“GREENBOOK”

Standard Specifications for

Public Works Construction
2021 Edition

eBook Version

This eBook version of the 2021 "Greenbook" (Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction) is a .pdf document licensed exclusively for your personal individual use.

This eBook is fully bookmarked so you can quickly navigate to any section you are looking for.
To view the bookmarks, be sure to open this pdf using Adobe® Acrobat Reader* (and NOT a
web browser such as Google Chrome). If the bookmarks do not display in Acrobat Reader,
select “View” from the main menu, then select “Show/Hide.” Next select “Navigation Panes,”
and then select “Bookmarks.”

Please remember that this pdf file is licensed exclusively for your personal use. By opening this
file, you are agreeing to these Terms of Use.

* If you do not have Acrobat Reader installed on your computer, you can download it free by going
to [Link]

Written and Promulgated by

Public Works Standards, Inc.
Published by

A Division of BNi Publications, Inc.

990 Park Center Drive, Suite E, Vista, CA 92081
1-888-264-2665

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
II Greenbook 2021

BNi PUBLICATIONS, INC.

990 Park Center Drive, Suite E
Vista, CA 92081

Copyright  2021 by BNi Publications, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of
America. Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this publication
may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a data base or retrieval
system, without the prior written permission of the publisher.

While diligent effort is made to provide reliable, accurate and up-to-date information, neither BNi
Publications Inc., nor its authors or editors, can place a guarantee on the correctness of the data or
information contained in this book. BNi Publications Inc., and its authors and editors, do hereby
disclaim any responsibility or liability in connection with the use of this book or of any data or other
information contained therein.

ISBN 978-1-58855-209-9

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 III

….. By Way Of Explanation

The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, popularly known as the “Greenbook”,
was originally published in 1967. The 2021 Edition is the 19th edition of this book, which is updated
and republished every three years.

The original edition of the Greenbook was the product of almost four years of intensive work by a
400-person task force. The City and County of Los Angeles were major contributors to this effort and
these two agencies were the first to adopt the Greenbook. To date, more than 200 other cities, counties,
and agencies in the area have also adopted it as their standard for public works construction
specifications. Interest in the Greenbook has been worldwide, with copies being acquired and studied by
public works officials throughout the United States, Canada, and many countries overseas.

Immediately after publication of the Greenbook, a permanent task force, now known as the Joint
Cooperative Committee, comprised of representatives from cities, counties, utility companies, and
contractors throughout Southern California, was established to carry on the work. The function of this
committee was to study and update the provisions of these specifications to reflect the constantly
changing technology and advanced thinking of the construction industry.

The first 10 editions of the Greenbook were the product of the Joint Cooperative Committee of the
Southern California Chapter of the American Public Works Association, and the Southern California
Districts of the Associated General Contractors of California.

In December 1995, the Joint Cooperative Committee formally ceased operations. In January 1996, Public
Works Standards, Inc., a mutual benefit corporation, was formed to oversee the publication of the Greenbook. A
new committee, The Greenbook Committee, was formed by Public Works Standards, Inc. to conduct the day to
day business of managing the Greenbook. The Corporation’s Board of Directors is comprised of nine members
– five representing the American Public Works Association, and the other four from the Associated General
Contractors of California, the Engineering Contractors Association, the Southern California Contractors
Association, and BNi Publications, Inc. The Board appoints a 25-member Greenbook Committee which carries
on the tradition and function of the original Joint Committee. This committee convenes regularly each month to
consider new changes.

In each of the two years between publication of a new Greenbook edition, the changes which have
been approved by the Greenbook Committee during the preceding year are published in pamphlet form
as amendments to the current edition. This program maintains a “living” document in public works
specifications. Vertical lines in the margin of each new edition point out significant changes in the text
adopted since the preceding edition.

The original edition of the Greenbook consisted of three parts: General Provisions, Construction
Materials, and Construction Methods.
In 1970, 1991, and 1994, Parts 4, 5 and 6 were added to provide specifications for alternate aggregate
materials, pipeline system rehabilitation, and modified asphalt products, respectively. In 2012, Part 6
was incorporated into Parts 2 and 3. In 2015, Parts 6, 7, and 8 were added. Part 6 contains
specifications formerly in 7-10.1 and 7-10.2; Part 7 those formerly in 209 and 307; and Part 8 those
formerly in 212 and 308. In 2018, Part 4 pertaining to alternate aggregate materials was incorporated
into Part 2 and a new Part 4 was added to restructure and consolidate specifications pertaining to

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
IV Greenbook 2021

protection, restoration, and removal of existing improvements, manhole adjustment and reconstruction,
and cold milling and micro-milling of existing pavement. Part 1 was also completely restructured to
place content under headings similar to those in other standard specifications documents which follow
the AASHTO format.
The Greenbook is designed to aid in furthering uniformity of plans and specifications accepted and
used by those involved in public works construction and to take such other steps as are designed to
promote more competitive bidding by private contractors. The Greenbook provides specifications that
have general applicability to public works projects. The Greenbook does NOT test or approve products.
It is the function of public agencies and private project owners that utilize the Greenbook to determine
whether products proposed by a contractor satisfy the Greenbook specifications or the Special
Provisions.

Interested parties who wish to suggest changes or amendments to this book may communicate with
Public Works Standards, Inc., c/o BNi Publications, 990 Park Center Drive, Suite E, Vista, CA 92081.
The change form and further information about the Greenbook Committee are available at
[Link]

In 1984, a companion to the Greenbook entitled the Standard Plans for Public Works Construction
was adopted by the Joint Cooperative Committee. Both books are available from BNi Publications, Inc.,
or other technical bookstores.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 V

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS .................................................................................................. 1

SECTION 1 – General, Terms, Definitions, Abbreviations, Units of Measure, and Symbols .......... 1
SECTION 2 – Scope of the Work .................................................................................................... 12
SECTION 3 – Control of the Work.................................................................................................. 14
SECTION 4 – Control of Materials ................................................................................................. 22
SECTION 5 – Legal Relations and Responsibilities........................................................................ 24
SECTION 6 – Prosecution and Progress of the Work ..................................................................... 30
SECTION 7 – Measurement and Payment....................................................................................... 35
SECTION 8 – Facilities for Agency Personnel................................................................................ 39

PART 2 – CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS .................................................................................... 43

SECTION 200 – Rock Materials...................................................................................................... 43

SECTION 201 – Concrete, Mortar and Related Materials............................................................... 58
SECTION 202 – Masonry Materials ................................................................................................ 84
SECTION 203 – Bituminous Materials ........................................................................................... 86
SECTION 204 – Lumber and Treatment with Preservatives ......................................................... 122
SECTION 205 – Piles .................................................................................................................... 124
SECTION 206 – Miscellaneous Metal Items ................................................................................. 128
SECTION 207 – Gravity Pipe........................................................................................................ 136
SECTION 208 – Pipe Joint Types and Materials........................................................................... 187
SECTION 209 – Pressure Pipe ...................................................................................................... 193
SECTION 210 – Paint and Protective Coatings............................................................................. 207
SECTION 211 – Material Tests ..................................................................................................... 219
SECTION 212 – Water and Sewer System Valves and Appurtenances ........................................ 224
SECTION 213 – Engineering Geosynthetics ................................................................................. 252
SECTION 214 – Traffic Striping, Curb and Pavement Markings, and Pavement Markers........... 256
SECTION 215 – Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes (PRCMH) ............................................ 264
SECTION 216 – Precast Reinforced Concrete Box....................................................................... 266
SECTION 217 – Bedding and Backfill Materials .......................................................................... 271

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
VI Greenbook 2021

PART 3 – CONSTRUCTION METHODS ..................................................................................... 273

SECTION 300 – Earthwork ........................................................................................................... 273

SECTION 301 – Subgrade Preparation, Treated Materials and Placement of Base Materials ...... 287
SECTION 302 – Roadway Surfacing............................................................................................. 307
SECTION 303 – Concrete and Masonry Construction .................................................................. 344
SECTION 304 – Metal Fabrication and Construction ................................................................... 375
SECTION 305 – Pile Driving and Timber Construction ............................................................... 390
SECTION 306 – Open Trench Conduit Construction.................................................................... 397
SECTION 307 – Jacking and Tunneling ........................................................................................ 458
SECTION 308 – Microtunneling ...................................................................................................464
SECTION 309 – Monuments ......................................................................................................... 470
SECTION 310 – Painting ............................................................................................................... 471
SECTION 311 – Special Protective Materials ............................................................................... 479
SECTION 314 – Traffic Striping, Curb and Pavement Markings, and Pavement Markers .......... 487

PART 4 – EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS ..................................................................................... 495

SECTION 400 – Protection and Restoration.................................................................................. 495
SECTION 401 – Removal.............................................................................................................. 496
SECTION 402 – Utilities ............................................................................................................... 497
SECTION 403 – Manhole Adjustment and Reconstruction .......................................................... 499
SECTION 404 – Cold Milling........................................................................................................ 500
SECTION 405 – Micro-Milling ..................................................................................................... 503

PART 5 – PIPELINE SYSTEM REHABILITATION .................................................................. 505

SECTION 500 – Pipeline Rehabilitation........................................................................................ 505
SECTION 501 – Service Lateral Connection Sealing.................................................................... 533
SECTION 502 – Manhole and Structure Rehabilitation ................................................................ 536

PART 6 – TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 543

SECTION 600 – Access ................................................................................................................. 543
SECTION 601 – Temporary Traffic Control for Construction and Maintenance Work Zones .... 544
PART 7 – STREET LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS ..................................... 551
SECTION 700 – Materials ............................................................................................................. 551
SECTION 701 – Construction........................................................................................................ 592

PART 8 – LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION .......................................................................... 609

SECTION 800 – Materials ............................................................................................................. 609
SECTION 801 – Installation .......................................................................................................... 614

APPENDIX ........................................................................................................................................ 627

INDEX ............................................................................................................................................... 631

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 1

PART 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 1 - GENERAL

1-1 GENERAL – Unless otherwise stated, the words directed, required, permitted, ordered,
instructed, designated, considered necessary, prescribed, approved, acceptable, satisfactory, or
words of like meaning, refer to actions, expressions, and prerogatives of the Engineer.
The phrase unless otherwise specified shall mean unless otherwise specified in the Special
Provisions or shown on the Plans.
1-2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS.
Addendum – Written or graphic instrument issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarifies,
corrects, or changes the Contract Documents. The term “Addendum” shall include bulletins
and all other types of written notices issued to potential bidders prior to opening of the Bids.
Agency – The legal entity for which the Work is being performed.
Agreed Price – The cost for new or unforeseen work, or for adjustments in the Contract Unit
Price for changes in the character of the work as specified in 7-3.7, established by mutual
agreement between the Contractor and the Agency.
Agreement – See Contract.
Assessment Act Contract – A Contract financed by special assessments authorized under a
State Act or procedural ordinance of a City or County.
Base – A layer of specified material of planned thickness placed immediately below the
pavement or surfacing.
Bid – The offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the
prices for the Work.
Bidder – Any individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or combination thereof, submitting a
Bid for the Work, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative.
Board – The officer or body constituting the awarding authority of the Agency.
Bond – Bid, performance, or payment bond or other instrument of security.
Caltrans – The State of California Department of Transportation.
Cash Contract – A Contract financed by means other than special assessments.
Certificate of Compliance – A written document signed and submitted by a supplier or
manufacturer that certifies that the material or assembled material supplied to the Work site
conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Change Order – A written order to the Contractor signed by the Agency directing an addition,
deletion, or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract time
issued after the effective date of the Contract. A Change Order may or may not also be
signed by the Contractor.
Code – The terms Government Code, Labor Code, etc., refer to codes of the State of California.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
2 Greenbook 2021

Contract – The written agreement between the Agency and the Contractor covering the Work.
Contract Documents – The Contract, Addenda, notice inviting bids, instructions to bidders,
Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-bid documentation
submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Contract, the
Bonds, permits from jurisdictional regulatory agencies, Special Provisions, Plans, Standard
Plans, Standard Specifications, Reference Specifications, Change Orders, and Supplemental
Agreements.
Contractor – The individual, partnership, corporation, joint venture, or other legal entity having
a Contract with the Agency to perform the Work. In the case of work being done under a
permit issued by the Agency, the permittee shall be construed to be the Contractor. The
term “prime contractor” shall mean the Contractor.
Contract Price – The total amount of money for which the Contract is awarded.
Contract Unit Price – The amount stated in the Bid for a single unit of an item of work.
County Sealer – The Sealer of Weights and Measures of the county in which the Contract is
awarded.
Days – Days shall mean consecutive calendar days unless otherwise specified in the Special
Provisions.
Disputed Work – Work in which the Agency and the Contractor are in disagreement.
Electrolier – Street light assembly complete, including foundation, standard, mast arm,
luminaire, etc.
Extra Work – New or unforeseen work not covered by a Contract Unit Price or Stipulated Unit
Price.
Engineer – The Chief Engineer of the Agency, Director of Public Works, or other person
designated by the Board, acting either directly or through authorized agents.
House Connection Sewer—A sewer, within a public street or right-of-way, proposed to
connect any parcel, lot, or part of a lot with a mainline sewer.
Luminaire – The lamp housing including the optical and socket assemblies (and ballast if so
specified).
Mast Arm – The structural member, or bracket, which, when mounted on a Standard, supports
the luminaire.
Modification – Includes Change Orders and Supplemental Agreements. A Modification may
only be issued after the effective date of the Contract.
Notice of Award – The written notice by the Agency to the successful Bidder stating that upon
its compliance with the required conditions, the Agency will execute the Contract.
Notice to Proceed – A written notice given by the Agency to the Contractor fixing the date on
which the Contract time will start.
Operation, Maintenance, and Warranty Instructions – Documents published by
manufacturers of pre-manufactured products describing operation, maintenance and any
other actions that must be performed by the Agency as a condition for the manufacturer to
honor the specified warranty.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 3

Person – Any individual, firm, association, partnership, corporation, trust, joint venture, or
other legal entity.
Plans – The drawings, profiles, cross sections, Standard Plans, working drawings, and shop
drawings, or reproductions thereof, approved by the Engineer, which show the location,
character, dimensions, or details of the Work.
Private Contract – Work subject to Agency inspection, control, and approval, involving private
funds, not administered by the Agency.
Proposal – See Bid.
Reference Specifications - The latest edition, including amendments, in effect as of the date of
advertisement of the Contract or issuing the permit, unless otherwise specified, of:
a) bulletins,
b) standards,
c) rules,
d) methods of analysis or testing,
e) codes,
f) installation instructions, and
g) specifications of other agencies, engineering societies, manufacturers, or industrial
associations referred to in the Contract Documents.
Roadway – The portion of a street reserved for vehicular use.
Service Connection – All or any portion of the conduit cable or duct including meter, between
a utility distribution line and an individual consumer.
Service Lateral Connection – The interface of the House Connection Sewer with the host pipe.
Sewer – Any conduit intended for the reception and transfer of sewage and fluid industrial
waste.
Shop Drawings – Drawings showing details of manufactured or assembled products proposed
to be incorporated into the Work.
Special Provisions – Additions and revisions to the Standard Specifications setting forth
conditions and requirements peculiar to the Work.
Specifications – Standard Specifications, Reference Specifications, Special Provisions, and
specifications in Change Orders or Supplemental Agreements between the Contractor and
the Board.
Standard – The shaft or pole used to support street lighting luminaires, traffic signal heads,
mast arms, etc.
Standard Plans – Details of standard structures, devices, or instructions referred to on the Plans
or in the Specifications by title or number.
Standard Specifications – The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction
(SSPWC), the “Greenbook.”
State – State of California.
Stipulated Unit Price – Unit prices established by the Agency in the Contract Documents.
Storm Drain – Any conduit and appurtenances intended for the reception and transfer of storm
water.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
4 Greenbook 2021

Street – Any road, highway, parkway, freeway, alley, walk, or way.

Subbase – A layer of specified material of planned thickness between the base and the
subgrade.
Subcontractor – An individual, firm, or corporation having a direct contract with the
Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work.
Subgrade – For roadways, that portion on which pavement, surfacing, base, subbase, or a layer
of other material is placed. For structures, the soil prepared to support a structure.
Supervision – Supervision, where used to indicate supervision by the Engineer, shall mean the
performance of obligations, and the exercise of rights, specifically imposed upon and
granted to the Agency in becoming a party to the Contract. Except as specifically stated
herein, supervision by the Agency shall not mean active and direct superintendence of
details of the Work.
Supplemental Agreement – A written amendment of the Contract Documents signed by the
Agency and the Contractor.
Surety – Any individual, firm, or corporation, bound with and for the Contractor for the
acceptable performance, execution, and completion of the Work, and for the satisfaction of
all obligations incurred.
Utility – Tracks, overhead or underground wires, pipeline, conduits, ducts, structures, sewers, or
storm drains owned, operated, or maintained in or across a public right of way or private
easement.
Work – That which is proposed to be constructed or done under the Contract or permit,
including the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and services.
Working Day – Any day within the period between the date of the start of the Contract time as
specified in 6-1 and the date of completion of the Work as specified in 3-13.1, other than:
a) Saturday,
b) Sunday,
c) any day designated as a holiday by the Agency,
d) any other day designated as a holiday in a master labor agreement entered into by the
Contractor or on behalf of the Contractor as an eligible member of a contractor
association,
e) any day the Contractor is prevented from working at the beginning of the workday for
cause as specified in 6-4.1, or
f) any day the Contractor is prevented from working during the first 5 hours with at least
60 percent of the normal work force for cause as specified in 6-4.1.
Working Drawings – Drawings showing details not shown on the Plans which are required to
be designed by the Contractor.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 5

1-3 ABBREVIATIONS.
1-3.1 General. The abbreviations are applicable to these Standard Specifications and the Special
Provisions. Additional abbreviations shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special
Provisions.
1-3.2 Common Usage.
Abbreviation Word or Words
ABS ..................... Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
AC ....................... Alternating Current
ADA ................... Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (Public Law 101-336, 104 Sat. 1990, 42
USC 12101-12213 (as amended))
APC .................... Air Placed Concrete
ARHM ................. Asphalt Rubber Hot Mix
ARAM ................. Asphalt Rubber and Aggregate Membrane
AWG ................... American Wire Gauge
BMPs ................... Best Management Practices
BR........................ Butadiene Rubber
BWG.................... Birmingham Wire Gauge
CAB..................... Crushed Aggregate Base
CAPA .................. Corrugated Aluminum Pipe Arch
CAP ..................... Corrugated Aluminum Pipe
CBR ..................... California Bearing Ratio
CCFRPM............. Centrifugally Cast Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Mortar
CCR..................... California Code of Regulations
CCTV .................. Closed Circuit Television
CHDPE................ Corrugated High Density Polyethylene
CIP....................... Cast Iron Pipe
CIPCP.................. Cast-In-Place Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe
CIPP..................... Cured-In-Place Pipe CLSM Controlled Low Strength Material
CMB .................... Crushed Miscellaneous Base
CMP .................... Corrugated Metal Pipe
CQS ..................... Cationic Quick-Setting
CRM .................... Crumb Rubber Modifier
CRS ..................... Cationic Rapid-Setting
CRUMAC............ Crumb Rubber Modified Asphalt Concrete
CSEP ................... Confined Space Entry Plan
CSPA................... Corrugated Steel Pipe Arch
CSPB……………Cement Stabilized Pulverized Base
CSP...................... Corrugated Steel Pipe
CSS...................... Cationic Slow-Setting
CTB ..................... Cement Treated Base
CTM .................... California Test Method
CT........................ California Test
CWA.................... Constant Wattage Attenuator
CW ...................... Constant Wattage
DC ....................... Direct Current
DIP....................... Ductile Iron Pipe

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
6 Greenbook 2021

EAS...................... Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry

EPDM .................. Ethylene-Propylene Diene Monomer
EPM..................... Ethylene-Propylene Monomer
FRPM .................. Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer Mortar
GG ....................... Gap-Graded
HC........................ House Connection
HDPE................... High Density Polyethylene
HPS...................... High Pressure Sodium
HRWRA .............. High Range Water Reducing Admixture
IIPP ...................... Injury and Illness Prevention Program
IPS ....................... Iron Pipe Size
JMF...................... Job Mix Formula
LCB ..................... Lean Concrete Base
LED ..................... Light Emitting Diode
LSPB.................... Lime Stabilized Pulverized Base
LS......................... Lump Sum
MAC .................... Modified Asphalt Cement
MC....................... Medium Curing
Min ...................... Minimum
MTBM ................. Microtunneling Tunnel Boring Machine
MUTCD............... Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
N/A ...................... Not Applicable
NBR ..................... Nitrile-Butadiene Rubber
NEC ..................... National Electric Code
NPDES ................ National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System
NRCP................... Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe
OBC ..................... Optimum Binder Content
OD ....................... Outside Diameter
PAM .................... Pneumatically Applied Mortar
PAV ..................... Pressure Aging Vessel
PBM..................... Pulverized Base Material
PCC...................... Portland Cement Concrete
PE ........................ Polyethylene
PG ........................ Performance Graded PLI Pounds Per Linear Inch
PMB..................... Processed Miscellaneous Base
PME..................... Polymer Modified Emulsion
PM ....................... Polymer Modified
PRCB................... Precast Reinforced Concrete Box
PTFE.................... Polytetrafluoroethylene
PVC ..................... Polyvinyl Chloride
RC........................ Rapid Curing
R .......................... Resistance Value
RA........................ Reclaimed Aggregates
RAP ..................... Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement
RCP...................... Reinforced Concrete Pipe
REAS................... Rubberized Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 7

Abbreviation Word or Words

RMS .................... Root Mean Square
RPPCC ................ Reclaimed Plastic Portland Cement Concrete
RTFO................... Rolling Thin Film Oven
RW ...................... Reclaimed Water
S........................... Hveem Stability SAPPA Structural Aluminum Plate Pipe Arch
SAPP ................... Structural Aluminum Plate Pipe
SBR ..................... Styrene-Butadiene Rubber
SC ........................ Slow Curing
SCMs................... Supplementary Cementitious Materials
SDR ..................... Standard Dimension Ratio
SDS...................... Safety Data Sheet
SE ........................ Sand Equivalent
SG........................ Specific Gravity
SI ......................... International System of Units (Metric)
SLC ..................... Service Lateral Connection
SPA...................... Special Performance Admixture
SS ........................ Slow-Setting
SSPPA ................. Structural Steel Plate Pipe Arch
SSPP .................... Structural Steel Plate Pipe
SWPPP ................ Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
TCP...................... Traffic Control Plan
THN..................... Thermoplastic, High Heat, Nylon-Coated
THWN................. Thermoplastic, Heat and Water Resistant, Nylon-Coated
THW.................... Thermoplastic, Heat and Water Resistant
TRMAC............... Tire Rubber Modified Asphalt Concrete
TR........................ Tire Rubber
TTC ..................... Temporary Traffic Control
TW....................... Thermoplastic, Water Resistant
U.S.C. .................. United States Code
U.S....................... United States
UV ....................... Ultraviolet
VCP ..................... Vitrified Clay Pipe
VTCSH................ Vehicle Traffic Controls Signal Head
WATCH .............. Work Area Traffic Control Handbook
WMA................... Warm Mix Asphalt
WTAT ................. Wet Track Abrasion Test
X .......................... By

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
8 Greenbook 2021

1-3.3 Institutions.
Abbreviation Word or Words
AASHTO........................................ American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI ...................................................................................................................American Concrete Institute
AISC ............................................................................................. American Institute of Steel Construction
ANSI.................................................................................................American National Standards Institute
AREA ......................................................................................American Railway Engineering Association
ASME ...................................................................................... American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASQ ................................................................................................................American Society for Quality
ASTM ......................................................................................American Society for Testing and Materials
AWPA ........................................................................................... American Wood Preservers Association
AWS ...................................................................................................................American Welding Society
AWWA................................................................................................American Water Works Association
EEI.......................................................................................................................... Edison Electric Institute
EIA................................................................................................................. Electronic Industries Alliance
EPA ........................................................................................................ Environmental Protection Agency
ETL...............................................................................................................Electrical Testing Laboratories
FCC.................................................................................................. Federal Communications Commission
FHWA ...................................................................................................... Federal Highway Administration
GRI ............................................................................................................. Geosynthetic Research Institute
IEEE...................................................................................Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IMSA ........................................................................................ International Municipal Signal Association
ISSA........................................................................................... International Slurry Surfacing Association
ITE ...................................................................................................... Institute of Transportation Engineers
NCHRP..........................................................................National Cooperative Highway Research Program
NEMA .................................................................................National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NSF................................................................................................................................... NSF International
OSHA ................................................................................ Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PPI ...............................................................................................................................Plastics Pipe Institute
RUS ........................................................................................................................... Rural Utilities Service
SAE...........................................................................................................Society of Automotive Engineers
SSPC............................................................................................................ Society for Protective Coatings
UL............................................................................................................... Underwriters’ Laboratories Inc.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 9

1-4 UNITS OF MEASURE.

1-4.1 General. The U.S. Standard Measures, also referred to as the U.S. Customary System, is the
principal measurement system in these Specifications and shall be used for construction unless otherwise
specified in the Special Provisions. The International System of Units, also referred to as SI or the
metric system, is included in parenthesis. U.S. Standard Measures units may or may not be exactly
equivalent to the SI units in parenthesis. If SI is specified for use in the Contract Documents, then all
values used for construction shall be the SI units shown in parenthesis. Certain material specifications
and test requirements contained herein use SI units specifically and U.S. Standard Measures have not
been included in those circumstances.
Reference is also made to ASTM E380 for definitions of various units of the SI system and a more
extensive set of conversion factors.
1-4.2 Units of Measure and Their Abbreviations.
U.S. Customary Unit Equal To SI Unit
(Abbreviations) (Abbreviations)

1 mil (= 0.001 inch)............................................................... 25.4 micrometer (µm)

1 inch .................................................................................... 25.4 millimeter (mm)
1 inch .................................................................................... 2.54 centimeter (cm)
1 foot (ft) ............................................................................... 0.3048 meter (m)
1 yard (yd) ............................................................................. 0.9144 meter (m)
1 mile (mi)............................................................................. 1.6093 kilometer (km)
1 square foot (ft²)................................................................... 0.0929 square meter (m²)
1 square yard (yd²)................................................................. 0.8361 square meter (m²)
1 cubic foot (ft³)..................................................................... 0.0283 cubic meter (m³)
1 cubic yard (yd³)................................................................... 0.7646 cubic meter (m³)
1 acre ..................................................................................... 0.4047 hectare (ha)
1 U.S. gallon (gal) ................................................................ 3.7854 liter (L)
1 fluid ounce (fl. oz) ............................................................. 29.5735 milliliter (mL)
1 pound mass (lb) (avoirdupois)............................................ 0.4536 kilogram (kg)
1 ounce mass (oz) .................................................................. 0.02835 kilogram (kg)
1 Ton (= 2000 lb avoirdupois)............................................... 0.9072 tonne (= 907 kg)
1 Poise ................................................................................... 0.1 pascal · second (Pa · s)
1 centistoke (cs) ................................................................. 1 square millimeters per second (mm²/s)
1 pound force (lbf)................................................................. 4.4482 Newton (N)
1 pound per square inch (psi) ................................................ 6.8948 kilopascal (kPa)
1 pound force per foot (lbf/ft)................................................ 1.4594 Newton per meter (N/m)
1 foot-pound force (ft-lbf) ..................................................... 1.3558 joules (J)
1 foot-pound force per second (ft-lbf) ................................... 1.3558 watt (W)
1 part per million (ppm) ........................................................ 1 milligram/liter (mg/L)

Temperature Units and Abbreviations

Degree Fahrenheit (°F): Degree Celsius (°C):
°F = (1.8 x °C) + 32 °C = (°F – 32)/1.8

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
10 Greenbook 2021

SI Units (abbreviation) Commonly Used in Both Systems

1 Ampere (A)
1 Volt (V)
1 Candela (cd)
1 Lumen (lm)
1 second (s)

Common Metric Prefixes

kilo (k) ....................................................................... 10³
centi (c) ...................................................................... 10-2
milli (m)..................................................................... 10-³
micro (µ).................................................................... 10-6
nano (n)...................................................................... 10-9
pico (p)....................................................................... 10-12
1-5 SYMBOLS.
% ............ Percent
’................ Feet or minutes
” ............... Inches or seconds
¹ ................ Number
/ ................ per or (between words)
°................ Degree
x .............. Times
1-6 BIDDING AND SUBMISSION OF THE BID.
1-6.1 General. Bidding and submission of the Bid shall conform to the requirements specified in
the Special Provisions, Instructions to Bidders, and Notice Inviting Bids.
1-6.2 Subcontractor Listing. Each Bidder shall comply with Division 2, Chapter 4 of the Public
Contract Code including Sections 4100 through 4113.
The Bidder shall set forth in the Bid, pursuant to 4104:
“(a) (1) The name, the location of the place of business, the California contractor license number,
and public works contractor registration number issued pursuant to Section 1725.5 of the Labor
Code of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the prime
contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement, or a subcontractor licensed
by the State of California who, under subcontract to the prime contractor, specially fabricates
and installs a portion of the work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in
the plans and specifications, in an amount in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime
contractor’s total bid or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction of streets or highways,
including bridges, in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor’s total bid or ten
thousand dollars ($10,000), whichever is greater.”
“(2) An inadvertent error in listing the California contractor license number or public works
contractor registration number provided pursuant to paragraph (1) shall not be grounds for
filing a bid protest or grounds for considering the bid nonresponsive if the corrected
contractor’s license number is submitted to the public entity by the prime contractor within
24 hours after the bid opening and provided the corrected contractor’s license number
corresponds to the submitted name and location for that subcontractor.”

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 11

“(3) (A) Subject to subparagraph (B), any information requested by the officer, department,
board, or commission concerning any subcontractor who the prime contractor is required to
list under this subdivision, other than the subcontractor’s name, location of business, the
California contractor license number, and the public works contractor registration number,
may be submitted by the prime contractor up to 24 hours after the deadline established by
the officer, department, board, or commission for receipt of bids by prime contractors.”
“(B) A state or local agency may implement subparagraph (A) at its option.”
“(b) The portion of the work that will be done by each subcontractor under this act. The prime
contractor shall list only one subcontractor for each portion as is defined by the prime
contractor in his or her bid.”
If the Contractor fails to specify a Subcontractor, or specifies more than one Subcontractor for the
same portion of the Work to be performed under the Contract (in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the
Contractor’s total Bid), the Contractor shall be qualified to perform that portion itself, and shall perform
that portion itself, except as otherwise provided in the Public Contract Code.
Pursuant to Section 4107, no Contractor whose Bid is accepted shall substitute any person as a
Subcontractor in place of a Subcontractor listed in the Bid, except for the causes and by the procedures
established in Section 4107.5. This section provides procedures to correct a clerical error in the listing
of a Subcontractor.
Section 4110 provides that a Contractor violating any of the provisions of Chapter 4 violates the
Contract and the Board may exercise the option either to cancel the Contract or assess the Contractor a
penalty in an amount of not more than 10 percent of the subcontract involved after a public hearing.
1-7 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT.
1-7.1 General. Award and execution of the Contract shall be as specified in the Special Provisions,
Instructions to Bidders, or Notice Inviting Bids.
1-7.2 Contract Bonds. Before execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall file surety bonds with
the Agency to be approved by the Board in the amounts and for the purposes specified below. Bonds
issued by a surety who is listed in the latest version of U.S. Department of Treasury Circular 570, who is
authorized to issue bonds in California, and whose bonding limitation shown in said circular is sufficient
to provide bonds in the amount required by the Contract shall be deemed to be approved unless
specifically rejected by the Agency. Bonds from all other sureties shall be accompanied by all of the
documents enumerated in the Code of Civil Procedure, Section 995.660 a).
Each bond shall incorporate, by reference, the Contract and be signed by both the Bidder and the
Surety. The signature of the authorized agent of the Surety shall be notarized.
The Contractor shall provide 2 good and sufficient surety bonds. The “Payment Bond” (material and
labor bond) shall be for not less than 100 percent of the Contract Price, to satisfy claims of material
suppliers and mechanics and laborers employed by it on the Work. The Bond shall be maintained by the
Contractor in full force and effect until the performance of the Contract is accepted by the Agency and
until all claims for materials and labor are paid, and shall otherwise comply with the Civil Code.
The “Performance Bond” shall be for 100 percent of the Contract Price to guaranty faithful
performance of all work, within the time prescribed, in a manner satisfactory to the Agency, and that all
materials and workmanship will be free from original or developed defects. The Bond must remain in
effect until the end of all warranty periods set forth in the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall pay all bond premiums, costs, and incidentals.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
12 Greenbook 2021

Should any bond become insufficient, the Contractor shall renew the bond within 10 Days after
receiving notice from the Agency.
Should any surety at any time be unsatisfactory to the Board, notice to that effect will be given to the
Contractor. No further payments shall be deemed due or will be made under the Contract until a new
surety qualifies and is accepted by the Board.
Changes in the Work or extensions of time, made pursuant to the Contract, shall in no way release
the Contractor or the Surety from its obligations. Notice of such changes or extensions shall be waived
by the Surety.

SECTION 2 - SCOPE OF THE WORK

2-1 WORK TO BE DONE. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to complete the
Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall
furnish all materials, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals necessary to complete the Work.
2-2 PERMITS. The Agency will obtain, at no cost to the Contractor, all permits necessary to
perform the Work in streets, highways, railways or other rights-of-way. The Contractor shall obtain and
pay for all costs incurred for permits necessitated by its operations such as, but not limited to, those
permits required for night work, overload, blasting, and demolition. The Contractor shall pay all
business taxes or license fees that are required for the Work.
2-3 RIGHT-OF-WAY. Rights-of-way, easements, or rights-of-entry for the Work will be provided
by the Agency. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall make arrangements, pay for, and
assume all responsibility for acquiring, using, and disposing of additional work areas and facilities
temporarily required. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Agency harmless from all claims for
damages caused by such actions.
2-4 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK. The Contractor shall be responsible for
ascertaining the nature and extent of any simultaneous, collateral, and essential work by others. The
Agency, its workers and contractors and others, shall have the right to operate within or adjacent to the
Work site during the performance of such work.
The Agency, the Contractor, and each of such workers, contractors and others, shall coordinate their
operations and cooperate to minimize interference.
The Contractor shall include in its Bid all costs involved as a result of coordinating its work with
others. The Contractor will not be entitled to additional compensation from the Agency for damages
resulting from such simultaneous, collateral, and essential work. If necessary to avoid or minimize such
damage or delay, the Contractor shall redeploy its work force to other parts of the Work.
Should the Contractor be delayed by the Agency, and such delay could not have been reasonably
foreseen or prevented by the Contractor, the Engineer will determine the extent of the delay, the effect
on the Work, and any extension of time.
2-5 THE CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES.
2-5.1 General. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain in good condition all equipment and
facilities as required for the proper execution and inspection of the Work
The Contractor shall provide and maintain enclosed toilets for the use of employees engaged in the
Work. These accommodations shall be maintained in a neat and sanitary condition, and regularly
pumped out.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 13

2-5.2 Temporary Utility Services. The Contractor shall, at its own expense, make all arrangements
necessary for the provision of temporary utility services necessary for its own use during performance of
the Work.
The Contractor shall not draw water from any fire hydrant (except to extinguish a fire), without
obtaining permission from the water utility owner.
2-5.3 Crushing and Screening Operations. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions,
the establishment and operation of portable screens and crushers will not be allowed on or adjacent to
the Work site.
2-5.4 Haul Routes. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, haul routes shall be
determined by the Contractor.
2-6 CHANGES REQUESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR. Changes in the Plans and
Specifications, requested in writing by the Contractor, which do not materially affect the Work and
which are not detrimental to the Work or to the interests of the Agency, may be granted by the Engineer.
Nothing herein shall be construed as granting a right to the Contractor to demand acceptance of such
changes.
2-7 CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY.
2-7.1 General. The Agency may change the Plans, Specifications, character of the work, or
quantity of work provided the total arithmetic dollar value of all such changes, both additive and
deductive, does not exceed 25 percent of the Contract Price. Should it become necessary to exceed this
limitation, the change shall be by written Supplemental Agreement between the Contractor and Agency,
unless both parties agree to proceed with the change by Change Order.
Change Orders shall be in writing and state the dollar value of the change or establish the method of
payment, any adjustment in the Contract time of completion, and when negotiated prices are involved,
shall provide for the Contractor’s signature indicating acceptance.
2-8 EXTRA WORK. New or unforeseen work will be classified as Extra Work when the Engineer
determines that it is not covered by Contract Unit Prices or Stipulated Unit Prices.
2-9 CHANGED CONDITIONS. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the following Work
site conditions (hereinafter called “changed conditions”), in writing, upon their discovery and before
they are disturbed:
a) Subsurface or latent physical conditions differing from those indicated by information about the
Work site made available to Bidders prior to the deadline for submitting Bids;
b) Unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature differing materially from those ordinarily
encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character being performed; and
c) Material differing from that represented in the Contract Documents which the Contractor
believes may be hazardous waste, as defined in Section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code,
that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with
the provisions of existing law.
The Engineer will investigate conditions which appear to be changed conditions. If the Engineer
determines that the conditions are changed conditions and will materially affect costs, a Change Order
will be issued adjusting the compensation for such portion of the Work in accordance with 7-3 or 7-4. If
the Engineer determines that the conditions are changed conditions and will materially affect
performance time, the Contractor, upon submitting a written request, will be granted an extension of
time in accordance with 6-4.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
14 Greenbook 2021

If the Engineer determines that the conditions do not justify an adjustment in compensation, the
Contractor will be so notified in writing. This notice will also advise the Contractor of its obligation to
notify the Engineer in writing if the Contractor disagrees.
If the Contractor disagrees with the decision, it may submit a written notice of potential claim to the
Engineer before commencing the disputed work. In the event of such a dispute, the Contractor shall not
be excused from any scheduled completion date provided by the Contract and shall proceed with all
work to be performed under the Contract. However, the Contractor shall retain any and all rights
provided by either the Contract or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests
between the contracting parties. The Contractor shall proceed in accordance with 2-10.
The Contractor’s failure to give notice of changed conditions promptly upon their discovery and
before they are disturbed shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith.
2-10 DISPUTED WORK. If the Contractor and the Agency are unable to reach agreement, the
Agency may direct the Contractor to proceed with the Disputed Work. Payment shall be as later
determined by 7-3, 7-4, mediation or arbitration, if the Agency and Contractor agree thereto, or as fixed
in a court of law.
Although not to be construed as proceeding under 7-4, the Contractor shall keep and furnish records
of Disputed Work to the Engineer in accordance with 7-4.

SECTION 3 - CONTROL OF THE WORK

3-1 ASSIGNMENT. No Contract or portion thereof may be assigned without the consent of the
Board, except that the Contractor may assign money due or which will accrue to it under the Contract. If
given written notice, such assignment will be recognized by the Board to the extent permitted by law.
Any assignment of money shall be subject to all proper withholdings in favor of the Agency and to all
deductions provided for in the Contract. All money withheld, whether assigned or not, shall be subject
to being used by the Agency for completion of the Work should the Contractor be in default.
3-2 SELF-PERFORMANCE. The Contractor shall perform, with its own organization, Contract
work amounting to at least 50 percent of the Contract Price except that any designated “Specialty Items”
may be performed by subcontract and the amount of any such “Specialty Items” so performed will be
deducted from the Contract Price before computing the amount required to be performed by the
Contractor with its own organization. “Specialty Items” will be identified by the Agency in the Bid or in
the Special Provisions. Where an entire item is subcontracted, the value of work subcontracted will be
based on the Contract Unit Price. When a portion of an item is subcontracted, the value of work
subcontracted will be based on the estimated percentage of the Contract Unit Price. This will be
determined from information submitted by the Contractor, and subject to approval by the Engineer.
3-3 SUBCONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall give personal attention to the fulfillment of the
Contract. The Contractor shall keep the Work under its control. Subcontractors shall be considered
employees of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be responsible for their work.
In addition to the requirements of 1-6.2, before the work of any Subcontractor is started, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a written statement listing the name, contractor
license number, and business address of each Subcontractor and a description and value of each portion
of the Work to be so subcontracted.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 15

3-4 AUTHORITY OF THE BOARD AND THE ENGINEER. The Board has the final authority
in all matters affecting the Work. Within the scope of the Contract, the Engineer has the authority to
enforce compliance with the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor shall promptly comply with
instructions from the Engineer.
The decision of the Engineer is final and binding on all questions relating to: quantities; acceptability
of material, equipment, or work; execution, progress or sequence of work; and interpretation of the
Plans, Specifications, or other Contract Documents. This shall be precedent to any payment under the
Contract, unless otherwise ordered by the Board.
3-5 INSPECTION. The Work is subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall notify the Engineer before noon of the Working Day before inspection is required.
Work shall be done only in the presence of the Engineer, unless otherwise approved. Any work done
without proper inspection will be subject to rejection. The Engineer and any authorized representatives
shall at all times have access to the Work during its construction at shops and yards and while in storage,
as well as to the Work site. The Contractor shall provide every reasonable facility for ascertaining that
the materials and workmanship conform to the Contract Documents. Inspection of the Work shall not
relieve the Contractor of the obligation to fulfill all conditions of the Contract.
3-6 THE CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE. Before starting the Work, the Contractor
shall designate in writing a representative who shall have complete authority to act for it. An alternative
representative may be designated as well. The representative or alternate shall be present at the Work
site whenever work is in progress or whenever actions of the elements necessitate its presence to take
measures necessary to protect the Work, persons, or property. Any order or communication given to this
representative shall be deemed delivered to the Contractor. A joint venture shall designate only one
representative and alternate. In the absence of the Contractor or its representative, instructions or
directions may be given by the Engineer to the superintendent or person in charge of the specific work to
which the order applies. Such order shall be complied with promptly and referred to the Contractor or
its representative.
In order to communicate with the Agency, the Contractor’s representative, superintendent, or person
in charge of specific work shall be able to speak, read, and write the English language.
3-7 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
3-7.1 General. The Contractor shall keep at the Work site a copy of the Plans and Specifications, to
which the Engineer shall have access at all times.
The Plans, Specifications, and other Contract Documents shall govern the Work. The Contract
Documents are intended to be complementary and cooperative. Anything specified in the Specifications
and not shown on the Plans, or shown on the Plans and not specified in the Specifications, shall be as
though shown on or specified in both.
The Plans shall be supplemented by such Working Drawings and Shop Drawings as are necessary to
adequately control the Work.
The Contractor shall, upon discovering any error or omission in the Plans or Specifications,
immediately call it to the attention of the Engineer.
3-7.2 Precedence of the Contract Documents. If there is a conflict between any of the Contract
Documents, the document highest in the order of precedence shall control. The order of precedence,
from highest to lowest, shall be as follows:
a) Permits issued by jurisdictional regulatory agencies.
b) Change Orders and Supplemental Agreements; whichever occurs last.
c) Contract/Agreement.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
16 Greenbook 2021

d) Addenda.
e) Bid/Proposal.
f) Special Provisions.
g) Plans.
h) Standard Plans.
i) Standard Specifications.
j) Reference Specifications.
Detail drawings shall take precedence over general drawings. The precedence of the notice inviting
bids and instructions to bidders shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
3-8 SUBMITTALS.
3-8.1 General. Submittals shall be provided as specified or when requested by the Engineer.
Materials shall neither be furnished nor fabricated, nor shall any work for which submittals are required
be performed before the required submittals have been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. Neither
review nor acceptance of submittals by the Engineer shall relieve the Contractor from responsibility for
errors, omissions, or deviations from the Contract Documents, unless such deviations were specifically
called to the attention of the Engineer in the letter of transmittal. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the correctness of the submittals.
The Contractor shall allow a minimum of 20 Working Days for review of submittals unless
otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a letter of
transmittal.
Payment for submittals shall be included in the Contract Unit Price or lump sum Bid price for the
various Bid items.
3-8.2 Working Drawings. Working Drawings shall be of a size and scale to clearly show all
necessary details.
Six copies and one reproducible shall be submitted. If no revisions are required, 3 of the copies will
be returned to the Contractor. If revisions are required, the Engineer will return one copy along with the
reproducible for resubmission. Upon acceptance, the Engineer will return 2 of the copies to the
Contractor and retain the remaining copies and the reproducible.
Working Drawings are required in the subsections shown in Table 3-8.2.

TABLE 3-8.2
Item Subsection No. Title Subject
1 3-12.5.2 Sanitary Sewers Sewage Bypass and Pumping Plan
2 3-12.6.3 Water Pollution Control Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
3 3-12.6.5 Water Pollution Control Dewatering Plan
4 5-7.2.2 Safety Orders Shoring Plan
5 5-7.8 Steel Plate Covers Thickness (Trench Width > 5’-3”(1.6 m))
6 300-3.2 Cofferdams
7 303-1.6.1 Falsework
8 303-1.7.1 Placing Reinforcement
9 303-3.1 Prestressed Concrete Construction
10 304-1.1.2 Structural Steel Falsework Plans
11 307-1.1 Jacking Operations
12 307-2.1 Tunneling Operations
13 308-3 Microtunneling Submittals
14 601-2 Temporary Traffic Control Plan

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 17

Working Drawings listed above as Items 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 shall be prepared by a
Civil or Structural Engineer registered by the State of California.
3-8.3 Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings are required in the subsections shown in Table 3-8.3.

TABLE 3-8.3
Item Subsection No. Title Subject
1 207-2.5 Joints Reinforced Concrete Pipe
2 207-8.4 Joints Vitrified Clay Pipe
3 304-1.1.1 Shop Drawings Structural Steel
4 304-2.1 General Metal Hand Railings

3-8.4 Supporting Information. Supporting information is information required by the

Specifications for the purposes of administration of the Contract, analysis for verification of
conformance with the Specifications, the operation and maintenance of a manufactured product or
system to be constructed as part of the Work, and other information as may be required by the Engineer.
Six copies of the supporting information shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the start of the Work
unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer. Supporting information for systems shall be
bound together and include all manufactured items for the system. If resubmittal is not required, 3
copies will be returned to the Contractor.
Supporting information shall consist of the following and is required unless otherwise specified in
the Special Provisions:
a) List of subcontractors per 3-3.
b) List of materials per 4-4.
c) Certificates of Compliance per 4-5.
d) Construction schedule per 6-1.
e) Spill Prevention and Emergency Response Plan per 3-12.5.3.
f) Confined Space Entry Program per 5-7.5.1.
g) Lean concrete base mix designs per 200-4.
h) Concrete mix designs per 201-1.1.
i) Asphalt concrete job mix formulas and/or mix designs per 203-6.3.
j) Pipeline layout diagrams per 207-2.1.
k) Equipment and materials list per 700-1.
l) Controller cabinet wiring diagrams per 701-17.2.2.
m) Data, including, but not limited to, catalog sheets, manufacturer’s brochures, technical bulletins,
specifications, diagrams, product samples, and other information necessary to describe a system,
product or item. This information is required for irrigation systems, street lighting systems, and
traffic signals, and may also be required for any product, manufactured item, or system.
3-8.5 Installation Instructions. When installation instructions for a pre-manufactured product are
specified or referenced in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall submit the following:
a) One original or legal copy of the installation instructions referenced.
b) When a manufacturer’s installation instructions deviate from the Contract Documents, the
Contractor shall submit a written statement from the manufacturer identifying the proposed
deviations and the basis for such.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
18 Greenbook 2021

c) Unless the proposed deviations are approved, installation shall conform to the requirements in
the Contract Documents.
d) The Engineer may waive the requirement for submitting installation instructions.
3-8.6 Manufacturer’s Operation, Maintenance, and Warranty Instructions. For each pre-
manufactured product covered by a manufacturer’s warranty, the Contractor shall submit 3 bound
original or legal copies prior to acceptance of the Contract. When no instructions are submitted, the
Agency will presume no operational restrictions or maintenance procedures are required by the
manufacturer as a condition for the manufacturer to honor the specified warranty.
3-9 SUBSURFACE DATA. Subsurface data shall include geotechnical reports, groundwater
elevations, soil analyses and characterization, and other information included or referenced in the
Special Provisions. Subsurface data shall apply only at the location of the test holes and to the depths
indicated. Additional subsurface exploration may be performed by Bidders or the Contractor at their
own expense.
The indicated groundwater elevation is that which existed on the date specified in the subsurface
data. If there is a difference between the groundwater elevation shown in the subsurface data and the
groundwater elevation encountered during the Work, no additional payment will be made if the
groundwater elevation encountered is at or above an elevation 1 foot below the conduit invert elevation
or bottom elevation of other structures shown on the Plans unless Extra Work is required.
3-10 SURVEYING.
3-10.1 General. The Engineer will perform and be responsible for the accuracy of surveying
adequate for construction. The Contractor shall preserve construction survey stakes and marks for the
duration of their usefulness. If any construction survey stakes are lost or disturbed and need to be
replaced, such replacement will be performed by the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing at least 2 Working Days before survey services
will be required in connection with the laying out of any portion of the Work. The Contractor shall dig
all holes necessary for line and grade stakes.
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, stakes will be set and stationed by the Engineer
for curbs, headers, sewers, storm drains, structures, and rough grade. A corresponding cut or fill to
finished grade (or flowline) will be indicated on a grade sheet.
3-10.2 Line and Grade. The Work shall conform to the lines, elevations, and grades shown on the
Plans.
Three consecutive points set on the same slope shall be used together so that any variation from a
straight grade can be detected. Any such variation shall be reported to the Engineer. In the absence of
such report, the Contractor shall be responsible for any error in the grade of the Work.
Grades for underground conduits will be set at the surface of the ground. The Contractor shall
transfer them to the bottom of the trench.
3-11 CONTRACT INFORMATION SIGNS. The names, addresses and specialties of Contractors,
Subcontractors, architects, or engineers may be displayed on removable signs. The size, location, and
details shall conform to the details specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
Commercial advertising matter shall not be attached to or painted on the surfaces of buildings,
fences, canopies, or barricades.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 19

3-12 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE.

3-12.1 General. Throughout all phases, the Contractor shall keep the Work site clean and free from
rubbish and debris. Rubbish and debris collected on the Work site shall only be stored in roll-off,
enclosed containers prior to disposal. Stockpiles of such will not be allowed.
When required by the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall provide a self-loading motorized street
sweeper equipped with a functional water spray system. The sweeper shall clean all paved areas within
the Work site and all paved haul routes at least once each working day
The Contractor shall ensure there is no spillage along haul routes. Any such spillage shall be
removed immediately and the area cleaned.
Should the Contractor fail to keep the Work site free from rubbish and debris, the Engineer may
suspend the Work pursuant to 6-6 until the condition is corrected.
3-12.2 Air Pollution Control. The Contractor shall not discharge smoke, dust, equipment exhaust,
or any other air contaminants into the atmosphere in such quantity as will violate any Federal, State, or
local regulations. The Contractor shall also abate dust nuisance by cleaning, sweeping and spraying with
water, or other means as necessary. The use of water shall conform to 3-12.6.
3-12.3 Noise Control. Noise generated from the Contractor’s operations shall be controlled as
specified in the Special Provisions.
3-12.4 Storage of Equipment and Materials.
3-12.4.1 General. Materials and equipment shall be removed from the Work site as soon as they
are no longer necessary. Before inspection by the Engineer for completion per 3-13.1, the Work site
shall be cleared of equipment, unused materials, and rubbish so as to present a satisfactory clean and
neat appearance.
Excess excavated material shall be removed from the Work site immediately unless otherwise
specified.
Forms and form lumber shall be removed from the Work site as soon as practicable after stripping.
3-12.4.2 Storage in Public Streets. Construction materials and equipment shall not be stored in
streets, roads, or highways for more than 5 Days after unloading unless otherwise specified or approved
by the Engineer. All materials or equipment not installed or used in the Work within 5 Days after
unloading shall be stored at a location approved by the Engineer.
Excavated material, except that which is to be used as backfill in the adjacent trench, shall not be
stored in public streets unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer. Immediately after
placing backfill, all excess excavated material shall be removed.
3-12.5 Sanitary Sewers.
3-12.5.1 General. The flow of sewage shall not be interrupted. Should the Contractor disrupt the
operation of existing sanitary sewer facilities, or should disruption be necessary for performance of the
Work, the Contractor shall bypass the sewage flow around the Work. Sewage shall be conveyed in
closed conduits and disposed of in a sanitary sewer system. Sewage shall not be permitted to flow in
trenches nor be covered by backfill.
Whenever sewage bypass and pumping is required by the Plans or Specifications, or the Contractor
so elects to perform, the Contractor shall submit a Working Drawing conforming to 3-12.5.2 detailing its
proposed plan of sewage bypass and pumping.
3-12.5.2 Sewage Bypass and Pumping Plan. The plan shall indicate the locations and capacities of
all pumps, sumps, suction and discharge lines. Equipment and piping shall be sized to handle the peak
flow of the section of sewer line to be bypassed and pumped. Bypass piping, when crossing areas

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
20 Greenbook 2021

subject to traffic loads, shall be constructed in trenches with adequate cover and otherwise protected
from damage due to traffic. Lay-flat hose or aluminum piping with an adequate casing and/or traffic
plates may be allowed if so approved by the Engineer. Bypass pump suction and discharge lines that
extend into manholes shall be rigid hose or hard pipe. Lay-flat hose will not be allowed to extend into
manholes. The Contractor shall provide a backup bypass pumping system in case of malfunction. The
backup bypass system shall provide 100 percent standby capability, and be in place and ready for
immediate use. Each standby pump shall be a complete unit with its own suction and discharge piping.
In addition to the backup system, the Contractor shall furnish and operate vacuum trucks when required
by the Plans or Special Provisions.
3-12.5.3 Spill Prevention and Emergency Response Plan. The Contractor shall prepare and
submit a spill prevention and emergency response plan. The plan shall address implementation of
measures to prevent sewage spills, procedures for spill control and containment, notifications,
emergency response, cleanup, and spill and damage reporting.
The plan shall account for all storm drain systems and water courses within the vicinity of the Work
which could be affected by a sewage spill. Catch basins that could receive spilled sewage shall be
identified. Unless otherwise specified, these catch basins shall be sealed prior to operating the bypass
and pumping system. The Contractor shall remove all material used to seal the catch basins when the
bypass and pumping system operations are complete.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for containing any sewage spillage, preventing any sewage
from reaching a watercourse, recovery and legal disposal of any spilled sewage, any fines or penalties
associated with the sewage spill imposed upon by the Agency and/or the Contractor by jurisdictional
regulatory agencies, and any other expenses or liabilities related to the sewage spill.
3-12.6 Water Pollution Control.
3-12.6.1 General. The Contractor shall conform to all applicable local, state and Federal regulations
and laws pertaining to water pollution control. The Contractor shall conduct and schedule its operations,
and follow and implement best management practices in such a manner as to prevent water pollution.
The Contractor shall also conform to the following requirements:
a) Sediments shall not be discharged to a storm drain system or receiving waters.
b) Sediments generated on the Work site shall be contained on the Work site using appropriate
BMPs.
c) No construction-related materials, waste, spill, or residue shall be discharged from the Work site
to streets, drainage facilities, receiving waters, or adjacent property by wind or runoff.
d) Non-storm water runoff from equipment, vehicle washing, or any other activity shall be contained
within the Work site using appropriate BMPs.
e) Erosion shall be prevented. Erosion susceptible slopes shall be covered, planted or otherwise
protected in a way that prevents discharge from the Work site.
3-12.6.2 Best Management Practices (BMPs). The Contractor shall implement and maintain such
BMPs as are relevant to the Work, and as are specifically required by the Plans or Special Provisions.
The Contractor shall be responsible throughout the duration of the Contract for installing, constructing,
inspecting, maintaining, removing and disposing of BMPs for wind erosion control, tracking control,
erosion and sediment control, non-storm water control, and waste management and materials pollution
control. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be responsible for BMP
implementation and maintenance throughout any temporary suspension of the Work.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 21

3-12.6.3 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). When so specified in the Special
Provisions, or if so required by a jurisdictional regulatory agency, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit a storm water pollution prevention plan. The SWPPP shall conform to the requirements
specified in the Special Provisions and those of the jurisdictional regulatory agency. The Notice of
Intent will be filed by the Agency.
3-12.6.4 Dewatering. Dewatering shall be performed by the Contractor when specifically required
by the Plans or Specifications, and as necessary for construction of the Work. Dewatering shall be
performed in conformance with all applicable local, state and Federal laws and permits issued by
jurisdictional regulatory agencies. Permits necessary for treatment and disposal of accumulated water
shall be obtained by the Contractor or the Agency as specified in the Special Provisions. Accumulated
water shall be treated prior to disposal if so specified in the Special Provisions or required by a permit.
The Contractor shall submit a Working Drawing and related supporting information detailing its
proposed plan and methodology of dewatering and treatment and disposal of accumulated water.
The plan shall identify the location, type and size of dewatering devices and related equipment, the
size and type of materials composing the collection system, the size and type of equipment to be used to
retain and, if required, treat accumulated water, and the proposed disposal locations. If the proposed
disposal location is a sanitary sewer, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer written evidence of
permission from the owner. If the proposed disposal location is a storm drain system or receiving body
of water, the Contractor shall submit written evidence of permission from the owner of the storm drain
system and, if not obtained by the Agency, original signed permits from jurisdictional regulatory
agencies or written evidence that such permits are not required.
3-12.6.5 Payment. Unless otherwise specified, payment for implementation and maintenance of
BMPs shall be considered as included in the Contract Unit Price for each item in the Bid.
Payment for dewatering shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
3-13 COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND WARRANTY.
3-13.1 Completion. The Contractor shall submit a written assertion that the Work has been
completed. If, in the Engineer’s judgment, the Work has been completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents, the Engineer will set forth in writing the date the Work was completed. This will
be the date when the Contractor is relieved from responsibility to protect and maintain the Work and to
which liquidated damages will be computed.
3-13.2 Acceptance. Acceptance will occur after all of the requirements contained in the Contract
Documents have been fulfilled. If, in the Engineer’s judgment, the Contractor has fully performed the
Contract, the Engineer will recommend to the Board that the Contractor’s performance of the Contract
be accepted.
3-13.3 Warranty. The Work shall be warranted by the Contractor against defective materials and
workmanship for a period of 1 year. The warranty period shall start on the date the Work was completed
as determined by the Engineer.
The warranty period for specific items covered under manufacturers’ or suppliers’ warranties shall
commence on the date they are placed into service at the direction of or as approved by the Engineer in
writing.
All warranties, express or implied, from subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers, of any tier, for
the materials furnished and work performed shall be assigned, in writing, to the Agency, and such
warranties shall be delivered to the Engineer prior to acceptance of the Contractor’s performance of the
Contract.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
22 Greenbook 2021

The Contractor shall replace or repair defective materials and workmanship in a manner satisfactory
to the Engineer, after notice to do so from the Engineer, and within the time specified in the notice. If the
Contractor fails to make such replacement or repairs within the time specified in the notice, the Agency
may perform the replacement or repairs at the Contractor’s expense. If the Contractor fails to reimburse
the Agency for the actual costs, the Contractor’s Surety shall be liable for the cost thereof.

SECTION 4 - CONTROL OF MATERIALS

4-1 GENERAL. Materials, parts, and equipment furnished by the Contractor for the Work shall be
new, free of defects, and conform to the requirements in the Contract Documents. Used or secondhand
materials, parts, and equipment may be used only if so specified in the Special Provisions.
The quality of materials shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Materials of quality not
conforming to the requirements of the Specifications shall be considered defective and will be subject to
rejection. Defective material, whether in place or not, shall be removed immediately from the Work site
by the Contractor, at its expense, when so directed by the Engineer.
If the Contractor fails to replace any defective material after reasonable notice, the Engineer may
cause such work or materials to be replaced. The replacement expense will be deducted from the
amount to be paid to the Contractor.
4-2 PROTECTION. The Contractor shall provide and maintain storage facilities and employ such
measures as will preserve the specified quality of materials to be used in the Work. Stored materials
shall be reasonably accessible for inspection. The Contractor shall also adequately protect new and
existing work and all items of equipment for the duration of the Contract.
The Contractor shall not, without the Agency’s consent, assign, sell, mortgage, hypothecate, or
remove equipment or materials which have been installed or delivered and which may be necessary for
the completion of the Work.
4-3 INSPECTION.
4-3.1 General. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, inspection is required at the
source for asphalt concrete pavement mixtures, structural concrete, metal fabrication, metal casting,
welding, concrete pipe manufacture, protective coating application, and similar shop or plant operations.
Additional materials and fabricated items which require inspection at the source shall be as specified in
the Special Provisions.
Steel pipe in sizes less than 18 inches (450 mm) and vitrified clay and cast iron pipe in all sizes are
acceptable upon submittal of a Certificate of Compliance, subject to sampling and testing by the Agency.
Standard items of equipment such as electric motors, conveyors, elevators, plumbing fixtures, etc., are
subject to inspection at the Work site only. Special items of equipment such as designed electrical panel
boards, large pumps, sewage plant equipment, etc., are subject to inspection at the source for
performance testing only. Inspection at the source for other items shall be as specified in the Special
Provisions.
4-3.2 Inspection by the Agency. The Agency will provide inspection and testing laboratory
services within the continental United States within a 50-mile radius of the geographical limits of the
Agency. Inspection and testing laboratory services beyond this radius or outside the continental United
States shall be provided by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 23

4-3.3 Inspection of Items Not Locally Produced. When the Contractor intends to purchase
materials, fabricated products, or equipment from sources located more than 50 miles (80 km) outside
the geographical limits of the Agency or outside the United States, an inspector or accredited testing
laboratory approved by the Engineer, shall be engaged by the Contractor at its expense, to inspect the
materials, equipment or process. This approval shall be obtained before producing any material or
equipment. The inspector or representative of the testing laboratory shall evaluate the materials for
conformance with the requirements of the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor shall forward reports
required by the Engineer. No materials or equipment shall be shipped nor shall any processing,
fabrication or treatment of such materials be done without proper inspection by the approved agent.
Approval by said agent shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for complying with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4-4 TESTING. Before incorporation into the Work, the Contractor shall submit samples of
materials, as the Engineer may require, at no cost to the Agency. The Contractor, at its expense, shall
deliver the materials for testing to the place and at the time designated by the Engineer. Unless
otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, all initial testing and a reasonable amount of retesting will
be performed under the direction of the Engineer, and at no expense to the Contractor. If the Contractor
is to provide and pay for testing, it will be so specified in the Special Provisions.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing, at least 15 Days in advance, of its intention to
use materials for which tests are specified, to allow sufficient time to perform the tests. The notice shall
name the proposed supplier and source of material.
If the notice of intent to use is sent before the materials are available for testing or inspection, or is
sent so far in advance that the materials on hand at the time will not last but will be replaced by a new lot
prior to use on the Work, it will be the Contractor’s responsibility to re-notify the Engineer when
samples which are representative may be obtained.
Third party independent testing and quality control testing shall be performed within the United
States.
4-5 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE. A Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished to the
Engineer prior to the use of any material or assembled material for which the Specifications so require or
if so required by the Engineer.
The Engineer may waive the materials testing requirements of the Specifications and accept a
Certificate of Compliance. Material test data may be required by the Engineer to be included with the
submittal.
Materials used on the basis of a Certificate of Compliance may be sampled and tested at any time.
The submission of a Certificate of Compliance shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
incorporating material into the Work which conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents,
and any material not conforming to the requirements will be subject to rejection by the Engineer whether
in place or not.
4-6 TRADE NAMES. The Contractor may supply any of the materials specified or offer a proposed
equivalent. The Engineer will determine whether the material submitted is equivalent to that specified.
For submittals after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall allow 28 Days for the Engineer to make
this determination unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
A listing of materials is not intended to be comprehensive, or in order of preference. The Contractor
may offer any material, process, or equipment considered to be equivalent to that indicated. The
substantiation of offers shall be submitted as provided in the Contract Documents.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
24 Greenbook 2021

The Contractor shall, at its expense, furnish data concerning items offered by it as equivalent to those
specified. The Contractor shall have the material tested as required by the Engineer to determine that the
quality, strength, physical, chemical, or other characteristics, including durability, finish, efficiency,
dimensions, service, and suitability are such that the item will fulfill its intended function.
Test methods shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Test results shall be reported
promptly to the Engineer, who will evaluate the results and determine if the substitute item is equivalent.
The Engineer’s findings shall be final. Installation and use of a substitute item shall not be made until
approved by the Engineer.
If a substitute offered by the Contractor is not found to be equal to the specified material, the
Contractor shall furnish and install the specified material.
The specified Contract time of completion shall not be affected by any circumstance developing
from the provisions of this subsection.
4-7 WEIGHING EQUIPMENT. Scales and metering equipment used for proportioning materials
shall be inspected for accuracy and certified within the past 12 months by the State of California
Department of Food and Agriculture, Division of Measurement Standards, Registered Service Agency.
The accuracy of the work of a scale service agency, except as stated herein, shall meet the standards
of the Business and Professions Code and the Code of Regulations pertaining to weighing devices. A
Certificate of Compliance shall be presented, prior to operation, to the Engineer for approval and shall
be renewed whenever required by the Engineer at no cost to the Agency.
Scales shall be arranged so they may be read easily from the operator’s platform or area. They shall
indicate the true net weight without the application of any factor. The figures of the scales shall be
clearly legible. Scales shall be accurate to within 1 percent when tested with the plant shut down.
Weighing equipment shall be so insulated against vibration or moving of other operating equipment in
the plant area that the error in weighing with the entire plant running will not exceed 2 percent for any
setting nor 1.5 percent for any batch.
4-8 CALIBRATION OF TESTING EQUIPMENT. Testing equipment, such as, but not limited
to pressure gages, metering devices, hydraulic systems, force (load) measuring instruments, and strain-
measuring devices shall be calibrated by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer at intervals not to
exceed 12 months and following repairs, modification, or relocation of the equipment. Calibration
certificates shall be provided when requested by the Engineer.

SECTION 5 - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

5-1 LAWS AND REGULATIONS. The Contractor shall keep itself fully informed of State and
national laws and County and municipal ordinances and regulations which in any manner affect those
employed in the Work or the materials used in the Work or in any way affect the conduct of the Work.
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with such laws, ordinances, and regulations.
5-2 SPECIAL NOTICES. When specified or directed by the Engineer, any notice required to be
served in accordance with this subsection shall be in writing, dated, and signed by the Contractor or the
Engineer. Such notices shall be served by any of the following methods:
a) Personal delivery with proof of delivery which may be made by declaration under penalty of
perjury by any person over the age of 18 years. The proof of delivery shall show that delivery
was performed in accordance with these provisions. Service shall be effective on the date of

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 25

delivery. Notices given to the Contractor by personal delivery may be made to the Contractor’s
authorized representative at the Work site; or
b) Certified mail addressed to the mailing address of the recipient postage prepaid; return receipt
requested. Service shall be effective on the date of the receipt of the mailing.
Simultaneously, the Agency may send the same notice by regular mail. If a notice that is sent by
certified mail is returned unsigned, then delivery shall be effective pursuant to regular mail, provided the
notice that was sent by regular mail is not returned.
5-3 LABOR.
5-3.1 General. The Contractor, its agents, and employees shall be bound by and comply with
applicable provisions of the Labor Code and Federal, State, and local laws related to labor.
Any worker found by the Engineer to be incompetent, intemperate, troublesome, disorderly, or
otherwise objectionable, or who fails to perform the Work properly and acceptably, shall be immediately
removed from the Work site by the Contractor and shall not be reemployed in the performance of the
Work.
5-3.2 Prevailing Wages. Pursuant to Section 1773.2 of the Labor Code, the current prevailing rate
of per diem wages at the time of the Bid as determined by the Director of the Department of Industrial
Relations (DIR) are on file at the office of the Engineer. The Contractor shall post a copy of these rates
at the Work site. Pursuant to Sections 1771 and 1774 of the Labor Code, the Contractor and any
Subcontractors shall pay not less than the specified prevailing rates of wages to workers employed on the
Contract. If the Contract is Federally-funded, the Contractor and any Subcontractors shall not pay less
than the higher of these rates or the rates determined by the United States Department of Labor.
Pursuant to Section 1775 of the Labor Code, the Contractor and any Subcontractors, shall, as a penalty to
the Agency, forfeit the prescribed amounts per calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker paid less
than the prevailing wage rates.
5-3.3 Payroll Records. Pursuant to Section 1776 of the Labor Code the Contractor shall keep, make
available, and submit to the Engineer upon request, certified payroll records.
5-3.4 Hours of Labor. Pursuant to Section 1810 of the Labor Code, 8 hours of labor shall constitute
a legal day’s work. Pursuant to Section 1813 of the Labor Code, the Contractor and any Subcontractors,
shall, as a penalty to the Agency, forfeit the prescribed amount per calendar day for each worker required
or permitted to work more than 8 hours in any 1 calendar day and 40 hours in any 1 calendar week
without being compensated in accordance with Section 1815.
5-3.5 Apprentices. Pursuant to Section 1777.5 of the Labor Code, the Contractor shall comply with
all requirements for apprenticeable occupations.
5-4 INSURANCE.
5-4.1 General. The Contractor shall provide and maintain insurance naming the Agency as an
insured or additional insured with the Contractor regardless of any inconsistent statement in the policy or
any subsequent endorsement whether liability is attributable to the Contractor or the Agency. The
insurance provisions shall not be construed to limit the Contractor's indemnity obligations contained in
the Contract. Except as otherwise specified in 6-5, the Contractor shall save, keep, and hold harmless
the Agency, its officers, employees, and agents from all damages, costs or expenses in law or equity that
may at any time arise to a person or property by reason of or in the course of performing the Work, or
which may be caused by a negligent act or omission by the Contractor, the Contractor's employees, or a
Subcontractor. The Agency will not be liable for any accident, loss, or damage to the Work prior to
completion, except as otherwise specified in 6-5.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
26 Greenbook 2021

With the exception of workers’ compensation insurance, the policies furnished by the Contractor
shall be issued by an insurance company authorized by the Insurance Commissioner to transact business
in the State of California. The insurance company shall have a policy holder rating of "A" or higher and
a Financial Class VII or higher as established by A.M. Best, or higher rating established by Moody's or
Standard & Poor’s.
The Contractor shall notify the Agency in accordance with 5-2 within 5 Days of the date of being
notified by its insurance carrier of any changes to or cancellation of the policy.
The Contractor shall submit insurance documents including an additional insured endorsement,
certificate of insurance, and waiver of subrogation.
The cost of the defense of any claims against the Agency shall not erode or take away from the
specified limits of liability.
No separate payment will be made for insurance. Payment shall be considered as included in the
Contract Price.
5-4.2 General Liability Insurance. The policy shall insure the Agency, its officers, employees, and
agents while acting within the scope of their duties on the Work, against all claims arising out of or in
connection with the Work, except as otherwise specified in 6-5. This policy shall provide coverage for
on-going and completed operations. The certificate of insurance submitted to the Agency shall state that
the Contractor’s insurance is primary and that any other insurance held by the Agency is non-
contributory.
The Contractor may file insurance acceptable to the Agency covering more than one contract.
Unless otherwise specified, the coverage shall provide the following minimum limits:
Limits of Liability
General Aggregate Limit ................................................................................................. $2,000,000
Other than Products/Completed Operations Aggregate .................................................. $2,000,000
Products/Completed Operations Aggregate Limit........................................................... $2,000,000
Personal Injury Limit ....................................................................................................... $1,000,000
Each Occurrence.............................................................................................................. $1,000,000
The policy or policies shall be endorsed to provide that the insurer waives all rights of subrogation
against the Agency, and its respective elected officials, officers, employees, agents, and representatives
for losses paid under the terms of the policy or policies and which arise from work performed by the
named insured for the Agency.
5-4.3 Workers' Compensation Insurance. Pursuant to Sections 1860 and 3700 of the Labor Code,
the Contractor shall secure, pay for, and maintain in full force for the duration of the Contract, workers’
compensation insurance. The insurance company shall have a policy rating equal to or better than that of
the California State Compensation Insurance Fund (SCIF). The Agency, its officers, employees and
agents, shall not be held responsible for any claims in law or equity occasioned by failure of the
Contractor to comply with this requirement.
Pursuant to Sections 1860 and 1861 of the Labor Code, the Contractor shall submit the following
certification to the Engineer prior to execution of the Contract by the Board:
“I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which require every employer to be
insured against liability for workers’ compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 27

provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of
the work of this contract.”
The policy or policies shall be endorsed to provide that the insurer will waive all rights of
subrogation against the Agency, and its respective elected officials, officers, employees, agents, and
representatives for losses paid under the terms of the policy or policies and which arise from work
performed by the named insured for the Agency.
5-4.4 Auto Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall provide a certificate of insurance to the
Agency showing coverage of at least $1,000,000 for bodily injury and property damage or a combined
single limit. This policy shall be for “any auto” or for “all autos either owned, hired, or non-owned.”
5-5 ANTITRUST CLAIMS. Pursuant to Section 7103.5 of the Public Contract Code:
“In entering into a public works contract or a subcontract to supply goods, services, or materials
pursuant to a public works contract, the contractor or subcontractor offers and agrees to assign to the
awarding body all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of
the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. Sec 15) or Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 [commencing with Section 16700] of
Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from purchases of goods, services, or
materials pursuant to the public works contract or subcontract. The assignment shall be made and
become effective at the time the awarding body tenders final payment to the contractor, without further
acknowledgment by the parties.”
5-6 PATENT FEES OR ROYALTIES. The Contractor shall absorb in its Bid the patent fees or
royalties on any patented article or process furnished or used in the Work. The Contractor shall
indemnify and hold the Agency harmless from any legal action that may be brought for infringement of
patents.
5-7 SAFETY.
5-7.1 Work Site Safety.
5-7.1.1 General. The Contractor shall provide safety measures as necessary to protect the public and
workers within, or in the vicinity of, the Work site. The Contractor shall ensure that its operations will
not create safety hazards.
The Contractor shall provide safety equipment, material, and assistance to Agency personnel so that
they may properly inspect all phases of the Work.
When asbestos is being removed, the requirements of the CCR Title 8, Div. 1, Chapter 4, Subchapter
4 and Subchapter 7 shall be implemented.
5-7.1.2 Work Site Safety Official. The Contractor shall designate in writing a “Project Safety
Official” who shall be at the Work site at all times, and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the
Contractor’s Injury and Illness Prevention Program (IIPP) and Code of Safe Practices. The Project
Safety Official shall be available at all times to abate any potential safety hazards and shall have the
authority and responsibility to shut down an unsafe operation, if necessary.
5-7.2 Safety Orders.
5-7.2.1 General. The Contractor shall have at the Work site, copies or suitable extracts of
Construction Safety Orders, Tunnel Safety Orders, and General Industry Safety Orders issued by the
State Division of Industrial Safety.
Prior to beginning any excavation 5 feet in depth or greater, the Contractor shall submit the name of
the “Competent Person” as defined in CCR, Title 8, Section 1504. The “Competent Person” shall be
present at the Work site as required by Cal-OSHA.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
28 Greenbook 2021

5-7.2.2 Shoring Plan. Before excavating any trench 5 feet (1.5 m) or more in depth, the Contractor
shall submit a detailed Working Drawing (shoring plan) showing the design of the shoring, bracing,
sloping, or other provisions used for the workers’ protection. If the shoring plan varies from the shoring
system standards, the shoring plan shall be prepared by a registered Structural or Civil Engineer. The
shoring plan shall accommodate existing underground utilities. No excavation shall start until the
Engineer has accepted the shoring plan and the Contractor has obtained a permit from the State Division
of Industrial Safety. A copy of this permit shall be submitted to the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to
submit a shoring plan or fails to comply with an accepted shoring plan, the Contractor shall suspend
work at the affected location(s). Such suspended work shall not be the basis of a claim for Extra Work
and the Contractor shall not receive additional compensation or Contract time.
5-7.2.3 Payment. Payment for shoring shall be included in the Bid item provided therefore.
Payment for compliance with the provisions of the safety orders and all other laws, ordinances, and
regulations shall be included in the various Bid items.
5-7.3 Use of Explosives. Explosives may be used only when specified in the Special Provisions.
Explosives shall be handled, used, and stored in accordance with all applicable regulations.
Prior to blasting, the Contactor shall comply with the following requirements:
a) The jurisdictional law enforcement agency shall be notified 24 hours in advance of blasting.
b) The jurisdictional fire department shall be notified 24 hours in advance of blasting.
c) Blasting activities and schedule milestones shall be included in the Contractor’s construction
schedule per 6-1.
The Engineer’s approval of the use of explosives shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for
claims caused by blasting operations.
5-7.4 Hazardous Substances. An SDS as described in CCR, Title 8, Section 5194, shall be
maintained at the Work site for all hazardous material used by the Contractor.
Material usage shall be accomplished with strict adherence to California Division of Industrial Safety
requirements and all manufacturer warnings and application instructions listed on the MSDS and on the
product container label.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer if a specified product cannot be used under safe conditions.
5-7.5 Confined Spaces.
5-7.5.1 Confined Space Entry Program (CSEP). The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing,
administering and maintaining a CSEP in accordance with CCR, Title 8, Sections 5156, 5157 and 5158.
Prior to the start of the Work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a CSEP. The CSEP shall
address all potential physical and environmental hazards and contain procedures for safe entry into
confined spaces such as the following:
a) Training of personnel.
b) Purging and cleaning the space of materials and residue.
c) Potential isolation and control of energy and material inflow.
d) Controlled access to the space.
e) Atmospheric testing of the space.
f) Ventilation of the space.
g) Special hazards consideration.
h) Personal protective equipment.
i) Rescue plan provisions.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 29

The submittal shall include the names of the Contractor’s personnel, including each Subcontractor‘s
personnel, assigned to the Work that will have CSEP responsibilities, their CSEP training, and their
specific assignment and responsibility in carrying out the CSEP.
5-7.5.2 Permit-Required Confined Spaces. Entry into permit-required confined spaces as defined
in CCR, Title 8, Section 5157 may be required as a part of the Work. Manholes, tanks, vaults, pipelines,
excavations, or other enclosed or partially enclosed spaces shall be considered permit-required confined
spaces until the pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise. The Contractor shall implement a permit-
required CSEP prior to performing any work in a permit-required confined space. A copy of the permit
shall be available at all times for review by the Contractor and the Engineer at the Work site.
5-7.5.3 Payment. Payment for the CSEP shall be included in the Bid items for which the CSEP is
required.
5-7.6 Flood Lighting.
5-7.6.1 General. When work is being performed during hours of darkness, as defined in Division 1,
Section 280, of the California Vehicle Code, flood lighting shall be used to illuminate the Work site,
flagger stations, equipment crossings and other hazardous areas. Flood lighting shall provide visibility
for a distance of 1/2 mile (800 m). Flood lights shall not shine directly into the view of oncoming
traffic.
5-7.6.2 Payment. No separate or additional payment will be made for flood lighting. Payment shall
be included in the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid for the various Bid items.
5-7.7 Security and Protective Devices.
5-7.7.1 General. Security and protective devices shall consist of fencing, steel plates, or other
devices as specified in the Special Provisions to protect open excavations.
5-7.7.2 Security Fencing. The Contractor shall completely fence open excavations. Security
fencing shall conform to 304-5. Security fencing shall remain in place unless workers are present and
construction operations are in progress during which time the Contractor shall provide equivalent
security.
5-7.8 Steel Plate Covers.
5-7.8.1 General. The Contractor shall provide, install, and maintain steel plate covers as necessary
to protect from accidental entry into openings, trenches, and excavations.
Surfaces exposed to pedestrian or vehicular traffic shall be non-skid.
5-7.8.2 Thickness. Steel plate covers shall conform to Table 5-7.8.2.

TABLE 5-7.8.2
Trench Width Steel Plate Cover Thickness
Less than 10” (250 mm) 1/2” (12.5 mm)
10” (250 mm) to 1’-11” (580 mm) 3/4” (19 mm)
2’ (600 mm) to 2’-7” (790 mm) 7/8 “ (22 mm)
2’-8” (820 mm) to 3’-5” (1040 mm) 1” (25 mm)
3’-6” (1070 mm) to 5’-3” (1600 mm) 1-1/4” (32 mm)
More than 5’-3” (1600 mm) See Note 1
Notes:
The Contractor shall submit a Working Drawing and calculations based on AASHTO H20-44 bridge loading.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
30 Greenbook 2021

5-7.8.3 Installation. Steel plate covers shall:

a) be secured against movement by use of a holding device,
b) be installed in such a manner as to minimize noise creation when driven over, and
c) extend a minimum of 1 foot (300 mm) beyond trench edges.
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, steel plate covers shall be installed using either
Method 1 or 2.
d) Method 1. For posted speeds more than 40 miles per hour (62 km/hour), the pavement shall be
cold milled to a depth equal to the thickness of the plate and to a width and length equal to the
dimensions of the plate. Method 1 may also be used for speeds less than 40 miles per hour (70
km/hour).
e) Method 2. For posted speeds less than 40 miles per hour (62 km/hour), the approach plate(s) and
ending plate (in longitudinal placement) shall be attached to the roadway by a minimum of 2
dowels drilled at the corners of the plate and drilled 2 inches (50 mm) into the pavement.
Subsequent plates may be butted next to each other. When the steel plates are removed, the
dowel holes shall be backfilled.
When Method 2 is used, temporary asphalt concrete (D2-SC 800) shall be used to construct tapers
from the steel plate surface to the surface of the existing roadway as follows:
f) for vehicular traffic, with a 4-inch (100 mm) run for each 1 inch (25 mm) thickness of steel plate.
g) for bike paths or routes, with an 8-inch (200 mm) run for each 1 inch (25 mm) thickness of steel
plate.
h) the pedestrian way, including crosswalks, shall be placed with a 12-inch (300 mm) run for each 1
inch (25 mm) thickness of steel plate if the plate is installed per Method 2.
Advance traffic warning signs shall be installed as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on
the TCP.
5-7.8.4 Payment. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, no separate or additional
payment will be made for steel plate covers. Payment shall be included in the Contract Unit Price or
lump sum price in the Bid for the various Bid items that require steel plate covers.

SECTION 6 - PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK

6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK.

6-1.1 Construction Schedule. After notification of award of the Contract and prior to start of any
work, the Contractor shall submit its proposed construction schedule to the Engineer for approval. The
construction schedule shall be in the form of a tabulation, chart, or graph and shall be in sufficient detail
to show chronological relationship of all activities of the Work. These include, but are not limited to:
estimated starting and completion dates of various activities, submission of submittals per 3-8.3,
procurement of materials and scheduling of equipment. The construction schedule shall incorporate the
requirements of 402-5 and reflect completion of the Work within the specified Contract time and in
conformance with the Contract Documents.
If the Contractor desires to make a major change in the method of operations after commencing
construction, or if the schedule fails to reflect the actual progress, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a revised construction schedule in advance of beginning revised operations.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 31

6-1.2 Commencement of the Work. Unless otherwise specified, the Contract time shall commence
upon the date of issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The Work shall start within 15 Days thereafter, and
be diligently prosecuted to completion within the Contract time.
6-2 PROSECUTION OF THE WORK. To minimize public inconvenience and possible hazard
and to restore street and other work areas to their original condition and state of usefulness as soon as
practicable, the Contractor shall diligently prosecute the Work to completion. If the Engineer determines
that the Contractor is failing to prosecute the Work to the proper extent, the Contractor shall, upon
orders from the Engineer, immediately take steps to remedy the situation. Should the Contractor fail to
take the necessary steps to fully accomplish said purposes, after orders of the Engineer, the Engineer
may suspend the Work in whole or part, until the Contractor takes said steps.
If the Work is suspended through no fault of the Agency, all expenses and losses incurred by the
Contractor during such suspensions shall be borne by the Contractor. If the Contractor fails to properly
provide for public safety, traffic, and protection of the Work during periods of suspension, the Agency
may elect to do so, and deduct the cost thereof from monies due the Contractor. Such actions will not
relieve the Contractor from liability.
6-3 TIME OF COMPLETION.
6-3.1 General. The Contractor shall complete the Work within the time specified in the Contract or
the Special Provisions. The Contractor shall complete each portion of the Work within the time
specified in the Contract or the Special Provisions for such portion. Unless otherwise specified, the time
of completion of the Contract shall be expressed in Working Days.
6-3.2 Contract Time Accounting. The Engineer will make a daily determination of each Working
Day to be charged against the Contract time. These determinations will be discussed and the Contractor
will be furnished a periodic statement showing the allowable number of Working Days of Contract time,
as adjusted, at the beginning of the reporting period. The statement will also indicate the number of
Working Days charged during the reporting period and the number of Working Days of Contract time
remaining. If the Contractor does not agree with the statement, it shall file a written protest within 15
Days after receipt, setting forth the facts of the protest. Otherwise, the statement will be deemed to have
been accepted.
6-4 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME.
6-4.1 General. If delays are caused by unforeseen events beyond the control of the Contractor, such
delays will entitle the Contractor to an extension of the Contract time as provided herein, but the
Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment due to such delays, except as otherwise
specified in 6-4.3. Such unforeseen events may include: war, government regulations, labor disputes,
strikes, fires, floods, adverse weather or elements necessitating cessation of work, inability to obtain
materials, labor or equipment, required Extra Work, or other specific events as may be further described
in the Special Provisions.
No extension of time will be granted for a delay caused by the Contractor’s inability to obtain
materials unless the Contractor furnishes to the Engineer documentary proof. The proof must be
provided in a timely manner in accordance with the sequence of the Contractor’s operations and the
approved construction schedule.
If delays beyond the Contractor’s control are caused by events other than those mentioned above or
in 402-5, the Engineer may deem an extension of time to be in the best interests of the Agency. The
Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment due to such delays, except as otherwise
specified in 6-4.3 or 402-5.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
32 Greenbook 2021

If delays beyond the Contractor’s control are caused solely by action or inaction by the Agency, such
delays will entitle the Contractor to an extension of time per 6-4.2.
6-4.2 Extensions of Time. Extensions of time, when granted, will be based upon the effect of delays
to the Work. They will not be granted for non-controlling delays to minor portions of the Work unless it
can be shown that such delays did or will delay the progress of the Work.
6-4.3 Payment for Delays. Pursuant to Section 7102 of the Public Contract Code, the Contractor
will be compensated for damages incurred due to delays for which the Agency is responsible. Such
actual costs will be determined by the Engineer. The Agency will not be liable for damages which the
Contractor could have avoided by any reasonable means, such as judicious handling of forces,
equipment, or plant. The determination of what damages the Contractor could have avoided will be
made by the Engineer.
6-4.4 Written Notice and Report. If the Contractor desires payment for a delay as specified in 6-
6.3 or an extension of time, it shall file with the Engineer a written request and report of cause within 30
Days after the beginning of the delay. The request for payment or extension must be made at least 15
Days before the specified completion date. Failure by the Contractor to file these items within the times
specified will be considered grounds for refusal by the Agency to consider such request.
6-5 USE OF IMPROVEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION. The Agency reserves the right to
take over and utilize all or part of any completed facility or appurtenance. The Contractor will be
notified in writing in advance of such action. Such action by the Agency will relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for injury or damage to said completed portions of the improvement resulting from use by
public traffic or from the action of the elements or from any other cause, except Contractor operations or
negligence. The Contractor will not be required to reclean such portions of the improvement before field
acceptance, except for cleanup made necessary by its operations. Nothing in this subsection shall be
construed as relieving the Contractor from full responsibility for correcting defective work or materials.
In the event the Agency exercises its right to place into service and utilize all or part of any
completed facility or appurtenance, the Agency will assume the responsibility and liability for injury to
persons or property resulting from the utilization of the facility or appurtenance so placed into service,
except for any such injury to persons or property caused by any willful or negligent act or omission by
the Contractor, Subcontractor, their officers, employees, or agents.
6-6 SUSPENSION OF THE WORK.
6-6.1 General. The Work may be suspended in whole or in part when determined by the Engineer
that the suspension is necessary in the interest of the Agency. The Contractor shall comply immediately
with any written order of the Engineer. Such suspension shall be without liability to the Contractor on
the part of the Agency except as otherwise specified in 6-4.3.
6-6.2 Archaeological and Paleontological Discoveries. If discovery is made of items of
archaeological or paleontological interest, the Contractor shall immediately cease excavation in the area
of discovery and shall not continue until ordered by the Engineer. When resumed, excavation operations
within the area of discovery shall be as directed by the Engineer.
Discoveries which may be encountered may include, but not be limited to, dwelling sites, stone
implements or other artifacts, animal bones, human bones, and fossils.
The Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of time and compensation in accordance with 6-4.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 33

6-7 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT FOR DEFAULT.

6-7.1 General. If, prior to the acceptance of the Work, the Contractor:
a) becomes insolvent, assigns its assets for the benefit of its creditors, is unable to pay its debts as
they become due, or is otherwise financially unable to complete the Work,
b) abandons the Work by failing to report to the Work site and diligently prosecute the Work to
completion,
c) disregards written instructions from the Engineer or materially violates provisions of the Contract
Documents,
d) fails to prosecute the Work according to the schedule approved by the Engineer,
e) disregards laws or regulations of any public body having jurisdiction, or
f) commits continuous or repeated violations of regulatory or statutory safety requirements, then the
Agency will consider the Contractor in default of the Contract.
Notices, and other written communications regarding default between the Contractor, the Agency,
and the Surety shall be transmitted in accordance with 5-2.
6-7.2 Notice to Cure. The Agency will issue a written notice to cure the default to the Contractor
and its Surety. The Contractor shall commence satisfactory corrective actions within 5 Working Days
after receipt.
6-7.3 Notice of Termination for Default. If the Contractor fails to commence satisfactory
corrective action within 5 Working Days after receipt of the notice to cure, or to diligently continue
satisfactory and timely correction of the default thereafter, then the Agency will recommend to the Board
that the Contractor be found in default of the Contract and upon such finding by the Board:
a) will terminate the Contractor’s right to perform under the Contract by issuing a written notice of
termination for default to the Contractor and its Surety,
b) may use any materials, equipment, tools or other facilities furnished by the Contractor to secure
and maintain the Work site, and
c) may furnish labor, equipment, and materials the Agency deems necessary to secure and maintain
the Work site.
The provisions of this subsection shall be in addition to all other legal rights and remedies available
to the Agency.
6-7.4 Responsibilities of the Surety. Upon receipt of the written notice of termination for default,
the Surety shall immediately assume all rights, obligations and liabilities of the Contractor under the
Contract. If the Surety fails to protect and maintain the Work site, the Agency may do so, and may
recover all costs incurred. The Surety shall notify the Agency that it is assuming all rights, obligations
and liabilities of the Contractor under the Contract and all money that is due, or would become due, to
the Contractor shall be payable to the Surety as the Work progresses, subject to the terms of the
Contract.
Within 15 Working Days of receipt of the written notice of termination for default, the Surety shall
submit to the Agency a written plan detailing the course of action it intends to take to remedy the default.
The Agency will review the plan and notify the Surety if the plan is satisfactory. If the Surety fails to
submit a satisfactory plan, or if the Surety fails to maintain progress according to the plan accepted by
the Agency, the Agency may, upon 48 hours written notice, exclude the Surety from the premises, take
possession of all material and equipment, and complete the Work in any way the Agency deems to be
expedient. The cost of completing the Work by the Agency shall be charged against the Surety and may

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
34 Greenbook 2021

be deducted from any monies due, or which would become due, the Surety. If the amounts due under
the Contract are insufficient for completion, the Surety shall pay to the Agency, within 30 Days after the
Agency submits an invoice, all costs in excess of the remaining Contract Price.
6-7.5 Payment. The Surety will be paid for completion of the Work in accordance with 7-3 less the
value of damages caused to the Agency by acts of the Contractor.
6-8 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONVENIENCE. The Board may terminate
the Contract if it becomes impossible or impracticable to proceed, or because of conditions or events
beyond the control of the Agency.
The Agency will issue a written notice of termination for convenience in accordance with 5-2. Upon
receipt, the Contractor shall immediately cease work, except work the Contractor is directed to complete
by the Engineer or required to complete for public safety and convenience. The Contractor shall
immediately notify Subcontractors and suppliers to immediately cease their work.
The Contractor will be paid without duplication for:
a) work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of
termination for convenience;
b) reasonable costs incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, suppliers and
others; and
c) reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.
The Contractor shall submit a final termination settlement proposal to the Agency no later than 90
days from the effective date of termination, unless extended, in writing, by the Agency upon written
request by the Contractor.
If the Contractor fails to submit a proposal, the Agency may determine the amount, if any, due the
Contractor as a result of the termination. The Agency will pay the Contractor the amount it determines
to be reasonable. If the Contractor disagrees with the amount determined by the Agency as being
reasonable, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Agency within 30 Days of receipt of payment. Any
amount due shall be as later determined by arbitration, if the Agency and the Contractor agree thereto, or
as fixed in a court of law.
6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. Failure of the Contractor to complete the Work within the time
allowed will result in damages being sustained by the Agency. Such damages are, and will continue to
be, impracticable and extremely difficult to determine. For each consecutive calendar day in excess of
the time specified for completion of the Work, as adjusted in accordance with 6-4, the Contractor shall
pay to the Agency, or have withheld from monies due it, the sum of $250, unless otherwise specified in
the Special Provisions.
Execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement by the Agency and Contractor that $250 per
Day is the minimum value of the costs and actual damage caused by the failure of the Contractor to
complete the Work within the allotted time. Such sum is liquidated damages and shall not be construed
as a penalty, and may be deducted from payments due the Contractor if such delay occurs.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 35

SECTION 7 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

7-1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES FOR UNIT PRICE WORK.

7-1.1 General. Unless otherwise specified, quantities of work shall be determined from
measurements or dimensions in horizontal planes. However, linear quantities of pipe, piling, fencing
and timber shall be considered as being the true length measured along longitudinal axis.
Unless otherwise specified, volumetric quantities shall be the product of the mean area of vertical or
horizontal sections and the intervening horizontal or vertical dimension.
7-1.2 Methods of Measurement. Materials and items of work which are to be paid for on basis of
measurement shall be measured in accordance with methods stipulated in the particular sections
involved.
7-1.3 Certified Weights. When payment is to be made on the basis of weight, the weighing shall be
done on certified platform scales or, when approved by the Engineer, on a completely automated
weighing and recording system. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with duplicate licensed
weighmaster’s certificates showing actual net weights. The Agency will accept the certificates as
evidence of weights delivered.
7-2 LUMP SUM WORK. Items for which quantities are indicated “Lump Sum”, “LS”, or “Job”,
shall be paid for at the price indicated in the Bid. Such payment shall be full compensation for the items
of work and all work appurtenant thereto.
When specified in the Special Provisions or requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer within 15 Days after award of Contract, a detailed schedule in triplicate, to be used only as
a basis for determining progress payments on a lump sum contract or designated lump sum Bid item.
This schedule shall equal the lump sum Contract Price or Bid item price and shall be in such form and
sufficiently detailed as to satisfy the Engineer that it correctly represents a reasonable apportionment of
the lump sum.
7-3 PAYMENT.
7-3.1 General. The unit and lump sum prices to be paid shall be full compensation for the items of
work and all appurtenant work, including furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools, and
incidentals.
Payment will not be made for materials wasted or disposed of in a manner not called for under the
Contract. This includes rejected material not unloaded from vehicles, material rejected after it has been
placed, and material placed outside of the Plan lines. No compensation will be allowed for disposing of
rejected or excess material.
Payment for work performed or materials furnished under an Assessment Act Contract will be made
as provided in the particular proceedings or legislative act under which such contract was awarded.
Whenever any portion of the Work is performed by the Agency at the Contractor’s request, the cost
thereof shall be charged against the Contractor, and may be deducted from any amount due or becoming
due from the Agency.
Whenever immediate action is required to prevent injury, death, or property damage, and precautions
which are the Contractor’s responsibility have not been taken and are not reasonably expected to be
taken, the Agency may, after reasonable attempt to notify the Contractor, cause such precautions to be
taken and shall charge the cost thereof against the Contractor, or may deduct such cost from any amount

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
36 Greenbook 2021

due or becoming due from the Agency. Agency action or inaction under such circumstances shall not be
construed as relieving the Contractor or its Surety from liability.
Payment shall not relieve the Contractor from its obligations under the Contract; nor shall such
payment be construed to be acceptance of any of the Work. Payment shall not be construed as the
transfer of ownership of any equipment or materials to the Agency. Responsibility of ownership shall
remain with the Contractor who shall be obligated to store any fully or partially completed work or
structure for which payment has been made; or replace any materials or equipment required to be
provided under the Contract which may be damaged, lost, stolen or otherwise degraded in any way prior
to completion of the Work, except as otherwise specified in 6-5.
Warranty periods shall not be affected by any payment.
If, within the time fixed by law, a properly executed notice to stop payment is filed with the Agency,
due to the Contractor’s failure to pay for labor or materials used in the Work, all money due for such
labor or materials will be withheld from payment to the Contractor in accordance with applicable laws.
At the expiration of 35 Days from the date of acceptance of the performance of the Contract by the
Board, or as prescribed by law, the amount deducted from the final estimate and retained by the Agency
will be paid to the Contractor except such amounts as are required by law to be withheld by properly
executed and filed notices to stop payment, or as may be authorized by the Contract to be further
retained.
7-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. The Engineer will, after award of the Contract, establish a
closure date for the purpose of making monthly progress payments. The Contractor may request in
writing that such monthly closure date be changed. The Engineer may approve such request when it is
compatible with the Agency’s payment procedure.
Each month, the Engineer will make an approximate measurement of the work performed to the
closure date and as a basis for making monthly progress payments, estimate its value based on Contract
Unit Prices or in accordance with 7-2. When the Work has been satisfactorily completed, the Engineer
will determine the quantity of work performed and prepare the final estimate.
From each progress payment, not less than 5 percent will be deducted and retained by the Agency.
The Agency will withhold not less than 5 percent of the total Contract amount until acceptance of the
performance of the Contract by the Board.
No progress payment made to the Contractor or its Sureties will constitute a waiver of the liquidated
damages specified in 6-9.
Pursuant to Section 22300 of the Public Contract Code, the Contractor may substitute securities for
any monies withheld by the Agency to ensure performance under the Contract.
7-3.3 Delivered Materials. When provided for in the Special Provisions, and subject to the
limitation and conditions therein, the cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated into
the Work will be included in the progress estimate.
7-3.4 Mobilization. When a Bid item is included in the Proposal for mobilization and subject to the
conditions and limitations in the Special Provisions, the costs of work in advance of construction
operations and not directly attributable to any specific Bid item will be included in the progress estimate.
When no such Bid item is provided, payment for such costs will be considered to be included in the
other items of work.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 37

7-3.5 Contract Unit Prices.

7-3.5.1 General. The quantities listed in the Proposal will not govern final payment. Payment to the
Contractor will be made only for actual quantities of Contract items constructed in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
If a change is ordered in an item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price, and such change does not
involve a substantial change in the character of the work from that shown on the Plans or specified in the
Specifications, then an adjustment in payment will be made. This adjustment will be based upon the
increase or decrease in quantity and the Contract Unit Price.
If the actual quantity of an item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price and constructed in
conformance with the Plans and Specifications varies from the Bid quantity by 25 percent or less,
payment will be made at the Contract Unit Price. If the actual quantity of said item of work varies from
the Bid quantity by more than 25 percent, payment will be made per 7-3.5.2 or 7-3.5.3 as appropriate.
If a change is ordered in an item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price, and such change does
involve a substantial change in the character of the work from that shown on the Plans or specified in the
Specifications, an adjustment in payment will be made per 7-3.7.
7-3.5.2 Increases of More Than 25 Percent. Should the actual quantity of an item of work
covered by a Contract Unit Price and constructed in conformance with the Plans and Specifications,
exceed the Bid quantity by more than 25 percent, payment for the quantity in excess of 125 percent of
the Bid quantity will be made on the basis of an adjustment in the Contract Unit Price mutually agreed to
by the Contractor and the Agency, or at the option of the Engineer, on the basis of Extra Work.
The Extra Work basis of payment shall not include fixed costs. Fixed costs shall be deemed to have been
recovered by the Contractor through payment for 125 percent of the Bid quantity at the Contract Unit Price.
7-3.5.3 Decreases of More Than 25 Percent. Should the actual quantity of an item of work covered by a
Contract Unit Price, and constructed in conformance with the Plans and Specifications, be less than 75 percent of
the Bid quantity, an adjustment in payment will not be made unless so requested in writing by the Contractor. If
the Contractor so requests, payment will be made on the basis of an adjustment in the Contract Unit Price
mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Agency, or at the option of the Engineer, on the basis of Extra
Work; however, in no case will payment be less than would be made for the actual quantity at the Contract Unit
Price nor more than would be made for 75 percent of the Bid quantity at the Contract Unit Price.
7-3.6 Stipulated Unit Prices. Stipulated Unit Prices may be used for the adjustment of Contract
changes when so specified in the Special Provisions.
7-3.7 Agreed Prices. If mutual agreement can not be reached, the Engineer may direct the
Contractor to proceed on the basis of Extra Work, except as otherwise specified in 7-3.5.2 or 7-3.5.3.
7-3.8 Eliminated Items. Should any Bid item be eliminated in its entirety, payment will be made to
the Contractor for its actual costs incurred in connection with the eliminated item prior to notification in
writing from the Engineer so stating its elimination.
If material conforming to the Plans and Specifications is ordered by the Contractor for use in the
eliminated item prior to the date of notification of elimination by the Engineer, and if the order for that
material can not be canceled, payment will be made to the Contractor for the actual cost of the material.
In this case, the material shall become the property of the Agency. Payment will be made to the
Contractor for its actual costs for any further handling. If the material is returnable, the material shall be
returned and payment will be made to the Contractor for the actual cost of charges made by the supplier
for returning the material and for handling by the Contractor.
Actual costs, as used herein, shall be computed on the basis of Extra Work.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
38 Greenbook 2021

7-4 PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK.

7-4.1 General. When the cost for Extra Work cannot be agreed upon, the Agency will pay for Extra
Work based on the accumulation of costs as provided herein.
7-4.2 Basis for Establishing Costs.
7-4.2.1 Labor. The cost of labor shall be the actual cost for wages of workers performing the Extra
Work at the time the Extra Work is done, plus employer payments of payroll taxes, workers
compensation insurance, liability insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds,
and other direct costs, resulting from Federal, State, or local laws, as well as assessments or benefits
required by lawful collective bargaining agreements.
The use of a labor classification which would increase the Extra Work cost will not be permitted
unless the Contractor establishes the necessity for such additional costs. Labor costs for equipment
operators and helpers shall be reported only when such costs are not included in the invoice for
equipment rental. The labor cost for foremen shall be proportioned to all of their assigned work and
only that applicable to the Extra Work will be paid.
Nondirect labor costs, including superintendence, shall be considered part of the markup specified in
7-4.3.
7-4.2.2 Materials. The cost of materials reported shall be at invoice or lowest current price at
which such materials are locally available and delivered to the Work site in the quantities involved, plus
sales tax, freight, and delivery.
The Agency reserves the right to approve materials and sources of supply, or to supply materials to
the Contractor if necessary for the progress of the Work. No markup shall be applied to any material
provided by the Agency.
7-4.2.3 Tool and Equipment Rental. No payment will be made for the use of tools which have a
replacement value of $200 or less.
Regardless of ownership, the rates to be used in determining equipment rental costs shall not exceed
listed rates prevailing locally at equipment rental agencies, or distributors, at the time the Extra Work is
performed.
The rental rates paid shall include the cost of fuel, oil, lubrication, supplies, small tools, necessary
attachments, repairs and maintenance of any kind, depreciation, storage, insurance, and all incidentals.
Necessary loading and transportation costs for equipment used on the Extra Work shall be included.
If equipment is used intermittently and, when not in use, could be returned to its rental source at less
expense to the Agency than holding it at the Work site, it shall be returned, unless the Contractor elects
to keep it at the Work site, at no expense to the Agency.
All equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer, in good working condition, and suitable for the
purpose for which it is to be used.
The reported rental time for equipment already at the Work site shall be the duration of its use on the
Extra Work. This time shall begin when the equipment is first used on the Extra Work, plus the time
required to move it from its previous site and back, or to a closer site.
7-4.2.4 Other Items. The Agency may authorize other items which may be required on the Extra
Work, including labor, services, material, and equipment. These items must be different in their nature
from those required for the Work, and be of a type not ordinarily available from the Contractor or
Subcontractors.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 39

7-4.2.5 Invoices. Vendors’ invoices for material, equipment rental and other expenditures shall be
submitted with the daily report per 7-4.4. If the daily report is not substantiated by invoices or other
documentation, the Agency may establish the cost of the item involved at the lowest price which was
current at the time of the report.
7-4.3 Markup.
7-4.3.1 Work by the Contractor. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, a
reasonable allowance for overhead and profit shall be added to the Contractor’s costs as determined in
accordance with 7-4.2 and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profit on Extra Work done by
the Contractor. The Contractor shall also be compensated as specified in the Special Provisions for the
actual increase in the Contractor’s bond premium caused by the Extra Work.
7-4.3.2 Work by a Subcontractor. When any of the Extra Work is performed by a Subcontractor, the
markup established in 7-4.3.1 shall be applied to the Subcontractor’s costs as determined in accordance with
7-4.2. Unless otherwise specified, a reasonable allowance for the Contractor’s overhead and profit shall be
added to the sum of the Subcontractor’s costs and markup and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and
profit for the Contractor on Extra Work done by the Subcontractor.
7-4.4 Daily Reports. When the cost for the Extra Work cannot be agreed upon, the Contractor shall
submit a daily report to the Engineer on forms approved by the Agency. Applicable delivery tickets, listing
all labor, materials, and equipment involved for that day, and other services and expenditures when
authorized shall be included. Failure to submit the daily report by the close of the next Working Day may
waive any rights for that day. An attempt shall be made to reconcile the report daily, and it shall be signed
by the Engineer and the Contractor. In the event of a disagreement, pertinent notes shall be entered by each
party to explain points which cannot be resolved immediately. Each party shall retain a signed copy of the
report. Reports by Subcontractors or others shall be submitted through the Contractor.
The report shall:
a) List the names of workers, classifications, and hours worked.
b) Describe and list quantities of materials used.
c) List the type of equipment, size, identification number, and hours of operation, including loading
and transportation, if applicable.
d) Describe other services and expenditures in such detail as the Agency may require.
7-5 PAYMENT FOR CHANGES REQUESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR. If such changes are
approved by the Engineer pursuant to 2-6, approval will only be made based upon a reduction in cost or
no additional cost to the Agency.

SECTION 8 - FACILITIES FOR AGENCY PERSONNEL

8-1 GENERAL. Facilities provided for Agency personnel shall be at locations approved by the
Engineer. Such facilities must be in a room, building, or trailer provided for this purpose with
acceptable means for locking.
A Class “A” Field Office conforming to 8-2.1 shall be provided at any offsite plant facility
furnishing pipe subject to Agency inspection during manufacture. A field laboratory conforming to 8-
3.1 shall be provided at any offsite or Work site plant facility furnishing Portland cement concrete or
asphalt concrete pavement. Any other facilities for Agency personnel shall be provided only when
required by the Contract Documents.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
40 Greenbook 2021

Offices and laboratories at plants may be used concurrently by inspection personnel of other agencies
provided such use does not seriously conflict with Agency use. When facilities are shared in this
manner, at least one locker provided with a hasp for a padlock must be available for the exclusive use of
the Agency. Otherwise any facilities furnished are for the exclusive use of the Agency.
Facilities shall conform to the applicable codes, ordinances, and regulations of the local jurisdiction
and of the State of California, and shall conform to current practice. The interior shall be paneled or
suitably lined to provide a facility of good appearance.
The Contractor shall provide janitorial and other maintenance services in all types of facilities
provided. Such services shall include the supply of the appropriate paper products and dispensers.
Trash receptacles shall be provided and emptied by the Contractor at weekly intervals or sooner as
required. The trash shall be removed from the Work site.
8-2 FIELD OFFICE FACILITIES.
8-2.1 Class “A” Field Office. The office shall have a minimum floor space of 175 square feet (16
m2), at least one door, and window area of not less than 22 square feet ( 2 m2). All doors and windows
shall be provided with screens.
Furniture shall be provided as follows: one plan table, one standard 5-foot (1.5 m) long double-
pedestal desk with a drawer suitable for holding files, 2 chairs, one drafting stool, and one plan rack.
Electric power shall be provided to include a minimum of 4 duplex convenience outlets. The office shall
be illuminated at the tables and desk. An outdoor lighting fixture with a 300W bulb shall be installed.
Heating and air conditioning of sufficient capacity shall be provided at no expense to the Agency.
The Contractor shall provide drinking water within the office and integral sanitary facilities directly
adjoining. Sanitary facilities shall include a toilet and wash basin with hot and cold running water.
Extended area, non-coin-operated telephone service shall be provided within the office area. The
installation shall include sufficient extension cord to serve the plan table and desk.
8-2.2 Class “B” Field Office. The office shall be the same as class “A” except that integrated
sanitary facilities and air conditioning are not required. A chemical toilet facility shall be provided
adjacent to the office.
8-2.3 Class “C” Field Office. The office shall have a minimum floor space of 120 square feet (11
m2) of floor area. It shall be equipped with one 3-foot x 5-foot (0.9 m x 1.5 m) table, 4 chairs and one
plan rack. It shall be adequately heated, ventilated, and lighted and 2 duplex convenience outlets shall
be provided. Air conditioning, telephones, and sanitary facilities are not required.
8-3 FIELD LABORATORIES.
8-3.1 Offsite at Manufacturing Plant. Field laboratories shall conform to the requirements for a
Class “C” Field Office specified in 8-2.3 except for the following:
a) Telephone service as specified in 8-2.1.
b) Chair.
c) Work table, 4 feet x 10 feet (1.2 m x 3 m), 3 feet (0.9 m).
d) Sieves per 203-6.
e) Scales and weights.
f) Burner plate for heating samples.
g) Thermometer, with 200 to 400°F (90 to 260°C) degree range (asphalt concrete plants only).
h) Air meter for concrete in accordance with ASTM C231 of the type that indicates the percentage
of air directly (precast concrete plants only).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 41

Sampling and testing equipment shall be maintained in satisfactory operating condition by the
Contractor or the plant owner. Laboratories shall be located immediately adjacent to and with full view
of batching and loading operations.
8-3.2 At the Work Site. Field laboratories shall conform to 8-3.1, except that sieves, scales,
weights, burner plates, sampling devices, pans, and thermometers will be furnished by the Agency at no
expense to the Contractor. If air entraining admixtures are being used in the concrete on the Work, an
air meter of the type specified in 8-3.1 shall be furnished by the Contractor.
8-4 BATHHOUSE FACILITIES. When the Special Provisions require bathhouse facilities, the
following shall be provided:
a) One lavatory with hot and cold water.
b) One toilet in a stall.
c) One 3-foot (1 m) trough-type urinal.
d) One enclosed shower at least 3 feet x 3 feet (1 m x 1 m) with hot and cold water.
e) One bench, 6 feet (2 m) long.
f) Soap dispensers.
g) Toilet paper holders.
h) Paper towel cabinet.
i) Wastepaper receptacle.
These facilities shall be serviced and provided with necessary sanitary supplies.
These facilities shall be for the exclusive use of Agency personnel. However, a separate building
need not be provided for this purpose if such facilities are located in a separate room in a building which
includes other facilities.
8-5 REMOVAL OF FACILITIES. Field offices, laboratories, and bathhouse facilities at the
Work site shall be removed upon completion of the Work. Buildings and equipment furnished by the
Contractor at the Work site under the provisions of this subsection shall remain the property of the
Contractor.
8-6 BASIS OF PAYMENT. Payment for furnishing, maintaining, servicing, and removing field
offices laboratories, or bathhouse facilities required at the Work site shall be included in the Bid item for
furnishing such facilities. If no Bid item is provided in the Proposal, payment shall be considered as
included in other Bid items. Such costs incurred in connection with offices and laboratories at plants
shall be borne by the plant owners.
The first progress payment will not be approved until all facilities are in place and fully comply with
the Specifications.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
42 Greenbook 2021

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 43

PART 2
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
SECTION 200 - ROCK MATERIALS

200-1 ROCK PRODUCTS.

200-1.1 General. Rock products shall be defined as crushed rock, rock dust, gravel, sand, stone for
riprap, or any combination thereof. Rock products shall be clean, hard, sound, durable, uniform in
quality, and free of any detrimental quantity of soft, friable, thin, elongated or laminated pieces,
disintegrated material, organic matter, oil, alkali, or other deleterious substance.
200-1.1.1 Testing. Sieve analysis shall be performed in accordance with California Test 202. Sand
equivalent tests shall be performed in accordance with California Test 217. Unless otherwise specified,
percentages shall be determined by weight.
200-1.1.2 Statistical Testing. Statistical testing shall conform to the following:
Whenever both individual test results and moving average requirements are specified, materials shall
meet both requirements.
Individual samples tested prior to the first use of materials from each source, or prior to the first use
of materials after any changes have been made in material processing procedures, shall conform to the
limits specified for moving average.
Moving average shall be computed in accordance with 211-5.
200-1.2 Crushed Rock and Rock Dust.
200-1.2.1 General. Crushed rock and rock dust shall be the product of crushing rock or gravel. A
minimum of 50 percent of the particles retained on the 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) sieve shall have 3 or more
fractured faces. A maximum of 5 percent of the retained particles shall have no fractured faces. Of that
portion which passes the 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) sieve but is retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve, not more
than 10 percent shall be gravel particles.
Crushed rock and rock dust shall be specified by nominal size (e.g. “3/4”) and shall conform to the
gradation requirements shown in Table 200-1.2.1 (A).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
44 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 200-1.2.1 (A)

Percentage Passing Sieves
Sieve Size 1" (25.0 mm) 3/4" (19.0 mm) 1/2" (12.5 mm)
1-1/2" (37.5 mm) 100 - -
1" (25.0 mm) 90-100 100 -
3/4" (19.0 mm) 30-60 90-100 100
1/2" (12.5 mm) 0-20 30-60 90-100
3/8" (9.5 mm) - 0-20 20-60
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 0-5 0-5 0-15
No. 8 (2.36 mm) - - 0-5
ASTM C131 Test Grading A B B
Percentage Passing Sieves
Sieve Size 3/8" (9.5 mm) 1/4" (6.3 mm) 3/16" (4.75 mm) Rock Dust
1/2" (12.5 mm) 100 - - -
3/8" (9.5 mm) 90-100 - - 100
1/4" (6.3 mm) - 100 - -
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 30-60 75-100 100 90-100
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 0-10 0-25 40-75 -
No. 16 (1.18 mm) - 0-5 0-10 -
No. 30 (600 µm) - - - 20-60
No. 200 (75 µm) - 0-2 0-2 5-20
ASTM C131 Test Grading C D D -

Crushed rock shall conform to the rock quality requirements shown in Table 200-1.2.1 (B).
TABLE 200-1.2.1 (B)
Test Test Method No. Requirements in percent
Percentage Wear ASTM C131
100 Revolutions 15 Maximum
500 Revolutions 52 Maximum

200-1.2.2 Screenings.
200-[Link] General. Screenings shall be composed of crushed rock conforming to 200-1.2.1,
except the rock quality shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 200-[Link]. Screenings will
be specified by the nominal size, e.g. “Medium Fine.”

TABLE 200-[Link]
Tests Test Method No. Requirements
Percentage Wear (100 revolutions) ASTM C131 12 Maximum
Percentage Wear (500 revolutions) ASTM C131 35 Maximum
Film Stripping (%) California 302 25 Maximum
Cleanness Value California 227 80 Minimum
California Durability California 229 52 Minimum

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 45

200-[Link] Screenings for Polymer Modified Emulsified Asphalt Chip Seal Applications.
Screenings for use as cover aggregate over polymer modified emulsified asphalt shall conform to the
gradation requirements shown in Table 200-[Link].

TABLE 200-[Link]
Percentage Passing Sieve
Sieve Size Coarse Medium Medium Fine Fine
1/2" x No. 4 3/8" x No. 6 5/16" x No. 8 1/4" x No. 10
(12.5 x 4.75 mm) (9.5 x 3.35 mm) (8.0 x 2.36 mm) (6.3 x 2.00 mm)
3/4" (19.0 mm) 100 - - -
1/2" (12.5 mm) 85 -100 100 - -
3/8" (9.5 mm) 0-30 85-100 100 100
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 0- 5 0-15 0-50 60-85
No. 8 (2.36 mm) - 0- 5 0-15 0-25
No. 16 (1.18 mm) - - 0-5 0-5
No. 30 (600 µm) - - 0-3 0-3
No. 200 (75 µm) 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2

200-[Link] Pre-Coated, Pre-Heated Screenings for Asphalt Rubber and Aggregate Membrane
(ARAM) Applications. Screenings for use as cover aggregate over asphalt rubber binder shall conform
to the grading requirements shown in Table 200-[Link].

TABLE 200-[Link]
Percentage Passing Sieve
Sieve Size Medium Maximum Medium
1/2" (12.5 mm) 3/8" (9.5 mm)
3/4" (19.0 mm) 100 100
1/2" (12.5 mm) 85 – 90 95 – 100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 0 – 30 70 – 85
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 0-5 0 - 15
No. 8 (2.36 mm) – 0–5
No. 200 (75 µm) 0–1 0–1

Screenings shall be:

a) “Medium” unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans;
b) preheated to between 260°F (127°C) to 325°F (163°C); and
c) coated with 0.70 percent to 1 percent PG 64-10 paving asphalt conforming to 203-1 at a central
mixing plant. The exact percentage of paving asphalt shall be recommended by the Contractor
and approved by the Engineer.
200-1.3 Gravel. Gravel shall be composed entirely of particles that have no more than one
fractured face.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
46 Greenbook 2021

200-1.4 Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete. Concrete aggregate shall be composed
of gravel, crushed rock, or a blended mixture. Concrete aggregate shall be washed before delivery to the
batching plant and shall conform to the following:

TABLE 200-1.4 (A)

Tests Tests Method No. Requirements
Cleanness Value California 227 75 Minimum
Percentage Wear ASTM C131
100 revolutions 15 Maximum
500 revolutions 52 Maximum
Specific Gravity (Bulk saturated surface dry) ASTM C127 2.58 Minimum¹
1. Not more than 15 percent by weight shall be particles with a bulk specific gravity below 2.50.
2. Moving Average calculated in accordance with 211-5; no individual test result used shall be less than 71.

Concrete aggregate will be designated by number and shall conform to the following gradations:

TABLE 200-1.4 (B)

Percentage Passing Sieve
Sieve Size
No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
2" (50 mm) 100 - -
1-1/2" (37.5 mm) 90-100 100 -
1" (25.0 mm) 5-40 90-100 -
3/4" (19.0 mm) 0-15 55-85 100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 0-5 8-20 85-100
No. 4 (4.75 mm) - 0-5 0-30
No. 8 (2.36 mm) - 0-5 0-10
No. 200 (75 µm) 0-2 0-2 0-2
ASTM C131 Test Grading A B C

200-1.5 Sand.
200-1.5.1 General. Sand shall consist of natural or manufactured granular material, or a
combination thereof, free of deleterious amounts of organic material, mica, loam, clay, and other
substances not suitable for the purpose intended.
200-1.5.2 Sand for Asphalt Concrete. The sand shall conform to the gradation specified for
asphalt concrete in 200-1.5.5.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 47

200-1.5.3 Sand for Portland Cement Concrete. Sand for Portland cement concrete shall be
washed and shall conform to the gradation specified for Portland cement concrete in 200-1.5.5 and the
following quality requirements:

TABLE 200-1.5.3
Tests Test Method No. Requirements
1
Organic Impurities ASTM C40 Satisfactory

Sand Equivalent California 217 75 Minimum

3
Moving Average 75 Minimum
2
Soundness (%) California 214 10 Maximum
1. The resultant color of the testing solution shall not be darker than the ASTM C40 standard.
2. The soundness requirement will be waived, provided that the durability index, Df, is 60 or greater, when determined by California Test 229.
3. Moving Average calculated in accordance with 211-5; no individual test result used shall be less than 70.

200-1.5.4 Sand For Air-Placed Concrete. Sand for air-placed concrete shall be washed and
conform to the gradation for Portland cement concrete in 200-1.5.5. The amount of deleterious
substances shall not exceed the limits prescribed in ASTM C33.
200-1.5.5 Sand Gradations. Sand shall conform to the following gradations:

TABLE 200-1.5.5
Percentage Passing Sieve
Sieve Size
Asphalt Concrete Portland Cement Concrete Mortar
3/8" (9.5 mm) 100 100 -
No. 4 (4.75 mm) - 95-100 100
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 75-100 75-90 95-100
No. 16 (1.18 mm) - 55-75 70-95
No. 30 (600 µm) - 30-50 35-70
No.50 (300 µm) - 10-25 5-35
No. 100 (150 µm) - 2-10 0-10
1
No. 200 (75 µm) 0-8 0-5 0-5
1. May be exceeded to permit a maximum of 12 percent, provided the sand equivalent of the asphalt concrete sand is 35 or greater.

200-1.6 Rock for Slope and Erosion Protection (Riprap).

200-1.6.1 General. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of the intended source of
rock at least 60 Days prior to use. Rock for slope and erosion protection shall be placed in accordance
with 300-11.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
48 Greenbook 2021

200-1.6.2 Grading Requirements. Rock for slope and erosion protection shall be specified by
class and conform to the following dimension grading requirements:

TABLE 200-1.6.2
Nominal Class by Dimension Grading Requirements
Median Particle
1 Nominal Median 2 2 2
Diameter d15 d50 d100
Particle Weight
3,4 inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm)
W50
Diameter pounds (kg)
Class Min Max Min Max Max
inches (mm)
I 6 (150) 20 (9) 3.7 (94) 5.2 (132) 5.7 (145) 6.9 (175) 12.0 (300)

II 9 (225) 60 (27) 5.5 (140) 7.8 (198) 8.5 (216) 10.5 (267) 18.0 (450)

III 12 (300) 150 (68) 7.3 (185) 10.5 (267) 11.5 (292) 14.0 (356) 24.0 (600)

IV 15 (375) 300 (135) 9.2 (234) 13.0 (330) 14.5 (368) 17.5 (445) 30.0 (750)

V 18 (450) 500 (225) 11.0 (279) 15.5 (394) 17.0 (432) 20.5 (521) 36.0 (900)

VI 21 (525) 750 (340) 13.0 (330) 18.5 (470) 20.0 (508) 24.0 (610) 42.0 (1,050)

VII 24 (600) 1,000 (450) 14.5 (368) 21.0 (533) 23.0 (584) 27.5 (699) 48.0 (1,200)

VIII 30 (750) 2,000 (900) 18.5 (470) 26.0 (660) 28.5 (724) 34.5 (876) 48.0 (1,200)

IX 36 (900) 4,000 (1,800) 22.0 (559) 31.5 (800) 34.0 (864) 41.5 (1,054) 52.8 (1,320)

X 42 (1,050) 6,000 (2,700) 25.5 (648) 36.5 (927) 40.0 (1,016) 48.5 (1,232) 60.5 (1,512)

XI 46 (1,150) 8,000 (3,600) 28.0 (711) 39.4 (1,000) 43.7 (1,110) 53.1 (1,350) 66.6 (1,665)
1) Intermediate or B dimension (i.e., width) where A dimension is length and C dimension is thickness.
2) d%, where % denotes the percentage of the total weight of the graded material.
3) Values shown are based on the minimum and maximum particle diameters shown and an average specific gravity of 2.65. Weight
will vary based on specific gravity of rock available.
4) W%, where % denotes the percentage of the total weight of the graded material.

200-1.6.3 Quality Requirements. Flat or elongated shapes will not be accepted. A flat rock is
defined as having a width at least 3 times greater than its thickness. An elongated rock is defined as
having a length at least 3 times greater than its width. Rock shall be clean and free from deleterious
impurities, including alkali, earth, clay, refuse, and adherent coatings.
Rock for slope and erosion protection shall conform to the following requirements:

TABLE 200-1.6.3
Tests Test Method No. Requirements
Apparent Specific Gravity California 206 2.50 Minimum
1
Absorption California 206 4.20 Maximum
1
Durability Index California 229 52 Minimum
Abrasion (500 revolutions) California 211 45 Maximum
1. Based on the formula below, absorption may exceed 4.2 percent if the Durability Absorption Ratio (DAR) is greater than 10. Durability
Index may be less than 52 if DAR is greater than 24. DAR = Coarse Durability Index
% Absorption + 1

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 49

The structural integrity of each individual rock shall be such that it passes a "drop test" when
requested by the Engineer. The drop test shall consist of dropping a single rock once from a height of
half the average diameter of the rock onto a rigid concrete surface, or onto a half-buried rock of
comparable size, in the presence of the Engineer. Prior to testing, the rock shall be measured and have all
cracks examined, marked, and measured. Immediately after the drop, the rock will be examined. A rock
will pass the drop test provided the following criteria are met:
a) new cracks have not developed,
b) existing cracks have not widened, and
c) the greatest dimension decreases in size by less than 5 percent.
200-1.7 Aggregate for Slurry Seal Surfacing.
200-1.7.1 General. Aggregate, excluding mineral filler, shall be 100 percent crushed rock
conforming to 200-1.1, 200-1.2, and the requirements shown in Table 200-1.7.1.

TABLE 200-1.7.1
Tests ASTM Test Method Requirements
1
Percentage Wear at 500 Revolutions C131 40% Maximum
Sand Equivalent D2419 55 Minimum
1
Soundness (5 Cycles) C88 15% Maximum
1. To be run on the material retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve graded from the source.

200-1.7.2 Grading. The combined aggregate gradation shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM C136 and conform to the requirements shown in Table 200-1.7.2.

TABLE 200-1.7.2
Percentage Passing Sieves
Type Fine Type I Type II Type III
Sieve Size Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 100 --- 100 --- 100 --- 100 ---
No. 4 (4.74 mm) 100 --- 100 --- 90 100 70 90
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 95 100 90 100 65 90 45 70
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 75 92 65 90 45 70 28 50
No. 30 (600 µm) 50 75 40 60 30 50 19 34
No. 50 (300 µm) 35 50 25 42 18 36 12 25
No. 100 (150 µm) 15 30 15 30 10 24 7 18
No. 200 (75 µm) 10 20 10 20 5 15 5 15

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
50 Greenbook 2021

200-1.8 Aggregate for Microsurfacing.

200-1.8.1 General. Aggregate, excluding mineral filler, shall be 100 percent crushed rock
conforming to 200-1.1, 200-1.2, and the requirements shown in Table 200-1.8.1.

TABLE 200-1.8.1
Test ASTM Test Method Requirement
1
Sand Equivalent D2419 65 Minimum
Percentage Wear at 500 Revolutions2 C131 35% Maximum
1. 60 if specified or approved by the Engineer.
2. To be run on material retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve graded from the source.

200-1.8.2 Grading. The combined aggregate gradation shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM C136 and conform to the requirements shown in Table 200-1.7.2 for Type II and Type III.
200-2 UNTREATED BASE MATERIALS.
200-2.1 General. Materials for use as untreated base or subbase shall be classified in the order of
quality classification (from highest to lowest) as follows:
a) Crushed Aggregate Base
b) Crushed Miscellaneous Base
c) Pulverized Miscellaneous Base
d) Processed Miscellaneous Base
e) Select Subbase
When base material without further qualification is specified, the Contractor shall supply crushed
aggregate base. When a particular classification of base material is specified, the Contractor may
substitute any higher classification, following the order of preference listed above, of base material for
that specified. All processing or blending of materials to meet the grading requirement will be
performed at the plant or source. The materials shall compact to a hard, firm, unyielding surface and
shall remain stable when saturated with water.
200-2.2 Crushed Aggregate Base.
200-2.2.1 General. Crushed aggregate base shall consist entirely of crushed rock and rock dust
conforming to the requirements of 200-1.1 and 200-1.2.
200-2.2.2 Grading. The aggregate shall be uniformly graded and shall conform to the
following gradation:

TABLE 200-2.2.2
Sieve Percentage Passing Sieve
1-1/2" (37.5 mm) 100
3/4" (19.0 mm) 90-100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 50-80
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 35-55
No. 30 (600 µm) 10-30
No. 200 (75 µm) 2-9
ASTM C131 Test Grading B

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 51

200-2.2.3 Quality Requirements. The material shall conform to the following:

TABLE 200-2.2.3
Tests Test Method No. Requirements
1
R-value California 301 80 Minimum
Sand Equivalent California 217 50 Minimum
Percentage Wear ASTM C131
100 revolutions 15 Maximum
500 revolutions 52 Maximum
2
Specific Gravity (Bulk saturated surface dry) ASTM C127 2.58 Minimum
1. The R-value requirement will be waived, provided the material has an SE of 55 or more.
2. Not more than 15 percent by weight shall be particles with a bulk specific gravity below 2.50.

The Engineer may waive percentage wear and specific gravity requirements, provided that the
material has a minimum durability of 40 in accordance with California Test 229.
200-2.3 NOT USED.
200-2.4 Crushed Miscellaneous Base.
200-2.4.1 General. Crushed miscellaneous base shall consist of broken and crushed asphalt
concrete or Portland cement concrete and may contain crushed aggregate base or other rock materials.
The material shall be free of any detrimental quantity of deleterious material as defined in 200-1.1.
The material retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve shall contain no more than 15 percent gravel
particles as defined in 200-1.3. The material may contain no more than 3 percent brick by weight as
determined by California Test 202 modified as follows: Brick material retained on a No. 4 (4.75 mm)
sieve shall be identified visually and separated manually. Brick quantification shall be based on total
weight of dry sample.
200-2.4.2 Grading. The material shall be uniformly graded and shall conform to one of the
following gradations:
TABLE 200-2.4.2
Percentage Passing Sieve
Sieve Size
Coarse Fine
2" (50.0 mm) 100
1-1/2" (37.5 mm) 85-100 100
3/4" (19.0 mm) 50-85 85-100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 55-75
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 25-45 35-60
No. 30 (600 µm) 10-25 10-30
No. 200 (75 µm) 2-9 2-9
ASTM C131 Test Grading A B

When there is a difference in specific gravity (bulk saturated surface dry per ASTM C127) of 0.2 or
more between that portion retained and that portion passing a No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve, the grading will be
modified by California Test 105.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
52 Greenbook 2021

200-2.4.3 Quality Requirements. The material shall conform to the following:

TABLE 200-2.4.3
Tests Test Method No. Requirements
1
R-value California 301 78 Minimum
Sand Equivalent California 217 35 Minimum
Percentage Wear ASTM C131
100 revolutions 15 Maximum
500 revolutions 52 Maximum
1. The R-value requirement may be waived, provided the material has an SE of 40 or more.

The Engineer may waive the percentage wear requirements, provided the material has a minimum
durability of 40 in accordance with California Test 229.
200-2.5 Processed Miscellaneous Base.
200-2.5.1 General. Processed miscellaneous base shall consist of broken or crushed asphalt
concrete, Portland cement concrete, railroad ballast, glass, crushed porcelain material, crushed rock, rock
dust, or natural material. The material retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve shall contain no more than
75 percent gravel particles as defined in 200-1.3. The material shall be free of any detrimental quantity
of deleterious material as defined in 200-1.1. The material may contain no more than 3 percent brick by
weight as determined by California Test 202 modified as follows: Brick material retained on a No. 4
(4.75 mm) sieve shall be identified visually and separated manually. Brick quantification shall be based
on total weight of dry sample.
200-2.5.2 Grading. The material shall be uniformly graded and shall conform to 200-2.4.2.
200-2.5.3 Quality Requirements. The material shall conform to the following in Table 200-2.4.3:
The Engineer may waive the percentage wear requirements, provided the material has a minimum
durability of 35 in accordance with California Test 229.
200-2.6 Select Subbase
200-2.6.1 General. Select subbase shall consist of soil, mineral aggregates, asphalt concrete,
Portland cement concrete, or blends of these.
200-2.6.2 Grading. The material shall be uniformly graded and shall conform to one of the
following gradations:
TABLE 200-2.6.2
Percentage Passing Sieve
Sieve Size
Coarse Fine
1-1/2" (37.5 mm) 100 -
1" (25.0 mm) - 100
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 55-75 70-100
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 30-75 40-90
No.50 (300 µm) 15-40 20-60
No. 200 (75 µm) 0-25 0-30

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 53

200-2.6.3 Quality Requirements. The material shall also conform to the following requirements:

TABLE 200-2.6.3
Tests Test Method No. Requirements
1
R-value California 301 60 Minimum
Sand Equivalent California 217 20 Minimum
1. The R-value requirement may be waived, provided the material has an SE of 30 or more.

200-2.7 Disintegrated Granite.

200-2.7.1 General. Disintegrated granite shall be free from vegetable matter and other deleterious
substances and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily under water and rolling to form a
firm, stable base.
Disintegrated granite shall be any igneous rock, which has been weathered in place, or any
sedimentary material principally derived from igneous rock.
200-2.7.2 Grading. The percentage composition by weight shall conform to Table 200-2.7.2.

TABLE 200-2.7.2
Sieve Size Percent Passing
1-1/2 in (37.5 mm) 100
1 in (25.0 mm) 90-100
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 50-100
No. 30 (600 µm) 25-55
No. 200 (75 µm) 5-18

200-2.7.3 Quality Requirements. Disintegrated granite shall also conform to Table 200-2.7.3.

TABLE 200-2.7.3
Test Test Method No. Requirements
R-value California 301 73 Minimum
Sand Equivalent California 217 30 Minimum

200-2.8 Pulverized Miscellaneous Base.

200-2.8.1 General. Pulverized miscellaneous base shall consist of asphalt concrete or Portland
cement concrete pavement that has been pulverized in place to the dimensions shown on the Plans.
Pulverized miscellaneous base may contain underlying base material or subgrade soil. The material shall
be free of any detrimental quantity of deleterious material as specified in 200-1.1.
Pulverized miscellaneous base, if produced in place, shall only be produced through the operation of
a machine specifically designed for pulverizing, stabilizing and blending of this material. Pulverized
miscellaneous base shall not be produced by the operation of self-propelled drop hammers (“stompers”),
breakers, steel padded rollers, or by ripping or excavation equipment.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
54 Greenbook 2021

200-2.8.2 Testing. The Agency will collect samples of the pulverized material in accordance with
California Test 125. The Agency will perform a minimum of one gradation and one sand equivalent test
per 500 cubic yards of material pulverized. The Contractor shall allow the Agency a minimum of 48
hours to complete each test and inform the Contractor of the results.
200-2.8.3 Grading. The material shall be uniformly graded and shall conform to Table 200-2.8.3:

TABLE 200-2.8.3
Sieve Size Percentage Passing Sieves
2" (50 mm) 100
1" (25 mm) -
3/4" (19 mm) 85-100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 55-80
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 35-60
No. 30 (600 µm) 10-30
No. 200 (75 µm) 2-9
ASTM C131 Grading B

If, after testing by the Agency, the pulverized material does not conform to the gradation specified in
Table 200-2.8.3, a maximum of 35 percent rock products conforming to 200-1 may be blended into the
pulverized material to correct the gradation. The Contractor shall determine the amount of rock products
to be blended. The rock products shall be uniformly spread and blended over the area requiring
correction of the gradation. The equipment used for blending shall conform to 200-2.8.1. The Agency
will retest the corrected area in accordance with 200-2.8.2.
When there is a difference in specific gravity (bulk saturated surface dry conforming to ASTM
C127) of 0.2 or more between that portion retained and that portion passing a No. 4 sieve, a modified
grading will be required. The grading will be modified in accordance with California Test 105. The
Agency will provide the Contractor with the modified grading required.
200-2.8.4 Quality Requirements. This material shall conform to the following:

TABLE 200-2.8.4
Tests Test Method No. Requirements
Sand Equivalent California 217 40 Minimum
Percentage Wear ASTM C131
1
100 Rev 15 Maximum
1
500 Rev 52 Maximum
2
R-Value California 301 78 Minimum
1. The Engineer may waive the percentage wear requirements, provided the material has a minimum durability of 40 in accordance with
California Test 229.
2. The R-Value may be waived if the SE is 45 or greater.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 55

200-3 PERMEABLE MATERIAL.

200-3.1 General. Permeable material shall consist entirely of rock products conforming to 200-1.1.
Permeable material shall be specified by Class.
200-3.2 Class 1 Permeable Material. Class 1 permeable material shall:
a) have a minimum durability of 40 when tested in accordance with California Test 229,
b) be specified by Type, and
c) conform to the gradation requirements shown in Table 200-3.2 when sampled prior to
compaction.

TABLE 200-3.2
Sieve Size Percent Passing Sieve
Type A Type B
2" (50.0 mm) - 100
1-1/2" (37.5 mm) - 95-100
1" (25.0 mm) - -
3/4" (19.0 mm) 100 50-100
1/2" (12.5 mm) 95-100 -
3/8" (9.5 mm) 70-100 15-55
No.4 (4.75 mm) 0-55 0-25
No.8 (2.36 mm) 0-10 0-5
No.200 (75 µm) 0-3 0-3

200-3.3 Class 2 Permeable Material. Class 2 permeable material shall conform to the quality
requirements shown in Table 200-3.3 (A) and the gradation requirements shown in Table 200-3.3 (B)
when sampled prior to compaction.

TABLE 200-3.3 (A)

Tests Test Method No. Requirements
Sand Equivalent California 217 70 Minimum
Durability Index California 229 40 Minimum
Percentage Wear, 100 revolutions ASTM C131 15 Maximum
500 revolutions 52 Maximum

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
56 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 200-3.3 (B)

Sieve Size Percent Passing Sieve
1" (25.0 mm) 100
3/4" (19.0 mm) 90-100
1/2" (12.5 mm) -
3/8" (9.5 mm) 40-100
No.4 (4.75 mm) 25-40
No.8 (2.36 mm) 15-35
No.16 (1.18 mm) -
No.30 (600 µm) 5-20
No.50 (300 µm) 0-10
No.100 (150 µm) -
No.200 (75 µm) 0-3

200-4 LEAN CONCRETE BASE (LCB).

200-4.1 General. LCB shall consist of a mixture of:
a) cement,
b) aggregate,
c) water, and
d) at the option of the Contractor, water reducing and/or air-entraining admixtures.
The proportions of cement, water and other materials shall be determined by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit a mix design with laboratory results in accordance with 3-8.4. The mix
design shall show the amount and type of cement, and the amount of water, the aggregate grading and
source, and the type and manufacturer of any proposed admixtures.
The amount of cement shall not to exceed 300 pounds per cubic yard (178 kg/m3). The compressive
strength, when tested in accordance with California Test 548, shall be a minimum of 700 pounds per
square inch (4.8 MPa) at 7 Days.
200-4.2 Materials.
200-4.2.1 Cement. Cement shall be Type II/V Portland cement conforming to 201-1.2.1, added at a
rate of 270 pounds per cubic yard (160 kg/m3). SCMs shall not be substituted for Portland cement.
200-4.2.2 Aggregate.
200-[Link] General. Aggregate shall conform to 200-2. Should the Contractor change the source
or grading, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, of the new source or grading. The
Contractor shall make the aggregate available for sampling and testing at least 45 Days prior to its
intended use.
The 1-1/2 inch (37.5 mm) maximum or the 1 inch (25 mm) maximum may be used. Once a grading
is selected, the grading shall not be changed without the Engineer's written approval.
200-[Link] Combined Aggregate Gradation. The combined aggregate gradation for the grading
selected shall conform to Table 200-[Link]. The percentage retained shall be determined by California
Test 202, modified by California Test 105 when there is a difference in specific gravity of 0.2 or more
between the coarse and fine aggregate.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 57

TABLE 200-[Link]
1
Percent Passing
Sieve 1-1/2" (37.5 mm) 1" (25.0 mm)
Sizes Maximum Maximum
Moving Individual Moving Individual
2 2
Average Test Results Average Test Results
2” (50.0 mm) 100 100 --- ---
1 ½” (37.5 mm) 90 – 100 87 – 100 100 100
1" (25.0 mm) — — 90 – 100 87 – 100
3/4" (19.0 mm) 50 – 85 45 – 90 50 – 100 45 – 100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 40 – 75 35 – 80 40 – 75 35 – 80
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 25 – 60 20 – 65 35 – 60 30 – 65
No. 30 10 – 30 6 – 34 10 – 30 6 – 34
No. 200 0 – 12 0 – 15 0 – 12 0 – 15
1. Coarse aggregate is material retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve and fine aggregate is material passing the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve.
2. Statistical testing shall conform to 200-1.1.

200-[Link] Sand Equivalent. Aggregate shall not be treated with lime, cement or other chemicals
before being tested. Aggregate shall have a sand equivalent value of not less than that shown in Table
200-[Link].

TABLE 200-[Link]
1
Moving Average 30
Individual Test Results 27
1. Statistical testing shall conform to 200-1.1.

The 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) maximum or the 1 inch (25 mm) maximum may be used. Once a grading is
selected, the grading shall not be changed without the Engineer's written approval.
If the test results of the tests for either or both aggregate grading and sand equivalent tests do not meet the
requirements specified for the “moving average” but meet the “individual test” requirements, placement of the
LCB may be continued for the remainder of the working day. Work shall not resume until tests indicate that
the aggregate to be used complies with the requirements specified for the “moving average.”
No single aggregate grading or sand equivalent test shall represent more than 500 cubic yards (400
3
m ) or one day of production, whichever is smaller.
200-4.2.3 Water. Water shall conform to 201-1.2.3.
200-4.2.4 Chemical Admixtures. Chemical admixtures shall conform to 201-1.2.4. Water
reducing admixtures shall be Type A or Type F.
The air content of LCB shall not exceed 4 percent. An air-entrainment reducing admixture shall be
used when aggregate is produced from reclaimed material containing asphalt concrete or other material
which would cause the air content to exceed 4 percent.
200-4.3 Proportioning, Mixing and Transporting. Proportioning shall conform to 201-1.3, except that
the dividing of aggregate into sizes will not be required and the slump shall not exceed 3 inches (75 mm).
Mixing and transporting shall conform to 201-1.4 and 201-1.5.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
58 Greenbook 2021

SECTION 201 - CONCRETE, MORTAR, AND RELATED MATERIALS

201-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE.

201-1.1 Requirements.
201-1.1.1 General. Concrete shall consist of cement, concrete aggregates, water, and when specified or
approved for use, chemical admixtures, and/or SCMs, fibers, color, and/or reclaimed concrete material. Concrete
shall be specified by class, alternate class, special exposure, or compressive strength.
Concrete specified by compressive strength shall be designed by the Contractor in accordance with 201-
1.1.4.
Chemical admixtures shall be used in accordance with 201-1.2.4 and at the manufacturer’s specified
dosage rate. Additional cement or SCMs may be used to obtain high early strength in concrete, except
that the total amount of cement shall not exceed 700 pounds per cubic yard (415 kg/m3) unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
Colored concrete shall conform to 303-7.
Fiber reinforcement shall conform to 201-2.3 and be added at the rate specified in the Special Provisions.
Reclaimed concrete material conforming to 201-1.2.6 may be incorporated into concrete mixtures
when so specified in the Special Provisions or approved by the Engineer.
When concrete is specified by class, alternate class, or special exposure, a mix design shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval in accordance with 3-8.4. The mix design shall specify the
proportions of aggregate, water, and when applicable, SCMs, chemical admixtures, and reclaimed concrete
material. The mix design shall also include the gradation and source of aggregate, the type and source of
cement and SCMs, the brand and designation of chemical admixtures, and slump requirement. If fiber
reinforcement is to be added, the fiber type, fiber manufacturer, and rate of addition shall be included with
the mix design. If so specified in the Special Provisions, the color manufacturer, amount of color, and the
type of construction for which the concrete is to be used shall also be included with the mix design.
201-1.1.2 Concrete Specified by Class and Alternate Class. When the specified by class,
concrete will be designated by a number, one or two letters, and a number. The first number is the
weight of Portland cement conforming to 201-1.2.1 in pounds per cubic yard (kg/m3), the first letter is
the combined aggregate gradation conforming to 201-1.3.2 and the second letter (W) designates the
required use of a water reducing admixture conforming to 201-1.2.4. The last number is the minimum
compressive strength at 28 Days in pounds per square inch (MPa). A water reducing admixture
conforming to 201-1.2.4 may be used in any concrete specified by class and is required in all 4000 psi
(28 MPa) compressive strength concrete specified by class.
When specified by alternate class, concrete will be designated by a number, three letters, and a
number. The first number is the weight of cementitious material in pounds per cubic yard (kg/m3) which
consists of 85 percent Portland cement conforming to 201-1.2.1 and 15 percent SCMs by weight. The
first letter is the combined aggregate gradation, conforming to 201-1.3.2, the second letter (F) designates
the required use of SCMs conforming to 201-1.2.5, the third letter (W) designates the required use of a
water reducing admixture conforming to 201-1.2.4. The last number is the minimum compressive
strength at 28 Days in pounds per square inch (MPa).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 59

The concrete class, alternate class, and maximum slump for the various types of construction shall be
as shown in Table 201-1.1.2.
TABLE 201-1.1.2
5,6,7
Concrete Class Alternate Class Maximum
U.S. Standard U.S. Standard Slump
Type of Construction
Measures Measures Inches
(Metric Units) (Metric Units) (mm)
Street Surface Improvements
Concrete Pavement (not integral with curb) 520-A-2500 494-AFW-2500 3
(310-A-17) (295-AFW-17) (75)
Curb, Integral Curb and Pavement, Gutter, Walk, Alley Aprons 520-C-2500 494-CFW-2500 4
(310-C-17) (295-CFW-17) (100)
Curb, Integral Curb and Pavement, Gutter, Walk, Alley Aprons 520-C-2500P1 494-CFW-2500P1 4
(310-C-17P1) (295-CFW-17P1) (100)
Extruded Curb, Curb and Gutter 8 520-C-2500 494-CFW-2500 2
(310-C-17) (295-CFW-17) (50)
520-D-2500 494-DFW-2500 2
(310-D-17) (295-DFW-17) (50)
Sewer & Storm Drainage Facilities
Pipe Collars, Beam Support for Pipe, Pre-Cast Manhole 560-C-32502 532-CFW-32502 5
Components, Catch Basins, Sidewalk Culverts (330-C-232) (315-CFW-232) (125)
565-C-3250P1 537-CFW-3250P1 4
(335-C-23P1) (320-CFW-23P1) (100)
Sidehill Surface Drainage Facilities 500-C-2500 475-CFW-2500 3
(295-C-17) (280-CFW-17) (75)
520-C-2500P1 494-CFW-2500P1 4
(310-C-17P1) (295-CFW-17P1) (100)
560-E-2500P1 532-EFW-2500P1 4
(330-E-17P1) (315-EFW-17P1) (100)
Pipe Bedding and Encasement, Anchors and Thrust Blocks, 450-C-20002 4
Wall Support for Pipe3 (265-C-142) (100)
565-E-2000P1 537-EFW-2000P1 6
(335-E-14P1) (320-EFW-14P1) (150)
Tunnel Backfill 480-C-2000 5
(285-C-14) (125)
490-C-2000P1 5
(290-C-14P1) (125)
Trench Backfill 100-E-100 5
(60-E-0.7) (125)
Reinforced Structures
Bridges, Buildings, Retaining Walls, and Tunnels 560-C-32502 532-CFW-32502 4
(330-C-232) (315-CFW-232) (100)
565-C-3250P1 537-CFW-3250P1 4
(335-C-23P1) (320-CFW-23P1) (100)
650-CW-40005 650-CFW-40005 4
(385-C-285) (385-CFW-281) (100)
660-CW-4000P1, 5 660-CFW-4000P1, 5 4
(390-CW-28P1, 5) (390-CFW-28P1,5) (100)
Cast-In-Place piles 560-C-32502 532-CFW-32502 4
(330-C-232) (315-CFW-232) (100)
565-C-3250P1 537-CFW-3250P1 4
(335-C-23P1) (320-CFW-23P1) (100)

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
60 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 201-1.1.2 (Continued)

Concrete Class 5, 6, 7 Alternate Class Maximum
U.S. Standard U.S. Standard Slump Inches
Type of Construction
Measures Measures (Metric (mm)
(Metric Units) Units)
Reinforced Structures (Cont.)
Channels and Boxes, Inverts 560-B-3250 532-BFW-3250 4
(330-B-23) (315-BFW-23) (100)
565-B-3250P1 537-BFW-3250P1 4
(335-B-23P1) (320-BFW-23P1) (100)
650-BW-40005 650-BFW-40005 4
(385-BW-285) (385-BFW-285) (100)
660-CW-4000P1, 5 660-CFW-4000P1, 5 4
(390-CW-28P1, 5) (390-CFW-28P1, 5) (100)
Walls and Deck 560-C-3250 532-CFW-3250 5
(330-C-23) (315-CFW-23) (125)
565-C-3250P1 537-CFW-3250P1 5
(335-C-23P1,5) (320-CFW-23P1,5) (125)
650-CW-40005 650-CFW-40005 4
(385-CW-285) (385-CFW-285) (100)
660-CW-4000P1, 5 660-CFW-4000P1,5 4
(390-CW-28P1, 5) (390-CFW-28P1,5) (100)
Miscellaneous
Street Light and Traffic Signal Foundations, Survey Monuments 560-C-3250 532-CFW-3250 4
(330-C-23) (315-CFW-23) (100)
Fence and Guardrail Post Foundations 500-C-2500 475-CFW-2500 5
(295-C-17) (280-CFW-17) (125)
Concrete Not Otherwise Specified 560-C-3250 532-CFW-3250 5
(330-C-23) (315-CFW-23) (125)
565-C-3250P1 537-CFW-3250P1 4
(335-C-23P1) (320-CFW-23P1) (100)
Air Placed Concrete, Method B 650-D-3250P1 650-DFW-3250P1 4
(385-D-23P1) (385-DFW-23P1) (100)
650-E-3250P1 650-EFW-3250P1 4
(385-E-23P1) (385-EFW-23P1) (100)
Coarse Masonry Grout 610-E-2000G4 610-EF-2000G4 10
(360-E-14G4) (360-EF-14G4) (250)
580-EFW-2000G4 10
(345-EFW-14G4) (250)
1. Concrete mixes followed by a "P" have been designed to accommodate placement by a concrete pump using a 4-inch line.
When placing conditions require use of a smaller line pump, a “CSP” gradation shown in Table 201-1.3.2 may be substituted for
the “C” gradation with the approval of the Engineer. A pump mix may be substituted for a similar Class or Alternate Class mix
and placed utilizing standard placement methods by the Contractor at its option. Said substitution, if made, shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
2. Use “B” aggregate gradation when placing conditions permit.
3. Use limited to bedding concrete over which backfill will be placed not less than 40 hours after placement. For backfill after 24
hours, add 3 pints per 100 pounds of cement (31 milliliters per kilogram of cement) of calcium chloride. For backfill after 16
hours and removal of sheeting after 18 hours, use 660-CW-4000 (390-CW-28) with 3 pints per 100 pounds of cement (31
milliliters per kilogram of cement) calcium chloride solution.
4. Concrete mixes followed by a "G" have been designed to accommodate the grout requirements of 202.
5. A water reducing admixture conforming to 201-1.2.4 may be used in any concrete specified by class and is required in all 4000
psi (28 MPa) compressive strength concrete specified by class.
6. Fibers conforming to 201-2.3 may be used in any concrete specified by class.
7. Color conforming to 303-7 may be added to any concrete specified by class.
8. Air-entraining or viscosity modifying admixtures conforming to 201-1.2.4 may be used.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 61

201-1.1.3 Concrete Specified by Special Exposure. Concrete specified by special exposure, shall
be designated by a number, followed by 3 letters and a number. The first number is the minimum
weight of cementitious material in pounds per cubic yard (kg/m3) as specified in Table 201-1.1.3. The
first letter is the combined aggregate gradation conforming to 201-1.3.2. The second and third letters
(LE, ME, or SE) designate the level of exposure (Low Exposure, Moderate Exposure or Severe
Exposure). The last number is the minimum compressive strength at 28 Days in pounds per square inch
(MPa).
Concrete specified by special exposure shall contain Class F fly ash conforming to 201-1.2.5 and a
water-reducing admixture conforming to 201-1.2.4, and shall conform to the water-cementitious material
ratio specified in Table 201-1.1.3.
Concrete specified by special exposure shall be proportioned in accordance with Table 201-1.1.3.
Admixtures containing calcium chloride are prohibited for use in concrete exposed to sulfates. The level
of exposure shall be as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans. A mix of a higher
level of exposure may be substituted for a mix of a lower level of exposure.
Additional special exposure requirements shall be as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on
the Plans. When specified, concrete exposed to other conditions, including freeze-thaw, contact with
water, or corrosion protection, shall conform to the durability requirements of ACI 318.

TABLE 201-1.1.3
Special
Maximum
Exposure Cementitious
Water -
Special Exposure Mixes U.S. Standard Material
Cementitious
2 Measure(Metric Requirement
Ratio
Units)
1
LOW EXPOSURE (LE) - 0.50 650-BLE-4000P 80% Type II or V Portland cement
Water-soluble Sulfate (SO4) in soil samples, (385-BLE-28P )
1 with 20% Class F fly ash
1
% by mass, 0.10 ≤ SO4 < 0.20 650-CLE-4000P
1
(385-CLE-28P )
1
Dissolved Sulfate (SO4) in water samples, ppm, 740-DLE-4000P
1
150 ≤ SO4 < 1,500 (440-DLE-28P )
1
MODERATE EXPOSURE (ME) - 0.45 658-BME-4500P 80% Type V Portland cement
Water-soluble Sulfate (SO4) in soil samples, (390-BME-31P )
1 with 20% Class F fly ash
1
% by mass, 0.20 ≤ SO4 ≤ 2.00 658-CME-4500P
1
(390-CME-31P )
1
Dissolved Sulfate (SO4) in water samples, ppm, 815-DME-4500P
1
1,500 ≤ SO4 ≤ 10,000 (480-DME-31P )
1
SEVERE EXPOSURE (SE) - 0.40 750-BSE-5000P 80% Type V Portland cement
Water-soluble Sulfate (SO4) in soil samples, (450-BSE-35P )
1 with 20% Class F fly ash
1
% by mass, SO4 > 2.00 750-CSE-5000P
1
(450-CSE-35P )
1
Dissolved Sulfate (SO4) in water samples, ppm, 875-DSE-5000P
1
SO4 > 10,000 (520-DSE-35P )
1. Concrete mixes followed by a “P” have been designed to accommodate placement by a concrete pump using a 4-inch line.
2. Maximum slump is determined by placement conditions so long as water-cementitious ratio is not exceeded.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
62 Greenbook 2021

201-1.1.4 Concrete Specified by Compressive Strength. The Contractor shall determine the mix
proportions of concrete specified in the Special Provision or shown on the Plans by its 28-Day
compressive strength within the minimum cement, maximum size coarse aggregate and admixture
limitations specified herein or otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. Concrete specified by
compressive strength shall contain not less than 560 pounds of cement, or cement and SCMs per cubic
yard (330 kg of cement, or cement and SCMs per m3), in accordance with 201-1.2.5, for concrete
strengths of 3,250 psi (23 MPa) or greater. The Contractor may submit mix designs specified by
compressive strength in excess of 28 Days with the approval of the Engineer. Such mix designs are not
subject to the SCMs limitations of 201-1.2.5.
Calcium chloride may be used only with the approval of the Engineer. Admixtures proposed for use
shall be evaluated in accordance with 201-1.2.4.
The proposed mix design shall be evaluated from tests of a field trial batch conforming to the size of
load, materials, proportions, slump, mixing and placing equipment, and procedures to be used in the
actual work or, with the approval of the Engineer, tests of a laboratory trial batch conforming to the
materials, proportions, and slump to be used in the actual work. The trial batch procedure may be
waived when test data of prior performance of the proposed mix design is presented by the Contractor
and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor may utilize any strength data on file with the Agency for
this purpose.
When approved by the Engineer, field trial batches may be placed in the Work at designated
locations where concrete of a lower quality is specified. Concrete so placed will be considered for
purpose of payment to be the type of concrete specified at that location.
Ten test cylinders shall be molded from the trial batch containing the maximum water content
indicated by the mix design. Five of the cylinders shall be tested at 7 Days in order to establish 7-Day
average compressive strength information, and the remaining 5 cylinders shall be tested at no more than
28 Days after molding. The average compressive strength of the 5, 28-Day cylinders for field trial tests
shall be at least 600 psi (4 MPa) greater than the specified strength. The average compressive strength
of the 5, 28-Day cylinders for laboratory trial batch tests shall be at least 1000 psi (7 MPa) greater than
the specified strength for specified strengths less than 3000 psi (21 MPa), 1200 psi (8 MPa) greater than
the specified strength for specified strengths between 3000 psi and 5000 psi (21 MPa and 36 MPa), and
1400 psi (10 MPa) greater than the specified strength for specified strengths greater than 5000 psi (36
MPa). The minimum strength of any one cylinder shall not be less than the specified strength.
The placing of concrete specified by compressive strength shall not begin until the mix design has
qualified in accordance with the aforesaid test criteria. Should the source of materials or established
procedures change, new trial batches may be required.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 63

201-1.1.5 Tests. Portland cement concrete shall be sampled and tested in accordance with the
following ASTM Tests:
a) Sampling Fresh Concrete ............................................................................................. C172
b) Obtaining Drilled Cores ................................................................................................ C42
c) Molding and Curing Specimens ..................................................................................... C31
d) Compressive Strength..................................................................................................... C39
e) Flexural Strength ............................................................................................................ C78
f) Slump ........................................................................................................................... C143
g) Air Content ..................................................................................................... C173 or C231
h) Unit Weight Yield ........................................................................................................ C138
i) Setting of Mortar ............................................................................................ C191 or C266
j) Mortar Cube Test .......................................................................................................... C109
k) Drying Shrinkage (with admixture) ............................................................................. C157
l) Expansion (with expansive hydraulic cement or component) ...................................... C878
A compressive strength test shall consist of the average strength of 2 cylinders fabricated from a
single load of concrete, except that if any cylinder shows evidence of improper handling, molding, or
testing, it shall be discarded and the strength test shall consist of the strength of the remaining cylinder.
The Engineer will determine the frequency of sampling. The Contractor shall afford the Engineer all
reasonable access, without charge, for the procurement of samples of fresh concrete at time of
placement.
Concrete compressive strength tests representing concrete that has been placed shall attain the
following 28-Day strength: The average of any 3 consecutive strength tests shall be equal to or greater
than the specified 28-Day strength. Not more than 10 percent of the tests shall be less than the specified
28-Day strength. No test shall be less than 85 percent of the specified 28-Day strength.
Concrete represented by compressive strength tests that fail to meet the requirements of this
subsection shall be removed from the Work. However, with the approval of the Engineer, the concrete
represented by the failing compressive strength tests may be cored for strength testing. Coring shall
commence within 5 Days of notification by the Engineer. Drilled cores shall be obtained by the
Contractor in the presence of the Engineer and tested at the Contractor’s expense in accordance with
ASTM C42 by a laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. A minimum of 3 cores shall be taken in each
area represented by the failing 28-Day compressive strength tests. If the average of 3 cores is at least 85
percent of the specified 28-Day strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of the specified 28-
Day strength, the concrete represented may be accepted with no further action required. Additional
testing of cores extracted from locations represented by erratic core strength results shall be permitted by
the Engineer.
201-1.1.6 Pervious Concrete.
201-[Link] General. Pervious concrete shall consist of Portland cement, coarse concrete aggregate,
water, and when approved by the Engineer or specified in the Special Provisions, chemical admixtures,
fly ash, sand, or reclaimed concrete material.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
64 Greenbook 2021

201-[Link] Materials. Materials shall consist of:

a) Type II or Type V Portland cement conforming to 201-1.2.1, a, Type II, unless otherwise
specified in the Special Provisions;
b) coarse concrete aggregate conforming to 200-1.4, No. 4, unless otherwise specified in the Special
Provisions;
c) water conforming to 201-1.2.3;
d) hydration stabilizing (Type B or D), air-entraining, and/or specific performance chemical
admixtures conforming to 201-1.2.4;
e) fly ash conforming to 201-[Link], the content shall be less than 25 percent;
f) sand for Portland cement concrete conforming to 200-1.5.3; and
g) reclaimed concrete material conforming to 201-1.2.6.
201-[Link] Mix Design. A mix design shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8.4. The minimum
cementitious material content shall be 540 pounds per cubic yard (320 kg/m3). The fly ash content shall
not be greater than 25 percent of the total weight of cementitious materials.
The mix design shall show the mix identification number and the applicable proportions, weights,
and quantities of Portland cement, aggregate, water, and when specified or approved, fly ash, chemical
admixtures, sand, and reclaimed concrete material. The mix design submittal shall also include the size
and source of concrete aggregates, the type and source of Portland cement and fly ash, the brand and
designation of chemical admixtures, the percent voids, and the intended type of construction.
201-1.2 Materials.
201-1.2.1 Cement. Cement shall be:
a) Portland Cement. Portland cement shall be:
1) Type II or Type V Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150 and the optional
requirements of ASTM C150, Table 2 for maximum equivalent alkalis (Na2O + 0.658K2O)
of 0.60 percent.
2) Type III Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150 and the optional requirements of
ASTM C150, Table 2 for maximum equivalent alkalis (Na2O + 0.658K2O) of 0.60 percent
may be used when approved by the Engineer.
b) Blended Cement. Blended cement shall be Type IP (MS) Portland-pozzolan cement conforming
to ASTM C595, unless otherwise specified. Type IP (MS) cement shall meet the optional mortar
expansion requirements of ASTM C595, Table 2 and contain no more than 25 percent pozzolan.
c) Rapid Hardening Hydraulic Cement. Rapid hardening hydraulic cement shall conform to
ASTM C1600.
d) Expansive Hydraulic Cement. Expansive hydraulic cement shall conform to ASTM C845.
Expansive hydraulic cement shall be used when specified and may be used when approved by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall furnish a Certificate of Compliance.
Cement shall be stored to protect against contamination and moisture. Should any cement show
evidence of contamination or be otherwise unsuitable, the Engineer may reject it and require that it be
removed from the site.
Cement used in concrete for any individual structure shall be of the same brand and type unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 65

201-1.2.2 Aggregates. Aggregates shall conform to 200-1. Aggregate shall be of such character
that it will be possible to produce workable concrete within the limits of slump and water content in 201-
1.1.2 and 201-1.3.3.
Methods of handling materials resulting in segregation, degradation, or the combining of materials
which results in failure to meet specifications shall not be permitted. The free moisture content of sand
shall not exceed 8 percent at the time of batching.
Aggregates shall be nonreactive and conform to one of the requirements shown in Table 201-
1.2.2 (A).

TABLE 201-1.2.2 (A): REACTIVITY IDENTIFICATION

Description Test Method Requirement
Test Method for Potential Alkali
Reactivity of Aggregates ASTM C1260 Expansion ≤ 0.15 Percent at 16 Days
(Mortar-Bar Method)

Test Method for Determination of

Length Change of Concrete Due to ASTM C1293 Expansion ≤ 0.04 Percent at 365 Days
Alkali-Silica Reaction

Aggregates without reactivity identification test results or those found to be potentially reactive may
be used provided the mix design conforms to one of the requirements shown in Table 201-1.2.2 (B).

TABLE 201-1.2.2 (B): REACTIVITY MITIGATION

Description Test Method Requirement

Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-

Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious
ASTM C1567 Expansion ≤ 0.10 Percent at 16 Days
Materials and Aggregate
(Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)

Modify Mix Design for Alternate Class Mixes

1
Alternate Class Method Shown in Table 201-1.1.2
2
( A (1.134) = B)

1. When using the Alternate Class Method, the only SCM allowed is Class F fly ash. If the proposed Alternate Class mix design
contains a water-reducing admixture, the set time shall be adjusted accordingly.
2. A = the weight of cementitious material for the respective Alternate Class mix shown in Table 201-1.1.2
B = the total weight of cementitious material (75 percent Portland cement and 25 percent Class F fly ash by weight). Example: 494-CFW-
2500; 494 x 1.134 = 560 total cementitious. 560 x 0.75 = 420 pounds cement and 560 x 0.25 = 140 pounds Class F fly ash.

201-1.2.3 Water. Water used for concrete shall not contain deleterious substances. Water shall not
contain an amount of impurities that will cause a change in the time of setting of Portland cement of
more than 25 percent nor a reduction in relative mortar strength at 7 and 28 Days of more than 10
percent compared to results obtained with distilled water.
In conventionally reinforced concrete work, water shall not contain more than 1,000 mg/L (ppm) of
chlorides calculated as Cl, nor more than 1,000 mg/L (ppm) of sulfates calculated as SO4.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
66 Greenbook 2021

In prestressed concrete work, water shall not contain more than 650 mg/L (ppm) of chlorides
calculated as Cl, nor more than 800 mg/L (ppm) of sulfates calculated as SO4.
In nonreinforced concrete work, water shall not contain more than 2,000 mg/L (ppm) of chlorides
calculated as Cl, nor more than 1,500 mg/L (ppm) of sulfates calculated as SO4.
201-1.2.4 Chemical Admixtures. Chemical admixtures specified or approved by the Engineer shall
conform to ASTM standards unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. Chemical admixtures
shall be compatible with all other ingredients of the concrete mixture. Chemical admixtures shall be
dispensed in liquid form and the quantity dispensed shall not vary more than 5 percent from the quantity
specified. Approval to use an admixture shall not relieve the Contractor of the specified concrete
requirements. Use of chemical admixtures shall conform to the trial batch requirements of 201-1.1.4,
except for concrete specified by class, by alternate class, or by special exposure.
a) Water-Reducing, Set-Retarding, and Hydration Stabilizing Admixtures. Water-reducing
(Type A), water-reducing set-retarding (Type D), and hydration stabilizing (Type B or D)
admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494.
b) Accelerating Admixtures. When calcium chloride is approved for use, it shall conform to
ASTM D98. Calcium chloride shall not be used in concrete containing prestressing steel.
Calcium chloride shall not be used in concrete containing any reinforcing metal products,
unless approved by the Engineer. Other accelerating admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494,
accelerating (Type C), or water reducing and accelerating (Type E) admixtures.
c) High Range, Water-Reducing Admixtures (HRWRA). HRWRA, i.e., superplasticizers,
shall conform to ASTM C494, water-reducing, high range admixtures (Type F), or water-
reducing, high range, and retarding admixtures (Type G). The use of HRWRA shall conform to
the manufacturer’s recommendation for dosage, redose, and point of addition for each specific
admixture. HRWRA may be added at the batch plant or at the Work site, as approved by the
Engineer.
d) Air-Entraining Admixtures. Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM C260.
Concrete containing air-entraining admixtures shall be sampled and tested in accordance with
201-1.1.5. The air content, at the point of discharge shall be within a tolerance of 1.5 percent of
the value specified in ASTM C94. Testing for air content may be waived by the Engineer
when air-entrainment is used solely in concrete for extruded curb, or curb and gutter as shown
in Table 201-1.1.2.
e) Specific Performance Admixtures (SPA). SPA shall conform to ASTM C494, specific
performance admixtures (Type S). The use of SPA shall conform to the manufacturer’s
recommendation for dosage, redose, and point of addition. SPA may be added at the batch
plant or at the Work site, as approved by the Engineer.
201-1.2.5 Supplementary Cementitious Materials.
201-[Link] Definitions.
SCMs - Materials that are by products of other processes or natural materials. SCMs may or may
not be furthered processed for use in concrete and distribute pozzolanic and/or cementitious reactions.
Pozzolans - Materials that possess little or no cementitious value, but are capable of reacting
chemically with calcium hydroxide at ambient temperatures to form compounds with cementitious
properties.
Cementitious Materials - Materials that react in the presence of water or calcium hydroxide to form
complex silicates having the characteristics of cements.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 67

201-[Link] General. SCMs shall be cementitious and/or pozzolanic materials as specified in the
Special Provisions.
Bulk SCMs shall be stored in silo storage facilities. SCMs shall be stored in such a manner as to
permit ready access for the purposes of inspection, and sampling and provide suitable protection against
contamination or moisture. The Engineer may reject SCMs that show evidence of contamination or are
otherwise unsuitable, and require that they be removed from the storage site. Facilities shall be provided
to discharge the SCMs into the cement hopper in accordance with 201-1.3.1.
SCMs used in concrete for any individual structure shall be from the same source in combination
with the same source and type of cement, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
201-[Link] Fly Ash. Fly ash shall be incorporated into the alternate class mixes specified in 201-
1.1.2, and special exposure mixes specified in 201-1.1.3. Fly ash may also be used in other mixes when
approved by the Engineer. The amount of fly ash and cement used shall be based upon trial batches in
accordance with 201-1.1.4.
The Contractor shall furnish a Certificate of Compliance conforming to 4-5 signed by the supplier.
The certificate shall identify the type of fly ash, and state that the fly ash conforms to ASTM C618 and
the Specifications. Supporting test data shall be furnished when requested by the Engineer. Testing and
sampling procedures shall conform to ASTM C311.
a) Class F Fly Ash. Class F fly ash shall conform to ASTM C618 and the following:
Loss of ignition 4% maximum
SO3 content 3% maximum
Moisture content 1% maximum
Test results for special exposure mixes shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with 3-8.
The test results shall show the fly ash to be used is effective in contributing to sulfate resistance
in conformance with ASTM C618, Table 3 (optional requirements) as tested in accordance with
ASTM C1012. The data submitted shall be less than 6 months old.
Class F fly ash, as a percent by weight of total cementitious material, may exceed 20 percent,
when approved by the Engineer.
b) Class C Fly Ash. Class C fly ash shall conform to ASTM C618 and the following:
Loss of ignition 2% maximum
SO3 content 4% maximum
Moisture content 1% maximum
Class C fly ash, as a percent by weight of total cementitious material, shall not exceed 30 percent,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Class C fly ash shall not be used where sulfate resistant concrete is required.
201-[Link] Class N Pozzolans. Class N pozzolans shall comply with the applicable requirements
for the class specified herein and conform to ASTM C618.
Class N pozzolans are:
a) some diatomaceous earths;
b) opaline cherts and shales;
c) tuffs and volcanic ashes or pumicites, calcined or uncalcined; and
d) various materials requiring calcination to induce satisfactory properties, such as some clays and shales.
Class N pozzolans may be used in any mix when approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
68 Greenbook 2021

The Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Compliance signed by the supplier. The certificate shall
identify the type of pozzolan, and state that the pozzolan conforms to ASTM C618 and the
Specifications. Supporting test data shall be furnished when requested by the Engineer. Testing and
sampling procedures shall conform to ASTM C311.
Class N pozzolan, as a percent by weight of total cementitious material, may exceed 20 percent when
approved by the Engineer.
Special exposure mixes specified in 201-1.1.3 shall be proportioned in accordance with ACI 318,
Chapter 4. Class N pozzolan shall comply with ASTM C618 Table 3. All test data shall be made
available upon the Engineer’s request.
In any other mix, the amount of Class N pozzolan and Portland cement used shall be determined by
trial batches in accordance with 201-1.1.4.
201-[Link] Shrinkage-Compensating Component. A shrinkage-compensating (expansive)
mineral additive shall be combined with Portland cement to produce expansive hydraulic cement. The
combination shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C806 to determine the restrained expansion of the
expansive cement mortar. The restrained expansion shall not be less than 0.04 percent nor exceed 0.10
percent at 7 Days.
201-1.2.6 Reclaimed Concrete Material. Reclaimed concrete material may be either:
a) Reclaimed plastic Portland cement concrete (RPPCC)
or
b) Reclaimed non-plastic Portland cement concrete materials
The Contractor is required to maintain suitable equipment to classify reclaimed concrete material and
document its use in the proportioning of concrete mixtures. The addition and characteristics of
reclaimed concrete material will be monitored to ensure the final Portland cement concrete composite
conforms to the specifications for its Class and use.
All mixtures incorporating reclaimed concrete material will be represented by mix designs in
accordance with section 201-1.1.1. The Contractor shall evaluate all mix designs by laboratory or field
trial batches. Each trial batch shall conform to the materials, proportions, and slump as proposed by the
mix design. When approved by the Engineer, field trial batches may be placed in the Work at designated
locations where concrete of lower quality is specified. Concrete so placed will be considered for the
purpose of payment to be the type of concrete specified at that location. A minimum of 10 test cylinders
shall be molded from the trial batch containing the maximum water content indicated by the mix design.
Five of the cylinders shall be tested at 7 Days to establish 7-Day average compressive strength
information. The remaining 5 cylinders shall be tested at no more than 28 Days after molding. For field
trial batches the average 28-Day compressive strength shall be at least 600 psi (4 MPa) greater than the
specified strength. For laboratory trial batches the average 28-Day compressive strength shall be at least
1000 psi (7 MPa) greater for specified strengths less than 3000 psi (21 MPa), 1200 psi (8 MPa) greater
for specified strengths between 3000 psi and 5000 psi (21 MPa and 36 MPa) and 1400 psi (10 MPa)
greater for specified strengths greater than 5000 psi (36 MPa). The minimum strength of any one
cylinder shall not be less than the specified strength. Changes in the source of materials or established
procedures may require new trial batches. Changes in the quality of materials or failure to comply with
the compressive strength requirements of 201-1.1.4 shall require new trial batches unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
Reclaimed concrete material may not be used in special exposure mixtures or in architectural
concrete specifications.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 69

a) Reclaimed Plastic Portland Cement Concrete (RPPCC). A maximum of 15 percent by

volume of reclaimed plastic Portland cement concrete may be incorporated into fresh Portland
cement concrete. Each weighmaster certificate shall show the exact volume of RPPCC in
addition to the weighmaster certificate requirements of section 201-1.4.3.
RPPCC may be any un-hardened Portland cement concrete provided its design strength is 2000
psi (14 MPa) or greater, its constituent material conforms to section 201-1.2, and it has not
attained or has been delayed from attaining initial set either by time or by the incorporation of
set-delaying chemical admixtures. When set-delaying chemical admixtures are used, they shall
be used at the manufacturer’s recommended dosage rates and have a proven history of
specifically maintaining and extending both plasticity and set. The Contractor shall maintain
process documentation, mix designs, and supportive concrete test data and shall provide the
information to the Engineer upon request.
RPPCC shall be proportioned by volume in accordance with section 201-1.3. RPPCC may be
added at any point during the proportioning process that results in a consistent, uniform, and
homogeneous final product. For design and proportioning purposes, all RPPCC shall be
considered as a 2000 psi (14 MPa) mixture, consisting of 470 pounds (280 kg) of cementitious
material. Additional cement shall be added to achieve the minimum cement content and/or
strength as required for a mixture’s Class and use. The quantity and/or constituent materials of
the RPPCC shall be monitored and proportioned such that the final combined gradation conforms
to the requirements of 201-1.3.2.
b) Reclaimed Non-Plastic Portland Cement Concrete Materials. Non-plastic Portland cement
concrete materials shall consist of an individual amount of or a combination of materials
resulting from the reclaiming of Portland cement concrete. Before reclamation, these materials
shall conform to 201-1.2. The materials shall be designated as either reclaimed aggregates (RA)
or reclaimed water (RW).
RA shall consist of crushed and graded concrete aggregates and/or a reclaimed naturally occurring
aggregate. A maximum of 30 percent RA by weight of total aggregate may be incorporated into fresh
Portland cement concrete. Reclaimed naturally occurring aggregates may contain minor residual
amounts of Portland cement concrete components as a result of reclamation. When crushed Portland
cement concrete is used as aggregate it shall, when combined with the non-reclaimed aggregate at the
proposed percentage of use, conform to 201-1.2.2. When 15 percent or less RA by weight of total
aggregate is used, the requirements of 201-1.2.2 may be waived by the Engineer provided the final
combined gradation conforms to the requirements of 201-1.3.2.
RW may consist of non-deleterious amounts of hydrated and un-hydrated Portland cement,
admixtures, minor amounts of fly ash and fine aggregate. The reclamation process for RW shall include
a mechanism to ensure uniformity and homogeneity of the RW. A maximum of 35 percent RW by
weight of batch water may be incorporated into fresh Portland cement concrete.
RA and RW shall be proportioned by weight in accordance with 201-1.3. RA and RW may be added
at any point during the proportioning process that results in a consistent, uniform, and homogeneous
final product. The quantity and/or constituent materials of the RA shall be monitored and proportioned
such that the final combined gradation conforms to the requirements of 201-1.3.2.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
70 Greenbook 2021

201-1.3 Proportioning.
201-1.3.1 General. Aggregates and cement shall be proportioned by weight except that when the
amount of concrete required for any one contract is 10 cubic yards (8 m3) or less, the materials may be
measured by volume. Materials that are proportioned by volume shall be measured in containers of
known capacity.
Weigh hoppers shall be charged from bins located directly over them or from conveyor belts. When
conveyor belts are used, there shall be a separate belt for each size aggregate. There shall be a moisture
meter installed, accurate within 1 percent of actual moisture content, to indicate moisture in the sand.
Bulk cement shall be weighed in an individual hopper and kept separate from the aggregates until
ingredients are released for discharge. The cement hopper shall be attached to a separate scale for
individual weighing.
The amount of water added to the mixture shall be measured into the mixing drum through a valve
with a positive cutoff. When water is measured by weight, it shall be weighed on a separate scale.
Whenever a portable batch plant is set up at a new location the scale assemblies shall be inspected
and certified regardless of the date the scales were last tested.
Scales utilized in proportioning shall be either springless dial, multiple beam, or solid-state digital
strain gage transducer. Scale graduation shall be no greater than the following:
Aggregate Scales ............................................................................................ 25 lbs (10 kg)
Cement Scales ................................................................................................ 5 lbs (2 kg)
Water Scales ................................................................................................... 5 lbs (2 kg)
If a multiple beam type scale is used, the scale shall be provided with an indicator operated by the
main beam which will give positive visible evidence of over or under weight. The indicator shall be so
designed that it will operate during the addition of the last 400 pounds (200 kg) of any weighing. The
over-travel of the indicator hand shall be at least 1/3 of the loading travel. Indicators shall be enclosed
against moisture and dust.
Weighing equipment shall be insulated against vibration and movement of other operating
equipment in the plant. When the entire plant is running, the scale reading at cutoff shall not vary from
the weight designated by more than 1 percent for cement, 1 percent for water, 1-1/2 percent for any size
of aggregate, nor 1 percent for the total aggregate in any batch.
201-1.3.2 Combined Aggregate Gradings. The aggregates, when proportioned and combined in
accordance with an approved mix design, shall conform to the gradings shown in Table 201-1.3.2. If the
combined aggregate grading conforms to the grading of its specified class, the mix proportions shall be
considered satisfied and the individual gradations required by 200-1.4 and 200-1.5 may be waived by the
Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 71

TABLE 201-1.3.2
Percentage Passing Sieves
Sieve Size Grading Grading Grading Grading Grading Grading
A B C CSP D E
2" (50 mm) 100 100 - - - -
1-1/2" (37.5 mm) 95-100 95-100 100 100 - -
1" (25.0 mm) 64-80 80-96 95-100 98-100 - -
3/4" (19.0 mm) 55-71 64-80 77-93 85-98 100 100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 37-53 40-52 50-70 67-80 92-100 90-100
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 32-42 35-46 39-51 46-65 42-60 60-80
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 25-35 28-38 31-41 38-54 33-47 50-70
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 18-28 21-31 22-32 27-40 22-38 33-53
No. 30 (600 µm) 10-18 10-20 12-22 15-27 17-25 19-35
No.50 (300 µm) 3-9 3-10 3-15 3-15 6-15 5-15
No. 100 (150 µm) 0-4 0-4 0-5 0-7 1-6 2-7
No. 200 (75 µm) 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-3 0-3 0-4

201-1.3.3 Concrete Consistency. The amount of water added at the mixer shall be regulated to
take into account the free water in aggregates. Free water is defined as the total water minus the water
absorbed by the aggregate in a saturated surface-dry condition.
The amount of water used in the mixture shall not exceed the amount necessary to permit practical
placement and consolidation of the concrete. Total free water in the mixture shall not exceed an amount
producing the maximum slump specified in 201-1.1.2, and shall not exceed amounts shown in the
following:

TABLE 201-1.3.3
Pounds (Kg) Per Cubic Yard (Cubic Meter) of Concrete
Aggregate Slump Inches (mm)
1
Grading 1" (25 mm) 2" (50 mm) 3" (75 mm) 4" (100 mm) 5" (125 mm)
A 270 (160) 280 (166) 290 (172) 300 (178) 310 (184)
B 275 (163) 285 (169) 295 (175) 305 (181) 315 (187)
C 290 (172) 300 (178) 310 (184) 320 (190) 330 (196)
D 320 (190) 335 (199) 350 (208) 365 (216) 375 (222)
E 335 (199) 350 (208) 365 (216) 380 (225) 395 (234)
1. When the coarse aggregate is composed solely of crushed rock, the above values may be increased up to 20 pounds (12 kg) of water per
cubic yard (cubic meter).

When adverse or difficult conditions affect the placement of concrete, the Engineer may authorize a
greater slump to be used, provided the cement is increased. Water shall be added at a ratio not to exceed
32 percent of added cement per cubic yard (m3) of concrete, and such additional water and cement shall
be provided at the Contractor’s expense.
201-1.4 Mixing.
201-1.4.1 General. Machine mixing will be required in all cases other than those in which it would
obviously prove to be impractical, in which case hand mixing is permitted. Mixing shall be commenced
as soon as possible after the cement is placed in contact with the aggregates, but in no event shall the
intervening period exceed 30 minutes.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
72 Greenbook 2021

All concrete mixers shall be of such design and construction and so operated to provide a properly
mixed concrete with uniform distribution of ingredients. Mixers shall be maintained properly and be in
working order and not have any aluminum parts which will have direct contact with concrete.
201-1.4.2 Paving and Stationary Mixers. Paving and stationary mixers shall be equipped with an
accurate automatic timing device so designed and constructed as to lock the discharge lever. The
regulation setting of this device shall be under the supervision of the Engineer. Water control equipment
shall also be provided with each concrete mixer.
The proper proportions of aggregate, cement, and water for each batch of concrete shall be placed in
the mixer and mixed for a period of not less than 1 minute (1-1/2 minutes for reinforced concrete).
The rotating speed at which the mixer shall be operated shall conform to that recommended by the
manufacturer. The total volume of materials in any one batch shall not exceed the water level capacity
of the mixer or the manufacturer’s specified capacity of the mixer.
201-1.4.3 Transit Mixers. The type, capacity, and manner of operation of the mixing and
transporting equipment for ready-mix concrete shall conform to the current “Standards for Operation of
Truck Mixers and Agitators of the National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association” and the “Truck Mixer
and Agitator Standards of the Truck Mixer Manufacturers Bureau.” Transit mix concrete trucks shall be
equipped with an automatic device for recording the number of revolutions of the drum during the
mixing period. Each mixer and agitator shall have attached thereto in a prominent place, a metal plate or
plates, installed by the manufacturer. The plate(s) shall be plainly marked with the manufacturer’s
designated capacity of the drum in terms of the volume of mixed concrete and the speed of rotation for
the agitating and mixing speeds of the mixing drum or blades.
Each mixer shall have an identification number painted on it that can be easily read from the
batching platform.
The total volume of materials introduced into the mixer shall not exceed the manufacturer’s specified
mixing capacity. If the concrete so mixed does not meet the uniformity requirements of 210-1.4.1, the
amount of materials introduced into the mixer shall be reduced.
The drum of the mixer shall be completely emptied of any previously mixed load. The proper
proportions of the required ingredients for each load of concrete shall be placed in the mixer and shall be
mixed between 70 and 100 revolutions at the manufacturer’s designated mixing speed unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer. Additional revolutions of the drum shall be at the manufacturer’s designated
agitating speed.
When concrete is produced for pavement or concrete structures, all wash water shall be emptied
from the mixer before any portion of the succeeding load is introduced, unless it has been measured. For
all other work, the mixer shall be empty or may carry up to 10 gallons (40 L) of water in the drum. This
amount may be exceeded if the water is measured to an accuracy of 1 percent of the required total
mixing water. Adequate control of ready-mixed concrete may require additional added water mixed into
the batch at the discharge point. This water shall be mixed for a minimum of 30 revolutions at the
manufacturer’s designated mixing speed. Water shall not be added to the load during transit.
The total elapsed time between introduction of water at the batch plant and completely discharging
the load shall not exceed 90 minutes. The Engineer may waive this limitation if the concrete is of such
slump after the 90 minute time limit has been reached that it can be placed without the addition of water
to the batch. Under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete a time limit less than 90
minutes may be specified by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 73

The Engineer shall be provided with a legible certified weighmaster certificate which shall contain
the following information:
a) Name of vendor.
b) Name of Contractor.
c) Work location.
d) Number of cubic yards in the load.
e) Concrete Class, Alternate Class, or Special Exposure mix designation.
f) Amount of water added at the plant (including water in fine aggregates).
g) Maximum allowable water.
h) Time and date of batching.
When concrete is specified by compressive strength, or when required by the Engineer, the certificate
shall contain the following additional information:
i) Actual weights of cementitious materials and of each size of aggregate.
j) Brand and type of cement.
k) Brand, type and amount of admixture.
Space shall be provided on the certificate so that amount of water added at the Work site may be indicated.
201-1.4.4 Hand Mixing. Hand mixing is permitted when the amount of concrete required is less than 1
cubic yard (cubic meter). Hand-mixed concrete shall be mixed on a watertight platform or in a mortar box in
batches not to exceed 1/3 cubic yard (cubic meter) each. The aggregates shall be spread in a uniform layer over
which the required quantity of cement shall be evenly distributed. The entire batch shall be turned with shovels
until the ingredients are thoroughly blended before adding water. After adding the proper amount of water, the
batch shall again be turned with shovels until a uniform consistency is obtained. Methods of hand mixing which
allow the loss of mixing water will not be permitted.
201-1.5 Transporting Batched Materials and Mixed Concrete. The compartments of trucks or
other equipment used for the purpose of transporting proportioned dry aggregate and cement, or mixed
concrete, shall be suitably constructed to protect and prevent loss or leakage of contents during charging,
transit, or discharging.
201-2 REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE.
201-2.1 General. Bar, wire, welded wire, and fiber reinforcement shall conform to the dimensions,
quantity, and details shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Before use, reinforcement shall be clean and free of deleterious substances.
201-2.2 Steel Reinforcement.
201-2.2.1 Reinforcing Steel. Unless otherwise specified, reinforcing steel shall be either Grade 40
(300) or Grade 60 (400) billet steel conforming to ASTM A615/A615M. Steel bending processes shall
conform to the requirements of the Manual of Standard Practice of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel
Institute. Bending or straightening shall be performed in a manner that will not result in the steel being
damaged. Kinked bars shall not be used.
201-2.2.2 Wire Reinforcement. Wire reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A82.
201-2.2.3 Welded Wire Reinforcement. Welded wire reinforcement shall conform to ASTM
A185. The gage of the wire and the dimensions of the mesh shall be as shown on the Plans or specified

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
74 Greenbook 2021

in the Special Provisions. Welded wire reinforcement shall retain its original shape and form during
handling. The effective cross-sectional area of the wire shall be equal to that specified.
201-2.3 Fiber Reinforcement.
201-2.3.1 General. Fiber reinforcement for fiber reinforced concrete or air placed concrete, method
B, shall conform to ASTM C1116. The Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Compliance for each
type of fiber reinforcement used in the Work.
201-2.3.2 Type I Reinforcement. Type I reinforcement shall be composed of steel fibers
conforming to ASTM A820.
201-2.3.3 Type II Reinforcement. Type II reinforcement shall be composed of alkali-resistant
glass fibers.
201-2.3.4 Type III Reinforcement. Type III reinforcement shall be composed of synthetic fibers
conforming to ASTM D7508. Fibers shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1399, ASTM C1609 or
ASTM C1550.
201-2.4 Samples for Testing.
201-2.4.1 General. No reinforcing steel will be accepted until it has been approved by the
Engineer. Samples shall be taken from bars selected by the Engineer and cut in the Engineer’s presence.
The Contractor shall furnish a certified mill test report for each heat or size of steel when required by the
Engineer.
201-2.4.2 Reinforcing Steel Bars. Two sample bars, cut from different bars and 3 feet (1 m) in
length for sizes No. 3 (10M) through No. 5 (16M) and 5 feet (1.5 m) in length for size No. 6 (19M) and
larger, shall be taken from each bar size and heat number delivered to the Work site on a cumulative
tonnage basis in accordance with the following schedule:

TABLE 201-2.4.2
U.S. Standard Bar Sizes (Metric Sizes) Bar Size Delivered To the Work Site
Tons (tonnes)
2 (6M) 0.5 (1/2)
3 (10M) 1 (1)
4 (13M) 2 (2)
5 (16M) 3 (3)
6 (19M) 4 (4)
7 (22M) 5 (5)
8 (25M) 7 (6)
9 (29M) 9 (8)
10 (32M) 11 (10)
11 (36M) 13 (12)
14 (43M) 20 (18)
18 (57M) 35 (32)
At least 2 sample bars shall be taken from each bar size.

201-2.4.3 Wire Reinforcement. One sample consisting of two pieces, each 3 feet (1 m) long, shall
be taken from each lot of 2 tons (2 tonnes) or less for each size of wire delivered to the Work site.
201-2.4.4 Welded Wire Reinforcement. Two samples of a size suitable for testing shall be taken
from each 3,000 square feet (280 m2) of fabric or fraction thereof.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 75

201-3 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER AND JOINT SEALANTS.

201-3.1 General. This section specifies joint fillers and sealants to be used for treating joints in
Portland cement concrete.
All joints which are to be sealed shall be formed with filler. The filler shall be placed in correct
position before concrete is placed against it. Holes or joints in the filler shall be filled with mastic to
prevent the passage of mortar or concrete from one side of the joint to the other.
201-3.2 Premolded Joint Filler. Premolded joint filler material shall consist of premolded strips of
a durable resilient material.
Unless otherwise specified, premolded joint filler shall be one of the following:
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler (Bituminous) ASTM D994
Nonextruding and Resilient Filler (Bituminous) ASTM D1751
Nonextruding and Resilient Filler (Non-bituminous) ASTM D1752
201-3.3 Polystyrene Joint Filler. Commercial quality expanded polystyrene foam blocks and
planks shall be furnished by the Contractor and installed in-place as shown on the Plans. The foam shall
be composed of non-interconnecting cells. Expanded polystyrene shall have a flexural strength of 35
pounds per square inch (240 kPa) and a compressive yield strength of between 16 and 40 pounds per
square inch (110 kPa and 275 kPa) at 5 percent compression.
Surfaces of expanded polystyrene against which concrete is to be placed shall be faced with
hardboard. Hardboard shall be 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum thickness conforming to Federal
Specifications LLL-B-810, any type. Other facing materials may be used, provided they furnish
equivalent protection. All boards shall be held in place by nails, waterproof adhesive, or other means
approved by the Engineer.
201-3.4 Type “A” Sealant (Two-Part Polyurethane Sealant). The sealant shall be a polyurethane
sealant furnished and placed in accordance with the Specifications for “Two-Component Machine-
Mixed Polyurethane Sealant” (State Specification 8030-61J-01).
Polyethylene foam shall be commercial quality, with a continuous impervious, glazed top surface,
suitable for retaining the liquid polyurethane sealant in the joint while hardening.
A primer, furnished by the manufacturer of the sealant, shall be applied to the sides of the groove and
to all exposed vertical surfaces in the joint prior to placing the polyurethane sealant. The primer shall be
dry prior to placing sealant. Contamination of the completed primer with foreign material will be cause
for rejection of the primed surface.
201-3.5 Type “B” Sealant (Preformed Elastomeric Sealant). The sealant shall be a preformed
elastomeric joint seal conforming to specifications of ASTM D2628 and the following requirements:
The manufacturer shall designate the minimum uncompressed width of each size of seal to be
furnished. Any seal which has a minimum uncompressed width, measured at any point in the height of
the seal, less than that designated by the manufacturer shall not be used.
Seals delivered to the Work site that have dimensional or shape tolerances of such magnitude that the
seal will not function as specified shall not be used.
The seal shall consist of a multi-channel, nonporous, homogeneous material furnished in a finished
extruded form, and shall be furnished full length for each joint with no more than one shop splice in any
60 foot (18 m) length of seal. Field splices shall not be used.
The adhesive used to splice the seal shall be an effective bonding agent and shall be resistant to
water and ozone. The lubricant adhesive shall conform to State Specification 701-80-30. All abutting

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
76 Greenbook 2021

surfaces of shop splices shall be bonded together with adhesive. Shop splices shall have no visible
evidence of bond failure.
After the seal has been installed in the joint, shop splices shall have no visible offset of the exterior
surfaces and there shall be no evidence of bond failure at the abutting surfaces of the splices.
At all open ends of the seal, each cell of the elastomeric joint seal shall be filled to a depth of 4
inches (100 mm) with commercial quality open cell polyurethane foam, or closed by other methods
subject to Engineer approval.
Tests of elastomeric joint seals will be conducted in accordance with California Test 673.
201-3.6 NOT USED.
201-3.7 Type “D” Joint Sealant (Hot-Poured Rubber-Asphalt Joint Sealant). Hot-poured
rubber asphalt joint sealants shall conform to requirements of ASTM D6690. They shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation and 303-1.8.7.
201-3.8 Type “E” Joint Sealant (Polysulfide Polymer and Rubber Rod). Polysulfide polymer
type joint sealant shall be a two-component, plastic, rubber-like, cold-applied joint sealant. This
material shall resist the intrusion of foreign materials into the joint throughout repeated cycles of
expansion and contraction.
The joint sealant shall be packaged in sealed containers identified by the name of the manufacturer,
lot number, and date, and bear instructions for mixing and application. Accelerator containers shall be
marked “A”, and polysulfide containers shall be marked “B”. The weight of component “A” in the
mixture shall not be less than 10 percent of component “B”. Minimum polysulfide content of the
mixture shall be 20 percent by weight.
Upon opening the container, component “B” shall not exhibit more than a slight degree of
“skinning” on the surface of the material.
The joint sealant shall conform to the following requirements when laboratory mixed materials are
tested in accordance with California Test 413:

TABLE 201-3.8 (A)

Determination Requirements
Viscosity, 5 minutes after mixing, poises (Pa·s) 200 to 350 (20 to 35)
Application time (pot life or time to reach 2000 poises [200 Pa·s] at 77°F
1
[25°C], hours minimum)
Penetration at 77°F (25°C) after aging 24 hours at 77°F (25°C) 150 maximum
Nonvolatile content, percent 88 minimum

The following tests shall be performed on the mixed material after 96 hours of aging at 77°F (25°C):

TABLE 201-3.8 (B)

Determination Requirements
Penetration at 77°F (25°C) 50 to 120
Penetration at 158°F (70°C) 175 maximum
1
Resilience at 77°F (25°C), percent 70 min., 60 min.
1
Resilience at 158°F (70°C), percent 60 min., 50 min.
Bond to concrete, 100% extension, dry at -20°F (-29°C) No failure
Bond to concrete, 50% extension, wet at -20°F (-29°C) No failure
1. This requirement applied if the penetration at 77°F (25°C), after 96 hours aging at 77°F (25°C) is 100 to 129.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 77

The following test shall be performed on the sample from the resilience test above, oven-aged for 7
Days at 158°F (70°C):

TABLE 201-3.8 (C)

Determination Requirements
1
Resilience of oven-aged sample after 7 Days at 77°F (25°C), percent 70 min., 60 min.
1. This requirement applied if the penetration at 77°F (25°C), after 96 hours aging at 77°F (25°C) is 100 to 129.

The rubber rod shall be a cellular synthetic rubber, either butyl or neoprene, of circular cross section
with continuous skin impervious to water conforming to the requirements shown in Table 201-3.8 (D):

TABLE 201-3.8 (D)

Determination Requirements
Specific gravity (Bulk) 0.30 to 0.50
Surface hardness, Durometer (Fig. 1) ASTM D2240 60 to 85
Water absorption, by weight, 1 inch (25 mm) head at 75°F (24°C), for 24
5 maximum
hours, percent
Resistance to ozone, ASTM D470, except 30 minutes exposure, at 70 ±
No cracks
10 mg/L ozone, at 85°F (29°C)

201-3.9 Test Report and Certification. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
provide at delivery time, certified copies of the vendor’s test report. This shall indicate the vendor name,
type of joint sealant, date and point of delivery, quantity, ticket number, lot number, and results of the
required test. The test report shall be signed by an authorized representative of the vendor.
201-4 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS.
201-4.1 Membrane Curing Compounds.
201-4.1.1 General. Curing compound shall consist of a liquid which, when applied to fresh
concrete, will form a continuous membrane over the exposed surfaces of the concrete.
Curing compounds shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C309 Class B (Resin Type Only),
except the loss of water shall not exceed 0.15 kilogram per square meter in 24 hours nor 0.45 kilogram
per square meter in 72 hours when tested in accordance with ASTM C156.
Concrete curing compounds are designated by type as follows:
Type 1 - Clear or translucent without dye.
Type 1-D - Clear or translucent with fugitive dye.
Type 2 - White pigmented
Unless otherwise stated on the Plans or in the Specifications, Type 1-D shall be used, except that
Type 2 shall be used for the top surface of bridge decks. Curing compounds which contain such
coloration as to be easily visible following application shall be considered as meeting the fugitive dye
requirement.
All compounds shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be delivered ready-mixed in sealed
original containers labeled in accordance with ASTM C309 and with the date of the manufacture. At the
time of use, pigmented curing compounds shall be maintained in a thoroughly mixed condition.
Containers of curing compound shall remain air-tight when not in use.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
78 Greenbook 2021

201-4.1.2 Application. Curing compound shall be applied in 2 coats according to the

manufacturer’s directions and 303-1.10. The direction of application of the second coat shall be
perpendicular to the first. The second coat shall be applied when the first coat is dry to the touch, but not
later than 4 hours after the first coat was applied.
The rate of application shall be such that the compound forms a continuous, unbroken film when
applied to the work and shall not be less than the rate used when tested for water retention.
Application of the curing compound to the concrete shall commence as soon as the finished surface
of the concrete reaches a uniformly damp appearance with no free water on the surface. At any point,
the application rate shall be within 50 square feet per gallon (1.2 m2/L) of the nominal rate and the
average application rate shall be within 25 square feet per gallon (0.6 m2/L) of the nominal rate specified
when tested in accordance with California Test 535.
201-4.2 Sheet Curing Materials.
201-4.2.1 General. Sheet curing materials are designated by type as follows:
Type 1 - Waterproof Paper
Type 2 - Polyethylene Film
Type 3 - White-Burlap-Polyethylene Sheet
Type 4 - Burlap
Types 1, 2, and 3 sheet curing materials shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C171, Standard
Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
201-4.2.2 Burlap. Burlap shall weigh not less than 10 ounces per linear yard, 40 inches wide (305
g/m2).
201-4.3 Test Report and Certification. The Contractor shall provide, when requested by the
Engineer, certified copies of the vendor’s test report showing compliance with ASTM C309 and these
specifications.
201-5 CEMENT MORTAR.
201-5.1 General. Cement mortar shall consist of cement, sand, and water. Cement and sand shall first
be combined in the proper proportions, and then thoroughly mixed with the required amount of water.
Cement mortar shall be designated by class and proportioned by loose volume as shown in
Table 201-5.1.

TABLE 201-5.1
Mortar Designation Class Proportions
Parts Cement Parts Sand
A 1 1
B 1 1-½
C 1 2
D 1 2-½
E 1 3
F 1 3-½

The quantity of water to be used in the preparation of mortar shall be only that required to produce a
mixture sufficiently workable for the purpose intended.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 79

Mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and shall show no visible signs of setting prior
to use. Retempering of mortar will not be permitted.
201-5.2 Cement. Cement shall conform to 201-1.2.1.
201-5.3 Sand. Sand shall conform to requirements of 200-1.5.3. In proportioning the sand it shall
be measured loose (without shaking or compacting) in measuring boxes or other suitable containers of
known capacity.
201-5.4 Water. Water shall conform to 201-1.2.3.
201-5.5 Admixtures. No admixture shall be used in mortar unless approved by the Engineer.
201-6 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM).
201-6.1 Requirements.
201-6.1.1 General. CLSM shall consist of cement, aggregates, water, and fly ash. Chemical
admixtures and other mineral admixtures may be used when approved by the Engineer.
The actual mix proportions and flow characteristics shall be determined by the producer of the
CLSM to meet the Work site conditions and shall be approved by the Engineer. The mixture shall be
workable and non-segregating. When air-entrainment is specified, it shall be evaluated with the actual
materials to be used in the Work.
CLSM that is to be hand excavatable, shall contain aggregate no larger than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) and
the 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) aggregate shall comprise no more than 30 percent of the total aggregate content.
When minimum and/or maximum compressive strength is required, the strength shall be as shown
on the Plans.
201-6.2 Materials
201-6.2.1 Cement. Cement shall conform to the requirements of 201-1.2.1.
201-6.2.2 Aggregates. Aggregates shall conform to the requirements of 201-1.2.2, except as noted
below. Aggregates shall be pretested in CLSM mixtures similar to those anticipated for the Work,
confirming their ability to perform as required for the specific application. Aggregates not in
conformance with 201-1.2.2 may be used when approved by the Engineer, providing the material has a
minimum sand equivalent of 20, the percentage passing the No. 200 (75 mm) sieve does not exceed 12
percent, and the fines are non-plastic.
201-6.2.3 Water. Water shall conform to the requirements of 201-1.2.3.
201-6.2.4 Admixtures. Chemical admixtures shall conform to the requirements of 201-1.2.4, and
may consist of air-entraining agents, water-reducing admixtures, and other chemical additives.
Chemical admixtures shall be approved by the Engineer.
Mineral admixtures other than fly ash may be used when approved by the Engineer.
201-6.2.5 Fly Ash. Fly ash shall conform to the requirements of 201-1.2.5, except it shall not be
limited to 20 percent by weight of the total cementitious material. Class C fly ash shall not be used.
201-6.3 Proportioning.
201-6.3.1 General. Proportioning shall conform to requirements of 201-1.3.1. When CLSM is
used underneath a paved public right of way, the mixture shall contain a minimum of 25 pounds per
cubic yard (15 kg/m3) of cement when using washed concrete sand.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
80 Greenbook 2021

201-6.4 Mixing.
201-6.4.1 General. Mixing shall conform to the requirements of 201-1.4, except the 90-minute
time limit specified in 201-1.4 shall not apply. Unless otherwise specified, under conditions
contributing to quick setting the Engineer may specify a time limit, not to exceed 2-1/2 hours.
201-6.5 Testing. CLSM shall be tested for plastic unit weight. Plastic unit weight shall not deviate
more than ± 10 percent of theoretical unit weight shown on the approved mix design. Unit weight shall
be determined in accordance with ASTM C138. When a compressive strength is specified on the Plans,
a compressive strength test shall be performed as directed by the Engineer.
201-6.6 Placement.
201-6.6.1 General. CLSM may be placed by chutes, conveyors, buckets, pumps or tremies
depending upon the application and accessibility.
For trench backfill, CLSM shall be placed continuously. To contain CLSM when filling long
open trenches or open-ended structures in stages, the end points shall be adequately bulkheaded to
prevent movement. Methods may include bulkheading with sandbags, earth dams, forms, or stiffer
mixtures of CLSM.
For bedding, CLSM shall be placed in a manner to prevent flotation or displacement of the
embedded item. Methods of preventing flotation or displacement may include placement of CLSM in
lifts or, at strategic locations, placing sandbags, straps anchored into soil, faster setting CLSM, or lower
slump CLSM over the embedded item.
201-6.7 Replacing Pavement.
201-6.7.1 General. Pavement may be placed directly upon the CLSM as soon as the surface will
withstand the paving process without displacement or disruption. If the placement of the CLSM is not
completed in time to allow permanent paving to be completed the same day, the Contractor shall prevent
traffic contact with the CLSM until paving is completed.
201-7 NON-MASONRY GROUT.
201-7.1 General. Non-masonry grouts are composed of hydraulic cement, fine aggregate, and other
ingredients. Quick-setting grouts may be used for setting posts and anchors in concrete or masonry.
Non-shrink grout is typically used for setting bearing plates.
201-7.2 Quick-Setting Grout. Quick-setting grout shall be a high strength nonstaining grout
approved by the Engineer. It shall reach an initial set within 90 minutes at 70°F (21°C) and reach
minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi (17.2 MPa) within 24 hours. Shrinking shall be less than
0.1 percent when tested, using the test procedures of ASTM C596. The grout shall be mixed, handled
and placed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
201-7.3. Non-Shrink Grout. Non-shrink grout shall be a high strength nonstaining grout approved
by the Engineer and meeting the requirements of ASTM C1107. The grout shall be mixed, handled and
placed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
201-8 SOIL-CEMENT.
201-8.1 General. Soil-cement shall consist of a mixture of soil, Portland cement, and water mixed
at a central mixing plant, in-place, or off-road. The required 7-Day compressive strength shall be as
shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 81

201-8.2 Materials.
201-8.2.1 Soil. Unless otherwise specified, soil shall conform to the following requirements when
tested in accordance with ASTM C136:
a) 100 percent shall pass the 2-inch (50 mm) sieve.
b) Not less than 95 percent shall pass the 1 inch (25 mm) sieve.
c) Not less than 55 percent shall pass the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve.
d) Not more than 20 percent shall pass the No. 200 (75 µm) sieve.
e) The SE shall be 15 or greater when tested in accordance with ASTM D2419.
201-8.2.2 Portland Cement. Portland cement shall be Type II/V conforming to 201-1.2.1.
Supplementary cementitious materials shall not be substituted for any portion of the required Portland
cement content.
201-8.2.3 Water. Water shall conform to 201-1.2.3.
201-8.3 Mix Design(s). The materials shall be tested and the mix design(s) developed in
accordance with ASTM D558. Compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with ASTM
D1633, Method A.
The mix design(s) shall show:
a) the amount and gradation of the soil to be treated,
b) the amount and type of Portland cement,
c) the amount of water, and
d) the 7-Day compressive strength attained.
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the mix design(s) will be prepared by the
Agency.
201-8.4 Mixing.
201-8.4.1 General. Mixing shall be performed at a central mixing plant, in-place, or off-road.
The quantity of water added shall be adjusted to produce a moisture content between 1 percent below
and 3 percent above the optimum moisture content.
The soil and Portland cement shall be sufficiently mixed so as to prevent balls from being formed
when water is added. Mixing shall continue until a homogeneous mixture of uniformly distributed and
coated soil-cement of unchanging appearance is produced. After mixing has been completed, no
additional water shall be added to the soil-cement mixture unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
201-8.4.2 Central Mixing Plant.
201-[Link] General. Central mixing plants shall be either batch-type rotary-drum plants or
continuous pugmill plants.
Each plant shall be equipped with a screen or other device capable of removing any oversized material
greater than 3 inches (75 mm) and facilities for weighing samples to be used for calibrating gate openings.
Central mixing plants shall be equipped with weighing and metering devices capable of introducing
the soil, Portland cement, and water into the mixer in the proportions conforming to the mix design,
combining the materials into a uniform mixture, and discharging the mixture without segregation.
Weighing and metering devices shall be electronically controlled, computer-interlocked and
synchronized so as to maintain a constant ratio between the soil, Portland cement, and water.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
82 Greenbook 2021

Water shall be so proportioned and recorded such that the Engineer can readily verify the amount or
rate of the flow of water being used. Water shall not be weighed or measured cumulatively with the soil
or Portland cement.
The weight of soil, Portland cement, and water shall be within 3 percent of the amounts specified in
the approved mix design.
201-[Link] Storage and Handling. The soil to be treated, Portland cement and water shall be
stored separately and proportioned by weight.
The soil to be treated and Portland cement shall be:
a) handled so as to not cause segregation or degradation,
b) stored in bins and tight containers such that the materials will not overflow into adjacent bins, and
c) drawn from storage bins by means of separately adjustable calibrated gates and openings.
201-[Link] Batch-Type Rotary-Drum Plants. Batch-type rotary-drum plants shall be equipped
with automatic proportioning devices and a proportioning control system. All weight increments
required for a batch shall be pre-set on the controls at the same time. Bin discharge shall be interlocked
so that only one bin can discharge onto a given scale at one time and that a new batch may not be started
until all weigh hoppers are empty, the scales are at zero, and the discharge gates are closed. Gates shall
be arranged so that the amount of each material can be separately adjusted. The interlock shall prevent
the weigh box from discharging until the required quantities of materials are weighed and filled. The
charge shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall produce a complete and
homogeneous mixture.
201-[Link] Continuous Pugmill Plants. Each material shall be uniformly, continuously and
simultaneously introduced into a continuous pugmill plant. The materials shall be drawn from storage
bins, hoppers or silos by means of a continuous feeder through adjustable calibrated gates, belts, augers
or other material transfer devices. The proportioning devices shall be such that the rate of feed for the
soil, Portland cement, and water can be determined while the plant is in operation. A positive signal
system shall be provided to indicate when the level of material in each bin approaches the “strikeoff”
capacity of the feed gate. The plant shall not be operated unless this signal system is in working
condition. The rate of feed shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall produce a
complete and homogeneous mixture.
201-8.4.3 In-Place and Off-Road Mixing. In-place and off-road mixing shall conform to 301-[Link].
201-8.5 Transporting. Unless otherwise specified, soil-cement shall be transported in dump trucks.
Dump truck beds shall be equipped with a retractable cover and not allow seepage of water from the
mixture. Each load shall be covered. The haul time shall not exceed 45 minutes.
201-8.6 Acceptance. Acceptance of soil-cement mixtures produced at a central mixing plant will
be based on conformance to the Specifications.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 83

201-9 CEMENT TREATED BASE (CTB).

201-9.1 General. CTB shall consist of a mixture of untreated base material, Portland cement, and
water mixed at a central mixing plant or in-place. The required 7-Day compressive strength shall be as
shown on the Plans or as specified in the Special Provisions.
201-9.2 Materials.
201-9.2.1 Untreated Base Material. Untreated base material to be treated shall be crushed
aggregate base conforming to 200-2.3, crushed miscellaneous base conforming to 200-2.4, or pulverized
miscellaneous base conforming to 200-2.5, except the sand equivalent shall be a minimum of 18 when
tested in accordance with ASTM D2419.
201-9.2.2 Portland Cement. Portland cement shall be Type II/V conforming to 201-1.2.1.
Supplementary cementitious materials shall not be substituted for Portland cement.
201-9.2.3 Water. Water shall conform to 201-1.2.3.
201-9.3 Mix Design(s). The materials shall be tested and the mix design(s) developed in
accordance with ASTM D1557. Compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with ASTM
D1633, Method A, except:
a) Test specimens shall be compacted in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method A or B.
b) Test specimens shall be cured by sealing each specimen with 2 layers of plastic at least 4 mils
thick. The plastic must be tight around the specimen. All seams shall be sealed with duct tape.
Sealed specimens shall be placed in an oven for 7 Days at 100 ± 5ºF (38 ± 3ºC). At the end of the
cure period, specimens shall be removed from the oven and air-cooled. Duct tape and plastic
wrap shall be removed before capping. Specimens shall not be soaked before testing.
The mix design(s) shall show:
a) the amount and gradation of the base material to be treated,
b) the amount and type of Portland cement,
c) the amount of water, and
d) the 7-Day compressive strength attained.
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the mix design(s) will be prepared by the Agency.
201-9.4 Mixing. Mixing shall conform to 201-8.4.
201-9.5 Transporting. Transporting shall conform to 201-8.5.
201-9.6 Acceptance. Acceptance of cement treated base mixtures produced at a central mixing
plant will be based on conformance to the Specifications.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
84 Greenbook 2021

SECTION 202 - MASONRY MATERIALS

202-1 BRICK.
202-1.1 General. Brick shall be whole, sound, hard, burned, give a clear ringing sound when struck
together, and be uniform in quality. Brick shall be culled or sorted before delivery to the Work site. Mortar
used in brick construction shall be Class “D” conforming to 202-3.1. Grout used in brick construction shall
conform to 202-3.2. Fine grout shall be used in spaces less than 2 inches (50 mm) clear in any dimension.
Coarse grout shall be used in spaces 2 inches (50 mm) or larger in all horizontal directions.
202-1.2 Manhole Brick. Sewer manhole brick shall conform to ASTM C62, Grade MW, modified
as follows:
a) The average compressive strength of 5 bricks shall not be less than 4,000 pounds per square inch
(28 MPa) and the compressive strength of any individual brick shall not be less than 3,500
pounds per square inch (24 MPa).
b) The absorption of any individual brick shall not be more than 16 percent when submerged 24
hours in cold water.
c) Dimensions shall conform to the following:

TABLE 202-1.2
Depth inches (mm) Width inches (mm) Length inches (mm)
Standard Size 2-1/2 (64) 3-7/8 (98) 8-1/4 (210)
Allowed Variation ± 1/4 (± 6) ± 3/8 (± 10) ± 1/2 (± 13)

d) Plaster for brick sewer structures shall be Class “D” mortar conforming to 201-5.1.

202-1.3 Building Brick. Building brick shall conform to ASTM C62, Grade MW. The size and texture
shall be as shown on the Plans, as specified in the Special Provisions, or as approved by the Engineer.
202-1.4 Facing Brick. Facing brick shall conform to ASTM C216, Grade MW, Type FBS. The
size, color, and texture shall be as shown on the Plans, as specified in the Special Provisions, or as
approved by the Engineer.
202-2 CONCRETE BLOCK.
202-2.1 General. Mortar used in concrete block construction shall be Class “D” or “E” conforming
to 202-3.1. Grout used in concrete block construction shall conform to 202-3.2. Fine grout shall be used
in spaces less than 4 inches (100 mm) clear in any dimension. Coarse grout shall be used in spaces 4
inches (100 mm) or larger in all horizontal directions.
202-2.2 Masonry Units. Masonry units shall be made with sand-gravel aggregate and conform to
ASTM C90. The net size of the units shall be as indicated on the Plans. Unless otherwise specified in
the Special Provisions, all units shall be of the normal weight classification (oven-dry weight of concrete
125 pounds per cubic foot (2000 kg/m3) or more).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 85

202-3 MORTAR, GROUT, AND WATER.

202-3.1 Mortar.
202-3.1.1 General. Mortar for masonry units shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 1,800
pounds per square inch (13 MPa) in 28 Days when tested in accordance with ASTM C109 unless
otherwise specified. A mortar of higher strength shall not be substituted where a mortar of lower
strength is required. When structural reinforcement is incorporated, the air content of the mortar shall
not exceed 12 percent. Air content shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C91 except that the
laboratory mixed mortar shall utilize material sources and proportions proposed to be used in the Work.
202-3.1.2 Site Mixed Mortar. Mortar shall be specified by class in accordance with 201-5.1. Sand
shall conform to 200-1.5.5. The cementitious material shall consist of one of the following:
a) 1/4 to 1/2 part hydrated lime or lime putty added to cement conforming to 201-1.2.1(a); or
b) Type S or Type M mortar cement conforming to ASTM C1329.
202-3.1.3 Preblended Dry Mortar Mix. Preblended dry mortar mix shall conform to ASTM C1714.
202-3.2 Grout.
202-3.2.1 General.
a) Grout shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 2,000 pounds per square inch (14 MPa) in
28 Days.
b) Grout shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1019.
202-3.2.2 Site-Mixed Grout.
a) Site-mixed grout shall be proportioned by volume.
b) Fine grout shall be 1 part cement and 2-1/4 to 3 parts sand to which 1/10 part hydrated lime may
be added.
c) Coarse grout used in brick construction shall be 1 part cement, 2 to 3 parts sand, and not more
than 2 parts No. 4 concrete aggregate.
d) Coarse grout used in concrete block construction shall be 1 part cement, 2 to 3 parts sand, and 1-
3/4 to 2 parts No. 4 concrete aggregate.
202-3.2.3 Ready-Mixed Grout.
a) Ready-mixed grout shall conform to 201-1.
b) Fine grout shall consist of a minimum of 750 pounds per cubic yard (445 kg/m3) of cement, sand,
and sufficient water to achieve a 10-inch (250 mm) slump. Admixtures may be used as specified
in the Special Provisions or as approved by the Engineer.
c) Coarse grout shall conform to Table 201-1.1.2 for “Coarse Masonry Grout.”
202.-3.3 Water. Water shall conform to 201-1.2.3. The quantity of water to be used in the
preparation of the mortar or grout shall be the minimum required to produce a mixture sufficiently
workable for the purpose intended.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
86 Greenbook 2021

SECTION 203 - BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

203-1 PAVING ASPHALT.

203-1.1 General. Paving asphalt shall be steam-refined asphalt produced from crude asphaltic
petroleum or a mixture of refined liquid asphalt and refined solid asphalt. It shall be homogeneous and
free from water and residues from distillation of coal, coal tar, or paraffin oil.
203-1.2 Testing Requirements. Paving asphalt shall be specified by performance grade and shall
conform to the requirements shown in Table 203-1.2.

TABLE 203-1.2

Grade AASHTO Test PG 64-10 PG 64-16 PG 64-28 PG 70-10

Original Binder
Flash Point, °C, minimum T48 230 230 230 230
Solubility, %, minimum T44 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0
1
Viscosity, 135°C, Pa·s, maximum T316 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Dynamic Shear Test Temperature, °C T315 64 64 64 70
Dynamic Shear, 10 rad/s, G*/Sinδ, kPa, minimum T315 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
RTFO Aged Binder (T240)
Mass Loss, %, maximum T240 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Dynamic Shear Test Temperature, °C T315 64 64 64 70
Dynamic Shear, 10 rad/s, G*/Sinδ, kPa, minimum T315 2.20 2.20 2.20 2.20
Ductility, 25°C, 5 cm/min, cm, minimum T51 75 75 75 75
RTFO and PAV Aged Binder (R28)
PAV Aging Temperature, °C R28 100 100 100 110
2 2 2 2
Dynamic Shear Test Temperature, °C T315 31 28 22 34
Dynamic Shear, 10 rad/s, G*/Sinδ, kPa, maximum T315 5000 5000 5000 5000
Bending Beam Test Temperature, °C T313 0 -6 -18 0
Creep Stiffness, MPa, maximum T313 300 300 300 300
m-value, minimum T313 0.300 0.300 0.300 0.300
1. This requirement may be waived by the Engineer if the supplier warrants that the paving asphalt can be adequately pumped and mixed
at temperatures that meet all applicable safety standards.
2. If the PAV aged binder exceeds 5000 kPa at the designated test temperature, it will be deemed acceptable if it is less than 5000 kPa
when tested at a 3°C higher test temperature.

203-1.3 Test Reports and Certification. Paving asphalt shall be supplied by Caltrans or other
State Department of Transportation approved vendors unless otherwise specified in the Special
Provisions. At delivery time, the supplying vendor shall deliver to the purchaser a certified copy of the
test report. This report shall indicate the vendor’s name, grade of paving asphalt delivered, date and
point of delivery, quantity delivered, ticket number, purchase order number, and results of specified
tests. The certified test report and the testing required in connection with the report shall be submitted in
accordance with 3-8.4.
Until the certified test report and samples of the material have been reviewed by the Engineer to
determine their conformity with the specified requirements, the material to which such report relates and
any work in which it may have been incorporated as an integral component, will be only tentatively

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 87

accepted by the Agency. Final acceptance will be dependent upon the determination by the Engineer
that the material involved conforms to the Specifications.
203-1.4 Temperatures. Paving asphalt shall not be heated during its manufacture, storage, or
during construction so as to cause formation of carbonized particles. At no time shall the temperature be
higher than 10°F (5°C) below the actual flash point of the paving asphalt, nor shall it be raised above
375°F (190°C) after loading into a tank car or truck for transport.
Unless otherwise specified, the various grades of paving asphalt shall be applied within the
temperature range indicated in Table 203-1.4.

TABLE 203-1.4
Asphalt Plant Mixing Temperature Distribution Application Temperature
Grade °F (°°C) °F (°°C)
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
PG 70-10 300 (150) 350 (175) 285 (140) 350 (175)
PG 64-28 275 (135) 325 (160) 285 (140) 350 (175)
PG 64-16 275 (135) 325 (160) 285 (140) 350 (175)
PG 64-10 275 (135) 325 (160) 285 (140) 350 (175)

Paving asphalt shall be heated in such a manner that no steam or hot oils will be introduced into the
paving asphalt during heating. The Contractor shall furnish and keep on-site an accurate thermometer
suitable for determining the temperature of the paving asphalt.
203-1.5 Distributing Equipment. Distributing equipment shall conform to 203-2.5.
203-1.6 Measurement and Payment. For all volumetric quantities to be paid for at a Contract Unit
Price, the unit of measurement shall be U.S. gallon (L) at a temperature of 60°F (15°C).
In converting weight to volume, computations shall be based on Table 203-1.6.

TABLE 203-1.6
Grade of Material Gallons Per Ton At 60°F Lbs. Per Gallon At 60°F
(L/tonne At 15°C) (g/L At 15°C)
PG 70-10 235 (981) 8.51 (1020)
PG 64-28 235 (981) 8.51 (1020)
PG 64-16 235 (981) 8.51 (1020)
PG 64-10 235 (981) 8.51 (1020)

203-2 LIQUID ASPHALT.

203-2.1 General. Liquid asphalt shall conform to the following classifications:
a) Slow curing products, designated by the letters SC, shall consist of natural crude oils or residual
oils from refining of crude asphaltic petroleum, or products resulting from fluxing of a paving
asphalt with a light oil.
b) Medium curing products, (MC), shall consist of a paving asphalt conforming to provisions in
203-1, fluxed or blended with a kerosene-type solvent.
c) Rapid curing products (RC), shall consist of a paving asphalt conforming to provisions in 203-1,
fluxed or blended with a naphtha solvent.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
88 Greenbook 2021

203-2.2 Test Reports and Certifications. Test reports and certifications will be furnished in
accordance with 203-1.3.
203-2.3 Temperatures. Liquid asphalt shall not be heated during its manufacture, storage, or
during construction so as to cause the formation of carbonized particles.
At no time after loading for transportation from the refinery to the purchaser, unless authorized by
the Engineer, shall the temperature of liquid asphalt be raised above that shown in the last column of
Table 206-2.3 and in no case shall the temperature be higher than 10°F (5°C) below flash point. Unless
authorized by the Engineer, no liquid asphalt, except tack coats, shall be applied when the air
temperature is lower than 40°F (5°C).
Unless otherwise specified, the various grades of liquid asphalt shall be applied within the
temperature range shown in Table 203-2.3.

TABLE 203-2.3
Pugmill Mixing Temp. for MC Distributor Application
All Type of
& SC Liquid Asphalts, °F (°C) Temperature, °F (°C)
Liquid Asphalt
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
70 90 (30) 155 (70) 105 (40) 175 (80)
250 125 (50) 200 (90) 140 (60) 225 (110)
800 160 (70) 225 (105) 175 (80) 225 (125)
3000 200 (95) 260 (125) 215 (100) 290 (145)

Liquid asphalt shall be heated in such a manner that no steam or hot oils will be introduced into the
asphalt. The Contractor shall furnish and keep on the site an accurate thermometer suitable for
determining the temperature of the asphalt.
203-2.4 Test Requirements. Liquid asphalt shall conform to the requirements shown in the
following tables:

TABLE 203-2.4 (A): SLOW CURING PRODUCTS

ASTM Grade
Test Description
Test No. SC 70 SC 250 SC 800 SC 3000
Flash Point, C.O.C. °F (°C), Min. D92 150 (65) 175 (80) 200 (90) 225 (105)
2
Viscosity at 140°F (60°C) Kinematics, mm /s (cSt) D2170 70-140 250-500 800-1600 3000-6000
Distillation Total Dist. to 680°F (360°C) Vol. % D402 10-30 4-20 2-12 0-5
2
Kinematic Viscosity on Residue at 140°F (60°C) mm /s (cSt) D2170 400-7000 800-8500 2002-14000 4000-35000
Asphalt Residue of 100 Pen., % Min. D243 50 60 70 80
Ductility of Asphalt Residue at 77°F (25°C) mm, Min. D113 1000 1000 1000 1000
Solubility in trichloroethylene, % Min. D2042 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5
Water, % Max. D95 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Heptane Xylene Equivalent, % Max. (AASHTO T102) 35 35 35 35

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 89

TABLE 203-2.4 (B): MEDIUM CURING PRODUCTS

ASTM Grade
Test Description
Test No. MC 70 MC 250 MC 800 MC 3000
Flash Point (Tag Open Cup) °F (°C) Min. D3143 100 (40) 150 (65) 150 (65) 150 (65)
2
Viscosity at 140°F (60°C) Kinematic, mm /s (cSt) D2170 70-140 250-500 800-1600 3000-6000
Distillation Distillate [% of total distillate to 680°F (360°C) ] D402
To 437°F (225°C) 0-20 0-10 0-3 0-2
To 500°F (260°C) 20-60 15-55 0-35 0-75
To 600°F (315°C) 65-90 60-87 45-80 15-75
Residue from distillation to 680°F (360°C)
55 67 75 80
Volume percent by difference, Min.
Tests on Residue from Distillation Penetration at 77°F (25°C), 0.1 mm D5 120-250 120-250 120-250 120-250
1
Ductility, 77°F (25°C) mm, Min. D113 1000 1000 1000 1000
Solubility in trichloroethylene, % Min. D2042 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5
Water, % Max. D95 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
Heptane Xylene Equiv., % Max. (AASHTO T102) — 35 35 35 35
1. If penetration of residue is more than 200 and its ductility at 77°F (25°C) is less than 1000, the material will be acceptable if the ductility at
60°F (15°C) is greater than 1000 mm.

TABLE 203-2.4 (C): RAPID CURING PRODUCTS

ASTM Grade
Test Description
Test No. RC 70 RC 250 RC 800 RC 3000
Flash Point (Tag Open Cup)°F (°C), Min. D3143 — 80 (27) 80 (27) 80 (27)
2
Viscosity at 140°F (60°C) Kinematic mm /s (cSt) D2170 70-140 250-500 800-1600 3000-6000
Distillation Distillate [% of total distillate to 680°F (360°C), Min.] D402
To 374°F (190°C) 10 — — —
To 437°F (225°C) 50 35 15 —
To 500°F (260°C) 70 60 45 25
To 600°F (315°C) 85 80 75 70
Residue from Distillation to 680°F (360°C) Volume
55 65 75 80
percent by difference, Min.
Tests on Residue from Distillation Penetration at
D5 80-120 80-120 80-120 80-120
77°F (25°C), 0.1 mm
1
Ductility, 77°F (25°C) mm, Min. D113 1000 1000 1000 1000
Solubility in trichloroethylene, % Min. D2042 99.5 99.5 99.5 99.5
Water, % Max. D95 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
Heptane Xylene Equiv., % Max. (AASHTO T102) — 35 35 35 35

203-2.5 Distributing Equipment. Distributors shall be of the pressure type with insulated tanks
and shall be equipped with the following:
a) A tachometer of the auxiliary wheel type which registers speed in feet (m) per minute.
b) Charts and devices to provide for accurate and rapid determination and control of the amount of
asphalt being applied.
c) A hose and nozzle attachment to be used for areas inaccessible to the spray bar.
d) A pressure gage for determining application pressure.
e) A thermometer for determining temperature of the asphalt.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
90 Greenbook 2021

Distributors and booster tanks shall be so maintained as to prevent dripping of asphalt from any part
of the equipment.
Spray bars shall have a minimum length of 9 feet (2.7 m). Spray bars and extensions shall be the full
circulating type and be adjustable to permit varying height above the surface to be treated.
The nozzles attached to the bar shall be either conical or flat slotted. The distance center to center
shall not exceed 6 inches (150 mm). The valves which control the flow from nozzles shall be of a
positive acting design so as to provide a uniform unbroken spread of asphalt. Valves shall be operated
so that all may be simultaneously opened or closed. Each valve shall also be capable of similar
independent control.
Spreading equipment shall be so designed and articulated that uniform application of the asphalt may
be made ranging from 0.02 to 1.0 gallon per square yard (0.1 L/m2 to 4.5 L/m2) of surface and with a
range of pressure from 25 to 75 psi (170 kPa to 515 kPa).
Equipment which fails to produce a satisfactory distribution of asphalt, as determined by the
Engineer, shall not be used.
Application of asphalt will not be permitted when, as determined by the Engineer, the surface to be
treated is damp or weather conditions are unsuitable.
203-2.6 Measurement and Payment. For all volumetric quantities to be paid for at Contract Unit
Price, the unit measure shall be the U.S. gallon (L) at a temperature of 60°F (15°C).
In converting weight to volume, computations are based on the following:

TABLE 203-2.6
Gallons per Ton (L/tonne) Pounds per Gallon
Grade of Material
@ 60°F (15°C) (g/L) @ 60°F (15°C)
70 253 (1056) 7.90 (947)
250 249 (1039) 8.03 (962)
800 245 (1022) 8.16 (978)
3000 241 (1006) 8.30 (995)

All types SC, MC, and RC of the same grade shall be considered to have equal weights per volume.
203-3 EMULSIFIED ASPHALT.
203-3.1 General. Emulsified asphalt shall be composed of a paving asphalt base emulsified with
water. Emulsified asphalt may also contain crumb rubber and/or polymer. Emulsified asphalt shall
remain homogeneous during storage.
203-3.2 Water. Water used in emulsifying paving asphalt shall be potable, free from harmful
soluble salts and compatible with the other components.
203-3.3 Polymer. Polymer shall be a neoprene polymer or a styrene and butadiene copolymer.
Water-based SBR solids shall be 65 +/- 5 percent by weight of the SBR emulsion unless otherwise
specified.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 91

203-3.4 Physical Properties.

203-3.4.1 General. Emulsified asphalt shall be anionic, cationic, polymer modified, or rubberized
polymer modified.
203-3.4.2 Anionic Emulsified Asphalt. Anionic emulsified asphalt shall conform to the
requirements shown in Table 203-3.4.2.

TABLE 203-3.4.2
ASTM Rapid Setting Slow Setting
Test Test
RS-1 RS-2 SS-1 SS-1h
Description Method
No. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Furol Viscosity at 77ºF (25ºC), sec. D7496 20 100 20 100 20 100
Furol Viscosity at 122ºF (50ºC), sec. D7496 75 400
1
Settlement 5 Days, % D6930 5 5 5 5
Storage Stability 1 Day D6930 1 1 1 1
Demulsibility (5 mL 0.02 N CaCl2), % D6936 60 60
Sieve Test (Retained on No. 20 (850 µm),% D6933 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10
Cement Mixing Test, % D6935 2.0 2.0
Residue from Distillation, % D6997 55 63 57 57
2 2
Penetration of residue at 77ºF (25ºC), 0.1 mm D5 100 200 100 200 100 200 40 90
Solubility of residue,% D2042 97.5 97.5 97.5 97.5
Ductility of residue at 77ºF (25ºC), mm D113 400 400 400 400
1. The test requirements for settlement may be waived when the emulsified asphalt is used in less than 5 days of time, or the Engineer may
require that the settlement test be run from the time the sample is received until it is used, when the elapsed time is less than 5 Days.
2. A harder base asphalt meeting current paving asphalt specifications may be specified with the provision that the test requirements on the
Residue from Distillation test be waived.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
92 Greenbook 2021

203-3.4.3 Cationic Emulsified Asphalt. Cationic emulsified asphalt shall conform to the
requirements shown in Table 203-3.4.3.

TABLE 203-3.4.3
Quick
Rapid Setting Medium Setting Slow Setting
ASTM Set
Test Description
Test CRS-1 CRS-2 CMS-2 CMS-2h CSS-1 CSS-1h CQS-1h
Method Min. Min. Min. Min. Min. Min. Min.
No. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max.
20 20 15
Furol Viscosity at 77ºF (25ºC), sec. D7496
100 100 90
20 100 50 50
Furol Viscosity at 122ºF (50ºC), sec. D7496
100 400 450 450

Settlement1, 5 Days, % D6930 5 5 5 5 5 5

Storage Stability Test, 1 Day, %

D6930 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Demulsibility 35 mL 0.8% sodium dactyl

D6936
sulfosuccinate, % 40 40

Sieve Test (Retained on No. 20 (850 µm)

sieve) D6933 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.30
Coating ability and water resistance:
D244
Coating, dry aggregate Good Good
Coating, after spraying Fair Fair
Coating, wet aggregate Fair Fair
Coating, after spraying Fair Fair
Particle Charge Test3 D7402 Positive Positive Positive Positive Positive Positive3 Positive
Cement Mixing Test, % D6935
2.0 2.0
Oil distillate by vol. of emulsion, % D6997
3 3 12 12
Residue from Distillation, %
D6997 60 65 65 65 57 57 60
1002 1002 100 40 100 40 45
Penetration of residue, at 77ºF (25ºC), 0.1 mm D5
250 250 250 90 250 90 80
Solubility of residue, % D2042 97.5 97.5 97.5 97.5 97.5 97.5 97.5
Ductility of residue 77ºF (25ºC), mm D113 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
1. The test requirements for settlement may be waived when the emulsified asphalt is used in less than 5 Days of time or the Engineer may
require that the settlement test be run from the time the sample is received until it is used if the elapsed time is less than 5 Days.
2. A harder base asphalt meeting current paving asphalt specifications may be specified with the provision that the requirements on the
Residue from Distillation test be waived.
3. Must meet pH requirements of 6.7 maximum (ASTM E70) if the Particle Charge Test results are inconclusive.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 93

203-3.4.4 Rubberized Polymer Modified Emulsion (RPME).

203-[Link] General. RPME shall consist of a mixture of emulsified asphalt, crumb rubber, and polymer.
RPME shall contain between 0.55 pounds per gallon (66 g/L) and 0.65 pounds per gallon (78 g/L) of crumb
rubber. Polymer shall constitute a minimum of 2 percent by weight of RPME.
Crumb rubber shall:
a) be granulated scrap tire rubber free from fabric, wires, and other contaminants
b) be dry and free flowing;
c) have a specific gravity between 1.15 and 1.20; and
d) have a gradation of 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18 mm) sieve, 95 percent passing the
No. 20 (850 µm) sieve, and a maximum of 1 percent passing the No. 200 (75 µm) sieve.
Calcium carbonate or talc may be added to a maximum of 4 percent by dry weight of crumb
rubber to prevent the rubber particles from sticking together.
203-[Link] Composition. RPME shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 203-[Link].

TABLE 203-[Link]
Requirement
ASTM Test
Tests Method Min. Max.
Viscosity, 77ºF (25ºC), Brookfield, Model RVT #6 Spindle @ 10 D2196 4,000 12,000
RPM (Centipoise) @ 60 sec.

Residue by Evaporation % (including fillers) D6934 50 55

Sieve Test (% retained on No. 20 (850 µm) sieve) D6933 --- 2.0
1

Penetration of Residue, 77ºF (25ºC), 0.1 mm, D5 15 30

Solubility of Residue D2042 75 ---

Weight lbs/gallon (g/L) 77ºF± 1ºF (25ºC ± 5ºC) D1475 8.33 lbs/gal 8.75 lbs/gal
(1000 g/L) (1050 g/L)
Asphalt Content
2 --- 40 ---

1. Sieve test of original emulsion is 0.10 max.

2. Asphalt Content shall be determined by multiplying Residue by Evaporation by Solubility of Residue.

203-3.4.5 Polymer Modified Emulsion (PME). PME shall conform to the requirements shown in
Table 203-3.4.5 (A). Quick-set PME shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 203-3.4.5 (B).
PME shall be sampled in accordance with AASHTO T 40.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
94 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 203-3.4.5 (A): POLYMER MODIFIED EMULSION

Type Anionic Cationic
Grade PMRS-2 PMRS-2h PMCRS-2 PMCRS-2h
Properties Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Tests on emulsions: Test Method -- --
Saybolt Furol Viscosity, @ 50 ºC, SFS1 75 300 75 300 75 300 75 300
Settlement, 5 Days, % -- 5 -- 5 -- 5 -- 5
Storage Stability, 1 Day, % -- 1 -- 1 -- 1 -- 1
Sieve Test, % -- 0.30 -- 0.30 -- 0.30 -- 0.30
Demulsibility, % 602 -- 602 -- 403 -- 403 --
Particle Charge
Ash Content, % ASTM D723 -- 0.2 -- 0.2 -- 0.2 -- 0.2
Residue by Evaporation, % AASHTO T 59 65 -- 65 -- 65 -- 65 --
Test on residue from evaporation: AASHTO T 59
Penetration, 25ºC AASHTO T 49 100 200 40 90 100 200 40 90
Ductility, 25ºC, mm AASHTO T 51 400 -- 400 -- 400 -- 400 --
Elastic Recovery, % AASHTO T 301 50 -- 50 -- 50 -- 50 --
Softening Point, ºF AASHTO T 53 -- -- 135 -- -- -- 135 --

1. SFS means Saybolt Furol seconds.

2. Use 35 ml of 0.02 normality CaCL2 solution.
3. Use 35 ml of 0.8% sodium dioctyl sulfosuccinate solution.
4. PME shall contain a minimum of 2.5 percent polymer by weight of residual asphalt.

TABLE 203-3.4.5 (B): QUICK-SET POLYMER MODIFIED EMULSION (PMCQS-1h)

Value
Property Test Method
Min. Max.
Tests on emulsion:
1
Saybolt Furol Viscosity @ 25 ºC, SFS AASHTO T 59 15 90
Sieve test, % AASHTO T 59 -- 0.30
Storage stability, 1 day, % AASHTO T 59 -- 1
Residue by evaporation, % AASHTO T 59 60 --
Particle charge AASHTO T 59 Positive
Tests on residue by evaporation:
Penetration, 25 ºC AASHTO T 49 40 90
Ductility, 25 ºC, mm AASHTO T 51 400 --
Elastic Recovery, % AASHTO T 301 50 --
Softening Point, ºF AASHTO T 53 135 --
1. SFS means Saybolt Furol seconds.
2. PME shall contain a minimum of 2.5 percent polymer by weight of residual asphalt.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 95

203-3.4.6 Microsurfacing Emulsion (MSE). MSE shall be a quick-set, homogeneous, polymer-

modified, cationic asphalt emulsion. MSE shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 203-3.4.6.

TABLE 203-3.4.6
Test Test Method Requirement
Viscosity @ 25°C, SSF AASHTO T 59 15-90 sec
Sieve Test, max. AASHTO T 59 0.30%
Settlement, 5 days, max. AASHTO T 59 5%
Storage Stability, 1 day, max. AASHTO T 59 1%
Residue by Evaporation, min. AASHTO T 59 62%

Tests on Residue:
Test Test Method Requirement
o
Penetration @ 77 F (25ºC) AASHTO T 49 40-90
o
Softening Point, min. AASHTO T 53 135 F (57ºC)
Elastic Recovery, min. AASHTO T 301 50

Polymers shall be milled or blended into the asphalt or blended into the emulsifier solution prior to
the emulsification process. MSE shall contain a minimum of 3 percent polymer solids based on the
weight of residual asphalt.
The 5-Day settlement test may be waived, provided MSE stored for use on the Work site is used
within 36 hours from the time of shipment.
A Certificate of Compliance for each shipment of MSE delivered to the Work site shall be submitted
to the Engineer.
203-3.5 Certificate of Compliance. A Certificate of Compliance shall be sent with each load of
emulsified asphalt to be delivered to the Work or production site.
Test data for each property specified shall be submitted upon request. The test frequency for each
specified property shall not exceed one year.
203-3.6 Temperature. Emulsified asphalt may be reheated, but at no time after loading shall the
temperature be raised above 160ºF (70ºC). During reheating, emulsified asphalt shall be agitated to
prevent localized overheating. Emulsified asphalt shall not be permitted to cool to a temperature less
than 40ºF (5ºC).
203-3.7 Volumetric Measurement. For volumetric quantities, the unit of measurement shall be the
U.S. gallon (L) at a temperature of 60ºF (15ºC).
In converting weight to volume, computations shall be based on the following, for all grades of
emulsified asphalt, except RPME:
Gallons per ton = 240 (L/tonne = 1002)
Pounds per gallon = 8.33 (L/tonne = 998)
For RPME:
Gallons per ton = 235 (L/tonne = 962)
Pounds per gallon = 8.5 (L/tonne = 1018)
203-4 NOT USED.
203-5 RUBBERIZED EMULSION-AGGREGATE SLURRY (REAS) .
203-5.1 General. REAS shall be a stable mixture of RPME, aggregate, water, and Portland cement.
REAS shall be specified by combined aggregate gradation, e.g. Type II-REAS. The combined
aggregate gradation (Type) shall be as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
96 Greenbook 2021

203-5.2 Materials.
203-5.2.1 Aggregate. Aggregate shall be Type Fine, Type I, Type II, or Type III conforming to 200-1.7.
203-5.2.2 Rubberized Polymer Modified Emulsion. RPME shall conform to 203-3.4.5. The percentage
of RPME and residual RPME solids shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 203-5.2.2.

TABLE 203-5.2.2
Type Fine Type I Type II Type III
Test Test
Method Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
1
RPME % by weight of dry aggregate ASTM 61 85 50 57 33 40 28 35
2
D6307 or
3
Residual RPME Solids 2 31 47 26 31 17 22 15 19
CT 382
1. Must meet Residual RPME Solids.
2. Sample size shall be 500 g minimum.
3. Residual RPME Solids shall be determined by multiplying RPME % (ASTM D6307 or CT 382) by Residue by Evaporation of RPME %
(ASTM D6934).

203-5.2.3 Water. Water shall conform to 203-3.2.

203-5.2.4 Portland Cement. Portland cement may be added to modify the viscosity and curing
characteristics in accordance with the approved mix design.
Portland cement shall be Type I/II or II/V conforming to 201-1.2.1 and shall not exceed 1.5 percent
of the dry weight of the aggregate.
203-5.3 Mixing.
Mixing shall be performed at a central mixing plant and shall conform to the following
requirements:
a) Component materials shall be stored separately.
b) Aggregate shall neither be stored nor transported in such a way that may cause segregation,
degradation, or intermingling of different size aggregates.
c) Materials shall be proportioned by weight into the mixing tank. Volumetric proportioning will
not be permitted.
d) The mixing tank shall be equipped with scales. The zero tolerance for the tank scales shall be
0.5 percent based on the total batch weight. The scales shall be calibrated and certified on a
yearly basis in accordance with 4-7 or after every modification or repair.
e) The mixing tank shall be equipped with a full sweep mixer/agitator with blades or paddles of a
sufficient size and number and operated at a speed sufficient to produce a homogeneous mix.
Should the blades, paddles, or other parts of the mixer/agitator become worn to such an extent to
adversely affect the quality of the mix they shall be promptly replaced. Insufficient mixing or
agitation within the mixing tank shall be corrected by either a reduction in the volume of
component materials or other adjustments.
f) Each batch shall be continuously mixed for 3 minutes or until all of the component materials are
thoroughly blended, whichever is longer. The mixing time shall begin upon the introduction of
the last component material. If the Engineer determines that the mixture is not thoroughly
blended, the mixing time shall be increased.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 97

g) Mixed REAS shall be stored at the central mixing plant site in storage tanks equipped with an
agitator of a similar configuration to the agitator in the mixing tank. The agitator shall be
capable of continuous operation.
203-5.4 Transporting. REAS shall be transported from the central mixing plant to the Work site in
trucks specifically designed and constructed for this purpose and be equipped with an agitator. REAS
shall be continuously agitated during transport.
203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE.
203-6.1 General. Asphalt concrete shall be the product of mixing mineral aggregate and up to 20
percent reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) with asphalt binder at a central mixing plant.
When so specified in the Special Provisions, asphalt concrete may contain greater than 20 percent
RAP and/or be produced using a warm mix asphalt (WMA) technology.
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans, asphalt concrete
mixtures shall conform to 203-6.4.
203-6.2 Materials.
203-6.2.1 Asphalt Binder. Asphalt binder shall be paving asphalt conforming to 203-1 or liquid
asphalt conforming to 203-2.
203-6.2.2 Rock Products for Asphalt Concrete Mixtures. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed rock
conforming to 200-1.2. Rock dust shall conform to 200-1.2. Sand shall conform to 200-1.5.2. Fine
aggregate shall be sand, rock dust, mineral filler, or a blend of these materials.
203-6.2.3 Rock Products for Type III Asphalt Concrete Mixtures. Coarse aggregate shall be
defined as material retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve. Fine aggregate shall be defined as material
passing the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve.
Aggregate for alternate asphalt concrete mixtures shall conform to 203-6.2.2 except as follows:
a) Coarse and fine aggregate shall consist of one or a mixture of the following:
i. Broken or crushed rock or crushed gravel.
ii. Natural material having sufficient roughness to conform to the stabilometer requirements
when confined within the grading limits shown in Table 203-6.5.4 (B).
b) The percentage by weight of crushed particles, as determined in accordance with California Test
205, shall be:
i. For coarse aggregate, a minimum of 25 percent.
ii. For fine aggregate, a minimum of 20 percent for the portion passing the No. 4 (4.75 mm)
sieve and retained on the No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve.
c) The weight loss, as determined in accordance with ASTM C131, shall neither exceed 15 percent
during 100 revolutions nor exceed 52 percent during 500 revolutions.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
98 Greenbook 2021

203-6.2.4 Mineral Filler. Mineral filler shall consist of Portland cement or mechanically reduced
rock. Mechanically reduced rock shall conform to the grading shown in Table 203-6.2.4 when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T88.
TABLE 203-6.2.4
Particle Size Percentage
Passing 75 µm Sieve 75 -100
Finer than 50 µm 65 -100
Finer than 20 µm 35 - 65
Finer than 10 µm 26 - 35
Finer than 5 µm 10 - 22

203-6.2.5 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP).

203-[Link] General. RAP shall be defined as asphalt concrete pavement which has been processed
to a maximum of 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm) in size and is free of contaminants.
203-[Link] RAP Stockpiles. Stockpiles of processed RAP shall be:
a) constructed on a base which provides drainage,
b) uniformly layered, and
c) kept clean and free from contaminants.
203-[Link] Fractionation. Fractionation is the processing of RAP into 2 or more sizes. Unless
otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, fractionation will not be required.
203-[Link] Testing. Testing shall be performed at a frequency of 1 test per 1000 tons of processed
RAP. A minimum of 1 test per stockpile per month shall be performed.
The following tests shall be performed on RAP in processed stockpiles:
a) Sand-equivalent on un-extracted RAP in accordance with California Test 217.
b) Asphalt binder content in accordance with one of the test methods listed in 203-6.4.4.
c) Gradation on extracted aggregate obtained in accordance with ASTM D2172 or AASHTO T 308.
When using greater than 25 percent RAP, the following additional tests shall be performed:
a) On asphalt binder and solvent resulting from ASTM D2172, asphalt binder recovered in
accordance with AASHTO T 319 or ASTM D1856.
b) Asphalt binder performance grade in accordance with AASHTO M 323.
203-[Link] Quality. The minimum sand-equivalent value of un-extracted RAP shall be 80 when
determined in accordance with California Test 217.
203-[Link] Quality Control Records. Quality control records (records) shall be established and
maintained for a minimum of the last 6 test results. The records shall be submitted with the mix design
and be made available to the Engineer upon request.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 99

203-6.2.6 Recycling Agents. Recycling agents shall conform to the requirements shown in Table
203-6.2.6.

TABLE 203-6.2.61

ASTM Test
TEST Method (s) RA 5 RA 25 RA 75 RA 250 RA 500
Kinematic Viscosity at 140°F, D2170 or
cSt (60°C, mm2/s). Min./Max. D2171 200/800 1000/4000 5000/10000 15000/35000 40000/60000
Flash Point, COC °F (°C), Min. D92 400 (205) 425 (215) 450 (230) 450 (230) 450 (230)
Saturated Wt. %, Max. D2007 25 25 25 25 25
Residue from RTFO Oven Test at 325°F (163°C) D2872
Viscosity Ratio2 Max. - 3 3 3 3 3
RTFO Oven Weight Change, ±, % D2872 4 4 2 2 2
Specific Gravity D70 or D1298 Report Report Report
1. The acceptance of any recycling agent is subject to its ability to develop a RAC binder which will comply with the paving asphalt grade
specified.
2. Viscosity Ratio = RTFO Viscosity at 140°F, cSt (60°C, mm2/s)
Original Viscosity at 140°F, cSt (60°C, mm2/s)

203-6.3 Job Mix Formula (JMF) and Mix Designs.

203-6.3.1 General. The Contractor shall submit in accordance with 3-8.4 a JMF that summarizes
each asphalt concrete mix design for each class and grade of asphalt concrete required to construct the
Work. Supporting information for the warm mix asphalt (WMA) technology and/or recycling agent, if
included in a mixture, shall also be submitted.
The JMF shall identify the source and the individual grading of each material used to produce the
mix design (including the percentage and individual gradation of any manufactured or natural sands), the
combined gradation, the optimum binder content (OBC), void content, reclaimed asphalt pavement
(RAP) percentage, RAP gradation, RAP binder content, stability value, plant identification, mix number,
WMA technology, and the source and performance grade of the paving asphalt. Upon request, the mix
design test data represented by the JMF shall be immediately made available to the Engineer.
When greater than 25 percent RAP is to be included in a mixture, a mix design shall be submitted.
The submittal shall include supporting information showing the viscosity of the individual binders (both
the virgin paving asphalt grade and that of the binder recovered from the RAP); and the amount of
recycling agent, if any, and the blended final viscosity in accordance with AASHTO M323.
For all mixtures, the asphalt binder content shall be defined as the total bituminous material present
in the mix consisting of the blend of virgin paving asphalt, residual paving asphalt from RAP, and
recycling agent.
When a mix design is more than 30 Days old, the JMF must indicate that the combined gradation is
± 3 percent from the referenced mix design based on a 30-Day moving average or a minimum of the 10
most current results. If the combined aggregate gradation is not within ± 3 percentage points of the
gradation shown on the referenced mix design on any sieve, if the source of any aggregate is changed,
the performance grade of paving asphalt is changed, or the mix design is over 2 years old, a new mix
design shall be prepared and a new JMF shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
203-6.3.2 Hveem Mix Design Method. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, mix
designs shall be prepared in accordance with Asphalt Institute publication MS-2. The OBC shall be
determined in accordance with California Test 367.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
100 Greenbook 2021

Mix designs for asphalt concrete mixtures shall conform to Table 203-6.4.4 for the class and grade
shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. The minimum Hveem stability (“S-value)
shown shall be used for mix design only. The target S-value, at the OBC for the mix design, shall be at
least 2 points above the minimum shown.
Mix designs for Type III asphalt concrete mixtures shall conform to Tables 203-6.5.4 (A) and 203-
6.5.4 (B) for the class and grade shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Unless viscosity and blending charts developed in accordance with AASHTO M323 show otherwise,
mix designs for mixtures containing more than 25 percent RAP shall drop the high temperature
requirement of the virgin paving asphalt by one performance grade and drop the low temperature
requirement by a minimum of one performance grade, e.g. a specified “PG 64-10” shall become a “PG
58-22 or “PG 58 – XX.”
203-6.4 Asphalt Concrete Mixtures.
203-6.4.1 Class and Grade. Asphalt concrete mixtures shall be specified by class of combined
aggregate gradation and performance grade of paving asphalt, e.g. “C2-PG 64-10.” The class and grade
shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Job mix formulas, mix designs, and weight tickets shall have the following suffixes added to the
class and grade:
a) No suffix if the mixture contains RAP in an amount up to 20 percent.
b) “R0” if the mixture does not contain RAP, e.g. “C2-PG 64-10-R0”.
c) “RXX” and the percentage of RAP when the mixture contains greater than 20 percent, e.g. “C2-
PG 64-10-R25.”
d) “WMA” if the mixture uses a warm mix asphalt technology, e.g. “C2-PG 64-10-WMA” or “B-
PG 70-10-R25-WMA.”
203-6.4.2 Hveem Stability (“S-Value”). The Hveem stability (“S-value”) shall be determined in
accordance with California Tests 304 and 366. When mixtures contain a WMA additive, stability shall
be determined by curing the mix in an oven for 15 to 18 hours at 140 ± 5°F or for 2 to 3 hours at 295 ±
5°F in accordance with California Test 304 prior to testing. Mixtures containing a WMA additive may
be cooled to room temperature prior to such curing.
The moving average shall be computed in accordance with 211-5 except that no individual test result
will be accepted if it is more than 3 points below the minimum S-value shown in Table 203-6.4.4.
The individual S-value test result shall be the average of 3 tests from one sample representing 1000
tons or a single day of paving on the Work site, whichever is less. If the range for the 3 tests is more
than 10, then the sample shall be discarded and a new sample shall be obtained and retested.
203-6.4.3 Combined Aggregates and Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP). The combined
aggregates and RAP shall conform to the following requirements after processing and prior to the
addition of asphalt binder, mineral filler and, if so specified, a warm mix asphalt additive and/or
recycling agent.
a) The combined aggregates shall have a minimum sand equivalent of 50 when tested in accordance
with California Test 217.
b) When there is a difference in specific gravity (bulk saturated surface dry determined in accordance
with ASTM C127 and C128) of 0.2 or more between that portion retained on and that portion
passing a No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve, the grading shall be modified in accordance with California
Test 105.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 101

c) The combined aggregate gradation shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C136 and
C117 or California Test 202.
d) The combined aggregate gradation shall be uniform from coarse to fine.
e) When the mixture contains greater than 20 percent RAP, a RAP correction factor determined in
accordance with 211-6 shall be used in determining the combined aggregate and RAP gradation.
f) If the fine aggregate is deficient in material passing the No. 200 (75 µm) sieve, mineral filler
conforming to 203-6.2.4 shall be added as necessary to conform to the required combined grading.
g) If the combined aggregate grading conforms to the grading of its class as shown in Table 203-
6.4.4, the individual grading required by 200-1.2 may be waived.
h) Percentages for the combined gradings, within the specified limits, shall be of such uniformity
that the material passing the indicated sieves during any day of production does not exceed the
maximum variation specified in 203-6.4.4.
203-6.4.4 Composition and Grading. Asphalt concrete mixtures shall conform to Table 203-6.4.4
in which the percentages shown are based on the weight of the dry aggregate only.

TABLE 203-6.4.4
Percentage Passing Sieves
A B C1 C2 D1 D2 E F
Sieve Size Dense
Dense Coarse Dense Coarse Dense Extra Channel
Medium
Coarse Medium Medium Fine Fine Fine Liner
Coarse
1-1/2" (37.5 mm) 100
1" (25 mm) 90-100 100
3/4" (19.0 mm) 78-90 87-100 100 100
1/2" (12.5 mm) 64-78 70-87 90-100 95-100 100 100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 54-68 55-76 72-88 72-88 90-100 95-100 100 100
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 34-48 35-52 40-54 46-60 40-54 58-72 65-85 95-100
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 25-35 22-40 18-34 28-42 20-32 34-48 45-65 70-84
No. 30 (600 µm) 12-22 8-24 8-20 15-27 6-18 18-32 22-38 36-50
No.50 (300 µm) 8-16 5-18 4-14 10-20 2-12 13-23 16-28 23-35
No. 200 (75 µm) 3-6 0-7 1-6 2-7 0-5 2-9 6-12 6-12
Asphalt Binder % 4.5-5.7 4.5-6.5 4.6-6.0 4.6-6.0 4.8-6.5 4.8-6.5 5.8-7.8 8.0-10.0
Hveem Stability
35 35 33 33 30 30
“S Value” (min.)
1
Air Voids 4% 4% 4% 4% 4% 4%
1. Per CTM 367.

When the aggregate is highly absorptive (a 2.0 percent combined absorption value when determined
in accordance with AASHTO T84 and T85), the maximum percentage for asphalt binder may be
increased up to 2.0 percentage points over the values shown.
Maximum variation during any day of production shall not exceed the following:
No. 4 (4.75 mm) Sieve - 6 percentage points
No. 30 (600 µm) Sieve - 5 percentage points
No. 200 (75 µm) Sieve - 3 percentage points
The gradations in the above tabulations represent the limits which shall determine the suitability of
aggregate for use from the sources of supply.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
102 Greenbook 2021

Determination of the asphalt binder content shall be by extraction of the paving asphalt from the
mixture performed in accordance with any of the following test methods or other published test methods
approved by the Engineer:
AASHTO T 164
AASHTO T 308
AASHTO T 319
ASTM D2172
ASTM D4125
ASTM D6307
California Test Method 382
Gradations determined during asphalt binder content testing shall be provided for information only.
203-6.5 Type III Asphalt Concrete Mixtures.
203-6.5.1 Class and Grade. Type III asphalt concrete mixtures shall be designated by type (III),
class of combined aggregate gradation and performance grade of paving asphalt, e.g. “III-C2-PG 64-
10.” The type, class, and grade shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Job mix formulas, mix designs, and weight tickets shall have the following suffixes added to the
type, class and grade:
a) No suffix if the mixture contains RAP in an amount up to 20 percent.
b) “R0” if the mixture does not contain RAP, e.g. “III-C2-PG 64-10-R0”.
c) “R” and the percentage of RAP if the mixture contains greater than 20 percent, e.g. “III-C2-PG
64-10-R25.”
d) “WMA” if the mixture uses a warm mix asphalt technology, e.g. “III-C2-PG 64-10-WMA” or
“III-B-PG 70-10-R25-WMA.”
203-6.5.2 Combined Aggregates and Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP). The combined
aggregates and RAP shall conform to 203-6.4.3 except as follows:
a). The combined aggregates shall have a minimum sand equivalent of 45 when determined in
accordance with California Test 217.
b) Subparagraphs “a”, “g”, and “h” shall not apply.
203-6.5.3 Hveem Stability (“S-Value”). Hveem stability shall be determined in accordance with
203-6.4.2.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 103

203-6.5.4 Composition and Grading. Type III asphalt concrete mixtures shall conform to Tables
203-6.5.4 (A) and 203-6.5.4 (B). The percentages shown in Table 203-6.5.4 (A) are based on the weight
of the dry aggregate only.

TABLE 203-6.5.4 (A)

CLASS B2 B3
Individual Moving Individual Moving
Sieve Size
Test Result Average Test Result Average
1" (25.0 mm) 100 100 100 100
3/4" (19.0 mm) 87 – 100 90 - 100 90 - 100 95 - 100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 50 – 80 60 - 75 60 - 84 65 - 80
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 30 – 60 40 - 55 40 - 60 45 - 60
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 22 – 44 27 - 40 24 - 50 30 - 45
No. 30 (600 µm) 8 – 26 12 - 22 11 - 29 15 - 25
No. 200 (75 µm) 1–8 3-6 1-9 3-7
Asphalt Binder % 4.6 - 6.0 4.6 - 6.0
CLASS C2 C3
Individual Moving Individual Moving
Sieve Size
Test Result Average Test Result Average
3/4" (19.0 mm) 100 100 100 100
1/2" (12.5 mm) 89 – 100 95 - 100 89 - 100 95 - 100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 70 – 94 75 - 90 74 - 100 80 - 95
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 44 – 72 50 - 67 50 - 78 55 - 72
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 30 – 54 35 - 50 32 - 60 38 - 55
No. 30 (600 µm) 10 – 34 15 - 30 14 - 38 18 - 33
No. 200 (75 µm) 2 – 10 4-7 2 - 10 4-8
Asphalt Binder % 4.8 - 6.5 4.6 - 7.0
CLASS D F
Sieve Sizes Combined Average Combined Average
1/2" (12.5 mm) 100 –
3/8" (9.5 mm) 95 - 100 100
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 65 - 85 95 - 100
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 50 - 70 70 - 80
No. 30 (600 µm) 28 - 40 35 - 50
No. 200 (75 µm) 5 - 14 7 - 16
Asphalt Binder % 6.0 - 8.0 8.0 - 10.0

Table 203-6.5.4 (B)

Aggregate Gradings California Test Hveem Stability S Value
B and C 35 Min.
304 and 366
D and F 30 Min.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
104 Greenbook 2021

Determination of the asphalt binder content shall be by extraction of the paving asphalt from the
mixture performed in accordance with any of the following test methods or other published test methods
approved by the Engineer:
AASHTO T 164
AASHTO T 308
AASHTO T 319
ASTM D2172
ASTM D4125
ASTM D6307
California Test Method 382
Gradations determined during asphalt binder content testing shall be provided for information only.
203-6.5.5 Statistical Testing. Statistical testing shall conform to 200-1.1.2 and the following:
Whenever the results of an individual test for any property of a material does not comply with the
limits specified for an individual test and if the moving average would not comply with the limit
specified for the moving average should the next test be of the same value as that of the test being
considered, the production of that material shall be suspended until corrective changes have been made
and tests indicate that the quality of the material proposed for use in the Work complies with that
specified for the moving average.
203-6.6 NOT USED.
203-6.7 Production.
203-6.7.1 General. Asphalt concrete mixtures shall be produced by either the batch plant method or
the dryer-drum method.
The temperature of paving asphalt shall be within the range shown in Table 203-1.4 when added to
the aggregate and reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP).
The temperature of liquid asphalt shall be within the range shown in Table 203-2.3 when added to
the aggregate. The temperature of the aggregate at the time of adding liquid asphalt shall not exceed the
maximum pugmill mixing temperature shown in Table 203-2.3.
A temperature indicating device capable of reading up to 500°F (260°C) and accurate to within 10°F
(5°C) shall be fixed in the asphalt binder and recycling agent feed lines or storage tanks. The indicator
shall be located and maintained where the proportioning operations are controlled.
The discharge end of the asphalt binder and recycling agent circulating pipe shall extend to within 1
foot (0.3 m) of the bottom of the storage tank.
The binder and recycling agent feed lines connecting the plant storage tanks to the asphalt binder
weighing system or spray bar shall be equipped with a sampling valve. The sampling valve shall consist
of a 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) or 3/4 inch (19 mm) valve constructed in such a manner that a 1 quart (1 L)
sample may be withdrawn slowly at any time during plant operations, and shall be placed in a safe
location. A drainage receptacle shall be provided for flushing the valve prior to sampling. One gallon (4
L) shall be drawn from the sampler prior to taking the sample.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 105

203-6.7.2 Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA) Technologies. Asphalt concrete mixtures may be produced
using a WMA technology if so specified in the Special Provisions.
The WMA technology and mixing and placement temperatures shall be as specified on the approved
mix design.
The plant shall be equipped or modified as necessary to produce warm mix asphalt in accordance
with the WMA technology supplier’s recommendations and the approved mix design.
203-6.7.3 Batch Plant Method.
203-[Link] Aggregate and Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) Storage, Drying, and
Screening. Each size of aggregate and RAP shall be stored separately. When handling or transporting,
no method shall be used which may cause segregation, degradation, or intermingling of different sizes.
When RAP is included in the mixture, the batch plant shall be equipped to introduce RAP using a
separate storage facility with direct access to the weigh hopper. RAP may be introduced into the plant by
direct access into the weigh hopper, into the hot aggregate elevator, or by another method approved by
the Engineer. The RAP and the virgin aggregates shall be weighed together in the weigh hopper prior to
introduction into the pugmill and dry mixed for 10 seconds, or longer if necessary, to effectuate the heat
transfer. Aggregates shall be heated and dried for a period of time sufficient to result in a moisture
content not exceeding 1 percent when tested in accordance with California Test 310 or 370.
The dryer shall be equipped with a device capable of displaying the temperature of the aggregate and
RAP leaving the dryer. The heat indicating device shall be independently mounted from other plant
components, be accurate to the nearest 10°F (5°C), and shall be installed in such a manner that a
fluctuation of 10°F (5°C) in the aggregate and RAP temperature will be indicated within 1 minute. The
temperature indicator shall be located and maintained where the proportioning operations are controlled.
After drying, the aggregates and, when included, RAP shall be evenly fed to the screens in such
quantities as to maintain, in separate bins, a uniform grading of materials and proper balance in the
amount of material. The operation of the screens shall be so controlled as to secure a thorough
separation of aggregate sizes.
Screens having clear openings shall be used to separate and classify materials for the hot storage
bins. The aggregate and RAP passing these screens shall be separately stored in individual bins until
proportioned into the mixer.

TABLE 203-[Link] (A)

Size of Openings Bin No.
4-Bin Plants
100% passing 1-1/2" (37.5 mm) sieve 4
100% passing 5/8" (16.0 mm) sieve 3
100% passing 3/8" (9.5 mm) sieve 2
100% passing No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve 1
5-Bin Plants
100% passing 1-1/2" (37.5 mm) sieve 5
100% passing 7/8" (22.4 mm) sieve 4
100% passing 5/8" (16.0 mm) sieve 3
100% passing 3/8" (9.5 mm) sieve 2
100% passing No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve 1

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
106 Greenbook 2021

The No.1 bin shall not contain more than 10 percent of material retained on the No. 8 (2.36 mm)
sieve. The remaining bins shall not contain more than 10 percent of material passing through the sieve
sizes shown in Table 203-[Link] (B).

TABLE 203-[Link] (B)

Bin. No. Sieve Size
2 No. 8 (2.36 mm)
3 No. 4 (4.75 mm)
4 3/8" (9.5 mm)
5 3/8" (9.5 mm)

Each bin shall be equipped with an opening to prevent overflow into adjacent bins. Overflow
material shall be discarded or returned to its respective storage area. All material fed to the No. 4 bin
shall pass through the screen over that bin. Oversize rock shall be discarded or returned to its respective
storage area.
Discharged material may be returned to a storage area that contains aggregates of the approximate
grading of the discharged material. Discharged material containing RAP shall be returned to a separate
stockpile for reprocessing.
203-[Link] Proportioning. All materials shall be proportioned by weight. The zero tolerance for
aggregate and RAP scales, asphalt binder scales, and, when used, mineral filler scales shall be 0.5
percent based on the total batch weight of the aggregate.
The indicated weight of any material drawn from storage shall not vary from the preselected setting
by more than the following percentages based on the total batch weight of the aggregate:
Aggregate 1.0 percent
RAP 1.0 percent
Mineral Filler 0.5 percent
Asphalt Binder 0.1 percent
Recycling Agent 0.1 percent
Automatic proportioning devices shall be operated so that all weight increments required for a batch
are preset on the controls at the same time. The discharge mechanism of each bin shall be interlocked so
that only one bin can discharge onto a given scale at a time and that a new batch may not be started until
all of the weigh hoppers are empty, the scales are at zero, and the discharge gate is closed. The interlock
system shall prevent the weigh box from discharging until the required quantity of each bin and the other
weighing devices have been properly filled and weighed. The proportioning controls shall be equipped
with means for inspection of the interlock tolerance settings. Instructions for determining these settings
shall be posted at the control panel for the Engineer’s use.
Bag house fines or mineral filler shall be proportioned by weight by a method that uniformly feeds
the material to within 10 percent of the required amount.
When introducing the RAP into the hot aggregate elevator, the conveyors shall be equipped with belt
scales with rate-of-flow indicators to show the rates of delivery of each size of aggregate. The belt
scales shall be interlocked with the belt scale for aggregate entering the dryer to maintain the proper
proportion of RAP to aggregate.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 107

203-[Link] Mixing. Aggregates, asphalt binder, RAP, and when included, recycling agent and/or
warm mix asphalt (WMA) additive, shall be thoroughly mixed.
The mixer shall be of the twin-shaft pugmill type and operated at the speed recommended by the
manufacturer. The mixer shall be equipped with paddles of sufficient size and number to produce
and deliver a uniform mixture. Paddles or other parts of the pugmill which become worn to such an
extent as to adversely affect the quality of mixing or allow leakage from the discharge gate shall be
promptly replaced.
The mixer, weigh hopper, and sampling platforms shall be of ample size to provide safe and
convenient access to the mixer and other equipment. Weigh box housings shall be equipped with gates
of ample size to permit ready sampling of the discharged aggregates from each of the plant bins.
The total weight of material that may be mixed per batch shall not exceed the manufacturer’s
rated capacity of the mixer, nor exceed that which will permit complete mixing of all the materials.
Dead areas in the mixer shall be corrected either by reducing the total weight of materials or by
other adjustments.
Each batch shall be continuously mixed until all of the materials are thoroughly blended. The batch
mixing time shall begin on the charging stroke of the weigh hopper dump mechanism and shall end
when discharge from the mixer begins. The mixer shall be equipped with a time lock mechanism which
locks the mixer discharge gate for the mixing period and actuates an indicator light by the charging
stroke of the weigh hopper charging mechanism. The indicator light shall be so located as to be visible
from where the mixing operations are controlled.
The minimum mixing time shall be 35 seconds, of which 5 seconds shall be drop time for the aggregate,
RAP, paving asphalt, and, if included, recycling agent and/or WMA additive, into the mixer. If the drop time
exceeds 5 seconds, the additional time shall be added to the 35 seconds. If the Engineer determines that the
mixture is not thoroughly blended, the mixing time shall be increased.
The temperature of the mixture, without a WMA additive, at the point of discharge from the plant shall be
between 275°F (135°C) and 325°F (163°C). The temperature of the mixture at the Work site shall be as
specified in 302-5.5. When a WMA technology is used, the minimum and maximum plant discharge
temperatures and the acceptable temperature range at the Work site shall be as specified on the approved job
mix formula or mix design.
203-6.7.4 Dryer-Drum Method.
203-[Link] Aggregate and Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) Storage and Drying. Each size of
aggregate and RAP shall be stored separately. When handling or transporting, no method shall be used which
may cause segregation, degradation, or intermingling of aggregates of different size.
RAP shall be introduced into the dryer-drum and combined with the hot aggregate in such a manner that
the RAP is protected from direct contact with the burner flame. Asphalt binder shall be introduced after the
RAP and the aggregate have been combined.
Except for mixtures produced with a warm mix asphalt (WMA) technology, mixtures shall not contain
more than 1 percent moisture when tested in accordance with California Test 310 or 370.
The dryer-drum shall be equipped with a device which indicates the temperature of the mixed
material leaving the drum. The device shall be accurate to within 10°F (5°C) and shall be installed in
such a manner that a temperature change of 10°F (5°C) in the mixed material will be shown within 1
minute. The temperature indicator shall be located and maintained at the location where the
proportioning operations are controlled.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
108 Greenbook 2021

203-[Link] Proportioning. Asphalt binder, RAP, and when included, recycling agent and/or warm mix
asphalt (WMA) additive, shall be measured by a meter certified in accordance with 4-7. The meter shall
automatically compensate for changes in the asphalt binder temperature. The meter and feed lines shall be
heated and insulated. The storage tanks for the asphalt binder, and when included, recycling agent and/or
WMA additive, shall be equipped with a device for automatic plant cutoff when the fluid level in the tank is
low enough to expose the pump suction line. The metering system shall be capable of varying the rate of
delivery of asphalt binder, recycling agent and WMA additive proportionately with the rate of delivery of
aggregate and RAP while the plant is in full operation. During any day of production, the temperature of the
asphalt binder shall not vary more than 50°F (30°C).
Bag house fines or mineral filler, if used, shall be:
a) proportioned by weight or by volume,
b) uniformly fed into the mixer at an amount within 10 percent of the required amount, and
c) discharged into the mixer in proximity to where the asphalt binder is introduced.
The combined aggregates and RAP shall be weighed on separate belt scales. The belt scales shall be of
such accuracy that, when the plant is operating between 30 and 100 percent of belt capacity, the average
difference between the indicated weight of the material delivered and the actual weight does not exceed 1
percent of the actual rate for 3, 3-minute runs. For any of the 3 individual 3-minute runs, the indicated weight
of the material delivered shall not vary from the actual weight by more than 2 percent of the actual weight.
The actual weight of material delivered shall be determined by a vehicle platform scale.
The individual belt scales for the combined aggregates and RAP, the proportioning meters for the
asphalt binder, and when included, recycling agent and WMA additive and the other proportioning
devices shall be interlocked in such a manner that the rates of feed automatically adjust and maintain the
required proportions. The plant shall not be operated unless this system is fully operational and accurate.
Belt scales and proportioning meters shall be equipped with rate of flow indicators showing the rates
of delivery of aggregates, RAP, asphalt binder, and if included, recycling agent and WMA additive, and
shall have resettable totalizers for determining the actual weight of each. Rate of flow indicators and
totalizers for like materials shall be accurate to within 1 percent when compared directly. The asphalt
binder, recycling agent and WMA additive totalizers shall not register when the metering system is not
delivering material to the mixer, and shall not be reset unless so approved by the Engineer. The bins
containing fine aggregate and mineral filler shall be equipped with a vibrating unit or other equipment
capable of preventing any “hang-up” of material while the plant is operating. Before the quantity of
material in any one bin reaches the strike-off capacity of the feed gate, a device shall automatically shut
down the plant.
The moisture content of the aggregate and RAP shall be determined in accordance with California
Test 310 or 370 at least once during every 2 hours of production. Moisture control equipment shall be
adjusted accordingly.
A sampling device capable of providing 60-pound to 80-pound (25 kg to 40 kg) samples of the RAP
and of the combined aggregates while the plant is in full operation shall be located in advance of the
point where these materials enter the mixer.
When bag house fines or mineral filler is used, a sampling device shall be installed in each feed line
or surge tank preceding the proportioning device.
203-[Link] Mixing. Aggregates, asphalt binder, RAP, and when included, recycling agent and/or
WMA additive, shall be thoroughly mixed.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 109

Mixing shall continue for a sufficient amount of time and at a sufficiently high temperature, that, at
discharge from the mixer, aggregate size is uniformly distributed through the mixture and all particles
are thoroughly and uniformly coated with asphalt binder.
After mixing, the mixture shall be discharged from the drum into a silo. The Contractor shall
provide a means of diverting the flow of material away from the silo when starting and stopping the
plant production in order to prevent unmixed or partially mixed portions of the mixture from entering.
The temperature of the mixture, without a WMA additive, at the point of discharge from the plant
shall be between 275°F (135°C) and 325°F (163°C). The temperature of the mixture at the Work site
shall be as specified in 302-5.5. When a WMA technology is used, the minimum and maximum plant
discharge temperatures and the acceptable temperature range at the Work site shall be as specified on the
approved job mix formula or mix design.
203-6.8 Storage. Asphalt concrete shall be:
a) transferred from the mixer by a method that does not cause segregation, and
b) stored in insulated silos with heated discharge cones, unless the silo is being used for surge
purposes. Silos shall be equipped to prevent segregation during filling.
203-6.9 Transportation. Truck beds shall be coated with a release agent before loading. Visible
pools of release agent shall be removed prior to loading.
The temperature of asphalt concrete discharged into truck beds shall not vary more than 20°F (10°C)
for successive loads. When the hauling time from the plant to the Work site exceeds 2 hours, when the
atmospheric temperature is below 50°F (10°C), or when rain is falling along the haul route, asphalt
concrete shall be completely covered with a tarpaulin secured to the truck bed during transport.
Asphalt concrete shall be delivered to the Work site without segregation and within the temperature
range specified in 302-5.5.
203-6.10 Sampling. Asphalt concrete shall be sampled in accordance with California Test 125.
Samples of RAP shall be from processed stockpiles, or from collector belts.
Aggregate samples for batch plants shall be taken from the hot bins. Aggregate samples for dryer-
drum plants shall be taken in advance of the dryer-drum using devices conforming to 203-[Link].
203-6.11 Acceptance. Acceptance of asphalt concrete mixtures will be based upon conformance to
the gradation, asphalt binder content, and minimum stability values shown in Table 203-6.4.4.
Acceptance of Type III asphalt concrete mixtures will be based upon conformance to the gradation,
binder content, and minimum stability values shown in Tables 203-6.5.4 (A) and 203-6.5.4 (B). The
asphalt binder content shall be within +/– 0.5 percent of that shown on the respective job mix formula or
mix design. Air void values will not be used as an acceptance criterion.
Should plant gradation test results be unavailable, gradation may be determined in accordance with
ASTM D2172 or by AASHTO T 308 with adherence to the aggregate correction factor therein. In the
case of a continued dispute, final acceptance of plant produced mixtures may be based upon binder
content and stability.
When dissimilar surface course mix characteristics are the result of production and delivery from
multiple plants, the Engineer may require production and delivery from only one plant during any one
day of production.
203-7 NOT USED.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
110 Greenbook 2021

203-8 ASPHALT PAINT. Shall conform to ASTM D41 or D43 and be furnished and applied to
concrete surfaces as required and shown on the Plans.
203-9 SEALCOAT - ASPHALT BASED.
203-9.1 General. This specification applies to sealcoat intended to be used for sealing
miscellaneous areas such as asphalt parking lots, playgrounds, and similar areas. Sealcoat material shall
be a plant blended product composed of mineral aggregates uniformly distributed in a petroleum-based
asphalt emulsion. The asphalt emulsion shall conform to 203-3. The sealcoat material shall contain
non-asbestos fibers.
203-9.2 Testing Requirements. Sealcoat materials, undiluted except as noted, shall conform to the
following requirements:

TABLE 203-9.2
Test Specifications
Weight lbs per gallon (grams per liter) 9.5 (1139) Min.
1
Nonvolatile component (%) 60% Min. by weight
Mineral aggregate component No. 20 (850 µm) sieve – 100% passing
Working viscosity, diluted 4 parts product to 1 part water – ASTM D562 75 KREBS Min.
Dried film color Black
Asphalt content 25% - 35% of nonvolatiles by weight
1. Weigh 10 grams of homogeneous product into a previously tarred, small ointment can lid. Place in a constant temperature oven at 325°F
(163°C) for 1-1/2 hours. Cool, reweigh, and calculate nonvolatile components.

203-10 NOT USED.

203-11 ASPHALT RUBBER HOT MIX (ARHM).
203-11.1 General. Asphalt Rubber Hot Mix shall consist of a mixture of paving asphalt, asphalt modifier,
crumb rubber modifier (CRM), and aggregate mixed in a central mixing plant.
203-11.2 Materials. The Contractor shall submit test reports and Certificates of Compliance conforming to
4-5 for the paving asphalt, asphalt modifier, and CRM to be used. When requested by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall also submit samples of the tested material.
203-11.2.1 Paving Asphalt. Paving asphalt used for asphalt-rubber shall be PG 64-16, conforming to 203-1.
Performance graded paving asphalts other than PG 64-16 may be used if so specified in the Special Provisions.
203-11.2.2 Asphalt Modifier. The asphalt modifier shall be a resinous, high flash point, aromatic
hydrocarbon compound and shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 203-11.2.2. The asphalt modifier
may be eliminated if approved by the Engineer.

TABLE 203-11.2.2
Property ASTM Test Method Value
Flash Point, C.L.O.C., °F (°C) D92 405 (207) min
Viscosity, cSt @ 212°F (100°C) D445 X ± 3*
Molecular Analysis
Asphaltenes, percent by mass D2007 0.1 max
Aromatics, percent by mass D2007 55 min
* The symbol “X” is the viscosity of the asphalt modifier the Contractor proposes to furnish. The value “X” which the Contractor proposes shall be
between the limits of 19 and 36 and shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer. Any proposed change requested by the Contractor in the value “X”
shall require a new asphalt-rubber binder design.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 111

203-11.2.3 Crumb Rubber Modifier (CRM).

203-[Link] General. CRM shall consist of a combination of scrap tire CRM and high natural CRM.
Scrap tire CRM shall consist of ground or granulated rubber derived from any combination of automobile tires,
truck tires or tire buffings. The high natural CRM shall consist of ground or granulated rubber derived from
materials that utilize high natural rubber sources. Whole scrap tire CRM shall be derived from whole scrap tires
generated within the State boundaries of the user agencies. The Certificate of Compliance shall contain a
statement confirming conformance with this requirement. The high natural CRM may consist of blended CRM.
CRM shall be ground or granulated at ambient temperature. Cryogenically produced CRM particles which
can pass through the grinder or granulator without being ground or granulated shall not be used. Cryogenic
separation, if utilized, shall be performed separately from and prior to grinding or granulating. Steel and fiber
separation may employ any method.
CRM shall not contain more than 0.01 percent of wire by weight and shall be free of all other contaminants,
except fabric. Fabric shall not exceed 0.05 percent by weight of CRM. A Certificate of Compliance certifying
these percentages shall be furnished to the Engineer.
CRM shall be dry and free-flowing and not produce foaming when combined with the blended paving
asphalt and asphalt modifier mixture. Calcium carbonate or talc may be added up to a maximum of 3 percent by
weight of CRM to prevent CRM particles from sticking together. CRM shall have a specific gravity range from
1.1 minimum to 1.2 maximum as determined by ASTM D297. Scrap tire CRM and high natural CRM shall be
delivered to the production site in separate bags and shall be sampled and tested separately. Scrap tire CRM
material shall conform to the chemical analysis requirements shown in Table 203-[Link] (A).

TABLE 203-[Link] (A):

CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SCRAP TIRE CRM
Test ASTM Test Method Minimum Maximum
Acetone Extract D297 6.0% 16.0%
Ash Content D297 — 8.0%
Carbon Black Content D297 28.0% 38.0%
Rubber Hydrocarbon D297 42.0% 65.0%
Natural Rubber Content D297 22.0% 39.0%

Scrap tire CRM shall be mixed at the production site with high natural CRM so that 75 percent ± 2
percent of the product used is derived from scrap tires and 25 percent ± 2 percent from materials that
utilize high natural rubber sources. High natural rubber CRM may consist of blended CRM which, after
blending, conforms to the chemical analysis requirements shown in Table 203-[Link] (B).

TABLE 203-[Link] (B):

CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH NATURAL CRM
Test ASTM Test Method Minimum Maximum
Acetone Extract D297 4.0% 16.0%
Rubber Hydrocarbons D297 50.0% –
Natural Rubber Content D297 40.0% 48.0%

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
112 Greenbook 2021

With the approval of the Engineer, high natural CRM may be eliminated. If high natural rubber is
not used, then the full amount of required CRM shall be scrap tire CRM. Asphalt rubber binder without
high natural CRM shall be designated as Type I and ARHM manufactured with Type I binder shall be
designated as ARHM-I.
203-[Link] CRM Gradations. CRM gradations shall conform to the requirements shown in
Table 203-[Link] when tested in accordance with ASTM C136, amended as follows:
Split or quarter 100 grams ± 5 grams from the representative CRM sample and dry to a constant
weight at a temperature of not less than 135°F (57°C) nor more than 145°F (63°C) and record the dry
sample weight. Place the CRM sample and 5.0 grams of talc (or calcium carbonate) in a 1 pint jar. Seal
the jar and shake it by hand for a minimum of one minute to mix the CRM and the talc (or calcium
carbonate). Continue shaking or open the jar and stir until particle agglomerates and clumps are broken
and the talc (or calcium carbonate) is uniformly mixed.
A Rotap (or equivalent) test shaker shall be used for the sieve analysis. Place one rubber ball on
each sieve. Each ball shall have a weight of 8.5 ± 0.5 grams, have a diameter of 24.5 ± 0.5 mm, and
shall have a Shore Durometer “A” hardness of 50 ± 5 in accordance with ASTM D2240. After shaking
the combined material for 10 minutes ± 1 minute, disassemble the sieves. Any material adhering to the
bottom of a sieve shall be brushed into the next finer sieve. Weigh and record the weight of the material
retained on the No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve and leave this material on the scale or balance. Any observed
fabric balls shall remain on the scale or balance and shall be placed together on the side of the scale or
balance to prevent the fabric balls from being covered or disturbed when placing the material from finer
sieves onto the scale or balance. The material retained on the next finer sieve shall be added to the scale
or balance. Weigh and record that weight as the accumulative weight retained on that sieve. Continue
weighing and recording the accumulated weight retained on the remaining sieves until the accumulated
weight retained in the pan has been determined. Prior to discarding the CRM sample, separately weigh
and record the total weight of fabric balls in the sample.
Determine the weight of material passing the No. 200 (75 µm) sieve (or weight retained in the pan)
by subtracting the accumulated weight retained on the No. 200 (75 µm) sieve from the accumulated
weight retained in the pan. If the material passing the No. 200 (75 µm) sieve (or weight retained in the
pan) has a weight of 5 grams or less, cross out the recorded number for the accumulated weight retained
in the pan and copy the number recorded for the accumulated weight retained on the No. 200 (75 µm)
sieve and record that number (next to the crossed out number) as the accumulated weight retained in the
pan. If the material passing the No. 200 (75 µm) sieve (or weight retained in the pan) has a weight
greater than 5 grams, cross out the recorded number for the accumulated weight retained in the pan,
subtract 5 grams from that number and record the difference next to the crossed out number. The
adjustment to the accumulated weight retained in the pan is made to account for the 5 grams of talc (or
calcium carbonate) added to the sample. For calculation purposes, the adjusted total sample weight is
the same as the adjusted accumulated weight retained in the pan. Determine the percent passing based
on the adjusted total sample weight and record to the nearest 0.1 percent.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 113

TABLE 203-[Link]:
GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR CRM
Sieve Size Scrap Tire CRM Percent Passing High Natural CRM Percent Passing
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 100 100
No. 10 (2.00 mm) 98 – 100 100
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 45 – 75 95 – 100
No. 30 (600 µm) 2 – 20 35 – 85
No. 50 (300 µm) 0–6 10 – 30
No. 100 (150 µm) 0–2 0–4
No. 200 (75 µm) – 0–1
* CRM from more than one source may be used provided the combined CRM gradation meets the specified limits. No
particles shall exceed a length of 3/16 inch (5 mm) as measured on any axis.

203-11.2.4 Aggregate. The aggregate for ARHM shall meet the quality requirements specified in
200-1 for asphalt concrete.
203-11.3 Composition and Grading. Asphalt-rubber hot-mix gap-graded (ARHM-GG) shall
be designated by type and class, i.e., ARHM-GG-C, and shall conform to the requirements shown in
Table 203-11.3.

TABLE 203-11.3
REQUIREMENTS FOR ARHM-GG

CLASS
SIEVE SIZE GG-B GG-C GG-D
Min.- Max. Min.- Max. Min.- Max.
1" (25 mm) 100 – –
3/4" (19.0 mm) 90-100 100 –
1/2" (12.5 mm) – 90-100 100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 60-75 78-92 78-92
No. 4 (4.5 mm) 28-42 28-42 28-42
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 15-25 15-25 15-25
No. 30 (600 µm) 5-15 5-15 5-15
No. 200 (75 µm) 0-5 2-7 2-7
1
Asphalt Rubber Binder, % by Weight of Dry Aggregate 7.5-8.4 7.5-8.7 7.8-8.7
Air Voids % California Test 367 3-6 3-6 3-6
Stabilometer Value, California Test 304 and 366, Min. 25 23 23
2
Voids in Mineral Aggregate, % Min. 18 18 18
1. Once the percent asphalt rubber binder is determined by the mix design, the production tolerance shall be +/- 0.5% as determined
by California Test Method 362, 379, or 382.
2. Percent voids in the mineral aggregate (VMA) is to be determined during the mix design process only and is to be calculated on the
basis of ASTM bulk specific gravity as described in the Asphalt Institute MS-2 manual.

203-11.4 Mixing Asphalt and CRM. The paving asphalt and asphalt modifier shall be combined
into a blended mixture that is chemically compatible with the crumb rubber modifier to be used. The
blended mixture is considered to be chemically compatible when it conforms to the requirements for
asphalt rubber binder (after reacting) shown in Table 203-11.4.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
114 Greenbook 2021

The asphalt modifier shall be proportionately added to the paving asphalt at the production site
where the asphalt-rubber binder is blended and reacted. Asphalt modifier shall be added at an amount of
2.5 percent to 6.0 percent by weight of the paving asphalt based on the recommendation of the asphalt
rubber binder supplier. The paving asphalt shall be at a temperature of not less than 375°F (190°C) nor
more than 440°F (226°C) when the asphalt modifier is added. If the asphalt modifier is combined with
the paving asphalt before being blended with the CRM, the combined paving asphalt and asphalt
modifier shall be mixed by circulation for not less than 20 minutes. This premixing of asphalt modifier
and the paving asphalt will not be required when all ingredients of the asphalt rubber binder are
proportioned and mixed simultaneously. Asphalt modifier and paving asphalt shall be measured for
proportioning with meters conforming to 203-6-6.
The proportions of the materials, by total weight of asphalt-rubber binder, shall be 80 percent ± 2
percent combined paving asphalt and asphalt modifier, and 20 percent ± 2 percent CRM. The
temperature of the blended asphalt and modifier shall be between 375°F (190°C) and 440°F (226°C)
when the CRM is added. The temperature shall not exceed 10°F (6°C) below the actual flash point of
the mixture. The CRM shall be combined and mixed together in an asphalt-rubber mechanical blender
conforming to 203-11.5. The combined asphalt and CRM shall be pumped into a storage/reaction tank or
distributor truck conforming to meeting the requirements of 203-11.5. The required mixing/reaction
time shall be 45 minutes minimum. The temperature of the asphalt-rubber mixture shall be between
375°F (190°C) to 425°F (218°C) during the reaction period. After reacting, the asphalt rubber binder
shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 203-11.4.

TABLE 203-11.4:
REQUIREMENTS FOR ASPHALT RUBBER BINDER
Specification Limit
Test Parameter Test Method
Minimum Maximum
Haake Field Viscosity @ 375°F (191°C), (Centipoise) See 211-4 1500 4000
Cone Penetration @ 77°F (25°C),mm ASTM D217 25 70
Resilient @ 77°F (25°C), % Rebound ASTM D5239 18 —
Field Softening Point, °F (°C) ASTM D36 52 (125) 74 (165)

The reacted asphalt rubber binder shall be maintained at a temperature of not less than 375°F
(190°C) nor more than 425°F (218°C). If any of the material in a batch of asphalt rubber binder is not
used within 4 hours after the 45-minute reaction period, heating of the material shall be discontinued.
Any time the asphalt rubber binder cools below 375°F (190°C), and is then reheated, shall be considered
a reheat cycle. The total number of reheat cycles shall not exceed 2. The material shall be uniformly
reheated to a temperature of not less than 375°F (190°C)) nor more than 425°F (218°C) prior to use.
Additional scrap tire CRM may be added to the reheated binder and reacted for a minimum of 45
minutes. The cumulative amount of additional scrap tire CRM shall not exceed 10 percent of the total
binder weight. Reheated asphalt rubber binder shall conform to requirements shown in Table 203-11.4.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 115

When permitted by the Engineer, asphalt-rubber binder produced on a contract for another
agency and defined here as “hold over material”, may be used in the Work if the initial agency
certifies the following:
a) The total weight and type of material being held over.
b) The amount of CRM contained within the holdover load on a percentage basis.
c) The grade of paving asphalt and asphalt modifier used and its source.
d) Date of original mixing.
e) Number of reheat cycles.
In no case, will more than 20 tons (18 tonnes) of holdover material be allowed to be transferred from
one project to another. In all cases, the holdover material when blended with new asphalt-rubber binder,
shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 203-11.4.
203-11.5 Equipment for Production of Asphalt-Rubber. The Contractor shall utilize the
following equipment for production of asphalt-rubber binder:
a) Asphalt Heating Tank. An asphalt heating tank equipped to heat and maintain the blended
paving asphalt and asphalt modifier mixture at the necessary temperature before blending with
the CRM. This unit shall be equipped with a thermostatic heat control device and a temperature
reading device and shall be accurate to within ± 5°F (± 3°C) and shall be of the recording type.
b) Blender Equipment. A mechanical mixer for the complete, homogeneous blending of paving
asphalt, asphalt modifier, and CRM. Paving asphalt and asphalt modifier shall be introduced into
the mixer through meters. The blending system shall be capable of varying the rate of delivery of
paving asphalt and asphalt modifier proportionate with the delivery of CRM. During the
proportioning and blending of the liquid ingredients, the temperature of paving asphalt and the
asphalt modifier shall not vary more than ± 25°F (± 14°C). The paving asphalt feed, the asphalt
modifier feed and CRM feed, shall be equipped with devices by which the rate of feed can be
determined during the proportioning operation. Meters used for proportioning individual
ingredients shall be equipped with rate-of-flow indicators to show the rates of delivery and
resettable totalizers so that the total amounts of liquid ingredients introduced into the mixture can
be determined. The liquid and dry ingredients shall be fed directly into the mixer at a uniform
and controlled rate. The rate of feed to the mixer shall not exceed that which will permit
complete mixing of the materials. Dead areas in the mixer, in which the material does not move
or is not sufficiently agitated, shall be corrected by a reduction in the volume of material or by
other adjustments. Mixing shall continue until a homogeneous mixture of uniformly distributed
and properly blended asphalt-rubber binder is produced. The Contractor shall provide a safe
sampling device capable of delivering a representative sample of the completed asphalt-rubber
binder of sufficient size to perform the required tests.
c) Storage/Reaction Tank. An asphalt-rubber binder storage/reaction tank equipped with a
heating system that is equipped with a temperature reading device to maintain the proper
temperature of the asphalt-rubber binder and an internal mixing unit capable of maintaining a
homogeneous mixture of paving asphalt, asphalt modifier and CRM.
d) Viscometers. The Contractor shall supply a Haake Viscometer (or equivalent) conforming to
211-4 for use by the Engineer to verify the viscosity of the asphalt-rubber binder wherever a field
laboratory is used. All asphalt concrete plants are required to have a field laboratory for use by
the Engineer per 8-3.
The equipment shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
116 Greenbook 2021

203-11.6 Mix Designs and Certifications. The optimum binder content for ARHM-GG mixes
shall be determined by California Test Method 367 except that Step 2 regarding surface flushing shall
not be used. Optimum binder content shall be determined by using a void content between 3 percent
minimum to 6 percent maximum as approved by the Engineer. Compaction shall be in accordance with
California Test Method 304 except for the following:
Mixing Temperatures:
Asphalt-rubber = 325°F to 360°F (163°C to 182°C)
Aggregate = 290°F to 325°F (143°C to 163°C)
Compaction Temperature = 290°F to 300°F (143°C to 149°C)
In addition to the formulations and certifications required in 203-11.2, 203-11.3 and 203-11.4 for
asphalt-rubber, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a mix design and samples of all materials to
be used at least 10 Working Days before construction is scheduled to begin. The mix design and
certifications shall include, but are not limited to, the following:
a) Combined aggregate gradation.
b) Individual bin gradations (hot for batch, cold for drum plant).
c) Percentage of each bin.
d) Asphalt rubber binder content.
e) Density.
f) Air Voids.
g) Voids in Mineral Aggregates (VMA).
h) Stability.
i) Aggregate source
j) Asphalt binder source
203-11.7 Mixing Binder With Aggregate. Mixing of the asphalt rubber binder with aggregate
shall conform to 203-6.7 except that the temperature requirements of ARHM shall supercede the
requirements in 203-6.7.
203-11.8 Storage. Storage of ARHM shall conform to 203-6.8.
203-11.9 Miscellaneous Requirements. Miscellaneous requirements shall conform to 203-6.9
except that the temperature of the asphalt rubber binder shall be 375°F (190°C) to 425°F (218°C) when
added to the aggregate. The temperature of the aggregate at the time of adding the asphalt-rubber binder
shall be 300°F (149°C) to 330°F (166°C).
203-12 ASPHALT RUBBER AND AGGREGATE MEMBRANE (ARAM).
203-12.1 General. ARAM consists of the application of asphalt rubber binder followed by the
spreading of pre-coated, pre-heated screenings.
203-12.2 Asphalt Rubber Binder. Asphalt rubber binder shall conform to 203-11.
203-12.3 Pre-Coated, Pre-Heated Screenings. Pre-coated, pre-heated screenings shall conform
to 200-[Link].
203-13 NOT USED.
203-14 TIRE RUBBER MODIFIED ASPHALT CONCRETE (TRMAC).
203-14.1 General. TRMAC shall be the product of mixing mineral aggregate and up to 20 percent
reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) with tire rubber modified paving asphalt at a central mixing plant.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 117

203-14.2 Materials.
203-14.2.1 Tire Rubber Modified Paving Asphalt. Tire rubber modified paving asphalt shall
consist of paving asphalt containing ground scrap tire rubber. The scrap tire rubber shall be incorporated
into the paving asphalt such that a smooth and homogeneous composition results. Tire rubber modified
paving asphalt shall be graded as MAC-15TR, or performance graded as PG 64-28TR or PG76-22TR.
The Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Compliance for each grade used in the Work.
MAC-15TR shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 203-14.2.1 (A).

TABLE 203-14.2.1 (A)

Properties Test Method No. MAC-15TR
TESTS ON ORIGINAL ASPHALT:
Minimum Recycled Whole Scrap Tire Rubber Content, % CERTIFICATION 15.0
Penetration, at 25ºC, 0.1 mm, 100 grams, 5 seconds ASTM D5 40-60
Penetration, at 4ºC, 0.1 mm, 200 grams, 60 seconds, Min. ASTM D5 15
Dynamic Viscosity, at 140ºF (60ºC), Poise, Min. ASTM D2171 5000
Kinematic Viscosity, at 275ºF (135ºC), Centistokes, Max. ASTM D2170 1200
Flash Point, Cleveland Open Cup, ºF (ºC), Min. ASTM D92 446 (230)
Softening Point, ºF (ºC), Min. ASTM D36 127 (53)
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, %, Min. ASTM D2042 97.5
TESTS ON RESIDUE FROM RTFO PROCEDURE:
Penetration, at 25ºC, 0.1 mm, 100 grams, 5 seconds ASTM D5 20-40
Penetration, at 4ºC, 0.1 mm, 200 grams, 60 seconds, Min. ASTM D5 10
Dynamic Viscosity, at 140ºF (60ºC), Poise, Min. ASTM D2171 20,000
Kinematic Viscosity, at 275ºF (135ºC), Centistokes, Max. ASTM D2170 2000
Percent of Original Penetration, at 25ºC, 0.1 mm, 100 grams, 5 seconds, Min. ASTM D5 50

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
118 Greenbook 2021

PG 64-28TR and PG 76-22TR shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 203-14.2.1 (B).

TABLE 203-14.2.1 (B)

Specification
Grade
Property AASHTO Test Method
PG PG
64-28TR 76-22TR
Original Binder
Recycled Whole Scrap Tire Certificate of Compliance
Rubber, %, minimum 15 15
Flash Point, °C, minimum T 48 230 230
Solubility, %, minimum T 44 97.5 97.5
Viscosity, 135°C, Pa·s, T 316
maximum 3.0 3.0
Dynamic Shear Test T 315 64 76
Temperature, °C
Dynamic Shear, 10 rad/s, T 315
G*/Sinō, kPa, minimum 1.00 1.00
RTFO Aged Binder (T 240)
Mass Loss, %, maximum T 240 1.00 1.00
Dynamic Shear Test T 315 64 76
Temperature, °C
Dynamic Shear, 10 rad/s, T 315
G*/Sinō, kPa, minimum 2.20 2.20
Elastic Recovery Test T 301
Temperature, °C, 25 25
minimum recovery % 75 65
Dynamic Shear Test T 315
Temperature, °C,
maximum (delta), degrees 80 80
RTFO Test and PAV Aged Binder (R 28)
PAV Aging Temperature, °C R 28 100 110
Dynamic Shear Test T 315
Temperature, °C 22 31
Dynamic Shear, 10 rad/s, T 315
G*/Sinō, kPa, maximum 5000 5000
Bending Beam Test T 313
Temperature, °C -18 -12
Creep Stiffness, MPa, T 313
maximum 300 300
m-value, minimum T 313 0.300 0.300

203-14.2.2 Aggregate. Aggregate shall conform to 203-6.2.3.

203-14.2.3 Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall conform to 203-6.2.4.
203-14.2.4 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP). RAP shall conform to 203-6.2.5.
203-14.3 Job Mix Formulas and Mix Designs. Job mix formulas and mix designs shall conform
to 203-6.3.
203-14.4 TRMAC Mixtures.
203-14.4.1 General. Dense graded mixtures may be produced using MAC-15TR, PG 64-28TR, or
PG 76-22TR. Gap-graded mixtures shall only be produced using MAC-15TR.
203-14.4.2 Class and Grade. Dense-graded mixtures shall be specified by class of combined
aggregate gradation and grade of tire rubber modified paving asphalt (e.g. “C2-MAC-15TR,” C2-PG 64-

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 119

28TR”). Gap-graded mixtures shall be specified by the class of combined aggregate gradation followed
by “MAC-15TR” (e.g. “GG-C-MAC-15TR”).
The class and grade shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
203-14.4.3 Combined Aggregates and RAP. Combined aggregates and RAP shall conform
to 203-6.4.3.
203-14.4.4 Composition and Grading. The composition and grading of dense-graded mixes shall
conform to 203-6.4.4. Gap-graded mixes shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table
203-11.3 and the composition requirements shown in Table 203-14.4.4.

TABLE 203-14.4.4
Properties Requirements
% MAC-15TR by Weight of Dry Aggregate* 5.0 – 7.0
Air Voids, %, California Test 367 3–6
Stabilometer Value per California Test 304 and 366, Min. 23
Voids in Mineral Aggregate Percent, Min. 16
*Once the percent MAC-15TR is determined by the mix design, the production tolerance shall be ± 0.5% as determined by California Test
Method 362, 379, or 382.

203-14.5 Production. Production shall conform to 203-6.7.

203-14.6 Storage. Storage shall conform to 203-6.8.
203-14.7 Transportation. Transportation shall conform to 203-6.9.
203-14.8 Sampling. Sampling shall conform to 203-6.10.
203-14.9 Acceptance. Acceptance of dense-graded mixtures will be based upon conformance to the
gradation, asphalt binder content, and minimum stability requirements shown in Table 203-6.4.4. Acceptance
of gap-graded mixes will be based upon conformance to the gradation requirements shown in Table 203-11.3
and the asphalt binder content and minimum stability requirements shown in Table 203-14.4.4.
The asphalt binder content shall be within +/- 0.5 percent of that shown on the respective job mix
formula or mix design. Air voids will not be used as an acceptance criterion.
Should plant gradation test results be unavailable, gradation may be determined in accordance with
ASTM D2172 or by AASHTO T 308 with adherence to the aggregate correction factor therein. In the
case of a continued dispute, final acceptance of plant produced mixtures may be based upon binder
content and stability.
When dissimilar surface course mix characteristics are the result of production and delivery from
multiple plants, the Engineer may require production and delivery from only one plant during any one
Day of production.
203-15 POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE.
203-15.1 General. Porous asphalt concrete shall be the product of mixing open-graded mineral
aggregate with paving asphalt at a central mixing plant.
203-15.2 Materials.
203-15.2.1 Paving Asphalt. Paving asphalt shall:
a) conform to 203-1,
b) be one performance grade higher than that established by the State of California for the climate
region of the Work site unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, and
c) contain 0.5 percent liquid antistrip by weight of paving asphalt.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
120 Greenbook 2021

203-15.2.2 Aggregate. Aggregate shall conform to 203-6.3.2.

203-15.2.3 Mineral Filler. Mineral filler shall conform to 203-6.3.3.
203-15.2.4 Liquid Antistrip. Liquid antistrip storage and method of introduction shall conform to
the manufacturer’s recommendations. Liquid antistrip shall be introduced into the paving asphalt by the
paving asphalt producer. Liquid antistrip shall not be substituted for paving asphalt. Only one type or
brand may be used at any one time during production. The total amine value shall be 325 minimum
when tested in accordance with ASTM D2074.
203-15.3 Composition and Grading. The grading of the combined aggregates shall conform to the
requirements shown in Table 203-15.3 (A) unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.

TABLE 203-15.3 (A)

Sieve Size Percentage Passing Sieves
3/4 in (19.0 mm) 100
1/2 in (12.5 mm) 95-100
3/8 in ( 9.5 mm) 74-93
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 24-41
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 3-22
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 0-10
No. 200 (75 µm) 0-3

Porous asphalt concrete shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 203-15.3 (B).

TABLE 203-15.3 (B)

Properties Requirements
Paving Asphalt, % 6.0 % min.
Air Voids, %, California Test 309 * 18% min.
Draindown, ASTM D6390 or CT 368 0.30% max.
* Compact specimen and determine bulk specific gravity in accordance with CT 308 Method B.

203-15.4 Job Mix Formula (JMF) and Mix Designs. JMFs and mix designs shall conform to 203-
6.2 and 203-15.3.
203-15.5 Aggregate Storing, Drying, and Screening. Aggregate storing, drying, and screening
shall conform to 203-6.5.
203-15.6 Proportioning. Proportioning shall conform to 203-6.6.
203-15.7 Mixing. Mixing shall conform to 203-6.7.
203-15.8 Storage. Storage shall conform to 203-6.8. Porous asphalt concrete shall not be stored in
a silo in excess of 2 hours.
203-15.9 Miscellaneous Requirements. Miscellaneous requirements shall conform to 203-6.9.
Porous asphalt concrete shall be completely covered with tarpaulins during transport. The material
temperature at the time of delivery to the Work site shall not exceed 275° F (135° C).
203-15.10 Acceptance. Acceptance will be based upon gradation and paving asphalt content.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 121

203-16 POLYMER MODIFIED ASPHALT CONCRETE (PMAC).

203-16.1 General. PMAC shall be the product of mixing mineral aggregate and up to 20 percent
reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) with polymer modified paving asphalt at a central mixing plant.
203-16.2 Materials.
203-16.2.1 Polymer Modified Paving Asphalt. Polymer modified paving asphalt shall consist of
paving asphalt containing polymer. The polymer shall be incorporated into the paving asphalt such that a
smooth and homogeneous composition results. Polymer modified paving asphalt shall be performance
graded as PG 64-28PM or PG 76-22PM, and shall conform to the requirements for the respective
performance grade shown in Table 203-14.2.1 (B) except for the recycled whole scrap tire rubber content.
The Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Compliance conforming to 4-5 for each performance
grade used in the Work.
203-16.2.2 Aggregate. Aggregate shall conform to 203-6.2.3.
203-16.2.3 Mineral Filler. Mineral filler shall conform to 203-6.2.4.
203-16.2.4 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP). RAP shall conform to 203-6.2.5.
203-16.3 Job Mix Formulas and Mix Designs. Job mix formulas and mix designs shall
conform to 203-6.3.
203-16.4 PMAC Mixtures.
203-16.4.1 Class and Grade. PMAC shall be specified by class of combined aggregate gradation
and performance grade of polymer modified paving asphalt (e.g. “C2-PG 64-28PM”).
The class and grade shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
203-16.4.2 Combined Aggregates and RAP. Combined aggregates and RAP shall conform to
203-6.4.3.
203-16.4.3 Composition and Grading. Composition and grading shall conform to 203-6.4.3.
203-16.5 Production. Production shall conform to 203-6.7.
203-16.6 Storage. Storage shall conform to 203-6.8.
203-16.7 Transportation. Transportation shall conform to 203-6.9.
203-16.8 Sampling. Sampling shall conform to 203-6.10.
203-16.9 Acceptance. Acceptance will be based upon conformance to the gradation, asphalt binder
content, and minimum stability requirements shown in Table 203-6.4.4. The asphalt binder content shall
be within +/- 0.5 percent of that shown on the respective job mix formula or mix design. Air voids will
not be used as an acceptance criterion.
Should plant gradation test results be unavailable, gradation may be determined in accordance with
ASTM D2172 or by AASHTO T 308 with adherence to the aggregate correction factor therein. In the
case of a continued dispute, final acceptance of plant produced mixtures may be based upon binder
content and stability.
When dissimilar surface course mix characteristics are the result of production and delivery from
multiple plants, the Engineer may require production and delivery from only one plant during any one
Day of production.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
122 Greenbook 2021

SECTION 204 - LUMBER AND TREATMENT WITH PRESERVATIVES

204-1 LUMBER AND PLYWOOD.

204-1.1 Kinds.
204-1.1.1 General. Structural lumber shall be of the kinds and grades indicated on the Plans or in
the Special Provisions. Proper allowance for shrinkage in the lumber shall be made by the Contractor
where it is necessary to meet definite dimensions shown on the Plans. All sizes refer to nominal sizes.
Rough and dressed sizes shall conform to the sizes set forth in the American Lumber Standards.
204-1.1.2 Douglas Fir. Unless otherwise specified, all lumber shall be Douglas fir and shall be
selected as to grade and shall conform in all particulars to the Standard Grading Rules for Western
Lumber, published by the Western Wood Products Association and approved by the American Lumber
Standards Committee.
204-1.1.3 Redwood. Redwood lumber shall conform in all particulars to the Standard
Specifications for Grades of California Redwood of the Redwood Inspection Service.
204-1.1.4 Plywood. Plywood shall be manufactured and graded in accordance with the rules of the
American Plywood Association and the latest Product Standard for Softwood Plywood, Construction
and Industrial, of the National Bureau of Standards.
204-1.2 Lumber Uses and Grades. Unless otherwise specified, lumber quality for the uses listed
shall not be less than the grades in Table 204-1.2.

TABLE 204-1.2
Uses Grades
Major permanent construction, such as bridges. “Select Structural” for main structural members. “No. 1”
for beams, stringers, joists, and planks.
“Select Structural” when redwood is specified.
Minor permanent construction, such as bulkheads, retaining “No.1” for posts, joists and planks.
structures, headers for bituminous pavement, wooden “Construction” for boards.
warning rails, posts for metal beam guard rails.
Wooden warning rail posts, guide posts, sign posts. “Select Structural” redwood. (No. 1 grade Douglas fir
optional for wooden warning rail posts.)
Studs, headers, and wales for formwork. Form sheathing “Standard”, “No. 4 Common”, or “No. 3”; any exterior-type
for non-showing surfaces of concrete. grade of plywood optional for form sheathing.
All exposed surfaces of bridges, viaducts, over-crossing; “Exterior B-B” (concrete form) grade of plywood.
soffits and sides of beams and girders; slabs between
beams and girders; headwalls and endwalls of culverts
or covering conduits; form sheathing for showing
surfaces of retaining walls, channel walls, etc.

204-1.3 Grade Marking.

204-1.3.1 Lumber. All lumber shall be grade marked by a lumber grading agency certified by the
American Lumber Standards Committee.
204-1.3.2 Plywood. Each sheet of plywood shall bear the official stamp of a quality control agency
stating the grade of the sheet.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 123

204-2 TREATMENT WITH PRESERVATIVES.

204-2.1 General. Wood shall be conditioned, seasoned, prepared, and treated by the pressure
process in accordance with the applicable standards in the AWPA Book of Standards.
All cutting, adzing, boring, chamfering, framing, graining, surfacing, and trimming shall be done
prior to treatment.
With the exception of southern yellow pine and ponderosa pine, all lumber and timber with a
nominal thickness of 2 inches (50 mm) and over shall be incised on all sides to ensure penetration in
accordance with AWPA Standards. Lumber edge-worked to pattern (such as T&G) other than S4S need
not be incised on the edges.
204-2.2 Wood Preservatives. The preservative used shall be one of the following:
a) Oil-borne preservatives;
b) Water-borne preservatives;
c) Fire-retardant treatment (either exterior or interior type).
Preservatives and the selection of preservatives shall conform to the requirements in the AWPA Book of
Standards for the AWPA Use Category System specified in the Special Provisions. The retention and
penetration for each preservative shall be equal to, or greater than, the minimums specified.
Fire-retardant treated wood shall conform to NFPA 703-Standard for Fire Retardant Impregnated Wood.
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, preservatives used for wood in contact with
ground or fresh water shall be limited to:
a) Copper Napthenate
b) Alkaline Copper Quaternary (ACQ) Compounds
c) Copper Azole (CA-B)
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, preservatives used for wood subjected to
marine (salt water) exposure shall be limited to:
a) Ammoniacal Copper Zinc Arsenate (ACZA)
b) Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA)
c) Creosote
d) Pentachlorophenol
204-2.3 Field Treatment of Cut Surfaces. When cutting or drilling becomes necessary after plant
treatment, the cut or drilled surfaces shall be given protection by field treatment in accordance with
provisions of AWPA Standard M4.
204-2.4 Quality Control. All materials treated shall be subject to inspection. The inspection and
marking shall be in accordance with AWPA Standard M2.
Inspection shall be performed by an American Lumber Standard Committee accredited agency.
A manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance and explanation of the markings or codes shall be
submitted with each delivery to the Work site.
204-2.5 Handling and Protection of Treated Materials. Care shall be exercised to not damage
the edges or abrade the surfaces to the extent of reducing the depth of treated wood or exposing any
wood not penetrated. Cant hooks, peavies, sharp-pointed tools, and the use of metal slings without
protective guards shall not be used for the handling of treated lumber. Treated piling may be handled
with pointed tools, provided that side surfaces are not penetrated over 1/2 inch (12.5 mm). Handling
tools and loading devices shall not be used in the groundline area of poles. All damage such as

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
124 Greenbook 2021

abrasions, nail and spike holes, shall be thoroughly saturated with the field treating solution in
accordance with AWPA Standard M4.
Material that is stored at the Work site prior to its use shall be stacked neatly on skids, and shall be
protected from the sun and weather.

SECTION 205 - PILES

205-1 TIMBER PILES.

205-1.1 General. Timber piles shall be Douglas fir, unless otherwise shown on the Plans or
specified in the Special Provisions.
205-1.2 Quality. Piles shall conform to ASTM D25 for Class B piles and the requirements
contained herein. Piles shall be cut from sound, live, close-grained trees and shall be free from large,
loose, or unsound knots, scars, decay, holes, insect damage, barnacles, limnoria, or other forms of sea
life, and other defects or imperfections that would materially impair their strength or durability.
All piles shall be machine-peeled and all inner skin shall be removed. All branch stubs and partially
overgrown knots shall be neatly trimmed flush with the surface, and the butts and tips shall be sawed
square with the longitudinal axis of the pile.
No cracks will be permitted in any pile. Splits, shakes, and checks will be permitted only to the
extent provided herein. A crack is defined as a break across the grain of the wood extending from
surface to surface through the pile; a shake is defined as a separation of the wood along the annual rings;
and a check is defined as a lengthwise separation of the wood across the rings of annual growth. A
through check or compound check is defined as a check extending from surface to surface, either
through the pith center or shunted around by a shake.
Splits in piles shall not be longer than the butt diameter. The length of any shake or combination of
shakes in the outer half of the radius of the butt of the pile, when measured along the curve of the annual
ring, shall not exceed one-third of the circumference of the butt of the pile.
Any check that would impair the strength of the pile will be cause for rejection, but in no case will
any check exceeding 3/4 inch (19 mm) in width be allowed. Any compound or through check,
regardless of length, will be cause for rejection.
Spiral grain shall not exceed one-half of a complete twist in any 20 feet (6 m) of length.
Sound knots in piles 50 feet (15 m) or less in length, and in 3/4 of the length from the butt of piles
longer than 50 feet (15 m), shall be no longer than 4 inches (100 mm) or 1/3 of the diameter of the pile at
the point where they occur, whichever is smaller. Sound knots in the remaining 1/4 of the length of piles
longer than 50 feet (15 m) shall be no larger than 5 inches (125 mm) or 1/2 of the diameter of the pile at
the point where they occur, whichever is the smaller. The size of a knot shall be its diameter measured
at right angles to the length of the pile.
Unsound knots or knot clusters will not be permitted. A knot cluster is two or more knots grouped
together, the fibers of the wood being deflected around the entire unit. A group of single knots, with
fibers deflected around each knot separately, is not a cluster, even though the knots may be in close
proximity. The sum of sizes of all knots in any foot of length of the pile shall not exceed twice the size
of the largest single knot permitted.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 125

Holes less than 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) in average diameter will be permitted in piles, provided the sum
of the average diameters of all holes in any 1 square foot (0.1 m2) of pile surface does not exceed 1-1/2
inches (38 mm).
The presence of invisible internal checks, and shattering or water-burses, shall be determined by
sounding with a suitable hammer, and a resultant hollow or shattered sound will be sufficient cause for
rejecting the pile.
The requirements prescribed herein relative to cracks, splits, shakes, and checks shall apply equally
to treated and untreated piles, and any such defects that develop or occur as a result of any treating
operation may be cause for rejection.
No nails, spikes, or other metal shall be present in any timber pile unless specifically authorized by
the Engineer.
205-1.3 Dimensional Requirements. The diameter of a pile at any section shall be considered as
the average diameter at such section measured at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the pile; but in
determining an average diameter, no single diameter that is more than 10 percent greater than the least
diameter at the same section shall be used. The butt and tip diameters shall be such as to conform with
the requirements indicated in the following tabulation and the diameter 3 feet (1 m) from the butt shall
not be smaller than 1 inch (25 mm) less than that at the butt.

TABLE 205-1.3
3 Ft (1 m) From Butt
Minimum Maximum All Tip Minimum
Length Approx. Approx. Approx.
Feet Circumference Dia. Circumference Dia. Circumference Dia.
(Meters) inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm)
Under 40 (12) 38 (965) 12 (305) 63 (1600) 20 (510) 25 (635) 8 (203)
40-54 (12-16) 38 (965) 12 (305) 63 (1600) 20 (510) 22 (559) 7 (178)
55-74 (17-22) 41 (1040) 13 (330) 63 (1600) 20 (510) 22 (559) 7 (178)
75-90 (23-27) 41 (1040) 13 (330) 63 (1600) 20 (510) 19 (483) 6 (152)
Over 90 (27) 41 (1040) 13 (330) 63 (1600) 20 (510) 16 (406) 5 (127)

The average diameter of the heartwood at the butt of Douglas fir piles that are to be treated shall be
not less than 70 percent, and of those that are to be used untreated not less than 75 percent, of the
average outside butt diameter of the pile.
A straight line from the center of the butt to the center of the tip pile shall lie entirely within the body
of the pile.
Piles shall be free from short crooks in which the deviation from straightness in any 5 feet (1.5 m) of
length anywhere exceeds 2-1/2 inches (63 mm). Short crooks shall also comply with the requirements
for straightness.
The individual lengths in which timber piles are to be furnished shall be as stipulated by the Plans,
Specifications, requisition, or purchase order issued in connection therewith. Unless otherwise
prescribed, as many as 30 percent of the number furnished on any single order or in any single lot may
run as much as 2 feet (0.6 m) longer than the specified lengths.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
126 Greenbook 2021

205-2 STEEL PILES.

205-2.1 General. Steel piles furnished under this specification shall consist of structural steel shapes that
fulfill the requirements prescribed for such material in ASTM A36 and shall conform to the details and
dimensions shown on the Plans and Special Provisions relating directly thereto.
Splices in steel piles shall be made by a full penetration butt weld of the entire cross section. Care shall be
taken to properly align adjacent sections so that the axis of the pile will be straight. The number of splices in the
length of the pile shall be limited to 2. Splices in the top 10 feet (3 m) of the piles will not be permitted. The
locations of pile lugs, when used, shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. All weldings shall be
performed by qualified welding operators in accordance with 304-1.9.
205-2.2 Manufacturing Requirements. Material for steel piles shall not be made by the acid Bessemer
process.
Steel sheet piling shall consist of standard interlocking sheet pile sections having positive interlocks in both
longitudinal and transverse directions which are continuous throughout the entire length of the piece.
205-3 CONCRETE PILES.
205-3.1 General. The types of concrete piles covered by these specifications are precast, cast-in-place, and
prestressed piles. The type to be used or furnished shall be as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
Steel and concrete shall be placed in accordance with 303-1. Portland cement concrete and reinforcing steel shall
conform to the provisions of 201-1 and 201-2.
Compressive strength tests for precast and pre-stressed piles shall be performed in accordance with 201-
1.1.5.
205-3.2 Precast Piles. Precast concrete piles shall be of such quality that the finished piles can be handled
and driven to required bearing without cracking or other damage which would impair their strength or durability.
Concrete shall have a minimum strength of 4,000 pounds per square inch (27.6 MPa) at 28 Days.
Concrete for precast concrete piles shall be cast in smooth, mortar-tight forms so supported as to prevent
deformation or settlement during concrete placement or curing. The piles after being cast shall be cured by
water, steam, curing compound, or other such methods of curing as may be approved by the Engineer. Curing
shall be continued until specimens of the concrete from which the piles were cast attain a compressive strength of
at least 4,000 pounds per square inch (27.6 MPa). Piles shall not be driven until completion of the specified
curing.
The piles shall present true, smooth, even surfaces, free from honeycombs or voids and shall be sufficiently
straight that a line stretched from butt tip along any face will not deviate nor be deflected for more than 1 inch (25
mm) in 50 feet (15 m) at any point. Defects in any pile may be accepted if repaired to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Concrete piles may be cast the full length of the reinforcing bars provided that, after the piles have been
driven, the concrete is removed to expose the steel as shown on the Plans.
205-3.3 Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles.
205-3.3.1 Metal-Cased Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles. Piles shall be cast in steel shells that have been
previously driven to the penetration or bearing value required by the Engineer.
The shell shall be cylindrical and may be fluted, step-tapered, or uniformly tapered from butt to tip.
Shells that are driven without a mandrel shall be equipped with steel driving tips and shall be constructed of
material conforming to the requirements prescribed in ASTM A252, Grade 2. They shall be of sufficient
thickness (9 gage (3.8 mm) minimum), strength, and rigidity to withstand distortion from driving, soil pressure,

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 127

or the driving of adjacent piles. Continuous welds shall be used at all shell splices to develop the full strength of
the section.
After being driven, but prior to placing of the reinforcing steel and concrete, the shells shall be examined for
collapse or reduced diameter. The Contractor shall have available at all times a suitable light for the inspection of
the shell throughout the entire length. Shells that are improperly driven, broken, or show partial collapse shall be
replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor. Partial collapse of shells shall be interpreted to mean any
collapse which reduces any diameter to less than 80 percent at any point. The replacement of the shell shall be
made by withdrawing the entire shell and driving another in its place. Driving one shell within a shell is not
permitted. If the withdrawal of the defective shell is impossible or impractical, as determined by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall fill the defective shell with concrete and shall replace the defective pile with another pile
driven alongside. Any enlargement of the footing required to accommodate such piling shall be at Contractor’s
expense.
Driven shells shall be clean and free of water before reinforcing steel and concrete are placed therein.
Concrete shall be vibrated to within 5 feet (1.5 m) of the tip of the shell.
205-3.3.2 Piles Cast in Drilled Holes. All holes for concrete piles cast in drilled holes shall be drilled dry to
the tip elevations and diameter shown on the Plans or to the elevation determined by the Engineer. Any hole
which shows less than 1/2 the diameter of the hole at the bottom shall be rejected. Suitable casings shall be
furnished and placed when required to prevent caving of the hole before concrete is placed therein.
All loose material and water, existing at the bottom of the hole after drilling operations have been completed,
shall be removed before placing concrete in the hole.
If the casing is to be removed, it shall be removed from the hole as concrete is placed therein. The bottom of
the casing shall be maintained not more than 5 feet (1.5 m) nor less than 1 foot (0.3 m) below the top of the
concrete during withdrawal and placing operations, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Damage to the
concrete during withdrawal and placing operations shall be avoided by hammering or vibrating the casing.
The Contractor shall ensure that the concrete in the hole is dense and homogeneous. Vibration of the
concrete during placing will not be permitted. However, rodding may be required. After the hole has been filled
with concrete, the concrete in the top 10 feet (3 m) of the hole or for the length of the reinforcing, whichever is
the greater, shall be vibrated.
205-3.4 Prestressed Concrete Piles.
205-3.4.1 General. The manufacture of prestressed piles shall be performed in accordance with 303-3.
Concrete shall have a minimum strength at 28 Days of 5,000 pounds per square inch (34.5 MPa). Piles shall be
of such quality that the finished piles can be handled and driven to required bearing without cracking or other
damage which would impair their strength or durability. Piles shall present true, smooth, even surfaces free from
honeycombs or voids and shall be sufficiently straight that a line stretched from butt to tip along any face will not
deviate more than 1 inch (25 mm) in 50 feet (15 m) at any point. Piles showing defects in the upper 10 feet (3 m)
which reduce the cover over the steel to less than required, will be rejected. Defects in the remainder of the pile
may be accepted if repaired in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
Prestressed forces shall not be transferred to the piles until the concrete has attained a strength of 3,500
pounds per square inch (24.1 MPa).
205-3.4.2 Handling and Driving. Prestressed concrete piles shall be lifted or supported only at the points
shown on the approved Shop Drawings. Piles shall not be driven until they have attained a minimum
compressive strength of 5,000 pounds per square inch (34.5 MPa) as determined by tests on concrete cylinders
cast and cured under the same conditions as the piles.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
128 Greenbook 2021

SECTION 206 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS

206-1 STRUCTURAL STEEL, RIVETS, BOLTS, PINS, AND ANCHOR BOLTS.

206-1.1 Requirements.
206-1.1.1 General. All steel, the class of which is not definitely designated herein, in the Special
Provisions, or on the Plans, shall be structural steel and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
A36. Steel manufactured by the acid Bessemer process shall not be used.
206-1.1.2 Certification. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, before fabrication, a mill
certified report (in duplicate) of the tests for each heat of steel or iron from which the material is to be
fabricated. The certification shall contain the results of chemical and physical tests required by ASTM
standards for materials.
206-1.1.3 Additional Tests. The Agency reserves the right to require or make additional mill and
laboratory tests. The number of such additional tests will be limited as follows, except that in case of failure
of the material to comply with the ASTM requirements, more tests may be made or the material rejected:
a) Structural steel - One complete test for each heat number or each 10 tons (9 tonnes) of identifiable
stock
b) Rivets - One complete test for each size
c) Bolts - One complete test for each lot
“Identifiable stock” is material for which authentic records of the chemical and physical properties
are available.
Test specimens shall be furnished cut and machined in accordance with the ASTM standards for the
material to be tested, as referred to herein.
206-1.1.4 Stock Material. When the Contractor proposes to use material already in stock, it shall
notify the Engineer of such intention at least 10 Days in advance of beginning fabrication.
206-1.1.5 Mill Tolerance. Rolling and cutting tolerances, permissible variations in weight and
dimensions, defects, and imperfections shall not exceed the limits contained in ASTM A6.
206-1.2 Structural Steel.
206-1.2.1 Stock Materials. The Contractor shall select the material intended for use from stock and
place it in location apart from other stock material and accessible for inspection and sampling. It shall
also select the material from as few heat numbers as possible and shall furnish certified mill test reports
for each of the heat numbers. Two samples shall be taken by the Engineer from each heat number; one
for the tension test and one for the cold-bend test. If the heat numbers cannot be identified, the Engineer
may select random test specimens from the unidentifiable heats.
206-1.2.2 High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel. The material shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A242, A441, A606, A607, or A446 (Grades C, D, or E) as specified.
206-1.2.3 Copper Bearing Structural Steel. Copper bearing structural steel shall conform to
requirements of ASTM A36, A446, A570 or A611 as specified.
206-1.3 Rivets.
206-1.3.1 Stock Material. Rivets taken from identifiable stock may be accepted by the Engineer
based on certified mill test reports.
Rivets from unidentifiable stock shall not be used except where shown on Shop Drawings.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 129

206-1.3.2 High-Strength Structural Steel Rivets. The material shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM A502.
206-1.3.3 Structural Steel Rivets. The material shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A502,
except that the test specimen shall be bent upon itself when performing the bend test.
206-1.4 Bolts.
206-1.4.1 Unfinished Bolts. The bolts shall have square heads and square nuts unless otherwise
specified. The bolts shall be long enough to extend entirely through the nut but not more than 1/4 inch
(6 mm) beyond. Washers shall not be furnished unless specified. Bolts shall be of steel conforming to
the requirements of ASTM A307.
206-1.4.2 High-Strength Bolts. Shall conform to ASTM A325.
206-1.4.3 Anchor Bolts. Shall be manufactured from steel conforming to ASTM A36 or A307.
206-1.5 Mild Steel Forgings for Structural Purposes.
Steel forgings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A325. They shall be Class C forgings
with a maximum carbon content of 0.35 percent and shall be given a thorough annealing. The metal
shall have a minimum Brinell hardness of 130 and a maximum of 190, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E10.
206-2 STEEL CASTINGS.
206-2.1 General. Steel castings shall be true to pattern in form and dimension and free from defects
that would affect the service value of the casting. Minor defects which do not impair the strength of the
casting may be repaired with the approval of the Engineer. Castings which have been repaired without
the permission of the Engineer may be rejected. Chemical analysis shall be performed in accordance
with the requirements in the Special Provisions.
206-2.2 Test Specimens. When required by the Agency, test coupons shall be poured
monolithically with the castings. If, in the opinion of the manufacturer, the design of the casting is
such that test coupons should not be attached thereto, the test coupons shall be cast attached to
separate blocks. Two coupons shall be cast to represent each lot. A lot shall be considered as all
castings from a melt which constitutes a part of a charge. Coupons shall remain attached until
properly identified by the Engineer. Where test coupons are cast separately from the castings, the
Engineer shall be notified of the time of pouring so as to permit him to identify both coupons and
castings. Coupons cast separately from the castings shall not be detached from the block to which
they are fastened until identified by the Engineer.
Test specimens shall be furnished and machined in accordance with ASTM A370 at the
Contractor’s expense.
If the results of the tests for any lot do not conform, the entire lot will be rejected.
206-2.3 High-Strength Steel Castings for Structural Purposes. Castings shall conform to ASTM A148,
Grade 80-50, except that the steel shall contain not less than 0.60 percent of manganese and not less than 0.20
percent of silicon.
206-2.4 Mild-to-Medium Carbon-Steel Castings for General Application. Castings shall conform to
ASTM A27, Grade 65-35. The metal shall have a minimum Brinell hardness number of 130 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E10.
206-3 GRAY IRON AND DUCTILE IRON CASTINGS.
206-3.1 General. This subsection provides material specifications for gray and ductile iron castings.
Castings shall be coated or uncoated as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
130 Greenbook 2021

206-3.2 Materials.
206-3.2.1 Castings for Vehicular Traffic Areas. Vehicular traffic areas shall be defined as streets,
highways, alleys, parking lots, bike lanes, driveways and other areas intended for use by motor vehicles.
Gray iron castings shall conform to ASTM A48/A48M, Class 35B, or AASHTO M105, Class 35B. Ductile
iron castings shall conform to ASTM A536/A536M, grade 80-55-06.
206-3.2.2 Castings for Non-Vehicular Traffic Areas. Non-vehicular traffic areas shall be defined as
sidewalks, bike paths, and other areas intended for use by pedestrians and bicyclists.
Gray iron castings shall conform to ASTM A48/A48M, Class 30B, or AASHTO M105, Class 30B. Ductile
iron castings shall conform to ASTM A536/A536M grade 65-45-12 or grade 80-55-06.
206-3.2.3 Railings, Railing Posts, and Wheel Guards. Gray iron castings shall conform to ASTM
A48/A48M, Class 40B, or AASHTO M105, Class 40B. Ductile iron castings shall conform to the requirements
specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
206-3.2.4 Rockers, Rocker Plate Bearings, and Bearing Plates for Bridges. Gray iron castings shall
conform to ASTM A48/A48M, Class 50B, or AASHTO M105, Class 50B.
206-3.3 Manufacturing and Finishing.
206-3.3.1 General. The dimensions of the finished casting shall be as shown on the Plans. The as-cast
dimensions may vary by 1/2 the maximum shrinkage of the metal or ± 1/16 inch per foot (± 5 mm/m).
206-3.3.2 Manhole Frame and Cover Sets and Grates. Manhole covers and grates shall seat into the
frame such that the top surface of the cover or grate is flush with the top surface of the frame. The cover or grate
shall sit within 1/8 inch (3 mm) of the frame at any point.
Circular manhole frames shall be fabricated with a machined horizontal bearing surface. Covers and grates
shall seat firmly into the frame and not rock when rotated to any position in the frame. The cover or grate shall
not sit higher than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above the frame for a distance greater than 1/4 of the frame circumference.
Square and rectangular frames shall be fabricated with an as-cast bearing surface.
206-3.3.3 Railings, Railing Posts, and Wheel Guards. Castings shall be machined and finished as
specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
206-3.3.4 Rockers, Rocker Plate Bearings, and Bearing Plates for Bridges. Castings shall be machined
and finished as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
206-3.4 Testing.
206-3.4.1 General. Tensile testing, proof-load testing, or both shall be performed as specified in the Special
Provisions. No separate payment will be made for the material specimens, test bars, machining, testing, and
inspection required in these specifications.
206-3.4.2 Tensile Testing.
206-[Link] General. Test bars shall be tested at a laboratory approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall
be notified of the time of the melt and the time of testing to permit identification of both the test bars or coupons
and the castings. The Engineer may select the test bars to be tested and may be present during testing. The
Contractor shall submit in accordance with 3-8.4 a Certificate of Compliance with laboratory test results.
206-[Link] Gray Cast Iron Castings. Testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM A48/A48M.
Test bars shall be provided and machined by the manufacturer to the dimensions specified for Type B test
bars in AASHTO M105 Specimen B or ASTM A48/A48M.
Test bars cast on and with a casting shall be cast such that when removed, the breakage pattern remains on
the member. Test bars shall be of sufficient size for the manufacturer to produce a machined test specimen with

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 131

the dimensions specified for “Type B” test bars as shown in Table 3 of AASHTO M105 or ASTM A48/A48M.
For lots of 30 or less, a minimum of 3 test bars shall be tested. For lots greater than 30, 10 percent of all the test
bars shall be tested.
Test bars cast separately from the casting shall be machined and tested at the laboratory approved by the
Engineer. The Certificate of Compliance shall state that the test bar was cast integral with the casting it
represents and that the testing and results were obtained as specified.
206-[Link] Ductile Iron Castings. Testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM A536/A536M as
modified herein.
Test bars shall be machined by the manufacturer to the dimensions specified in ASTM A536/A536M. The
size of the test bars shall be as specified in the Special Provisions. Test bars shall be marked for identification of
the casting represented by the coupons and test bars.
At the time of manufacture, test bars shall be cast from the same melt. Test bars shall be machined and
tested at the laboratory approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit in accordance with 3-8.4 a
Certificate of Compliance conforming to 4-5 with laboratory test results. The Certificate of Compliance shall
state that the test bar was cast integral with the casting it represents and that the testing and results were obtained
as specified.
206-[Link] Test Results. If any of the test bars fail, 3 additional test bars shall be tested. The Engineer may
select the test bars. If any of the additional test bars fail, the lot shall be rejected.
206-3.4.3 Proof-Load Testing.
206-[Link] General. Proof-load testing shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO M306 as
modified in these specifications. Testing shall be performed at a facility approved by the Engineer. The
Engineer shall be notified a minimum of 14 Days before the scheduled date of testing and may elect to
be present.
Castings shall be loaded to the proof-load specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans. The
loads shall be concentrated on a 9-inch x 9-inch x 1 inch (225 mm x 225 mm x 25 mm) minimum thickness steel
plate placed on a 9-inch x 9-inch x 1/4 inch (225 mm x 225 mm x 6 mm) thick rubber pad, with a shore D
hardness of 30, centered on the assembled castings. Castings shall be supported in the same manner as they
would be when placed in use. The specified load shall be applied by a calibrated testing machine and held for a
period of 1 minute. Upon removal of the load, the castings shall be examined for cracks and permanent
deformation. Castings subjected to proof-load testing shall be destroyed.
Additionally, for each lot of gray iron castings supplied with cast-on test bars, 3 assembled castings shall be
proof-load tested. The castings may be selected by the Engineer. A lot shall be defined as consisting of no more
than 100 complete units from the same foundry facility.
206-[Link] Test Results. The Contractor shall submit test results signed by a Registered Civil Engineer
showing the ultimate strength of the castings conforms to the requirements of AASHTO M306.
In addition, each lot of gray iron castings with cast-on test bars shall conform to the following:
a) If each of the 3 assembled castings pass the test, the entire lot will be considered as complying with the
load requirements.
b) If any of the 3 assembled castings fail to pass the test, then 5 additional assembled castings from the same
lot shall be selected for testing.
c) If each of the 5 additional assembled castings pass the test, the remainder of the lot will be considered as
complying with the Specifications, except for the previously failed casting(s).
d) If any of the 5 additional assembled castings fail, the entire lot will be rejected.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
132 Greenbook 2021

206-3.5 Workmanship. Before castings are removed from the foundry, they shall be smooth and cleaned
by shot blasting and parting lines, gates, and risers ground flush. Castings that show injurious defects revealed by
X-ray or machining operations shall be rejected.
Castings shall be rejected if an examination reveals cracks or permanent deformations exceeding 1/8
inch (3 mm).
Castings shall be true to pattern in form and dimension, and properly fit together. Castings shall be filleted
boldly at angles and the risers shall be sharp and true. Parting lines, gates, and risers shall be ground flush.
Castings with minor defects may be reworked and resubmitted for approval by the Engineer. Castings that
have been repaired without the permission of the Engineer shall be rejected. Welding plugs shall not be used.
206-3.6 Weight and Dimensions. Castings shall be inspected for conformance to the required weight and
dimensions. The weight of each component shall not vary by more than ± 5 percent from the weight specified in
the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
Castings that fail to conform to the required weight or dimensions shall be rejected. All remaining castings
in the lot shall be inspected and shall conform to the Specifications.
206-3.7 Acceptance. The basis of acceptance will be the test results from the tensile testing, proof-load
testing or both, as specified in the Special Provisions, and conformance to the required workmanship and weights
and dimensions.
If so specified in the Special Provisions, a Certificate of Compliance shall be submitted to the Engineer in
accordance with 3-8.4 in lieu of testing. The certificate shall state that the samples representing each lot have
been tested, inspected, and conform to the Plans and Specifications. The certificate shall also state the country of
origin of the castings. In addition, acceptance will be based on conformance to the required workmanship.
Castings that have been damaged prior to installation will be rejected.
206-4 BRONZE CASTINGS.
206-4.1 General. Bronze castings shall be true to pattern in form and dimension and free from defects that
would affect the service value of the casting. Minor defects may be repaired with Engineer approval. Castings
which have been repaired without Engineer approval may be rejected. Castings that show injurious defects
revealed by machining operations or by X-ray will be rejected.
206-4.2 Testing Requirements. Chemical analysis, if required, shall be performed as specified in the
Special Provisions.
When required by the Agency, test coupons shall be provided as specified in 206-2.2 except specimens shall
be prepared in accordance with ASTM B208.
206-4.3 Expansion and Bearing Plates. Expansion and bearing plates shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM B22, Alloy C. The sliding contact faces shall be machined smooth to true planes. If practical, one
plate shall be machined at right angles to other plates in the set.
206-4.4 Ornamental Tablets and Miscellaneous Castings.
206-4.4.1 General. Ornamental tablets, railings, miscellaneous ornaments, and fixtures shall conform to the
chemical requirements of ASTM B584 Copper Alloy UNS No. C90300.
206-4.4.2 Bearing Plates. The letters shall be heavily raised and spaced carefully to secure a uniform and
balanced effect over the entire area of the panel. The background of the letter panel shall have a finely pebbled
surface. The model of the tablet shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Castings shall be boldly filleted at angles, and the arises shall be sharp and true.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 133

The faces and edges of all lettering and ornaments shall be tooled sharp and clean. Beveled edges shall be
tooled smooth and true. Outside borders shall be straight and true and thoroughly polished. Filing and other tool
marks shall be removed.
Ornaments, lettering, and the beveled edges shall be given a fine satin, hand finish. Lettering, bevels, and
rosettes shall be highlighted; leaves and scrolls slightly highlighted, but well-polished. The pebble background
shall be finished in dark statuary bronze and polished.
206-5 METAL RAILINGS.
206-5.1 Metal Hand Railings Materials. The fabrication of metal hand railings shall be in accordance
with 304-2.
Steel railing material shall be welded or seamless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53, structural steel
conforming to ASTM A36, or tubular sections of hot rolled-mild steel, conforming to ASTM A501.
The base metal for aluminum railing shall be ASA alloy designation 6063-T6. Pipe and tubing shall be
extruded conforming to requirements of ASTM B429, plates and sheets shall be rolled conforming to ASTM
B209, and rods, bars, or shapes shall be extruded conforming to ASTM B221.
206-6 CHAIN LINK FENCE.
206-6.1 General. All materials and fittings shall be new and all ferrous materials shall be coated in
accordance with 210-3. Class 1A steel pipe shall additionally be coated in accordance with 210-4. When
specified, Class 1 or Class 1A materials shall additionally be clad coated with PVC in accordance with 210-5.
The base material for the manufacture of steel pipe used for posts, braces, top rails, and gate frames shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM F1083, Schedule 40, for Class 1 or ASTM A569 for Class 1A. Class 1A
steel shall have a minimum yield strength of 50,000 pounds per square inch (345 MPa). All unit weights shall be
subject to the standard mill tolerance of plus or minus 5 percent.
Posts shall be fitted with caps designed to fit securely over the posts and carry a top rail where specified.
Posts shall have a total length of not less than the depth of the concrete footing, as specified herein, plus the
length required above ground. Where no top rail is required, pipe posts shall be fitted with suitable caps. Caps
will not be required for “C” or “H” section posts.
Top rails shall be furnished in random lengths of approximately 20 feet (6 m) where required.
Barbed wire shall be installed on the fence only when specifically required by the Plans or Special
Provisions. When required, it shall be installed on extension arms of a type specified under 206-6.6.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
134 Greenbook 2021

206-6.2 Materials for Posts, Rails and Braces. Materials for posts, rails, and braces shall conform to
Table 206-6.2.

TABLE 206-6.2
1 Weight
Nominal Actual O.D.
Use lbs/ft (kg/m)
Type And Size inches (mm)
Class 1 Class 1A
End, corner, slope, and gate posts for
single gates 6 feet (1.8 m) or less in
width and double gates 12 feet (3.6 m) or 2 NPS 2.375 (60.3) 3.65 (5.43) 3.12 (4.64)
less in width for fences less than 72
inches (1.8 m) in height.
End, corner, slope, and gate posts for
single gates 6 feet (1.8 m) or less in 2-1/2 NPS 2.875 (73.0) 5.79 (8.62) 4.64 (6.91)
width and double gates 12 feet (3.6 m) or
less in width for fences 72 inches (1.8 m)
in height or higher.
Gate posts for single swing gates over 13 —
feet (4 m) but not over 18 feet (5.5 m) in —
width and double swing gates over 26 3-1/2 NPS 4.0 (101.6) 9.11 (13.56)
feet (8 m) but not over 36 feet (11 m) in
width for fences less than 72 inches
(1.8m) in height. 3 NPS 3.5 (88.9) — 5.71 (8.50)
—
Gate posts for single swing gates over 13
feet (4 m) but not over 18 feet (5.5 m) in
width and double swing gates over 26 6 NPS 6.625 (168.3) 18.97 (28.23)
feet (8 m) but not over 36 feet (11 m) in
width for fences 72 inches (1.8m) in —
height or higher.
Gate posts for single swing gates over 18
feet (5.5 m) in width and double- swing 8 NPS 8.625 (219.1) 24.70 (36.76) —
gates over 36 feet (11 m) in width.
Line posts for fences 72 inches (1.8 m) in 2 NPS 2.375 (60.3) 3.65 (5.43) 3.12 (4.64)
height or higher. 1-7/8 x 1-5/8 in — 2.15 (3.20) —
(48 x 41 mm) C —
2-1/4 x 1-7/8 in — 4.10 (6.10)
(57 x 48 mm) H
Line posts for fences less than 72 inches 1-1/2 NPS 1.90 (48.3) 2.72 (4.05) 2.28 (3.39)
(1.8 m) in height.
17/8 x 1-5/8 in — 1.85 (2.75)
(48 x 41 mm) H —
17/8 x 1-5/8 in — 2.80 (4.17) —
(48 x 41 mm) H —
Top rails and braces. 1-1/4 NPS 1.660 (42.2) 2.27 (3.39) 1.83 (2.72)

1-5/8 x 1-1/4 in — 1.35 (2.01) —

(41 x 32 mm) C — —
1-1/2 x 1-1/4 in — 2.20 (3.27) —
(38 x 32 mm) H — —
Frames for gates. 1-1/2 NPS 1.900 (48.3) 2.72 (4.05) 2.28 (3.39)
Stiffeners for gates. 1-1/4 NPS 1.660 (42.2) 2.27 (3.39) 1.83 (2.72)
1. Nominal Pipe Size (NPS), a non-dimensional unit as defined in ASTM F1083.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 135

206-6.3 Chain Link Fabric. Unless otherwise specified, shall conform to 206-3.1 or 206-6.3.2.
206-6.3.1 Galvanized Fabric. Chain link fabric shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A392.
The fabric shall be 11-gage (3.1 mm) for all fence 60 inches (1500 mm) or less in height and shall be 9-
gage (3.8 mm) for all fence over 60 inches (1500 mm) in height, unless otherwise specified.
All chain link fabric shall be woven into approximately 2-inch (50 mm) mesh and galvanized either
prior to or after fabrication, unless otherwise specified by the Contract Documents. Fabric 60 inches
(1500 mm) or less in width shall have knuckled finish on the top and bottom edges. Fabric greater than
60 inches (1500 mm) in width shall have knuckled finish on the top edges and twisted and barbed finish
on the bottom edge. Barbing shall be done by cutting the wire on the bias.
206-6.3.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated Fabric. This specification covers PVC coated chain
link fabric coated before weaving. PVC coated fabric shall conform to ASTM F668. Fabric may be
produced in two classes of wire defined as follows: Class 1 shall consist of PVC extruded or extruded
and adhered to zinc-coated steel wire. Class 2 shall consist of PVC fusion-bonded to zinc-coated steel
wire. PVC coating thickness shall be a minimum 15 mils (380 µm) for Class 1 and 7 mils (180 µm) for
Class 2. The core wire for the fabric shall be 0.120 inches (3.0 mm) for all fence 60 inches (1500 mm)
or less in height and shall be 0.148 inches (3.76 mm) for all fence over 60 inches (1500 mm) in height
unless otherwise specified. The specified diameter is the metallic core wire diameter and the PVC
coating shall not be considered when determining the diameter.
All chain link fabric shall be woven into approximately 2-inch (50 mm) mesh. All fabric widths
shall have knuckled finish on the top and bottom edges. At the time of fabrication, cut ends shall be
covered with acrylic enamel. Acrylic enamel shall be a PVC resin in solution, consisting of high-level
pigments, ultraviolet absorbers and solvent blends applied by brush or dabbing applicator.
206-6.4 Tension Wires and Fabric Ties. Tension wires shall be at least 7-gage (4.5 mm)
galvanized coil spring steel wire.
Ties used to fasten the fabric to posts, rails, and gate frames shall be not smaller than 11-gage (3.1
mm) galvanized steel, 6-gage (4.9 mm) aluminum wire, or approved noncorrosive metal bands.
Tension bars used in fastening fabric to end and corner posts and gate frames shall be galvanized
high carbon steel bars not smaller than 3/16 inch (9.5 mm) by 3/4 inch (19 mm).
206-6.5 Truss or Tension Rods. Truss or tension rods used in trussing gate frames and line posts
adjacent to end, corner, slope or gate posts shall be adjustable 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter galvanized
steel rod. When used in trussing line posts, adjustment shall be provided by means of galvanized
turnbuckles or other suitable tightening devices.
206-6.6 Fittings. All required fittings and hardware shall be galvanized.
Couplings to connect the individual lengths of top rail shall be of the outside sleeve type and at least
7 inches (175 mm) long. The bore of the sleeves shall be sufficiently true to maintain adjacent lengths of
rail in alignment.
Extension arms for barbed wire shall be of a type that can be attached to the tops of the posts and
carry three wires at approximately 5-1/2 inches (138 mm) centers in a plane approximately 45 degrees
from the vertical, inclined as shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
206-6.7 Barbed Wire. Barbed wire shall be 4-point pattern, composed of two strands of 12-1/2
gage (2.5 mm) galvanized steel wire with barbs spaced 5 inches (125 mm) apart and shall confirm to
ASTM A121.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
136 Greenbook 2021

206-6.8 Repair of Damaged Coatings. All welds made after galvanizing shall be ground smooth
and wire brushed to remove loose or burned zinc coating, after which the cleaned areas shall be prepared
and neatly coated with 50-50 solder or as prescribed in 210-3.5. Repairs to abraded or otherwise
damaged zinc coating shall be made in a similar manner.
206-6.9 Security Fencing. Security fencing shall be 5 feet (1.5 m) high. Security fencing material
shall be chain link fabric or welded wire fabric (6x6-W9xW9 minimum) and constructed using:
a) Tensioned fencing material with top and bottom tension wires securely fastened to driven steel
posts or other equally rigid elements at a maximum spacing of 12 feet (3.7 m); or
b) Untensioned fencing materials securely fastened to extended trench shoring elements at a
maximum spacing of 8 feet (2.4 m) and fastened to continuous top and bottom rails including
toe plates constructed of nominal 2-inch x 4-inch (50 mm x 100 mm) lumber or equally rigid
material.
Framed panels with suitable supporting elements fastened together to form a continuous fence may
also be used.

SECTION 207 – GRAVITY PIPE

207-1 NONREINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE.

207-1.1 General. Nonreinforced concrete pipe to be furnished shall be as shown on the Plans, or as
specified under the Bid item of work for the Contract.
Concrete pipe shall be extra-strength unless otherwise specified, shall be manufactured from
Portland cement concrete, and shall be so constructed that it will conform to the requirements
described herein.
207-1.2 Materials. Materials used in manufacturing the pipe shall be as specified in ASTM
C14/C14M with the following exceptions:
a) Cement shall conform to 201-1.2.1.
b) At least 28 percent of the aggregate by weight shall be larger than 9/10 inch (23 mm) for pipes 12
inches (300 mm) and larger in diameter.
c) Aggregates shall conform to 201-1.2.2.
207-1.3 General Requirements. The plane of the ends of the pipe, except for special shapes, shall
be perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. The interior surface shall be smooth and well-
finished. Joints shall either be of the socket and spigot type or the tongue and groove type, as approved
by the Engineer, and so constructed that, when laid, the pipe will form a continuous conduit with a
smooth and uniform interior surface.
When shown on the Plans, the pipe shall have a gasketed joint. The gasket shall be seated in an
accurately shaped groove on the spigot end of the pipe section and the gasket shall be of suitable cross
section and size. Alternate joint details may be used with Engineer approval. The gasket shall be
considered as the principal element in making the joint watertight. The gasket shall be manufactured
from a synthetic rubber of neoprene base and shall conform to the requirements of 208-1.2 and 208-2.2.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 137

The completed pipe shall be free from fractures, large or deep cracks, laminations, and surface
roughness. Specimens which, when placed in a vertical position, do not give a metallic ring when struck
with a hammer, or which exhibit any of the following defects, will be subject to rejection:
a) Indications of honeycomb or open texture or of imperfect mixing or molding.
b) Fractures or cracks passing through the wall or socket, except a single end crack less than 3
inches (75 mm) measured transversely or 2 inches (50 mm) measured longitudinally will not be
deemed cause for rejection unless such defects appear in more than 5 percent of the number of
sections inspected; in which event, the defective sections will be rejected.
c) Cracks sufficient to impair the strength, durability or serviceability of the pipe; a single crack in
the body of the pipe, extending through one-half of the thickness of the wall and over 3 inches
(75 mm) in length; or 2 or more such cracks regardless of length.
d) Variations in dimensions in excess of those permissible, as set forth in the following tables.
e) Failure to meet the test requirements set forth herein.
f) In pipe designed to be straight, deviations greater than 3/8 inch per linear foot (30 mm/m).
The deviation shall be measured from a straight-edge on the concave side of the pipe.
207-1.4 Dimensions. Each straight pipe of all sizes and classes shall be not less than 3 feet (0.9 m)
in length unless otherwise specified for special purposes. The minimum length of 6-inch (150 mm) Ys
and Ts shall be 18 inches (450 mm) and 24 inches (600 mm) for 8-inch (200 mm) and larger Ys and Ts.
Other dimensions of pipe shall conform to the following tables:

TABLE 207-1.4 (A):

STANDARD STRENGTH CONCRETE PIPE

1 2 3 4
1
Nominal Size Thickness of Wall Depth of Socket Minimum Annular Space
inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm)
6 (150) 3/4 (19) 2-1/4 (57) 5/8 (16)
8 (200) 7/8 (22) 2-1/2 (64) 5/8 (16)
10 (250) 1 (25) 2-1/2 (64) 5/8 (16)
12 (300) 1-1/8 (29) 2-3/4 (70) 5/8 (16)
15 (375) 1-3/8 (35) 2-3/4 (70) 5/8 (16)
18 (450) 1-1/2 (38) 3 (76) 5/8 (16)
21 (525) 1-3/4 (44) 3-1/2 (89) 3/4 (19)
1. Applies to socket ends only.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
138 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 207-1.4 (B):

EXTRA-STRENGTH CONCRETE PIPE
1 2 3 4
2
Nominal Size Thickness of Wall Depth of Socket Minimum Annular Space
inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm)
6 (150) 3/4 (19) 2-1/4 (57) 5/8 (16)
8 (200) 7/8 (22) 2-1/2 (64) 5/8 (16)
10 (250) 1 (25) 2-1/2 (64) 5/8 (16)
12 (300) 1-1/2 (38) 2-3/4 (70) 5/8 (16)
15 (375) 1-7/8 (48) 2-3/4 (70) 5/8 (16)
18 (450) 2-3/8 (60) 3 (76) 5/8 (16)
21 (525) 2-3/4 (70) 3-1/2 (89) 3/4 (19)
1. The annular space is the space between the inside of the socket and the outside of the spigot of the pipe as placed in the socket. The
minimum annular space, as shown in column 4, is measured at the outer end of the socket. The space at the bottom of the socket,
known as the caulking space, shall be not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. Applies to socket ends only.

TABLE 207-1.4 (C):

LIMITS OF PERMISSIBLE VARIATION IN STANDARD STRENGTH AND EXTRA-STRENGTH CONCRETE PIPE
Inside Diameter of Bore Length of
Variation from Thickness inches (mm) Two Opposite
Nominal Size Indicated Length (±) Depth of Socket (–) of Wall (–) Sides
inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm) Minimum Maximum inches (mm)
6 (150) 1/2 (13) 1/4 (6) 1/16 (2) 5-13/16 (150) 6-3/16 (160) 3/8 (10)
8 (200) 1/2 (13) 1/4 (6) 1/16 (2) 7-13/16 (200) 8-1/4 (210) 3/8 (10)
10 (250) 1/2 (13) 1/4 (6) 1/16 (2) 9-13/16 (250) 10-1/4 (260) 3/8 (10)
12 (300) 1/2 (13) 1/4 (6) 1/16 (2) 11-13/16 (300) 12-5/16 (312) 3/8 (10)
15 (375) 1/2 (13) 1/4 (6) 1/8 (3) 14-3/4 (375) 15-5/16 (390) 3/8 (10)
18 (450) 1/2 (13) 1/4 (6) 1/8 (3) 17-3/4 (450) 18-3/8 (465) 3/8 (10)
21 (525) 1/2 (13) 1/4 (6) 1/8 (3) 20-11/16 (525) 21-7/16 (545) 3/8 (10)
The minus sign (–) alone indicates the plus variation is not limited; the plus and minus sign (±) indicates variations in both excess and
deficiency.

207-1.5 Marking. Each pipe shall be marked clearly and legibly to show the class of pipe, date of
manufacture, and the name or trademark of the manufacturer.
207-1.6 Test Requirements.
207-1.6.1 General. Before pipe is delivered to the Work site for use in any work, test pipe shall
meet the requirements of the hydrostatic pressure test and the loading test described herein. Tests shall
be made at the point of manufacture and shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer.
Testing equipment shall be calibrated at intervals not to exceed 6 months.
207-1.6.2 Selection of Test Pipes. Each lot of non-reinforced concrete pipe is defined as not more
than 450 sections of pipe of one size and class. All the pipe shall be manufactured from the same mix of
concrete, have the same cure, and be from 1 day’s manufacture.
The Engineer will select at random and have tested one pipe for each 50 pipes or fraction thereof in
each lot. The minimum number of pipes tested for any lot shall be 5. The pipes selected for test shall be
sound and have dimensions consistent with these specifications.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 139

The Contractor shall furnish the test pipes without charge and shall provide adequate equipment and
facilities for conducting tests. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall bear all costs.
207-1.6.3 Hydrostatic Pressure Test. The hydrostatic pressure test shall precede the loading test
by not more than 3 hours.
When the pipe is subjected to an internal hydrostatic pressure of 10 pounds per square inch (70
kPa) for the time shown in the following table, the accumulated moisture on the exterior surface
shall not run down the sides in such quantity that will exceed 0.34 fluid ounce (10 mL). Each 10
square inches (6500 mm2) of moisture appearing on the exterior surface shall be considered to be
0.03 fluid ounce (1 mL) of runoff.

TABLE 207-1.6.3
Thickness of Wall Testing Time (Minutes)
Up to and including 1 inch (25 mm) 7
Over 1 inch (25 mm) and including 1-1/2-inch (38 mm) 9
Over 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) and including 2-inch (50 mm) 12
Over 2 inches (50 mm) and including 2-1/2-inch (63 mm) 15
Over 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) and including 3-inch (75 mm) 18
Over 3 inches (75 mm) 21

207-1.6.4 Loading Test. The loading test shall be the three-edge bearing conforming to ASTM C14.

TABLE 207-1.6.4
Pounds Per Linear Foot (kN/m)
Size Inches (mm) Standard Strength Extra Strength
6 (150) 1100 (16.1) 2000 (29.2)
8 (200) 1300 (19.0) 2000 (29.2)
10 (250) 1400 (20.4) 2000 (29.2)
12 (300) 1500 (21.9) 2250 (32.8)
15 (375) 1750 (25.5) 2750 (40.1)
18 (450) 2000 (29.2) 3300 (48.2)
21 (525) 2200 (32.1) 3850 (56.2)

The net inside length of pipe from the bottom of the socket to the spigot end of the pipe shall be used
as the divisor to calculate the load per unit length.
207-1.6.5 Acceptance or Rejection of Pipe. When all the pipe tested passes the required tests, the
entire lot of pipe will be acceptable. When 2 test pipes fail, the entire lot will be rejected.
When only one test pipe of the first group selected fails, 5 additional pipes shall be tested. If none of
the additional pipes fail, the entire lot will be acceptable. If one fails, the entire lot will be rejected.
207-1.7 Perforated Pipe. Perforated pipe shall conform to the requirements of this section except
the hydrostatic pressure test will not be required, and the strength requirements shall be reduced 10
percent from the values given in 207-1.6.4.
The pipe shall be shop perforated with perforations symmetrically located within a maximum
arc of 160 degrees. Perforations shall have a total open area of at least 0.3 square inches per linear
foot (630 mm2/m) of pipe, with a minimum of one perforation per linear foot (3 perforations per
linear meter) ; except for joint areas. Perforations shall be either holes or slots. Diameter of the

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
140 Greenbook 2021

holes may vary from 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum to 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) maximum; the width of the
slots may vary from 3/16 inch (5 mm) minimum to 5/16 inch (8 mm) maximum; the length of the
slot shall not exceed 4 inches (100 mm).
207-1.8 Curing.
207-1.8.1 General. The manufacturer shall provide adequate steam plant, enclosures, piping, and
other facilities for curing the pipe. The enclosures shall be such that the humidity shall be maintained so
as to keep the pipe surfaces moist at all times. The temperature shall be maintained continuously
between 120°F and 150°F (50°C and 65°C).
207-1.8.2 Curing Requirements. The pipe shall be cured under either of the following methods:
a) After the pipe has been manufactured, it shall be placed in enclosures and saturated steam
applied for at least 6 hours, starting not sooner than 1 hour nor more than 10 hours, after
completion of manufacture. Starting not later than 1 working day after completion of the steam
curing, the pipe shall be kept constantly and thoroughly wet for at least 7 Days. When an
approved temperature-time recorder is used, 1 hour of steam may be substituted for each 4 hours
of the required water cure.
b) Starting not later than 24 hours after the pipe has been manufactured, it shall be kept constantly
and thoroughly wet for at least 14 Days.
207-1.9 Inspection. Sections of pipe to be inspected shall be so situated at the manufacturer’s plant
as to provide the Engineer with free accessibility for inspection and marking. In no case shall the pipe
be stacked for inspection to a height that would require the Engineer to climb or use a ladder.
At the place of manufacture, the Engineer will indicate acceptance of the pipe for delivery to the
Work site by marking the pipe with the Agency’s stamp. Such acceptance, however, shall be considered
a tentative acceptance. Final acceptance will be made only when the project has been completed.
If pipe is rejected subsequent to its manufacture, the mark placed thereon by the Engineer shall
be defaced.
207-2 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (RCP).
207-2.1 General. These specifications apply to reinforced concrete pipe intended to be used for the
construction of storm drains, sewers, and related structures.
The size, type, and D-load of the concrete pipe to be furnished shall be as shown on the Plans or
specified in the Special Provisions.
Prior to the manufacture of the RCP, 3 sets of prints of the pipeline layout diagrams shall be
furnished to the Engineer per 3-8.4, except transparencies will not be required. Catch basin connector
pipes need not be included in the layout; but, in lieu thereof, a list of catch basin connector pipes shall
accompany the layout. The connector pipe list shall include size and D-load of pipe, station at which
pipe joins mainline, number of sections of pipe, length of sections, and type of sections (straight,
horizontal bevel, vertical bevel, etc.). The diagrams and lists submitted will be used by the Engineer for
reference only, and their use shall in no way relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for correctness.
The Engineer may waive the pipeline layout and connector pipe list requirement.
Unless otherwise specified, RCP shall be either wet-cast, spun, or machine-made.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 141

Plants and processes not previously qualified by the Agency may require initial qualification by the
Agency using any or all of the following tests described in ASTM C497/C497M and as listed below.
Upon qualification, no additional tests will be required unless changes have been made in the equipment
and procedures, or an increase in the largest aggregate size is made from the previous approved mix
designs. The manufacturer shall provide qualifying data upon request by the Engineer:
a) Three-Edge Bearing Test. Two tests minimum on each of three different pipe sizes per 207-2.9.2.
b) Core Strength Test.
1) Minimum allowable adjusted compressive strength: 4,000 pounds per square inch (27.6 MPa).
2) Number of tests: 2 each from 3 different pipes.
3) Unit weight to be used as a baseline for future reference.
c) Absorption Test Per ASTM C497/ASTM, C497M, Section 7, Method A.
1) Obtain 2 core samples (one each from the middle area of two pipes for each mix design).
2) Maximum allowable absorption value: 9 percent.
d) Hydrostatic Test. One test sample selected by the Engineer shall meet the following criteria:
1) 24-hour presoak (manufacturer’s option).
2) Hydrostatic pressure of 13 pounds per square inch (90 kPa) minimum shall be maintained for
20 minutes.
3) End bulkheads or internal plugs may be used at the manufacturer’s option. Leakage at the
bulkhead of plugs is allowed if leakage does not interfere with the test.
4) Allowable leakage: none. Moisture appearing on the exterior surface of the pipe in the form
of beads adhering to the surface will not be considered leakage. The tests may be repeated
after the 24-hour presoak at the manufacturer’s option to determine if test pipe stops leaking.
Pipe which stops leakage after the presoak will be considered to have passed.
e) Visual Inspection. Pipe inspection shall include the following:
1) 207-2.5 (Joints).
2) Interior surface finish and textures.
3) Reinforcing steel placement and twist, per 207-2.4.2 and 207-2.4.3. Concrete from a portion
of one piece of green pipe shall be stripped or raked to determine cage twist, location,
clearance, and voids. Voids around reinforcing steel cage caused by cage twist will not be
acceptable. Cage twist resulting from pipe production in excess of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 8 feet
(2.4 m) will not be acceptable.
4) Longitudinally cut pipe. One pipe shall be longitudinally sawcut in half using equipment
which will not damage the concrete or reinforcing steel. The exposed surface shall be
inspected for voids adjacent to the circumferential steel. Voids shall be considered
continuous if a 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) diameter pin can be inserted 1/4 inch (6 mm) deep.
This test will be acceptable if no more than 10 percent of the circumferential bars exposed
have continuous voids.
Plant inspection shall include cage manufacturing, curing process, batching equipment and process,
aggregate and cement storage, concrete mix designs, and product handling.
The interior surface of the pipe shall be smooth and well-finished. Joints shall be of such type and
design and so constructed as to be adequate for the purpose intended so that, when laid, the pipe will
form a continuous conduit with a smooth and uniform interior surface.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
142 Greenbook 2021

Sockets and spigots shall be free from any deleterious substance or condition which might prevent a
satisfactory mortar bond at the joints.
If the Engineer determines that the forms, end rings, or form gaskets used in the manufacture of the pipe
are inadequate, the Contractor shall replace or repair said equipment to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Pipe of greater strength than that specified or cover greater than required in 207-2.4.2 may be
furnished at the Contractor’s option, and its expense, provided such pipe conforms in all other aspects to
the applicable provisions of these specifications.
The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain stulls or other devices in the pipe as may be
necessary to meet the limitations on cracks specified herein.
207-2.2 Materials. Unless otherwise approved, no materials shall be used in manufacturing the
pipe other than water, water reducing admixture, cement, mineral aggregates, and steel conforming to
ASTM C76/ASTM, C76M with the following requirements:
a) Cement shall conform to 201-1.2.1.
b) Aggregate shall conform to the reactivity requirements in 201-1.2.2.
c) Fly ash shall conform to the quality requirements in 201-1.2.5.
Aggregate shall be so graded, proportioned, and thoroughly mixed in a batch mixer so as to produce
a homogeneous concrete mixture of such quality that pipe will conform to the test and design
requirements of these Specifications. The proportion of cementitious material (Portland cement and fly
ash) shall not be less than 560 pounds per cubic yard (330 kg/m3) of concrete.
207-2.3 Dimensions.
207-2.3.1 Length. The nominal length shall be not less than 8 feet (2.4 m) except as otherwise
specified or required for bends or special joints.
Variations in laying lengths of 2 opposite sides of pipe shall not be more than 1/8 inch per foot (10
mm/m) of diameter with a maximum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) in any length of pipe.
207-2.3.2 Cast Pipe Wall Thickness. Cast pipe wall thickness shall conform to the following:

TABLE 207-2.3.2
Nominal Internal Diameter Minimum Barrel Thickness
inches (mm) inches (mm)
12 (300) 2 (50)
15 (375) 2-1/4 (57)
18 (450) 2-1/4 (57)
21 (525) 2-1/4 (57)
24 (600) 3 (76)
27 (675) 3 (76)
30 (750) 3 (76)
33 (825) 3 (76)

For pipe larger than 33 inches (825 mm) in diameter, the minimum wall thickness permitted will
depend upon the strength of the concrete used. If the concrete has a strength of 4,500 pounds per square
inch (31.0 MPa) in 28 Days, any wall thickness not less than 1/12 the internal diameter is permitted. If the
concrete has a strength less than 4,500 pounds per square inch (31.0 MPa) but more than 4,000 pounds per
square inch (27.6 MPa) at 28 Days, a wall thickness 1 inch (25 mm) greater than 1/12 the internal diameter
will be required. The concrete strength shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C31 and C39.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 143

207-2.3.3 Spun Pipe Wall Thickness. Spun pipe wall thickness shall conform to the following:

TABLE 207-2.3.3
Nominal Diameter inches (mm) Minimum Wall Thickness inches (mm)
12 (300) 2 (50)
15 (375) 2 (50)
18 (450) 2 (50)
21 (525) 2 (50)
24 (600) 2-1/2 (63)
27 (675) 2-5/8 (66)
30 (750) 2-3/4 (69)
33 (825) 2-7/8 (73)
36 (900) 3 (75)
39 (975) 3-1/8 (78)
42 (1050) 3-3/4 (94)
45 (1125) 3-7/8 (98)
48 (1200) 4 (100)

The thickness of the barrel of pipe larger than 48 inches (1200 mm) in diameter shall not be less than
1/12 the internal diameter of the pipe.
207-2.3.4 Machine-Made Pipe Wall Thickness. The minimum wall thickness for all pipe sizes
shall be as specified in ASTM C76/C76M Wall B (1/12 the internal diameter plus 1 inch [25 mm]) using
4,000 pounds per square inch (27.6 MPa) minimum strength concrete.
207-2.4 Reinforcement.
207-2.4.1 General. The reinforcement shall be a cage fabricated of bars or wire.
Circumferential reinforcement shall be in the amount and type shown on Plans, or that required to
sustain the specified test loads. Longitudinal reinforcement shall be sufficient to make the cage
rigid and to support the circumferential reinforcement firmly in place in the forms during placing
and consolidation of the concrete.
Pipe which is to be jacked shall have a circular cage reinforcement.
In pipe larger than 96 inches (2400 mm) diameter, the minimum size of circumferential
reinforcement for the inside circular cage shall be 7/16 inch (11 mm) diameter.
Fastenings (supports) and/or retractable mechanical devices, approved by the Engineer, shall be used
for holding the cage rigidly in place in the form in its elliptical or circular shape. In wet-cast and
machine-made pipe these fastenings shall be spaced not closer than 2 feet (0.6 m) center-to-center along
the longitudinal reinforcement except for pipe having a nominal length of 4 feet (1.2 m) or less.
All reinforcing steel shall be clean and free from loose rust, scale, paint, grease, form oil, or other
foreign matter.
Splices shall be butt-welded or lap-welded a minimum of 6 diameters. Nonwelded splices shall be
lapped a minimum of 20 diameters for deformed bars and 40 diameters for plain bars or cold-drawn
wire. Nonwelded lapped splices shall be wired tightly. Welds shall develop not less than 75 percent of
the minimum specified ultimate strength of the bars or wires being welded.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
144 Greenbook 2021

Elliptical cages may be specifically fabricated or deformed from a circular cage to the required
elliptical dimensions.
Cages for machine-made pipe shall be circular.
Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish data to the Engineer indicating lot number, wall thickness,
and the size, spacing, and positioning of reinforcement for any pipe manufactured.
207-2.4.2 Location of Reinforcement. Measurements of position, except for concrete cover, shall
apply to the center of the bar or wire.
For pipe with wall thickness greater than 2-1/4 inches (57 mm), the required minimum cover
measured between reinforcement surface and pipe surface, and the permitted cover tolerances are given
in the following table:

TABLE 207-2.4.2
Storm Drain Pipe Nominal Diameter Sewer Pipe Nominal Diameter

Reinforcement Greater than 96 inches Greater than

24 to 36 inches 39 to 96 inches
6 inches (2400 mm) 96 inches
(600 to 900 mm) (975 to 2400 mm)
(2400 mm) or less (2400 mm)
Circumferential, inches (mm) 3/4 ± 1/4 (19 ± 6) 3/4 ± 1/4 (19 ± 6) 1-1/4 ± 1/4 (32 ± 6) 1 ± 1/4 (25 ± 6) 1-1/4 ± 1/4 (32 ± 6)
Longitudinal, inches (mm) 3/8 (9.5) minimum 1/2 (12.5) minimum 1/2 (12.5) minimum 1 (25) minimum 1 (25) minimum
In lined sewer pipe, the tabulated cover shall be increased as necessary to ensure that the distance from any reinforcement to embedded
lugs or locking extensions of the liner is at least 1/4 inch (6 mm).

The required covers shown in the table are minimums. Certain conditions such as high velocities or
corrosive environments, may require greater covers as indicated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
The tabulated tolerances shall not apply where the Plans show cover over circumferential steel which differs
from the values shown above.
For pipe with a wall thickness of 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) or less, the circumferential reinforcement shall be
located at the center of the wall. The cover over longitudinal reinforcement shall be at least 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
207-2.4.3 Placement of Reinforcement. The location of the minor axis of elliptically reinforced pipe shall
be marked so that an imprint will be left in the interior of the concrete.
The circumferential reinforcement shall be placed in the body of pipe in such a manner that the longitudinal
reinforcement of the cage will hold the last hoop or coil 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum from the end plates or rings.
Both ends of the circumferential reinforcement shall be finished off with a complete hoop of reinforcement.
For storm drain pipe, the longitudinal reinforcement may extend to the base plate or ring to act as a cage
support. For sanitary sewer pipe, the longitudinal reinforcement shall have a minimum cover of 3/4 inch (19
mm) from the end faces of the pipe.
Circumferential reinforcement may be included in the joint projections at the option of manufacturer, and
shall be included when required by the Plans or Special Provisions.
Where the wall reinforcement does not extend into the joint projection, the longitudinal distance to the last
circumferential reinforcement from the inside shoulder of the bell or shoulder of the spigot shall be a maximum
of 1-3/4 inches (44 mm), but not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) from any face.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 145

207-2.5 Joints. Joints shall be designed to be self-centering. Unless otherwise specified, joints in concrete
pipe shall be of the tongue-and-groove mortar type of joint.
When pipe joints of the reinforced concrete collar type or of rubber-gasketed type are specified or indicated
on the Plans, joint details shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before commencing pipe manufacture.
Pipe with beveled ends for use around curves, the radii of which are shown on the Plans, shall be provided
where necessary. Either one or both ends shall be beveled a maximum of 5 degrees as may be required to
provide well-fitting joints.
If required by the Engineer, the pipe shall be “match-marked” to meet specified laying tolerances at the place
of manufacture and laying diagrams shall be furnished to the Contractor.
207-2.6 General Manufacturing Requirements.
207-2.6.1 Wet-Cast Pipe. Wet-cast RCP shall be manufactured by placing the concrete into stationary,
vertical, cylindrical metal forms. During placing of each batch the concrete shall be vibrated continuously with
internal or external mechanical vibrators operating at a minimum rate of 6,500 vibrations per minute.
207-2.6.2 Spun Pipe. Spun RCP shall be manufactured by introducing the concrete into a rotating
horizontal cylindrical metal form. After the concrete materials have been mixed, they shall be promptly placed in
the forms and spun on a horizontal axis. If, for any reason, the work of filling the forms is interrupted long
enough for the concrete to take its initial set, any partly filled form shall be emptied and the concrete rejected.
While the concrete is being placed in the forms, they shall be revolved on a horizontal axis at a speed that will
ensure uniformity of aggregates. After all the concrete has been placed in the forms, they shall be revolved at
proper speed and duration to secure a dense concrete with smooth interior surface. Water and laitance collecting
on the surface of the concrete shall be removed, and the interior surface of the pipe shall be troweled and finished
to the form of a true cylinder.
207-2.6.3 Machine-Made Pipe. Machine-made RCP shall be manufactured by placing the concrete
between vertical cylindrical forms or by placing the concrete into a vertical form and the interior surface formed
with one or more roller packing heads and a long bottom-trowel rotating in opposite directions. The concrete
shall be mixed to a uniform consistency and the reinforcing cage shall be held by fastening (supports) and/or
retractable mechanical devices to ensure correct cage position.
Concrete placed between inner and outer forms shall be continuously vibrated throughout the manufacturing
cycle and after all concrete has been placed in the forms, axial pressure shall be applied simultaneously with
vibration to further densify the concrete, or the concrete shall be placed against the outer jacket and densified by
continuous vibration during the manufacturing cycle. On completion of densification, the pipe may be removed
immediately from the forms.
207-2.7 Curing.
207-2.7.1 Steam Curing Facilities. The manufacturer shall provide adequate enclosures, steam plant,
piping, and other facilities for curing pipe. The enclosures shall be such that the temperature and humidity can be
controlled to keep the pipe surfaces moist at all times and temperature maintained continuously between 80°F
and 170°F (27°C and 77°C). Bulkhead curing is permissible, but will only be given credit for a maximum of 12
hours of the steam cycle.
207-2.7.2 Curing Procedures.
General. Wet-cast, machine-made, and spun pipe shall be cured by steam or water, or a combination of
both, as described in the following paragraphs:
a) Steam Curing. Steam may be applied as soon as the pipe is enclosed, but not later than 10 hours after
completion of concrete placement. The temperature within the enclosure shall not be raised above 100°F
(38°C) by the use of steam for the first hour; thereafter the temperature shall not be increased at a rate

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
146 Greenbook 2021

greater than 40°F (22°C) per hour. The temperature shall be maintained continuously between 80°F and
170°F (27°C and 77°C) for 28 hours.
For wet-cast and spun pipe, 6 hours of steam (at least 5 hours at 80°F (27°C) or higher) is required before
forms may be removed. The period necessary to remove the forms may be included in the 28 hours, as
long as it does not exceed 4 hours. Any time more than 4 hours shall be added to the total steam cycle.
The time lapse during form removal shall not exceed 1 working day.
b) Combination Curing. At any time after 6 hours of the steam cycle, the steam may be stopped and the
cure continued using water applied in such a manner that the outside surfaces of the pipe is kept moist.
Water may be substituted for steam on a basis of 4 hours of water being equal to 1 hour of steam. The
manufacturer shall notify the Engineer prior to using water in lieu of steam.
c) Water Curing. Pipe may be water cured by any method that will keep the outside surface moist for 4
consecutive days. Pipe to be given a total water cure may not be stripped from the forms until 20 hours
after concrete placement or until the concrete has reached a compressive strength of 1,500 pounds per
square inch (10.3 MPa), whichever occurs first.
d) Alternate Curing Based On Compressive Strength. Pipe cured by any of the above methods may
have the water or steam stopped when the concrete strength reaches 3,000 pounds per square inch (20.7
MPa). The strength shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C31 and C39.
e) Alternate Curing Procedures. The manufacturer may request approval of alternate methods of curing
that differ from the procedures specified above. The alternative method shall be specified in writing to
the Engineer and fully substantiated by test data.
207-2.8 Causes for Rejection. Inspection of pipe as may be deemed necessary by the Agency will be made
at the place of manufacture, and unless it can be repaired as provided in 207-3.3, or as approved by the Engineer,
pipe may be rejected for any of the following reasons:
a) A piece of any size broken out of the pipe.
b) Defects that indicate imperfect mixing or molding.
c) Any crack extending entirely through the wall of the pipe and having a longitudinal or transverse length
greater than the wall thickness of the pipe.
d) Any shattering or flaking of concrete at a crack.
e) A deficiency greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) from the specified wall thickness of pipe 30 inches (750
mm) or smaller in diameter, or a deficiency greater than 5 percent (6 percent) from the specified wall
thickness of pipe larger than 30 inches (750 mm) in internal diameter, except that the deficiency may
be 8 percent (7 percent) adjacent to the longitudinal joint, provided that additional deficiency does not
lie closer than 20 percent of the internal diameter to the vertical axis of the pipe and does not extend
along the circumference for a distance greater than 20 percent of the internal diameter.
The deficiencies in wall thickness permitted herein do not apply to gasket contact surfaces in gasketed
joint pipe. Dimensions and tolerances of such contact surfaces shall be submitted for approval.
f) Internal diameter of the pipe varying from the true circle of the specified diameter by more than 1
percent for U.S. Standard Measures units (for SI units, pipe having less than the specified diameter, or
exceeding it by more than 2.6 percent).
g) The roundness of the pipe varies from a true circle of the actual internal diameter by more than one
percent at any location along the barrel.
h) Rock pockets and water pockets in any pipe.
i) Exposure of any reinforcement arising from misplacement thereof.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 147

j) Evidence of cage twist or misplacement of reinforcement.

k) Delamination of the concrete.
l) Surface defects indicating honeycomb or open-texture.
m) Separations or “blisters.”
n) Slumped or sagged concrete.
o) For sewer pipe, any crack showing two visible lines or separation for a continuous length of 2 feet (0.6
m) or more, or an interrupted length of 3 feet (0.9 m) or more anywhere in evidence, both inside and
outside, except where such cracks occur during the external loading test specified herein.
p) Any continuous crack or concrete separation having a surface width of 0.010 inch (0.255 mm) or more
and extending for a length of 12 inches (300 mm) or more, regardless of depth or position in the wall of
the pipe.
q) The pipe fails the D-load bearing strength test.
Pipe subject to rejection for reasons a, d, h, i, l, and m above may be repaired or rejected in accordance with
AASHTO R73 when approved by the Engineer.
The imperfections and variations as causes for rejection in sewer and storm drain pipe, as specified herein,
shall apply to pipe for which design details are shown on the Plans as well as for pipe which is specified by D-
load. The procedure of the Engineer for marking the pipe with the Agency’s stamp at the place of manufacture
shall not be considered a final acceptance of the pipe.
Pipe shall be considered ready for transporting to the Work site when it conforms to the specified
requirements for curing, testing, and inspection.
207-2.9 Basis for Acceptance.
207-2.9.1 General. The basis for acceptance shall be by one of the following, as specified in the
Special Provisions:
a) The D-load bearing strength test, compliance with these Specifications, inspection of the pipe
manufacture and inspection of the completed pipe.
b) The structural design details, materials, tests, inspection of the pipe manufacture and inspection of the
completed pipe.
c) Acceptance of a Certificate of Compliance.
207-2.9.2 D-load Bearing Strength Test. Pipe to be D-load tested shall be selected at random by the
Engineer at the point of manufacture. One pipe will be selected for each lot, or fraction thereof, of the pipe to be
furnished for the Work.
For the purpose of these specifications, a lot is defined as 400 feet (122 m) but no more than 50 sections of
pipe, or fraction thereof, of one size and class manufactured on consecutive working days. If the 400 feet (122
m), but no more than 50 sections, of pipe are not made on consecutive working days, then only those made on
consecutive working days shall be considered a lot. If an interruption in manufacturing occurs, the Engineer may
permit the pipe made after the interruption to be included in the lot, provided that the interruption lasts less than 7
Days. A new lot number will be assigned if any change occurs in size or spacing of reinforcing steel, in the
concrete mix, or in the curing method.
The Contractor shall furnish the test pipe without charge and shall provide adequate equipment and facilities
for conducting tests and shall bear all expense in connection therewith, all tests being under the supervision of the
Engineer. Testing equipment shall be calibrated at intervals not to exceed 6 months.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
148 Greenbook 2021

Test pipe shall conform in all other respects to the applicable requirements specified herein. Pipe shall be
tested by the 3-edge bearing test as prescribed in ASTM C497/C497M.

TABLE 207-2.9.2:
ALLOWABLE CRACK WIDTH
Allowable Crack Width in inches (mm)
Pipe Wall Pipe Diameters up to 96 inches (2400 mm)
Thickness Concrete Cover on Transverse Reinforcement in inches (mm)
inches 0.75" 1.25" 1.75" 2.25" 2.75"
(mm) (19 mm) (32 mm) (44 mm) (57 mm) (70 mm)
2.5 (63) 0.010 (0.255) 0.015 (0.380)
3.0 (76) 0.010 (0.255) 0.014 (0.355)
3.5 (89) 0.010 (0.255) 0.013 (0.330) 0.018 (0.455)
4.0 (101) 0.010 (0.255) 0.013 (0.330) 0.017 (0.430)
4.5 (114) 0.010 (0.255) 0.012 (0.305) 0.015 (0.380) 0.020 (0.510)
5.0 (127) 0.010 (0.255) 0.012 (0.305) 0.015 (0.380) 0.018 (0.455)
5.5 (140) 0.010 (0.255) 0.012 (0.305) 0.014 (0.355) 0.017 (0.430) 0.021 (0.535)
6.0 (152) 0.010 (0.255) 0.012 (0.305) 0.013 (0.330) 0.016 (0.405) 0.019 (0.485)
6.5 (165) 0.010 (0.255) 0.012 (0.305) 0.013 (0.330) 0.015 (0.380) 0.018 (0.455)
7.0 (178) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.013 (0.330) 0.015 (0.380) 0.017 (0.430)
7.5 (191) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.013 (0.330) 0.014 (0.355) 0.017 (0.430)
8.0 (203) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.013 (0.330) 0.014 (0.355) 0.016 (0.405)
8.5 (216) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.013 (0.330) 0.014 (0.355) 0.015 (0.380)
9.0 (229) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.013 (0.330) 0.013 (0.330) 0.015 (0.380)
9.5 to 10.5 (241 to 267) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.013 (0.330) 0.013 (0.330) 0.014 (0.355)
Pipe Wall Allowable Crack Width in inches (mm)
Thickness Pipe Diameters Greater than 96 inches (2400 mm)
inches Concrete Cover on Transverse Reinforcement in inches (mm)
(mm) 1.25" 1.75" 2.25" 2.75" 3.25"
(32 mm) (44 mm) (57 mm) (70 mm) (83 mm)
8.0 (203) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.012 (0.305) 0.014 (0.355) 0.016 (0.405)
8.5 (216) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.012 (0.305) 0.014 (0.355) 0.015 (0.380)
9.0 (229) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.012 (0.305) 0.013 (0.330) 0.015 (0.380)
9.5 (241) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.012 (0.305) 0.013 (0.330) 0.015 (0.380)
10.0 (254) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.012 (0.305) 0.013 (0.330) 0.014 (0.355)
10.5 (267) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.012 (0.305) 0.013 (0.330) 0.014 (0.355)
11.0 (279) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.012 (0.305) 0.013 (0.330) 0.014 (0.355)
11.5 (292) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.012 (0.305) 0.012 (0.305) 0.013 (0.330)
12.0 (305) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.012 (0.305) 0.012 (0.305) 0.013 (0.330)
12.5 (318) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.011 (0.280) 0.012 (0.305) 0.013 (0.330)
13.0 (330) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.011 (0.280) 0.012 (0.305) 0.013 (0.330)
13.5 (343) 0.010 (0.255) 0.011 (0.280) 0.011 (0.280) 0.012 (0.305) 0.013 (0.330)
1. Concrete cover is measured between reinforcement surface and concrete surface.
2. The tabulated crack width dimensions are measured in inches (mm).
3. Sewer pipe shall have an allowable crack width of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) regardless of concrete cover.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 149

The required strength of the pipe specimens undergoing the bearing test will be designated in terms
of D-load. Such designation indicates the actual load in pounds per linear foot (N/m) of pipe, divided by
the inside diameter of the pipe in feet (mm). The pipe shall withstand the required test load before a
crack having a width as indicated in the following table, measured at close intervals, occurs throughout a
length of 1 foot (300 mm) or more. The crack shall be considered to be at the indicated width when the
point of the measuring gauge will, without forcing, penetrate it 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) at close intervals
throughout the specified distance of 1 foot (300 mm).
The load shall be applied at a uniform rate not to exceed 2,000 pounds per minute per foot-length
(29.2 kN per minute per meter of length) of pipe for the first 80 percent of the required load and then at a
uniform rate not to exceed 500 pounds per minute per foot-length (7.3 kN per minute per meter of
length) of pipe for the remainder of the test.
The test specimens shall be surface dry when tested.
The length on which the test load is computed shall be determined by measuring the inside length of
the barrel of the pipe from the bottom of the socket to the end of the spigot. The length of a beveled pipe
shall be the average length of the inside of the barrel of the pipe, measured from the bottom of the socket
to the end of the spigot.
If the tested specimen of a designated lot passes the test, all of the pipe of that lot shall be considered
as complying with the requirements.
If the tested specimen of a designated lot fails to pass the test, then 5 additional specimens from that
same lot shall be selected for testing.
If the 5 additional specimens pass, the total number of that lot to be furnished shall be considered as
complying, except the one previous failing specimen.
If any of the five additional specimens fail, the entire lot shall be rejected; or may be downgraded
except those specimens which passed the first time.
The Contractor may test specimens of a rejected lot individually to determine whether they may
comply with the requirements for acceptance.
207-2.9.3 Structural Design Basis. Where structural details of the pipe are shown on the Plans, the
manufacture of pipe shall be checked by making the appropriate tests on the concrete placed in the pipe
forms, by inspection of the steel reinforcing cages that are to be used in the pipe, and by inspection of the
fabrication of the pipe.
Concrete in pipe shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 4,500 pounds per square inch (31.0
MPa) at 28 Days.
207-2.9.4 Downgrading of Pipe. For the purpose of these specifications, “downgraded” pipe shall
be defined as pipes which are to be used under loads less than those for which they were designed.
Pipes manufactured in accordance with these specifications which have not met their designed test
loads may be downgraded by the Engineer and used provided that:
a) Enough load tests are made to establish the load under which they may be used. The
number of tests to be made shall be as determined by the Engineer and may require the
testing of each section.
b) They comply with the testing and inspection requirements of these specifications.
Individual specimens of pipe which will require major repair, or which have numerous hairline
cracks extending the full length of the section on the inside of the pipe at the minor axis or on the

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
150 Greenbook 2021

outside of the pipe at the major axis, may be tested for downgrading purposes only at the discretion
of the Engineer.
207-2.9.5 Acceptance of Stockpiled Pipe. Pipe may be used from stockpiles only when approved
in advance by the Engineer, and provided the pipe meets all other requirements for pipe with the
exception of inspection of manufacture.
For the purpose of these specifications, “stockpiled” pipe shall be defined as pipe manufactured in
quantity which will meet requirements of this section, but was not manufactured for use in specific
projects. However, pipe which has been rejected by another agency will not be considered as
“stockpiled” pipe, nor will such pipe be accepted.
207-2.10 Marking. The date of manufacture, size and D-load, lot number, manufacturer’s
identification mark, and where elliptical reinforcement is used, a 4-inch (100 mm) high “T” marking the
location of the minor axis of the reinforcement shall be legibly painted or stamped on the inside of each
pipe. If the Plans or Specifications require a minimum interior clearance for the reinforcing steel, the
minimum clearance shall also be painted or stamped on the inside of the pipe.
Sections of pipe to be inspected shall be so situated at the manufacturer’s plant as to provide the
Engineer with free accessibility for inspection and marking. In no case shall the pipe be stacked to a
height that would require the Engineer to climb or use or a ladder to properly inspect the pipe.
At the place of manufacture, the Engineer will indicate acceptance of the pipe for delivery to the
Worksite by marking the pipe with the Agency’s stamp. Such acceptance, however, shall be considered
a tentative acceptance. Final acceptance will be made only when the Work has been completed.
If pipe is rejected subsequent to its manufacture, the mark placed thereon by the Engineer shall
be defaced.
207-2.11 Inspection Platform. For machine-made pipe, a permanently installed inspection
platform shall be provided. The platform shall be located such that the inspector can observe the cage
and concrete during placement and manufacturing.
207-3 LINED REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE.
207-3.1 General. These specifications apply to pipe manufactured with a plastic lining. The plastic
lining material shall be tested in accordance with 211-2 and conform to 210-2. Pipe not installed within
180 days from the date of pipe manufacture shall have both ends of the pipe covered with an opaque
material to prevent ultra-violet degradation of the plastic liner. The Contractor shall not install any lined
RCP that is more than 2 years old from the date of manufacture.
Such pipe shall conform to the applicable provisions in 207-2, except that the causes for
rejection shall be as listed herein, and repair of pipe will be permitted only within limits set forth in
this subsection.
All such pipe shall be manufactured with Type II cement unless otherwise specified in the Special
Provisions. All cement shall contain not more than 0.6 percent by weight of alkalis calculated as Na2O
plus 0.658 K2O.
Chairs or spacers between the reinforcement and forms or base rings shall be stainless steel or a
nonferrous material approved by the Engineer. Spacers may only come in contact with the liner plate if
they are made of plastic and have a flat base plate of sufficient size to prevent puncture of the liner plate.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 151

207-3.2 Causes for Rejection. Lined pipe may be rejected for any of the following reasons:
a) Exposure of any wires, positioning spacers, or chairs used to hold the reinforcement cage in
position, or steel reinforcement in any surface of the pipe, except for holding rods in end
projections.
b) Transverse reinforcing steel found to be in excess of 1/4 inch (6 mm) out of specified position
after the pipe is molded.
c) Any shattering or flaking of concrete at a crack.
d) Air bubble voids (bugholes) on the interior and exterior surfaces of the pipe exceeding 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in depth unless pointed with mortar or other approved material.
e) Unauthorized application of any wash coat of cement or grout.
f) A deficiency greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) from the specified wall thickness of pipe 30 inches
(750 mm) or smaller in internal diameter.
g) A deficiency greater than 6 percent (5 percent) from the specified wall thickness of pipe
larger than 30 inches (750 mm) in internal diameter, except that the deficiency may be 8
percent (7 percent) adjacent to the longitudinal form joint, provided that the additional
deficiency does not lie closer than 20 percent of the internal diameter to the vertical axis of
the pipe and does not extend along the circumference for a distance greater than 20 percent
of the internal diameter of the pipe.
The deficiencies in wall thickness permitted herein do not apply to gasket contact surfaces in
gasketed joint pipe. Dimensions and tolerances of such contact surfaces shall be submitted
for approval.
h) Internal diameter of the pipe varying from the true circle of the specified diameter by more than 1
percent (for metric units, pipe having less than the specified diameter, or exceeding it by more
than 2.6 percent) or interior surfaces reworked after placing of the concrete. The variation in
internal diameter permitted herein does not apply to gasket contact surface in gasketed joint pipe.
Tolerances at such contact surfaces shall be submitted for approval.
i) A water pocket (identified by tapping the internal surface of the pipe) which is greater than 30
inches (750 mm) in length or wider than three times the specified wall thickness. Repair of such
defective areas not exceeding these limits shall be made as specified in 207-3.3.
j) A piece broken from the end projections of the pipe which has circumferential length exceeding
60 degrees of the circle, or extends into the body of the pipe, or extends into the gasket contact
surfaces of gasketed joint pipe for a circumferential length in excess of 6 inches (150 mm)
measured at the midpoint of the gasket contact surface on the bell end, and at the inner shoulder
of the gasket groove at the spigot end. If 2 or more pieces are broken from an end projection, the
total length of such broken pieces on any end shall not exceed 90 degrees of the circle; and there
shall be a distance of at least 9 inches (225 mm) of sound concrete between breaks. The total
length of broken pieces that extends into the gasket contact surfaces of gasketed joint pipe shall
not exceed a circumferential length of 6 inches (150 mm).
If less than 9 inches (225 mm) of sound concrete exists between two individual breaks, the 2
breaks shall be considered as one continuous break. Repair of such defects not exceeding above
limits shall be made by Method III as specified in 207-3.3.3. Unsound portions of end
projections shall be removed, and if pieces removed do not exceed the above limits, the pipe may
be similarly repaired.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
152 Greenbook 2021

k) Defects that indicate imperfect molding of concrete; or any surface defect indicating honeycomb
or open-texture (rock pockets) greater in size than an area equal to a square with a side dimension
of 2-1/2 times the wall thickness or deeper than 2 times the maximum graded aggregate size; or a
local deficiency of cement resulting in loosely bonded concrete, the area of which exceeds in size
the limits of area described in i) and j) above when the defective concrete is removed. Repair of
such defects not exceeding these limits shall be made as provided in i) and j) above. Sand rings
occurring at the ends of the pipe shall be repaired for the full circumference.
l) Any of the following cracks:
1) A crack having a width of 0.01 inch (0.255 mm) or more throughout a continuous length of
12 inches (300 mm) or more.
2) Any crack extending through the wall of the pipe and having a length in excess of the
wall thickness.
3) Any crack showing two visible lines of separation for a continuous length of 2 feet (0.6
m) or more, or an interrupted length of 3 feet (0.9 m) or more anywhere in evidence, both
inside and outside, except where such cracks occur during the external loading test
specified in 207-2.9.
When required by the Engineer, any crack which is 0.01 inch (0.255 mm) wide or wider and
is not a cause for rejection, shall be filled with neat cement grout composed of cement mixed
with water to a fluid consistency.
207-3.3 Repair of Imperfections.
207-3.3.1 Method I - Repair by Hand-Placed Mortar.
a) Preparation of Surfaces to be Repaired. Unsound or imperfect concrete shall be removed by
chipping. Edges where concrete has been chipped out shall be sharp and squared with the
surface, leaving no feathered edges. The chipped area shall be washed with water to remove all
loose material and concrete dust.
Surfaces within the trimmed areas shall be kept wet for several hours, preferably overnight,
before the repair replacement is made. All surfaces in areas to be repaired shall be damp, but not
wet, when the material is applied.
b) Placement of the Mortar. The mortar used for the repair shall contain the same proportions of
cement and sand as the mix from which the pipe was made.
This mortar shall be pre-shrunk by mixing it to a plastic consistency as far in advance of its use
as possible. Trial mixes shall be made and aged to determine the longest period the mortar’s use
can be delayed while retaining sufficient plasticity to permit good workmanship.
Immediately prior to the application of the mortar, the damp surface of the area to be repaired
shall be scrubbed thoroughly with a small quantity of neat cement grout, using a wire brush.
Remaining loose sand particles shall be swept away before application of the mortar.
In applying the mortar, it shall be compacted into the space to be filled, care being taken to
eliminate air pockets and to secure bond at the edges. The surfaces shall be shaped and finished
to correspond with the adjacent surface of the pipe.
c) Curing. The newly repaired surfaces shall be kept damp for 24 hours after the repair is
completed. A membrane coating of an approved white-pigmented sealing compound shall then
be applied.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 153

207-3.3.2 Method II - Repair by Pneumatically Applied Mortar (PAM).

a) General. PAM shall not be used when the repair extends to a depth greater than the embedment
of the reinforcing steel. Such repairs shall be made with pre-shrunk mortar.
b) Preparation of Surface to be Repaired. Surfaces to which PAM is to be applied shall be
prepared in the same manner as described in 207-3.3.1 a) except that the edges of the area from
which unsound or imperfect concrete is removed shall be beveled so as not to entrap rebound.
c) Placement of Mortar. No rebound shall be included in the repair. The pipe shall be turned so
that the area being repaired is at the side of the pipe in a near vertical position to permit rebound
to fall clear.
The mortar used for the repair shall contain the same properties of cement and sand as the mix
from which the pipe was made.
Before repairing grooved concrete spigots, the snap ring shall be replaced and retained in
position until the repair has attained sufficient strength to assure no damage to the gasket groove
by its removal.
Areas repaired with PAM shall be filled in excess of the dimension required and then carefully
trimmed to correspond with adjacent surfaces.
d) Curing. Surfaces to which PAM has been applied shall be cured in the same manner as
described in 207-3.3.1 c).
207-3.3.3 Method III - Bonding Mortar Repairs With Epoxy Resin Adhesives. Unsound or
imperfect concrete shall be removed by chipping. If hand placed mortar is to be used, the edges shall be
left sharp and square with the surface. If PAM is to be used, the edges shall be beveled.
The area to be repaired shall be kept dry. Loose material and concrete dust remaining after the
chipping operation shall be removed by means of an air jet.
Epoxy resins previously approved for such use by the Engineer shall be used in the manner prescribed by
the Engineer. The prepared area shall be primed with the epoxy resin compound, care being taken to ensure
intimate contact with the base material. Mortar shall be applied before the epoxy resin compound sets.
Mortar shall be applied by either Method I or II as described in 207-3.3.1 and 207-3.3.2.
207-4 NOT USED.
207-5 NOT USED.
207-6 NOT USED.
207-7 NOT USED.
207-8 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE (VCP).
207-8.1 General. Except as modified in this subsection, vitrified clay pipe and fittings including
perforated pipe shall be extra strength or high strength manufactured in accordance with ASTM C700.
207-8.2 Manufacturing Requirements.
207-8.2.1 General. All pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked with the name or trademark of the
manufacturer, the location of the plant, and the strength designation. All standard length straight pipe as
defined in 207-8.2.2 shall, in addition to the above, be marked with a manufacturer’s date code. All
fabricated bends and/or bevels shall be manufactured from pipe meeting all requirements of the pipe
specifications for the Work.
207-8.2.2 Dimensions and Tolerances. The pipe diameter shall not vary from a true circle by more
than 3 percent of nominal diameter. Except for special purposes, the minimum standard length of

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
154 Greenbook 2021

straight pipe, exclusive of socket depth, shall be 40 inches (1000 mm). Pipe shall not deviate from
straight by more than 1/16 inch per foot (5 mm/m) of length.
207-8.2.3 Imperfections. Imperfections in pipe and fittings containing blisters, cracks, and chips in
excess of the limits herein will be rejected; however, certain cracks and chips meeting the requirements
of 207-8.2.4 may be repaired in accordance with 207-8.6.
a) Blisters. For pipe of nominal sizes 3 to 18 inches (75 to 450 mm), blisters shall not exceed 3
inches (75 mm) in any direction, and no blister or pimple shall project more than 1/8 inch (3 mm)
above the surface of the pipe.
For pipe of nominal sizes over 18 inches (450 mm), no blister shall exceed in any direction, 2
inches per foot (170 mm/m) of internal diameter, and no blister or pimple shall project above the
surface of the pipe more than 1/8 inch per foot (10 mm/m) of internal diameter.
Pipe shall have no broken blisters.
b) Cracks. There shall be no cracks passing through the barrel or socket except that a single crack
at the spigot end of the pipe not exceeding 75 percent of the depth of the socket, or a single
circumferential crack in the socket not exceeding 3 inches (75 mm) in length or a single crack not
exceeding 2 inches (50 mm) in the axial direction is permitted.
c) Chips. Chips on the interior surface shall not exceed 2 inches (50 mm) in length, 1 inch (25 mm)
in width, and a depth of 1/4 of the barrel thickness, but not to exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm). A single
pipe shall contain no more than 2 such defects.
207-8.2.4 Repairable Imperfections.
a) General. Structurally sound clay pipe larger than 15 inches (375 mm) in size may be repaired as
provided in 207-8.6.
Repairs of any type at the spigot or socket, shall be limited to one for each 60 degrees of
circumference, and a maximum of four at either end. Repaired pipe shall not be used for
fabricated fittings unless the repaired pipe is tested. Molded fittings may be repaired within the
scope of the Specifications.
b) Cracks. The following longitudinal cracks parallel to the axis caused by shrinkage or drying and
not more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) wide may be repaired:
1) A crack on the exterior of the spigot that does not penetrate the entire barrel thickness and
does not exceed 50 percent of the depth of the socket in length.
2) A crack in the socket of the pipe that does not penetrate the entire thickness and does not
exceed 75 percent of the depth of the socket in length.
3) A crack that penetrates the entire thickness of the socket and does not exceed 50 percent of
the depth of the socket in length.
4) A crack on the interior of the socket and in the shoulder on the exterior of the socket which
does not exceed 3 inches (75 mm) in length and does not penetrate more than 20 percent of
the wall thickness.
c) Surface Chips. Surface chips located on the exterior of the spigot, the interior or exterior of the
socket, or on the shoulder of the socket may be repaired, provided:
1) The length of the circumference of the chip does not exceed twice the barrel thickness.
2) The width is not greater than 50 percent of the socket depth measured parallel to the axis.
3) The depth is not greater than 25 percent of the wall thickness measured perpendicularly
to the axis.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 155

d) Full-Depth Chips. Full-depth chips located on the socket may be repaired provided the length of
the chip does not exceed twice the barrel thickness or the width does not exceed 25 percent of the
socket depth.
207-8.3 Fittings and Stoppers. Fittings shall be made to such dimensions as will accommodate the
joint system specified. Y- and T-branch fittings shall be furnished with spurs securely fastened by the
manufacturer to the barrel of the pipe. There shall be no projection on the inner surface of the barrel.
T-branch fittings shall have their axis perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. The axis of
the spur on Y-branch fittings shall be 45-degrees from the longitudinal axis of the pipe. The barrel of
each spur shall be of sufficient length to permit the proper jointing of the connecting pipe.
Stoppers furnished for installation in branch fittings and ends of pipe left unconnected shall be strong
enough to sustain all applied construction and in-place loads, including field pressure tests. Stoppers for pipe
shall be one of the following: polyethylene (PE), polyurethane, polypropylene, acrylonitrilebutadiene-styrene
(ABS), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), ozone-resistant synthetic rubber, clay discs, or other material approved by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall retest within 60 Days prior to installation any stopper that is more than 180
days old from the date of manufacture to ensure compliance with the requirements of the Specifications. The
Contractor shall not install any stopper that is more than 2 years old from the date of manufacture.
207-8.4 Joints. Joints for vitrified clay pipe shall conform to 208-2. The maximum bevel of the
ends of pipe to be laid on a curve shall be 4 degrees. Plain-end pipe shall not be beveled.
Each joint within vertical and horizontal curves shall be constructed using factory fabricated mitered
or beveled pipe or by deflecting joints. In no case shall joints be deflected more than allowed in 306-
1.2.3. Shop and layout drawings for mitered or beveled pipe shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review and approval.
207-8.5 Testing Requirements.
207-8.5.1 General. Before a lot of pipe is acceptable for use, test pipes selected from the lot shall
meet the requirements of the hydrostatic pressure and bearing tests described herein. The tests shall be
made at the point of manufacture, in the presence of the Engineer, and at no cost to the Agency. Fittings
will be subject to the requirements of the hydrostatic pressure test only.
When less than 50 pipes are to be furnished to the Work, the Engineer may waive the sampling,
testing and acceptance requirements of this subsection and accept the manufacturer’s written Certificate
of Compliance that the pipe meets the quality and strength specified. All pipe will be subject to visual
inspection and acceptance by the Engineer after delivery to the Work site.
All testing equipment shall be calibrated by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer at
intervals not to exceed 12 months or following repair of the hydraulic system or modification or
relocation of the equipment.
Each lot of vitrified clay pipe is defined as not more than 500 sections of pipe for one size and class.
The Engineer shall select for testing the following number of samples:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
156 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 207-8.5.1
No. of Sections in Lot No. of Sections for Testing
Less than 41 2
41 - 60 3
61 - 80 4
81 - 250 5
251 - 300 6
301 - 350 7
351 - 400 8
401 - 450 9
451 - 500 10

The pipe selected for testing shall be sound and shall meet the dimensions and tolerances of
the specifications.
207-8.5.2 Hydrostatic Pressure Test. Shall be carried out in accordance with the applicable
requirements of ASTM C301 and shall precede the bearing test by not more than 3 hours.
207-8.5.3 Bearing Tests. Shall be carried out in accordance with the 3-edge bearing method
requirements of ASTM C301. The pipe shall withstand the minimum 3-edge bearing test loads indicated
in the following table:

TABLE 207-8.5.3
Nominal Diameter Extra Strength Pipe High Strength Pipe
inches (mm) lbs/ft (kN/m) lbs/ft (kN/m)
3 (75) 2000 (29.2) 2200 (32.1)
4 (100) 2000 (29.2) 2200 (32.1)
6 (150) 2000 (29.2) 2200 (32.1)
8 (200) 2200 (32.1) 2400 (35.0)
10 (250) 2400 (35.0) 2600 (37.9)
12 (300) 2600 (37.9) 2900 (42.3)
15 (375) 3100 (45.2) 3400 (49.6)
18 (450) 3600 (52.5) 4000 (58.4)
21 (525) 4200 (61.3) 4600 (67.1)
24 (600) 4800 (70.1) 5300 (77.3)
27 (675) 5200 (75.9) 5700 (83.2)
30 (750) 5500 (80.3) 6100 (89.0)
33 (825) 5800 (84.6) 6400 (93.4)
36 (900) 6300 (91.9) 6900 (100.7)
39 (975) 6600 (96.3) 7300 (106.5)
42 (1050) 7000 (102.2) 7700 (112.4)

207-8.5.4 Acceptance. When all test pipes meet the hydrostatic pressure and bearing tests, the
entire lot of pipe is acceptable. When 2 test pipes fail, the entire lot will be rejected. When one pipe
fails, a second group of 2 pipes must pass the tests, otherwise the entire lot will be rejected.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 157

207-8.6 Clay Pipe Repair.

207-8.6.1 Repair Methods and Materials.
a) General. All surfaces to be repaired shall be clean and dry. All unsound material at lumps or
blisters shall be ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Cracks shall be grooved 1/8 to
1/4 inch (3 mm to 6 mm) wide and 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 mm to 6 mm) deep for the full length of the
crack. All unsound material at chips, flakes, pits, and spalls shall be removed and edges shall be
1/16 inch (1.5 mm) minimum below adjacent surfaces. There shall be no feather edges.
Prepared areas shall be cleaned of dust and other loose particles and then filled with repair
material compounded to provide properties most desirable for sewerage service. Repair material
shall resist bacterial attack and attack by chemicals or combinations of chemicals normally
present in domestic and industrial sewage.
Repair material shall be mixed, applied, and cured as recommended by the manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer, and shall have a color contrasting with the color of pipe to be repaired.
If necessary to produce a contrast in color, carbon black in a small quantity may be added to the
repair material. The repair material shall be subject to adhesion and chemical testing as required
by the Engineer to determine its suitability for use.
b) Adhesion Test. Vitrified clay bars 1 inch (25 mm) square in cross section and approximately 8
inches (200 mm) in length, compounded of the same materials as the vitrified clay pipe and fired
to clay pipe manufacturing temperature shall be used in preparing test specimens. The bars shall
have a modulus of rupture of not less than 1,600 pounds per square inch (11.0 MPa) when tested
in flexure with third-point loading.
The bars shall be cut through at the midpoint and then bonded with the repair material.
Following a 7-Day maximum cure period at ambient room temperature, the bonded bars shall be
tested in flexure with third-point loading.
The average modulus of rupture of 5 test bars bonded with the repair material shall not be less
than 1,600 pounds per square inch (11.0 MPa).
Five additional test bars bonded with the repair material and immersed for 60 Days in water at
ambient room temperature shall have an average modulus of rupture not less than 1,500 pounds
per square inch (10.3 MPa).
c) Chemical Tests. Each specimen of repair material shall lose not more than 2 percent of its
weight after being immersed in the solutions listed in Table 208-2.3.2 (Note 3) for a period of 30
Days and being reconditioned as indicated.
207-8.6.2 Inspection of Repairs. All pipe to be repaired shall be inspected by the Engineer after
preparation for repair, again after repair has been made. Repairs made without prior inspection will be
rejected. The Engineer may require retesting of any repaired pipe to demonstrate its soundness. The
Agency shall be reimbursed for all costs incurred for inspection and testing of repaired pipe.
207-9 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM A74.
Cast iron soil pipe shall not be used for mainline gravity sewers or for any pressure piping used to
convey sewage.
207-10 NOT USED.
207-11 CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE AND PIPE ARCHES.
207-11.1 General. Corrugated steel pipe, pipe arches, nestable pipe, slotted pipe, spiral rib pipe,
spiral rib pipe arches, and coupling bands shall be manufactured and inspected in conformance with

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
158 Greenbook 2021

AASHTO M36/ASTM A760/A760M or AASHTO M245/ASTM A762/A762M and as specified herein.

The size, type, and metal thickness of the pipe to be furnished shall be as shown as on the Plans or
specified in the Special Provisions.
Corrugated steel pipe arches and spiral rib pipe arches shall consist of round pipe which has been re-
formed to multi-centered pipe having an arch shaped top with a slightly curved integral bottom.
Nominal diameter shall be the minimum inside dimensions of the round pipe. Pipe arch dimensions
shall be in accordance with AASHTO M36/ASTM A760/A760M or AASHTO M245/ASTM
A762/A762M.
207-11.2 Materials.
207-11.2.1 General. The material for corrugated steel pipe, pipe arches, spiral rib pipe, and spiral
rib pipe arches shall be zinc coated (galvanized) or aluminum coated (AL-T-2) or polymer precoated
steel sheet conforming to AASHTO M218/ASTM A929/A929M or AASHTO M274/ASTM A819 or
AASHTO M246/ASTM A742/A742M. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) shall be made available by
the pipe manufacturers.
The manufacturer of corrugated steel pipe, pipe arches, spiral rib pipe, and spiral rib pipe arches shall
furnish to the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance. Additional testing, as required by the Engineer,
shall be done at the Contractor’s expense.
207-11.2.2 Coupling Bands. The coupling bands shall be of either one-, two-, or three-piece
construction and shall be of the same material as the pipe. The coupling bands for the pipe larger than
42 inches (1050 mm) shall be of 2- or 3-piece construction. Coupling bands shall be formed metal not
more than three standard culvert sheet thicknesses lighter than that of the pipe to be connected, but shall
be not less than 0.052 inch (1.32 mm) or more than 0.109 inch (2.77 mm) thick. The minimum width of
the coupling bands for pipe ends other than flanged shall be 10-1/2 inches (265 mm) for annular
corrugations and rerolled ends and 12 inches (300 mm) for helical corrugations except for hugger bands
for pipes 42 inches (1050 mm) or less in diameter installed in a buried condition without watertight
joints, which may be 4 inches (100 mm). Dimpled coupling bands shall not be used unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer. All coupling band connection hardware shall be galvanized in accordance
with 210-3 or electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5. Bolts and nuts for all types
of coupling bands shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A307.
The installed distance between corrugated pipe ends shall be no greater than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)
and the maximum difference in diameter between pipe ends to be joined shall be 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) for
pipe sizes 48 inches (1200 mm) and under and 1 percent of the diameter for larger pipe sizes.
When required by the Plans or the Special Provisions, watertight joints shall be provided by the use
of approved sealant or gasket materials. Gasket material shall conform to 208-1.2. These materials shall
be neoprene expanded rubber or sheet rubber gaskets, “O” ring rubber gaskets, butyl rubber base joint
sealant, or other approved materials. Sheet rubber gaskets shall be at least 7 inches (175 mm) wide and
3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1056 with Grades 41 to 43
inclusive, unless otherwise specified. “O” rings shall conform to ASTM C443 and shall not be used on
helical corrugations. Test for watertight joints shall conform to 306-7.8.
207-11.3 Fabrication.
207-11.3.1 General. Unless otherwise specified, corrugated steel pipe, pipe arches, spiral rib pipe
and spiral rib pipe arches, shall be furnished with pipe ends cut perpendicularly to the longitudinal axis
of the pipe. Pipe ends shall be cut uniformly and shall be fabricated so that the pipe can be effectively
joined with coupling bands conforming to 207-11.2.2.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 159

Corrugated steel pipe may be fabricated either by riveting, resistance spot welding or using a
helically corrugated steel pipe with a continuous helical lock seam or a continuous helical welded seam
paralleling the corrugation.
Spiral rib pipe shall be fabricated with helical ribs projecting outwardly with a continuous lock seam
or welded seam paralleling the rib.
207-11.3.2 Fabrication by Spot Welding. Pipe fabrication by spot welding shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M36/ASTM A760/A760M. Pipes fabricated by resistance spot welding shall
be the full circle type with lap joint construction. The center of each spot weld shall be at least its radius
plus 1/4 inch (6.5 mm) from the edge of the steel sheets.
Spot welding shall be performed in such a manner that the exterior surfaces of 90 percent or more of
the spot welds on a length of pipe show no evidence of melting or burning of the base metal; and the
base metal is not exposed when the area adjacent to the electrode contact surface area is wire brushed.
Discoloration of the spot weld surfaces will not be cause for rejection.
207-11.3.3 Fabrication by Continuous Helical Seam.
a) Helical Corrugations and Pitches. Helically corrugated steel pipe and spiral rib pipe shall be
fabricated using corrugated profiles and continuous helical pitches as shown in Table 207-
11.3.3 (A).

TABLE 207-11.3.3 (A)

1 1 1
Diameters Nominal Pitch Max. Pitch Rib Width Min. Depth Seam Pitch
inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm)
6 thru 12
1-1/2 (38) 1-7/8 (48) — 1/4 (6.5) 12 (305)
(150 thru 300)
12 thru 96
2-2/3 (68) 2-7/8 (73) — 1/2 (13) 24 (610)
(300 thru 2400)
42 thru 120
3 (75) 3-1/4 (83) — 1 (25) 21 (533)
(1050 thru 3000)
42 thru 120
5 (125) 5-1/4 (133) — 1 (25) 29-1/2 (749)
(1050 thru 3000)
18 thru 72
11-1/2 (292) 11-3/4 (298) 3/4 (19) 1 (25) —
(450 thru 1800)
1. Pitch shall be measured at right angles to the direction of the corrugation.

For spiral rib pipe and spiral rib pipe arches, the corrugations shall be essentially rectangular ribs
projecting outwardly from the pipe wall. The width of the ribs shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm) plus 2
times the wall thickness ± 1/8 inch (3 mm). The height of the ribs shall be a minimum of 0.90
inch (23 mm). The radius bend of the metal at the corners of the ribs shall be not less than 0.10
inch (2.55 mm) or greater than 0.17 inch (4.30 mm). All rib measurements will be made outside
to outside except for the inside radius bend. The rib spacing shall be 11-1/2 inches (292 mm) ±
1/2 inch (12.5 mm) center to center.
b) Continuous Lock Seam Pipe. Pipe shall be fabricated with the lock seam parallel to the
corrugation, and may be used for full circle and equivalent pipe-arch sizes. The lock seam shall
be formed in the tangent element of the corrugation profile with its center near the neutral axis,
and shall meet the following requirements:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
160 Greenbook 2021

1) The edges of the sheets within the cross-section of the lock seam shall lap at least 5/32 inch
(4 mm) for the pipe 10 inches (250 mm) or less in diameter and at least 5/16 inch (8 mm) for
pipe greater than 10 inches (250 mm) in diameter, with an occasional tolerance of minus 10
percent of lap width allowable.
2) The lapped surface shall be in tight contact.
3) There shall be no excessive angularity on the interior of the 180-degree fold of metal at the
lock seam which will cause any visual cracks in the sheet. Roller indentations shall not cause
any cracks in the sheet or a loss of metal-to-metal contact within the seam.
4) Tensile specimens cut from production pipe normal to and across the lock seam shall develop
the strength as tabulated in Table 207-11.3.3 (B).
5) Continuous lock seam pipe shall be sampled and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 249.

TABLE 207-11.3.3 (B)

Pipe Sheet Thickness Minimum Lock Strength
Gage No. (U.S. Std.)
inches (mm) lb/in (kN/m) of width
0.064 (1.63) 16 425 (74)
0.079 (2.01) 14 650 (114)
0.109 (2.77) 12 875 (153)
0.138 (3.51) 10 1,100 (193)
0.168 (4.21) 8 1,500 (263)

c) Continuous Welded Seam Pipe. Pipes fabricated with a continuous helical weld seam parallel
to the corrugations may be used for full circle and equivalent pipe arch sizes. The welding
process shall be so controlled that the combined width of the weld and adjacent spelter coating
burned by the welding does not exceed 3 times the thickness of the metal. If the spelter is burned
outside of these limits, the weld and burned spelter shall be treated as specified in 207-11.4.
When pipe is fabricated with aluminum coated sheets, the weld seam shall be metalized during
the fabrication of the pipe with an aluminum alloy wire to completely cover and protect the
damaged coated area. Testing for welded seam quality control shall conform to AASHTO T241.
This test may be waived for pipe manufactured with factory reformed ends.
207-11.4 Repair of Damaged Galvanizing or Aluminizing. When the metallic coated surface has
been burned by gas or arc welding, all surfaces of the welded connections shall be thoroughly cleaned by
wire brushing and all traces of the welding flux and loose or cracked zinc or aluminum removed, after
which the areas shall be repaired as specified in 210-3.5. In addition, damaged aluminized surfaces shall
be given an asphalt mastic coating per 207-11.5.2.
207-11.5 Coatings, Linings, and Pavings.
207-11.5.1 General. When required by the Special Provisions, corrugated steel pipe, coupling
bands, and fittings shall be coated, lined, or paved. Each section of pipe and fittings shall have the
nominal metal thickness painted on the inner surface so that the metal thickness can readily be identified.
Coupling bands need not be coated on the interior surface.
207-11.5.2 Coatings.
a) General. Coatings shall be applied to one or both pipe surfaces to a minimum thickness as
specified herein. Any appearance of pinholes, blisters, cracks, excessive whiskering (stalactites),
or lack of bond shall be cause for rejection.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 161

b) Bituminous Coatings. Hot-applied bituminous coating shall be applied to both surfaces and
shall conform to AASHTO M190, Type A/ASTM A849, Class B. Minimum coating thickness
shall be 0.050 inch (1.3 mm). Where concrete lining or paving is to be placed on aluminum
coated steel, that portion of the conduit in contact with the concrete shall be coated with asphalt
mastic coating per 207-11.5.2 prior to placement of the concrete. With the approval of the
Engineer, the Contractor or manufacturer may add (anti-corrosion) additives to the concrete mix
in lieu of asphalt coating.
c) Asphalt Mastic Coating. Cold-applied asphalt mastic coating shall conform to the requirements
of AASHTO M243, except that asbestos fiber shall not be used. The asphalt mastic material
shall be applied to the surface specified to a minimum thickness of 0.050 inch (1.3 mm).
d) Polymeric Coating. The polymeric coating shall comply with the requirements of ASTM A849
Class P, and may be plant applied after pipe fabrication. Polymeric coatings shall be applied to
the surfaces specified to a minimum thickness of 0.010 inch (0.25 mm).
207-11.5.3 Linings.
a) General. Linings shall be applied to the interior of the pipe to produce a smooth surface.
b) Bituminous Linings. Hot-applied bituminous linings shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M190, Type D/ASTM A849, Class M. Minimum lining thickness shall be 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) over the tops of the crests of the inside corrugations.
c) Concrete Lining. The concrete lining shall be plant applied to produce a homogeneous, non-
segregated, smooth lining with a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) over the crest of the
inside corrugations, in accordance with ASTM A849, Class C.
The concrete shall comply with 201-5, except that sand gradation requirements will be waived.
Fly ash in accordance with 201-1.2.5 is permitted. The 28-Day strength of the concrete shall be a
minimum of 5,000 pounds per square inch (34.5 MPa). Cracks in the lining greater than 1/16
inch (1.5 mm) shall be repaired in accordance with 207-3.3. Interior joints shall be mortared in
accordance with 306-1.2.4.
207-11.5.4 Pavings.
a) General. Paving material shall cover at least 25 percent of the circumference of round pipe and
40 percent of the circumference of pipe arches and shall be placed symmetrically, left and right
of the bottom centerline of the pipe.
b) Bituminous Paving. Hot-applied bituminous paving shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M190, Type C/ASTM A849, Class M.
c) Concrete Paving. Concrete shall be Class 600-E-3250 (360-E-23). Steel reinforcing, when
specified, shall conform to 201-2. The concrete shall be placed to the thickness specified, after
the pipe has been backfilled.
207-11.6 Nestable Pipe. Nestable pipe shall be fabricated in 2 separate half-circle sections and the
sections shall be firmly joined together, all in accordance with Federal Specification MIL-P-236E. The
longitudinal joint of the nestable pipe sections may be either Type I, flanged, or Type II, notched, as
specified in MIL-P-236E.
207-11.7 Slotted Pipe. The corrugated steel pipe used in the slotted drain shall meet the
requirements of AASHTO M36/ASTM A760/A760M and shall be galvanized or aluminized coated
(AL-T-2) steel. The diameter and gage shall be as shown on the Plans.
The grates shall be manufactured from ASTM A1011/A1011M, Grade 36 steel. The spacers and
bearing bars (sides) shall be 3/16 inch (4.763 mm) material ± 0.0075 inch (0.190 mm).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
162 Greenbook 2021

The spacers shall be on 6-inch (150 mm) centers and welded on both sides to each bearing bar
(sides) with 4, 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) long, 3/16 inch (5 mm) fillet welds on each side of the bearing bars.
The Engineer may require tensile strength tests on the grate if the grate is not in compliance with the
above. If tensile strength tests are required, minimum results for an in-place spacer pulled perpendicular
to the bearing bar shall be:
T = 12,000 pounds (53.4 kN) for 2-1/2 inch (63 mm) grate
15,000 pounds (T = 66.7 kN) for 6-inch (150 mm) grate
The grates shall be trapezoidal with a 1-3/4-inch (44 mm) opening in the top and 30-degree slanted
spacers unless shown otherwise on the Plans. If vertical grates are shown on the Plans, the grates shall
be vertical (straight sides) with a 1-3/4-inch (44 mm) opening in the top and 30-degree slanted spacers.
The grate shall be 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) or 6 inches (150 mm) high as shown on the Plans.
The grate shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 except with a 2-ounce per square foot
(605 g/m2) galvanized coating.
The grate shall be fillet welded with a minimum 1 inch (25 mm) long weld to the corrugated steel
pipe on each side of the grate at every other corrugation.
The corrugated steel pipe shall have a minimum of 2 re-rolled annular ends. The slotted drain bands
shall be a modified Hugger band to secure the pipe and prevent infiltration of the backfill. When the
slotted drain is banded together, the adjacent grates shall have a maximum 3-inch (75 mm) gap.
207-11.8 Underdrains. The pipe for underdrains shall be of the full-circle type and perforations in
the pipe may be drilled or punched. The perforations may be located either in the inside crests or in the
flat tangent portion of the corrugations, but not in both locations in the same length of pipe.
Steel band couplers shall be as specified in 207-11.2.2. Sleeve type couplings may be substituted for
the band couplers. The couplings may be either plastic or galvanized steel, suitable for holding the pipe
firmly in alignment without the use of sealing compound or gaskets. The couplings shall not distort
under normal conditions of use.
207-11.9 Siphons. Pipe and couplings shall be watertight and shall conform to 207-11.2.
The pipe for siphons shall be of such lengths that the number of field connections will be held to a
minimum. The outside seams of riveted, spot welded or continuous helical lock seam pipe shall be
continuously soldered. Rivets and spot welds on circumferential seams shall be spaced at approximately
2-1/2 inches (64 mm) on center with maximum of 3 inches (75 mm) on center.
Prior to backfilling, the pipe for siphons shall be subject to the hydrostatic test as specified in 306-
[Link].
207-11.10 Pipe Downdrains. Pipe and couplings for downdrains shall be watertight in accordance
with 207-11.2. When required by the Plans or the Special Provisions, the Engineer may require testing
in accordance with 306-[Link].
Joints for downdrains shall comply with the following joint property requirements:

TABLE 207-11.10:
TENSILE STRENGTH (PULL APART STRENGTH)

Less than 42 inches (1050 mm) pipe diameter 5,000 lbs (22.3 kN)
42 thru 84 inches (1050 thru 2200 mm) pipe diameter 10,000 lbs (44.5 kN)

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 163

207-12 STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATE PIPE ARCHES AND PIPE ARCHES.

207-12.1 General. The sizes, thicknesses, and dimensions of structural steel plate pipe, arches, and
pipe arches shall be as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
207-12.2 Materials.
207-12.2.1 General. Steel sheets, plates, bolts, and nuts shall conform to AASHTO M167. In
accordance with the requirements of Section 4, the fabricator of the structural steel products shall furnish
to the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance stating that the materials furnished comply with these
requirements. Galvanized surfaces which are damaged shall be repaired in accordance with 210-3.5.
207-12.2.2 Identification. When plates of 2 dissimilar thicknesses are involved in one cross-
section of an installation, the thickness of structural steel plates will be identified on the Plans, or in the
proposal in accordance with the following:
Each installation will be designated by size and symbol indicating the number and thickness of plates
required. Thus, “(4 x 0.109-1 x 0.168)” [(4 x 2.77-1 x 4.27)]) will be used to designate an installation
for one plate length composed of 4, 0.109 inch (2.77 mm) thick plates and one 0.168 inch (4.27 mm)
thick plate, with the heaviest thickness to be placed in the invert. This designation does not prevent the
Contractor from using fewer or more plates, provided the minimum thickness requirements are met.
207-12.3 Distorting. When required by the Plans or the Special Provisions, circular structural steel
plate pipe shall be distorted, either at the fabricating shop or in the field.
Plates distorted in the fabricating shop shall provide an increase in the vertical diameter of the pipe,
after assembly, of approximately 5 percent for the full length. Plates shall be marked to assure that they
will be placed in proper position.
The method for distorting plates in the field shall conform to details shown on the Plans and to 304-4.
207-12.4 Coatings. When required by the Plans or the Special Provisions, a protective coating
shall be applied to structural steel plate pipe and arches, including all appurtenant fasteners and fittings.
Bituminous coating shall conform to 207-11.5.2. Asphalt mastic coating shall conform to 207-11.5.4.
Asphalt mastic coating may be field applied after assembly of the structure.
When bituminous coatings are shop applied, each plate shall have the plate thickness on the inner
surface so that the plate thickness can be readily identified.
207-13 CORRUGATED ALUMINUM PIPE AND PIPE ARCHES.
207-13.1 General. Corrugated aluminum pipe, pipe arches, and connectors shall be manufactured
and inspected in conformance with the requirements of AASHTO M196, M197, and as specified herein.
The size, type, and gage of the pipe to be furnished shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the
Special Provisions.
Corrugated aluminum pipe arches shall consist of corrugated aluminum pipe which has been re-
formed to multicentered pipe having an arch-shaped top with a slightly curved integral bottom. The
minimum radius of any part of the pipe section shall be not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
The specifications contained herein for pipe shall also apply to pipe arches.
Nominal diameter, as referred to in AASHTO M196 and M197, shall be defined as meaning the
minimum inside dimension of the pipe.
207-13.2 Materials.
207-13.2.1 General. Corrugated aluminum sheets covered by this section shall be fabricated from
Alloy Alclad 3004 with Temper H-34 and shall conform to ASTM B209/B209M and the following
mechanical properties:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
164 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 207-13.2.1 (A)

Thickness inches (mm) 0.051 to 0.113 (1.30 to 2.87) 0.114 to 0.249 (2.88 to 6.32)
Property

Tensile Strength (minimum) 31,000 psi (215 MPa) 31,000 psi (215 MPa)
Yield Strength (2% offset) (minimum) 24,000 psi (165 MPa) 24,000 psi (165 MPa)
Elongation in 2 inches (50 mm) 4% min. 5% min.

The gages and thickness referred to in this specification are as follows:

TABLE 207-13.2.1 (B)

Thickness inches (mm) Gage Number (U.S. Standard)
0.060 (1.52) 16
0.075 (1.91) 14
0.105 (2.67) 12
0.135 (3.43) 10
0.165 (4.19) 8

The cladding thickness shall be 5 percent of the total composite thickness.

Rivets shall conform to ASTM B316M/B316 for Alloy 6053 with Temper T-4 and the following
physical properties:

TABLE 207-13.2.1 (C)

Tensile Strength (minimum) 25,000 psi (170 MPa)
Yield Strength (2% Offset) (minimum) 14,000 psi (95 MPa)
Shear Strength (minimum) 15,000 psi (105 MPa)
Elongation in 2 inches (50 mm) (minimum) 16%

The corrugations for all pipe, measured at right angles to the direction of the corrugation, shall
conform to the dimensions in the following table:

TABLE 207-13.2.1 (D)

1 2 2
Diameter inches (mm) Width inches (mm) Depth (Min.) inches (mm) Type of Corrugation
8 and larger (200 and larger) 2-2/3 (68) 1/2 (13) Annular
36 and larger (900 and larger) 3 (76) 1 (25) Annular
6 through 10 (150 through 250) 1-1/2 (38) 1/4 (6) Helical
12 and larger (300 and larger) 2-2/3 (68) 1/2 (13) Helical
36 and larger (900 and larger) 3 (76) 1 (25) Helical
1. Inside diameter of pipe shall not vary more than the following:
6 inch through 18 inch (150 mm through 450 mm) in diameter, 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum
21 inch through 24 inch (525 mm through 600 mm) in diameter, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) maximum
24 inch (600 mm) and over in diameter, 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) maximum.
2. Minimum and maximum width and depth of corrugation shall conform to AASHTO M196 and M197.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 165

The lengths and thickness of sheet, width of laps, and computed weight per lineal foot of finished
corrugated aluminum pipe and arches shall be as specified in Table 4 of AASHTO M196. The
dimensions of the corrugated aluminum pipe arch shall be as shown in Table 7 of AASHTO M196.
207-13.2.2 Connecting Bands. The connecting bands shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M196, except the minimum width of band for 12-inch (300 mm) and larger pipe shall be 12
inches (300 mm). Minimum width of band for pipe less than 12 inches (300 mm) shall be 7 inches (175
mm) and minimum width of band for 1 inch x 3-inch (25 mm x 75 mm) corrugations shall be 14 inches
(355 mm). The base metal of connecting bands shall be the same base metal as that of the pipe. The
gage of the connecting bands for corrugated pipe and pipe arches may be 2 standard-use thicknesses
lighter than that used for the pipe, but not less than 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) thick.
The band couplers shall be connected with galvanized steel bolts of not less than 1/2 inch (12.5
mm) diameter.
207-13.2.3 End Finish. The ends of 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) and 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thickness
installations shall be reinforced where shown on the Plans. The reinforcement shall consist of an
aluminum band of at least 13.5 mils (3.43 mm) material at least 6 inches (150 mm) wide, on at least the
outer 12 inches (300 mm).
207-13.3 Fabrication.
207-13.3.1 General. At the option of the Contractor, corrugated aluminum pipe may be fabricated
by riveting or by using a helically corrugated metal pipe with a continuous helical lock seam paralleling
the corrugation.
207-13.3.2 By Riveting. Pipe fabricated by riveting shall conform to AASHTO M196.
207-13.3.3 By Continuous Lock Seam. Pipe fabricated with a continuous helical lock seam parallel
to the corrugations shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M196 and as specified herein.
207-13.4 Underdrains. Pipe for underdrains shall be of the full circle type and perforations in the
pipe may be drilled or punched in accordance with AASHTO M196. The perforations may be either in
the inside crests or in the flat tangent portion of the corrugations but not in both locations in the same
length of pipe.
Sleeve-type couplings may be substituted for the band couplers. The couplings may be either plastic
or aluminum, suitable for holding the pipe firmly in alignment without the use of sealing compound or
gaskets. The couplings shall not distort under normal conditions of use. Minimum thickness for
underdrains shall be 0.060 inch (1.52 mm).
207-13.5 Pipe Downdrains. Joints for downdrains shall be watertight in accordance with 207-
11.2.2. When required by the Special Provisions, the Engineer may require testing in accordance
with 306-1.4.6.
Joints for downdrains shall comply with the following joint property requirements:

TABLE 207-13.5:
TENSILE STRENGTH (PULL APART STRENGTH)

0 to 42 inches (0 to 1050 mm) pipe diameter 5,000 pounds (22.3 kN)

45 to 84 inches (1125 to 2100 mm) pipe diameter 10,000 pounds (44.5 kN)

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
166 Greenbook 2021

207-13.6 Bituminous Coating. When required by the Plans or Special Provisions, pipe and
connecting bands shall be protected, both inside and outside, with a bituminous coating. The bituminous
coating shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M190 and as hereinafter specified.
The minimum thickness of bituminous material for all coated pipe measured on the crest of the
corrugations shall be 0.05 inch (1.3 mm).
In paving the invert of aluminum pipes, the bituminous material shall cover the crests to a minimum
depth of 1/8 inch (3 mm) and the width of paving shall at least cover one third of the periphery of pipe
arches and one quarter of the periphery of circular pipes.
The bituminous material shall conform to Paragraph 4 of AASHTO M190, except that it shall be at
least 90 percent soluble in cold carbon disulfide.
When corrugated aluminum pipes are to have a bituminous coating, the fabrication requirements
specified in AASHTO M196 shall be altered so that the rivet heads inside the pipe will be in the valley
of the corrugations.
Damaged bituminous coatings shall be repaired by the Contractor at its expense by applying
bituminous material conforming to the provisions of this subsection.
207-13.7 Repair of Damaged Alclad Coating. Alclad coatings which have been damaged shall be
repaired. The damaged area shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brushing. The cleaned area shall be
painted with 2 coats of zinc oxide-zinc dust paint conforming to the requirements of Military
Specification MIL-P-15145. The paint shall be properly mixed with a suitable vehicle in the ratio of one
part zinc oxide to four parts zinc dust by weight.
207-14 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PLATE PIPE ARCHES AND PIPE ARCHES.
207-14.1 General. The sizes, thicknesses, and dimensions of structural aluminum plate pipe,
arches, and pipe arches shall be as designated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
207-14.2 Materials.
207-14.2.1 General. Aluminum sheets, plates, bolts, and nuts shall conform to AASHTO M 219.
The fabricator of the structural aluminum products shall furnish to the Engineer a Certificate of
Compliance stating that the materials furnished comply with these requirements. Each plate shall be
marked on the inner surface so that the plate thickness can be readily identified after installation.
207-14.2.2 Identification. When plates of 2 dissimilar thicknesses are involved in one cross-
section of an installation, the thickness of structural aluminum plates will be identified in accordance
with 207-12.2.2.
207-14.2.3 Distorting. When required by the Plans or the Special Provisions, circular structural
aluminum plate pipe shall be distorted, either at the fabricating shop or in the field.
Plates distorted in the fabricating shop shall provide an increase in the vertical diameter of the pipe,
after assembly, of approximately 5 percent for the full length. Plates shall be marked to ensure that they
will be placed in proper position.
Distorting of plates in the field shall conform to 304-4.3.
207-14.2.4 Coatings. When required by the Plans or the Special Provisions, a protective coating
shall be applied to structural aluminum plate pipe and arches, including all appurtenant fasteners and
fittings. Bituminous coating shall conform to 207-11.5.2 b). Asphalt mastic coating shall conform to
207-11.5.2 c). Asphalt mastic coating may be field applied after assembly of the structure.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 167

207-15 ABS SOLID WALL PIPE.

207-15.1 General. This subsection applies to ABS plastic solid wall pipe for use as sanitary sewers,
storm drains, and house connection sewers. Minimum wall thickness shall correspond with SDR 35.
Joints for sanitary sewers, except for house connection sewers, shall be gasketed joints.
Joint solvent cement shall be an ABS cement conforming to ASTM D2235. Gaskets shall conform
to the requirements of 208-4.
207-15.2 Material Composition and Testing. The pipe and fittings shall be made of ABS plastic
which shall meet the minimum cell classification of 1-3-3, 3-2-2, or 2-2-3 as defined in ASTM D1788
and having the chemical composition as follows:
Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) pipe - plastics containing polymers or blends of polymers, or
both, in which the minimum butadiene content is 6 percent, the minimum acrylonitrile content is 15
percent, the minimum styrelene or substituted styrene content or both, is 15 percent and the maximum
content of all other monomers is not more than five parts by weight per 100 parts of ABS resin.
Additives and fibers, including but not limited to stabilizers, antioxidants, colorants, etc., shall not
exceed 10 parts by weight per 100 parts of ABS resin.
Material shall meet or exceed the values and properties below:

TABLE 207-15.2
Minimum Value Based on
ASTM Cell Classification
Property Test Method 1-3-3 3-3-2 2-2-3
Izod impact @ 23° ± 2°C foot-lb/inch (J/m) of notch D256 1 (53) 3 (160) 2 (107)
Deflection Temperature under load 264 psi (1820 kPa) D648
°F 190 180 190
°C 87 82 87
Tensile stress at yield, psi (MPa) D638 5000 (34.5) 4000 (27.6) 5000 (34.5)
Specific Gravity: D792
Minimum 1.0 1.0 1.0
Maximum 1.2 1.2 1.2

207-15.3 Chemical Resistance (Pickle Jar Test). The Engineer may at any time direct the
manufacturer to obtain samples of the compound and to prepare test specimens in accordance with
ASTM D3641. These specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below and also
with the applicable ASTM requirements.
Tensile, impact and weight change exposure specimens shall be immersed in the solutions specified
in Table 211-2 (A) for a period of 112 Days. At 28-Day intervals, selected specimens shall be removed,
washed, surface dried, and tested.
The weight change specimens shall be 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter and may be molded discs or
discs cut from the pipe wall. They shall be conditioned in a mechanical convection oven for 7 Days at
110° ± 4°F (43° ± 2°C), then cooled in a desiccator for 3 hours at 73°± 4°F (23° ± 2°C), weighed, and
then immersed in the solutions in Table 211-2 (A). At 28-Day intervals, selected specimens shall be
removed, washed, surface dried, and weighed. These same specimens shall be reconditioned in a
mechanical convection oven for 7 Days at 110° ± 4°F (43° ± 2°C), then cooled in a desiccator for 3
hours at 73°± 4°F (23° ± 2°C) and weighed again. If any specimen fails to meet these requirements at
any time, the material will be rejected.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
168 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 207-15.3
Values After 112-Day
Property ASTM Test Method Initial Values Exposure
Tensile stress at yield, psi (MPa), minimum D638 5,000 (34.5) 5,000 (34.5)
D256 Method A
Impact Strength foot-lbs/inch (J/m) of notch, Size 1/2 x 1/8 x 2-1/2"
2 (107) 2 (107)
minimum (Size 12.7 x 3.17 x 63.5
mm)
Weight Change D543
Unconditioned ± 1.5% maximum
Conditioned ± 1.0% maximum

207-15.4 Pipe Acceptance. At the time of manufacture each lot of pipe and fittings shall be
inspected for defects, and tested for impact, stiffness, and flattening in accordance with ASTM D2751.
When testing subsequent to manufacture, the impact requirement shall be excluded. For the
flattening requirement, the percentage reduction in pipe diameter shall be not less than 15 percent for
pipe marked SDR 23.5 or lower, and not less than 25 percent for pipe marked with higher SDR numbers.
The stiffness requirement is unchanged.
A pipe lot shall consist of all pipe having the same marking number. The lot test specimen shall
have a minimum length of 4 feet (1.2 m).
207-15.5 Marking. Pipe shall have a home mark to indicate full penetration of the spigot when the
joint is made. Pipe shall be marked at 5-foot (1.5 m) intervals or less with a marking number which
identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, machine, date, and shift on which the pipe was produced.
207-15.6 Installation Time Limit. The Contractor shall retest within 60 Days prior to the
installation of all pipe and fittings that are more than 180 Days old from the date of manufacture to
ensure compliance with the requirements of the Specifications. The Contractor shall not install any pipe
that is more than 2 years old from the date of manufacture.
207-16 ABS OR PVC COMPOSITE PIPE.
207-16.1 General. This subsection applies to ABS or PVC composite pipe for use as sanitary
sewers, storm drains, and house connection sewers. Pipe, fittings, and joints shall conform to ASTM
D2680, except as modified herein.
The pipe shall consist of two concentric extruded thermoplastic tubes integrally connected by webs
to form a circular truss. The longitudinal void spaces shall be filled with inert material. The maximum
average ID of the pipe, as determined by ASTM D2122, shall be:

TABLE 207-16.1
Nominal Size Max. Average ID
inches (mm) inches (mm)
6 (150) 5.81 (148)
8 (200) 7.90 (201)
10 (250) 9.88 (251)
12 (300) 11.83 (301)
15 (375) 14.80 (376)

Joint solvent cement shall conform to 207-15.1 for ABS and 207-17.3.3 for PVC.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 169

207-16.2 Material Composition and Testing. The ABS resin compound used in the manufacture
of ABS composite pipe shall conform to 207-15.2. The PVC resin shall conform to 207-17.2.2.
207-16.3 Chemical and Physical Testing. ABS resins shall conform to 207-15.3. PVC resins
shall conform to 207-17.5.
207-16.4 Pipe Acceptance. Each lot of pipe and fittings shall be inspected for defects and tested for
stiffness and deflection in accordance with ASTM D2680. Installation time shall conform to 207-15.7.
A pipe lot shall consist of all pipe having the same marking number. The lot test specimen shall be a
minimum length of 4 feet (1.2 m).
207-16.5 Marking. Pipe shall have a home mark to indicate full penetration of the spigot when a
joint is made. Pipe shall be marked at 5-foot (1.5 m) intervals or less with a marking number which
identifies the manufacturer, size and machine, date, and shift on which the pipe was made.
207-16.6 Repair. There shall be no discontinuity of the pipe inner wall. Ruptures in the pipe outer
wall may be repaired if the damage is limited to an area that can be encompassed by a 3-inch (75 mm)
diameter circle superimposed over the damage. Cell filler repair is unnecessary. A solvent welded
repair patch of the same material as the pipe, at least equal to the thickness of the pipe outer wall, shall
extend at least 1 inch (25 mm) beyond the damage. When damage exceeds these limits, the damaged
section shall be cleanly removed.
207-17 PVC GRAVITY PIPE.
207-17.1 General. This subsection applies to the requirements for unplasticized PVC plastic pipe
for sanitary sewers, storm drains, and house connection sewers. Pipe, fittings, couplings, and joints for
solid wall pipe shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 207-17.1. Pipe, fittings, couplings,
and joints for large diameter ((21-inch to 54-inch) ( 525 mm to 1350 mm)) closed profile wall pipe shall
conform to ASTM F1803.

TABLE 207-17.1
Nominal Size inches (mm) ASTM Wall Thickness Min.
4 - 15 (100 - 375) D3034 SDR 35
18 - 30 (450 - 750) F679 “T-1” only

Joints for sanitary sewers, except house connection sewers, shall be gasketed joints.
207-17.2 Manufacturing Requirements.
207-17.2.1 Identification Marks. All pipe, fittings, and couplings shall be clearly marked at
intervals not to exceed 5 feet as follows:
a) Nominal pipe diameter.
b) PVC cell classification.
c) Company, plant, shift, ASTM, SDR, and date designation.
d) Service designation or legend.
For fittings and couplings, the SDR designation is not required.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
170 Greenbook 2021

207-17.2.2 Cell Classification. Pipe shall be made of PVC plastic having a cell classification of
12454 or 13364, as defined in ASTM D1784. The fittings shall be made of PVC plastic having a cell
classification of 12454, or 13343. PVC compounds of other cell classifications shall be in conformance
with 207-17.5. Additives and fillers, including but not limited to stabilizers, antioxidants, lubricants,
colorants, etc., shall not exceed 10 parts by weight per 100 of PVC resin in the compound.
207-17.3 Joining Systems.
207-17.3.1 General. All pipe shall have a home mark on the spigot end to indicate proper
penetration when the joint is made.
The socket and spigot configurations for the fittings and couplings shall be compatible to those used
for the pipe.
207-17.3.2 Elastomeric Gasket Joints. Pipe with gasketed joints shall be manufactured with a
socket configuration which will prevent improper installation of the gasket and will ensure that the
gasket remains in place during the joint operation. The gasket shall be manufactured from a synthetic
elastomer and shall conform to the requirements of 208-1.2 and 208-4.
207-17.3.3 Solvent Cement Joints. Pipe with solvent cement joints shall be joined with PVC
cement conforming to ASTM D2564.
207-17.3.4 Injection Sealed Joints. Pipe with injection sealed joints shall be sealed with a PVC
adhesive compound. The compound shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2564 and shall have
a minimum viscosity of 50,000 centipoises (50 Pa•S). The internal diameter of the socket shall be
uniform with a locking taper at the base and an outer seal ring attached to the end. The socket shall have
an injection port to inject the adhesive and an exhaust port on the opposite side to allow air to escape
from the annular space.
207-17.4 Test Requirements.
207-17.4.1 General. Pipe, fittings, and couplings shall meet the requirements of the section titled
“Requirements” of ASTM D3034, or F679 (“T-1” wall only). During production of the pipe, the
manufacturer shall perform the specified tests for each pipe marking. A Certificate of Compliance by
the manufacturer indicating compliance with specification requirements shall be delivered with the pipe.
The Certificate of Compliance shall include the test result data. The PVC compound shall also meet the
chemical resistance requirements of 207-17.5.
207-17.4.2 Acceptance. The basis for acceptance will be the inspection of pipe, fittings, and
couplings; the tests specified in 207-17.4.1; and compliance with the Specifications. When the pipe is
delivered to the Work site, the Engineer may require additional testing to determine conformance with
the requirements of pipe flattening, impact resistance, pipe stiffness, and extrusion quality. Installation
time shall conform to 207-15.7.
207-17.4.3 Selection of Test Pipe. When testing is required by the Engineer, one test pipe shall be
selected at random by the Engineer from each 1,200 feet (370 m) or fraction thereof of one test pipe per
lot. A lot shall be defined as pipe having the same identification marking. The length of specimen for
each selected pipe shall be a minimum of 8 feet (2.4 m).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 171

207-17.5 Chemical Resistance and Physical Testing. PVC shall be tested in accordance with 211-
2 and conform to Table 207-17.5.

TABLE 207-17.5
Values (Initial and After 112-Day Exposure)
Cell Classification
Property ASTM Test Method 12454 13343 13364
Tensile stress at yield, psi (MPa), min. D638 7000 (48.3) 6000 (41.4) 6000 (41.4)
D256 Method A
Impact Strength ft-lbs/inch (J/m) of notch, min. Size 1/2 x 1/8 x 2-1/2" 0.65 (35) 1.5 (80) 1.5 (80)
(12.7 x 3.17 x 63.5 mm)
Weight Change D543
Unconditioned ± 1.5% max ± 1.5% max ± 1.5% max
Conditioned ± 1.0% max ± 1.0% max ± 1.0% max

207-18 ANNULAR HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE WITH SMOOTH

INTERIOR, CORRUGATED EXTERIOR, WITH BELL AND SPIGOT JOINTS (TYPE S).
207-18.1 General. These specifications apply to high density polyethylene, annular corrugated pipe
and applicable fittings and coupling systems intended for use in the construction of gravity flow storm
drains, culverts, and subsurface drains. The size, type, and material properties of the pipe to be furnished
shall be as shown on the Plans or as specified in the Special Provisions.
207-18.2 Materials.
207-18.2.1 Extruded Pipe and Fittings and Blow Molded Fittings. Pipe and fittings shall be
made of virgin HDPE that conforms to the requirements of AASHTO M294. The residue from ignition
shall not exceed 30 percent as determined by ASTM D2584 except that the furnace temperature shall be
840° ± 45° F (450° ± 25° C).
207-18.2.2 Reworked Plastics. In lieu of virgin HDPE, the manufacturer may use clean reworked
plastics, provided that it meets the cell class requirements specified in AASHTO M294. Reworked
plastics shall be from a processor’s own production that has been reground, palletized, or solvated after
having been previously processed by molding, extrusion, etc.
207-18.3 Nominal Diameter, Wall Thickness, and Pipe Stiffness. The inside diameter, minimum
wall thickness and minimum pipe stiffness shall be as specified in Table 207-18.3. The nominal
diameter for each pipe shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D2122. The diameter shall not
vary from a true circle by more than 2 percent of the nominal diameter. The wall thickness and inside
diameter for each production pipe shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO M294. Wall
thickness of Type S corrugated polyethylene pipe shall be the thickness of the inner liner measured
between corrugated valleys. Pipe stiffness values shall be determined in accordance with 207-18.5.2.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
172 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 207-18.3
Diameter, inches (mm) Minimum Wall Thickness, inches (mm) Minimum Pipe Stiffness, psi (kPa)
12 (300) 0.035 (0.89) 50 (345)
15 (375) 0.039 (1.00) 42 (290)
18 (450) 0.050 (1.27) 40 (275)
24 (600) 0.059 (1.50) 34 (235)
30 (750) 0.059 (1.50) 28 (195)
36 (900) 0.069 (1.70) 22 (150)
42 (1050) 0.070 (1.80) 20 (140)
48 (1200) 0.070 (1.80) 18 (125)
60 (1500) 0.080 (2.00) 14 (97)
Tolerance on the above specified inside diameter shall be 4.5 percent oversize and 1.5 percent undersize, but not more than 1-1/2 inch
(38 mm) oversize.

207-18.4 Joints, Fittings, and Connections.

207-18.4.1 Water-Tight Joints. Pipe shall be joined with bell and spigot joints and unless
otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions, be water-tight. Pipe shall
incorporate a gasket conforming to 208-4. Water-tight joints shall be tested at a pressure of at least 11
psi (74 kPa) in conformance with ASTM D3212. The manufacturer shall clearly identify watertight
joints on the pipe delivered to the Work site.
207-18.4.2 Silt-Tight Joints. Pipe shall be joined with bell and spigot joints and shall at a
minimum be silt-tight and leak resistant. The pipe shall incorporate a gasket conforming to 208-4. Silt-
tight joints shall conform to ASTM D3212, modified to a test pressure of at least 2 pounds per square
inch (14 kPa).
207-18.4.3 Fittings. Corrugated fittings include in-line joint fittings, such as couplings and
reducers, and branch or complimentary assembly fittings such as tees, wyes, and end caps. Fittings shall
be installed in accordance with the Plans and Special Provisions.
a) Fittings shall not reduce or impair the overall integrity or function of the pipe.
b) Fittings shall not reduce the inside diameter of the pipe being joined by more than 1/2 inch (12.5
mm). Reducer fittings shall not reduce the cross-sectional area of the smaller size.
c) Fabricated fittings shall be welded on the interior and exterior of all junctions.
d) Fittings shall conform to 207-18.4.2 unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
207-18.5 Testing.
207-18.5.1 General. For testing purposes a production lot size shall consist of all pipe having the
same lot marking number, but shall not exceed a total of 50 lengths per Day.
207-18.5.2 Pipe Stiffness. A minimum of 3 pipe specimens per production run shall be tested for
pipe stiffness (PS) in accordance with ASTM D2412 modified as follows:
a) The test specimens shall be a minimum of one diameter length.
b) Position the first specimen in the loading machine with an imaginary line connecting the two
seams formed by the corrugation mold (end view) parallel to the loading planes, when applicable.
The specimen shall lie flat on the plate within 1/8 inch (3 mm). The specimen may be
straightened by hand bending at room temperature to accomplish this. The first location shall be
used as a reference point for rotation and testing of the two other specimens. Rotate the other
specimens 45 and 90 degrees, respectively, from the reference point. Each specimen shall be
tested in one position only.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 173

c) The deflection indicator shall be readable and accurate to ± 7.9 x 10-4 inches (± 0.2 mm).
d) The beginning point for deflection measurement shall be at a load of 4.5 ± 1.1 pounds (20 ± 5 N).
This point shall be considered as the origin of the load deflection curve.
207-18.5.3 Pipe Flattening. The specimens specified in 207-18.5.2 shall be flattened until the
vertical inside diameter is reduced by 20 percent. The rate of loading shall conform to 207-18.5.2. The
specimens shall not exhibit any cracking, splitting, or delamination. Wall buckling is indicated by
reverse curvature in the pipe wall accompanied by a decrease in load carrying ability of the pipe. Any
decrease or downward deviation in the pipe stiffness test curve shall be considered a wall buckling point.
207-18.5.4 Brittleness. Test pipe specimens shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D2444,
except 6 specimens shall be tested, or 6 impacts shall be made on one specimen. In the latter case,
successive impacts shall be separated by 120 ± 10 degrees for impacts made on one circle, or at least 12
inches (300 mm) longitudinally for impacts made on one element. Impact points shall be at least 6
inches (150 mm) from the end of the specimen. A tup (type B) shall be used, with a mass of 10 pounds
(4.5 kg). The height of drop shall be 10 feet (3.0 m). A flat plate specimen holder shall be used.
Specimens shall be conditioned for 24 hours at a temperature of 24.8 ± 1.8° F (–4 ± 2° C), and all tests
shall be conducted within 60 seconds of removal from this atmosphere. The center of the falling tup
shall strike on a corrugation crown for all impacts.
207-18.5.5. Environmental Stress Cracking of Finished Pipe. Pipe shall be tested for
environmental stress cracking in accordance with ASTM D1693 modified as follows:
a) Three specimens shall be tested.
b) Each specimen shall consist of a 90-degree arc length of pipe.
c) Bend the specimens to shorten the inside chord length 20 ± 1 percent and retain in this position
using a suitable holding device. Determine the arc chord measurement (B) of the specimen under
test as follows:
Place the bent specimen in a container of suitable size and cover completely with a preheated
wetting agent at 122 ± 1.8° F (50 ± 1° C). Maintain this temperature for 24 hours, and then
remove the sample and inspect immediately. The wetting agent used in this test shall be 100
percent nonylphenoxy poly (ethyleneoxy) ethanol.
207-18.5.6 Slow Crack Growth Resistance. Basic resin compounds shall be tested for stress crack
resistance in accordance with ASTM F2136 modified as follows:
a) The applied stress for the NCLS test shall be 600 pounds per square inch (4100 kPa).
b) The notched depth shall be 20 percent of the nominal thickness of the specimen.
c) The average failure time of the 5 test specimens shall not be less than 24 hours with no single test
specimen’s failure time less than 17 hours.
207-18.5.7 Joint Integrity. Joint integrity shall be tested in accordance with the following:
a) Each fitting or coupling shall be assembled in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Use pipe samples at least 12 inches (300 mm) in length. Assemble a
specimen at least 21 inches (600 mm) in length with the connection at the center.
b) Load the connected pipe and fitting between parallel plates at the rate of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) per
minute until the vertical inside diameter is reduced by at least 20 percent of the nominal diameter
of the pipe.
c) Inspect for damage while at the specified deflection and after removal of the load.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
174 Greenbook 2021

d) Measure the maximum radial distance between pipe and fittings or between bell and spigot,
during test and after the load is removed.
Pipe connections shall not separate to create a gap exceeding 3/16 inch (5 mm) when measured in the
radial direction between pipe and coupling or between bell and spigot portions of the pipe. The gap
measurement shall be taken at the gasket or hinge point. The test shall be conducted on a fully
assembled joint, including the gasket. Fittings shall not crack or delaminate.
207-18.5.8 Cell Classification. Cell classification of pipe and fittings shall conform to 207-18.2.1.
207-18.6 Marking. Pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked at intervals of 11.5 feet (3.5 m) or less.
Markings shall display the manufacturer’s name and/or trademark, nominal size, plant designation code,
and date of manufacture.
207-18.7 Pipe Acceptance or Rejection. Pipe shall be free of cracks, holes, delaminations, foreign
inclusions, blisters, or other defects that would, due to their nature, degree or extent, have a deleterious
effect on pipe performance as determined by the Engineer. Prior to installation, damaged pipe shall
either be repaired or field cut to remove the damaged portion as approved by the Engineer and in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
207-19 POLYETHYLENE (PE) SOLID WALL GRAVITY PIPE.
207-19.1 General. Polyethylene (PE) plastic solid wall pipe and liner for use in gravity flow
sanitary sewers, storm drains, and house connection sewers shall comply with ASTM D3350 or ASTM
F714. Unless otherwise specified, pipe shall conform to SDR 21. Fittings shall comply with ASTM
D2683 or D3261.
207-19.2 Material Composition. Pipe and fittings shall be made from PE resins complying with
ASTM D1248, Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34, and ASTM D3350, and which shall further
meet the requirements as listed in the following table:

TABLE 207-19.2
Property Value ASTM Test
3
Density (g/cm ) 0.941-0.959 D1505
Melt Index (g/10 minutes) 0.15 max. D1238 cond. E.
Flexural Modulus psi (MPa) 120,000 (827) minimum D790
Tensile strength at yield psi (MPa) 3,200 (22.1) minimum D638
Elongation at break 800% D638
Brittleness temperature °F (°C) -180° (-118°) max. D746
1
Environmental Stress Crack Resistance Fo (hrs.) Test Condition “C” 192 min. D1693
Hydrostatic Design Basic, psi (MPa) @ 73°F (23°C) 1600 (11.0) D2837
Color 2% Carbon Black min.
1. Fo indicates no failures.

Additives and fillers including, but not limited to, stabilizers, antioxidants, lubricants, colorants, etc.,
shall not exceed 5 parts by weight per 100 of PE resin in the compound. The Engineer may require a
Certificate of Compliance by the manufacturer that the test results conform to the requirements of the
Specifications.
207-19.3 Pipe Acceptance. At the time of manufacture, each lot of pipe, liner, and fittings shall be
inspected for defects and tested for Elevated Temperature Sustain Pressure in accordance with ASTM
F714. Installation time limit shall conform to 207-15.7.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 175

At the time of delivery, the pipe shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks,
holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults.
For testing purposes, a production lot shall consist of all pipe having the same marking number. It
shall include any and all items produced during any given work shift and must be so identified as
opposed to previous or ensuing production.
207-19.4 Marking. Pipe shall be marked at 5-foot (1.5 m) intervals or less with a coded number
which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, machine, date, and shift on which the pipe was
extruded.
At the end of the production shift, during which a production lot has been extruded, the marking
code on the pipe shall be changed to indicate that said time intervals have elapsed and that a new
production shift has begun.
Fittings shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer or its logo, the size, and the material
from which they were molded or fabricated.
207-19.5 Chemical Resistance and Physical Testing. PE resins shall be tested in accordance with
211-2 and conform to the requirements shown in Table 207-19.5.

TABLE 207-19.5
Property ASTM Test Method Initial Value Value After 112 Days Exposure
Tensile stress at yield, psi (MPa) min. D638 3,200 (22.1) 3,200 (22.1)
D256 Method A
Impact Strength, ft-lb/inch (J/m) min. Size 1/2 x 1/8 x 2-1/2" 3.5 (187) 3.5 (187)
(12.7 x 3.17 x 63.5 mm)
Weight Change D543
Unconditioned ± 1.5% max.
Conditioned ± 1.0% max.

The Engineer may, at any time, direct the manufacturer and/or Contractor to obtain compound
samples and to obtain compression molded test specimens in accordance with ASTM D4703. These
specimens shall conform to the minimum property values shown in Table 207-19.5.
207-20 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYMER MORTAR (FRPM) PIPE.
207-20.1 General. These specifications apply to FRPM pipe to be used for the construction of
direct bury gravity sanitary sewers. storm drains, and related structures. Pipes. joints, and fittings shall
conform to ASTM D3262. Unless otherwise specified, the minimum pipe stiffness shall be 46 pounds
per square inch (318 kPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412. The size, type, and stiffness of
the pipe to be furnished shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
207-20.2 Materials. The amount, location, and orientation of the chopped and continuous glass-
fiber reinforcement shall be specifically designed for each application. The glass shall be a commercial
grade of E-type glass fibers with a finish compatible with the resin used. The sand shall be a minimum
98 percent silica kiln-dried and graded. The polyester wall resin shall be an isophthalic, orthophthalic,
or other approved resin with a minimum tensile elongation of 2 percent. A vinyl ester liner resin shall be
used to meet the chemical requirements of 207-20.5. Designation per ASTM D3262 shall be Type 1,
Liner 1 or 2, Grade 1 or 3, and a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 pounds per square inch (318 kPa) or
greater, unless a higher value is indicated in the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Elastomeric sealing gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
176 Greenbook 2021

207-20.3 Dimensions.
207-20.3.1 Length. The nominal length shall be 20 feet (6 m) except as otherwise specified or required for
bends or special joints, with a minimum length of 5 feet (1.5 m). At least 90 percent of the total footage of each
size and class of pipe, excluding special order lengths, shall be furnished in nominal length sections.
207-20.3.2 Nominal and Outside Diameter, Tolerances, and Wall Thickness. For pipe less than
60 inches (1500 mm) in diameter, the nominal and outside diameters and allowable tolerances shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM D3262. For pipe greater than 60 inches (1500 mm) in diameter,
the outside diameter and allowable tolerance shall conform to the manufacturer’s requirements.
Wall thickness shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D3567. The weight of the pipe for all
sizes shall be provided by the manufacturer.
207-20.4 Joints. Pipes and fittings shall be field connected with a coupling or bell-and-spigot joint
containing a compressed elastomeric gasket. Elastomeric gasket material shall conform to 208-1.2.
Joints shall meet the performance requirements of ASTM D4161. Maximum allowable joint angular
deflections for curves are shown in Table 207-20.4.

TABLE 207-20.4
Nominal Diameter, inches (mm) Maximum Joint Deflection Angle (Degrees)
12 to 14 (300 to 350) 4
16 to 20 (400 to 500) 3
24 to 36 (600 to 900) 2
42 to 48 (1050 to 1200) 1.5
54 to 60 (1350 to 1500) 1
66 to 78 (1650 to 1950) 0.75
84 to 102 (2100 to 2550) 0.50

207-20.5 Chemical Resistance and Physical Testing. All pipe furnished under this subsection
shall be tested in accordance with 211-2 and conform to the requirements shown in Table 207-20.5 (A).
In addition, the pipe shall be tested as follows:
a) Properties. In accordance with ASTM D3262.
b) Accelerated Aging of Pipe Using A Deflected Condition. Pipe rings shall be tested for
retention of properties after exposure for 112 Days in a strained deflected condition to solutions
specified in Table 207-20.5 (B).
Tests for initial properties to comply with Table 207-20.5 (A) shall be conducted on pipe rings
and specimens cut from pipe rings all prior to their exposure.
Initial properties to be used in evaluation of physical property retention for each exposed pipe ring shall
be determined from specimens cut from each ring after exposure. Initial property test specimens shall be
taken from ring locations that were 45 degrees either side of the top position in the exposure test.
The deflection of pipe rings during the exposure shall be based on achieving a specific strain as
shown in Table 207-20.5 (C).
c) Test Procedures. The following procedures shall be used for performing the accelerated aging
test on pipe specimens:
1) Select 2 pipe diameters for testing.
2) Obtain 16 pipe rings each 12 inches (300 mm) long from both diameters.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 177

3) One ring of each diameter shall be tested for initial properties in accordance with 211-2 and
meet or exceed the values in Table 207-20.5 (A).
4) Weigh the remaining pipe rings and test for pipe stiffness per ASTM D2412.
5) Determine the appropriate test deflection of each pipe ring in accordance with Table 207-20.5 (C).
6) Deflect each pipe ring in accordance with ASTM D3681 procedures to the determined test
deflection, dam the ends, and immediately begin the test exposure. Depth of test solution
shall be 1/3 of pipe diameter.
7) Three pipe rings of each diameter and pipe joint section shall be exposed for 112 Days to
each test solutions specified in Table 207-20.5 (B).
8) After exposure, immediately remove rings from deflections restraints, clean, and visually
inspect (note any changes).
9) Weigh each ring and test for pipe stiffness.
10) Determine initial strength and elongation properties for each pipe ring in accordance with
Table 207-20.5 (A).
11) Determine exposed properties of each pipe ring in accordance with Table 207-20.5 (A).
12) Compute changes in pipe stiffness, weight, and properties for each ring.
13) Compute average retentions for each test solution and evaluate for conformance to the
requirements shown in Table 207-20.5 (A).

TABLE 207-20.5 (A)

Property Initial and After Exposure¹ After Exposure in strained deflected
condition
Minimum Axial Tensile Strength 100% of initial 90% of initial
350,000 psi (2413 MPa) (secant tangent
Minimum Axial Tensile Modulus 90% of initial
method)
Minimum Axial Elongation at break 0.5% 90% of initial
Weight change + 1.5% + 1.5%
Minimum Pipe Stiffness 46 psi (0.32 MPa) 90% of initial
1. After 112 Days in chemical solutions listed in 211-2.

TABLE 207-20.5 (B)

Chemical Solutions Concentration

Sulfuric Acid 20%
Sodium Hydroxide 5%
Nitric Acid 1%
Sodium Hypochlorite 1%
Bacteriological BOD not less than 700 PPM
1. Volumetric percentages: Actual concentration of reagent must be corrected to 100%.
2. After 112 Days in chemical solutions listed on Table 207-20.5 (B) in the stressed condition given in Table 207-20.5 (C).
3. May be 85% of initial if after exposure value exceeds 46 psi (0.32 MPa).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
178 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 207-20.5 (C)

Pipe Stiffness psi (MPa) Minimum Strain (%) Test Deflection
1
46 (0.32) 0.39t/D 9.1%
2
72 (0.50) 0.34t/D 7.9%
1. Linearly interpolate minimum strain values and test deflections for other values of pipe surface.
2. t and D are the nominal local wall thickness and the inside diameter.

207-20.6 Marking. Each pipe section shall be marked at both ends inside and every 5 feet (1.5 m)
on the outside to identify the manufacturer, manufacturer number (identifies factory location, date of
manufacture, shift, and sequence), nominal diameter, pipe stiffness, ASTM D3262 and designation, and
lot number.
207-20.7 Pipe Acceptance or Rejection. The pipe shall be free of cracks, holes, delaminations,
foreign inclusions, blisters, or other defects that would, due to their nature, degree, or extent, have a
deleterious effect on the pipe performance as determined by the Engineer. Prior to installation, damaged
pipe shall be either repaired or field cut to remove the damaged portion as approved by the Engineer.
For testing purposes, a production lot shall consist of all pipe having the same lot marking number, but
shall not exceed a total of 50 pipes. Pipe length, wall thickness, joint dimensions, pipe stiffness, and
deflection characteristics shall be verified by inspection and testing in accordance with 4-3, 4-4, and
ASTM D3262 requirements for each lot. Installation time limit shall conform to 207-15.6.
207-21 VITRIFIED CLAY MICROTUNNELING PIPE.
207-21.1 General. This specification is for vitrified clay microtunneling pipe to be used for sanitary
sewers, storm drains, and related structures. Vitrified clay microtunneling pipe shall be manufactured in
accordance with 207-8 and ASTM C1208, except as modified herein.
207-21.2 Dimensions and Tolerances. For typical tolerances, see Table 207-21.2. Since the
physical properties of clay pipe vary at different manufacturing locations, the minimum wall thickness of
the pipe shall be included with the submittals.
a) Length. Typical lengths shall be 4, 6, or 8 feet (1.5, 2, or 2.5 m).
b) Straightness. Pipe shall not deviate from straight by more than 0.05 inch per linear foot (4
mm/m) when the maximum offset is measured from the concave side of the pipe. Measurements
shall be taken by placing a straightedge along the concave side of the full length of the pipe
barrel, excluding the joint, and measuring the maximum distance between the straightedge and
concave side of the pipe.
c) Roundness. The diameter shall not vary from a true circle by more than 2 percent of the
nominal diameter. The out-of-round dimension is the difference between the maximum and
minimum diameters measured at any one location along the barrel.
d) End Squareness. The ends of the pipe shall be perpendicular to the theoretical longitudinal axis
within 0.004 inch per inch (4 mm/m) of outside diameter.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 179

TABLE 207-21.2: DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

Minimum
Maximum Maximum Minus Tolerance
Nominal Diameter Allowable
1 Out-of-Round Out-of-Square from Lying Length,
inches (mm) 2 Diameter
inches (mm) inches (mm) inch/foot (mm/m) 3
inches (mm)
8 (200) 0.16 (4) 0.04 (1.2) 0.25 (21) 7.6 (192)
10 (250) 0.20 (5) 0.06 (1.4) 0.25 (21) 9.5 (240)
12 (300) 0.24 (6) 0.06 (1.6) 0.25 (21) 11.4 (289)
16 (400) 0.30 (8) 0.09 (2.2) 0.25 (21) 15.2 (385)
18 (450) 0.36 (9) 0.09 (2.3) 0.25 (21) 17.2 (437)
20 (500) 0.38 (10) 0.10 (2.5) 0.25 (21) 18.9 (480)
21 (525) 0.42 (11) 0.10 (2.7) 0.25 (21) 20.0 (509)
24 (600) 0.43 (12) 0.12 (3.0) 0.38 (32) 23.1 (586)
27 (675) 0.54 (14) 0.13 (3.4) 0.38 (32) 25.9 (658)
30 (750) 0.60 (15) 0.14 (3.6) 0.38 (32) 28.7 (730)
33 (825) 0.70 (16) 0.16 (4.2) 0.38 (32) 31.5 (801)
36 (900) 0.72 (18) 0.18 (4.5) 0.38 (32) 34.6 (878)
39 (975) 0.80 (20) 0.19 (4.9) 0.38 (32) 37.5 (953)
42 (1050) 0.84 (21) 0.21 (5.2) 0.38 (32) 40.5 (1028)

1. The outside diameter of the delivered pipe shall not vary by more than 2.5% for outside diameters up to and including
24 inches (600 mm), and 2.0% for outside diameters greater than 24 inches (600 mm).
2. These are based on the outside diameter and are approximate. Consult with the pipe manufacturer for the specific
dimensions.
3. No fixed “+” tolerance limit.

207-21.3 Imperfections.
a) Fractures or Cracks. There shall be no fractures or cracks passing through the barrel which are
visible to the unaided eye.
b) Chips, Fractures, or Blisters. Chips, fractures, or blisters on the pipe shall not exceed 2 inches
(50 mm) laterally in any surface dimension and shall not exceed a depth of 1/8 the minimum
thickness of the barrel.
207-21.4 Repair Methods and Materials. Repairs, if any, shall be made in accordance with 207-8.6.
207-21.5 Fittings and Stoppers. 207-8.3 is not applicable to microtunnel-installed vitrified clay pipe.
207-21.6 Joints. Joints for vitrified clay pipe shall consist of a seat, an elastomeric sealing element,
a sleeve, and a compression disc.
a) Seat. The seat is either formed or recess-ground on the pipe ends.
b) Elastomeric Sealing Element(s). The elastomeric sealing element is an elastomeric gasket
configuration and location may vary by pipe manufacturer. The sealing element(s) shall conform
to 208-2.
c) Sleeve. The sleeve is an element which bridges between the pipe sections and shall be made of
non-corrosive materials which, in conjunction with the sealing element(s), forms a joint which
meets the test requirements of 207-21.7. Stainless steel sleeves shall be AISI Type 316.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
180 Greenbook 2021

d) Compression Disc. The compression disc is a flat disk that forms a continuous ring of contact
with the ends of the pipe and which functions to distribute the jacking forces which develop
during pipeline installation. The width of the compression disc shall not exceed the maximum
wall thickness of the pipe, not extend into the flow, nor inhibit the installation of the sleeve onto
the joint of the pipe.
207-21.7 Testing Requirements.
207-21.7.1 General. Testing shall be in accordance with 207-8.5 and ASTM C1208.
207-21.7.2 Joint Test. Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C1208.
207-21.7.3 Hydrostatic Pressure Test. Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C1208.
207-21.7.4 Bearing Strength Test. Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C1208. Pipe shall
meet Table 207-8.5.3 for Extra Strength pipe.
207-21.7.5 Compressive Strength Test. Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C1208. Pipe
material shall have a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 pounds per square inch (48 MPa).
207-21.7.6 Acid Resistance Test. Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C301.
207-21.7.7 Acceptance. Pipe acceptance shall be in accordance with 207-8.5.4.
207-22 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYMER MORTAR (FRPM) MICROTUNNELING PIPE.
207-22.1 General. This specification applies to FRPM microtunneling pipe to be used for sanitary
sewers, storm drains, and related structures. Such pipe shall conform to 207-20 except as modified
herein. The minimum pipe stiffness shall be 120 pounds per square inch (830 kPa) when tested in
accordance with ASTM D2412.
207-22.2 Materials. Materials shall conform to 207-20.2, except that the minimum pipe stiffness
shall be 120 psi (830 kPa). Pipe material shall have a minimum compressive strength of 10,000 pounds
per square inch (69 MPa).
207-22.3 Dimensions. Dimensions and sizes shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 207-22.3.
207-22.3.1 Length. The nominal lengths shall be 6, 10, or 20 feet (2, 3, or 6 m). At least 90
percent of the total footage of each size and class of pipe, excluding special order lengths and pipes
sampled for quality control testing, shall be furnished in nominal length sections.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 181

207-22.3.2 Minimum Wall Thickness. The outside diameter and minimum wall thickness are
shown in Table 207-22.3. The allowable jacking load for microtunnel pipe shall be determined from the
pipe wall thickness where the cross-section is reduced (the bottom of the spigot gasket groove).

TABLE 207-22.3
Nominal Diameter Outside Diameter Nominal Inside Minimum Pipe Wall
1 2 2
inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm) inches (mm)
18 (450) 19.5 (495) 17.0 (432) 1.12 (28.4)
20 (500) 21.6 (549) 19.0 (483) 1.15 (29.2)
24 (600) 25.8 (655) 23.1 (587) 1.22 (31.0)
28 (700) 30.0 (762) 27.1 (688) 1.30 (33.0)
30 (750) 32.0 (813) 28.7 (729) 1.52 (38.6)
33 (825) 34.0 (864) 30.6 (777) 1.54 (39.1)
36 (900) 38.3 (973) 34.8 (884) 1.59 (40.4)
42 (1050) 44.5 (1130) 40.8 (1036) 1.67 (42.4)
48 (1200) 50.8 (1290) 46.7 (1186) 1.88 (47.8)
51 (1275) 53.9 (1369) 49.7 (1262) 1.94 (49.3)
54 (1350) 57.1 (1450) 52.8 (1341) 2.00 (50.8)
57 (1425) 60.0 (1524) 55.5 (1410) 2.06 (52.3)
60 (1500) 62.9 (1598) 58.3 (1481) 2.11 (53.6)
63 (1575) 66.0 (1676) 61.3 (1557) 2.15 (54.6)
66 (1650) 69.2 (1758) 63.9 (1623) 2.44 (62.0)
69 (1725) 72.5 (1842) 67.1 (1704) 2.50 (63.5)
72 (1800) 75.4 (1915) 69.9 (1775) 2.56 (65.0)
78 (1950) 81.6 (2073) 75.8 (1925) 2.94 (68.8)
82 (2050) 87.0 (2210) 80.7 (2050) 2.94 (74.7)
84 (2100) 88.7 (2253) 82.3 (2090) 3.00 (76.2)
90 (2250) 94.3 (2395) 87.6 (2225) 3.13 (79.5)
96 (2400) 99.5 (2527) 92.6 (2352) 3.23 (82.0)
102 (2550) 108.0 (2743) 100.7 (2558) 3.42 (86.9)
1. The outside diameter of the pipe delivered to the Work site shall not vary by more than ± 0.1% for each pipe size.
2. For standard tonnage ratings.

207-22.3.3 Tolerances.
a) Length. Laying length tolerance shall conform to ASTM D3262.
b) Straightness. Pipes shall not deviate from straight by more than 0.006 inch per linear foot (0.5
mm/m). Measurements shall be taken by measuring gaps between the pipe wall and a
straightedge placed along any longitudinal line on the exterior surface of the pipe.
c) Roundness. The diameter shall not very from a true circle by more than ± 0.5 percent of its
nominal diameter. The out-of-round dimension is the difference between the maximum and
minimum diameters measured at any one location along the barrel.
d) End Squareness. All points around each end of the pipe shall fall within 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) to
a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe.
207-22.4 Joints. Joints shall conform to 207-20.4, except that bell and spigot joints shall have a
flush exterior. Joints at tie-ins, when needed, may utilize fiberglass gasket-sealed closure couplings

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
182 Greenbook 2021

which have an outside diameter larger than the pipe. The maximum allowable joint angular deflections
for curves shown in Table 207-20.4 shall not apply.
207-22.5 Accelerated Aging and Physical Testing. Testing shall conform to 207-20.5, and values
used shall reflect actual pipe stiffness.
207-22.6 Marking. Marking shall conform to 207-20.6. The maximum allowable jacking load
shall also be indicated.
207-22.7 Pipe Acceptance or Rejection. Pipe shall conform to 207-20.7.
207-23 REINFORCED CONCRETE MICROTUNNELING PIPE.
207-23.1 General. This specification applies to reinforced concrete microtunneling pipe
manufactured for the construction of storm drains, sewers, water pipelines, and related structures. Such
pipe shall comply with 207-2 for reinforced concrete pipe; 207-3 for lined reinforced concrete pipe; or
209-3 for AWWA C300 Reinforced Pressure Pipe, Steel Cylinder Type, or AWWA C302 Reinforced
Pressure Pipe, Noncylinder Type, except as modified herein. A minimum concrete compressive strength
of 5,000 pounds per square inch (34.5 MPa) is required.
207-23.2 Materials. All materials used shall conform to the requirements of 201 and 207-2.2,
except that the Contractor shall submit written certification from the pipe manufacturer that no calcium
chloride has been used in the manufacturer of the pipe.
207-23.3 Dimensions and Tolerances.
a) Length. Pipe shall have a nominal laying length of 8 to 24 feet (2.4 to 7.3 m) unless otherwise
specified. Variations in laying lengths of 2 opposite sides of pipe shall not be more than 1/16
inch per foot (5 mm/m) with a maximum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) in any length of pipe for diameters
up to and including 72-inch (1800 mm), and a maximum of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) for larger
diameters. The underrun in length of a section of pipe shall not be more than 1/8 inch per foot
(10 mm/m) with a maximum of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) in any length of pipe.
b) Wall Thickness. The minimum wall thickness for all pipe sizes shall be as specified in ASTM
C76, Wall B.
c) Inside Diameter. The inside diameter of 12-inch to 24-inch (300 mm to 600 mm) pipe shall not
vary more than 1/4 inch (6 mm). The internal diameter of 27-inch (675 mm) and larger pipe
shall not vary more than 1 percent or 5/8 inch (16 mm), whichever is less.
d) Outside Diameter. The outside diameter of 12-inch to 24-inch (300 mm to 600 mm) pipe shall
not vary more than 1/4 inch (6 mm). The outside diameter of 27-inch (675 mm) and larger pipe
shall not vary more than 1 percent or 5/8 inch (16 mm), whichever is less.
e) Straightness. Pipes shall not deviate from straight by more than 1/16 inch per linear foot (5
mm/m). Measurements shall be taken by measuring gaps between the pipe wall ends and a
straightedge placed along any longitudinal line on the exterior surface of the pipe.
f) Roundness. The outside diameter of the pipe shall not vary from a true circle by more than 1 percent.
g) End Squareness. The ends of the pipe in contact with the jacking pads shall be perpendicular to
the longitudinal axis of the pipe with a maximum of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm), measured with a square
and a straight edge across the end of the pipe. The bearing surfaces shall be smooth and free of
projections.
207-23.4 Reinforcement. Pipe shall have concentric circular cage reinforcement conforming to
the requirements of 207-2.4 for reinforced concrete pipe or 207-5 for reinforced concrete pressure pipe.
The total area of reinforcement provided shall be at least 1/8 square inch per foot (265 mm2/m) in each

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 183

direction. When 2 reinforcement cages are used, the longitudinal reinforcement shall be divided
approximately equal between the 2 cages, and only the longitudinal reinforcement on the outer cage need
extend into the bell. Supports between the reinforcement and the forms that are to be exposed in the
finished pipe shall be made of stainless steel, plastic or plastic coated steel.
207-23.5 Joints. Pipe shall have rubber-gasket type, concrete or steel joints. Tongue and groove
joints are not acceptable. Joint details shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before
commencing pipe manufacturing. For flush bell and spigot joints, the slope of the longitudinal gasket
contact surfaces of the joint with respect to the longitudinal axis of the pipe shall not exceed 2 degrees.
The ends of the pipe shall be so formed that, when the pipes are joined, they shall make a continuous and
uniform line of pipe with a smooth and regular surface. The rubber gasket shall conform to 208-3.
207-23.6 Repair. Unsound or imperfect concrete shall be repaired per the applicable sections of
207-2, 207-3, 207-4 or other methods approved by the Engineer.
207-23.7 Pipe Acceptance or Rejection. Pipe shall conform to 207-2.9 and 207-3.2.
207-24 STEEL MICROTUNNELING PIPE.
207-24.1 General. This specification applies to steel microtunneling pipe manufactured for the
construction of storm drains, sewers, water pipelines, and related structures. Such pipe shall conform to
209-2 except as modified herein.
207-24.2 Materials. Materials used shall conform to 209-2.2.
207-24.3 Dimension and Tolerances.
a) Length. The nominal length shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 209-2.2.1. Pipe
shall have a nominal laying length of 8 to 40 feet (2.4 m to 12 m) unless otherwise specified.
Variations in laying lengths of 2 opposite sides of pipe shall not be more than with a maximum
of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) in any length of pipe for diameters up to and including 72 inches (1800
mm), or 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) for larger diameters. The underrun in length of a section of pipe
shall not be more than 3/8 inch per foot (30 mm/m) with a maximum of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) in
any length of pipe.
b) Wall Thickness. Plate and sheet thickness shall conform to 307-1.3. For plate, the maximum
allowable thickness variation shall be 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) under the ordered thickness. For
sheet, the maximum allowable thickness variation shall be as tabulated in ASTM A568, ASTM
A635, or 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) under the ordered thickness,
c) Diameter. Internal diameter shall conform to 207-10.2.3. The outside circumference of the pipe
shall not vary by more than 1 percent but not to exceed 3/4 inch (19 mm) from the nominal
outside circumference. The circumference of the pipe ends shall not vary by more than 0.196
inch (5 mm) under, or 0.393 inch (10 mm) over the required outside circumference.
d) Straightness. Finished cylinder shall not deviate by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from a 10-foot
(3 m) long straight edge held against the cylinder.
e) Roundness. The outside diameter of the pipe shall not vary from a true circle by more than 1
percent. The out-of-round of the pipe ends shall be determined by measuring the ring diameter at
a minimum three locations equally spaced on the contact surface. The out-of-round shall be the
difference between the high and low readings. The maximum out-of-round shall not exceed 0.5
percent of the average of the low and high readings or 1/4 inch (6 mm), whichever is less.
f) End Squareness. For pipe that is to be butt welded in the field, the end of the pipe shall be
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe with a maximum deviation of no more than 1/8
inch (3 mm) measured with a square and a straight edge across the end of the pipe.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
184 Greenbook 2021

207-24.4 Joints. Joints shall conform to the requirements of 307-1.3. Connecting adjacent pieces
of steel pipe shall be achieved by field butt welding. For casing application, integral press fit connectors
may be used as approved by the Engineer.
207-24.5 Protective Lining and Coating. Exterior coatings, if required, shall be the type that
minimize skin friction between the exterior of the pipe and the soil. Such an exterior coating shall be
epoxy-based polymer concrete, fusion-bond epoxy, or other product that provides a hard, smooth
surface. Strict adherence to the coating manufacturer’s recommendations for surface preparation and
application procedure shall be required with holiday detection and repair. If the steel pipe is field
welded, the Contractor shall submit a procedure for approval to the Engineer to field repair the coating
which maintains the coating integrity and minimizes the repair and curing time.
Exterior coating of steel pipe, used as encasement, is not required if a wall thickness increase of at
least 0.063 inch (1.5 mm) is specified.
Interior lining of steel pipe should be shop-applied coating such as liquid epoxy, polyurethane,
cement mortar, or appropriate material for the desired service. Consideration should also be given to
line-in-place procedures.
207-24.6 Inspection and Acceptance. Pipe shall be inspected and accepted in accordance with
AWWA C 200.
207-25 PROFILE POLYPROPYLENE PIPE WITH SMOOTH INTERIOR, WITH BELL
AND SPIGOT JOINTS.
207-25.1 General. These specifications apply to polypropylene, dual wall (Type S) and triple wall
(Type D) profile pipe in sizes 12-inch through 60-inch (300 mm through 1500 mm) and appurtenant
fittings and coupling systems intended for use in the construction of gravity flow storm drains, culverts,
and subsurface drains.
The size, type, and material properties of the pipe to be furnished shall be as shown on the Plans or
specified in the Special Provisions.
207-25.2 Materials.
[Link] Extruded Pipe and Fittings. Pipe and fittings shall be produced from virgin
polypropylene conforming to ASTM F2881 or AASHTO M330.
207-25.3 Reworked Plastics. In lieu of virgin polypropylene, the manufacturer may use clean
reworked plastics, provided it conforms to the cell class requirements specified in ASTM F2881 or
AASHTO M330. Reworked plastics shall be from a processor’s own production that has been reground,
pelletized, or solvated after having been previously processed.
207-25.4 Nominal Diameter, Wall Thickness, and Pipe Stiffness. The inside diameter, minimum
wall thickness, and minimum pipe stiffness shall be as shown in Table 207-25.4 and are based on ASTM
F2881 or AASHTO M330 values. The nominal diameter for each pipe shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM D2122. The diameter shall not vary from a true circle by more than 2 percent of
the nominal diameter. The wall thickness and inside diameter for each production pipe shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM F2881 or AASHTO M330. Wall thickness of dual wall
corrugated polypropylene pipe shall be the thickness of the inner liner measured between corrugated
valleys (the waterway). Both the inner and outer walls of triple wall pipe shall have the minimum wall
thickness values for either ASTM F2881 or AASHTO M330 per Table 207-25.4. Pipe stiffness shall be
determined in accordance with 207-25.6.2.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 185

TABLE 207-25.4
Diameter ASTM F2881 ASTM F2881 AASHTO M330 AASHTO M330
in (mm) Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum
Wall Thickness Pipe Stiffness Wall Thickness Pipe Stiffness
in (mm) psi (kPa) in (mm) psi (kPa)
(Storm Sewer) (Storm Sewer)
12 (300) 0.045 (1.1) 70 (482) 0.035 (0.9) 65 (450)
15 (375) 0.050 (1.3) 60 (413) 0.04 (1.0) 54 (375)
18 (450) 0.055 (1.4) 56 (386) 0.05 (1.3) 50 (350)
24 (600) 0.060 (1.5) 50 (344) 0.06 (1.5) 44 (300)
30 (750) 0.065 (1.7) 46 (317) 0.06 (1.5) 36 (250)
36 (900) 0.070 (1.8) 40 (275) 0.07 (1.7) 29 (200)
42 (1050) 0.070 (1.8) 35 (241) 0.07 (1.8) 27 (185)
48 (1200) 0.072 (1.8) 30 (208) 0.07 (1.8) 25 (170)
60 (1500) 0.085 (2.2) 25 (170) 0.08 (2.0) 19 (135)

207-25.5 Joints, Fittings, and Connections.

207-25.5.1 Water-Tight Joints. Pipe shall be joined with water-tight bell and spigot joints unless
otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. Pipe shall incorporate a gasket
conforming to 208-4. Water-tight joints shall be tested at a pressure of at least 10.8 pounds per square
inch (74 kPa) in accordance with ASTM D3212. The manufacturer shall clearly identify water-tight
joints on the pipe delivered to the Work site.
207-25.5.2 Fittings. Profile wall fittings include in-line joint fittings and branch or complimentary
assembly fittings. Fittings shall conform to the following:
a) Fittings shall not reduce or impair the overall integrity or function of the pipe.
b) Fittings shall not reduce the inside diameter of the pipe being joined by more than 1/2 inch (12.5
mm). Reducer fittings shall not reduce the cross-sectional area of the smaller size.
c) Fabricated fittings shall be welded on the interior and the exterior of all junctions.
d) Fittings shall conform to 207-25.4 unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
207-25.6 Manufacturing Facility Testing.
207-25.6.1 General. Pipe provided under this section shall be manufactured in a facility audited by
the AASHTO National Transportation Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP). The manufacturer shall
provide a Certificate of Compliance documenting the pipe was manufactured in accordance the
Specifications. A Certificate of Compliance shall be submitted for each delivery of pipe to the Work
site.
For testing purposes a production lot size shall consist of all pipe having the same lot marking
number, but shall not exceed a total of 50 lengths per day.
207-25.6.2 Pipe Stiffness. A minimum of 3 pipe specimens per production run shall be tested for
pipe stiffness (PS) in accordance with ASTM D2412 modified as follows:
a) The test specimen shall be a minimum of one diameter length.
b) Position the first specimen in the loading machine with an imaginary line connecting the two
seams formed by the corrugation mold (end view) parallel to the loading planes, when applicable.
The specimen shall lie flat on the plate within 1/8 inch (3 mm). The specimen may be
straightened by hand bending at room temperature to accomplish this. The first location shall be
used as a reference point for rotation and testing of the two other specimens. Rotate the other

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
186 Greenbook 2021

specimens 45 and 90 degrees, respectively, from the reference point. Each specimen shall be
tested in one position only.
c) The deflection indicator shall be readable and accurate to +/- 0.001 inches (+/- 0.02 mm).
d) The rate of head approach shall be 0.50 +/- 0.02 inch (12.5 +/- 0.5 mm)/minute.
207-25.6.3 Pipe Flattening. The specimens specified in 207-25.6.2 shall be flattened until the
vertical inside diameter is reduced by 20 percent. The rate of loading shall conform to 207-25.6.2. The
specimens shall not exhibit any cracking, splitting, or delamination. Wall buckling is indicated by
reverse curvature in the pipe wall accompanied by a decrease in load carrying ability of the pipe. Any
decrease or downward deviation in the pipe stiffness test curve shall be considered a wall buckling point.
207-25.6.4 Brittleness. Test pipe specimens shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D2444,
except 6 specimens shall be tested or 6 impacts shall be made on one specimen. A tup (type B) shall be
used, with a mass of 20 pounds (9 kg). The height of drop shall be 10 feet (3.0 m). A flat plate
specimen holder shall be used. Specimens shall be conditioned for 24 hours at a temperature of 73 +/-
3.60 degrees F (23 +/- 20 degrees C), and all tests shall be conducted within 60 seconds of removal from
this atmosphere. The center of the falling tup shall strike on a corrugation crown for all impacts.
207-25.6.5 Joint Integrity. Joint integrity shall be tested a minimum of once during each
production line run and tested in accordance with the following:
a) A sample of each fitting or coupling shall be assembled in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Use pipe samples at least 12 inches (300 mm) in length. Assemble a
specimen at least 21 inches (600 mm) in length with the connection at the center.
b) Load the connected pipe and fitting between parallel plates at the rate of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) per
minute until the vertical inside diameter is reduced by at least 20 percent of the nominal diameter
of the pipe.
c) Inspect for damage while at the specified deflection and after removal of the load.
d) Measure the maximum radial distance between pipe and fittings or between bell and spigot,
during test and after the load is removed.
207-25.6.6 Cell Classification. Cell classification of pipe and fittings shall conform to 207-25.2.
207-25.7 Marking. Pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked at intervals of 11.5 feet (3.5 m) or less.
Markings shall display the manufacturer’s name and/or trademark, nominal size, plant designation code,
and date of manufacture.
207-25.8 Pipe Acceptance or Rejection. Pipe shall be free of cracks, holes, delamination, foreign
inclusions, blisters, or other defects that would, due to their nature, degree or extent, have a deleterious
effect on pipe performance. Prior to installation, damaged pipe shall either be repaired or field cut to
remove the damaged portion in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 187

SECTION 208 - PIPE JOINT TYPES AND MATERIALS

208-1 GENERAL.
208-1.1 Material Designation. The type of pipe joint shall be as shown on the Plans. The
Engineer may require testing of the joint materials for compliance with these requirements prior to
delivery to the Work site.
208-1.2 Installation Time Limit. The Contractor shall retest within 60 Days prior to installation
any pipe gasket that is more than 180 Days old from the date of manufacture to ensure compliance with
the requirements of the Specifications. The Contractor shall not install any pipe gasket that is more than
2 years old from the date of manufacture.
208-2 JOINTS FOR CLAY PIPE.
208-2.1 General. Joints other than those specified below, made of approved materials and meeting
the chemical and bacteriological resistance requirements contained herein, may be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
208-2.2 Type “D” Joints (Synthetic Rubber Coupling with Corrosion-Resistant Shear Ring
for Plain-End Clay Pipe, 12-Inch (300 mm) Maximum).
208-2.2.1 General. The joint shall consist of 3 parts: a circular synthetic rubber sleeve of 2
stainless steel compression bands with stainless steel nut and bolt type tightening devices and an
injection molded acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS), polyethylene (PE), or polyvinylchloride (PVC)
shear ring.
208-2.2.2 Sealing Components. The compression bands shall be fabricated from AISI Type 316
stainless steel with stainless steel nut and bolt (any AISI series 300) type tightening devices and meeting
the requirements of ASTM A240. The sleeve shall be fabricated in a configuration approved by the
Engineer. It shall be made of a synthetic rubber molded to form a smooth surface, free of pits, cracks,
air marks, porosity, and air pockets.
208-2.2.3 Testing of the Synthetic Rubber Sealing Component. Test specimens that are exposed
to various chemical and bacteriological environments shall be conditioned in the same manner, both
before and after exposure, prior to testing.
a) Initial Physical Requirements. The initial physical requirements shall conform to the
requirements shown in Table 208-2.2.3 (A):

TABLE 208-2.2.3 (A)

ASTM Test
Property Value
Method No.
Tensile strength, at 73.4° ± 3.6°F (23° ± 2°C), psi (kPa), min. 1000 (6900) D412 (Die C)
Elongation at break, 73.4° ± 3.6°F (23° ± 2°C), %, min. 200 D412 (Die C)
Shore Durometer, Type A (1 sec. reading, min.) 60 D2240
Compression set (after exposure to 158° ± 3.6°F [70° ± 2°C], for 22 hours), % max. 20 D395 (Method B)
Water absorption (after immersion at 73.4° ± 1.8°F [23° ± 1°C] for 28 days), %, max. 4 D570

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
188 Greenbook 2021

b) Physical Requirements after Accelerated Aging. The physical requirements after accelerated
aging shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 208-2.2.3 (B).

TABLE 208-2.2.3 (B)

ASTM Test
Property Value
Method No.
Tensile strength (after exposure to 300 psi (2100 kPa) oxygen at 158° ± 1.8°F [70° ± 70 D572
1°C] for 96 hours), % of initial, min.
Elongation at break (after exposure to 300 psi (2100 kPa) oxygen at 158° ± 1.8°F 70 D572
[70° ± 1° C] for 96 hours), % of initial, min.
Ozone resistance (after exposure to 100 pphm ozone for 50 hours at 104° ± 2°F [40° No cracks or D1149
± 1°C] ) crazing

c) Chemical Resistance and Physical Testing. After exposure to the chemical solutions specified
in Table 211-2 (A), test specimens shall be tested in accordance with 211-2 and conform to the
physical requirements shown in Table 208-2.2.3 (C).

TABLE 208-2.2.3 (C)

ASTM Test
Property Value
Method No.
Tensile strength at 73.4° ± 3.6°F (23° ± 2°C), psi (kPa), min. 800 (5500) D412 (Die C)
Elongation at break at 73.4° ± 3.6°F (23° ± 2°C), % min. 150
Shore Durometer, Type A at 75° ± 5°F (23° ± 2°C) (1 second reading) point change, 15 D2240
max.
Compression set (after exposure to 158° ± 1.8°F [70° ± 1°C] for 22 hours), % max. D395 (Method B)
a. Chemical exposures 25
b. Bacteriological exposure (unconditioned surface dry) 30
Weight change, % max. (approx. specimen size 1.0 x 3.0 x 0.1 inch) (25 x 75 x 2.5 –1.0, +5.0
mm)

208-2.2.4 Circular Plastic Shear Ring Component and Testing Requirements. The plastic shear
ring shall be injection molded from an ABS, PE, or PVC resin meeting the requirements specified
below. The ABS shear ring material shall conform to 207-15.2. The PE shear ring shall conform to
207-19.2 except that the hydrostatic design and color requirements need not be satisfied and crack
resistance failure maximum percentage be zero.
The PVC shear ring shall conform to 207-17.2.2 and 207-17.4.1.
The shear rings shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color and free of cracks, holes, foreign
materials, blisters, or deleterious faults.
Markings on all shear rings shall indicate the name of the manufacturer and Type “D” joint.
208-2.2.5 Laboratory Test of Joint. An assembled joint shall provide sufficient resistance to shear
loading to allow a load of 150 pounds-force per inch (26.3 N/mm) of nominal diameter to be uniformly
applied over an arc of not less than 120 degrees and a longitudinal distance of 12 inches (300 mm)
immediately adjacent to one edge of the sleeve coupling. The assembled pipe shall rest on three
supports. A support shall be located at each extreme end of the assembly. The third support shall be
placed immediately adjacent to the coupling. The shear load shall be placed on the unsupported end of

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 189

the pipe, immediately adjacent to the coupling. There shall be no visible leakage when tested with an
internal hydrostatic pressure of 10 pounds per square inch (70 kPa) for 10 minutes. The joint including
the plastic shear ring for the 6-inch to 12-inch (150 mm to 300 mm) diameter pipe, inclusive, shall
exhibit sufficient flexibility when joined to allow a maximum deflection of 3 degrees in any direction.
The deflected joint shall show no visible leakage when subjected to the same shear load as indicated in
the previous paragraph and when tested under an internal hydrostatic pressure of 10 pounds per square
inch (70 kPa) for 10 minutes.
During these tests, the ends of the tested pipe shall be restrained only in the amount necessary to
prevent longitudinal movement. Upon completion of the above tests, the joint shall be disassembled and
if any component has failed, that joint will be rejected. Failures shall include, but not be limited to the
following: breaks, flange cracks, gouges, tears, and deformation beyond reuse.
208-2.2.6 Joint Acceptance. When all components of this joint meet the requirements as set forth
in these specifications and when one percent of the joints are successfully laboratory tested, then the
joints will be accepted.
208-2.3 Type “G” Joints (Polyurethane).
208-2.3.1 General. The Type “G” joint shall consist of polyurethane elastomer sealing components,
one bonded to the outside of the spigot and the other bonded to the inside of the socket. The sealing
components shall be shaped, sized, bonded, and cured to uniform hardness to form a tight seal of the
joint when it is assembled. The sealing components shall resist attack by bacteria and chemicals or
combinations of chemicals normally present in domestic or industrial waste sewage.
208-2.3.2 Polyurethane Sealing Components. Polyurethane sealing components shall conform to
the requirements shown in Table 208-2.3.2. The polyurethane sealing component material shall be
tested in accordance with 211-2. The number of samples to be tested shall be as specified in the Special
Provisions.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
190 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 208-2.3.2
Property Values1 Test Method and Conditions
Tensile strength, psi (kPa) min. 4125 (600) 2425 (350) ASTM D412 (Die C) 73.4 ± 3.6°F (23° ± 2°C)
Elongation, % min. 70 70 ASTM D412 (Die C) 73.4° ± 3.6°F (23° ±
2°C)
Compression set, % max. 3 3 ASTM D395, Method B, 24 hours 73.4° ±
3.6°F (23° ± 2°C)
Shore durometer Not less than value designated for the ASTM D2240, Type A, 5-second reading, 32°
joint design by the manufacturer to 80°F (0° to 27°C)
Water absorption, % max. (Weight gain) 3.5 3.5 ASTM D570, after immersion for 28 Days at
73.4° ± 1.8°F (23° ± 1°C)
Volatile loss, % max. (Weight loss) 1 1 After 28 Days in mechanical convection oven
at 150° ± 3°F (66° ± 2°C)
Adhesive strength, psi (kPa) min Before immersion in accordance with Note 2.
Original 2425 (350) 2425 (350) After immersion in water at 73.4° ± 3.6°F
(23° ± 2°C) in accordance with Note 2
Final 1725 (250) 1725 (250)
Chemical resistance (See Note 3) After exposure to each of the chemical
Weight change, % max. 1.5 1.5 environments for 112 Days
as described in Note 3
Tensile strength, psi (kPa) 2975 (430) 1800 (260)
Shore durometer, change max. ± 15 ± 15
Compression set, % max. 5 5
Bacteriological resistance (See Note 3) After exposure to bacteriological environment
Weight change, % max. 2 2 for 112 Days as described in Note 3.
Tensile strength, psi (kPa) min. 3450 (500) 2000 (290)
Shore Durometer
Before reconditioning, loss max. 15 15
After reconditioning, change max. 5 5
Compression set
Before reconditioning, % max. 3 3
After reconditioning, % max. 3 3
1. The configuration of the jointing system determines the necessary physical properties of the polyurethane joint material. The columns
of values in this table represent properties of polyurethane that, in conjunction with specific joint configurations, will provide
functionally equal acceptable jointing systems. The values for a single product shall be all from one of the columns.
2. Adhesion test specimens shall be clay blocks 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) thick and 1 inch square (25 mm x 25 mm), of the same composition
of materials and fired at the same vitrifying temperatures as sewer pipe.
The clay block shall be placed flat in the center of a mold 7 inches (175 mm) long, 1 inch (25 mm) wide, and 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) deep.
The edges of the clay block at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the form shall be coated with the adhesive and the form on each
side of the block shall be filled to a depth of approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) with the sealing component compound. Curing of this
last specimen shall simulate the curing process at the pipe manufacturing plant.
At the end of the immersion period, samples shall be removed, surface dried, and immediately pulled in tension at the rate of 20 inches
(500 mm) per minute to determine the final tensile strength of the bonded interfaces. The specimens retained for controls shall be
pulled at the same time to determine the original strength of the bonded interfaces.
3. Exposure environments for bacteriological and chemical resistance tests per Table 211-2 (A). At the end of the exposure period,
specimens shall be washed and reconditioned before testing.

208-2.3.3 Type “G” Joint Acceptance Tests. Joint tests shall be performed in accordance with
ASTM C425. The Engineer may perform additional acceptance tests on one joint for each 100 pipes in a
lot (or fraction of a lot) for each size. For this additional testing the pipe joints shall not leak when
subjected to the shear load test described in ASTM C425, except that the internal hydrostatic pressure
shall be 10 pounds per square inch (70 kPa) for pipe sizes up to 18 inches (450 mm) and 5 pounds per
square inch (35 kPa) for pipe sizes 21 inches (525 mm) and larger before and after being deflected the
distances shown in Table 208-2.3.3 at the sealing components of the joint for a period of 10 minutes.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 191

TABLE 208-2.3.3
Nominal Pipe Size Deflection
inches (mm) inches (mm)
4 - 10 (100 - 250) 5/8 (16)
12 - 21 (300 - 525) 3/4 (19)
24 - 30 (600 - 750) 7/8 (22)
33 - 42 (825 - 1050) 1 (25)

If one of the selected joints fails the test, the lot shall be rejected unless 2 additional joints selected
from the lot pass the test.
208-3 GASKETS FOR CONCRETE PIPE. Unless otherwise specified, gaskets shall be
manufactured from a synthetic elastomer. The compound shall contain not less than 50 percent by
volume of first-grade synthetic rubber. The remainder of the compound shall consist of pulverized
fillers free of rubber substitutes, reclaimed rubber, and deleterious substances. The installation of
gaskets shall conform to 208-1.2.
Gaskets shall be extruded or molded and cured in such a manner as to be dense, homogeneous and
of smooth surface, free of pitting, blisters, porosity and other imperfections. The tolerance for any
diameter or profile dimension measured at any cross section shall be ± 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish test samples of gaskets from each batch
used in the work. Gasket material shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 208-3.

TABLE 208-3
Property Value ASTM Test Method
1500
Tensile strength, psi (MPa) min. D412
(10.3)
Elongation at break (% min.) 350 D412
1
Shore durometer, Type A (Pipe manufacturer shall select value suitable for type of joint). 40 to 65 D2240
Compression set (constant deflection) max. % of original deflection. 16 D395 Method B
Tensile strength after oven aging (96 hours, 158°F [70°C] ) % of tensile strength before
80 D573
aging.
Increase in Shore durometer hardness after oven aging. Maximum increase over original
10 D2240
Shore durometer.
Physical Requirements after exposure to ozone concentration (50 pphm. 72 hours, 104°F No
D1149
[40°C], 20% extension). Cracks
1. This applies only to the sealing component of the gasket.

No more than one splice will be permitted in a gasket. A splice shall be made by applying a suitable
cement to the ends and vulcanizing the splice in a full mold. The splice shall show no separation when
subjected to the following tests:
a) Elongation Test. The part of the gasket which includes the splice shall withstand 100 percent
elongation with no visible separation of the splice. While in the stretched position, the gasket
shall be rotated in the spliced area a minimum of 180 degrees in each direction in order to inspect
for separation.
b) Bend Test. The portion of the unstretched gasket containing the splice shall be wrapped a
minimum of 180 degrees and a maximum of 270 degrees around a rod of a diameter equal to the
cross section diameter of the gasket.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
192 Greenbook 2021

208-4 GASKETS FOR THERMOPLASTIC PIPE. Gaskets shall be manufactured from a

synthetic elastomer conforming to the requirements of 208-3. The installation of gaskets shall conform
to 208-1.2.
208-5 TYPE “Z” JOINT.
208-5.1 General. Except as modified herein, Type “Z” Joints shall conform to Type “D” Joints per
208-2.2. This joint shall be used as a field closure coupling, repair coupling, or outside diameter
transition coupling for identical or dissimilar pipe materials for gravity sewers and drains. The joint
shall be applied to 4-inch through 12-inch (100 mm through 300 mm) diameter pipe sizes only.
208-5.2 Components. The joint shall consist of three components as follows:
a) A circular synthetic rubber sleeve meeting the physical, chemical and bacteriological
requirements of the Type “D” Joint per 208-2.2.2. The sleeve shall conform to 208-1.2.
b) Two stainless steel compression bands (AISI 316) with stainless steel nut and bolt (any AISI
Series 300) type tightening devices and meeting the requirements of ASTM A240.
c) A stainless steel shear band shall wrap around the joint a minimum of 380 degrees. Welded to
the shear band shall be two stainless steel nut and bolt tightening devices or worm drive
tightening devices fabricated from any 300 Series stainless steel and meeting the requirements of
the compression bands above. The minimum shear band thickness shall be 0.012 inches (0.30
mm). Minimum shear band width shall be 2.120 inches (54.0 mm) for 4-inch and 6-inch (100
mm and 150 mm) diameter pipe sizes and 2.437 inches (62.0 mm) for 8-inch through 12-inch
(200 mm through 300 mm) diameter pipe sizes.
208-5.3 OD Transitions. Pipe joints where the pipe outside diameters have a differential of 3/8
inch (9 mm) or greater shall require an outside diameter transition coupling. Outside diameter transition
coupling shall be comprised of the components per 208-5.2 plus a synthetic rubber bushing meeting the
requirements of 208-2.2.2. The bushing shall compensate for the differential in pipe Outside Diameters.
208-5.4 Testing Requirements. The Type “Z” Joint, with or without bushing, shall meet the test
requirements for Type “D” Joints per 208-2.2.4.
208-6 PIPE TO MANHOLE FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS.
208-6.1 General. The joint shall consist of a flexible connector designed to produce a positive
watertight connection for pipes entering precast manholes and other concrete structures.
208-6.1.1 Seal. The connector shall be in accordance with ASTM C923/C923M so that a positive
seal is made between the connector and the manhole wall and between the connector and the pipe. The
seal between the connector and the manhole wall may be made by either mechanical means or by casting
the connector integrally with the manhole wall. The seal between the connector and the pipe may be
made by mechanical means or by compression of the resilient material against the outside of the pipe.
208-6.1.2 Parameters. The connector shall withstand 23 feet (10 psi) (7.1 m (70 kPa)) of hydrostatic
pressure and be capable of sustaining an axial deflection of at least 7 degrees in any direction. The test
methods and requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM C923/C923M, Section 7.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 193

208-6.2 Materials. The gaskets shall be manufactured from a synthetic elastomer and shall contain
not less than 50 percent by volume of first-grade synthetic rubber. All rubber gaskets shall be either
molded or extruded and cured in such a manner that any cross-section shall be dense, homogeneous, and
free of porosity blisters, pitting, and other imperfections. The gaskets shall comply with the physical
requirements prescribed by ASTM C923/C923M Table 1 when tested in accordance with the referenced
ASTM. However, the chemical resistance shall be tested in accordance with 211-2 and meet the weight
change per Table 210-2.4.1. Metal components shall be fabricated from AISI Type 316 stainless steel
for all bands, and the nut and bolt shall be AISI Type 305 stainless steel. Gaskets shall conform with the
installation time requirements in 208-1.2.
208-6.3 Performance Test Requirements. A performance test of the connector to be used shall
be made at least once when the manhole producer begins using a pipe to manhole connector system.
The test methods and requirements shall be made in accordance with ASTM C923/C923M, Section 7.
The connector shall be marked clearly by the manufacturer with his trade name and size designation or
part number. This shall be visible on the gasket when installed in the manhole.
208-6.4 Plant Fabrication Method. The flexible connector shall be installed in accordance with
the specific instructions of the manufacturer.
208-6.5 Installation Instructions. The manhole manufacturer shall provide installation
instructions to the Contractor. The connector shall have all foreign matter removed and shall be
inspected to ensure that there are no defects in the rubber or splice.

SECTION 209 – PRESSURE PIPE

209-1 IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS.

209-1.1 Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP).
209-1.1.1 General. This subsection specifies ductile iron pipe used for pressure piping applications
for water and recycled water pressure pipes and for sewage force mains.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
194 Greenbook 2021

209-1.1.2 Materials. Unless otherwise specified, ductile iron pipe shall conform to the following:

TABLE 209-1.1.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Pipe Manufacturing Standards Conform to AWWA C151/ANSI 21.50 for 3”-64” (75 mm - 1600 mm) pipe.
Design Standards Conform to AWWA C150/ANSI A21.50 and AWWA M41.
NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe.
Material Ductile iron.
Size As shown on the Plans.
Minimum Wall Thickness 3”-12” (75 mm - 300 mm) pipe Pressure Class 350.
14”-36” (350 mm - 900 mm) pipe Pressure Class 250.
42”-64” (1050 mm -1600 mm) pipe Pressure Class 200.
Pipe with grooved couplings Thickness Class 53.
Markings Conform to AWWA C151 Section 4.6.
Lengths 18’ or 20’ (5.5 m or 6.1 m) lengths per AWWA C151/ANSI A21.51.
Shorter lengths may be used to facilitate curves or fit horizontal or vertical alignment.
Interior Lining and Buried Exterior Coatings Shop coat with one prime coat of asphaltic coating approximately 1 mil (25 µm) thick per AWWA C151.
Exterior Coating Exterior Coatings on Pipe Conform to 212-12.
Above Ground and in
Vaults
Cement-Mortar Interior Pipe Size Lining Thickness
Lining 3”-12” (75 mm - 300 mm) pipe 1/8” (3 mm)
(AWWA C104 “Double 14”-24” (350 mm -0600 mm) pipe 3/16” (5 mm)
Thickness”) 30”-64” (900 mm - 1600 mm) pipe 1/4” (6 mm)
Conform to AWWA C104 using Type II cement.
Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Conform to 212-12.
Interior Lining where shown
on the Plans
Ceramic Epoxy Interior Amine cured novalac epoxy lining.
Lining, where shown on the Permeability rating of 0.00.
Plans Abrasion resistance < 4 mils (100 µm) loss after 1,000,000 cycles on ± 22.5º sliding aggregate slurry
abrasion tester using a sharp natural siliceous gravel with particle size between 2 mm and 10 mm.
Joints Standard Push-on Style AWWA C111/ANSI 21.11.
Mechanical Joint AWWA C111/ANSI 21.11.
Restrained Style Special push-on type joint providing longitudinal restraint to full test pressure without relying on thrust
block.
Boltless, restrained push-on joint design with positive axial locking restrained system capable of
deflection after assembly.
Use one type of restrained joint exclusively for all Work.
Flanged Joint Conform to AWWA C110/ANSI A21.10.
Flanged Joint Threaded Conform to AWWA C115/ANSI A21.15.
Flanges
Bell Joint Gaskets Material Conform to AWWA C111/ANSI A21.11.
Vulcanized styrene butadiene rubber (SBR).
Material for Hydrocarbon NBR (Nitrile) (acrylonitrile butadiene), FLUOREL, or FKM (Viton) (fluorocarbon).
Applications and
Contaminated Soils
Gasket Age < 180 Days old or < 2 years old but retested < 60 Days prior to installation.
Flange Gaskets Material 212-2.7.
Fittings Material Ductile iron.
Standards Conform to AWWA C110/ANSI 21.10 or AWWA C153/ANSI A21.53.
Style Push-on (standard) or restrained joint (as shown).
Marking Cast letters “DI” or “DUCTILE” into fittings, unless otherwise specified.
Cast “AWWA C110” or “AWWA C153” depending on thickness.
Exterior Coatings Use same coating as adjacent pipe, as specified above.
Interior Linings Use same lining as adjacent pipe, as specified above.
Ductile Iron Pipe Material Ductile iron.
Joint Restraints Style Gripping wedge
Design Pressure Rating 3”-16” (75 mm - 400 mm) 350 psi (2.4 MPa)
18”-64” (450 mm -1600 mm) 250 psi (1.7 MPa)
Pipe Shop Coat Prime Coat 12 mils (300 µm) MDFT.
Polyethylene PE Polyethylene Film and Tape Conform to 212-12.1.1.
Encasement Color per 212-12.2.
Alternate to Pipe Finish Coat 15 mils (375 µm) MDFT field-applied bitumastic coating.
Polyethylene
Encasement

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 195

209-2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS.

209-2.1 General. This subsection specifies steel pipe and fittings up to 64-inch (1600 mm) diameter
for the transmission and distribution of raw, potable, or recycled water under pressure. Steel pipe shall
be of the size, type, and cylinder wall thickness or pressure class shown on the Plans or specified in the
Special Provisions.
209-2.2 Fabricated Steel Pipe and Fittings.
209-2.2.1 Materials. Unless otherwise specified, fabricated steel pipe shall conform to the following:

TABLE 209-2.2.1
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Pipe Manufacturing Butt or offset-butt electrically welded straight or spiral-seam steel cylinders, shop
Standards fabricated from coil or plates and conforming to AWWA C200 for pipe 6” (150 mm)
and larger.
4” (100 mm) pipe when required shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C200.
Design Standards Conform to AWWA M11.
NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe.
Material Steel plates or sheets used to manufacture fabricated steel pipe shall conform to the
physical and chemical requirements for sheet steel listed in AWWA C200 Table 1.
Size As shown on the Plans.
Net inside diameter after interior lining shall equal or exceed nominal pipe diameter with
tolerance of minus 1/4” (6 mm).
Minimum Wall Where the Plans do not show thickness, submit design and supporting calculations
Thickness prepared by the manufacturer in accordance with AWWA M11 using a maximum
design working stress of 1/2 the yield stress for the grade of steel used in pipe
fabrication. Compute wall thickness using pressure equal to 150 psi (1.0 MPa) or
the design pressure shown on the Plans, whichever is greater.
No pipe 4” (100 mm) and larger outside buildings or vaults shall have a wall thickness
less than 14-gauge (1.9 mm).
No pipe 4” (100 mm) and larger inside buildings or vaults shall have a wall thickness
less than 3/8” (9.5 mm).
Markings Mark each special and each length of straight pipe at bell end to identify:
• Manufacturer’s name or mark
• Type of steel
• Design pressure
• Diameter and weight of pipe or special
• Proper location of pipe or special by reference to layout schedule
Lengths Maximum pipe length of 42’ (13 m). Shorter lengths may be used to facilitate curves or
fit horizontal or vertical alignment.
Lining and Cement-Mortar Interior Conform to AWWA C205 and AWWA C602 using Type II/V cement.
Exterior Lining and Exterior Trim lining as necessary to allow full operation of butterfly or check valves at
Coating Coating connections to steel pipe.
(Required on Line exposed portions of pipe interior with hand-applied epoxy conforming to 212-12.
exposed steel 3/4” (19 mm) minimum coating thickness unless otherwise shown or soil is identified as
surfaces and corrosive.
ring joints) Trim coating 6” to 12” (150 mm to 300 mm) above grade on spools penetrating to
daylight or vault interiors.
Cold-Applied Tape Conform to AWWA C209 for exterior of specials, connections, and fittings.
Exterior Coatings Conform to AWWA C214 for steel pipeline exteriors.
Liquid Epoxy Interior Conform to AWWA C210 and 212-12.
Lining and Exterior
Coating of Above-
Ground Pipe
Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Conform to AWWA C213 and 212-12.
Interior Lining and
Exterior Coating of
Above-Ground Pipe
Extruded Polyolefin Conform to AWWA C215 for extruded coatings.
Exterior Coatings Conform to AWWA C216 for heat-shrinkable cross-linked coatings.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
196 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 209-2.2.1 (Continued)

Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Joints Bell-and-Spigot Ends Conform to AWWA C200 Section 4.13.
with Rubber Gaskets Design for maximum interior pipe lining gap joint of 1/2” (12.5 mm) after joint assembly,
measured from ends of lining of pipe sections being joined.
Ends Prepared for Conform to AWWA C200 Section 4.13.
Mechanical-Coupled Square cut or beveled with no burrs. Outside surfaces where coupling seats shall be
Field Joints free of indentations, projections, or roll marks to ensure watertight seal. Pipe ends
shall have tolerances within limits required by mechanical coupling manufacturer.
Lap Joints for Field Conform to AWWA C200 Section 4.13.
Welding Design for maximum interior pipe lining gap joint of 1/2” (12.5 mm) after joint assembly,
measured from ends of interior lining of pipe sections being joined.
Plain Ends with Butt Conform to AWWA C200 Section 4.13.
Straps for Field Welding Design for maximum interior pipe lining gap joint of 1/2” (12.5 mm) after joint assembly,
measured from ends of interior lining of pipe sections being joined.
For pipe less than 24” (600 mm) nominal diameter, furnish butt straps with a 4” (100
mm) diameter hand hole, complete with screwed cap or plug, suitable for use in
“pointing” the interior joint lining after field installation of the joint.
Flanged Joint Conform to AWWA C207.
Faced and dimensioned in accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.5 for the pressure class
shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Bell Joint Material Conform to AWWA C300 Section 4.4.11 and 4.5.4.
Gaskets Vulcanized styrene butadiene rubber (SBR).
Material for NBR (Nitrile) (acrylonitrile butadiene), FLUOREL or FKM (Viton) (fluorocarbon).
Hydrocarbon
Applications and
Contaminated Soils
Gasket Age < 180 Days old or
< 2 years old but retested < 60 Days prior to installation

Flange Material 212-2.7.

Gaskets
Fittings Material Same steel as pipe.
Standards Conform to AWWA C208.
Exterior Coatings Use same coating as adjacent pipe, as specified above.
Interior Linings Use same lining as adjacent pipe, as specified above.

209-2.2.2 Submittals. Prior to fabricating pipe, the Contractor shall submit, in accordance with 3-
8.3, Shop Drawings for the fabrication of pipe, pipe specials, and joint details. The Contractor shall also
submit a schedule of pipe marks accompanied by a plan showing the field location of each mark. Pipe
shall be marked using the coordinate system or stationing shown on the Plans.
The Contractor shall also submit a certified laboratory report stating the type of steel, and the
physical and chemical properties for each heat number of the steel used in fabricating the pipe.
The Contractor shall submit documentation showing all field welders are certified to perform the
required work in accordance with AWS D1.1.
209-2.2.3 Factory Testing. After fabrication, but prior to the application of the specified interior
lining and exterior coating, straight pipe cylinders of all sizes shall be successfully hydrostatically tested
to 75 percent of the specified minimum yield point of the steel sheets or plates used to manufacture the
pipe in accordance with Section 5.25 of AWWA C200.
All special pipe sections not fabricated from tested pipe shall be hydrostatically tested after
specification as specified above for straight pipe. Sections that cannot be tested in a testing machine may
be prepared for testing by welding a head on the open ends, or as may otherwise be approved by the
Engineer. After testing, the ends shall be reconditioned.
209-2.2.4 Joints. Laying of bell-and-spigot, rubber-gasket-joint pipe on curved alignment using
unsymmetrical closure of spigot into bell will be permitted only if a joint qualification test is
successfully conducted with the joint aligned in this condition. The amount of “pull” and the method of

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 197

achieving the “pull” shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendation, but the deviation from the
normal interior lining gap at the joint shall not exceed 3/4 inch (19 mm) “pull” on the outside of the
curve and a 1/4 inch (6 mm) “push” on the inside of the curve with no “push” to be permitted until the
full 3/4 inch (19 mm) “pull” has been used.
Where the allowable pipe deflection using unsymmetrical joint closure is insufficient to fit the
curved alignment of the pipe, as shown on the Plans, special beveled-end pipe sections or multiple-piece
bends shall be fabricated. In no case shall the pipe bell or spigot composing the joint between sections of
pipe be field-cut or altered in any manner.
209-2.2.5 Special Sections. Special sections, including curves, tees, branches, manifolds, reducers,
and enlargers, shall be fabricated as shown from sections of previously lined and coated straight pipe of
the kind being furnished under the Contract, or of specially rolled, lined, and coated pipe for fittings to
conform to the Work site conditions shown on the Plans.
Bends shall be required on curves having a shorter radius than can be accommodated by beveled pipe
ends or by pushing and pulling joints.
The courses of special sections shall be joined by butt welding after which the pipe protective
interior lining and exterior coating shall be repaired to a like condition as existed on the previously lined
and coated straight sections from which the special was fabricated.
209-2.2.6 Welding. Factory welding of fabricated steel pipe shall conform to AWWA C200 Section
4.11. Field welding shall conform to AWWA C206.
Patching of pipe where test specimens have been taken will not be permitted.
If specified in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall submit certified laboratory reports stating
the results of the required welding tests.
209-2.3 Mill-Type Steel Pipe.
209-2.3.1 Materials. Unless otherwise specified, mill-type steel pipe shall conform to the following:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
198 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 209-2.3.1
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Pipe Manufacturing Furnace-welded, electrically welded or seamless pipe conforming to AWWA
Standards C200 for pipe 6” (150 mm) and larger or ANSI B36.10 for pipe smaller than
6” (150 mm) or for pipe with wall thickness specified by strength or schedule
on the Plans.
Design Standards Conform to AWWA M11.
NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe.
Material ASTM A53 Grade A or B, ASTM A134 (steel plate per ASTM A283 Grades C or
D or A36), ASTM A135, or ASTM A139.
Size As shown on the Plans.
Conform to dimensional tolerances of AWWA C200 for pipe ≥ 6” (150 mm)
identified on the Plans by class, gauge or decimal wall thickness.
Conform to ANSI B36.10 for pipe < 6” (150 mm) or for pipe specified on the
Plans by strength or wall-thickness schedule.
Minimum Wall Where the Plans do not show thickness, submit design and supporting
Thickness calculations prepared by the manufacturer in accordance with AWWA M11
using a maximum design working stress of 1/2 the yield stress for the grade
of steel used in pipe fabrication. Compute wall thickness using pressure
equal to 150 psi (1.0 MPa) or the design pressure shown on the Plans,
whichever is greater.
No pipe 4” (100 mm) and larger outside buildings or vaults shall have a wall
thickness less than 14-gauge (1.9 mm).
No pipe 4” (100 mm) and larger inside buildings or vaults shall have a wall
thickness less than 3/8” (9.5 mm).
Markings Mark each special and each length of straight pipe at bell end to identify:
• Manufacturer’s name or mark
• Type of steel
• Design pressure
• Diameter and weight of pipe or special
• Proper location of pipe or special by reference to layout schedule
Lengths Furnish in single random lengths, double random lengths, or in specified cut
lengths.
For single random lengths, average length shall not be less than 17.5’ (5.3 m)
and no piece shall be shorter than 9’ (2.7 m).
For double random lengths average length shall not be less than 35’ (10.7 m),
not less than 10% of pieces shall be shorter than 26.25’ (8.0 m) and no
piece shall be shorter than 14’ (2.7 m).
For specified cut lengths, the actual pipe length shall not vary from the specified
length by more than 1/8” (3 mm).
Interior Lining Cement-Mortar Conform to AWWA C205 and AWWA C602 using Type II/V cement.
and Exterior Interior Lining and Trim lining as necessary to allow full operation of butterfly or check valves at
Coating Exterior Coating connections to steel pipe.
(Required on Line exposed portions of pipe interior with hand-applied epoxy conforming to
exposed steel 212-12.
surfaces and ring 3/4” (19 mm) min coating thickness unless otherwise shown or soil is identified
joints) as corrosive.
Trim coating 6” to 12” (150 mm to 300 mm) above grade on spools penetrating
to daylight or vault interiors.
Cold-Applied Tape Conform to AWWA C209 for the exterior of specials, connections, and fittings.
Exterior Coatings Conform to AWWA C214 for steel pipeline coatings.
Liquid Epoxy Interior Conform to AWWA C210 and 212-12.
Lining and Exterior
Coating of Above-
Ground Pipe
Fusion-Bonded Conform to AWWA C213 and 212-12.
Epoxy Interior Lining
and Exterior Coating
of Above-Ground
Pipe
Extruded Polyolefin Conform to AWWA C215 for extruded coatings.
Exterior Coatings Conform to AWWA C216 for heat-shrinkable cross-linked coatings.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 199

TABLE 209-2.3.1 (Continued)

Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Joints Ends Prepared for Conform to AWWA C200 Section 4.13.
Mechanical-Coupled Square cut or beveled with no burrs. Outside surfaces where coupling seats
Field Joints shall be free of indentations, projections, or roll marks to ensure watertight
seal. Pipe ends shall have tolerances within limits required by the
mechanical coupling manufacturer.
Field-Butt-Welded Pipe with wall thickness 15/64” (6.0 mm) or greater, intended for field butt
Joints welding. Bevel pipe on outside, inside or both sides as shown or specified.
Bevel angle shall be 30 to 35 degrees measured from plane perpendicular
to pipe axis. Width of root face at pipe end shall be 1/32” to 3/32” (0.8 mm-
2.3 mm)
Flanged Joint Forged steel conforming to ASTM A181 Faced and dimensioned in accordance
with ASME/ANSI B16.5 for the pressure class shown on the Plans or
specified in the Special Provisions.
Threads for screwed flanges and companion pipe ends shall conform to
ASME/ANSI B1.20.1.
Pipe ends for welding neck flanges shall be beveled.
Flange Gaskets Material 212-2.7.
Fittings Material Same steel as pipe.
Standards Manufacture from mill-type steel pipe in accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.9.
Exterior Coatings Use same coating as adjacent pipe, as specified above.
Interior Linings Use same lining as adjacent pipe, as specified above.

209-2.3.2 Submittals. If specified in the Special Provisions, prior to fabricating pipe, the Contractor
shall submit, in accordance with 3-8.4, a certified laboratory report stating the type of steel, and the
physical and chemical properties for each heat number of the steel used in fabricating the pipe.
209-2.3.3 Factory Testing. After fabrication, but prior to the application of the specified interior
lining and exterior coating, straight pipe cylinders of all sizes shall be successfully hydrostatically tested
to 1.5 times the test pressure shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
209-2.3.4 Welding. Factory welding of mill steel pipe shall conform to AWWA C200 Section 4.11.
Field welding shall conform to AWWA C206.
Patching of pipe where test specimens have been taken will not be permitted.
If specified in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall submit certified laboratory reports stating
the results of the required welding tests.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
200 Greenbook 2021

209-2.4 Stainless Steel Water Pipe.

209-2.4.1 Materials. Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel pipe shall conform to the following:

TABLE 209-2.4.1
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Pipe Manufacturing Furnace-welded, electrically welded or seamless pipe conforming to AWWA 220 or
Standards ASTM A312 (pipe ≤ 10” (250 mm)), or ASTM A409 or ASTM A778 (pipe ≥ 12”
(300 mm)).
Design Standards Conform to AWWA M11.
NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe.
Material Stainless Steel SAE Type 316L unless otherwise specified.
Size As shown on the Plans.
Conform to dimensional tolerances of AWWA C200 for pipe ≥ 6” (150 mm) specified
on the Plans by class, gauge or decimal wall thickness.
Conform to ANSI B36.10 for pipe < 6” (150 mm) or for pipe specified on the Plans by
strength or wall thickness schedule.
Minimum Wall Where the Plans do not show thickness, submit design and supporting calculations
Thickness prepared by the manufacturer in accordance with AWWA M11 using a maximum
design working stress of 1/2 the yield stress for the grade of steel used in pipe
fabrication. Compute wall thickness using pressure equal to 150 psi (1.0 MPa) or
the design pressure shown on the Plans, whichever is greater.
No pipe 4” (100 mm) and larger outside buildings or vaults shall have a wall thickness
less than 14-gauge (1.9 mm).
No pipe 4” (100 mm) and larger inside buildings or vaults shall have a wall thickness
less than 3/8” (9.5 mm).
Markings Mark each special and each length of straight pipe at bell end to identify:
• Manufacturer’s name or mark
• Type of steel
• Design pressure
• Diameter and weight of pipe or special
• Proper location of pipe or special by reference to layout schedule
Lengths Furnish in single random lengths, double random lengths, or in specified cut lengths.
For single random lengths, average length shall not be less than 17.5’ (5.3 m) and no
piece shall be shorter than 9’ (2.7 m).
For double random lengths average length shall not be less than 35’ (10.7 m), not
less than 10% of pieces shall be shorter than 26.25’ (8.0 m) and no piece shall
be shorter than 14’ (2.7 m).
For specified cut lengths, the actual pipe length shall not vary from the specified
length by more than 1/8” (3 mm).
Joints Ends Prepared for Conform to AWWA C220 Section 4.13.
Mechanical-Coupled Square cut or beveled with no burrs. Outside surfaces where coupling seats shall be
Field Joints free of indentations, projections, or roll marks to ensure watertight seal. Pipe
ends shall have tolerances within limits required by the mechanical coupling
manufacturer.
Field-Butt-Welded Pipe with wall thickness 15/64” (6.0 mm) or greater, intended for field butt welding.
Joints Bevel pipe on outside, inside or both sides as shown or specified. Bevel angle
shall be 30 to 35 degrees measured from plane perpendicular to pipe axis. Width
of root face at pipe end shall be 1/32” to 3/32” (0.8 mm-2.3 mm).
Flanged Joint Forged steel conforming to ASTM A181 faced and dimensioned in accordance with
ASME/ANSI B16.5 for the pressure class shown on the Plans or specified in the
Special Provisions.
Threads for screwed flanges and companion pipe ends shall conform to ASME/ANSI
B1.20.1.
Pipe ends for welding neck flanges shall be beveled.
Flange Gaskets Material 212-2.7.
Fittings Material Same steel as pipe.
Standards Manufacture from mill-type steel pipe in accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.9.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 201

209-2.4.2 Submittals. If specified in the Special Provisions, prior to fabricating pipe, the Contractor
shall, in accordance with 3-8.4, submit a certified laboratory report stating the type of steel, and the
physical and chemical properties for each heat number of the stainless steel used in fabricating the pipe.
209-2.4.3 Factory Testing. After fabrication, straight pipe cylinders of all sizes shall be
successfully hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times the test pressure shown on the Plans or specified in
the Special Provisions.
Special sections manufactured from previously tested pipe need not be hydrostatically tested but any
welds not previously hydrostatically tested shall be tested by the air-soap or dye-check method,
209-2.4.4 Welding. Factory welding of mill-type steel pipe shall conform to AWWA C220 Section
4.4. Field welding shall conform to applicable AWS/ANSI standards.
Patching of pipe where test specimens have been taken will not be permitted.
If specified in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall submit certified laboratory reports stating
the results of the required welding tests.
209-2.5 Pipe End Preparation for Lined and Coated Pipe. Pipe interior linings and exterior
coatings shall be held back from the socket and spigot ends in accordance with the manufacturer’s
standard practices.
Exterior coatings shall be held back from the ends of all butt-strap, mechanical coupling, and flanged
joint pipe a sufficient distance to permit field assembly of joints.
Interior linings shall terminate at pipe ends, unless otherwise specified or where necessary to
accommodate free motion of butterfly or check valve discs.
Non-coated or unlined surfaces shall be cleaned and covered with a brush coat of suitable NSF-61
certified rust preventative material compatible with field-applied finish interior lining and exterior
coating materials.
209-3 CONCRETE PRESSURE PIPE.
209-3.1 General. This subsection specifies concrete cylinder pipe and reinforced concrete pipe up to
64-inch (1600 mm) diameter for the transmission and distribution of raw, potable, or recycled water, or
sewage under pressure. Concrete pressure pipe shall be of the size, type, and cylinder wall thickness or
pressure class shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
209-3.2 Materials. Unless otherwise specified, concrete pressure pipe shall conform to the following:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
202 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 209-3.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Pipe Standards Butt or offset-butt electrically welded straight or spiral-seam steel cylinders, shop fabricated from plates
and conforming to AWWA C300 for pipe ≥ 30” (750 mm) or AWWA C301 for pipe ≥ 16” (400 mm)
or AWWA C303 for pipe ≥ 10” (250 mm).
Reinforced concrete non-cylinder type pipe shall conform to AWWA C302 for pipe ≥ 12” (300 mm).
Design Standards Conform to AWWA C304 and AWWA M9
NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe
Material Cement – ASTM C150 Type II/V
Steel plates, sheets, and reinforcement used to manufacture concrete pressure pipe shall conform to
requirements for steel shown in applicable AWWA standard.
Size As shown on the Plans.
Net inside diameter after interior lining shall equal or exceed nominal pipe diameter with tolerance of
minus 1/4” (6 mm).
Minimum Wall Thickness Where the Plans do not show thickness, or reinforcing, submit design and supporting calculations
prepared by the manufacturer in accordance with AWWA M9 and AWWA C304.
Compute wall thickness and reinforcing requirements using maximum design working stress of 1/2 the
yield stress for the grades of steel used in pipe fabrication. Compute wall thickness and
reinforcement requirements using the design pressure shown on the Plans.
No pipe 4” (100 mm) and larger outside buildings or vaults shall have a wall thickness less than 14-
gauge (1.9 mm).
No pipe 4” (100 mm) and larger inside buildings or vaults shall have a wall thickness less than 3/8” (9.5
mm).
Markings Mark each special and each length of straight pipe at bell end to identify:
• Manufacturer’s name or mark
• Type of steel and concrete
• Design pressure
• Diameter and weight of pipe or special
• Proper location of pipe or special by reference to layout schedule
Lengths Maximum pipe length of 42’ (13 m). Shorter lengths may be used to facilitate curves or fit horizontal or
vertical alignment.
Interior Lining and Liquid Epoxy Interior Conform to AWWA C210 and 212-12.
Exterior Coating Lining and Exterior
(Required on all Coating of Exposed
exposed steel Steel on Pipe
surfaces and ring Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Conform to AWWA C213 and 212-12.
joints) Interior Lining and
Exterior Coating of
Exposed Steel on Pipe
Joints Bell-and-Spigot Ends Conform to AWWA C300, C301, C302, or C303 as applicable. Design for maximum interior pipe
with Rubber Gaskets interior lining gap joint of 1/2” (12.5 mm) after joint assembly, measured from ends of interior lining
of pipe sections being joined.
Ends Prepared for Conform to AWWA C300, C301, or C303 as applicable. Cylinders shall be square cut or beveled with
Mechanical-Coupled no burrs. Outside surfaces where coupling seats shall be free of indentations, projections, or roll
Field Joints marks to ensure watertight seal. Pipe ends shall have tolerances within limits required by the
mechanical coupling manufacturer.
Lap Joints for Field Conform to AWWA C300, C301, or C303 as applicable. Design for maximum interior pipe lining gap
Welding joint of 1/2” (12.5 mm) after joint assembly, measured from ends of interior lining of pipe sections
being joined.
Plain Ends with Butt Conform to AWWA C300, C301, or C303 as applicable. Design for maximum interior pipe lining gap
Straps for Field Welding joint of 1/2” (12.5 mm) after joint assembly, measured from ends of interior lining of pipe sections
being joined.
For pipe less than 24” (600 mm) nominal diameter, furnish butt straps with a 4” (100 mm) diameter
hand hole, complete with screwed cap or plug, suitable for use in “pointing” the interior joint lining
after field installation of the joint.
Flanged Joint Conform to AWWA C207. Faced and dimensioned in accordance with ASME/ANSI B16.5 for the
pressure class shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Bell Joint Gaskets Material Conform to AWWA C300 Section 4.4.11 and 4.5.4. Vulcanized styrene butadiene rubber (SBR).
Material for Hydrocarbon NBR (Nitrile) (acrylonitrile butadiene), FLUOREL or FKM (Viton) (fluorocarbon).
Applications and
Contaminated Soils
Gasket Age < 180 Days old or
< 2 years old but retested < 60 Days prior to installation.
Flange Gaskets Material 212-2.7.
Fittings Material Same steel as pipe.
Standards Conform to AWWA C208.
Exterior Coatings Use same coating as adjacent pipe, as specified above.
Interior Linings Use same lining as adjacent pipe, as specified above.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 203

209-4 PVC PRESSURE PIPE.

209-4.1 General. This subsection specifies PVC pipe used for pressure piping applications for water
and recycled water pressure pipes and for sewage force mains.
209-4.2 Materials. Unless otherwise specified, PVC pressure pipe shall conform to the following:

TABLE 209-4.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Pipe Manufacturing Conform to AWWA C900 for pipe 4”-12” (100 mm-300 mm).
Standards Conform to AWWA C905 for pipe 14” (350 mm) and larger.
Design Standards Conform to AWWA M23 using hydraulic design basis below.
NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe.
Material Virgin rigid poly-vinyl-chloride.
Conform to ASTM D1784 Cell Class 12454B or better.
Conform to NSF 14.
Conform to AWWA C900 Section 4.2 or AWWA C905 Section 4.2 as appropriate.
Hydrostatic Design ≥ 4,000 psi (27.5 MPa) for water at 73.4ºF (23ºC).
Basis (HDB) Apply 2.5 Safety Factor and use 1,600 psi (11.0 MPa) maximum design stress.
Markings (each pipe) Conform to AWWA C900 or C905 Section 6.1.
Mark applicable AWWA standard.
Show nominal pipe diameter.
Show AWWA pressure class or DR.
Show NSF 61 stamp (for potable water service).
Show manufacturer and manufacturing date code.
Size As shown on the Plans.
Conform to outside diameter of ductile iron pipe unless otherwise shown.
Minimum Wall Design Pressure and Diameter Shown on the Minimum Dimension Ratio
Thickness Plans
(Dimension Ratio) 0-100 psi (.7 MPa) DR 18 (Class 235)
4”-48” (100 mm-1200 mm)
150 psi (1.0 MPa) DR 14 (Class 305)
4”-12” (100 mm-300 mm)
150 psi (1.0 MPa) DR 18 (Class 235)
14”-48” (350 mm-1200 mm)
200 psi (1.4 MPa) DR 14 (Class 305)
4”-12” (100 mm-300 mm)
200 psi (1.4 MPa) Use DIP or Steel Pipe
14”-48” (350 mm-1200 mm)
Greater than 200 psi (1.4 MPa) Use DIP or Steel Pipe
Pipe with Grooved Couplings Use DIP or Steel Pipe
Lengths Laying lengths shall be 20’ with option to supply up to 15% random (minimum length
10’) sections.
Joints Standard Push-on Conform to ASTM D3139.
Style
Bell Joint Gaskets Material Elastomeric membrane per AWWA C900 Section 4.2.4 (Gaskets and Lubricants) and
ASTM F477.
Butadiene styrene (SBR or BR) for potable water.
Ethylene propylene (EPM or EPDM) for recycled water.
Material for Elastomeric membrane per AWWA C900 Section 4.2.4 (Gaskets and Lubricants) and
Hydrocarbon ASTM F477.
Applications and NBR (Nitrile) (acrylonitrile butadiene), FLUOREL or FKM (Viton) (fluorocarbon).
Contaminated Soils
Gasket Age < 180 Days old or
< 2 years old but retested < 60 Days prior to installation
Fittings Material Ductile iron.
Standards Conform to AWWA C110/ANSI 21.10 or AWWA C153/ANSI A21.53.
Style Push-on (standard) or restrained joint (as shown).
Marking Cast letters “DI” or “DUCTILE” into fittings, unless otherwise specified.
Exterior Coatings 1 mil (25 µm) petroleum asphaltic coating.
Interior Linings Cement mortar (double thickness).
Plastic Film Wrap for Conform to 212-12.1.1.
Corrosion Protection Color per 212-12.2.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
204 Greenbook 2021

209-5 HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) SOLID WALL PRESSURE PIPE.

209-5.1 General. This subsection specifies HDPE solid wall pipe to be used for pressure piping
applications for water and recycled water pressure pipes and for sewage force mains.
209-5.2 Materials. Unless otherwise specified, HDPE pressure pipe shall conform to the following.

TABLE 209-5.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Pipe Manufacturing Conform to AWWA C901 for pipe 1/2”-3” (12.5 mm -75 mm).
Standards (Potable Conform to AWWA C906 for pipe 4”-63” (100 mm -1575 mm).
Water Pipe)
Manufacturing Conform to ASTM F714.
Standards (Non-
Potable Water Pipe)
Design Standards Conform to AWWA M55.
NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe.
Material ASTM D3350 PE 4710 Cell classification 4454 or higher.
Conform to AWWA C901 Section 4.2 or AWWA C906 Section 4.2 as appropriate.
Hydrostatic Design ≥ 1600 psi (11.0 MPa) for water at 73.4ºF (23ºC).
Basis (HDB) Apply 2.0 Safety Factor (0.5 Design Factor) and use 800 psi (5.5 MPa) maximum
design stress.
Markings (each pipe) Conform to AWWA C901 or C906 Section 6.1.
Mark applicable AWWA standard.
Show nominal pipe diameter.
Show standard material code designation.
Show AWWA pressure class or DR.
Show NSF 61 stamp (for potable water service).
Show manufacturer and manufacturing date code.
Size 1-1/4”-63” (32 mm-1575 mm) diameter as shown on the Plans.
Ductile iron pipe size (DIPS) outside diameter for pipe 4”-48” (100 mm -1200 mm)
unless otherwise shown.
Iron pipe size (IPS) outside diameter for pipe < 4” (100 mm) or > 48” (1200 mm).
Minimum Wall Design Pressure Shown on the Plans Minimum Dimension Ratio
Thickness 0-80 psi (0.6 MPa) DR 21
(Dimension Ratio) 100 psi (0.7 MPa) DR 17
150 psi (1.0 MPa) DR 11
200 psi (1.4 MPa) DR 9
250 psi (1.7 MPa) DR 7.3
Not shown DR 11
Joints Style Thermal butt fusion for joining pipe in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Flanged for connections to appurtenances and other pipe materials in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Flange Back-up Ring Provide flange back-up ring of Type 316 SS or fusion bonded epoxy coated ductile iron.
Design Pressure Match design pressure rating of pipe shown on the Plans.
Fusion Fittings Standards ASTM D2683 socket-type, ASTM D3261 butt-type, or ASTM F1055 electrofusion
(fittings shall be marked as complying).
Material HDPE conforming to pipe specifications.
Design Pressure Match design pressure rating of pipe shown on the Plans.
Safety Factor 2:1 minimum.
Quick Burst Strength Not less than pipe connected to fitting.
Adaptor Fittings Internal Stiffener Required.
(For Connections Ring
to Flanged Backup Ring Stainless steel.
Fittings) Thrust Restraint Per anchoring kit per manufacturer’s requirements.

209-6 FIBERGLASS PRESSURE PIPE.

209-6.1 General. This subsection specifies fiberglass pressure pipe up to 64-inch (1600 mm)
diameter to be used for pressure piping applications for water and recycled water pressure pipes and for
sewage force mains.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 205

209-6.2 Materials. Unless otherwise specified, fiberglass pressure pipe shall conform to the following:

TABLE 209-6.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Pipe Manufacturing Conform to AWWA C950.
Standards
Design Standards Conform to AWWA M45.
NSF Certification NSF 61 certification required for potable water pipe.
Material Type I Centrifugally-Cast Fiberglass-Reinforced Polymer Mortar Pipe or Type II
Filament-Wound Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer Mortar as specified in the
Special Provisions.
Grade As specified in the Special Provisions.
Liner As specified in the Special Provisions.
Markings (each Mark each length of pipe or fitting to identify:
pipe) • Applicable ASTM or AWWA standard
• Manufacturer’s name or mark
• Type and grade of pipe and liner if applicable
• Design pressure
• Stiffness class
Proper location of pipe or special by reference to layout schedule
Size As shown on the Plans,
Conform to outside diameter of ductile iron pipe unless otherwise shown.
Pressure Class As shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Stiffness Class As shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Maximum Long- 5%.
Term Deflection
Wall Thickness As required to conform to minimum pressure class or minimum stiffness class
shown on the Plans.
Lengths Laying lengths shall be from 10’ to 40’ (3 m to 12 m) with option to supply up to
15% of sections in random lengths.
Pipe Ends Square to pipe axis with maximum tolerance of ± 1/4” (6 mm) or 0.5% of the
nominal diameter, whichever is greater.
Joints Unrestrained Conform to performance requirements of ASTM D4161 Section 7.
Coupling or Bell-
and-Spigot Joints
Mechanical Conform to manufacturer’s recommendation and performance requirements of
Coupling Joints ASTM D4161 Section 7.
Butt Joint with Use only for specials or when approved by the Engineer.
Laminated Overlay Conform to manufacturer’s recommendation and performance requirements of
ASTM D4161 Section 7.
Flanged Conform to manufacturer’s recommendation and performance requirements of
ASTM D4161 Section 7.
Bolt pattern to match adjacent pipe.
Joint Gaskets Material Conform to ASTM F477.
Butadiene Styrene (SBR or BR) for potable water.
Ethylene Propylene (EPM or EPDM) for recycled water; EPM, EPDM, or NBR
(Nitrile) for wastewater.
NBR (Nitrile) for wastewater sludge.
Material for Elastomeric Membrane per AWWA C900 Section 4.2.4 (Gaskets and Lubricants)
Hydrocarbon and ASTM F477.
Applications and NBR (Nitrile) (acrylonitrile butadiene), FLUOREL or FKM (Viton) (fluorocarbon).
Contaminated Soils
Gasket Age < 180 Days old or
< 2 years old but retested < 60 Days prior to installation.
Fittings Standards Conform to AWWA C950 or ASTM D3517.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
206 Greenbook 2021

209-7 PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION.

209-7.1 General. This subsection specifies pipe warning and locating materials and methods for use
with buried pressure pipe.
209-7.2 Requirements: Pipeline identification shall conform to the following:

TABLE 209-7.2
Function Type Materials/Method
Pipe Contents Pipe Color (Plastic Blue for Potable Water.
Identification Pipe or Polywrap) Purple for Recycled Water.
Green for Sewage.
AND
Stenciling Stenciling marked on pipe in contrasting color to background color of pipe stating:
“POTABLE WATER”,
“CAUTION RECYCLED WATER - DO NOT DRINK” or “CAUTION SEWER” as
appropriate.
5/8” (16 mm) high letters.
Repeated at 1 foot (300 mm) intervals.
OR
Identification Tape Polyethylene tape 6” (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (100 µm) minimum thickness with
2” (50 mm) high letters stating:
“POTABLE WATER”,
“CAUTION RECYCLED WATER - DO NOT DRINK” or “CAUTION SEWER” as
appropriate.
For pipe > 12” (300 mm) diameter, use 12” (300 mm) wide tape.
Color - Blue with white letters for potable water,
Purple with white letters for recycled water,
Green with white letters for sewage.
Attached to top of pipe with adhesive tape.
Pipe Warning and Warning and Polyethylene tape 6” (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (100 µm) minimum thickness with
Locating Locating Tape 2”(50 mm) high letters stating:
“CAUTION: WATERLINE BURIED BELOW”, “CAUTION: RECLAIMED
WATERLINE BURIED BELOW – DO NOT DRINK”, or “CAUTION: SEWER
BURIED BELOW” as appropriate.
For pipe > 12” (300 mm) diameter, use 12” (300 mm) wide tape.
Color - blue with black or white letters for potable water,
Purple with black or white letters for recycled water,
Green with black or white letters for sewage.
Place in pipe trench 18” (450 mm) above pipe.
Tape shall contain metallic strip that can be registered by magnetic field locating
device.
OR
Locating Wire In lieu of installing metallic warning tape; non-metallic warning tape 18” (450 mm)
above pipe and 10-gauge copper wire attached to top of pipe and accessibly
terminated may be used.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 207

SECTION 210 - PAINT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS

210-1 PAINT.
210-1.1 General Requirements. Paint shall be homogeneous, free of contaminants, and of a
consistency suitable for the use for which it is specified. The pigment shall be finely ground and
properly dispersed in the vehicle according to the requirements of the paint; and this dispersion shall be
of such nature that the pigment does not settle appreciably, does not cake or thicken in the container, or
become granular or curdled. Paint and paint materials shall be delivered to the Work site in new,
unopened, airtight containers, appropriately identified with the manufacturer’s name, date of
manufacture, type of paint or paint material, State Specification number, and lot or batch number.
No paint shall be used until at least 7 Days have elapsed from the date of manufacture.
210-1.2 Testing. All paint and paint materials shall be sampled and tested prior to use. All tests
will be conducted in accordance with the methods specified in ASTM or methods set forth in Federal
Standard 141. In the absence of any such methods, other suitable methods may be designed and utilized
by the Engineer.
Lots or batches of paint of proprietary brand, which have been previously sampled and tested by the
Agency and approved as conforming with these specifications, may be used without further testing, if
permitted by the Engineer. For the purpose of these specifications, proprietary brands of paint and paint
materials are construed to mean those conforming to the requirements of these specifications which are
produced for distribution through regular wholesale and retail outlets.
210-1.3 Paint Coats. Paint coats shall consist of pre-treatment when specified, primer, and finish
coats in that order, in accordance with 210-1.5.
210-1.4 Paint Materials. Paint materials shall conform in all respects to the requirements of the
reference specifications indicated for such material in the table of paint systems shown below.
210-1.5 Paint Systems. Unless otherwise specified, the paint systems to be used shall conform to
the requirements shown in the following table and the State of California Department of Transportation
Standard Specifications.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
208 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 210-1.5
1 1
Surface to be Painted Pre-Treatment/Surface Primer Finish Coats
1
Preparation
Galvanized Metal Vinyl Wash Zinc Dust – Zinc Oxide Fed. Aluminum
Spec. TT-P- 641 Type II White Enamel
White Tint
2
Base
Aluminum Green
Tan
Burnt Sienna
Structural Steel – General Use Commercial Blast Per Per Manufacturer’s
SSPWC 310-2.5 Recommendations
2
Wood Structures, Wood Primer and Wood Primer Exterior White
Surfaces
Signal Standards Vinyl Wash Yellow Yellow
2
Signal Heads and Mounting Vinyl Wash Olive Green
2
Backplates, Visors, Louvers Vinyl Wash Black
1. Refer to Section 91, State of California Department of Transportation (CalTrans) Standard Specifications unless otherwise specified.
2. Finish color shall be in accordance with Specifications or as determined by the Engineer.

210-2 PLASTIC LINERS.

210-2.1 General. Plastic liner sheets, joints, corners, and weld strips shall be manufactured from a
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or high-density polyethylene (HDPE) or polypropylene (PP) or a composite of
PP and fiber reinforced polymer (FRP) material that conforms to the requirements specified herein.
Copolymer resin will not be permitted.
Changes in the material formulation will only be approved if the new formulation meets or exceeds
the specified requirements as demonstrated through testing. The Engineer shall be notified a minimum
of 14 Days prior to the start of testing. The new formulation and test results shall be submitted in
accordance with 3-8.
The Engineer may sample specimens taken from any part of the assembled or unassembled product
for testing of physical properties in accordance with 211-2 at any time during manufacture or prior to
acceptance.
Plastic liner sheets, including locking extensions, and joint, corner, connecting, and welding strips,
shall be free of cracks, cleavages, or other defects adversely affecting the protective characteristics of the
material. Plastic liner sheets older than 365 Days from the date of manufacture shall not be used in lined
reinforced concrete pipe as specified in 207-3 or in lined concrete structures.
PVC liners shall be protected from exposure to ultraviolet light.
210-2.2 Adhesives. Adhesives intended for use inside joined plastic-lined pipe or cast-in-place
structures shall be nonflammable. Adhesives shall not be used with HDPE or PP liners without the use
of a transition material approved by the Engineer. Proposed adhesives shall be submitted in accordance
with 3-8.
Plastic liners or any portion thereof shall not be bonded to concrete surfaces with an adhesive unless
otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer.
210-2.3 Cleaners. Cleaners shall be nonflammable, water soluble or water dispersible, and shall
not be detrimental to the plastic liner. Proposed cleaners shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 209

210-2.4 Liner Packaging Markings. Liner packaging, including any rolls, spools, or tubes, shall be
marked with the following:
a) Manufacturer.
b) Product name.
c) Date of manufacture.
d) Lot or batch tracking number.
210-2.5 Details and Dimensions.
210-2.5.1 Submittals. Liner sheets, strips, and other accessory pieces shall conform to the
requirements shown on the Plans and specified in the Specifications. Working Drawings, cross sections,
details, and locations where accessory pieces are to be used shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8.
210-2.5.2 Material Thickness. The minimum thickness of sheets and strips shall conform to the
requirements shown in Table 210-2.5.2.

TABLE 210-2.5.2
Material Component Thickness mils (mm)
Sheet, integral locking extensions 65 (1.65)
Sheet, plain 94 (2.39)
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Joint strip 75 (1.91)
Weld strip 120 (3.00)
Sheet, integral locking extensions 80 (2.00)
Sheet, plain 120 (3.00)
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
Cap/Joint strip 120 (3.00)
Weld strip 120 (3.00)
Sheet, integral locking extensions 120 (3.00)
Sheet, plain 120 (3.00)
Polypropylene (PP)
Cap/Joint strip 120 (3.00)
Weld strip 120 (3.00)

210-2.5.3 Material Sizes. Liner sheets for pipe shall be sized to provide the coverage shown on the
Plans. Joint strips for PVC shall be 4 ± 1/4 inches (100 ± 6 mm) in width and shall have each edge
beveled prior to application. Welding strips shall be 1 ± 1/8 inch (25 ± 3 mm) in width. Cap strips for
HDPE and PP liners shall be either 4 ± 1/4 inches (100 ± 6 mm) or 6 ± 1/4 inches (150 ± 6 mm) in width
unless otherwise specified.
210-2.5.4 Locking Extensions.
210-[Link] General. Plastic liners to be embedded in concrete shall have integral locking extensions.
Locking extensions shall be constructed of the same material as the liner and shall be integrally
bonded, molded, or extruded with the sheets.
210-[Link] Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Locking Extensions. PVC locking extensions shall have a
minimum height of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) and a minimum web thickness of 3/32 inch (2.2 mm). Locking
extensions shall be 2-1/2 ± 1/4 inches (63 ± 6 mm) apart for pipe and structure applications. The locking
extensions shall be such that when they are embedded in concrete, the liner will be held permanently in
place and meet the pull-out requirements of 210-[Link]. A minimum of one locking extension shall be
embedded in each continuous surface, except any continuous surface of 4 inches (100 mm) or more shall
have a minimum of 2 locking extensions, or the material shall be bonded in place. Locking extensions

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
210 Greenbook 2021

shall be parallel and continuous except where interrupted for joint flaps, weep channels, strap channels,
or for other purposes shown on the Plans or where permitted by the Engineer.
A flexible liner sheet edge which will be the lower terminal edge in a structure or pipe shall not
extend beyond the base of the final locking extension more than 3/8 inch (9.5mm).
210-[Link] High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) and Polypropylene (PP) Locking Extensions.
HDPE and PP locking extensions shall have a sizing, spacing, and design to ensure the liner passes a
pull test when tested in accordance with 210-[Link]. Fabric-backed liner or other transitional material
shall be bonded to concrete or other dissimilar surfaces with an adhesive when approved by the
Engineer.
210-2.5.5 Strap Channels. Strap channels shall be 1-inch (25 mm) wide maximum and formed by
removing the locking extensions so that a maximum of 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) remains.
210-2.5.6 Transverse Flaps. Transverse flaps shall be fabricated by removing locking extensions so
that a maximum of 1/32 inch (0.80 mm) of the base of the locking extensions remains on the sheet.
210-2.6 Tests.
210-2.6.1 General. Liner materials shall be tested for physical and chemical properties prior to
approval. Samples taken from sheets, joints, or weld strips of material representative of those to be
furnished shall be tested to determine material properties.
A minimum of 5 random samples shall be selected from each lot for testing. If the Engineer is
present, the Engineer will select the samples. A lot shall be defined as all of the material manufactured
during a single Day. Determination of physical properties shall be performed in accordance with the
tests specified in 210-2.7 or 210-2.8. Test results shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8.
210-2.6.2 NOT USED.
210-2.6.3 Chemical Resistance Test (Pickle Jar Test). Test specimens shall be tested in
accordance with 211-2.
210-2.6.4 Pull Test for Locking Extensions.
210-[Link] PVC Liner Locking Extensions. PVC liner locking extensions embedded in concrete
shall withstand a test pull of at least 100 pounds per linear inch (18 N/mm) when a single locking
extension is applied perpendicular to the concrete surface for a period of 1 minute without rupture of the
locking extensions or withdrawal from embedment when the test is performed at a temperature between
70°F to 80°F (21°C to 27°C) inclusive.
210-[Link] HDPE and PP Liner Locking Extensions. HDPE and PP liner locking extensions
embedded in concrete shall withstand a test pull strength of at least 100 pounds per square inch (18
N/mm2) when applied perpendicular to a one square foot sample embedded in the concrete surface for a
period of 1 minute, without rupture of the locking extensions or withdrawal from embedment when the
test is performed at a temperature between 70°F to 80°F (21°C to 27°C) inclusive.
210-2.6.5 Shop Welded Joints. Shop-welded joints used to fuse individual sections of liner together
shall conform to the minimum requirements of the liner for thickness, corrosion resistance, and
impermeability. A minimum of 5 random samples from each lot shall be selected for testing. If the Engineer
is present, the Engineer will select the samples. Welds shall show no cracks or separations and shall be tested
for tensile strength.
For PVC, HDPE and PP liners, the tensile strength measured across the welded joint shall not be less
than the values shown in Tables 210-2.7.1, 210-2.7.2, and 210-2.7.3. Test temperatures shall be 77°F ±
5°F (25°C ± 3°C) and the measured minimum width and thickness of the reduced section shall be used.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 211

Shop-welded joints shall be completed by certified welders conforming to [Link] shop weld
shall be marked to identify the welder and the shift it was performed.
210-2.6.6 Spark Test. Liners shall be shop-tested for holes with a spark tester set to provide
20,000 volts. Sheets having holes shall be repaired prior to shipment from the manufacturer’s plant.
210-2.7 Flexible Protective Liners.
210-2.7.1 PVC Liners for Structures, Manholes, and Pipes. PVC liner materials shall conform to
the requirements shown in Table 210-2.7.1 when tested at 77°F ± 5 degrees (25°C ± 3°C).

TABLE 210-2.7.1
1 1
PVC Property Standard Initial Exposure
Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM D412, Die B 2,200 (15) 2,100 (14.4)
Elongation at break, percent ASTM D412, Die B 200 200
3
Within 1 sec. 50-60 ±5
Hardness, Shore durometer ASTM D2240, Type D 3
Within 10 sec. 35-50 ±5
3
Weight change, percent — ± 1.5
1. For 112 Days in chemical solutions listed in 211-2. All above values are minimum required except for hardness and weight, which
is the maximum permissible gain or loss in weight.
2. Except that a single thickness of material shall be used.
3. With respect to initial test result.

210-2.7.2 HDPE Liners. HDPE liner materials shall conform to the requirements shown in Table
210-2.7.2 when tested at 77°F ± 5 degrees (25°C ± 3°C).

TABLE 210-2.7.2
1 1
HDPE Property Standard Initial Exposure
2
Thickness, mils (mm) ASTM D5199 78.7 (2.0) -
3 3 ASTM D1505 or ASTM 2
Density, oz/in (g/cm ) 0.540 (0.935) -
D792, Method B
ASTM D638 or ASTM
D6693, Type IV Dumbbell, 2
Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) 2,200 (15) -
G.L. = 2.0 in/min (50.8
mm/min)
ASTM D638 or ASTM
D6693, Type IV Dumbbell, 2
Elongation at break, percent 300 -
G.L. = 2.0 in/min (50.8
mm/min)
3
Within 1 sec. 50-60 ±5
Hardness, shore durometer ASTM D2240, Type D 3
Within 10 sec. 35-50 ±5
3
Weight change, percent Table 211-2(B) ± 1.5
1. For 112 Days in chemical solutions listed in 211-2. All above values are minimum required except for hardness and weight, which is the
maximum permissible gain or loss in weight.
2. Except that a single thickness of material shall be used.
3. With respect to initial test result.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
212 Greenbook 2021

210-2.7.3 PP Liners. PP liner materials shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 210-2.7.3
when tested at 77°F ± 5 degrees (25°C ± 3°C).

TABLE 210-2.7.3
PP Property Standard Initial After Exposure

Thickness, mils (mm) - 118.1 (3.0) --

3 3
Density, oz/in (g/cm ) ASTM D792 0.526 (0.910) --

Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM D638 2,900 (20) min. 2,700 (18.6)

Elongation at break, percent ASTM D638 250 min. 250 min.

3
Hardness, shore durometer ASTM D2240, Type A 90-95 85-95
3
Weight change, percent Table 211-2(B) -- 1.5 max.
1. For 112 Days in chemical solutions listed in 211-2. All above values are minimum required except for hardness and weight, which
is the maximum permissible gain or loss in weight.
2. Except that a single thickness of material shall be used.
3. With respect to initial test result.

210-2.8 Rigid Liners.

210-2.8.1 General. Rigid liners are liners that when self-supported, hold their shape and resist
deformation during handling and construction.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 213

210-2.8.2 Rigid PVC Liners for Structures, Manholes, and Pipes. Rigid PVC plastic liner sheets,
joint assembly components, and corner and connecting strips shall conform to the requirements shown in
Table 210-2.8.2.

TABLE 210-2.8.2
Rigid PVC Panel Style Pre-formed Panel Style
Property Standard
with Mechanical Lock PVC
Cell Classification ASTM D1784 12344 15334
Material ASTM F1735 and D1784 ASTM F1735 ASTM D1784
Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM D638 6,500 (44) 6,500 (44)
Tensile Modulus, psi (MPa) ASTM D638 360,000 (2,480) 325,000 (2,240)
2 Applicable to joiner strip
Hardness, Shore Durometer ASTM D2240, Type D 81
(shore A) 65
Flexural Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM D790 11,300 (80) 9,200 (63)
Flexural Modulus, psi (MPa) ASTM D790 410,000 (2,820) 340,000 (2,340)
Heat Deflection, °F (°C) ASTM D648 158 (70) 158 (70)
Izod Impact, ft-lb/in (J/m) ASTM D256 0.65 (34.7) 10 (533.5)
Variable Height Impact Test ASTM D4226 105
Weight Change, percent Greenbook 211-2(B) ± 1.5 ± 1.5
Flammability ASTM D635 Self-extinguishing Self-extinguishing
1. All above values are minimum required except for hardness and weight, which is the maximum permissible gain or loss in
weight.
2. Minimum Failure Energy.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
214 Greenbook 2021

210-2.8.3 Rigid Polypropylene (PP) – Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Composite Liners for
Structures, Manholes, and Pipes. Rigid PP-FRP composite liner sheets, joint assembly components,
corner strips, and cap strips shall be tested in accordance with 211-2.
PP materials shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 210-2.8.3 (A).

TABLE 210-2.8.3 (A)

PP Property Standard Initial After Exposure

Thickness, mils (mm) - 118.1 (3.0) min. --

3 3
Density, oz/in (g/cm ) ASTM D792 0.526 (0.910) --

Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM D638 2,900 (20) min. 2,700 (18.6)

Hardness, Shore Durometer ASTM D2240, Type A 90-95 85-95

Weight change, percent -- 1.5 max.

FRP materials shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 210-2.8.3 (B). FRP materials shall
be constructed of vinyl-ester or epoxy resin and glass fiber reinforcing formulated for continuous service
in sewer environments with 1N sulfuric acid at an average wastewater temperature of 80°F (27°C) and
intermittent exposure to a pH of 11.

TABLE 210-2.8.3 (B)

Property Standard Initial After Exposure

Thickness, mils (mm) -- 118.1 (3.0) min. --

3 3
Density, oz/in (g/cm ) ASTM D792 0.587 (1.02)

Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM D638 6,500 (44.8) min. 5,850 (40.3) min.

Hardness, Shore Durometer ASTM D2240, Type A 95-97 89-97

Weight change, percent -- -- 1.5 max.

Flexural Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM D790 8,050 (55.5) --

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 215

210-2.8.4 Rigid Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Liners for Structures, and Manholes. Rigid
FRP liner components and corner strips shall be tested in accordance with 211-2 and conform to the
requirements shown in Table [Link] materials shall be constructed of vinyl-ester or epoxy resin
and glass fiber reinforcing formulated for continuous service in sewerage environments with 1N sulfuric
acid at an average wastewater temperature of 80°F (27°C) and intermittent exposure to a pH of 11.

TABLE 210-2.8.4
Property Standard Initial After Exposure

Thickness, mils (mm) -- 118.1 (3.0) min. --

3 3
Density, oz/in (g/cm ) ASTM D792 0.587 (1.02)

Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM D638 6,500 (44.8) min. 5,850 (40.3) min.

Hardness, Shore Durometer ASTM D2240, Type A 95-97 89-97

Weight change, percent -- -- 1.5 max.

Flexural Strength, psi (MPa) ASTM D790 8,050 (55.5) --

210-2.9 Joining of Dissimilar Materials. Liners of dissimilar materials shall not be joined without the
use of a transition material. The proposed transition material shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8.
The tensile strength of the joint between dissimilar liner materials shall not be less than the
minimums for the materials used when tested in accordance with 210-2.6.5.
210-3 GALVANIZING.
210-3.1 General. Zinc used for galvanizing shall be grade Prime Western conforming to ASTM
B6. Except as otherwise specified, materials shall be galvanized by the hot-dip, mechanical, or electrode
positing process.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
216 Greenbook 2021

210-3.2 Coating Requirements. The minimum weight of coating and other requirements shall be
as shown in Table 210-3.2. If there is a conflict between the ASTM and minimum weight columns, the
minimum weight column shall apply. The weight shown is ounces per square foot (grams per square
meter) of surface area. The weight of coating shall be determined in accordance with ASTM A90,
modified to determine the coating of each surface separately. All surfaces, when tested separately, shall
meet the minimum requirements.

TABLE 210-3.2
Material ASTM Minimum Weight of Coating
2 2
oz/ft (g/m )
Steel products including structural shapes, tie rods, handrails, A123 2.00 (610)
manhole steps, and miscellaneous items. A153 2.00 (610)
B633 2.00 (610)
B695 2.00 (610)
Hardware including cast, rolled, pressed and forged articles. A153 2.00 (610)
B633 2.00 (610)
B695 2.00 (610)
Bolts, screws, nuts and washers A153 1.25 (381)
B633 1.25 (381)
B695 1.25 (381)
CSP culverts and underdrains A929 1.00 (305)
Chain link fence fabric, tie wire only. A392 1.20 (366)
Steel pipe (includes fence posts, braces, and rails)
Class 1 (see Note 1) F1083 1.80 (550)
Class 1A (pipe only, see Notes 2 and 3). 1.00 (305)
All other chain link fence articles A123 1.80 (550)
Iron or steel wire fencing A116 0.80 (244)
Steel or iron sheets A525 1.20 (366)
Barbed wire A121 0.80 (244)
Electrolier standards, 7-gage steel and over A123 2.00 (610)
Electrolier standards, under 7-gage steel A123 1.50 (458)
1. “C” and “H” section fence posts shall be hot-dipped galvanized after forming.
2. Class 1A pipe shall, in addition to the galvanized exterior coating indicated, have coatings of chromate conversion and acrylic
urethane in accordance with Subsection 210-4.
3. The interior surface coating for Class 1A pipe shall have 1 ounce per square foot (305 g/m2) of hot-dipped galvanized coating or a
zinc-rich organic a minimum of 0.3 mils (8 µm) thick. The coating shall have a minimum zinc powder loading of 87 percent by
weight. The interior coated surface shall have a demonstrated ability to resist 650 hours of exposure to salt fog with a maximum of
5 percent red rust when tested in accordance with ASTM B117.

210-3.3 Workmanship. The zinc coating shall adhere tenaciously to the surface of the base
material. The finished product shall be free from blisters and excess zinc, and the coating shall be even,
smooth, and uniform throughout. Machine work, die work, cutting, punching, bending, welding,
drilling, thread cutting, straightening, and other fabricating shall be done as far as is practicable before
the galvanizing. All members, nuts, bolts, washers, etc., shall be galvanized before a structural unit is
assembled. All uncoated spots or damaged coatings shall be cause for rejection.
Products that are warped or distorted to the extent of impairment for the use intended shall be rejected.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 217

210-3.4 Test Coupons. Test coupons for determining the quantity and quality of the galvanizing
shall be of such size and shall be wired to the materials to be galvanized before immersion so as to
represent the amount of coating deposited on the finished product.
Nondestructive tests for uniformity of coating may be made by the Engineer with a magnetic
instrument in accordance with ASTM E 376.
210-3.5 Repair of Damaged Zinc Coatings. Zinc coating which has been field or shop cut, burned
by welding, abraded, or otherwise damaged to such extent as to expose the base metal, shall be repaired
and recoated by one of the following methods approved by the Engineer.
210-3.5.1 Hot-Dip Process. The damaged areas shall be thoroughly stripped and cleaned and a
coating of zinc shall be applied by the hot-dip process per 210-3.1 and 210-3.2.
210-3.5.2 Metalizing Process. The damaged area shall be repaired per ASTM A780, Annex A3,
and the following requirements:
a) The damaged areas shall be thoroughly cleaned by blasting with sharp sand or steel grit per 310-
2.5.1b).
b) The blasted area shall lap the undamaged zinc coating at least 1/2 inch (12.5 mm).
c) Zinc wire containing not less than 99.98 percent zinc shall be used in the metalizing operation.
d) A zinc coating shall be applied to the damaged area with a metalizing gun to a thickness of not
less than 5 mils (130 µm) on the damaged area, and shall taper to zero thickness at the edge of
the blasted undamaged section.
210-3.5.3 Zinc Dust Paint. When zinc surfaces have small areas of abrasion which occur after
shop application of zinc coating, zinc dust paint may be used to repair these areas when approved by the
Engineer. The damaged area shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brushing and traces of welding flux
and loose or cracked zinc coating removed prior to painting. The cleaned area shall be painted with a
minimum of two coats of an unthinned zinc paint to provide a total minimum film thickness of 8 mils
(205 µm). The zinc dust paint shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A780, Annex A3, except that
it shall have a 90 percent minimum dry film content of zinc dust by weight. The method of application
shall be approved by the Engineer.
210-3.5.4 Zinc Based Solders. The damaged areas shall be repaired using zinc alloy solders per
ASTM A780, Annex A3. Zinc solder shall be deposited until a minimum thickness of 5 mils (130 µm)
is applied to the damaged area.
210-4 CHROMATE CONVERSION AND CLEAR ACRYLIC URETHANE COATINGS.
210-4.1 General. Class 1A Steel pipe for chain link fencing used for posts, braces, top rail, and
gate frames shall have an exterior chromate conversion coating placed on the galvanized coating
followed by a clear acrylic urethane coating.
210-4.2 Chromate Conversion Coating. The chromate conversion coating weight shall be a
minimum of 23 g/m2. The weight of chromate coating shall be determined by stripping the acrylic
urethane coating with a neutral epoxy polyurethane stripper, determine the total weight of chromate and
zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A90; then determine the percent of chromate and percent of zinc
in the total metallic coating by atomic absorption spectrophotometer.
210-4.3 Clear Acrylic Urethane Coating. The coating shall be manufactured from high grade raw
materials which produce a crosslinked acrylic polyurethane coating.
The acrylic urethane coating shall be a minimum of 0.3 mil (8 µm) thick. The thickness shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM D7091. The gage shall be calibrated on the bare metal substrate

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
218 Greenbook 2021

after chemically removing the urethane and underlying zinc coatings. The total thickness of the urethane
and zinc coatings shall then be determined. Chemically strip the urethane and determine the thickness of
the zinc coating only. The difference between the thickness of the zinc and the total thickness of the
urethane coating and zinc is the thickness of the urethane coating.
Alternate test methods may be used when approved by the Engineer.
210-4.4 Test of Coating System. These tests shall be performed with the entire coating system in place.
The exterior clear-coated surface of the pipe shall have a demonstrated ability to resist 1,000 hours of
exposure to salt fog with a maximum of 5 percent red rust when tested in accordance with ASTM B117.
There shall be no film cracking of the clear finish coat after 500 hours exposure in a weatherometer
in accordance with ASTM G23, Type E, or EH carbon arc weatherometer, or G 26, Type B, or BH
xenon arc weatherometer. There shall be no blistering or cracking of the clear finish coat after 500 hours
of exposure to 100 percent relative humidity in accordance with ASTM D2247.
210-4.5 Repair of Coatings. Repairs of damaged areas for Class 1A steel pipe shall be done by
first repairing the galvanized coating in accordance with 210-3.5. In addition, a clear acrylic lacquer
such as acrylon, shall be used as a final coating on the repaired area.
210-5 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) COATINGS.
210-5.1 General. This specification covers PVC coatings for posts, frames, gates, and fittings.
PVC coating thickness shall be a minimum of 15 mils (380 µm).
210-5.2 Properties. The requirements for PVC coating shall be as shown in the following table:

TABLE 210-5.2
Property ASTM Test No. Requirements
Specific Gravity of Fused Resin D792 1.30 ± 0.030
Hardness,
Shore A D2240 88 ± 2
Shore D D2240 36 ± 2
Tensile Strength, psi (MPa) D651 2500 ± 100 (17.2 ± 0.2)
Elongation, % D638 250 ± 10
Tear Strength, lbs/inch (N/mm) D1004 440 ± 20 (77 ± 3)
Brittleness Temperature D746 0 ± 4°F (-18 ± 2°C)
Weathering Test Method, Langley Melting Range E690 395°F to 415°F (202°C to 213°C)
Dielectric Strength Range V/mil (V/ µm) D3991 800 to 1000 (32 to 40)

210-5.3 Workmanship. All surfaces to be PVC coated shall be thoroughly cleaned, removing all
foreign matter to ensure noncontaminated surfaces. The substrate shall be primed, preheated to a
temperature of 450°F (232°C) and with 0.5 mil (13 µm) thickness primer. Primer shall be composed of
a mixture of acrylic, phenolic, and epoxy. All pipe and fittings shall be immersed in a fluidized-bed
system for PVC coating. Gate frames shall be fabricated and welded prior to the application of zinc
substrate and PVC coatings.
210-5.4 Repair of Damaged PVC Coatings. Damaged PVC coatings, which have been field
or shop cut, burned, abraded, or otherwise damaged, shall be repaired and recoated by the following
method: the damaged area shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brushing, then wiped clean with a
non-oil-base solvent such as methyl ethyl ketone or acetone solvent. The cleaned area shall be

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 219

painted with 5-mil (130 µm) thickness of acrylic enamel. Acrylic enamel shall be a PVC resin in
solution, consisting of high level pigments, ultraviolet absorbers, and solvent blends applied by
brush in a minimum of three coats.

SECTION 211- MATERIAL TESTS

211-1 COMPACTION TESTS.

211-1.1 Laboratory Maximum Density. The following method shall be used for compaction tests
unless otherwise specified:
Laboratory maximum densities will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557.
The Engineer may modify ASTM D1557 at his option to calculate relative compaction based on
adjusted laboratory maximum wet density calculated as follows:
Da = (100 Dm) / (100 ± Wa)
Da = Adjusted laboratory maximum wet density.
Dm = Maximum wet density per ASTM D1557.
± Wa = Percent change in moisture content from field moisture to laboratory optimum
moisture. Use minus when field moisture content is higher than laboratory optimum
moisture content. Use plus when field moisture content is lower than laboratory
optimum moisture content.
211-1.2 Field Density. Field density of soil shall be determined by ASTM D6938 or ASTM D1556.
211-1.3 Relative Compaction. The words Relative Compaction shall mean the ratio of the field dry or
wet density to the laboratory maximum dry or adjusted wet density, respectively, expressed as a percentage.
211-2 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE (PICKLE JAR) TEST. This test is used to determine the
physical properties and weight change of specimens of materials used in sewers after exposure to
chemical solutions. Specimens of composite materials shall be seal coated on 2 adjacent edges of their 4
edges and not seal coated on the inner or outer surface. Specimens of non-composite materials shall not
be seal coated. Test specimens shall be conditioned in a mechanical convection oven for 7 Days at a
constant weight and at a temperature of 110º F ± 3º F (43º C ± 3º C) and subsequently cooled for 3 hours
in a desiccator. This conditioning shall be performed before and after submersion of the test specimens
in the solutions shown in Table 211-2 (A) for a period of 28, 56, 84 and 112 Days at 77º F ± 5º F (25º C
± 3º C). Test specimens shall be provided as follows, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
a) Specimens For Non-Composite Materials - Provide 55 each ASTM D638 specimens and 164
each ASTM D543 specimens measuring 1 inch x 3 inches x 0.125 inch thick (25 mm x 75 mm x
3 mm).
b) Specimens For Composite Materials - Provide 55 each ASTM D638 specimens and 164 each
ASTM D543 specimens measuring 1 inch x 3 inches x 0.125 inch to 0.25 inch thick (25 mm x 75
mm x 3 mm to 6 mm).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
220 Greenbook 2021

The allowable percent weight gain or loss for these specimens shall be as specified for the respective
type of material.
TABLE 211-2 (A)
1
Chemical Solution Concentration Tolerance Check Replace
Concentration Chemical
Solution
2
Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4) 20% ± 0.1% NA NA
Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH) 5% ± 0.2% 56 Days When < 4.8%
Ammonium Hydroxide (NH4OH) 5% ± 1.0% 28 Days When < 4.0%
Nitric acid (HNO3) 1% ± 0.1% 28 Days When Turbid
Ferric Chloride (FeCl3) 1% ± 0.2% 28 Days When Turbid
Sodium Hypochlorite (NaOCl) 1% ± 0.1% NA 28 Days
Soap 0.10% NA NA 28 Days
Detergent (Linear alkyl benzyl sulfonate or 0.10% NA NA 28 Days
LAS)
Bacteriological (BOD) ≥ 700 ppm NA NA 7 Days
1. Volume percentages – Actual concentration of reagent must be corrected to 100%.
2. NA – Not Applicable.

If required by the type of material and the manufacturer, specimens thicker than 0.25 inch (6 mm)
will be accepted and evaluated. The same number of ASTM D638 AND D543 specimens, as specified
in 211-2a or 211-2b above, will be required. The allowable weight change value for the 112-Day test
period for these thicker specimens shall conform to the values shown in Table 211-2 (B).
At 28-Day intervals, specimens shall be removed from each chemical solution and tested. If any
specimen fails to meet the 112-Day requirement specified for the material being tested before
completion of the 112-Day exposure, the material will be rejected.

TABLE 211-2 (B)

1,2
Thickness of Sample Weight Change
Inches (mm)
0.375 (9.5) ± 0.75 %
0.50 (12.7) ± 0.63 %
0.75 (19.1) ± 0.50 %
1.0 (25.4) ± 0.44 %
1.5 (38.1) ± 0.38 %
1. With respect to initial test results.
2. Allowable percent weight gain or loss for the thickness between the designated values can be a straight line interpretation.

If required by the type of material being evaluated, additional size and quantity specimens may be
required in order to meet the testing and ASTM requirements in the section for the material.
Five of the ASTM D638 specimens and 16 of the ASTM D543 specimens for the type of material
being tested shall be submersed in each of the 9 solutions listed in Table 211-2 (A). At 28-Day
intervals, 4 specimens shall be removed from each chemical solution, tested for weight change and the
percent weight gain or loss shall be recorded. Required physical property testing shall be obtained at
0 and 112 Days. The chemical strength of each solution shall be tested and replaced if not in
compliance with the required values shown in Table 211-2 (A). If any specimen fails to meet the 112-

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 221

Day requirement specified for the material being tested before completion of the 112-Day exposure,
the material will be rejected.
The Contractor shall furnish a Certificate of Compliance, signed by an authorized representative of
the testing laboratory, identifying the product, the test results for each of the 9 solutions and
confirming conformance with the Specifications. Supporting test data shall be furnished upon request
by the Engineer.
The chemical resistance test is a qualification test only. Requalification is required only when the
compound formulation changes.
211-3 INFILTRATION CAPACITY TEST.
211-3.1 Test Apparatus. Test apparatus shall consist of a:
a) One gallon (4 L), minimum size, water container with a spout. The spout shall be able to
produce a stream with a circular cross section, the diameter of that which is large enough to
discharge the entire contents of the container in 20 seconds or less;
b) Stopwatch capable of indicating elapsed time to the nearest second;
c) Tape measure of at least 36 inches (900 mm) that is graduated in 1/4 inch (6 mm) increments or
smaller.
211-3.2 Water. Water shall be free of suspended solids. The volume of water shall be determined
to 2 significant figures.
211-3.3 Test Procedure. The testing procedure shall be as follows:
a) Place a pre-measured amount of water into the container.
b) Pour the water onto the surface in one spot. Control the discharge rate by manually adjusting the
angle of the spout so that the diameter of the pool of water is between 10 to 30 inches (250 mm to 750
mm). Empty the container holding the spout over the spot until the pool of water vanishes.
c) Start the stopwatch when the water initially touches the concrete surface and stop it when the
pool disappears from the surface.
d) Measure the longest dimension (d1) of the dampened area. Measure the width (d2) of the pool
perpendicular to d1.
e) Repeat this procedure at a minimum of 4 separate locations.
211-3.4 Infiltration Capacity. Infiltration Capacity shall be calculated as follows:
a) The formula for U.S. Standard Measures shall be: IC=(V)(3,326,400)/(π)(d1)(d2)(t) inches per hour.
b) The formula for SI Units shall be: IC=(V)(14.4X106)/(π)(d1)(d2)(t) cm per hour.
Where:
IC is Infiltration Capacity
V is the volume of water in gallons or liters
d1 and d2 are the dimensions that were determined in part 211-3.3
π is approximately 3.14159
211-3.5 Test Report. The test report shall include:
a) The time and date of testing.
b) The name and affiliation of the person performing the test.
c) The location of the Work site.
d) The location of each test site tested within the Work site.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
222 Greenbook 2021

e) The volume of water used at each test site.

f) The length of the two measurements taken at each test site.
g) The discharge time for the water at each test site.
h) The Infiltration Capacity at each test site.
i) The average Infiltration Capacity for the Work site.
211-4 HAND HELD VISCOMETER TEST.
211-4.1 Test Apparatus. Test apparatus shall consist of the following:
a) Viscometer: Haake Model VT – 02 rotational viscometer or equivalent.
b) Spindle: Rotor No. 1, diameter 24 mm ± 0.1 mm, height 53 mm ± 0.1 mm or equivalent.
c) Thermometer: Digital with metal-jacketed probe, 1ºF (1ºC) precision.
d) Sample Container: 1 gallon metal can with wire bale.
e) Standard Fluids: per fluid manufacturer’s recommendations, calibrate viscometer in absolute
viscosity (centipoises).
211-4.2 Calibration. The viscometer shall be calibrated in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. The accuracy of the viscometer shall be verified by comparing the viscosity results
obtained with the hand held viscometer to 3 separate calibration fluids of known viscosity ranging from
1000 to 5000 centipoises. The viscometer will be considered accurate if the values obtained are within
300 centipoises of the known viscosity. The known viscosity value shall be based on the fluid
manufacturer’s standard test temperature or the test temperature versus viscosity correlation table
provided by the fluid manufacturer. The viscometer calibration may be performed at an offsite
laboratory and a Certificate of Compliance conforming to 4-5 verifying the calibration shall be submitted
to the Engineer.
211-4.3 Test Procedure. The test procedure shall be in accordance with the following:
a) Obtain a representative sample of asphalt rubber binder from an appropriate sample valve during
production. Prior to sampling, run a 1 gallon (4 L) sample of binder through the sampling valve
and discard the sample. Place a clean 1 gallon (4 L) sample can under the sampling valve and fill
the container to approximately 85 percent full.
b) Transport the sample immediately to the testing location. The testing location shall be close to
the sampling location to avoid undue temperature loss. The temperature of the binder prior to
sampling shall be a minimum of 375ºF (190ºC). The sample container shall then be placed on a
smooth, level support for testing.
c) The binder shall be continuously stirred using an appropriate metal stirring rod. Use of the
temperature probe is permitted. Insert the temperature probe into the binder and check the
temperature. Stirring shall continue until the binder reaches a temperature of 375ºF ± 5ºF (190ºC
± 3ºC).
d) The viscometer spindle shall be cleaned in a suitable solvent and free of any binder material prior
to the test. While holding the viscometer over the sample container insert the spindle of the
viscometer into the sample container near the side of the container and turn the viscometer on.
While the spindle is rotating, move the spindle in and out of the binder 3 times to bring the
spindle up to the temperature of the binder. Continue stirring the binder.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 223

e) Determine the viscosity of the binder at 375ºF ± 5ºF (190ºC ± 3ºC) as follows:
1) In one continuous operation, remove the spindle vertically from the binder, turn off the
spindle rotation after the binder stops dripping from the spindle (after heating), and
immediately insert the spindle back into the center of the binder sample until fully immersed.
2) Wait 5 seconds to fill the spindle. While holding the viscometer level, turn the spindle on,
watch the needle on the viscometer dial and record the maximum value obtained on the dial.
3) Record the test temperature and maximum viscosity. (The viscometer shall be maintained
and operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. However, this test method
shall apply if there are any differences in the instructions for the determination of the
viscosity.)
f) Report the following information for the viscosity test:
1) Name of the technician performing the viscometer test,
2) date and location of the plant,
3) asphalt rubber binder supplier,
4) binder test temperature and viscosity,
5) spindle size and rotational speed in revolutions per minute, and viscometer model and
serial number.
211-5 MOVING AVERAGE COMPUTATIONS. The moving average shall be computed as follows:
The moving average shall be rounded to the same number of significant figures as are reported for
individual test results. When the figure to be dropped is less than 5, round down, if greater than 5, round
up, and if it is 5, round up or down to the even number.
The moving average shall be continuous for the individual material processing or batch plant. In
determining a moving average for a material property, all of the individual test results that represent
material actually used in the Work shall be used in the calculation. The test results shall be entered into
the calculation sequence in the chronological order that the Work is performed. The first individual test
result shall start the moving average and shall meet the moving average requirements. Until more than 4
test results are available, the moving average shall be the numerical average of the individual test results.
When more than 4 test results are available the moving average shall be determined by multiplying the
last moving average by 4, adding the new result to this product and then dividing this sum by 5.
In computing the moving average, whenever an upper calculation limit value for an individual test is
stated in the Specifications, the upper calculation limit value shall be used in the calculation in lieu of
any actual individual test results which exceed said upper calculation limit value.
211-6 RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP) CORRECTION FACTOR.
211-6.1 General. A RAP correction factor must be determined for asphalt concrete mixtures
containing greater than 25 percent reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP). The RAP correction factor shall
be determined in accordance with Caltrans Lab Procedure LP-9 dated May 22, 2006. This factor shall be
used in determining the combined gradation of the virgin aggregates and RAP.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
224 Greenbook 2021

SECTION 212 – WATER AND SEWER SYSTEM VALVES AND APPURTENANCES

212-1 GENERAL.
212-1.1 Submittal Package. Before ordering or shipping materials, the Contractor shall submit the
following in accordance with 3-8.4:

TABLE 212-1.1
Submittal Description
Shop Drawings Required for valves larger than 16” (400 mm) diameter.
Supporting Information Required for all water and sewer system valves and appurtenances furnished.
a) Catalog data (with items, options, sizes and pressure ratings to be furnished clearly
highlighted or otherwise indicated on the submittal.)
b) Interior lining and exterior coating data and thicknesses.
c) NSF 61 Certificate of Compliance for potable water applications.
d) California AB 1953 Certificate of Compliance for potable water applications.
e) Certificate of Compliance with referenced AWWA standards.
f) Certified test results for tests required by AWWA standards – proof of design and
hydrostatic tests in both directions.
g) Installation instructions
h) Manufacturer’s operation, maintenance, and warranty instructions.
Cavitation Calculations a) Required for valves intended for throttling or pressure regulating service where
normal pressure drop across valve exceeds 40 psi (0.275 MPa).
b) If calculations indicate valves specified in the Contract Documents are improperly
sized or specified, or if internal cavitation trim is not specified but believed to be
required, submit a letter to the Engineer requesting the appropriate variance.

212-1.2 Products Conveying Potable Water. Products conveying potable water shall:
a) bear a marking showing compliance with NSF 61,
b) have an interior lining listed as complying with NSF 61,
c) bear a marking showing compliance with NSF 372 if constructed of bronze or brass, and
d) contain no more than 0.25 percent lead by average weight in compliance with Section 116875 of
the California Health and Safety Code.
Solder shall be tin-silver solder conforming to ASTM B32, Grade Sb5. Cored solder shall not be
used. Solder and flux used in joints of potable waterlines shall contain no more than 0.2 percent lead.
Water service-lateral and on-site piping products shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 6 of
the California Plumbing Code.
Stainless steel products may be substituted for bronze or brass products provided dielectric
protection is provided between stainless steel and bronze or copper alloys.
212-1.3 Products Conveying Fluids Other than Potable Water. Products conveying fluids other
than potable water shall conform to the following requirements:
a) Pipeline, valve, and pipeline appurtenance materials shall be chemically compatible with
chemicals and solutions handled. If any portion of a specified valve is chemically incompatible
with chemicals or solutions handled, the Contractor shall submit a valve with appropriate
materials stating the reason for the exception request.
b) NSF International marking is not required for piping not intended for potable water service.
c) Brass products carrying sewage shall be lead-free.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 225

212-2 FLANGED AND THREADED CONNECTIONS.

212-2.1 Threaded Ends. Threaded ends of pipe and appurtenances shall conform to ASME/ANSI
B1.20.1 NPT National Pipe Thread Taper and ASME/ANSI B2.1.
212-2.2 Flanges. Flanges shall be cast iron, ductile iron, PVC, fiberglass, steel or stainless steel, raised or
plain-faced, as shown on the Plans. For design pressures in excess of 150 pounds per square inch (1.0 MPa),
only ductile iron, steel, or stainless steel flanges and cast ferrous valve components shall be used.
212-2.3 Flange Drilling. Flange drilling shall conform to the following:

TABLE 212-2.3
Design Pressure Material Required Drilling Pattern
0 -150 psi Cast Iron Flanges ASME/ANSI B16.1 Class 125.
(0 -1.0 MPa) Ductile Iron Flanges ASME/ANSI B16.42 Class 150.
Carbon Steel Flanges AWWA C207 Class D or E.
150 - 250 psi Ductile Iron Flanges ASME/ANSI B16.42 Class 150.
(1.0 -1.7 MPa) Carbon Steel Flanges AWWA C207 Class E.
250 - 300 psi Ductile Iron Flanges ASME/ANSI B16.42 Class 300.
(1.7 – 2.1 MPa) Carbon Steel Flanges AWWA C207 Class F.
> 300 psi Carbon Steel Flanges Provide drilling pattern and gasket appropriate
(> 2.1 MPa) for temperature and class of service.

212-2.4 Flange Drilling Alignment. Bolt holes of flanged valves shall straddle horizontal and
vertical centerlines of pipe run.
212-2.5 Flange, Coupling, and Harness Bolts, Nuts, and Washers.
212-2.5.1 Buried Ferrous or Plastic Piping Applications. Unless otherwise specified, flange,
coupling, and harness bolts, nuts and washers for buried ferrous or plastic piping or ferrous or plastic
piping in underground structures shall conform to the following:

TABLE 212-2.5.1
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Bolts for Underground Ferrous SAE Type 316 Stainless ASTM A193 B8M T-316.
Installations Steel Heavy hexagon series.
ANSI B1.1 Class 2A fit.
1/4” to 1/2” (6 mm -12.5 mm) shall project through tightened
nut.
Threading per ANSI/ASME B18.2.1
Bolt-Head Identification Mark – “B8M”
Nuts for Underground Ferrous SAE Type 316 Stainless ASTM A194 8M T-316.
Installations Steel Heavy hexagon series.
ANSI B1.1 Class 2B fit.
Threading per ANSI/ASME B18.2.2
1/4” to 1/2” (6 mm -12.5 mm) shall project through tightened
nut.
Coating for New Bolts and Nickel-Phosphate
Nuts undercoating
PTFE (Teflon), Fluorokote
#1, Xylan 1424, or Equal
Fluoropolymer Coating
Coating for Existing Bolts and Antiseize Lubricant
Nuts
Washers Same material as bolt. Provide one washer for each nut.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
226 Greenbook 2021

212-2.5.2 Above-Ground Ferrous or Plastic Piping Applications. Unless otherwise specified,

flange, coupling, and harness bolts, nuts and washers for above-ground ferrous or plastic piping shall
conform to the following:

TABLE 212-2.5.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Bolts for Above-Ground SAE Type 316 Stainless ASTM A193 B8M-316.
Ferrous Installations Steel or Heavy hexagon series.
ANSI B1.1 Class 2A fit.
Class 3A fit may be used for holes tapped for studs.
1/4” to 1/2” (6 mm -12.5 mm) shall project through tightened
nut.
Threads may be either cut or cold-formed.
Threading per ANSI/ASME B18.2.1.
Bolt-Head Identification Mark – “B8M”
Zinc-Plated Carbon Steel ASTM A307 Grade B.
Heavy hexagon series.
ANSI B1.1 Class 2A fit.
Class 3A fit may be used for holes tapped for studs.
1/4” to 1/2” (6 mm-12.5 mm) shall project through tightened
nut.
Threads may be either cut or cold-formed.
Threading per ANSI/ASME B18.2.1.
Bolt-Head Identification Mark – “A307B”
Nuts for Above-Ground Zinc-Plated Carbon Steel ASTM A563.
Ferrous Installations or Heavy hexagon series.
ANSI B1.1 Class 2B fit.
Threading per ANSI/ASME B18.2.2.
SAE Type 316 Stainless ASTM A194 8M T-316.
Steel ASTM Heavy hexagon series.
ANSI B1.1 Class 2B fit.
Threading per ANSI/ASME B18.2.2.
Coating for New Bolts and Nickel-Phosphate
Nuts undercoating
PTFE (Teflon), Fluorokote
#1, Xylan 1424 or Equal
Fluoropolymer Coating
Coating for Existing Bolts and Anti-Seize Lubricant Use on SAE Type 316 hardware.
Nuts Non-Oxide Grease Use on zinc-plated carbon steel hardware.
Washers Same material as bolt. Provide one washer for each nut.

212-2.5.3 Applications in Corrosive, High-Chloride, or Saltwater Environments. Unless

otherwise specified, flange, coupling, and harness bolts, nuts and washers for above-ground or buried
ferrous or plastic piping in corrosive environments shall conform to the following:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 227

TABLE 212-2.5.3
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Bolts for Above-Ground SAE Type 316 Stainless ASTM A193 B8M T-316.
Ferrous Installations Steel Heavy hexagon series.
ANSI B1.1 Class 2A fit.
Class 3A fit may be used for holes tapped for studs.
1/4” to 1/2” (6 mm -12.5 mm) shall project through tightened
nut.
Threads may be either cut or cold-formed.
Threading per ANSI/ASME B18.2.1.
Bolt-Head Identification Mark – “B8M”
Nuts for Above-Ground SAE Type 316 Stainless ASTM A194 8M316, Grade 1 or 2.
Ferrous Installations Steel ASTM Heavy hexagon series ANSI B1.1 Class 2B fit.
Threading per ANSI/ASME B18.2.2.
Lubrication for Above-ground Oil and Graphite, Blue
or Vault-enclosed Steel Bolt Fluoropolymer Coating or
Threads Accepted Valve
Manufacturer’s Anti-seize
Coating
Coating for Buried Nuts and Commercially Available 2 coats, minimum 15 mils (400 µm) per coat.
Bolts Coating Expressly
Manufactured for Buried
Applications or
AWWA C217 Petrolatum Primer, wax, and 40-mil (1 mm) tape per AWWA C217.
Wax and Wax-Tape System 1” (25 mm) minimum tape overlap with 1.5-mil (40 µm) clear
metallocene resin tape outer wrap.
Washers Same material and coating Provide one washer for each nut.
as bolt. Nickel-phosphate undercoating.

212-2.5.4 Applications where Heavy Hexagon Heads will Not Fit Valves. Where heavy hexagon
series bolts and nuts will not fit cast flanges, finished SAE type 316 stainless steel finished hex bolts and
nuts conforming to ASTM F593 Grade G or H and ASTM F594 Grade G or H shall be substituted.
212-2.5.5 Above-Ground Bronze Piping Applications. Unless otherwise specified, flange, coupling,
and harness bolts, nuts and washers for above-ground bronze piping shall conform to the following:

TABLE 212-2.5.5
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Bolts for Above-Ground Bronze Low-Silicon Bronze Grade ASTM B98 or ASTM F468.
Installations C65100 or Grade C63000 Finished hexagon series.
ANSI B1.1 Class 2A fit.
1/4” to 1/2” (6 mm-12.5 mm) shall project through tightened
nut.
Threads may be either cut or cold-formed.
Threading per ANSI/ASME B18.2.1.
Bolt-Head Identification Mark – “651,” “SB,” or unmarked.
Nuts for Above-Ground Bronze Low-Silicon Bronze Grade ASTM B98 or ASTM F467.
Installations C65100 or Grade C63000 to Finished hexagon series.
match bolt material ANSI B1.1 Class 2B fit.
1/4” to 1/2” (6 mm-12.5 mm) shall project through tightened
nut.
Threads may be either cut or cold-formed.
Threading per ANSI/ASME B18.2.1.
Washers Same material as bolt. Provide one washer for each nut.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
228 Greenbook 2021

212-2.6 Bonnet Bolts, Cover Bolts, and Cap Screws. Bonnet bolts, cover bolts, and cap screws
shall be constructed of the same materials specified for flange bolts.
212-2.7 Flange Gaskets.
212-2.7.1 General. Flange gaskets on metallic flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.21.
The thickness shall be 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum, except PTFE (Teflon) gaskets may be 1/16 inch
(1.5 mm) thick.
Gaskets for design pressures up to 300 pounds per square inch (2.1 MPa) shall have design pressure
rating of 350 pounds per square inch (2.4 MPa) at 180ºF (82ºC).
Gaskets shall be the full-face type with pre-punched bolt holes where both flanges are flat-face. Ring
flange gaskets extending to the inner edge of the bolt circle may be used where a raised-face flange is present.
212-2.7.2 Materials. Flange gasket material shall be asbestos-free and conform to the following:

TABLE 212-2.7.2
Application Allowable Flange Gasket Materials
Water or Wastewater Piping in SBR (styrene butadiene rubber) with cloth insert
Normal Soils EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer)
CR (neoprene polychloroprene)
NBR (Nitrile) (acrylonitrile butadiene)
PTFE (Teflon) GoreTex (GR)
SBR-Fiber Non-Asbestos Composite
Water or Wastewater Piping in NBR (Nitrile) (acrylonitrile butadiene)
Contaminated Soils or Hydrocarbon FLUOREL or FKM (Viton) (fluorocarbon)
Piping in Normal Soils

212-2.8 Dissimilar Metals.

212-2.8.1 General. Dissimilar metals, when used in conjunction with each other shall have
insulation provided between adjoining surfaces that eliminate direct contact and electrical current flow
Dissimilar metal pipe connections shall conform to the following where insulation is required:

TABLE 212-2.8.1
Pipe Material
Existing Steel New Steel Cast Iron or Stainless Copper,
Ductile Iron Steel Brass or
Bronze
Existing Steel (NR) Insulation is Insulation is Insulation is Insulation is
required required required required
New Steel Insulation is (NR) Insulation is Insulation is Insulation is
required required required required
Contacting
Cast Iron or Insulation is Insulation is (NR) Insulation is Insulation is
Pipe
Ductile Iron required required required required
Material
Stainless Steel Insulation is Insulation is Insulation is (NR) Insulation is
required required required required
Copper, Brass Insulation is Insulation is Insulation is Insulation is (NR)
or Bronze required required required required
1. (NR) = Not required
2. Insulating kits or bushings are not required in the following cases:
a) Where indicated as not required (NR) in the table above or in the Special Provisions.
b) Where connecting any pipe material to plastic, fiberglass, clay or concrete pipe with no exposed reinforcing steel.
c) Where new steel pipe is welded to existing steel pipe.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 229

212-2.8.2 Insulation of Threaded Connections. Threaded insulating bushings shall be furnished

and installed where dissimilar threaded piping materials come into contact.
212-2.8.3 Flange Insulating Kits.
212-[Link] General. Flange insulating kits shall be furnished and installed where flanges of
dissimilar metals mate,
212-[Link] Materials. Flange insulating kits shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Insulating Gaskets Dielectric Phenolic 500 V/mil dielectric strength.
25 ksi compressive strength.
Gasket Seal Element NBR (Nitrile)
Insulating Sleeves Mylar 4000 V/mil dielectric strength.
< 0.8% water absorption.
Insulating Washers for Bolts Phenolic 500 V/mil dielectric strength.
33 ksi compressive strength.
< 1.6% water absorption.
Steel Washers over Insulating Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Washers

212-[Link] Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Insulating Gaskets Gaskets Full faced with bolt holes.
Thickness 1/8” (3 mm) minimum.
Drilling Match adjacent flanges.
Flange Isolation Kits Type Double-insulating (2 steel washers + 2 insulating washers +
1 full-length insulating sleeve per bolt).
Insulating Washers Dimensions 1/8” (3 mm) minimum thickness.
ID of washer shall fit over isolating sleeve.
Steel Washers over Insulating Dimensions 1/8” (3 mm) minimum thickness.
Washers Steel and isolating washer shall have same ID and OD.

212-2.9 Mastic and Tape-Wrap Systems.

212-2.9.1 General. When specified, a 3-stage mastic tape-wrap system shall be applied in addition
to required polyethylene encasement. Mastic and tape wrap systems shall cover appurtenant flanges,
bolts, nuts, tie-rods, turnbuckles, restraint devices, couplings and appurtenances.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
230 Greenbook 2021

212-2.9.2 Materials. Mastic and tape-wrap systems shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-2.9.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
AWWA C217 Petrolatum and Surface Preparation SSPC SP1 solvent cleaning.
Petroleum Wax Tape Coatings Remove weld spatter, sharp points and edges.
for the Exterior of Connections On pipe with rust, paint or foreign matter, surface prep per
and Fittings for Steel Water SSPC SP2 hand-tool cleaning, or SSPC SP3 power-tool
Pipelines cleaning requirements. High pressure wash of 3,000-7,000
psi (2-5 MPa) is also acceptable.
Petrolatum Primer AWWA C217 primer containing moisture displacing,
corrosion-inhibiting compounds.
Mastic After priming, use product of manufacturer supplying
petrolatum primer and wax tape to mold mastic into a
rounded configuration to completely fill irregular shapes and
reduce sharp-edge surfaces.
Petrolatum Tape AWWA C217 Petrolatum and Petroleum Wax Tape Exterior
Coating.
Tape Width – 4” (100- mm) 4” (100 mm)
Pipe and under
Tape Width – 6”-12” (150- 9” (225 mm)
mm- 300- mm) Pipe
Tape Width – 14” (350 mm) 12” (300 mm)
Pipe and larger
Thickness 40 mils (1 mm) minimum
Minimum Tape Overlap 1” (25 mm)
Outer Wrap 1.5-mil (40 µm) (150-gauge) clear metallocene resin tape.

Mastic/coating shall be applied in a manner ensuring no voids exist under the coating system.

212-3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS, CASING SPACERS, AND WALL PENETRATIONS.
212-3.1 Pipe Hangers and Supports.
212-3.1.1 General. Pipe hangers and supports shall be provided as required by Section 314 of the
California Plumbing Code. Hanger rod sizes shall be as shown in Table 3-1. Support spacing and
frequency shall be as shown in Table 3-2.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 231

212-3.1.2 Materials. Pipe hangers and supports shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-3.1.2
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Bolts (Connection Bolts and High-Strength Carbon steel – ASTM A325 or ASTM A490.
Anchor Bolts) –Steel Galvanized With self-locking nuts or lock-washers and plain nuts.

2
Zinc Coating ASTM A153 - 2.1-mil (53 µm) thickness - 1.30 oz./ft (400
2
g/m )
Bolts (Connection Bolts and Stainless Steel ASTM A193 Grade B8M bolts with ASTM A194 Grade 8M
Anchor Bolts) – Stainless nuts.
Steel Alternate ASTM F593 Type 316 bolts with ASTM F594 SAE
Type 316 nuts.
Washers – same material as nuts.
Bolts – Embedded Eyebolts Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Welded eye type.
Concrete Anchors – Epoxy Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Adhesive Anchor Systems
Concrete Anchors – Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Expansion Bolt Systems
Fiberglass Channel Framing Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Flame-spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM D84.
System Dimensional tolerance per ASTM D3917 and D4385 with
ultraviolet stabilizer.
Powder Actuated Fastening Steel AISI 1061.
Systems Hardness: 52-58 Rockwell C.
2
Galvanized Coating ASTM B633 - 2.1-mil (53 µm) thickness - 1.30 oz./ft (400
2
g/m ).
Pipe and Conduit Hangers Steel
(Above Ground) Galvanized Coating
2
ASTM A153 - 2.1-mil (53 µm) thickness - 1.30 oz./ft (400
2
g/m ).
Pipe and Conduit Hangers Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
(Below Ground or Exposed to Fiberglass
Water)
Washers Carbon steel – Square or rectangular smooth beveled washers, tapered in
Galvanized thickness.
2
Galvanized Coating ASTM A153 - 2.1-mil (53 µm) thickness - 1.30 oz./ft.
Welding Electrode – Steel Steel Electrodes AWS D1.1 E70xx except E7024 rods or electrodes shall not
be used.
Welding Electrode – Stainless Steel Electrodes Type 347.
Steel

Zinc coatings shall be applied by the hot-dipped or electro-depositing process. Zinc shall
conform to ASTM B6.
After fabrication, all steel not shown or specified to be galvanized or stainless shall receive one coat
of a pigmented primer recommended by the manufacturer of the final paint system. Parts inaccessible
after assembly shall receive a second coat of the same primer. Final painting shall conform to the
requirements specified in the Special Provisions.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
232 Greenbook 2021

212-3.2 Casing Spacers.

212-3.2.1 Metallic Casing Spacers. Metallic casing spacers (casing insulators or pipe skids) shall be
constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-3.2.1
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Casing Spacer Band Stainless Steel SAE Type 304.
14-gauge (1.98 mm) minimum.
8” (200 mm) minimum width with 2 runners on top and 2 on
bottom for carrier pipe < 14” (350 mm) diameter.
12” (300 mm) minimum width with 2 runners on top and 4 on
bottom for carrier pipe 14” (350 mm) diameter and greater.
Center-restrained, position type.
Liner PVC 0.090” thick.
Risers Stainless Steel SAE Type 304.
10-gauge (3.57 mm) minimum.
Welded to band.
Anti-Friction Runners Polyethylene, Polypropylene Heavy-duty, 2” (50 mm) minimum width at ends.
or
Glass-Reinforced Polymer
Studs, Nuts and Washers Stainless Steel 5/16” (8 mm) AISI Type 304.

212-3.2.2 Non-Metallic Casing Spacers. Non-metallic casing spacers (casing insulators or pipe
skids) shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-3.2.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Casing Spacer Band and Risers Polypropylene Center-restrained, position type.

[Link] Casing End Seals. Casing end seals shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-3.2.3
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Casing End Seal Butadiene Rubber Sheet 1/4” (6 mm) thick.
Heat-shrinkable sleeve Minimum 2500 psi (17 MPa) tensile strength.
Use thixotropic adhesive sealant.
Bands and Hardware Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.

212-3.2.4 Casing Spacer Dimensions. Casing insulators shall be of such dimensions to center the
carrier pipe within the casing and prevent it from floating. There shall be at least 1 inch (25 mm) but no
more than 2 inches (50 mm) of clearance between the top runner and the soffit of the casing.
212-3.3 Wall Pipes, Seep Rings, and Penetrations.
212-3.3.1 General. Wall pipes or sleeves, and seep rings (collars) shall be furnished and installed at
all pipe and conduit penetrations of new concrete walls, floors. slabs, and ceilings.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 233

212-3.3.2 Materials. Wall pipes and seep rings shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-3.3.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
ASTM A53 Type E or S Grade B or
ASTM A135 Grade B or
Fabricated Wall Sleeves Steel Pipe ASTM A139 Grade B or
Containing Pipe API 5L or 5LX.
Standard Weight Thickness per ANSI B36.10.
PVC Schedule 40 minimum.
Material and thickness to match connecting pipe.
Fabricated Steel Wall Sleeves
Steel Pipe Provide with ends as shown for connection to adjacent
Connecting to Steel Pipe
steel pipes.
Wall Collar on Steel Wall
Steel ASTM A105, A181 or A182.
Sleeve
Polyethylene Foam Filler for Extruded closed-cell Rod or disc shall be 1/2” (12.5 mm) larger in diameter
Pipe Penetrations polyethylene foam rod or disc than annular space.

212-3.4 Rubber Annular Hydrostatic Sealing Devices.

212-3.4.1 General. Rubber annular hydrostatic sealing devices shall be modular mechanical type
using interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between a wall
sleeve and passing pipe or conduit. Assembled links shall form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe
or conduit, with pressure a plate under each bolt head and nut. The minimum sealing width shall be 4
inches (100 mm).
212-3.4.2 Materials. Rubber annular hydrostatic sealing devices shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-3.4.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Carbon Steel or Glass
Pressure Plate
Reinforced Plastic Composite
ASTM F593.
Type 316.
Bolts and Nuts for Links Stainless Steel
Rod shall be 1/2” (12.5 mm) larger in diameter than
annular space.
EPDM Rubber (for Water,
Wastewater or Treatment Black.
Chemical Applications)
Sealing Element NBR (Nitrile Rubber) (for Oil
Green.
and Fuel Applications)
Silicone Rubber for Fire Wall
Gray.
Applications

212-4 VALVE ACTUATORS, EXTENSIONS, AND VALVE BOXES.

212-4.1 Direction of Operation. Valves and hydrants shall open by turning the nut, lever actuator,
or handwheel counterclockwise.
212-4.2 Valve Operators for Buried or Submerged Valves.
212-4.2.1 General. Buried valves and valves within manholes or pipe trenches shall have standard
2-inch (50 mm) AWWA actuator nuts. Shaft seals, valves, and actuator cover gaskets shall be watertight,
totally enclosed, and designed for buried service.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
234 Greenbook 2021

212-4.2.2 Valve Extension Stems. Extension stems on valves shall be furnished and installed
wherever the valve centerline is more than 4 feet (1.2 m) below the finish grade or water surface. The
extension stem shall bring the nut to within 6 inches (150 mm) below the finished grade or water
surface. Stem extensions shall be pinned to the valve operating nut.
Extension stem diameters shall conform to the following:

TABLE 212-4.2.2
Valve Size Minimum Extension Stem Diameter
3”, 4” (75 mm, 100 mm) ⅞” (22 mm)
6” (150 mm) 1” (25 mm)
8” (200 mm) 1-⅛” (29 mm)
10” – 12” (250 mm - 300 mm) 1-¼” (32 mm)
14” (350 mm) 1-⅜” (35 mm)
16” – 18” (400 mm - 450 mm) 1-½” (38 mm)
20” – 36” (600 mm - 900 mm) 1-¾” (45 mm)
42”- 54” (1050 mm - 1350 mm) 2” (50 mm)

212-4.2.3 Valve Cans and Covers for Buried Valves.

212-[Link] General. Valve cans and covers shall be constructed over all buried valve operators, but
not in manholes, vaults, tunnels, or pipe trenches.
212-[Link] Materials. Unless otherwise specified, valve boxes shall be H-20 traffic rated and
constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
ASTM A126 Class B.
Cast Iron or
Valve Boxes Two-piece.
PVC AWWA C900 DR 14, color as appropriate for conveyed fluid.
ASTM A126 Class B.
Valve Box Covers Cast Iron Solid skirt.
20-lb minimum weight.
Extension Pipes Cast Iron ASTM A126 Class B.

212-[Link] Valve Position Indicators for Buried Valves. Valve position indicators shall be
designed to fit standard 5-1/4-inch (133 mm) valve boxes. Indicators shall show the valve position and
direction, and the number of turns required to fully open or close the valve.
212-4.3 Valve Operators for Above-Ground Valves.
212-4.3.1 General. Above-ground valves 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter and smaller shall have
hand or lever operators or handwheels with position indicators. Above-ground valves 8 inches (200 mm)
in diameter and larger shall have handwheels with position indicators.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 235

212-4.3.2 Stem Position for Valve Operators for Above-Ground Valves. Unless otherwise
shown or directed by Engineer, valve stems shall be furnished and installed in the following positions:

TABLE 212-4.3.2
Valve Location Stem Position
Horizontal pipe runs with centerline elevations no higher than Install stems vertical.
4’-6” (1.38 m) above floor.
Horizontal pipe runs with centerline elevations higher than 4’- Install stems horizontal.
6” (1.38 m) but less than 6’ 9” (2 m) above floor.
Manually operated valves 6’-9” (2 m) or more above floor or Provide chain-wheel and guide actuators with position
finish surface. indicator.
Vertical pipe runs next to walls. Install stems horizontal and facing away from wall.

212-4.4 Gear Actuators. Gear actuators shall be enclosed and grease-lubricated, with seals on the
shafts to prevent entry of dirt and water. Buried service gears shall be 90 percent-minimum grease-
packed. Stop limiting devices shall be furnished and installed in actuators in open and closed positions.
Actuators shall be self-locking to prevent disc or plug from creeping unless otherwise approved.
Actuator gearing shall be as follows:

TABLE 212-4.4
Application Gearing
Actuators on Manual Butterfly, Ball and Plug Valves 4”-30” Enclosed worm and gear or enclosed traveling- nut-type gear
(100 mm – 750 mm) actuators with position indicator.
Actuators on Manual Butterfly, Ball and Plug Valves 36” (900 Enclosed worm and gear type gear actuators with position
mm) and Larger indicator.
Actuators on All Motorized Butterfly, Ball and Plug Valves Enclosed worm and gear type gear actuators with position
indicator.

212-4.5 Floor Stands and Extension Stems. Floor stands shall be the cast or ductile iron base, non-
rising, stem indicating type with SAE Type 316 stainless steel extension stems, couplings and stem
guide brackets spaced such that L/R does not exceed 150. Anchor bolts shall be constructed of SAE
Type 316 stainless steel.
212-4.6 Chain-Wheels and Guides. Chain-wheels and guides shall be galvanized or zinc-plated, or
aluminum, extending to within 4 feet (1.2 m) of the operating floor elevation. Chains shall be galvanized
steel, SAE Type 316 stainless steel, or zinc-plated steel. Anchor bolts shall be constructed of SAE Type
316 stainless steel.
212-4.7 Valve Operator Torque. Where operating torque requirements for valve operators are not
stipulated by AWWA standards, valves shall open with a maximum pull of 80 pounds (355 N) on the
hand-wheel, lever, chain-wheel or crank and a maximum torque input of 150 foot-pounds (203 J) when
differential pressure across valve is equal to rated pressure class of valve. Actuator components shall be
designed to withstand, without damage, a pull of 200 pounds (890 N) on the hand-wheel, lever, chain-
wheel or crank and a maximum torque input of 300 foot-pounds (407 J) when operating against stops.
Actuators shall be sized to produce torque no less than 1.25 times the valve torque required to
operate the valve at full rated pressure and a velocity of 16 feet per second (5 m/s).
212-4.8 Minimum Turns to Open Valve. For gate valves, the minimum number of turns to open
shall be as shown in AWWA C515, Table 7. For other valves with traveling nut or worm gear operators,

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
236 Greenbook 2021

the minimum number of turns to open the valve shall be 1.5 times the valve diameter in inches, (38
times the valve diameter in mm) but no fewer than 30 turns.
212-5 VALVES.
212-5.1 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves.
212-5.1.1 General. Gate valves shall be the reduced-wall resilient-wedge type, conforming to
AWWA C515.
212-5.1.2 Materials. Gate valves shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-5.1.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Body Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Trim Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Stem and Stem Nut Low-Zinc Bronze Maximum 7% zinc, 2% aluminum.
Minimum tensile strength = 70,000 psi (480 MPa).
Minimum yield strength = 40,000 psi (275 MPa).
Elongation >15% in 2” (50 mm).
Visibly mark stem to show compliance with above.
Wedge – Potable Water Ductile Iron with Vulcanized Fully-encapsulated.
Applications Rubber Coating
Wedge – Recycled Water Ductile Iron with Ethylene- Fully-encapsulated.
Applications Propylene Diene Monomer ASTM D429.
(EPDM) Coating Peroxide-cured.
O-Rings Synthetic Rubber ASTM D2000.

212-5.1.3 Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-5.1.3
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Resilient Wedge Gate Valves Stem Seal Double O-ring type.
Stem Non-rising stem unless otherwise shown.
Actuator 2” (50 mm) AWWA stem nut required on buried operators
Handwheel Required on above-ground valves or valves in vaults unless
otherwise shown.
Resilient Wedge Fully-encapsulated.
Markings Manufacturer's name or logo, size of valve, year of
manufacture, and design pressure rating shall be cast
in valve bonnet or body.
Body shall have arrow cast in metal to show direction of
opening.
Ends Flange x flange, flange x mechanical joint or mechanical
joint x mechanical joint unless otherwise shown.
Polyethylene Encasement Polyethylene Film 212-12.1.1.
Color per 212-12.2.

212-5.1.4 Tapping Valves. Tapping valves shall be resilient wedge valves with a tapping valve
flanged end. Tapping valves shall be sized to accept tapping machine shell cutters.
212-5.1.5 Tapping Sleeves. Tapping sleeves shall be ductile iron, steel, or stainless steel. Gaskets
shall provide a full-circumferential seal on both sides of the tap capable of withstanding the specified
test pressures or be a positive-seal-type gasket capable of withstanding the specified test pressures.
Flanges shall match adjacent valves.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 237

Size-on-size stainless-steel-type tapping sleeves will not be permitted.

Tapping sleeves may be used for design pressures up to 150 pounds per square inch (1.0 MPa).
Unless otherwise specified, tapping valves shall not be used at higher pressures.
212-5.2 Butterfly Valves.
212-5.2.1 General. Butterfly valves shall be the short-body-type, conforming to AWWA C504.
212-5.2.2 Materials. Butterfly valves shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-5.2.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Body Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Valve Shaft SAE Type 316 Stainless ASTM A276.
Steel
Disc Cast Iron or ASTM A48, Class 40.
or ASTM A136 Class B.
Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 or 70-50-05.
Valve Disc Edge SAE Type 316 Stainless ASTM A276.
Steel
Valve Seat EPDM Rubber ASTM D412.
Peroxide-cured.
Exposed Body Cap Screws, SAE Type 316 Stainless ASTM A276 with anti-seize lubricant or blue fluoropolymer
Bolts, and Nuts including Steel coating.
Squeeze Pins

212-5.2.3 Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-5.2.3
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Butterfly Valves Stem and Stem Nut Non-rising stem.
Seat Mounting Secure resilient seat to valve body.
Valve Shaft Sealing Self-adjusting and wear-compensating. Do not use manually
adjustable packing glands on buried valves.
Ends Flange x flange unless otherwise shown.
Polyethylene Encasement Polyethylene Film 212-12.1.1.
Color per 212-12.2.

212-5.3 Plug Valves.

212-5.3.1 General. Plug valves shall be the resilient-seated, cast iron, eccentric-type conforming to
AWWA C517.
212-5.3.2 Materials. Plug valves shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-5.3.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Body Ductile Iron or ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Cast Iron ASTM A126 Grade B.
Body Seat Nickel
Plug Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Bearings SAE Type 316 Stainless Steel SAE 841 Sintered.
Grit Seals PTFE (Teflon)
Thrust Washers – Top and Bottom PTFE (Teflon)

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
238 Greenbook 2021

212-5.3.3 Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-5.3.3
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Design Eccentric-type.
80% minimum on valves 36” (900 mm) or less,
Plug Valve Port Size
70% on valves 42” (1050 mm) and larger.
Ends Flange x flange unless otherwise shown.

212-5.4 Ball Valves.

212-5.4.1 General. Ball valves less than 6 inches (150 mm) shall be rated for minimum 250 pounds
per square inch (1.7 MPa) water-oil-gas (WOG) pressure and shall be UL listed.
Ball valves 6 inches and larger shall conform to AWWA C507.
212-5.4.2 Materials. Ball valves shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-5.4.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Body Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Valve Ball Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Valve Shaft SAE Type 316 Stainless Steel ASTM A276.
Mount to body.
Valve Seat EPDM Rubber ASTM D429.
Peroxide cured.

212-5.4.3 Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-5.4.3
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Design AWWA C507
Ball Valves Port Size 100%
Ends Flange x flange unless otherwise shown.

212-5.5 Check Valves.

212-5.5.1 Swing-Check Valves.
212-[Link] General. Swing check valves shall conform to AWWA C508.
212-[Link] Materials. Swing check valves shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Body and Cover Ductile Iron or ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Cast Iron ASTM A126 Grade B.
Body and Cover for Pressures over Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
250 psi (1.7 MPa)
Disc and Disc Arm Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Seat SAE Type 316 Stainless Steel ASTM A276.
Pivot Shaft SAE Type 316 Stainless Steel ASTM A276.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 239

212-[Link] Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Design AWWA C508 outside lever and weight.
Swing Check Valves
Ends Flange x flange unless otherwise shown.

212-5.5.2 Dual-Disc Check Valves.

212-[Link] General. Dual-disc check valves shall conform to AWWA C518.
212-[Link] Materials. Dual-disc check valves shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Ductile Iron or ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Body and Door
Cast Iron ASTM A126 Grade B.
Body and Door for Pressures Ductile Iron
ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
over 250 psi (1.7 MPa)
SAE Type 316 Stainless
Hinge and Stop Pins ASTM A276.
Steel

212-[Link] Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
AWWA C518.
Design
Dual-Disc Check Valves Equip valve with closure spring.
Ends Flange x flange unless otherwise shown.

212-5.5.3 Silent Check Valves.

212-[Link] Materials. Silent check valves shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Ductile Iron or ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Body
Cast Iron ASTM A126 Grade B.
Body for Pressures over 250 Ductile Iron
ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
psi (1.7 MPa)
Plug and Seat Bronze NSF 372-compliant for potable water.
SAE Type 316 Stainless
Spring ASTM A276.
Steel

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
240 Greenbook 2021

212-[Link] Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Center-guided valve plug with integral through-shaft and
Design
Silent Check Valves spring-loaded silent shutoff.
Ends Flange x flange unless otherwise shown.

212-5.5.4 Slanting-Disc Check Valves.

212-[Link] Materials. Slanting-disc check valves shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Ductile Iron or ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Body
Cast Iron ASTM A126 Grade B.
Body for Pressures over 250 Ductile Iron
ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
psi (1.7 MPa)
Ductile Iron or
ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Disc and Seat
Cast Iron or ASTM A126 Grade B.
Bronze NSF 372-compliant for potable water.
SAE Type 316 Stainless
Hinge Pin ASTM A276.
Steel
SAE Type 316 Stainless
Spring ASTM A276.
Steel

212-[Link] Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Two-piece construction bolted at center to hold seat at
Design
approximate 55º angle.
Position Indicator Required on valves 6” (150 mm) and larger.
Slanting Disc Check Valves
Valve shall be configurable to accept a top-mounted
Top-Mounted Dashpot
dashpot.
Ends Flange x flange unless otherwise shown.

212-5.5.5 Rubber Flapper Swing Check Valves.

212-[Link] Materials. Rubber flapper swing check valves shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Ductile Iron or ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Body ASTM A48 Class 30 or
Cast Iron
ASTM A126 Class B.
Steel and Rubber Steel Disc insert and steel bar hinge covered with Buna-N
Flapper
vulcanized to metal pieces.
Cover Bolts Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 241

212-[Link] Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-[Link]
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Design Valve shall consist of body, flapper and bolted cover.
Valve Seat Set at 45° angle to pipe centerline.
Rubber Flapper Swing Check Manual Backflow Actuator Required (screw type with stainless steel t-handle).
Valves Provide position indicator or pre-wired limit or proximity
Position Indicator
switch.
Ends Flange x flange unless otherwise shown.

212-5.5.6 Rubber Sleeve In-Line Full-Cross-Section Check Valves. Rubber sleeve inline full-
cross-section check valves shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-5.5.6
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Body Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Rubber Flapper EPDM

212-5.6 Air Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves.

212-5.6.1 General. Air release, air/vacuum and combination air valves shall be capable of passing
all tests described in AWWA C512, Section 5.
212-5.6.2 Materials. Air release, air/vacuum, and combination air valves shall be constructed of
the following:

TABLE 212-5.6.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Body and Cover (Potable and Ductile Iron or ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Recycled Water) Cast Iron ASTM A126 Grade B.
Body and Cover for Pressures
over 250 psi Ductile Iron
ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
(1.7 MPa) (Potable and
Recycled Water)
Body and Cover (Sewage) Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Float, Linkage and Internal Stainless Steel or ASTM A240 SAE Type 316.
Parts Polycarbonate NSF 61 Certified.
Buna N or FKM (Viton) for
Potable Water or Sewage
Seats
EPDM for Recycled Water
or Sewage

212-5.7 Diaphragm-Actuated Pilot-Control Valves.

212-5.7.1 General. Diaphragm-actuated pilot-control valves shall conform to AWWA C530.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
242 Greenbook 2021

212-5.7.2 Materials. Diaphragm-actuated pilot-control valves shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-5.7.2
Item Material Reference
Specification/Requirements
Main Valve Body and Cover, Disc Ductile Iron (for pressures 0-300 psi) ASTM A536.
Retainer and Diaphragm Washer (2.1 MPa)
Main Valve Trim:, Stem, Seat and SAE Type 316 Stainless Steel ASTM A276 or A351.
Bonnet Spring
Stem Guide Bearings, Upper and Lower Brass, ASTM B16.
Bronze, or SAE 660.
SAE Type 316 Stainless Steel ASTM A276.
Disc Buna-N Rubber or
EPDM
Diaphragm Nylon-Reinforced Buna-N Rubber or
EPDM
Pilot Control System Cast Bronze with Lead-free for potable water applications
SAE Type 316 Stainless Steel Trim ASTM A276.
Piping and Tubing Copper and brass Lead free for potable water
applications.
ASTM B75, B88 (copper) and ASTM
B43 (brass).

212-5.7.3 Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-5.7.3
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Diaphragm-Actuated Control Manufacturer’s Standard Where pressure drop across valve exceeds 40 psi (0.275
Valves Internal Cavitation Trim MPa) submit cavitation calculations per 212-1.1 and a
letter to the Engineer requesting a waiver if applicable.
Isolation Valves on Pilot Required on both sides of pilot.
Lines
Opening and Closing Speed Required.
Control
In-Line Y Strainer on Pilot Required.
Line
Stem Self-cleaning.
Ends Flange x flange unless otherwise shown.

212-6 HYDRANTS
212-6.1 Fire Hydrants.
212-6.1.1 General. With the exception of service areas subject to freezing, fire hydrants shall be
the “California” wet-barrel-type, UL-listed and FM-approved, conforming to AWWA C503.
The color scheme and finish shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
Outlet threads shall conform to AWWA C503. Appendix A

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 243

212-6.1.2 Materials. Fire hydrants shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-6.1.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Body Bronze AWWA C503 and NSF 372 lead-free.
Cast Iron AWWA C503.
Outlet Nozzles Bronze AWWA C503 and NSF 372 lead-free.
Cast Iron AWWA C503.
Outlet Nozzle Caps Bronze, Cast Iron or Plastic AWWA C503 and NSF 372 lead-free.
Exposed Body Cap Screws, SAE Type 316 Stainless ASTM A276 with anti-seize lubricant or blue fluoropolymer
Bolts, and Nuts including Steel coating.
Squeeze Pins
Flanges Cast Iron or Ductile Iron Raised or plain-faced.

212-6.1.3 Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-6.1.3
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Design “California” or Wet-Barrel Type AWWA C503.
Body 6” (150 mm) inlet AWWA C503 §4.6.
Hydrant Bury Same Diameter as Hydrant AWWA C503 §4.6.
Outlets – Residential One 4” (100 mm) Pumper AWWA C503.
Hydrants Outlet plus One 2-1/2” (64 mm)
Hose Outlet
Outlets – One 4” (100 mm) Pumper AWWA C503.
Commercial/Industrial Outlets plus Two 2-1/2” (64
Hydrants mm) Hose Outlets
Outlets – Two 4” (100 mm) Pumper AWWA C503.
Commercial/Industrial Outlets plus One 2-1/2” (64
Double-Steamer Hydrants mm) Hose Outlet
Outlet Nozzle Cap Chain Required AWWA C503 §4.6.10.
and Cap Gasket
Threads Conform to National Standard ANSI B26 and NFPA Standard 1963.
for Fire Hose Connections
Hydrant Flange 6” (150 mm) Flange with AWWA C503 §4.6.
Standard 8-hole drilling
Hydrant Bolts Hollow Metal Bolts at Junction ASTM A307 Grade A.
of Hydrant and Hydrant Spool Heavy hexagon series.
ANSI B1.1 Class 2A fit.
5/8”(16 mm) bolt with 11/32” (9 mm) hole drilled 2-3/8” (60
mm) deep into shank and 100% silicon-filled to prevent
internal corrosion.
1/4” to 1/2” (6 mm-12.5 mm) shall project through tightened
nut.
Threading per ANSI/ASME B18.2.1.
Bolt-Head Identification Mark – “A 307 A”

212-7 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES.

212-7.1 General. Backflow prevention devices shall conform to Title 17 of the California Code of
Regulations and Title 24, Part 5 of the California Plumbing Code.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
244 Greenbook 2021

212-7.2 Double Check (DC) Valve Backflow Prevention Assemblies. DC valve backflow
prevention assemblies shall conform to AWWA C510, and shall be IAPMO listed, FM approved, UL
classified, and approved by the Foundation for Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research at the
University of Southern California.
212-7.3 Reduced-Pressure (RP) Backflow Prevention Assemblies. RP backflow prevention
assemblies shall conform to AWWA C511 and shall be IAPMO listed, FM approved, UL classified, and
approved by the Foundation for Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research at the University of
Southern California.
212-8 COUPLINGS.
212-8.1 Bolted-Sleeve-Type Couplings.
212-8.1.1 General. Bolted sleeve type couplings shall conform to AWWA C219.
212-8.1.2 Materials. Bolted-sleeve-type couplings shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-8.1.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Sleeve Steel ASTM A283 Grade C or carbon steel with 30 ksi minimum
yield.
Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Gasket AWWA C111.
Coupling and Harness Bolts Stainless Steel 212-2.5.
Polyethylene Encasement Polyethylene Film 212-12.1.1.
Color per 212-12.2.

212-8.2 Flanged Coupling Adaptors.

212-8.2.1 General. Flanged coupling adaptors shall conform to AWWA C219.
212-8.2.2 Materials. Flanged coupling adaptors shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-8.2.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Body Ductile Iron or Steel to AWWA C219.
Match Adjacent Pipe
Gasket AWWA C111.
Coupling and Harness Bolts Stainless Steel 212-2.5.
Polyethylene Encasement Polyethylene Film 212-12.1.1.
Color per 212-12.2.

212-8.3 Coupling Restraint Systems. Coupling restraint systems for bolted-sleeve-type couplings
or flanged coupling adaptors furnished and installed on ductile iron or PVC pipe shall be constructed of
the following:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 245

TABLE 212-8.3
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Follower Gland Ductile Iron ASTM A536 65-45-12.
Wedges Ductile Iron Single tooth, heat-treated for ductile iron applications.
Actuating Bolts Ductile Iron ASTM A536 65-45-18.
Breakaway Nuts Carbon Steel
Cast Iron
Tie Rods - Steel Carbon Steel ASTM A193 Grade B7 threaded rods. Do not use all-thread.
2
Galvanized Coating ASTM A123 - 3.4 mil (90 µm) thickness - 2.00 oz./ft (610
2
g/m )
Tie Rods – Stainless Steel Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Coating for New Bolts and PTFE (Teflon), Fluorokote 212-2.5.
Nuts #1, Xylan 1424 or Equal
Fluoropolymer
Coating for Existing Bolts and Antiseize Lubricant 212-2.5.
Nuts
Lubrication for Above-Ground Oil and Graphite, Blue 212-2.5.
or Vault-Enclosed Steel Tie- Fluoropolymer Coating or
Rod or Bolt Threads Accepted Valve
Manufacturer’s Anti-seize
Coating
Gland Exterior Finish Coat Fusion-Bonded Epoxy 212-12.1.
Coating on Buried Bolts and Mastic 212-2.9.
Nuts
Polyethylene Encasement Polyethylene Film 212-12.1.1.
Color per 212-12.2.

212-8.4 Grooved and Shouldered Couplings and Joints.

212-8.4.1 General. Grooved and shouldered couplings and joints shall conform to AWWA C606.
212-8.4.2 Materials. Grooved and shouldered couplings shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-8.4.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Body Ductile Iron or Steel to AWWA C606.
Match Adjacent Pipe
Coupling Bolts Stainless Steel 212-2.5.
Polyethylene Encasement Polyethylene Film 212-12.1.1.
Color per 212-12.2.

212-8.4.3 Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-8.4.3
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Grooved Couplings – Mating Radius Grooving Minimum wall thickness of grooved DIP shall be Class 53.
Ductile Iron Pipe 4”-24” (100 Groove dimensions per AWWA C606 Table 2 for flexible
mm-600 mm) diameter joints.
Grooved Couplings – Mating Roll Grooving Minimum wall thickness of grooved steel pipe shall be as
Steel Pipe 4”-24” (100 mm-600 shown in AWWA C606 Table 5.
mm) diameter Groove dimensions per AWWA C606 Table 5.
Grooved and Shouldered Shouldered AWWA C606 Type C or D.
Couplings – Mating Steel Pipe Dimensions per AWWA C606 Table 6.
4”-64” (100 mm-1600 mm)
diameter

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
246 Greenbook 2021

212-8.5 Dismantling Joints.

212-8.5.1 Materials. Dismantling joints shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-8.5.1
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Body Match Adjacent Pipe
Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Steel ASTM A283 Grade C or carbon steel with 30 ksi minimum
yield.
Gasket ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Tie Rods Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Polyethylene Encasement Polyethylene Film 212-12.1.1.
Color per 212-12.2.

212-9 EXPANSION JOINTS.

212-9.1 Double-Ball Expansion Joints.
212-9.1.1 General. Double-ball expansion joints shall be capable of accommodating the minimum
design displacements for piping attachments to tanks and mechanical equipment shown in ASCE 7,
Table 15.7-1, when unrestrained.
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, expansion joints shall be the force-balanced,
self-restraining type. If expansion joints are not force-balanced, the Contractor shall make provisions for
restraining joints from damaging adjacent tanks and piping during testing.
212-9.1.2 Materials. Double-ball expansion joints shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-9.1.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Expansion Joints – Double Ball Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12.
Type
Polyethylene Encasement Polyethylene Film 212-12.1.1.
Color per 212-12.2.

212-9.1.3 Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-9.1.3
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Expansion Joints – Double Minimum Expansion 8” (200 mm).
Ball Type
Expansion/Contraction Pre- 50% expansion-50% contraction on horizontal
setting installations.
75% expansion-25% contraction on vertical installations.
Minimum Deflection 15 degrees per ball.
Self-Contained Restraint Larger of 250 psi (1.7 MPa) or rating of mating flanges.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 247

212-9.2 Bellows-Type Expansion Joints.

212-9.2.1 General. Bellows-type lateral-offset seismic expansion joints on tanks shall be capable of
accommodating the minimum design displacements for piping attachments to tanks and mechanical
equipment shown in ASCE 7, Table 15.7-1, when unrestrained.
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, expansion joints shall be the self-restraining-
type with spring steel reinforcing rings embedded in each bellows arch.
Under the specified test pressures, bellows-type expansion joints shall limit expansion under thrust
to 1/8” (3 mm) maximum displacement. Restraint under the test pressure shall be provided by any of the
following:
a) The spring rate capability of the steel bellows reinforcement.
b) An external steel harness with bolts designed to break away at 100 pounds per square inch (0.7
MPa) over the test pressure.
c) An external force restraint system shown on the Plans.
212-9.2.2 Materials. Bellows-type expansion joints shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-9.2.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Bellows EPDM Rubber ANSI/NSF 61 certified for any use with potable water.
Tie Rods – Stainless Steel Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Backing Rings – Stainless Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Steel
Washers Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Spherical to accommodate lateral deflection.
Reinforcing Ring on Bellows Spring Steel Provide at outside of arch on each bellows.

212-9.3 Mechanical Slip-Type Expansion Joints. Mechanical slip-type expansion joints shall
conform to AWWA C221.
212-10 SERVICE LATERALS, METERS, AND METER BOXES.
212-10.1 Copper Tubing. Copper tubing shall be seamless copper water tubing conforming to
ASTM B88, Type K. Temper shall be annealed,
The size and form of furnished pipe shall be as follows:

TABLE 212-10.1
Size Form Length Temper
Coils 60’-100’
1” (25 mm) O-60 annealed.
Minimum 24” (600 mm) ID (18.3 m-30.3 m) coils,
Flexible or rigid straight
2” (50 mm) 20’ (6.1 m) (rigid) O-50 annealed.
lengths

212-10.2 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Tubing. HDPE tubing shall conform to AWWA
C901 for coiled or straight pipe.
The pressure class shall be either Pressure Class 160 or the pressure class shown on the Plans for the
adjacent pipe, whichever is greater.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
248 Greenbook 2021

212-10.3 Corporation Stops, Angle Meter Valves, Service Saddles and Other Service Materials.
Service materials shall be constructed of NSF 372 brass complying with AWWA C800 and Standard
Plans except service saddles may be constructed of nylon-encased iron with double-flattened stainless
steel straps. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions, service saddles
and corporation stop inlets shall be AWWA “CC” threaded.
212-10.4 Meters. Acceptable types of meters shall be as shown on the Plans or Standard Plans.
Registers shall be the straight-reading-type, hermetically sealed, having a register test hand.
Registration shall be in gallons or cubic feet as specified in the Special Provisions. Registration accuracy
shall conform to the AWWA standard or requirement shown in Table 212-10.4.
Meters shall conform to the following:

TABLE 212-10.4
Type of Meter Size Range Case Reference Specification
Displacement Meters ½” - 2” Bronze AWWA C700
(Nutating Disc or Piston- (12.5 mm - 50 mm)
Type)
Multi-Jet Meters ½” - 2” Bronze AWWA C708
(12.5 mm-50 mm)
Single-Jet Meters ⅝” - 6” Bronze AWWA C712
(16 mm - 150 mm)
Fluidic Oscillator Meters ½” - 2” Bronze AWWA C713
(12.5 mm - 50 mm)
Compound Meters 2” - 8” Epoxy-Lined and Coated AWWA C702
(50 mm - 200 mm) Steel, Iron, or Bronze - Class II
Match Adjacent Piping
Fire-Service Meters 3” - 10” Steel, Iron, or Bronze - AWWA C703
(75 mm - 250 mm) Match Adjacent Piping
Propeller Meters 2” - 72” Epoxy-Lined and Coated AWWA C704
(50 mm - 1800 mm) Steel or Iron – Match
Adjacent Piping
Turbine Meters 1-½” - 20” Epoxy-Lined and Coated AWWA C701
(38 mm - 500 mm) Steel, Iron, or Bronze - Class II
Match Adjacent Piping
Sonic or Ultrasonic (Transit- 4” (100 mm) and larger Epoxy-Lined and Coated AWWA C750
Time) Meters Steel
Magnetic Meters 1-½” - 54” Epoxy-Lined and Coated Accuracy to 0.5% within flow
(38 mm - 1350 mm) Steel range having 20:1 minimum
turndown ratio.

212-10.5 Remote Registration Systems. Direct-reading remote-registration systems shall conform

to AWWA C706. Encoder-type remote registration systems shall conform to AWWA C707.
212-10.6 Meter Boxes.
212-10.6.1 General. Meter boxes shall be constructed of concrete or polymer.
212-10.6.2 Dimensions. The minimum meter box dimensions shall conform to the following:

TABLE 212-10.6.2
Size of Meter Interior Length (Below Lip) Interior Width Depth
(Below Lip)
¾” (19 mm) or less 15-⅜” (400 mm) 10” (250 mm) 12” (300 mm)
1” (25 mm) 25” (635 mm) 15” (380 mm) 12” (300 mm)
1-½” (38 mm) 28” (710 mm) 16” (400 mm) 12” (300 mm)
2“ (50 mm) 30” (750 mm) 17” (430 mm) 12” (300 mm)

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 249

212-11 PRESSURE GAUGES.

212-11.1 Stem-Mounted Pressure Gauges.
212-11.1.1 General. Stem-mounted pressure gauges may be used for water or recycled water
applications and shall conform to ASME/ANSI B40.100.
212-11.1.2 Materials. Stem-mounted pressure gauges shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-11.1.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Case ABS or
Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Process-Wetted Materials Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Window Acrylic
Sleeve Pure Gum Rubber
Fill Fluid Ethylene Glycol

212-11.1.3 Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-11.1.3
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Dial Calibrated Pressure Range 0-150 psi (0 – 1,000 KPa) unless otherwise shown on the
Plans.
Accuracy within Pressure ± 0.25%
Range
Process Connection 1/4” (6 mm) NPT

212-11.2 Flanged In-Line Sensor Sleeve Style Pressure Gauges.

212-11.2.1 General. Flanged in-line sensor sleeve style pressure gauges may be used for water or
recycled water applications and shall be used in wastewater applications.
212-11.2.2 Materials. Stem-mounted pressure gauges shall be constructed of the following:

TABLE 212-11.2.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Body Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Process-Wetted Materials Stainless Steel SAE Type 316.
Sleeve Pure Gum Rubber
Fill Fluid Ethylene Glycol

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
250 Greenbook 2021

212-11.2.3 Design Options. The following design options are required:

TABLE 212-11.2.3
Item Option Reference Specification/Requirements
Dial Calibrated Pressure Range 0-150 psi (0 -1,000 KPa) unless otherwise shown on the
Plans.
Accuracy within Pressure ± 0.25%
Range

212-12 PAINTING, INTERIOR LINING, AND EXTERIOR COATING.

212-12.1 Interior Lining and Exterior Coating of Ferrous Valve, Hydrant, Valve Operator,
Meter, Coupling, Expansion Joint, Spool, Fitting, and Backflow Preventer Surfaces.
212-12.1.1 General. All ferrous exposed non-lubricated parts of valves, hydrants, valve operators,
meters, couplings, spools, fittings, and backflow preventers shall be epoxy-coated, as shown in Table
212-12.1.2, with the exception of stainless steel surfaces and bituminous or cement-mortar-lined or
coated pipe or fitting surfaces. Non-stainless ferrous interior surfaces of all valves, hydrants, operators,
meters, couplings, expansion joints, spools, fittings, and backflow preventers 3-inch (75 mm) nominal
diameter and larger shall be lined with epoxy conforming to AWWA C550. Interior linings for surfaces
contacting potable water shall be NSF 61-listed.
In addition to required painting, all buried ductile or cast iron pipe, fittings, couplings, tie rods,
expansion joints, valves and hydrant runs shall be encapsulated in polyethylene encasement.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 251

212-12.1.2 Materials. Interior lining and exterior coating materials shall conform to the following:

TABLE 212-12.1.2
Item Material Reference Specification/Requirements
Interior Lining Fusion-Bonded Epoxy or AWWA C550.
High-Solids Two-Part Epoxy 12-mil (300 µm) thickness.
Do not coat seating areas or bronze or stainless steel parts.
Exterior Finish Coat Fusion-Bonded Epoxy or AWWA C550.
Epoxy Urethane 12-mil (300 µm) thickness.
Do not coat bronze or stainless steel parts.
Lubrication for Above-ground See 212-2.5
or Vault-enclosed Steel Bolt
Threads
Coating for Buried Nuts and See 212-2.5
Bolts
Polyethylene PE Encasement Standards AWWA C105/ANSI A21.50.
on Buried Ductile or Cast Iron
Material Polyethylene plastic tube.
Pipe, Fittings, Couplings, Tie
rods, Expansion Joints, Valves Thickness 8-mil (200 µm) double layer on pipe.
and Hydrant Runs 8-mil (200 µm) triple layer on fittings, valves and
appurtenances.
Color per 212-12.2.
Adhesive Tape to Connect 2” (50 mm) wide polyethylene adhesive tape.
Polyethylene Film Tubes
and Polyethylene
Encasement at Fittings and
Appurtenances

212-12.2 Color Scheme. The color of valves, polyethylene encasement, and appurtenances shall be
as follows:

TABLE 212-12.2
Item Color Items Included
Domestic Water Blue Valves, polyethylene encasement, appurtenances, and
above-ground or vault-enclosed piping.
Chrome Yellow with Tops and Fire hydrants.
Nozzle Caps colored per AWWA
C503 Appendix B
Recycled Water Purple Valves, polyethylene encasement, appurtenances, and
above-ground or vault-enclosed piping.
Wastewater Green Valves, polyethylene encasement, appurtenances, and
above-ground or vault-enclosed piping.
Fire Water Systems Red Valves, polyethylene encasement, appurtenances, and
above-ground or vault-enclosed piping.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
252 Greenbook 2021

SECTION 213 - ENGINEERING GEOSYNTHETICS

213-1 GENERAL. Engineering geosynthetics (geosynthetics) shall consist of paving fabrics,

geotextiles, and geogrids. Geosynthetics shall conform to ASTM D4759.
A Certificate of Compliance conforming to 4-5 shall accompany each shipment and be submitted to
the Engineer prior to installation. The certificate shall include the name of the manufacturer, chemical
composition, product description, lot number, signature of the manufacturer’s representative, and quality
control test results.
213-2 IDENTIFICATION, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Identification, storage, and handling
shall conform to ASTM D4873.
Geosynthetic material shall be shipped in rolls. Each roll in the shipment shall be marked or tagged
to identify the manufacturer, type, length, width, date, place of manufacture, and production
identification number. Geotextiles and paving fabrics shall be wrapped with protective covering.
Paving fabric material shall be stored on clean, dry surfaces, free of foreign substances that could
have a deleterious effect on the material. When stored in outside areas, paving fabric material shall be
kept 1 foot (300 mm) minimum above ground level and protected from exposure to ultraviolet light.
Protective coverings provided by the manufacturer shall not be removed more than 8 hours prior to
placement. Open rolls shall be covered by a waterproof covering when not in use and at the end of each
Working Day. No hooks, tongs or other sharp tools or instruments shall be used in handling. Unloading
of paving fabric material shall be performed:
a) by slings;
b) by use of a pole inserted through a hollow core, provided the pole extends 1 foot (300 mm)
minimum beyond each end, and lifting and handling devices are attached to only that portion of
the pole located outside the ends of the core; or
c) by hand.
213-3 SAMPLING AND TESTING. Sampling and testing shall conform to ASTM D4354.
213-4 PAVING FABRIC. This subsection applies to paving fabric material placed within or under
an asphalt concrete layer or a chip seal. Paving fabric material shall be nonwoven, needle-punched
polyester or polypropylene and conform to Table 213-4.1.

TABLE 213-4.1
Property ASTM Test No. Requirements
2 2
Weight, oz./yd (g/m ) D5261 4.1 to 5.5 (139 to 187)
Grab Tensile Strength 1 inch (25 mm) Grip, lbf (N) D4632 101 (449) min.
Elongation at Break, % D4632 40 min., 100 max.
Fabric Thickness, Mils (µm) D5199 30 to 50 (760 to 1270)
2 2
Asphalt Retention, oz./ft (g/ m ) D6140 2.90 (886)min.
Grab Tensile Strength After Asphalt Saturation 1 inch (25 mm) Grip, lbf (N) D4632 200 (890) min.
Elongation at Break, % After Asphalt Saturation D4632 40 min., 70 max
1. Asphalt paving fabric interlayer is used for stress relief and to resist surface moisture penetration.

Paving fabric material shall be treated by heat or other processes causing the fibers on one side only
to become bonded together, forming a glazed, delamination-free surface.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 253

213-5 GEOTEXTILES AND GEOGRIDS. This subsection applies to geotextiles (nonwoven

and woven) and geogrids (uniaxial, biaxial, and multi-axial) placed on or within fill material,
subgrade soil, or untreated base material.
Nonwoven geotextiles shall be needle punched or needle entangled and shall consist of long
chain polymeric filaments of polypropylene, polyester, or nylon. The fabric shall be a stable
network of fibers which retain their positions relative to each other.
Woven geotextiles shall consist of long chain polymeric monofilaments, slit film tapes, or
multifilaments of tape and nonwoven yarn of polypropylene, polyester or nylon. The fabric shall be
woven into a stable network and the edges of the fabric shall be selvedged or surged in such a way
that the fabric will not unravel or fray during installation or usage.
Uniaxial, biaxial, and multi-axial geogrids shall be manufactured using polyolefins (high
density polyethylene (HDPE), polypropylene (PP) and/or polyester (PET). The geogrid
reinforcement elements shall consist of a regular network of integrally connected polymer tensile
elements with aperture geometry capable of providing mechanical interlock with the surrounding
soil, aggregate or other material.
Nonwoven and woven geotextiles shall conform to Table 213-5.2 (A) or Table 213-5.2 (B) for
the type shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. Geogrids shall conform to Table
213-5.2 (C), Table 213-5.2 (D), or Table 213-5.2 (E) for the type shown on the Plans or specified in
the Special Provisions. Unless otherwise shown, all values represent minimum average roll values
(MARV) as defined in ASTM D4439.

TABLE 213-5.2 (A): NONWOVEN

1,2
Type
Property Test Reference
90 N 180 N 250 N
2
Grab Strength lbs (N), Min. ASTM D4632 90 (400) 180 (800) 250 (1110)
Elongation, Minimum (at peak load) %, Max. ASTM D4632 50 50 50
Puncture Strength, lbs (N), Min. ASTM D3787 45 (200) 80 (355) 115 (510)
1
Permitivity, Sec. , Min. ASTM D4491 0.7 0.7 0.7
Burst Strength psi (kPa), Min. ASTM D3786 180 (1240) 320 (2205) 360 (2485)
% Elongation x 5,500 10,000 14,000
Toughness, lbs (N), Min.
Grab Strength (24,500) (44,500) (62,500)
Ultraviolet Resistance % Strength Retained @ 500
ASTM D4355 70 70 70
Weatherometer Hours
1. N – Nonwoven.
2. For application and placement, refer to 300-8 or 300-10.
3. Minimum roll average in the weakest principal direction.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
254 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 213-5.2 (B): WOVEN

1,2
Test Type
Property
Reference 90WS 200WS 270WS 200WM
2
Grab Strength lbs (N), Min. ASTM D4632 90 (400) 200 (890) 270 (1200) 200 (890)
Elongation, Maximum, at peak load %, Max. ASTM D4632 25 25 25 25
Puncture Strength, lbs (N), Min. ASTM D3787 30 (135) 70 (310) 110 (490) 100 (445)
1
Permitivity, Sec. , Min. ASTM D4491 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04
Burst Strength, psi (kPa), Min. ASTM D3786 200 (1380) 400 (2760) 500 (3450) 400 (2760)
Ultraviolet Resistance % Strength Retained @ 500
ASTM D4355 70 70 70 70
Weatherometer Hours
1. WS – Slit Film; WM – Monofiliment.
2. For application and placemen, refer to 300-8, 300-9, or 300-10.
3. Minimum average roll value in each direction.

TABLE 213-5.2 (C): UNIAXIAL

1
Test Type
Property
Reference P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
2700 4400 6900 9000 10800
Tensile Strength lbs/ft (kN/m), Min. ASTM D6637
(39.4) (64.2) (100.7) (131.3) (157.6)
550 1000 1800 2330 2740
Tensile Strength @ 2% strain lbs/ft (kN/m), Min. ASTM D6637
(8) (14.6) (26.3) (34) (40)
1165 2000 3700 4450 5400
Tensile Strength @ 5% strain lbs/ft (kN/m), Min. ASTM D6637
(17) (29.2) (54) (65) (78.8)
27500 50000 90000 116500 137000
Initial Modulus lbs/ft (kN/m) ASTM D6637
(400) (730) (1310) (1700) (2000)
2430 3960 6210 8100 9720
Junction Strength, lbs/ft (kN/m), Min. ASTM D7737
(35) (58) (91) (118) (142)
2 809 1602 2424 3203 4026
Long-Term Allowable Strength, lbs/ft (kN/m) GRI GG-4
(11.8) (23.4) (35.4) (46.7) (58.7)
ASTM D4355-
Ultraviolet Stability, @ 500 hrs (%) 70 70 70 70 70
05
1. Uniaxial geogrid contains two primary ribs at each junction which serve to provide linear (uni-directional) reinforcement in
mechanically stabilized earth (MSE) retaining wall applications. Two secondary ribs are also located at each junction (in the
perpendicular direction) to provide stability to the geogrid structure. All property values are listed for the machine direction.
2. Minimum reduction factors are as follows: installation damage reduction factor for HDPE of 1.05 and 1.1 for PET geogrids, durability
reduction factor of 1.1 for HDPE and 1.3 for PET geogrids.

TABLE 213-5.2 (D): BIAXIAL

1
Type
Property Test Reference
S1 S2
1
Ultimate Tensile Strength lbs/ft (kN/m), Min. ASTM D6637 1300 (19) 1975 (28.8)
1
Tensile Strength @ 2% strain lbs/ft (kN/m), Min. ASTM D6637 450 (6.57) 600 (8.75)
1
Tensile Strength @ 5% strain lbs/ft (kN/m), Min. ASTM D6637 920 (13.4) 1340 (19.5)
Flexural Stiffness mg-cm ASTM D7748 250000 750000
1
Junction Strength, lbs/ft (kN/m), Min. ASTM D7737 1170 (17.1) 1778 (26)
2
Torsional Stiffness, cm-kg/degree GRI:GG9 3.2 6.5
Ultraviolet Stability, @ 500 hrs (%) ASTM D4355-05 70 70
1. Biaxial geogrid contains four perpendicular intersecting ribs at each junction formed into a bi-directionally stable network of open
rectangular apertures. All property values are listed for the cross-machine direction with the exception of flexural stiffness,
measured in the machine direction, and torsional stiffness which is measured at the junction.
2. Geosynthetic Research Institute, Test Method GG9, “Torsional Behavior of Bidirectional Geogrids When Subjected to In-Plane
Rotation.”

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 255

TABLE 213-5.2 (E): MULTI-AXIAL

1
Test Type
Property
Reference R1 R2 R3
2
Percent Open Area (%) Min. CW-02215 80 79 78
3 10,285 15,430 20,580
Secant Modulus@ 0.5% strain lbs/ft (kN/m), Min. ASTM D6637
(150) (225) (300)
4
Secant Modulus Ratio (dimensionless) ASTM D6637 >0.60 >0.60 >0.60
5 ASTM D6637
Junction Strength Efficiency (%) 93 93 93
ASTM D7737
Ultraviolet Stability, @ 500 hrs (%) ASTM D4355 70 70 70
1. Tabulated values are based on multi-axial geogrids containing more than four intersecting ribs at each junction formed into a
radially stable network of open equilateral triangular apertures. Values for other shapes shall be as specified in the Special
Provisions.
2. Minimum determined in accordance with modified Corps of Engineers CW-02215.
3. Minimum value of secant modulus is measured in both the rib direction and mid-rib (direction that bisects the angles between ribs).
Secant modulus measured in the rib direction is determined in accordance with ASTM D6637 Method B. Secant modulus
measured in the mid-rib direction is determined with ASTM D6637 modified Method B. Mid-rib force per unit width, in kN/m, is
calculated as the observed force, in kN, minus the slack tensile load, in kN, divided by a nominal width of the specimen
(minimum of 0.20 meters). Mid-rib secant modulus at 0.5% strain is calculated as the mid-rib force per unit width times 100
divided by 0.5. The minimum number of tests shall be determined as the number of observed symmetric axes, starting at 0
degrees, and include a mid-rib and 90-degree direction test. The direction of testing for all multi-rib specimens shall be reported
in accordance with Figure 1 of ASTM D6637.
4. Ratio of the minimum to maximum MARV values of secant modulus at 0.5% strain.
5. Junction strength efficiency is the average junction strength, in N, in accordance with ASTM D7737 Method A divided by the
average single rib strength, in N, in accordance with ASTM D6637 Method A and expressed as a percentage. The direction of
testing for all multi-rib specimens shall be in the rib direction and reported in accordance with Figure 1 of ASTM D7737.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
256 Greenbook 2021

SECTION 214 - TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS,

AND PAVEMENT MARKERS

214-1 GENERAL. The following material specifications set forth the requirements for glass beads,
paint, thermoplastic material, and reflective and non-reflective pavement markers for use in traffic
striping (striping) and curb and pavement markings (markings).Manufacturer’s warranties, guaranties,
and instruction sheets for materials used in the Work shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance
with 3-8.4.
State Specifications referred to in these specifications are available from the Caltrans Division of
Engineering Services, Materials Engineering and Testing Services, Office of Roadway Materials
Testing, Chemical Testing Branch (Caltrans Transportation Laboratory).
214-2 TEST REPORTS AND CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE. The Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer certified copies of the manufacturer’s test reports and MSDS in accordance with
3-8 and 7-10.4.3. Test reports shall indicate the name of the manufacturer, type of material, date of
manufacture, quantity, State Specification number, manufacturer’s lot or batch number, and results of
the required tests. Test reports shall be signed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer.
In lieu of test reports the Contractor may provide the Engineer with a Certificate of Compliance in
accordance with 3-8.4 and 4-5. The certificate shall certify that the paint or thermoplastic material
conforms to the Specifications and that the paint was manufactured to the same formulation and process
that has passed Caltrans testing.
214-3 GLASS BEADS. Glass beads shall conform to State Specification 8010-004 (Type II).
214-4 PAINT FOR STRIPING AND MARKINGS.
214-4.1 General. Paint for striping and markings shall conform to the requirements shown in
Table 214-4.1.

TABLE 214-4.1
1
Paint Type Color State Specification No.
Waterborne Traffic Line, Type I (Rapid Dry) White, Yellow and Black PTWB-01
Acetone-Based White, Yellow and Black PT-150VOC(A)
Waterborne Traffic Line Blue, Red and Green Federal Specification No. TT-P-1952D
1. Copies of the State Specifications may be obtained from the Caltrans Transportation Laboratory.

The Contractor may select waterborne or acetone-based paint, depending on the weather conditions
and local air pollution control regulations, subject to approval by the Engineer. Thinning of paint will
not be allowed.
Paint shall contain at least 12 percent titanium dioxide in white paint.
Glass beads conforming to 214-3 shall be mechanically applied at a rate of 5 pounds per gallon (2
kg/L) of paint to the surface of each coat of prior to setting. Application shall conform to 314-4.3.5.
214-4.2 White, Yellow, and Black Traffic Line Paint. White, yellow, and black traffic line paint
shall dry to a “no traffic pickup” condition in 30 seconds. The “no traffic pickup” time shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM D711. The paint shall be completely dry in not more than 3
minutes when preheated to the temperature recommended by the manufacturer before application.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 257

214-5 THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL FOR TRAFFIC STRIPING AND MARKINGS.

214-5.1 General. Thermoplastic material shall conform to State Specification PTH-025SPRAY,
PTH-02HYDRO, or PTH-02ALKYD as specified in the Special Provisions.
Glass beads conforming to 214-3 shall be added directly to the combined pigment, filler, and resin.
Thermoplastic material shall contain at least 20 percent by weight of glass beads in the white and yellow
paints and at least 12 percent titanium dioxide in the white.
Thermoplastic material shall be applied in a molten state by mechanical means. Prior to setting, an
additional application of glass shall be mechanically applied to the surface of the molten thermoplastic
material in conformance with 314-4.4.4. Thermoplastic material, when applied at a temperature range of
400ºF to 425ºF (200ºC to 220ºC) and a thickness of 90 to 125 mils (2300 to 3200 µm) for traffic
markings and 60 to 70 mils (1500 to 1800 µm) for traffic striping, shall set to bear traffic in 2 minutes or
less when the atmospheric temperature is 50ºF (10ºC) or greater and not more than 10 minutes when the
air atmospheric temperature is 90ºF (32ºC) or greater. Thermoplastic material shall dry to “no traffic
pick-up” in accordance with ASTM D711.
214-6 PAVEMENT MARKERS.
214-6.1 Types of Markers. Pavement markers shall conform to one or more of the following types:
a) Type A - Non-Reflective White.
b) Type AY - Non-Reflective Yellow.
c) Type C - Red-Clear Retroreflective.
d) Type D - Two-Way Yellow Retroreflective.
e) Type G - One-Way Clear Retroreflective.
f) Type H - One-Way Yellow Retroreflective.
g) Type I - Two-Way Blue Retroreflective.
214-6.2 Sampling and Acceptance.
214-6.2.1 Sampling. A representative sample size for each lot shall be selected in accordance with the
requirements shown in Table 214-6.2.1. For sampling purposes the lot size shall not exceed 25,000 markers.

TABLE 214-6.2.1
Lot Size Sample Size
10000 or less 20
10,001-25,000 40

214-6.2.2 Test Specimens. Three test specimens shall be randomly selected from the sample for
each test except as otherwise specified in 214-6.2.3, and tested for conformance with these
Specifications. If any one of the 3 specimens fails to comply with the requirements of these
Specifications, 6 additional specimens will be tested. The failure of any one of these 6 specimens shall
be a basis for rejection of the entire lot or shipment represented by the sample.
214-6.2.3 Reflectance. The entire sample of retroreflective pavement markers shall be tested for
reflectance. The failure of 10 percent or more of the original sampling shall be a basis for rejection.
214-6.2.4 Re-samples. At the discretion of the Engineer, a re-sample may be taken consisting of
twice the number of samples originally taken. Tolerances for re-samples shall be in the same ratio as
specified in 214-6.2.2.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
258 Greenbook 2021

214-6.3 Non-Reflective Pavement Markers.

214-6.3.1 General. Non-reflective pavement markers shall be either ceramic or plastic as
specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
The bottom of each marker shall be free from gloss or glaze and shall have between 50 and 200
integrally formed protrusions or indentations approximately 50 mils (1.25 mm) high projecting from the
surface in a uniform pattern. The tips of the protrusions shall not deviate more than 50 mils (1.25 mm)
from a flat surface. Each protrusion shall have a face parallel to the bottom of the marker and shall
project approximately 40 mils (1 mm). The area of each parallel face shall be between 0.01 and 0.065
square inches (6 and 42 mm2) and the combined area of these faces shall be between 2.2 and 4 square
inches (1420 and 2580 mm2). The sides of each protrusion may be tapered. This taper shall not exceed
15 degrees from perpendicular to the marker bottom. Markers manufactured with protrusions whose
diameter is less than 1/8 inch (3 mm) may have an additional taper not exceeding 30 degrees from
perpendicular to the marker bottom and exceeding no more than 1/2 the total height of the protrusion.
The top surface of each marker shall be convex and the radius of curvature shall be between 3-1/2
inches (88 mm) and 6 inches (150 mm), except that the radius within 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) of the nearest
the edge may be less. Any change in curvature shall be gradual. The top and sides shall be smooth and
free of mold marks, pits, indentations, air bubbles, or other objectionable marks or discolorations that
will affect the adhesion or appearance.
214-6.3.2 Ceramic Non-Reflective Pavement Markers. Ceramic non-reflective pavement
markers shall consist of a heat-fired, vitreous, ceramic base and a heat-fired opaque glazed surface to
produce the properties required in these Specifications. Markers shall be produced from any suitable
combination of intimately mixed clays, shales, talcs, flints, feldspars, or other inorganic materials which
conform to the material requirements. The markers shall be thoroughly and evenly matured and free
from defects which affect appearance or serviceability.
214-6.3.3 Plastic Non-Reflective Pavement Markers. Plastic non-reflective pavement markers
shall be either polypropylene or ABS plastic as specified in the Special Provisions.
214-6.3.4 Requirements. Non-reflective pavement markers shall conform to the requirements
shown in Table 214-6.3.4. Testing shall be performed in accordance with California Test 669.

TABLE 214-6.3.4
1
Test Test Description Requirement
A Bond Strength 700 psi (4826 kPa), min.
B Glaze thickness 7 mils (178 µm), min.
C Hardness 6 Mob, min.
D Luminance factor, Type A white markers only, glazed surface. 75, min.
E Yellowness index, Type A white markers only, glazed surface. 7, max.
Color-yellow, Type AY, yellow markers only, The chromaticity
F Pass
coordinates shall be within a color box defined in CTM 669.
G Compressive strength 1500 lbs (680 kg) min.
H Water absorption 2.0% max.
I Artificial weathering, 500 hours exposure yellowness index 20, max.
1. Tests A, B, C, and H do not apply to plastic markers.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 259

214-6.4 Retroreflective Pavement Markers.

214-6.4.1 General. Retroreflective pavement markers shall be of the prismatic, reflector-type
consisting of a methyl methacrylate or suitably compounded shell with a mixture of an inert
thermosetting compound and filler material. The exterior surface of the shell shall be smooth and
contain 1 or 2 methyl methacrylate prismatic reflector faces of the number and color specified in the
Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
The infrared curves of the compounded methyl methacrylate or ABS shells shall match approved
curves on file in the Caltrans Transportation Laboratory.
The retroreflective lens shall not contain any voids or air space and the back of the lens shall be metalized.
The shell shall be fabricated in a manner that will provide a mechanical interlock between the
thermosetting compound and the shell. The thermosetting compound shall bond directly to the back side
of the metalized lens surface.
The base shall be flat (the deviation from a flat surface shall not exceed 50 mils (1.25 mm), rough
textured, and free from gloss or substances which may reduce its bond to the adhesive.
The color of the reflector faces, when illuminated by the white light from a sealed-beam automobile
headlight as defined in the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) Standard J 578, shall be clear,
yellow, blue or red color as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans. Off-color
reflection shall be a basis for rejection. The daylight color of the marker body shall be compatible with
the color of the primary lens, and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
214-6.4.2 Requirements. Retroreflective pavement markers shall conform to the requirements
shown in Table 214-6.4.2. Testing shall be performed in accordance with California Test 669.

TABLE 214-6.4.2
Test Description Requirement
2
Bond strength 500 psi (3400 kPa), min.
3
Compressive strength 2000 lbs. (900 kg), min.
Abrasion resistance, marker shall meet the respective specific intensity minimum Pass
requirements after abrasion.
Water Soak Resistance No delamination of the body or lens
system of the marker nor loss of
reflectance.
Specific Intensity
Reflectance Clear Yellow Red
0º Incidence Angle, min. 3.0 1.5 0.75
20º Incidence Angle, min. 1.2 0.60 0.30
After one year field evaluation 0.30 0.15 0.08
1. Failure of the marker body or filler material prior to reaching 500 psi (3400 kPa) shall constitute a failing bond strength.
2. Deformation of more than 125 mils (3200 µm) at a load of less than 2000 lbs. (3400 kPa) or delimitation of the shell and the filler
material of more than 125 mils (3200 µm) regardless of the load required to break the marker shall be a basis for rejection of the
markers.

Pavement markers to be placed in pavement recesses shall conform to the above requirements for
retroreflective pavement markers except that the minimum compressive strength requirement shall be
1200 pounds (540 kg).
214-6.6 Storage. Pavement markers shall be stored indoors and shall be protected from any source
of moisture both during shipment to, and at, the Work site. Pavement markers shall be stored at a

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
260 Greenbook 2021

temperature high enough to preclude moisture condensation. At the time of placement, both the
pavement markers and their packaging shall be dry.
214-7 ADHESIVES FOR PAVEMENT MARKERS.
214-7.1 General. This specification covers high viscosity paste rapid-set and standard-set epoxy
adhesives formulated primarily for use in bonding pavement markers to Portland cement concrete and
asphalt concrete pavement, and hot-melt bituminous adhesives. The type of adhesive to be applied shall
be as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
214-7.2 Epoxy Adhesives.
214-7.2.1 General. Epoxy adhesives shall be rapid-set or standard-set.
214-7.2.2 Rapid-Set Epoxy Adhesive. This specification covers a high viscosity paste, rapid-set
epoxy formulated primarily for use in bonding pavement markers to Portland cement concrete and
asphalt concrete pavement. Rapid-set epoxy adhesive shall conform to ASTM C881, Type IV, Viscosity
Grade 3, Classes B and C, except that the gel time may be shorter than 30 minutes. Components shall
conform to the requirements shown in Table 214-7.2.2.

TABLE 214-7.2.2
COMPONENT A
Ingredients Parts by Weight
1
Epoxy Resin 90.00
2
Orthocresol Glycidyl Ether 10.00
Titanium Dioxide ASTM Designation D476 3.00
3
Talc 50.00
4 9
Oleeophilic Fumed Silica 4.50

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 261

TABLE 214-7.2.2
COMPONENT B
Ingredients Parts by Weight
5
High Functionality Polymercaptan Harder 60.00
6
2,4,6-Tri (Dimethylaminomethyl) Phenol 7.00
7
Polysulfide Polymer 35.00
8
Furnace Black 0.10
3
Talc 52.00
4 9
Oleophilic Fumed Silica 3.50
Silicone Anti-Foam, Type DB 100, 100% Solids 0.005
1. Di Glycidyl ether of bisphenol A, viscosity 100-160 poise (10-16 Pa·s) at 25ºC; weight per epoxide equivalent, 180-200. Gardner 19
maximum.
2. Viscosity at 25ºC, 5-10 Centipoises (0.005 to 0.01 Pa·s). Weight per gallon (L), 9.00-9.10 (1.08-1.09 Kg). Weight per epoxy equivalent,
180-200.
3. Specify Gravity..........................................................................................................................................................2.68 to 2.96
Oil Absorption, ASTM D281 ........................................................................................................................................ 26 to 33
pH............................................................................................................................................................................. 8.9 to 9.6
Hegman Rating............................................................................................................................................................... 3 to 5
Particle Shape ............................................................................................................................................................... Platey
Maximum Particle Size, micrometers................................................................................................................................... 55
Percentage passing, No. 325 (45 µm) screen, min .............................................................................................................. 99
Dry Brightness, Min.............................................................................................................................................................. 93
4. High purity fumed silica treated with a silicone oil, with the following properties: Appearance, fluffy while powder; surface area, N2
B.E.T. method 70 ± 15 m2/gram; pH 4 grams dispersed in 100 milliliters of 20/80 volume mixture of ethyl alcohol and distilled water,
4.7; weight %, carbon, 5.0 minimum; ignition loss (dry basis) 2 hours at 1000ºC, 6 to 7; specify gravity, 1.8.
5. Liquid polymercaptan resin, viscosity 100-130 poise at 25ºC, 0.973; specific gravity 1.14-1.16: mercaptan value, 3.6 meg/gram. Color,
Gardner 1933, 1 maximum. Infrared curve shall match the curve on file in the Caltrans Transportation Laboratory.
6. Formula weight, 265; specific gravity at 250/25ºC, 0.973; refractive index 1,514 at 25ºC; distillation range, 96% at 130º to 160ºC (0.5-1.5
mm); flash point. Tag Open Cup, 300ºF minimum; water content, 0.08% maximum.
7. Specific gravity, 1.24-`1.30 at 20º/20ºC, viscosity, 0.7-1.2 Pa·s (700-1200 centipoises). Brookfield at 25ºC, pH water extract 6.0-8.0;
moisture content, 0.1% maximum; pour point, -10ºC (15ºF); average molecular weight, 1000; flash point ºC (ºF). Cleveland Open
Cup, 199ºC (390ºF) minimum; sulfur content, percent, 36-40; color, Hellige, 9-12. The product shall be a difunctional mercaptan
made from 98 mole percent of bis (2-chloroetlyl) formal and 2 mole percent of trichloropropane.
8. Surface area, square meters/gram, 115/130; particle diameter nanometers, 18-30; pH, 7.0-8.5, fixed carbon (moisture free), percent,
96-98; volatile matter, percent, 1-4; oil absorption, stiff paste end-point; CCSi/gram, 0.80-0.90.
9. A range of 4.0 to 5.0 parts is permitted in the A Component and 3.0 to 4.0 parts in the B Component, to achieve the required viscosity
and thixotropy. Small preproduction batches should be made to determine the oleophilic silica level best suited for manufacturing
equipment used.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
262 Greenbook 2021

214-7.2.3 Standard-Set Epoxy Adhesive. This specification covers a high viscosity paste,
standard-set epoxy formulated primarily for use in bonding pavement markers to Portland cement
concrete and asphalt concrete pavement. Standard-set epoxy adhesive shall conform to ASTM C881,
Type IV, Viscosity Grade 3, Classes B or C, except that the gel time may be shorter than 30 minutes.
Components shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 214-7.2.3.

TABLE 214-7.2.3
COMPONENT A
Ingredients Parts by Weight
1
Epoxy Resin 87.00
2
Orthocresol Glycidyl Ether 13.00
Titanium Dioxide ASTM Designation D476 3.00
3 8
Oleeophilic Fumed Silica 6.50
4
Talc 34.00

COMPONENT B
Ingredients Parts by Weight
5
N-Ameinoethyl Piperazine 23.20
6
Nonylphenol 52.00
7
Furnace Black 0.10
3 8
Oleophilic Fumed Silica 6.50
Silicone Anti-Foam, Type DB 100, 100% Solids 0.005
1. Di Glycidyl ether of bisphenol A, viscosity 10-16 Pa·s (100-160 poise) at 25ºC; weight per epoxide equivalent 180-200. Gardner 1933.3
maximum.
2. Aliphatic mono functional reactive ether, derived from an aliphatic alcohol. Viscosity at 1-15 Centipoises. Weight per epoxide
equivalent 220-250. Specific gravity 0.88-0.95.
3. High purity fumed silica treated with a silicone oil, with the following properties: Appearance, fluffy while powder; surface area, N2
B.E.T. method 70 ± 15 M2/gram; pH 4 grams dispersed in 100 milliliters of 20/80 volume mixture of ethyl alcohol and distilled water,
4.7; weight % carbon 5.0 minimum; ignition loss (dry basis) 2 hours at 1000ºC, 6 to 7; specify gravity, 1.8.
4. Specify Gravity ................................................................................................................................................................. 2.68 to 2.96
Oil Absorption, ASTM D281 ................................................................................................................................................ 26 to 33
pH ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 8.9 to 9.6
Hegman Rating .......................................................................................................................................................................3 to 5
Particle Shape........................................................................................................................................................................Platey
Maximum Particle Size, micrometers ...........................................................................................................................................55
Percentage passing U. S. No. 325 (45 µm) screen, Min ...............................................................................................................99
Dry Brightness, Min ......................................................................................................................................................................93
5. Color (APHA) 50 maximum; amine value 1250-1350 based on titration which reacts with the 3 nitrogens in the molecule; appearance
clear and substantially free of suspended matter.
6. Color (APHA) 50 maximum; hydroxyl number 245-255; distillation range, 25ºC at 760 millimeters first drop 295 minimum, 5% 298
minimum, 95% 325 maximum; water, % (K.F.) 0.05 maximum.
7. Surface area, square meters/gram, 115/130; particle diameter nanometers, 18-30; pH, 7.0-8.5, fixed carbon (moisture free), percent,
96-98; volatile matter, percent, 1-4; oil absorption, stiff paste end-point; CCSi/gram, 0.80-0.90.
8. A range of 6.0 to 7.0 parts is permitted in the A Component and B Component to achieve the required viscosity and shear ratio.

All tests shall be performed in accordance with California Test 425.

214-7.2.4 Mixing. Any material which shows evidence of crystallization or a permanent increase in
viscosity or settling of pigments which cannot be readily re-dispersed with a paddle shall not be used.
Prior to beginning mixing, Components A and B shall be at a temperature between 60ºF (15ºC) and 85ºF
(30ºC), unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. Any heating of the adhesive components
shall be done by application of indirect heat. Immediately prior to mixing, each component shall be
thoroughly mixed with a paddle. Separate paddles shall be used to stir each component. Immediately

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 263

prior to use, Components A and B shall be mixed together in the ratio specified by the manufacturer.
Mixed adhesives shall have a uniform gray color without black or white streaks. No solvent shall be
added. Mixed adhesives shall be used before thickening has begun.
214-7.2.5 Requirements of Combined Components. Components A and B, when combined, shall
conform to the requirements shown in Table 214-7.2.5. Testing shall be performed in accordance with
California Test 434.

TABLE 214-7.2.5
Property Requirement
Gel time, minutes, maximum, at 77º F (25º C) 30
Bond Strength to Concrete, Time, minutes (maximum) to
reach not less than 200 psi.
at 77º F ± 2º F (25º C ± 1º C) 35
at 50º F ± 2º F (10º C ± 1º C) 45
Slant Shear Strength
2 days at 77º F ± 2º F (25º C ± 1º C), psi 1,000
14 days at77º F ± 2º F (25º C ± 1º C), plus water soak, psi 1,500
Tensile Adhesion and Cohesion
Ceramic marker bottom, psi 700 min
Ceramic marker bottom, including post cure, psi 700 min
Retroreflective pavement marker bottom, psi 500 min
Color of mixed epoxy Gray
Glass transition temperature, Tg, samples conditioned at 77º
F (25º C) for 24 hours, ASTM D4065. 86º F (30º C)

214-7.3 Hot-Melt Bituminous Adhesives.

214-7.3.1 General. This specification covers a bituminous-type, hot-melt adhesive used for the
placement of pavement markers. The adhesive shall be capable of bonding ceramic and plastic
pavement markers to PCC and asphalt concrete pavement when the roadway surface and pavement
marker temperatures are in the range of 40ºF to 160ºF (5ºC to 70ºC). The composition must be such that
its properties will not deteriorate when heated to and applied at temperatures up to 425ºF (220ºC) using
either air or oil-jacketed melters.
214-7.3.2 Material Requirements. Filler material used in hot-melt bituminous adhesives shall be
Type PC, Grade III, calcium carbonate conforming to ASTM D1199 and the requirements shown in
Table 214-7.3.2 (A).

TABLE 214-7.3.2 (A)

Sieve Size Percentage Passing
No. 100 100
No. 200 95
No. 325 75

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
264 Greenbook 2021

Hot-melt bituminous adhesive material, when homogeneously mixed with filler material, shall
conform to the requirements shown in Table 214-7.3.2 (B).

TABLE 214-7.3.2 (B)

Property Min. Max. Test Method No.
Softening Point, ºF (ºC) 200 (93) 230 (110) ASTM D36
Penetration, 100 g, 5 seconds, 77 ºF (25º 10 20 ASTM D5
C)
1
Flow, inch (mm) --- 0.2 (5) ASTM D3407
Heat Stability Flow, inch (mm) --- 0.2 (5) See Note 2
Brookfield Thermosel Viscosity, Centipoise,
No. 27 Spindle, 20 RPM, 400 ºF (200ºC) 3,000 6,000 ASTM D4402
Flash Point, C.O.C, ºF (ºC) 550 (290) ASTM D92
Recommended Pouring Temp., ºF (ºC) 400 (200) 425 (220) ---
Shelf Life, Years --- 2 ----
Filler Content, percent by weight 65 75
(Insoluble in 1,1,1 Trichlorethane) ASTM D2371
1. Flow shall be determined according to Section 6, Flow, of ASTM D3407 with the exception that the oven temperature shall be 158° ± 2°F
(70°C ± 1°C) and sample preparation shall be according to Section 7.1 of ASTM D5.
2. Heat Stability Flow shall be determined according to Flow with the exception that 1000 grams of adhesive shall be placed in a loosely-
covered quart can, heated to 220°C (425°F) and maintained at this temperature for 4 hours to preparing the sample panel.

SECTION 215 – PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE MANHOLES (PRCMH)

215-1 GENERAL. These specifications cover materials for precast reinforced concrete manholes
intended for the conveyance of storm water and waste water. Precast reinforced concrete manholes shall
be manufactured by wet-cast or machine-made (dry-cast) methods. Reinforced concrete manhole
sections shall conform to ASTM C478.
Two sets of Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8 including stacking drawings
that include precast sections.
Supporting information, including mix designs and cut sheets, shall be submitted in accordance with
3-8 for manhole appurtenances shown on the Plans such as steps, grade rings, frame and cover, etc.
Dimensions indicated on the Plans are interior dimensions unless otherwise shown.
215-2 MATERIALS.
215-2.1 Concrete. Concrete for PRCMH shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000
pounds per square inch (28 MPa) and conform to 201-1.1.4 unless otherwise specified.
Concrete shall conform to ASTM C478 and the following:
a) Aggregate shall conform to the reactivity requirements specified in 201-1.2.2
b) Cementitious material(s) shall be Portland cement or Portland cement and fly ash.
c) Mixing shall conform to 201-1.4.
215-2.2 Fly Ash. Fly ash shall be Class F conforming to 201-1.2.5 unless otherwise specified.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 265

215-2.3 Steel Reinforcement.

215-2.3.1 General. Steel reinforcement for PRCMH shall conform to 201-2.2 except deformed bars
shall be Grade 60, billet steel bars.
215-2.4 Plastic Liners. When shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions, plastic
liners shall conform to 210-2.
215-3 FABRICATION.
215-3.1 General. PRCMH shall be fabricated to conform to the Plans.
215-3.2 Joints. Joints shall be tongue and groove, bell and spigot, or shiplap. Flat joints in a recess
(1/2 inch minimum) may be used for bases and flattops, unless otherwise shown.
215-3.3 Steel Reinforcement.
215-3.3.1 General. Reinforcement shall conform to ASTM C478 and shall be as shown on the
accepted Shop Drawings.
215-3.3.2 Placement. Reinforcement shall be firmly and securely held in position by wiring at
intersections and splices and by using plastic or ferrous metal chairs, spacers, metal hangers supporting
wires, or other devices of sufficient strength to resist crushing under applied loads. Wooden or
aluminum supports shall not be used. Tack welding of reinforcing bars will not be permitted unless
reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A706 or welded wire reinforcement conforming to ASTM A1064
is used.
215-3.3.3 Splicing. Splicing shall conform to ASTM C478.
215-3.4 Curing. Curing shall conform to ASTM C478.
215-3.5 Forms. Forms shall conform to 216-3.5.
215-3.6 Lifting Holes or Devices. Lifting holes or devices shall conform to 216-3.6.
215-4 TESTING REQUIREMENTS.
215-4.1 Test Specimens. Test specimens shall conform to 201-1.1.5 as modified to allow the use of
Section 8 of ASTM C478.
215.4.2 Compression Testing of Cylinders.
215-4.2.1 General. Compression testing of cylinders shall conform to 201-1.1.5. A minimum of 2
cylinders shall be prepared from each concrete mix used each production day.
215-4.2.2 Acceptance. The average compressive strength of all cylinders tested shall be equal to or
greater than the specified compressive strength. No cylinder tested shall have a compressive strength
less than 80 percent of the specified compressive strength.
215-4.3 Compression Testing of Cores.
215-4.3.1 General. Cores, if required, shall be obtained and tested for compressive strength in
accordance with 201-1.1.5.
215-4.3.2 Core Holes. Core holes shall be plugged and sealed in accordance with 216-4.3.2.
215-5 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS.
215-5.1 Internal Diameter. Internal diameter shall not vary by more than 1 percent from the
diameter shown on the Plans.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
266 Greenbook 2021

215-5.2 Wall Thickness. Wall thicknesses shall not be less than that shown on the Plans by more
than 5 percent or 3/16 inch, whichever is greater. A thickness greater than that shown on the Plans will
not be a cause for rejection.
215-5.3 Height of Two Opposite Sides. The height of two opposite sides of a section shall not
vary by more than 5/8 inch.
215-5.4 Height of Section. The under-run in height of a section shall not vary more than 1/4 inch
per foot of height with a maximum of 1/2 inch in any one section.
215-5.5 Position of Reinforcement. The maximum variation in the position of the reinforcement
shall be ± 5/8 inch or ± 10 percent, whichever is the lesser. In no case shall the cover over the
reinforcement be less than 3/4 inch. The minimum cover limitations do not apply at the mating surfaces
of a joint.
215-6 MARKINGS. The following information shall be legibly marked on each PRCMH section
by indentation or waterproof paint:
a) manufacturer,
b) date and place of manufacture,
c) diameter,
d) height.
215-7 CAUSES FOR REJECTION. Inspection of PRCMH as may be deemed necessary by the
Engineer will be made at the place of manufacture. Individual PRCMH sections may be rejected due to
any of the following unless repairs are made and approved by the Engineer.
a) Failure to meet the permissible variations specified in 215-5.
b) Exposure of any reinforcement arising from misplacement thereof.
215-8 BASIS OF ACCEPTANCE. The basis of acceptance shall be by one of the following as
specified in the Special Provisions:
a) Compliance with these Specifications, inspection of the manufacturing, and inspection of
completed PRCMH section(s).
b) Acceptance of a Certificate of Compliance conforming to 4-5.
Such acceptance, however, shall be considered a tentative acceptance. Final acceptance will only be
made when the Work is completed.

SECTION 216 – PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX

216-1 GENERAL. These specifications cover materials for single-cell precast reinforced concrete
box (PRCB) sections intended for the conveyance of storm water.
The span, rise, and design earth cover shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Three sets of prints of the PRCB layout diagrams and 2 sets of Shop Drawings shall be submitted to
the Engineer in accordance with 3-8.4, except one reproducible print of the layout diagrams will not be
required. The layout diagrams will be used by the Engineer for reference only, and their use shall in no
way relieve the Contractor for its responsibility for accuracy. The Engineer may waive the PRCB layout
diagrams requirement.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 267

216-2 MATERIALS.
216-2.1 Portland Cement Concrete (PCC). PCC for PRCB sections shall have a compressive
strength of 5000 pounds per square inch (36 MPa) minimum and conform to 201-1.1.4 unless otherwise
specified in the Special Provisions.
PCC shall conform to the following:
a) Portland cement shall conform to 201-1.2.1.
b) Aggregate shall conform to the reactivity requirements specified in 201-1.2.2.
c) The combined aggregate gradation shall include aggregate of 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum
diameter unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
d) Water shall conform to 201-6.2.3.
e) Chemical admixtures shall conform to 201-1.2.4.
f) Cementitious material(s) shall be Portland cement or Portland cement and fly ash.
g) The water-cementitious material(s) ratio shall not exceed 0.53 by weight.
h) Proportioning shall conform to 201-1.3.
i) Mixing shall conform to 201-1.4.
216-2.2 Fly Ash. Fly ash shall be Class F conforming to 201-1.2.5 unless otherwise specified in the
Special Provisions.
216-2.3 Reinforcement.
216-2.3.1 Deformed Welded Wire Reinforcement. The diameter of any deformed wire in finished
deformed welded wire reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A496 or AASHTO M32 or M221.
Deformed welded wire reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A497 or AASHTO M55 or M221.
216-2.3.2 Deformed Bars. Deformed bars shall be Grade 60, billet-steel bars conforming to 201-2.2.1.
216-2.4 Leveling Bed Material. Leveling bed material shall be sand, crushed aggregate or crushed
miscellaneous base, native free-draining granular material having a sand equivalent of not less than 30,
or the material specified in the Special Provisions.
216-3 FABRICATION.
216-3.1 General. PRCB sections shall be fabricated as shown on the Plans.
PRCB sections of greater strength than that specified may be furnished at the Contractor’s option,
and at its own expense. The interior surfaces of PRCB sections shall be smooth.
216-3.2 Joints. Joints for PRCB sections shall be fabricated with tongue and groove ends.
Outer cage transverse reinforcement shall be placed in the top and bottom slabs at the groove portion
of the joint.
216-3.3 Reinforcement.
216-3.3.1 General. Reinforcement shall be deformed welded wire reinforcement conforming to
216-2.3.2 or deformed bars conforming to 216-2.3.3 unless otherwise specified in the Special
Provisions. Other details shall be as shown on the Plans.
Before reinforcement is placed it shall be free of mortar, oil, dirt, excessive mill scale and scabby
rust, and any other coating of any nature that would destroy or reduce its ability to bond.
216-3.3.2 Area of Steel Reinforcement. The area of steel reinforcement shall be as shown on the
Plans or Standard Plans. Steel areas greater than those shown on the Plans shall not exceed 25 percent,
unless the Engineer is provided with calculations verifying that the required ductile response is

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
268 Greenbook 2021

maintained. The calculations shall be prepared by a Registered Civil or Structural Engineer and
submitted to the Engineer in accordance with 3-8.4.
If deformed steel bars are used, the steel area shall be increased to account for the difference in steel
yield strength, steel spacing, concrete cover, and crack control between the welded wire reinforcement
and steel bars.
216-3.3.3 Placement. Reinforcement placement shall conform to the details shown on the Plans.
Reinforcement shall be firmly and securely held in position by wiring at intersections and splices and by
using plastic or ferrous metal chairs, spacers, metal hangers supporting wires, or other devices of
sufficient strength to resist crushing under applied loads. Wooden or aluminum supports shall not be
used. Placement on layers of fresh concrete as the work progresses will not be permitted. Tack welding
of reinforcing bars will not be permitted.
Welded wire fabric shall be rolled flat before placing concrete, unless otherwise shown on the Plans
or Standard Plans.
216-3.3.4 Splicing. Splices in reinforcing bars shall be constructed using lap splices.
Splicing of reinforcing bars will not be permitted at locations shown on the Plans or Standard Plans
as a “No-Splice Zone.” At the option of the Contractor, reinforcing bars may be continuous at locations
where splices are shown on the Plans. The locations of splices, except where shown on the Plans, shall
be determined by the Contractor.
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, splices in adjacent reinforcing bars at any particular section
shall be staggered. The minimum distance between staggered lap splices or mechanical lap splices shall
be the same as the length required for a lap splice in the largest bar.
216-3.4 Curing.
216-3.4.1 General. Curing shall be for a length of time sufficient for the PCC to develop the
specified compressive strength in 28 Days or less. Any one of the following methods of curing or
combinations thereof may be used:
a) Steam Curing. Steam curing shall conform to ASTM C1433/C1433M. PRCB sections shall be
low pressure, steam-cured by a system capable of maintaining a moist atmosphere.
b) Water Curing. Water curing shall conform to ASTM C1433/C1433M. PRCB sections shall be
kept moist continuously.
c) Membrane Curing. A sealing membrane conforming to ASTM C309 shall be applied and left
intact until the specified PCC compressive strength is attained. The temperature of the PCC at
the time of application of the membrane shall be within ± 100ºF (± 60ºC) of the atmospheric
temperature. All surfaces shall be kept moist prior to the application of the membranes and shall
be damp when the membrane is applied.
216-3.5 Forms. Forms shall have sufficient rigidity to be capable of maintaining section
dimensions within the permissible tolerances. Form surfaces which will come into contact with PCC
shall be constructed of smooth non-porous material.
216-3.6 Lifting Holes or Devices. Lifting holes or devices may be cast into, or attached to, PRCB
sections. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8.3 if so specified in the Special
Provisions.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 269

216-4 TESTING REQUIREMENTS.

216-4.1 Test Specimens. Test specimens shall conform to 201-1.1.5 as modified to allow the use of
Section 11 of ASTM C497 or AASHTO T280. The Engineer shall be notified before testing is started.
216-4.2 Compression Testing of Cylinders.
216-4.2.1 General. Compression testing of cylinders shall conform to 201-1.1.5. A minimum of 3
test cylinders shall be prepared from each PCC mix used for each lot of PRCB sections. A production
lot for PRCB shall be the lesser of one day’s production, 400 feet (120 m) or 50 units.
216-4.2.2 Acceptance. When the average compressive strength of all cylinders tested is equal to or
greater than the specified compressive strength of the PCC, and not more than 10 percent of the
cylinders tested have a compressive strength less than the specified compressive strength, and no
cylinder tested has a compressive strength less than 80 percent of the specified compressive strength, the
lot will be accepted.
When the compressive strength of the cylinders tested does not conform to the aforementioned
acceptance criteria, acceptance of the lot shall be determined in accordance with 216-4.3.
216-4.3 Compression Testing of Cores.
216-4.3.1 General. Cores shall be obtained and tested for compressive strength in accordance
with 201-1.1.5.
216-4.3.2 Core Holes. Core holes shall be plugged and sealed using high-strength, non-shrink
grout. The compressive strength of the repaired core holes shall meet or exceed the compressive
strength requirements of the PRCB section.
216-5 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS.
216-5.1 Internal Dimensions. Internal dimensions shall not vary more than 1 percent from the
dimensions shown on the Plans or Standard Plans. The haunch dimensions shall not vary more than 1/4
inch (6 mm) from the dimensions shown on the Plans.
216-5.2 Slab and Wall Thickness. Slab and wall thicknesses shall not be less than that shown on
the Plans or Standard Plans by more than 5 percent or 3/16 inch (5 mm), whichever is greater. A
thickness greater than that shown on the Plans will not be a cause for rejection.
216-5.3 Length of Opposite Surfaces. The length of opposite surfaces shall not vary more than 1/8
inch/foot of internal span. The maximum variation shall not exceed 5/8 inch (16 mm) for all sizes
through an internal span of 7 feet (2100 mm), and 3/4 inch (19 mm) for an internal span greater than 7
feet (2100 mm), except where beveled ends for laying of curves are specified.
216-5.4 Length of Section. The under-run in length shall not be more than 1/8 inch/foot of length
with a maximum of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) in any PRCB section.
216-5.5 Position of Reinforcement. The maximum variation in the position of the reinforcement
for slab and wall thicknesses of 5 inches (125 mm) or less shall be ± 3/8 inch (9.5 mm), and for
thicknesses greater than 5 inches (125 mm) shall be ± 1/2 inch (12.5 mm).
The cover over the reinforcement shall not be less than 5/8 inch (15 mm), as measured to the internal
surface or the external surface of the slab except as follows. The cover over the reinforcement for the
external surface of the top slab for PRCB sections with less than 2 feet (600 mm) of cover shall not be
less than 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). The aforementioned minimum cover limitations do not apply at the
mating surfaces of a joint.
Hooks and bends shall conform to ACI 318.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
270 Greenbook 2021

216-6 MARKINGS. The following information shall be legibly marked on each PRCB section by
indentation or waterproof paint:
a) PRCB section span,
b) rise,
c) table number,
d) maximum and minimum design earth cover,
e) specification designation,
f) interior invert cover,
g) date of manufacture, and
h) the word “top” lettered on the inside top surface.
216-7 CAUSES FOR REJECTION. Inspection of PRCB as may be deemed necessary by the
Engineer will be made at the place of manufacture. Individual PRCB sections may be rejected due to
any of the following unless repairs are made and approved by the Engineer:
a) Fractures or cracks with widths exceeding 0.10 inch (3 mm).
b) Mixing and molding defects, honeycombed or open texture that would adversely affect the
function of the PRCB section,
c) Failure to meet the permissible variations specified in 216-5.
d) Exposure of any reinforcement arising from misplacement thereof.
216-8 BASIS OF ACCEPTANCE. The basis of acceptance shall be by one of the following as
specified in the Special Provisions:
a) Compliance with these Specifications, inspection of the manufacturing, and inspection of the
completed PRCB sections.
b) Acceptance of a Certificate of Compliance conforming to 4-5.
Such acceptance, however, shall be considered a tentative acceptance. Final acceptance will only be
made when the Work is completed.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 271

SECTION 217 – BEDDING AND BACKFILL MATERIALS

217-1 BEDDING MATERIAL.

217-1.1 General. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans,
bedding material, except for plastic pipe, shall be sand, gravel, crushed aggregate, or native free-draining
granular material having a sand equivalent of not less than 20 or a coefficient of permeability greater
than 1.5 inches/hour (37.5 mm per hour).
217-1.2 Bedding Material for Plastic Pipe. For ABS composite, PVC composite, and FRPM pipe
bedding material shall conform to 217-1.1.
For HDPE, PVC solid wall, and PE solid wall pipe the bedding material shall be crushed rock conforming
to the requirements shown in Table 217-1.2 unless otherwise specified or shown on the Plans.
Bedding for fittings shall be Class 560-C-3250 (330-C-23) concrete conforming to 201-1.1.2.

TABLE 217-1.2
Nominal Pipe Size inches (mm) Maximum Rock Gradation
Up to and including 15 inches (375 mm) 1/2 inch (12.5 mm)
Over 15 inches (375 mm) 3/4 inch (19 mm)

217-2 TRENCH BACKFILL.

217-2.1 General. Trench backfill material shall be native material generated from trench
excavations or imported. Trench backfill material shall conform to the requirements shown in Table
217-2.1 and the following.
Trench backfill material shall be free from shale, sod, roots, rubbish, trash, lumber, organic material,
ashes and other debris, unusual color, contamination, and sulfide odor. Rocks, including pieces of
broken concrete or bituminous pavement, originating from the native material shall be dispersed within,
or mixed with, the backfill material such that voids or pockets of large pieces (“nesting”) are not created.

TABLE 217-2.1
Zone Zone Limits Maximum Rock Size Sand Equivalent
(greatest dimension) (Excluding Rock)
Backfill Zone From subgrade to 12” (300 6” (150 mm) Not less than 20 unless
mm) above top of pipe. otherwise shown on the
Plans or specified in the
Special Provisions.

When native material is unsuitable for use as trench backfill, it shall be disposed of off the Work
site, and material conforming to 217-2.2 shall be imported.
217-2.2 Imported Trench Backfill. Imported trench backfill shall be trench backfill material
imported from outside the Work site. Imported trench backfill material shall conform to 217-2.1 and the
following.
A sample of the proposed material shall be delivered to the Engineer not less than 10 Days prior to
its intended use. The sample shall have a minimum dry weight of 100 pounds (45 kg) and shall be
clearly identified as to source, including street address and community of origin.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
272 Greenbook 2021

The Engineer will determine the material’s suitability for use as trench backfill and the maximum
dry density to be used in determining the relative compaction achieved during placement.
Should the imported trench backfill material delivered to the Work site substantially differ from the
approved sample, it shall not be used for backfill and shall be removed from the Work site.
217-3 STRUCTURE BACKFILL. Material used for structure backfill shall have a sand equivalent
of not less than 20 and conform to the gradation requirements shown in Table 217-3.

TABLE 217-3
Sieve Size Percent Passing
4" (100 mm) 100
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 35 - 100
No. 30 (600 µm) 20 - 100

217-4 PERVIOUS BACKFILL. Pervious backfill material shall consist of gravel, crushed gravel,
crushed rock, natural sands, manufactured sand, or combinations thereof and shall conform to the
gradation requirements shown in Table 217-4.

TABLE 217-4
Sieve Size Percent Passing
3/4" (19 mm) 100
3/8" (9.5 mm) 80 - 100
No. 100 (150 µm) 0-8
No. 200 (75 µm) 0-3

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 273

PART 3
CONSTRUCTION METHODS
SECTION 300 – EARTHWORK
300-1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING.
300-1.1. General. Clearing shall consist of the trimming and removal of trees, and the removal of
brush, weeds, stumps, trash, and other debris. Grubbing shall consist of the removal of sod, grass,
stumps, roots, and other vegetation on or below the ground surface. Clearing and grubbing shall be
performed within the Work area and other such areas as shown on the Plans prior to the start of
earthwork operations.
Grubbing shall extend to the outside excavation and fill slope lines, except that where slopes are to be
rounded, the areas shall extend to the outside limits of slope rounding. Within the limits of clearing, all
stumps, roots 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm) in diameter or larger, buried logs, and all other objectionable material
shall be removed 3 feet (1 m) below the existing ground surface or to subgrade, whichever is deeper.
Trees and vegetation not to be removed shall be protected in place.
300-1.2 Root Pruning and Tree Trimming. Tree trimming and root pruning shall be performed as
specified in the Special Provisions.
300-1.3 Measurement. Clearing and grubbing, if measured for payment, will be measured by the
acre or lump sum, except for tree trimming and root pruning. Removal of trees and stumps, if measured
separately, will be measured by “each” for each size of diameter or range of diameter sizes.
Tree trimming and root pruning will be measured as specified in the Special Provisions.
300-1.4 Payment. Unless otherwise specified, payment for clearing and grubbing will be made at
the Contract Unit Price per acre or the lump sum Bid price. Payment for removal of stumps and trees, if
measured separately for payment, will be made at the Contract Unit Price per size of diameter or range
of diameter sizes. The Contract Unit Price or lump sum Bid price shall include payment for removal and
disposal of the resulting materials off the Work site.
If the Proposal does not include a Bid item for clearing and grubbing, payment will be considered as
included in the Contract Unit Price for the Bid item(s) which require clearing and grubbing.
300-2 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION.
300-2.1 General. Unclassified excavation shall consist of all excavation, including roadways,
unless separately designated.
300-2.2 Unsuitable Material.
300-2.2.1 General. Material that is unsuitable for its planned use shall be excavated and disposed
of as directed by the Engineer.
The removal and disposal of unsuitable material will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price for unclassified
excavation if the removal of such material is shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
If the removal of unsuitable material is not shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions,
the removal and disposal of such material will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price for unclassified
excavation. However, if the removal and disposal of such material involves a substantial change in the
character of the work, an adjustment in payment will be made per 7-3.7.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
274 Greenbook 2021

300-2.2.2 Wet Material. If required excavated material is unsatisfactory for the specified use on
the Work solely because of high moisture content, the Contractor may be directed by the Engineer to
either process the material to reduce the moisture content to an optimum condition, or to remove the
material and replace it with suitable material. If such high moisture content is not the result of any
action on the part of the Contractor, or inaction in protecting the work during the course of the Contract,
the work involved will be paid for in accordance with 7-3 or 7-4. Otherwise, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer for approval, a plan for drying or removing and replacing the wet material, and such
work and material shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
300-2.3 Overshooting. Excessive blasting will not be permitted. Material outside the authorized
cross section which may be shattered or loosened because of blasting shall be removed at the
Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall discontinue any method of blasting which leads to
overshooting, is hazardous to the public, or is destructive to property or natural features.
300-2.4 Slides and Slipouts. Material outside the planned excavation limits which is unstable and
constitutes a potential slide as determined by the Engineer, material which has come into the planned
excavation limits, and material which has slipped out of new or old fills shall be excavated to designated
lines or slopes either by benching or in such manner as directed by the Engineer. Such material may be
used in the construction of an unclassified fill or disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
The removal and disposal of slide and slipout material as above specified, not resulting from
overshooting as specified in 300-2.3 and not resulting from any act or failure to act on the part of
the Contractor, will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price for unclassified excavation for the
quantities involved.
However, if due to the character of the work, the removal and disposal of such material is not
properly compensable at the Contract Unit Prices for unclassified excavation, the work may be paid for
as provided in 7-3 or 7-4.
Payment will be made only for those quantities of slide or slipout material which are actually
removed as ordered by the Engineer.
300-2.5 Slopes. Excavation slopes shall be finished in conformance with the lines and grades
shown on the Plans. All debris and loose material shall be removed. When completed, the average
plane of the slopes shall conform to the slopes indicated on the Plans and no point on the completed
slopes shall vary from the designated plane by more than 6 inches (150 mm) measured at right angles to
the slope. Where excavation is in rock, no point shall vary more than 2 feet (600 mm) from the
designated plane of the slope. In no case shall any portion of the slope encroach so as to interfere with
the planned use of the facility.
The tops of excavation slopes and the ends of excavations shall be rounded where shown on the
Plans, and these quantities will not be included in the quantities to be paid for as excavation. This
work will be considered as a part of finishing slopes and no additional compensation will be
allowed therefore.
300-2.6 Surplus Material. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions,
no surplus excavated material may be disposed of within the right-of-way. The Contractor shall
make all arrangements for disposal of the material at offsite locations and shall, upon request, file
with the Engineer the written consent of the owner of the property upon which it intends to dispose
of such material.
Quantities of surplus material, if shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, are approximate
only. The Contractor shall satisfy itself that there is sufficient material available for the completion of
the fills before disposing of any indicated surplus material inside or outside the right-of-way. Any

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 275

shortage of material, caused by premature disposal of the indicated surplus material by the Contractor,
shall be replaced by it and no compensation will be allowed for such replacement.
300-2.7 Selected Material. Selected material encountered in excavation within the right-of-way
shall be used as shown on the Plans, in the Special Provisions, or as directed by the Engineer. Topsoil
excavated within the limits of the Work may be considered as a selected material only for the purpose of
backfilling areas to be planted.
300-2.8 Measurement. The following earthwork operations will be measured as unclassified
excavation for the quantities of material involved:
a) Excavating the roadway prism including public and private road approaches;
b) Connections and driveways;
c) Excavating unsuitable material when shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions;
d) Excavating slides and slipouts not resulting from overshooting;
e) Excavating surplus material;
f) Excavating selected material and topsoil from within the limits of the Work and removing such
materials from stockpiles when stockpiling is ordered;
g) Excavating local borrow.
Measurement of material removed from required stockpiles will be based on the volume it occupies
in its final position after compaction.
Excavation in excess of the planned or authorized cross section will not be paid for, except as
provided in 300-2.2 and 300-2.4. The Contractor shall backfill and compact unauthorized excavated
areas to the original ground elevation or authorized section at its expense.
Care shall be exercised to prevent excavating below grade. Areas excavated below grade shall be
filled with suitable material and compacted by the Contractor at its expense.
300-2.9 Payment. Payment for all unclassified excavation will be made at the Contract Unit Price
per cubic yard (m3). Payment for unclassified excavation shall include compensation for excavating,
sloping, rounding tops and ends of excavations, loading, disposing of surplus material, stockpiling, and
hauling it to its final location.
Where required by the Plans or the Special Provisions or where directed by the Engineer, the
excavating and stockpiling of selected material will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price for
unclassified excavation. Removing such selected material from the stockpile and placing it in its final
position will also be paid for at the Contract Unit Price for unclassified excavation. The Contractor may
stockpile material; however, no separate payment will be made for excavating material from an optional
stockpile and placing it in its final position.
No separate payment will be made for excavating topsoil temporarily stockpiled along the top of
slopes and placing it in its final position on the slope for erosion control planting work, whether or not
required by the Contract Documents or by the Engineer.
300-3 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL.
300-3.1 General. Structure excavation shall consist of the removal of material for the construction
of foundations for bridges, retaining walls, headwalls, culverts, or other structures, and other excavation
shown on the Plans or specified in the Specifications as structure excavation. Excavation and backfill
for underground conduit construction, including box conduit, shall be in accordance with 306.
Structure backfill shall consist of furnishing material, if necessary, and placing and compacting
backfill material around structures to the lines shown on the Plans.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
276 Greenbook 2021

Structure excavation and structure backfill shall include the furnishing of all materials and
equipment; the construction or installation of all cofferdams and other facilities which may be
necessary to perform the excavations and to place and compact the backfill; and the subsequent
removal of such facilities, except where they are required or permitted by the Plans or the Special
Provisions to remain in place.
300-3.2 Cofferdams. Cofferdams for foundation construction shall be carried well below the
bottom of the footings and shall be well braced and reasonably watertight. The interior dimensions of
cofferdams shall provide sufficient clearance inside the wales for constructing forms and driving piles
and to permit pumping outside the forms.
If in the judgment of the Contractor, the clearance provided on the Plans between the outside line of
the footing and any pile or interior wall or surface is not sufficient to permit the driving of piles or
building of forms, it may provide such necessary clearance by constructing the cofferdam sufficiently
large to provide such clearances as may be deemed necessary. Any such enlargement in excess of 1 foot
(0.3 m) outside the dimensions of the footing as shown on the Plans shall be considered as being for the
sole purpose of expediting the work of the Contractor and such excavation and backfill shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.
Cofferdams which are tilted or moved out of position by any cause during the process of sinking
shall be plumbed or enlarged to provide the necessary clearance and proper pier location and such work
shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
In tidal waters or in streams at a time of probable flood, cofferdam walls shall be vented at low water
elevation to ensure equal hydrostatic head both inside and outside of the cofferdam during the period of
pouring and setting of seals.
No shoring will be permitted in cofferdams which will induce stress, shock, or vibration in the
permanent structure.
When permitted by the Engineer, cross struts or bracing may extend through foundation concrete.
Such struts or bracing below low water will be permitted to remain in place, except in navigable streams
or, when shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions to be removed. Struts or bracing above low
water shall be removed and the resulting space filled with concrete of the same mix as that specified for
the surrounding concrete.
For substructure work, the Contractor shall, in accordance with 3-8.4, submit Working Drawings
showing the proposed method of cofferdam construction and other details left open to choice or not fully
shown on the Plans. The type and clearance of cofferdams, insofar as such details affect the character of
the finished work, will be subject to the approval of the Engineer, but other details of design will be left
to the Contractor, who shall be responsible for the successful construction of the work.
After completion of the substructure, the cofferdams with all sheeting and bracing shall be removed
to at least 2 feet (0.6 m) below the level of the streambed by the Contractor at its expense and such
removal shall be performed in a manner that will not disturb or mar the finished concrete or masonry.
300-3.3 Foundation Material Treatment. When footing concrete or masonry is to rest upon rock,
the rock shall be fully uncovered and the surface thereof shall be removed to a depth sufficient to expose
sound rock. The rock shall be roughly leveled off or cut to approximate horizontal and vertical steps,
and shall be roughened. Seams in the rock shall be grouted under pressure or treated as the Engineer
may direct and the cost thereof will be paid for as Extra Work.
When no piles are used and footing concrete or masonry is to rest on an excavated surface other than
rock, care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. Final removal of the foundation
material to grade shall not be made until just before the concrete or masonry is placed. Except when

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 277

overexcavation is directed by the Engineer, excavation below grade shall be replaced at the Contractor’s
expense with the same class of concrete specified for the structure and at the time the concrete for the
structure is being placed. Where it is determined by the Engineer that it will not be detrimental to the
structure, the Contractor may backfill above grade with not less than 90 percent relative compaction and
then trim to the specified grade.
Where the original ground is below the specified elevation for footings, the Contractor shall backfill
to 6 inches (150 mm) above grade with not less than 90 percent relative compaction and then excavate to
the prescribed grade prior to placing concrete.
The excavation for piers and abutments shall be completed to the bottom of the footings before any
piles are driven therein, and excess material remaining in the excavation after pile driving shall be
removed to the elevation of the bottom of the footings.
When piles are used and ground displacement results from pile driving operations, the Contractor
shall at its expense excavate or backfill the footing area to the grade of the bottom of the footing as
shown on the Plans with structure backfill material.
300-3.4 Inspection. Whenever any structure excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify
the Engineer who will make an inspection of the foundation. No concrete or masonry shall be placed
until the foundation has been approved by the Engineer.
300-3.5 Structure Backfill. Structure backfill shall conform to 217-3. Structure backfill shall not
be placed until the structure has been inspected by the Engineer and approved for backfilling. No
backfill material shall be deposited against the back of concrete abutments or concrete retaining walls,
until the concrete has developed not less than the specified 28-Day compressive strength. Backfill at the
inside of bridge wingwalls shall be placed before railing bases on the wingwalls are constructed.
Structure backfill shall be placed in accordance with 300-4.5 and shall be mechanically compacted to
a minimum relative compaction of 90 percent.
Where consolidation of structure backfill by jetting is permitted by the Plans or the Special
Provisions, the following conditions shall apply:
a) Backfill material shall be placed and consolidated in layers not exceeding 4 feet (1.2 m) in
thickness.
b) The jetting shall be performed without softening the embankment and in a manner that
excess water will not be impounded.
c) Jetting methods shall be supplemented by the use of vibratory or other consolidation
equipment when necessary to obtain 90 percent relative compaction.
d) The upper 3 feet (0.9 m) below finished subgrade shall be mechanically compacted in
roadway areas.
300-3.6 Pervious Backfill. Pervious backfill shall conform to 217-4. Pervious backfill material
shall be placed behind bridge abutments, wingwalls, and retaining walls as shown on the Plans and in
accordance with the following requirements.
All weep holes shall be backed with 2 cubic feet (0.06 m3) of material conforming to the
requirements for No. 3 concrete aggregate conforming to 200-1.4; securely tied in a burlap sack; and
placed in such a manner that the backing covers the weep holes and extends at least 12 inches (300 mm)
above the bottom of the opening. An 8-inch (200 mm) square section of 1/4 inch (6 mm) galvanized or
aluminum screen having a minimum wire diameter of 0.03 inch (0.8 mm) shall be firmly attached at the
back of each weep hole before the material is placed.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
278 Greenbook 2021

Pervious backfill material shall be placed in layers along with and by the same methods specified for
structure backfill. Pervious backfill material at any one location shall be approximately the same
grading, and, at locations where the material would otherwise be exposed to erosion, shall be covered
with at least a 1 foot (0.3 m) layer of earthy material approved by the Engineer.
300-3.7 Payment. Unless otherwise specified, no payment will be made for structure excavation or
backfill. Payment shall be considered as included in the price in the Bid for the construction or
installation of the item to which such excavation or backfill is incidental or Bid appurtenant. Unless
otherwise shown on the Plans, the quantity of the structure excavation, whether paid for as a separate
item or not, shall be that volume in place included within the vertical plane 1 foot (0.3 m) outside of and
parallel with the outermost horizontal dimensions of the structure and the surface of the existing ground,
final ground surface, or proposed street subgrade, whichever is lower, and the footing subgrade.
Structure backfill will be measured to the finished ground surface, or to the proposed street subgrade,
whichever is lower, within the limits specified above.
300-4 UNCLASSIFIED FILL.
300-4.1 General. Unclassified fill shall be fill generated from unclassified excavation on the Work
site. Unclassified fill shall consist of all fill unless separately specified. Construction of unclassified fill
shall include preparing the area on which unclassified fill is to be placed, and the depositing,
conditioning, and compacting of fill material.
Rocks or other solid materials which are larger than 4 inches (100 mm) in greatest dimension shall
not be placed in unclassified fill where piles are to be placed or driven.
Clods or hard lumps of earth of 6 inches (150 mm) in greatest dimension shall be broken up before
compacting, except when the unclassified fill material contains large rocks, boulders, or hard lumps
(such as hardpan or cemented gravel which cannot be broken readily) over 12 inches (300 mm) in
greatest dimension, such materials may be incorporated in the fill. The location and depth of its
placement in the fill and the method to be used shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Unclassified fill shall not be constructed when the material is frozen or a blanket of snow prevents
proper compaction.
300-4.2 Preparation of Placement Areas. Areas over which unclassified fill is to be placed shall
first be cleared and grubbed in accordance with 300-1. The areas shall then be scarified to a minimum
depth of 6 inches (150 mm), moisture-conditioned in accordance with 300-4.6, and compacted in
accordance with 300-4.7 to a relative compaction of at least 85 percent unless otherwise specified in the
Special Provisions.
When unclassified fill is shown to be placed over existing surface improvements which are to remain
in place, the preparation shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
300-4.3 Other Fill Materials. Brick rubble, broken asphalt pavement, and broken concrete
originating from the Work shall be disposed of off the Work site. Unless otherwise specified, no fill
materials may be imported from outside the limits of the Work.
300-4.4 Benching. Benching is required when unclassified fill is to be placed on a slope of 1
vertical to 5 horizontal or steeper. When unclassified fill is being constructed against an existing slope,
the slope face shall be horizontally benched to key the unclassified fill into the slope face. Benching
shall be into firm soils free of loose or disturbed soils, such that, a minimum 3 feet (0.9 m) vertical face
height is exposed into firm soils unless otherwise shown on the Plans. The horizontal surface of each
bench shall be scarified to a depth of at least 6 inches (150 mm) prior to placing the first lift of
unclassified fill.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 279

300-4.5 Placement. Unclassified fill material shall be placed in horizontal layers of depths
compatible with the material being placed and the type of equipment being used. Each layer shall be
evenly spread and moisture-conditioned or aerated, as necessary. Unless otherwise specified, each layer
spread for compaction shall not exceed 8 inches (200 mm) of compacted thickness.
Unless otherwise approved, each layer of unclassified fill material shall cover the length and width of
the area to be filled before the next higher layer is placed. The top surface of each layer shall be
approximately level, but with a crown or crossfall of at least 1 vertical in 50 horizontal, but no more than
1 vertical in 20 horizontal.
When unclassified fill material contains by volume over 25 percent of rock larger than 6 inches (150
mm) in greatest dimension, the unclassified fill below a plane 3 feet (0.9 m) from finished grade may be
constructed in layers of a loose thickness before compaction up to the maximum size of rock in the
material, but not exceeding 3 feet (0.9 m) in thickness. The interstices around the rock in each layer
shall be filled with earth or other fine material and compacted.
300-4.6 Application of Water. At the time of compaction, the moisture content of unclassified fill
material shall be such that the specified relative compaction will be obtained and the fill will be firm,
hard, and unyielding.
Chemical additives may be used in water to be applied to fill material when approved by the Engineer.
300-4.7 Compaction. Unless otherwise specified, each layer of unclassified fill shall be compacted
to a relative compaction of at least 90 percent.
Each layer of unclassified fill shall be compacted by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers,
vibratory rollers, or other mechanical means approved by the Engineer. Unclassified fill layers shall be
compacted to the specified relative compaction by hand-directed compaction equipment where it would
be impractical because of inaccessibility to use larger compacting equipment.
When soil types, or a combination of soil types, are encountered which tend to develop densely
packed surfaces as a result of spreading or compacting operations, the surface of each layer of fill shall
be sufficiently roughened after compaction to ensure bond to the succeeding layer.
300-4.8 Slopes. Slopes constructed of unclassified fill shall be finished in conformance with the
lines and grades shown on the Plans. Completed fill slopes shall not vary from the plane shown on the
Plans by more than 6 inches (150 mm) measured at right angles to the slope, unless otherwise specified.
300-4.9 Measurement. The following earthwork operations will be measured as unclassified fill
for the quantities of material involved:
a) Fill within the limits of the roadway prism including public and private road approaches.
b) Connections and driveways.
c) Slopes and embankments.
Unclassified fill placed outside the limits shown on the Plans, or to a grade flatter than the grade
shown on the Plans will not be measured for payment.
300-4.10 Payment. Payment for unclassified fill will be made at the Contract Unit Price per cubic
yard (m3). The Contract Unit shall include preparation (other than clearing and grubbing) of placement
areas, benching, unclassified fill material, placement, water, compaction, and grading to the lines,
grades, and cross sections shown on the Plans.
Payment for clearing and grubbing shall conform to 300-1.4.
No separate or additional payment will be made for chemical additives.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
280 Greenbook 2021

No separate or additional payment will be made for bulking, subsidence, shrinkage, temporary
erosion control measures unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
No additional payment will be made for benching not approved by the Engineer or not shown on the Plans.
No additional payment will be made for disposal of excess unclassified fill material, except when
determined by the Engineer to be unsuitable material in accordance with 300-2.2.
300-5 BORROW EXCAVATION.
300-5.1 Local Borrow. Local borrow shall consist of material excavated and used in the
construction of fills, for use as selected material, or for other construction purposes. Local borrow shall
be obtained by widening cuts or by excavating from other sources outside the planned or authorized
cross section within the right-of-way and within the limits of the Work. Local borrow shall be material
which is excavated from sources specified or designated by the Engineer. The sources of material to be
excavated shall be approved in advance by the Engineer. Local borrow shall be excavated to the lines
and grades established by the Engineer.
300-5.2 Imported Borrow. Imported borrow shall consist of material required for construction of
fills, and unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall make arrangements
for obtaining imported borrow and shall pay all costs involved.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of opening any borrow site so that
adequate time will be allowed for testing the material and establishing cross section elevations and
measurements of the ground surface.
300-5.3 Placing and Compacting. Borrow shall be placed and compacted as specified in 300-4.
The Contractor shall satisfy itself that there is sufficient space available in fill locations for placing
any excavated material before placing imported borrow. Any excess excavation which develops as a
result of placing imported borrow in advance of completing excavations shall be disposed of at the
Contractor’s expense in accordance with the provisions of 300-2.6. A corresponding reduction in the
quantity of imported borrow to be paid for will be made, for which the Contractor will have no claim
for compensation.
300-5.4 Measurement and Payment. Quantities of local borrow will be measured and paid as
specified for unclassified excavation in 300-2.8 and 300-2.9.
Quantities of imported borrow will be measured and paid in accordance with the Special Provisions.
300-6 EARTHWORK FOR DEBRIS DAMS AND BASINS.
300-6.1 General. Earthwork for debris dams and basins shall include clearing, stripping,
excavation, fill, backfill, grading, and disposal of excess excavated material.
300-6.2 Clearing and Grubbing. Unless otherwise specified, the entire area of all rights-of-way
shall be cleared of all trees and brush by cutting at the ground surface. All main root clusters shall be
entirely removed from areas upon which improvements are to be constructed, and in addition, those
areas upon which compacted fills are to be constructed shall be grubbed as follows:
Individual roots of diameters between 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) and 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) shall be
removed to a depth of not less than 1 foot (0.3 m) below natural ground. Larger roots shall be removed
down to the level at which the root diameter is 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or less. Regardless of diameter, no
roots need to be removed to a depth greater than 3 feet (1 m).
All bulking of soil resulting from the grubbing operations shall be compacted and holes filled and
compacted to subgrade for subsequent compacted fills.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 281

300-6.3 Stripping. When stripping is indicated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, the
Contractor shall strip the soil from the designated areas to the depths specified.
The material obtained from stripping operations shall be disposed of away from the Work site unless
otherwise specified.
Soil loosened below the stripping depth specified shall be compacted. Soil removed below stripping
depth shall be replaced and compacted to subgrade. All such filling and compacting shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.
300-6.4 Basin Excavation. Unless otherwise specified, material obtained from the basin excavation
shall be used for compacted fills. The Engineer will designate the exact limits of basin excavation and
the depths thereof in order to obtain a material suitable for use in the compacted fills. Rocks over 6
inches (150 mm) in greatest dimension will not be permitted in compacted fills and shall be disposed of
away from the Work site unless otherwise specified.
300-6.5 Compacted Fills. Unless otherwise specified, the relative compaction of all fills shall be at
least 90 percent.
Compacted fills shall be constructed of materials obtained from the onsite excavation unless
otherwise specified.
The work of preparing subgrades, placing fill materials, watering, and compacting shall be
performed only in the presence of the Engineer.
On hillsides and at abutments where the existing natural slope is steeper than 1 vertical in 4
horizontal, the existing ground shall be benched as the fill is brought up in layers. The benches shall be
approximately horizontal and shall extend below the surface of the cleared and stripped ground a
minimum depth of 2 feet (0.6 m) normal to the slope unless otherwise specified. The material cut from
the slope shall be incorporated in the fill.
Before placing the materials for the compacted fills, the subgrade shall be moistened, compacted,
and scarified in accordance with the requirements hereinafter set forth for subsequent layers of fill. The
Engineer may determine the locations at which each load of fill shall be placed in order to obtain the best
possible blending of materials. The fill material shall be placed in approximately horizontal, evenly
distributed layers not exceeding 8 inches (200 mm) in depth, except that where the Contractor clearly
demonstrates that it can attain the required relative density with the type of equipment being used, a
greater lift may be authorized. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, each layer of fill material
shall cover the full length and width of the entire area to be filled before the next higher layer of material
is placed, and each layer shall be sufficiently scarified, after compaction, to provide bond with the
succeeding layer. The top surface of each layer shall have sufficient crown to provide adequate drainage
for water at all times during the construction period.
Before rolling or tamping, sufficient water shall be evenly applied to each layer of loose material so
as to provide proper moisture content for satisfactory compaction to the specified relative compaction.
The material shall be disc harrowed, or otherwise similarly worked, as the water is applied. The
moisture content at the time of compaction shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. In case any
layer of fill shall prove to be too wet to permit the attainment of the specified relative compaction, the
compacting work shall be delayed until the material has dried sufficiently to permit the attainment of
said relative compaction.
After each layer has been spread, worked, and properly moistened, it shall be compacted by
approved tamping or sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, mechanically operated hand tampers,
or other mechanical means acceptable to the Engineer, to such extent as will produce the specified
relative compaction.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
282 Greenbook 2021

Compacted fill which is to become subgrade for concrete channel or basin facing slabs, spillways, or
other hydraulic structures, shall be overfilled sufficiently to permit the trimming thereof to an even and
firm subgrade for the concrete to be placed thereon.
300-6.6 Payment. Clearing and grubbing shall be paid for on a lump sum or per acre (hectare) basis
as provided in the Special Provisions.
Stripping, excavation, and compacted fill shall be measured and paid for on a cubic yard (m3) basis
as provided for in the Special Provisions.
No direct payment will be made for overfilled subgrade for concrete structures. Payment shall be
included in the Contract Unit Price for the compacted fill.
300-7 EARTHWORK FOR CHANNELS.
300-7.1 General. Earthwork for channels shall consist of clearing, stripping, excavation, fill,
backfill, grading, and disposal of excess excavated and removed material.
Channels for the purposes of this section shall mean open rectangular concrete channels and lined or
unlined trapezoidal channels.
300-7.2 Stripping. When stripping is indicated on the Plans or otherwise specified, the Contractor
shall strip the soil from the designated areas to the depths specified.
The material obtained from stripping operations shall be disposed of away from the site unless
otherwise specified.
Soil loosened or removed below the stripping depth specified shall be replaced and compacted
to not less than 90 percent relative compaction. All such filling and compacting shall be at the
Contractor’s expense.
300-7.3 Excavation. Excavation in an open cut for lined channels may be made so as to place
concrete directly against excavated surfaces, provided the faces of the excavation are firm, hard, and
unyielding; are such as will stand or can be made to stand without sloughing; and are at all points outside
the concrete lines shown on the Plans.
Excavated surfaces becoming subgrade for lined channels, or subdrainage material, shall be
excavated to the lines indicated on the Plans. Excavation made below subgrade shall be backfilled and
compacted to a relative compaction of not less than 90 percent or, with the approval of the Engineer,
with concrete or other materials being placed. However, no payment will be made for such
overexcavation or material used for the backfill.
Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond the normal lines of excavation in order to remove
boulders or other interfering objects, the voids remaining after the removal of such boulders or
interfering objects shall be backfilled as hereinafter specified, or as otherwise approved by the Engineer.
When the void is below the subgrade for reinforced concrete channel, suitable material approved
by the Engineer shall be compacted to a relative compaction of not less than 90 percent or as
specified. With the approval of the Engineer, concrete of the same mix as that used in the concrete
channel may be used.
The removal of all boulders or other interfering objects and the backfilling of voids caused by
such removals shall be at the expense of the Contractor and no direct payment for the cost of such
work will be made by the Agency. The cost of such work shall be included in the prices bid for the
various items of work.
If, during the progress of excavation, material is encountered which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
is unsuitable for subgrade for the structure to be constructed thereon, the Engineer will direct the
Contractor to excavate beyond the pay lines shown on the Plans. However, the suitability of subgrade

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 283

will be determined by the Engineer on the basis of its ability to withstand the load of the proposed
channel and not upon the capacity to withstand the loads which may be placed thereon by the
Contractor’s equipment. Should the Contractor be directed to excavate beyond the pay lines shown on
the Plans, said pay lines will be extended to include such excavation. The pay lines for subdrainage
material, if used, will be adjusted accordingly.
Materials used or work performed by the Contractor beyond the specified requirements for
stabilization of the subgrade, so that it will withstand the loads which may be placed upon it by the
Contractor’s equipment, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
300-7.4 Fill and Backfill. Unless otherwise specified, the material obtained from the Work
excavations will be suitable for use as fill or backfill, provided that all organic material, rubbish, debris,
and other objectionable material contained therein is first removed. However, rocks, boulders, broken
Portland cement concrete, and bituminous type pavement obtained from the Work excavations will be
permitted in the backfill or fill with the following limitations:
a) The maximum dimension of any piece used shall be 6 inches (150 mm).
b) Pieces larger than 4 inches (100 mm) shall not be placed within 12 inches (300 mm) of any structure.
c) Pieces larger than 3 inches (75 mm) shall not be placed within 12 inches (300 mm) of the
subgrade for paving.
d) “Nesting” of pieces will not be permitted.
Unless otherwise specified, the relative compaction of all fill and backfill shall be 90 percent.
300-7.5 Grading. Grading of unlined channels, levees, and access roads shall conform to the
following tolerances:
A vertical tolerance of zero above and 3 inches (75 mm) below the specified grade will be allowed for:
a) The channel bottom.
b) The channel sideslopes in both cut and fill.
c) The levee and access road sideslopes in cut.
A vertical tolerance of zero below and 3 inches (75 mm) above the specified grade will be allowed on:
d) The top surface of levees and access roads in both cut and fill.
e) The levee and access road sideslopes in fill.
Regardless of the construction tolerances specified, the excavation and grading shall be performed so
that the finished surfaces are in uniform planes with no abrupt breaks in the surface.
The construction tolerances specified herein for grading are solely for purposes of field control.
300-7.6 Measurement and Payment. Clearing, stripping, and excavation shall be measured and
paid for on a cubic yard (m3) basis or as specified in the Special Provisions.
Compacted fill shall be measured and paid for as provided in 300-4.9.
All costs involved in backfilling and grading shall be included in the prices in the Bid for the
applicable items of earthwork.
300-8 GEOTEXTILES FOR DRAINAGE.
300-8.1 Trench Drains. Geotextiles for trench drains shall be placed in accordance with the
following provisions:
300-8.1.1 Placement. Fabric shall be placed in the trench in accordance with the Plans. The fabric
shall be placed loosely and seated firmly into the corners. If heat-bonded fabric is used, the bonded side
shall be placed to the inside of the trench and the fuzzy side shall face the outside of the trench, against

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
284 Greenbook 2021

the native soil. Overlapping, if necessary, shall be a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm). Damaged fabric
shall be repaired at Contractor’s expense by placing new fabric that meets overlap requirements over the
damaged area. Fabric shall be covered as soon as possible after being placed, but not later than 7 Days
after placement. Fabrics left uncovered for more than 7 Days shall be removed and rejected.
Trench sides and bottom shall be excavated to provide a smooth surface, free of obstructions and
debris. After placement of granular fill, the 2 edges of the geotextile protruding at the top of the trench
shall be overlapped 12 inches (300 mm) on top of the granular fill, and then soil or other materials
required by the Plans shall be compacted in the trench to the required grade.
300-8.1.2 Measurement and Payment. Geotextiles shall be measured for payment by the square
yard (m2) of fabric placed, not including any fabric for overlaps or splices.
300-9 GEOTEXTILES FOR EROSION CONTROL.
300-9.1 Bank and Shore Protection. Geotextiles for bank and shore protection shall be placed in
accordance with the following provisions:
300-9.1.1 Placement. Prior to placement of fabric, the Contractor shall construct a subgrade in
accordance with the Plans and Specifications. The fabric shall be placed loosely (not in a stretched
condition), aligned, and placed in a manner to minimize wrinkling. Adjacent borders and ends of fabric
shall be overlapped a minimum of 18 inches (450 mm) or stitched when using nonwoven fabrics with a
grab tensile strength of 90 pounds (400 N) or woven fabrics with a grab tensile strength of 200 pounds
(890 N) or less. Borders and ends shall be overlapped 36 inches (900 mm) or stitched for nonwoven
fabrics with a grab tensile strength greater than 90 pounds (400 N) or woven fabrics with a grab tensile
strength greater than 200 pounds (890 N).
If the fabric is overlapped, the upstream or higher panel shall overlap the downstream or lower panel.
When stitched, the seam shall have seam breaking strength of not less than 80 percent of the minimum
required fabric strength. The size and composition of the stitching material and stitching pattern shall be
approved by the Engineer. The stitching yarn shall be of a contrasting color.
Anchoring of the fabric at terminal ends and top and bottom of the slope shall be accomplished
through the use of key trenches or aprons as shown on the Plans. If the geotextile is placed in a vertical
direction on the slope, there shall be no end joints between rolls. If heat bonded fabric is used, the fuzzy
side shall be placed against the soil with the heat bonded side up.
The fabric shall be secured with pins placed on 6 foot (1.8 m) centers at the midpoint of the overlaps
unless a key trench is used. Pins at 6-foot (1.8 m) centers shall be placed along the top edge of the slope.
Spacing of pins shall be reduced to eliminate tearing of the fabric. Pins shall be 12 inches (300 mm)
long or of sufficient length to prevent pin movement.
The outer stone cover shall be thick enough to completely prevent penetration of sunlight,
unless a bedding layer of aggregate particles greater in size than the openings in the outer stone
cover is installed first.
Fabric shall be covered as soon as possible after being placed, but not later than 7 Days after
placement. Fabric left uncovered for more than 7 Days shall be removed and rejected.
Equipment or vehicles shall not be operated on the fabric. Damaged fabric shall be repaired, at the
Contractor’s expense, by placing new fabric over the damaged area in a manner that meets the overlap
requirements for horizontal placement. Vertically placed fabric shall be replaced in its entirety.
300-9.1.2 Measurement and Payment. Measurement and payment shall conform to 300-8.1.2.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 285

300-10 GEOTEXTILES FOR SEPARATION.

300-10.1 Subgrade Enhancement. Geotextiles for subgrade enhancement shall be placed in
accordance with the following provisions:
300-10.1.1 Placement. During grading operations, care shall be taken not to disturb or scarify the
subgrade. This may require use of lightweight dozers, etc., for low-strength soils such as saturated,
cohesionless, or low cohesion soils.
Once the subgrade along a particular segment of road alignment has been prepared, the geotextile
shall be unrolled in line with the placement of the new aggregate. The fabric shall not be dragged across
the subgrade, and the entire fabric shall be placed and rolled out as smoothly as possible. If heat bonded
fabric is used, the fuzzy side shall be placed against the soil, with the bonded side up.
Parallel rolls or ends of fabric shall be overlapped 24 inches (600 mm) or sewn if required by the
Plans or Special Provisions. When indicated on the Plans or Special Provisions, a 36-inch (900 mm)
overlap shall be used.
The fabric shall be secured with pins placed on 6-foot (1.8 m) centers at the midpoint of all overlaps
and at the edges to maintain them during construction activities. Spacing of pins shall be reduced if
necessary to eliminate tearing and movement of fabric.
For roadways, fabric widths shall be selected such that overlaps of parallel rolls occur at lane lines.
Overlaps shall not be placed along anticipated main wheel path locations.
Overlaps at the end of rolls shall be in the direction of the aggregate placement with the previous roll
on top.
When fabric intersects an existing pavement area, the fabric shall extend to the edge of the old
system, and the fabric shall be anchored.
The aggregate base material shall be placed on the fabric in such a manner and thickness that wheel
rutting of aggregate over the fabric is limited to 1/2 inch (12.5 mm). Unless otherwise specified, the
minimum thickness shall be 12 inches (300 mm). Lightweight dozers shall be used if necessary.
Equipment shall not be allowed directly on the fabric.
Before covering, the conditions of the fabric will be observed by the Engineer to determine that no
holes or rips exist in the fabric. All such occurrences shall be repaired by placing a new layer of fabric
extending beyond the defect in all directions a distance equal to the minimum overlap required for
adjacent rolls.
300-10.1.2 Measurement and Payment. Measurement and payment shall conform to the
requirements of 300-8.1.2.
300-11 ROCK SLOPE AND EROSION PROTECTION (RIPRAP).
300-11.1 General. Rock for rock slope and erosion protection shall conform to 200-1.6. Rock slope
and erosion protection shall be concreted in accordance with 300-11.3 when shown on the Plans.
300-11.2 Rock Placement. Rock slope and erosion protection shall be placed in accordance with
the following method:
A footing trench shall be excavated along the toe of the slope, as shown on the Plans. The larger
rocks shall be placed in the footing trench. The voids in the footing trench shall be filled with
uncompacted excavated material after the rock is placed. Rocks on the slope shall be placed with their
longitudinal axis normal to the embankment face, and arranged so that each rock above the foundation
course has a 3-point bearing on the underlying rocks. The foundation course is the course placed on the
slope in contact with the ground surface.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
286 Greenbook 2021

Rocks shall be placed by a grapple or other mechanical equipment in a tight interlocking

configuration which results in rock to rock contact, without slipping, to form a stable layer. Smaller
rocks used between layers shall be evenly distributed and sized to fill voids after 3-point bearing on the
underlying course is established.
Class VII or smaller rock may be placed by dumping provided the following criteria are met:
a) rock is spread in layers by bulldozers, excavators, or other suitable equipment,
b) larger rocks are in the toe course and on the outside surface of the slope protection, and
c) voids larger than the diameter of the smallest rock size are filled.
Local surface irregularities of the slope and erosion protection shall not vary from the planned slope
by more than 1 foot (0.3m) measured at right angles to the slope. Rounded rocks shall not be used on
slopes steeper than 1 vertical to 2 horizontal.
300-11.3 Concreted Rock Slope and Erosion Protection.
300-11.3.1 General. Rock for concreted rock slope and erosion protection shall be Class I – VII
conforming to 200-1.6 and shall be placed in accordance with 300-11.2.
300-11.3.2 Concrete. Concrete for concreted rock slope and erosion protection shall be 520-C-
2500P (310-C-17P) and conform to the requirements of 201-1, except that the slump of the concrete
shall be adjusted to provide the minimum penetration shown in Table 300-11.3.2.

TABLE 300-11.3.2
Class I II III IV V VI VII
Penetration in inches (mm) 6 (150) 8 (200) 10 (250) 12 (300) 14 (350) 16 (400) 18 (450)

300-11.3.3 Concrete Placement. The surfaces of the rock to be concreted shall be cleaned of
adhering dirt and clay and then moistened. The concrete shall be placed in a continuous operation for
any day’s run at one location. Concrete shall be brought to the place of final deposit by buckets or
pump. Other placement methods shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use.
In no case shall concrete be permitted to flow on the slope and erosion protection a distance greater than
10 feet (3m).
Immediately after depositing, the concrete shall be spaded and rodded into place with suitable tools
until the minimum penetration is that shown in Table 300-11.3.2.
After the concrete has been placed, the rocks shall be thoroughly brushed so that their top surfaces
are exposed. The outer rocks shall project 1/3 to 1/4 their diameter above the concrete surface. After
completion of any 10 foot (3m) strip, no person or load shall be permitted on the surface for a period of
at least 24 hours, or longer if so ordered by the Engineer.
Concreted rock slope and erosion protection shall be cured as provided in 303-1.10.
300-11.4 Measurement and Payment. Rock for rock slope and erosion protection will be measured
and paid for per ton (tonne) of rock in place.
Concrete and concrete placement will be measured and paid for per cubic yard (cubic meter) in place.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 287

SECTION 301 – SUBGRADE PREPARATION, TREATED MATERIALS, AND

PLACEMENT OF BASE MATERIALS

301-1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION.

301-1.1 General. This subsection shall govern the preparation of natural, filled, or excavated
roadbed material prior to the placement of subbase or base material, pavement, curbs and gutters,
driveways, sidewalks, or other roadway structures.
301-1.2 Preparation of Subgrade. Scarifying and cultivating will be required for dry soils which
are impervious to the penetration of water, for soils which contain excessive amounts of moisture which
may result in unstable foundations, for soils which are nonuniform in character which may result in
nonuniform relative compactions and subsequent differential settlements of finished surfaces, or when
pavement is to be placed directly on the roadbed material. Unsuitable material found below the
processing depth for subgrade specified herein shall be treated in accordance with 300-2.2.
After rough grading has been completed, when scarifying and cultivating are required, the roadbed
shall be loosened to a depth of at least 6 inches (150 mm). The loosened material shall then be worked
to a finely divided condition and all rocks larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in diameter shall be removed.
The moisture content shall be brought to minus 1 percent of optimum or wetter by the addition of water,
by the addition and blending of dry suitable material, or by the drying of existing material. The material
shall then be compacted by approved equipment to the specified relative compaction.
Uniform pervious soils, that allow the immediate penetration of water or uniform impervious soils
which will allow the penetration of water to a depth of at least 6 inches (150 mm) after the addition of a
suitable wetting agent, will not require scarifying and cultivating unless a condition previously set forth
in this subsection requires such processing. When scarifying and cultivating are not required, the
moisture content of the top 6 inches (150 mm) of the subgrade material shall be brought to optimum by
the addition of water at the surface, and the material shall be compacted by approved equipment to the
specified relative compaction.
301-1.3 Relative Compaction. Except in alleys, when pavement is to be placed directly on
subgrade material, the top 6 inches (150 mm) of subgrade material shall be compacted to a relative
compaction of 95 percent. When base or subbase material, curb, gutter, alley pavement, driveways, or
sidewalks are to be placed on the subgrade material, the top 6 inches (150 mm) of such subgrade
material shall be compacted to a relative compaction of 90 percent.
After compaction and trimming, the subgrade shall be firm, hard, and unyielding.
301-1.4 Subgrade Tolerances. Subgrade for pavement, sidewalk, curb and gutter, driveways, or
other roadway structures shall not vary more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) from the specified grade and cross
section. Subgrade for subbase or base material shall not vary more than 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) from the
specified grade and cross section. Variations within the above specified tolerances shall be
compensating so that the average grade and cross section specified are met.
301-1.5 Grading of Areas Not To Be Paved. Roadway areas where “grade only” is called for on
the Plans shall be graded to meet tolerances for base subgrade. The surface shall be constructed to a
straight grade from the finish pavement or curb elevations shown on the Plans to the elevation of the
existing ground at the extremities of the area to be graded.
301-1.6 NOT USED.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
288 Greenbook 2021

301-1.7 Payment. Payment for preparing a subgrade will be considered as included in the item of
work for which the subgrade is prepared.
Payment for grading operations in areas designated as “grade only” will be considered as included in
the Bid price for excavation or fill.
Payment for adjusting manhole frames and covers to grade, where the difference between the lowest
point of manhole removal and final elevation of the top of the frame is less than 15 inches (375 mm) or
where the adjustment is accomplished by adjustment rings only, will be made at the Contract Unit Price
for adjusting each manhole frame.
Payment for adjusting manhole frames and covers to grade, where the difference between the lowest
point of manhole removal and final elevation of the top of the frame is 15 inches (375 mm) or more, will
be made at the Contract Unit Price per linear foot (m) for reconstructing each manhole.
If no payment provision for manhole adjustment or reconstruction is made, payment for such work
will be as specified in 3-3.
301-2 UNTREATED BASE.
301-2.1 General. Untreated base material shall conform to 200-2.
301-2.2 Spreading. Untreated base shall be delivered to the roadbed as uniform mixtures and each
layer shall be spread in one operation. Segregation shall be avoided and the base shall be free from
pockets of coarse or fine material.
Untreated base shall be deposited on the roadbed at a uniform quantity per linear foot (m), at a
quantity which will provide the required compacted thickness within the tolerances specified herein
without resorting to spotting, picking up, or otherwise shifting the base material. At the time untreated
base is spread, it shall have a moisture content sufficient to obtain the required compaction. Such
moisture shall be uniformly distributed throughout the material.
Where the required thickness is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, the base material, except “Pulverized
Miscellaneous Base,” may be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the required thickness is more
than 6 inches (150 mm) the base material, except “Pulverized Miscellaneous Base,” shall be spread and
compacted in 2 or more layers of approximately equal thickness, and the maximum compacted thickness
of any one layer shall not exceed 6 inches (150 mm). Each layer shall be spread and compacted in a
similar manner.
The use of motor graders will be permitted during depositing, spreading and compacting operations,
except when self-propelled spreaders are specified. Pulverized Miscellaneous Base shall be spread and
compacted in one or more layers. The maximum compacted layer shall not exceed 10 inches (250 mm).
When the subgrade for untreated base consists of cohesionless sand and written permission is
granted by the Engineer, a portion of the untreated base may be dumped in piles upon the subgrade and
spread from the dumped material in sufficient quantity to stabilize the subgrade. Segregation of
aggregates shall be avoided and the material as spread shall be free from pockets of coarse or fine
material.
301-2.3 Compacting. Rolling shall commence along the edge of the area to be compacted and the
roller shall gradually advance toward the center of the area to be compacted.
Rollers shall be operated along lines parallel or concentric with the centerline of the road being
constructed, and no material variation therefrom will be permitted.
The relative compaction of each layer of compacted base material shall not be less than 95 percent,
except in the areas back of curb (under sidewalks and driveways). Compaction in the excepted areas

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 289

shall be as specified in 211-1 with each layer of compacted base material having a minimum relative
compaction of 90 percent.
The surface of the finished aggregate base at any point shall not vary more than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
above or below the grade established by the Engineer.
Base which does not conform to the above requirements shall be reshaped or reworked, watered, and
thoroughly recompacted to conform to the specified requirements.
301-2.4 Measurement and Payment. Quantities of untreated base will be measured as shown in
the Bid. The volumetric quantities of base material shall be those compacted in place within the limits
of the dimensions shown on the Plans.
The weight of material to be paid for will be determined by deducting (from the weight of material
delivered to the Work) the weight of water in the material (at the time of weighing) in excess of 1
percent more than the optimum moisture content. No payment will be made for the weight of water
deducted as provided in this subsection.
301-3 PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED MATERIALS.
301-3.1 General. Portland cement treated materials shall include soil-cement, cement treated base,
and cement-stabilized pulverized base. The specific mixture(s) to be produced and placed shall be as
shown on the Plans.
301-3.2 Soil-Cement.
301-3.2.1 General. Soil-cement shall consist of a mixture of soil, Portland cement, and water
mixed, placed, spread, compacted, finished, and cured such that the in-place mixture forms a dense,
uniform mass conforming to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Plans. The required 7-
Day compressive strength shall be as shown on the Plans or as specified in the Special Provisions.
301-3.2.2 Materials. Materials shall conform to 201-8.2.
301-3.2.3 Mix Design(s). Mix design(s) shall conform to 201-8.3.
301-3.2.4 Subgrade Preparation for Central Plant and Off-Road Produced Mixtures.
Subgrade preparation prior to placement of central plant or off-road produced mixtures shall conform to
301-1 except as follows:
The subgrade shall be scarified and graded to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the
Plans. Unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced in accordance with 300-2.2. Soft or
yielding subgrade shall be removed or stabilized as specified in the Special Provisions or as
directed by the Engineer.
The subgrade, after preparation, shall be firm and able to support the loads imposed by soil-cement
placement, spreading, grading, and compaction operations without yielding or settlement.
301-3.2.5 Mixing.
301-[Link] General. Mixing shall be performed at a central mixing plant, in-place, or off-road. The
mixing method shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
Soil-cement shall not be mixed or placed when the subgrade or material to be treated is muddy or
frozen, or when the ambient temperature is 40ºF (5ºC) or less.
301-[Link] Central Plant Mixing. Mixing performed at a central mixing plant shall conform
to 201-8.4.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
290 Greenbook 2021

301-[Link] In-Place Mixing.

a) General. In-place mixing shall include grading, spreading of Portland cement, and mixing of the
soil to be treated, Portland cement, and water.
b) Grading. Prior to the spreading of Portland cement, the soil to be treated shall be graded to
conform to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Plans.
c) Spreading. Portland cement shall be uniformly spread on the graded soil. Spreading shall be
performed with a spreader truck conforming to 301-[Link]. The spread rate shall be that which
results in the Portland cement content specified in the Special Provisions or in the approved mix
design. The Portland cement content shall not vary more than 0.5 percent under nor more than
1.0 percent over the specified content. However, the moving average shall not be less than the
specified content. The Engineer may increase the rate of application as in-place mixing
operations progress.
d) Mixing. Mixing shall be performed with a reclaimer conforming to 301-[Link]. The full-depth
of the soil to be treated shall be mixed a minimum of 2 times. At least 1 of the 2 mixings shall
be performed while introducing water into the soil-Portland cement mixture. The quantity of
water added shall be adjusted as necessary to produce a moisture content between 1 percent
below and 3 percent above the optimum moisture content.
301-[Link] Off-Road Mixing. If specified in the Special Provisions or approved by the Engineer,
mixing may be performed off the roadway. Off-road mixing shall conform to 301-[Link].
301-3.2.6 Placement and Spreading of Central Mixing Plant and Off-Road Produced
Mixtures. Prior to placement, the subgrade or receiving surface shall be moistened.
Soil-cement mixtures shall be placed in a manner that does not result in segregation. When 2 or
more layers are to be placed, the surface which will be in contact with succeeding layers shall be kept
continuously moist for 7 Days or until the placement of the subsequent layer. Loose material shall be
removed from the surface of each completed layer and the surface moistened immediately prior to
placement of the next layer. No standing water will be permitted.
One or more self-propelled motor graders, or other mechanical spreading equipment approved by the
Engineer, shall be used for spreading and trimming. Spreading shall be performed uniformly over the
full-width of the subgrade or underlying layer. Spreading equipment shall work in parallel as necessary
to result in a uniform rate of full-width spreading.
Soil-cement mixtures shall be spread in a single layer 6 inches (150 mm) to 12 inches (300 mm) in
thickness. If multiple layers are required, each layer shall be of equal thickness not less than 6 inches
(150 mm) in thickness.
301-3.2.7 Compaction and Finishing. Soil-cement mixtures shall be compacted to a minimum of
95 percent of the maximum wet density determined in accordance with ASTM D558. In-place density
shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D6938. In-place moisture content shall be determined in
accordance with ASTM D4959.
Each layer shall be compacted after the completion of placement and spreading.
Compaction equipment shall be capable of achieving the specified compaction within the operational
time limits specified. Areas inaccessible to rollers shall be compacted by other methods and equipment
approved by the Engineer.
Initial rolling shall be performed with a vibratory pad-foot, or segmented pad-foot roller. After
initial rolling, the soil-cement mixture shall be trimmed as necessary to conform to the lines, grades, and

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 291

cross sections shown on the Plans. Excess soil-cement mixture shall be removed and disposed of. Final
rolling shall be performed with a steel smooth drum, or vibratory smooth drum roller operated in the
static mode. Finish rolling shall be performed with a pneumatic-tired roller and result in a smooth,
dense surface without inducing hair-line cracking.
The total elapsed time between the addition of water to the mixed materials and Portland cement and
the start of compaction shall not exceed 45 minutes. Not more than 1-1/2 hours shall elapse between the
time water is added to the mixed materials and Portland cement, and the time of completion of initial
rolling. Not more than 2-1/2 hours shall elapse between the time water is added to the mixed materials
and Portland cement, and the time of completion of final rolling after trimming. Soil-cement mixtures
that have not been compacted and finished shall not be left undisturbed for longer than 30 minutes. Not
more than 60 minutes shall elapse between placement in adjacent lanes except at longitudinal and
transverse construction joints.
301-3.2.8 Partial-Width Construction. Where traffic or other conditions make part-width
construction necessary, as determined by the Engineer, and mixing is performed off-road, a windrow of
soil shall be placed and compacted to form a choker to restrain the inner edge of the soil-cement mixture
during compaction and finishing operations. The choker shall be constructed to the same elevation as
that of the finished surface, and shall be completed in advance of the start of spreading. The toe of the
choker shall be not less than 3 inches (75 mm) outside the finished longitudinal joint. Side forms or
other methods capable of retaining the soil-cement mixture during compaction operations may be used if
so approved by the Engineer.
Should only one spreader be used, not more than 60 minutes shall elapse between the times of
placing the mixed material in adjacent lanes at any location without trimming the longitudinal joint.
After a partial-width section has been compacted and finished, the inner edge shall be vertically cut
and trimmed to form a longitudinal joint. Choker material and trimmed soil-cement mixture shall be
used only in the construction of adjacent shoulders or otherwise disposed of off the roadway, unless
otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or approved by the Engineer.
301-3.2.9 Construction Joints. At the end of each Working Day, a transverse construction joint
shall be constructed.
Construction joints shall have vertical faces and be constructed by cutting into soil-cement
mixtures which have been compacted and finished. The face of cut joints shall be clean, free of
deleterious material, and kept moist until the placement of the adjacent soil-cement mixture.
Additional soil-cement mixtures shall not be placed against a construction joint until the joint has
been approved by the Engineer.
Alternatively, if mixed-in-place, mixing passes shall overlap 3 inches into the adjacent soil-
cement mixture.
301-3.2.10 Curing.
301-[Link] General. The surface of compacted and finished soil-cement mixtures (finished
surface) shall be cured by the water curing method, bituminous seal method, or other method specified in
the Special Provisions.
The finished surface shall be protected from drying, freezing, and traffic for a minimum of 7 Days
unless otherwise specified.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
292 Greenbook 2021

301-[Link] Water Curing Method. The finished surface shall be kept wet continuously by the
application of water. The application of water shall continue for a period of a minimum of 5 to a maximum
of 7 Days from the date of completion of compaction and finishing unless otherwise specified.
301-[Link] Bituminous Seal Curing Method. The finished surface shall be uniformly sprayed
with a bituminous curing seal. The bituminous curing seal shall form a continuous membrane over the
finished surface after application. The bituminous curing seal material shall be either SS-1h or CSS-1h
emulsified asphalt conforming to 203-3. The emulsified asphalt shall be diluted with water at a ratio of
50/50. The application rate shall be between 0.10 to 0.20 gallons per square yard (0.46 L/m2 to 0.91
L/m2). The exact rate will be determined by the Engineer.
Application shall begin within 24 hours after compaction and finishing is completed. The finished
surface shall be kept moist until the bituminous curing seal is applied. At the time of application, the
finished surface shall be dense, free of loose and extraneous material, and contain sufficient moisture to
prevent excessive penetration of the bituminous curing seal.
No traffic or equipment shall either park or drive on the finished surface during the first 3 Days after
applying the curing compound, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall, before the overlying pavement is placed on the finished surface, remove any
other material which has been spread to protect the finished surface.
301-3.2.11 Acceptance.
301-[Link] Materials. Acceptance shall conform to 201-8.6.
301-[Link] Finishing. The thickness at any point shall not be more than 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) less
than the thickness shown on the Plans.
The finished surface shall not vary more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) above or below the grades shown on
the Plans and be free from porous areas.
Damaged areas shall be removed and replaced for the full-depth of the affected layers.
Feathering or thin layers may not be used to fill or repair depressed or shallow thickness areas.
301-3.2.12 Measurement. Portland cement will be measured by the ton (tonne). The basis of
payment shall be the net weight of Portland cement used to produce soil-cement for the Work. The
Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with certified weighmaster certificates.
Soil-cement will be measured by the cubic yard (m3), or by the square yard (m2) of finished surface
for each thickness specified or shown on the Plans.
Excess in-place material requiring removal and disposal will be measured by the cubic yard (m3).
301-3.2.13 Payment. Payment for preparation of the mix design, if prepared by the Contractor, will
be made as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Bid.
Payment for Portland cement will be made at the Contract Unit Price per ton (tonne). The Contract
Unit Price shall include furnishing and spreading. Payment for Portland cement will not be subject to
the provisions of 7-3.5.2 and 7-3.5.3.
Payment for soil-cement will be made at the Contract Unit Price per cubic yard (m3), or per square
yard (m2) of finished surface for each thickness specified. The Contract Unit Price shall include mixing,
placement, spreading, trimming, compaction, finishing, and curing.
Payment for removal and disposal of excess in-place material prior to treatment will be made at the
Contract Unit Price per cubic yard (m3) for unclassified excavation.
No separate or additional payment will be made for removal and disposal of excess soil-cement.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 293

301-3.3 Cement Treated Base (CTB).

301-3.3.1 General. CTB shall consist of a mixture of untreated base material, Portland cement,
and water mixed, placed, spread, compacted, finished, and cured such that the in-place mixture
forms a dense, uniform mass conforming to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the
Plans. The required 7-Day compressive strength shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the
Special Provisions.
301-3.3.2 Materials. Materials shall conform to 201-9.2.
301-3.3.3 Mix Designs. Mix designs shall conform to 201-9.3.
301-3.3.4 Equipment for In-Place and Off-Road Produced Mixtures. Equipment for in-place
and off-road produced mixtures shall conform to 301-3.4.4.
301-3.3.5 Subgrade Preparation for Central Plant and Off-Road Produced Mixtures. Subgrade
preparation for central plant and off-road produced mixtures shall conform to 301-3.2.4.
301-3.3.6 Mixing. Mixing shall conform to 301-3.2.5.
301-3.3.7 Placement and Spreading of Central Plant and Off-Road Produced Mixtures.
Placement and spreading of central plant and off-road produced mixtures shall conform to 301-3.2.6.
301-3.3.8 Compaction and Finishing. Compaction and finishing shall conform to 301-3.2.7,
except cement treated base mixtures shall be compacted to a minimum of 92 percent of the maximum
wet density determined in accordance with ASTM D1557. In-place moisture content shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM D4959.
301-3.3.9 Partial-Width Construction. Partial-width construction shall conform to 301-3.2.8.
301-3.3.10 Construction Joints. Construction joints shall conform to 301-3.2.9.
301-3.3.11 Curing. Curing shall conform to 301-3.2.10.
301-3.3.12 Acceptance.
301-[Link] Materials. Acceptance shall conform to 201-9.6.
301-[Link] Finishing. The thickness at any point shall not be more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) less
than the thickness shown on the Plans.
The finished surface shall not vary more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) above or below the grades shown on
the Plans and be free from porous areas.
Damaged areas shall be removed and replaced for the full-depth of the affected layers.
Feathering or thin layers shall not be used to fill or repair depressed or shallow thickness areas.
301-3.3.13 Measurement. Portland cement will be measured by the ton (tonne). The basis of
payment shall be the net weight of Portland cement used to produce CTB for the Work. The Contractor
shall furnish the Engineer with certified weighmaster certificates.
CTB will be measured by the cubic yard (m3), or by the square yard (m2) of finished surface for each
thickness specified.
Excess in-place material requiring removal and disposal will be measured by the cubic yard (m3).
301-3.3.14 Payment. Payment for preparation of the mix design, if prepared by the Contractor, will
be made as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Bid.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
294 Greenbook 2021

Payment for Portland cement will be made at the Contract Unit Price per ton (tonne). The Contract
Unit Price shall include furnishing and spreading. Payment for Portland cement will not be subject to
the provisions of 7-3.5.2 and 7-3.5.3.
Payment for CTB will be made at the Contract Unit Price per cubic yard (m3), or per square yard
2
(m ) of finished surface for each thickness specified. The Contract Unit Price shall include mixing,
placement, spreading, trimming, compaction, finishing, and curing.
Payment for removal and disposal of excess in-place material prior to treatment will be made at the
Contract Unit Price per cubic yard (m3) for unclassified excavation.
No separate or additional payment will be made for removal and disposal of excess CTB.
301-3.4 Cement Stabilized Pulverized Base (CSPB).
301-3.4.1 General. CSPB shall consist of pulverized asphalt concrete pavement, base material,
subgrade soil, Portland cement, and water uniformly mixed, compacted, finished and cured in such a
manner that the in-place mixture forms a dense, uniform mass conforming to the lines, grades, and cross
sections shown on the Plans.
301-3.4.2 Materials.
301-[Link] Portland Cement. Portland cement shall be Type II/V conforming to 201-1.2.1.
Supplementary cementitious materials shall not be substituted for any portion of the required Portland
cement content.
301-[Link] Water. Water shall conform to 201-1.2.3.
301-[Link] Pulverized Base Material. Pulverized base material shall consist of existing or
remaining asphalt concrete pavement, base material, and subgrade soil pulverized and mixed by a
reclaimer conforming to 301-[Link].
The resultant pulverized base material shall conform to the following requirements when tested in
accordance with ASTM C136:
a) 100 percent shall pass the 3-inch (75 mm) sieve.
b) 95-100 percent shall pass the 2-inch (50 mm) sieve.
c) Not less than 90 percent shall pass the 1-1/2 inch (37.5 mm) sieve.
d) 35 to 60 percent shall pass the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve.
e) The material shall be uniformly graded.
301-[Link] Emulsified Asphalt for Fog Seal. Emulsified asphalt for fog seal applications shall be
SS-1h or CSS-1h conforming to 203-3 diluted up to 50 percent with water.
301-3.4.3 Mix Design. The mix design shall be prepared using the proposed proportions of
pulverized asphalt concrete pavement, base material, and subgrade soil to be stabilized, and
Portland cement.
The materials shall be tested and the mix design(s) developed in accordance with ASTM D1633,
Method A, except:
a) Test specimens shall be compacted in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method A or B.
b) Test specimens shall be cured by sealing each specimen with 2 layers of plastic at least 4 mils
thick. The plastic must be tight around the specimen. All seams shall be sealed with duct tape.
Sealed specimens shall be placed in an oven for 7 Days at 100ºF ± 5ºF (38ºC ± 3ºC). At the end

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 295

of the cure period, specimens shall be removed from the oven and air-cooled. Duct tape and
plastic wrap shall be removed before capping. Specimens shall not be soaked before testing.
The mix design shall show:
c) the rate, as a percentage of the dry unit weight of the pulverized base material, of application
of Portland cement to the pulverized base material which results in a 7-Day compressive
strength of a minimum of 400 pounds per square inch (2.8 MPa) unless otherwise specified
in the Special Provisions,
d) the proportions and gradation of the material to be stabilized,
e) optimum water content during mixing, curing and compaction, and
f) the moisture-density relationship.
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the Agency will prepare the mix design.
301-3.4.4 Equipment.
301-[Link] General. Equipment shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use.
301-[Link] Reclaimer. Pulverizing and mixing shall be performed, and cement stabilized
pulverized base produced, only by the utilization and operation of a reclaimer specifically designed and
constructed for, and capable of, pulverizing and mixing of in-place materials to the depth shown on the
Plans. Such machine shall hereinafter be referred to as a “reclaimer.”
The reclaimer shall be equipped with a controllable water additive and distribution system capable of
attaching to and being fed from a water truck, and regulating and uniformly introducing and mixing
water into the mixture; a visible depth indicator showing the mixing depth; and an odometer or foot
meter displaying travel speed.
301-[Link] Spreader Trucks. Portland cement shall be spread by trucks equipped with a body
specifically designed and constructed for the spreading of dry lime or Portland cement, hereinafter
referred to as “spreader trucks.” Spreader trucks shall be equipped with a non-pressurized mechanical
vane-feed spreader, on-board scales, and an automatic spread rate control system with cab-mounted
controls capable of regulating the rate of application of Portland cement. Spreader trucks shall be
capable of maintaining a constant spread rate at variable travel speeds.
Dump trucks, tailgate spreaders, and manual spread rate controls will not be allowed.
301-[Link] Rollers. Rollers shall be pad foot, segmented wheel, pneumatic-tired, or steel drum,
and of sufficient weight to compact the full-depth of the CSPB mixture.
301-3.4.5 Sequence of Work. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the sequence of
work for production of CSPB shall be as follows:
a) Pulverize the existing or remaining asphalt concrete pavement and mix with the underlying base
material and subgrade soil to the depth shown on the Plans. The resultant material shall
hereinafter be referred to as “pulverized base material.”
b) Grade the pulverized base material to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Plans.
Remove and dispose of the excess material.
c) Uniformly spread and mix Portland cement into the pulverized base material to the depth shown
on the Plans.
d) Compact the pulverized base material-Portland cement mixture.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
296 Greenbook 2021

e) Grade the pulverized base material-Portland cement mixture to the lines, grades, and depths
shown on the Plans.
f) Initial cure the in-place mixture for 48 hours.
g) Micro-crack the in-place mixture.
h) Final cure the in-place mixture as required.
301-3.4.6 Pulverizing. The existing or remaining asphalt concrete pavement, base material, and
subgrade soil shall be pulverized to the depth shown on the Plans. The number of passes required shall
be that which results in pulverized base material conforming to 301-[Link].
301-3.4.7 Initial Grading. Following the completion of pulverizing, pulverized base material shall
be graded to the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the Plans.
Temporary access ramps shall be constructed at each driveway following the completion of initial
grading or at the end of each Working Day, whichever comes first.
Excess pulverized base material shall be removed and disposed of off the Work site.
301-3.4.8 Spreading. Portland cement shall be uniformly spread on the pulverized base material at
the rate specified in the approved mix design unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The rate shall
not be less than 0.5 percent under nor greater than 1.0 percent over the specified rate. However, the
moving average shall not be less than the specified rate. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to
increase the rate as necessary.
Spreading shall be performed in a series of passes parallel to the centerline of the roadway.
Portland cement shall not be spread more than 2 hours prior to mixing.
After spreading, no traffic shall pass over the roadway until the mixing operation is completed.
301-3.4.9 Mixing. Mixing shall be performed in a series of passes parallel to the centerline of the
roadway such that transverse and longitudinal construction joints are minimized. The full- depth of the
pulverized base material shall be mixed with Portland cement a minimum of 2 times. At least 1 of the 2
mixings shall be done while introducing water into the pulverized base material through the metering
device on the reclaimer. Water shall be added to the pulverized base material during mixing to provide a
moisture content not less than 1 percentage point below nor more than 3 percentage points above the
optimum moisture content of the pulverized base material-Portland cement mixture as determined in
accordance with 301-3.4.3.
Any remaining untreated pulverized base material around or attached to manholes, valves, vaults,
survey monuments or other structures; adjacent or attached to curbs and gutters; or in areas inaccessible
by the reclaimer shall be removed to the depth mixed, and replaced with the pulverized base material-
Portland cement mixture.
301-3.4.10 Compaction and Final Grading. Compaction and final grading shall be performed in
such a manner as to produce a smooth, dense surface free of compaction planes, cracks, ridges or loose
CSPB material.
CSPB material shall be compacted to not less than 92 percent of the maximum wet density
determined in accordance with ASTM D1557. In-place density shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM D6938. In-place moisture content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D4959. Unless
otherwise specified, the Contractor shall perform a minimum of 1 compaction test per 750 square yards
(627 m2) of CSPB. Test data shall be recorded on forms approved by the Engineer. Test results shall be
furnished to the Engineer at the end of each Working Day.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 297

Initial compaction shall be performed using static or vibratory pad foot, or segmented wheel rollers.
Final compaction shall immediately follow initial compaction. Final compaction shall be performed
using steel drum or pneumatic-tired rollers. The use of vibratory rollers in vibratory mode will not be
permitted during final compaction.
Areas inaccessible to rollers shall be compacted to the required density by other equipment approved
by the Engineer.
Compaction shall be completed within 2-1/2 hours after the initial application of water during the
mixing operations.
CSPB material shall be graded to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Plans. The
finished surface of the CSPB material shall be hereinafter referred to as the “grading plane.” At any
point along the grading plane, the elevation shall not vary more than 1/4 inch (25 mm) above or below
the required elevation.
If, after compaction, any point along the grading plane is above the specified grade tolerance, excess
material shall be trimmed, removed, and disposed of as necessary. No loose material shall be left on the
grading plane. Trimming of excess material shall not be conducted unless rolling can be completed
within 2 hours after trimming.
New or trimmed material shall not be added to any point or area along the grading plane below the
specified tolerance or to raise the elevation of compacted material.
Points or areas along the grading plane below the specified tolerance, irregularities, or weak spots
that develop shall be corrected immediately by scarifying the area affected, adding or removing material
as required, re-compacting, and re-graded.
Once the grading plane is within tolerance, it shall be completely rolled using steel drum or
pneumatic-tired rollers.
301-3.4.11 Construction Joints. At the end of each Working Day, a vertical-faced construction
joint shall be constructed in the CSPB normal to the centerline of the roadway. The joint shall be
constructed for the full-depth of the CSPB and be moisture-cured continuously until placement of
adjacent CSPB begins. Adjacent CSPB shall not be placed until the construction joint has been
approved by the Engineer.
301-3.4.12 Initial Curing. CSPB shall be moisture-cured continuously for 48 hours after final
grading. Water shall be applied as necessary to keep the surface damp. During curing, only traffic
necessary for access to residences and businesses shall be allowed to drive on the CSPB.
301-3.4.13 Micro-Cracking.
301-[Link] General. Micro-cracking is the process of generating minute, subsurface cracks in the
CSPB. The Contractor shall perform micro-cracking on the CSPB within 30 to 72 hours of the
completion of compaction.
301-[Link] Method. Micro-cracking shall be performed by operating a 10 to 12-ton steel wheel
vibratory roller, traveling at a speed of approximately 2 mph, and vibrating at maximum amplitude, over
the CSPB for a minimum of 3 passes unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer. The CSPB
surface shall be completely covered, exclusive of the outside 1 foot.
301-3.4.14 Final Curing. After the completion of initial curing and micro-cracking, CSPB shall be
continuously moisture-cured for an additional 48-72 hours, or until placement of the overlying asphalt
concrete base course, whichever occurs first.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
298 Greenbook 2021

301-3.4.15 Fog Seal. If specified, a fog seal shall be applied over the CSPB after final curing. The
fog seal material shall be applied at a rate of 0.10 to 0.20 gallon per square yard (0.46 L/m2 to 0.91 L/m2)
unless otherwise specified. The final application rate shall be approved by the Engineer.
The fog seal material shall be allowed to break or otherwise become stable before placement of the
overlying asphalt concrete base course. Traffic shall not be allowed to drive upon fog seal material at
any time.
301-3.4.16 Measurement. Portland cement will be measured by the ton (tonne). The basis of
payment shall be the net weight of Portland cement used to produce CSPB for the Work. The Contractor
shall furnish the Engineer with certified weighmaster certificates showing the weight of each load
delivered to the Work site and the weight remaining on the Work site after completion.
CSPB will be measured by the square yard (m2) of finished surface for each thickness specified or
shown on the Plans.
Excess pulverized base material, excess CSPB, and unsuitable material will be measured by the
cubic yard (m3).
301-3.4.17 Payment. Payment for Portland cement will be made at the Contract Unit Price per ton
(tonne). The Contract Unit Price shall include furnishing and spreading. Payment for Portland cement
will not be subject to the provisions of 7-3.5.2 and 7-3.5.3.
Payment for CSPB will be made at the Contract Unit Price per square yard (m2) for each thickness
specified or shown on the Plans. The Contract Unit Price shall include pulverizing, initial grading,
mixing, compaction, final grading, curing, micro-cracking, and fog seal (if required).
Payment for preparation of the mix design, if prepared by the Contractor, will be made as specified
in the Special Provisions or shown on the Bid.
Payment for removal and disposal of excess pulverized base material and excess cement
stabilized pulverized base material will be made at the Contract Unit Price per cubic yard (m3) for
unclassified excavation.
301-4 LEAN CONCRETE BASE (LCB).
301-4.1 General. This subsection specifies the methods to be used to place LCB conforming
to 200-4.
301-4.2 Subgrade. Immediately prior to placement, the subgrade shall conform to 301-1. The
subgrade shall be free of loose or extraneous material and shall be sufficiently dampened to ensure that
no water is absorbed from the LCB.
301-4.3 Placement. Placement shall conform to 302-6.3.
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions, LCB shall be placed in
widths of not less than 12 feet (4 m) separated by construction joints. LCB placed monolithically in
widths greater than 26 feet (8 m) shall be placed with a longitudinal weakened plane joint offset not
more than 3 feet (1 m) from the centerline of the width being constructed. Longitudinal weakened plane
joints shall conform to 302-6.5.4.
When PCC pavement is to be placed over LCB, longitudinal construction joints and longitudinal
weakened plane joints in the LCB shall not be within 1 foot (300 mm) of longitudinal weakened plane
joints nor longitudinal construction joints in the PCC pavement.
Areas of the subgrade that are lower than the grade established on the Plans shall be filled with LCB.
LCB shall not be mixed nor placed while the atmospheric temperature is below 35° F (2° C), and
shall not be placed on frozen ground.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 299

301-4.4 Spreading, Compacting and Shaping. Spreading, compacting, and shaping shall conform
to 301-3.3.
In advance of curing operations, LCB to be surfaced with asphalt concrete pavement shall be
textured with a drag strip of burlap, a broom, or a spring steel tine device capable of producing scoring
in the finished surface. The scoring shall be parallel with or transverse to the centerline.
LCB to be surfaced with PCC pavement shall not be textured and shall be finished to a smooth
surface, free of mortar ridges and other projections, before curing compound is applied.
The finished surface of LCB shall be free from porous areas and not vary at any point more than 5/8
inch (16 mm) above or below the grade shown on the Plans.
301-4.5 Curing. LCB shall be cured with a pigmented curing compound conforming to 201-4.
Curing compound shall be applied to areas to be surfaced with PCC pavement in 2 separate applications.
Each application shall be applied at a rate of approximately 1 gallon per 150 square feet (1 L/4 m2).
Curing compound shall be applied before the atmospheric temperature falls below 40° F (40 C).
Areas to be covered with PCC pavement that are not covered by the fourth day after the curing
compound is applied shall be given a subsequent application (or applications, if necessary) so that each
application occurs no more than 4 Days in advance of placing the overlying PCC pavement. LCB
surfaces shall be cleaned of all foreign material prior to the application of curing compound.
Curing compound shall be applied at a rate of approximately 1 gallon per 200 square feet (1 L/5 m2) for
each subsequent application.
Damage to the curing compound or the LCB shall be promptly repaired by the Contractor at the
Contractor's expense, as directed by the Engineer.
301-4.6 Acceptance.
301-4.6.1 Material. LCB will be tested for acceptance in accordance with 201-1.1.5.
301-4.6.2 Placement. Hardened LCB with a surface lower than 5/8 inch (16 mm) below the grade
shown on the Plans shall be removed and replaced with LCB, or if permitted by the Engineer, low areas
shall be filled with paving material as follows:
a) When the surface pavement is PCC, low areas shall be filled with PCC at the time and in the
same operation the PCC pavement is placed.
b) When the surface pavement is asphalt concrete, the low areas shall be filled with asphalt concrete
at the time and in the same operation that asphalt concrete pavement is placed.
Hardened LCB with a surface higher than 5/8 inch (16 mm) above the grade shown on the Plans
shall be removed and replaced with LCB, or if permitted by the Engineer, high areas may be ground until
the surface conforms to the tolerances specified in 301-4.4. Grinding shall be performed with diamond
blade or carborundum blade grinding equipment. Ground areas to be surfaced with PCC pavement shall
be cleaned of all foreign material and grinding residue as soon as all free water has left the surface.
Curing compound conforming to 301-4.5 shall be applied at a rate of approximately 1 gallon per 150
square feet (1 L/4 m2).
301-4.7 Measurement. LCB will be measured by the cubic yard (m 3 ). The volume will be
calculated on the basis of the dimensions shown on the Plans adjusted by the amount of any
change approved by the Engineer. LCB used to fill depressed areas of subgrade will not be
measured for payment.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
300 Greenbook 2021

301-4.8 Payment. Payment for LCB will be made at the Contract Unit Price per cubic yard (m3).
No separate payment will be made for bringing the surface of the LCB within tolerance. Payment
will be considered as included in the Contract Unit Price per cubic yard (m3).
301-5 LIME-TREATED SOIL.
301-5.1 General. Lime treated soil shall consist of a mixture of soil, lime, and water spread, mixed,
compacted, finished, and cured such that the in-place mixture forms a dense, uniform mass conforming
to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Plans.
301-5.2 Materials.
301-5.2.1 Lime. Lime shall be quicklime as defined in ASTM C51. Quicklime shall conform to the
chemical requirements specified in ASTM C977 except the minimum available calcium oxide shall be
90 percent.
At the time of delivery to the Work site, lime shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 301-5.2.1.

TABLE 301-5.2.1
Sieve Sizes Percent Passing
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 100
No. 100 (150 µm) 0 - 20
1
Test Method ASTM C136
Chemical Percent of Chemical (Min.)
CaO 90
Test Method ASTM C25
Notes:
1. Dry sieving only.

A Certificate of Compliance for each delivery to the Work site shall be submitted to the Engineer.
Lime shall be protected from exposure to moisture until used and shall be sufficiently dry to flow freely.
301-5.2.2 Water. Water shall conform to 201-1.2.3, except water shall not contain more than 2,000 ppm
(mg/L) of chlorides calculated as Cl, nor more than 1,500 ppm (mg/L) of sulfates calculated as SO4.
301-5.2.3 Soil. Unless otherwise specified, soil shall conform to the following requirements:
a) 100 percent shall pass the 3-inch (75 mm) sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM C136.
b) Total soluble sulfate content shall be less than 10,000 ppm when tested in accordance with
California Test 417 with a 10:1 dilution.
301-5.2.4 Mix Design(s). The materials shall be tested and the mix design(s) developed in
accordance with ASTM D698. Compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with ASTM
D5102, Procedure B.
The mix design(s) shall result in a mixture which conforms to the following requirements:
a) A minimum pH of 12.4 after initial mixing and compaction with the lime at ambient temperature,
when tested in accordance with ASTM C977 Appendix (Eades-Grimm pH test method).
b) A plasticity index of less than 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318.
c) Swell potential of 1 percent or less vertical expansion of an air-dried soil when inundated with
water and allowed to swell at a confined pressure of 60 pounds per square inch (0.4 MPa) when
tested in accordance with ASTM D4829.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 301

d) Minimum ultimate unconfined compressive strength of 160 pounds per square inch (1.1 MPa)
after 7 Days.
The mix design shall show:
e) the rate, as a percentage of the dry unit weight of the soil, of application of lime to the soil which
results in the specified compressive strength,
f) the proportions and gradation of the material to be treated,
g) optimum water content during mixing, mellowing and compaction, and
h) the moisture-density relationship developed in accordance with ASTM D698 for mellowing
periods of 24, 48, and 72 hours.
Unless otherwise specified, the mix design will be prepared by the Agency.
301-5.3 Equipment. Equipment shall conform to 301-3.4.4.
301-5.4 Sequence of Work. Unless otherwise specified, the sequence of work for production of
lime treated soil shall be as follows:
a) Grade the soil to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Plans. Remove and dispose of
the excess material.
b) Uniformly spread and mix lime into the soil to the depth shown on the Plans.
c) Allow the soil-lime mixture to mellow in an un-compacted state for the time specified.
d) Maintain the mixture as necessary to allow vehicular access during the mellowing period.
e) Re-mix the soil-lime mixture.
f) Compact the soil-lime mixture.
g) Grade the soil-lime mixture to the lines, grades, and depths shown on the Plans.
h) Cure the in-place mixture as required.
301-5.5 Initial Grading and Subgrade Preparation. Prior to lime spreading, the soil to be treated
shall be graded to conform to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Plans. After grading, no
further subgrade preparation will be required if the subgrade is firm and able to support the loads
imposed by grading, spreading, mixing, and compaction operations without yielding or settlement.
301-5.6 Spreading. Spreading shall be performed with a spreader truck. Lime shall not be spread
or mixed while the atmospheric temperature is below 35°F (2°C) or when wind conditions are such that
blowing lime will have an adverse effect on traffic or adjacent property.
Lime shall be uniformly spread on the graded soil at the rate specified in the Special Provisions or in
the approved mix design unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The rate shall be not less than 0.5
percent under nor more than 1.0 percent over the specified rate. However, the moving average shall not
be less than the specified rate. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to increase the rate as necessary.
No traffic shall pass over the spread lime until the initial mixing operation is complete.
301-5.7 Initial Mixing. Lime shall be mixed on the same Day as spread. Initial mixing shall be
performed with a reclaimer.
The full-depth of the soil to be treated shall be mixed with lime a minimum of 2 times. At least 1 of
the 2 mixings shall be done while introducing water into the soil-lime mixture through the metering
device on the reclaimer. Sufficient water shall be added to result in a moisture content not less than 4
percentage points above the optimum moisture content and fully-hydrate the lime. Mixing operations
shall produce a uniformly blended soil-lime mixture free of streaks and pockets of lime.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
302 Greenbook 2021

Any remaining untreated soil around or attached to manholes, utility substructures, valves, vaults,
survey monuments or other structures; adjacent or attached to curbs and gutters; or in areas inaccessible
by the reclaimer shall be removed to the depth mixed, and replaced with the soil-lime mixture.
301-5.8 Mellowing. After initial mixing, the soil-lime mixture shall be allowed to cure or “mellow” in an
un-compacted state for a period of no less than 16 hours nor more than 72 hours unless otherwise specified or
approved by the Engineer. In no case shall initial and final mixing be performed on the same Day.
During the mellowing period, the moisture content shall be maintained above the optimum.
301-5.9 Final Mixing. After the required mellowing period and prior to compaction, the lime-soil
mixture shall be re-mixed. Final mixing shall be performed with a reclaimer. Mixing operations shall
produce a uniformly blended soil-lime mixture free of streaks and pockets of lime.
Subsequent to the addition of water, sufficient passes of the reclaimer shall be made as necessary.
Uniformity will be determined initially by sampling and testing at variable depths and locations within
the mixture. The number of passes required may be adjusted based upon subsequent sampling and
testing. Non-uniformity or no color reaction of the mixture when tested with the standard
phenolphthalein alcohol indicator will be considered evidence of inadequate mixing.
Mixing shall continue until a homogenous soil-lime mixture is produced which, exclusive of rock or
aggregate, conforms to the gradation requirement shown in Table 301-5.9 when tested in accordance
with ASTM C136.

TABLE 301-5.9
Sieve Sizes Percent Passing

1-1/2” 98 Min.

The depth of lime treated soil after final mixing shall not vary more than 0.1 foot (30 mm) from the
specified depth at any point. Mixing to a depth that exceeds the specified depth by 0.1 foot (30 mm)
shall be considered as evidence of an inadequate amount of lime and additional lime shall be added as
directed by the Engineer.
At the end of each day of final mixing operations, the surface shall be left in a condition that allows
for vehicular access.
301-5.10 Compaction and Final Grading. Soil-lime mixtures shall be compacted to a minimum
of 90 percent relative compaction when tested in accordance with ASTM D698 on samples taken after
final mixing. In-place density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D6938. In-place moisture
content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D4959.
When placed directly under pavement, the top 12 inches (300 mm) shall be compacted to not less
than 95 percent relative density. Any underlying layers shall be compacted to not less than 90 percent
relative density.
The moisture content shall be a minimum of 2 percent over the optimum at the time of compaction.
Unless otherwise specified, the thickness of a compacted layer shall not exceed 12 inches (300 mm).
Where the thickness is more than 12 inches (300 mm), or the Contractor is unable to achieve the required
compaction, the mixture shall be spread and compacted in 2 or more approximately equal layers.
Initial compaction shall be performed with a static or vibratory pad-foot, or segmented wheel roller.
Final compaction shall immediately follow initial compaction. Final compaction shall be performed

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 303

with a steel smooth drum or pneumatic-tired roller. The use of steel smooth drum vibratory rollers in the
vibratory mode during final compaction will not be permitted. Areas inaccessible to rollers shall be
compacted to the required compaction by other means satisfactory to the Engineer.
After final compaction, soil-lime mixtures shall be graded to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on
the Plans. The finished surface shall be hereinafter referred to as the “grading plane.” At any point along the
grading plane, the elevation shall not vary more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) above or below the required elevation.
301-5.11 Construction Joints. At the end of each day of compaction and final grading operations, a
transverse construction joint shall be constructed.
Construction joints shall have vertical faces and be constructed by cutting into soil-lime mixtures
which have been compacted and graded. The face of cut joints shall be clean, free of deleterious
material, and kept moist until the placement of the adjacent soil-lime mixture. Additional soil-lime
mixture shall not be placed against a construction joint until the joint has been approved by the Engineer.
Alternatively, mixing passes shall overlap 3 inches (75 mm) into the adjacent soil-lime mixture.
301-5.12 Curing.
301-5.12.1 General. The surface of compacted and graded lime treated soil (finished surface) shall
be cured by the water curing method, bituminous seal curing method, or other method specified in the
Special Provisions.
The finished surface shall be protected from drying, freezing, and traffic for a period of 48 to 72
hours unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer.
301-5.12.2 Water Curing Method. The finished surface shall be kept in a moist condition by the
application of water. The application of water shall continue for a period of 48 to 72 hours from the
time of completion of compaction and final grading unless otherwise specified.
301-5.12.3 Bituminous Seal Curing Method. The finished surface shall be uniformly sprayed with
a bituminous seal. The bituminous seal shall form a continuous membrane over the finished surface
after application. The bituminous seal shall be either SS-1h or CSS-1h emulsified asphalt conforming to
203-3. The emulsified asphalt shall be diluted with water at a ratio of 50/50. The application rate shall
be between 0.10 to 0.20 gallon per square yard (0.46 L/m2 to 0.91 L/m2). The exact rate will be
determined by the Engineer.
The finished surface shall be kept moist until the bituminous seal is applied. Application shall begin
within 24 hours after the completion of compaction and final grading. At the time of application, the
finished surface shall be dense, free of loose and extraneous material, and contain sufficient moisture to
prevent excessive penetration.
Traffic or equipment shall not park or drive on the finished surface during the first 3 Days after
application unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall, before the overlying pavement is placed on the finished surface, remove any
other material which has been spread to protect the finished surface.
301-5.13 Measurement. Lime will be measured by the ton (tonne). The basis of payment shall be
the net weight of lime used to produce lime treated soil. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with
certified weighmaster certificates showing the weight of each load delivered to the Work site and the
weight remaining on the Work site after completion.
Lime treated soil will be measured by the square yard (m2) of finished surface for each thickness
specified or shown on the Plans.
Excess soil, excess lime treated soil, and unsuitable material will be measured by the cubic yard (m3).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
304 Greenbook 2021

301-5.14 Payment. Payment for lime will be made at the Contract Unit Price per ton (tonne).
Payment will be made for the difference between the weight delivered to the Work site and the
remaining weight. The Contract Unit Price shall include furnishing and spreading. Payment for lime
will not be subject to the provisions of 7-3.5.2 and 7-3.5.3.
Payment for lime treated soil will be made at the Contract Unit Price per square yard (m2) for each
thickness specified or shown on the Plans. The Contract Unit Price shall include mixing, water;
compaction; placement to the lines, grades and cross sections shown on the Plans; and curing.
If the Engineer directs lime to be spread in excess of the specified percentage, payment for the effect
of the additional lime on reclaimer mixing production will be made on the basis of Extra Work. No
additional payment will be made if the additional lime is necessitated by mixing below the depth
tolerance specified in 301-5.9.
Payment for preparation of the mix design, if prepared by the Contractor, will be made as specified
in the Special Provisions or shown on the Bid.
Payment for removal and disposal of excess in-place material prior to treatment will be made at the
Contract Unit Price per cubic yard (m3) for unclassified excavation.
No separate or additional payment will be made for removal and disposal of excess lime treated soil.
301-6 LIME STABLIZED PULVERIZED BASE (LSPB).
301-6.1 General. LSPB shall consist of pulverized asphalt concrete pavement, base material, subgrade
soil, lime, and water uniformly mixed, compacted, finished and cured in such a manner that the in-place
mixture forms a dense, uniform mass conforming to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Plans.
301-6.2 Materials.
301-6.2.1 Lime. Lime shall conform to 301-5.2.1 unless otherwise specified.
301-6.2.2 Water. Water shall conform to 301-5.2.2.
301-6.2.3 Pulverized Base Material. Pulverized base material shall conform to 301-[Link]. The
total soluble sulfate content shall be less than 10,000 ppm when tested in accordance with California
Test Method 417 with a 10:1 dilution.
301-6.2.4 Mix Design. The mix design shall be prepared using the proposed proportions of
pulverized asphalt concrete pavement, base material, and subgrade soil to be stabilized, and lime.
The mix design shall result in a mixture which conforms to the following requirements:
a) A minimum pH of 12.4 after initial mixing and compaction with the lime at ambient temperature,
when tested in accordance with ASTM C977 Appendix (Eades-Grimm pH test method).
b) A plasticity index of less than 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318.
c) Swell potential of 1 percent or less vertical expansion of an air-dried Pulverized base material
when inundated with water and allowed to swell at a confined pressure of 60 pounds per square
inch (0.4 MPa) when tested in accordance with ASTM D4829.
d) Minimum ultimate unconfined compressive strength of 160 pounds per square inch (1.1 MPa)
after 7 Days of curing in accordance with ASTM D5102, Procedure B, except test specimens
shall be compacted in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method A or B.
The mix design shall show:
e) the rate, as a percentage of the dry unit weight of the pulverized base material, of application of
lime to the pulverized base material which results in the specified compressive strength,
f) the proportions and gradation of the material to be treated,

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 305

g) optimum water content during mixing, mellowing and compaction, and

h) the moisture-density relationship developed in accordance with ASTM D698 for mellowing
periods of 24, 48, and 72 hours.
Unless otherwise specified, the mix design will be prepared by the Agency.
301-6.3 Equipment. Equipment shall conform to 301-3.4.4.
301-6.4 Sequence of Work. Unless otherwise specified, the sequence of work for production of
LSPB shall be as follows:
a) Pulverize the existing or remaining asphalt concrete pavement and mix with the underlying base
material and subgrade soil to the depth shown on the Plans. The resultant material shall
hereinafter be referred to as “pulverized base material.”
b) Grade the pulverized base material to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Plans.
Remove and dispose of the excess material.
c) Uniformly spread the lime and mix into the pulverized base material to the depth shown on the Plans.
d) Allow the pulverized base material-lime mixture to mellow in an un-compacted state for the
time specified.
e) Maintain the mixture as necessary to allow vehicular access during the mellowing period.
f) Re-mix the pulverized base material-lime mixture.
g) Compact the pulverized base material-lime mixture.
h) Grade the pulverized base material-lime mixture to the lines, grades, and depths shown on the Plans.
i) Cure the in-place mixture as required.
301-6.5 Pulverizing. The existing or remaining asphalt concrete pavement, base material, and
subgrade soil shall be pulverized to the depth shown on the Plans. The number of passes required shall
be that which results in pulverized base material conforming to 301-6.2.3.
301-6.6 Initial Grading. Initial grading shall conform to 301-3.4.7.
301-6.7 Spreading. Spreading shall conform to 301-5.6.
301-6.8 Initial Mixing. Initial mixing shall conform to 301-5.7.
301-6.9 Mellowing. Mellowing shall conform to 301-5.8.
301-6.10 Final Mixing. Final mixing shall conform to 301-5.9 except the gradation requirement
shown in Table 301-5.9 shall not apply.
301-6.11 Compaction and Final Grading. Compaction and final grading shall be performed in such a
manner as to produce a smooth, dense surface free of compaction planes, cracks, ridges or loose LSPB material.
LSPB material shall be compacted to not less than 95 percent of the maximum wet density
determined in accordance with ASTM D1557. In-place density shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM D6938. In-place moisture content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D4959. Unless
otherwise specified, the Contractor shall perform a minimum of 1 compaction test per 750 square yards
(627m2) of LSPB. Test data shall be recorded on forms approved by the Engineer. Test results shall be
furnished to the Engineer at the end of each Working Day.
Initial compaction shall be performed using static or vibratory pad foot, or segmented wheel rollers.
Final compaction shall immediately follow initial compaction. Final compaction shall be performed
using steel drum or pneumatic-tired rollers. The use of steel drum vibratory rollers in the vibratory mode
during final compaction will not be permitted. Areas inaccessible to rollers shall be compacted by other
equipment approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
306 Greenbook 2021

Compaction shall be completed within 36 hours of the completion of final mixing operations.
LSPB material shall be graded to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the Plans. The
finished surface of the LSPB material shall be hereinafter referred to as the “grading plane.” At any
point along the grading plane, the elevation shall not vary more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) above or below the
required elevation.
If, after compaction, any point or area is above the specified grade tolerance, excess material shall be
trimmed and removed as necessary. No loose material shall be left on the grading plane. Trimmed
surfaces shall be completely rolled using steel drum or pneumatic-tired rollers.
The finished surface shall be maintained in a smooth condition, free from undulations, ruts, and
loose LSPB material until the overlying base course of asphalt concrete pavement is placed.
301-6.12 Construction Joints. At the end of each day of compaction and final grading, a vertical-
faced construction joint shall be constructed in the LSPB normal to the centerline of the roadway. The
joint shall be constructed for the full-depth of the LSPB and be moisture-cured continuously until
placement of adjacent LSPB begins. Adjacent LSPB shall not be placed until the construction joint has
been approved by the Engineer.
301-6.13 Curing. Curing shall conform to 301-5.11.
301-6.14 Fog Seal. Fog seal, if specified, shall conform to 301-3.4.15.
301-6.15 Measurement. Lime will be measured by the ton (tonne). The basis of payment shall be
the net weight of lime used to produce LSPB. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with certified
weighmaster certificates showing the weight of each load delivered to the Work site and the weight
remaining on the Work site after completion.
LSPB will be measured by the square yard (m2) of finished surface for each thickness specified or
shown on the Plans.
Excess pulverized base material, excess LSPB, and unsuitable material will be measured by the
cubic yard (m3).
301-6.16 Payment. Payment for lime will be made at the Contract Unit Price per ton (tonne).
Payment will be made for the difference between the weight delivered to the Work site and the
remaining weight. The Contract Unit Price shall include furnishing and spreading. Payment for lime
will not be subject to the provisions of 7-3.5.2 and 7-3.5.3.
Payment for LSPB will be made at the Contract Unit Price per square yard (m2) for each thickness
specified or shown on the Plans. The Contract Unit Price shall include pulverizing, mixing, water,
compaction and final grading, compaction testing, curing, and fog seal (if required).
If the Engineer directs lime to be spread in excess of the specified percentage, payment for the effect
of the additional lime on reclaimer mixing production will be made on the basis of Extra Work. No
additional payment will be made if the additional lime is necessitated by mixing below the depth
tolerance specified in 301-5.9.
Payment for preparation of the mix design, if prepared by the Contractor, will be made as specified
in the Special Provisions or shown on the Bid.
Payment for removal and disposal of excess pulverized base material, excess lime stabilized
pulverized base material, and unsuitable material will be made at the Contract Unit Price per cubic yard
(m3) for unclassified excavation.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 307

SECTION 302 - ROADWAY SURFACING

302-1 NOT USED.

302-2 CHIP SEAL.
302-2.1 General. A chip seal shall consist of an application of polymer modified emulsified asphalt
or modified paving asphalt and screenings to an existing roadway surface. A double chip seal shall
include a second application of polymer modified emulsified asphalt or modified paving asphalt and
screenings of a smaller size. A chip seal consisting of an application of asphalt rubber binder and
screenings shall conform to 302-10.
Chip seals shall be specified by the type (size of screenings) and grade of emulsified asphalt or
modified paving asphalt, i.e. “Medium Fine - PMCRS-2h.”
The type (size of screenings) and grade of emulsified asphalt or modified paving asphalt to be
applied, and the type of screenings to be spread, shall be as specified in the Special Provisions or shown
on the Plans.
302-2.2 Materials.
302-2.2.1 Emulsified Asphalt. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or shown on
the Plans, emulsified asphalt for chip seal applications shall be PMCRS-2h conforming to 203-3.4.5.
Emulsified asphalt for fog seal applications shall consist of 50 percent CQS-1h conforming to 203-
3.4.3 and 50 percent water conforming to 203-3.2.
302-2.2.2 Modified Paving Asphalt. Modified paving asphalt shall be defined as performance
grade paving asphalt containing polymer and/or ground tire rubber modifiers. Modified paving asphalt
shall conform to the requirements specified in the Special Provisions.
302-2.2.3 Screenings. Screenings shall conform to 200-1.2.2.
302-2.2.4 Sand. Sand for sand cover shall conform to 200-1.5.3.
302-2.3 Equipment.
302-2.3.1. General. Equipment shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use on the Work.
302-2.3.2 Distributor Trucks. Distributor trucks shall be self-propelled and of the pressure-type
with insulated tanks. Distributor trucks shall be capable of uniform application in controlled amounts
ranging from 0.02 gallon to 1 gallon per square yard (0.10 to 4.5 L/m2) of surface.
Distributor trucks shall be equipped with:
a) a cab-mounted computerized control system capable of adjusting the application rate, spray bar
circulation, spray bar width, and turning on/off in 1 foot (0.3 m) increments of the spray bar;
b) a cab-mounted display with selectable digital readouts of application rate, truck speed (feet per
minute) (meters per minute), distance traveled, spray bar width, and total area sprayed;
c) a cab-mounted automatic valve control system;
d) a ground travel speed and distance traveled measuring system;
e) heating unit and pump or pumps capable of spraying within 0.02 gallons per square yard (0.10
L/m2) of the specified application rate;
f) a full-circulation spray bar (including extensions), a minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) wide, capable of
uniform application across the full-width of a traffic lane without streaks or other distortions,

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
308 Greenbook 2021

adjustable to permit positioning at various heights above the surface to be treated, and equipped
with individual quick-disconnect valves for each nozzle;
g) tachometer;
h) pressure gauges;
i) volume measuring device and gauges;
j) temperature gauges, including one on the side of the tank visible to the Engineer when standing
on ground level; and
k) a single or multiple nozzle hand spray wand with a minimum of 25 feet (7.6 m) of hose.
302-2.3.3 Haul Trucks. Trucks for hauling screenings shall be of the tailgate discharge (“end
dump”) type and be equipped with:
a) a device capable of locking onto the rear hitch of the chip spreader;
b) a dump bed that, when fully raised, will not push down on the chip spreader; and
c) a dump body lip of sufficient length that screenings will not spill onto the roadway surface during
dumping into the rear hopper of the chip spreader.
302-2.3.4 Chip Spreaders. Chip spreaders shall be specifically designed and constructed for
spreading screenings. Chip spreaders shall be:
a) self-propelled;
b) equipped with a locking device for attaching to haul trucks, separate rear receiving and front
spreading hoppers, a conveyor system capable of transporting material deposited in the rear
hopper to the front hopper, an adjustable-width spreading hopper, and a computerized spread rate
control system capable of adjusting the spread rate up or down in 1 pound increments; and
c) capable of towing haul trucks during discharge and spreading screenings over an entire traffic
lane width in one pass.
302-2.3.5 Pneumatic Tire Rollers. Pneumatic tire rollers (rollers) shall be self-propelled,
reversible, and the oscillating-type having a width of not less than 4 feet (1.2 m).
Roller tires shall be of equal size, diameter, type, and ply, and be spaced such that the gaps between
adjacent front tires will be covered by adjacent rear tires. Rollers shall carry a minimum of 3,000
pounds (1360 kg) of load on each tire. Each tire shall be inflated to 100 pounds per square inch (689
kPa) and maintained so that the air pressure will not vary more than 5 pounds per square inch (34 kPa).
Rollers shall be equipped with pads and a water application system capable of preventing asphalt
from adhering to the pneumatic tires. A biodegradable parting agent approved by the Engineer may be
used in addition to the pads and water application system.
302-2.3.6 Sweepers. Sweepers shall be self-loading, motorized street sweepers or self-propelled
power brooms equipped with an adjustable, power-driven, rotating circular broom. Sweepers shall be
capable of removing loose screenings without dislodging those seated in the residual asphalt.
302-2.4 Roadway Surface Preparation. Prior to application and spreading, the roadway surface
shall be prepared as follows.
Manhole covers, utility vaults and the surfaces of other utility facilities, survey monuments and
benchmarks, shall be covered using a material approved by the Engineer. The cover material and
application procedure shall not result adherence of the chip seal nor in stripping of the chip seal from the
adjacent roadway pavement.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 309

Thermoplastic striping and pavement markings, raised pavement markers, and raised pavement
marker adhesive shall be removed.
Cleaning shall be performed by sweeping, flushing, or other method which results in the removal of
all loose particles of extraneous material.
302-2.5 Temporary Traffic Control. In addition to the requirements of 601, temporary traffic
control shall conform to the following requirements:
a) Roadways to be chip sealed may be closed to through traffic if so specified in the Special
Provisions or approved by the Engineer.
b) At locations where traffic is being routed over an open roadway upon which a chip seal is to be
applied, the chip seal shall not be applied to more than 1/2 the width of the traveled way at a
time, and the remaining width shall be kept free of obstructions and open for use by traffic until
the chip seal is finished.
c) Pilot cars utilized by the Contractor to convoy or otherwise control traffic shall maintain radio
contact with other pilot cars, flaggers, and personnel in the Work area. The maximum speed of
the pilot cars convoying or controlling traffic through the temporary traffic control zone shall be
15 miles per hour on 2-lane, 2-way roadways and 25 miles per hour on multi-lane divided and
undivided roadways. Pilot cars shall only use open traffic lanes.
d) On 2-lane, 2-way roadways, C6 "LOOSE GRAVEL" signs and W6 (35) speed advisory signs
shall be furnished and placed adjacent to both sides of the traveled way where screenings are
being spread on a traffic lane. The first C6 sign in each direction shall be placed where traffic
first encounters loose screenings, regardless of which lane the screenings are being spread on.
The W6 (35) signs need not be placed in those areas with posted speed limits of less than 40
MPH. The signs shall be placed at maximum 2,000-foot (610 m) intervals along each side of the
traveled way and at public roads or streets entering the seal coat area as directed by the Engineer.
e) On multilane roadways where screenings are being spread on a traffic lane, C6 "LOOSE
GRAVEL" signs and W6 (35) speed advisory signs shall be furnished and placed adjacent to the
outside edge of the traveled way nearest to the lane being worked on. The first C6 sign shall be
placed where the screenings begin with respect to the direction of travel on that lane. The W6
(35) signs need not be placed in those areas with posted speed limits of less than 40 MPH. The
signs shall be placed at maximum 2,000-foot (610 m) intervals along the edge of traveled way
and at public roads or streets entering the scrub seal coat area as directed by the Engineer.
f) The C6 and W6 signs shall be maintained in place at each location until final sweeping at that
location has been completed. The signs may be set on temporary portable supports with the W6
below the C6 or on barricades with the W6 sign alternating with the C6 sign.
g) During flush coat operations, the traffic lanes upon which the flush coat is being applied
shall be closed.
h) Traffic lanes shall not be opened until the flush coat has been applied.
302-2.6 Application and Spreading.
302-2.6.1 General. Application and spreading shall only be performed when the pavement is clean
and dry, wind conditions are such that uniform coverage will result, and rain is not imminent.
302-2.6.2 Polymer Modified Emulsified Asphalt. Polymer modified emulsified asphalt shall only
be applied when the ambient temperature is between 60ºF and 105ºF (16ºC and 41ºC), and the roadway
pavement surface temperature is a minimum of 55ºF (13ºC).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
310 Greenbook 2021

The liquid temperature at the time of application shall be between 130ºF and 180ºF (54ºC and 82ºC).
The application rate shall be within the range shown in Table 302-2.6.2 for the type of chip seal. The
initial rate of application, if pre-determined, shall be as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on
the Plans. The exact rate will be determined by the Engineer.

TABLE 302-2.6.2
Application Rate
Chip Seal Types 2
gal/yd (L/m )
2

Fine 0.15 to 0.30 (0.68 to 1.36)

Medium Fine 0.25 to 0.35 (1.13 to 1.58)
Medium 0.25 to 0.40 (1.13 to 1.81)
Coarse 0.30 to 0.40 (1.36 to 1.81)
Double
1st Application 0.20 to 0.35 (0.91 to 1.58)
2nd Application 0.20 to 0.30 (0.91 to 1.36)

Distribution shall not vary from the specified rate by more than 15 percent transversely nor more
than 10 percent longitudinally, as determined in accordance with California Test 339.
Application a) may be performed with a wand in areas inaccessible to the distributor truck if so
approved by the Engineer, b) shall not be to a greater distance than can be immediately covered by
screenings, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, and c) shall be discontinued sufficiently early
each Working Day to permit the termination of temporary traffic control prior to darkness.
302-2.6.3 Modified Paving Asphalt. Modified paving asphalt shall only be applied when the atmospheric
temperature is 65ºF (18ºF) or above and the existing pavement surface temperature is 80ºF (27ºC) or above.
The liquid temperature at the time of application shall be between 330ºF and 375ºF (166ºC and 191ºC).
The application rate shall be within the range shown in Table 302-2.6.3 for the type of chip seal. The
initial rate of application, if pre-determined, shall be as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on
the Plans. The exact rate will be determined by the Engineer.

TABLE 302-2.6.3
Application Rate
Chip Seal Types 2
gal/yd (L/m )
2

Fine 0.28 to 0.34 (0.68 to 1.36)

Medium Fine 0.32 to 0.38 (1.13 to 1.58)
Medium 0.36 to 0.46 (1.13 to 1.81)
Coarse 0.38 to 0.48 (1.36 to 1.81)
Double
1st Application 0.36 to 0.42 (0.91 to 1.58)
2nd Application 0.26 to 0.34 (0.91 to 1.36)

Distribution shall not vary from the specified rate by more than 15 percent transversely nor more
than 10 percent longitudinally, as determined in accordance with California Test 339.
Application:
a) shall not be to a greater distance than can be immediately covered by screenings, and
b) shall be discontinued sufficiently early each Working Day to permit the termination of temporary
traffic control prior to darkness.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 311

302-2.6.4 Screenings.
302-[Link] General. The chip spreader shall be operated at a speed that will not result in the
screenings rolling over after striking the asphalt covered roadway surface. The speed of the distributor
truck shall be governed by the speed of the chip spreader.
302-[Link] Spreading on Polymer Modified Emulsified Asphalt. Screenings shall be spread
before setting or “breaking” of the polymer modified emulsified asphalt occurs.
Screenings may be stockpiled; however, screenings contaminated during storage or reloading
operations will be rejected.
Screenings shall be surface damp at the time of application. Screenings shall be dampened in the
haul truck prior to dumping into the chip spreader when so directed by the Engineer.
The spread rate shall be within the range shown in Table 302-[Link] for the type of chip seal. The
initial rate, if pre-determined, shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. The
exact rate will be determined by the Engineer.

TABLE 302-[Link]
Spread Rate
2 2
Chip Seal Types lbs/yd (kg/m )
Fine 12 to 20 (6.5 to 10.9)
Medium Fine 16 to 25 (8.7 to 13.6)
Medium 20 to 30 (10.9 to 16.3)
Coarse 23 to 35 (12.5 to 19.0)
Double
1st Application 23 to 30 (12.5 to 16.3)
2nd Application 12 to 20 (6.5 to 10.9)

Screenings shall be spread at a rate within 10 percent of the rate determined by the Engineer.
302-[Link] Spreading on Modified Paving Asphalt. Pre-coated, pre-heated screenings shall be
spread immediately after application of modified paving asphalt. Stockpiling will not be permitted.
The spread rate shall be within the range shown in Table 302-[Link] for the type of chip seal. The
initial rate, if pre-determined, shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. The
exact rate will be determined by the Engineer.

TABLE 302-[Link]
Spread Rate
2 2
Chip Seal Types lbs/yd (kg/m )
Fine 16 to 24 (6.5 to 10.9)
Medium Fine 16 to 24 (8.7 to 13.6)
Medium 18 to 26 (10.9 to 16.3)
Coarse 18 to 26 (12.5 to 19.0)
Double
1st Application 20 to 26 (12.5 to 16.3)
2nd Application 16 to 22 (6.5 to 10.9)

Screenings shall be spread at a rate within 10 percent of the rate determined by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
312 Greenbook 2021

302-2.6.5 Joints. Joints shall be smooth, straight, and uniform. Edges shall be swept free of loose
screenings prior to the adjacent application of asphalt.
Application shall start and stop on building paper or other similar material approved by the Engineer
wherever a transverse join to existing roadway pavement or an adjacent application occurs. The material
shall cover the full-width of the application. The material length shall be that which is necessary to
ensure the distributor truck spray nozzles are fully-operational when the existing pavement to be chip
sealed is reached, and which prevents application on previously placed screenings or beyond the limits
shown on the Plans. The joint material shall then be removed and disposed of by the Contractor.
Longitudinal joints between adjacent applications shall a) coincide with traffic lane lines, b) be swept
of loose screenings prior to the adjacent application, and c) be overlapped between applications for a
maximum width of 4 inches (100 mm). The resultant joints shall be free of ridges and depressions and
have an appearance and texture consistent with the adjacent chip sealed surface.
302-2.7 Finishing.
302-2.7.1 General. Finishing shall consist of, in order of sequence:
a) initial and final rolling;
b) sweeping; and
c) application of a flush coat.
After the screenings have been spread, piles and ridges shall be removed. Additional screenings
shall be spread in whatever quantity as may be necessary to completely and uniformly cover the residual
asphalt, after which the chip seal shall be rolled. After initial sweeping, sand shall be applied to areas
where free residual asphalt is evident.
302-2.7.2 Rolling. A minimum of 3 pneumatic tire rollers shall be furnished and operated during
rolling operations.
A pass shall be defined as 1 roller movement parallel to the chip seal application in either direction.
Coverage shall be defined as the number of passes needed for a roller to cover the full application width.
Overlapping passes shall be considered part of the coverage being performed and not a part of a
subsequent coverage. Subsequent coverage shall not be started until the previous coverage has been
completed.
Rolling shall be performed in the following sequence:
a) Initial rolling consisting of 1 coverage.
b) Final rolling consisting of 3 coverages.
Initial rolling shall begin immediately after the screenings have been spread.
Final rolling shall begin immediately after completion of the initial rolling. If approved by the
Engineer, final rolling for screenings on modified paving asphalt may be performed with one steel wheel
roller weighing between 8 tons (7.3 tonnes) minimum and 10 tons (9.1 tonnes) maximum. The steel
wheel roller shall be operated in the static mode only.
302-2.7.3 Sweeping. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the time it intends to wait after the
screenings have been spread before beginning sweeping operations. A minimum of 3 sweepers shall be
furnished and operated in addition to those required to conform to 302-2.8.
Sweeping shall not cause screenings which have seated in the residual asphalt to become loose.
Sweeping shall result in the removal of loose screenings from the roadway, adjacent gutters, curb ramps,
sidewalks, driveways, and intersecting roadways.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 313

Excess screenings generated by sweeping operations shall be removed and disposed of by the
Contractor except as follows:
a) Excess screenings may remain on unimproved, graded shoulders unless otherwise specified or
approved by the Engineer.
b) Excess screenings may be salvaged and stockpiled for spreading if so specified or approved
by the Engineer.
302-2.7.4 Finished Surface. The finished surface, prior to application of the flush coat, shall be
uniform in appearance and free from ridges, depressions or other irregularities.
302-2.8 Flush Coat.
302-2.8.1 General. Flush coat shall consist of the application of an emulsified asphalt fog seal and
sand cover to the surface of the chip seal. Flush coat application shall begin immediately after initial
sweeping and removal of excess screenings and prior to opening the lane to uncontrolled (not controlled
with pilot cars) traffic.
Flush coat shall not be applied when the atmospheric temperature is below 40°F (4°C).
302-2.8.2 Fog Seal. Emulsified asphalt shall be applied by a distributor truck conforming to 302-
2.3.2. The diluted application rate shall be within the range of 0.06 to 0.18 gallons per square yard (0.28
to 0.81 L/m2). The exact application rate will be determined by the Engineer. The actual rate shall not
vary more than 5 percent from the specified rate.
After the application of a fog seal coat, emulsified asphalt that becomes tacky shall be sprinkled with
water in the amount ordered and as directed by the Engineer.
302-2.8.3 Sand Cover. Sand shall be spread by a chip spreader conforming to 302-2.3.4 at a
uniform rate over the full width of a traffic lane in a single application.
Sand cover shall be applied immediately following application of the fog seal. Sand shall be spread
at a rate of 2 to 4 pounds per square yard (0.91 to 1.8kg/m2). The exact rate will be determined by the
Engineer. The actual rate shall not vary more than 5 percent from the specified rate.
302-2.9 Maintenance. The Contractor shall maintain the chip seal surface for 4 Days beginning on
the date of application and spreading. Maintenance shall include maintaining the chip seal surface free
of loose screenings by sweeping, applying additional screenings and/or sand cover as may be necessary
to absorb free residual asphalt or cover bare areas, and other work as directed by the Engineer.
Sweeping shall not result in screenings set in the residual asphalt becoming loose.
The exact duration of sweeping operations will be determined by the Engineer. As a minimum,
sweeping, in addition to that required in 302-2.7, is required as follows:
a) On 2-lane, 2-way roadways, from 2 to 4 hours after public traffic controlled with pilot cars has
been routed over the seal coat.
b) On multilane roadways, from 2 to 4 hours after screenings have been applied.
c) In addition to previous sweeping, immediately prior to opening any lane to public traffic not
controlled with pilot cars.
d) As a first order of work on the morning following the spreading of screenings, on any lane that
has been open to public traffic not controlled with pilot cars.
e) For double seal coats, prior to the second application.
f) At the end of the 4-Day maintenance period.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
314 Greenbook 2021

The following shall apply to seal coat operations on 2-lane, 2-way roadways under one-way
traffic control:
g) Upon the completion of final rolling, public traffic routed over the seal coat must be controlled
with pilot cars from 2 to 4 hours. The exact period of time will be determined by the Engineer.
h) The flush coat shall be applied on both lanes such that traffic control is discontinued 1 hour
before darkness. At the end of the work shift, the end of the seal coat on each lane shall match.
The following shall apply to seal coat operations on multi-lane roadways:
i) The initial sweeping shall begin 2 to 4 hours after the screenings have been applied. When
the initial sweeping is not completed during the work shift in which the screenings were
applied, the initial sweeping shall be completed as the first order of work at the beginning of
the next work shift.
j) After the completion of initial sweeping, public traffic controlled by pilot cars shall be routed
over the seal coat surface.
k) A maximum of 1 lane in each direction shall be open to public traffic when controlled by
pilot cars.
l) Public traffic shall be controlled with pilot cars for a minimum of 2 hours or until the adjacent
traffic lanes have been seal-coated and swept, whichever comes last.
302-2.10 Measurement. Chip seals will be measured by the square yard for each combination of
size of screenings and grade of polymer modified emulsified asphalt or modified paving asphalt, or by
the ton for each size of screenings and each grade of polymer modified emulsified asphalt or modified
paving asphalt. The basis of measurement shall be as specified in the Bid.
The Contractor shall submit licensed weighmaster certificates for materials delivered to the Work
site by the end of the first Working Day following the date of delivery. Upon completion of the Work,
the Contractor shall submit licensed weighmaster certificates for materials remaining on the Work site
but not used in the Work. The weight of materials used in the Work will be calculated by deducting the
weight of remaining materials from the weight of delivered materials.
302-2.11 Payment. Payment for chip seals will be made at the Contract Unit Price per square yard
for each combination of size of screenings and grade of emulsified asphalt or modified paving asphalt, or
the Contract Unit Price per ton (tonne) for each size of screenings and each grade of emulsified asphalt
or modified paving asphalt used in the Work. The basis of payment shall be as specified in the Bid.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contract Unit Price shall include:
a) surface preparation,
b) materials,
c) temporary traffic control,
d) application and spreading,
e) finishing,
f) sweeping, and
g) maintenance of the completed chip seal.
302-3 MICROSURFACING.
302-3.1 General. Microsurfacing shall consist of the mixing, spreading, and application of a
mixture of microsurfacing emulsion (MSE), water, set control agents, and aggregate.
The combined aggregate gradation (Type) shall be as shown on the Plans.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 315

302-3.2 Mix Design(s). The Contractor shall submit a mix design for each aggregate gradation
(Type) to be used in the Work. Laboratory reports supporting each mix design shall be included with the
submittals. The component materials used in the mix design must be the same materials that will be
used during microsurfacing application.
The percentages of each individual material proposed in the mix design shall be included in the
laboratory report. Individual materials shall be within the limits shown in Table 302-3.2 (A).

TABLE 302-3.2 (A)

MSE Residual Asphalt Type II: 5.5% to 10.5% by dry weight of aggregate
Type III: 6.5% to 10.5% by dry weight of aggregate
Water and Additives No Limit
Set Control Agents 0% to 3% by dry weight of aggregate

Microsurfacing mixtures shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 302-3.2 (B).

TABLE 302-3.2 (B)

Test ISSA Test Method Requirements
Wet Cohesion TB* 139
@ 30 Minute (Set), min. 12 kg-cm20 kg-cm
@ 60 Minute (Traffic), min.
2 2
Excess Asphalt, max. TB* 109 50 g/ft (540 g/m )
Wet Stripping, min. TB* 114 Pass (90% Minimum)
Wet Track Abrasion Loss TB* 100
2 2
6-day Soak, max. 75 g/ft (810 g/m )
Displacement TB* 147
Lateral, max. 5%
Specific Gravity After 1000 Cycles of 125 lbs 2.10
(57 kg), Max.
Classification Compatibility, min. TB* 144 (AAA, BAA) 11 Grade Points Minimum
Mix Time @ 77°F(25°C), min. TB* 113 Controllable to 120 Seconds Minimum
TB* = Technical Bulletin

The laboratory report(s) shall show the results of the tests on individual materials and shall compare
their values to those required. The report shall clearly show the proportions of aggregate, water
(minimum and maximum), set control agents, and MSE residual asphalt content (minimum and
maximum) based on the dry weight of aggregate. The laboratory report(s) shall include the quantitative
effects of moisture content on the unit weight of the aggregate (bulking effect) in accordance with
ASTM C29M. The laboratory report shall further show the recommended changes in water and set
control agent proportions for high temperature weather conditions by reporting proportions of materials
required for 60 seconds of mix time with materials heated to 100°F (38°C).
The completed mixture, after addition of water and set control agents, if set control agents are used,
shall be such that the microsurfacing mixture has the workability necessary for application. At the
expiration of the time allowed for closure of roadways or traffic lanes, the microsurfacing mixture shall
be sufficiently cured to support unrestricted traffic.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
316 Greenbook 2021

302-3.3 Materials.
302-3.3.1 Aggregate. Aggregate shall be Type II or Type III conforming to 200-1.8.
302-3.3.2 Microsurfacing Emulsion (MSE). MSE shall conform to 203-3.4.6.
302-3.3.3 Water. Water shall conform to 203-3.2.
302-3.3.4 Set Control Agents. Set control agents shall conform to 302-[Link].
302-3.4 Continuous-Flow Mixers.
302-3.4.1 General. Continuous-flow mixers shall be used to mix and spread microsurfacing.
Continuous-flow mixers (mixers) shall be mixer-spreader trucks or continuous mixer-spreader
machines. The Contractor shall have a minimum of 2 fully-operational mixers on the Work site at all
times when continuous mixer-spreader machines (continuous machines) are not specified.
302-3.4.2 Mixer-Spreader Trucks. Mixer-spreader trucks shall conform to 302-4.5.
302-3.4.3 Continuous Self-Loading Mixer-Spreader Machines. Continuous self-loading mixer-
spreader machines shall be:
a) specifically designed and manufactured to place slurry seal and microsurfacing,
b) self-propelled,
c) self-loading, and
d) capable of loading materials during mixing, spreading and application;
e) conform to 302-4.5, and
f) have sufficient storage capacity for aggregate, MSE, mineral filler, water and additives to maintain
an adequate supply to the proportioning controls.
302-3.5 Verification Testing. Verification testing shall conform to 302-4.4.5 except wet track
abrasion test results will not be required.
302-3.6 Spreader Boxes.
302-3.6.1 General. Spreader boxes shall be capable of placing the microsurfacing mixture a
minimum of 8 feet (2.4 m) wide. Spreader boxes shall have baffles, reversible motor driven augers, or
be otherwise equipped to be capable of uniform application on super-elevated sections and shoulder
slopes. Spreader boxes shall be maintained in such manner as to prevent chatter (washboarding) in the
finished surface. Spreader boxes shall be clean and free of microsurfacing mixture at the start of each
work shift.
Spreader boxes shall have a series of strike-off devices at the rear. Strike-off devices shall be
fabricated of flexible material suitable for the intended use and shall be designed and operated to ensure
that the finished surface has a uniform texture. The number of strike-off devices shall be determined by
the Contractor. The first strike-off device shall be designed to maintain close contact with the pavement
during spreading, attain the thickness required, and be capable of being adjusted as necessary to result in
a uniform application and finished surface across the pavement cross section. The final strike-off device
shall be cleaned daily and changed if longitudinal scouring occurs.
Flexible fabric drags attached to the rear of the spreader box shall not be used.
302-3.6.2 Wheel Path Depression (Rut) Boxes. Rut boxes shall be strike-off devices designed and
constructed to regulate the thickness of microsurfacing mixture spread and be either 5 or 6 feet (1.5 or
1.8 m) wide. Rut boxes shall be equipped with hydraulic augers, or similar devices, capable of moving
the microsurfacing mixture from the rear to the front of the filling chamber, guiding the larger aggregate

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 317

into the center, deeper section of the wheel path depression, and forcing the finer material toward the
outer edges of the spreader box.
In areas inaccessible to a rut box, the microsurfacing mixture may be spread by other methods
approved by the Engineer.
303-3.7 Aggregate Stockpile. The Contractor shall arrange for and provide an aggregate stockpile
site a minimum of 7 Days prior to the start of the Work. The stockpile site shall be clean and free from
objectionable material.
302-3.8 Scheduling, Public Convenience, and Traffic Control. Scheduling, public convenience,
and traffic control shall conform to 302-4.7, Part 6, and the following:
a) Microsurfacing operations shall cease a minimum of 1 hour before the expiration of the times
specified for lane closures in the Special Provisions.
b) Traffic shall not be allowed on newly placed microsurfacing until it has sufficiently set and
bonded to the underlying pavement.
302-3.9 Pavement Surface Preparation. Before placing microsurfacing, the pavement surface
shall be cleaned by sweeping or other method approved by the Engineer. No loose particle shall remain
on the pavement after cleaning.
Thermoplastic striping and pavement markings, raised pavement markers, and raised pavement
marker adhesive shall be removed.
Manhole covers, utility vaults and the surfaces of other utility facilities, survey monuments and
benchmarks, shall be covered using a material approved by the Engineer. The material and procedure
shall result in no adherence of the microsurfacing to the improvement and no stripping of the
microsurfacing from the adjacent pavement.
302-3.10 Test Strips. The Contractor shall construct a minimum of 1 test strip for each type of
aggregate gradation to be used in the Work for evaluation by the Engineer. Each test strip shall be 300
to 500 feet long, a minimum of 1500 square yards in size, replicate the full-production mixing,
spreading, and application, and consist of the application of the courses specified. Each test strip shall
be constructed at the same time of day that the full-production will happen. Each test strip may be
constructed in 2 Days when multiple-course applications are specified. If the microsurfacing is to be
placed on a scrub seal or chip seal, the test strips shall be placed over the underlying seal coat.
The Engineer will evaluate each completed test strip for 48 hours after traffic has been allowed on it
to determine if the mix design and placement procedure are acceptable. If the mix design or the
placement procedure is determined by the Engineer to be unacceptable, the test strips will be rejected,
the Contractor shall make modifications, and new test strips shall be constructed. The new test strips
will be evaluated by the Engineer as previously specified. Rejected test strips shall be removed if
directed by the Engineer.
302-3.11 Mixing, Spreading, and Application. Microsurfacing shall not be placed when either the
ambient or pavement temperature is below 50°F (13°C) or during unsuitable weather. Microsurfacing
shall not be placed if rain is imminent or if freezing temperatures are forecast within 24 hours.
Immediately before spreading, the existing pavement shall be pre-wetted by a pressurized water
distribution system equipped with a fog-type spray bar capable of completely covering the surface
of the pavement.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
318 Greenbook 2021

Microsurfacing shall be spread by a spreader box attached to a mixer-spreader truck or continuous

machine. However, when wheel path depressions have a cross section that is deformed 1/2-inch (12.5
mm) or more, the individual wheel paths shall first be filled utilizing a wheel path depression (rut) box.
The depth of the wheel path depression shall be determined after adjacent ridges have been removed.
The maximum single application for wheel path depressions shall be 1 inch (25 mm). Wheel path
depressions of depths greater than 1 inch shall require multiple applications in each depression.
Wheel path depression repair shall be constructed with a slight crown to allow for initial compaction
by traffic on the microsurfacing.
Freshly filled wheel path depressions shall be compacted by traffic for a minimum of 48 hours before
additional lifts of microsurfacing are placed for rut filling purposes or as the surface course.
Microsurfacing shall be spread at the rates of pounds of dry aggregate per square yard shown in
Table 302-3.11 unless otherwise specified or shown on the Plans.

TABLE 302-3.11
2 2
Microsurfacing Type/Application Location Spread Rate (lbs/yd ) (kg/m )

Type II over Existing AC Pavement Full Lane Width 15-20 (8-11)

Type II over Micro-Milled AC Pavement Full Lane Width 16-21 (9-12)
Type II over Chip Seal (1/4”) Full Lane Width 16-21 (9-12)
Type II over Chip Seal (5/16”) Full Lane Width 18-22 (9-12)
Type II over Chip Seal (3/8”) Full Lane Width 18-22 (9-12)
Type III over Existing AC Pavement Full Lane Width 20-30 (11-17)
Type III over Chip Seal (1/4”) Full Lane Width 20-30 (11-17)
Type III over Chip Seal (5/16”) Full Lane Width 21-30 (12-17)
Type III over Chip Seal (3/8”) Full Lane Width 22-30 (12-17)

Microsurfacing shall be uniformly spread on the existing pavement surface within the rate specified
without spotting, re-handling, or otherwise shifting the mixture. Spreading shall be performed in one
continuous application per work shift. Other than joints at the start and end of each work shift, no other
joints will be allowed.
Through traffic lanes shall be spread in full-lane-widths only. Longitudinal joints common to 2
traffic lanes shall be butt joints with overlaps not to exceed 3 inches (75 mm). Longitudinal joints shall
correspond with the edges of the final traffic lane lines. Building paper shall be placed at the transverse
joints. Transverse joints shall be straight, clean and have no variation in surface texture from the rest of
the mat.
The mixture shall be of homogeneous composition and uniform texture after application and shall
not show separation of the MSE and aggregate after setting.
Microsurfacing shall be protected from damage by traffic until such time that the mixture has cured
sufficiently so that the microsurfacing will not adhere to or be picked up by the tires of vehicles.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 319

Microsurfacing shall be swept approximately 24 hours after placement. Thereafter, microsurfacing

shall be swept, when directed by the Engineer, for up to 10 Days after placement. Sweeping shall be
performed in such a manner that the microsurfacing will not be damaged.
302-3.12 Measurement. The basis of measurement shall be the combined weight of dry aggregate,
excluding mineral filler, and MSE, in tons (tonnes), for each type of aggregate used in the Work, as
determined by licensed weighmaster’s certificates. The weight of added water, and set control agents
used in the microsurfacing mixture will not be included in the weight measured for payment. No
deduction will be made for water in the aggregate and MSE.
The Contractor shall submit a written plan covering the intended method of delivery, storage and
measurement of dry aggregate and MSE. The Contractor shall submit licensed weighmaster tickets for
each load of dry aggregate and MSE delivered to the stockpile site or directly to each mixer-spreader
machine prior to the end of each Working Day. Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall
submit licensed weighmaster’s certificates for materials delivered to the Work site but not incorporated
into the Work. Measurement for payment will be determined by deducting the remaining weight of
materials from the weight of materials delivered.
302-3.13 Payment. Payment for microsurfacing will be made at the Contract Unit Price per
ton (tonne). No payment will be made for test strips which have been rejected or for removal of
rejected test strips.
No separate or additional payment will be made for calibration, scheduling, public convenience, or
traffic control unless otherwise specified.
302-4 SLURRY SEAL SURFACING.
302-4.1 General. Slurry seal surfacing shall consist of the mixing, spreading, and application of
emulsion-aggregate slurry (EAS) conforming to 302-4.3 or the spreading and application of rubberized
emulsion-aggregate slurry (REAS) conforming to 203-5. The combined aggregate gradation (Type) and
slurry seal mixture (EAS or REAS) shall be as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
302-4.2 Mix Design(s). The Contractor shall submit a mix design for each combination of
emulsified asphalt grade and combined aggregate gradation to be used in the Work. Each mix design
shall conform to ASTM D3910. Laboratory reports supporting each mix design shall be included with
the submittals. Laboratory reports shall identify the aggregate source and supplier, emulsified asphalt
supplier and all of the test results required in ASTM D3910 except for the cohesion test. In addition,
each mix design shall include the following:
a) amount of PME or RPME in gallons (liters) per ton (tonne) of aggregate,
b) amount of added water in gallons (liter) per ton (tonne) of aggregate,
c) quantity and type of set control agents,
d) percent of polymer, if so specified, and the
e) loose unit weight of aggregate (ASTM C29 with 0.1 cubic feet (3 L) bucket).
Mix designs shall be based on the following:
a) for Type Fine, the content of RPME and water needed to produce a slurry seal with a maximum
wet track abrasion test loss of 50 grams per square foot (540 grams per square meter) when tested
in accordance with ASTM D3910;

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
320 Greenbook 2021

b) for Type I, the content of PME or RPME and water needed to produce a Type I slurry seal with a
maximum wet track abrasion test loss of 50 grams per square foot (540 grams per square meter)
when tested in accordance with ASTM D3910; or,
c) for Type II or Type III, the content of PME or RPME and water needed to produce a slurry seal
with a maximum wet track abrasion test loss of 60 grams per square foot (650 grams per square
meter) when tested in accordance with ASTM D3910.
ASTM D3910 shall be modified to include the aggregate retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve for
Type II and Type III slurry seals. Type III slurry seals shall use the 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) template.
When a mix design is more than 30 Days old, it shall be supplemented with a Certificate of
Compliance that states the combined aggregate gradation is within ± 3 percent of the referenced mix
design based on a 30-Day moving average or the average of a minimum of 10 of the most current
laboratory results, whichever is greater. A mix design shall be reformulated if it is more than one-year-
old or whenever the combined aggregate gradation changes from that in the previously submitted mix
design by ± 3 percentage points on any sieve size shown in Table 200-1.7.2. If the source of any
aggregate or emulsified asphalt is changed, or the mix design or supporting laboratory reports are over
one-year-old, a new mix design shall be submitted.
302-4.3 Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry (EAS).
302-4.3.1 General. EAS shall be a mixture of polymer modified cationic quick-set emulsified
asphalt, aggregate, water, and a set control agent. EAS shall be specified by combined aggregate
gradation, e.g. Type II-EAS.
302-4.3.2 Materials.
302-[Link] Aggregate. Aggregate shall be Type I, Type II, or Type III conforming to 200-1.7.
302-[Link] Emulsified Asphalt. Emulsified asphalt shall be PMCQS-1h conforming to the
requirements shown in Table 203-3.4.5 (B).
The percentage of emulsified asphalt and residual asphalt content shall conform to the requirements
shown in Table 302-[Link].

TABLE 302-[Link]
Test Method Type I Type II Type III
Emulsified Asphalt %, by __
weight of dry aggregate. 17-20 14-18 11-15
1
Residual Asphalt ASTM D6307 10 min. 7.5 min. 6.5 min.
Content, % by weight of dry or
1
aggregate . CT 382
1

1. Sample size shall be 500 g minimum.

302-[Link] Water. Water shall conform to 203-3.2.

302-[Link] NOT USED.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 321

302-[Link] Set Control Agents. Set control agents shall be either Type II or Type V Portland
cement conforming to 201-1.2.1, aluminum sulfate, or other material approved by the Engineer.
Field adjustments to the set control agents may be made in accordance with the approved mix
design. The amount of set control agents to be included shall be that amount necessary to ensure that
quick-set EAS can support vehicular traffic within 60 minutes after the completion of application.
302-4.3.3 Mixing. Mixing shall be performed on the Work site by continuous-flow mixers
conforming to 302-4.5.
302-4.4 Rubberized Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry (REAS).
302-4.4.1 General. REAS shall conform to 203-5.
302-4.4.2 Mixing. Mixing shall conform to 203-5.3.
302-4.4.3 Transporting. Transporting shall conform to 203-5.4.
302-4.4.4 Work Site Storage. REAS may be stored at the Work site in tanks specifically designed
for this purpose and which are equipped with an agitator similar to that in a central mixing plant. The
agitator shall be capable of continuous operation.
302-4.5 Continuous-Flow Mixers.
302-4.5.1 General. Continuous-flow mixers shall be used to mix and spread EAS. Continuous-
flow mixers shall be mixer-spreader trucks or continuous self-loading mixer-spreader machines
conforming to 302-3.4.3. The Contractor shall have a minimum of 2 fully-operational mixers available
for use on the Work site at all times.
Mixers shall be multi-blade or spiral continuous flow units capable of accurately proportioning and
mixing aggregate, water, emulsion, Portland cement and set control agents, and discharging the mixture
to a spreader box on a continuous basis. Mixers shall be equipped with a counter to count the
revolutions of the aggregate belt head pulley, a metering device capable of measuring the quantity of
water in gallons (liters), and a separate metering device capable of measuring the quantity of emulsified
asphalt used to produce each load of slurry seal.
Each emulsion pump shall have its own identification number as determined by the Contractor.
Variable rate emulsion pumps shall not be used. The identification number shall be affixed in a location
visible to the Engineer.
302-4.5.2 Hydraulic Continuous-Flow Mixers. The drive shaft of the hydraulic motor shall be
connected directly to the emulsion pump and have the same or a parallel shaft connected to the hydraulic
motor that drives the aggregate belt head pulley.
302-4.5.3 Mechanical Continuous-Flow Mixers. The emulsion pump and aggregate belt head
pulley shall be driven off the same drive shaft.
302-4.5.4 Calibration.
302-[Link] General. Each continuous-flow mixer to be used in the Work shall be calibrated
annually by the Contractor. The calibration procedure shall conform to the ISSA “Inspector’s Manual
MA-1” except as modified in 302-[Link].
The calibration shall be valid for one year from the date the procedure was performed.
Re-calibration will be required if:
a) the emulsion pump or the sprocket drive ratio is changed, and/or

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
322 Greenbook 2021

b) the aggregate source is changed and the loose unit weight, as determined by 302-[Link],
varies by more than 5 percent from the loose unit weight determined at the time of
calibration of the mixer.
Slurry seal surfacing work shall not begin until the calibration report has been reviewed and accepted
by the Engineer.
302-[Link] Procedure. The ISSA procedure shall be modified to require a minimum sample size
of 6,000 pounds (2,700 kg) of aggregate for each gate opening and each test run. The calibration of the
emulsion pump shall require a minimum of 25 revolutions of the aggregate belt. The difference in the
weight of aggregate delivered shall not vary by more than 2 percent from the average of 3 test runs. The
number of revolutions of the head pulley shall be the same for each test run for the gate openings being
tested. The emulsion calibration need only be verified for one gate setting. The emulsion delivery rate
shall not vary by more than 2 percent from the average of 3 test runs. The Contractor may elect to use
larger samples of aggregate or emulsion.
The Contractor shall reproduce and complete the “Emulsion Calibration Worksheet” in the
Appendix of the ISSA “Inspector’s Manual MA-1.” In addition to the information required on the
worksheet, the Contractor shall also provide the following:
a) the type and grade of emulsified asphalt,
b) the aggregate source and type,
c) the proposed gate setting based upon the approved mix design,
d) the date of calibration, and
e) the loose unit weight of aggregate determined in accordance with ASTM C29 with a minimum
0.1 cubic foot (3 L) bucket.
The Contractor shall also include the following information on all worksheets and graphs:
f) the identification number for the sprocket and emulsion pump, and
g) the model of the vehicle and type of mixer used for the calibration.
A copy of the gate opening curve and calibration data shall be kept with each mixer for review by
the Engineer.
302-4.5.5 Verification Testing. The Contractor shall adjust each continuous-flow mixer to be used
in the Work to produce slurry seal conforming to the approved mix design(s). The Contractor shall
allow 2 Working Days prior to the start of the Work for verification testing of each continuous flow
mixer. The Contractor shall provide field samples at the time of verification testing for extraction tests
(ASTM D6307), consistency tests, and modified wet track abrasion tests (ASTM D3910). When the
field samples conform to the Specifications, the Engineer will notify the Contractor it may start the
Work. If not, additional tests shall be performed at the Contractor’s expense until an acceptable mix is
produced.
302-4.6 Aggregate Stockpile. The Contractor shall make arrangements for and provide an
aggregate stockpile site a minimum of 7 Days prior to the start of the Work. The stockpile site shall be
clean and free from objectionable material.
302-4.7 Scheduling, Public Convenience and Traffic Control. In addition to the requirements of
Part 6, the Contractor shall comply with the following:
At least 5 Working Days prior to commencing the Work, the Contractor shall submit its proposed
schedule to the Engineer for approval. Based upon the approved schedule, the Contractor shall, at least

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 323

48 hours in advance, notify residents and businesses of the Work and post temporary “No Parking”
signs. Requests for changes in the approved schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at
least 3 Working Days before the street is scheduled to be sealed.
Streets where slurry seal is scheduled to be applied shall be closed from the time the Contractor
begins to clean the street surface until the Engineer determines the slurry seal has achieved sufficient set
to be opened to traffic.
Rock dust or sand shall be spread, as directed by the Engineer, to eliminate tracking or damage and
to provide vehicular or pedestrian crossings. Rock dust or sand used for this purpose shall conform to
200-1.2 and 200-1.5, respectively.
302-4.8 Spreading and Application.
302-4.8.1 General. Prior to spreading, the Contractor shall clean the existing pavement.
Immediately ahead of the spreader truck, the existing pavement shall be pre-wetted by a pressurized
water distribution system equipped with a fog-type spray bar capable of completely covering the surface
of the pavement.
Slurry seal mixed at the Work site shall be spread by a spreader box attached to a continuous-flow
mixer-spreader truck conforming to 302-4.5 or by a continuous mixer-spreader machine conforming to
302-3.4.3. REAS mixed at a central mixing plant shall be spread by a spreader box attached to an
agitator truck conforming to 203-5.4.
The spreader box shall be equipped with flexible material in continuous contact with the existing
pavement and shall be capable of controlling the rate of application. The spreader box shall have
adjustable width and strike-off height, and be capable of controlling and providing uniform spreading.
The maximum speed of the spreader truck shall not exceed 270 feet per minute (80 m/min.).
REAS shall be continuously agitated during spreading.
Hand squeegees and other equipment shall be provided for spreading and spillage removal in areas
inaccessible to the spreader box.
Slurry seal shall be applied in such a manner that no ridges remain. Areas in which there is
evidence of solidification of the emulsified asphalt, balling or lumping of the aggregates, or uncoated
aggregates shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall prevent slurry seal from being deposited on other than asphalt concrete surfaces
and shall remove it from surfaces not designated to be sealed. The method of removal shall be approved
by the Engineer.
Where the completed slurry seal surfacing is not uniform in color, the street shall be treated by a
method approved by the Engineer to eliminate the color variation.
302-4.8.2 Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry (EAS).
302-[Link] Application Temperature. EAS shall not be applied if either the pavement or the
ambient temperature is less than 50ºF (10ºC) and falling, but may be applied when the pavement and
ambient temperatures are both above 45ºF (7ºC) and rising.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
324 Greenbook 2021

302-[Link] Aggregate Application Rate.

General. The aggregate application rate shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 302-
[Link] unless otherwise specified or shown on the Plans.

TABLE 302-[Link]
2
Aggregate Application Rate (lbs./yd2) (kg/m )
Aggregate Type Minimum Maximum
Type I over Existing AC Pavement 8 (4) 10 (6)
2
Type II over Existing AC Pavement 12 (7) 15 (8 )
Type II over Micro-Milled AC Pavement 14 (8) 16 (9)
Type II over Chip Seal (1/4”) 14 (8) 20 (11)
Type II over Chip Seal (5/16”) 16 (9) 20 (12)
Type II over Chip Seal (3/8”) 16 (9) 22 (12)
Type II over Chip Seal (1/2”) 18 (10) 24 (13)
Type III over Existing AC Pavement 20 (11) 25 (14)
Type III over Chip Seal (1/4”) 20 (11) 28 (16)
Type III over Chip Seal (5/16”) 20 (11) 28 (16)
Type III over Chip Seal (3/8”) 20 (11) 28 (16)
Type III over Chip Seal (1/2”) 20 (11) 28 (16)

Corrective Action. When the aggregate application rate is less than the minimum shown in Table
302-[Link], the Contractor shall apply additional slurry seal material to the nonconforming areas as
necessary to conform to the Specifications.
When the aggregate application rate exceeds the maximum shown in Table 302-[Link], the
nonconforming material shall be removed and replaced, or be left in place at no additional cost to the
Agency, as determined by the Engineer.
302-4.8.3 Rubberized Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry (REAS).
302-[Link] Application Temperature. REAS shall not be applied if either the pavement or the
ambient temperature is less than 55ºF (13ºC) and falling, but may be applied when the pavement and
ambient temperatures are both above 50ºF (10ºC) and rising.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 325

302-[Link] Application Rate.

General. The application rate shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 302-[Link] unless
otherwise specified or shown on the Plans.

TABLE 302-[Link]
Application Rate (REAS) (lbs./yd2) (kg/m2)
Type Minimum Maximum
Type Fine REAS 5 (2.7) 6 (3.2)
Type I REAS 7 (3.8) 8 (4.5)
Type II REAS 11 (6.1) 15 (8.1)
Type II REAS
over Chip Seal Special Provisions Special Provisions
(Cape Seal)
Type III REAS 23 (12.2) 28 (15.2)
Type III REAS
over Chip Seal Special Provisions Special Provisions
(Cape Seal)

Corrective Action. When the application rate is less than the minimum shown in the tables above,
the Contractor shall apply additional REAS to the nonconforming areas as necessary to conform to the
Specifications.
When the application rate exceeds the maximum shown in the tables above, the nonconforming
material shall be removed and replaced, or be left in place at no additional cost to the Agency, as
determined by the Engineer.
302-4.9 Field Sampling and Testing.
302-4.9.1 Field Sampling. During the performance of the Work, the Contractor shall provide the
Engineer with at least 2 field samples, from separate loads, of mixed slurry seal per mixer per day.
WTAT specimens shall be cast and struck off within 60 seconds of obtaining the sample. WTAT
specimens shall not be transported until the slurry seal has set as defined by ASTM D3910.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
326 Greenbook 2021

Field samples shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 302-4.9.1.

TABLE 302-4.9.1
Requirements
Tests ASTM Test Method
Min. Max.
Wet Track Abrasion Test, Weight loss, 1
2 2 D3910 0 50 (540)
gm/ft (gm/m ) Type Fine Aggregate
Wet Track Abrasion Test, Weight loss, 1
2 2 D3910 0 50 (540)
gm/ft (gm/m ) Type I Aggregate
Wet Track Abrasion Test, Weight loss, 1
2 2 D3910 0 60 (650)
gm/ft (gm/m ) Type II Aggregate
Wet Track Abrasion Test, Weight loss, 1
2 2 4 D3910 0 60 (650)
gm/ft (gm/m ) Type III Aggregate
1
Consistency Test (mm) D3910 20 40
Extraction Test (Calculated Emulsion 2 2 ± 1 % of mix design for EAS.
D6307 , CT 382
Content, %) ± 3 % of mix design for REAS
Type I, II and III EAS < 25
Water Content (% of Dry Slurry) See Note 3 Type Fine and I REAS < 40
Type II and III REAS < 31
1. Modified ASTM D3910 to include No. 4 (4.75 mm) aggregate or greater and to be performed using field samples. Subsection [Link],
ASTM D3910 may be modified to use a microwave oven for drying the specimen after the abrasion cycle is complete and the
debris washed off.
2. Modified ASTM D6307 and California Test Method 382 to allow a minimum of 500 ± 50 gram sample.
3. Weigh a minimum of 500 grams of homogenized mixed slurry into a previously tared quart can with a friction lid. The lid shall be
placed on the can to prevent loss of material during transportation. Place the can with the lid off in an oven and dry to constant
mass at 220ºF ± 10ºF (110º C ± 5ºC).
4. The 3/8-inch (9.5 mm) template shall be used.

If the test results fail to conform to the Specifications, the Contractor shall cease spreading slurry
seal produced by the nonconforming mixer until the Contractor demonstrates the mixer is producing
slurry seal which conforms to the Specifications.
302-4.10 Measurement.
302-4.10.1 General. The Contractor shall submit a written plan covering the intended method of
delivery, storage and measurement of materials.
Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall submit licensed weighmaster’s certificates for
materials delivered to the Work site but not incorporated into the Work. Measurement for payment will
be determined by deducting the remaining weight of materials from the weight of materials delivered.
302-4.10.2 Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry Seal Surfacing. Emulsion-aggregate slurry seal surfacing
will be measured by the combined weight of each ton (tonne) of emulsified asphalt and each ton (tonne)
of each Type of aggregate used in the Work.
The basis of measurement shall be the combined weight of dry aggregate, excluding mineral filler
and emulsified asphalt, in tons (tonnes), for each Type of aggregate used in the Work, as determined by
licensed weighmaster’s certificates. The weight of added water and set control agents used in the slurry
seal mixture will not be included in the weight measured for payment. No deduction will be made for
water in the aggregate and emulsified asphalt.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 327

The Contractor shall submit licensed weighmaster tickets for each load of dry aggregate and
emulsified asphalt delivered to the stockpile site or directly to each mixer-spreader machine prior to the
end of each Working Day.
302-4.10.3 Rubberized Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry Seal Surfacing. REAS will be measured by
each ton (tonne), including aggregate, RPME, additives and water for each Type of aggregate used in
the Work.
The basis of measurement shall be the weight of REAS, for each Type of aggregate used in the
Work, as determined by licensed weighmaster’s certificates.
The Contractor shall submit licensed weighmaster tickets for each load of REAS transported to the
Work site prior to the end of each Working Day.
302-4.11 Payment.
302-4.11.1 Payment Reduction for Noncompliance.
302-[Link] General. Payment to the Contractor will be reduced for failure of the field test
samples to conform to the WTAT requirements specified in 302-4.9.1.
302-[Link] Reduction in Payment Based on WTAT. If the average of all WTATs performed per
mixer, per day, fails to conform to the requirements specified in 302-4.9.1, the Contractor agrees that
payment for the Work represented by the failed tests shall be reduced as shown in Table 302-[Link]
(A) or (B).

TABLE 302-[Link] (A)

2 2 Payment Reduction (Percent)
WTAT Loss gm/ft (gm/m )
Type Fine & I Aggregate
0 – 50 (0 – 540) 0
50.1 – 60 (540.1 – 650) 5
60.1 – 70 (650.1 – 750) 15
70.1 – 80 (750.1 – 860) 30
80.1 – 99 (860.1 – 1070) 70
1
99.1 or greater (1070.1 or greater ) 100
2 2
1. Slurry seal surfacing with WTAT loss greater than 99.1 gm/m (1070.1 gm/ft ) shall be removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

TABLE 302-[Link] (B)

2 2 Payment Reduction (Percent)
WTAT Loss gm/ft (gm/m )
Type II and III Aggregate
0 – 60 (0 – 540) 0
60.1 – 75 (650.1 – 810) 15
75.1 – 80 (810.1 – 860) 30
80.1 – 99 (860.1 – 1070) 70
1
99.1 or greater (1070.1 or greater ) 100
1. Slurry seal surfacing with WTAT loss greater than 99.1 gm/m2 (1070.1 gm/ft2) shall be removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
328 Greenbook 2021

302-4.11.2 Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry Seal Surfacing. Payment for emulsion-aggregate slurry seal
surfacing will be made at the Contract Unit Price per ton (tonne) for each combination of EAS and aggregate
Type used in the Work.
No separate or additional payment will be made for calibration, scheduling, public convenience, or traffic
control unless otherwise specified.
302-4.11.3 Rubberized Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry Seal Surfacing. Payment for rubberized
emulsion-aggregate slurry seal surfacing will be made at the Contract Unit Price per ton (tonne) for
each combination of REAS and aggregate Type used in the Work.
No separate or additional payment will be made for calibration, scheduling, public convenience,
or traffic control unless otherwise specified.
302-5 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT.
302-5.1 General. Asphalt concrete pavement shall consist of one or more courses of a mixture
of paving asphalt and graded aggregate as specified in 203-6, placed upon a prepared roadbed or
base, or over existing pavement. The courses shall be of the mixture class and grade and the
dimensions shown on the Plans.
302-5.2 NOT USED.
302-5.3 Prime Coat. When specified, a prime coat consisting of Grade SC-250 liquid asphalt shall
be applied at a rate between 0.10 and 0.25 gallon per square yard (0.45 L/m2 and 1.15 L/m2). Grade SC-
70 liquid asphalt may be used when approved by the Engineer.
302-5.4 Tack Coat. If the asphalt concrete pavement is being constructed directly upon an existing
hard-surfaced pavement, a tack coat of PG 64-10 paving asphalt at an approximate rate of 0.05 gallon
per square yard (0.25 L/m2) or SS-1h emulsified asphalt at an approximate rate of 0.05 to 0.10 gallon per
square yard (0.25 L/m2 to 0.45 L/m2) shall be uniformly applied upon the existing pavement preceding
the placement of the asphalt concrete. The surface shall be free of water, foreign material, or dust when
the tack coat is applied. To minimize public inconvenience, no greater area shall be treated in any one
day than is planned to be covered by asphalt concrete during the same day, unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer.
A similar tack coat shall be applied to the surface of any course, if the surface is such that a
satisfactory bond cannot be obtained between it and a succeeding course.
The contact surfaces of all cold pavement joints, curbs, gutters, manholes, and the like shall be
painted with either SS-1h emulsified asphalt or PG 64-10 paving asphalt immediately before the
adjoining asphalt concrete is placed.
302-5.5 Distribution and Spreading. The Contractor shall provide and install a header upon the
line of termination of asphalt pavement where shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Such headers shall remain in place upon completion of the improvements.
Headers shall be 2-inch (50 mm) nominal size lumber, the vertical dimension of which shall be
within 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) of the thickness of the pavement at the header line. The minimum vertical
dimension of a header shall be 3-1/2 inches (88 mm). The headers shall have a firm bearing on the
header subgrade and the top edges shall be set to conform to the grade of the proposed street surface.
Side stakes 2 inches by 3 inches (50 mm x 75 mm) nominal size, 18 inches (450 mm) long, or longer,
and spaced not over 4 feet (1.2 m) apart, shall be driven on the outside of the headers to a depth of 1 inch
(25 mm) below the top edge and then nailed to the header. The joints between the individual boards
being used as headers shall be spliced with a 1 inch (25 mm) thick nominal size board of the same height
as the header and not less than 24 inches (600 mm) long.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 329

The temperature of the mixture directly behind the paving machine, before the breakdown roller,
shall not be lower than 270°F (132°C) or higher than 320°F (160°C), the lower limit to be approached in
warm weather and the higher in cold weather.
Asphalt concrete shall not be placed unless the atmospheric temperature is at least 50°F (10°C) and
rising or during unsuitable weather.
The asphalt concrete shall be evenly spread upon the subgrade or base to such a depth that, after
rolling, it will be of the specified cross section and grade of the course being constructed.
The depositing, distributing, and spreading of the asphalt concrete shall be accomplished in a single,
continuous operation by means of a self-propelled mechanical spreading and finishing machine designed
specially for that purpose. The machine shall be equipped with a full-width compacting screed capable
of being accurately regulated and adjusted to distribute a layer of the material to a definite predetermined
thickness. When paving is of a size or in a location that use of a self-propelled machine is impractical
the Engineer may waive the self-propelled requirements.
The asphalt concrete as delivered shall be deposited directly into the hopper of the spreading and
finishing machine. With the approval of the Engineer, the Contractor may deposit the asphalt concrete
material from bottom-dump trucks into a uniformly sized windrow, then pick up the material and convey
it to the spreading machine with loading equipment provided:
a) The spreading machine shall be of such design that the material will fall into a hopper, having a
movable bottom conveyor or screw to feed the screed.
b) The loader (pickup machine) shall be constructed and operated so that substantially all of the
material deposited on the roadbed is picked up and deposited in the spreading machine.
c) The windrow may be deposited no more than two truck loads ahead of the pickup machine and
the temperature of the material in the windrow shall not fall below 270ºF (132ºC).
d) Allowable windrow lengths may be increased if approved by the Engineer, but the windrow shall
not block intersections prior to the arrival of the paving machine.
e) A skip loader shall be on site to remove any windrowed material not meeting temperature
requirement or which will overload the paving machine hopper.
Asphalt concrete of the class indicated in the following table shall be laid in courses not exceeding 4
inches (100 mm) in thickness unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

TABLE 302-5.5
Specified Total Thickness of Pavement
Greater Than But Not More Than Minimum Number
inches (mm) inches (mm) of Courses Class of Mixture
0 1 (25) 1 D1 or D2
1 (25) 1-1/2 (38) 1 C1, C2, D1 or D2
1-1/2 (38) 3 (75) 1 C1, C2, B or A (as directed)
3 (75) 4 (100) 1 B or A (as directed)
4 (100) 5 (125) 2 C1, C2, B or A (as directed)
5 (125) — 2 or as directed C1, C2, B or A (as directed)

Spreading, once commenced, must be continued without interruption. No greater amount of the
mixture shall be delivered in any one day than can be properly distributed and rolled during that day.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
330 Greenbook 2021

Successive courses may be laid upon previously laid courses as soon as the previous course has
cooled sufficiently to show no displacement under equipment or loaded material delivery trucks.
The asphalt concrete surface of an alley shall be warped up to meet paved driveways which are 6
inches (150 mm) or less above grade. Such warping shall not extend more than 18 inches (450 mm) into
the alley and shall be accomplished by thickening the pavement.
302-5.6 Rolling.
302-5.6.1 General. Asphalt concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling. The number of
rollers used with each paving operation shall not be less than specified below. Each roller shall have a
separate operator.

TABLE 302-5.6.1
1
Rollers Required
Tons (Tonnes) Placed per Hour Compacted Thickness
1-1/2" (38 mm) or less More than 1-1/2" (38 mm)
Less than 100 (90) 1 1
100 to 200 (90 to 180) 2 2
201 to 300 (181 to 270) 3 2
300 (More than 270) 3 3
1. Additional rollers may be necessary to meet the requirements herein.

Self-propelled compacting rollers shall meet the following criteria:

a) Each roller manufactured after 1998 shall have a Manufacturer’s identification plate that is
readily accessible and readable with the following information:
1) Name of Manufacturer.
2) Model Number.
3) Static pounds per lineal inch (PLI) (newton per millimeter (N/mm)) of each drum.
4) Static PLI (N/mm) of ballasted drum.
5) PLI (N/mm) of each drum in vibratory mode.
Contractors using rollers manufactured prior to 1999 shall have the manufacturer’s
specifications, providing the information requested above, available to the Engineer upon
request. Any roller not having this information shall not be used and shall be removed from the
Work site.
b) Tandem rollers in the static mode used for breakdown or intermediate rolling shall be such that
the ballasted or unballasted weight on at least one drum is a minimum 250 PLI (44 N/mm).
c) Vibratory rollers used for breakdown or intermediate rolling shall have a compactive effort of not
less than 250 PLI (44 N/mm) of centrifugal force at the setting indicated by the manufacturer’s
ID plate.
d) Finish rolling shall be performed by static or vibratory steel rollers in static mode
e) Pneumatic-tired rollers used for intermediate rolling shall be the oscillating type having a width
of not less than 4 feet (1.2 m) and equipped with pneumatic-tires of equal size and diameter,
having treads satisfactory to the Engineer. Wobble-wheel rollers will not be permitted. The tires
shall be so spaced that the gap between adjacent tires will be covered by the tread of the
following tire. The tires shall be inflated to 90 pounds per square inch (620 kPa) or such lower

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 331

pressure as designated by the Engineer, and maintained so that the air pressure will vary not more
5 pounds per square inch (35 kPa) from the designated pressure. Pneumatic-tired rollers shall be
so constructed that the total mass of the roller can be varied to produce an operating mass per tire
of not less than 2,000 pounds (900 kg). The total operating mass of the roller shall be varied as
directed by the Engineer.
For areas to be paved that are not to be subjected to vehicular traffic and when the asphalt is placed
in these areas at a rate less than 100 tons (90 tonnes) per hour the roller shall have a minimum
compactive force of 150 PLI (26 N/mm).
Other rollers may be used subject to prior approval by the Engineer.
As soon as the layer of asphalt concrete has been placed the breakdown rolling shall commence. The
layer of asphalt shall have an internal temperature greater than 260ºF (126ºC) and not displace under the
roller. Except when compacting lifts greater than 4 inches (100 mm) in compacted thickness, rolling
shall be commenced along the lower edge of the area to be rolled and continued until the edge is
thoroughly compacted, after which the roller shall be gradually advanced to the crown point, both sides
being rolled in like manner. When vibratory rollers are used, they shall be operated at the highest
frequency possible without breaking rock. All breakdown and intermediate rolling shall be completed
prior to the surface of the mat reaching 180ºF (82ºC). Rolling shall be continued until the pavement
layer has become thoroughly compacted throughout and is true to grade and cross section. The finish
rolling shall remove all marks from the surface of the mat.
For lifts greater than 4 inches (100 mm) in compacted thickness, rolling shall be commenced in the
middle of the mat, after which the roller shall be gradually advanced to both edges. The roller should be
advanced to a supported edge first, if applicable. Rolling of an unsupported edge may be delayed
provided the required densities are obtained after the completion of the finishing rolling.
All rollers must be maintained in good mechanical condition. Those that cannot be driven along a
straight path, operated without jerking, or the amplitude or frequency cannot be adjusted shall not be
used and shall be removed from the Work site. No leakage of petroleum products from any roller shall
be allowed to come in contact with pavement being constructed, nor shall any roller be permitted to
stand motionless on any portion of the work. The surfaces of all roller wheels shall be treated with
sufficient water to prevent the pickup of bituminous materials, but under no circumstances shall the
quantity of water used be detrimental to the surface of the pavement being rolled.
302-5.6.2 Density and Smoothness. Asphalt concrete pavement shall be true to grade and cross
section. When a 10-foot (3 m) straightedge is laid on the finished surface parallel to the centerline of the
roadway, the finished surface shall not vary from the edge of the straightedge more than 1/8 inch (3
mm), except at intersections or at changes of grade. Any areas that are not within this tolerance shall be
brought to grade immediately following the initial rolling. If the paving material has cooled below the
lower limits of the spreading temperatures prescribed in 302-5.5 or 302-9.4, the surface of the pavement
shall be brought to a true grade cross section. The paving material in the area to be repaired shall be
removed, by cold milling, to provide a minimum laying depth of 1 inch (25 mm), or 2 times the
maximum aggregate size, whichever is greater, of the new pavement at the join line. Repairs shall not be
made to the pavement surface by tapering the thickness at the join lines.
The compaction after rolling shall be a minimum of 95 percent of the density obtained on samples
compacted with the California Kneading Compactor per California Test 304. The density shall be
determined in accordance with California Test 308, Method A. Method C may be used if the absorption
of the compacted specimen is less than 2 percent.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
332 Greenbook 2021

The field density of compacted asphalt concrete shall be determined by:

a) A properly calibrated nuclear asphalt testing device in the field, or
b) California Test 308, Method A when slabs or cores are taken for laboratory testing.
In case of dispute, method b) (above) shall be used.
Paved areas not to be subject to vehicular traffic shall be compacted to 90 percent of the density
determined as specified above.
302-5.7 Joints. Joints between successive runs shall be vertical and at right angles to the line of the
improvement. Care shall be exercised in connection with the construction of all joints to ensure that the
surface of the pavement is true to grade and cross section. Lapped joints will not be permitted.
When terminating paving operations for the day, the Contractor shall construct temporary hot-mix
ramps at all vertical joints which are greater than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in height and transverse to
through traffic. Temporary hot-mix ramp dimensions and compaction shall be approved by the
Engineer. Prior to resuming paving operations, the Contractor shall remove temporary hot-mix ramps to
provide for a vertical face and a full depth lift joint and apply a tack coat to the faces of the joint in
accordance with 302-5.4.
302-5.8 NOT USED.
302-5.9 Measurement and Payment. Asphalt concrete pavement will be paid for at the Contract
Unit Price per square foot (m2), or at the Contract Unit Price per ton (tonne) as shown in the Bid. Such
price shall constitute full compensation for the preparation of subgrade and applying tack coat if
required. Resetting, reconstructing, or adjusting manhole or vault frames and covers to grade will be
paid for as provided in 301-1.7.
The asphalt concrete Bid item which utilizes the latex modifier shall be identified as latex modified
asphalt concrete or asphalt concrete with latex. The Contract Unit Price paid for latex modified asphalt
concrete or asphalt concrete with latex shall include all costs for furnishing, mixing, and placement.
When payment is to be made on a tonnage basis, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer at the
time of delivery of the material to the Work site a legible copy of a licensed weighmaster’s certificate
showing gross, tare, and net weights of each truckload of asphalt concrete mixture. When an automatic
batching system is used, the licensed weighmaster’s certificate may show only the net weight of material
in the truck load. Failure of the Contractor to provide a certificate to the Engineer by the end of the day
on which the material represented by such certificate is delivered to the Work site may, at the discretion
of the Engineer, result in the forfeiture of all payment for such material, including any labor and
equipment costs included in the price for furnishing and placing the asphalt concrete.
Payment for installing headers, where required, will be made at the Contract Unit Price per linear
foot (m) for headers.
302-6 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT.
302-6.1 General. Unless otherwise specified, Portland cement concrete pavement shall be
constructed of concrete prepared as prescribed in 201-1.
Concrete pavement shall be removed in accordance with 300-1.3.
302-6.2 Forms and Headers.
302-6.2.1 General. Forms and headers shall be either wood or metal. They shall be set plumb and
true to line and grade, with the upper edge thereof set to the grade of the pavement to be constructed; and
shall be rigidly installed on a true alignment and so maintained for a distance in advance of placing the
pavement to provide for at least a 1 Day run of concrete. Headers shall rest firmly on the subgrade or

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 333

base. They shall be oiled immediately prior to the placing of the concrete and shall remain in place for at
least 12 hours after concrete has been placed. Forms and headers must be removed before the work will
be accepted.
302-6.2.2 Wooden Forms. Wooden forms shall be constructed of 3-inch (75 mm) nominal lumber
in pieces not less than 16 feet (4.9 m) long, except where changes in alignment or grade necessitate the
use of material of smaller dimensions. The lumber used shall be free from warp and other imperfections
which would impair the strength for the use intended; shall have square edges (which may be slightly
beveled) and square ends; shall be surfaced on the upper edge; and shall be not more than 1/2 inch (12.5
mm) less in depth than the specified thickness of the edge of the pavement.
Such forms shall be secured by nailing to side stakes spaced not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) apart and
driven into the subgrade vertically to a depth not less than 12 inches (300 mm), and so that the tops will
be below the upper edge of the header. The stakes shall be of sufficient length and cross-sectional area
to adequately resist lateral displacement of the headers during the paving operations.
Wooden headers shall be spliced by nailing a board to the outside of the headers. The board shall be
at least 4 feet (1.2 m) long, 1 inch (25 mm) thick, and at least 6 inches (150 mm) wide (or the depth of
the header, whichever is least), and shall be centered on the joint.
302-6.2.3 Metal Forms. Metal forms shall be free from warp, have sufficient rigidity to resist
springing during the paving operations, and shall be not less in depth than the specified thickness of the
edge of the pavement being constructed. They shall be secured by means of metal stakes spaced not
more than 5 feet (1.5 m) apart and driven below the top of the forms. They shall be designed so as to be
driven through openings in the forms to lock them in position.
302-6.3 Placing Concrete.
302-6.3.1 General. Concrete shall be placed on a subgrade sufficiently dampened to ensure that no
moisture will be absorbed from the fresh concrete.
Immediately after being mixed, the concrete shall be deposited on the subgrade to the required depth
over the entire width of the section.
At the end of each day’s run, or at any time when operations are stopped for a period of more than 40
minutes, a rigid transverse header shall be placed vertically and at a right angle across the improvement
at the location designated by the Engineer and the pavement shall be finished to form a square vertical
joint against which the work may be resumed. Hand mixing may be used only if necessary to provide
sufficient concrete to complete paving to the expedient header.
302-6.3.2 Slip-Form Construction. At the option of the Contractor, and with the approval of the
Engineer, concrete pavement may be constructed by the use of slip-form paving equipment.
Slip-form paving equipment shall be provided with traveling side forms of sufficient dimensions,
shape, and strength to support the concrete laterally for a sufficient length of time during placement to
produce pavement of the required cross section, and it shall spread, consolidate, screed, and float-finish
the freshly placed concrete to provide a dense and homogeneous pavement.
The concrete shall be distributed uniformly into final position by the slip-form paver and the
horizontal deviation in alignment of the edges shall not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) from the alignment
established by the Engineer.
The concrete, for the full paving width, shall be effectively consolidated by internal vibration, with
transverse vibrating units, or with a series of longitudinal vibrating units. Internal vibration shall mean
vibration by means of vibrating units loaded within the specified thickness of pavement section and at a
minimum distance ahead of the screed equal to the pavement thickness.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
334 Greenbook 2021

When concrete is being placed adjacent to an existing pavement, that part of the equipment which is
supported on the existing pavement shall be equipped with protective pads on crawler tracks or rubber-
tired wheels, offset to run a sufficient distance from the edge of the pavement to avoid breaking or
cracking the pavement edge.
After the concrete has been given a preliminary finish by finishing devices incorporated in the slip-
form paving equipment, the surface of the fresh concrete shall be checked by the Contractor with a
straightedge to the tolerances and finish required in 302-6.4.
Final finishing for slip-form pavement construction shall be as specified in 302-6.4.4.
302-6.4 Finishing.
302-6.4.1 General. The concrete shall be consolidated, and the surface finished true to grade and
cross section. Upon completion, the surface shall be free of any unevenness greater than 1/8 inch (3
mm) when checked with a 10-foot (3 m) straightedge placed on the surface of the pavement. The 10-
foot (3 m) straightedge shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be at the Work site prior to the
commencing of the placing of the concrete.
302-6.4.2 Tamping. The concrete shall be distributed uniformly between the side forms as soon as
it is placed, after which the concrete shall be struck off and tamped by means of a mechanical tamper.
The tamper shall be operated at right angles to the centerline of the pavement, and tamping continued
until the concrete is thoroughly consolidated to the specified cross section and sufficient mortar for
finishing purposes has been brought to the surface.
Steel-shod hand tampers or vibrating bars may be substituted in those cases where the use of a
mechanical spreader and tamper would be obviously impracticable.
Approved concrete vibrating equipment shall be used in conjunction with the mechanical tamper to
consolidate the concrete adjacent to the forms or existing pavement.
302-6.4.3 Floating.
a) General. After tamping, the surface of the concrete shall be floated by either the finishing-
machine method or the transverse-float method described below. Bridge decks may be floated by
the longitudinal-float method.
b) Finishing-Machine Method. The concrete shall be floated smooth and true to grade with an
approved finishing machine.
c) Transverse-Float Method. The concrete shall be floated at least twice with a long-handled float
at least 5 feet (1.5 m) wide, following which the surface of the concrete shall be finished smooth
and true to grade, with a wooden float 16 feet (4.9 m) long, 2 inches (50 mm) thick, and 6 inches
(150 mm) wide. It shall be rigidly ribbed and with adjustable screws between the rib and float
board to ensure a true and flat surface on the under side at all times. The float shall be operated
from the side of the pavement, and parallel with the centerline.
The edge of the float shall be used to cut down all high areas, and the material so removed shall
be floated into the depression until a true surface is obtained. Each successive pass of the float
shall half-lap the previous pass.
The float shall be operated as far behind the tamping machine as the workability of the concrete
will permit before its initial set.
d) Longitudinal-Float Method. The concrete shall first be floated with a double-handled
longitudinal float not less than 16 feet (4.9 m) nor more than 20 feet (6.1 m) in length, having a
troweling surface not less than 8 inches (200 mm) nor more than 10 inches (255 mm) wide.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 335

The float shall be operated from bridges over the pavement with its length parallel to the
centerline of the improvement, and shall be worked back and forth transversely across the slab,
planing off high spots and filling depressions.
This operation shall be continued until the surface is reasonably smooth, after which the
bridges may be advanced not to exceed 2/3 the length of the surface so floated, and the
operation continued.
302-6.4.4 Final Finishing. After being finished by one of the above methods, the outside edges of
pavement shall be rounded to a 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) radius; and transverse contact joints, expansion
joints, and joints adjacent to an existing pavement shall be rounded to a 1/4 inch (6 mm) radius.
A strip of wetted burlap shall be provided, of a length not less than the width of the pavement slab.
It shall be attached by one edge to a rigid frame supported over the pavement so that the free edge of the
burlap will rest or drag on the surface of the concrete. The burlap shall be dragged back and forth
longitudinally along the pavement until the surface of the slab is of uniform texture and appearance
throughout its entire length.
302-6.5 Joints.
302-6.5.1 General. Joints in concrete pavement will be designated as longitudinal and transverse
construction joints, transverse expansion joints, and longitudinal and transverse weakened-plane joints.
Unless otherwise specified, transverse joints shall be constructed perpendicularly to the centerline of
the pavement, longitudinal joints shall be constructed parallel to the centerline of the pavement, and the
faces of all joints shall be perpendicular to the finished surface of the pavement.
Joint filler, when required, shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
302-6.5.2 Construction Joints. Construction joints are those made by placing fresh concrete against
hardened concrete at planned locations. They shall be constructed at the locations and in the manner
shown on the Plans.
Longitudinal construction joints shall be constructed by one of the following methods:
a) A plain face,
b) Use of tie bars,
c) Construction of keyways.
The bars or keyways shall be as shown on the Plans.
302-6.5.3 Transverse Expansion Joints. Transverse expansion joints shall be constructed at the
locations shown on the Plans. Expansion joint filler material shall have a minimum thickness of 1/2
inch (12.5 mm), a maximum thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm), a depth equal to the thickness of the
pavement, and shall be composed of materials as specified or approved by the Engineer. After the
concrete has been finished, an edger of 1/4 inch (6 mm) radius shall be used on each side of the
expansion joint filler. The expansion joint filler shall be cleaned of all concrete mortar.
302-6.5.4 Weakened-Plane Joints. Weakened-plane joints shall be constructed at the locations
shown on the Plans and shall be formed by cutting a groove in the pavement with a power-driven saw.
The groove for a transverse joint shall be cut to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or 1/6 of the
pavement thickness, whichever is greater; the groove for a longitudinal joint shall be cut to a minimum
depth of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or 1/4 of the pavement thickness, whichever is greater; and the width
shall be the minimum width possible with the saw being used, but in no case shall the width exceed 1/4
inch (6 mm). Any portion of the sealing compound which has been disturbed by sawing operations shall
be restored by spraying the areas with additional sealing compound.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
336 Greenbook 2021

In the initial lane of concrete, the first transverse weakened-plane joint immediately following a
transverse construction joint, and every fourth weakened-plane joint thereafter, shall be sawed within 10
to 24 hours after the concrete has been placed. The time lapse will be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. Every second transverse weakened-plane joint shall be sawed within 24 hours after the
concrete is placed, and the remaining weakened-plane joints may be sawed at such time as the
Contractor may elect; except that in any lane, all weakened-plane joints shall be sawed before concrete is
placed in succeeding adjacent lanes and before any traffic whatsoever is permitted to use the pavement.
In succeeding adjacent lanes of concrete pavement transverse weakened-plane joints opposite those
which have opened in the initial lane shall be sawed within 10 to 24 hours after the concrete has been
placed. The time lapse will be subject to the approval of the Engineer. In all cases, no more than three
consecutive, transverse, weakened-plane joints shall be bypassed.
Longitudinal weakened-plane joints may be used at traffic lane lines in multi-lane, monolithic
concrete pavement in lieu of longitudinal construction joints. Dowel requirements shall be as shown on
the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
302-6.6 Curing. The pavement shall be cured by a concrete curing compound conforming to the
requirements of 201-4.1.
Curing shall commence as soon as free water leaves the surface of the concrete, but not later than 3
hours following the deposit of the concrete upon the subgrade.
Spraying equipment shall be of the fully atomizing type, equipped with a tank agitator of an
approved type which provides for continual agitation of the compound during application. The use of
nonagitating-type, hand-pumped garden sprayers will not be permitted except for small and inaccessible
areas as may be permitted by the Engineer.
302-6.7 Traffic and Use Provisions. The concrete pavement shall be immediately barricaded upon
its installation, and no vehicular traffic will be permitted thereon until the expiration of at least 7 Days.
Pavement constructed of concrete which has been treated in accordance with 201-1 to obtain an early
increase in strength may be opened to traffic 3 Days after it is placed, if directed by the Engineer.
At least 3 Days shall elapse from the time the concrete is placed before any mechanical tamper,
spreader, or finisher which will be supported by the edge of the new pavement, may be operated in
adjacent lanes.
302-6.8 Measurement and Payment. Payment for concrete pavement will be made on a cubic yard
(m3) or square foot (m2) basis as shown on the Bid.
Payment for reconstructing or adjusting manholes to grade will be made as a separate item as
provided in 301-1.7. If no such item is provided, payment will be deemed included in the other items of
work.
302-7 PAVEMENT FABRIC.
302-7.1 General. Pavement fabric material shall conform to 213-4.
302-7.2 Placement.
302-7.2.1 General. The existing pavement surface shall be prepared as shown on the Plans or
specified in the Special Provisions prior to placement of the tack coat and pavement fabric. The entire
surface to be covered shall be free of water, foreign matter, vegetation, and dust before application of the
tack coat. The temperature of the underlying asphalt concrete shall not exceed 150ºF (66ºC) when the
fabric is placed.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 337

After placement, pavement fabric material shall be overlaid with asphalt concrete pavement or
covered with a chip seal. Pavement fabric shall not be placed in areas where the asphalt concrete overlay
is less than 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm) thick.
302-7.2.2 Tack Coat.
302-[Link] General. Tack coat shall be PG 64-10 or PG 70-10 paving asphalt as specified in the
Special Provisions. Tack coat shall be applied uniformly prior to placing fabric.
Tack coat shall be sprayed with a truck-mounted sprayer at the rate of 0.25 ± 0.02 gallon per square
yard (1.13 ± 0.09 L/m2). On a new asphalt concrete leveling course, the rate shall be 0.2 ± 0.02 gallon
per square yard (0.91 ± 0.09 L/m2). The application rate may be adjusted as directed by the Engineer.
Hand spraying shall be kept to a minimum.
The width of the sprayer application shall be no more than 6 inches (150 mm) and no less than 2
inches (50 mm) wider than the fabric width.
The temperature of the tack coat shall not exceed 325ºF (163ºC) when the fabric is placed.
302-[Link] Calibration of Truck-Mounted Sprayer Units. The Contractor shall calibrate each
sprayer unit used in the Work prior to the start of spreading the tack coat. Spreading shall not proceed
until the calibration has been accepted by the Engineer.
302-[Link] Testing Apparatus. Testing apparatus shall consist of the following:
a) Portable measuring scale accurate to within ± 2 grams.
b) Test units shall be a 12-inch x 12-inch (300 mm x 300 mm) square of 1/8 inch (3 mm) or 1/4
inch (6 mm) thick hardboard or plywood.
302-[Link] Calibration Procedure. The calibration procedure shall be as follows:
a) Pre-weigh hardboard or plywood square (minimum of 1, maximum of 3) and write the weight on
the underside. The number of test units to be used shall be determined by the Engineer.
b) Locate the truck mounted sprayer unit at the starting point of tack coat placement.
c) The operator sets the application to that rate specified in 302-[Link] or as specified in the
Special Provisions.
d) Place test units on the pavement directly in front of the truck mounted sprayer unit. If 1 unit is
used, place it in the center of the truck mounted sprayer unit. If 3 units are used, place 1 unit in
center of the sprayer unit and 1 unit outside of each wheel path.
e) Retrieve test units after the truck mounted sprayer unit has passed over them and re-weigh.
302-[Link] Calculation of the Application Rate. The application rate shall be calculated as follows:
a) Subtract the original weight, recorded on the underside of the test unit, from the weight of the test
unit including the tack coat.
b) The difference is the weight of the tack coat on the test unit.
c) Multiply by 9 to calculate the number of grams applied per square yard.
d) Divide the number of grams per square yard by 3861.03 grams per gallon at 60ºF.
e) The tack coat application rate shall be expressed in gallons per square yard.
f) Retest as necessary until the specified application rate is confirmed.
302-7.2.3 Laydown. If manual laydown methods are used, pavement fabric material shall be
unrolled, stretched, aligned, and placed in increments of approximately 15 feet (4 m).
Adjacent borders of the fabric material shall be lapped 2 to 4 inches (50 mm to 100 mm). The
preceding roll shall lap 2 to 4 inches (50 mm to 100 mm) over the following roll in the direction of

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
338 Greenbook 2021

paving at ends of rolls or at any break. If the lap exceeds 4 inches (100 mm), tack coat shall be placed to
bond the layers of fabric material together and both the tack coat and pavement fabric material shall lap
by the same amount.
Pavement fabric material shall be placed with the treated side up and shall be seated with brooms or
pneumatic rolling equipment after placing. Turning of the paving machine and other vehicles shall be
gradual and kept to a minimum to avoid damage.
Pavement fabric material shall not be placed more than 800 feet (180 m) in advance of paving
operations or chip sealing unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. No more pavement fabric
material shall be placed than can be covered that day.
If the pavement fabric material is placed within 50 feet (15 m) of the tack coat spray unit, the first 15
feet (4 m) of each roll shall be placed by hand, if directed by the Engineer, to allow inspection of the tack
coat application.
Pavement fabric material shall be placed with no wrinkles that lap. The test for lapping shall be
made as follows:
a) By gathering together the pavement fabric material in a wrinkle.
b) The two sides of the wrinkle shall be pressed together from pavement surface to a fold point
with equal amounts of pavement fabric material on both sides of the fold point down to the
pavement surface.
c) If the height of the doubled portion of extra pavement fabric material exceeds 1/2 inch (12.5
mm), the pavement fabric material shall be cleanly cut to remove the wrinkle.
d) The cut shall be made on the side of the wrinkle away from the paving operation.
e) The opposite or longer side shall be lapped over the shorter and the re-laid wrinkle area shall
be pressed and smoothed into place against the pavement surface.
f) Any lap in excess of 2 inches (50 mm) shall be cleanly cut away, and then overlapped in the
same manner as for smaller laps.
g) A minimum 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) overlap shall be provided in all cases when a wrinkle area is
re-laid.
Pavement fabric material shall not be reduced more than 2 inches (50 mm) on each side after being
placed on the tack coat. If the overall width is reduced more than 4 inches (100 mm), then the operation
shall be stopped and the temperature of the tack coat immediately prior to placement of the pavement
fabric material or the type of pavement fabric material shall be changed.
Care shall be taken to avoid tracking tack coat onto the pavement fabric material or distorting the
fabric during seating of the fabric material with rolling equipment. If necessary, exposed tack coat shall
be covered lightly with sand.
A small quantity of asphalt concrete, to be determined by the Engineer, may be spread over the fabric
material immediately in advance of placing asphalt concrete overlay in order to prevent pavement fabric
material from being picked up by construction equipment.
Public traffic shall not be allowed to drive over bare pavement fabric material. However, public
traffic may be allowed to cross the fabric material under traffic control. The Contractor may place a
small quantity of asphalt concrete over the fabric material to protect it from damage if so directed by the
Engineer.
302-7.3 Measurement. Pavement fabric material will be measured by the square yard (m2) for the
actual pavement area covered.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 339

302-7.4 Payment. Payment for pavement fabric shall be made at the Contract Unit Price per
square yard (m2). The Contract Unit Price for pavement fabric shall include cleaning of the existing
pavement, tack coat, calibration of the truck mounted sprayer unit, and furnishing and placing
pavement fabric material.
Payment for advance spreading of asphalt concrete over the fabric shall be considered as included in
the Contract Unit Price for asphalt concrete.
302-8 SEALCOAT FOR MISCELLANEOUS AREAS.
302-8.1 Materials. The materials for sealcoat shall conform to 203-9. Before incorporation in the
Work, the Contractor shall submit a 2-quart (2 L) sample of undiluted sealcoat at no cost to the Agency
per Section 4.
302-8.2 Application.
302-8.2.1 General. The work shall consist of spreading sealcoat material on the pavement where
shown on the Plans. The sealcoat material shall be applied in 2 applications. Unless otherwise
specified, the total quantity applied shall be 50 gallons per 1,000 square feet (2 L/m2).
Sealcoat material shall be diluted as directed by the Engineer using clean, potable water in an amount
not to exceed 20 percent of the total volume.
A tack coat, if required by Contract Documents, shall consist of 3 parts clean, potable water and one
part SS-1h emulsion and shall be applied at the rate of 0.05 gallon per square yard (0.25 L/m2).
Sealcoat material shall not be placed over new asphalt pavement until the pavement has cured for 30
days or as required by the Engineer.
302-8.2.2 Spreading. Sealcoat shall only be applied when the atmospheric temperature is greater
than 55°F (13°C) and if rain is not forecast for the period of 24 hours after application.
Prior to applying sealcoat material, all cracked and broken pavement shall be removed and patched
in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Cracks wider than 1/8 inch (3 mm) shall be cleaned,
treated with weed killer, and filled with an asphalt-based crack filler specified by the Engineer. The
pavement surface shall be clean and free from dirt, oil, and grease deposits.
When ambient temperatures are over 80°F (27°C) or the pavement is excessively aged or porous, the
surface shall be sprayed with a mist of water in an amount that will leave the surface damp, but with no
visible puddles of water. This procedure is not required if a tack coat per 302-8.2.1 has been applied.
Sealcoat material shall be applied using a truck-mounted tank or wheeled container in continuous
parallel lines and spread by means of brooms or rubber-faced squeegees either by hand or machine and
in such a manner as to eliminate all ridges, lap marks, and air pockets. Raised pavement markers, valve
box covers, and manhole covers shall be protected and kept free of sealcoat material.
Sealcoat material shall be homogeneous prior to spreading, with no visible separation of solids
and liquids.
The second coat of sealcoat material shall not be applied until the first coat has dried to the touch.
The Contractor shall exercise care to prevent sealcoat material from being deposited on other than
specified surfaces and shall remove sealcoat material from surfaces not designated to be sealed, at no
cost to the Agency.
Traffic control shall be per 302-4.4.
302-8.3 Measurement and Payment. Sealcoat material shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price
per square yard (m2) or as shown in the Bid.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
340 Greenbook 2021

302-9 ASPHALT RUBBER HOT MIX (ARHM).

302-9.1 General. ARHM shall conform to 203-11.
302-9.2 Tack Coat. Tack coat shall conform to 302-5.4.
302-9.3 Distribution and Spreading. Distribution and spreading shall conform to 302-5.5 except
that at the time of delivery to the Work site, the temperature of the ARHM shall be between 300°F
(149°C) and 330°F (166°C). The atmospheric temperature shall be 50°F (10°C) and rising. When the
atmospheric temperature is above 85°F (29°C), the temperature of the ARHM at the time of delivery
to the Work site may be reduced to 290°F (143°C) if so approved by the Engineer.
302-9.4 Rolling. Rolling shall conform to 302-5.6 except that vibratory rollers using the vibratory
mode shall be used for initial breakdown rolling. The initial coverage of breakdown rolling shall
commence before the ARHM temperature falls below 290°F (143°C). If the atmospheric temperature
is above 85°F (29°C), the initial breakdown rolling temperature may be reduced to 280°F (138°C).
Pneumatic rollers shall not be used. If the initial breakdown rolling temperature is reduced, the
Contractor shall not be relieved of the density requirements.
302-9.5 Joints. Joints shall conform to 302-5.7.
302-9.6 Manholes (and Other Structures). Manhole and other structures shall conform to 403-3.
302-9.7 Rock Dust Blotter. At the option of the Engineer, when traffic conditions warrant, a rock
dust blotter may be required to avoid tracking. Rock dust blotter shall conform to 200-1.2 and be
uniformly applied using a mechanical spreader at a rate of 2 pounds per square foot (1.1 kg/m2) to 4
pounds per square foot (2.2 kg/m2). When the ARHM pavement has cooled to below 150°F (66°C), the
rock dust blotter may not be required.
302-9.8 Measurement. ARHM will be measured by the ton (tonne) or by the square foot (m2).
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer at the time of delivery to the Work site, a legible copy of
a licensed weighmaster certificate showing gross, tare, and net weights of each truckload of ARHM.
When an automatic batching system is used, the certificate may show only the net weight of ARHM in
the truckload.
302-9.9 Payment. Payment for ARHM will be made at Contract Unit Price per ton (tonne) or
square foot (m2). No separate payment for tack coat, rock dust blotter, or sweeping will be made.
Failure of the Contractor to provide a licensed weighmaster certificate to the Engineer by the end of
the day on which the ARHM represented by such certificate was delivered to the Work site may, at the
discretion of the Engineer, result in forfeiture of payment.
302-10 ASPHALT RUBBER AND AGGREGATE MEMBRANE (ARAM).
302-10.1 Application. Asphalt rubber binder shall conform to 203-12.2. Asphalt rubber binder
shall be placed upon a clean dry surface. The pavement surface temperature shall be a minimum of 55°F
(13°C) including shaded areas; the atmospheric temperature shall be a minimum of 60°F (16°C) ; the
wind shall not adversely affect spray distribution; and all necessary equipment shall be in position and
ready to commence placement operations prior to starting the work. The Contractor shall take
temperature readings with a temperature measuring device approved by the Engineer.
Asphalt rubber binder shall be applied by distributor equipment meeting the requirements of the
following:
a) Distributor trucks shall meet the requirements for distributing equipment of 203-2.5 and be
equipped with an internal heating device capable of evenly heating the material to a temperature
of 425°F (218°C).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 341

b) The distributor shall have a platform on the rear of the vehicle and an observer shall accompany
the distributor.
c) The observer shall ride in a position so that all spray bar tips are in full view and readily
accessible for unplugging if a plugged tip should occur.
d) Material shall be applied at a rate between 0.55 to 0.65 gallons per square yard (2.5 to 3.0 L/m2)
as directed by the Engineer.
e) Material spreading shall not be in excess of that which can be covered with aggregate within 15
minutes maximum.
f) At the time of delivery to the Work site, the temperature of the asphalt rubber shall be 300°F
(149°C) minimum.
The asphalt rubber binder may be applied to the roadway immediately following mixing and reacting
at a temperature between 375°F (191°C) minimum to 425°F (218°C) maximum. However, if the binder
is not to be used within 6 hours of mixing, the binder shall be allowed to cool below 300°F (149°C) for
12 hours maximum, or to ambient temperature for longer periods, and shall be uniformly reheated to a
temperature between 375°F (149°C) minimum to 425°F (218°C) maximum at time of placement and
conform to the viscosity requirements.
When joining edges against areas with cover aggregate, the joint shall be swept clean of
excess aggregate prior to the adjacent application of asphalt rubber material. Transverse joints of
this type shall be constructed by placing building paper across and over the end of the previous
asphalt rubber binder application. Once the spraying has progressed beyond the paper, the paper
shall be removed immediately.
Joints between areas of asphalt rubber binder without cover aggregate shall be made by overlapping
asphalt rubber distributions. The excess material shall be dispersed by spreading with a squeegee or rake
over a larger area of freshly applied asphalt rubber. The longitudinal joint between adjacent applications
of screenings shall coincide with the line between designated traffic lines. All longitudinal joints shall
be overlapped for complete coverage. The overlap shall not exceed 4 inches (100 mm). At longitudinal
joints, the edge shall be broomed back and blended so there are no gaps and the elevations are the same,
free from ridges and depressions.
The application of asphalt rubber binder to areas not accessible with the distributor bar on the truck
shall be accomplished by using pressurized hand wands or other means approved by the Engineer.
Application of asphalt rubber binder shall be discontinued sufficiently early in the workday to permit
completion of initial sweeping prior to the termination of traffic control.
302-10.2 Screenings. Following the application of asphalt rubber binder, screenings conforming
to 200-[Link] shall be placed over all areas receiving asphalt rubber. Screenings shall be applied
(within a maximum of 15 minutes) at a temperature between 260°F (127°C) minimum to 325°F (163°C)
maximum at a rate of 28 to 40 pounds per square yard (15 to 22 kg/m2) as directed by the Engineer.
Stockpiling of screenings after preheating and precoating with paving asphalt will not be permitted.
The Contractor shall prevent any vehicle, including construction equipment, from driving on the
uncovered asphalt rubber. Screenings shall be placed with a self-propelled aggregate-spreading machine
that can be adjusted to accurately spread the specified amounts per square yard (m2). Trucks for hauling
screening material shall conform to 302-2.3.
Initial rolling shall commence within 90 seconds following the placement of screenings. Rolling
shall be accomplished by 3 self-propelled, pneumatic-tired rollers meeting the requirements of 302-5.6.1
except that the tires shall be inflated to 100 pounds per square inch (690 kPa). The operating weight of

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
342 Greenbook 2021

each roller shall be a minimum of 16,000 pounds (7200 kg). If in the opinion of the Engineer, complete
coverage may be provided by 2 rollers in one pass, then 2 pneumatic-tired rollers will be sufficient. The
initial rolling equipment shall maintain a distance of not more than 200 feet (60 m) behind the cover-
aggregate spreader on the first pass. There shall be at least 4 complete coverages (single pass in one
direction) by the pneumatic-tired rollers before final roller coverage. A steel-drum roller weighing 8
tons (7.2 tonnes) minimum to 10 tons (9.1 tonnes) maximum shall complete the final roller coverage.
Sweeping shall be a multi-step operation following final rolling of the aggregate. A power broom
shall be used to remove loose material without dislodging aggregate set in the asphalt rubber. The initial
sweeping shall be a light brooming on the same day as ARAM placement. The ARAM shall be
maintained free of loose screenings for a minimum of 5 Working Days following placement. During
this period, the surface shall be swept as necessary to remove any loose cover material as directed by the
Engineer. Final sweeping shall be done and all loose aggregate shall be removed prior to acceptance.
The sweeping operations shall be accomplished without the use of gutter brooms or steel-tined brooms.
Immediately upon opening the street to traffic, the Contractor shall start removing loose aggregate
from parkways, sidewalks, and intersecting streets. Both operations shall continue until all excess or
loose aggregate is removed from the roadway surface and abutting adjacent areas.
At the option of the Engineer, rock dust blotter material shall be applied immediately after the initial
pass of the rollers or after sweeping, but prior to opening to traffic, to prevent bleeding and pickup of the
asphalt rubber material. Rock dust blotter conforming to 200-1.2 shall be uniformly applied using a
mechanical spreader at a rate of 2 pounds per square yard (1.1 kg/m2) minimum to 4 pounds per square
yard (2.2 kg/m2) maximum. If the ARAM is to be used as a finished surface, a flush coat shall be used.
The Contractor shall protect all existing manhole, valve, survey monument, and other miscellaneous
frames and covers. The Contractor shall cooperate with the owners of any frames and covers and shall
cover and completely protect them with heavy roofing paper or other suitable material. Petroleum-based
release agents shall not be used for this purpose.
302-10.3 Flush Coat. If required a flush coat shall be applied. This work shall consist of an
application of fog seal coat and rock dust blotter material to the surface of ARAM.
Flush coat shall be applied to the ARAM immediately after removal of excess screenings following
initial brooming of the ARAM and prior to opening the lane to uncontrolled public traffic, as directed by
the Engineer.
Asphaltic emulsion (fog seal coat) shall be applied to the surface of the ARAM and shall be grade
CSS1 or CSS1H, per 203-3, unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer.
The application rate of the fog seal coat (asphaltic emulsion and an equal amount of water) shall be
such that the diluted asphaltic emulsion will be spread at a rate of 0.06 gallons per square yard (0.27
L/m2) minimum to 0.12 gallons per square yard (0.54 L/m2) maximum. The exact rate of application
will be determined by the Engineer.
During fog seal coat operations the surface upon which an ARAM is being applied shall be closed to
public traffic. Care shall be taken to avoid tracking fog seal coat material onto existing pavement
surfaces beyond the limits of construction.
302-10.4 Public Convenience and Traffic Control. The Contractor shall prohibit traffic on the
street until the initial sweeping is complete. Prior to opening the streets to traffic, “Loose Gravel,” C6
signs, and appropriate speed-reduction signs conforming to local, State, and Federal regulations shall be
posted and maintained by the Contractor. These signs shall remain in place until there is no further
dislodging of the cover aggregate.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 343

302-10.5 Measurement and Payment. ARAM including asphalt rubber and cover aggregate will
be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per square yard (m2). Unless otherwise specified, such price shall
include full compensation for pavement preparation, furnishing and placing materials required, including
rock dust blotter, sweeping, and incidentals needed to complete the work in place.
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Unit Price for ARAM the full cost of applying rock dust
blotter to all areas of ARAM, as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall include in the Contract Unit Price for ARAM the full cost of applying a flush
coat (if required) to all areas of ARAM, as directed by the Engineer.
302-11 NOT USED.
302-12 TIRE RUBBER MODIFIED ASPHALT CONCRETE (TRMAC) PAVEMENT.
302-12.1 General. TRMAC shall conform to 203-14.
302-12.2 Tack Coat. Tack coat shall conform to 302-5.4.
302-12.3 Distribution and Spreading. Distribution and spreading shall conform to 302-9.3.
302-12.4 Rolling. Rolling shall conform to 302-9.4.
302-12.5 Joints. Joints shall conform to 302-5.7.
302-12.6 Manholes (and Other Structures). Manholes and other structures shall conform to 403-3.
302-12.7 Rock Dust Blotter. Rock dust blotter shall conform to 302-9.7.
302-12.8 Measurement. TRMAC pavement will be measured by the ton (tonne) or by the square
foot (m2).
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer at the time of delivery to the Work site, a legible copy of
a licensed weighmaster certificate showing gross, tare, and net weights of each truckload of TRMAC.
When an automatic batching system is used, the certificate may show only the net weight of TRMAC in
the truckload.
302-12.9 Payment. Payment for TRMAC will be made at the Contract Unit Price per ton (tonne) or
at the Contract Unit Price per square foot (m2). No separate payment will be made for tack coat, rock
dust blotter, or sweeping.
Failure of the Contractor to provide a licensed weighmaster certificate to the Engineer by the end of
the day on which the TRMAC represented by such certificate was delivered to the Work site may, at the
discretion of the Engineer, result in forfeiture of payment.
302-13 POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT.
302-13.1 General. Porous asphalt concrete shall conform to 203-15.
302-13.2 Distribution and Spreading. Distribution and spreading shall conform to 302-5.5, except
each successive course shall be laid upon previously laid courses as soon as the previous course has
cooled sufficiently to show no displacement under equipment or loaded material delivery trucks and
preclude the necessity of tack coat between courses.
302-13.3 Rolling. Rolling shall be performed using an 8 to 10 ton static steel drum roller
conforming to 302-5.6. The surface temperature during rolling shall be between 210°F (99°C) and
260°F (127°C). Rolling shall be limited to a maximum of 2 passes. No vehicular traffic shall be
permitted on porous asphalt concrete pavement for 24 hours after rolling.
302-13.4 Infiltration Rate. Porous asphalt concrete pavement shall have an infiltration rate of a
minimum of 100 inches per hour (254 cm/hr) when tested in accordance with 211-3 unless otherwise
specified in the Special Provisions.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
344 Greenbook 2021

302-13.5 Measurement. Porous asphalt concrete will be measured by the ton (tonne). The
Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer at the time of delivery to the Work site a legible copy of a
licensed weighmaster’s certificate showing gross, tare, and net weights of each truckload of porous
asphalt concrete. When an automatic batching system is used, the licensed weighmaster’s certificate
may show only the net weight of material in the truckload.
302-13.6 Payment. Payment for porous asphalt concrete will be made at the Contract Unit Price
per ton (tonne). Failure to provide a certificate to the Engineer by the end of the day on which the
material represented by such certificate is delivered to the Work site, may, at the discretion of the
Engineer, result in the forfeiture of payment for such material.
302-14 POLYMER MODIFIED ASPHALT CONCRETE (PMAC) PAVEMENT.
302-14.1 General. PMAC shall conform to 203-16.
302-14.2 Tack Coat. Tack coat shall conform to 302-5.4.
302-14.3 Distribution and Spreading. Distribution and spreading shall conform to 302-5.5.
302-14.4 Rolling. Rolling shall conform to 302-5.6.
302-14.5 Joints. Joints shall conform to 302-5.7.
302-14.6 Manholes (and Other Structures). Manholes and other structures shall conform to 403-3.
302-14.7 Measurement. PMAC pavement will be measured by the ton (tonne) or by the square
foot (m2).
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer at the time of delivery to the Work site, a legible copy of
a licensed weighmaster certificate showing gross, tare, and net weights of each truckload of TRMAC.
When an automatic batching system is used, the certificate may show only the net weight of TRMAC in
the truckload.
302-14.8 Payment. Payment for TRMAC will be made at the Contract Unit Price per ton
(tonne) or at the Contract Unit Price per square foot (m 2). No separate payment will be made for
tack coat or sweeping.
Failure of the Contractor to provide a licensed weighmaster certificate to the Engineer by the end of
the day on which the TRMAC represented by such certificate was delivered to the Work site may, at the
discretion of the Engineer, result in forfeiture of payment.

SECTION 303 - CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION

303-1 CONCRETE STRUCTURES.

303-1.1 General. Concrete bridges, culverts, catch basins, retaining walls, abutments, piers,
footings, foundations, and similar structures shall be constructed in conformity with the Plans and
Specifications. Concrete for use in work constructed under this section shall conform to 201-1.
Safe and suitable ladders shall be provided to permit access to all portions of the work.
The compressive strength of the concrete referred to in this section will be based on the results of
concrete test cylinders made and tested by the Engineer in accordance with 201-1. The cylinders will be
cured in accordance with ASTM C31, unless otherwise determined by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 345

When plastic-lined concrete structures are shown on the Plans, the plastic liner materials shall
conform to 210-2 and the installation of the liner shall be in accordance with 311-1.
303-1.2 Subgrade for Concrete Structures. Earth subgrade upon which concrete is placed shall be
firm and free from standing water. Groundwater shall be kept below subgrade until the concrete has set.
When the subgrade is in dry earth, it shall be thoroughly dampened with water to ensure that no moisture
will be absorbed from the fresh concrete.
When the Plans show the construction of filter or drain material consisting of gravel (or combination
of gravel and sand), which material will be subgrade for concrete, the placing of steel reinforcement and
placement of concrete shall follow the installation of the filter or drain material as closely as practical.
The filter or drain material shall be kept dewatered to the extent necessary to prevent any portion of
concrete materials being deposited in water.
When the concrete is to be deposited on rock, the rock shall be fully uncovered, cleaned, and its
surface shall be removed to a depth sufficient to expose sound rock. Bedrock shall be roughly leveled
off or cut to approximately horizontal and vertical steps. Seams in the rock shall be grouted under
pressure or otherwise treated as the Engineer may direct.
303-1.3 Forms. Forms shall be of suitable material and of a type, size, shape, quality, and strength
to ensure construction as designed. The forms shall be true to line and grade, mortar-tight, and
sufficiently rigid to resist deflection during placing of the concrete. The responsibility for their adequacy
shall rest with the Contractor. All dirt, chips, sawdust, nails, and other foreign matter shall be
completely removed from forms before any concrete is deposited therein. The surfaces of forms shall be
smooth and free from irregularities, dents, sags, and holes that would deface the finished surfaces.
Forms previously used shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, mortar, and foreign matter before being
reused. Before concrete is placed in forms, all inside surfaces of the forms shall be thoroughly treated
with an approved releasing agent which will leave no objectionable film on the surface of the forms that
can be absorbed by the concrete. Care shall be exercised that no releasing agent is deposited on
previously placed concrete.
Forms for all surfaces that will not be completely enclosed or hidden below the permanent surface of
the ground shall be made of surfaced lumber, or material which will provide a surface at least equal to
surfaced lumber or plywood. Any lumber or material which becomes badly checked or warped, prior to
placing concrete, shall not be used.
Forms for all exposed surfaces of bridges, viaducts, overcrossings, and similar structures shall be
constructed of plywood or an approved equal. Plywood for forms shall be of the grade “Exterior B-B
(concrete form)”, conforming to the latest Product Standard for Soft Plywood, Construction and
Industrial, of the National Institute of Standards and Technology. Plywood shall be furnished and placed
in no less than 48 inch (1.2 m) widths and in uniform lengths of not less than 96 inches (2.4m) except
where the dimension of the member formed is less than the specified panel dimension. Plywood shall be
placed with the grain of the outer plies in the direction of the span. Where plywood is attached directly
to the studs or joists, the panels shall be not less than 5/8 inch (15mm) thick, and the studs or joists shall
be spaced not more than 12 inches (305mm), center to center. Plywood less than 5/8-inch (15 mm)
thick, otherwise conforming to the requirements specified herein, may be used with a continuous
backing of 3/4-inch (19mm) sheeting. All form panels shall be placed in a neat, symmetrical pattern
with the horizontal joints level and continuous. All joints shall be filled with an approved quick-setting
compound and finished flush with the interior of the form.
Wooden forms for copings and curbs shall have a thickness of not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)
and a width of not less than the full depth of coping or curb.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
346 Greenbook 2021

Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, all sharp edges shall be chamfered with 3/4 x 3/4 inch (20 x 20
mm) triangular fillets. Forms for curved surfaces shall be so constructed and placed that the finished
surface will not deviate from the arc of the curve.
Forms shall be so constructed that portions, where finishing is required, may be removed without
disturbing portions of forms to remain in place.
Joists and stringers supporting slabs and overhangs shall be considered as falsework and designed in
accordance with 303-1.6.
Forms for girders and slabs shall be cambered as may be required by the Engineer.
Forms shall, as far as practicable, be so constructed that the form marks will conform to the general
lines of the structure. Concrete bridge railings shall be constructed to present a smooth uniform
appearance in their final position, conforming to the lines shown on the Plans. The height of the
concrete railings shall be adjusted as directed by the Engineer to compensate for the camber and dead
load deflection of the superstructure.
Form clamps or bolts, approved by the Engineer, shall be used to fasten forms. The use of twisted-wire
loop ties to hold forms in position will not be permitted, nor shall wooden spreaders be used unless
authorized by the Engineer. Clamps or bolts shall be of sufficient strength and number to prevent
spreading of the forms. They shall be of such type that they can be entirely removed or cut back 1 inch (25
mm) inside the finished surface of the concrete. Forms for outside surfaces shall be constructed with stiff
wales at right angles to the studs, and all form clamps or bolts shall extend through and fasten such wales.
Forms for cast-in-place concrete drain conduits or sewer structures will not be required for concrete to
be placed directly against the sides of the excavation or shoring, provided the following conditions are met:
a) If concrete is placed directly against the faces of the excavation, the faces must be firm, compact,
able to stand without sloughing, and must be outside the concrete lines shown on the Plans at all
points. Gunite shall be applied to the entire faces of excavation, against which concrete is to be
placed without the use of outside forms, to sufficient thickness to prevent raveling of the exposed
earth faces during the placing of reinforcing steel, forms, and concrete.
b) If concrete is placed against shoring, such shoring shall be closely fitted and all points shall be
outside the concrete lines shown on the Plans. Those surfaces against which the concrete is to be
placed shall be faced with building paper, plywood, or other suitable materials approved by the
Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, shoring shall not be removed until at least 7 Days after
placing concrete, or until the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 2,000 pounds per
square inch (14 MPa).
Voids left by the removal of shoring components shall be backfilled with material having a sand
equivalent of not less than 30 and consolidated by jetting.
c) The reinforcing steel shall be set accurately and held firmly in-place.
d) The Contractor shall assume all risks of damage to the Work or to existing improvements that
may be attributable to this method of construction.
e) Should this method of construction prove unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall discontinue this
method and construct the conduit by using outside forms.
In lieu of wood forms, manufactured traveler metal forms may be used to form cast-in-place
reinforced concrete box. The specific traveler metal forms to be used and their operation shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 347

303-1.4 Removal of Forms.

303-1.4.1 General. The periods of time for form removal are subject to the Contractor assuming all
risks that may be involved. Forms shall not be removed until 24 hours after concrete is placed and the
concrete has obtained a compressive strength of 2,000 pounds per square inch (14 MPa) unless
otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer.
303-1.4.2 Bridges. Forms for bridges shall be removed as specified in the Special Provisions.
303-1.4.3 Miscellaneous Structures. Forms for concrete members (except bridges) subject to
bending stresses, where the member relies upon forms for vertical support, may be removed 7 Days after
concrete is placed.
Curb forms shall not be removed until the concrete has set sufficiently to hold its shape but shall be
removed in time to permit proper finishing.
Stairway forms shall be removed and the finish of the steps completed on the day the concrete is
placed. Metal stairway treads, if required by the Plans, shall be installed immediately after the steps
have been poured.
303-1.4.4 Standard Structures.
a) General. Unless otherwise specified, the periods of time specified herein for removal of forms
are based on the use of Types II, III, IV, or V Portland cement.
b) Standard Catch Basins.
i. Outside forms and inside wall forms which do not support the top slab forms - 16 hours.
ii. Top slab forms - 48 hours if Type II, II/V, or V Portland cement is used; 24 hours if Type III
Portland cement is used.
c) Standard Transition Structures.
i. Outside forms and inside wall forms which do not support the top slab form - 16 hours.
ii. Top slab forms - as specified for box section slab forms.
303-1.4.5 Channels and Arch Sections.
a) General. Unless otherwise specified, the periods of time specified herein are based on the use of
Types II, III, IV, or V Portland cement.
b) Forms Removal. Forms for open channels and forms and shoring for arch sections of sewers and
storm drains may be removed as follows:
i. Forms for open channel walls - 16 hours.
ii. Arch sections in open cut - 12 hours.
303-1.5 Removal of Forms for Cast-In-Place Reinforced Concrete Box (CIPRCB) Sections.
Removal of forms for CIPRCB sections shall conform to 306-11.7.
303-1.6 Falsework.
303-1.6.1 General. The Contractor shall submit Working Drawings for the falsework proposed to
be used. Such Working Drawings shall be in sufficient detail to indicate the general layout, sizes of
members, grade of materials to be used in the falsework, and typical soil conditions.
303-1.6.2 Falsework Design. Falsework shall be designed to carry all loads and pressures applied to it.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
348 Greenbook 2021

303-1.7 Placing Reinforcement.

303-1.7.1 General. Before placing reinforcing steel, the Contractor shall submit a reinforcing steel
placing Working Drawing.
Reinforcing bars shall be placed in accordance with the size and spacing shown on the Plans.
Reinforcing bars shall be firmly and securely held in position in accordance with the “Manual of
Standard Practice” of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, using concrete or metal chairs, spacers,
metal hangers, supporting wires, and other approved devices of sufficient strength to resist crushing
under full load. Metal chairs which extend to the surface of the concrete (except where shown on the
Plans) and wooden supports, shall not be used. Tack welding on reinforcing bars will not be permitted.
Concrete chairs or blocks shall attain a 28-Day compressive strength of 3250 psi or to the
requirements prescribed for Class "A" mortar per 201-5.1. In either case, the concrete chairs or blocks
shall be water-cured per 303-1.10.
The Contractor shall insure that the dowels for bridge sidewalks, curbs, and barrier railings remain
tight and on the intended alignment. Any damage to or loss of bond of the dowels caused by the
Contractor's operations shall be repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. When
dowels are placed in drilled holes, the Contractor shall first fill the hole with epoxy adhesive and then
insert the dowel to insure positive bonding.
Reinforcing steel that extends from previously placed concrete into new construction shall be
cleaned and free of any coating which would be likely to destroy, reduce or impair its proper bonding
with the new concrete.
Old reinforcement that is to project into new work shall be straightened or bent to conform to the
requirements shown on the Plans. Any damaged reinforcing steel that is to be left in place, and is to be
repaired by welding, shall be welded in accordance with the provisions of the American Welding Society
Publication, AWS D12.1, "Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts, and
Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction". The weld shall be sufficient to develop the full
strength of the bar.
Placing bars on layers of fresh concrete as the work progresses and adjusting bars during the placing
of concrete will not be permitted. Before placing in the form, all reinforcing steel shall be cleaned
thoroughly of mortar, oil, dirt, loose mill scale, loose or thick rust, and coatings of any character that
would destroy or reduce the bond. No concrete shall be deposited until the placing of the reinforcing
steel has been inspected and approved.
Bar spacing shall be center to center of bars. Bar cover shall be the clear distance between surface of
bar and face of concrete and shall be 2 inches (50mm) unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
Reinforcement shall terminate 2 inches (50mm) from concrete surfaces and expansion joints, unless
otherwise shown on the Plans.
Reinforcement used in post-tensioned concrete shall be adjusted or relocated during the installation
of prestressing ducts or tendons, as required to provide planned clearances to the prestressing tendons,
anchorages, jacks, and equipment, as approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 349

303-1.7.2 Splicing. Splices of bars shall be made only where shown on the Plans or approved by the
Engineer. Where bars are spliced, the splices shall be staggered. The length of lapped splices shall be as
follows:
a) Reinforcing bars size No. 6, or smaller, shall be lapped 32 diameters of the smaller bar joined.
b) Reinforcing bars sizes Nos. 7, 8 and 9 shall be lapped at least 49 diameters of the smaller
bar joined.
c) Reinforcing bars sizes Nos. 10 and 11 shall be lapped at least 60 diameters of the smaller bar
joined.
d) Reinforcing bars sizes Nos. 14 and 18 shall not be spliced by lapping.
Splicing shall be accomplished by placing the bars in contact with each other and wiring them together.
Welding of reinforcing steel smaller than Nos. 14 and 18 will not be permitted unless otherwise
shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer. Welding, when permitted, shall conform to AWS D1.4
and utilize reinforcing bars conforming to ASTM designation A706.
Radiographic examinations shall be performed by the Contractor on at least 25 percent of all full
penetration butt-welded splices. For each weld found to be defective, a retest shall be made plus one
additional splice as selected by the Engineer shall be examined radiographically by the Contractor.
All radiographs shall be submitted to the Engineer with a radiographic report and a certificate of
compliance.
Each radiographed splice shall be identified on each radiograph. The radiograph identification and
marking system shall be established by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer before radiographic
inspection begins.
Welders, welding operators, and tackers shall be prequalified in accordance with the specifications of
AWS D1.4 and shall produce written evidence of qualification satisfactory to the Engineer. Written
approval of the documentation by the Engineer is required.
303-1.7.3 Bending Reinforcement. Bends and hooks in bars shall be made in the manner
prescribed in the “Manual of Standard Practice” of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
Bars shall not be bent or straightened in a manner which will injure the material. Bars with kinks or
unspecified bends shall not be used.
303-1.7.4 Welded Wire Fabric. Welded wire fabric shall be spliced not less than two meshes. It
shall be lifted carefully into its specified position after the concrete is placed but still plastic.
303-1.8 Placing Concrete.
303-1.8.1 General. Concrete shall be conveyed, deposited, and consolidated by any method which
will preclude the segregation or loss of component materials. Equipment having components made of
aluminum or magnesium alloys which will be in contact with plastic concrete during mixing,
transporting or pumping of Portland cement concrete shall not be used.
All surfaces against which concrete is to be placed shall be thoroughly moistened with water
immediately before placing concrete. All ponded and excess water shall be removed to leave surfaces
moist but not flooded.
Prior to placing any structure concrete, all forms, surfaces of previously placed concrete and
reinforcing steel shall be wetted and the free water removed.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
350 Greenbook 2021

Chutes used in conveying concrete shall be sloped to permit concrete of the consistency required to
flow without segregation. Where a sequence for placing concrete is shown on the Plans, no deviation
will be permitted unless approved in writing by the Engineer.
Concrete not placed within 10 minutes from the time of leaving the mixer shall be remixed before
pouring. Any concrete not poured within a 15-minute interval after mixing shall be wasted.
303-1.8.2 Grouting. Where concrete is to be deposited against hardened concrete at horizontal
construction joints, placing operations shall begin by conveying a grout mixture through the placing
system and equipment and depositing the mixture on the joint. Unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer, the grout mixture shall have a combined aggregate E grading in accordance with 201-1.3.2,
and meet all other requirements consistent with the approved mix design. Consolidation techniques
shall be utilized to ensure proper bond at the joint.
303-1.8.3 Depositing. To avoid segregation, concrete shall be deposited as near to its final position
as is practicable. The use of vibrators for extensive shifting of the mass of concrete will not be
permitted. Concrete that has partially hardened, has been re-tempered, or is contaminated by foreign
materials shall not be deposited in the structure.
Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers insofar as practical. Placing shall start at the low point
and proceed upgrade unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Concrete shall be placed in a
continuous operation between construction joints and shall be terminated with square ends and level tops
unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
Concrete shall not be permitted to free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m) without the use of tremies or
other suitable conveyance. Tremies shall be at least 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter, or the equivalent
cross-sectional area for rectangular sections. Concrete shall not be placed in horizontal members or
sections until the concrete in the supporting vertical members or sections has been consolidated and a 2-
hour period has elapsed to permit shrinkage to occur.
When poured monolithically, top slabs of CIPRCB sections shall not be poured until the concrete
in the walls has been consolidated and settlement has occurred. Vibration of the concrete in the top
slab shall be conducted in such a manner that vibrators penetrate into the concrete previously placed
in the walls.
303-1.8.4 Consolidating. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated in a manner that will encase
the reinforcement and inserts, fill the forms, and produce a surface of uniform texture free of rock
pockets and excessive voids.
Structural concrete, except slope paving such as spillway aprons and channel lining, and concrete
placed under water, shall be consolidated by means of high frequency internal vibrators of a type, size,
and number approved by the Engineer. The location, manner, and duration of the application of the
vibrators shall be such as to secure maximum consolidation of the concrete without separation of the
mortar and coarse aggregate, and without causing water or cement paste to flush to the surface. Internal
vibrators shall not be held against the forms or reinforcing steel.
The number of vibrators employed shall be sufficient to consolidate the concrete within 15
minutes after it has been deposited in the forms. At least 2 vibrators in good operating condition
shall be available at the site of the structure in which more than 25 cubic yards (19 m3) of concrete
is to be placed.
Approved external vibrators for consolidating concrete will be permitted when the concrete is not
accessible to internal vibration. Forms and falsework shall be designed and constructed to resist
displacement or damage from external vibration.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 351

303-1.8.5 Walkways. Walkways and platforms shall be provided for personnel and equipment at a
level convenient for the concrete placement and to permit the performance of all operations necessary for
the completion of such work including finishing.
Where bridge decks are to be constructed to final roadway grade, walkways shall be provided outside
the deck area along each side and for the full length of the structure. These walkways shall be of
sufficient width and so constructed as to provide for the support of the bridges from which the
longitudinal floats specified are to be operated.
303-1.8.6 Joints. The work shall be so prosecuted that construction joints will occur at designated
places shown on the Plans unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. The Contractor shall construct,
in one continuous concrete placing operation, all work comprised between such joints. Joints shall be
kept moist until adjacent concrete is placed.
All construction joints having a keyed, stepped, or roughened surface shall be cleaned by
sandblasting prior placement of the adjacent concrete, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Any
quality of sand may be used which will accomplish the desired results.
The sandblasting operations shall be continued until all unsatisfactory concrete, laitance, coatings,
stains, debris, and other foreign materials are removed. The surface of the concrete shall be washed
thoroughly to remove all loose material. The method used in disposing of wastewater employed in
washing the concrete surfaces shall be such that the wastewater will not stain, discolor, or affect exposed
surfaces of the structures, and will be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Before placing fresh concrete, all construction joints shall be thoroughly wetted. Joints which are
approximately horizontal, except expansion or contraction joints, shall be covered with 1 inch of mortar
consisting of one part cement to 2 1/2 parts sand. The quantity of water used shall be only that required
to produce a mixture with a consistency comparable to that of the fresh concrete.
Water stops for reinforced concrete conduits and structures, where called for on the Plans, shall be of
the type specified on the Plans.
Expansion and contraction joints in concrete structures shall be formed where shown on the
Plans. No reinforcement shall be extended through the joints, except where specifically noted or
detailed on the Plans.
Asphalt paint used in joints shall conform to 203-8. Premolded asphalt filler shall conform to 201-3.
303-1.8.7 Application of Joint Sealants.
a) General. Joint sealants shall conform to 201-3. Prior to sealing joints containing waterstops, the
expansion joint filler, hardboard, concrete spillage, and all foreign material shall be removed
from the deck joint down to a depth of the waterstops. All such material shall be removed from
the entire depth of joints in curbs, sidewalks, railings, and the overhanging portion of deck slabs.
Immediately before applying the joint sealant, the joint shall be thoroughly cleaned by abrasive
blasting or other approved means to remove all mortar, laitance, scale, dirt, dust, oil, curing
compounds, and other foreign material. The joints shall be blown out with high pressure
compressed air to remove all residue.
If a sealant is shown in the sidewalk, saw-cutting of grooves at concrete railing locations shall be
completed prior to constructing the railings. Joint seal material shall be protected during the
construction of the railing.
At the time of applying the joint sealant, the joint shall be surface dry, and acceptable to the
Engineer. No sealant shall be placed during unsuitable weather, when the atmospheric

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
352 Greenbook 2021

temperature is below 50°F (10°C), or when weather conditions indicate that the temperature may
fall below 32°F (0°C) within 24 hours.
The joint shall be filled from the bottom to the top without formation of voids. The top of
the finished joint seal shall be between 1/4 inch (6 mm) and 3/8 inch (10 mm) below the
finished surface.
All adjoining surfaces shall be carefully protected during the joint sealing operations, and any
stains, marks or damage thereto, as a result of the Contractor’s operations, shall be corrected in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
b) Type “A” Seal. The top edges of the seal shall remain in continuous contact with the sides of the
groove over the entire range of joint movement and such contact shall not break when thumb
pressure is applied vertically to the seal at the centerline of the seal. The seal shall satisfactorily
resist the intrusion of foreign material and water.
Grooves for joint seals shall be cut to a uniform width and depth and to the alignment shown on
the Plans or as ordered by the Engineer. Both sides of the groove shall have saw-cut surfaces for
their full depth and shall expose sound concrete.
The concrete saw for cutting the grooves shall be fitted with diamond blades having a core (disk)
thickness not less than 3/16 inch (5mm). Double blades, cutting both sides of the groove
simultaneously, shall be used for the initial cut. The completed groove measured at the top shall
be within 1/8 inch (3mm) of the width shown on the Plans. The groove width measured at the
bottom shall not vary from the top width by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) for each 2 inches (50
mm) of depth.
Immediately following cutting, the lip of the groove shall be beveled by grinding, as shown on
the Plans, and the groove shall be thoroughly washed with water under pressure and blown out
with high pressure air jets to remove all residue and foreign materials.
At least 48 hours prior to installing the seal, the Contractor shall repair all spalls,
fractures, breaks, or voids in the concrete surfaces of the joint groove by methods
approved by the Engineer.
If any of the requirements of this subsection are not satisfied, the Contractor shall remove the
seal, repair or reconstruct the groove, and replace the seal or install new seal material.
c) Type “B” Seal. The requirements of 303-1.8.7 b) shall apply to the application of Type “B”
seals. In addition, the following requirements shall apply:
i Sawcutting of grooves shall not be started until seal material has been tested, approved, and
delivered to the Work site.
ii The elastomeric joint seal shall be installed with mechanical equipment specifically designed
for this purpose.
iii The equipment shall not elongate the seal longitudinally nor cause structural damage to the
seal or the concrete. The equipment shall place the seal to the depth shown on the Plans.
iv. The equipment shall not twist, distort, or cause other malformations in the completed seal.
Equipment that does not provide a properly installed seal shall not be used.
v. A combination lubricant and adhesive shall be applied to the dry sides of the seal and to all
vertical surfaces which will be in contact with the seal immediately prior to installation. The
rate of application shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the seal. The contact

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 353

surfaces of the seal shall be cleaned with normal butyl acetate, using clean rags or mops, just
prior to applying the lubricant-adhesive.
vi. If the completed joint seal is out of position or out of shape, if it does not maintain uniform
folding, if the top edges pull away from the sides of the groove, or if the seal does not
satisfactorily resist the intrusion of foreign material and water, the Contractor at its expense
shall remove the seal, repair or reconstruct the groove, and replace the seal.
d) Type “C” Seal. At no time shall the emulsion be subjected to a temperature below 40°F (4°C).
Prior to application, the joint sealant may be warmed if necessary to permit proper filling of the
joints. The heating shall be carefully controlled to avoid overheating of any part of the container
or mixture and under no circumstance shall the emulsion be heated to a temperature greater than
130°F (54°C).
Immediately before applying the sealant, the emulsion shall be mixed with the proper amount of
paste setting agent. The components shall be mixed, preferably with a powder mixer, for 5
minutes to produce a homogeneous material.
e) Type “E” Seal. The rubber rod shall be compressed into the clean joint to a position such that
the top is 1-1/4 inches (30mm) below the level of the finished surface.
The sealing material components shall be maintained at temperatures of not less than 60°F
(16°C). To ensure adequate mixing and application, they may be preheated to a maximum of
90°F (32°), by means other than the application of direct flame.
The materials shall be power mixed for at least 8 minutes to produce a homogeneous material.
When the amount of component “A” is less than 25 percent by weight of component “B”,
extreme care must be used to be certain that all of component “A” is incorporated in the mix.
Joint sealant in place shall comply with the following test: within 24 hours of application, a 1-
cent coin shall be pressed edgewise one-half of its diameter into the joint sealer. Within 1 minute
after release, the coin shall be ejected by the joint sealant, leaving the sealing compound free of
abrasions or indentations deeper than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
Joint sealant, which does not cure to a homogeneous, rubber-like compound, bond to the joint
faces, or comply with any other requirements of this section, shall be removed. The joint shall be
recleaned and new joint sealant placed by the Contractor at its expense.
303-1.8.8 Placing Concrete Under Adverse Weather Conditions. Concrete for structures shall
not be placed on frozen ground nor shall it be mixed or placed while the atmospheric temperature is
below 35°F (2°C), unless adequate means are employed to heat the aggregates and water, and
satisfactory provisions have been made for protecting the work.
Concrete shall not be placed on frozen ground, nor shall concrete be mixed or placed when the
atmospheric temperature is below 35°F (2°C), or when conditions indicate that the temperature may fall
to 35°F (2°C) within 24 hours, except with the written permission of the Engineer and only after such
precautionary measures for the protection of the concrete have been taken as approved by the Engineer.
Concrete shall be effectively protected from freezing or frost for a period of 5 Days after placing.
Concrete for structures shall not be mixed or placed while the atmospheric temperature is above
115°F (46°C) unless adequate means are employed to cool the aggregate and water and satisfactory
provisions have been made for protecting the work. In any case, the temperature of the concrete as
placed shall not exceed 90°F (32°C).
Concrete placement shall be stopped when rainfall is sufficient to cause damage to the work.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
354 Greenbook 2021

303-1.8.9 Concrete Deposited Under Water. When conditions render it impossible or

inadvisable to dewater excavations before placing concrete, the Contractor shall deposit underwater,
by means of a tremie or underwater bottom-dump bucket, a layer of concrete of sufficient thickness to
thoroughly seal the cofferdam. To prevent segregation, the concrete shall be carefully placed in a
compact mass and shall not be disturbed after being deposited. Water shall be maintained in a still
condition at the point of deposit.
A tremie shall consist of a watertight tube having a diameter of not less than 10 inches (250 mm)
with a hopper at the top. The tube shall be equipped with a device that will close the discharge end and
prevent water from entering the tube while it is being charged with concrete. The tremie shall be
supported to permit free movement of the discharge end over the entire top surface of the work and to
permit rapid lowering when necessary to retard or stop the flow of concrete. The discharge end shall be
closed at the start of the work to prevent water entering the tube and shall be entirely sealed at all times,
except when the concrete is being placed. The tremie tube shall be kept full of concrete. When a batch
is dumped into the hopper, the flow of concrete shall be induced by slightly raising the discharge end,
always keeping it in the deposited concrete. The flow shall be continuous until the work is completed
and the resulting concrete seal shall be monolithic and homogeneous.
The underwater bucket shall have an open top and the bottom doors shall open freely and outwardly
when tripped. The bucket shall be completely filled and slowly lowered to avoid backwash and shall not
be dumped until it rests on the surface upon which the concrete is to be deposited. After discharge, the
bucket shall be raised slowly until well above the concrete.
303-1.9 Surface Finishes.
303-1.9.1 General. The classes of surface finish described herein shall be applied to various parts of
concrete structures as specified. Exposed box sections and bridge decks shall be finished in
conformance with 302-6.4, except that final finish shall be accomplished with a drag broom in lieu of
burlap drags.
The invert of cast-in-place sewers and sewer structures shall be given a steel-trowel finish. The
invert in circular conduit is defined as the unlined portion of lined conduit or the bottom 60 degrees of
circumference of the inside of unlined conduit.
303-1.9.2 Ordinary Surface Finish. Immediately after the forms have been removed, all exterior
form bolts shall be removed to a depth of at least 1 inch (25 mm) inside the surface of the concrete and
the resulting holes or depressions cleaned and filled with mortar, except on the interior surfaces of box
girders, the bolts may be removed flush with the surface of the concrete. Mortar shall be Class “C”.
White cement shall be added to the mortar in an amount sufficient to tint the mortar a shade lighter than
the concrete to be repaired. Mortar shall be mixed approximately 45 minutes in advance of use. Care
shall be exercised to obtain a good bond with the concrete. After the mortar has thoroughly hardened,
the surface shall be rubbed with a carborundum stone to obtain the same color in the mortar as in the
surrounding concrete. All fins caused by form joints, and other projections shall be removed and all
pockets cleaned and filled. Mortar for filling pockets shall be treated as specified for bolt holes.
Ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory
to a higher-class finish. On surfaces which are to be buried underground or surfaces which are
completely enclosed (such as the cells of box girders), the removal of fins and form marks and the
rubbing of a mortared surface to a uniform color will not be required. Ordinary surface finish, unless
otherwise specified, shall be considered as a final finish on the following surfaces:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 355

a) The undersurfaces of slab spans, box girders, filled-spandrel arch spans, and floor slabs between
T-girders of superstructures except for grade separation structures.
b) The exposed surfaces of channel walls and the inside vertical surface of T-girders of
superstructures except for grade separation structures.
c) Surfaces which are to be buried underground, covered with fill, or for surfaces of culverts above
finish grade which are not visible from the traveled way.
d) Top surfaces which are to be buried underground shall be struck off and given a float finish.
e) Inside walls of cast-in-place reinforced concrete box.
303-1.9.3 Class 1 Surface Finish. Class 1 surface finish shall be applied to the following surfaces,
unless otherwise specified:
a) All surfaces of superstructures for grade separation structures.
b) All surfaces of bridge piers, columns, and abutments; culvert headwalls; and retaining walls above
finished ground and to at least 1 foot (300 mm) below finished ground.
c) The outside vertical surfaces and bottom surface of outside girders, and the outside vertical
surfaces and the undersurfaces of cantilever sidewalks, safety curbs, and floor slabs overhanging
outside girders.
d) All surfaces of open spandrel arch rings, spandrel columns, and abutment towers.
e) Surfaces inside of culvert barrels having a height of 4 feet (1.2m) or more for a distance inside the
barrel at least equal to the height of the culvert.
f) All interior surfaces of pumping plant motor and control rooms and the engine-generator room.
After completion of the ordinary surface finish, the entire surface specified shall be sanded with a
power sander or other approved abrasive means as required to obtain a uniform color and texture.
The use of power carborundum stones or discs will be required to remove unsightly bulges or
irregularities. The Class 1 surface finish shall not be applied until after the surfaces have been exposed
to the elements for a period of 30 Days, or until a uniform appearance of the surface can be secured.
The specifications for a Class 1 finish require a smooth, even surface of uniform appearance with
unsightly bulges removed and depressions due to form marks and other imperfections repaired. The
degree of care in building forms and the character of materials used in formwork are a contributing
factor in the amount of such sanding and grinding required, and the Engineer shall determine the extent
of such work required to meet the standard of this class of finish.
303-1.9.4 Class 2 Surface Finish. Class 2 surface finish shall be applied to the following surfaces
unless otherwise specified:
All surfaces of concrete railings, including barrier railings, rail posts, rail end posts, and rail bases.
When Class 2 surface finish is specified, the ordinary surface finish and Class 1 surface finish shall
be completed in succession. The process specified under Class 2 surface finish shall then be deferred
until all other work which would in any way affect or mar the final finish is complete. The Contractor
shall then apply a brush coat or surface film of Class “A” mortar.
303-1.10 Curing. As soon after completion of the specified finishing operations as the condition of
the concrete will permit without danger of consequent damage thereto, all exposed surfaces shall be
sprayed with a curing compound conforming to 201-4.1. Concrete may be cured by the use of earth,
sand or burlap kept continuously wet when such method is approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
356 Greenbook 2021

Concrete that is water cured shall be kept continuously wet for at least 10 Days after being placed;
preferably being covered with at least two layers of not lighter than 10 ounces per linear yard, 40 inches
wide (305 g/m2) burlap. Handrail, base rail, railing posts, tops of walls, and similar parts of the
structure, if water cured, shall be covered with burlap as prescribed above, immediately following the
finishing treatment specified therefor, and such covering shall not be removed in less than 10 Days.
Roadway areas, floors, slabs, curbs, walks, and the like, that are water cured may be ponded or
covered with sand to a depth of at least 2 inches (50 mm) in lieu of the burlap as prescribed above, as
soon as the condition of the concrete will permit, and such covering shall remain wet and in place for at
least 10 Days, unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer.
When the surface is covered with plastic sheeting, it shall remain covered for at least 10 Days. The
plastic sheeting shall be laid either with edges butted together and sealed with a 2- inch (50 mm)-wide
sealing tape or with edges lapped not less than 3 inches (75 mm) and fastened with waterproof adhesive.
When a membrane curing compound is used, it shall be applied in a manner and quantity to entirely
cover and seal all exposed surfaces of the concrete with a uniform film. The membrane shall not be
applied to any surface until finishing operations have been completed. Such surfaces shall be kept damp
until the membrane is applied. All surfaces on which a bond is required, such as construction joints,
shear planes, reinforcing steel, and the like, shall be adequately covered and protected before starting the
application of the curing compound to prevent any of the compound from being deposited thereon; and
any such surface with which the compound may have come in contact shall immediately be cleaned.
Care shall be exercised to prevent damage to the membrane seal during the curing period. Should the
seal be damaged before the expiration of 10 Days after the placing of the concrete, additional impervious
membrane shall be immediately applied over the damaged area.
The top surface of highway bridge decks shall be cured by a combination of both the curing
compound method and the water method, except that the curing compound shall be Type 2. The curing
compound shall be applied continuously and progressively during the deck finishing operations
immediately after the finishing operations are completed on each individual portion of the deck. The
water cure shall be applied as soon as the curing compound has formed a continuous membrane, but not
later than 4 hours after completion of deck finishing or, for portions of the decks on which finishing is
completed after normal working hours, the water cure shall be applied as directed by the Engineer.
Should any forms be removed sooner than 10 Days after the placing of the concrete, the exposed
surface shall either be immediately coated with curing compound or kept continuously wet by the use of
burlap or other suitable means until such concrete has cured for at least 10 Days.
When tops of walls are cured by the curing compound method, the side forms, except for metal
forms, shall be kept continuously wet for the 10 Days following the placing of the concrete.
If there is any likelihood of the fresh concrete checking or cracking prior to the commencement of
the curing operations (due to weather conditions, materials used, or for any other reason), it shall be kept
damp, but not wet, by means of an indirect fine spray of water until it is not likely that checking or
cracking will occur, or until the curing operations are started in the area affected.
303-1.11 Measurement. Concrete structures will be measured for payment as specified in the
Special Provisions or as shown in the Bid, and in accordance with the following.
Where concrete is measured for payment on the basis of cubic yards (m3), the calculation of the quantity
of concrete for payment will be made only to the neat lines of the structures as shown on the Plans and on the
basis of the concrete having the specified dimensions. However, all concrete shall be placed to line and grade
within such tolerances, as determined by the Engineer, as are reasonable and acceptable for the type of work

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 357

involved. The quantity of such concrete will be calculated considering the mortar used to cover construction
joints as being concrete and no deductions will be made for rounded or beveled edges, space occupied by
reinforcing steel, or metal inserts or openings 5 square feet (0.5 m2) or less in area.
The quantity of reinforcing steel, when scheduled as a separate item, will be calculated for payment on the
basis of the number of each type bar actually placed in accordance with the Plans and approved changes. The
weight will be calculated using the actual lengths of bars placed and the unit weights per linear foot (m)
specified in ASTM A615/615M, A616/616M, and A617/617M.
Measurement of cast-in-place reinforced concrete box will be made in accordance with 306-14.
303-1.12 Payment. Payment for concrete structures will be made as specified in the Special Provisions or
as shown in the Bid.
Unless otherwise specified, no separate or additional payment will be made for dewatering or radiographic
examinations.
Payment for grouting seams in rock or otherwise treating will be made as specified in the Special
Provisions.
Payment for cement used in mortar for covering construction joints, patching, or other uses in the structure
being constructed, in excess of that required for the design mix of the adjacent concrete, shall be included in
payment for the item of work of which said mortar is a part.
Steel for laps indicated on the Plans, or required by the Engineer, will be paid for at the Contract Unit
Price. No payment will be made for reinforcing steel in laps (whether specified or optional) which are not
used, and payment will not be made for additional steel in laps which are requested by the Contractor for its
convenience, or for steel used in chairs or other devices for supporting the required reinforcement.
Payment for longitudinal steel reinforcement will be made on the basis that the longest standard mill
lengths will be placed; and not more than one lap will be paid for between 2 consecutive construction joints,
unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. The standard mill length for bar sizes No. 4 (No. 13M) and
larger is 60 feet (18 m).
When optional longitudinal construction joints are indicated on the Plans or specified, the Contractor will
be permitted to lap the transverse reinforcing steel at said joints and the reinforcing steel used in such laps will
be paid for at the Contract Unit Price.
Payment for cast-in-place reinforced concrete box will be made in accordance with 306-15.
303-2 AIR-PLACED CONCRETE.
303-2.1 Requirements.
303-2.1.1 General. Air-placed concrete construction shall be in accordance with this subsection and the
applicable provisions of 303-1.
Only personnel skilled in the techniques of air placement of concrete shall be utilized for air-placed
concrete construction.
Unless otherwise specified, air-placed concrete shall be applied by one of the following methods.
303-2.1.2 Method A (Gunite). A proportional combination of cement and aggregate pneumatically
transported in a dry state through a pipe or hose to a nozzle where water is added immediately prior to
discharge.
303-2.1.3 Method B (Shotcrete). A proportioned combination of cement, aggregate, and water
mixed by mechanical methods, pumped in a plastic state through a pipe or hose to the nozzle where, by
the addition of air, the mixture is forcibly propelled to the work.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
358 Greenbook 2021

303-2.2 Equipment. For Method A, the minimum air pressure shall be 45 pounds per square inch
(310 kPa) on the gun tank when 100 feet (30 m) or less of hose is used and the pressure shall be
increased 5 pounds per square inch (35 kPa) for each additional 50 feet (15 m) of hose. The pressure
shall also be increased 5 pounds per square inch (35 kPa) for each 25 feet (8 m) that the nozzle is located
above the elevation of the gun tank. The maximum nozzle diameter shall be 1-5/8 inches (41 mm)
unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Water pressure at the nozzle shall be at least 15 pounds per
square inch (100 kPa) above the air pressure at the nozzle.
For Method B, the pump system utilized to convey premixed concrete shall deliver a uniform and
uninterrupted flow of material, without segregation or loss of the ingredients. The main run from the
pump to the work shall be at least 3-inch (75 mm) diameter steel pipe or flexible hose reduced to 2-inch
(50 mm) diameter at the point of expulsion. Aluminum pipe will not be permitted. The air compressor
shall have the capacity to deliver at least 100 cubic feet (2.8 m3) per minute for each operating nozzle.
303-2.3 Materials, Proportioning, and Mixing.
303-2.3.1 Method A. Aggregate and cement shall conform to 200-1.5.4 and 201-1.2.1,
respectively. Unless otherwise specified, the proportions by volume shall be 1 part cement to 4-1/2 parts
sand. The sand shall contain not less than 3 percent nor more than 6 percent moisture by weight. The
cement and sand shall be mixed thoroughly in a power mixer for at least 1-1/2 minutes. The dry-mixed
material shall be used promptly after mixing and any material that has been mixed for more than 45
minutes shall be rejected and removed from the Work site.
303-2.3.2 Method B. The concrete class shall conform to 201-1.1.2.
303-2.4 Tests. The Contractor shall make the work accessible to facilitate the preparation of test specimens.
The strength of air-placed concrete shall be determined from cores cut from the completed work, cores cut
from test panels, compression test cylinders or a combination of these methods as directed by the Engineer.
Compression test cylinders shall be prepared by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer in 6-inch (150
mm) diameter x 12-inch (300 mm) long containers of 3/4 inch-square (19 mm x 19 mm) hardware cloth,
utilizing the same mix, air pressure, water pressure and nozzle tip as for the material placed in the structure.
Cylinders shall be cured in accordance with ASTM C31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C39.
Test panels prepared for core tests shall be constructed by the Contractor, of material that is
representative of that used in the structure. The size of the test panel shall be as directed by the
Engineer. Four-inch (100 mm) minimum-diameter core specimens shall be obtained from the completed
work or test panels and tested in accordance with ASTM C42 at the Contractor's expense. Core holes in
the completed work shall be repaired with Class C mortar per 207-3.3.1 b) and 201-5.1.
A compressive strength test of air-placed concrete shall consist of 3 specimens. If the test specimens
are 6-inch x 12-inch (150 mm x 300 mm) cylinders, one shall be tested at 7 Days. If the test specimens
are cores, one shall be tested at 14 Days. The remaining 2 specimens shall be tested at 28 Days. At least
one set of test specimens shall be obtained for each day's work from each nozzle person employed.
The minimum strength of test specimens shall be:
7-Day (cylinders)........................................... 2,000 psi (14 MPa)
14-Day (cores) ............................................... 2,300 psi (16 MPa)
28-Day........................................................... 3,250 psi (23 MPa)
When a test specimen shows deficient strength, 2 cores taken from adjacent areas at the Contractor’s
expense may be required for each deficient specimen. Should either core prove deficient, the work shall
be subject to rejection.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 359

303-2.5 Preparation of Surfaces. Subgrade for air-placed concrete shall be neatly trimmed to line
and grade and shall be free of all loose material. The subgrade shall be compacted as required by the
Plans or Special Provisions.
Overexcavation shall be backfilled with material compacted to 90 percent relative density, or air-
placed concrete at the Contractor’s expense.
Masonry, rock, asphalt, and concrete surfaces to be covered by air-placed concrete shall be free of
loose material. Dust, dirt, grease, organic material, or other deleterious substances shall be removed and
the surface washed with water.
303-2.6 Placement. All surfaces shall be dampened before application and material shall not be
applied to a surface on which free water exists.
The velocity of the material as it leaves the nozzle shall be maintained uniformly at a rate satisfactory
for the job conditions. Material that rebounds and does not fall clear of the work, or which collects on
the surfaces, shall be removed. Rebound shall not be used in any portion of the work.
The nozzle shall be held at such distance and position that the stream of flowing material will
impinge approximately at right angles to the surface being covered. Any portion of the in-place material
which sags, is soft, contains sand pockets, or shows other evidence of being defective, shall be removed
and replaced with new material. Reinforcement damaged or destroyed by such repairs shall be replaced
by properly lapped additional steel.
Mortar blocks, metal chairs, clips, or spacers with wire ties, or other acceptable means shall be used
to secure the reinforcement firmly in the position shown on the Plans.
Where material is placed on overhead surfaces, the amount of water in the mix shall be controlled to
permit placement of layers of material approximately 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick without sag or slough.
303-2.7 Forms and Ground Wires. The forms shall be built in accordance with the applicable
provisions of 303-1. All forms shall be constructed so as to permit the escape of air and rebound.
Ground wires shall be installed in such a manner that they accurately outline the finished surface as
indicated on the Plans. They shall be located at intervals sufficient to ensure proper thickness throughout.
Wires shall be stretched tight and shall not be removed prior to application of the finish coat.
Headers will be required where the Plans indicate a formed edge or joint.
303-2.8 Joints. Construction joints shall be sloped off at an angle of approximately 45 degrees to the
surface to which air-placed material is being applied. Before applying air-placed material in the adjacent
sections, the sloped portion shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted by means of air and water blasting.
Control joints shall be formed at the locations designated on the Plans.
303-2.9 Finish. Upon reaching the thickness and shape outlined by forms and ground wires, the
surface shall be rodded off to true line and grade. Low spots or depressions shall be brought up to
proper grade by placing additional air-placed material. Ground wires shall then be removed and, unless
otherwise specified, the surface shall then be broom-finished to secure a uniform surface texture.
Rodding and working with a wood float shall be held to a minimum.
Rebound or accumulated loose sand shall be removed an disposed of by the Contractor.
When a nozzle finish is specified on the Plans, the surface upon which the finish is to be applied
shall be at the proper grade and prepared by sand and water blasting to remove all laitance prior to
application of the concrete.
303-2.10 Curing. Air-placed concrete (gunite or shotcrete) shall be cured in accordance with the
provisions of 303-1.10.
The Contractor shall, at all times, protect the finished work from being scarred or damaged.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
360 Greenbook 2021

303-2.11 Measurement and Payment. Quantities of air-placed concrete will be computed from
measurements of actual areas in the plane of the work and the dimensions shown on the Plans. No
compensation will be allowed for material placed in excess of the dimensions shown on the Plans.
The Contract Unit Price for air-placed concrete shall include full compensation for preparing the
foundation, setting all formwork and grounds, furnishing and placing reinforcement, placing the concrete,
finishing surfaces, curing, and structure backfill as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
303-3 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION.
303-3.1 General. This work shall consist of furnishing and placing pretensioned or post-tensioned
prestressed concrete members, and shall include the manufacture, transportation, and storage of girders,
slabs, piling, and other structural of prestressed concrete, and placing of all prestressed concrete
members, except piling which shall be placed as provided in 305-1.
The members shall be furnished complete including all concrete, prestressing steel, reinforcing steel,
and incidental materials.
Prestressing shall be performed by either pretensioning or post-tensioning methods. The method of
prestressing to be used shall be optional with the Contractor, within the limitations of these specifications.
Prior to casting any members, the Contractor shall, in accordance with 3-8.2, submit complete Working
Drawings and details of the method, materials, concrete mix, and equipment to be used in the prestressing
operations. Any additions or rearrangement of reinforcing steel from that shown on the Plans shall be
specially noted. Such details shall outline the method and sequence of stressing and shall include complete
specifications and details of the prestressing steel and anchoring devices, anchoring stresses, type of
enclosures, and all other data pertaining to the prestressing operations, including the arrangement of the
prestressing steel in the members, pressure grouting materials, and equipment. The Working Drawings shall
also include details of the holdups and holddowns if the pretensioned method is used. Friction losses at these
locations shall be included in the calculations submitted to the Engineer in accordance with 3-8.2. For any
rearrangement of stress pattern, the stress calculations, signed by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered by
the State of California, shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer.
303-3.2 Concrete. Concrete construction shall conform to the applicable provisions in 303-1.
The design of the precast prestressed concrete members is based on the use of concrete having an
ultimate compressive strength at 28 Days of not less than the values shown on the Plans.
The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing concrete for prestressed members which contains
not less than 560 pounds (330 kg) nor more than 750 pounds (445 kg) of cement per cubic yard (m3) of
concrete, which is workable, and which conforms to the strength requirements specified. Variation from
the above cement content shall have prior approval of the Engineer.
The compressive strength of the concrete will be determined from concrete test cylinders cured under
conditions similar to those affecting the member.
The use of admixtures shall be as specified in 201-1.2.4.
Concrete shall not be placed in the forms until the Engineer has inspected the placing of the
reinforcement, enclosures, anchorages, and prestressing steel.
The concrete shall be vibrated internally or externally, or both, as required to consolidate the
concrete. The vibrating shall be done with care and in such a manner that displacement of
reinforcement, enclosures, and prestressing steel will be avoided.
Holes for anchor bars and for diaphragm dowels which pass through the member, openings for
connection rods, recesses for grout, and holes for railing bolts shall be provided in the members in
accordance with the details shown on the Plans. Where diaphragm dowels do not pass through the

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 361

member, the dowels may be anchored in the member by embedment in the concrete or by means of an
approved threaded insert.
Forms for interior cells or holes in the members shall be constructed of a material that will resist breakage
or deformation during the placing of concrete and will not materially increase the weight of the member.
Lifting anchors shall be installed as detailed on the Working Drawings. In members to be placed in bridge
decks, all portions of the anchor above the concrete shall be removed after the members are placed.
Side forms for prestressed members may be removed after a period of 24 hours, provided
arrangements satisfactory to the Engineer are made for curing and protecting the concrete. If side forms
are lift in place until transfer strength has been attained, no further curing will be required.
The steam curing method or other methods approved by the Engineer may be used for curing precast
prestressed concrete members in lieu of water curing. Steam curing, if elected by the Contractor, shall
conform to the following provisions:
a) After placement of the concrete, members shall be held for a 4-hour-minimum presteaming
period. If the ambient air temperature is below 50°F (10°C), steam shall be applied during the
presteaming period to hold the air surrounding the members at a temperature between 50°F and
90°F (10°C and 32°C).
b) All exposed surfaces of the members shall be kept wet continuously during the holding and
curing period.
c) The steam shall be saturated, low pressure and shall be distributed uniformly over all exposed
surfaces of the member and shall not impinge on the exposed concrete surfaces.
d) The steam hood shall be equipped with temperature recording devices that will furnish an
accurate, continuous, permanent record of the temperatures under the hood during the curing
period. The position of the temperature devices shall be approved by the Engineer.
e) During application of the steam the temperature gradient within the enclosure shall not exceed 40°F
(22°C) per hour. The curing temperature shall not exceed 150°F (66°C) and shall be maintained at a
constant level for a sufficient time necessary to develop the required compressive strength.
f) The members shall be protected from sudden temperature and moisture loss after completion of
steam curing. In discontinuing the steam application, the ambient air temperature shall decrease
at a rate not to exceed 40°F (22°C) per hour until a temperature has been reached 20°F (11°C)
above the temperature of the air to which the concrete will be exposed.
g) After steam curing is complete, a copy of the steam charts shall be submitted to the Engineer.
303-3.3 Prestressing Steel. Prestressing steel shall be high-tensile wire conforming to ASTM
A421/A421M, high-tensile wire strand conforming to ASTM A416/A416M, or uncoated high-strength
steel bars conforming to ASTM A722/A722M, including all supplementary requirements.
Bars of different ultimate strength shall not be used interchangeably in the same member, unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
In handling and shipping bars, care shall be taken to avoid bending, injury from deflection, scraping,
or overstressing of the bars. All damaged bars will be rejected.
When bars are to be extended by the use of couplers, the assembled units shall have tensile strength
of not less than the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength. Failure of any one sample to meet this
requirement will be cause for rejection of the heat of bars and lot of couplers. The location of couplers
in the member shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
All wires, strands, and bars shall be:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
362 Greenbook 2021

a) Protected from corrosion during shipping by a factory treatment or process.

b) Protected against abrasion during shipment and handling.
c) Installed in members to be post-tensioned after steam curing, when steam curing is used, unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
d) Grouted in the enclosures of post-tensioned members within 48 hours after the wire or strand has been
tensioned, and within 10 Days after removal of the prestressing steel from shipping containers, unless
adequate provisions are made to inhibit corrosion. In all cases, grouting shall be completed within 96
hours after the wire or strand has been tensioned.
Wires shall be straightened, if necessary, to produce equal stress in all wires of wire groups or
parallel-lay cables that are to be stressed simultaneously, or when necessary to ensure proper positioning
in the enclosures.
When wires are button-headed, the buttons shall be cold-formed symmetrically about the axes of the
wires, and shall develop the full strength of the wire. No cold-forming process shall be used that results
in indentations in the wire.
When the button-headed wire assembly is tested as a unit in tension in accordance with California
Test 641, at least 90 percent of the failures at or above the minimum guaranteed ultimate strength of the
wire shall occur in the wire and not in the buttons.
Until finally encased in concrete or grouted in the member, all prestressing steel shall be protected
against corrosion and damage, and shall be free of all dirt, scale, oil, grease, and other deleterious
substances. Evidence of mishandling or inadequate protection such as physical damage or development
of visible rust or other results of corrosion shall be cause for rejection.
No welds or grounds for welding equipment shall be made on any prestressing steel. If arc welding
is utilized on other parts of a prestressed structure, the ground shall be attached directly to the part being
welded. All grounding and welding operations performed after the prestressing steel has been installed
shall be approved by the Engineer.
303-3.4 Anchorages and Distribution. All post-tensioned prestressing steel shall be secured at the
ends by means of approved permanent anchoring devices. The anchors shall be of such design that they
will not kink, neck down, or otherwise damage the prestressing steel.
The load from the anchoring device shall be distributed to the concrete by means of approved
devices that will effectively distribute the load to the concrete.
All anchorage devices for post-tensioning shall hold the prestressing steel at a load producing stress
of not less than 95 percent of the guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the prestressing steel, when
tested in accordance with California Test 641.
Where the end of a post-tensioned assembly will not be covered by concrete, the anchoring devices shall
be recessed so that the ends of the prestressing steel and all parts on the anchor devices will be at least 2 inches
(50 mm) inside of the end surface of the members, unless a greater embedment is shown on the Plans.
Following post-tensioning, the recesses shall be filled with Class “A” mortar and finished flush.
When headed wires are used, the outside edge of any hole for prestressing wire through a stressing
washer, or through an unthreaded bearing ring or plate, shall not be less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) from the
root of the thread of the washer or from the edge of the ring or plate.
Distribution plates or assemblies shall conform to the following requirements:
a) The final unit compressive stress on the concrete directly underneath the plate or assembly shall not
exceed 3,000 pounds per square inch (21 MPa), and a suitable grillage of reinforcing steel shall be used
in the stressed area.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 363

b) Bending stresses in the plates or assemblies induced by the pull of the prestressing steel shall not
exceed the yield point of the material or cause visible distortion in the anchorage plate when 100
percent of the ultimate load is applied.
Materials and workmanship shall conform to 304.
Should the Contractor elect to furnish anchoring devices of a type which are sufficiently large and
which are used in conjunction with a steel grillage embedded in the concrete that effectively distributes
the compressive stresses to the concrete, the steel distribution plates, or assemblies may be omitted.
303-3.5 Duct Enclosures. Duct enclosures for prestressing steel shall be rigid, mortar-tight,
accurately placed at Plan locations, and free of angle changes, crimping, or flattening.
Ducts shall be rigid, galvanized, ferrous metal tubes with either welded or interlocked seams having
sufficient strength to maintain correct alignment during placing of concrete. Galvanizing of the welded
seam will not be required. Joints between sections shall be positive metallic connections sealed with
waterproof tape. Transition couplings connecting ducts to anchoring devices need not be galvanized.
All duct openings or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or other suitable connections
for the injection of grout after prestressing. After installation in the forms, the ends of ducts shall be
covered to prevent the entry of water or debris. The Contractor shall demonstrate by positive means to
the satisfaction of the Engineer that the ducts are free of water and debris prior to the installation of the
prestressing steel. The inside diameter of ducts shall be at least 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) greater than the
outside diameter of the tendon.
Ducts shall be securely fastened in place to prevent movement during the placement of concrete.
Vents shall be 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) minimum-diameter standard pipe connected at the high points in the
duct profile to ducts with metallic structural fasteners sealed with waterproof tape. Ends of vents shall
be removed 2 inches (50 mm) below the roadway surface after grouting has been completed.
303-3.6 Prestressing. All prestressing steel shall be tensioned by means of hydraulic jacks. Each
jack shall be equipped with an accurate pressure gage with a dial at least 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter,
and each jack and its gage shall be accompanied by a recent certified calibration chart acceptable to the
Engineer, showing the relationship between gage readings and total load applied by the ram. At the
option of the Contractor, with the approval of the Engineer, a reverse calibrated load-cell may be used.
Except where the compressive strength of concrete at time of initial prestress is specified on the Plans,
tension shall not be applied or transferred to any member until the concrete in the member has attained
80 percent of the design compressive strength shown on the Plans.
Subject to prior approval by the Engineer, a portion of the total prestressing force may be applied to a
member when the strength of the concrete in the member is less than the value shown on the Plans and
the member may then be moved. Approval by the Engineer of such partial prestressing and moving shall
in no way relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for successfully constructing the members.
The cutting and release of prestressing steel in pretensioned members shall be performed in such an
order that the eccentricity of prestress will be a minimum. The prestressing steel shall be cut off flush
with the end of the member and the exposed ends of the prestressing steel shall be heavily coated with
roofing asphalt or an approved epoxy.
Post-tensioning will not be permitted until it is demonstrated that the prestressing steel is free and
unbonded in the enclosure. In addition, prior to placing forms for the closing of box girder cells, the
Contractor shall demonstrate that adjacent ducts are unobstructed.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
364 Greenbook 2021

The tensioning process, as applied to post-tensioned members, shall be so conducted that tension
being applied and the elongation of the prestressing steel may be measured and recorded at all times.
The record of gage pressures and elongations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Prestressing steel in post-tensioned members shall be tensioned by simultaneous jacking at both ends
of the assembly, except that simple span members may be tensioned by jacking from one end only.
Where jacking from one end is permitted, half of the prestressing steel in the member shall be stressed
from one end and the other half from the opposite end.
Determination of the jacking stresses shall be supported by calculations, or both calculations and
field tests when specified, prepared by the Contractor. The Contractor shall, prior to making field tests,
submit to the Engineer for approval, its calculations and details of its proposed gages and load devices
for determining the jacking load at each end of the test prestressing unit. The stress at the center will be
calculated from the average of the end test loads. Jacking stresses within 2 percent of the specified
values will be considered satisfactory.
The following friction coefficients shall be used in calculating friction losses. K represents the
wobble of the ducts, and U represents the curvature in draped cables:

TABLE 303-3.6 (A)

Type of Steel Type of Duct K U
Bright metal wire or strand Galvanized-rigid 0.0002 0.25
Bright metal bars Galvanized-rigid 0.0002 0.15

The maximum temporary tensile stress (jacking stress) in prestressing steel shall not exceed 75
percent of the ultimate tensile strength of the prestressing steel. The prestressing steel shall be anchored
at stresses (initial stress) that will result in the ultimate retention of working forces of not less than those
shown on the Plans, but in no case shall the initial stress exceed 70 percent of the ultimate tensile
strength of the prestressing steel. The value to be used for ultimate tensile strength of prestressing steel
shall be the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength, unless satisfactory evidence is furnished that
the actual ultimate tensile strength exceeds the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength. Such
evidence shall be furnished to the Engineer at the time the Contractor submits details as specified.
The loss in stress in post-tensioned prestressing steel due to creep and shrinkage of concrete, creep of
steel, and sequence of stressing shall be assumed to be 25,000 pounds per square inch (172 MPa).
The loss in stress in pretensioned prestressing steel due to creep and shrinkage of concrete,
creep of steel, and elastic compression of concrete shall be assumed to be 35,000 pounds per square
inch (241 MPa).
Longitudinal prestressing steel in pretensioned members shall not be cut or released until tests on
concrete cylinders indicate that the concrete in the member has attained a compressive strength of not
less than the value shown on the Plans or the following values, whichever is greater:

TABLE 303-3.6 (B)

Diameter of Strand, inches (mm) Compressive Strength, psi (MPa)
3/8 (9.5) 3,500 (24)
7/16 (11) 4,000 (28)
1/2 (12.5) 4,000 (28)

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 365

The working force in the prestressing steel shall be not less than the value shown on the Plans.
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Plans, the average working stress in the prestressing steel
shall not exceed 60 percent of the ultimate tensile strength of the prestressing steel.
Working force and working stress will be considered as the force and stress remaining in the
prestressing steel after all losses, including creep and shrinkage of concrete, creep of steel, losses in post-
tensioned prestressing steel due to sequence of stressing, friction and takeup of anchorages, and all other
losses inherent in the method or system of prestressing, have taken place.
The minimum clear spacing of prestressing steel at the end of pretensioned beams shall be 3 times
the diameter of the steel or 1-1/2 times the maximum size of the concrete aggregate, whichever is
greater. In post-tensioned beams, the minimum clear distance between ducts at the ends of the beam
shall be 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) or 1-1/2 times the maximum size of the concrete aggregate, whichever is
the greater.
303-3.7 Bonding and Grouting. Post-tensioned prestressing steel shall be bonded to the concrete by
completely filling the entire void space between the duct and the tendon with grout placed under pressure.
Grout shall consist of Type II Portland cement, water, and a nonshrinking or expansive admixture
conforming to 201-1.
The grout shall be mixed in mechanical mixing equipment of a type that will produce uniform and
thoroughly mixed grout. The water content shall be not more than 5 gallons per 100 pounds (42 L/100
kg) of cement and shall first be added to the mixer followed by cement and admixture. Retempering of
grout will not be permitted. Grout shall be continuously agitated until it is pumped.
The pumpability of the grout shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with the U.S. Army
Corps of Engineers Test Method CRD-C 79. The efflux time of a grout sample immediately after
mixing shall be not less than 11 seconds at zero-quiescent time. Efflux time is the amount of time that a
sample of grout requires to run out of the flow cone after the plug is pulled. Quiescent time is the
amount of time that a sample of grout remains undisturbed in the flow cone.
Grouting equipment shall be capable of grouting at a pressure of at least 100 pounds per square inch
(700 kPa) and shall be furnished with a pressure gage having a full-scale reading of not more than 300
pounds per square inch (2100 kPa).
Standby flushing equipment capable of developing a pumping pressure of 250 pounds per square
inch (1700 kPa) and of sufficient capacity to flush out any partially grouted ducts shall be provided.
All ducts shall be clean and free of deleterious materials that would impair bond of the grout or
interfere with grouting procedures. Immediately prior to the grouting, each duct shall be thoroughly
flushed with water containing 0.1 pounds (12 grams) of hydrated lime or quicklime per gallon (L) and
then blown out with oil-free air, or cleaned by another method approved by the Engineer.
All grout shall pass through a screen with 0.07 inch (1.8 mm) maximum clear openings prior to
being introduced into the grout pump.
Grout injection pipes shall be fitted with positive mechanical shutoff valves. Vents and ejecting
pipes shall be fitted with valves, caps or other devices capable of withstanding the pumping pressures.
Valves and caps shall not be removed or opened until the grout has set. Leakage of grout through
anchorage assemblies shall be prevented by mechanical capping or other positive devices capable of
withstanding the grouting pressure.
Grout shall be pumped through the duct and continuously wasted at the outlet until 15 seconds after
all visible slugs of water or air are ejected. The outlet pipe shall then be closed and the pumping
pressure held momentarily. The valve at the inlet shall then be closed while maintaining this pressure.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
366 Greenbook 2021

After post-tensioned prestressing steel has been pressure grouted, the members shall not be moved or
otherwise disturbed until at least 24 hours have elapsed.
The anchorage assemblies shall not be encased in concrete until the duct grouting has been
completed and the concrete surfaces against which the encasement is to be placed have been cleaned by
abrasive blasting to expose the aggregate.
303-3.8 Samples for Testing. Sampling and testing shall conform to ASTM A416/A416M,
A421/A421M, and as specified in this subsection.
Samples from each size, lot, and heat of prestressing steel wires and bars, from each manufactured
reel of prestressing steel strand, and from each lot of anchorage assemblies and bar couplers to be used,
shall be furnished for testing. With each sample of prestressing steel wires, bars, and strands furnished
for testing, there shall be submitted a certification stating the manufacturer’s minimum guaranteed
ultimate tensile strength of the sample furnished.
All materials for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor at its expense. The Contractor shall
anticipate and furnish far enough in advance of the need in the work to allow reasonable time for testing
and shall have no claim for additional compensation in the event its work is delayed awaiting approval.
All wire or bars, of each size from each mill lot, and all strands from each manufactured reel to be
shipped to the site, shall be assigned an individual lot number and shall be tagged in such a manner that
each such lot can be accurately identified at the Work site. Each lot of anchorage assemblies and bar
couplers to be installed at the Work site shall be likewise identified. All unidentified prestressing steel,
anchorage assemblies, or bar couplers received at the Work site will be rejected.
Samples of material and tendons, selected by the Engineer from the prestressing steel at the plant or
jobsite well in advance of anticipated use, shall be furnished by the Contractor as follows:
a) For wire or strand, 2, 7-foot (2.1 m) long samples shall be furnished for each heat or reel; for
bars, 2, 6-foot (1.8 m) long samples shall be furnished for each heat.
b) If the prestressing tendon is to be prefabricated, one completely fabricated prestressing tendon 5
feet (1.5 m) in length for each size of tendon shall be furnished, including anchorage assemblies.
If the prestressing tendon is to be assembled at the Work site, sufficient wire or strand and end
fittings to make up one complete prestressing tendon 5 feet (1.5 m) in length for each size of
tendon shall be furnished, including anchorage assemblies.
c) If the prestressing tendon is a bar, one 6-foot (1.8 m) length complete with two end anchorages
shall be furnished, and, in addition, if couplers are to be used with the bars, 2, 3-foot (1.0 m)
lengths of bar equipped with one coupler and fabricated to fit the coupler shall be furnished.
For prefabricated tendons, the Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 10 Days notice before
commencing the installation of end-fittings or the heading of wires. The Engineer will inspect all end-
fitting installations and wire headings while such fabrication is in progress at the plant and will arrange
for all testing required.
No prefabricated tendon shall be shipped to the site without first having been released by the
Engineer, and each tendon shall be tagged before shipment for identification purposes at the site. All
unidentified tendons received at the Work site will be rejected.
Jobsite or site as referred to herein shall be considered to mean the location where the members are
to be manufactured, whether at the Work site or a casting yard elsewhere.
The release of any material by the Engineer shall not preclude subsequent rejection of the material if
it is damaged in transit or later found to be defective.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 367

303-3.9 Handling. Extreme care shall be exercised in handling, storing, moving, or erecting precast
prestressed concrete members to avoid twisting, racking, or other distortion that would result in cracking or
damage to the members. Every precast prestressed member shall be handled, transported, and erected in an
upright position and the points of support and directions of the reactions with respect to the member shall be
approximately the same during transportation and storage as when the member is in its position.
After erection, the prestressed girders shall be adequately supported and braced until after the
concrete of the diaphragms or of other girder bracing members has hardened.
Precast prestressed concrete piling shall be placed in accordance with the provisions for concrete
piling as specified in 305-1.
303-3.10 Measurement and Payment. Precast prestressed concrete members, except piling, will
be paid for at the Contract Unit Price in the Bid for furnishing and erecting precast prestressed concrete
members of the various types and lengths.
Precast prestressed concrete piling will be measured and paid for as provided in 305-1.8.
Full compensation for furnishing and placing transverse connections, anchor rods, expansion joints
material, and for grouting spaces and recesses between the members shall be considered as included in
the Contract Unit Price for furnishing and erecting the member.
303-4 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION.
303-4.1 Concrete Block Masonry1.
1. Portions reprinted through courtesy of Concrete Masonry Association of California.
303-4.1.1 General. Materials for concrete block masonry shall conform to the requirements of 202-2.
303-4.1.2 Construction. All work shall be performed in a workmanlike manner and in full compliance
with the applicable building ordinances.
All masonry walls shall be laid true, level, and plumb in accordance with the Plans.
Masonry units shall be cured, dry, and surfaces shall be clean when laid in the walls.
During construction, all partially laid walls as well as units in storage shall be protected from moisture. All
concrete block units and any partially laid walls which become wet during the construction shall be permitted to
dry for at least 1 week or longer, if required by weather conditions, before recommencing work.
Proper masonry units shall be used to provide for all windows, doors, bond beams, lintels, pilasters,
etc., with a minimum of unit cutting. Where masonry unit cutting is necessary, all cuts shall be neat and
regular and edges exposed in the finished work shall be cut with a power-driven abrasive saw.
Where no bond pattern is shown, the wall shall be laid up in straight uniform courses with regular
running bond and alternate header joints in vertical alignment.
Intersecting masonry walls and partitions shall be bonded by the use of 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum-
diameter steel ties at 24 inches (600 mm) on centers (maximum).
Where stack bond is indicated on the Plans, approved metal ties shall be provided horizontally at 24
inches (600 mm) on centers (maximum).
Mortar joints shall be straight, clean, and uniform in thickness. Unless otherwise specified or
detailed on the Plans, horizontal and vertical joints shall be approximately 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick with
full mortar coverage on the face shells and on the webs surrounding cells to be filled. Units shall be laid
with “push joints”. No slushing or grouting of a joint will be permitted, nor shall a joint be made by
working in mortar after the units have been laid.
Exposed walls shall have joints tooled with a round bar (or V-shaped bar) to produce a dense,
slightly concave surface well-bonded to the block at the edges. Tooling shall be done when the mortar is

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
368 Greenbook 2021

partially set but still sufficiently plastic to bond. All tooling shall be done with a tool which compacts
the mortar, pressing the excess mortar out of the joint rather than dragging it out.
If it is necessary to move a block so as to open a joint, the block shall be removed from the wall,
cleaned, and set in fresh mortar.
303-4.1.3 Placing Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing steel shall be placed as indicated on the Plans.
Splices shall be lapped a minimum of 40 diameters, except that dowels other than column dowels need
be lapped only 30 diameters. Column dowels shall lap 50 diameters.
Outside horizontal steel shall lap around corners 40 diameters and be carried through columns unless
otherwise shown on the Plans. Inside horizontal steel shall extend as far as possible and bend into
corner core. A dowel shall be provided in the foundation for each vertical bar.
Where horizontal courses are to be filled, metal stops shall be used. Use of paper stops will not be
permitted. All horizontal reinforcing steel shall be laid in a course of bond beam blocks filled with grout.
Vertical cores containing steel shall be filled solid with grout, and thoroughly rodded.
Where knockout blocks are used, steel shall be erected and wired in place before three courses have
been laid. Vertical cores at steel locations shall be filled as construction progresses.
Where knockout blocks are not used, vertical cores at steel locations shall be filled in lifts of not
more than 4 feet (1.2 m) The maximum height of pour shall be 8 feet (2.4 m). Cores shall be cleaned of
debris and mortar and shall have reinforcing steel held straight and in place. If ordered by the Engineer,
inspection and cleanout holes shall be provided at the bottom of each core to be filled.
Reinforcing steel shall be inspected prior to placing grout.
303-4.1.4 Protection and Curing. During construction operations, all adjoining work shall be
protected from mortar droppings. Concrete block masonry shall be protected from the sun and rain.
When approved in advance by the Engineer, completed masonry construction may be protected with a
curing compound. Except in hot weather when it may be fog sprayed sufficiently to dampen the surface,
finished concrete block masonry shall not be wetted.
303-4.1.5 Measurement and Payment. Payment for concrete block masonry will be made as
shown in the Bid.
Unless otherwise specified, concrete block masonry walls will be measured parallel to the finished
grade, deducting the widths of full-height openings.
303-4.2 Brick Masonry.
303-4.2.1 Materials. Unless otherwise specified, brick masonry shall be constructed of Grade MW
brick and cement mortar as described in 202-1.
303-4.2.2 Bricklaying. Brick shall be clean, wetted immediately before laying, and shall be laid on
a full mortar bed with “push joints.” In no event will slushing or grouting of a joint be permitted, nor
shall a joint be made by working in mortar after the brick has been laid. Joints between courses of bricks
shall be of a uniform thickness of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) as nearly as possible. Joints on surfaces which are
not to be plastered, or on any surface that will be exposed upon completion of the work, shall be neatly struck
and pointed. In all cases, the work shall be well-bonded, and if new work is to be joined to the existing or
unfinished work, the contact surfaces of the latter shall first be properly cleaned and moistened.
Brickwork shall not be constructed upon a concrete foundation until at least 24 hours after such
foundation has been placed. No brick shall be laid in water nor shall water be permitted to stand or run
on any brickwork until the mortar has thoroughly set, except as provided in 303-4.2.3.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 369

303-4.2.3 Protection and Curing. During construction operations, all adjoining work shall be
protected from mortar droppings. Brickwork shall be protected from the sun and rain.
Except in hot weather when it may be fog sprayed sufficient to dampen the surface, finished brick
masonry shall not be wetted.
303-4.2.4 Measurement and Payment. Payment for brick masonry will be made as shown in the Bid.
Unless otherwise specified, brick masonry walls will be measured parallel to the finished grade,
deducting the width of full-height openings.
303-5 CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS, GUTTERS, CROSS GUTTERS, ALLEY INTERSECTIONS,
ACCESS RAMPS, AND DRIVEWAYS.
303-5.1 Requirements.
303-5.1.1 General. Concrete curbs, walks, gutters, cross gutters, alley intersections, access ramps,
and driveways shall be constructed of Portland cement concrete of the class and other requirements
specified in 201-1. The finish coat to be applied to curbs shall consist of Class “B” mortar prepared as
specified in 201-5.1. Subgrade preparation shall conform to 301-1.
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, and except as otherwise specified in 303-5.1.3, the minimum
thickness of walks shall be 3 inches (75 mm). The thickness of gutters, cross gutters, alley intersections,
access ramps, and driveway aprons shall be as shown on the Plans.
303-5.1.2 Drainage Outlets Through Curb. Where existing building drains occur along the line
of work, the new curb shall be suitably sleeved to provide for such drains. Similar sleeves shall be
installed to serve low areas on adjacent property where drainage has been affected by the work.
The location and size of the sleeves and construction of connecting sidewalk drains shall be as
shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
303-5.1.3 Driveway Entrances. Driveway entrances shall be provided in new curb at all existing
driveways along the line of the work, at locations shown on the Plans, and at such other locations as may
be designated by the Engineer.
The fully depressed curb opening at driveway entrances shall be 1 inch (25 mm) above gutter
flowline at the curb face. The top of the fully depressed portion of the curb shall be finished to a
transverse slope toward the gutter of 3/4 inch (19 mm).
Where a walk is to be constructed across driveways to commercial establishments, the thickness thereof
shall be 6 inches (150 mm) unless otherwise specified or shown on the Plans. At residential driveways, the
thickness of the walk will be 4 inches (100 mm) unless otherwise specified or shown on the Plans.
303-5.2 Forms.
303-5.2.1 Standard Forms. Forms shall be free from warp, with smooth and straight upper edges,
and if used for the face of curb, shall be surfaced on the side against which the concrete is to be placed.
Wooden forms for straight work shall have a net thickness of at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Metal forms
for such a work shall be of a gage that will provide equivalent rigidity and strength. Curb face forms
used on monolithic curb and gutter construction shall be of a single plank width when the curb face is 10
inches (250 mm) or less, except for those used on curb returns. Forms used on curb returns shall be not
less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in thickness, cut in the length and radius as shown on the Plans, and held
rigidly in place by the use of metal stakes and clamps. The curb face form shall be cut to conform
exactly with the curb face batter as well as being cut to the required length and radius. Forms shall be of
sufficient rigidity and strength, and shall be supported to adequately resist springing or deflection from
placing and tamping the concrete.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
370 Greenbook 2021

Form material shall be clean at the time it is used and shall be given a coating of light oil, or other
equally suitable material, immediately prior to the placing of the concrete.
All forms except back planks of curb shall be set with the upper edges flush with the specified grade
of the finished surface of the improvement to be constructed, and all forms shall be not less than a depth
equivalent to the full specified thickness of the concrete to be placed.
Back forms shall be held securely in place by means of stakes driven in pairs at intervals not to
exceed 4 feet (1.2 m), one at the front form and one at the back. Clamps, spreaders, and braces shall be
used to such extent as may be necessary to ensure proper form rigidity. Forms for walk, gutter, and
similar work shall be firmly secured by means of stakes driven flush with the upper edge of the form at
intervals not to exceed 5 feet (1.5 m). Form stakes shall be of sufficient size and be driven so as to
adequately resist lateral displacement.
Commercial form clamps for the curb and gutter may be used provided they fulfill the requirements
specified herein.
303-5.2.2 Slip-Forms. At the option of the Contractor and with the approval of the Engineer, slip-
form equipment may be used for the construction of concrete curb and gutter.
Slip-form equipment shall be provided with traveling side and top forms of suitable dimensions,
shapes, and strength to support the concrete for a sufficient length of time during placement to produce
curb and gutter of the required cross section. The equipment shall spread, consolidate, and screed the
freshly placed concrete to provide a dense and homogeneous product.
The slip-form equipment shall have automatic sensor controls which operate from an offset control
line. The line and grade of the slip-form equipment shall be automatically controlled.
303-5.3 Placing Concrete. Concrete shall be placed on a subgrade sufficiently dampened to ensure
that no moisture will be absorbed from the fresh concrete.
Concrete shall be placed in curb, gutter, and curb and gutter forms in horizontal layers not exceeding
6 inches (150 mm) in thickness, each layer being spaded along the forms and thoroughly tamped.
Concrete may be placed in layers of more than 6 inches (150 mm) in thickness only when authorized by
the Engineer and the spading and tamping is sufficient to consolidate the concrete for its entire depth.
After the concrete for walk has been placed, a strikeoff shall be used to bring the surface to the
proper elevation when compacted. It shall be spaded along the form faces and tamped to assure a dense
and compact mass, and to force the larger aggregate down while bringing to the surface not less than 3/8
inch (9.5 mm) of the free mortar for finishing purposes.
Concrete shall be placed in cross gutters in horizontal layers of not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in
thickness, each layer being spaded along the form faces and thoroughly tamped into a dense and compact
mass. If internal vibrators are used, the full specified thickness may be placed in one operation.
After the concrete has been placed and tamped, the upper surface shall be struck off to the specified grade.
303-5.4 Joints.
303-5.4.1 General. Joints in concrete curb, gutter, and walk shall be designated as expansion joints
and weakened plane joints.
303-5.4.2 Expansion Joints. Expansion joints shall be constructed in curb, walk, and gutter as
specified herein unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Such joints shall be filled with premolded joint
filler conforming with the requirements prescribed in 201-3.2. No such joints shall be constructed in
cross gutters, alley intersections, access ramps, or driveways except as may be approved by the Engineer.
Joints 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick shall be constructed in curb and gutter at the end of all returns except
where cross gutter transitions extend beyond the curb return, in which case they shall be placed at the

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 371

ends of the cross gutter transition. No joints shall be constructed in returns. Where monolithic curb and
gutter is constructed adjacent to concrete pavement, no expansion joints will be required except at the
EC and BC of curb returns.
Expansion joint filler 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick shall be placed in walk at the EC and BC of all walk
returns and around all utility poles which may project into the concrete along the line of the work. Joints
1/4 inch (6 mm) thick shall be constructed in walk returns between the walk and the back of curb returns
when required by the Engineer. At the EC and BC and around utility poles, the joint filler-strips shall
extend the full depth of the concrete being placed. Joint filler-strips between walk and curb shall be the
depth of the walk plus 1 inch (25 mm) with the top set flush with the specified grade of the top of curb.
All expansion joint filler strips shall be installed vertically, and shall extend to the full depth and
width of the work in which they are installed, and be constructed perpendicular to straight curb or
radially to the line of the curb constructed on a curve. Expansion joint filler materials shall completely
fill these joints to within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of any surface of the concrete. Excess filler material shall be
trimmed off to the specified dimension in a neat and workmanlike manner. During the placing and
tamping of the concrete, the filler strips shall be held rigidly and securely in proper position.
303-5.4.3 Weakened Plane Joints.
a) General. Weakened plane joints shall be straight and constructed in accordance with
Subsections b) or c) below, unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
In walks, joints shall be transverse to the line of work and at regular intervals not exceeding 10
feet (3 m). At curves and walk returns, the joint shall be radial.
In gutter, including gutter integral with curb, joints shall be at regular intervals not exceeding 20
feet (6 m). Where integral curb and gutter is adjacent to concrete pavement, the joint shall be
aligned with the pavement joints where practical.
b) Control Joint. After preliminary troweling, the concrete shall be parted to a depth of 2 inches
(50 mm) with a straightedge to create a division in the coarse aggregate. The concrete shall then
be refloated to fill the parted joint with mortar. Headers shall be marked to locate the weakened
plane for final joint finishing, which shall be accomplished with a jointer tool having a depth of
1/2 inch (12.5 mm) and a radius of 1/8 inch (3 mm). The finished joint opening shall not be
wider than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
c) Plastic Control Joint. The joint material shall be a T-shaped plastic strip at least 1 inch (25 mm)
deep, having suitable anchorage to prevent vertical movement, and having a removable stiffener with
a width of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm). After preliminary troweling, the concrete shall be parted to a
depth of 2 inches (50 mm) with a straightedge. The plastic strip shall be inserted in the impression so
that the upper surface of the removable stiffener is flush with the concrete. After floating the concrete
to fill all adjacent voids, the removable stiffener shall be stripped. During final troweling, the edges
shall be finished to a radius of 1/8 inch (3 mm), using a slit jointer tool.
303-5.5 Finishing.
303-5.5.1 General. Finishing shall be completed as specified herein for the type work being performed.
303-5.5.2 Curb. The front forms may be stripped as soon as the concrete has set sufficiently. Class
“B” mortar, as prescribed in 201-5.1 and thinned to the consistency of grout, shall be immediately
applied to the top and face of the curb. If monolithic curb and gutter is being constructed, this mortar
shall be applied to the full exposed curb face; otherwise, it shall extend 2 inches (50 mm) below the
gutter surface.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
372 Greenbook 2021

The face and top of the curb shall then be carefully troweled to a smooth and even finish; the top being
finished to a transverse slope of 1/4 inch (6 mm) toward the gutter, with both edges rounded to a radius of
1/2 inch (12.5 mm). The troweled surface shall be finished with a fine-hair broom applied parallel with the
line of the work. The edge of the concrete at all expansion joints shall be rounded to a 1/4 inch (6 mm)
radius. The surface of the work shall be finished as prescribed; after which the name of the Contractor,
together with the year in which the improvement is constructed, shall be stamped therein to a depth of 1/4
inch (6 mm) in letters not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) high, at the BC and EC of curb returns.
Joints shall conform to 303-5.4.
303-5.5.3 Walk. The forms shall be set to place the finished surface in a plane sloping up from the
top of curb 2 percent when measured at right angles to the curb.
Following placing, the concrete shall be screeded to the required grade, tamped to consolidate
the concrete and to bring a thin layer of mortar to the surface, and floated to a smooth, flat, uniform
surface. The concrete shall then be edged at all headers, given a preliminary troweling and
provided with weakened plane joints.
Walk shall be steel troweled to a smooth and even finish. All formed edges shall be rounded to a
radius of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm). Edges at expansion joints shall be rounded to a radius of 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Preliminary troweling may be done with a long handled trowel or “Fresno,” but the finish troweling,
shall be done with a hand trowel. After final troweling, walk on grades of less than 6 percent shall be
given a fine-hair-broom finish applied transversely to the centerline. On grades exceeding 6 percent,
walk shall be finished by hand with a wood float. Walk shall be remarked as necessary after final finish,
to assure neat uniform edges, joints, and score lines.
Scoring lines, where required, shall have a minimum depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) and a radius of 1/8
inch (3 mm). When longitudinal scoring lines are required, they shall be parallel to, or concentric with,
the lines of the work. Walk 20 feet (6 m) or more in width shall have a longitudinal center scoring line.
In walk returns, one scoring line shall be made radially midway between the BCR and ECR. When
directed by the Engineer, longitudinal and transverse scoring lines shall match the adjacent walk. The
Contractor shall have sufficient metal bars, straightedges, and joint tools on the Work site.
Headers shall remain in place for at least 16 hours after completion of the walk but must be removed
before the Work is accepted.
303-5.5.4 Gutter. After the concrete has been thoroughly tamped to force the larger aggregate into the
concrete and bring to the top sufficient free mortar for finishing, the surface shall be worked to a true and
even grade by means of a float, troweled with a long handled trowel or “Fresno,” and wood-float finished.
The flowline of the gutter shall be troweled smooth for a width of approximately 4 inches (100 mm) for
integral curb and gutter and 4 inches (100 mm) on either side of the flowline on cross gutters and
longitudinal gutters. The outer edges of the gutter shall be rounded to a radius of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm).
Side forms shall remain in place for at least 24 hours after completion of the gutter, but must be
removed before the work will be accepted.
Joints shall conform to 303-5.4.
303-5.5.5 Alley Intersections, Access Ramps, and Driveways. Alley intersections, access ramps, and
driveways shall be constructed as specified for concrete pavement in 302-6, except final finishing for alley
intersections, access ramps, and the sloping portion of driveways shall be done by hand with a wood float and the
remaining portion of the driveway finished as specified for walks in accordance with 303-5.5.3.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 373

303-5.6 Curing. Immediately after finishing operations are completed, curing compound conforming to
201-4.1 shall be applied.
The curing compound shall be applied in a manner to entirely cover all exposed surfaces of the
concrete with a continuous membrane.
No power equipment used for the preparation of subgrade will be permitted adjacent to concrete
curb, gutter, or alley intersections until the fourth day following placement of the concrete. The
placement of bituminous pavement adjacent to concrete curb, gutter, or alley intersections will not be
permitted until the seventh day following the placement of concrete nor will concrete paving operations
be permitted until the seventh day where placing or finishing equipment will ride on the previously
placed concrete. If admixtures, additional cement or Type III cement is used to obtain high early
strength concrete in accordance with 201-1, grading operations will be permitted on the second day
following the placement of the concrete and paving operations on the third day.
303-5.7 Repairs and Replacements. Any new work found to be defective or damaged prior to its
acceptance shall be repaired or replaced as approved by the Engineer.
303-5.8 Backfilling and Cleanup. Backfilling to the finished surface of the newly constructed
improvement must be completed before acceptance of the Work.
Upon completion of the work the surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and the site left
in a neat and orderly condition.
303-5.9 Measurement and Payment. Payment for concrete curbs, walks, gutters, cross gutters,
alley intersections, access ramps, and driveways will be made as shown in the Bid.
303-6 STAMPED CONCRETE.
303-6.1 General. Stamped concrete shall be imprinted with special tools to provide the pattern
specified. Colored stamped concrete shall also conform to 303-7.
The Contractor shall construct a sample for each pattern included in the Work. The sample shall be
a minimum of 10 square feet (1 m2) which shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer.
All other areas to be installed shall match the texture of the approved area.
All coloring and curing compounds used in the Work shall be from the same manufacturer.
303-6.2 Concrete Placement. Placing of concrete shall conform to 302-6 and 303-5. The
minimum slab thickness shall be 4 inches (100 mm). The maximum size aggregate in the top 2 inches
(50 mm) shall be 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
303-6.3 Pattern. The pattern of stamped concrete shall be implanted, indented, imprinted, or
stamped into the surface by means of forms, molds, or other approved devices. The impressions
shall be approximately 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) in width, not to exceed 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) in depth and
be ungrouted unless otherwise specified. Expansion joints and control joints shall be located so as
not to disrupt the pattern.
Joints shall conform to 303-5.4.
303-6.4 Curing. Curing shall conform to 303-1.10. Curing compound used in the Work shall be of
a single type and manufacturer.
303-7 COLORED CONCRETE.
303-7.1 General. Colored concrete shall be produced by Method A or B as specified below. The
Contractor shall provide a sample in the Work for each color specified of a size satisfactory to the
Engineer. The sample shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before proceeding with the Work.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
374 Greenbook 2021

303-7.2 Method A (Dry Shake). Color hardener shall be applied evenly to the plastic surface by a
dry shake method using approved manufacturer’s printed instructions, otherwise, it shall be applied in
two applications, wood floated after each, and troweled only after the final floating.
303-7.3 Method B (Integral Color).
a) Color Conditioning Admixture. Color conditioning admixture shall be added to the concrete in
accordance with approved manufacturer’s printed instructions. No calcium chloride shall be added
to the concrete. Other non-chloride admixtures may be added subject to approval of the Engineer.
b) Pure Mineral Pigments. Pure mineral pigments shall be added to the concrete in accordance
with approved manufacturer’s printed instructions. Other admixtures specified or approved by
the Engineer shall be added to the concrete in accordance with 201-1.2.4, except that no
calcium chloride, or other admixture containing chloride ions shall be used.
303-7.4 Curing. Colored concrete shall be cured with a liquid curing compound in matching color
and complying with the requirements of ASTM C309. The curing compound shall be applied in
accordance with approved manufacturer’s printed instructions. Curing with clear, white-pigmented or
fugitive-dye curing compounds, or with plastic or other waterproof membranes will not be allowed.
When approved by the Engineer, colored concrete may be cured by a continuous indirect fine spray of
water for a minimum of 10 Days.
303-8 PERVIOUS CONCRETE.
303-8.1 General. Pervious concrete shall conform to 201-1.1.6. Pervious concrete shall be
constructed a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) thick unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
303-8.2 Test Section. The Contractor shall construct a test section using the same equipment and
placing crew as it proposes to use for the remainder of the pervious concrete work. The test section shall be a
minimum of 225 square feet (21 m2). The test section(s) may be incorporated into the Work if so approved by
the Engineer.
303-8.3 Subgrade. The subgrade shall be compacted to a relative compaction between the
minimum specified in the Special Provisions and a maximum of 96 percent. The subgrade shall not be
treated or stabilized with Portland cement or lime.
303-8.4 Forms. Forms shall conform to 302-6.2. Forms shall be placed for the full-depth of the
thickness of pervious concrete to be constructed and be capable of supporting mechanical equipment
without deformation during or following placement operations.
303-8.5 Placement. Prior to placement, plastic pervious concrete shall have a density within ± 5
pounds per cubic foot (80 kg/m3) of that shown on the approved mix design when tested in accordance
with ASTM C1688. Placement shall conform to the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the
Plans. Placement operations shall not result in the voids becoming sealed.
Pervious concrete shall be uniformly deposited over the entire formed area. A self-propelled roller
screed shall be used for strike-off, spreading, and compaction. Hand-rodding may be used in areas
inaccessible to the roller-screed if so approved by the Engineer. Adjacent to the edge of each form, hand
tampers shall be used for compaction.
The finished surface shall not deviate more than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from a 10 foot (3 m) straightedge
laid on the surface. Surface depressions shall be corrected immediately after compaction by placing
fresh pervious concrete in the depressions and compacting using a hand tamper.
After compaction, the surface shall be protected from rapid evaporation by water fogging, covering with 1
mil polyethylene sheeting, or the application of a chemical evaporation retardant approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 375

303-8.6 Joints.
303-8.6.1 Weakened-Plane Joints.
303-[Link] General. Weakened-plane joints shall be constructed at the locations shown on the
Plans or at regular intervals not to exceed 2 times the width of the placement or 15 feet (4.6 m) on-
center, whichever is less. Joints shall be constructed to a depth of 1/4 of the thickness, or a minimum of
1-1/2 inches (38 mm), whichever is greater.
303-[Link] Construction Methods. Unless otherwise specified, weakened-plane joints shall be
constructed by one of the following methods:
a) Rolling with a roller equipped with a circumferential beveled fin immediately after compaction
and prior to curing.
b) Saw cutting as soon as the pervious concrete can be saw cut without causing raveling along the
joint edges. Only the area occupied by the concrete saw shall be uncovered and exposed.
Immediately after sawing each joint, the exposed area shall be fogged with water and re-covered
in accordance with 302-8.7.
303-8.6.2 Transverse Construction Joints. Transverse construction joints shall be constructed
whenever placement is suspended for more than 20 minutes.
303-8.7 Curing. Curing shall consist of covering the surface and, as necessary, the application of
water. Curing shall begin within 20 minutes of placement. The surface shall be securely covered with
polyethylene sheeting having a minimum thickness of 6 mils (150 µm). The cover shall be checked
daily to verify that it has not been displaced or damaged, and that condensation is evident underneath the
sheeting. Damaged sheeting shall be repaired. Displaced sheeting shall be replaced. When there is no
observable condensation, 1.5 gallons of water per square yard (5.7 L/m2) shall be applied to the surface.
303-8.8 Acceptance. Pervious concrete shall have a consistent, uniform surface with no visible excess
cement paste, tears, or gouges. Roller-constructed joints shall have smooth, rounded, and uniformly compacted
edges. Saw-cut joints shall not contain cement paste or dust nor exhibit evidence of spalling. Unless otherwise
specified in the Special Provisions, pervious concrete shall have a minimum infiltration rate of 100 inches per
hour (2540 mm/hr) when tested in accordance with ASTM C1701.
303-8.9 Measurement. Pervious concrete will be measured by the square foot (m2) for each
thickness shown on the Plans, or by the cubic yard (m3).
303-8.10 Payment. Payment for pervious concrete will be made at the Contract Unit Price per
square foot (m2) for each thickness shown on the Plans, or per cubic yard (m3), as shown in the Bid.

SECTION 304 - METAL FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION

304-1 STRUCTURAL STEEL.

304-1.1 General.
304-1.1.1 Shop Drawings. The Contractor shall, in accordance with 3-8.3, submit Shop Drawings
which show details, dimensions, sizes of material, and all information and data necessary for the
fabrication of the metal work, including full details of the match markings. Shop Drawings required to
be submitted by the Contractor shall conform to the applicable provisions of 304-1.4.
When required by the Plans or Special Provisions, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer,
before acceptance of the Work, detailed drawings of the structure to be built. Inasmuch as the drawings

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
376 Greenbook 2021

will be retained by the Agency as permanent records, they must be in the form of printable
transparencies of quality satisfactory to the Engineer.
304-1.1.2 Falsework Plans. The Contractor shall, in accordance with the provisions of 3-8.2 and
303-1.6, submit detailed Working Drawings of falsework to be used. Approval of such Working
Drawings will be based upon compliance with the design criteria set forth for falsework for concrete
structures in 303-1.6.2. Approval of falsework Working Drawings will not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for the results obtained by use of such Working Drawings. The Contractor shall be fully
responsible for providing falsework capable of supporting all loads which are applied.
304-1.2 Methods and Equipment. When requested before starting erection of any structural
members, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully as to the methods it proposes to follow and the
amount and character of equipment proposed for use in such work. The use of such methods and
equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, but this approval shall not be considered as
relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for the safety of its methods or equipment, or for carrying
out the work in full accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
304-1.3 Inspection. An inspector or other authorized representative of the Engineer will examine
the metals and metal items to be fabricated before they are worked in the shop and may exercise constant
surveillance over the work during its progress, with full power to reject all materials or workmanship not
conforming to the Plans and Specifications.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer 5 Days minimum advance notice before commencement of
the fabricating operations to permit ample time for the inspection of the materials.
The Engineer shall be furnished complete copies of all mill reports prior to commencing fabrication.
The Contractor shall furnish ample means and assistance for sampling all materials. Arrangements shall
be made for the Engineer to have free access at all times to any portion of the workshops where work is
being done under these specifications.
No fabricating, machining, cutting, welding, assembling, or painting shall be done except with the
knowledge of the Engineer. Any work done otherwise will be subject to rejection.
The acceptance of any material or finished member by the Engineer shall not preclude subsequent
rejection if it is later found to be defective. Rejected material and workmanship shall be promptly
repaired or replaced by the Contractor.
Samples of materials, except castings, shall be cut from stock designated by the Engineer or will be
selected from items furnished. Gray iron, steel, and bronze castings shall be cast with test coupons.
304-1.4 Steel Structures. Fabrication and erection of structures shall conform to “Specifications
for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings” of the American Institute of
Steel Construction (AISC), except for any conflicts with the applicable building code which may exist,
and except that the following sections are considered as excluded from the AISC Specifications:
a) Section 1.1 Plans and Drawings
b) Section 1.4 Material
c) Section 1.24 Shop Painting
d) Section 1.26 Inspection
The subject matter excluded from the foregoing AISC Specifications shall be superseded by the
applicable provisions of these Specifications.
In addition to complying with AISC Specifications, when work involving the use of the high strength
bolts is included in the Work, the design and construction of such work shall conform to ASTM A325.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 377

The design, fabrication and erection of structural steel and all similar work incidental or appurtenant
to steel construction for highway bridges shall be performed and accomplished in accordance with the
latest Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges adopted by the American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials.
The Plans or Special Provisions will designate the members to be painted or galvanized.
304-1.5 Workmanship.
304-1.5.1 General. Workmanship and finish shall be equal to the best general practice in modern
steel fabricating shops.
Before being laid out or worked, rolled material shall be straight. If straightening is necessary, it
shall be done by methods approved by the Engineer. Kinks and bends in the material will be cause for
rejection. Heat shrinking of low alloy structural steels will not be permitted.
If straightening is necessary in the field, only methods approved by the Engineer shall be used.
Following the straightening of a bend or buckle, the surface of the metal shall be carefully inspected
for evidence of fracture.
Portions of the work exposed to view shall be finished neatly. Shearing, flame cutting, and chipping
shall be done carefully and accurately. Undercut gusset plates will not be accepted. All sharp corners
and edges, and edges that are marred, cut, or roughened in handling or erection, shall be slightly rounded
by grinding or other suitable means.
304-1.5.2 Holes for Bolts or Rivets.
General. Holes shall be either punched full size, punched and reamed, or drilled. The finished hole
shall be 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) larger than the nominal diameter of the rivet.
Holes punched full size shall have all burrs and sharp edges removed. The diameter of the die shall
not exceed that of the punch by more than 3/32 inch (2.4 mm).
a) Shop Rivets. Holes for shop rivets shall be subpunched, or subdrilled at the fabricator’s option,
1/4 inch (6 mm) less in diameter than that of the finished holes, and shall be reamed to size with
the parts assembled, with the following exceptions:
1) Holes in material thicker than 7/8 inch (22 mm) shall not be punched; however, at the
fabricator’s option, they may be subdrilled to the diameter specified for subpunching or may
be drilled full size with the parts assembled, provided that the parts are adequately bolted or
clamped together.
2) Holes in rolled beams and plate girders, including stiffeners and active fillers at bearing
points, may be subpunched 1/8 inch (3 mm) less in diameter than that of the finished holes;
and reamed to size (after assembly) in material not thicker than the nominal diameter of the
rivet less 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3) Holes in material not more than 7/8 inch (22 mm) thick, for rivets which do not transfer
stress caused by external vertical loading, may be punched full size or, at the fabricator’s
option, may be subpunched 1/8 inch (3 mm) less in diameter than the finished holes and
reamed to size after assembly. This applies to holes for stitch rivets, lateral, longitudinal, or
sway bracing and their connecting material, lacing, stay plates, diaphragms which do not
transfer shear or stress, inactive fillers, and stiffeners not at bearing points. However, holes
through assembled material shall not pass through both reamed plies and plies punched full
size unless the reamed holes have been subpunched for the fabricator’s convenience, or the
assembled material is not over five plies thick, of which the main material consists of not
more than three plies.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
378 Greenbook 2021

b) Field Rivets. Holes for field rivets shall be subpunched or subdrilled at the fabricator’s option,
1/4 inch (6 mm) less in diameter than that of the finished holes, and shall be reamed to size
through steel templates with hardened steel bushings, with the following exceptions:
1) Field splices in plate girders and in the chords of trusses shall be reamed with the members
assembled. Other field connections may be reamed with the members assembled, at the
fabricator’s option. Chord splices in truss members shall, in all cases, be reamed or drilled
with at least three abutting sections assembled and with milled ends of compression chords in
full bearing.
2) Assemblies, such as floor systems to girders, complete trusses, rolled beam spans connected
by diaphragms, and portals to trusses shall be reamed with the members assembled if so
indicated on the Plans, and otherwise at the fabricator’s option.
3) Field connections of lateral, longitudinal, or sway bracing shall conform to the requirements
of holes for shop rivets.
4) Holes in material thicker than 7/8 inch (22 mm) shall not be punched, but shall be subdrilled
to the diameter specified for subpunching, or drilled full size with parts assembled.
The accuracy of the punching shall be such that for any group of holes when assembled, 75 percent
shall admit a rod equal to the diameter of the cold rivet at right angles to the plane of the connection.
Otherwise the holes shall be reamed. When the extent of the reaming is such that the holes cannot be
properly filled or accurately adjusted after reaming, the faulty member shall be discarded and replaced.
Mispunched members shall not be corrected by welding without the approval of the Engineer.
304-1.5.3 Reamed Work. Reaming shall be done after the pieces forming a member are assembled
and so firmly bolted together that the surfaces are in close contact. Burrs and sharp edges of each
reamed hole under both rivet heads shall be removed with a countersinking tool making 1/16 inch (1.5
mm) fillets. The pieces shall be taken apart before riveting, if necessary, and any shavings removed. If
it is necessary to take the members apart for shipping or handling, the pieces reamed together shall be so
marked that they may be reassembled in the same position. Reamed parts shall not be interchanged.
304-1.5.4 Drilled Holes. Drilled holes shall be 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) larger than the nominal diameter
of the rivet. Burrs and sharp edges of each drilled hole under both rivet heads shall be removed with a
countersinking tool making a 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) fillet. Burrs on the outside surfaces shall be removed.
If members are drilled while assembled, the parts shall be held securely together while the drilling is
being done.
Drilled holes shall be drilled to finish size while all of the thicknesses of metal are assembled, or
subdrilled and reamed as required for punched and reamed holes.
Holes shall be clean-cut, without torn or ragged edges. Holes that must be enlarged to admit rivets
shall be reamed. Drilling shall be done accurately.
304-1.5.5 Assembling Steel.
a) General. Steel parts shall be assembled in the shop or in the field in accordance with 304-1.5.5
b) and 304-1.5.5 c).
b) Shop Work. At the time of assembling and riveting, bolting, or welding, steel surfaces in
contact for shop or field connection shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, loose mill scale, dirt,
grease, or other material foreign to the steel. No paint shall be applied to contact surfaces prior
to riveting, bolting or welding.
Riveted or bolted trusses, continuous plate girder and I-beam spans, skew portals, skew
connections, rigid frames, bents, and towers shall be completely assembled in the shop and

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 379

accurately adjusted to line and camber. Holes for field connections shall be drilled or reamed
while assembled. Holes for other connections, except those in lateral, longitudinal, and sway
bracing shall be drilled or reamed in the shop with the connecting parts assembled; or drilled or
reamed to a metal template with hardened bushing, without assembling.
Long-span truss work shall be assembled in lengths of not less than three abutting panels, the
members adjusted for line and camber, and holes for field connections drilled or reamed while
assembled.
Field riveted or bolted joints for girders shall be completely assembled, the members adjusted for
line and camber, and holes for field connections drilled or reamed while assembled.
Field butt joints for welded girders shall be completely assembled with the members adjusted for
line and camber and prepared to fit for welding.
All machinery shall be completely assembled. All bearing shall be fitted to the specified
clearances and alignment. Gear reductions and all line gears shall have gear center distances set
and the gears properly matchmarked.
c) Field Work. The parts shall be accurately assembled as shown on the Plans and all matchmarks
shall be followed. The material shall be carefully handled so that no parts will be bent, broken,
or otherwise damaged. Hammering which will injure or distort the members will not be
permitted. Bearing surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the
members are assembled. Unless erected by the cantilever method, truss spans shall be erected on
blocking so placed as to give the trusses proper camber. The blocking shall be left in place until
the tension chord splices are fully riveted or bolted and all other truss connections pinned and
bolted. Rivets or bolts in splices of butt joints of compression members and rivets or bolts in
railings shall not be driven or torqued until the span has been erected in place, temporarily
bolted, and the member is supporting its own weight. Splices and field connections shall have
1/2 of the holes filled with bolts and cylindrical erection pins (in approximately equal numbers)
before riveting or bolting.
Splices and connections carrying traffic during erection shall have 3/4 of the holes so filled.
Fitting-up bolts shall be of the same nominal diameter as the rivets, and cylindrical erection pins
shall be 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) larger.
The drifting done during assembling shall be only such as to bring the parts into position, and not
sufficient to enlarge the holes or distort the metal.
If any holes must be enlarged to admit the rivets, they shall be reamed.
Connecting parts assembled in the shop for the purpose of reaming holes in field connections
shall be matchmarked, and a diagram showing such marks shall be furnished to the Engineer.
304-1.5.6 Riveting.
a) Shop Work. Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a light cherry-red color and shall be driven
while hot. Rivets, when heated and ready for driving, shall be free from slag, scale, and other
adhering matter. When driven, they shall completely fill the holes. The heads shall be of
approved shape, full size, neatly formed, concentric with the shank, free from fins, and in full
contact with the surface of the member.
Loose, burned, or otherwise defective rivets shall be replaced. In removing rivets, care shall be
taken not to injure the adjacent metal. Caulking or recupping will not be permitted.
Rivets shall be driven by direct-acting riveters where practicable. If rivets are driven with a
pneumatic hammer, a pneumatic bucker shall be used if practicable.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
380 Greenbook 2021

b) Field Work. Pneumatic hammers shall be used for field riveting. Connections shall be
accurately and securely fitted up before the rivets are driven.
Drifting shall be only such as to draw the parts into position and not sufficient to enlarge the
holes or distort the metal. Unfair holes shall be reamed or drilled. Rivets shall be heated
uniformly to a light cherry-red color and shall be driven while hot. They shall not be overheated
or burned.
Rivet heads shall be full and symmetrical, concentric with the shank, and shall have full bearing
all around. They shall not be smaller than the heads of the shop rivets. Rivets shall be tight and
shall grip the connected parts securely together. Cup-faced dollies, fitting the head closely to
ensure good bearing, shall be used. Sufficient air compressor capacity shall be maintained to
keep the air pressure at 100 pounds per square inch (700 kPa) at the hammers.
Caulking or recupping will not be permitted. In removing rivets, the surrounding metal shall not
be injured. The removal of loose or defective rivets by flame cutting will not be permitted,
except upon written permission of the Engineer.
304-1.5.7 Bolted Connections. Bolts shall be unfinished bolts, turned bolts, or high strength steel
bolts, as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
Unfinished or turned bolts shall have hexagonal heads and nuts and shall be of such length that they
will extend entirely through the nut but not more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) beyond. Bolts in tension shall
have 2 nuts.
Unfinished bolts in shear shall have not more than one thread within the grip. The diameter of the
unfinished bolt shall not be more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) smaller than the diameter of the hole.
The threads of turned bolts shall be entirely outside the grip. The holes for turned bolts shall be
reamed and the bolts shall be finished to provide a driving fit. Approved nut locks or flat washers 1/4
inch (6 mm) thick shall be furnished, as specified.
Bolted connections using high strength steel bolts shall conform to ASTM A325.
Holes for bolted connections using high strength steel bolts shall conform to the requirements
specified in 304-1.5.2, except as follows: Holes that are required to be subdrilled and reamed may be
subdrilled 1/8 inch (3 mm) less in diameter than that of the finished hole, provided that the offset of any
hole in any ply measured from the outer ply after the hole is finished does not exceed 1/32 inch (0.8 mm)
and that no more than 20 percent of the holes shall provide as much offset as 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
304-1.6 Joint and Connections.
304-1.6.1 Edge Planing. Sheared edges of plates more than 5/8 inch (16 mm) in thickness and
carrying calculated stress shall be planed to a depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm).
304-1.6.2 Facing of Bearing Surfaces. Surfaces of bearing and base plates and other metal bearing
surfaces that are to come in contact with each other, with ground concrete surfaces, or with asbestos
sheet packing shall be finish-machined flat to within 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) tolerance in 12 inches (300
mm) and to within 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) tolerance overall. Surfaces of bearing and base plates and other
metal bearing surfaces that are to come in contact with preformed fabric pads, elastomeric and elastic
bearing pads, or Portland cement grout shall be finish-machined flat to within 1/8 inch (3 mm) tolerance
in 12 inches (300 mm) and to within 3/16 inch (5 mm) tolerance overall.
Steel slabs, where not in contact with other metal bearing surfaces, may be heat-straightened in lieu
of machining, provided the above tolerances are met.
304-1.6.3 Abutting Joints. When shown on the Plans, abutting joints shall be faced and brought to
an even bearing. Where joints are not faced, the opening shall not exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 381

304-1.6.4 End Connection Angles. Floor beams, stringers, and girders having end connection
angles shall be built to exact length back to back of connection angles. If end connections are faced, the
finished thickness of the angle shall not be less than that shown on the detail drawings.
304-1.6.5 Web Plates. In girders having no cover plates and which are not to be encased in
concrete, the top edge of the web plate shall not extend above the backs of the flange angles and shall be
not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) below at any point.
304-1.6.6 Fit of Stiffeners. End stiffener angles of girders and stiffener angles intended as supports
for concentrated load shall be milled or ground to secure an even bearing against the flange angles. All
fillers under stiffener angles shall fit sufficiently tight to exclude water after being painted.
304-1.6.7 Pin and Bolted Connections. Pilot and driving nuts shall be used in driving pins. Pins
shall be so driven that the members will take full bearing on them. In field assembling, the pin nuts on
pin connections and the bolts on bolted connections shall be screwed up tight and the threads, except
when high strength bolts are used, burred at the face of the nuts with a pointed tool.
304-1.6.8 Pins and Rollers. Pins and rollers shall be accurately turned to the dimensions shown on
the drawings and shall be straight, smooth, and free from flaws. The final surface shall be produced by a
finishing cut.
Pins and rollers more than 7 inches (175 mm) in diameter shall be forged and annealed.
In pins larger than 9 inches (230 mm) in diameter, the forging shall be permitted to cool to a
temperature below the critical range under suitable conditions to prevent injury by too rapid cooling, and
a hole not less than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter shall be bored full length along the axis of the pin
before being annealed.
Pin holes in structural members shall be bored true to the specified diameter, smooth and straight, at
right angles with the axis of the member and parallel with each other unless otherwise required. The
final surface shall be produced by a finishing cut.
The distance outside to outside of holes in tension members and inside to inside of holes in
compression members shall not vary from that specified more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). Holes in built-
up members shall be bored after riveting, bolting, or welding is completed.
The diameter of the pin hole shall not exceed that of the pin by more than 1/50 inch (0.5 mm) for
pins 5 inches (125 mm) or less in diameter, or 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) for larger pins.
304-1.6.9 Screw Threads. Screw threads shall make close fits in the nuts and shall be Unified
Standard Series conforming to ANSI B1.1-1960.
304-1.7 Bearings and Anchorage. Anchor bolts shall be either headed bolts, installed with or
without pipe sleeves, or swage bolts installed in drilled holes, as detailed on the Plans. The anchor bolts
shall be carefully installed to permit true positioning of the bearing assemblies.
When anchor bolts are installed in pipe sleeves, the pipes shall be completely filled with grout at the
time the grout pads are constructed or at the time the bearing assemblies or masonry plates are placed.
Swage bolts installed in holes shall be either sulphured in or grouted in as shown on the Plans.
All bearing assemblies shall be set level and to the elevations shown on the Plans. Adjustments in
the horizontal positions of bearing assemblies shall be made for temperature as directed by the Engineer.
In conformance with the details shown on the Plans, masonry plates and the bearing plates of bearing
assemblies shall be set on ground concrete surfaces, on preformed fabric pads, or on grout pads.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
382 Greenbook 2021

Grout to be placed below masonry plates or bearing plates of the bearing assemblies and in anchor
bolt sleeves shall consist of Class “E” mortar. Concrete areas to be in contact with the grout shall be
cleaned of all loose or foreign matter that would in any way prevent bond between the mortar and the
concrete surfaces and shall be kept thoroughly saturated with water for a period of not less than 24 hours
immediately prior to placing the grout. The grout shall contain only sufficient moisture to permit
packing and shaping. The grout shall completely fill the anchor bolt sleeves and shall be tightly packed
under the masonry or bearing plates to provide full bearing. After placing, all exposed surfaces of the
grout pads shall be kept covered with a heavy thickness of burlap saturated with water for a period of 3
Days. All improperly cured or otherwise defective grout shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
Immediately before setting bearing assemblies or masonry plates directly on ground concrete
surfaces, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the surfaces of the concrete and the metal to be in contact
and shall apply a coating of non-sag polysulfide or polyurethane caulking conforming to Federal
Specification TT-S-230, Type II, to contact areas to provide full bedding of the metal in the caulking.
Preformed fabric pads shall be furnished and installed at the locations and in accordance with the
details shown on the Plans.
The preformed fabric pads shall be composed of multiple layers of 8 ounces per square yard (270
g/m2) cotton duck impregnated and bound with high-quality natural rubber or of equivalent and equally
suitable materials compressed into resilient pads of uniform thickness. The number of plies shall be
sufficient to produce the specified thickness, after compression and vulcanizing. The finish pads shall
withstand compression loads perpendicular to the plane of the laminations of not less than 10,000
pounds per square inch (70 MPa) without extrusion or detrimental reduction in thickness.
304-1.8 Expansion and Rotation Assemblies. Before leaving the shop or foundry, the rockers or
roller nests shall be completely assembled with the bearing plates for checking and approval by the
Engineer.
304-1.9 Welding. All welding shall conform to the requirements of the Structural Welding Code
AWS D1.1, and these Specifications.
Inspection of welding made to control the quality of welds and workmanship will be performed in
accordance with the requirements of the AWS. All welding may be subject to radiographic or other
nondestructive testing. Such nondestructive testing will be performed without charge to the Contractor
except that if a weld is shown to be defective, all costs involved in reinspection shall be borne by the
Contractor.
Weld metal shall be sound throughout, except that very small gas pockets and small inclusions of
oxide or slag may be permitted if well dispersed and if none exceeds 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in greatest
dimension, and provided further that the sum of the greatest dimension of all such defects in any 1
square inch (625 mm2) weld area does not exceed 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 383

All welding shall be performed in such a manner that the Brinnell hardness of the weld metal and
heat-affected zone is within the following limits:

Minimum Brinnell Hardness

In US Std. Units = Minimum specified tensile strength of parent metal (psi)
500
In SI Units = Minimum specified tensile strength of parent metal (MPa)
3.5
Maximum Brinnell Hardness
In US Std. Units = Maximum specified or tested tensile strength of parent metal (psi) + 50
500
In SI Units = Maximum specified or tested tensile strength of parent metal (MPa) + 50
3.5
All welding of structural steel (ASTM A36, A242, and A441) shall be performed by either the
submerged or gas-shielded arc process, or with low hydrogen electrodes. Low hydrogen electrodes for
welding low alloy steel shall conform to the requirements of the Military Specifications for Electrodes
(mineral covered, low hydrogen) for Welding Medium and High Tensile Steels, MIL-E-18038 (Ships).
All welding of low alloy structural steel shall be qualified by procedure tests before fabrication is
commenced.
Low hydrogen electrodes shall be stored for holding in an approved low hydrogen oven at a
temperature of from 300°F to 400°F (150°C to 205°C) to control the moisture in the coating on the
electrode.
Low hydrogen electrodes not packaged in a moisture-proof container shall be restored by rebaking
for 2 hours or more at a temperature of from 450°F to 500°F (232°C to 260°C) in an approved oven.
Low hydrogen electrodes which have been removed from their moisture-proof containers shall be
stored in an approved oven at a temperature of from 300°F to 400°F (150°C to 205°C) after rebaking.
Areas contiguous to welding operations shall be preheated to a minimum temperature of 300°F
(150°C) when necessary to prevent distortion of weld cracking. Preheating to a temperature in excess of
400°F (205°C) will not be required.
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions, bearing assemblies that
are to be machined after welding shall be stress-relieved by heat treatment before machining, in
accordance with the “Structural Welding Code” AWS D1.1.
Portions of members in bearing assemblies or in direct bearing shall be straightened, planed, or
otherwise corrected after fabrication as necessary to provide fill bearing on bearing assemblies or bearing
areas on level bearing plates.
Where the end of a stiffener plate is shown “tight fit” on the Plans, the end of the plate shall be so
fitted that it bears on the beam flange with at least point bearing. Local clearances between the end of
the plate and the flange shall not exceed 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions, erection bolts required
for welded splices or welded connections may be left in place and the ends of all such erection bolts
which project beyond the nut shall be burned off flush with the face of the nut. Where the bolt does not
project, the end of the bolt and nut shall be tack welded to prevent loosening of the nut. Burning off
projecting bolt ends and tack welding shall be performed prior to painting.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
384 Greenbook 2021

Welders, welding operators, and tackers shall be prequalified in accordance with the specifications of
AWS D1.1 and shall produce written evidence of qualification satisfactory to the Engineer.
Electroslag and electrogas welding will not be permitted without the written approval of the
Engineer.
304-1.10 Torch Cutting. The use of a cutting torch is permissible if the metal being cut is not
carrying stress during the operation. The radius of re-entrant flame-cut fillets shall be as large as
possible, but never less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). To determine the net area of members so cut, 1/8 inch (3
mm) shall be deducted from the flame-cut edges. Stresses shall not be transmitted through a flame-cut
surface.
Where cutting with a torch, cuts shall be true to line with a maximum deviation of 1/16 inch (1.5
mm). All burned edges shall be finished by grinding.
304-1.11 Bent Plates. Cold-bent, load-carrying, rolled steel plates shall conform to the following:
a) They shall be taken from the stock plates so that the direction of bending will be at right angles
to the direction of rolling.
b) The radius of bend, measured to the concave face of the metal, shall not be less and preferably
shall be greater than shown in the following table, in which “T” is the thickness of the plate:
c) Before bending, the corners of the plate shall be rounded to a radius of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)
throughout that portion of the plate at which the bending is to occur.
If a shorter radius is essential, the plates shall be bent hot, and such plates shall conform to
requirement a) above.

TABLE 304-1.11
Angle Through Which Plate is Bent Minimum Radius
61° to 90° 1.0 T
91° to 120° 1.5 T
121° to 150° 2.0 T

304-1.12 Measurement and Payment.

304-1.12.1 General. Steel structures will be paid for at a Contract Unit Price per pound (kg) for
structural steel, and at Contract Unit Prices per pound (kg) for cast steel and cast iron or as indicated in
the Bid. The pay quantities shall be determined by scale weights or, if permitted by the Engineer, by
computed weights obtained as provided in this 304-1.12.3. The Contractor will be paid only for material
actually used in the completed structure.
Computed weights shall be used to determine pay quantities of alloy and carbon steel when members
contain both alloy and carbon steel.
The weight of erection bolts, paint, boxes, crates, and other containers used for packing and the
materials used for supporting members during transportation will not be included in the weights of
material for pay purposes.
The weight of structural steel to be paid for shall not exceed the computed weight by more than 1-1/2
percent. The weight of cast steel or cast iron to be paid for shall not exceed the computed weights by
more than 7-1/2 percent. If the scale weight of any member is less than 97-1/2 percent of the computed
weight of that member, the member will be rejected and will not be included in pay quantities.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 385

If computed weights are used, the weight to be paid for will be the calculated weight as established
by the Engineer, and no allowance will be made for weight in excess thereof.
When the estimated quantities of structural steel, cast steel, and cast iron required for the work as
described in the Specifications and shown on the Plans as final quantities, said estimated quantities shall
be the final quantities for which payment will be made unless the dimensions of the work as shown on
the Plans are revised by the Engineer. If such revisions result in an increase or decrease in the quantity
of structural steel, cast steel, or cast iron, the final quantities for payment will be revised accordingly.
The estimated quantities of structural steel required for the work shall be considered as approximate
only. No allowance will be made in the event quantities determined from the details and dimensions as
shown on the Plans do not equal the estimated quantities. These provisions concerning basis of payment
shall not be construed to waive the specification of ASTM A6/A6M.
304-1.12.2 Scale Weights. Scale weight shall be actual weight of the members as determined on
accurate scales. When carload or truck weights are used, a record shall be submitted to the Engineer,
which shall contain an itemized statement of the dunnage and the members included in each lot.
For any protective coating, scale weights will be reduced as follows:
0.25 percent for each coat of oil
0.5 percent for each shop coat of paint
3.5 percent for hot-dip galvanizing
Scale weights of members will not be required when the quantities of structural steel are designated
on the Plans or in the Specifications as final quantities.
304-1.12.3 Computed Weights. The computed weight shall be obtained by the use of the following
rules and assumptions:
a) The density of structural and cast steel shall be assumed at 0.2833 pounds per cubic inch (7849
kg/m3). The density of cast iron shall be assumed at 0.2604 pounds per cubic inch (7208 kg/m3).
b) The weights of rolled shapes and of structural plates shall be computed on the basis of their
nominal weights and dimensions, as shown on the Shop Drawings, deducting for copes, cuts, and
open holes, exclusive of rivet and bolt holes.
c) Since no deduction is made in the computed weight of structural steel members by reason of rivet or
bolt holes, the computed weights of the completed members will be obtained by adding to the above
weights the weights of the heads of all rivets and bolts in the structure, both shop-driven and field-
driven. Full compensation for all rivets and bolts furnished in excess of the actual number in place in
the completed structure shall be considered as included in the Contract Unit Price per pound (kg) for
structural steel in place and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
386 Greenbook 2021

Should the computed weights be used to determine pay quantities, the weight of rivet heads shall
be assumed as follows:

TABLE 304-1.12.3 (A)

Diameter of Rivet Weight of 100 Heads
inches (mm) lbs (kg)
1/2 (13) 5.0 (2.3)
5/8 (16) 9.7 (4.4)
3/4 (19) 16.0 (7.3)
7/8 (22) 24.0 (10.9)
1 (25) 35.0 (15.9)
1-1/8 (29) 49.0 (22.2)
1-1/4 (32) 78.0 (35.4)

Should computed weights be used to determine pay quantities of high strength steel bolts, the
weights of portions of bolts outside the grip (including 2 washers and 1 nut) shall be assumed
as follows:

TABLE 304-1.12.3 (B)

Weight of 100 Bolts
Diameter of Bolt
(Each complete with 2 washers and one nut, less grip
inches (mm)
length) lbs (kg)
5/8 (16) 46 (21)
3/4 (19) 71 (32)
7/8 (22) 105 (48)
1 (25) 145 (66)
1-1/8 (29) 194 (88)
1-1/4 (32) 259 (117)

d) The weight of castings and fillets shall be computed from the dimensions shown on the Shop
Drawings, deducting for all openings or cuts in the finished casting.
e) The weight of pins and rollers shall be computed from the dimensions shown on the Shop
Drawings, deducting for all holes, openings, pockets, and metal removed by machine finishing.
Pilot nuts and driving nuts for each size of pin shall be furnished for erection work and the weights of
such nuts will not be included in the weight of structural steel for which payment is made.
f) The weight of bolts, cap screws, anchor bolts, nuts, washers, except as limited by c) above, and
anchor pipe sleeves remaining in the finished structure shall be computed on the basis of their
nominal weights and dimensions as shown on the Shop Drawings.
g) No allowance will be made for the weight of paint in computing the weights of metal for payment.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 387

h) The weight of shop an field fillet welds shall be assumed as follows:

TABLE 304-1.12.3 (C)

Size of Filled Weld Weights
inches (mm) lbs per ft (kg/m)
3/16 (5) 0.08 (0.098)
1/4 (6) 0.14 (0.141)
5/16 (8) 0.22 (0.251)
3/8 (10) 0.30 (0.392)
1/2 (13) 0.55 (0.663)
5/8 (16) 0.80 (1.005)
3/4 (19) 1.10 (1.417)
7/8 (22) 1.50 (1.899)
1 (25) 2.00 (2.453)

i) If computed weights are used to determine the pay quantities of galvanized metal, the weight to
be added to the calculated weight of the base metal for the galvanizing shall be determined from
the table of weights of zinc coatings specified by ASTM A153.
304-1.12.4 Payment. Structural steel, cast steel, cast bronze, or cast iron will be paid for by the
pound as shown in the Bid. If the Plans or Specifications require the metal to be galvanized, the weight
of the metal shall include the weight of the zinc coating.
Full compensation for furnishing and placing sheet packing, preformed fabric pads, elastomeric or
elastic bearing pads, and caulking, and for grouting masonry or bearing plates as shown on the Plans,
shall be considered as included in the Contract Unit Price per pound for structural steel.
Cleaning and painting structural steel will be paid for as provided in 310.
304-2 METAL HAND RAILINGS.
304-2.1 General. The materials for metal hand railings shall conform to 206-5.1. Except where a
Standard Plan is referred to on the Plans, the Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings showing the details
and dimensions of all metal hand railings.
304-2.2 Fabrication. Welding shall conform to the requirements of the “Structural Welding
Code” AWS D1.1 for steel, and to the requirements of the “Specifications for Aluminum
Structures” of the Aluminum Association, for aluminum alloys. All exposed welds shall be ground
flush with adjacent surfaces.
Railing panels shall be straight and true to dimensions. Adjacent railing panels shall align with each
other with a variation not to exceed 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Joints shall be matchmarked.
For structures on curves, either horizontal or vertical, the railing shall conform closely to the
curvature of the structure by means of series of short chords. The lengths of the chords shall be the
distance center to center of rail posts.
Steel railing units shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with 210-3.
Completed aluminum railing units shall be anodized after fabrication conforming to the Aluminum
Association Standard for Anodized Architectural Aluminum, Class I Anodic Coating, AA-C22-A41.
304-2.3 Installation. The railing shall be erected in accordance with the Plans on anchor bolts, or
in holes formed by inserts provided in the concrete railing base to receive the railing posts. Sheet metal
inserts shall be removed before the erection of the railing.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
388 Greenbook 2021

No railing shall be erected on the structure until the sidewalk to which it is to be attached is
completed and all falsework supporting the system is released.
The railing shall be carefully erected, true to line and grade. Posts and balusters shall be vertical
with the deviation from the vertical for the full height of the panel not exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm).
After erecting the railing, any abrasions or exposed steel shall be repaired in accordance with 210-3.5.
304-2.4 Measurement and Payment. The various types of railing will be measured and paid for by
the linear foot (m) from end to end along the face of the railing, including terminal sections.
304-3 CHAIN LINK FENCE.
304-3.1 General. Materials for chain link fence shall conform to 206-6.
304-3.2 Fence Construction. Posts shall be spaced at not more than 10 foot (3 m) intervals,
measured from center to center of posts and shall be vertical.
Corner posts shall be installed at changes in fence line where the horizontal angle of deflection is greater than
30 degrees. Slope posts shall be installed at changes in surface grade greater than 5 percent.
Footings for fence posts shall be concrete of the class specified in Table 201-1.1.2. Footings shall be
crowned at the top to shed water. Line post footings for fabric 5 feet (1.5 m) or less in height shall have
a minimum depth of 30 inches (750 mm) and a minimum diameter of 8 inches (200 mm). Line post
footings for fabric more than 5 feet (1.5 m) in height shall have a minimum depth of 36 inches (900 mm)
and a minimum diameter of 8 inches (200 mm). All other footings, unless otherwise shown on the Plans
or specified in the Special Provisions, shall have a minimum depth of 36 inches (900 mm) and a
minimum diameter of 12 inches (300 mm).
End and gate posts shall be braced to the nearest line post. Corner and slope posts shall be braced to the
nearest line post on each side. The bracing shall consist of a horizontal brace 12 inches (300 mm) below the top
of the fence fabric and a diagonal tension member. The tension member shall be a 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) steel rod
with turnbuckle or other approved tightening device. When a top rail is specified, the horizontal brace shall be
omitted at intermediate, slope, end, and corner posts.
End and gate posts shall be braced to the nearest line post. Corner and slope posts shall be braced to the
nearest line post on each side. The bracing shall consist of a horizontal brace 12 inches (300 mm) below the top
of the fence fabric and a diagonal tension member. The tension member shall be a 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) rod with
turnbuckle or other approved tightening device. When a top rail is specified, the horizontal brace shall be
omitted at intermediate, slope, end, and corner posts.
Unless otherwise specified, all fences shall be installed with a top rail and a bottom tension wire. When the
top rail is omitted, a top and bottom tension wire shall be used.
The fabric shall be placed on the outward facing side of the posts and shall be installed so that the top edge
projects over the top rail of the fence and the bottom tension wire by 3 inches (75 mm). The fabric shall be
stretched taut and securely fastened to the posts, the top rail, and the bottom tension wire. The tension wire shall
be installed parallel to the line of the fabric. The bottom of the fabric shall extend to within 2 inches (50 mm) of
the natural ground or paved surface. High points of ground shall be excavated to clear the bottom of the fabric
and depressions shall be filled and compacted to within 1 inch (25 mm) of the bottom of fabric.
The fabric shall be fastened to end, corner, slope, and gate posts with 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick by 3/4 inch (19
mm) wide carbon steel tension bars and the tension bars shall be fastened with steel tension bar bands spaced at
16 inches (400 mm) intervals. Steel tension bar bands shall have a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) and a
minimum width of 1 inch (25 mm). The fabric shall be fastened to line posts, top rails, and tension wires with tie
wires or metal bands. Tie wires or metal bands shall be placed on line posts at intervals of approximately 16
inches (400 mm), and on top rail and tension wire at intervals of approximately 24 inches (600 mm).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 389

304-3.3 Installation of Gates. The widths of any gates to be installed shall be as shown on the Plans.
Gates with fabric 7 feet (2 m) or more in height shall have a horizontal stiffener. Vertical stiffeners
shall be installed at a maximum of 8-foot (2.4 m) centers. A 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) adjustable tension rod
shall be installed on all gates over 4 feet (1.2 m) in width.
The corners of gate frames shall be fastened together and reinforced with a fitting designed for the
purpose or by welding. All welds shall be ground smooth.
Chain link fence fabric shall be attached to the gate frame by the use of tension bars and tie wires as
specified for fence construction, and suitable tension connectors spaced at approximately 16-inch (400
mm) intervals.
The swing gates shall be hung by at least 2 steel or malleable iron hinges, designed to securely clamp
to the gate post and permit the gate to be swung back 180 degrees.
Gates shall be provided with a combination steel or malleable iron catch and locking attachment of
approved design. Stops to hold gates open and a center rest with catch shall be provided where required.
304-3.4 Measurement and Payment. Chain link fence will be measured parallel to the ground
slope along the line of the completed fence, deducting the widths of gates and openings.
Gates will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price for each size of gate required by the Plans, which
price shall include full compensation for furnishing the gates together with all necessary fittings and
hardware, and doing all the work involved in installing the gate complete in place. If double gates are
required, each double gate will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price and such unit price shall include
furnishing and installing both leaves.
Full compensation for clearing the line of the fence and disposing of the resulting material,
excavating high points in the existing ground between posts, excavating and furnishing and placing
concrete footings, connecting new fences to structures and existing fence as shown on Plans and any
other related work shall be considered as included in the Contract Unit Price per linear foot (m) of fence
and no additional compensation will be made therefore.
304-4 STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATE PIPE AND ARCH CONSTRUCTION.
304-4.1 General. The materials for structural steel plate pipe and arches shall be as shown on the
Plans or specified in the Special Provisions and as specified in 207-12.
Damage to galvanized surfaces during construction shall be repaired in accordance with 210-3.5.
Damage to other coatings shall be repaired in accordance with the coating requirements for the original
material. Asphalt mastic coating in accordance with 207-11.5.4 may be applied after field assembly of
the structure.
304-4.2 Structures and Footings. Footings and arch bearings shall be constructed as shown on the
Plans. Where shown on the Plans, inlet and outlet structures shall be constructed in connection with
structural steel plate installations. When such structures are constructed, the ends of plates shall be
placed flush or cut off flush with the structures face, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
304-4.3 Plate Assembly. Structural steel plates shall be assembled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. A copy of the manufacturer’s instructions shall be furnished to the
Engineer prior to assembling the plates. Each side of the arch shall rest on a galvanized steel angle or
channel anchored to the footings. When plates of 2 dissimilar thicknesses are involved in one cross
section of an installation, the thickness of structure steel plates will be specified in the Plans or in the
Special Provisions.
Distorted circular plate pipes shall be placed with the major axis vertical. When distortion is
accomplished by use of field devices, they shall not be removed until the supporting earthfill is

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
390 Greenbook 2021

completed, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. The devices shall be removed prior to
construction of inlet or outlet structures and before completion of the work.
The method for distorting plates in the field shall conform to details shown on the Plans. The
vertical diameter throughout that portion of the pipe between outer shoulder lines of the roadway shall be
increased to the approximate percentages listed in the following:
Pipes using 0.280 inch or 0.249 inch (7.11 mm or 6.32 mm) top and side plates .......... 1%.
Pipes using 0.218 inch or 0.188 inch (5.54 mm or 4.78 mm) top and side plates ...........2%.
Pipes using 0.168 inch, 0.138 inch, or 0.109 inch (4.27 mm, 3.31 mm, or 2.77 mm)
top and side plates .................................................................................................3%.
Between the outer shoulder lines of the roadway and the outer ends of the pipe, the distortion may be
decreased uniformly to zero.
304-4.4 Measurement and Payment. Measurement and payment will be as specified in the
Special Provisions.
304-5 SECURITY FENCING.
304-5.1 General. Security fencing shall conform to 206-6.9, the Plans, and the Special Provisions.
Security fencing shall completely enclose all open excavations and remain in place until backfill has
been placed to the approximate level of the adjacent ground.
304-5.2 Payment. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, payment for security
fencing shall be included in the various Bid items that require security fencing.

SECTION 305 - PILE DRIVING AND TIMBER CONSTRUCTION

305-1 PILE DRIVING.

305-1.1 General. Piles shall be accurately located, and driven either vertically or to the prescribed
batter as indicated on the Plans. No greater variation from the vertical or specified batter line than 1/4
inch per foot (20 mm/m) of length will be permitted. Piles driven with greater variation and those
seriously damaged in driving shall be removed or cut off, and replaced with new piles. Should any pile
be heaved by the subsequent driving of adjacent piles it shall be redriven.
The pile tip elevations shown on the Plans are approximate, and are to be used as a basis for
establishing quantities for piling, including exploratory piles, for bidding purpose only.
When required in the Special Provisions, one pile of the type selected or designated for the Work
shall be driven in each pier and abutment area as an exploratory pile. The location of these piles will be
determined by the Engineer.
Exploratory piles shall be driven to determine the length and penetration that will be required for the
balance of the piles. No piles other than exploratory piles shall be driven at each pier or abutment until
such determination has been made by the Engineer, and has been reported to the Contractor.
The conditions under which the exploratory piles are to be driven shall be as ordered by the
Engineer. These exploratory piles shall be furnished and driven by the Contractor, and under normal
circumstances shall be left in place and utilized as one of the specified piles.
Exploratory piles shall be driven with the same size and type hammer operating with the same
effective energy and efficiency as that to be used in driving the remainder of the piles.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 391

The Engineer will specify the tip elevation to which the piling shall be driven for each pier or
abutment. All piles shall be driven to the tip elevation established by the Engineer, or deeper if
necessary, to develop the bearing value as determined by the formula prescribed in 305-1.5.
Excavations required in the areas through which the piles are to be driven shall be made before any
pile is driven. No excavation may be made below the bottom of the pile footing elevation, unless
approved by the Engineer.
When piles are to be driven through the bridge approach embankment and the depth of the
embankment at the pile location is in excess of 5 feet (1.5 m), the pile shall be driven in a hole drilled
through the embankment. The hole shall have a diameter of not less than the butt diameter of the pile
plus 6 inches (150 mm). After driving the pile, the annular space around the pile shall be filled to
ground surface with dry sand or pea gravel.
No piles shall be driven within 25 feet (7.5 m) of any concrete that has not attained a minimum
compressive strength of 2,000 pounds per square inch (14 MPa).
To eliminate hazard to life and to preclude dirt or debris from falling or being thrown into them, the
tops of driven pile shells or drilled holes shall be securely covered immediately upon withdrawal of the
mandrel or drilling equipment.
305-1.2 Driving Equipment. Pile hammers shall be approved types that develop sufficient energy
to drive the pile at a penetration rate of not less than 1/8 inch (3 mm) per blow at the required bearing
value, and shall develop energy per blow at each full stroke of the piston of not less than 1 foot-pound
for each pound (3 Joules for each kilogram) of weight driven. Vibratory pile hammers may be used only
when approved by the Engineer.
Drop hammers may be used on timber piles only. Drop hammers shall weigh not less than 3,000
pounds (1350 kg) and shall be equipped with proper leads and hoisting equipment to handle the work
efficiently. The fall of the hammer shall not exceed 10 feet (3 m).
Steam or air hammers shall be furnished with boiler or air capacity at least equal to that specified by
the manufacturers of the hammers being used. The boiler or compressor shall be equipped at all times
with an accurate pressure gage. The valve mechanism and other parts of steam or air hammers shall be
maintained in first-class condition so that the length of stroke and number of blows per minute for which
the hammer is designed can be obtained at all times. Steam or air hammers not meeting the
Specifications shall be removed from the Work.
When necessary to obtain the specified penetration and with the approval of the Engineer, the
Contractor may be required to supply and operate one or more water jets and pumps; or to furnish the
necessary drilling apparatus and drill holes and drive the piles therein as specified in 305-1.3.
The use of jets at locations where the stability of embankments or other improvements would be
endangered will not be permitted. Jetting normally will not be permitted in cohesive soils. All jetting
must be suspended and the pile driven for the last 3 feet (1 m) to specified bearing.
The cost of any jetting or drilling that may be required shall be included in the Contract Unit Price
for driving piles, or for other applicable items of work.
The use of followers, underwater hammers, or hammers not in leads will not be permitted unless
authorized by the Engineer. When a follower or underwater hammer is authorized, the first pile in each
bent shall be furnished sufficiently long for it to be driven without a follower or underwater hammer, and
the bearing value and penetration shall be determined from this pile.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
392 Greenbook 2021

305-1.3 Drilled Holes.

305-1.3.1 Driven Piles. When approved by the Engineer, piles may be driven in predrilled holes.
The holes shall have a diameter not greater than the diameter of the pile at ground surface. The depth of
the predrilled hole shall be adjusted by the Contractor (as directed by the Engineer) as the work proceeds
in order to maintain adequate bearing. Piles shall be driven sufficiently to secure full bearing. Minimum
penetration of the pile below the bottom of the predrilled hole shall be 5 feet (1.5 m) unless otherwise
authorized by the Engineer.
305-1.3.2 Drilled Holes for Cast-in-Place-Piles. Holes for cast-in-place concrete piles shall be
drilled dry to the tip elevations shown on the Plans or determined by the Engineer. All holes shall be
inspected for straightness prior to placing concrete therein. When viewed from the top, more than one-
half of the entire bottom area must be visible.
305-1.3.3 Drilling Material. All loose material existing at the bottom of the hole after drilling
operations have been completed shall be removed before placing concrete in the hole.
Material resulting from drilling holes shall be disposed of as provided in 3-12.1.
305-1.3.4 Water. The use of water for drilling operations, or for any other purpose where it may
enter the hole, will not be permitted. Surface water shall not be permitted to enter the hole and all water
which may have infiltrated into the hole shall be removed before placing concrete therein.
305-1.3.5 Casings. Suitable casings shall be furnished and placed when required to prevent caving
of the hole before concrete is placed therein. Casing used in drilling operations shall be removed from
the hole as concrete is placed therein. The bottom of the casing shall be maintained not more than 5 feet
(1.5 m) nor less than 1 foot (0.3 m) below the top of the concrete during withdrawal and placing
operations, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Separation of the concrete during withdrawal
operations shall be avoided by hammering or otherwise vibrating the casing.
305-1.3.6 Reinforcing Cage. The reinforcing cage shall be placed and secured symmetrically about
the axis of the pile and shall be securely blocked to clear the sides of the hole.
305-1.3.7 Concrete. Care shall be exercised to ensure that the concrete in the hole is dense and
homogeneous. Vibration of the concrete during placing will not be required. After the hole has been
filled with concrete, the top 10 feet (3 m) of the concrete, or the length of the reinforcing, whichever is
greater, shall be vibrated.
305-1.4 Driving. During driving operations, the pile heads shall be protected and held in position
by the use of a steel driving block or anvil. Timber piles shall be shaped to closely fit the driving head.
The heads of the piles may be protected by means of heavy steel or wrought iron rings. The heads of
concrete piles or casings shall be protected from direct impact of the hammer by a cushion block which
shall be maintained in good condition during the entire driving operation. This cushion block shall be
arranged so that any reinforcing bars projecting above the piles will not be displaced or damaged in
driving. For driving steel H-beam piles and shells without a mandrel for cast-in-place concrete piles,
steel combination driving heads and pilots shall be used. The driving heads shall closely fit the top of
the steel pile or shell and shall extend down the sides of the pile at least 4 inches (100 mm). Piles
materially out of line, as determined by the Engineer, shall be pulled and replaced.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 393

305-1.5 Bearing Value. Piles shall be driven to the penetration and bearing value shown on the
Plans as a minimum. Timber piles shall not be driven to a bearing value exceeding 20 tons (180 kN).
The bearing value shall be determined from the applicable formula in the following schedule:

For piles driven with a drop hammer

2WL
U.S. Standard Measures Equation: P=
s+1

WL
Metric Equation: P=
6 (s + 2.54)

For piles driven with a single acting steam or air hammer

2WL 2E
U.S. Standard Measures Equations: P= or P=
s + 0.1 s + 0.1

WL E
Metric Equations: P= or P=
6 (s + 2.54) 6 (s + 2.54)

For piles driven with a double acting steam or air hammer

2L (W + ap) 2E
U.S. Standard Measures Equations: P= or P=
s + 0.1 s + 0.1

L (W + ap) E
Metric Equations: P= or P=
6 (s + 2.54) 6 (s + 2.54)

Where:
P= Safe bearing load developed by the pile in pounds (kN).
W= Weight of the hammer in pounds (N).
L= Length of stroke or height of fall of the hammer in feet (meters).
s= Penetration of the pile into the ground per blow in inches (mm) taken as the average over the
last 10 blows. Penetration shall be measured at a time when there is no appreciable rebound
of the hammer and the preceding blow was struck upon a sound pile head or driving block.
a = Effective area of the piston in in2 (m2).
p = Mean effective steam pressure in the case of steam hammers or means effective air pressure
in the case of air hammers, in psi (pascals).
E = Manufacturer’s rating of energy developed by the hammer in foot-pounds (joules).

305-1.6 Cutoff and Extension. Timber piles which are to be capped shall be accurately cut off so
that true bearing is obtained on every pile without the use of shims. Other timber piles shall be cut off
on the square at the elevation designated. Piles inaccurately cut off shall be replaced. Splicing of timber
piles will not be permitted, except upon written permission of the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
394 Greenbook 2021

Except for piles that are to be capped with concrete, the tops of treated piles, after cutoff, shall be
treated as specified in 204-2.3.
Concrete piles shall be cut off at such elevations that they will extend into the cap or footing as
indicated on the Plans. Concrete piles may be cast the full length of the reinforcing bars, provided that
the concrete is cut off to expose the steel as shown on the Plans after the piles have been driven. When
concrete piles are driven or cut off below the elevation of the bottom of the cap, the pile section shall be
extended to the elevation of the bottom of the cap by means of a reinforced concrete extension
constructed in accordance with the details shown on the Plans. Concrete shall be removed from the end
of the pile to expose sufficient reinforcing steel to permit a lap of at least 35 diameters.
Steel shells or concrete casings for cast-in-place concrete piles shall be cut off at the designated
elevations. The work of cutting off precast concrete piles or concrete casings shall be performed in such
a manner as to avoid spalling or damaging the pile below cutoff. In case of such damage, the pile shall
be replaced or repaired as required by the Engineer.
All cut off lengths of piling shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of
outside the Work area.
305-1.7 Load Testing. If load tests are required, they shall be performed on the exploratory piles. The
loading shall not be applied until 48 hours after the pile is driven or, in the case of cast-in-place piles, the
concrete has attained a minimum compressive strength of 2,000 pounds per square inch (14 MPa).
A loading test shall consist of the continuous application of a load of twice the design load to the pile
being tested. The pile shall be considered to have a bearing value equal to the design load if the
permanent settlement produced by such test loading is not greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the loading tests shall be completed before the
remaining piles are cast or driven.
When a loading test is required, the Contractor shall provide suitable facilities and equipment by
means of which a prescribed test load can be transmitted vertically to each pile to be tested. Provisions
for varying the applied load shall also be made, and the loads must be in known and measurable
increments, applied axially to the pile.
The marks, gages, dials, or other instruments of any loading equipment required to determine
settlement of the pile, shall be arranged so as to provide convenient observation thereof without danger
to the observer or the equipment. All test equipment shall be accurately calibrated and shall be approved
by the Engineer.
The test loads shall be applied under the direction of the Engineer and at such rate or in such
increments as he may specify. When a load test of a pile is commenced, the test shall be continuous, and
the Contractor shall furnish all facilities on a 24-hour-day, 7-day-week basis until the test is completed.
Forty-eight hours after all deflection and settlement has ceased, or sooner if directed by the Engineer, the
test load shall be removed at such rate or in such increments as the Engineer may direct. If the results of
the above-described operations indicate that excessive permanent settlement of the test pile has occurred,
the pile shall be driven to such additional depths as the Engineer may specify, and the above-described
test loading operations repeated. Each complete operation, which shall include loading and unloading as
above-prescribed, shall be considered as an individual test.
305-1.8 Payment.
305-1.8.1 General. Timber, steel, and concrete piles will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per
linear foot (m) for furnishing piling and the Contract Unit Price per pile for driving piles. Load tests will
be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per load test. Test piles that become a part of the completed

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 395

structure will be paid for at the Contract Unit Prices for furnishing piling and for driving piles. No
payment will be made for piles rejected prior to driving or for piles which are driven out of place or are
damaged in handling or driving.
305-1.8.2 Payment for Furnishing Piles. The length of timber, steel, and concrete piles to be
paid for shall be the total length in place of the completed work, measured from the tip of pile to the
plane of pile cutoff, except when otherwise specified that the Engineer will determine the length of
pile to be furnished.
The Contract Unit Price paid per linear foot (m) for furnishing timber, concrete, or steel piling shall
include full compensation for furnishing the piles at the site for driving, including steel shells and
concrete casings and the filling materials for cast-in-place concrete piles, and constructing reinforced
concrete extensions as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
Payment for furnishing piles shall also include full compensation for the attaching and fitting of steel
shoes when they are specified for timber piles, and the furnishing and attachment of brackets, lugs, core
stoppers, and cap plates necessary, including fins, brackets, plates, or other devices ordered by the
Engineer to increase the bearing value of steel piles.
If the Contractor manufactures concrete piles to the full length of the reinforcement bars to facilitate
driving, no payment will be made for that portion over Plan length where concrete must be removed in
order that the bars may project as shown on the Plans.
305-1.8.3 Payment for Driving Piles. The Contract Unit Price per pile for driving piles shall
include full compensation for doing all the work involved in driving timber, concrete, and steel piles;
driving steel shells or concrete casings for cast-in-place concrete piles; drilling holes for concrete piles
cast in drilled holes; placing concrete for cast-in-place concrete piles; and cutting off piles, all complete
in place to the required bearing and penetration as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
Full compensation for all jetting, drilling, or other work necessary to obtain the specified
penetration and bearing of the piles, for drilling holes through embankment and filling the space
remaining around the pile with sand or pea gravel, for disposing of material resulting from drilling
holes, for splicing steel piles, and for all excavation and backfill involved in construction of concrete
extensions as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, shall be considered as included in the
Contract Unit Price for driving piles.
305-2 TIMBER STRUCTURES AND TIMBER CONSTRUCTION.
305-2.1 General. Timber structures erected under these specifications shall conform to the
dimensions and details of design shown on the Plans.
305-2.2 Materials. Materials shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Timber and lumber that is stored prior to its use shall be neatly piled on skids to raise it from the
ground, and shall be protected from the sun when so required. The materials shall be stored or piled in
such a manner to permit ready access for the purpose of inspection.
The use of cant hooks, peavies, or other pointed tools and hooks, will not be permitted in the
handling of structural timber, lumber, or piles. Precautions shall be exercised in handling treated
material to prevent damage to the surface thereof to the extent that untreated wood is exposed. Any
piece so damaged will be rejected.
If treated timber or piling is cut after treatment, such cuts shall be treated in accordance with 204-2.3.
This requirement shall also apply to any surface that has become abraded to the extent of exposing
untreated wood. All borings and holes in such material shall be similarly treated, and holes which are

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
396 Greenbook 2021

not to be used for rods, bolts, pins, screws, spikes, and the like, or which will not subsequently be
otherwise closed, shall be tightly filled with treated plugs.
Timber for floors and decks, and that which is to be used in the construction of split ring or shear
plate connected trusses, shall be well seasoned and thoroughly air dried before being placed or
incorporated in the work. This requirement shall apply to treated material as well as to that which is
untreated.
305-2.3 Workmanship. Workmanship shall be first class throughout. Framing shall be true and
exact and none but thoroughly competent workers shall be employed or engaged in connection with the
erection of any structure under these specifications. All lumber and timber shall be cut and framed to a
close fit and shall have even bearing over the entire contact surfaces. No shimming will be permitted in
making joints. All members shall be true to size for the full depth thereof.
Holes for drift pins in untreated lumber shall be bored with a bit 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) less in diameter
than the pin or dowel. Holes for drift pins and dowels in treated lumber shall be bored with a bit of the
same diameter as the pin or dowel. Holes for truss rods or bolts shall be bored with a bit 1/16 inch (1.5
mm) larger than the rod or bolt. Holes for lag screws shall be bored with a bit not larger than the base of
the thread. In small timbers where the prevention of splitting is necessary, holes shall be bored for
spikes with a bit having a diameter not larger than that of the spike.
In the installation of metal timber connectors, care shall be exercised to ensure that the connector is
installed concentric with its corresponding bolt; and if more than one connector bolt is installed in any
individual joint, all bolts in such joint shall be drawn up to an even and uniform tension. The grooves
for split-ring and shear-plate connectors shall be carefully cut to a uniform width and depth for the full
perimeter therefore. The dimensions of these grooves, and the manner and means of cutting, shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer of the particular connector to be installed, and any special tool or
equipment used in cutting the grooves shall be operated in the manner and at the speed similarly
recommended. Toothed-ring and spiked-grid connectors shall be installed by means of pressure
equipment of a type intended for the purpose. However, split-ring connectors shall not be forced on, but
shall be expanded to such an extent as to readily slip over the core formed by the groove without
damaging the wood.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, all bolts shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter or larger and
shall be of sufficient length to project beyond the nut when the nut is drawn tight. Bolts shall be fitted at
each end with either a malleable iron (ogee) washer or a steel plate at least 3-inch-square (75 mm x 75
mm) and not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick, or as otherwise shown on the Plans.
305-2.4 Framing. Mudsills shall be firmly and evenly bedded on solid material. Sills and caps
shall have a full, even bearing on the pedestals, posts, or piles and shall be secured in place as indicated
on the Plans.
Bents shall be accurately aligned before the bracing is placed. Bracing shall be fastened at the ends
and at each intersection by bolts. Bracing shall be of such length as will provide a minimum distance of
8 inches (200 mm) between the outside bolt and the end of the brace. Treated posts or piles shall not be
cut to accommodate the bracing. Treated filler blocks shall be used if necessary to fill any space that
may occur between the bracing and the member of the bent.
In placing joists, the best edge shall be placed down. The elevation of the tops of adjacent joists
shall not vary more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Outside joists shall have butt joints, Interior joists shall be
lapped and shall extend the full width of the cap to obtain full bearing. Bridging between joists shall be
solid and fastened to the joists near the top of the block and on each side of the bottom of the block.
Bridging shall be accurately cut to fit closely between the joists.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 397

Trusses, when completed, shall show no irregularity of line. Chords shall be straight and true from
end to end in horizontal projection, and in vertical projection shall show a smooth curve through panel
points conforming to the correct camber. Uneven and rough cuts at the points of bearing will be cause
for rejection of the piece containing the defect.
Laminated bridge floors shall be constructed as shown on the Plans. The planks shall be laid with
the best edge down.
Spiking of deck planking in roadway areas of bridges and similar structures shall be accomplished by
the means of an air hammer equipped with a suitable driving head so designed and constructed as to
ensure that the spikes are driven to sufficient depth to draw the planking tightly to the joints without
damaging or abrading the surface of the plank.
305-2.5 Painting. The railing of timber bridges, including the posts, the entire outer edge of bridge
decks, except treated surfaces, and any other surfaces indicated on the Plans to be painted, shall be
painted as specified in 210-1.5 and 310.
The surface of wooden guard rails above the ground shall be painted as prescribed in 210-1.5 and 310.
The lumber shall be cut to fit and the entire surface shall be given the specified prime coat. The
remaining coats shall be applied after the structure has been erected.
305-2.6 Measurement and Payment. Timber structures will be paid for as provided in the Bid.
Where board measure is used as the basis of payment, the quantity to be paid for will be determined
from actual (nominal) widths and thicknesses and the actual lengths of the pieces in the finished
structure, except that in the case of laminated timber flooring, the number of laminations to be paid for
shall be the required number of the size specified after dressing and the length of each lamination shall
be considered as the full width or length of the floor.
The Contract Unit Price per board measure, per linear foot (m) of structure, or the lump sum, shall
include full compensation for furnishing all nails, hardware, paint, and wood preservative.

SECTION 306 - OPEN TRENCH CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION

306-1 GENERAL. This section includes specifications for trench excavation, construction of
buried conduits, testing, backfill, and resurfacing.
306-2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, AND PROTECTION OF PIPELINE
MATERIALS, FITTINGS, VALVES, AND APPURTENANCES.
306-2.1 General. Delivery, storage and handling of pipeline materials, fittings, valves and
appurtenances shall conform with the pipe-specific installation instructions shown in Tables 306-2.1 (A)
and 306-2.1 (B). Instructions shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with 3-8.4.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
398 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 306-2.1 (A)

Delivery, Storage, and
Material Handling Reference
Gravity Pipe Material Specification Specification
Vitrified Clay Pipe 207-8 ASTM C12 Section 8
Nonreinforced Concrete Pipe 207-1 ASTM C1479
Reinforced Concrete Pipe 207-2 ASTM C1479
Lined Reinforced Concrete Pipe 207-3 ASTM C1479
Cast Iron Soil Pipe 207-9 California Plumbing Code
Chapters 3 and 7
Corrugated Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches 207-11 ASTM A798 Section 8
Structural Steel Plate Pipe and Pipe Arches 207-12 ASTM A807
Corrugated Aluminum Pipe and Pipe Arches 207-13 ASTM B788
Structural Aluminum Plate Pipe and Arches 207-14 ASTM B789
ABS Solid Wall Pipe 207-15 ASTM D2321 Section 8
ABS or PVC Composite Pipe 207-16 ASTM D2321 Section 8
PVC Plastic Sewer Pipe 207-17 ASTM D2321 Section 8
Annular HDPE Pipe with Smooth Interior and Corrugated Exterior 207-18 ASTM D2321 Section 8
Polyethylene Solid-Wall Pipe 207-19 ASTM D2321 Section 8
FRPM Pipe 207-20 ASTM D2321 Section 8 or
AWWA M45

TABLE 306-2.1 (B)

Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Pressure Pipe Material Material Specification Reference Specification
Ductile Iron Pipe 209-1 AWWA C600 and AWWA M41 Chapter 11
Steel Pipe 209-2 AWWA C604 or AWWA M11 Chapter 12
Concrete Pressure Pipe 209-3 AWWA M9 Chapter 13
PVC Pressure Pipe 209-4 AWWA C605 or AWWA M23 Chapter 6
HDPE Pressure Pipe 209-5 AWWA M55 Chapter 7
Fiberglass Pressure Pipe 209-6 AWWA M45 Chapter 6
Valves, Hydrants, and Appurtenances 212 Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions

306-2.2 Shipment and Delivery.

306-2.2.1 General. Shipment and delivery to the Work site shall conform to 3-12.4 and the following.
306-2.2.2 Factory Testing. In accordance with 4-3, pipe, valves, motors, actuators and mechanical
equipment shall be operated and tested at the factory before shipping.
306-2.2.3 Packaging. Pipeline materials, fittings, valves and appurtenances shall be delivered to the
Work site in the manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled packaging, containers, or bundles. Packages,
containers, or bundles shall be tagged or labeled to identify the contents and equipment of which the
contents form a part.
306-2.2.4 Lubricated Components. Oil or grease-lubricated gearing, bearings and components shall
be shipped with an oil-soluble protective coating which shall provide protection for one year after
completion of the Work and conform to the manufacturer’s operation, maintenance, and warranty
instructions. Oil-soluble coatings for parts which will be in contact with potable water shall conform to
NSF 60 or 61 as appropriate.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 399

306-2.2.5 Shipping Records. The Contractor shall maintain records of deliveries showing the
Contractor's order number, purchase order number, and equipment item number. Labeling or shipping tags
shall be included in the records. The records shall be furnished to the Engineer for review if so requested.
306-2.3 Storage. Pipeline materials, fittings, valves, and appurtenances shall be stored at the Work
site in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Unless otherwise specified in the delivery, storage, and handling Reference Specification shown in
Table 306-2.1 (A) or Table 306-2.1 (B), storage shall conform to the following requirements:
a) Products shall be stored in a protected dry area at a temperature between 35°F (2°C) and 110°F (43°C).
b) Exposed metals shall be protected from moisture, rust and corrosion, even when such items may
be sandblasted or otherwise cleaned before painting. Any corrosion in evidence prior to
completion of the Work shall be removed, or the product shall be removed or replaced.
c) Items not designed for outdoor exposure shall be stored off-ground and under cover. Items with
factory-applied primers or non-cementitious coatings shall be stored off-ground.
d) Fasteners and connectors shall be stored in their original unopened containers until used.
e) Stored products shall be covered with a tarpaulin or other covering. Coverings shall be secured
in-place.
f) Plastic and ultraviolet-sensitive items shall be covered.
g) Products shall be stored so as to preserve their quality and fitness in a location facilitating
inspection. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage or loss to products until completion
of the Work.
h) Products shall be protected against damage from improper handling, improper storage, vandalism
or theft.
i) Flammable products shall be stored in conformance with applicable safety codes for storage of
flammable materials.
j) Stringing of pipe and appurtenances along right of way shall be done in a manner that will not
interfere with the requirements of Part 6.
k) Exterior surfaces of delivered items shall be free from imperfections that render products unfit
for service.
l) The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing if any delivered or stored product is damaged.
Damaged products shall not be repaired without the Engineer’s prior written approval.
306-2.4 Handling.
306-2.4.1 General. Products shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's installation
instructions. Items weighing over 100 pounds (45 kg) shall be lifted only at points designated by the
manufacturer. Products shall not be dropped, dragged, bent, or handled in a manner that causes
abrasions, bruises, cracks, mars, scars, scratches, or other damage. Padded slings and hooks shall be used
for lifting as needed to prevent damage. Mishandled products will not be accepted.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
400 Greenbook 2021

306-2.4.2 Coated Products. Coated pipe, valves, and other products shall be lifted, lowered or
suspended using rubber or canvas belt slings or pneumatic-tired cradles. The sling width shall equal or
exceed the pipe or product diameter. Coated products shall not be handled using ropes, hooks, chains,
calipers, or cables.
Coated products shall be stored on padded or wooden skids.
306-2.4.3 Pre-Installation Inspection. Before installation, each product shall be inspected for
damage, defects, completeness, and correct operation.
306-2.4.4 Pre-Installation Cleaning. Before installation, joints and interiors of piping materials,
fittings, valves, and appurtenances shall be swabbed to remove foreign matter and contaminants.
306-2.4.5 Protection of Machined Surfaces. Machined surfaces and shafting shall be kept clean
and protected from corrosion by using the type and amount of coating specified in the manufacturer’s
warranty requirements.
306-2.5 Protection of Pipe Interiors. Completed portions of pipeline shall not be used as a drain
for removing water that has infiltrated into the trench. Pipe interiors shall be maintained in a clean
condition free from foreign materials until completion of the Work.
For pressure pipe and clean water gravity pipe, pipe ends, fitting ends, valve ends, and equipment
openings shall be covered with rubber, plastic, or canvas. Open ends of pressure pipe or clean water
gravity pipe with tight-fitting caps or plugs shall be closed when pipe installation is not in progress.
These provisions shall apply during work breaks in excess of 40 minutes, as well as overnight.
For potable water pipelines, failure to provide adequate protection will result in the Engineer
requiring additional bacteriological testing to be performed in accordance with 306-[Link].
306-2.6 Compliance with Warranty Instructions. The Contractor shall conform to the submitted
operation, maintenance, and warranty instructions. These instructions shall be deemed to be a part of the
manufacturer’s installation instructions. The Contractor shall perform the Work in such manner that the
applicable manufacturer’s warranty is not voided by its activities.
306-2.7 Shutdowns of Existing Pipelines.
306-2.7.1 General. All work needed to shut down an existing pipeline for the Contractor will
be performed by forces employed by the affected utility owner unless otherwise specified. The
Contractor shall not operate valves, hydrants or other appurtenances owned by the affected utility
unless otherwise specified.
306-2.7.2 Preparation. The Contractor shall be prepared to employ pumping and dewatering
equipment if a watertight seal cannot be achieved by the utility owner or Agency forces using
existing valves.
306-2.7.3 Temporary Bypasses. When main shutdowns in excess of 4 hours are required, the
utility owner will determine what temporary bypasses or service connections will be required unless
specified in the Special Provisions.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary water service. Piping, hoses and associated
equipment used shall be flushed and disinfected in accordance with 306-8.9.4.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 401

306-2.8 Advance Preparation before Connecting to Existing Pipelines. When connections are to
be made to any existing pipe, conduit, or other structure or appurtenance, where the Plans require
verification, or where the actual elevation, size, material, joint type, or position is not shown on the Plans
or cannot be ascertained with certainty without excavation, the Contractor shall excavate for and expose
the existing improvement before ordering materials or laying any pipe or conduit.
The Contractor shall provide advance notice to the Engineer and allow a minimum 2-hour window
for the Engineer to inspect the existing pipe or conduit before connection materials are ordered. The
Contractor shall prepare a sketch of the materials found at the proposed point of connection and submit
to the Engineer along with any proposed changes to the specified connection requirements and/or to the
lines and grades shown on the Plans. Any resultant changes shall be approved by the Engineer before
ordering materials.
306-3 TRENCH EXCAVATION.
306-3.1 General. Pursuant to Section 6500 of the Labor Code, prior to commencing the excavation
of a trench 5 feet (1.5 m) in depth or greater and into which a person will be required to descend, the
Contractor shall first obtain a permit to do so from the State of California Department of Industrial
Relations, Division of Occupational Safety and Health.
Excavation shall include the removal of materials of any nature which interfere with the Work.
Excavation for appurtenant structures, such as but not limited to, manholes, transition structures,
junction structures, vaults, valve boxes, catch basins, thrust blocks, and boring pits shall, for the purpose
of shoring and bracing, be deemed to be in the category of trench excavation.
306-3.2 Removal of Surface Improvements. Removal of surface improvements shall conform to 401.
306-3.3 Removal and Abandonment of Existing Conduits and Structures. When conduits have
been or are proposed to be abandoned and are found to interfere with construction of new conduit, the
interfering portion(s) shall be removed and the remaining open portion(s) securely sealed. Where the
inside diameter of the existing conduit is 4 feet (1.2 m) or less, the seal shall consist of a wall of concrete
not less than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or a wall of brick and mortar 8 inches (200 mm) thick. For larger
openings, details of the seal shall be as shown on the Plans. In the case of catch basin connector pipes,
the inlet opening to the mainline pipe shall also be sealed.
When a sanitary sewer or storm drain is to be abandoned within specified limits, all structures and
appurtenances within said limits shall also be abandoned.
Structures shown on the Plans to be removed shall be removed to the full depth of the structure,
including its foundation. Voids resulting from abandoned or removed structures shall be filled with
material approved by the Engineer compacted to a relative compaction of 90 percent.
Cover sets, gratings, and other steel components (except reinforcing bars) of removed or abandoned
structures shall be salvaged. The Contractor shall contact the component owners and, if requested, shall
load such material onto an owner-furnished truck at the Work site. Otherwise, such material shall
become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of off the Work site.
306-3.4 Minimum and Maximum Pipe Zone Trench Width. For pipe, unless otherwise shown
on the Plans, the minimum and maximum trench width measured at the top of the bedding zone located
1 foot (0.3 m) above the crown of the pipe shall be as shown in Tables 306-3.4 (A) and 306-3.4 (B),
where D is the nominal pipe diameter.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
402 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 306-3.4 (A)

Nominal Pipe Size Side Clearance, inches (mm)
Applicable Specification
Gravity Pipe Material inches (mm) Minimum Maximum
6 (150) or as
Vitrified Clay Pipe 306-7.4 and ASTM C12 As shown on the
All sizes shown on the
Section 6 Plans
Plans
6 (150) or as
Up to and including 36 D or as shown on
shown on the
(900) the Plans
Prefabricated Concrete Pipe 306-7.3 and ASTM C1479 Plans
D/6 or as shown As shown on the
Over 36 (900)
on the Plans Plans
Cast-in-Place Concrete Pipe 306-9 All sizes 306-9
As shown on the
Corrugated Metal Pipe 306-7.6 All sizes 8 (200)
Plans
Up to and including 16
8 (200) 12 (300)
(400)
ASTM D2321 Paragraph
Plastic Pipe Over 16 (400) to and
6.3 6 (150) + D/8 18 (450)
including 30 (750)
Over 30 (750) As shown on the Plans

TABLE 306-3.4 (B)

Nominal Pipe Size Side Clearance inches (mm)
Pressure Pipe Material Applicable Specification
inches (mm) Minimum Maximum
AWWA C600 Section
[Link] and As shown on the
Ductile Iron Pipe All sizes 12 (300)
Plans
AWWA M41
AWWA C604 Section 6 (150) or as
[Link] As shown on the
Steel Pipe All sizes shown on the
Plans
and AWWA M11 Plans
AWWA C604 Section 6 (150) or as
[Link] and As shown on the
Concrete Pressure Pipe All sizes shown on the
Plans
AWWA M9 Plans
Up to and including 16
8 (200) 12 (300)
(400)
PVC Pressure Pipe AWWA C605 AWWA M23 Over 16 (400) to and
6 (150) + D/8 18 (450)
including 30 (750)
Over 30 (750) As shown on the Plans
Up to and including 16
8 (200) 12 (300)
(400)
HDPE Pressure Pipe AWWA M55 Over 16 (400) to and
6 (150) + D/8 18 (450)
including 30 (750)
Over 30 (750) As shown on the Plans
Up to and including 16
8 (200) 12 (300)
(400)
Fiberglass Pressure Pipe AWWA M45 Section 6.6 Over 16 (400) to and
6 (150) + D/8 18 (450)
including 30 (750)
Over 30 (750) As shown on the Plans

If the maximum trench width is exceeded, the Contractor shall provide additional bedding, another
type of bedding, or a higher strength of pipe as approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 403

306-3.5 Maximum Length of Open Trench. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions
or approved by the Engineer, the maximum length of open trench where prefabricated pipe, including
field fused/welded pipe, is to be placed shall be 500 feet (150 m) or the distance necessary to
accommodate the length of pipe to be installed in a single Day, whichever is greater. This distance shall
be defined as the total length at any location of open trench excavation, pipe laying and appurtenant
construction, and backfill over which temporary resurfacing has not been placed.
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or approved by the Engineer, the maximum
length of open trench in any one location where concrete structures are cast-in-place shall be that which
is necessary to permit uninterrupted progress of the structure construction.
306-3.6 Trench Access Ladders. Ladders for trench access shall be provided for each 50 feet (15
m) of open trench, or fraction thereof, for trenches over 4 feet (1.2 m) in depth. Ladders shall project 2
feet (0.6 m) above the top of the trench and be so located that workers in the trench need not move more
than 25 feet (7.5 m) to a ladder.
306-4 SHORING AND BRACING. For the purpose of shoring or bracing, a trench is defined as
an excavation in which the depth is greater than the width of the bottom of the excavation.
The manner of bracing excavations shall be as set forth in the rules, orders, and regulations of the
Division of Occupational Safety and Health.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and removal of all shoring and bracing
materials used during trenching and excavations unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of all existing damaged utilities and structures.
At locations where the drilling of holes for soldier piles is impracticable because of the existence of
rocks, running sand, or other similar conditions, and provided said impracticability is demonstrated to
the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Engineer may approve the use of means other than drilling for the
purpose of placing the vertical supports. Such other means, however, shall prevent damage to existing
surface or subsurface improvements.
If sheeting is used to support an excavated trench, the Contractor shall remove the sheeting, and no
such sheeting will be permitted to remain in the trench. When field conditions, the type of sheeting, or
methods of construction used by the Contractor are such as to make the removal of sheeting
impracticable, the Engineer may permit portions of the sheeting to be cut off to a specified depth and
remain in the trench.
306-5 DEWATERING. The Contractor shall install, operate, and maintain a dewatering system of
sufficient capacity so as to maintain the trench bedding zone free of standing or ponded water, and in a
condition suitable for prosecution and progress of the Work. Unless otherwise specified, dewatering
shall conform to 3-12.6.4.
Groundwater shall be allowed to rise to ambient groundwater elevation upon completion of final
trench backfill operations to finished grade or subgrade of permanent surfacing. The rate at which
groundwater is allowed to rise shall be controlled by the Contractor to assure protection of the Work in
conformance with 4-1.
306-6 BEDDING.
306-6.1 General. Bedding material shall conform to 217. Concrete used for bedding shall conform
to 201-1. The bedding zone shall be defined as the area containing the material supporting, surrounding
the pipe, and extending to 1 foot (300 mm) above the top of the pipe. Where concrete is specified to
cover the pipe, the top of the concrete shall be considered the top of the bedding.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
404 Greenbook 2021

Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, or specified in the Special Provisions or Reference
Specifications, the minimum dimensions of bedding material placement shall be as follows:
a) 4 inches (100 mm) below the pipe barrel on ferrous, concrete and clay pipe,
b) 4 inches (100 mm) below the pipe barrel on plastic pipe,
c) 6 inches (150 mm) below the pipe barrel on pipe above a rock foundation,
d) 1 inch (25 mm) below a projecting bell for non-plastic sewer, storm drain and water pipe, and
e) the dimensions shown in Tables 306-3.4 (A) and 306-3.4 (B) from the outermost dimension of
each side of the pipe barrel.
Bedding material shall be placed on a firm and unyielding subgrade so the pipe is supported for the
full-length of the barrel.
Where it becomes necessary to remove boulders or other interfering objects at subgrade, the resulting
voids below such subgrade shall be backfilled with bedding material of the type shown in Table 217-1.2.
Soft, spongy, unstable, or other unsuitable material encountered upon which the bedding material or pipe
is to be placed shall be removed to the depth directed or approved by the Engineer and replaced with the
aforementioned bedding material.
The trench shall be excavated to a depth above the invert grade and the trench bottom hand-shaped
so as to provide firm support on undisturbed material for the entire length of the pipe.
Pipe shall bear uniformly on the subgrade or bedding material except for sockets or collars which
shall not bear upon the subgrade or bedding material.
306-6.2 Bedding for Narrow Trenches. Narrow trenches shall be defined as trenches 10 inches
(250 mm) or less in width.
Bedding requirements for narrow trenches will be specified by the owner of the installation, and shall
be placed on firm and unyielding subgrade so as to support the pipe or conduit for its full length.
Bedding shall not be jetted unless authorized in writing by the owner of the installation.
When the Contractor is permitted to place the pipe or conduit without bedding, it shall be placed on
firm and unyielding subgrade.
306-6.3 Bedding for Plastic Pipe and Fittings. Plastic pipe and fittings shall include the following:
a) ABS solid wall pipe conforming to 207-15.
b) ABS or PVC composite pipe conforming to 207-16.
c) PVC solid wall sewer pipe conforming to 207-17.
d) Annular HDPE pipe conforming to 207-18.
e) PE solid wall drainage pipe conforming to 207-19.
f) FRPM pipe conforming to 207-20.
g) PVC Pressure Pipe conforming to 209-4.
h) Polyethylene (HDPE) Solid-Wall Pressure Pipe conforming to 209-5.
i) Fiberglass pressure pipe conforming to 209-6.
Bedding material for plastic pipe shall conform to 217-1.2.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 405

306-6.4 Concrete Cradles, Arches, or Encasements When pipe is laid in a sheeted trench, sheeting
against which a concrete cradle, arch or encasement is to be placed shall be faced with at least one
thickness of building paper and the sheeting shall be withdrawn without displacing or damaging the
cradle, except as otherwise specified in 306-4.1.
306-6.5 Placement and Compaction.
306-6.5.1 General. The material in the bedding zone shall be placed and compacted either
mechanically or by jetting. Unless the sheeting or shoring is to be cut off and left in place, compaction
of bedding material for pipe shall be performed after the sheeting or shoring has been removed form the
bedding zone, and prior to the placement of backfill.
Mechanical compaction shall conform to 306-12.3.
Jetting shall conform to 306-12.4 except each lift of bedding material shall not exceed 4 feet (1.2 m)
in thickness. The jet pipe shall be of sufficient length to reach within 2 feet (0.6 m) of the bottom of the
pipe. Jetting shall provide enough water to thoroughly saturate and compact, without voids, the bedding
material around the pipe. The jet pipe shall be inserted at intervals of 3 feet (1 m) maximum, contiguous
along each side of the pipe. Neither flooding, nor free standing water will be permitted.
306-6.5.2 Plastic Pipe and Fittings. Bedding material shall be placed as shown on the Plans, or
specified in the Special Provisions or Reference Specifications. Crushed rock bedding material shall be
placed by slicing, shovel-spading, or shovel rodding to ensure complete filling of the haunch areas below
the pipe. No minimum relative compaction requirement shall apply to crushed rock.
306-7 PREFABRICATED GRAVITY PIPE.
306-7.1 General. Prefabricated gravity pipe shall include pipe installations where:
a) no portion of the system (excluding siphons) is designed to operate under continuous pressure,
and
b) pipes are designed to drain by gravity in a downhill direction.
Installation of pipeline materials, fittings, and appurtenances shall conform to the requirements
shown in Table 306-7.1.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
406 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 306-7.1
Material
Gravity Pipe Material Installation Specification
Specification
Nonreinforced Concrete Pipe (NRCP) 207-1 306-7.2
Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP) 207-2 306-7.3
Lined Reinforced Concrete Pipe 207-3 306-7.3
Vitrified Clay Pipe (VCP) 207-8 306-7.4
306-7.5
Cast Iron Soil Pipe 207-9 1
California Plumbing Code
Corrugated Steel Pipe 207-11 306-7.6
Structural Steel Plate Pipe and Arches 207-12 306-7.6
Corrugated Aluminum Pipe 207-14 306-7.6
Structural Aluminum Plate Pipe and Arches 207-12 306-7.6
ABS Solid Wall Pipe 207-15 306-7.7
ABS or PVC Composite Pipe 207-16 306-7.7
PVC Plastic Sewer Pipe 207-17 306-7.7
Annular HDPE Pipe with Smooth Interior and Corrugated
207-18 306-7.7
Exterior
Polyethylene (HDPE) Solid-Wall Pipe 207-19 306-7.7
FRPM Pipe 207-20 306-7.7
Profile Polypropylene Pipe 207-25 306-7.7
2
Valves, Manholes, Waterstops, and Appurtenances 212 Manufacturer’s installation instructions
1. Submit to the Engineer in accordance with 3-8.4.
2. Any conflicts or discrepancies between the installation specifications shown above and the manufacturer’s installation instructions shall
be brought to the attention of the Engineer in writing for resolution prior to the start of pipe installation.

Gravity pipe shall be laid to the lines and grades shown on the Plans. The socket or collar ends of the
pipe shall be laid upgrade unless otherwise shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer.
Gravity pipe shall be laid and jointed such that the offset of the inside of the pipe at any joint is held
to a minimum at the invert. The maximum offset at the invert of pipe shall be 1 percent of the inside
diameter of the pipe or 3/8 inch (9.5 mm), whichever is smaller. In joining socket-and-spigot pipe, the
spigot shall be so seated in the socket of the adjacent pipe as to provide a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
annular space around the circumference of the pipe in the socket. Offsets shall be distributed around the
circumference of the pipe in such a manner that the minimum offset occurs at the invert.
After the joints have been constructed, the pipe shall not be disturbed.
At the close of work each Day, or whenever the work ceases for any reason, the end of the pipe shall
be securely closed unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
306-7.2 Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe (NRCP).
306-7.2.1 General. NRCP shall conform to 207-1.
306-7.2.2 Tongue and Groove Self-Centering Joints. Tongue and groove self-centering joints
shall conform to 306-[Link].
306-7.2.3 Mortar Joints. The entire annular space shall be completely and compactly filled with
Class “C” mortar.
Mortar placed in the joint to assist in the assembling and centering of the pipe shall not be considered
to fill that portion of the joint in which it is placed. The mortar shall be beveled on a 1:1 slope from the
outer socket edge, and the interior of the pipe cleaned of surplus mortar or other foreign material and
neatly wiped.
When approved by the Engineer, a gasket of material approved by the Engineer may be caulked into
joints in wet trenches, after which the mortar shall be placed therein.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 407

306-7.2.4 Gasket-Type Joints. Gasket-type joints shall conform to 306-[Link].

306-7.2.5 Acceptance Testing. NRCP shall successfully pass the following tests prior to completion
of the Work:

TABLE 306-7.2.5
Item Test For Test Standard Reference
Suitability for Use as Backfill 217
Bedding and Backfill
Compaction ASTM D1557
Pipe Material Materials Inspection 207-1
Allowable Cracking Table 207-2.9.2
Joint Offset Tolerances 306-7.1
Installed NRCP
Pressure Testing and Leakage Inspection of Gravity Pipelines 306-7.8.2
11-Month Anniversary Warranty Inspection 306-8.9.6

306-7.3 Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP).

306-7.3.1 General. Circular RCP with elliptical reinforcement shall be laid with the minor axis of
the reinforcement cage in the vertical position. The minor axis shall be marked by the manufacturer with
a 4-inch-high (100 mm) “T”. RCP shall be laid with the socket end upgrade starting at the downgrade
end of the line. Plastic liner installation shall conform to 311-1.
306-7.3.2 Joints.
306-[Link] Tongue and Groove Self-Centering Joints. Each joint shall be cleaned with a wire
brush and wetted before mortaring. Mortar shall be Class “C” conforming to 201-5.
Mortaring of outside joints will not be required except where RCP is used on curves unless
otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
RCP installed along curves shall have one or both ends beveled or be pulled to provide a smooth
curve. If the extreme ends do not overlap, and the resulting clear space between the extreme ends does
not exceed 1 inch (25 mm), the space shall be filled with Class “C” mortar for the full-thickness of the
pipe wall. If the clear space between the extreme ends is more than 1 inch (25 mm) but less than 3
inches (75 mm), the joint shall be covered using Class 520-C-2500 (310-C-17) concrete to a minimum
depth of 6 inches (150 mm) for a width of 15 inches (380 mm) centered about the joint. Such concrete
cover shall be placed from the bottom of the pipe to a point where the extreme ends overlap. Sandbags
or dirt sacks may be used as side forms. The inside of the joint shall be mortared as specified above. If
the clear space between the extreme ends is 3 inches (75 mm) or greater, but less than 6 inches (150
mm), a concrete collar is required. If the clear space is 6 inches (150 mm) or greater, a transition
structure is required. Concrete collars and transition structures shall conform to the details shown on the
Plans.
When RCP is under 24 inches (600 mm) in diameter, the outer joint space shall be filled with mortar.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
408 Greenbook 2021

When RCP is 24 inches (600 mm) or greater in diameter, the interior annular space of each joint
shall be filled full-depth with mortar, a smooth, troweled finish applied, and excess mortar removed.
The jointing procedure shall be as follows:
a) When the entire trench is to be jetted, no joints shall be mortared before the next 2 joints in
advance are laid. However, the mortaring of joints shall be completed before the beginning
of jetting.
b) When the entire trench is to be compacted mechanically, no interior joints shall be mortared until
compaction has been completed. Joints shall then be mortared.
c) Where the lower portion of the trench is to be jetted and the remainder mechanically compacted,
joints shall be mortared in 2 separate operations. Before jetting is begun, mortar shall be pressed
into interior joints to within 1 inch (25 mm) of the inside surface. After jetting and mechanical
compaction have both been completed, the interior joints shall be cleaned and completed.
d) For gravity sewer pipe, the top half of the outside joint shall be filled with mortar by means of
troweling or wiping prior to placement of backfill, and the inside joints shall be completed as
specified herein.
306-[Link] Collar Joints. RCP with collar joints shall be laid with the collar end up-grade. The
pipes shall be butted together and a uniform caulking space left between the pipe length and the collar.
When the entering pipe length has been laid and checked for line and grade, the pipe length shall be
backfilled on both sides. The caulking space shall then be filled with mortar tamped using a caulking
tool and hammer.
306-[Link] Gasket-Type Joints. Gasket-type joints shall be watertight and flexible. Each joint
shall contain a gasket conforming to 208-3 unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the
Special Provisions. This gasket shall be the sole element responsible for watertightness of the joint. The
slope of the longitudinal gasket contact surfaces of the joint with respect to the longitudinal axis of the
pipe shall not exceed 2 degrees.
The length and cross-sectional dimension of the gasket, the annular space provided for the gasket,
and other joint details shall produce a watertight, flexible joint after installation.
For O-ring type gaskets, prior to placing the spigot into the socket of the pipe previously laid, the
spigot groove, the gasket, and the first 2 inches (50 mm) of the inside surface of the socket shall be
thoroughly cleaned, then lubricated with a soft vegetable soap compound approved by the Engineer.
The gasket, after lubrication, shall be uniformly stretched when being placed in the spigot groove.
For pipe in which the inside joints are to be pointed, spacers shall be placed against the inside
shoulder of the socket to provide the proper space between abutting ends.
For profile-type gaskets, the manufacturer’s requirements for lubrication and assembly shall
be followed.
After the joint is assembled, a metal feeler gauge shall be inserted between the socket and the spigot
and the position of the gasket checked around the complete circumference of the pipe. If the gasket is
not in the proper position, the pipe shall be withdrawn from the joint, the gasket checked to see that it is
not cut or damaged, the pipe re-inserted and re-bedded, and the gasket position re-checked.
Where steel joint rings are used, a cloth, plastic, or paper band shall be placed around the outside of
the pipe and centered over the joint to prevent dirt from entering the joint recess.
The joint band shall be bound to the pipe by the use of steel box strapping or other method approved by
the Engineer, and shall completely and tightly encase the outside joint except for an opening near the top

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 409

where grout is to be poured into the joint recess. Grout shall be poured and allowed to set before densification
of bedding and backfill material by jetting begins. In any case, joints shall be grouted before backfill is placed
over the top of the pipe. With the jointing band properly secured, the joint recess shall be moistened with
water and then filled with Class “C” mortar. Mortar shall completely fill the outside annular space between
the ends of the pipe and around the circumference. After the recess has been filled, the jointing band shall be
replaced over the opening left for pouring and the mortar allowed to set. After the bedding and backfill
material have been densified, the inside joint recess shall first be moistened with water, then filled with stiff
class “C” mortar. The finished joint shall be smooth and flush with the adjacent pipe surfaces.
306-7.3.3 Acceptance Testing. RCP shall successfully pass the following tests prior to completion
of the Work:

TABLE 306-7.3.3
Item Test For Test Standard Reference
Bedding and Suitability for Use as Backfill 217
Backfill Compaction ASTM D1557
Pipe Material Materials Inspection 207-2 or 207-3 as applicable
Allowable Cracking Table 207-2.9.2
Joint Offset Tolerances 306-7.1
Installed RCP Pressure Testing and Leakage Inspection of Gravity
306-7.8.2
Pipelines
11-Month Anniversary Warranty Inspection 306-8.9.6

306-7.4 Vitrified Clay Pipe (VCP).

306-7.4.1 General. VCP shall be “extra strength” or “high strength” as shown on the Plans or
specified in the Special Provisions.
306-7.4.2 Installation.
306-[Link] General. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions,
any of the following joints may be used.
306-[Link] Type “D” Joints (Rubber-Sleeve Coupling with Shear Ring for Plain-End Clay
Pipe). Type “D” joints shall conform to 208-2.2. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions,
pipe shall be delivered to the Work site with the rubber sleeve and shear ring installed on one end of the
pipe or fitting. Before installing compression bands, the surface of the rubber sleeve shall be thoroughly
wetted with a silicone-based lubricant. The lubricant shall not be detrimental to the sleeve, stainless
steel bands, or plastic shear ring. Joints installed on pipe at the manufacturing plant shall have
compression bands torqued to 70 inch-pounds (8 N-m), minimum. When joints are installed in the field,
the plain end of the pipe to be joined shall be inserted into the sleeve and the compression bands torqued
to 70 inch-pounds (8 N-m), minimum, and shall provide uniform tension. Type “D” Joints may be used
on pipe on curves in accordance with 306-[Link].

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
410 Greenbook 2021

306-[Link] Type “G” Joints (Polyurethane Compression). Type “G” joints shall conform to 208-2.3.
Prior to jointing, the matting surfaces shall be cleaned and lubricated with a lubricant recommended
by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Pipe shall be joined spigot into socket. When
jointing is completed, joints shall be within the tolerance shown in Table 306-[Link].

TABLE 306-[Link]
Pipe Size Joint Space
inches (mm) inches (mm)
15 - 18 (375 - 450) 5/8 (16)
21 - 42 (525 - 1050) 7/8 (22)

The joint space shall not be increased because of deflections along curved sections. Straight pipe
with Type “G” joints may be used on pipe on curves in accordance with 306-[Link].
306-[Link] Straight Non-Beveled Pipe On Curves. Straight nonbeveled pipe with Type “D” or
Type “G” joints may be used along curves, provided the radius of curvature is not less than that shown in
Table 306-[Link] (A). For a radius of curvature less than that shown, beveled pipe or shorter pipe
lengths shall be used.

TABLE 306-[Link] (A)

D For Pipe Min. Radius of Max. Deflection Max. Deflection
Pipe Size Length Curvature Per Joint Per Length
inches (mm) ft (m) ft (m) (degrees) inches (mm)
5 (1.5) 120 (37) 2.4 2-1/2 (63)
6 to 12 (150 to 300) 5-1/2 (1.7) 132 (40) 2.4 2-3/4 (70)
6 (1.8) 144 (44) 2.4 3 (76)
5 (1.5) 160 (49) 1.8 1-7/8 (47)
5-1/2 (1.7) 176 (54) 1.8 2-1/16 (52)
15 to 24 (375 to 600)
6 (1.8) 192 (59) 1.8 2-1/4 (57)
7-1/2 (2.3) 240 (73) 1.8 2-13/16 (71)
5 (1.5) 240 (73) 1.2 1-1/4 (31)
5-1/2 (1.7) 264 (80) 1.2 1-3/8 (34)
27 to 36 (675 to 900)
6 (1.8) 288 (88) 1.2 1-1/2 (38)
7-1/2 (2.3) 360 (110) 1.2 1-7/8 (47)
5 (1.5) 320 (97) 0.9 15/16 (23)
39 to 42 (975 to 1050) 5-1/2 (1.7) 352 (107) 0.9 1-1/16 (27)
6 (1.8) 384 (117) 0.9 1-1/8 (28)

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 411

For pipe lengths not shown in Table 306-[Link] (A), the requirements shown in Table 306-[Link]
(B) shall be applicable.

TABLE 306-[Link] (B)

Equation for
D Maximum Allowable
Minimum Radius of
Pipe Size Deflection ∆d
Curvature
inches (mm) inches per ft (mm per m) of pipe
(L = Pipe Length)
6 to 12 (150 to 300) 1/2 (42) r = 24L
15 to 24 (375 to 600) 3/8 (31) r = 32L
27 to 36 (675 to 900) 1/4 (21) r = 48L
39 to 42 (975 to 1050) 3/16 (16) r = 64L

306-7.4.3 Acceptance Testing. VCP shall successfully pass the following tests prior to completion
of the Work:

TABLE 306-7.4.3
Item Test For Test Standard Reference
Suitability for Use as Backfill 217
Bedding and Backfill
Compaction ASTM D1557
Pipe Material Materials Inspection 207-8
Joint Offset Tolerances 306-7.1
VCP Pressure Testing and Leakage Inspection of Gravity Pipelines 306-7.8.2
11-Month Anniversary Warranty Inspection 306-8.9.6

306-7.5 Cast Iron Soil Pipe.

306-7.5.1 General. The type of joint to be installed shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in
the Special Provisions. If not designated, the type of joint may be any of the following.
306-7.5.2 Installation.
306-[Link] Cement Joints. Cement joints shall consist of a gasket of untarred jute or oakum
twisted into a rope of approximately the same diameter as the joint space and saturated with neat cement
grout driven against the base of the socket. After placement, caulking cement shall be pushed into the
socket with a steel caulking tool until the interior of the socket is completely filled, then thoroughly
tamped with a caulking tool. The joint shall then be beveled off from the outer edge of the socket to the
sides of the pipe. Completed joints shall be protected from the sun immediately following caulking.
306-[Link] Slip-On Joints. The gasket and gasket seal inside the socket shall be wiped clean
before the gasket is inserted. A thin film of soft vegetable soap compound shall be applied to the gasket
and the outside of the spigot end of the pipe. The spigot shall then be positioned inside the socket and
pushed into place. Any lubricant other than that furnished with the pipe shall not be used unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
412 Greenbook 2021

306-7.5.3 Acceptance Testing. Cast iron soil pipe shall successfully pass the following tests prior to
completion of the Work:

TABLE 306-7.5.3
Item Test For Test Standard Reference
Bedding and Suitability for Use as Backfill 217
Backfill Compaction ASTM D1557
Pipe Material Materials Inspection 207-9
Installed Cast Iron Pressure Testing and Leakage Inspection of Gravity Pipelines 306-7.8.2
Soil Pipe 11-Month Anniversary Warranty Inspection 306-8.9.6

306-7.6 Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP).

306-7.6.1 General. CMP shall include corrugated steel pipe and corrugated aluminum pipe.
Installation of pipe arches shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
306-7.6.2 Installation. Pipe sections shall be laid with a maximum spacing between sections of 1-1/2
inches (38 mm). Annular CMP shall be laid with external laps of the circumferential seams or circumferential
joints upgrade. Pipe coupling corrugations or projections shall properly engage the pipe sections before bolts are
tightened. Where pipe and/or couplings and pipe and/or couplings with metallic coatings are joined with
dissimilar metals, the contact points shall be coated with asphalt mastic conforming to 207-11.5.2.
Corrugated aluminum pipe and aluminized corrugated steel pipe shall not come into contact with
reinforcing steel or structural steel members. Corrugated aluminum pipe and aluminized corrugated
steel pipe shall be coated with asphalt mastic conforming to 207-11.5.2 where concrete or trench backfill
slurry is required or where the pipe is to be embedded in concrete.
Paved inverts shall be placed and centered on the bottom of the trench. Any damage to the
protective lining and coating shall be repaired prior to backfilling.
When so specified in the Special Provisions, circular corrugated steel pipe shall be elongated in the
shop or in the field before backfilling. The pipe shall be vertically elongated from a true circle to
provide an increase in the diameter of approximately 5 percent for the full length.
Watertight joints, when shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions, shall conform to
207-11.2.2.
Corrugated steel pipe installation shall conform to ASTM A798 Section 8.
Corrugated steel plate pipe and arch installation shall conform to ASTM A807 Section 8.
Corrugated aluminum pipe installation shall conform to ASTM B788.
Corrugated aluminum plate pipe and arch installation shall conform to ASTM B789.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 413

306-7.6.3 Acceptance Testing. CMP shall successfully pass the following tests prior to completion
of the Work:

TABLE 306-7.6.3
Item Test For Test Standard Reference
Bedding and Backfill Suitability for Use as Backfill 217
Compaction ASTM D1557
Pipe Material Materials Inspection 207-11, 12, 13, or 14 as appropriate
Installed CMP Barrel Deflection 306-7.8.3
Leakage Test 306-7.8.2
11-Month Warranty Inspection 306-8.9.6

306-7.7 Plastic Sewer and Drainage Pipe.

306-7.7.1 General. Plastic pipe and fittings shall be defined as including the following:
a) ABS solid wall pipe conforming to 207-15,
b) ABS or PVC composite pipe conforming to 207-16,
c) PVC gravity pipe conforming to 207-17,
d) Annular HDPE pipe conforming to 207-18,
e) PE solid wall pipe conforming to 207-19,
f) FRPM pipe conforming to 207-20, and.
g) Profile Polypropylene Pipe conforming to 207-25.
Connections of pipe and fittings to a manhole shall be watertight. The use of manhole waterstops
shall be approved by the Engineer. Pipe may be used on curves only if deflection fittings or couplings
are used, or if solid wall pipe is bent without any application of heat. If deflection fittings or couplings
are proposed for use on curves, the proposed alignment and method of joining shall be submitted to the
Engineer in accordance with 3-8.4.
306-7.7.2 Installation.
306-[Link] Solvent-Welded ABS and PVC Pipe. Solvent cement shall conform to 207-15.1 for
ABS pipe and 207-17.3.3 for PVC pipe.
The spigot end of the pipe shall be inserted to the proper depth of the socket as indicated by the
“home mark.”
306-[Link] Gasket-Type ABS, CHDPE, PVC Pipe, and Profile Polypropylene Pipe. Gaskets
shall conform to 208-4.
The spigot end shall be inserted to the proper depth of the socket as indicated by the “home mark.”
The home mark shall be shown as a circumferential line or by the words “home mark” on the outside of
the pipe. The home mark shall be clearly and permanently indicated on the spigot end of the pipe by the
manufacturer at the factory.
306-[Link] Jointing of Injection-Sealed PVC Pipe. The spigot end shall be inserted to the full-
depth of the socket as indicated by the “home mark” and driven into the locking taper as recommended
by the manufacturer.
The ports in the socket end shall be positioned to allow observance of flow of the adhesive
compound from the exhaust port. The adhesive compound shall be injected until air is no longer

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
414 Greenbook 2021

observed to bubble from the exhaust port. Escape of adhesive compound beyond the retainer ring shall
be cause for rejection of the joint.
306-7.7.3 Acceptance Testing. Plastic sewer and drainage pipe shall successfully pass the following
tests prior to completion of the Work:

TABLE 306-7.7.3
Item Test For Test Standard Reference
Suitability for Use as Backfill 217
Bedding and Backfill
Compaction ASTM D1557
207-15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20
Pipe Material Materials Inspection
as appropriate
Barrel Deflection 306-7.8.3
Installed Plastic Sewer
Pressure Testing and Leakage Inspection of Gravity Pipelines 306-7.8.2
and Drainage Pipe
11-Month Anniversary Warranty Inspection 306-8.9.6

306-7.8 Gravity Pipeline Testing.

306-7.8.1 General. Gravity pipeline testing shall include pressure testing, leakage inspection, and
barrel deflection testing.
306-7.8.2 Pressure Testing and Leakage Inspection .
306-[Link] General. Leakage tests and post-installation closed circuit television (CCTV)
inspections shall be completed and approved prior to placing permanent resurfacing.
When leakage or infiltration exceeds the amount allowed by the Specifications, the Contractor shall
locate the leaks and make the necessary repairs or replacements in conformance with the Specifications
to reduce the leakage or infiltration to the specified limits. Individual detectable leaks shall be repaired
regardless of the results of the tests. Leakage tests shall be performed on completed pipelines as follows:
a) Storm Drains: Not required unless shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
b) Gravity Sanitary Sewers 24 inches (600 mm) or less in diameter where the difference in elevation
between inverts of adjacent manholes is 10 feet (3 m) or less: Water exfiltration test or water
infiltration test as specified in the Special Provisions. The Engineer may allow substitution of an
air pressure test for the water exfiltration test.
c) Gravity Sanitary Sewers 24 inches (600 mm) or less in diameter where the difference in elevation
between inverts of adjacent manholes is greater than 10 feet (3 m): Air pressure test or water
infiltration test as specified in the Special Provisions.
d) Gravity Sanitary Sewers 24 inches (600 mm) or greater in diameter: Air pressure test or water
infiltration test as specified in the Special Provisions.
e) Gravity Sanitary Sewers which are in service and a bypass system is not available: The
Contractor shall perform post-installation CCTV inspection in accordance with 500-1.1.5.
306-[Link] Water Exfiltration Test. Each section of sewer shall be tested between successive
manholes by closing the lower end of the sewer to be tested and the inlet sewer of the upper manhole
with stoppers. The pipe and manhole shall be filled with water to a point 4 feet (1.2 m) above the invert
of the sewer at the center of the upper manhole; or if groundwater is present, 4 feet (1.2 m) above the
average adjacent groundwater level.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 415

The allowable leakage will be computed by the formulae:

EUS = 0.0001 LD √H for mortared joints.
(ESI = 0.00009 LD √H for mortared joints)
EUS = 0.00002 LD √H for all other joints.
(ESI = 0.000018 LD √H for all other joints.)
Where:
L = length of sewer and house connections tested, in feet (meters).
EUS (ESI) = the allowable leakage in gallons (liters) per minute of sewer tested.
D = the internal diameter of the pipe in inches (mm).
H = is the difference in elevation feet (meters) between the water surface in the upper manhole and
the invert of the pipe at the lower manhole; or if groundwater is present above the invert of the
pipe in the lower manhole, the difference in elevation between the water surface in the upper
manhole and the groundwater at the lower manhole.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish the water, labor, and equipment necessary
and perform the required tests. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.
306-[Link] Water Infiltration Test. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, excessive groundwater
is encountered during the construction of a section of a sewer, the exfiltration test for leakage shall
not be used.
The end of the sewer at the upper structure shall be closed sufficiently to prevent the entrance of
water, and pumping of groundwater shall be discontinued for at least 3 Days, after which the section
shall be tested for infiltration.
The infiltration into each individual reach of the sewer between adjoining manholes shall not exceed
that allowed by the formula specified in 306-[Link] where H is the difference in the elevation in feet
(meters) between the groundwater surface and the invert of the sewer at the downstream manhole.
306-[Link] Air Pressure Test. Air test equipment shall be approved by the Engineer unless
otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
The Contractor may conduct an initial air test of the sewer mainline after compaction of the backfill,
but prior to installation of the house connection sewers. Such tests will be considered to be for the
Contractor’s convenience and need not be performed in the presence of the Engineer.
Each section of sewer shall be tested between successive manholes by plugging and bracing all
openings in the sewer mainline and the upper ends of all house connection sewers. Prior to any air
pressure testing, pipe plugs shall be checked with a soap solution to detect any air leakage. If any leaks
are found, the air pressure shall be released, the leaks eliminated, and the test procedure started over
again. The Contractor may, at its option, wet the interior of the pipe prior to the test.
The final leakage test of the sewer mainline and branching house connection sewers shall be
conducted in the presence of the Engineer in the following manner:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
416 Greenbook 2021

Air shall be introduced into the pipeline until 30 pounds per square inch (210 kPa) gauge pressure
has been reached, at which time the flow of air shall be reduced and the internal air pressure shall be
maintained between 2.5 and 3.5 pounds per square inch (17 kPa and 24 kPa) gauge pressure for at least 2
minutes to allow the air temperature to come to equilibrium with the temperature of the pipe walls.
Pressure in the pipeline shall be constantly monitored by a gauge and hose arrangement separate from
the hose used to introduce air into the line. Pressure in the pipeline shall not be allowed to exceed 5
pounds per square inch (34 kPa) gauge pressure.
After the temperature has stabilized and no air leaks at the plugs have been found, the air pressure
shall be permitted to drop and, when the internal pressure has reached 2.5 pounds per square inch (17
kPa) gauge pressure, a stopwatch or sweep-second-hand watch shall be used to determine the time lapse
required for the air pressure to drop to 1.5 pounds per square inch (10 kPa) gauge pressure.
If the time lapse (in seconds) required for the air pressure to decrease from 2.5 to 1.5 pounds per
square inch (17 to 10 kPa) gage pressure exceeds that shown in Table 306-[Link], the pipe shall be
presumed to be within the acceptance limits for leakage.
If the time lapse is less than that shown in the table, the Contractor shall make the necessary
corrections to reduce the leakage to the acceptance limits.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 417

TABLE 306-[Link]
Time in Seconds for Pressure to Drop from 2.5 to 1.5 pounds per square inch (17 to 10 kPa) Gauge Pressure
Main Line 4-inch (100 mm) House Connection Main Line 6-inch (150 mm) House Connection
Nominal House Connection Length Nominal House Connection Length
Length Length
Diameter 0 ft 100 ft 200 ft 300 ft 400 ft Diameter 0 ft 100 ft 200 ft 300 ft 400 ft
ft (m) ft (m)
inches (mm) (0 m) (30 m) (60 m) (90 m) (120 m) inches (mm) (0 m) (30 m) (60 m) (90 m) (120 m)
0 (0) 0 (0)
0 20 40 50 70 0 40 80 100 100
50 (15) 50 (15)
40 50 70 90 80 40 70 110 110 110
100 (30) 100 (30)
70 90 100 100 90 70 110 120 110 110
150 (45) 150 (45)
8 (200) 110 120 110 100 100 8 (200) 110 120 120 120 110
200 (60) 200 (60)
140 120 110 110 100 140 130 120 120 120
300 (90) 300 (90)
140 130 120 110 110 140 130 120 120 120
400 400
140 130 120 120 110 140 130 130 120 120
(120) (120)
50 (15) 50 70 90 100 90 50 (15) 50 90 120 120 110
100 (30) 110 130 120 110 110 100 (30) 110 140 130 130 120
10 (250) 150 (45) 170 150 140 130 120 10 (250) 150 (45) 170 150 140 140 130
200 (60) 170 160 150 140 130 200 (60) 170 160 150 140 140
300 (90) 170 160 150 150 140 300 (90) 170 160 150 150 140
50 (15) 80 100 110 110 110 50 (15) 80 120 140 130 120
100 (30) 160 170 150 140 130 100 (30) 160 170 150 140 140
12 (300) 150 (45) 200 180 170 160 150 12 (300) 150 (45) 200 180 170 160 150
200 (60) 200 190 180 170 160 200 (60) 200 190 180 170 160
300 (90) 200 190 180 180 170 300 (90) 200 190 180 180 170
50 (15) 120 140 160 140 130 50 (15) 120 160 160 150 140
100 (30) 250 220 190 170 160 100 (30) 250 210 190 170 160
15 (375) 150 (45) 260 230 220 200 190 15 (375) 150 (45) 260 230 210 200 190
200 (60) 260 240 230 220 210 200 (60) 260 240 220 210 200
300 (90) 260 240 230 220 220 300 (90) 260 240 230 220 210
50 (15) 180 200 190 170 150 50 (15) 180 220 190 170 160
100 (30) 310 260 230 210 190 100 (30) 310 260 220 200 190
18 (450) 150 (45) 310 280 260 250 230 18 (450) 150 (45) 310 280 260 240 220
200 (60) 310 290 280 260 250 200 (60) 310 290 270 260 240
300 (90) 310 290 280 270 260 300 (90) 310 290 280 270 260
50 (15) 240 260 230 200 180 50 (15) 240 260 220 200 180
100 (30) 360 310 280 250 230 100 (30) 360 300 260 240 200
21 (525) 150 (45) 360 330 310 290 280 21 (525) 150 (45) 360 330 300 280 260
200 (60) 360 340 320 310 300 200 (60) 360 330 320 300 290
300 (90) 360 340 330 320 310 300 (90) 360 340 330 310 300
50 (15) 320 320 270 240 210 50 (15) 320 310 260 220 200
100 (30) 410 360 320 290 270 100 (30) 410 350 310 280 260
24 (600) 150 (45) 410 380 360 340 320 24 (600) 150 (45) 410 370 350 320 310
200 (60) 410 390 370 360 350 200 (60) 410 380 360 350 330
300 (90) 410 390 380 370 360 300 (90) 410 390 370 360 350
50 (15) 400 370 310 280 250 50 (15) 400 350 290 260 230
100 (30) 460 410 370 340 310 100 (30) 460 390 350 320 290
27 (675) 150 (45) 460 430 410 390 370 27 (675) 150 (45) 460 420 390 370 350
200 (60) 460 440 420 410 390 200 (60) 460 430 410 390 380
300 (90) 460 450 430 420 410 300 (90) 460 440 420 410 390

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
418 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 306-[Link] (Continued)

Time in Seconds for Pressure to Drop from 2.5 to 1.5 pounds per square inch (17 to 10 kPa) Gauge Pressure
Main Line 4-inch (100 mm) House Connection Main Line 6-inch (150 mm) House Connection
Nominal House Connection Length Nominal House Connection Length
Length Length
Diameter 0 ft 100 ft 200 ft 300 ft 400 ft Diameter 0 ft 100 ft 200 ft 300 ft 400 ft
ft (m) ft (m)
inches (mm) (0 m) (30 m) (60 m) (90 m) (120 m) inches (mm) (0 m) (30 m) (60 m) (90 m) (120 m)
50 (15) 490 420 360 310 280 50 (15) 480 490 330 290 260
100 (30) 510 460 420 380 360 100 (30) 510 440 390 360 330
30 (750) 150 (45) 510 480 460 440 420 30 (750) 150 (45) 510 470 440 420 390
200 (60) 510 490 470 460 440 200 (60) 510 480 460 440 420
300 (90) 510 500 480 470 460 300 (90) 510 490 470 460 440
50 (15) 560 460 400 350 320 50 (15) 560 440 370 320 290
100 (30) 560 510 460 430 400 100 (30) 560 490 440 400 370
33 (825) 150 (45) 560 530 510 490 460 33 (825) 150 (45) 560 520 490 460 440
200 (60) 560 540 520 510 490 200 (60) 560 530 510 490 470
300 (90) 560 550 530 520 510 300 (90) 560 540 520 510 490
50 (15) 610 510 440 390 360 50 (15) 610 480 410 360 320
100 (30) 610 560 510 480 440 100 (30) 610 540 480 440 410
36 (900) 150 (45) 610 580 560 530 510 36 (900) 150 (45) 610 570 540 510 480
200 (60) 610 600 580 560 540 200 (60) 610 590 560 540 520
300 (90) 610 600 580 570 560 300 (90) 610 590 570 560 540
50 (15) 660 560 490 440 390 50 (15) 660 530 450 390 350
100 (30) 660 610 560 520 490 100 (30) 660 590 530 480 450
39 (975) 150 (45) 660 630 610 580 560 39 (975) 150 (45) 660 620 590 560 530
200 (60) 660 640 620 610 590 200 (60) 660 640 610 590 570
300 (90) 660 650 630 620 610 300 (90) 660 640 620 610 590
50 (15) 710 610 540 480 430 50 (15) 710 580 490 430 390
100 (30) 710 660 610 570 540 100 (30) 710 640 580 530 490
42 (1050) 150 (45) 710 680 660 630 610 42 (1050) 150 (45) 710 670 640 610 580
200 (60) 710 690 680 660 640 200 (60) 710 690 660 640 620
300 (90) 710 700 680 670 660 300 (90) 710 690 670 650 640

306-[Link] Leakage Test for Corrugated Metal Pipelines. After the pipe has been laid and
assembled, and when required, the pipeline shall be filled with water to a hydrostatic pressure head of 10
feet (3.0 m) above the point in the line to be tested.
A hydrostatic test shall be conducted for a period of not less than 24 hours, during which time an
accurate measure of the water required to maintain the test pressure shall be made. Any leakage
developed by the test shall not exceed 0.60 gallon per inch (90 mL/mm) of inside diameter per 100 feet
(30 m) of pipe per hour. Any leakage in excess of this amount shall be stopped in a manner accepted by
the Engineer, and the test repeated until the total leakage does not exceed the amount specified. All
obvious leaks shall be stopped in a manner accepted by the Engineer, whether or not the leakage from
the line exceeds that permitted herein.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 419

306-7.8.3 Maximum Allowable Barrel Deflection Testing of Plastic Sewer and Storm Drain Pipe.
306-[Link] General. Pipe and fittings shall be tested to ensure vertical deflections and measured
diameter do not exceed the maximum allowable barrel deflection. The maximum allowable barrel
deflection as a percentage of the nominal pipe internal diameter shall conform to the requirements shown
in Table 306-[Link].

TABLE 306-[Link]
1,2
Nominal Pipe Diameter Percentage Barrel Deflection Allowed
Sewer Pipe Storm Drain
ABS, PVC,
ABS, FRPM,
ABS or Clay, FRPM, Clay,
Inches Millimeters HDPE or PVC
PVC Concrete or CMP, Concrete
Solid-wall or
Composite DIP HDPE or or DIP
CHDPE
composite
0 through 12 0 through 300 3.0% 5.0% n/a 6.5% n/a
Over 12 through 30 Over 300 through 750 3.0% 4.0% n/a 6.5% n/a
Over 30 through 60 Over 750 through 1500 n/a 3.0% n/a 6.5% n/a
Over 1500 through
Over 60 through 90 n/a 2.5% n/a 6.5% n/a
2250
Over 2250 through
Over 90 through 120 n/a 2.0% n/a 6.5% n/a
3000
Over 120 Over 3000 n/a 1.5% n/a 6.5% n/a
1. 30 Days after installation.
2. Deflection tests shall not be performed sooner than 30 Days after completion of placement and compaction of backfill. The pipe and
fittings shall be cleaned and inspected for offsets and obstructions prior to testing.

306-[Link] 24-Inch (600 mm) or Smaller Inside Diameters. A mandrel shall be pulled through
the pipe by hand to ensure the maximum allowable deflection has not been exceeded. Fittings shall be
visually inspected to ensure the maximum allowable deflection has not been exceeded.
The mandrel shall be:
a) a rigid, nonadjustable, odd-numbered-leg (9 legs minimum) mandrel having an effective length
not less than its nominal diameter,
b) fabricated from steel and be fitted with pulling rings at each end,
c) stamped or engraved on a segment other than the runner, with the pipe material specification,
nominal size, and mandrel OD (e.g. PVC D3034-200 mm-187.10 mm; ABS Composite D2680-
250 mm-243.43 mm; PVC D3034-8”-7.366”; ABS Composite D2680-10”-9.584”), and

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
420 Greenbook 2021

d) have a minimum diameter at any point along the full length conforming to Table 306-[Link].

TABLE 306-[Link]
1
Pipe Material Nominal Size Minimum Mandrel Diameter
Inches mm Inches mm
PVC-ASTM D3034 (SDR 26) 6 150 5.331 135.4
8 200 7.114 180.7
10 250 8.875 225.4
12 300 10.547 267.9
15 375 13.032 331.0
PVC-ASTM D3034 (SDR 35) 6 150 5.455 138.6
8 200 7.282 185.0
10 250 9.085 230.8
12 300 10.793 274.1
15 375 13.342 338.9
PVC-ASTM F679 (T-1 Wall) 18 450 16.924 429.9
21 525 19.952 506.8
24 600 22.446 570.1
27 675 25.297 642.5
30 750 28.502 724.0
33 825 32.399 822.9
36 900 35.999 914.4
ABS or PVC Composite Pipe, 6 150 5.578 141.7
ASTM D2680 8 200 7.518 190.9
10 250 9.458 240.2
12 300 11.398 289.5
15 375 14.308 363.4
FRPM, ASTM D3262, 46 psi (318 8 200 7.363 187.0
KPa) 10 250 9.263 235.3
12 300 11.163 283.5
15 375 14.160 359.7
18 450 17.040 432.8
20 500 18.960 481.6
21 525 19.920 506.0
24 600 23.527 597.59
27 675 25.661 651.8
30 750 25.512 724.2
36 900 34.571 878.1
39 975 37.452 951.3
42 1050 40.333 1024.4
45 1125 43.214 1097.6
48 1200 46.094 1170.8
51 1275 48.975 1244.0
54 1350 51.856 1317.1
60 1500 57.618 1463.5
66 1650 63.707 1618.1
72 1800 69.498 1765.2
78 1950 75.290 1912.4
84 2100 81.081 2059.5
90 2250 86.873 2206.6
96 2400 93.139 2365.7
102 2550 98.980 2514.1
108 2700 104.86 2663.4
114 2850 110.74 2812.8
120 3000 116.62 2962.1
132 3300 129.04 3277.5
144 3600 140.86 3577.7
1. Metric mandrel diameters are direct conversions of mandrel diameters in U.S. Standard Measures. If the above types of pipe are
available and specified by the appropriate ASTM in metric dimensions, as the primary measure, the Engineer will determine the
appropriate mandrel diameter which conforms to this subsection.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 421

Prior to use, the mandrel shall be certified by the Engineer or by another entity approved by the
Engineer. Use of an uncertified mandrel or a mandrel altered or modified after certification will
invalidate the test.
If the mandrel fails to pass through the pipe, the pipe will be deemed to be over-deflected.
306-[Link] Inside Diameters Between 24 Inches (600 mm) and 36 Inches (900 mm).
Deflections shall be determined by a method submitted to the Engineer in accordance with 3-8. Fittings
shall be visually inspected to ensure the maximum allowable deflection has not been exceeded.
306-[Link] Inside Diameters Greater Than 36 Inches (900 mm). Deflections shall be determined
by using a 1 inch (25 mm) diameter, nonadjustable metal bar; a minimum-radius rigid template; or by a
method approved by the Engineer. Fittings shall be visually inspected to ensure the maximum allowable
deflection has not been exceeded.
306-[Link] Laser Testing. The Contractor may substitute laser profile testing for mandrel testing.
306-[Link] Defective Work Remediation. Over-deflected pipe shall be uncovered and, if not
damaged, reinstalled. Pipe subjected methods or process other than removal, which attempts, even
successfully, to reduce or cure any over-deflection, shall be uncovered, removed from the Work site, and
replaced with new pipe.
306-8 PREFABRICATED PRESSURE PIPE.
306-8.1 General. Prefabricated pressure pipe (pressure pipe) shall include pipe installations where:
a) the pipeline is designed to operate under continuous pressure, or
b) the pipeline is designed for bi-directional flow.
Installation of pipeline materials, fittings, valves and appurtenances shall conform to the pipe-
specific Reference Specifications shown in Table 306-8.1 which shall be submitted to the Engineer in
accordance with 3-8.4.

TABLE 306-8.1
Installation Reference
Pressure Pipe Material Material Specification 1
Specification
Ductile Iron Pipe 209-1 AWWA C600 and 306-8.2
Steel Pipe 209-2 AWWA C604, and 306-8.3
Concrete Pressure Pipe 207-3 AWWA M9 Chapter 14 and 306-8.4
PVC Pressure Pipe 209-4 AWWA C605 and 306-8.5
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pressure Pipe 209-5 AWWA M55 Chapter 8 and 306-8.5
Fiberglass Pressure Pipe 209-6 AWWA M45 Chapter 6 and 306-8.6
Manufacturer’s installation and
Valves and Appurtenances 212
warranty requirements
1. Where the manufacturer issues installation instructions, these shall be submitted to the Engineer in accordance with 2.5.3 along with
the specifications referenced above. Any conflicts or discrepancies between the Reference Specifications shown above and the
manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention in writing prior to the start of pipe installation. The
Contractor shall allow 10 Working Days for resolution.

Pressure pipe shall be laid to the lines and grades shown on the Plans.
Joint restraints shall be constructed using welds, flanges, mechanical joints, or manufactured joint
restraints as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
After the joints have been constructed, the pipe shall not be disturbed in any manner.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
422 Greenbook 2021

The Engineer may require removal and relaying of any pipe which is not true in alignment or shows
excessive settlement after laying.
At the close of work each Day, or whenever the Work ceases for any reason for more than 40 minutes,
each exposed end of the pipe shall be securely closed unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
306-8.2 Ductile Iron Pipe.
306-8.2.1 General. Ductile iron pipe shall be assembled in accordance with AWWA C600 and the
applicable manufacturer’s installation instructions.
306-8.2.2 Installation.
306-[Link] Push-On Joints. Push-on joints shall be assembled in accordance with AWWA C600
and the following:
a) On long radius curves, trenches shall be excavated wider than shown in Table 306-3.4 (B) to
allow for straight-line assembly before deflection.
b) Cutting and machining shall conform to the manufacturer’s installation and warranty
requirements. Pipe shall not be cut with a cold chisel, standard iron pipe cutter, or any other
method that may fracture the pipe or produce ragged, uneven edges.
c) Gasket recess and bell sockets of pipe or fittings and plain ends of mating pipe shall be cleaned.
Joints shall be dirt-free.
d) Plain ends, sockets, and gasket shall be lubricated using soapy water or an approved pipe
lubricant conforming to AWWA C600. Lubrication for spigot ends and instructions for lubricant
use shall be supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
e) An elastomeric gasket ring shall be inserted into the gasket recess and be completely seated.
f) Spigot and bell ends shall slide together without displacement of elastomeric gasket.
g) The pipe shall be installed with the bell end facing in the direction of laying unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
h) The spigot shall be inserted into the bell and forced slowly into position, using a large bar lever
and wood block across the pipe end. For large pipe, a come-along (with padding that will not
scratch the pipe) may be used.
i) After assembling the pipe in a straight line, horizontal or vertical deflections shall be made at the
joints to conform with the alignment shown on Plans.
Push-on restrained joints shall incorporate flex-ring, split-ring or ring segments and shall be installed
in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions for the joint design used.
Allowable push-on joint deflections shall not exceed the following:

TABLE 306-[Link]
Pipe Nominal Diameter Allowable Push-on-Joint Allowable Restrained Joint Deflection
Deflection
3-inch through 4-inch (75 to 100 mm) 4.0° n/a
6-inch through 12-inch (150 to 300 mm) 4.0° 3.2°
14-inch (350 mm) and larger 2.4° 1.6°
1. The values shown in Table 306-[Link] are based on 80 percent of that recommended by AWWA M41 Table 11-4 and 11-5 in
accordance with paragraph [Link] of AWWA C600.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 423

306-[Link] Mechanical Joints. Mechanical joints shall be assembled in accordance with AWWA
C600, and the following:
a) On long radius curves, trenches shall be excavated wider than shown in Table 306-3.4 (B) to
allow for straight-line assembly before deflection.
b) Pipe cutting and machining shall conform to the manufacturer’s installation and warranty
requirements. Pipe shall not be cut with a cold chisel, standard iron pipe cutter, or any other
method that may fracture the pipe or produce ragged, uneven edges.
c) Plain ends, sockets, and gaskets shall be lubricated using soapy water or an approved pipe
lubricant as recommended in AWWA C600. Lubrication for spigot ends and instruction for
lubricant use shall be supplied by pipe manufacturer.
d) An elastomeric gasket ring shall be inserted into the gasket recess and completely seated.
e) Spigot and bell ends shall slide together without displacement of the elastomeric gasket.
f) Joints shall be dirt free.
g) The pipe shall be installed with the bell end facing in the direction of laying unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
h) The spigot end shall be inserted into the bell and forced slowly into position using a large bar
lever and wood block across the pipe end. For large pipe, a come-along (with padding that will
not scratch the pipe) may be used.
i) The gland shall be pushed toward the socket and centered around the pipe with the gland lip
against the gasket.
j) Bolts shall then be inserted and nuts hand-tightened.
k) After assembling the pipe in a straight line, horizontal or vertical deflections shall be made at the
joints to conform with the alignment shown on the Plans.
Allowable joint deflections for mechanical joints shall not exceed the following:

TABLE 306-[Link]
Pipe Nominal Diameter Allowable Mechanical Joint Allowable Restrained
Deflection Joint Deflection
3-inch through 4-inch (75 to 100 mm) 6.6° n/a
6-inch (150 mm) 5.7° 3.2°
8-inch through 12-inch (200 to 300 mm) 4.3° 3.2°
14-inch through 16-inch (350 to 400 mm) 2.9° 1.6°
18-inch through 20-inch (450 to 500 mm) 2.4° 1.6°
24-inch (600 mm) 1.8° 1.6°
30-inch through 64-inch (750 to 1600 mm) n/a 1.6°
1. The values shown in Table 306-[Link] are based on 80% of that recommended by AWWA M41 Table 11-4 and 11-5 in accordance with
paragraph [Link] of AWWA C600.

After the joints are deflected, bolts shall be tightened to within the normal range of bolt torque
recommended by the manufacturer or AWWA M41 Table 11-3.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
424 Greenbook 2021

306-[Link] Installation of Polyethylene (PE) Film Wrap on Iron Fittings. PE film wrap
(film) shall be installed on ductile iron and cast iron fittings and pipe in accordance with AWWA
C105 and the following:
a) Film shall be wrapped snugly around all exterior ferrous surfaces and 8 inches (200 mm) beyond
bells, overlapping at least 2 inches (50 mm) at each seam.
b) Pipe shall be completely encased to prevent contact between the pipe and surrounding soil. Soil
or bedding material shall be prevented from becoming trapped between the pipe and film.
c) Film shall not be installed on pipe sections or fittings to be installed through concrete slope anchors.
d) Film wrap shall be secured in place using 2-inch (50 mm)-wide plastic tape.
e) At least 3 circumferential turns of plastic tape shall seal the film wrap ends over the pipe and
above valve bonnets.
f) Place circumferential wraps of tape at 3-foot (1 m) intervals along the pipe barrel to minimize the
space between the film and the pipe.
g) Cuts, tears, punctures or damage to the film shall be repaired with adhesive tape or with a short
length of polyethylene tube cut open, wrapped around the pipe, and secured in place.
In addition to wrapping ductile iron pipe with polyethylene, service lines of dissimilar metals and the
attendant corporation stop shall be wrapped with polyethylene film or an approved dielectric tape for a
minimum clear distance of 3 feet (1 m) from the main.
306-8.2.3 Acceptance. Ductile iron pipe shall successfully pass the following tests prior to
completion of the Work:

TABLE 306-8.2.3
Item Test For Test Standard
Bedding and Backfill Suitability for Use as Backfill 217
Compaction ASTM D1557
Pipe Material Materials Inspection 209-1
Installed DIP Alignment Deviation As specified in the Special Provisions but
not more than 1-foot (300 mm) horizontal,
0.25 foot (75 mm) vertical, or 0.1 foot (30
mm) vertical variation over 10 feet (3 m)
of pipe having the same slope
Hydrostatic Pressure Test 306-[Link]
Bacteriological Sampling and Testing 306-[Link]
11-Month Anniversary Warranty Inspection 306-8.9.6

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 425

306-8.3 Steel Pipe.

306-8.3.1 General. Steel pipe shall be assembled in accordance with AWWA C604 and the
applicable manufacturer’s installation instructions.
306-8.3.2 Installation.
306-[Link] Welded Steel Pipe Joints. The Contractor shall submit welder qualification certificates
for all personnel welding steel pressure pipe under the standard qualification procedure of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX, “Welding Qualifications.”
306-[Link] Welded Joints. Welded joints shall be constructed in accordance with AWWA C206,
and the following:
a) Welders assigned to the Work shall be qualified under the AWS standard qualification procedure.
b) Joints to be welded shall be cleaned prior to placing pipe in the trench. Loose scale, heavy rust, paint,
cement, and grease shall be removed. At least a 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) recess shall be provided between
adjacent mortar-covered surfaces to place the weld.
c) After the pipe is in its final position, lap-welded slip joints or butt-welded joints shall be completed in
accordance with the Plans.
d) During hand welding, metal shall be deposited in successive layers.
e) The minimum number of passes or beads in completed welds shall be as follows:

TABLE 306-[Link]
Steel Cylinder Thickness Fillet Weld Minimum Number of Passes
Smaller than 3/16 inch (5 mm) 1
3/16 inch through 1/4 inch (5 to 6 mm) 2
Greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) 1 pass for each 1/8 inch (3 mm) of cylinder or fraction thereof.

f) After welding, surfaces of welds shall be cleaned, removing all dirt, scale, or welding flux.
g) For cement-mortar-lined and coated pipe, the interior surface of welded pipe shall be coated with
cement mortar. Excess mortar shall be swabbed out.
h) For steel pipe with other lining systems, the interior surface shall be coated in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations to obtain a lining of similar thickness and life to factory-
applied lining.
306-[Link] Butt-Strap Closure Joints. Butt-strap closure joints shall be constructed in the trench
after the pipe has been laid to the alignment and grade shown on Plans. Butt strap closure joints shall
conform to the following:
a) Butt-strap closure joints shall be field-welded by full-circumferential fillet welds, or one edge
may be shop welded and the other field welded. Welding shall conform to 306-[Link].
b) The joint exterior shall be coated with mortar to a minimum thickness of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
Immediately prior to applying mortar to interior or exterior of joints, cement wash shall be
applied to the metal to be coated.
c) The joint interior shall be filled with stiff cement mortar and finished smoothly with the inside of
the pipe wall. Wire mesh, 2-inch (50 mm) x 4-inch (100 mm), No. 13 gauge (1.828 mm), clean,
and free from rust, shall be applied to joint interiors so that the wires run circumferentially

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
426 Greenbook 2021

around the pipe on 2-inch (50 mm) spacing. Wires on 4-inch (100 mm) spacing shall be crimped
in such manner to hold the mesh 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from the metal joint surface. Mesh shall be
lapped at least 8 inches (200 mm), and the wire held securely in position.
306-8.3.3 Acceptance. Steel pipe shall successfully pass the following tests prior to completion of
the Work:

TABLE 306-8.3.3
Item Test For Test Standard
Bedding and Backfill Suitability for Use as Backfill 217
Compaction ASTM D1557
Pipe Material Materials Inspection 209-2
Installed Steel Pipe and Alignment Deviation As specified in the Special Provisions but not
Fittings more than 1-foot (300 mm) horizontal, 0.25
foot (75 mm) vertical, or 0.1 foot (30 mm)
vertical variation over 10 feet (3 m) of pipe
having the same slope
Hydrostatic Pressure Test 306-8.9.2
Bacteriological Sampling and Testing 306-[Link]
Field Performance Demonstrate compliance to Contract
Documents and Manufacturer’s printed
literature
11-Month Anniversary Warranty
306-8.9.6
Inspection

306-8.4 Concrete Pressure Pipe.

306-8.4.1 General. Concrete pressure pipe shall be assembled in accordance with AWWA M9
Chapter 14 and the applicable manufacturer’s installation instructions.
306-8.4.2 Installation. Push-on joints shall be assembled in accordance with AWWA M9 Chapter
14 and the following:
a) Pipe shall be supported free of bedding or foundation material during jointing.
b) Pipe shall not be driven to grade by striking with an excavator bucket or other equipment.
c) The bell and spigot shall be cleaned and free of dirt and mud. A thin layer of NSF60-compliant
lubricant shall be applied to the bell face, the gasket recess of the spigot, and the gasket.
d) The elastomeric gasket stretch around the joint circumference shall be equalized by inserting a
round rod under the gasket once it is placed in the spigot gasket recess and moving the rod
around the full pipe circumference.
e) Upon completion, a steel feeler gauge 0.5 inch (12.5 mm) wide and 0.010 inch (250 µm) thick
shall be inserted into the joint to determine by feel if the gasket is properly seated in the gasket
recess. The full circumference of the gasket shall be checked.
f) A come-along, backhoe, or power winch shall be used to pull the pipe into the proper position by
applying pressure to a wire-rope choker used to lay pipe. The pipe spigot shall be installed into
the bell using a straight axial force to ensure proper gasket installation. The pipe shall not be
tipped during insertion.
g) If interior protective coatings have not been pre-applied to the interior metal, exposed metal
surfaces shall be cleaned and pipe joint interiors shall be coated with NSF 61-compliant Portland
cement mortar consisting of no more than 3 parts sand to one part cement.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 427

h) The full circumference of exterior joint space shall be grouted with a band of grout consisting
of no more than 3 parts sand to one part cement. The grout band shall be filled from one side
only. Grout shall be routed or agitated to ensure no voids are present, then routed or agitated
along both sides of the pipe alternately to settle the grout. The grout shall be allowed to stiffen
for 15 minutes. More grout shall then be added to fill the joint completely. The top of the grout
band shall be capped to protect the grout from backfill. The grout band shall not be removed
from the joint.
i) The grout shall be allowed to fully harden before placing any bedding or backfill above the
pipe bottom.
306-8.4.3 Acceptance. Concrete pressure pipe shall successfully pass the following tests prior to
completion of the Work:

TABLE 306-8.4.3
Item Test For Test Standard Reference
Bedding and Backfill Suitability for Use as Backfill 217
Compaction ASTM D1557
Pipe Material Materials Inspection 209-3
Installed Concrete Pressure Alignment Deviation As specified in the Special Provisions but not
Pipe and Fittings more than 1-foot (300 mm) horizontal,
0.25 foot (75 mm) vertical, or 0.1 foot (30
mm) vertical variation over 10 feet (3 m) of
pipe having the same slope
Hydrostatic Pressure Test 306-8.9.2
Bacteriological Sampling and Testing 306-[Link]
11-Month Anniversary Warranty Inspection 306-8.9.6

306-8.5 PVC Pressure Pipe.

306-8.5.1 General. PVC pressure pipe shall be assembled in accordance with AWWA C605 and the
applicable manufacturer’s installation instructions.
306-8.5.2 Installation.
306-[Link] Push-on Joints. Push-on joints shall be assembled in accordance with AWWA C605
and the following:
a) Spigots and bells shall slide together without displacement of the elastomeric gasket. Joints shall
be dirt-free. Pipe shall be installed with the bell facing in the direction of laying unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
b) The full circumference of the spigot end, including beveled ends, shall be lubricated using an
NSF 61-compliant lubricant supplied by the pipe manufacturer. If dirt or sand adhere to the
lubricant, the spigot shall be cleaned and re-lubricated.
c) An elastomeric gasket ring shall be inserted and completely seated into the gasket recess. The
lubrication for the spigot and instructions for lubricant use shall be supplied by the pipe
manufacturer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
428 Greenbook 2021

d) The spigot shall be inserted into the bell and forced slowly into position using a large bar lever
and wood block across the pipe end. For large pipe, a come-along (with padding that will not
scratch the pipe) may be used.
e) If undue resistance to spigot insertion is encountered or a reference mark does not reach the flush
position, the joint shall be disassembled and the position of the elastomeric gasket checked. If
twisted or dislodged, the gasket, bell, and spigot shall be cleaned and re-assembled. If the gasket
is not out of position, the distance between the reference mark and the spigot end shall be
measured and checked against the correct values provided by the pipe manufacturer.
f) Allowable joint deflections shall not exceed the following:

TABLE 306-[Link]
Pipe Nominal Diameter Allowable Push-on-Joint Allowable Joint Allowable Bending for 20-
Deflection Deflection with High Foot Length
Deflection Coupling
4” (100 mm) 2.0° 4.0°
6” (150 mm) 2.0° 4.0°
Longitudinal bending not
8”-10” (200 mm-250 mm) 2.0° 4.0°
permitted
12” (300 mm) 1.7° 4.0°
14”-24” (350 mm-600 mm) 0.8° 4.0°
1. The values shown in Table 306-[Link] are based on 80% of that recommended by AWWA M23 Table 13 or the coupling manufacturer.
In no case shall deflection exceed 2 degrees in any direction without the use of high-deflection couplings.

306-8.5.3 Acceptance. PVC pressure pipe shall successfully pass the following tests prior to
completion of the Work:

TABLE 306-8.5.3
Item Test For Test Standard
Bedding and Backfill Suitability for Use as Backfill 217
Compaction ASTM D1557
Pipe Material Materials Inspection 209-4
Installed PVC Pressure Alignment Deviation As specified in the Special Provisions but not
Pipe more than 1 foot (300 mm) horizontal, 0.25
foot (75 mm) vertical, or 0.1 foot (30 mm)
vertical variation over 10 feet (3 m) of pipe
having the same slope
Hydrostatic Pressure Test 306-8.9.2
Bacteriological Sampling and Testing 306-[Link]
11-Month Anniversary Warranty Inspection 306-8.9.6

306-8.6 High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pressure Pipe.

306-8.6.1 General. HDPE pressure pipe shall be assembled in accordance with AWWA M55
Chapter 8 and the applicable manufacturer’s installation instructions.
306-8.6.2 Installation. Butt fusion joints shall be assembled in accordance with AWWA M55 and
the following:
a) Pipe sections shall be joined above-ground and at the Work site into continuous water-tight leak-
proof lengths. Pipe sections shall be joined in true alignment using equipment and methods
which conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 429

b) Plain end pipes may be joined using either butt fusion or saddle fusion, and with either heat
fusion or electrofusion.
c) Butt fusion shall conform to ASTM D2657, PPI TR33 and AWWA M55.
d) Electrofusion shall conform to ASTM F1290 and AWWA M55.
e) Saddle fusion shall conform to ASTM D2657, ASTM F905, PPI TR41 and AWWA M55.
f) Hot fusion joining of HDPE end sections, service, taps, and fittings may be performed in
excavations.
g) Plain end pipes and fittings shall be joined by butt fusion conforming to ASTM D2657.
h) Branch connections to main shall be made with saddle fittings or tees. Main and saddle branch
fittings shall be joined using saddle fusion procedures conforming to ASTM F905.
i) Fusions of unlike wall thicknesses are acceptable as long as the difference is limited to one SDR
difference. Transitions between unlike wall thicknesses greater than one SDR shall be made with
a transition nipple (a short length of heavier-wall pipe with one end machined to the lighter-wall)
or by mechanical means.
j) Pressure shall not be removed until the joint has adequately cooled.
k) Rollback beads will result from the use of proper temperatures and pressures. External and
internal beads from butt welding shall not be removed.
l) Joints shall be equal in tensile strength to that of the adjacent pipe.
m) HDPE pipe and fittings may be joined together or joined to other materials using electro-fusion,
flanged connections, or mechanical couplings designed for joining HDPE pipe to mating material
only when heat-fusion joining is not practical as determined by the Engineer. When joining pipe
by any of the aforementioned methods, the installation instructions of the joining device
manufacturer shall be followed.
n) Flange faces shall be centered and aligned to each other before assembling and tightening bolts.
Flange bolts shall not be used to draw flanges into alignment. Bolt threads shall be lubricated and
flat washers shall be installed under flange nuts. Bolts shall be tightened evenly according to the
tightening pattern and torque step recommendations. At least 1 hour after the initial assembly,
flange connections shall be retightened, following the manufacturer’s tightening pattern and
torque step recommendations. Final tightening torque shall be 100 foot-pounds (136 N-m) or as
recommended by the manufacturer.
o) Mechanical joints using outside diameter compression mechanical couplings shall be installed
with the stiffener in the bore of the HDPE pipe.
p) Plain ends of 16-inch (400 mm) iron pipe size (IPS) and larger fabricated fittings shall be butt-fused to
the end of the pipe length. Flanged directional outlet connections to fittings shall be constructed in the
trench. Flanged connections shall be assembled and tightened in accordance with the flange adapter
manufacturer’s instructions. No more than one pipe length shall be connected to a 16-inch (400 mm)
IPS or larger directional fitting before placing the fitting in the trench.
q) Threaded or solvent-cement joints and connections will not be allowed.
r) Allowable pipe deflections shall not exceed the following:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
430 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 306-8.6.2
Minimum Cold-Bending Radius and Maximum Deflection per Foot (m) of Pipe Length
Nominal Pipe
Adjacent to
OD DR ≤ 9 9 < DR ≤ 13.5 13.5 < DR ≤ 21 DR > 21
Fitting or Flange
<3” (75 mm) 6.3’ – 9.2°/LF 7.8’ – 7.3°/LF 8.4’ – 6.8°/LF 9.4’ – 6.1°/LF 31.3’ – 1.83°/LF
(1.92 m – 30.2°) (2.38 m – 24.0°) (2.56 m – 22.3°) (2.87 m – 20.0°) (9.54 m – 6.00°)
3” (75 mm) 6.3’ – 9.2°/ LF 7.8’ – 7.3°/LF 8.4’ – 6.8°/LF 9.4’ – 6.1°/LF 31.3’ – 1.83°/LF
(1.92 m – 30.2°) (2.38 m – 24.0°) (2.56 m – 22.3°) (2.87 m – 20.0°) (9.54 m – 6.00°)
4” (100 mm) 8.3’ – 6.9°/ LF 10.4’ – 5.5°/ LF 11.3’ – 5.1°/ LF 12.5’ – 4.6°/ LF 41.7’ – 1.38°/ LF
(2.53 m – 22.6°) (3.17 m – 18.0°) (3.44 m – 16.7°) (3.81 m – 15.1°) (12.7 m – 4.53°)
6” (150 mm) 12.5’ – 4.6°/ LF 15.6’ – 3.7°/ LF 16.9’ – 3.4°/ LF 18.8’ – 3.1°/ LF 62.5’ – 0.92°/ LF
(3.81 m – 15.1°) (4.75 m – 12.1°) (5.15 m – 11.2°) (5.73 m – 10.2°) (19.0 m – 3.02°)
8” (200 mm) 16.7’ – 3.4°/LF 20.8’ – 2.8°/LF 22.5’ – 2.6°/LF 25.0’ – 2.3°/LF 83.3’ – 0.70°/LF
(5.09 m – 11.2°) (6.34 m – 9.19°) (6.86 m – 8.53°) (7.62 m – 7.55°) (25.4 m – 2.30°)
10” (250 mm) 20.8’ – 2.8°/LF 26.0’ – 2.2°/LF 28.1’ – 2.04°/LF 31.3’ – 1.83°/LF 104.2’ – 0.60°/LF
(6.34 m – 9.19°) (7.92 m – 7.22°) (8.56 m – 6.69°) (9.54 m – 6.00°) (31.76 m – 1.97°)
12” (300 mm) 25.0’ – 2.3°/LF 31.3’ – 1.83°/LF 33.8’ – 1.70°/LF 37.5’ – 1.53°/LF 125.0’ – 0.46°/LF
(7.62 m – 7.55°) (9.54 m – 6.00°) (10.3 m – 5.58°) (11.4 m – 5.02°) (38.1 m – 1.51°)
14” (350 mm) 29.2’ – 1.96°/LF 36.5’ – 1.57°/LF 39.4’ – 1.46°/LF 43.8’ – 1.31°/LF 145.8’ – 0.39°/LF
(8.90 m – 6.43°) (11.13 m – 5.15°) (12.01 m – 4.79°) (13.35 m – 4.30°) (44.44 m – 1.28°)
16” (400 mm) 33.3’ – 1.72°/LF 41.7’ – 1.38°/LF 45.0’ – 1.27°/LF 50.0’ – 1.15°/LF 166.7’ – 0.34°/LF
(10.15 m – 5.64°) (12.71 m – 4.53°) (13.72 m – 4.17°) (15.24 m – 3.77°) (50.81 m – 1.12°)
18” (450 mm) 37.5’ – 1.53°/LF 46.9’ – 1.22°/LF 50.6’ – 1.13°/LF 56.3’ – 1.02°/LF 187.5’ – 0.31°/LF
(11.43 m – 5.02°) (14.30 m – 4.00°) (14.42 m – 3.71°) (17.16 m – 3.35°) (57.15 m – 1.02°)
20” (500 mm) 41.7’ – 1.38°/LF 52.1’ – 1.10°/LF 56.3’ – 1.02°/LF 62.5’ – 0.92°/LF 208.3’ – 0.28°/LF
(12.71 m – 4.53°) (15.88 m – 3.61°) (17.16 m – 3.35°) (19.05 m – 3.02°) (63.49 m – 0.92°)
22” (550 mm) 45.8’ – 1.25°/LF 57.3’ – 1.00°/LF 61.9’ – 0.93°/LF 68.8’ – 0.83°/LF 229.2’ – 0.25°/LF
(13.96 m – 4.10°) (17.47 m – 3.28°) (18.87 m – 3.05°) (20.97 m – 2.72°) (69.86 m – 0.82°)
24” (600 mm) 50.0’ – 1.15°/LF 62.5’ – 0.92°/LF 67.5’ – 0.85°/LF 75.0’ – 0.76°/LF 250.0’ – 0.23°/LF
(15.24 m – 3.77°) (19.05 m – 3.02°) (20.57 m – 2.79°) (22.86 m – 2.49°) (76.20 m – 0.75°)
30” (750 mm) 62.5’ – 0.92°/LF 78.1’ – 0.73°/LF 84.4’ – 0.68°/LF 93.8’ – 0.61°/LF 312.5’ – 0.18°/LF
(19.05 m – 3.02°) (23.80 m – 2.40°) (25.73 m – 2.23°) (28.59 m – 2.00°) (95.25 m – 0.59°)
36” (900 mm) 75.0’ – 0.76°/LF 93.8’ – 0.61°/LF 101.3’ – 0.57°/LF 112.5’ – 0.51°/LF 375.0’ – 0.15°/LF
(22.86 m – 2.49°) (28.59 m – 2.00°) (30.88 m – 1.87°) (34.29 m – 1.67°) (114.3 mm – 0.49°)
42” (1050 mm) 87.5’ – 0.65°/LF 109.4’ – 0.52°/LF 118.1’ – 0.49°/LF 131.3’ – 0.44°/LF 437.5’ – 0.13°/LF
(26.67 m – 2.13°) (33.35 m – 1.71°) (36.00 m – 1.61°) (40.02 m – 1.44°) (113.4 m – 0.43°)
48” (1200 mm) 100.0’ – 0.57°/LF 125.0’ – 0.46°/LF 135.0’ – 0.42°/LF 150.0’ – 0.38°/LF 500.0’ – 0.11°/LF
(30.48 m – 1.87°) (38.10 m – 1.51°) (41.15 m – 1.38°) (45.72 m – 1.25°) (152.4 m – 0.36°)
54” (1350 mm) 112.5’ – 0.51°/LF 140.6’ – 0.41°/LF 151.9’ – 0.38°/LF 168.8’ – 0.34°/LF 562.5’ – 0.10°/LF
(34.29 m – 1.67°) (42.85 m – 1.35°) (46.30 m – 1.25°) (51.45 m – 1.12°) (171.5 m – 0.33°)
63” (1575 mm) 131.3’ – 0.44°/LF 164.1’ – 0.35°/LF 177.2’ – 0.32°/LF 196.9’ – 0.29°/LF 656.3’ – 0.09°/LF
(40.0 m – 0.44°) (50.0 m – 1.15°) (54.0 m – 1.05°) (60.0 m – 0.95°) (200.0 m – 0.30°)
1. The values shown in Table 306-8.6.2 are based on 125% of that recommended by AWWA M55 Table 8-2.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 431

306-8.6.3 Acceptance. HDPE pressure pipe shall successfully pass the following tests prior to
completion of the Work:

TABLE 306-8.6.3
Item Test For Test Standard
Bedding and Backfill Suitability for Use as Backfill 217
Compaction ASTM D1557
Pipe Material Materials Inspection 209-5
Butt-Fusion or Saddle-Fusion Bent-Strap Test After fully cooling first trial fusion, cut fusion
Integrity test straps at least 12” (300 mm) and at least
30 wall thicknesses long and at least 1” (25
mm) and at least 1.5 wall thicknesses wide.
Fusion shall be in center of length. Bend test
strap until ends of strap touch. If fusion fails
at joint, a new trial fusion shall be made,
cooled and tested. Do not begin butt fusion
of pipe to be installed until trial fusion has
passed bent strap test.
Installed HDPE Pressure Pipe Alignment Deviation As specified in the Special Provisions but not
more than 1 foot (300 mm) horizontal, 0.25
foot (75 mm) vertical, or 0.1 foot (30 mm)
vertical variation over 10 feet (3 m) of pipe
having the same slope
Mandrel Test Pull mandrel through installed pipe to test for
obstructions or pipe deformation beyond that
specified below. Correct all obstructions in
pipe at locations encountered by mandrel
Hydrostatic Pressure Test 306-8.9.2
Bacteriological Sampling and Testing 306-[Link]
11-Month Anniversary Warranty 306-8.9.6
Inspection

306-8.7 Fiberglass Pressure Pipe.

306-8.7.1 General. Fiberglass pressure pipe shall be assembled in accordance with AWWA M45
Chapter 6 and the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
306-8.7.2 Installation.
306-[Link] Push-On Joints. Push-on joints shall be assembled in accordance with AWWA C605
and the following:
a) Spigots and bells shall slide together without displacement of the elastomeric gasket. Joints shall
be dirt-free. Pipe shall be installed with the bell facing in the direction of laying unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
b) Joint lubricant shall be applied to the pipe ends and elastomeric seals of couplings. Only
lubricants approved by the pipe manufacturer shall be used.
c) Pipes shall be pushed together using suitable hydraulic jacks. The maximum forces
recommended by the pipe manufacturer shall not be exceeded.
d) Joints shall not be deflected during assembly. Pipes or fittings shall be joined in straight
alignment then deflected to the required angle at deflection points.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
432 Greenbook 2021

e) Allowable joint deflections for push-on joints shall not exceed the following:

TABLE 306-[Link]
Pipe Nominal Diameter Allowable Push-on-Joint Deflection Allowable Push-on-Joint Deflection
Push on Joint Push on Joint
Pressure Class 200 or Less Pressure Class 250
3”-18” (75 mm-450 mm) 2.4° 2.0°
20”-30” (500 mm-760 mm) 1.6° 1.2°
36”-64” (900 mm-1600 mm) 0.8° 0.64°
1. The values shown above are based on 80% of that recommended by AWWA M45 or the manufacturer.

f) Connection of fiberglass pressure pipe to manways, fittings, and transitions to other pipe
materials shall be water-tight.
306-8.7.3 Acceptance. Fiberglass pressure pipe shall successfully pass the following tests prior to
completion of the Work:

TABLE 306-8.7.3
Item Test For Test Standard
Suitability for Use as Backfill 217
Bedding and Backfill
Compaction ASTM D1557
Pipe Material Materials Inspection 209-6
As specified in the Special Provisions but not
Alignment Deviation more than 1 foot (300 mm) horizontal or
Installed Fiberglass 0.25 foot (75 mm) vertical
Pressure Pipe Hydrostatic Pressure Test 306-8.9.2
Bacteriological Sampling and Testing 306-[Link]
11-Month Warranty Inspection 306-8.9.6

306-8.8 Valves, Hydrants, and Appurtenances.

306-8.8.1 General. Valves, hydrants, and appurtenances shall be constructed in accordance with the
Plans and submitted Reference Specifications.
306-8.8.2 Installation.
306-[Link] General. Valves, hydrants, and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s installation instructions. Conflicts between the Plans and submitted Reference
Specifications and the manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be submitted to the Engineer for
resolution.
306-[Link] Flanged Joints. Flanged joints shall be assembled as follows:
a) Flange surfaces shall be cleaned to mate with the gasket. Loose dirt, scale and laitance shall be removed.
b) Pits, corrosion, dents or scratches which may interfere with proper sealing shall be repaired.
c) The gasket shall be inspected and verified to be of proper material and style, free of defects or damage.
d) Flange bolts and studs shall be inspected for proper material, size, threading, and length.
e) Bolt threads and nut contact surfaces shall be cleaned and lubricated using a lubricant chemically
compatible with all of the materials it will be in contact with.
f) The gasket shall be centered on the flange.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 433

g) The mating flange bolt holes shall be aligned. Mating flange faces shall be flush against the
gasket prior to bolt-up.
h) Bolts, nuts and washers shall be inserted and hand-tightened until snug.
i) Before tightening bolts beyond hand-tight, adjacent valves shall be operated through their full
range of motion to ensure clear unobstructed operation of discs and other internal parts.
j) Bolts shall be tightened in 5-foot-pound (7 N-m) increments following a 180-degree opposing
sequence. Tightening shall begin with the bolt nearest the “12-o’clock” position, then proceed to
the opposing bolt nearest the “6-o’clock” position, then to the “3-o’clock” and “9-o’clock”
positions, and continue in a similar alternating sequence until all bolts are tight.
k) Re-tighten bolts 24 hours after installation and pressure testing to compensate for any gasket relaxation.
l) Flange bolt torques shall be as recommended by the valve, appurtenance, or pipe manufacturer.
306-8.8.3 Thrust Blocks. Where pipe is not restrained, thrust blocks shall be constructed as
follows:
a) Thrust blocks shall be constructed of concrete conforming to 201-1.
b) Concrete thrust blocks shall be constructed in accordance with 303 and as shown on the Plans.
c) Concrete blocks shall be constructed between undisturbed ground and fittings to be anchored.
d) The quantity of concrete and the bearing area of the pipe against undisturbed soil shall be as
shown on the Plans or Standard Plans.
e) Unless otherwise shown, concrete shall be placed so pipe joints and fittings remain accessible to
repairs.
306-8.8.4 Service Connections. Service connections shall be constructed as shown on the Plans.
The minimum service connection size shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm). Where mains are laid in paved streets,
service connections 2 inches (50 mm) and smaller shall be installed by boring unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
Service laterals shall be placed under curbs and gutters by boring. The letter “W” shall be inscribed
in the center of the curb face in line with each meter installation. The “W” shall be approximately 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) high and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) deep. No kinks, flats, crushes or other reductions in the
diameter of service laterals will be permitted.
306-8.8.5 Acceptance. Acceptance testing for valves and appurtenances shall conform to 306-8.9.3.
Valves and appurtenances shall be pressure tested at the same time connecting pipelines are pressure
tested. Valves, operators, or control and instrumentation elements whose pressure rating is less than the
test pressure shall be protected or isolated during pressure testing.
306-8.9 Pipeline Pressure Testing, Disinfection, and Commissioning.
306-8.9.1 General. Pressure pipelines shall be pressure tested, disinfected, and commissioned in
accordance with the requirements of this subsection.
306-8.9.2 Hydrostatic Pressure Test.
306-[Link] General. A minimum 4-hour hydrostatic pressure test shall be performed and
successfully completed in accordance with AWWA C600 or C605 and the following.
306-[Link] Preparation. The Contractor shall apply test pressures at an approved outlet or fitting located
within 5 feet (1.5 m) vertically of the lowest point of each pipe section to be tested. The Contractor shall

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
434 Greenbook 2021

provide and later securely plug such fittings. Where air valves or other suitable outlets are unavailable, the
Contractor shall provide approved taps and fittings for air release, and securely plug these later.
The Contractor shall flush all mains and services with potable water (or water as otherwise approved
by the Engineer and jurisdictional regulatory agencies) after the completion of construction. A sufficient
number of suitable outlets at the end(s) of line(s) being flushed shall be provided in addition to those
shown on the Plans to permit flushing of mains with water at a velocity of at least 2.5 feet per second
(750 mm/s) over its entire length. Outlets provided shall meet the requirements for the fittings specified
for the type of main constructed. Velocity through outlets and fittings shall not exceed 25 feet per second
(750 m/s) during flushing. Drainage facilities shall be constructed as necessary to ensure water lines do
not become contaminated during flushing.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient hoses, fittings and equipment to direct flushing water to an
established point of discharge. The discharge point shall be an improved drainage structure capable of
accepting the flow without damaging existing improvements or creating a public hazard. The Contractor
shall also provide dechlorination of the flushing water chlorine residual as required to meet applicable
NPDES permit requirements. Flushing in or adjacent to public streets shall be scheduled during periods
of low traffic volume. Traffic control during flushing and discharge of flushing water onto traffic lanes
shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall make the arrangements for, and provide the water
for, flushing and its subsequent discharge.
306-[Link] Allowable Leakage. Allowable leakage shall be determined as follows:
No ductile iron or PVC pipe installation will be accepted if leakage exceeds that determined by the
following formula (taken from AWWA C600 or AWWA C605):

LUS = SD(P)1/2/148,000
in which L = allowable leakage, in gallons per hour
S = length of pipe tested, in feet
D = nominal diameter of pipe, in inches
P = average observed test pressure of the pipe being tested, as shown, in pounds per
square inch gauge, based on the elevation of the lowest point in the line or section
under test and corrected to the elevation of the test gauge.

(LSI = SD(P)1/2/794,800)
(LSI in liters per hour, S in meters, D in millimeters, P in kilopascals)
No gasketed steel pipe installation will be accepted if leakage exceeds that determined by the
following formula (taken from AWWA C604):

LUS = 10 gallons per inch-diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours

LSI = 0.93 liters per millimeter-diameter per kilometer of pipe per 24 hours
When testing against closed valves, an allowance of 0.0078 gallons per hour per inch of nominal
valve size may be added to that computed using formulas above to account for leakage around seals.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 435

For PVC, ductile iron, or gasketed steel pipe, allowable leakage shall be as shown in Table 306-[Link].

TABLE 306-[Link]
Allowable Leakage in PVC OR Ductile Iron Pipe, Gallons per Hour per 1000’ (Liters Allowable
Additional
per Hour per 1,000 m) of Pipe Leakage in
Allowable
Gasketed Steel
Leakage
Pipe,
through Seals
Gallons per
of Closed
Hour per 1000’
Valves,
(Liters per
Gallons (Liters)
Hour per 1,000
per Valve
m) of Pipe
Test Pressure
Pipe Diameter 150 psi 200 psi 250 psi 300 psi
All Pressures All Pressures
(1.0 MPa) (1.4 MPa) (1.7 MPa) (2.1 MPa)
3" (75 mm) 0.25 (3.10) 0.29 (3.60) 0.32 (3.97) 0.35 (4.35) 0.24 (2.98) 0.02 (0.08)
4" (100 mm) 0.33 (4.10) 0.38 (4.72) 0.43 (5.34) 0.47 (5.84) 0.32 (3.97) 0.03 (0.11)
6" (150 mm) 0.50 (6.21) 0.57 (7.08) 0.64 (7.95) 0.70 (8.69) 0.47 (5.84) 0.05 (0.19)
8" (200 mm) 0.66 (8.20) 0.76 (9.44) 0.85 (10.6) 0.94 (11.7) 0.63 (7.82) 0.06 (0.23)
10" (250 mm) 0.83 (10.3) 0.96 (11.92) 1.07 (13.29) 1.17 (14.53) 0.79 (9.81) 0.08 (0.30)
12" (300 mm) 0.99 (12.30) 1.15 (14.28) 1.28 (15.90) 1.40 (17.39) 0.95 (11.80) 0.09 (0.34)
14" (350 mm) 1.16 (14.41) 1.34 (16.64) 1.50 (18.63) 1.64 (20.37) 1.10 (13.66) 0.11 (0.42)
16" (400 mm) 1.32 (16.39) 1.53 (19.00) 1.71 (21.24) 1.87 (23.22) 1.26 (15.65) 0.12 (0.45)
18" (450 mm) 1.49 (18.50) 1.72 (21.36) 1.92 (23.85) 2.11 (26.20) 1.42 (17.64) 0.14 (0.53)
20" (500 mm) 1.66 (20.62) 1.91 (23.72) 2.14 (26.58) 2.34 (29.06) 1.58 (19.62) 0.16 (0.61)
24" (600 mm) 1.99 (24.71) 2.29 (28.44) 2.56 (31.79) 2.81 (34.90) 1.89 (23.47) 0.19 (0.72)
30" (750 mm) 2.48 (30.80) 2.87 (35.64) 3.21 (39.87) 3.51 (43.59) 2.37 (29.43) 0.23 (0.87)
36" (900 mm) 2.98 (37.01) 3.44 (42.72) 3.85 (47.81) 4.21 (52.59) 2.84 (35.27) 0.28 (1.06)
42" (1050 mm) 3.48 (43.22) 4.01 (49.80) 4.49 (55.76) 4.92 (61.10) 3.31 (41.11) 0.33 (1.25)
48" (1200 mm) 3.97 (49.30) 4.59 (57.00) 5.13 (63.71) 5.62 (69.80) 3.79 (47.07) 0.37 (1.40)
54" (1350 mm) 4.47 (55.51) 5.16 (64.08) 5.77 (71.66) 6.32 (78.49) 4.26 (52.91) 0.42 (1.59)
60" (1500 mm) 4.97 (61.72) 5.73 (71.16) 6.41 (79.61) 7.02 (87.18) 4.73 (58.74) 0.47 (1.78)
64" (1600 mm) 5.30 (65.82) 6.12 (76.01) 6.84 (84.95) 7.49 (93.02) 5.05 (62.72) 0.50 (1.89)

For welded steel pipe, no leakage will be permitted.

For HDPE pipe, no leakage will be permitted.
306-[Link] Test Procedure. A 4-hour hydrostatic pressure test shall be performed in accordance
with the following:
Pipe, appurtenances, and permanent thrust blocks shall be submitted to a hydrostatic pressure test
after they have been installed and backfilled sufficiently, and after temporary plugs, caps, thrust blocks
and shoring have been installed to provide the required restraint.
The test pressure shall be 50 pounds per square inch (350 kPa) in excess of the working pressure
shown on the Plans for the class of pipe constructed unless the test pressure is specified elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
436 Greenbook 2021

The Contractor shall conduct pressure tests or retests subsequent to any trench backfill compactive effort
that is performed using compacting equipment having an overall weight in excess of 100 pounds (45 kg).
If butterfly valves or other pipeline appurtenances may have a maximum working water pressure less
than test pressure, the Contractor shall apply a minimum back pressure on these closed devices equal to
the difference between the test pressure and the rated pressure of the device.
The Contractor shall complete and pass the pressure test and disinfection tests specified in 306-8.9.4
prior to connecting any new line to the existing pipe and mains. Test of new mains shall be conducted
with the new valves open, and the open ends of pipes, valves, and fittings suitably closed or blind-
flanged. Valves shall be operated and checked prior to the test period.
The maximum length of pipe to be included in any one test shall not exceed 2,500 feet (760 m) or
the distance between the valves, whichever is greater. Suitable test bulkheads, blocking, and fittings
shall be installed as necessary to permit such sectionalizing.
The Contractor shall fill the pipeline slowly and maintain at operating pressure for at least 24 hours
prior to testing to satisfy any system water absorption. While filling and immediately prior to testing, all
air shall be expelled from the pipeline.
The Contractor shall then pressurize the pipeline to the specified test pressure following a 48-hour
soak period. When the test pressure has been reached, pumping shall be discontinued until the line
pressure has dropped 10 pounds per square inch (70 kPa), at which time the line pressure shall again be
pumped up to the test pressure. This procedure shall be repeated until 4 hours have elapsed from the
time the test pressure was first applied. At the end of this period, the pressure shall be pumped up to the
test pressure one last time.
Leakage shall be computed as the total quantity of water pumped into the pipeline during the test
period, including water added to reach the specified test pressure for the final time. Leakage shall not
exceed the rate specified for the type of pipe tested.
The Contractor shall repeat the testing until the leakage does not exceed the specified leakage rate.
The Contractor shall repair all visible leaks regardless of the amount of leakage.
All tests shall be completed in the presence of the Engineer who will record the results.
306-8.9.3 Testing of Valves and Appurtenances. Field testing of valves and appurtenances shall
conform to the following:

TABLE 306-8.9.3
Item Test for Test Standard
Valves and Visual Inspection for drip-tight service under pressure for all joints
Installation and Leakage
Appurtenances and for all valves in closed position.
Anchorage and Support of Visual inspection of finished installation. support in accordance
Exposed Pipe with California Plumbing Code Table 3-1 and 3-2
Pressure Test See 306-[Link]
Bacteriological Test See 306-[Link]
Operate valve through 10 full cycles of opening and closing. Valve
shall operate from full open to full close without sticking, or
Valve Actuators
binding and without required operating torque exceeding 150 ft-
lbs at any point
Demonstrate compliance to Contract Documents, AWWA
Field Performance
standards and manufacturer’s printed literature
11-Month Anniversary
306-8.9.6
Warranty Inspection

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 437

306-8.9.4 Disinfection
306-[Link] General. Potable water facilities shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA C651
and the following.
306-[Link] Submittals. The following submittals are required:

TABLE 306-[Link]
Submittal Description
If requested by the Engineer, submit a detailed plan showing how the pipeline will
Testing, Disinfection, Flushing and
be tested, disinfected, and flushed, and how the discharge from the flushing
Dechlorinating Plan
operation will be dechlorinated.
Required from the owner of any sanitary sewer or storm drain prior to the discharge
of flushing water into sewer or storm drain. The submittal shall include any
Written Permission to Discharge into
special requirements for treatment of flushing water prior to discharge, an
Sewer or Storm Drain
estimate of the expected maximum discharge rate of the flushing flow, and an
analysis of the sewer or storm drain capacity.
Laboratory Report for Disinfection
Submit a report from the Engineer-accepted testing laboratory
Testing

306-[Link] Potable Water System Disinfection Procedures. Following flushing and pressure
testing, disinfection shall proceed as follows:
Pipelines, valves, hydrants, service laterals, fittings, tanks and other surfaces exposed to water shall
be disinfected in accordance with AWWA C651 except as otherwise specified herein.
The Contractor shall provide sampling locations in accordance with AWWA C651 and the
California Division of Drinking Water Programs regulations.
After flushing, piping for potable water service shall be disinfected with a chlorine compound
solution made with liquid chlorine, calcium hypochlorite in solution, or a sodium hypochlorite solution,
which shall be water mixed and introduced into the mains to produce a dosage of not less than 50 mg/l
nor more than 100 mg/L in all sections of the pipeline and appurtenances.
Treated water shall be retained within the system for at least 24 hours and shall, at the end of
the retention period, produce a chlorine residual of not less than 25 mg/L in all sections of the
pipeline being disinfected.
If the tests are not satisfactory, the Contractor shall provide additional disinfection as required until
all tests are passed.
During the disinfection process, valves, hydrants, and other accessories shall be operated.
The Contractor shall not allow chlorinated water to remain in contact with internal waterway ports of
pumps, valves, and sensor line assemblies for longer than necessary.
After chlorination, the Contractor shall flush water from the pipeline at its extremities until
replacement water tests are equal chemically and bacteriologically to those of the permanent source of
supply. Flush water shall be dechlorinated in accordance with applicable NPDES permit requirements.
Placing of HTH capsules or powder in pipe sections during the laying process will not be considered
adequate disinfection.
The Contractor shall keep adequate chlorine residual testing and indicating apparatus available on
site during the entire disinfection period. After final flushing, the Contractor shall plug flushing fittings
with devices intended for this purpose at the pressure class of the pipe.
Where the water main is coated for disinfection, plugs and outlets shall be similarly coated.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
438 Greenbook 2021

The Contractor shall keep and provide to the Engineer accurate documentation of the dosing rate
(ppm), time of dosing and duration. The dosing agent’s name, contact information and signature shall be
provided.
306-[Link] Recycled Water System Disinfection Procedures. Disinfection of recycled water
system components shall conform to 306-[Link], except calcium hypochlorite tablets or granules may be
used to disinfect recycled water mains and services.
306-[Link] Dechlorination and Flushing. The Contractor shall dechlorinate and remove pollutants
from water flushed from water mains in accordance with AWWA C655 and the discharge requirements
and locations specified in the Special Provisions.
306-[Link] Bacteriological Sampling and Testing. On 2 consecutive days, the Contractor shall
take bacteriological samples and submit them to a laboratory approved by the Engineer. Passing
bacteriological tests on 2 consecutive days shall be achieved prior to connecting the pipeline to the
existing water system or placing the pipeline into service. If the initial chlorination fails to produce 2
consecutive days of passing bacteriological tests, chlorination shall be repeated until 2 consecutive
days of passing bacteriological tests are achieved. Samples of water for the specified bacteriologic test
shall be taken from each end of the disinfected main (located downstream of the point of introduction
of the chlorine disinfectant). For mains over 2,400 feet (730 m) in length, additional samples shall be
taken at intermediate points in such a manner that at least one sample is taken for every 1,200 feet
(365 m) of main.
If trench water has entered the new main during construction, or if, in the Engineer’s opinion,
excessive dirt or debris have entered the new main, bacteriological samples shall be taken at intervals of
approximately 200 feet (60 m) to the extent such sampling is possible.
Satisfactory bacteriological results shall conform to all of the following:
a) No total or fecal coliform.
b) A heterotrophic plate count less than 500 colony forming units (CFU) per mL
c) Presence of chlorine residual.
306-[Link] Laboratory Report. The laboratory report shall be on a chain of custody, lab work sheet,
or summary letter imprinted with the laboratory’s name, address, and phone number. The report shall
specify the field tests, laboratory analysis and results, and shall be signed by the laboratory director.
The laboratory report shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
The Engineer may reject the report if any data is missing or suspect due to conflicting indications.
306-8.9.5 Pipeline Commissioning. Pipelines passing disinfection bacteriological testing shall be
placed into service within 4 weeks from the date of sampling, or shall be resampled and tested prior to
being placed into service.
306-8.9.6 Eleven-Month Anniversary Warranty Inspection. A warranty inspection shall be
conducted during the 11th month following completion of the Work.
The Engineer will establish the date for the warranty inspection and will notify the Contractor at least
30 Days in advance. If notification of the inspection date does not occur within 12 months after
completion of the Work, the first anniversary inspection shall be considered to be waived.
The following occurrences will be considered to be system failures:
a) Locations found where trench resurfacing has settled below matching grade.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 439

b) Locations found where coatings or paint have peeled, bubbled or cracked, or locations where rust
is evident.
c) Locations found where furnished manufactured products show visible leakage.
d) Locations found where piping, valves, appurtenances, or other pipeline equipment fail to perform
as specified in applicable AWWA standards and to the level of performance described in the
Contract Documents and applicable submittals.
The Contractor shall remove failed trench resurfacing, coating, or painting work identified during the
warranty inspection and replace or reconstruct in conformance with the original requirements of the
Contract Documents unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Repaired painted areas shall be re-tested
using spark testing or other methods specified in the Special Provisions. If the area of failure exceeds 25
percent of the total trench resurfacing area or 25 percent of the coated or painted surface area on any
structure or surface, the Contractor shall remove and replace the entire trench resurfacing, coating or
paint system in conformance with the original requirements of the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall repair or replace piping and appurtenances showing visible leakage or failing to
perform as specified in applicable AWWA standards and to the level of performance described in the
Contract Documents and applicable submittals.
If repairs are required under the 11-month anniversary warranty inspection, the warranty period shall
be extended to the date repairs are complete as determined by the Engineer.
306-9 CAST-IN-PLACE NON-REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (CIPCP).
306-9.1 General. These specifications are for cast-in-place non-reinforced concrete pipe intended
to be used for gravity and low head drains and irrigation systems.
306-9.2 Materials. Concrete, unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, shall be Class
560-C-3250 (Class 330-C-23) conforming to 201-1 except that:
a) The slump shall be 1 inch (25 mm) minimum and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum. No water shall
be added after the slump test material has been sampled,
b) Batch proportions shall be designed by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer in
accordance with 3-8.
306-9.3 Trench Excavation.
306-9.3.1 General. Trenches shall conform to the alignment and grades shown on the Plans. The
subgrade shall be fine graded to the tolerances specified in 306-[Link].
The bottom of the trench shall be shaped to serve as the outside form of the pipe. The “trench form”
shall be defined as the portion of the trench over the bottom 210 degrees of the pipe. The trench form
shall provide full, firm, and uniform support for the pipe.
306-9.3.2 Trench Width. Except for curves and structures, the trench width shall not exceed
the outside diameter of the pipe plus 2 inches (50 mm) for a height of 1 foot (0.3 m) above the top
of the pipe.
306-9.3.3 Isolated Rock. Where isolated rock is encountered within the trench form, it shall be
removed. If the rock is too large to be removed by hand, the portion of the rock within 6 inches (150
mm) of the lower 90 degrees of the trench form shall be removed. The void shall be filled with
monolithically placed concrete prior to construction of the pipe or backfilled with soil compacted to a
minimum relative compaction of 90 percent. The method shall be approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
440 Greenbook 2021

306-9.3.4 Extensive Rock. Where extensive rock is encountered, the bottom 90 degrees of soil and
rock shall be overexcavated to a depth of 6 inches (150 mm) below the trench form and 12 inches (300
mm) along the remaining portions. The void shall be filled with monolithically placed concrete prior to
construction of the pipe or backfilled with soil compacted to a minimum relative compaction of 90
percent. The method shall be approved by the Engineer.
306-9.4 Placement.
306-9.4.1 General. Concrete placement shall conform to 303-1.8 unless otherwise specified in the
Special Provisions. Concrete shall not be placed when the temperature of the concrete exceeds 90°F
(32°C) or is less than 50°F (10°C). The temperature of the soil adjacent to the trench shall be above
32°F (0°C).
306-9.4.2 Soil Moisture. At the time of concrete placement, soil which will be in contact with
CIPCP shall be moistened, but shall not contain standing, seeping, or flowing water. The Contractor
may place a layer of 1 inch (25 mm) maximum size rock 6 inches (150 mm) thick below the trench
invert to assist in water control.
306-9.4.3 Concrete Forms. Concrete shall be placed around the full circumference of the pipe in
one operation by means of fixed forms and traveling forms. The internal fixed forms shall be of
sufficient strength to withstand the vibrating or tamping of the concrete, and prevent deformation during
placement. Inflatable internal forms shall not be used. The concrete shall be vibrated, tamped, or
worked with suitable devices until consolidated and the forms are completely filled.
306-9.4.4 Junction Structures. Where junction structures are to be constructed, CIPCP shall be
constructed continuous through the structure locations. The pipe shall be cut away to the specified opening
prior to the concrete setting. Alternate methods may be used as approved in writing by the Engineer.
306-9.4.5 Construction Joints. When placement is stopped for a period of time long enough that
initial set may occur or for 20 minutes, whichever is less, a construction stoppage joint shall be
constructed by sloping the end of the pipe at approximately 45 degrees and inserting 24-inch (600 mm)
long No. 3 (No. 10M) dowels 12 inches (300 mm) into the center of the pipe wall at intervals of
approximately 18 inches (450 mm) around the pipe circumference. The total exposed face shall be left
in a roughened condition.
Before placement operations may resume, the concrete placed at the construction stoppage joint shall
have attained sufficient strength to permit an excavation to be made on each side of the joint to form a
concrete collar. This collar shall be centered on the joint and have a minimum thickness of 1-1/2 times
the pipe wall thickness and a minimum length of 24 inches (600 mm). The joint shall be cleaned of
laitance, foreign, and loose materials before resuming concrete placement.
306-9.4.6 Form Removal. Internal fixed forms shall remain in place until the concrete is self-
supporting, after which they may be loosened but shall not be removed for at least 6 hours after
placement. As soon as practical thereafter, the forms shall be removed to facilitate inspection and
prompt repair. During times of low temperatures or other adverse conditions the forms may be kept in
place for longer periods of time.
306-9.4.7 Finishing. The interior shall be at least as smooth as a steel trowel finish except for the
form lap ridges permitted in 306-[Link].
306-9.5 Curing. Immediately after placement, the exposed top portion of the pipe shall be cured by
placing a polyethylene film at least 1.5 mils (38 µm) thick so as to completely cover the top surface.
Each opening in the pipe shall be covered with polyethylene and loosely secured to prevent drafts for at

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 441

least 7 Days immediately after placement. At locations where work on the pipe is required, and only
during the period that such work is actually in progress, shall necessary openings be uncovered.
306-9.6 Repairing. After the internal fixed forms have been removed, the inside of the pipe will be
inspected by the Engineer. Rock pockets, blisters, voids, or similar defects not extending through the
wall and less than 2 square feet (0.18 m2) in area, shall be repaired immediately by removing the
defective concrete and replacing it with bonded and cured mortar or other patching material approved by
the Engineer.
Rock pockets, blisters, voids, or other defects greater than 2 square feet (0.18 m2) or which extend
through the pipe wall shall be repaired by removing the entire pipe for 1 foot (300 mm) on each side
beyond the limits of the defect.
Cracks shall not be repaired until the backfill has been placed. However, the Contractor may remove
and replace cracked pipe prior to placement of the backfill.
Subsequent to placement of the backfill, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the pipe is
ready for reinspection. Cracks less than 10 mils (250 µm) in width or cracks greater than 10 mils (250
µm) in width but less than 12 inches (300 mm) long shall be painted with a cement paste. Longitudinal
cracks exceeding 10 mils (250 µm) in width and 12 inches (300 mm) in length shall be repaired by
epoxy pressure grouting provided the total length of cracks for any reach is less than 25 percent. If the
total length of cracks exceeds 25 percent, the entire reach shall be removed and replaced. A reach shall
be defined as any length between 2 structures.
Circumferential cracks exceeding 10 mils (250 µm) in width and 12 inches (300 mm) in length shall
be repaired by removing at least 1 inch (25 mm) of concrete in width for a depth of at least 1/2 the wall
thickness. After cleaning this area, it shall be filled with bonded mortar and cured.
Alternate repair methods shall be submitted in writing not less than 7 Days prior to use for approval
by the Engineer. Any repairs performed shall ensure the specified structural strength is not compromised
and by techniques which have been approved by the Engineer.
306-9.7 Sampling and Testing.
306-9.7.1 General. Sampling and testing shall be performed in the sequence described herein.
Concrete will be tested during placement operations in accordance with 201-1.1.4. If the concrete
cylinders do not meet the required 28-Day strength, cores shall be obtained from the completed pipe.
Cores shall be used to determine the wall thickness and compressive strength. Strength test results shall
be verified by a laboratory approved by the Engineer.
The Engineer will determine the number and location of the samples to be taken and tests to be
performed by the Contractor. The location shall be identified by station, and where applicable, the angle
from vertical measured clockwise facing up-station.
306-9.7.2 Wall Thickness. The Engineer will determine the wall thickness in accordance with
the following:
a) The thickness at the invert and crown of the pipe will be measured by probing at approximately
25 foot (7.5 m) intervals during placement of the concrete. The probe will be forced through the
concrete to make firm contact with the form at the crown and will be held in a position normal to
the surface when the measurement is taken. The invert shall be inspected by removing a small
portion and measuring the thickness. The probe shall be a 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) round bar, at least 2
inches (50 mm) longer than the wall thickness to be measured, rounded on one end with a tee
handle on the other.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
442 Greenbook 2021

b) The thickness at the invert and springline will be measured through holes drilled by the
Contractor. The holes shall be at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter and shall be drilled after the
removal of the forms and within 72 hours of concrete placement.
Three holes shall be drilled every 50 feet (15 m) at the invert and both springlines and shall be
located as determined by the Engineer. The Engineer may require additional holes on curves.
After measurement, the Contractor shall fill all holes with Class “C” mortar conforming to 201-5.
306-9.7.3 Concrete Cores. Cores, when required by the Engineer, shall be obtained from CIPCP
and tested in accordance ASTM C42. The Contractor shall obtain the cores. Testing shall be arranged
by the Contractor and performed at a laboratory approved by the Engineer. The cores shall have a
length-to-diameter ratio of not less than one. The diameter of cores shall be at least 3 times the
maximum size of the aggregate used in the concrete, except where the wall thickness if such that the
length-to-diameter will be less than one, in which case the core diameter may be reduced to 2-1/2 times
the maximum aggregate size used.
At least 4 cores shall be taken for each 200 feet (60 m), or fraction thereof, of pipe. Cores shall be
taken at the following points at stations selected by the Engineer: one through the crown, one through the
invert, and 2 in the lower half of the pipe 45 degrees from the vertical. The Engineer may require
additional cores at any location. The Contractor shall patch each core hole in such a manner that the
patch will be permanent, not leak, and have a smooth finish flush with the interior surface.
306-9.7.4 Load Bearing Tests. Load bearing tests shall be performed by the Contractor every 1,000
feet (300 m) of pipe having the same size and wall thickness, with a minimum of 1 per size and 2 for the
Work. The test locations will be determined by the Engineer. The tests shall be performed in the
presence of the Engineer.
The method and apparatus requirements shall be as follows:
a) The test shall be performed with only the trench form providing bottom support. If the pipe has
been constructed so that more than 210 degrees is in contact with the natural soil, the trench wall
shall be re-excavated to provide 210 degrees of trench form without altering the existing bedded
condition of the trench form.
b) The test length shall be at least 4 feet (1.2 m) and not more than 5 feet (1.5 m). At the option of
the Contractor, the test section may be isolated from the completed pipe.
c) The test load shall be applied by use of a “sand box,” consisting of a frame and bearing plate, in
such a manner that sand carefully placed in the sand box forms a bearing symmetrically about the
centerline and over the entire length of the test section. The width of the bedding shall be 0.7
times the specified internal diameter of the pipe. The minimum thickness of the sand shall be
0.25 times the specified internal diameter.
d) The frame and bearing plate shall be sufficiently rigid such that the load is distributed uniformly
and the frame and plate will not deform under the loaded condition. The interior surfaces of the
frame shall be smooth. The lower surface of the bearing plate shall be a true plane. Cloth or
plastic film shall be attached to the inside of the frame along the lower edges to prevent the loss
of sand through the gap between the pipe and the frame. This type of apparatus is described in
ACI 346.
e) The frame shall be properly located on the pipe test section and filled with sand. The sand shall
be clean and graded to pass a No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve. The sand shall be struck off level and
covered with the bearing plate. During the test, the bearing plate shall not contact the frame.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 443

f) The load shall be applied symmetrically on the bearing plate until the total required has been
attained. The pipe shall remain loaded until the interior of the pipe has been inspected by the
Engineer and results have been observed and recorded.
g) The applied load, in pounds (N), shall equal the test load multiplied by the length of the test
section, in feet (meters).
The test load shall be calculated as follows:
U.S. Standard Measures:
Test Load = (127.5H + 1.5LL + 5.56T) OD + 34.0(ID)2
SI Units:
Test Load = (20030H + 1.5LL + 10.48T) OD + 5340 (ID)2
Where:
ID = Specified inside diameter of the pipe in feet (meters).
T = Specified wall thickness of the pipe in inches (mm).
OD = ID + 2T/12 = Outside diameter of pipe in feet.
(SI Units: OD = ID + 2T/1000 = Outside diameter of pipe in meters.)
H = Depth of cover on pipe in feet (meters).
LL = Live load on pipe in pounds per square foot (kPa).

TABLE 306-9.7.4
Depth of Cover Live Load (LL)
2
ft (m) lbs/ft (kPa)
3 (0.9) 489 (23.4)
4 (1.2) 314 (15.0)
5 (1.5) 234 (11.2)
6 (1.8) 182 (8.71)
7 (2.0) 145 (6.94)
8 (2.4) 119 (5.70)
9 (2.7) 120 (5.75)
10 (3.0) 90 (4.31)
Over 10 (3.0) N/A

h) The total test load shall be supported by the test section without the development of any
additional cracking.
i) After the satisfactory completion of the test, the Contractor shall repair the pipe, resulting from
isolating the test section, in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
In lieu of using a “sand box” as described above, the Contractor may conduct a wheel load test on a 4
foot (1.2 m) section of pipe when approved in writing by the Engineer. The load applied shall be
determined by the equation above applied to a section of pipe. The total test load shall be supported by
the test section without the development of any additional cracking.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
444 Greenbook 2021

306-9.8 Dimensions and Tolerances.

306-9.8.1 General. The minimum nominal size of CIPCP shall be 24-inch (600 mm) inside diameter.
306-9.8.2 Diameter. The inside diameter of the pipe at any point shall not be less than 99 percent
nor more than 105 percent of the nominal diameter, and the average of any 4 measurements of the inside
diameter made at 45-degree intervals shall not be less than the nominal diameter.
306-9.8.3 Wall Thickness. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, the minimum wall thickness shall
not be less than that shown in Table 306-9.8.3. The wall thickness shall be uniform around the
circumference of the pipe.

TABLE 306-9.8.3
Inside Diameter Minimum Wall Thickness
inches (mm) inches (mm)
24 and 30 (600 and 750) 3 (76)
36 (900) 3-1/2 (89)
42 (1050) 4 (102)
48 (1200) 5 (127)
54 (1350) 5-1/2 (140)
60 (1500) 6 (153)
66 (1650) 6-1/2 (165)
72 (1800) 7 (178)
78 (1950) 7-1/2 (191)
84 (2100) 8 (203)
90 (2250) 8-1/2 (216)
96 (2400) 9 (229)
108 (2700) 10 (254)
120 (3000) 12 (305)
132 (3300) 14 (356)
144 (3600) 15 (381)

For an inside diameter not shown above or on the Plans, the minimum wall thickness shall be equal
to the next size larger pipe.
306-9.8.4 Offsets and Indentations. Offsets and indentations, including transverse and
longitudinal form offsets and construction stoppage joints, shall not exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm) in width for
pipe with a specified inside diameter of 42 inches (1050 mm) or less, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) for pipe with a
specified inside diameter over 42 inches (1050 mm) and less than 72 inches (1800 mm), and 1/2 inch
(12.5 mm) for pipe diameters equal to or greater than 72 inches (1800 mm).
Reaches having offsets or indentations in excess of these limits shall be repaired as approved by
the Engineer.
306-9.8.5 Grade and Alignment. A laser grade control system shall be used during trench construction and
placement.
Departure from and return to established grade shall not exceed 3/8 inch per foot (10 mm/m) and
maximum departure shall not exceed 1 inch (25 mm). Maximum departure from established alignment
shall not exceed 2 inches (50 mm) on tangents and 4 inches (100 mm) on curves. Departure from and
return to established alignment shall not exceed 1/4 inch per foot (20 mm/m).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 445

If the departure exceeds the maximum allowed, the work shall be stopped and the necessary
adjustments made. The affected portions of the conduit with excessive departure shall be removed and
replaced at the alignment and grades shown on the Plans.
306-9.9 Rejection. CIPCP will be rejected for any of the following reasons:
a) Longitudinal cracks exceeding 10 mils (250 µm) in width and 12 inches (300 mm) or greater in length
unless repaired in conformance with 306-9.6. If longitudinal cracks occur intermittently in 25 percent or
more of a reach of pipe, the pipe shall not be repaired and shall be removed and replaced.
b) Circumferential cracks exceeding 10 mils (250 µm) in width and 12 inches (300 mm) or greater in length
unless repaired in conformance with 306-9.6.
c) Longitudinal cracks exceeding 1/1000 the internal diameter or a maximum 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in width.
d) Rock pockets, honeycombing, blisters, voids, or other defects that extend through the pipe wall.
e) A wall thickness less than the minimum shown in Table 306-9.8.3.
f) A diameter that does not conform to the requirements specified in 306-9.8.2.
g) Application of any wash coat of cement, grout, or other material prior to re-inspection after backfill has
been placed.
h) Air bubble voids on the interior surface of the pipe exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) in depth unless pointed
with mortar or other approved material.
i) Unpaired offsets or indentations, including transverse and longitudinal form offsets exceeding those
allowed in 306-9.8.4.
j) Deviation or departure from true grade or alignment exceeding that allowed in 306-9.8.5.
k) Concrete used that has a slump of less than 1 inch (25 mm) or more than 3 inches (75 mm) as specified
in 306-9.2. Concrete that has had water added after slump and/or cylinder samples have been taken or
that does not meet the proportioning requirements of 201-1.
l) Concrete that has core strengths less than specified in 306-9.2.
m) The pipe does not pass the load test specified in 306-9.7.4.
n) The pipe has been damaged in any manner.
o) Concrete that was placed when the concrete temperature exceeded 90°F (32°C) or was less than 50°F
(10°C), or when the soil adjacent to the trench was at or below 32°F (0°C).
p) The trench does not provide full, firm, and uniform support over the bottom 210 degrees of the pipe or
the trench width exceeds the outside diameter by more than 2 inches (50 mm), except when meeting the
requirements of 306-9.3.2, 9.3.3, and 9.3.4.
q) The interior of the pipe is not at least as smooth as a steel trowel finish except for the form lap ridges.
306-10 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES
306-10.1 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box (PRCB).
306-10.1.1 General. These specifications cover the construction of single-cell PRCB sections
intended to be used for the conveyance of stormwater. PRCB sections shall conform to 216.
306-10.1.2 Repairs. PRCB sections damaged due to imperfections in fabrication or handling shall
be repaired by a method approved by the Engineer.
306-10.1.3 Subgrade. Unsuitable subgrade material shall be removed to the depth shown on the
Plans or determined by the Engineer and replaced with leveling bed material. Voids below subgrade

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
446 Greenbook 2021

shall be filled with leveling bed material prior to densification. Subgrade material shall be compacted to
a minimum of 90 percent relative compaction.
306-10.1.4 Leveling Bed Material. Leveling bed material shall conform to 216-2.4 and be
compacted to a minimum of 90 percent relative compaction.
306-10.1.5 Installation. PRCB shall be laid up-grade with the groove ends up-grade unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Connections shall be constructed as shown on the Plans.
At the close of work each day, or whenever the work ceases for any reason, each end shall be
securely closed as approved by the Engineer.
306-10.1.6 Joints.
306-[Link] Tongue-and-Groove Joints. Tongue and groove joints shall be constructed in
accordance with 306-[Link] modified as follows:
a) Only one end shall be beveled for PRCB sections placed on curves.
b) Concrete used to fill clear spaces more than 1 inch (25 mm) and less than 3 inches (75 mm) shall
be Class 560-C-3250 (330-C-23) conforming to 201-1 or Class “C “mortar conforming to 201-5
unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
c) Joint shall be sealed by one of the following:
i) Preformed flexible joint sealant conforming to ASTM C990 or AASHTO M198. Preformed
flexible joint sealant shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications
on the tongue and groove, in order to fill the joint annular space on the inside of the PRCB
section. Flexible plastic gaskets shall not be used on PRCB pulled to provide a curve.
ii) Preformed flexible joint sealant bands conforming to ASTM C877, in conjunction with
mastic or mortar, when installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
306-[Link] Profile Gasket (Single Offset) Joints. Profile gasket joints shall contain a gasket
conforming to 208-3 unless otherwise specified. The gasket shall be the sole element responsible for
watertightness of the joint.
The slope of the longitudinal gasket contact surfaces of the joint shall not exceed 2 degrees with
respect to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. The gasket shall be uniformly stretched and equally
tensioned around the spigot end of the joint. Lubrication of the joint and assembly shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.
306-[Link] Acceptance Testing. The pipeline shall be tested in accordance with 306-7.8.
306-10.1.7 Structure Backfill. Structure backfill material shall conform to 217-3. Structure
backfill placement shall conform to 300-3.5.1. Structure backfill material shall be placed 12 inches (300
mm) from the top and 24 inches (600 mm) from each side.
306-10.2 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes (PRCMH).
306-10.2.1 General. These specifications cover the construction of precast reinforced concrete
manholes intended for the conveyance of stormwater and wastewater. PRCMH shall conform to 215.
306-10.2.2 Repairs. Damaged PRCMH shall be repaired by a method approved by the Engineer.
306-10.2.3 Subgrade. Unsuitable subgrade material shall be removed to the depth shown on the
Plans or determined by the Engineer and replaced with leveling bed material. Voids below subgrade
shall be filled with leveling bed material prior to densification. Subgrade material shall be compacted to
a minimum of 90 percent relative compaction.
306-10.2.4 Leveling Bed Material. Leveling bed material shall conform to 216-2.4.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 447

306-10.2.5 Installation.
The PRCMH base shall be set onto subgrade or leveling bed material and checked for proper
elevation and orientation to receive the incoming and outgoing pipes at the invert elevation. The top of
the manhole base shall be level in both directions.
PRCMH sections shall be constructed on a cast-in-place concrete base where shown on the Plans.
The cast-in-place concrete base shall be constructed on subgrade prepared in accordance with 303-1.2.
306-10.2.6 Joints. Joints shall be constructed in accordance with 306-7.3.2 and the following:
Tongue and groove joints shall be constructed in accordance with 306-[Link] modified as follows:
a) Concrete used to fill clear spaces more than 1 inch (25 mm) and less than 3 inches (75 mm) shall
be Class 560-C-3250 (330-C-23) conforming to 201-1 or Class “C” mortar conforming to 201-5
unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
b) Joint shall be sealed by one of the following:
i) Preformed flexible joint sealant conforming to ASTM C990. Preformed flexible joint sealant
shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications on the tongue and
groove, in order to fill the joint annular space on the inside of the PRCMH section.
ii) External preformed flexible joint sealant bands conforming to ASTM C877 Type I or II, in
conjunction with mastic or mortar, when installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
iii) Internal preformed flexible joint sealant bands conforming to ASTM C923 when installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
iv) Gaskets conforming to 208-3, when installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
306-10.2.7 Pipe to Manhole Connections. Pipes to manhole connections shall conform to 208-6.
306-10.2.8 Structure Backfill. Structure backfill material shall conform to 217-3. Structure
backfill placement shall conform to 300-3.5.1. Structure backfill material shall be placed 24 inches (600
mm) from each side of the structure unless otherwise specified.
306-10.2.9 Liners. Liners where shown on the Plans shall be the type specified and shall conform
to 502-5.
306-11 CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX (CIPRCB).
306-11.1 General. Concrete for CIPRCB shall conform to 201. The class shall conform to the
requirements shown in Table 201-1.1.2 unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the
Special Provisions.
306-11.2 Subgrade Preparation. Subgrade preparation shall conform to 303-1.2.
306-11.3 Bedding. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, bedding material is not required
under CIPRCB.
306-11.4 Form Construction. Form construction shall conform to 303-1.3.
306-11.5 Reinforcement Placement. Reinforcement placement shall conform to 303-1.7.
306-11.6 Concrete Placement. Concrete placement shall conform to 303-1.8.
306-11.7 Form Removal.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
448 Greenbook 2021

306-11.7.1 General. Unless otherwise specified, the periods of time specified herein are based on
the use of Types II, III, IV, or V Portland cement. Forms may be removed on the following basis:
a) Outside forms and inside wall forms which do not support the slab forms: 16 hours
b) Slab forms:
i. Type II cement - 48 hours or 6 hours per foot (20 hours per meter) of span between
supports, whichever is greater.
ii. Type III cement - 24 hours or 3 hours per foot (10 hours per meter) of span between
supports, whichever is greater.
iii. Type V cement - 56 hours or 7 hours per foot (23 hours per meter) of span between
supports, whichever is greater.
306-11.7.2 Computed Compressive Strength Method.
306-[Link] General. In lieu of form removal as specified in 306-11.7.1, form removal may be
based on the following.
If the walls and top slab of the box structure are placed monolithically, the forms may be removed
when the concrete has attained the compressive strength as computed from the following formula:

CUS = 20 S + 1000 For U.S. Standard Measures

(CSI = 0.45 S + 7 For Metric Units)
Where S = Span length in feet (meters) from center to center of supports (maximum span 20 feet (6 m)
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer).
Where CUS (CSI) = Required compressive strength in pounds per square inch (MPa) of the concrete as
determined in accordance with the requirements below:

If the top slab is not placed monolithically with side walls and if the wall forms do not support the
top slab forms, the forms for the walls may be removed when the concrete has attained a compressive
strength of 1,000 pounds per square inch (7 MPa). The forms for the top slab may be removed when the
concrete has attained a compressive strength equal to that computed by the above formula; provided that
the concrete in the walls has attained a compressive strength at least equal to that determined for the top
slab at the time it is proposed to remove the top slab forms.
The strengths at which the Contractor may remove forms in the walls and top slab of box sections
are permissive only, and subject to the Contractor assuming all risks that may be involved in such
removals. No allowance for external loads is included in the specified strength.
306-[Link] Testing Requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining when
concrete placed in the forms has attained the compressive strength specified for form removal by means
of tests on specimens made from the concrete placed in the forms. The Contractor shall make such
number of 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high cylindrical test specimens as may be required to determine
whether the specified strength has been attained; however, the number of specimens shall be such as to
allow a minimum of 3 specimens to be tested at any one age. The Contractor shall furnish at its own
expense, all equipment, material, supplies and labor for performing field tests which will be used as a
basis of determining when forms may be removed or stripped. Forms shall not be removed until
approval therefor has been given by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 449

The equipment, materials and supplies to be furnished shall include, but not be limited to, molds,
tamping rods, sulfur capping compound, capping compound warmer, a capping device and a
compression testing machine.
The specimens shall be made in the presence of the Engineer, during every concrete pour for which
stripping strengths are required, by taking representative samples of fresh concrete, directly from the
mixer, and placing such concrete into suitable molds where it shall be rodded into place. The specimens
shall be made in accordance with ASTM C31. Specimens shall be made and stored on a casting board
made of 5/8-inch plywood measuring 21 inches x 21 inches.
The specimens shall be covered by a box fabricated of 1/2-inch plywood measuring 21 inches x 21
inches x 15-1/2 inches high, outside dimensions. During the period of November 1 to May 31, inclusive,
said casting board and box shall be insulated with an inside covering of 1/2-inch thick styrofoam or other
material approved by the Engineer. No insulation shall be used during the period of June 1 to October 31,
inclusive. The use of plastic sheets, light bulbs or other heating devices, inside or outside of the box, will
not be permitted. Not more than 3 specimens shall be stored within the box at any one time.
The box and board containing the 3 specimens shall be stored near the point of sampling, either on
hardened concrete adjacent to the freshly placed concrete, or on the ground surface adjacent to the
freshly placed concrete.
At an appropriate time, prior to loading, the specimens shall be removed from the box and moved to
the location where the capping equipment and compression testing machine are kept; however, under no
circumstances shall specimens be stored in the box for a period greater than 24 hours. At the
aforementioned location, the specimens shall be removed from the molds and capped with a sulfur
capping compound in accordance with the methods of ASTM C31. After the caps have hardened, the
specimens shall be loaded to failure in a compression testing machine, in the presence of the Engineer, in
accordance with ASTM C39. The compressive strength of each specimen shall be calculated by
dividing the maximum load carried by the specimen during the test by the average cross-sectional area,
and the result expressed to the nearest 10 pounds per square inch. The compressive strength of the
concrete represented by the specimens shall be taken as the average compressive strength of 3 specimens
tested at the same age except that if one specimen in a test shows manifest evidence of improper
sampling, molding or testing, it shall be discarded and the remaining 2 strengths averaged. Should more
than one specimen representing a given test show definite defects due to improper sampling, molding or
testing, the entire test shall be discarded.
In the event specimens are to be tested at ages greater than 24 hours, the specimens shall be taken
from the box at an age of 24 hours, removed from the molds when the forms are stripped, and stored at
the location where the capping equipment and compression testing machine are kept, where they shall
receive, insofar as is practicable, the same exposure and/or protection from the elements as the portions
of the structure which they represent, until the time of testing.
The completed specimens may be tested by a testing laboratory approved by the Engineer; however,
forms shall not be stripped until the Engineer has been furnished with the results of the tests and until
approval has been given by the Engineer to remove the forms.
In the event that the compressive strength as determined from the cylinder tests is less than that
required for form removal, and the Contractor does not have sufficient specimens to perform additional
tests, then the Contractor shall wait 4 hours for each 100 pounds per square inch that the compressive
strength is below that required before removing the top slab forms.
306-11.8 Surface Finishes. Surface finishes shall conform to 303-1.9.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
450 Greenbook 2021

306-11.9 Curing. Curing shall conform to 303-1.10.

306-11.10 Structure Backfill. Structure backfill material shall conform to 217-3. Structure backfill
placement shall conform to 300-3.5.1. Structure backfill material shall be placed 12 inches (300 mm)
from the top and 24 inches (600 mm) from each side of the CIPRCB.
306-12 BACKFILL.
306-12.1 General. Trench backfill material shall conform to 217-2. Backfill for prefabricated
gravity and pressure pipe, cast-in-place non-reinforced concrete pipe, and prefabricated reinforced
concrete box shall be considered as starting at the top of the bedding zone. Backfill for cast-in-place
reinforced concrete box shall be considered as starting at the top of the structure backfill. For concrete
encasement, the backfill shall be considered as starting at the top of the concrete encasement.
Backfill shall be considered as starting at the subgrade for cast-in-place reinforced concrete box
and structures.
Except where a pipe must remain exposed for a force main leakage test and subject to the provisions
herein, the Contractor shall proceed with backfilling operations as soon as possible. Care shall be exercised
so that the conduit will not be damaged or displaced. If a pipe is supported by concrete bedding that does
not cover the pipe, the remainder of any bedding material shall be placed to 1 foot (0.3 m) over the top of
the pipe. Backfill above concrete bedding shall not be placed nor sheeting pulled until the concrete
bedding has been cured per 201-1.
The Contractor may place backfill or structure backfill against or over the top of any cast-in-place
structure in accordance with Table 306-12.1, unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.

TABLE 306-12.1
Operation Location

Against Sides of Structures (Days) Over Top of Structure (Days)

Placement of Loose Backfill 5 21

1
Densification of Backfill 7 28

1. Or 100 percent of the specified compressive strength.

Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond the limits of normal excavation lines in order to
remove boulders or other interfering objects, the voids remaining after the removal of the boulders shall
be backfilled and compacted as approved by the Engineer.
Voids left by the removal of sheeting, piles and similar sheeting supports shall be immediately
backfilled with clean sand which shall be jetted or vibrated into place to ensure dense and complete
filling of the voids.
Compaction shall be performed immediately after each lift of backfill is placed.
When the depth of cover of the top pipe or cable is less than 30 inches (750 mm), the top 24 inches
(600 mm) of backfill, measured from the surface, shall be compacted to 90 percent relative compaction.
If the Engineer determines that it is not practical to attain the required compaction by mechanical
methods, or jetting, such as in areas around utilities, vaults, or other structures, trench backfill slurry per
Table 201-1.1.2 will be required.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 451

306-12.2 Backfill for Narrow Trenches. Narrow trenches are defined as 10 inches (250 mm) or less in
width. Backfill for narrow trenches shall be placed in accordance with 306-1.12.1 except as modified herein.
Narrow trenches shall be backfilled by the use of trench backfill slurry conforming to 201-1 or CLSM
conforming to 201-6, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
When narrow trenches are backfilled using trench backfill slurry or CLSM, the Contractor may place the
material in a single lift using vibrators for consolidation. The top of the trench backfill slurry or CLSM shall be
placed flush with the top of the pavement when steel plates are not placed. The trench backfill slurry or CLSM
shall be cut back to a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) but no greater than 8 inches (200 mm) below the existing
pavement prior to placing permanent paving. For trenches 6 inches (150 mm) or less in width, the compacted
thickness of asphalt concrete shall be 3 inches (75 mm).
Backfill to be mechanically compacted in narrow trenches shall be placed in accordance with 306-1.12.3,
except as modified herein. Backfill shall not have any rocks greater in any dimension, than 1/4 the width of the
trench. In-place density for narrow trenches will be determined in accordance with ASTM D2937 or by a
method approved by Engineer.
306-12.3 Mechanically Compacted Trench Backfill.
306-12.3.1 General. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted by means of tamping, sheepsfoot, pneumatic
tire, or vibrating rollers, or other mechanical tampers. Such equipment shall be of the size and type approved by
the Engineer. Impact-type pavement breakers (“stompers”) will not be permitted over or adjacent to pipe, duct,
or cable, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Permission to use specific compaction equipment shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility to
ensure that the use of such equipment will not result in damage to adjacent ground, existing improvements, or
improvements constructed under the Contract. The Contractor shall make its own determination in this regard.
Each lift of backfill shall be uniformly spread, moistened (or dried, if necessary), and then compacted until
the specified relative compaction has been attained.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, material for mechanically compacted backfill shall be placed in
lifts which, prior to compaction, shall not exceed the thickness specified below for the various types of
equipment:
a) Impact, free fall, or “stomping” equipment- maximum lift thickness of 24 inches (600 mm)
b) Vibratory equipment, including vibratory plates on backhoe dipsticks, vibratory smooth-wheel rollers,
and vibratory pneumatic-tired rollers - maximum lift thickness of 18 inches (150 mm).
c) Rolling equipment, including sheepsfoot (both vibratory and nonvibratory), grid, smooth-wheel
(nonvibratory), grid, smooth wheel (nonvibratory), and segmented wheels - maximum lift thickness of 8
inches (200 mm).
d) Hand-directed mechanical compactors such as vibratory plates or tamper - maximum lift thickness of 4
inches (100 mm).
306-12.3.2 Compaction Requirements. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions,
mechanically compacted trench backfill shall be compacted to the following minimum relative compaction:
a) 85 percent relative compaction:
1) In the bedding zone.
2) Outside the traveled way and other paved areas (or areas to receive pavement).
3) Under sidewalks.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
452 Greenbook 2021

b) 90 percent relative compaction:

1) In the upper 3 feet (0.9 m) measured from the pavement surface (or finish grade where there is no
pavement), within the existing or future traveled way, shoulders, and other paved areas (or areas to
receive pavement).
2) Within engineered embankments.
3) Where lateral support is required for existing or proposed structures.
c) 95 percent relative compaction where required by 301-1.3.
306-12.4 Jetted Trench Backfill.
306-12.4.1 General. Trench backfill to be compacted by water shall be jetted. Flooding will not be
permitted. Jetting will be permitted only if so specified in the Special Provisions.
Jetting shall be accomplished by the use of a jet pipe to which a hose is attached, carrying a continuous
supply of water under pressure.
Backfill shall be jetted in accordance with the following requirements:
a) The jet pipe shall consist of a minimum 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter pipe to which a minimum 2-inch
(50 mm) diameter hose is attached at the upper end. The jet shall be of sufficient length to project to
within 2 feet (0.6 m) of the bottom of the lift being densified.
b) The Contractor shall jet to within 2 feet (0.6 m) of the bottom of the lift and apply water in a manner,
quantity and at a rate sufficient to thoroughly saturate the thickness of the lift being densified. The jet
pipe shall not be moved until the backfill has collapsed and the water has been forced to the surface.
c) The lift of backfill shall not exceed that which can be readily densified by jetting, but in no case shall the
undensified lift exceed 15 feet (4.5 m).
d) The Contractor shall make its own determination that jetting will not result in damage to adjacent
structures or facilities. Any resulting damage shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.
e) The Contractor shall have available a continuous supply of water at a minimum pressure of 40 pounds
per square inch (275 kPa) gage. If a water truck is used to supply water, it shall have a pump capable of
supplying water at 40 pounds per square inch (275 kPa) gage and shall have the capacity to jet the trench
without refill.
f) After jetting trench backfill, the Contractor shall prepare the top of the backfill to provide a firm and
unyielding subgrade conforming to 301-1. Jetting maybe supplemented with mechanical methods.
306-12.4.2 Compaction Requirements. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, trench
backfill compacted through jetting shall be densified to the following minimum relative compaction:
a) 85 percent relative compaction:
1) From the bottom of the trench to the beginning of the upper 3 feet (0.9 m), measured from the
pavement surface (or finish grade where there is no pavement) within native material or
unengineered embankments.
2) Outside the traveled way, shoulders, and under sidewalks, in the upper 3 feet (0.9 m), measured from
the pavement surface (or finish grade where there is no pavement).
3) Under sidewalks.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 453

b) 90 percent relative compaction:

1) In the upper 3 feet (0.9 m), measured from the pavement surface (or finish grade where there is
no pavement), within the existing or future traveled way, shoulders, and other paved areas (or
areas to receive pavement).
2) Within engineered embankments.
3) Where lateral support is required for existing or proposed structures.
c) 95 percent relative compaction where required by 301-1.3.
306-12.5 Backfill for Cast-In-Place Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe (CIPCP). Backfill for CIPCP
shall be considered as starting at the top of the trench form. The method of backfilling shall be subject to
the approval of the Engineer. The equipment used in placing the backfill shall not cause damage to the
pipe or cause loads to be placed on the pipe which are in excess of design loads.
Backfilling will not be permitted over CIPCP until the required 28-Day compressive strength has been
attained. The Contractor may place backfill prior to 28 Days upon written approval by the Engineer
provided the required 28-Day strength has been attained and verified by a laboratory.
306-13 TRENCH RESURFACING.
306-13.1 Temporary Resurfacing. Unless permanent pavement is placed immediately, temporary
resurfacing 2 inches (50 mm) thick shall be placed and maintained wherever excavation is made through
pavement, sidewalk or driveways. In sidewalk areas the temporary resurfacing shall be at least 1 inch (25
mm) thick; in all other areas it shall be at least 2 inches (50 mm) thick. Temporary resurfacing shall be
placed as soon as the condition of the backfill is suitable to receive it and shall remain in place until the
condition of the backfill is suitable for permanent resurfacing.
The asphalt concrete mixture used for temporary trench resurfacing shall conform to Class D2 asphalt
concrete conforming to 203-6.4.3; and liquid asphalt conforming to grade SC-800 shown in Table 203-2.4.
The mixture may be furnished from stockpiles or directly from the plant, and may be laid cold. Prior to
placing temporary resurfacing, the Contractor shall level and compact the backfill on which the surfacing is
to be placed. The grade of the backfill on which the resurfacing is to be placed shall provide the full
thickness of temporary resurfacing specified. The temporary resurfacing shall be placed, rolled,
maintained, removed, and disposed of by the Contractor.
306-13.2 Permanent Resurfacing. Unless otherwise specified, surface improvements damaged or
removed as a result of the Contractor’s operations shall be reconstructed by the Contractor to the same
dimensions, except for the pavement thickness, and with the same type of materials. Trench and
excavation resurfacing shall be 1 inch (25 mm) greater in thickness than existing pavement.
Subgrade for trench resurfacing shall conform to 301 and the pavement reconstruction shall comply
with the applicable provisions of 302. Aggregate base, when encountered within the structural section area,
shall be compacted to a minimum relative density of 95 percent and compacted in lifts in accordance with
301-2.2. The thickness of aggregate base shall be equal to that existing adjacent to the excavation.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
454 Greenbook 2021

306-13.3 Placement of Permanent Repair Hot Mixed Asphalt Concrete. The asphalt concrete shall be
placed in compacted lifts as shown in Table 306-13.3.

TABLE 306-13.3
Compaction Equipment Maximum Compacted Thickness, inches (mm)
Vibratory Plate 1-1/2 (38)
Pneumatic Plate 2 (50)
Vibratory Rammers 2 (50)
1
Steel Wheel Roller 2-1/2 (63)
1
Vibratory Roller 3 (75)
Pneumatic Tired Rollers Not Permitted
1. Rollers must fit entirely within the trench.

After placement of the backfill and/or aggregate base, the sides of the excavation shall be cleaned prior to the
application of an asphalt tack coat. The tack coat may be an emulsified asphalt conforming to 203-3 or a paving
asphalt conforming to 203-1. The tack coat when cured or cooled shall be of sufficient thickness to uniformly
and completely cover the vertical surfaces of the existing asphalt concrete. Excess tack on the horizontal surface
of the aggregate base or subgrade shall be spread uniformly over the surface and may require the application of a
blotting sand to prevent bleed through. Areas that are not sufficiently coated shall have the tack re-applied. The
Contractor shall ensure that the tack coat is not damaged during the placement of the asphalt concrete.
306-13.4 Base Course for Asphalt Concrete Placement. The base course shall be a B or C gradation and
shall be placed by either a spreader box, paving machine or “shoe” attachment.
For trenches less than 3 feet (1 m) wide and individual excavations or bore holes having an area of less than
50 square feet (5 m2), the base course pavement shall be placed in such a manner as to obtain the specified
density and smoothness.
The compacted surface shall not deviate from the planned base course elevation by more than
1/4 inch (6 mm).
306-13.5 Finish Course for Asphalt Concrete Placement. The finish course shall be a C or D gradation.
For trenches 8 feet (2.5 m) or greater in width, the final lift of asphalt concrete shall be placed with a paving
machine or a full width spreader box. When the total tonnage required for the final lift of asphalt concrete is
greater than 110 tons (100 tonnes), a paving machine shall be used.
For trench widths 3 feet (1 m) or greater and less than 8 feet (2.5 m), the final lift shall be placed with a
narrow paving machine or a spreader box when the total tonnage required for the final lift of asphalt concrete is
greater than 17 tons (15 tonnes).
For trenches less than 3 feet (1 m) wide and individual excavations or bore holes having an area of less than
50 square feet (5 m2), the final lift shall be placed in such a manner as to obtain the specified density and
smoothness.
306-13.6 Density and Smoothness. For trench widths of 3 feet (1 m) or greater, the Contractor shall
compact each lift with a self-propelled steel wheeled roller conforming to the PLI (N/mm) requirement specified
in 302-5.6.
For trench widths of less than 3 feet (1 m), the Contractor shall compact each lift by steel wheel rollers,
vibratory plates, or rammers of such width to fit within the sides of the excavation. The PLI (N/mm)
requirements of 302-5.6 shall not apply except for the final lift. The final lift shall be compacted using a steel
wheel roller conforming to the PLI (N/mm) requirements of 302-5.6.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 455

For individual excavations or bore holes having an area of less than 50 square feet (5 m2), the Contractor
shall compact each lift by steel wheel rollers, vibratory plates, or rammers of such width to fit within the sides of
the excavation. The PLI (N/mm) requirements of 302-5.6 shall not apply.
Pneumatic tire rollers or truck tires shall not be used to compact any of the lifts.
Trenches of any width backfilled with CLSM or trench backfill slurry will not require aggregate base.
Asphalt concrete shall be replaced to the full-depth of existing asphalt concrete plus 1 inch (25 mm), except for
trenches specified in 306-12.4.
For trench widths 3 feet (1 m) or greater, the compaction temperatures shall conform to 302-5.6. For trench
widths less than 3 feet (1 m), compaction shall be initiated before the asphalt concrete cools to less than 200°F
(94°C).
The minimum compaction after rolling shall be 95 percent of the density obtained in accordance with 302-
5.6.2. When the density is determined by a core sample, it shall be based on a full-depth sample, as specified in
302-5.6.2.
The final pavement surface for trenches wider than 3 feet (1 m) and parallel to the centerline of the street
shall conform to the smoothness requirements specified in 302-5.6.2. Trenches less than 3 feet (1 m) wide,
individual excavations or bore holes having an area less than 50 square feet (5 m2), and trenches of any width not
parallel to the centerline of the street shall match the smoothness of the existing pavement, except the final
pavement surface tolerances shall be 0 to plus 1/8 inch (3 mm) based on the existing pavement on either side of
the excavation. Final pavement below the existing surface will not be accepted.
Finish courses with deviations exceeding the above requirements shall be removed and replaced. Removal
shall be to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) for the full-width of the trench. The minimum length of
removal along the trench shall extend 4 feet (1.2 m) beyond the ends of the deviations, but in no case exceed the
limit of the original excavation.
306-13.7 Concrete Resurfacing. Replacement of PCC pavement for trench or individual excavations or
bore holes shall be 1 inch (25 mm) greater in thickness than the existing pavement. The concrete shall conform
to and be placed per 302-6.
306-14 MEASUREMENT.
306-14.1 Shoring and Bracing. Shoring and bracing will be measured as specified in the Special
Provisions or shown in the Bid.
306-14.2 Pressure Pipe. Pressure pipe will be measured in a horizontal plane along the pipe centerline
between the ends as laid and shall include the length of the actual pipe in-place, including the lay-lengths of in-
line tees, fittings, valves, meters and appurtenances.
306-14.3 Gravity Pipe. Gravity pipe will be measured along the longitudinal axis between the ends as laid
and shall include the length of the actual pipe in place and shall not include the inside dimensions of structures.
House connection sewers shall be measured from the center of the main sewer to the upper end of the house
connection sewer. Catch basin connections shall be measured from the inside face of the catch basin to the inside
face of conduit or structure to which connection is being made. Chimney pipe shall be measured vertically from
the upper end of the chimney to the invert of the sewer.
306-14.4 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box (PRCB). PRCB will be measured along the longitudinal axis
between the ends laid for each size. The length shall include the actual length of the PRCB in place but it shall
not include the inside dimensions of structures.
306-14.5 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manholes (PRCMH). PRCMH will be measured vertically from
the flowline to the top of the uppermost grade adjustment ring for each type shown on the Plans.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
456 Greenbook 2021

Liners, if measured for payment, will be measured vertically from the flowline to the top of the uppermost
grade adjustment ring for each type and diameter shown on the Plans.
Precast or cast-in-place concrete bases, if measured for payment, will be measured by the cubic yard (m3) in
accordance with 303-1.11.
306-14.6 Cast-In-Place Reinforced Concrete Box (CIPRCB). CIPRCB will be measured along the
longitudinal axis between the ends as constructed for each size shown on the Plans. The length shall include the
actual length of the CIPRCB in-place but it shall not include the inside dimensions of structures.
306-14.7 Valves, Hydrants, Buried Structures, and Pipeline Appurtenances. Pipeline appurtenances
shall include backflow prevention devices, meters, water service laterals, expansion joints, and other devices
specified as appurtenance Bid items in the Special Provisions or the Bid. Valves, hydrants, buried structures, and
appurtenances will be measured by “each” unless otherwise specified.
306-14.8 Temporary Resurfacing. Temporary resurfacing will be measured by the ton (tonne).
306-14.9 Permanent Resurfacing. Unless otherwise specified, permanent resurfacing will not be measured
separately for payment.
306-15 PAYMENT.
306-15.1 General. Payment for pipe and conduit will be made at the Contract Unit Price per linear foot (m).
The Contract Unit Price shall include payment for;
a) all wyes, tees, bends, monolithic catch basin connections, and specials shown on the Plans;
b) removal of interfering portions of existing pipelines, sewers, storm drains, and improvements;
c) closing or removing of abandoned conduit and structures;
d) trench excavation;
e) control of surface waters;
f) preparation of subgrade;
g) placing and joining pipe;
h) erection and removal of forms;
i) reinforcing steel;
j) pressure testing;
k) video inspection;
l) disinfection sample collection and delivery;
m) backfilling the trench;
n) permanent resurfacing; and
o) all other work (excluding temporary resurfacing) necessary to install the pipe or conduit, complete in-
place.
No separate or additional payment will be made for additional bedding or a higher strength of pipe
necessitated by the Contractor exceeding the maximum trench width.
306-15.2 Shoring and Bracing. Payment for shoring and bracing will be made as specified in the Special
Provisions.
306-15.3 Dewatering. Payment for dewatering will be made as specified in the Special Provisions.
306-15.4 Valves, Buried Structures, and Pipeline Appurtenances. Payment for valves, hydrants, buried
structures, and pipeline appurtenances will be made at the Contract Unit Price for each item and shall include
testing and disinfection.
306-15.5 Valves. Payment for valves will be made at the Contract Unit Price for each valve assembly of the
size, class, and type shown on the Plans. The Contract Unit Price shall include excavation, valve, actuator, thrust

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 457

restraint, valve supports, gaskets and fasteners, valve cans, risers, extensions, and lids, backfill, restoration of the
street surface, and all other work, excluding temporary resurfacing, necessary to construct the valve complete in-
place.
For air valve assemblies, the Contract Unit Price shall also include payment for concrete pads, enclosures,
laterals, risers, and isolation valves shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
306-15.6 Hydrants Payment for hydrants will be made at the Contract Unit Price for each hydrant assembly
of the size, and type shown on the Plans. The Contract Unit Price shall include excavation, the hydrant, hydrant
lateral, hydrant shutoff valve and actuator, thrust restraint, gaskets and fasteners, valve cans, risers, extensions,
and lid, backfill, restoration of the street surface, and all other work, excluding temporary resurfacing, necessary
to construct the hydrant assembly complete in-place.
306-15.7 Buried Structures. Buried structures shall include cast-in-place and precast manholes including
bases, cleanouts, junction structures, lamp holes, catch basins, and other structures specified as buried structures
in the Special Provisions. Payment for buried structures will be made at the Contract Unit Price for each type or
size of structure shown on the Plans. The Contract Unit Price shall include excavation, backfill, constructing
inverts, furnishing and installing castings, restoration of the street surface, and all other work, excluding
temporary resurfacing, necessary to construct the buried structure, complete in-place.
If the Proposal does not include a Bid item for cast-in-place or precast manhole bases, payment will be
considered as included in the Contract Unit Price for the Bid item(s) which require cast-in-place or precast
manhole bases.
306-15.8 Pipeline Appurtenances. Payment for pipeline appurtenances will be made at the Contract Unit
Price for each appurtenance of the size and type shown on the Plans, complete in-place.
Payment for backflow prevention devices will be made at the Contract Unit Price for each backflow
prevention assembly. The Contract Unit Price shall include payment for excavation, backflow prevention
assembly, isolation valves and actuators, thrust restraint, gaskets and fasteners, backfill, concrete pads and
enclosure, restoration of the street surface, and all other work, excluding temporary resurfacing, necessary to
construct the backflow prevention assembly, complete in-place.
Payment for water service laterals will be made at the Contract Unit Price for each water service lateral or
meter assembly, including service tap, corporation stop, lateral, riser, angle meter valve, service saddle, meter
installation, meter box or vault, meter box lid, and all other service material shown on the Plans or specified in
the Special Provisions.
Payment for meters will be made at the Contact Unit Price for each meter. The Contract Unit Price shall
include payment for the meter (unless furnished by the Agency) and any appurtenant couplings, meter boxes or
vaults, or meter box lid for which payment is not made under another Bid item.
Payment for expansion joints will be made at the Contract Unit Price for each expansion joint. The Contract
Unit Price shall include payment for each expansion joint and appurtenant thrust restraint system.
Payment for other pipeline appurtenances will be made as specified in the Special Provisions.
If the Proposal does not include a Bid item for manhole liners, payment will be considered as included in the
Contract Unit Price for the Bid item(s) which require manhole liners.
306-15.9 Temporary Resurfacing. Payment for temporary resurfacing will be made at the Contract Unit
Price per ton (tonne). The Contract Unit Price per ton (tonne) shall include furnishing, placing, maintaining,
removing, and disposing of such temporary resurfacing materials.
Payment will be limited to that quantity of material ordered placed by the Engineer and shall include material
used to maintain the temporary resurfacing until the permanent resurfacing is placed. No separate or additional
payment will be made for material placed by the Contractor for its convenience.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
458 Greenbook 2021

SECTION 307 – JACKING AND TUNNELING

307-1 JACKING OPERATIONS.

307-1.1 General. Jacking, as specified in 307-1, is a trenchless method of conduit construction
which consists of construction of jacking and receiving pits, hydraulically pushing reinforced concrete
pipe or a steel casing through existing ground or a pilot tunnel, constructing a pipeline within the steel
casing, and filling the annular space. The leading section of conduit shall be equipped with a jacking
head securely anchored thereto to prevent any wobble or variation in alignment during the jacking
operation.
The driving ends of the conduit shall be protected against spalling and other damage, and
intermediate joints shall be similarly protected by the installation of bearing shims. Conduit showing
signs of failure shall be removed and replaced with a new section of precast conduit, or with a cast-in-
place section, of adequate strength to carry the loads imposed upon it.
Excavation shall not be made in excess of the outer dimensions of the conduit being jacked unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. Excavated material shall be removed from the conduit as
excavation progresses. No accumulation of such material within the conduit will be permitted.
Once commenced, jacking shall be performed continuously and uninterrupted until the conduit has
been jacked between the limits shown on the Plans. This requirement may be modified if the Contractor
submits to the Engineer for approval methods and details that will prevent “freezing” of the conduit and
ensure that the heading is stable at all times.
Upon completion of the jacking operations, voids around the outside face of the conduit shall be
completely filled by grouting.
Grouting equipment and material shall be on the Work site before the jacking operations and drilling
of grout holes are completed.
Should the existing ground surrounding the conduit begin to subside or cave in, jacking operations
shall immediately cease. Voids shall be filled with a mixture of 1 part cement conforming to 201-1.2.1
and 5 parts bedding material conforming to 217-1. The materials shall be mixed with water to a
consistency that will result in placement under pressure without sloughing. Jacking operations shall not
resume until approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit the following in accordance with 3-8:
a) Working Drawings for the jacking and receiving pits.
b) Steel casing.
c) Jacking head, methods, and equipment.
d) Proposed grouting material and pressure.
e) Concrete support blocks.
f) Conduit bracing within the casing.
g) Concrete to be placed under pressure mix design, equipment, and methods.
h) Pilot tunnel dimensions and supports.
307-1.2 Jacking Reinforced Concrete Pipe. When pipe is specified to be jacked into place, the
design of such pipe shall be based upon the superimposed loads and not upon the loads which may be
placed upon the pipe as a result of the jacking operations. Any increase in pipe strength in order to
withstand jacking loads shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 459

Where pipe 60 inches (1500 mm) or greater in nominal inside diameter is to be jacked for a distance
greater than 30 feet (10 m), a pilot tunnel shall first be constructed. Unless otherwise specified, the
dimension and support of the pilot tunnel shall be optional with the Contractor.
Supports for pilot tunnels shall be removed as jacking progresses.
Unless the Contractor submits an alternate proposal to the Engineer for approval, the following
method shall be used for supporting and guiding the pipe:
After the pilot tunnel has been constructed, a concrete cradle shall be placed true to line and grade
and conforming to the outside radius of the pipe. The cradle shall be of such dimensions as to
adequately and uniformly support the pipe under the lower 60-degree sector measured on the outside of
the pipe. The curved surface shall be formed or screeded to the proper dimensions. It shall be
reinforced with not less than 0.3 percent of longitudinal steel and not less than 0.5 percent of transverse
steel with respect to the cross-sectional area of the cradle. The transverse steel shall be bent on a radius
equal to the radius of the outside of the pipe plus 2 inches (50 mm) and shall extend to within 1 inch (25
mm) of the edge of the cradle.
In lieu of the concrete cradle specified above, the Contractor may, subject to approval by the
Engineer, set steel rails in the concrete base slab to true line and grade.
The Contractor shall place grout holes, pipe, and fittings in the pipe invert on centers not greater than
5 feet (1.5 m) and shall perform such pressure grouting as is necessary to fill voids and to secure uniform
bearing between the cradle and the pipe. Grouting shall conform to 500-3.
307-1.3 Jacking Steel Casing. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, the size and wall thickness of
the casing to be jacked shall be at the Contractor’s option, except that the casing thickness shall be not
less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). The Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the casing.
The joints of sections of casing to be jacked shall be welded with a continuous circumferential weld.
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide stress transfer across the joints which is capable of
resisting the jacking forces involved.
Clay pipe installed in a jacked casing shall have mechanical compression joints and be braced or
filled to prevent shifting or flotation.
After the pipe shown on the Plans is constructed within the casing, the remaining area within the
casing shall be filled with sand conforming to 200-1.5.2, controlled low strength material (100 pounds
per square inch compressive strength) conforming to 201-6, or air placed concrete, Method B,
conforming to 201-1 and 303-2. If the concrete mix cannot be readily pumped or placed by the placing
equipment, additional water may be added, provided the water-cement ratio of the approved mix design
is not exceeded. Sand placement shall conform to 307-2.7.
307-1.4 Jacking Corrugated Steel Pipe. The thickness of the pipe shown on the Plans shall be the
minimum thickness permitted. Any heavier thickness of pipe or other facilities required to withstand
jacking pressure shall be determined and furnished by the Contractor.
Corrugated pipe lengths may be joined by field riveting. Variation from theoretical alignment and
grade at the time of completion of placing shall not exceed 1 inch per 100 feet (8 mm per 10 m).
The diameter of the excavated hole shall not be more than 0.1 foot (30 mm) greater than the outside
diameter of the pipe. Sluicing or jetting with water will not be permitted. A shield shall be used ahead
of the first section of pipe or the face of the excavation and shall not extend beyond the end of the pipe
more than 1-1/2 feet (0.5 m), unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
460 Greenbook 2021

307-1.5 Tolerances. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions,
when a pilot tunnel is required to be constructed, the tolerance from exact grade or alignment shall be 1
inch per 100 feet (8 mm per 10 m).
307-1.6 Measurement. Jacking will be measured by the linear foot (m) for each size and type of
conduit to be jacked.
307-1.7 Payment. The Contract Unit Price per linear foot (m) of jacked conduit shall include
excavation; constructing, supporting, and removing pilot tunnels; constructing reinforced concrete
cradles where required; providing grout holes, grout, and grouting where necessary; importing soil for
soil-cement; and work appurtenant to jacking conduit within the limits shown on the Plans.
For corrugated steel pipe, the Contract Unit Price shall include a greater thickness of pipe than that
shown on the Plans, if necessary.
Except when a Bid item is provided for jacked casing, payment for furnishing and jacking casing in
place shall be included in the Contract Unit Price per linear foot (m) for that portion of the pipeline or
conduit to be installed within the casing.
When a section of reinforced concrete pipe conduit is specified to be constructed by jacking
methods, the specified limits for jacking may be increased by the Contractor with the approval of the
Engineer. Such increased limits may require an increase in the strength of the pipe to be jacked. When
reinforced concrete pipe conduit is specified to be constructed by open trench method, the Contractor
may construct said conduit by jacking methods, with the approval of the Engineer. Such methods may
require an increase in strength of the pipe.
When a change in construction method or an increase in jacking limits as specified herein is
requested by the Contractor and authorized by the Engineer, payment for the work will be based on the
Contract Unit Prices as though the specified method had been used.
307-2 TUNNELING OPERATIONS.
307-2.1 General. Tunneling, as specified in 307-2, is a method of constructing underground
conduits by hand-digging or the in-place operation of a tunnel boring machine, and backfilling.
Microtunneling shall conform to 308.
Required pipe tunnel locations and lengths shall be as shown on the Plans.
The Contractor shall submit Working Drawings showing details of the following:
a) Tunnel shaft bracing and dimensions.
b) Tunnel supports.
c) Method of backpacking tunnel supports.
d) Method of transporting pipe in tunnel.
e) Bracing to prevent pipe shifting and flotation.
f) Pressure concrete mix design, placement method and equipment.
g) Invert slab, if required or otherwise to be placed separately.
h) Access shafts or portals locations and details.
Working Drawings for tunnel supports shall include details of the proposed tunnel supports
(including connections), longitudinal and transverse bracing and foot blocks, the proposed method of
pipe installations, the proposed method of backpacking tunnel supports, and other pertinent details.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 461

307-2.2 Excavations. Access shafts or portals shall be located where shown on the Plans. Where no
such locations are given, the Contractor shall have the option of determining such locations subject to
submission of Working Drawings. Access shafts or portals will not be permitted within street
intersections unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
The Contractor shall excavate materials encountered in the tunnel within the width and height
necessary to install tunnel supports, place pipe, construct joints, completely fill the void space around the
pipe and do whatever else is necessary to complete the pipe installation in the tunnel.
Clearances shown on the tunnel details on the Plans are minimum and no encroachment within the
dimensions shown will be permitted.
Drilling and blasting shall be performed in such a manner to avoid undue shattering or
loosening of material.
Loose material in the invert shall be removed to a clean rock surface or undisturbed foundation prior
to placing pipe bedding and installing pipe. Deep depressions shall be filled with material approved by
the Engineer.
307-2.3 Dewatering. Dewatering shall conform to 3-12.6.4. The Contractor shall furnish, install,
and operate pumps, pipes, appliances, and equipment of sufficient capacity to keep tunnel excavations
and accesses free from water until the tunnel is backfilled. The Contractor shall provide the means or
facilities necessary to convey water to the pumps.
307-2.4 Tunnel Supports. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, the materials used for tunnel
supports may be timber, metal, concrete, or a combination thereof at the option of the Contractor. Steel
liner plates, if used, shall be provided with grout connections sufficient in number to permit backpacking
by means of grout, should such action prove necessary. Tunnel supports shall conform to the
requirements set forth in the Tunnel Safety Orders of the State of California. Unless otherwise specified
or shown on the Plans, the minimum clearances shall be as follows:
For tunnels to be backfilled with air placed concrete, Method B per 303-2, the minimum side
clearance at the spring line of pipe sockets to continuous steel or timber shall be 12 inches (300 mm),
and to intermittent sets or ribs shall be 10 inches (250 mm). The minimum overhead clearance from
pipe sockets to nearest inside face of any steel or timber member shall be 10 inches (250 mm).
For tunnels to be backfilled with air placed concrete, Method A per 303-2, or sand conforming to
200-2.5.3, the minimum side clearance at the springline of pipe sockets shall be as for pressure concrete
backfill specified above, but the minimum overhead clearance shall be increased to 18 inches (450 mm).
The minimum side and top clearances prescribed herein shall be increased by 3 inches (75 mm) for
pipe without projecting sockets or collars and shall apply to the barrel of the pipe.
The minimum side and top clearances prescribed herein shall be increased by 3 inches (75 mm) for pipe
without projecting sockets or collars and shall apply to the barrel of the pipe.
No exterior work will be required on the following types of joints:
a) Socket and spigot pipe with rubber gasket or mechanical compression joints.
b) Pipe 24 inches (600 mm) or larger in internal diameter.
c) Steel-ring-and-gasket-type reinforced concrete pipe for sewers, if the tunnel backfill and bedding
under the pipe are concrete; or where the tunnel backfill is concrete and the bedding material
under the pipe is granular and the Contractor beds the pipe for 4 inches (100 mm) on each side of
the joint in fresh mortar at least 3 inches (75 mm) thick and extending 2 inches (50 mm) above
the top of the granular bedding material.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
462 Greenbook 2021

The Contractor shall reconstruct tunnel supports as necessary to conform to the aforementioned requirements.
Timber collar braces and, to the extent practicable, timber supports, lagging and blocking shall be
removed prior to backfilling tunnels, except where such removals would be hazardous to persons or the
structure. Material to remain in place shall be cleaned of adhering material not suitable for backfill.
307-2.5 Backpacking Tunnel Supports. Voids behind temporary or permanent tunnel support
systems, including over-break, cave-ins, and chimneys, shall be backpacked. Backpacking shall be
placed after placement of tunnel supports. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall place
backpacking immediately. Tunnels in rock supported by timber lagging, steel liner plate, or bolted steel
plate tunnel lining shall be backpacked either with pressure grout conforming to 500-3 or with a mixture
of 1 part cement conforming to 201-1.2.1 and 5 parts bedding material conforming to 217-1 except that
tunnel spoil may be used to the mid-height of the tunnel. The materials shall be mixed with water to a
consistency that will result in placement under pressure without sloughing. When voids 1 cubic foot
(0.03 m3) in size or larger exist behind lagging or sheeting in tunnels so supported in soil, the Contractor
shall backpack behind such supports with either pressure grout conforming to 500-3 or tunnel spoil
when directed by the Engineer.
Tunnels in rock or soil and supported by timber or steel sets with partial timber or metal lagging may
be backpacked to the mid-height of the tunnel with tunnel spoil.
All spaces not filled with such backpacking shall be filled at the time of, and with material selected
for, tunnel backfilling around the pipe.
Tunnel spoil used for backpacking shall contain sufficient fines to fill all voids. Such material shall
be rammed into place. Soft or wet clay may be used only if approved by the Engineer. Otherwise the
Contractor shall import granular material conforming to 217-1 for backpacking.
Lagged or fully-lined tunnels shall be backpacked with a mixture of 1 part cement conforming to
201-1.2.1 to 5 parts of granular material selected from the tunnel spoil when such material conforms to
217-1. Otherwise, granular material conforming to 217-1 shall be imported. The materials shall be
thoroughly mixed with water and rammed into place immediately following placement of tunnel
supports. The placement interval shall not exceed 3 rings of liner plate or the distance between tunnel
sets. Mechanically or pneumatically operated tampers shall be used to ram the mixture into place unless
another placing method is approved by the Engineer.
307-2.6 Pipe Subgrade and Bedding. Pipe placed within the tunnel shall be placed and bedded as
shown on the Plans or Working Drawings.
307-2.7 Tunnel Backfill. Pipe laying operations in tunnels shall not precede tunnel backfill by more
than 150 feet (45 m) without the approval of the Engineer. Longer reaches may be approved if tunnel
clearances are increased from the minimums shown in order to obtain additional working space around
the pipe.
The space between the tunnel supports and the pipe shall be completely backfilled. The backfill
material shall be forced or packed into all the crevices and around all timber sets or steel ribs from the
tunnel invert to its crown. The Contractor shall provide wedging or bracing as needed to ensure against
pipe movement during placement of backfill.
Backfill for tunnels in rock shall be air placed concrete, Method A or Method B, conforming to 303-2.
The use of Method B for backfill is contingent upon the prior backpacking of tunnel supports with
acceptable materials other than gunite concrete.
Unless the Plans require the use of pressure concrete or gunite concrete for backfill, the Contractor
may use sand conforming to 200-1.5.3.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 463

Gunite sand shall be placed with a pneumatic gun in accordance with 303-2 except that no Portland
cement need be added. The Contractor may add up to 100 pounds of cement per cubic yard (60 kg/m3) to
improve placement stability at its option and expense. In either case, water sufficient to saturate the material
and ensure proper packing and minimize rebound shall be added to the mixture. The nozzle person shall
operate in the immediate vicinity of the backfill face to ensure compaction and complete filling of voids.
The Contractor shall submit a proposed mix design and method of placing concrete, including
placing equipment. Concrete backfill shall not be placed until the mix design, placement method, and
equipment have been approved. If the approved mix cannot be readily pumped or placed by the
Contractor’s placing equipment, additional water may be added, provided the water-cement ratio of the
approved mix design is not exceeded.
Concrete backfill shall be placed by methods capable of forcing it into crevices and filling all void
spaces in the tunnel. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, the concrete backfill shall be placed under
pressure by means of a delivery line and pneumatic or positive displacement pumps.
The length of the delivery line shall not exceed the recommendation of the manufacturer of the
concrete pump or, if no manufacturer’s performance data is available, 150 feet (45 m). The discharge
end shall be rigid conduit with a minimum length of 10 feet (3 m). It shall be kept buried in at least 5
feet (1.5 m) of fresh concrete during concrete placement. Concrete shall be pumped continuously during
withdrawal to eliminate voids.
307-2.8 Pressure Grouting of Voids. Pressure grouting shall conform to 500-3 except as otherwise
specified as follows. Where the tunnel void spaces are not filled, the Contractor shall pressure grout
such locations through grout pipes installed either from the ground surface or from within the conduit.
At least 2 grout holes are required at each location. The location of surface grout pipes may be adjusted
as approved by the Engineer.
Grout for filling voids shall be low pressure grout (less than 10 pounds per square inch (70 kPa)). Neat
cement grout shall be used except that large voids shall be filled with pressure concrete or grout containing sand.
Grout shall be placed by means of pumps of positive displacement or pneumatic type and capable of
placing grout at pressures up to 100 pounds per square inch (700 kPa) unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer. Grout shall be placed at pressures which are requisite for the conditions encountered, and will
ordinarily be less than 10 pounds per square inch (70 kPa) except in cases where large cave-ins or other
adverse conditions may require higher pressures.
307-2.9 Measurement. Tunneling will be measured by the linear foot (m) for each size of tunnel to
be constructed.
307-2.10 Payment. Unless the Bid specifies Contract Unit Prices for individual work items, the
Contract Unit Price per linear foot (m) shall include dewatering, backpacking, maintaining tunnel
supports, placing tunnel backfill, low pressure grouting, providing access shafts of portals including
excavation, backfill and replacement of surface or other improvements, furnishing and installing pipe,
and all other work appurtenant to tunnel construction within the limits shown on the Plans.
Unless otherwise specified, payment for tunnel excavation shall include the excavation of any type of
material encountered.
High-pressure grouting required by the Engineer, and not resulting from an act or failure to act on the
part of the Contractor, will be paid for as Extra Work.
For pipe laid through tunnel access shafts, payment will be made in accordance with 306-15.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
464 Greenbook 2021

No separate or additional payment will be made for:

a) additional excavation required to remove material which may fall or appears to endanger workers,
b) removing loosened invert material and filling the resulting depressions or enlargement of the
tunnel from overshooting or over-excavating,
c) increasing the tunnel dimensions where necessary to provide adequate room for workers
and equipment,
d) reconstruction of tunnel supports,
e) rock required to fill voids caused by over-excavation, or necessary to maintain the tunnel bottom
for support of construction equipment and tunnel supporting members, or to control water during
tunnel excavation, or
f) imported granular material for backpacking.

SECTION 308 – MICROTUNNELING

308-1 GENERAL. Microtunneling is an unmanned entry method that uses a remotely operated
microtunnel boring machine (MTBM) to install pipes underground with minimal surface disruption.
Microtunneling continuously installs pipe behind a remotely controlled, steerable, laser-guided, full-face
controlled, articulated MTBM. The pipe to be installed is connected to and follows the MTBM.
308-2 DEFINITIONS.
Annular Space - The void created between the outside diameter of pipe being installed and extreme
outer limits created by MTBM bore process.
Earth Pressure Balance - MTBM pressure applied to the cutting face equals the pressure of earth
against the cutting face.
Full Face Control - Complete mechanical support of the excavated face at all times.
Lubricant - A substance applied between the pipe and soil to minimize friction and to fill the
annular space.
Microtunneling Boring Machine (MTBM) - A remotely controlled, steerable, laser guided
microtunnel boring machine consisting of an articulated boring machine shield and a rotating cutting
head.
Pipe String - The succession of joined individual pipes being used to advance the excavation
equipment.
Shaft or Pit - A vertical excavation to insert or receive microtunneling equipment and pipe.
Slurry - Water mixture, which may contain additives, that is used to transport spoils and
counterbalance any ground water pressure.
308-3 SUBMITTALS. The Contractor shall submit the following items for review and approval by
the Engineer in accordance with 3-8. Approval of the submittal by the Engineer shall be obtained prior
to ordering pipe materials and/or the start of the microtunneling operations.
a) Manufacturers’ data sheets and specifications describing in detail the microtunneling system to
be used.
b) Description of similar projects with references on which the proposed system was successfully
used by the Contractor/operator.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 465

c) Description of method to remove and dispose of spoil.

d) Maximum anticipated jacking loads and supporting calculations.
e) Description of methods to control and dispose of groundwater, spoil, temporary shoring, and other
materials encountered in the maintenance and construction of pits and shafts.
f) Shaft dimensions, locations, surface construction profile, depth, method of excavation, shoring, bracing,
and thrust block design.
g) Pipe design data and specifications.
h) A description of the grade and alignment control system.
i) Intermediate jacking station locations and design.
j) Description of lubrication and/or grouting system.
k) Layout plans and descriptions of operational sequence.
l) A detailed plan for monitoring ground surface movement (settlement or heave) due to the
microtunneling operation. The plan shall address the method and frequency of survey measurement. At
minimum, the plan shall measure the ground movement of all structures, roadways, parking lots, and any
other areas of concern within 25 feet (8 m) on both sides of all microtunneling pipelines at a maximum
spacing of 100 feet (30 m) along the pipeline route, or as required by the Engineer.
m) Contingency plans for approval for the following potential conditions: damage to pipeline structural
integrity and repair; loss and return to line and grade; and loss of ground.
n) Procedures to meet all applicable OSHA requirements. These procedures shall be submitted for a record
purpose only and will not be subject to approval by the Engineer. At a minimum, the Contractor shall
provide the following:
1) Protection against soil instability and ground-water inflow.
2) Safety for shaft access and exit, including ladders, stairs, walkways, and hoists.
3) Protection against mechanical and hydraulic equipment operations, and for lifting and hoisting
equipment and material.
4) Ventilation and lighting.
5) Monitoring for hazardous gases.
6) Protection against flooding and means for emergency evacuation.
7) Protection of shaft, including traffic barriers, accidental or unauthorized entry, and falling objects.
8) Emergency protection equipment.
9) Safety supervising responsibilities.
o) Annular space grouting plan if required by the Contract Documents.
308-4 MINIMUM SOIL COVER. The minimum depth of cover to the top of the installed pipe using this
process shall be 1-1/2 to 3 times the outside diameter of the pipe being installed, or 6 feet (2 m), whichever is
greater depending on the soil conditions. With prior approval of the Engineer, the minimum depth of cover may
be reduced.
308-5 SURFACE DESCRIPTION. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, settlement of
heave at the ground surface during and after construction shall not exceed 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) or unless specified
in the Contract Documents as measured along the centerline of the conduit being installed. Zero settlement or
heave may be required when specified in the Contract Documents or required by applicable permits.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
466 Greenbook 2021

308-6 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS.

308-6.1 Microtunneling Specified by the Agency. The Agency will make accessible to the
Contractor all available subsurface information, if any, which is listed in 3-9 and 308-6.3. All
subsurface investigations deemed necessary by the Contractor to complete the work shall be included.
Copies of all reports and information obtained by the Contractor shall be provided to the Agency.
308-6.2 Microtunneling Requested by the Contractor. When microtunneling is proposed by the
Contractor as an alternative to the specified methods of conduit installation, the Contractor shall obtain
copies of the information and reports listed in 3-9 and 308-6.3 and submit in accordance with 3-8.
Microtunneling operations must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of microtunneling work.
308-6.3 Subsurface Data. The following subsurface information will affect equipment selection
and the progress and practicality of microtunneling. The actual test data required will vary depending
upon the scope of the work and soil conditions encountered and may include but not be limited to the
following:
Particle-size analysis: ASTM D422
Soil Classification: ASTM D2487
Plastic limit: ASTM D4318
Liquid limits: ASTM D4318
Plasticity index: ASTM D4318
Expansion index: ASTM D4829
Density: ASTM D1556, D2037, D5195, D4564
Water (Moisture) content: ASTM D4959, D2216, D5220, D3017, D4643, D4944
Shear strength:
Direct: ASTM D3080
Triaxial, C.U: ASTM D4767
Unconfined compressive strength: ASTM D2166
Permeability: ASTM D2434
Apparent or unconfined soil cohesion.
Standard penetration test (SPT): ASTM D1586.
Water table depth
Nature of fill material
Nature of pollutants
Rock type and color
Fracture index
Rock quality designation (RQD)
Core recovery, TCR.
Reasonable attempts will be made to collect subsurface test samples within 20 feet (6 m)
horizontally of the centerline of the proposed conduit location. Subsurface test samples will be collected
to a minimum depth of one pipe diameter below conduit invert. The test samples will typically be
collected at 200-foot (60 m) intervals or at manhole locations.
308-7 PIPE. Pipe shall be specifically designed for microtunneling by the pipe manufacturer. The
pipe shall be round, smooth, and with flush-jointed outer surfaces. The ends of the pipe shall be
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe with a maximum deviation of no more than 1/16 inch

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 467

per foot (5 mm/m) of pipe diameter, with a maximum of 1/4 inch (6 mm), measured with a square and a
straight edge across the end of the pipe. Pipe ends shall be square and smooth so that jacking loads are
evenly distributed against the pipe end faces without point loads when the pipe is jacked.
Pipe used for microtunneling shall be capable of withstanding the jacking forces imposed by the
process of installation, as well as the final in-place loading conditions. The driving ends of the pipe and
intermediate joints shall be protected against damage. The detailed method proposed to cushion and
distribute the jacking forces shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Damaged pipe shall be jacked through to the reception shaft and be removed. Other methods of
repairing the damaged conduit may be used, as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
The pipe manufacturer’s design jacking loads shall not be exceeded during the installation process.
The pipe shall be designed to take full account of all temporary installation loads. The pipe materials
acceptable for microtunneling will be specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
The maximum jacking capacity used shall not exceed the allowable jacking capacity of the pipe that
has a minimum factor of safety of 2.5.
308-8 MICROTUNNELING SYSTEM COMPONENTS.
308-8.1 Microtunneling Tunnel Boring Machine (MTBM). The MTBM selected shall be
capable of installing the pipe while being compatible with the anticipated soil and geotechnical
conditions. The MTBM cutter face shall at all times be capable of supporting the full excavated area
without the use of ground stabilization and have the capability of measuring the earth pressure at the face
and setting a calculated earth balancing pressure. The maximum radial annular space shall not exceed 1
inch (25 mm), unless otherwise specified.
The MTBM shall be capable of controlling shield rotation by means of a bi-directional drive on the
cutter head or by use of mechanical fins or grippers. The MTBM shall be mechanically articulated to
enable remotely controlled steering of the shield. The MTBM shall control groundwater during
excavation without the use of external dewatering equipment. The measuring and balancing of earth and
groundwater pressure shall be achieved by use of a slurry or cased auger system. The system shall be
capable of incremental adjustments to maintain face stability for the soil conditions encountered.
308-8.2 Jacking Equipment. The main jacks shall be mounted in a jacking frame and located in
the jacking shaft The MTBM shall be moved forward by the jacks advancing a successive string of
connected pipes toward a receiving shaft.
A pipe lubrication system may be used to lower the friction developed on the surface of the pipe
during jacking with approval of the Engineer. An approved lubricant, typically bentonite or polymers,
may be injected at the rear of the MTBM or through lubrication ports. The pipe lubrication system
pressure shall be continuously monitored, recorded, and controlled to prevent pipe buckling and/or
ground heave.
A thrust block is required to transfer jacking loads into the soil. The thrust block shall be
perpendicular to the proposed pipe alignment. The thrust block shall be designed to support the
maximum jacking pressure developed by the main jacking system. Special care shall be taken when
securing the pipe guide rails and/or jacking frame in the jacking shaft to ensure correctness of the
alignment, grade, and stability of the pipe. If a concrete thrust block or treated soil zone is utilized to
transfer jacking loads into the soil, the MTBM shall not be jacked until the concrete or other materials
have attained the required strength.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
468 Greenbook 2021

When intermediate jacking stations are utilized, the maximum jacking force shall not exceed the
maximum allowable jacking load of the pipe.
308-8.3 Excavation Controls. The control equipment shall integrate the method of excavation and
removal of soil and its simultaneous replacement by a pipe. As each pipe section is jacked forward, the
control system shall synchronize spoils removal, excavation, and jacking speeds.
Operations shall be stopped when they result in pipe damage or any surface disruption. The Contractor shall
propose immediate action for review and approval by the Engineer to remedy the problem.
308-8.4 Automated Spoils Transportation. The MTBM shall include one of the following:
a) Slurry System. The system shall be capable of measuring earth and groundwater pressure and
making the adjustments required to counter-balance the earth and groundwater pressure to
prevent loss of slurry or uncontrolled soil and groundwater inflow.
1) The slurry pressure at the excavation face shall be controlled by use of slurry pumps.
2) A slurry bypass method shall be included to allow for a change in direction of flow to be
made and/or isolated.
3) Provide a separation process, properly sized for the tunnel being constructed, the soil type
being excavated, and the workspace available at each area. Separate the spoil from the slurry
so that slurry may be returned to the cutting face for reuse.
4) Monitor the composition of the slurry to maintain the slurry density and viscosity limits as
approved in the submittals.
b) Cased Auger System. The system shall monitor and continuously balance the soil and
groundwater pressure. The system shall be capable of adjustments required to maintain face
stability for the particular soil condition to be encountered to prevent loss of soil or uncontrolled
groundwater inflow.
1) Maintain the pressure at the excavation face by controlling the volume of spoil removal with
respect to the advance rate. Monitor the speed of the rotation of the auger and the amount of
water added.
2) Submit an evaluation of equipment’s ability to balance earth and water pressure at the face,
stability of the soils, and the significance of the groundwater present for the Engineer’s
review.
308-8.5 Active Steering Controls. A remotely controlled steering mechanism shall be provided
that allows for the operation of the system without the need for personnel to enter the microtunnel.
The steering information shall be monitored and transmitted to the operation console. the minimum
steering information available to the operator on the control console shall include the position of the
shield relative to the design reference, roll, inclination, attitude, rate of advance, installed length, thrust
force, and cutter head torque.
308-8.6 Guidance/Monitoring Equipment. The MTBM display equipment shall continuously
show and automatically record the position of the shield with respect to the project design line and grade.
The automated recording system shall include real time information such as earth and ground pressure,
roll, pitch, attitude, rate of advance, installed length, cutter head torque, jacking loads, slurry pressure,
slurry flow, and slurry valve positions.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 469

Line and grade shall be controlled by a guidance system that relates the actual position of the MTBM
to a design reference (e.g., by a laser beam transmitted from the jacking shaft along the line of the pipe to
a target mounted in the shield). The line and grade tolerances of pipe installed shall be ± 1 inch (25 mm)
on grade and 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in line between shafts, unless otherwise specified or approved by the
Engineer.
The rate of return to line and grade shall not exceed 1 inch in 25 feet (1:300), unless otherwise
specified.
308-9 METHODS.
308-9.1 General. Prior to pipe installation, the Contractor shall implement the approved submittals
to monitor ground movement.
308-9.2 Intermediate Shafts. If an intermediate shaft is requested, the Contractor shall obtain
written approval from the Engineer. The Contractor’s request shall include all necessary permits and
approvals, minimize public inconvenience and minimize impacting existing facilities.
308-9.3 Annular Space Grouting. The annular space created by the overcut of the MTBM in
excess of 3/4 inch (19 mm) shall be filled with a material approved by the Engineer unless otherwise
specified.
When grouting is specified, pressure-injected grout shall fill voids outside the limits of the
excavation created by caving or collapse of earth cover over the excavation.
The Contractor shall furnish and operate suitable equipment for any required grouting operations
depending on the condition of the application. The grouting operation shall not damage adjacent utilities
or other properties. Grout shall be injected at a pressure that will not distort or imperil any portion of the
work or existing installations or structures.
308-9.4 Work Hours. Work hours are not restricted unless otherwise specified in the Special
Provisions. Multiple shifts may be used if noise levels do not exceed local ordinances unless otherwise
specified in the Special Provisions. Continuous microtunneling will be permitted where:
a) Expansive soils are encountered; or
b) The actual jacking forces required approach either the capacity of the jacking system or the
designed jacking capacity of the pipe.
308-9.5 Construction Zones. Microtunneling construction zones in the public right-of-way shall be
limited to one lane of traffic, or the Contractor shall maintain a minimum of one lane of traffic in each
direction. The Engineer may specify a larger or smaller zone if circumstances warrant.
308-9.6 Shafts. Shafts shall be of a size commensurate with safe working practices and located as
shown on the Plans or Working Drawings. With the written approval of the Engineer, the Contractor
may relocate shafts to better suit the capabilities of the microtunneling equipment proposed.
Shaft locations shall, where possible, be kept clear of road intersections and within a single traffic
lane, in order to minimize disruption to the flow of traffic.
The design of the shafts shall ensure safe MTBM exit from the driving shaft and entry into the
receiving shaft The Contractor shall furnish and install equipment to keep the jacking shaft free of
excess water. The Contractor shall also provide surface protection during the period of construction to
ensure that surface runoff does not enter shafts.
Shafts shall be backfilled per 306-12. Shoring materials, bracing, temporary supports, rubbish, and
construction materials shall be removed from the Work site and disposed of by the Contractor.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
470 Greenbook 2021

308-9.7 Testing. Installed pipe shall be tested in accordance with 306-7.8.

308-10 RESTORATION OF SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS. Unless otherwise specified in the
Special Provisions or shown on the Plans, existing surface improvements damaged or removed as a
result of microtunneling operations shall be restored to their original condition.
308-11 MEASUREMENT. Tunneling will be measured by the linear foot (m). The limits of
measurement for payment shall be as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
308-12 PAYMENT. Unless the Bid lists Contract Unit Prices for individual work items, the
Contract Unit Price per linear foot (m) shall include grouting and lubricants; providing
jacking/receiving/recovery shafts including excavation, disposal, dewatering, backfill and replacement of
surface or other improvements; furnishing and installing pipe, excavating, and disposal of materials
encountered by installation of the pipe; and all other work appurtenant to microtunneling within the
limits shown on the Plans.

SECTION 309 - MONUMENTS

309-1 DESCRIPTION. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing Portland cement
concrete right-of-way monuments and cast-in-place survey monuments at the locations shown on the
Plans, in the Special Provisions, or as directed by the Engineer.
309-2 MATERIALS. The concrete portion of monuments shall be constructed in accordance with
201-1 and 303.
Marker plates for survey monuments will be furnished by the Agency at the Work site.
309-3 CONSTRUCTION. Survey monuments shall be cast-in-place in neat holes without the use
of forms. The exposed surface of the finished monuments shall be uniform, of even texture, and shall be
free of holes, cracks, and chipped edges.
Marker plates or copper bars shall be placed in survey monuments before the concrete has acquired
its initial set and shall be firmly bedded in the concrete. The concrete shall be so located that when the
plate is inserted, the reference point will fall within a 1 inch (25 mm) circle in the center of the plate.
Monuments shall be set firmly and vertically in the ground to a depth of at least 3 feet (0.9 m).
The tops of survey monument covers shall be set flush with the groundline or pavement surface,
whichever applies.
309-4 PAYMENT. The Contract Unit Price for each survey monument shall include full
compensation for doing all the work involved in constructing the survey monument, including necessary
excavation and backfill as shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 471

SECTION 310 - PAINTING

310-1 GENERAL.
310-1.1 Weather Conditions. Paint shall be applied only on thoroughly dry surfaces and during
periods of favorable weather. Except as provided herein, painting will not be permitted when weather
conditions are such that the atmospheric temperature is at or below 35°F (2°C), or when freshly painted
surfaces may become damaged by rain, fog, or condensation, or when it can be anticipated that the
atmospheric temperature will drop below 35°F (2°C) during the drying period. If fresh paint is damaged
by the elements, it shall be replaced by the Contractor at its expense.
Subject to the approval of the Engineer, the Contractor may provide suitable enclosures to permit
painting during inclement weather. Provisions must be made to artificially control atmospheric
conditions within limits suitable for painting inside the enclosure throughout the painting operation.
310-1.2 Application. Painting shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. Unless otherwise
specified, paint shall be applied by brush, roller, or spray methods.
If brushes are used, they shall have sufficient body and length of bristle to spread the paint in a
uniform coat. In general, the primary movement of the brush shall be such as to fill thoroughly all
irregularities in the surface, after which the coating shall be smoothed by a series of parallel strokes.
Paint shall be evenly spread and thoroughly brushed out. The paint will be considered to have been
improperly applied if an inordinate amount of residual brush marks remain. If rollers are used, they shall
be of a type that do not leave a stippled texture in the paint film.
On all surfaces which are inaccessible for brushing, the paint shall be applied by spray or by
sheepskin daubers especially constructed for the purpose, or by other means approved by the Engineer.
If spray methods are used, the operator shall be thoroughly experienced. Runs, sags, thin areas in the
paint coat, or skips and holidays shall be considered as evidence the work is unsatisfactory and the
Contractor may be required to apply the remainder of the paint by brush.
A water trap acceptable to the Engineer shall be furnished and installed on all equipment used in
spray painting.
Mechanical mixers shall be used to mix the paint a sufficient length of time prior to use to
thoroughly mix the pigment and vehicle. To keep the pigment in suspension, paint shall be kept
thoroughly mixed while being applied.
310-1.3 Thinning Paint. Paints specified are formulated ready for application and no thinning will
be permitted. If the paint becomes thick in cool weather, it shall be heated by immersing the container in
hot water.
310-1.4 Protection of Work. The Contractor shall protect all parts of the structure against
disfigurement as a result of its painting operations. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage
caused by its operations to vehicles, persons, or property, and shall provide at its expense protective
means to guard against such damage.
Paint stains on adjacent improvements which result in an unsightly appearance shall be removed by
the Contractor at its expense.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
472 Greenbook 2021

When ordered by the Engineer to abate a dust nuisance and to protect the wet paint film, the
Contractor shall dampen the adjacent roadbed and shoulders with water at its expense on each side of the
location where painting is in progress. The Contractor shall furnish and post at its expense DRIVE
SLOWLY signs and take other precautions necessary to prevent dust and dirt from accumulating on
freshly painted surfaces.
310-2 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR PAINTING STEEL STRUCTURES*.
*Portions reproduced courtesy of Steel Structures Painting Council.
310-2.1 General. The following methods of surface preparation apply to steel surfaces unless
another method is specified.
310-2.2 Hand Cleaning. Hand cleaning is a method of preparing metal surfaces for painting by
removing loose mill scale, loose rust, dirt, and loose paint by hand brushing, hand sanding, hand
scraping, hand chipping, with other hand impact tools, or by a combination of these methods. It is not
intended that all mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process, but loose mill scale, rust paint,
and other detrimental foreign matter present shall be removed.
Oil, grease, or salts shall first be removed by the methods specified in 310-2.3. Other detrimental
foreign matter shall be removed by the following operations:
a) Stratified rust (rust scale) shall be removed by hand hammering, hand chipping, other hand
impact tools, or a combination thereof.
b) All loose mill scale and all loose or nonadherent rust shall be removed by hand wire brushing,
hand sanding, hand scraping, or by a combination of these methods. Rust and mill scale are
classified as “loose mill scale” and “loose or nonadherent rust” if they can be removed from a
steel surface by vigorous hand brushing with a new, commercially acceptable wire brush, of
suitable type, at a rate of 2 square feet (0.2 m2) per minute. This test shall be conducted on an
area not previously brushed, scraped, or sanded, but from which all detrimental stratified rust
(rust scale), oil, and grease (if present) have been removed. This test establishes a standard for
surface preparation and shall not be considered as establishing the production rate by cleaning.
Regardless of the methods used for cleaning under this specification, the surface shall be cleaned
at least as well as the surface resulting from this test.
In preparing surfaces for repainting, all loose or nonadherent paint shall be removed. Edges of
remaining old paint shall be feathered so that the repainted surface will have a smooth appearance. The
remaining old paint shall have sufficient adhesion so that it cannot be lifted as a layer by inserting the
blade of a dull putty knife under it. All accessible weld flux and spatter shall be removed by hand
scraping or by hand impact tools followed by wire brushing. The accessible portions of all partially
enclosed steel members shall be cleaned. On new work, areas which will be inaccessible after assembly
shall be cleaned before assembly.
All rivets, welds, corners, joints, and openings shall be properly cleaned. The steel wire of the wire
brushes shall have sufficient rigidity to clean the surface, shall be kept free of excess foreign matter, and
shall be discarded when they are no longer effective. Hand scrapers shall be made of suitable material
and shall be kept sharp enough to be effective. The tools shall be operated in such a manner that no
burrs or sharp ridges are left on the surface and no sharp cuts made into the steel.
After hand cleaning is completed, dust and other loose matter shall be removed from the surface. If
detrimental amounts of grease or oil are still present, these areas shall be spot cleaned with solvent. The
pretreatment (if any is specified) or prime coat of paint shall be applied as soon as possible after cleaning
and before further deterioration of the surface occurs.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 473

310-2.3 Solvent Cleaning. Solvent cleaning is a procedure for removing detrimental foreign matter
such as oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other contaminants from steel surfaces by
the use of solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or other materials and methods
which may not involve a solvent action. It is intended that solvent cleaning, if specified, shall be used
prior to the application of paint and with other specified surface preparations for the removal of rust, mill
scale, or paint.
Soil, cement spatter, drawing compounds, salts, or other foreign matter (other than grease or oil)
shall be removed by brushing with stiff-fiber or wire brushes, by scraping, or by cleaning with solutions
of alkaline cleaners provided such cleaners are followed by a fresh water rinse, or by a combination of
these methods. When specified, the fresh water rinse shall be followed with a passivating dichromate or
dilute chromic acid wash.
Oil or grease shall be removed by any of the following methods:
a) Wiping or scrubbing the surface with rags or brushes wetted with solvent. The final wiping shall
be done with clean solvent and clean rags or brushes.
b) Spraying of the surface with solvent. The final spraying shall be done with clean solvent.
c) Complete immersion in a tank or tanks of solvent. Solvent for the last immersion shall not
contain detrimental amounts of contaminant.
Emulsion cleaners may be used in lieu of the methods in this subsection provided that after treatment
the surface shall be washed to remove detrimental residue.
Steam cleaning, using detergents or cleaners if specified, may be used in place of the methods in this
subsection provided that the surface shall finally be steamed or washed to remove detrimental residues.
If chemical paint strippers are used for the removal of paint, all wax from the stripper remaining on
the surface shall be removed by the use of suitable solvents. All alkaline residues from the paint
strippers shall be removed by washing the surface with fresh water. All detrimental paint residue or
stripping agent residue shall be removed.
Regardless of the method used to clean oil, grease, or contaminants from a surface, there shall be no
detrimental residue left on the surface.
Solvent-cleaned surfaces shall be primed or prepared as specified before any detrimental corrosion or
recontamination occurs.
310-2.4 Power Tool Cleaning. Power tool cleaning is a method of preparing metal surfaces for
painting by removing loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint with power wire brushes, power impact
tools, power grinders, power sanders, or by a combination of these methods. It is not intended that all
mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this process; but loose mill scale, rust, paint, and other
detrimental foreign matter present shall be removed.
Oil, grease, and salts shall first be removed by the methods specified in 310-2.3. Other detrimental
foreign matter will be removed as described below.
Stratified rust (rust scale) shall be removed by power impact tools. If minor quantities of stratified
rust are present, they may be removed as specified in 310-2.2.
Large areas of tight, well-adhered paint, even though they may be removable, shall be removed only
if specified. All loose mill scale and all loose or nonadherent rust and all loose paint, as defined below,
shall be removed by one or more of the following methods:
a) Power wire brushing using rotary, radial, or cup brushes of suitable size, entering all accessible
openings, angles, joints, and corners. The steel wire of such brushes have sufficient rigidity to

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
474 Greenbook 2021

clean the surface, shall be kept free of excess foreign matter, and shall be discarded when they
are no longer effective. The surface shall be cleaned, but not burnished to a detrimental degree.
b) Power impact tool cleaning using power driven chipping or scaling hammers, rotary scalers,
single- or multiple-piston scalers, or other similar impact cleaning tools. Cutting edges of such
tools shall be kept in effective condition.
c) Power grinding using abrasive wheels or power sanding using abrasive materials. Sanding or
abrasive materials shall be discarded when they become ineffective.
Mill scale, rust, and paint are classified as “loose mill scale,” “loose and nonadherent rust,” and
“loose” or “removable paint” if they can be removed from a steel surface by power wire brushing using a
commercial electric or air wire brushing machine operated at a speed under load of 3,450 rpm and
equipped with a 6-inch (150 mm) diameter cup brush of double-row, knotted construction, made of No.
20 gage music wire. The brush shall be held against the steel surface with a force of 16 pounds (71 N),
and the rate of cleaning shall be 2 square feet (0.2 m2) of surface per minute. This test must be
conducted on an area not previously brushed, scraped, or sanded, but from which all detrimental
stratified rust (rust scale), oil, and grease, if present, have been removed. This test establishes a standard
for surface preparation and shall not be considered as establishing the production rate of cleaning.
Regardless of the method used for cleaning under this specification, the surface shall be cleaned at least
as well as the surface resulting from this test.
In preparing surfaces for repainting, all loose paint shall be removed. Thick edges of remaining old
paint shall be feathered so that the repainted surface will have a smooth appearance. The remaining old
paint shall have sufficient adhesion so that it cannot be lifted as a layer by inserting the blade of a dull
putty knife under it. All accessible weld flux and spatter shall be removed by power tools. The
accessible portions of all partially enclosed steel members shall be cleaned. On new work, areas which
will be inaccessible after assembly shall be cleaned before assembly.
Rivet heads, cracks, crevices, lap joints, fillet welds, and re-entrant angles shall be cleaned by the use
of power wire brushing, sharp chisels used in chipping, scaling hammers, rotary grinders, sanders, or by
a combination of such tools. All tools shall be operated in such a manner that no burrs or sharp ridges
are left on the surface and no sharp cuts are made into the steel. Areas inaccessible for cleaning by
power tools but accessible for hand cleaning shall be cleaned by methods specified in 310-2.2.
After these cleaning operations are completed, dust and other loose matter shall be removed from the
surface. If detrimental amounts of grease or oil are still present, these areas shall be spot cleaned with
solvent. The pretreatment (if any), or the prime coat of paint shall be applied as soon as possible after
cleaning and before further deterioration of the surface occurs.
310-2.5 Blast Cleaning.
310-2.5.1 General.
a) Definition. Blast cleaning is a method of preparing metal surfaces for painting by removing mill
scale, rust, rust scale, paint, or foreign matter by the use of abrasives propelled through nozzles or
by centrifugal wheels, to obtain one of the degrees of surface cleanliness described below.
b) White metal. A white metal blast-cleaned surface finish is defined as a surface with a gray-
white, uniform metallic color, slightly roughened to form a suitable anchor pattern for coatings.
The surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all oil, grease, dirt, visible mill
scale, rust, corrosion products, oxides, paint, or any other foreign matter. The color of the clean
surface may be affected by the particular abrasive medium used.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 475

c) Near-White. A near-white blast-cleaned surface finish is defined as one from which all oil,
grease, dirt, mill scale, rust, corrosion products, oxides, paint, or other foreign matter have been
completely removed from the surface except for very light shadows, very slight streaks, or slight
discolorations caused by rust stain, mill scale oxides, or slight, tight residues of paint or coating
that may remain.
At least 95 percent of each square inch of surface area shall be free of all visible residues, and the
remainder shall be limited to light discoloration mentioned above.
d) Commercial. A commercial blast-cleaned surface finish is defined as one from which all oil,
grease, dirt, rust scale, and foreign matter have been completely removed from the surface and all
rust, mill scale, and old paint have been completely removed except for slight shadows, streaks,
or discolorations caused by rust stain, mill scale oxides, or slight, tight residues of paint or
coating that may remain; if the surface is pitted, slight residues of rust or paint may be found in
the bottom of pits; at least 2/3 of each square inch (645 mm2) of surface area shall be free of all
visible residues and the remainder shall be limited to the light discoloration, slight staining or
light residues mentioned above.
e) Brush-off. A brush-off blast-cleaned surface finish is defined as one from which all oil, grease,
dirt, rust-scale, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint or coatings are removed completely,
but tight mill scale and tight-adhered rust, paint, and coating are permitted to remain provided
that all mill scale and rust have been exposed to the abrasive blast pattern sufficient to expose
numerous flecks of the underlying metal fairly uniformly distributed over the entire surface.
Heavy deposits of oil or grease shall be removed by the methods prescribed in 310-2.3.
Small quantities of oil or grease may be removed by the blast-cleaning operation.
Excessive rust scale shall preferably be removed by impact tools, as prescribed in 310-2.2 and
310-2.4.
310-2.5.2 Methods. The surface of the metal may be blast-cleaned by one of the following methods:
a) Dry sandblasting using compressed air blast nozzles and dry sand of a maximum particle size no
larger than that passing through a No. 16 (1.18 mm) mesh screen, U.S. sieve series.
b) Wet or water-vapor sandblasting using compressed air blast nozzles, water, and sand of a
maximum particle size no larger than that passing through a No. 16 (1.18 mm) mesh screen, U.S.
sieve series.
c) Grit blasting using compressed air blast nozzles and crushed grit made of cast iron, malleable
iron, steel, or synthetic grits other than sand. The largest commercial grade of metal grit
permitted by this specification shall be SAE Grit No. G25 abrasive material.
d) Shot blasting using compressed air nozzles and cast iron, malleable iron, steel, or synthetic shot.
The largest commercial grade shot permitted by this specification shall be SAE Shot No. S330.
e) Closed, re-circulating nozzle blasting using compressed air, vacuum, and any of the
preceding abrasives.
f) Grit blasting using centrifugal wheels and crushed grit made of cast iron, malleable iron, steel, or
synthetic grits. The largest commercial grade permitted by this specification shall be SAE Shot
No. S330.
The surface, if dry blasted, shall be brushed with clean brushes made of hair, bristle, or fiber, blown
off with compressed air (from which detrimental oil and water have been removed), or cleaned by
vacuum, for the purpose of removing any traces of blast products from the surface, and also for the
removal of abrasive from pockets and corners.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
476 Greenbook 2021

The surface, if wet sandblasted, shall be cleaned by rinsing with fresh water to which sufficient corrosion
inhibitor has been added to prevent rusting, or with fresh water followed immediately by an inhibitive
treatment. This cleaning shall be supplemented by brushing, if necessary, to remove any residue.
The compressed air used for nozzle blasting shall be free of detrimental amounts of condensed water
or oil. Adequate separators and traps shall be provided. Blast cleaning operations shall be done in such
a manner that no damage is done to partially or entirely completed portions of the work.
The blast-cleaned surface shall be further treated, or primed, as specified, within 8 hours after
blasting when practicable, but in any event not later than 24 hours after blasting and also before any
visible or detrimental rusting occurs. Surfaces which rust before painting is accomplished shall be
recleaned by the Contractor at its expense.
310-3 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR PAINTING GALVANIZED SURFACES.
310-3.1 Hand Cleaning. Concrete spatter, heavy grease, and other foreign matter shall be removed
from galvanized surfaces by hand scraping or wire brushing.
310-3.2 Solvent Cleaning. After hand cleaning, all galvanized surfaces shall be cleaned by the
solvent cleaning procedures prescribed in 310-2.3 herein to remove oil, grease, and other detrimental
foreign matter. After washing, all areas shall be roughened by abrasive blasting using an abrasive that is
no larger than No. 30 mesh (600 µm). Galvanizing shall not be removed by this operation.
310-4 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR PAINTING WOOD SURFACES. Wood surfaces shall be
prepared for painting by removing all cracked or peeled paint, loose chalky paint, dirt, and other foreign matter
by wire brushing, scraping, sanding, or other approved means immediately prior to painting. All surfaces
shall be wiped or dry brushed to remove any dust or chalky residue that may result from cleaning operations.
All wood designated to be painted shall be thoroughly dry before paint is applied.
310-5 PAINTING VARIOUS SURFACES.
310-5.1 Painting Structural Steel.
310-5.1.1 Paint. Unless otherwise specified, paints shall consist of a primer (applied in not less than 2
coats), a pre-treatment, and 2 finish coats. The total dry film thickness of the primer shall not be less than 3
mils (80 µm), and the total dry film thickness of the 2 finish coats shall be not less than 2 mils (50 µm). The
dry film thickness of the paint will be measured in place with a calibrated magnetic film thickness gage. Pre-
treatment thickness shall be sufficient to completely coat the underlying primer.
Excessively thick coats of paint will not be permitted. The thickness of each coat shall be limited to
that which will result in uniform drying throughout the paint film.
Paint shall conform to 210-1. Succeeding coats of paint, not otherwise materially different in color, shall
have carbon black mixed into the paint 0.25 pounds per gallon (30 g/L) lamp black, Federal Specification TT-
P-00350, or slightly varying pigments to produce a shade contrasting with the paint being covered. Such
changes shall be in undercoats, and the final finish coat shall be the specified finish color.
310-5.1.2 Cleaning. Unless otherwise specified, after erection and riveting or welding, all surfaces
of structural steel which will be exposed to air in the completed structure, shall be commercially blast-
cleaned as prescribed by 310-2.5 prior to painting.
In repainting existing steel structures where partial cleaning is required, the method of cleaning will
be as specified.
Any damage to sound paint on areas not designated for treatment, which results from the
Contractor’s operations, shall be repaired as directed by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 477

310-5.1.3 Application of Paint. Painting of finish coats of structural steel, except for sections
which will be inaccessible after erection as described herein, shall be done after erection unless
otherwise specified. Requests to do any painting other than undercoats prior to erection shall be
submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer in writing before such work is started.
Any deficiencies in the first coat of paint shall be corrected prior to the application of succeeding
coats of paint.
Surfaces exposed to the atmosphere which would be inaccessible for painting after erection shall be
painted the full number of coats prior to erection.
All previous coats of paint shall be dry and fully cured and the surface of the paint coat being
covered shall be free from moisture, dust, grease, or any other deleterious material which would prevent
the bond of the succeeding paint coats. In spot painting, any old paint which lifts after application of the
first spot coat, shall be removed by scraping and the area repainted before application of the next coat.
The application of finish coats will not be permitted until the repaired total film thickness of the
undercoats of paint, as specified in 310-5.1.1, is obtained.
Open seams at contact surfaces of stiffeners and built-up members which would retain moisture shall
be caulked with non-sag polysulphide material conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-230, Type 2,
or other approved material before applying the second coat of primer.
Except for anchor bolt assemblies, steel surfaces embedded in concrete need not be painted.
Ungalvanized anchor bolt assemblies shall be painted or dipped with one coat of zinc-rich primer prior
to installation.
The bottom surfaces of masonry plates and surfaces of structural steel to be in contact with
elastomeric bearing pad or preformed fabric pads shall be cleaned and painted with the full number of
specified coats prior to erection.
With the exception of abutting chord and columns splices and column and truss shoe bases, machine
finished surfaces shall be coated with a rust inhibitor which can be easily removed. Surfaces of iron and
steel castings which have been machine finished shall be painted with a coat of shop paint.
Zinc-rich primer shall be applied by spray methods. On areas inaccessible to spray application, the
paint may be applied by brush or daubers. Mechanical mixers shall be used in mixing the primer. After
mixing, the primer shall be strained through a metal No. 30 to 60 (600 µm to 250 µm) mesh screen or a
double layer of cheesecloth immediately prior to or during pouring into the spray pot. An agitating spray
pot shall be used in all spray application of primer. The agitator or stirring rod shall reach within 2
inches (50 mm) of the bottom of the spray pot and shall be in motion at all times during primer
application. Such motion shall be sufficient to keep the primer well mixed. Whenever painting
operations are interrupted, the primer remaining in the fluid hose shall be expelled from the hose.
Primer shall be free from dust, dirt, salt, or other deleterious deposits and thoroughly dry before applying
pre-treatment vinyl wash primer.
The wash primer shall not be applied more than 72 hours before application of finish coats. The
vinyl wash primer wash shall be applied by spraying to produce a uniform wet film completely coating
the underlying surface.
310-5.1.4 Payment. Full compensation for preparing surfaces and for painting shall be considered
as included in the prices for the various contract items of work involving structural steel and no separate
payment for such work will be made. No separate or additional payment will be made for furnishing and
maintaining enclosures to permit painting during inclement weather.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
478 Greenbook 2021

310-5.2 Painting Machinery. Prior to installation, all surfaces of machinery exposed to the
atmosphere, which are subject to corrosion and are normally painted, shall be painted with two coats of
paint. Unless otherwise specified, after installation of the machinery, such surfaces shall be painted with
a finish coat. All coats shall be as specified for structural steel. Full compensation for painting
machinery shall be considered as included in the price paid for the machinery or in the item of which the
machinery is part.
310-5.3 Painting Galvanized Surfaces. Unless otherwise specified, galvanized surfaces shall be
left unpainted. When required to be painted, the surfaces shall be prepared as specified in 310-3 and
then painted with one coat of zinc dust-zinc oxide primer conforming to 210-1. The primer shall be
applied by spraying to produce a complete covering of the galvanized surface. After the primer is
applied, one coat of pre-treatment vinyl wash primer shall be applied. One finish coat shall be applied
the same day as the wash primer is applied.
Full compensation for painting such surfaces shall be included in the Contract Unit Price for the
various contract items involving galvanized metal objects and no separate payment for such painting will
be made.
310-5.4 Painting Metal Guard Rails. Metal guard rails, when required to be painted, shall be
painted with three coats of paint of the type specified for metal guard rails in 210-1.5. Full
compensation for painting guard rails shall be considered as included in the Contract Unit Price for the
guardrails and no separate payment for such painting will be made.
310-5.5 Painting Lumber.
310-5.5.1 Paint. Unless otherwise specified, all new lumber requiring painting shall consist of a
primer and 2 finish coats as prescribed in 210-1.5 for wood structures, or as specified by the Engineer.
On all lumber previously painted the number of coats and types of paint will be as specified.
310-5.5.2 Preparation of Surfaces. Wood surfaces designated to be painted shall be cleaned in
accordance with 310-4.
310-5.5.3 Application of Paint. When permitted by the Engineer, the first coat of paint may be
applied prior to erection.
After the first coat has dried and the lumber is in place, all cracks, checks, nail holes, etc., shall be
puttied flush with the surface and allowed to dry before the second coat is applied.
Skips, holidays, thin areas, or other deficiencies in any one coat of paint shall be corrected before the
succeeding coat is applied.
The surface of any paint coat being covered shall be free of deleterious material before additional
paint is applied.
310-5.5.4 Payment. Full compensation for preparing surfaces and for painting lumber shall be
considered as included in the Bid prices for the various Contract items of work involving lumber and no
separate payment for such work will be made.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 479

SECTION 311 - SPECIAL PROTECTIVE MATERIALS

311-1 PLASTIC LINER INSTALLATION.

311-1.1 General. Liner sheets, weld strips, other liner accessory items, adhesive products, and
cleansers to be used in conjunction with the installation of the liner shall conform to 210-2. Plastic
liners that rely on adhesive products or adhesion for bonding to the substrate shall only be used for
rehabilitation and shall conform to 502.
Plastic liners shall protect the interior surfaces of new sanitary sewer manholes (except the underside
of manhole frames and covers) and structures to the limits shown on the Plans.
Plastic liners shall have positive, mechanical anchors and welded or gasketed joints when used
with cast-in-place concrete structures or precast reinforced concrete pipe. Liners shall be applied
and secured to the forms, and inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to the placement of
reinforcing steel. Forms in contact with plastic liners shall not be oiled. Forms in contact with
rigid plastic liners may be lubricated with a biodegradable lubricating material approved by the
Engineer.
311-1.1.1 Submittals. The Contractor shall submit Working Drawings and Supporting Information
in accordance with 3-8. The submittals shall include the following:
a) Complete liner product documentation including associated materials, adhesives, certifications
and required test results.
b) Complete description of plastic liner installation.
c) Typical installation details and drawings.
d) Welding quality control plan, including:
i) Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) and Performance Qualification Test Records
(PQR) developed in accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) B2.4 by the material
manufacturer for each type of weld to be used in the Work,
ii) Welder Qualification Test Records (WQR) for each welder, and
iii) Quality control inspector certifications.
311-1.2 Installer Qualifications.
311-1.2.1 Applicators and Lead Installers.
The application of plastic liner to forms and other surfaces is considered to be specialized work
performed by entry level workers commonly referred to as “applicators.” Applicators shall work under
the direct supervision of a certified plastics welder or a lead installer. Unless otherwise specified, a lead
installer shall have a minimum of 2 years of experience installing the specific plastic liner materials
included in the Work.
311-1.2.2 Welders. Welders shall be certified plastics welders who are certified by a quality control
inspector conforming to 311-2.3 for proficiency in each type of weld they perform in accordance with
the approved WPS and PQR prior to welding or repairing any plastic liner material used in the Work.
Any weld completed by a welder without certification to perform that specific type of weld will be
rejected. Welders shall be recertified at least every 3 years and when requested by the Engineer for
quality assurance.
Welder certification test welds shall be performed in the presence of a quality control inspector and,
when requested, the Engineer. Test welds shall be constructed from 2 pieces of plastic liner material that

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
480 Greenbook 2021

are each at least 17 inches (430 mm) long and 5 inches (125 mm) wide. The welder shall follow the
WPS and PQR for the type of weld being certified and shall include the horizontal, vertical, and
overhead positions.
Three test specimens from each position shall be cut from the welded sample of each type of weld
and all specimens shall be tested in tension across the welds. The tensile strength of each specimen shall
conform to 210-2.6.5. The certification of the type of weld in each position will be based on the
following:
a) If none of the specimens in that position fail the tension test, the weld will be considered
satisfactory.
b) If one specimen in that position fails the tension test, a retest will be permitted. The retest shall
consist of testing 3 additional specimens cut from the original welded sample in that position. If
all 3 of the retest specimens pass the test, the weld will be considered satisfactory.
c) If 2 or more specimens in that position fail the tension test, the welder will be considered
unqualified for that type of weld and shall be disqualified.
A disqualified welder may submit a new welding sample for testing at any time after gaining
additional training or experience to warrant retesting.
311-1.2.3 Quality Control Inspectors. The welding and repair of plastic liners shall be performed
in the presence of a quality control inspector unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Shop welds
may be performed without a quality control inspector present provided they are on-site to regularly
inspect welds as part of the manufacturer’s quality control program.
Quality control inspectors shall be certified by The Welding Institute (TWI) and meet the following
requirements:
a) Associate Plastic Welding Inspector (APWI) shall have a minimum of 2 years experience
installing, welding, or inspecting the installation and welding of plastic liners.
b) Plastic Welding Inspector (PWI) shall have a minimum of 5 years experience installing, welding,
or inspecting the installation and welding of plastic liners.
c) Senior Plastic Welding Inspector (SPWI) shall have a minimum of 10 years experience
installing, welding, or inspecting the installation and welding of plastic liners.
Quality control inspectors shall perform the following duties:
d) APWI – Visual inspection of extrusion welds and any other welds not requiring physical
inspection.
e) PWI – Any duties performed by an APWI, inspection of all plastic welds, certification of any
WPS or PQR used in the Work, and certification of plastic welders.
f) SPWI – Any duties performed by a PWI and certification of APWIs and PWIs.
Alternate quality control inspector certifications and experience shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer. The Engineer’s determination as to the suitability of the certification and experience of the
quality control inspectors shall be final.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor, or manufacturer for shop welds, shall be responsible for
providing experienced and certified quality control inspectors necessary to complete the Work.
311-1.3 Liner Placement.
311-1.3.1 Coverage. The circumferential coverage shown on the Plans is the minimum area of
coverage required.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 481

After each pipe is installed, the offset at each longitudinal terminal edge of the plastic liner sheet on
the adjoining pipe shall not be greater than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). In cast-in-place structures, no such
offset of the lower terminal edge will be permitted.
At any location shown on the Plans where there is a difference in circumferential coverage and the
longitudinal terminal edges of liner downstream from said location are lower than those upstream, the
terminal edges of the liner installed in the section of pipe or structure immediately upstream from the
station shall be sloped uniformly for the entire length of the section of pipe or structure from the limits of
the smaller coverage to those of the greater coverage. Wherever the longitudinal terminal edges of liner
downstream from the station are higher than those upstream, the slope shall be accomplished uniformly
throughout the length of the section of pipe or structure immediately downstream from the station. An
approved locking extension shall be provided along all sloping lower terminal edges of plastic liner.
311-1.3.2 Liner Positioning. Liners installed in pipe shall be positioned so that the locking
extensions are parallel to the axis of the pipe.
Liners shall be centered within the form with respect to the “T” of the pipe when the inner form is in
position. Liner shall be set flush with the inner edge of the socket end of a pipe section and shall extend
either to the spigot end or beyond the spigot end, as required for the type of liner joint to be made with
the adjoining pipe.
Rigid liners shall be set flush with the inner edge of the socket-and-spigot ends of pipe or structures.
Rigid liners may be set back from the edge of the pipe up to 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) to facilitate
manufacturing.
Liners with continuous locking extensions installed in cast-in-place structures shall be positioned
with locking extensions placed in the vertical direction. Horizontal placement is subject to approval by
the Engineer.
Liners shall be closely fitted to inner forms. Sheets shall be cut to fit curved and warped surfaces
using a minimum number of separate pieces.
Prior to installation, the Contractor shall provide to the Engineer the proposed layout of liner sheets
for cast-in-place structures, including the location and type of all field welds.
The Engineer may require field sketches or the use of patterns or the marking of sheet layouts
directly on the forms where complicated or warped surfaces are involved.
At transverse joints between sheets of liner used in cast-in-place structures and at all pipe joints, the
space between ends of locking extensions, measured longitudinally, shall not exceed 4 inches (100 mm).
Where sheets are cut and joined for the purpose of fitting irregular surfaces, this space shall not exceed 2
inches (50 mm).
311-1.3.3 Securing Liners in-Place. Liners shall be secured in place against inner forms in
accordance with the liner manufacturer’s recommendations. For pipes and similar circular sections, light
steel banding straps, prefabricated tubes, or other approved means shall be used. If used, banding straps
shall be placed in strap channels. Any method of banding other than in strap channels shall be approved
by the Engineer. Where form ties or form stabilizing rods pass through a liner, provisions shall be made
to maintain the liner in close contact with the forms during concrete placement.
Concrete shall be prevented from flowing around the edges of sheets at joints by welding a weld strip
or applying a waterproof tape over the back of the joint.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
482 Greenbook 2021

311-1.3.4 Flexible Liner Weep Channels. For liners with continuous locking extensions, at each
pipe joint and at transverse joints in cast-in-place structures, a gap not less than 2 inches (50 mm) nor
greater than 4 inches (100 mm) shall be left in each locking extension to provide a transverse weep
channel. If locking extensions are removed to provide a weep channel at joints, the base of the extension
left on the sheet shall not exceed 32 mils (800 µm). Weep channels are not required for liners with
discontinuous locking extensions.
Intermediate weep channels shall be provided if specified or shown on the Plans. Intermediate weep
channels shall not be less than 2.5 inches (63 mm) nor greater than 4 inches (100 mm) in width. If
locking extensions are removed to provide intermediate weep channels, the base of the extension
remaining on the sheet shall not exceed 63 mils (1.6 µm). Weep channels are not required on pipe
containing a steel cylinder or pipe having 360-degree liner coverage.
Additional weep channels 2 inches (50 mm) wide shall be provided behind liners drained by
insufficient or non-fully-functional regular weep channels by cutting away locking extensions.
Provisions shall be made to permit any water accumulated behind the liner of concrete manhole shafts to
drain into the weep channels of the lined structure.
An additional transverse weep channel shall be provided approximately 12 inches (300 mm) away
from each liner return where surfaces lined with plastic liner join surfaces which are not lined, and at the
terminal edge of the weep channel for reinforcement.
Outlets of weep channels shall be cleared of obstructions.
Where specified or shown on the Plans, a 12-inch (300 mm) long weld strip, 1 inch (25 mm) wide,
shall be centered over each terminal edge of the weep channel for reinforcement.
311-1.3.5 Liner Returns. Liner returns with integral weep channels shall be installed where shown
on the Plans and wherever surfaces lined with plastic liner join surfaces which are not so lined.
Unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer, returns shall be constructed as follows:
a) Each liner return shall include a strip of liner that extends at least 3 inches (75 mm) at right
angles to the main liner in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
b) Flexible joint strips shall be heat-welded to join the return to the main liner. Rigid corner strips
shall be nonflammable solvent-welded to join the return to the main liner.
Each liner return shall be sealed to the adjacent construction with which it is in contact by means of a
compound approved by the Engineer. If the joint space is too wide or the joint surface too rough to
permit the use of the compound, the joint space shall be filled with 2 inches (50 mm) of cement mortar,
or other material approved by the Engineer, and finish-coated with a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) of an
approved corrosion-resistant material.
311-1.3.6 Liner Penetrations
311-[Link] Pipe Connections. Pipe connections penetrating into lined concrete structures shall
include a vapor seal capable of protecting the concrete structure from any corrosive environment. Lining
material used to seal the penetration shall be of the same material as the existing structure lining unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
311-[Link] Bolts and Anchors. Bolts and anchors penetrating the plastic liner shall be sealed with
a sealing compound compatible with the liner material and approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 483

311-1.4 Concrete Casting Operations.

311-1.4.1 Concrete Placement. During concrete placement, liners shall be supported in
conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Concrete shall be vibrated to avoid damage to
the liner and securely anchor the locking extensions into the concrete.
311-1.4.2 Form Removals. When forms are removed, any nails that remain in the liner plate
shall be pulled and the resulting holes clearly marked. Form tie holes shall be marked before ties
are broken off and areas of abrasion of the liner shall be marked.
Following completion of form removal, liner in pipe and structures shall be cleaned for inspection.
Repairs to liners in pipes, manhole shafts, and structures shall be completed and approved by the
Engineer prior to shipment.
Banding straps used in securing liners to forms shall be removed within the limits of unlined inverts.
Voids left in the invert at the edge of the liner shall be filled with cement mortar or other material
approved by the Engineer.
311-1.5 Field Jointing of Liner.
311-1.5.1 General. Field joints shall not be constructed until the lined pipe or structure has been
backfilled and 7 Days have elapsed after compaction has been completed. Where groundwater is
encountered, joints shall not be constructed until pumping of groundwater has been discontinued for at
least 7 Days and no visible leakage is evident at the joint. Liners at joint locations shall be free of mortar
and other foreign material, clean and dry before joints are constructed.
Ventilation shall be maintained during field jointing operations. Heated joint compound shall not be
brought in contact with liner.
No coating of any kind shall be applied over any joint, corner, or welding strip, except where non-
skid coating is applied to liner surfaces.
Field joints shall be overlapped unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The overlap shall be
welded to the adjacent plastic liner with locking extensions per the approved WPS and PQR for the
material. The overlap shall not be less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) and the entire seam between the
overlap and plastic liner shall be covered by a 1-inch (25 mm) welding strip or extrusion weld over the
front of the joint. PVC welds shall be probed in accordance with 311-1.10. For joints requiring 2 welds,
the first PVC weld shall be probed and approved by the Engineer before applying the second weld.
311-1.5.2 Field Joints in Pipe Installations. Field joints in plastic liner at pipe joints shall be one
of the following types:
a) Flexible liner Type P-1 joints shall consist of a 4-inch (100 mm) joint/cap strip centered over the
pipe joint and secured along each edge to the adjacent liner in accordance with the approved
WPS for the plastic liner material.
b) Flexible liner Type P-2 joints shall be constructed with an integral joint flap with locking
extensions removed, extending a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) beyond the end of the pipe.
The flap shall overlap and be welded to the adjacent lined pipe section in accordance with the
approved WPS for the plastic liner material. Care shall be taken to protect the flap from
damage. Excessive tension and distortion while bending the flap back to facilitate laying and
joint mortaring shall be avoided.
Any flap which has been bent back and held shall be allowed to return to its original shape and
flatness before constructing a field joint.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
484 Greenbook 2021

c) Rigid liner Type CJ-1 joints shall consist of a co-extruded 7-1/4 inch (184 mm) wide joint strip
centered over the mortared pipe joint and secured along each edge to the adjacent liner by means
of solvent welding. The solvent shall be nonflammable and approved by the Engineer.
Rigid liner panel locks shall consist of a 4-inch (100 mm) joint/T-strip centered over the pipe
joint and secured along each edge to adjacent liners by means of applying an adhesive approved
by the liner manufacturer and the Engineer.
d) Field joints in rigid liners at manhole joints shall consist of a 1-1/2-inch (38 mm) by 1-1/2-
inch (38 mm) factory-installed L-angle. When manholes are constructed in the field, a
polyurethane compound approved by the Engineer shall be applied between L-angles for
sealing purposes.
Field joints in liners at pipe joints shall not be made until in the mortar in the pipe joint has been
allowed to cure for at least 48 hours.
All joints between flexible-lined pipe and flexible-lined cast-in-place structures shall be either Type
C-1 or Type C-2 specified herein.
When the liner coverage for non-steel cylinder pipe is 360 degrees, the downstream side of a joint
strip or flap at the pipe invert shall not be welded for a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) and a maximum
of 8 inches (200 mm).
311-1.5.3 Field Joints in Cast-in-Place Structures. Field joints in liners in cast-in-place structures
shall be one of the following types:
a) Flexible Liners.
1) Type C-1 joints shall be constructed in the same manner as Type P-1 joints. The width of
space between adjacent sheets of liner in a Type C-1 joint shall not exceed 1/2 inch (12.5
mm). This is the only type of joint permitted at transverse expansion and contraction joints
in concrete structures. Its only other use is for joints between pipes and cast-in-place
structures. For HDPE or PP liners, a single extrusion weld may also be used to join sheets
with a gap of 3/8 inch (9.8 mm) or less between the sheets when constructed in accordance
with the approved WPS and approved by the Engineer.
2) Type C-2 joints shall be constructed by overlapping sheets not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)
and securing the overlap to the adjacent liner in accordance with the approved WPS for that
liner material. The upstream sheet shall overlap the downstream sheet. The length of the
overlapping sheet not having locking extensions shall not exceed 4 inches (100 mm).
3) Type C-3 joints shall be constructed by butting sheets of liner together and applying a welding
strip over the back of the joint before concrete is placed. After the concrete is in place, a
welding strip shall be applied over the front of the joint. Type C-3 joints are not permitted at
a transverse joint which extends to a lower terminal edge of a liner or at any joint where the
gap between adjoining liner sheets exceeds 1/8 inch (3 mm). Type C-3 joints shall be for
HDPE and PP liners only. A single extrusion weld may be used to join sheets with a gap of
3/8 inch (9.8 mm) or less between the sheets when constructed in accordance with the
approved WPS and approved by the Engineer.
b) Rigid PVC Liners.
1) H-strip joints shall be used to join sections of liner panels. Prior to placing concrete, an H-strip shall
be secured to the end of the installed panel which will receive the next section of panels. The
outside edges of the strip shall be sealed with a bead of approved adhesive.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 485

2) Corner strip joints are 90-degree strips that shall be used to join horizontal panels which will
receive a vertical panel requiring a 90-degree transition. The outside edges of the strip shall
be sealed with a bead of approved adhesive.
3) J-strip joints shall be used where custom or compound angles are required. The outside edges
of the strip shall be sealed with an approved adhesive.
4) PVC plugs shall be used when plugging a hole no greater than 1- inch (25 mm) in diameter.
The edges of the plug shall be sealed with a bead of approved adhesive.
5) Curved corner strip joints shall be used to join panels with a custom or compound angle.
6) T-Strip joints shall be used to join two lined structure segments. An approved adhesive shall
be applied to seal the two lined structures/segments.
7) Joiner strip joints shall be used to join liner panels with integral locking mechanisms.
c) Rigid Polypropylene – Fiber Reinforced Polymer (PP-FRP) Composite Liners.
1) Joints shall consist of a 4-inch (100 mm) joint/cap strip, centered over the pipe joint and
secured along each edge to the adjacent liner in accordance with the approved WPS for the
liner material.
2) Joints where PP or HDPE embedment is not present shall have gaps filled with a chemically
compatible resin recommended by the liner manufacturer. Voids larger than 1/8 inch (3 mm)
shall be filled with resin and glass fiber reinforcing recommended by the liner manufacturer.
311-1.5.4 Installation of Welding Strips for Flexible Liners. Welding strips shall be fusion-
welded to joint strips and liners in accordance with the approved WPS and when approved by the
Engineer.
After repairs have been made, repaired welds shall be inspected, tested, and approved by the
Engineer.
311-1.5.5 Joint Reinforcement. A 12-inch (300 mm) long welding strip shall be applied as a
reinforcement across each transverse joint, weep channel, or return which extends to the lower terminal
edge of liner. These reinforcement strips shall be centered over the joint being reinforced and located as
close to the lower edge of liner as practicable. They shall be welded in place after the transverse welding
strips have been installed.
311-1.6 Application of Liners to Concrete Surfaces. Application of liner plates to concrete
surfaces by application of an approved adhesive shall be performed as follows:
a) The concrete surface shall be mechanically etched by sandblasting, water blasting, or by other
means approved by the Engineer to develop a slightly granular surface. When permitted by the
Engineer, the concrete surface may be acid etched and neutralized in lieu of sandblasting.
b) After sandblasting, the concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust. Surfaces etched with
acid shall be thoroughly washed with clean water and completely dry before primer is applied.
Application of primer, adhesive, and liner shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. For HDPE and PP liners, a fabric-backed liner or other approved transition
material shall be used to ensure proper adhesion to the liner.
311-1.7 Non-Skid Surfaces. Liner surfaces shown on the Plans to be non-skid shall be treated as
follows prior to installation:
a) The liner shall be cleaned, dried, and sprayed with an adhesive coating recommended by the
manufacturer of the plastic liner and approved by the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
486 Greenbook 2021

b) Immediately after the adhesive is applied to the liner, the surface shall then be liberally sprinkled
with clean, dry, well-graded sand, passing a No. 30 (600 µm) sieve but be retained on a No. 70
(212 µm) sieve.
After the sanded surface has thoroughly dried, all excess sand shall be brushed away and a seal
coat of the adhesive coating shall be sprayed over the sand in sufficient quantity to coat and bond
the sand to the liner plate.
c) The coated sand surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before handling.
Alternatively, plastic liners may be furnished with a non-skid surface at the time of manufacture
when approved by the Engineer.
311-1.8 Application of Liners to Steel Surfaces. Fabrication and welding of steel to be lined with
plastic liners shall be completed before the liner is installed except for field welding.
Steel surfaces to which plastic liners are to be applied shall be prepared in such a manner that leaves
surfaces free of all mill scale, rust, grease, moisture, and other deleterious substances. Interior weld
metal shall be ground smooth and all weld spatter removed. After welds are ground, weld metal shall
not project more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above the pipe surface. In the event that field welding is
required, the plastic liner shall not be installed closer than 12 inches (300 mm) to the weld. Plastic liner
shall be installed in the weld area after welding on the steel has been completed.
The application of primer, adhesive, activator, and liner to steel surfaces shall conform to the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Field joints shall be tight-fitting butt joints. After the liner has been
applied to steel surfaces, corner strips or welding strips shall be applied over all joints and welded in-
place.
311-1.9 Protection and Repair of Liners. Any damage to installed liner plate shall be repaired by
the Contractor in accordance with the requirements set forth herein for the repair of liners. All nail and
tie holes and all cut, torn, and abraded areas in the liner plates shall be patched.
311-1.9.1 Flexible Liners.
a) Holes not exceeding 1/8 - inch (3 mm) in diameter for PVC and 1/2 - inch (12.5 mm) in diameter
for HDPE and PP may be repaired using a single 1-inch (25 mm) welding strip for PVC, or a
single extrusion weld for HDPE and PP, installed per the approved WPS for the liner material.
The use of parallel, overlapping, or adjoining welding strips will not be permitted.
b) Holes exceeding 1/8-inch (3 mm) in diameter for PVC and 1/2-inch (12.5 mm) in diameter for
HDPE and PP may be repaired with smooth liner over the damaged area and attached to the
adjoining liner per the approved WPS for the liner material. The size of a single patch shall be
limited only as to its width, which shall not exceed 4 inches (100 mm) for PVC or 8 inches (200
mm) for PP and HDPE. Patching holes in plastic liners exceeding 1/8-inch (3 mm) in diameter
for PVC or 1/2-inch (12.5 mm) for HDPE and PP shall be made with a patch which overlaps the
edge of the hole by a minimum of 3/4-inch (19 mm).
311-1.9.2 Rigid Liners. Patches shall be made of the same material as the liner and shall extend a
minimum of 3/4-inch (19 mm) past the damaged area of the liner. Patches shall be solvent welded or
adhered to the liner using a chemically compatible resin or adhesive. Rigid PP-FRP may be patched using a
smooth liner patch extrusion welded to the liner, provided the area being patched is faced with PP.
Proposed materials and methods for restoration of anchorage and patches larger than those permitted
above shall be approved by the Engineer.
311-1.10 Quality Assurance Tests.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 487

Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall clean the surface of the liner. Once clean
the Engineer will visually inspect the liner and perform spark testing in accordance with 210-2.6.6.
Areas of the liner, where visual inspection or spark testing identifies defects or holes, shall be repaired
by the Contractor and retested.
The Engineer will inspect welds for adhesion by probing or striking with an instrument, such as a
putty knife, to confirm proper fusion of the weld strip and liner without damage to the weld strip or the
liner. Welds without proper adhesion shall be repaired by the Contractor and re-inspected.
The Contractor shall assist in the inspection and spark testing by providing adequate ventilation,
ladders for access, barricades, or other traffic control devices, and shall be responsible for opening and
closing entrances and exits.
The Engineer may waive the aforementioned quality assurance tests and require submission of a
Certificate of Compliance signed by the quality control inspector and the Contractor that the completed
Work has been inspected, tested, and conforms to the Specifications. An accepted Certificate of
Compliance shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to correct defective work.
311-1.11 Payment. Payment for plastic liner materials and their installation, including quality
control inspection, shall be included in the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid for the pipe
or structure to which they are applied.
No separate or additional payment will be made for repairs.

SECTION 314 - TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS,

AND PAVEMENT MARKERS

314-1 GENERAL. The work shall consist of the removal and application of traffic striping
(striping), curb and pavement markings (markings), and pavement markers at the locations shown
on the Plans.
For the purposes of these Specifications, traffic striping shall be defined as longitudinal centerlines
and lane lines that separate traffic lanes in the same or opposing direction of travel, and longitudinal
edge lines that mark the edge of the traveled way or the edge of the lanes. Curb markings shall be
defined as colored markings on the curb that denote parking restrictions. Pavement markings shall be
defined as transverse markings which include, but are not limited to, word and symbol markings, limit
lines (stop lines), crosswalks, shoulder markings, parking stall markings and railroad crossing markings.
The type of material, paint or thermoplastic, to be applied shall be as specified in the Special
Provisions or as shown on the Plans.
314-2 REMOVAL OF TRAFFIC STRIPING AND CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS.
314-2.1 General. The Contractor shall remove existing traffic striping and pavement markings by
wet or dry sandblasting, high velocity water jet, grinding, or other methods as specified in the Special
Provisions. Obliteration with black paint or emulsified asphalt will not be allowed.
Curb markings shall be painted over as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
Conflicting striping and pavement markings shall be removed before the application of new
temporary or permanent traffic striping, and curb or pavement markings.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
488 Greenbook 2021

314-2.2 Measurement. Removal of traffic striping and curb and pavement markings will be
measured as follows:
a) Traffic striping and curb markings will be measured by the linear foot (m) for each width and
type of traffic stripe or curb marking.
b) Pavement markings will be measured by the square foot (m2). The space between the stripes or
letters will be included in the overall measurement.
314-2.3 Payment. Payment for removal of traffic striping and curb markings will be made at the
Contract Unit Price per linear foot for each width and type of traffic stripe or curb marking. Payment for
removal of pavement markings will be made at the Contract Unit Price per square foot.
314-3 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT MARKERS.
314-3.1 General. Removal of existing pavement markers shall be performed in such a manner as to
leave the existing pavement undamaged.
Asphalt concrete pavement shall be considered damaged when a depression of more than 1/4 inch (6
mm) results. Damaged asphalt concrete pavement shall be patched with E-PG 64-10 asphalt concrete
pavement conforming to 203-6 and 302-5.
314-3.2 Measurement. Removal of pavement markers will be measured by each pavement
marker removed.
314-3.3 Payment. Payment for removal of pavement markers will be made at the Contract Unit
Price for each pavement marker to be removed.
314-4 APPLICATION OF TRAFFIC STRIPING AND CURB AND PAVEMENT
MARKINGS.
314-4.1 General. Traffic striping and curb and pavement markings shall conform to the dimensions
and details shown on the Plans.
314-4.2 Control of Alignment and Layout.
314-4.2.1 General. When necessary, the Engineer will furnish the necessary control points. The
Contractor shall establish traffic striping between these points by string line or other method approved
by the Engineer.
Traffic lines shall be spotted in advance of application by using a rope as a guide for marking spots
every 5 feet (1.5 m), by using a marking wheel mounted on a vehicle, or by another method approved by
the Engineer.
314-4.3 Painted Traffic Striping and Curb and Pavement Markings.
314-4.3.1 General. The work shall consist of applying painted (including glass beads) traffic stripes
and curb and pavement markings at the locations shown on the Plans. Glass beads shall conform to 214-
3. Paint shall conform to 214-4.
Paint shall be applied only when:
a) the pavement surface is dry and clean,
b) the atmospheric temperature is above 40ºF (1ºC) when using acetone-based paint and 50º F
(10ºC) when using waterborne paint,
c) the weather is not windy, foggy, or humid,
d) the forecast atmospheric temperature will not drop below the aforementioned 40ºF (1ºC) or 50º F
(10ºC) temperatures during the drying period, and
e) the forecast temperature is within the paint manufacturer’s recommended range.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 489

314-4.3.2 Surface Preparation. Before applying paint, the existing pavement surface shall be
cleaned. Areas which cannot be satisfactorily cleaned shall be scrubbed with a water solution of tri-
sodium phosphate (10 percent Na3PO4) or other cleaning solution approved by the Engineer. After
cleaning, the surface shall be rinsed with water and dried before painting. The cleaning solution and
rinse water shall not be allowed to enter any storm drain or natural water course.
314-4.3.3 Mixing. Mechanical mixers shall be used to mix paint. Prior to application, paint shall
be mixed a sufficient length of time to thoroughly mix the pigment and vehicle together, and shall be
kept thoroughly agitated during application.
314-4.3.4 Application Equipment.
314-[Link] General. Application equipment shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use.
Application equipment shall include brushes, brooms, compressors, air blowers, mechanical marking
machines, heating devices, bead dispensing devices, auxiliary hand spray painting equipment, stencils,
paint rollers, and other equipment necessary to complete the work.
314-[Link] Striping Machines. Striping machines shall:
a) be a spray-type, rubber tired vehicle suitable for applying traffic paint;
b) have sufficient paint capacity for each color with adequate air pressure to perform the Work
satisfactorily without excessive stopping;
c) be capable of producing a uniform film thickness without running or spattering;
d) be capable of being guided within the straightness tolerances set forth in these Specifications;
e) have suitable adjustments for painting the line width specified and when required, be equipped with
an automatic cycling device to produce intermittent (skip) lines in accordance with 314-4.2.1;
f) be equipped to produce a variable skip pattern, including simultaneous painting of a broken line on
one side and a solid line on the other side of a multiple stripe;
g) be capable of accurately superimposing succeeding coats of traffic paint upon the first coat and
upon existing stripes at a minimum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h);
h) be capable of 2-gun, or 3-gun (1 black and 2 yellow spray guns operating simultaneously or
individually) applications;
i) have a wheel base of sufficient length to produce a straight line to meet the straightness tolerance
specified in 314-4.2.4; and
j) be capable of producing curved lines without abrupt breaks.
Striping machines shall be equipped with the following:
k) a pointer or sighting device not less than 5 feet (1.5 m) long extending from the front of the
machine;
l) a pointer or sighting device extending from the side of the machine to gauge the distance from the
centerline for painting shoulder stripes;
m) shields or an adjustable air curtain for line control;
n) pressure regulators and gages (if pneumatically operated) that are in within full view of the
operator;
o) a paint strainer in the paint supply line;
p) a paint storage tank with a mechanical agitator that operates continuously during painting
operations;
q) a glass bead dispenser located behind the paint applicator nozzle which is controlled simultaneously
with the paint applicator nozzle; and
r) calibrated rods for measuring the volumes of paint and glass beads in the paint and glass bead
tanks.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
490 Greenbook 2021

Where the configuration or location of a traffic stripe is such that the use of striping machines is
unsuitable, traffic paint and glass beads may be applied by other methods and equipment approved by
the Engineer. The Engineer will determine if the striping machine is unsuitable for a particular use.
Stencils and hand spray equipment shall be used to paint curb and pavement markings. Stencils shall
conform to the dimensions shown on the Standard Plans.
314-4.3.5 Application. Each coat of paint for any traffic stripe, including glass beads, shall be
applied in one pass of the striping machine, regardless of the number, widths and patterns of individual
stripes involved.
On 2-lane streets, when the first coat of the centerline stripe is applied in the same direction as the
stationing increases, the right-hand spray gun of the 3 spray guns used to apply a double yellow stripe
shall be used to apply a single yellow stripe. When the first coat of the centerline stripe is applied in the
direction as the stationing decreases, the left-hand gun of the 3 spray gun used to apply double yellow
stripe shall be used to apply a single yellow stripe. The second coat of centerline striping shall be
applied in the opposite direction that the first coat was applied.
A 1-coat, 3-inch (75 mm) wide black stripe shall be painted between the 2, 4-inch (100 mm) wide
yellow stripes of a double traffic stripe. If the 2, 4-inch (100 mm) wide yellow stripes are to be applied
in 2 coats, the black stripe shall be applied concurrently with the second yellow stripe.
On existing pavement surfaces, traffic striping and pavement markings shall be applied in 1 coat.
Paint to be applied in 1 coat shall be applied at an initial rate of 1 gallon per 107 square feet (1 L/2.6 m2)
unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. The final rate shall be approved by the Engineer.
On new pavement surfaces, traffic striping (except the black stripe between the yellow stripes of a
double traffic stripe) and pavement markings shall be applied in 2 coats unless otherwise shown on the
Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. If the paint is applied in 2 coats, the first coat shall be
thoroughly dry before the second coat is applied.
Paint to be applied in 2 coats shall be applied at the initial rates shown in Table 314-4.3.5 unless
otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.

TABLE 314-4.3.5
Square Foot Coverage Per Gallon
Paint Type First Coat Second Coat
Waterborne Paint 215 215
Acetone-Based Paint 360 150

The final application rates shall be approved by the Engineer. The volume of paint applied shall be
measured by inserting a calibrated rod into the paint tank. At the option of the Engineer, if the striping
machine is equipped with paint gauges, the volume of paint may be determined by using the gauges.
Glass beads shall be mechanically applied to the surface of each coat of paint, except black paint,
prior to the paint setting. Glass beads shall be embedded to a depth of one-half of their diameter. Glass
beads shall be applied at a rate of 5 pounds per gallon (2 kg/L) of paint unless otherwise specified in the
Special Provisions or directed by the Engineer. The amount of glass beads applied shall be measured by
inserting a calibrated rod into the glass bead tank of the striping machine.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 491

314-4.3.6 Measurement. Painted traffic stripes will be measured by the linear foot along the line of
the traffic stripes, without deductions for gaps in broken traffic stripes. A double traffic stripe,
consisting of 2, 4-inch (100 mm) wide yellow stripes separated by a 3-inch (75 mm) wide black stripe,
will be measured as 1 traffic stripe.
Painted curb markings will be measured by the linear foot (m).
Painted pavement markings will be measured by the square foot (m2) for the actual area painted or by
lump sum.
314-4.3.7 Payment. Payment for painted traffic stripes and painted curb markings will be
made at the Contract Unit Price per linear foot (m) for the number of coats of paint required, as
specified in the Proposal, regardless of the number, widths, and pattern of individual stripes
composing each traffic stripe.
Payment for painted pavement markings will be made at the Contract Unit Price per square foot (m2)
or lump sum Bid price for the number of coats of paint required, as specified in the Proposal.
No separate payment will be made for establishing alignment for stripes and layout work.
314-4.4 Thermoplastic Traffic Striping and Pavement Markings.
314-4.4.1 General. The work shall consist of applying thermoplastic traffic striping and pavement
markings at the locations shown on the Plans and Standard Plans. Glass beads shall conform to 214-3.
Thermoplastic material shall conform to 214-5.
Thermoplastic traffic striping and pavement markings shall only be applied to dry pavement surfaces
with a surface temperature above 50º F (10º C) unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. The
wind shall be calm enough that no blowing dirt is deposited on the pavement surface.
314-4.4.2 Surface Preparation. Before applying thermoplastic material, the existing pavement
surface shall be mechanically wire brushed to remove all dirt and contaminants. New Portland cement
concrete pavement shall be mechanically wire brushed or abrasive blast-cleaned to remove all laitance
and curing compound.
314-4.4.3 Application Equipment. Application equipment shall be approved by the Engineer prior
to use. Pre-heaters with mixers having a 360-degree rotation shall be used to preheat thermoplastic
material before it is applied.
Application equipment shall be capable of:
a) utilizing either the spray or extrusion methods;
b) applications that dry to “no pick up” in accordance with ASTM D711; and
c) producing smooth, continuous lines having sharp dimensions.
Thermoplastic pavement markings shall be applied with equipment and stencils specifically designed
and constructed for that purpose.
314-4.4.4 Application. A primer, of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the
thermoplastic material, shall be applied to asphalt concrete surfaces over 6 months old and to all
Portland cement concrete surfaces. The primer shall be applied immediately in advance of, but
concurrent with, the application of thermoplastic material. The primer shall be applied at the rate
recommended by the manufacturer and shall not be thinned.
Thermoplastic material shall be applied at a temperature between 400ºF and 425ºF (200º C and 218º
C), unless a different temperature is recommended by the manufacturer. Thermoplastic material shall be
applied in a single layer. The pavement surface to which the thermoplastic material is applied shall be
completely coated by the material and the voids in the pavement surface shall be filled.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
492 Greenbook 2021

Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, thermoplastic material for traffic striping shall
be applied at a minimum thickness of 60 mils (1,500 µm). Thermoplastic material for pavement
markings shall be applied at a thickness of 100 to 150 mils (2,500 µm to 3,800 µm).
Glass beads conforming to 214-3 shall be mechanically applied to the surface of the molten
thermoplastic material at a rate of not less than 8 pounds per 100 square feet (0.39 kg/m2). The amount
of glass beads applied shall be measured by inserting a calibrated rod into the glass bead tank.
314-4.4.5 Measurement. Thermoplastic traffic striping will be measured by the linear foot (m)
along the line of the traffic stripes, without deductions for gaps in broken traffic stripes. A double traffic
stripe, consisting of 2, 4-inch (100 mm) wide, yellow stripes, will be measured as 2 traffic stripes.
Thermoplastic pavement markings will be measured by the square foot (m2) for the actual area
covered or by the lump sum.
314-4.4.6 Payment. Payment for thermoplastic traffic striping will be made at the Contract Unit
Price per linear foot (m) for each width and pattern, as specified in the Proposal.
Payment for thermoplastic pavement markings will be made at the Contract Unit Price per square
foot (m2).
No separate payment will be made for establishing alignment for stripes and layout work.
314-4.5 Tolerances and Appearance. Traffic striping shall not vary more than 1/2 inch in 50 feet
(80 mm/100 m) from the specified alignment.
Straight stripes deviating more than 1/2 inch in 50 feet (80 mm/100 m) shall be obliterated by
sandblasting and the markings corrected. When existing traffic striping and pavement markings are to
be repainted, they shall be repainted to completely cover the old markings within 1/4 inch (6 mm).
Stripe repainting shall be retraced within a longitudinal tolerance of 6 inches (150 mm) at the end of
each stripe. Abrupt breaks in striping alignment will not be allowed. The striping shall be a continuous
operation except where crossovers are required to complete painted medians.
Drips, overspray, improper markings, paint and thermoplastic material tracked by traffic shall be
immediately removed, at the Contractor’s expense, from the pavement surface by methods approved by
the Engineer.
Completed traffic stripes shall have clean and well-defined edges without running or deformation, be
uniform, be straight on tangent alignments and be a true arc on curved alignments. The widths of
completed traffic stripes shall not deviate more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) on tangent nor more than 1/2 inch
(12.5 mm) on curves from the width shown on the Standard Plans. Broken traffic stripes shall also
conform to the following:
a) The lengths of the gaps and individual stripes that form broken traffic stripes shall not deviate
more than 2 inches (50 mm) from the lengths shown on the Standard Plans.
b) The lengths of the gaps and individual stripes shall be of such uniformity throughout the entire
length of the broken traffic stripes that a striping machine will be able to repeat the pattern and
superimpose additional stripes upon the traffic stripe being applied.
Completed curb and pavement markings shall have clean and well-defined edges without running or
deformation and conform to the dimensions shown on the Standard Plans, except that minor variations
may be accepted by the Engineer.
314-4.6 Protection from Damage. Newly placed traffic stripes and curb and pavement markings
shall be protected from damage by public traffic or other causes until the paint is thoroughly dry or the
thermoplastic material has sufficiently hardened. All adjacent surfaces shall be protected from
disfiguration by spatter, splashes, spillage, and dripping of paint or other material.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 493

314-5 PAVEMENT MARKERS.

314-5.1 General. The work shall consist of applying pavement markers conforming to 214-7 to the
existing pavement surface at the locations shown on the Plans.
314-5.2 Adhesives.
314-5.2.1 General. Pavement markers shall be cemented to the pavement with rapid-set epoxy
adhesive conforming to 214-7.2.2 or hot-melt bituminous adhesive conforming to 214-7.3 unless
otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
In areas of new construction where the pavement markers are protected from traffic, including the
Contractor’s vehicles, standard-set epoxy adhesive conforming to 215-5.2.5 may be used. Pavement
markers applied with standard-set epoxy adhesive shall be protected from traffic for at least 3 hours after
placement when the pavement surface temperature is 55ºF (13º C) or above, for at least 24 hours when
the pavement surface temperature is between 40ºF and 55ºF (4ºC and 13º C), and for at least 48 hours
when the pavement surface temperature is 40ºF (4ºC) or below. The Engineer will determine when the
adhesive has set sufficiently to bear traffic.
Regardless of the type of adhesive used, pavement markers shall not be placed when the pavement is
not surface dry.
314-5.2.2 Epoxy Adhesives.
314-[Link] General. Pavement markers shall not be placed using epoxy adhesives when either the
pavement or the atmospheric temperature is 32ºF (0ºC) or less. Epoxy adhesives shall not be used to
apply non-reflective plastic pavement markers.
314- [Link] Mixing.
a) General. Automatic mixing equipment shall use positive displacement pumps capable of
metering the 2 components in the specified ratio to within ± 5 percent by volume of either
component. At the beginning of each working day when directed by the Engineer, the ratio of
the 2 components shall be checked by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer. This check
shall be made by disconnecting the mixing heads, or using suitable bypass valves, and filling 2
suitable containers with the unmixed components. The mixing equipment shall mix the 2
components until there is no trace of black or white streaks in the mixed epoxy adhesive. Voids
in a cured, undisturbed sample of the mixed epoxy adhesive obtained from the extrusion nozzle
shall not exceed 4 percent.
b) Rapid-Set Epoxy Adhesives. Rapid-set type epoxy adhesives shall not be mixed by hand.
Rapid-set epoxy adhesives shall be mixed by a 2-component-type automatic mixing and
extrusion apparatus. When machine mixing standard-set epoxy adhesive or rapid-set epoxy
adhesive, pavement markers shall be placed within 60 seconds after the epoxy adhesive has been
mixed and extruded and no further movement of the marker will be allowed. In addition, the
time between when the components are pumped into the mixing head and when the mixed epoxy
adhesive is in place on the pavement, and not subject to further movement, shall not exceed 90
seconds. Mixed epoxy adhesives shall not remain in the mixing head for more than 45 seconds.
Epoxy adhesive remaining in the mixing head longer than this period shall be disposed of.
c) Standard-Set Epoxy Adhesives. When hand mixing standard-set epoxy adhesives, not more
than 1 quart shall be mixed at a time, and the pavement markers shall be aligned and pressed into
place within 5 minutes after beginning mixing operations. A mixed batch which becomes so
viscous that the adhesive cannot be readily extruded from under the marker upon application of
slight pressure shall not be used.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
494 Greenbook 2021

314-5.2.3 Hot-Melt Bituminous Adhesives. Pavement markers shall not be placed using hot-melt
bituminous adhesives when the pavement surface or atmospheric temperature is 50ºF (10ºC) or less.
Hot-melt bituminous adhesives shall be heated indirectly in an applicator with continuous agitation
or recirculation. Hot-melt bituminous adhesives shall not be heated above the maximum safe heating
temperature recommended by the manufacturer and shall not be applied at temperatures greater than
425ºF (210ºC) nor less than 375ºF (190ºC).
314-5.3 Surface Preparation. The existing pavement surface shall be free from dirt, curing
compound, grease, oil, moisture, loose or unsound layers, paint and any other material that would
adversely affect the bond of the adhesive. Cleaning shall be done by blast cleaning on all surfaces
regardless of age or type, except that blast cleaning of clean, new asphalt concrete and clean, new seal
coat surfaces will not be required when hot-melt bituminous adhesives are used.
314-5.4 Placement. Reflective markers shall be placed in such a manner that the reflective face of
the marker is perpendicular to a line parallel to the roadway centerline. Pavement markers shall not be
placed over longitudinal or transverse joints of the pavement surface. Pavement markers shall not be
placed on new asphalt concrete pavement or seal coats until they have been open to public traffic for a
period of not less than 7 Days when hot-melt bituminous adhesive is used, or not less than 14 Days when
epoxy adhesive is used.
Adhesives shall be placed uniformly on the pavement surface or on the bottom of the marker in a
quantity sufficient to result in complete coverage of the area of contact with the pavement marker with
no voids present and with a slight excess after the marker has been pressed in place. Pavement markers
shall be placed in position and pressure applied until firm contact is made with the pavement. When
hot-melt bituminous adhesive is used, the markers shall be placed immediately after application of the
adhesive. Excess adhesive around the edge of the marker, excess adhesive on the pavement, and
adhesive on the exposed surfaces of the markers shall be immediately removed. Markers shall be
protected against impact until the adhesive has hardened to the degree designated by the Engineer.
314-5.5 Pavement Recesses. Pavement recesses shall be located along the line or lines of new or
existing stripes.
Pavement recesses shall be constructed in new or existing pavement. The method of recess
construction shall be selected by the Contractor. Equipment for recess construction shall be power-
operated, mechanical and capable of removing the pavement to the dimensions shown on the Plans or
Standard Plans without damaging the underlying pavement.
Residue shall be removed from the roadbed by use of vacuum equipment. Residue from the removal
operations shall neither flow across the pavement nor into gutters or other drainage facilities. Residue
shall be removed from the pavement surface before the residue is blown by action of traffic or wind.
Pavement recesses shall not be constructed on existing structures.
314-5.6 Measurement. Retroreflective and non-reflective pavement markers will be measured by
the number of each type of pavement marker placed on the pavement surface. Retroreflective pavement
markers placed in a pavement recess will be measured by the number of each type of pavement marker.
314-5.7 Payment. Payment for retroreflective and non-reflective pavement markers placed on the
pavement surface will be made at the Contract Unit Price for each type of pavement marker placed on
the pavement surface.
Payment for retroreflective pavement markers placed in pavement recesses will be made at the
Contract Unit Price for each pavement marker placed in a pavement recess.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 495

PART 4
EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 400 – PROTECTION AND RESTORATION

400-1 GENERAL. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of public and private
property adjacent to the Work and shall exercise due caution to avoid damage to such property.
The Contractor shall repair or replace all existing improvements within the right-of-way which are
not designated for removal (e.g., curbs, sidewalks, driveways, fences, walls, signs, utility installations,
pavement, structures, etc.) which are damaged or removed as a result of its operations. When a portion
of a sprinkler system within the right-of-way must be removed, the remaining lines shall be capped.
Repairs and replacements shall be at least equal to existing improvements and shall match them in finish
and dimension.
Maintenance of street and traffic signal systems that are damaged, temporarily removed or relocated
shall conform to 701-2.
Trees, lawns, and shrubbery that are not to be removed shall be protected from damage or injury. If
damaged or removed due to Contractor’s operations, they shall be restored or replaced in as nearly the
original condition and location as is reasonably possible. Lawns shall be reseeded and covered with
suitable mulch.
The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to occupants or owners of adjacent property to permit
them to salvage or relocate plants, trees, fences, sprinklers, and other improvements, within the right-of-
way which are designated for removal and would be destroyed because of the Work.
400-2 PERMANENT SURVEY MARKERS. Pursuant to Division 3, Chapter 15 of the
Business and Professions Code, the Contractor shall not disturb survey monuments that “control the
location of subdivisions, tracts, boundaries, roads, streets, or highways, or provide horizontal or
vertical survey control” until they have been tied out by a Registered Land Surveyor or Registered
Civil Engineer authorized to practice land surveying within the State of California.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a minimum of 7 Days prior to the start of the Work a list
of controlling survey monuments which may be disturbed. The Agency will:
a) set survey points outside the affected work area that reference and locate each controlling survey
monument that may be disturbed,
b) file a Corner Record or Record of Survey with the County Surveyor after setting the survey
points to be used for re-establishment of the disturbed controlling survey monuments, and
c) file a Corner Record or Record of Survey with the County Surveyor after re-establishment of the
disturbed controlling survey monuments.
400-3 PAYMENT. No separate or additional payment will be made for 1) protection of existing
improvements, and 2) restoration of existing improvements. Permanent survey markers will be restored
by the Agency at its own expense.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
496 Greenbook 2021

SECTION 401 – REMOVAL

401-1 GENERAL. Material removed shall be disposed of outside of the Work area. The Work area
shall be left with a neat and finished appearance.
401-2 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT Asphalt concrete pavement shall be removed to
clean, straight lines. Removal performed by cold milling shall conform to 404.
Edges shall be saw cut full-depth if so specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
Trench edges shall be saw cut full-depth prior to trench resurfacing.
401-3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY IMPROVEMENTS.
401-3.1 Concrete Pavement. Concrete pavement, which has not been overlaid with asphalt
concrete, shall be removed to neatly sawed edges. Saw cuts shall be made to a minimum depth of 1-1/2
inches (37.5 mm). If a saw cut falls within 3 feet (1 m) of a construction joint, cold joint, expansion
joint, or edge, the concrete shall be removed to the joint or edge. The edges of existing concrete
pavement adjacent to trenches, where damaged subsequent to saw cutting of the pavement, shall again
be saw cut to neat, straight lines for the purpose of removing the damaged pavement areas. Such saw
cuts shall be either parallel to the original saw cuts or shall be cut on an angle that departs from the
original saw cut not more than 1 inch (25 mm) in each 6 inches (150 mm).
401-3.2 Concrete Curb, Walk, Gutters, Cross Gutters, Curb Ramps, Driveway, and Alley
Intersections. Concrete shall be removed to neatly sawed edges with saw cuts made through the entire
thickness. Concrete sidewalk or driveway to be removed shall be neatly sawed in straight lines either
parallel to the curb or at right angles to the alignment of the sidewalk. No section to be replaced shall be
smaller than 30 inches (750 mm) in either length or width. If the saw cut in sidewalk or driveway would
fall within 30 inches (750 mm) of a construction joint, expansion joint, or edge, the concrete shall be
removed to the joint or edge, except that where the saw cut would fall within 12 inches (300 mm) of a
score mark, the saw cut shall be made in and along the score mark. Curb and gutter shall be sawed on a
neat line at right angles to the curb face.
401-3.3 Reinforced Concrete and Masonry Structures. Structures constructed of reinforced
concrete or masonry shall be removed as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
Unless otherwise specified, the entire structure or improvement shall be removed.
401-4 COMPOSITE PAVEMENTS. Composite pavements consist of underlying concrete
pavement which has been overlaid with asphalt concrete pavement. Removal shall be as specified in the
Special Provisions or shown on the Plans. Removal performed by cold milling shall conform to 404.
401-5 OTHER IMPROVEMENTS. Other improvements shall be removed as specified in the
Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
401-6 MEASUREMENT. Removal of existing improvements will be measured as specified in the
Special Provisions.
401-7 PAYMENT. Payment for removal of existing improvements will be made as specified in the
Special Provisions.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 497

SECTION 402 - UTILITIES

402-1 LOCATION.
402-1.1 General. Known utilities and their respective owners are shown on the Plans or specified in
the Special Provisions. Where underground utilities are shown on the Plans, the Contractor shall assume
every property parcel will be served by a service connection for each type of utility.
Pursuant to Section 4216 of the Government Code, the Contractor shall contact the appropriate
regional notification center and obtain an inquiry identification number at least 2 Working Days, but not
more than 14 Days prior to commencing any excavation required for the Work. Caltrans and certain
other agencies are not required to become a member of a regional notification center. The Contractor
shall contact non-member agencies directly and request they locate and mark their subsurface
installations. Pursuant to Section 4216.2, when any proposed excavation is within 10 feet of a “high
priority subsurface installation” the Contractor shall coordinate with the operator.
Before starting the Work, the Contractor shall physically locate subsurface installations within 24
inches of any side of excavations required for the Work. The Contractor shall determine the horizontal
and vertical location, alignment, depth, material type, and size of each subsurface installation.
Excavation shall be performed pursuant to Section 4216.4. The Contractor shall provide the subsurface
installation location data to the Engineer within the time period specified in the Special Provisions.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing immediately after identifying potential physical
conflicts between existing subsurface installations and the Work. The written notification shall include;
a) date of locating,
b) method of locating,
c) type, size, and material of subsurface installation,
d) horizontal location,
e) elevation (or depth from existing pavement or ground surface) of the top and bottom of the
subsurface installation, and
f) presumed owner.
The Contractor shall complete excavation, backfill, and placement of temporary resurfacing on the
same Day. Backfill shall conform to 306-12. Temporary resurfacing shall conform to 306-13.1.
Permanent resurfacing shall be placed within 10 Working Days unless otherwise specified in the Special
Provisions or directed by the Engineer. Permanent resurfacing shall conform to 306-13.2.
402-1.2 Payment. Payment for utility location by the Contractor shall be as specified in the
Special Provisions.
402-2 PROTECTION. The Contractor shall not interrupt the service function or disturb the support
of any utility without authority from the utility owner or direction from the Engineer. Valves, switches,
vaults, and meters shall be maintained readily accessible for emergency shutoff.
Where protection is required to ensure support of utilities located as shown on the Plans or in
accordance with 402-1, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified, furnish and place the necessary
protection at its expense.
Upon learning of the existence and location of any utility omitted from or shown incorrectly on the
Plans, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing. When authorized by the
Engineer, support or protection of the utility will be paid for as provided in 7-3 or 7-4.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
498 Greenbook 2021

The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and the utility owner if any utility is disturbed
or damaged. The Contractor shall bear the costs of repair or replacement of any utility damaged if
located in accordance with 402-1.
When placing concrete around or contiguous to any non-metallic utility installation, the Contractor
shall at its expense:
a) Furnish and install a 2-inch (50 mm) cushion of expansion joint material or other similar resilient
material; or
b) Provide a sleeve or other opening which will result in a 2-inch (50 mm) minimum-clear annular
space between the concrete and the utility; or
c) Provide other acceptable means to prevent embedment in or bonding to the concrete.
Where concrete is used for backfill or for structures which would result in embedment, or partial
embedment, of a metallic utility installation; or where the coating, bedding or other cathodic protection
system is exposed or damaged by the Contractor’s operations, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer
and arrange to secure the advice of the affected utility owner regarding the procedures required to
maintain or restore the integrity of the system.
402-3 REMOVAL. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall remove all interfering portions
of utilities shown on the Plans as “abandoned” or “to be abandoned in place”. Before starting removal
operations, the Contractor shall ascertain from the Agency whether the abandonment is complete, and
the costs involved in the removal and disposal shall be included in the Bid for the items of work
necessitating such removals.
402-4 RELOCATION. When feasible, the owners responsible for utilities within the area affected
by the Work will complete their necessary installations, relocations, repairs, or replacements before
commencement of the Work by the Contractor. When the Plans or Special Provisions indicate that a
utility installation is to be relocated, altered, or constructed by others, the Agency will conduct all
negotiations with the owners and utility work will be done at no cost to the Contractor, except as
otherwise specified in 403-1. Utilities which are relocated in order to avoid interference shall be
protected in their position and the cost of such protection shall be included in the Bid for the items of
work necessitating such relocation.
After award of the Contract, portions of utilities which are found to interfere with the Work will be
relocated, altered or reconstructed by the utility owners, or the Engineer may order changes in the Work
to avoid interference. Such changes will be paid for in accordance with 7-3 or 7-4.
When the Plans or Special Provisions provide for the Contractor to alter, relocate, or reconstruct a
utility, all costs for such work shall be included in the Bid for the items of work necessitating such work.
Temporary or permanent relocation or alteration of utilities requested by the Contractor for its
convenience shall be its responsibility and it shall make all arrangements and bear all costs.
The utility owner will relocate service connections as necessary within the limits of the Work or
within temporary construction or slope easements. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
arrange for the relocation of service connections as necessary between the meter and property line, or
between a meter and the limits of temporary construction or slope easements. Payment for the relocation
of such service connections shall be in accordance with 7-3 or 7-4. Payment will include the restoration
of all existing improvements which may be affected thereby. The Contractor may agree with the owner
of any utility to disconnect and reconnect interfering service connections. The Agency will not be
involved in any such agreement.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 499

402-5 DELAYS DUE TO UTILITY CONFLICTS. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of its
construction schedule insofar as it affects the protection, removal, or relocation of utilities. Said
notification shall be included as a part of the construction schedule in accordance with 6-1. The
Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any subsequent changes in the construction schedule
which will affect the time available for protection, removal, or relocation of utilities.
The Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment for delays attributable to utility
relocations or alterations if correctly located, noted, and completed in accordance with 402-1.
The Contractor may be given an extension of time for unforeseen delays attributable to unreasonably
protracted interference by utilities in performing work correctly shown on the Plans.
The Agency will assume responsibility for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of existing
main or trunk line utility facilities within the area affected by the Work if such utilities are not identified
in the Contract Documents. The Contractor will not be assessed liquidated damages for any delay
caused by failure of the Agency to provide for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of such
existing facilities.
If the Contractor sustains loss due to delays attributable to interferences, relocations, or alterations
not covered by 402-1, which could not have been avoided by the judicious handling of forces,
equipment, or plant, there shall be paid to the Contractor such amount as the Engineer may find to be fair
and reasonable compensation for such part of the Contractor’s actual loss as was unavoidable and the
Contractor may be granted an extension of time.
402-6 COOPERATION. When necessary, the Contractor shall so conduct its operations as to
permit access to the Work site and provide time for utility work to be accomplished during the progress
of the Work.

SECTION 403 - MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT AND RECONSTRUCTION

403-1 GENERAL. Utility manhole and vault frames and covers within an area to be paved or
graded will be set by the owners thereof to finished grade. Sewer and storm drain manhole frames
within the area to be paved or graded shall be set to finish grade by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
remove all debris from the interior of manholes and shall clean all foreign material from the top of the
frames and covers.
403-2 MANHOLES IN CONCRETE PAVEMENT. Manholes in concrete pavement shall be set
to finish grade prior to paving.
403-3 MANHOLES IN ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT. Sewer and storm drain
structures extending 2 inches (50 mm) or more above the new subgrade shall be removed by the
Contractor to the new subgrade before paving. Other structures shall be lowered by their owners.
Structures projecting less than 2 inches (50 mm) above the subgrade may be paved over and later
adjusted to grade. The top of reset manholes and other structures shall conform to the smoothness
requirement specified in 302-5.6.2.
All structures from which manhole frames and covers have been removed to facilitate paving shall
be temporarily covered with a steel plate by the Contractor. When this procedure is impractical, such as
for large vaults, or special structures, remodeling or reconstruction shall be completed to finish
permanent surface prior to paving operations.
The Contractor shall notify utility owners at least 7 Days in advance of the need to commence work
required prior to paving operations and again for work required after paving operations. If the Engineer

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
500 Greenbook 2021

determines the utility owner will not complete adjustment of its facilities within 10 Working Days of the
completion of the surface course of pavement, the facilities will be adjusted by their owner under a
separate procedure established by the Agency and the Contractor will be absolved of any further
responsibility therewith.
After the pavement has been completed, the necessary portions of the subgrade, base, and pavement
shall be neatly removed, the structure built up, and the manhole frame set to within 1-1/2 inches (37.5
mm) of the surface with concrete pavement conforming to 201-1 and 302-6. The Contractor shall fill the
remaining 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm) with the asphalt concrete surface course mixture. This material shall
be placed and compacted to conform to the appearance of the surrounding pavement.
403-4 MEASUREMENT. Manhole adjustment and reconstruction will be measured by each.
403-5 PAYMENT. Payment for adjusting manhole frames and covers to grade, where the difference
between the lowest point of manhole removal and final elevation of the top of the frame is less than 15
inches (375 mm) or where the adjustment is accomplished by adjustment rings only, will be made at the
Contract Unit Price for adjusting each manhole frame.
Payment for setting manhole frames and covers to grade, where the difference between the lowest
point of manhole removal and the final elevation of the top of the frame is 15 inches (375 mm) or more,
will be made at the Contract Unit Price for reconstructing each manhole.

SECTION 404 – COLD MILLING

404-1 GENERAL. The type of pavement and depth to be cold milled shall be as shown on the Plans or
specified in the Special Provisions. The presence of pavement fabric or steel reinforcement within the depth to
be cold milled shall be as shown on the Plans. The surface after cold milling shall be uniformly grooved or
ridged. The outside lines of the milled pavement shall be neat and uniform. The Contractor shall remove
existing asphalt concrete overlay or slurry seal material within one foot of the edge of concrete gutters adjacent to
any area to be cold milled. The removal procedure and equipment to be used shall be approved by the Engineer.
The milled pavement shall be true to grade and cross section. When the straightedge specified in
302-5.6.2 is laid on the finished surface parallel to the centerline of the roadway, the surface shall not
vary from the edge of the straightedge more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) at any point, except at intersections
or at changes of grade. Any areas that are not within tolerance shall be brought to grade within one
Working Day following initial cold milling.
Cold milling operations shall be performed without damage to the remaining pavement. Whenever
cold milling is adjacent to existing concrete curbs, gutters or pavement, the Contractor shall protect these
improvements from damage. Concrete curbs, gutters or pavement damaged during cold milling
operations shall be repaired as directed by the Engineer. Replaced sections of concrete curb, gutter or
pavement shall be a minimum of 5 feet (1.5 m) in length or to the next joint.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 501

404-2 MILLING MACHINES. Milling machines shall be specifically designed and constructed
for cold milling of asphalt concrete, concrete, or composite pavement.
404-2.1 General. Milling machines shall conform to the following:
a) The cutting drum shall be a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) wide, except for those mounted
on a skid-steer loader, and shall be equipped with carbide-tipped cutting teeth placed in a
variable pattern to produce the desired finish.
b) Be self-propelled and capable of removing the pavement to the depth shown on the Plans.
c) Be equipped with a conveyor system that will immediately convey the milled material into a
transport vehicle for disposal as specified in the Special Provisions.
d) Be capable of spraying water at the cutting drum to minimize dust.
e) Be designed so that the operator can observe the milling operation, at all times, without leaving
the controls.
f) Be adjustable for slope and depth.
g) Be capable of milling, in one pass, to the maximum depth recommended by the manufacturer
without producing fumes or smoke.
404-2.2 Milling to Specified Elevations. Milling machines used for milling to specified elevation
shall conform to 404-2.1 and the following:
a) Be equipped with automatic grade controls that reference the existing pavement elevations or
independent grade references.
404-2.3 Profile Milling. Milling machines used for profile milling shall conform to 404-2.1 and the
following:
a) Be equipped with a minimum 20-foot (6 m) paving ski with spring loaded feet attached to the
bottom at not more than 18-inch (0.5 m) increments. The upper portion of the ski shall be one-
piece and manufactured such that the ski does not flex or bend by more than 3/16 inch (5 mm)
when supported off of the surface of the pavement by an attachment located at the ski’s
longitudinal center of gravity. The grade control system of the milling machine shall be
referenced to the center of the ski.
404-2.4 Full-Depth Milling. Milling machines used for full-depth milling shall conform to 404-2.1
and the following:
a) Be capable of milling to a minimum depth of 10 inches (250 mm) in a single pass.
The Contractor shall provide smaller machines if required to cold mill areas that are inaccessible to
larger machines.
404-3 COLD MILLING TO SPECIFIED ELEVATIONS. Milling to specified elevations is the
controlled removal of a portion of the existing pavement and underlying base or subgrade material. The
finished elevations and depth of removal shall be as shown on the Plans.
Independent grade references shall be those required to achieve the specified elevations shown
on the Plans.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
502 Greenbook 2021

404-4 PROFILE MILLING. Profile milling is the controlled removal of a portion of the existing
pavement to a nominal depth using longitudinal grade controls to remove surface irregularities in the
pavement and improve ride ability. The grade shall be as shown on the Plans.
During profile milling operations, the center of the ski shall be on a line coincident with the
transverse centerline of the milling machine’s cutting drum. A ski shall be attached to each side of the
milling machine cutting drum during the first pass, and on one side of the milling machine on
subsequent, adjacent passes with a joint matching grade control on the other side.
The resultant milled surface shall not deviate from the grade shown on the Plans, using the
straightedge specified in 302-5.6.2, by more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) at any point.
404-5 FULL-DEPTH MILLING. Full depth milling is the removal of the full depth of the existing
pavement as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. When full-depth milling is
specified, the Contractor shall continuously control the depth of milling to stay no more than 1/2 inch
(12.5 mm) below the full depth of the existing pavement. In areas of resurfaced trenches, individual
excavations or bore holes, the required depth of milling shall be the same as that of the adjacent
pavement. The Contractor shall remove existing asphalt concrete overlay from gutters adjacent to any
area specified to be cold milled, as directed by the Engineer.
404-6 COLD MILLING OF COMPOSITE PAVEMENT. Composite pavement consists of
underlying concrete pavement which has been overlaid with asphalt concrete pavement. The thickness
of each existing pavement material shall be as shown on the Plans. The area and depth to be cold milled
shall be as shown on the Plans.
404-7 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE. Work site maintenance shall conform to 3-12. A
motorized street sweeper shall follow within 50 feet (15 m) of the cold milling machine unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
404-8 DISPOSAL OF MILLINGS. Unless otherwise specified, millings shall be considered the
property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of off the Work site by the Contractor.
404-9 TRAFFIC SIGNAL LOOP DETECTORS. The Contractor shall not mill within 12 inches
(300 mm) of any existing loop detectors that are shown to be protected in place on the Plans or in the
Special Provisions. Traffic signal loop detectors that were shown to be protected in place but are
damaged or removed shall be replaced in conformance with 400-1, 700, and 701.
404-10 PAVEMENT TRANSITIONS. Structures and vertical joints within the cold-milled areas
that are transverse to through traffic shall be ramped in conformance with 302-5.7 and 306-1.5.1
temporary asphalt concrete as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. Ramps shall be
constructed the same day as the existing pavement is cold milled and removed prior to placement of the
permanent paving pavement.
404-11 MEASUREMENT. The quantity of each type of pavement to be cold milled (asphalt concrete,
concrete, or composite) will be measured separately. Cold milling will be measured by the linear foot (meter)
along the edge of the transverse joint lines, adjacent curb, gutter, or cross gutter, or by the square foot (square
meter) for each thickness or range of thicknesses to be removed as shown in the Bid.
404-12 PAYMENT. The Contract Unit Price for cold milling each type of pavement shall include
cold milling, removal of asphalt concrete and slurry seal material from adjacent concrete gutters,
construction and removal of pavement transitions, disposal of millings, and all other necessary work.
Payment for replacement of inductive loop detectors not shown on the Plans to be protected in place
will be made in accordance with 700-17.6.3.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 503

SECTION 405 - MICRO-MILLING

405-1 GENERAL. Micro-milling shall consist of the cold milling of existing asphalt concrete
pavement with a milling machine equipped with a cutting drum specifically designed and constructed for
micro-milling.
405-2 MILLING MACHINES. Milling machines shall conform to 404-2.1 and be:
a) Equipped with a micro-milling drum with tungsten-carbide-tipped cutting teeth spaced no greater
than 0.20 inch apart on center. The configuration of the teeth shall be such that the deviation in
elevation between any 2 teeth does not exceed 1/16 inch.
b) Capable of removing asphalt concrete pavement to a tolerance of + 1/8 inch.
c) Equipped with an automatic grade control system operating in “profile” mode. The system shall
be either:
i) a 30-foot-long paving machine ski with spring-loaded feet attached to the bottom on not
more than 1.5-foot increments, such that the feet rise and fall over small irregularities on
the pavement surface. The upper part of the ski shall be one piece and of such construction
that it will not flex or bend by more than 1/8 inch at either end when supported off the
grade by a fixture located at its center of gravity. The grade control system shall be
referenced off the center of the ski, with skis mounted on each side of the milling machine
such that the ski’s longitudinal center is even with the center of the milling machine’s
cutting drum; or,
ii) a sonic averaging system with automated controls. Each corner of the milling machine shall
be equipped with sonic grade averaging and slope sensors. The system shall feature plug-in
connections, internal cable routing, 2 dual control boxes for ground personnel each capable
of controlling each side of the milling machine, and a separate control box for the operator.
d) Equipped with a Tier III or greater diesel engine compliant with the regulations of the California
Air Resources Board.
405-3 MILLING OPERATIONS. Milling operations shall progress from the low side of each
roadway barrel or lane and progress towards the high side. Each successive pass of the milling machine
shall meet the line and grade of the previous pass. The speed of the milling machine shall be maintained
at a rate which results in a uniform pavement texture.
Micro-milling shall result in a grid-patterned textured pavement surface with longitudinal ridges
approximately the same distance apart as the cutting teeth. The ridges shall be consistent in depth, width, and
profile. The distance between the top of each ridge and the adjacent valleys shall not exceed 1/8 inch.
The resulting profile and cross slope of the milled pavement surface shall be such that a 12-foot long
straightedge laid perpendicular or parallel to the centerline will not allow a shim with a width of 1 inch
and a thickness of 3/16 inch to pass under the straightedge at any point except at breaks in profile grade
or cross slope.
During milling operations, the cutter teeth shall be regularly checked and replaced as necessary to
maintain the tolerances specified in 405-2.
Milled pavement surfaces which do not conform to the requirements above shall be corrected. The
Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval a correction plan prior to initiating
corrective action.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
504 Greenbook 2021

405-4 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE. Work site maintenance shall conform to 404-7.
405-5 DISPOSAL OF MILLINGS. Disposal of millings shall conform to 404-8.
405-6 MEASUREMENT. Micro-milling will be measured by the square foot for each thickness.
405-7 PAYMENT. Payment for micro-milling will be made at the Contract Unit Price per square
foot for each thickness of micro-milling shown on the Plans.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 505

PART 5
PIPELINE SYSTEM REHABILITATION
SECTION 500 – PIPELINE REHABILITATION

500-1 GENERAL. Pipeline rehabilitation shall consist of cleaning, preliminary inspection, sewage
bypass and pumping, service lateral identification, point repairs, lining, end seals, and service connection
re-establishment.
500-2 SUBMITTALS. The following shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8:
a) Chemical resistance test results in accordance with 211-2.
b) Liner repair materials, methods, and manufacturer’s recommendations.
c) Buoyancy calculations for lining systems to be installed without sewage bypass and pumping.
d) Pulling force limit calculations per 500-5.7.6.
If annular space grouting is required, the following shall also be submitted:
e) The proposed grouting mix.
f) The proposed grout densities and viscosity.
g) Initial set time of the grout.
h) The 24-hour and 28-Day minimum grout compressive strengths.
i) The grout working time before a 15 percent change in density or viscosity occurs.
j) The proposed grouting method and procedures.
k) The maximum injection pressures.
l) Proposed grout stage volumes (e.g., Stage 1, to springline; Stage 2, fully grouted).
m) Bulkhead designs and locations.
n) Buoyant force calculations during grouting.
o) Flow control.
p) Provisions for re-establishment of service connections.
q) Pressure gauge, recorder, and field equipment certifications (e.g., calibration by an approved
certified lab).
r) Vent location plans.
Data for e) through i) shall be derived from trial grout batches by an approved, independent
testing laboratory.
For each different type of grout or variation in procedure or installation, a complete package shall be
submitted. The submittal shall include each of the above items and the sewer locations or conditions to
which it applies. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer for any changes to be made in
the grout mix, grouting procedure, or installation prior to the commencement of grouting operations.
500-3 CLEANING AND PRELIMINARY INSPECTION.
500-3.1 General. Pipeline cleaning shall be performed prior to closed circuit television (CCTV)
inspection and rehabilitation. The Contractor shall protect the manholes to withstand forces generated
by equipment, water, and air pressure. The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of debris

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
506 Greenbook 2021

from the pipeline and restoration of the pipeline to a minimum of 95 percent of the original diameter
shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
500-3.2 Equipment.
500-3.2.1 Cleaning Equipment.
500-[Link] General. Root cutters and porcupines shall be attached to the winches if so specified in
the Special Provisions or directed by the Engineer.
500-[Link] Hydraulically Propelled Equipment. The equipment shall be a movable-dam type and
be constructed in such a way that a portion of the dam may be collapsed at any time during the cleaning
operation to prevent flooding of the sewer. The movable dam shall be equal in size to the pipeline being
cleaned and provide a flexible scraper around the outer periphery to ensure removal of grease and other
debris. If sewer cleaning balls or other equipment which cannot be collapsed are used, special
precautions to prevent flooding of the sewers and public or private property shall be taken.
500-[Link] High-Velocity Hydraulic (Hydro-Cleaning) Equipment. High-velocity hydraulic
cleaning equipment shall carry a water tank, auxiliary engines, pumps, and a hydraulically driven hose
reel. The equipment shall have a selection of 2 or more high velocity nozzles capable of producing a
scouring action from 15 to 45 degrees in all size lines designated to be cleaned. The cleaning units shall
have high-velocity nozzles for washing and scouring manhole walls and floors. The nozzles shall be
capable of producing flows from a fine spray to a solid stream.
500-[Link] Mechanically Powered Equipment. Bucket machines shall be used in pairs with
sufficient power to perform the work in an efficient manner. Machines shall be belt operated or have an
overload shutoff device. Machines with a direct drive that could cause damage to the pipe will not be
allowed. Bucket machines shall not be used on any host or rehabilitated pipeline that is lined with a
plastic pipe or material. A power rodding machine shall be either a sectional or continuous-rod type
capable of holding a minimum of 750 feet (230 m) of rod. The machine shall be fully enclosed and have
an automatic safety clutch or relief valve.
500-3.2.2 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System Equipment. CCTV system equipment shall
include television cameras, a television monitor, cables, power sources, and other equipment. The focal
distance shall be adjustable through a range from 6 inches (150 mm) to infinity. The remote-reading
footage counter shall be accurate to less than 1 percent error over the length of the particular section of
pipeline being inspected. This distance shall be measured from the centerline of the manhole to the
centerline of the next manhole. The camera and television monitor shall produce a minimum 350 lines
per inch (14 lines/mm) resolution. Telephones, radios, or other suitable means of communication shall
be set up to ensure that adequate communication exists between members of the crew.
The CCTV inspection camera utilized shall be specifically designed and constructed for sewer
inspection. The CCTV inspection camera shall be operative in 100 percent humidity conditions.
Lighting for the camera shall minimize reflective glare. Lighting and picture quality shall be suitable to
provide a clear, in-focus picture of the entire periphery of the pipeline for all conditions encountered
during the work.
The CCTV inspection camera shall be mounted on a skid, floatable raft system, or transporter based
on the conditions of the pipeline to be televised.
The CCTV inspection system to be utilized shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the work
being performed.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 507

500-3.3 Cleaning. When utilizing high-velocity hydraulic cleaning equipment independently or in

combination with other cleaning methods, a minimum of 2 passes with the hydraulic nozzle shall be
done unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
If cleaning cannot be completed from one manhole, the equipment shall be moved and set up on the
other manhole and cleaning shall be re-attempted. If successful cleaning still cannot be performed or the
equipment fails to traverse the entire pipeline section, it shall be assumed that a major blockage exists.
Efforts to clean the lines shall be temporarily suspended and the Contractor shall notify the Engineer.
Upon removal of the obstruction, the Contractor shall complete the cleaning operation.
The Contractor shall dispose of all debris removed from the pipeline in accordance with Federal,
State, and local laws and regulations.
500-3.4 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Inspection. Prior to rehabilitation, a post-cleaning
CCTV inspection shall be performed. Video inspections shall be recorded on a digital storage device.
All original digital recordings, log sheets, and reports shall be submitted to the Engineer and will
become the property of the Agency.
CCTV inspection shall be performed utilizing one of the following video camera systems:
a) remote-focus stationary lens cameras;
b) rotating-lens cameras; or
c) pan-and-tilt cameras.
CCTV inspection for re-instating service connections shall be performed utilizing system b) or c).
The Contractor shall televise the pipeline during optimum low-flow level conditions, as pre-
approved by the Engineer. The CCTV inspection camera shall be moved through the pipeline in a
downstream direction at a uniform rate, stopping when necessary to ensure proper documentation of
the condition, but in no case, shall it be moved through the pipeline at a speed greater than 30 feet
per minute (9 m/min.). A clear picture shall be provided looking into each service connection. If
the CCTV inspection camera will not pass through the entire pipeline section, the Contractor shall
reset the equipment at the downstream manhole and attempt to inspect the section of pipe from the
opposite direction. If the camera fails to pass through the entire section, it shall be assumed that an
obstruction exists. Efforts to televise that section of pipe shall be temporarily suspended and the
Contractor shall notify the Engineer. Upon removal of the obstruction, the Contractor shall
complete the CCTV inspection.
If an obstruction is encountered, the Contractor shall remove the obstruction by excavation, repair, or
other means approved by the Engineer, in order that CCTV inspection may continue.
Documentation shall consist of a color, digital recording, log sheets, and a written report detailing
the post-rehabilitation condition of the pipeline and lateral connections/openings. The report shall note
the time and date of CCTV inspection, street name, upstream and downstream manhole, direction of
view, direction of flow, surface material, pipeline length, pipe section length, pipe size, pipe material,
lateral connections, digital recording number, counter number, and a detailed logging of defects
encountered. If the quality of the digital recording is deemed to be unacceptable by the Engineer, the
pipeline shall be re-televised.
Additional requirements for performing CCTV inspection shall be as shown on the Plans or specified
in the Special Provisions.
Any rejected work shall be repaired, then inspected by CCTV.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
508 Greenbook 2021

500-3.5 Host Pipe Testing. Host pipe testing shall be performed by the Contractor. For segmented
liner systems 27 inches (675 mm) and larger, a standard test section of liner pipe or mandrel shall be
inserted prior to lining. For sewer applications in active flow conditions, the mandrel shall have a
segment length equal to that of the liner pipe. For applications in dry host pipes, the Contractor may
submit for approval a shorter length. The outside diameter of the mandrel shall be a minimum of one
percent greater than the outside diameter of the liner pipe but shall not exceed 1/2 inch (12.5 mm)
without prior approval of the Engineer. The equipment used by the Contractor to insert the test section
or mandrel shall conform to Table 500-3.5. A baffle plate shall be attached to the test section with
adequate height to remove any debris which could be present.

TABLE 500-3.5
1
Nominal ID of Liner Pipe, inches (mm) Minimum Equipment Insertion Force, Tons (kN)
27 (675) to and including 60 (1500) 25 (220)
Over 60 (1500) to and including 84 (2100) 32.5 (290)
Over 84 (2100) 50 (440)
1. The equipment at the insertion pit shall be capable of withdrawing the test section or mandrel, if necessary.

500-3.6 Measurement. Pipeline cleaning and inspection will be measured by the linear foot (m).
500-3.7 Payment. Pipeline cleaning and inspection will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price per
linear foot (m). If a separate Bid item is not included, payment shall be considered to be included in the
Bid price for the liner pipe and/or the pipeline point repair/replacement pipe.
No separate or additional payment will be made for removal of obstructions encountered during post-
installation CCTV inspection, nor for re-televising necessary due to the digital recording being
unacceptable to the Engineer.
500-4 PIPELINE POINT REPAIR AND/OR REPLACEMENT.
500-4.1 General. This subsection specifies the point repair and/or replacement of host pipelines.
The Contractor shall repair the pipeline where point repairs are shown on the Plans or specified in the
Special Provisions prior to any rehabilitation. If this work is not shown or specified, it will constitute
Extra Work.
The work shall include verifying the location of the point repair and/or replacement through CCTV
or person-entry inspection of the pipeline, locating all interfering utilities, excavation, dewatering, pipe
repairs or replacement, backfilling, surface restoration, temporary flow bypassing, sewer dewatering, and
traffic control.
500-4.2 Materials. The pipe and repair materials shall be the same as the host pipeline unless
otherwise specified, and shall conform to 207.
500-4.3 Sewer Bypassing and Dewatering. When required by the Contract Documents or the
process, the Contractor shall bypass the sewer flow around the work and dewater the work area, in
accordance with 3-12.5, 3-12.6.4, and 306-5.
500-4.4 Open Trench Conduit Construction. Open trench conduit construction shall conform to 306.
500-4.5 Inspection. The Contractor shall submit the post-cleaning digital video(s) to the Engineer
prior to demobilizing open trench operations. The results of the post-cleaning digital video(s) may
indicate the need for additional excavation and repair prior to lining. The Contractor shall review all
the post-cleaning digital video(s) and identify any additional point repair, which impact(s) the

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 509

placement of the liner and the reinstatement of the service connection(s) and shall provide these
locations in writing to the Engineer. All pipeline point repairs/replacement will be inspected and
measured by the Engineer prior to any backfilling and compaction and leak testing/CCTV inspection
prior to placing of permanent resurfacing.
500-4.6 Measurement. Pipeline point repair/replacement will be measured along the longitudinal
axis between the ends of the pipeline, as shown on the Plans, and shall not include the inside dimensions
of structures.
500-4.7 Payment. The Contract Unit Price per linear foot (m) or lump sum for pipeline point repair
and/or replacement shall include furnishing and installing all fittings, connections, seals, and special
work shown on the Plans and in the Specifications. Additionally, the Contract Unit Price shall include
chemical and physical testing; removal of interfering portions of existing sewers, storm drains, and other
improvements; closing or removing of abandoned pipelines and structures, if required CCTV inspection
and/or leak testing; excavation of the trench and/or access/insertion pits; control of ground and surface
waters; preparation of the subgrade; placing and joining of pipe, including any necessary annular space
grouting; backfilling of the trench and/or access/insertion pits; temporary and/or permanent resurfacing;
and all other work necessary for pipeline point repair and/or replacement, complete and in place.
500-5 LINING.
500-5.1 General. Rehabilitation materials shall be tested in accordance with 211-2 and conform to
the requirements for the specified material unless otherwise specified. Test methods, specifications,
standards, and the required quality control procedures for testing and installation are specified in each
subsection. The Contractor shall install only those pipeline rehabilitation system materials that conform
to the requirements specified.
The Contractor shall protect the manholes from the forces generated by equipment, water, and air
pressures during installation.
500-5.2 Service Connection Locations. The Contractor shall locate all service connections
and cleanouts. The Contractor shall provide written notification of work activities to each user.
The Contractor shall provide interim sewer service if shown on the Plans or specified in the
Special Provisions.
500-5.3 Sewage Bypass and Pumping. The lining systems specified in 500-5.8, 500-5.11, and 500-
5.12 may be installed while flow exists in the host pipeline, without diverting the flow or bypass
pumping. The Contractor shall consider the effects of varying floor levels on the buoyancy calculations
to be submitted.
500-5.4 HDPE Solid Wall Pipe Liner.
500-5.4.1 General. HDPE solid-wall liner pipe for use in sanitary sewers, storm drains, and house
connection sewers shall comply with ASTM D3350 and ASTM F714. Fittings shall comply with ASTM
D2683 or D3261. Fittings fabricated by mitered, butt fusions are also permitted.
500-5.4.2 Material Composition. Pipe and fittings shall be made from HDPE compounds
conforming to ASTM D3350, Cell Classification 345434C, D, and E and shall also meet the
requirements of 207-19.2.
500-5.4.3 Liner Pipe Acceptance. Liner pipe acceptance shall conform to 207-19.3.
500-5.4.4 Marking. Liner pipe marking shall conform to 207-19.4.
500-5.4.5 Chemical Resistance and Physical Testing. The HDPE liner pipe shall conform to 207-19.5.
500-5.4.6 Installation. The top of the existing host pipe exposed in the pit shall be evenly removed
down to the springline level. Liner pipes shall be inserted one section at a time through an

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
510 Greenbook 2021

access/insertion pit constructed above the existing sewer. When segmented liner pipe sections are
inserted from 2 locations to a common point, an approved coupling device shall be installed. Liner pipe
sections shall be inserted spigot end first with the bell end trailing and a pushing force shall be applied to
the pipe wall and to the inside of the bell, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Before insertion of segmented liner pipe 27 inches (675 mm) and larger, a standard test section of
liner pipe or an approved mandrel shall be pushed/pulled through the section of pipe being rehabilitated.
A jacking or pulling ring shall be used to distribute the push/pull forces uniformly against the bell end
perimeter of the liner pipe. The calculated forces shall include the frictional forces of the liner pipe
against the invert of the host pipe or the soffit of the host pipe when buoyant forces cause the liner pipe
to float. A load-measuring device, approved by the Engineer, shall be used to measure the loads exerted
on the liner pipe, so that the manufacturer’s approved maximum loads will not be exceeded.
500-5.4.7 End Seals. End seals shall conform to 500-6. End seals shall be completed before the
start of annular space grouting.
500-5.4.8 Annular Space Grouting. The annular space shall be grouted in accordance with 500-7.
Non-structural grout shall be used unless otherwise specified. The maximum safe annular grouting
pressure for single-stage or multi-stage grouting shall not exceed the values shown in Table 500-5.4.8.

TABLE 500-5.4.8
DIFFERENTIAL-PRESSURE (VACUUM OR EXTERNAL FLUID)
1
CAPABILITY FOR UNSUPPORTED PIPE AT 73.4°F (23°C)

SDR psi (kPa)

32.5 4 (30)
26 8 (55)
21 16 (110)
19 21 (145)
17 28 (195)
15.5 36 (250)
1. Safety factor not included.

500-5.4.9 Service Connections. Service connections shall be re-established in accordance with 500-
8. Service laterals shall be connected to the liner pipe by use of a heat-fused saddle or mechanical saddle
as approved by the Engineer.
500-5.4.10 Repair and Rejection. Liner pipe may be repaired for minor superficial pipe damage.
Damaged liner pipe which has been penetrated over 10 percent of the wall thickness at either the inner or
outer wall surface, shall be repaired by cutting out the damaged section and replacing it with new pipe.
Repair methods shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The remaining liner pipe sections shall
be a minimum of 8 feet (2.4 m) in length. Liner pipes shall be inspected for damage immediately prior
to installation. If liner pipe is found to be superficially damaged, the Engineer may allow the pipe to be
repaired or may reject it. Rejected liner pipe shall be replaced with a new section of liner pipe.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 511

500-5.5 Cured-In-Place Pipe (CIPP) Liner.

500-5.5.1 General. CIPP liner shall be either the Type A - inversion process conforming to ASTM F1216 or
the Type B - pull-in-place process conforming to ASTM F1743 for installation using heated-water cure. The
CIPP liner shall use an approved epoxy or epoxy-vinyl ester-resin-impregnated flexible fabric tube. The tube
shall be installed by an inversion method using a hydrostatic head or by pulling it through an existing pipe and
inflating by inverting a membrane using a hydrostatic head.
500-5.5.2 Material Composition and Testing. The fabric tube shall consist of one or more layers of
flexible, needled felt or an equivalent nonwoven material and have plastic coating(s). The material shall be
compatible with and capable of carrying epoxy or epoxy-vinyl-ester resin, capable of withstanding installation
pressures and curing temperatures, and be compatible with the approved resins used. The approved epoxy or
epoxy-vinyl-ester resin shall be compatible with the application and pipeline environment and be able to cure in
the presence of water. The initiation temperature for cure shall be as recommended by the resin manufacturer
and approved by the Engineer. The CIPP liner shall comply with ASTM D5813 and shall have, as a minimum,
the initial structural properties shown in Table 500-5.5.2.

TABLE 500-5.5.2
Epoxy Resin Properties ASTM Test Method Initial Values psi (MPa)
Flexural Strength D790 5,000 (34.5)
Flexural Modulus D790 300,000 (2050)
Tensile Strength D638 4,000 (27.5)
Tensile Modulus D638 250,000 (1710)
Epoxy-Vinyl-Ester Resin Properties ASTM Test Method Initial Values psi (MPa)
Flexural Strength D790 4,500 (31)
Flexural Modulus D790 250,000 (1710)
Tensile Strength D638 3,000 (20.5)
Tensile Modulus D638 250,000 (1710)

The Contractor shall provide field-cured samples as directed by the Engineer and as specified in the Special
Provisions. The physical properties of the finished CIPP shall be verified through a field-sampling procedure in
accordance with ASTM F1216 or ASTM F1743 and in accordance with ASTM D5813.
500-5.5.3 Resin and Tube Acceptance. At the time of resin impregnation, the entire fabric tube shall be
inspected for defects. The resin shall not contain fillers, except those required for viscosity control, fire
retardance, or extension of pot life. Thixotropic agents that do not interfere with visual inspection may be added
for viscosity control. The opacity of the plastic coating shall not interfere with visual inspection. Resins may
contain pigments, dyes, or colors that do not interfere with visual inspection of the CIPP liner or its required
properties. Additives may be incorporated that enhance the physical and/or chemical resistance.
500-5.5.4 Chemical Resistance Testing. The CIPP liner system shall conform to 211-2 and to the weight
change requirement shown in Table 210-2.4.1.
500-5.5.5 Installation. The outside diameter of the tube being installed shall be sized to allow for expansion
so that the CIPP can fit tightly against the existing pipe.
CIPP shall be installed in accordance with ASTM F1216 or ASTM F1743 and the Contractor’s
recommendations as approved by the Engineer. Immediately prior to installation, the CIPP liner tube shall be
saturated with resin (on or off the Work site) and stored/transported at a cool temperature as recommended by the
resin manufacturer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
512 Greenbook 2021

500-5.5.6 Curing. After tube placement is completed, a suitable heat source and distribution
equipment shall be provided by the Contractor to distribute or recirculate hot water throughout the
installed CIPP liner tube. Temperature shall be maintained during the curing period as recommended by
the resin manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. After the tube is cured, a cool-down period shall
be used prior to opening the downstream end, reconnection of services, and returning normal flow back
into the system. Heat curing of the resin shall occur within the manufacturer’s approved recommended
time frame (pot life). The water in the CIPP shall be cooled to below 100°F (38°C) before discharge.
500-5.5.7 End Seals. End seals shall conform to 500-6.
500-5.5.8 Service Connections. Service connections shall be re-established in accordance with 500-8.
500-5.5.9 Repairs. Internal and external repairs may be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and approval by the Engineer. Internal repairs may be made with approved fabric and
epoxy or epoxy-vinyl-ester resins to restore strength and integrity. External repairs may be made by
using standard plastic pipe repair techniques, including replacement of the damaged section using PVC
pipe coupled to the CIPP liner.
500-5.6 PVC Pipe Lining System.
500-5.6.1 General. PVC profile extrusions with annular space grouting shall be installed for use in
sanitary sewers and storm drains. This applies to the rehabilitation of small-diameter pipe and person-
entry pipe (36 inches (900 mm) and larger) or conduits in terms of materials and installations.
500-5.6.2 Material Composition. The material shall be made from un-plasticized PVC
compounds conforming to 207-17, having a cell classification of 12334, 12454, or 13354 as defined
in ASTM D1784.
500-5.6.3 Material Acceptance. At the time of manufacture, each lot of plastic strips shall be
inspected for defects and the physical properties certified in accordance with the ASTM Standards listed
in this subsection unless otherwise specified. There are 2 strips of PVC used in this process. The former
strip is a ribbed panel which varies in width and height as a function of pipe diameter. The joiner strip is
a “U”-shaped strip of PVC which is used to lock together the former strip edges as the PVC strips or
panels are being spirally wound upon themselves. The minimum thickness of the strips and panels shall
be as shown in Table 500-5.6.3 (A).

TABLE 500-5.6.3 (A)

Minimum Thickness
Nominal ID of Original Pipe Former Strip Joiner Strip Minimum Profile Height
inches (mm) mils (µm) mils (µm) mils (µm)
8 to 12 (200 to 300) 25 (635) 25 (635) 192 (4880)
15 to 18 (375 to 400) 30 (760) 31 (790) 242 (6150)
24 to 36 (600 to 900) 45 (1140) 58 (1470) 480 (12200)
1
30 to 72 (750 to 1800) 60 (1520) – 488 (12400)
1. In some lining applications for pipes and conduits 30 to 36 inches (750 to 900 mm) in diameter, it may be determined to use person-
entry techniques.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 513

The initial stiffness factor shall conform to Table 500-5.6.3 (B).

TABLE 500-5.6.3 (B)

(1) (2)
Nominal ID of Original Pipe Stiffness Factor (El)
3 2 3
inches (mm) in - lbf/in (Pa·m )
8 (200) 120 (14)
10 (250) 120 (14)
10 (250) 240 (27)
12 (300) 240 (27)
15 (375) 240 (27)
15 (375) 600 (68)
18 (450) 600 (68)
24 (600) 600 (68)
24 (600) 1600 (181)
30 (750) 1600 (181)
36 (900) 1600 (181)
1. For IDs larger than 36 inches (900 mm), see Plans or Special Provisions.
2. Stiffness factors shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D2412. El = 0.149R³ (PS).

At the time of delivery, the strips shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, and free of
cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or other deleterious faults. For testing purposes, a lot is defined
as production during an 8-hour shift, while a batch is defined as each 200 linear feet (60 linear meters) of
PVC product. Testing shall be performed every 2 hours and records submitted to the Engineer.
500-5.6.4 Marking. Each PVC continuous strip on each reel shall be distinctively marked on its
inside surface end with a coded number which identifies the manufacturer, strip thickness, minimum
profile height, size, material, machine, date, and shift on which the material was extruded. These
markings shall also appear on the PVC strips with a maximum distance between markings of 5 feet (1.5
m), and shall be visible from inside the completed liner.
500-5.6.5 Chemical Resistance Testing. PVC and cured sealant/adhesive shall be tested in
accordance with 211-2 and conform to the weight change requirements shown in Table 207-17.5.
500-5.6.6 Installation. The former and joiner strips shall be engaged and an approved
sealant/adhesive shall be injected onto the engaged locks. The Contractor shall ensure that the joiner
strip is continuously engaged.
For person-entry pipe, the PVC panels shall be cut and trimmed to fit as near as practical to the
internal perimeter of the existing conduit. A bead of approved sealant adhesive shall be applied to the
female locking edge of the former strip. End joins shall be made with the plasticized end section, which
shall overlap the joint by not less than 4 inches (100 mm). End joins shall be staggered and shall remain
below the normal flowline of the sewer.
500-5.6.7 End Seals. End seals shall conform to 500-6. End seals shall be completed prior to the
start of annular space grouting.
500-5.6.8 Annular Space Grouting. The annular space shall be grouted in accordance with 500-7.
Structural grout shall be used unless otherwise specified. The maximum safe annular grouting pressure
for single-stage or multi-stage grouting shall not exceed the values shown in Table 500-5.4.8.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
514 Greenbook 2021

500-5.6.9 Service Connections. Service connections shall be re-established in accordance with 500-8.
500-5.6.10 Repairs. If after installation, detected flaws of a deleterious nature shall be repaired in a
manner approved by the Engineer. Repairs performed by approved splicing or patching methods shall be
completed promptly.
500-5.7 Deformed/Re-formed HDPE Pipe Liner.
500-5.7.1 General. Deformed HDPE extrusions for rehabilitating sanitary sewers and storm drains
without excavation shall be in accordance with ASTM D3350 and ASTM F714. This method applies to the
rehabilitation of 4 through 18-inch (100 through 450 mm) diameter pipe. Unless otherwise specified, liner for
pipe shall have a minimum SDR of 32.5. This rehabilitation system may be capable of expanding up to 10
percent. Pipe stiffness shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 500-5.7.1.

TABLE 500-5.7.11
2
Pipe Stiffness , psi (kPa)
Pipe Size Inches (mm) SDR 21 SDR 26 SDR 32.5
4 (100) 61 31 16
6 (150) 61 31 16
8 (200) 61 31 16
10 (250) 61 31 16
12 (300) 61 31 16
15 (375) 61 31 16
18 (450) 61 31 16
1. Minimum pipe stiffness (PS) when tested in accordance with ASTM D2412.
2. PS values are from ASTM F174 Table X1.1

500-5.7.2 Material Composition. Pipe shall be made from HDPE compound complying with
ASTM D3350, cell classification 345434C, D, or E and shall also meet the requirements of 207-19.2,
except that titanium dioxide pigment may be substituted for the 2 percent carbon black.
The Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Compliance and test results to the Engineer.
500-5.7.3 Material Acceptance. Material acceptance shall conform to 207-19.3.
500-5.7.4 Marking. Marking shall conform to 207-19.4, except that the material shall be designated
by HDPE cell classification.
500-5.7.5 Chemical Resistance and Physical Testing. HDPE pipe specimens shall be tested in
accordance with 211-2 and conform to 207-19.5, except the requirements shall be met with samples
from pipes that have been subjected to the deformation and reforming process.
500-5.7.6 Installation. Installation shall conform to the following:
a) A cable shall be strung through the host pipe to be rehabilitated and attached to the deformed pipe
through an existing manhole or access point. The pipe shall be pulled through the existing
conduit by this cable. Pulling forces shall not exceed the axial strain limits of the deformed pipe.
The measured pulling operation limits the pulling force to an allowable tensile stress (1,500
pounds per square inch (10.3 MPa) or 50 percent of the yield) times the pipe wall cross-sectional
area. Appropriate sleeves and rollers shall be used to protect the pipe.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 515

b) When the deformed pipe is in place, the pipe shall be cut and the processing manifolds (pipe end-
closing assembly used for heat and pressure control within liner) shall be inserted and secured at
both pipe ends. The temperature and pressure measuring instruments shall be attached to the
deformed pipe at both ends.
c) After the deformed HDPE liner is outfitted with temperature and pressure instruments, steam shall
be introduced into the system until a minimum temperature of 226°F (108°C) to a maximum
temperature of 244°F (118°C) is reached and shall not exceed the melting temperature of 260°F
(127°C). The minimum outside pipe temperature at the terminating end of the pipe shall be
185°F (85°C). This temperature shall be held for a minimum of 20 minutes. The deformed pipe
shall be pressurized up to 14.5 pounds per square inch gage (100 kPa gage), maximum, while the
termination point valves are kept open to provide heat flow. The pressure shall then be increased
in increments up to a maximum of 26 pounds per square inch gage (180 kPa gage).
d) The Contractor shall cool the re-formed pipe according to the approved manufacturer
recommendations. When the temperature reduces to 100°F (38°C), the Contractor shall then
slowly raise the pressure to approximately 33 pounds per square inch gage (230 kPa gage), while
applying air or water for continued cooling. The equipment shall be disconnected after ambient
temperature is attained.
e) Temperatures and pressures shall be monitored and recorded throughout the installation process to
ensure that each phase of the process is achieved at the approved manufacturer’s recommended
temperature and pressure levels.
f) If testing of the installed HDPE liner pipe is required in the Special Provisions, the physical
properties of the installed HDPE liner pipe shall be verified through field sampling and
laboratory testing, all as approved by the Engineer. Unless the Special Provisions call for more
than one sample, a sample shall be cut from a section of re-formed/re-rounded HDPE liner pipe
at the upstream, downstream, or an intermediate manhole/access pit that has been inserted
through a same diameter pipe acting as a mold. HDPE liner pipe samples shall be submitted to a
certified laboratory which has been pre-approved by the Engineer and tested in accordance with
ASTM D638 and ASTM D790 to confirm that the liner pipe conforms to the minimum tensile
and elongation requirements specified in 500-5.7.2.
500-5.7.7 End Seals. End seals shall conform to 500-6.
500-5.7.8 Service Connections. Service connections shall be re-established in accordance with 500-8.
500-5.7.9 Repair. The Contractor shall provide an evaluation and repair specification to the
Engineer for approval for liner pipe found to be damaged during or after installation.
500-5.8 Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer Mortar (FRPM) Liner Pipe.
500-5.8.1 General. FRPM liner pipe for use in lining sanitary sewers shall comply with ASTM
D3262. Unless otherwise specified, the minimum pipe stiffness shall be 18 pounds per square inch (125
kPa), or greater, as tested in accordance with ASTM D2412.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
516 Greenbook 2021

500-5.8.2 Material Composition. The amount, location, and orientation of the chopped glass-fiber
reinforcement shall be specifically designed for each application. The glass shall be a commercial grade
of E-Type glass fibers with a finish compatible with the resin used. The sand shall be a minimum 98
percent silica kiln-dried and graded. The polyester wall resin shall be an isophthalic, orthophthalic or
other approved resin with a minimum tensile elongation of 2 percent. A vinyl ester liner resin shall be
used to meet the chemical resistance requirements of 211-2 and conform to 207-20.5. Designation per
ASTM D3262 shall be Type 1, Liner 2, Grade 3, and a minimum pipe stiffness of 18 pounds per square
inch (125 kPa), unless a higher value is shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Elastomeric sealing gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477.
500-5.8.3 Liner Pipe Acceptance. The liner pipe shall be free of cracks, holes, delaminations,
foreign inclusions, blisters or other defects that would, due to their nature, degree, or extent, have a
deleterious effect on the pipe performance as determined by the Engineer. Prior to installation, damaged
pipe shall be either repaired or field cut to remove the damaged portion as approved by the Engineer.
For testing purposes, a production lot shall consist of all liner pipes having the same lot marking number,
but shall not exceed a total of 50 pipes. Pipe length, wall thickness, joint dimensions, pipe stiffness, and
deflection characteristics shall be verified by testing for each lot in accordance with ASTM D3262.
500-5.8.4 Marking. Each pipe section shall be marked on the inside and every 5 feet (1.5 m) on the
outside, to show the manufacturer’s name, manufacturing number (identifies factory location, date, shift,
and sequence), nominal diameter, pipe stiffness, ASTM D3262 and designation, and lot number.
500-5.8.5 Chemical Resistance and Physical Testing. Pipe liners and gaskets shall be tested in
accordance with 211-2 and conform to 208-4 and 207-20.5 respectively. Verification shall be provided that
physical testing of the product conforms to ASTM D3262 (qualification test only) and ASTM D2412.
500-5.8.6 Installation. Liner pipes shall be inserted one section at a time through an
access/insertion pit constructed above the existing sewer. The top of the existing host pipe exposed in
the pit shall be evenly removed down to the springline level. Liner pipe sections shall be inserted spigot
end first with the bell end trailing and a pushing force shall be applied to the pipe wall and to the inside
of the bell, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. When segmented liner pipe sections are inserted
from 2 locations to a common point, an approved coupling device shall be installed.
Before insertion of segmented liner pipe 27 inches (675 mm) and larger, a standard test section of
liner pipe or an approved mandrel shall be pushed/pulled through the section of pipe being rehabilitated.
A jacking or pulling ring shall be used to distribute the push/pull forces uniformly against the bell end
perimeter of the liner pipe. The calculated forces shall include the frictional forces of the liner pipe
against the invert of the host pipe or the soffit of the host pipe when buoyant forces cause the liner pipe
to float. A load-measuring device, approved by the Engineer, shall be used to measure the loads exerted
on the liner pipe. The pushing force shall be applied to the pipe wall end inside of the bell. Maximum
jacking loads shall not exceed the values shown in Table 500-5.8.6.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 517

TABLE 500-5.8.6
SAFE AXIAL COMPRESSIVE LOAD¹, Tons (kN)
Nominal Diameter 18 psi (125 kPa) Pipe Stiffness 36 psi (250 kPa) Pipe Stiffness
inches (mm) Tons (kN) Tons (kN)
18 (450) — 17 (151)
20 (500) — 19 (169)
24 (600) 23 (205) 31 (276)
30 (750) 36 (320) 52 (463)
36 (900) 52 (463) 66 (587)
42 (1050) 71 (632) 95 (845)
48 (1200) 93 (827) 130 (1157)
54 (1350) 123 (1094) 171 (1521)
60 (1500) 155 (1379) 212 (1886)
66 (1650) 175 (1557) 240 (2135)
72 (1800) 209 (1859) 292 (2598)
78 (1950) 252 (2242) 351 (3123)
84 (2100) 307 (2731) 422 (3754)
90 (2250) 357 (3176) 485 (4315)
96 (2400) 411 (3656) 560 (4982)
102 (2550) 470 (4181) 640 (5694)
1. Factor of safety of 2:1 is included for longitudinal compressive load.
2. The minimum radial annular space shall not be less than 1 inch (25 mm) unless approved by the Engineer.

500-5.8.7 End Seals. End seals shall conform to 500-6. End seals shall be completed prior to the
start of annular space grouting.
500-5.8.8 Annular Space Grouting. The annular space shall be grouted in accordance with 500-7.
The maximum safe grouting pressure shall be equal to the pipe stiffness divided by 3.
500-5.8.9 Service Connections. Service connections shall be re-established in accordance with 500-8.
500-5.8.10 Repairs and Rejection. Prior to installation, damaged pipe shall be field cut to remove the
damaged portion and rejoined by approved methods. Superficial damage may be repaired without field
cutting. Liner pipe gouges deeper than 50 percent of the vinyl ester lining shall be field cut and removed.
500-5.9 External In-Place Wrap.
500-5.9.1 General. External in-place wrap shall consist of a wrap of plastic liner with integral
locking extensions followed by a cap of reinforcing steel and concrete.
Plastic liner sheet, weld strip, adhesive products and cleaners shall conform to 210-2.
500-5.9.2 Preparation of Existing Pipe. The concrete surface shall be etched by sandblasting to
develop a slightly granular surface. When permitted by the Engineer, the concrete surface may be acid
etched in lieu of sandblasting. After sandblasting, the concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of
dust. Surfaces etched with acid shall be neutralized with clean water.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
518 Greenbook 2021

500-5.9.3 Installation. Installation shall conform to the following:

a) Coverage. The circumferential coverage shall be the upper 270 degrees unless otherwise shown
on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
b) Positioning Liner. Liner installed on the existing pipe shall be positioned with the locking
extensions outward and aligned with or perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe.
Liner shall be centered with respect to the field top centerline of the pipe. Liner shall be set to fit
over the existing pipe joints with the field welded seams located away from the joint portion of
the pipes. Liner shall be closely fitted to the existing pipe. Sheets shall be cut to fit curved and
warped surfaces using the minimum number of separate pieces.
Prior to installation, the Contractor shall indicate to the Engineer the proposed layout of liner
sheets, including the location and type of all field welds.
The Engineer may require Working Drawings, the use of patterns, or the marking of sheet layouts
directly on the existing pipe where complex or warped surfaces are involved.
At transverse joints between sheets of liner used along the pipeline, the space between ends or
edges of locking extensions, measured longitudinally, shall not exceed 4 inches (100 mm).
c) Securing Liner in Place. Liner shall be held snugly in place against the existing pipe by use of
adhesive materials in accordance with the liner manufacturer’s written recommendations and as
approved by the Engineer.
Liner shall be bonded to the existing pipe a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) along both
longitudinal bottom edges. This shall be accomplished by the application of an approved
adhesive system.
500-5.9.4 Field Jointing.
a) General. Liner joints shall be free of all foreign material and shall be clean and dry before
joints are made. All field joints are to be made and tested prior to placement of reinforcing
steel and concrete.
b) Field Joints. Field joints in the liner plate shall be Type R-2 unless otherwise specified.
i. Type R-1 joint shall consist of a 2-inch (50 mm) wide weld strip, centered over the 1 inch (25
mm) maximum gap between sheets and securely welded along each edge of adjacent liner.
ii. Type R-2 joints shall be made with an integral joint flap with locking extensions removed per
210-2.4.6, extending 1-1/2 inches ± 1/4 inch (38 mm ± 6 mm) beyond the end of the sheet.
The sheet shall be overlapped not less than 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) and the overlap secured to the
adjacent liner by means of a 1 inch (25 mm) welding strip. The downstream sheet shall
overlap the upstream sheet.
iii. Type R-3 joint shall consist of a 1 inch (25 mm) wide weld strip centered over a 1/4 inch (6
mm) maximum gap between sheets and secured along each edge of adjacent liner by means
of a 1 inch (25 mm) welding strip.
c) Installation of Welding Strips. Installation of welding strips shall be in accordance with
311-1.5.4.
500-5.9.5 Protection and Repair. Protection and repair shall conform to 311-1.9.5.
500-5.9.6 Field Testing. Field testing shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with 311-1.10.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 519

500-5.9.7 Steel Reinforcement. Before placing reinforcing steel, the Contractor shall submit a
reinforcing steel placing plan.
Reinforcing bars shall conform to 210-2 and be placed in accordance with 303-1.7. They shall be
held in position by the use of concrete or plastic chairs. Metal chairs will not be allowed.
Caution shall be taken when installing reinforcing steel to ensure against puncturing or damaging the liner.
500-5.9.8 Concreting Operations.
a) General Placement. Concrete placed against the liner shall be carefully conveyed, deposited,
and consolidated to avoid damage to the liner and to produce dense concrete, securely anchoring
the locking extensions into the concrete. Vibrators shall be used to consolidate concrete with
particular attention along the bottom edge of the liner.
b) Forms. The trench walls may serve as the outer form for the new concrete encasement. Outer
forms, when required, shall conform to 303-1.3.
500-5.10 Folded and Re-Formed PVC Pipe Liner.
500-5.10.1 General. The type to be installed shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the
Special Provisions.
500-5.10.2 Type A.
a) General. This method applies to the rehabilitation of 4 through 15 inches (100 through 375 mm)
diameter pipe. The standard dimension ratio shall be SDR 35, 41, or 50 as specified in the
Special Provisions. This rehabilitation system may be capable of expanding up to 10 percent.
The initial pipe stiffness factor shall conform to Table 500-5.10.2 (A).

TABLE 500-5.10.2 (A)2

1
Nominal ID of Original Pipe Stiffness Factor (El)
SDR 3 2 3
inches (mm) in - lbf/in (Pa·m )
4 (100) 35 40 (4.5)
6 (150) 35 133 (15)
50 109 (12)
8 (200) 41 198 (22)
35 320 (36)
50 213 (24)
10 (250) 41 388 (44)
35 624 (70)
50 369 (42)
12 (300) 41 671 (76)
35 1076 (122)
50 720 (81)
15 (375) 41 1307 (148)
35 2105 (238)
1. Pipe Stiffness (PS) shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D2412. Stiffness factor is El = 0.149r³ (PS). The stiffness factors
listed in the table are typical values for gravity flow conditions. For pressure applications the stiffness factors are usually higher.
2. Effects of ovality and safety factor are not included.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
520 Greenbook 2021

b) Material Composition. The folded pipe shall be made from un-plasticized PVC compounds
having a cell classification of 13223, as defined in ASTM D1784.
c) Material Acceptance. At the time of manufacture, the extruded materials shall be inspected for
defects and physical properties in accordance with ASTM F1504, to show compliance with 500-
1.10.2 b), unless otherwise specified. Testing shall be performed once per shift, change in
material batch or coil. A Certificate of Compliance shall be submitted to the Engineer.
At the time of installation, the material shall be homogeneous and free of defects, cracks, holes,
blisters, foreign materials, or other deleterious faults.
d) Marking. Marking shall conform to 207-17.2.1, except that under Item 3, there is no ASTM
standard for this product.
e) Chemical Resistance and Physical Testing. The PVC material shall be tested in accordance with 211-
2 and conform to the requirements shown in Table 500-5.10.2 (B). The various requirements shall be
met with samples taken from pipe that has experienced the folding and re-forming process.

TABLE 500-5.10.2 (B)

Property ASTM Test Method Initial Values Values After 112 Days
Exposure
Tensile Strength psi (MPa) D638 5,000 (34.5) min. 5,000 (34.5) min.
D256 Method A
Impact Strength, ft-lbs/inch
Size 1/2 x 1/8 x 2-1/2 inches 1.5 (80) of notch, min. 1.5 (80) of notch, min.
(J/m)
(12.7 x 3.175 x 63.5 mm)
Weight Change % D543
Unconditioned + 1.5% max.
Conditioned + 1.0% max.

f) Installation.
i. If necessary, a flexible heat containment tube shall be permanently placed inside the existing
pipe for retention of heat necessary to soften the folded pipe. A cable shall be strung through
the heat containment tube.
ii. Steam shall be applied to the folded pipe until pliable for a minimum of 15 minutes prior to
insertion into the existing pipe. Once the material has become pliable, the cable shall be
attached to the folded pipe. Using a winch at the termination point, the folded pipe shall then
be inserted into the existing pipe through a manhole or access point. Pulling force shall not
exceed 2,000 pounds (8.9 kN).
iii. After the folded PVC pipe is inserted into the existing pipe, it shall be cut off at the starting
point and restrained at the terminating point. Thermocouples shall be placed on the exterior
of the liner pipe at both the upstream and downstream ends for monitoring of the re-forming
and cool-down process. Steam shall be introduced at the insertion end of the folded pipe
until a minimum temperature of 150°F (66°C) is attained at the terminating end. This
temperature shall be held for a minimum of 5 minutes and shall not exceed 240°F (115°C).
iv. After the material has reached the required temperature, a specifically designed pressure
driven rounding device shall be used to progressively round the folded PVC at a maximum
rate of 5 feet per second (1.5 m/s) using steam at 5 to 8 pounds per square inch gage (35 to 55
kPa gage). The rounding process shall not cause any scraping, tearing, abrasion, movement,
or other damage to the liner.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 521

v. When the rounding process is complete, the steam shall be converted to air, maintaining an
internal pressure of 5 to 12 pounds per square inch gage (35 to 84 kPa gage). After the
conversion to air pressure, water may be introduced until the system is completely filled. A
minimum of 8 pounds per square inch gage (55 kPa gage) air or water pressure shall be
maintained until the system is cooled to at least 120°F (49°C) at both ends. At this point, the
pressure shall be relieved and both ends shall be cut off in the manholes.
vi. If testing of the installed PVC liner pipe is required in the Special Provisions, the physical
properties of the installed PVC liner shall be verified through field sampling and laboratory
testing as approved by the Engineer. Unless the Special Provisions call for more than one
sample, a sample shall be cut from a section of reformed/re-rounded PVC liner pipe at the
upstream, downstream, or an intermediate manhole/access pit that has been inserted through
a same diameter pipe acting as a mold. PVC liner pipe samples shall be submitted to a
certified laboratory, which has been pre-approved by the Engineer. The samples shall be
tested in accordance with ASTM D638 for tensile strength, ASTM D790 for flexural
modulus, and ASTM D2444 for impact resistance to confirm that the liner pipe conforms to
the minimum requirements.
500-5.10.3 Type B.
a) General. This method applies to rehabilitation of 4 through 18-inch (100 through 450 mm) diameter
pipe. The standard dimension ratio shall be SDR 26, 32.5, or 41 as specified in the Special
Provisions. This rehabilitation system may be capable of expanding up to 10 percent. The initial pipe
stiffness factor shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 500-5.10.3 (A).

TABLE 500-5.10.3 (A)

CELL CLASS 12111
1, 2
Nominal ID of Original Pipe Stiffness Factor (El)
SDR 3 2 3
inch (mm) in - lbf/in (Pa - m )
32.5 23 (2.7)
4 (100)
26 47 (5.3)
32.5 79 (9.0)
6 (150)
26 153 (17)
32.5 187 (21)
8 (200)
26 365 (42)
32.5 364 (42)
10 (250)
26 711 (81)
32.5 630 (72)
12 (300)
26 1228 (140)
32.5 1226 (140)
15 (375)
26 2397 (274)
18 (450) 41 1057 (121)
1. Pipe Stiffness (PS) shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D2412. Stiffness factor is El = 0.149r³ (PS). The stiffness factors
listed in the table are typical values for gravity flow conditions. For pressure applications, the stiffness factors are usually higher.
2. Effects of ovality and safety factor are not included.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
522 Greenbook 2021

b) Material Composition. The folded pipe shall be made from PVC compounds having a cell
classification of 12111, as defined in ASTM D1784.
c) Material Acceptance. At the time of manufacture, the extruded material shall be inspected for
defects and physical properties in accordance with ASTM D7901, D2122, D2152, D2412, and
F1057 to verify compliance with b) above unless otherwise specified. Testing shall be performed
once per shift, change in material batch, or coil. A Certificate of Compliance shall be submitted
to the Engineer.
At the time of installation, the material shall be homogeneous and free of defects, cracks, holes,
blisters, foreign materials, or other deleterious faults.
d) Marking. Marking shall conform to 207-17.2.1, except that under Item 3 there is no ASTM
standard for this product.
e) Chemical Resistance and Physical Testing. The PVC material shall be tested in accordance
with 211-2 and conform to the requirements shown in Table 500-5.10.3 (B) and 210-2.3. The
various requirements shall be met with samples taken from pipe that has experienced the folding
and re-forming process.

TABLE 500-5.10.3 (B)

CELL CLASS 12111
Property ASTM Test Method Initial Values Values After
112 Days Exposure
Tensile Strength Yield, psi
D638 3,500 (24.1) min. 3,500 (24.1) min.
(MPa) min.
D256 Method A
Impact Strength, Foot- 1.2 (64) of 1.2 (64) of
Size 1/2 x 1/8 x 2-1/2 inches
lbs/inch (J/m) min. notch, min. notch, min.
(12.7 x 3.75 x 63.5 mm)
Weight Change (%) D543
Unconditioned ± 1.5% max.
Conditioned ± 1.5% max.

f) Installation.
i. Prior to insertion into the host pipe, heat may be applied to the folded pipe (while on the spool)
until pliable. Once the material has become pliable, the pulling cable shall be attached to the
insertion end of the folded pipe. Using a winch at the termination point, the folded pipe shall then
be inserted through the existing pipe via a manhole or access point. Pulling force shall not exceed
2,000 pounds (8.9 kN).
ii. After the folded PVC pipe is pulled through the host pipe, it shall be cut off at the starting
point and restrained at the terminating point. Thermocouples shall be placed on the exterior
of the liner pipe at the downstream end for monitoring of the re-forming and cool-down
process. Steam shall be introduced at the insertion end inside the folded pipe until a
minimum temperature of 200°F (93°C) is attained at the manifold with an instrument
designed to monitor the temperature and pressure during the expanding and cool-down
process at the terminating end. This temperature shall be held for a minimum of 5 minutes
and shall not exceed 240°F (115°C).
iii. After the material has reached the required temperature, a specifically designed pressure
driven rounding/expanding device shall be used to progressively round/expand the folded
PVC at a maximum rate of 5 feet (1.5 m) per second using steam at a maximum of 10 pounds

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 523

per square inch gage (70 kPa) gage. The rounding/expanding process shall not cause any
scraping, tearing, abrasion, movement, or other damage to the liner.
iv. When the rounding/expanding process is complete, the steam shall be transitioned to cooling
air, maintaining an internal pressure of up to 10 pounds per square inch gage (70 kPa) gage.
After the conversion to air pressure, the air will be exhausted at the downstream manifold to
cool the liner. As the downstream manifold exhaust temperature approaches 100°F (38°C),
the water valve on the upstream manifold shall be gradually opened to allow incoming
air/water mixture to reach 80°F (27°C). At this point, the air/water pressure shall be relieved
and both ends of the rounded/expanded pipe shall be cut off in the manholes.
v. If testing of the installed PVC liner pipe is required in the Special Provisions, the physical
properties of the installed PVC liner shall be verified through field sampling and laboratory
testing as approved by the Engineer. Unless the Special Provisions call for more than one
sample, a sample shall be cut from a section of rounded/expanded PVC liner pipe at the
upstream, downstream, or an intermediate manhole/access pit that has been inserted through
a same diameter pipe acting as a mold. PVC liner pipe samples shall be submitted to a
certified laboratory which has been pre-approved by the Engineer. The samples shall be
tested in accordance with ASTM D638 for tensile strength, ASTM D790 for flexural
modulus, ASTM D2444 for impact resistance to confirm that the liner pipe conforms to the
minimum requirements.
500-5.10.4 End Seals. End seals shall conform to 500-6.
500-5.10.5 Service Connections. Service connections shall be re-established in accordance with 500-8.
500-5.10.6 Repairs. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer for approval an evaluation and
repair specification for liner pipe damaged during or after installation. Any liner pipe damaged shall be
removed from the Work site.
500-5.11 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Spirally-Wound Profile Wall Liner Pipe.
500-5.11.1 General. HDPE profile liner pipe shall conform to ASTM F894.
Unless otherwise specified the minimum pipe stiffness shall be 22.5 pounds per square inch (155
kPa). Pipe stiffness and its respective ring stiffness constant (RSC) are shown in Table 500-5.11.1.
These shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 and ASTM F894. The profile configuration
shall be either external or internal unless otherwise specified.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
524 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 500-5.11.1
Nominal Diameter inches (mm) RSC (Min.) Pipe Stiffness (PS) (Min.) psi (kPa)
18 (450) 64 22.5 (155)
21 (525) 74 22.5 (155)

24 (600) 84 22.5 (155)

27 (675) 95 22.5 (155)

30 (750) 106 22.5 (155)
33 (825) 116 22.5 (155)
36 (900) 127 22.5 (155)
42 (1050) 148 22.5 (155)
48 (1200) 169 22.5 (155)
54 (1350) 191 22.5 (155)
60 (1500) 212 22.5 (155)
66 (1650) 233 22.5 (155)
72 (1800) 255 22.5 (155)
Higher RSC values with respectively higher pipe stiffness values may be available. RSC values are dimensionless.

500-5.11.2 Material Composition. Material composition shall conform to 207-19.2. Rubber

gaskets shall conform to the requirements of 208-3.
500-5.11.3 Liner Pipe Acceptance. At the time of manufacture, all lot components of the liner
pipe and fittings shall be inspected for defects. At the time of delivery, the liner pipe shall be
homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, abrasions, holes, foreign materials,
blisters, or deleterious faults. For testing purposes, a production lot shall consist of all liner pipe
having the same lot marking number, but shall not exceed a total of 50 lengths per day. Pipe
length, wall thickness, and joint dimension shall be verified by testing each lot per ASTM F894 or
more frequently as required by the Engineer.
500-5.11.4 Marking. Pipe sections having an exterior profile shall be marked at both ends on the
inside of each pipe. Each pipe section having an interior profile shall be marked at both ends on the
inside and outside of the pipe to show the manufacturer’s name, manufacturer’s number (identifies
factory location, date, shift, and sequence), nominal inside diameter, minimum RSC, pipe stiffness,
ASTM F894 designation, and lot number.
500-5.11.5 Chemical Resistance and Physical Testing. Liner pipes and gaskets shall be tested in
accordance 211-2 and conform to the requirements of 207-19.5 and 208-3 respectively.
500-5.11.6 Installation. Liner pipes shall be inserted one section at a time through an
access/insertion pit constructed above the existing sewer. The top of the existing host pipe exposed in
the pit shall be evenly removed down to the springline level. Liner pipe sections shall be inserted spigot
end first with the bell end trailing and a pushing force shall be applied to the pipe wall and to the inside
of the bell, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. When segmented liner pipe sections are inserted
from 2 locations to a common point, an approved coupling device shall be installed.
Before insertion of segmented liner pipe 27 inches (675 mm) and larger, a standard test section of liner
pipe or an approved mandrel shall be pushed/pulled through the section of pipe being rehabilitated. A jacking
or pulling ring shall be used to distribute the push/pull forces uniformly against the bell end perimeter of the
liner pipe. The calculated forces shall include the frictional forces of the liner pipe against the invert of the

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 525

host pipe or the soffit of the host pipe when buoyant forces cause the liner pipe to float. A load-measuring
device, approved by the Engineer, shall be used to measure the loads exerted on the liner pipe. Maximum
jacking loads shall not exceed the values shown in Tables 500-5.11.6 (A) and (B).

TABLE 500-5.11.6 (A) – EXTERIOR PROFILE

Nominal Inside Diameter Safe Axial Compressive Loads*
inches (mm) RSC 100 Tons (kN) RSC 160 Tons (kN)
18 (450) 2.3 (20.4) 3.3 (29.3)
21 (525) 2.3 (20.4) 3.8 (33.8)
24 (600) 3.3 (29.3) 3.8 (33.8)
27 (675) 3.9 (34.6) 3.8 (33.8)
30 (750) 3.9 (34.6) 4.0 (35.5)
33 (825) N/A. 5.8 (51.6)
36 (900) N/A. 5.8 (51.6)
42 (1050) N/A. 9.4 (83.6)
48 (1200) N/A. 9.8 (87.1)
54 (1350) N/A. 17.9 (159.2)
* Includes a Safety Factor of 2:1.

TABLE 500-5.11.6 (B) – INTERIOR PROFILE

Nominal Inside Diameter Safe Axial Compressive Loads*
inches (mm) RSC Tons (kN)
18 (450) 64 9.5 (84.5)
21 (525) 74 11.0 (97.8)
24 (600) 84 12.5 (111.2)
27 (675) 95 14.0 (124.5)
30 (750) 106 15.5 (137.8)
33 (825) 116 18.5 (164.5)
36 (900) 127 20.0 (177.9)
42 (1050) 148 25.0 (222.4)
48 (1200) 169 30.0 (266.9)
54 (1350) 191 45.0 (400.3)
60 (1500) 212 58.0 (515.0)
66 (1650) 233 72.0 (640.5)
72 (1800) 255 117.0 (1040)
* Includes a Safety Factor of 2:1.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
526 Greenbook 2021

500-5.11.7 Repairs and Rejection. Liner pipe may be repaired for minor superficial pipe damage.
Major damage which penetrates over 25 percent of the inner or outer wall thickness shall be repaired by
cutting out the damaged section and replacing the damaged section with a new pipe. Repair methods
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The liner pipe sections shall be a minimum of 8 feet
(2.4 m) in length unless shorter sections are authorized by the Engineer. Liner pipe shall be inspected
immediately prior to installation for damage. If liner pipe is found to be superficially damaged, the
Engineer may allow the pipe to be repaired or may reject it. Liner pipe with major damage will be
rejected and shall be replaced with a new section of liner pipe.
500-5.11.8 End Seals. End seals shall conform to 500-6. End seals shall be completed prior to the
start of annular space grouting.
500-5.11.9 Annular Space Grouting. The annular space shall be grouted in accordance with 500-7.
Non-structural grout shall be used unless otherwise specified. The maximum safe annular space grouting
pressure for single-stage or multi-stage grouting shall not exceed the pipe stiffness divided by 4.5.
500-5.11.10 Service Connections. Service connections shall be re-established in accordance with 500-8.
500-5.12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Closed Profile Liner Pipe.
500-5.12.1 General. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) closed profile segmented liner pipe for use in lining
sanitary sewers shall conform to ASTM F1803. Unless otherwise specified, the minimum pipe stiffness
shall be 46 pounds per square inch (318 kPa), as tested in accordance with ASTM D2412.
500-5.12.2 Material Composition. The material shall be made from un-plasticized PVC
compounds having a cell classification of 12364 as defined in ASTM D1784. Elastomeric sealing
gaskets shall conform to the requirements of 208-4.
500-5.12.3 Liner Pipe Acceptance. The liner pipe shall be free from cracks, holes, blisters, foreign
inclusions or other defects that would, due to their nature, degree, or extent, have a deleterious effect on
the pipe performance as determined by the Engineer.
For testing purposes, a production lot shall consist of all liner pipe having the same lot marking
number, but shall not exceed one shift of production for sizes 21 through 30 inches (525 through 750
mm) or 2 shifts of production for sizes 36 through 48 inches (925 through 1200 mm). Pipe length, wall
thickness and joint dimensions shall be verified by testing for each lot in accordance with ASTM F794.
Records of this testing shall be made available if so requested by the Engineer.
500-5.12.4 Marking. Each pipe section shall be marked at one end on the inside and every 5 feet
(1.5 m) on the outside showing the manufacturers name, manufacturing number (identifies production
plant, date, shift), cell classification, lot number, nominal diameter, pipe stiffness and ASTM F794.
Internally the pipe shall have a numbered air testing certificate (sticker) that can be correlated through
plant records to each piece of pipe. A key of the manufacturer’s production and lot codes shall be
submitted to the Engineer prior to delivery.
500-5.12.5 Chemical Resistance and Physical Testing. Liner pipe and gaskets shall be tested in
accordance with 211-2 and conform to the requirements shown in Table 500-5.12.5 and 208-4 respectively.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 527

TABLE 500-5.12.5
Value (Initial and After 112-Day
Property ASTM Test Method Exposure)
Cell Class 12364
Tensile Strength (Yield), psi (MPa), min. D638 6000 (41.5)
D256 Method A
Impact Strength, Ft-lbs/inch (J/m) of notch, min. Size 1/2 x 1/8 x 2-1/2 inches 0.65 (34.7)
(12.7 x 3.17 x 63.5 mm)
Weight Change % D543
Unconditioned ± 1.5 max.
Conditioned ± 1.0 max.

Verification shall be provided that physical testing of the product confirms conformance to ASTM
F794 (qualification test only) and ASTM D2412.
500-5.12.6 Installation. The existing sewer may be maintained in operation during the relining
process.
Liner pipes shall be inserted one section at a time through an access/insertion pit constructed above
the existing sewer. The top of the existing host pipe exposed in the pit shall be evenly removed down to
the springline level. Liner pipe sections shall be inserted spigot end first with the bell end trailing and a
pushing force shall be applied to the pipe wall and to the inside of the bell, unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. When segmented liner pipe sections are inserted from 2 locations to a common point, an
approved coupling device shall be installed.
Before insertion of segmented liner pipe 27 inches (675 mm) and larger, a standard test section of
liner pipe or an approved mandrel shall be pushed/pulled through the section of pipe being rehabilitated.
A jacking or pulling ring shall be used to distribute the push/pull forces uniformly against the bell end
perimeter of the liner pipe. The calculated forces shall include the frictional forces of the liner pipe
against the invert of the host pipe or the soffit of the host pipe when buoyant forces cause the liner pipe
to float. A load-measuring device, approved by the Engineer, shall be used to measure the loads exerted
on the liner pipe. The pushing force shall be applied to the grooved end of the pipe. Maximum pushing
loads shall not exceed the values shown in Table 500-5.12.6.

TABLE 500-5.12.6
Nominal Pipe Diameter 46 psi (318 kPa) Pipe Stiffness
1
in (mm) Maximum Pushing Load – Tons (kN)
21 (525) 12.5 (111)
24 (600) 12.5 (111)
27 (700) 12.5 (111)
30 (750) 12.5 (111)
36 (925) 12.5 (111)
42 (1050) 12.5 (111)
48 (1200) 12.5 (111)
1. A factor of safety of 2:1 is included for the maximum pushing load.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
528 Greenbook 2021

500-5.12.7 End Seals. End seals shall conform to 500-6. End seals shall be completed prior to the
start of annular space grouting.
500-5.12.8 Annular Space Grouting. The annular space shall be grouted in accordance with 500-7.
Non-structural grout shall be used unless otherwise specified. The maximum safe grouting pressure
shall be 10 pounds per square inch (70 kPa).
500-5.12.9 Service Connections. Service connections shall be re-established in accordance with 500-8.
500-5.12.10 Repairs and Rejection. Liner pipe with superficial damage may be repaired without
field cutting. Major damage which penetrates 50 percent or more of the inner or outer wall will be
rejected. Repair methods shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Rejected liner pipe shall be
replaced with a new section of liner pipe.
500-5.13 Spiral Wound Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Liner.
500-5.13.1 General. Spiral wound PVC pipe liner for use in the rehabilitation of circular and non-
circular pipelines shall be a PVC profiled strip with a continuously sealed spiral joint. The profile may
include steel reinforcing if shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. The profiled strip
is wound into the liner shape shown on the Plans to a size ranging from 6 inches through 15 feet (150
mm through 4.6 m). The profile may be designated as “Type 1” or “Type 2” on the Plans or in the
Special Provisions. Type 1 is expandable to fit against the host pipe wall. Type 2 is installed with a
fixed dimension, requiring annular space grouting between the liner and the existing host pipe. An end
seal shall be provided at each manhole. Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM F1741 as
modified herein.
500-5.13.2 Material Composition. The profiled strip shall be made from PVC compounds conforming
to ASTM F1697, Section 5. The gasket and/or sealing material shall be as recommended by the manufacturer
and shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8. When so specified in the Special Provisions, the steel
reinforcing strip shall be fabricated from steel conforming to ASTM F1697, Section 5.2.
500-5.13.3 Material Acceptance. The pipe liner material shall consist of a ribbed PVC profiled
strip with interlocking, sealed edges, gasket material and steel reinforcing strip, if required. The edges
lock together as the strip is wound into a pipe. The profiled strip shall have shaped ribs which vary in
height and width as specified in ASTM F1697. The Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Compliance
that states that the PVC profiled strip material, gasket material, and the steel reinforcing strip conforms
to ASTM F1697 and the Contract Documents. The grout shall conform to ASTM F1741, and the
Contract Documents.
500-5.13.4 Marking. Each PVC profiled strip shall be distinctively marked on its inside surface at
intervals not to exceed 30 feet (9 m) measured longitudinally along the profiled strip with a coded
number which identifies the manufacturer, plant, date of manufacture and shift, cell classification and
profile type. This information shall also appear on each reel.
500-13.5 Chemical Resistance Testing. The PVC profiled strip, gasket, end seals, sealants, and
other material exposed to the sewer environment shall be tested in accordance with 211-2 and, conform
to the weight change requirements of Table 207-17.5.
500-5.13.6 Installation. Spiral wound PVC pipe liner shall be of uniform appearance, undamaged,
free of cracks, holes, unsealed joints, and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and ASTM F1741.
At the time of installation, the profiled strip material shall be homogeneous and free of defects,
cracks, holes, blisters, or foreign materials.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 529

500-5.13.7 End Seals. End seals shall conform to 500-6. End seals shall be completed prior to the
start of annular space grouting.
500-5.13.8 Annular Space Grouting. The annular space shall be grouted in accordance with
ASTM F1741, Section 6.5. Structural grout conforming to 500-7.2 shall be used unless otherwise
specified.
500-5.13.9 Service Connections. Service connections shall be re-established in accordance with 500-8.
500-5.13.10 Repair. The Contractor shall submit a repair method for any profile strips or liner pipe
found to be damaged during or after installation, and for grouting deficiencies.
500-5.14 Ultraviolet (UV) Light-Cured Cured-in-Place (CIPP) Liners.
500-5.14.1 General. Fiberglass-reinforced CIPP liners cured by exposure to UV light for use in
sanitary sewers and storm drains shall conform to ASTM F2019 and ASTM D5813, except as otherwise
specified.
Liners shall be sized to expand and, after expansion, have a tight molded fit to the host pipe.
500-5.14.2 Submittals. In addition to the submittals listed in 500-2, the following shall be
submitted in accordance with 3-8:
a) Liner composition and cured liner properties including flexural strength, flexural modulus,
opening size, structural layer thickness, abrasion layer thickness, and total liner thickness
excluding any inner and outer plastic films.
b) Work plan, including:
i) personnel, equipment, inflation and calibration procedures, installation procedures, and
manufacturer’s recommended liner maximum pulling force, and
ii) curing procedures, including light train configuration, number of lamps, rated power per lamp,
maximum curing speed, inner air pressure during curing, and temperature limitations.
c) Re-establishment of service connections work plan in accordance with 500-5.2 and 500-8.
d) Sewage bypass and pumping plan, or flow control plan, in accordance with 500-5.3.
500-5.14.3 Materials. Liner materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Liner materials shall not be used after the manufacturer’s certified
expiration date.
Materials shall conform to the following:
a) External Protective Film. External protective film material shall be made of plastic foil,
impermeable to moisture and styrene, and opaque to the spectrum of light used for curing.
b) Resin. Resin shall be a vinyl ester or polyester resin containing UV light initiators. Resin with
thermal-based initiators will not be accepted. The resin shall not contain fillers. Thixotropic
agents that do not interfere with visual inspection may be added for viscosity control.
c) Glass Fibers. Glass fibers shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant E-CR glass conforming to
ASTM D578.
d) Inner Film. Inner film material shall consist of a plastic UV light penetrable foil impermeable to
moisture and styrene. The material shall be capable of stretching to fit an irregular host conduit
and resisting the air pressures and temperatures encountered during installation.
500-5.14.4 Glass Fiber Reinforced (Fabric) Tubes. Fabric tubes shall be constructed of materials
conforming to 500-5.14.3 and consist of at least 2 layers of glass fiber reinforcement formed into a
tubular shape. Each layer of glass fiber reinforcement shall be fully impregnated with resin. Fabric tubes
shall be composed of the following:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
530 Greenbook 2021

a) A structural layer comprised of resin-saturated glass fiber in the circumferential direction. The
minimum structural wall thickness shall be 3.0 mm or the design wall thickness, whichever is
greater.
b) An abrasion layer comprised of resin and a veil material on the inner surface of the liner. The
minimum abrasion layer wall thickness shall be 0.5 mm.
c) An inner film. Inner film may be integral to the liner or a separate film. Inner film not integral to
the liner shall be capable of releasing from the liner without resulting damage.
d) An external protective film.
Fabric tubes shall be visually inspected for defects prior to installation.
500-5.14.5 Installation. Installation shall conform to ASTM F2019 and the approved work plan.
Service connections shall be located in accordance with 500-5.2 and shall be field verified prior to
insertion of the liner.
A sliding sheet shall be used between the liner and the host pipe to protect the liner from any
imperfections and reduce friction forces during pulling.
The pulling force used to install the liner shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommended
maximum. The Contractor’s equipment shall include calibrated instruments that measure the pulling
force.
End seals shall conform to 500-6. Service connections shall be re-established in accordance with
500-8.
The Contractor shall submit an installation data report including pulling force, pull direction and
speed of light train, number of UV lamps, UV output of each lamp, inner air pressure, and exothermic
temperature reached.
500-5.14.6 Liner Properties After Curing. Unless otherwise specified, the initial properties of
fiberglass-reinforced CIPP liners after curing by exposure to UV light shall conform to the requirements
shown in Table 500-5.14.6 when tested in accordance with ASTM F2019 and ASTM D5813. Long term
properties shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.

TABLE 500-5.14.6
Property ASTM Test Method psi (MPa)
1
Flexural Strength , min. D790 15,000 (103)
1
Flexural Modulus , min. D790 725,000 (5,000)
1. In the circumferential (hoop) direction.

Liners in sanitary sewer applications shall conform to the chemical resistance and physical testing
requirements of 207-20.5, except weight change shall not exceed 1.25 percent. Liners in storm drain
applications shall conform to the chemical resistance requirements of sections 6.4.1 and 6.4.2 of ASTM
D5813.
500-5.14.7 Inspection. Expanded liners shall be inspected prior to curing to verify the fit to the host
pipe is without defects including wrinkles or fins. Defects shall be corrected prior to curing.
Prior to curing the first reach, the UV lamp output of each lamp shall be tested to confirm output
meets or exceeds the lamp output in the approved work plan.
Installed and cured liners shall be inspected for defects including wrinkles, fins, dry spots, lifts, and
delamination. Installed and cured liners shall have a smooth inside finish.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 531

The Contractor shall provide samples of the installed and cured liners as directed by the Engineer
and as specified in the Special Provisions. Cured liner samples shall be protected from direct sunlight.
500-5.14.8 Acceptance. Acceptance will be based upon conformance to the Specifications and the
following. The mean value of all cured liner properties shall not be less than the value specified in Table
500-5.14.6. The mean structural layer thickness and abrasion layer thickness shall not be less than the
values specified. No individual sample value shall be less than 80 percent of the specified value.
500-5.14.9 Repairs. The Contractor shall repair installed and cured liner defects in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations and as approved by the Engineer.
500-5.14.10 Measurement. Measurement shall conform to 500-11.
500-5.14.11 Payment. Payment shall conform to 500-12.
500-6 END SEALS. The beginning and end of the new pipe liner shall be sealed to the host pipe
with an epoxy or other material. The epoxy or other material shall conform to 211-2. The approved
epoxy or other material shall be compatible with the lining material and host pipe and shall provide a
watertight seal.
The finished liner shall protrude a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) and a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm)
into a manhole unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. Liner
material shall be cut smooth and parallel with a manhole wall. The interface between the host pipe and
the pipe liner shall be sealed 360 degrees.
When the pipe liner extends through a manhole it shall be sealed as shown on the Plans and as
specified in the Special Provisions.
500-7 ANNULAR SPACE GROUTING.
500-7.1 General. This subsection covers various requirements of continuous annular space grouting
of sliplining systems. The annular space (void between the host and liner pipes) shall be completely
grouted if specified as a requirement of the lining system.
500-7.2 Materials.
500-7.2.1 General. Grout materials shall consist of cement, Portland cement and fly ash, and/or
additives, provided materials are not biodegradable.
a) Non-Structural Grout. Non-structural grout shall have a minimum penetration resistance of 100
pounds per square inch (690 kPa) in 24 hours when tested in accordance with ASTM C403 and a
minimum compressive strength of 300 pounds per square inch (2070 kPa) in 28 Days when
tested in accordance with ASTM C495 or C109.
b) Structural Grout. Structural grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 pounds
per square inch (34.5 MPa) in 28 Days when tested in accordance with ASTM C39.
c) Mix Designs. One or more mix designs for each strength required shall be developed based on
the following:
i. Size of the annular void.
ii. Void (size) of the surrounding soil.
iii. Absence or presence of groundwater.
iv. Sufficient strength and durability to prevent movement of the pipe.
v. Adequate retardation.
vi. Less than 1 percent shrinkage by volume.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
532 Greenbook 2021

d) Viscosity. The grout mix shall be designed to prevent floating of the liner pipe. The apparent
viscosity shall not exceed 20 seconds in accordance with ASTM C939 unless otherwise specified
or approved by the Engineer.
500-7.3 Mixing. The materials shall be mixed in equipment of sufficient size and capacity to
provide the desired amount of grout material for each stage in a single operation. The equipment shall
be capable of mixing the grout at densities required for the approved procedure and shall also be capable
of changing density during the grouting operation.
500-7.4 Preparation. Upon completion of sliplining but prior to grouting, bulkheading of the ends
and appropriate venting is required. The Contractor shall test the integrity of the installed liner pipe and
constructed bulkheads for any leaks by performing the following:
a) Dewater and inject dye water into the annular space (this alternative will not be permitted if the
crown or any portion of the host pipe is severely deteriorated to the point where water may
escape through the host pipe).
b) Pressurize the annular space to the maximum permissible grouting pressure per the
manufacturer’s recommendation with approval by the Engineer.
c) The Contractor shall submit a detailed plan to the Engineer for holding the liner pipe on the
invert for a period of time long enough to allow the grout to set where buoyant uplift is a factor.
500-7.5 Injection Procedure and Pressure. A grout pressure gauge and recorder shall be installed
immediately adjacent to each injection port. During operations, the recorder shall continuously record
the actual grouting pressure versus the time on paper with ink. The gauge shall conform to an accuracy
of ± 0.5 pounds per square inch (± 3.5 kPa). The range of the gauge shall not be more than 100 percent
greater than the design and attached to a saddle-type diaphragm seal (gauge saver) to prevent clogging
with grout. All gauges shall be certified and calibrated in accordance with ANSI B40, Grade 2A. The
grout pressure recordings shall be identified, as a minimum, with the date, batch, and time of day
grouting was performed and shall be submitted to the Engineer at the end of the work day that grouting
was performed.
The gauge pumping pressure shall not exceed the liner pipe manufacturer’s recommendations.
Pumping equipment shall be of a size sufficient to inject grout at a volume, velocity and pressure
compatible with the size of the annular space and degree of host pipe corrosion. Once grouting
operations begin, grouting shall proceed uninterrupted from bulkhead to bulkhead. Grout placement
shall not be terminated until the following conditions are met, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer:
a) the estimated annular volume of grout has been injected;
b) the exhausted grout at each vent is not less than 85 percent of the density of freshly
injected grout;
c) the exhausted grout at each vent is not less than 85 percent of the original viscosity of the freshly
injected grout; and
d) when recommended by the grout installer.
500-7.6 Onsite Test. For each batch, the Contractor shall perform the following tests in the presence
of the Engineer:
a) Density per ASTM C138 or by other methods as approved by the Engineer.
b) Viscosity per ASTM C939.
Grout that exceeds ± 3 pounds per cubic foot (48 kg/m3) of the design density will be rejected.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 533

500-7.7 Test Section. The Contractor shall perform a test on each type of grout and grout system
proposed to be used. The test section to be grouted and the size of the annular space considered for each
type of grout system shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
500-8 SERVICE CONNECTION RE-ESTABLISHMENT. Service connections shall be re-
established as quickly as possible, not to exceed 24 hours, after completion of each liner pipe
installation. Services requiring bypasses to be provided by the Contractor will be identified in the
Special Provisions. When the service connection is re-established, the invert of the service connection
shall match the bottom of the reinstated service opening. The service opening shall be reinstated from a
minimum of 95 percent to a maximum of 100 percent of the original service connection. The new edge
shall be smooth and crack-free with no loose or abraded material.
If the service connection is to be re-established by a remote-control device, the Contractor shall have
a fully operational backup device on site. If for any reason the Contractor is unable to remotely re-
establish the service connections, the Contractor shall immediately re-establish each by open cut.
500-9 POST-INSTALLATION CCTV INSPECTION. After completion of the lining and re-
establishment of service connections, the Contractor shall perform a CCTV inspection in accordance
with 500-3.
500-10 RESTORATION OF ACCESS/INSERTION PITS. Upon completion of the lining
process, and/or as directed by the Engineer, the access/insertion pit area(s) shall be restored in
accordance with the approved Working Drawings.
500-11 MEASUREMENT. Lining will be measured by the linear foot (m).
500-12 PAYMENT. Payment for lining will be made at the Contract Unit Price per linear foot (m)
for each diameter size of pipeline to be lined.
The Contract Unit Price shall include;
a) sewage bypass and pumping,
b) service connection location and re-establishment,
c) construction and restoration of access pits, if proposed,
d) annular space grouting, if required, and
e) all other work not covered by other Bid items.

SECTION 501 – SERVICE LATERAL CONNECTION SEALING

501-1 GENERAL. This subsection specifies various service lateral connection (SLC) sealing
systems, and methods of installation. The type of sealing systems and methods to be used shall be as
shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. Unless otherwise specified, proof of
compliance with the Chemical Resistance Test specified in 211-2 using the weight change specified in
Table 501-1 shall be submitted to the Engineer.
SLC sealing systems shall consist of either a cured-in-place resin saturated felt or fiberglass lining
material and tube installed in an existing mainline and house connection. The lining material and tube
shall be sized such that when installed they are properly aligned, tight fitting and without wrinkles. SLC
sealing systems shall be manufactured to provide smooth tapered edges after curing. The curing method
and schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer. The cured SLC sealing system shall conform to the
requirements shown in Table 501-1.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
534 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 501-1
Property ASTM Test Method Initial, psi (MPa)
Flexural Strength D790 3,000 (20.7)
Flexural Modulus D790 250,000 (1,724)
Tensile Strength D638 3,000 (20.7)
Tensile Modulus D638 250,000 (1,724)
1
Weight Change - ± 1.5%
1. Tested in Conformance with 211-2

Bonding materials used with SLC sealing systems shall be compatible with the existing mainline and
HC or with the lining system used in the mainline and HC.
Prior to installation, the Contractor shall submit a detailed installation plan. The installation plan
shall include the manufacturer’s specified curing time, chemical composition and a detailed description
of the SLC sealing system.
Flow bypassing, if required, shall conform to 3-12.5.
501-2 SUBMITTALS. The following shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8:
a) Chemical resistance and weight change test results per 211-2 and 501-1.
b) Bonding materials per 501-1.
c) Detailed installation plan per 501-1.
d) Cleaning method per 501-3.
e) Proof of compatibility between repair and lining materials per 501-4.
f) Full-wrap installation and curing methods per 501-5.1.3.
g) Brim style curing method per 501-5.2.3.
h) Testing equipment per 501-6.
501-3 CLEANING, INSPECTION, AND SURFACE PREPARATION. Prior to the installation
of the SLC sealing system, the HC, SLC and mainline shall be prepared, as specified by the
manufacturer, to produce a surface that is suitable for application of the specified sealing system.
Cleaning methods shall be as specified by the manufacturer of the SLC sealing system and submitted.
Inspection shall include CCTV inspection of the mainline and HC for locating any damage or leaks.
CCTV inspection shall conform to 500-3.2.2 and 500-3.4. The HC's shall be inspected 16 inches (400
mm) beyond the end of the proposed lining unless otherwise specified. Any protrusions on the surface
of the mainline and HC that could interfere with the installation of the SLC sealing system shall be
removed. All roots larger than 1/8 inch (3 mm) shall be removed during the cleaning operation, and any
damage or leaks shall be reported to the Engineer. Debris from the cleaning operation shall not be
allowed to enter the sewer system. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and remove any necessary
debris containment devices while maintaining sewer flow. The Contractor shall dispose of all debris in
accordance with Federal, State, and local laws and regulations.
501-4 SLC REPAIR AND ACTIVE INFILTRATION ELIMINATION. Material used to repair
active infiltration shall be compatible with the SLC sealing system and mainline lining material
Active infiltration shall be eliminated by pressure grouting with chemical grout as specified by the
SLC system manufacturer or specified in the Special Provisions. Upon the completion of pressure
grouting, if required, the area to be sealed shall be visibly clean with no excess grout prior to lining.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 535

501-5 SLC SEALING SYSTEMS.

501-5.1 Full-Wrap “T-Style” SLC Sealing System.
501-5.1.1 General. This subsection specifies a full wrap “T-style” SLC sealing system.
501-5.1.2 Sealing Material. The sealing material shall consist of a cured-in-place resin saturated
felt tube that provides a full-wrap tube in the mainline centered at the HC, with a tube section extended
into the HC. The length of the tube section in the mainline and in the HC shall be as shown on the Plans
or specified in the Special Provisions.
501-5.1.3 Installation and Curing. Installation shall conform to Section 7.0 of ASTM F2561. The
installation method shall provide an air-tight seal of the SLC sealing system to the mainline pipe and
house connection as specified by the manufacturer. Prior to installation, the felt tube shall be saturated
with resin at the Work site and stored at the temperature specified by the resin manufacturer. After
installation, the felt tube shall be cured as specified by the resin manufacturer.
501-5.2 “Brim Style” SLC Sealing System.
501-5.2.1 General. This subsection specifies a “brim style” SLC sealing system.
501-5.2.2 Sealing Material. The sealing material shall consist of a cured-in-place resin saturated
fiberglass or felt material that provides a brim section in the mainline with the brim centered around the
HC with a tube section extended in the HC. The length of the tube section in the HC and the size of the
brim section in the mainline shall be as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
501-5.2.3 Installation and Curing. The fiberglass or felt material and tube shall be saturated with
resin at the Work site or at the factory and stored at the temperature specified by the resin manufacturer.
The resin saturated SLC sealing system shall be loaded on an applicator apparatus, attached to a robotic
device and positioned in the mainline at the HC to be sealed. The robotic device shall be equipped with
a CCTV camera which shall be used to align and center the SLC sealing system within the HC opening.
The applicator apparatus shall include a bladder or an approved mechanical device of sufficient length in
the mainline and HC such that the inflated bladder or approved mechanical device extends beyond the
end of the SLC seal. The insertion pressure shall be adjusted to fully deploy the SLC sealing system in
the HC and to hold the ends of the SLC seal against the pipe walls. The SLC sealing system shall
produce a smooth transition between the SLC seal and the pipe walls without a ridge or gap between the
SLC seal and the inner diameter of the mainline and HC. The insertion pressure shall be maintained for
the duration of the curing process. Curing shall be as specified by the resin manufacturer. The method
of curing shall be submitted.
501-6 INSPECTION, TESTING, AND REPAIR OF INSTALLED SLC SEALING SYSTEMS.
501-6.1 General. The Contractor shall submit information on the equipment to be used in testing
installed SLC sealing systems.
501-6.2 CCTV Inspection. After the installation is complete, the Contractor shall perform CCTV
inspection in accordance with 500-3.2.2 and 500-3.4.
501-6.3 Adhesion Testing. Adhesion testing shall be performed on each SLC seal installed. The
Contractor shall notify the Engineer 24 hours prior to performing adhesion testing, if the Engineer
cannot be on site during testing, the Contractor shall videotape the test at each seal and submit the
videotape to the Engineer.
Adhesion testing shall be conducted after the SLC seal has cured in accordance with manufacturer’s
specifications and before the final video inspection is performed. Adhesion testing shall consist of inserting a
high velocity, hydraulic cleaning type, 360-degree spinning nozzle and CCTV camera in the mainline pipe
and positioning the nozzle at the SLC seal. The water from the nozzle shall be directed downstream for a

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
536 Greenbook 2021

minimum of 1 minute, at each edge of the SLC seal in the mainline at the minimum pressure of 1500 pounds
per square inch (10 MPa) and minimum flow rate of 65 gallons per minute (246 L/m).
501-6.4 Air Pressure Test. Unless otherwise specified, cured SLC sealing systems shall be air
pressure tested. A test plug shall be placed adjacent to the upstream and downstream end of the SLC
sealing system in the mainline and adjacent to the upstream end in the HC Sewer. The test pressure shall
be 4 pounds per square inch (30 kPa) for a 3 minute test time during which the pressure shall not drop
below 3.5 pounds per square inch (24 kPa). If the SLC sealing system fails this test, the test plug in the
HC Sewer may be moved onto the SLC seal and the test conducted again. If the second test passes, the
SLC sealing system will be deemed to have passed the test.
501-6.5 Repair. If the SLC sealing system fails either the adhesion or the second air pressure test,
the Contractor shall remove and replace or repair the SLC sealing system as recommended by the
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
501-7 MEASUREMENT. SLC sealing systems will be measured by “each.”
501-8 PAYMENT. Payment for SLC sealing systems will be made at the Contract Unit Price or
lump sum price in the Bid for each SLC. The Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid shall
include furnishing and installing the SLC sealing system, surface preparation and repairs, preparation
and tape submittal of all pre- and post-construction CCTV inspection, bypassing if required, and testing,
unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.

SECTION 502 – MANHOLE AND STRUCTURE REHABILITATION

502-1 GENERAL. This subsection specifies various lining systems for manholes and structures. The types
of rehabilitation materials and methods shall be as shown on the Plans and specified in the Special Provisions.
Unless otherwise specified, proof of meeting the Chemical Resistance test per 211-2 shall be submitted.
As used in this subsection “holiday” shall be defined as any discontinuity, bare or thin section in a
lined or coated area.
Flow bypassing, if required, shall conform to 3-12.5.
502-2 SUBMITTALS. The following shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8:
a) Chemical resistance test results in accordance with 211-2.
b) Manufacturer’s specifications confirming the compatibility of repair materials with the lining
system per 502-4.1.
c) Certificate of Compliance for the liner per 502-5.1.
d) Certificate of Compliance for each material per 502-5.2.
502-3 CLEANING, SURFACE PREPARATION, AND INSPECTION. Prior to the installation
of the lining system, the host structure shall be prepared to produce a concrete or masonry surface
suitable for application and adhesion of the specified lining system. Cleaning and surface preparation
shall include the inspection of the host structure for any damage or leaks, and the removal of any
protrusions on the surface of the host structure that could interfere with the installation of the lining
system. Any damage or leaks shall be reported to the Engineer. Cleaning methods may include high
pressure water cleaning at a minimum of 5,000 pounds per square inch (34.5 MPa), abrasive blast, or a
method recommended by the manufacturer of the lining system, or another cleaning method approved by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall protect the host structure from damage by the cleaning equipment,
water and air pressure.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 537

Debris from the cleaning operation shall not be allowed to enter the sewer system. The Contractor
shall furnish, install and remove any necessary debris containment devices while maintaining sewer
flow. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all debris collected from the cleaning operation. If
reinforcing steel is exposed, either before or after removing deteriorated concrete, it shall be thoroughly
cleaned to remove all contamination and rust particles. Immediately after the cleaned reinforcing steel is
inspected and accepted by the Engineer, the Contractor shall place a protective coating approved by the
Engineer on the exposed reinforcing steel. The protective coating shall be applied in accordance with
the manufacturer’s specifications.
Manhole steps, pull rings and lifting eyes shall be installed or removed as shown on the Plans.
502-4 REPAIR, RESURFACING, AND ACTIVE INFILTRATION ELIMINATION.
502-4.1 General. Repair, resurfacing and active infiltration elimination materials shall be
compatible with the lining system. A copy of the manufacturer’s specifications confirming the
compatibility of the materials used in the repair shall be submitted.
502-4.2 Repair. Prior to installation, patching or localized repairs shall be performed using rapid
setting repair mortars compatible with the lining system. Repair mortars shall be used to fill surface
irregularities, voids, and deteriorated surfaces and to repair the host structure to a uniform surface.
Manufacturer’s specifications shall be followed when performing repairs, material handling, mixing,
installation and curing.
502-4.3 Resurfacing. Air-placed concrete (APC) materials, if required by the Special Provisions or
shown on the Plans, shall conform to 303-2.3.1. Prior to the application of APC, the structure shall be
prepared to produce a concrete or masonry surface that is suitable for application and adhesion of the
specified APC. The APC shall be applied in continuous lifts of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) minimum thickness
unless otherwise specified. Containment devices, approved by the Engineer, shall be used to prevent
rebound (non-adhering excess APC) from entering the sewer system. Immediately following the APC
placement operation, the containment device shall be removed and the structure’s cover reinstalled to
provide a moist curing environment. Where moist conditions within the structure do not exist, the
Contractor shall water cure the APC for a minimum of 24 hours prior to installation of the lining system.
All defects shall be repaired prior to the installation of the liner system.
502-4.4 Active Infiltration Elimination. Active leaks within the host structure shall be eliminated
prior to installation of the liner system. Leaks shall be eliminated by pressure grouting with chemical
grout as specified in the Special Provisions and/or the application of hydraulic cement conforming to
201-1.2. The host structures shall be visibly dry with no active infiltration prior to lining.
502-5 LINING SYSTEMS.
502-5.1 Integral Locking PVC Manhole and Structure Lining System.
502-5.1.1 General. This subsection specifies an integral locking PVC lining system. This system
consists of temporarily erecting a form inside an existing structure, installing PVC lining material with
integral locking devices and filling the annular space between the erected form and PVC lining material
and the walls of the host structure with Portland cement concrete resulting in a new PVC-lined,
monolithic structure within the host structure.
502-5.1.2 Materials.
502-[Link] Portland Cement Concrete. Portland cement concrete shall be Class 560-C-3250 (330-
C-23) conforming to 201-1.1.2 unless otherwise specified.
502-[Link] Integral Locking PVC Liner. The liner shall conform to 210-2 unless otherwise
specified. A Certificate of Compliance conforming to 4-1.5 shall be submitted to the Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
538 Greenbook 2021

502-5.1.3 Installation. If existing, steps shall be removed flush with the inside wall of the host
structure. Formwork for the lining system shall be installed in a manner that fits the existing walls and
creates an equal and approximate 3-inch (75 mm) annular space. Portland cement concrete shall be used
to fill the annular space. The installation of the liner shall conform to 311-1. Replacement of steps, if
required, shall conform to the requirements shown on the Plans and/or specified in the Special
Provisions.
Prior to placement of the Portland cement concrete, the existing mainline pipe shall be connected to
the host structure as shown on the Plans and/or as specified in the Special Provisions. Exposed Portland
cement concrete surfaces within the host structure shall be protected as specified in the Special
Provisions.
502-5.1.4 Testing. Field testing shall conform to 210-2.3.4 and 311-1.10 unless otherwise specified.
502-5.2 Segmented PVC Lining System.
502-5.2.1 General. This subsection specifies a lining system consisting of PVC liner strips placed
so that an annular space is created between the liner and the walls of the host structure. This annular
space is then filled with cementitious grout. A Certificate of Compliance shall be submitted to the
Engineer for each material.
502-5.2.2 Materials.
502-[Link] PVC Liner. PVC liner shall conform to and Table 207-17.5.
502-[Link] Cementitious Grout. Cementitious grout shall conform to ASTM F1741, Section 6.4
unless otherwise specified.
502-[Link] Sealant/Adhesive. The sealant/adhesive shall be compatible with the PVC lining
material and cementitious grout. A copy of the manufacturer’s specifications confirming the
compatibility of the sealant/adhesive materials shall be submitted to the Engineer.
502-[Link] Installation. Installation shall conform to 500-5.6.2 through 500-5.6.5. Installation shall
be performed by either manually spirally winding PVC strips or placing PVC panels and engaging the
complementary locks (male/female) at the edges of the strips/panels in a manner that creates an annular
space, of 1 inch (25 mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise specified.
A bead of approved sealant/adhesive shall be applied to the female locking edge of the strip/panel
prior to engaging the locking edges. Grouting of the annular space shall be performed in such a manner
as to prevent damage or collapse of the liner and completely fill the annular space. Holes in the liner
shall be covered with a patch of sealant materials as approved by the Engineer.
502-[Link] Testing. Testing shall be performed in accordance with 502-6 except the adhesion test
shall not be performed.
502-5.3 Polyurethane and Epoxy Protective Lining System.
502-5.3.1 General. This subsection specifies a polyurethane and epoxy primer protective lining
system.
502-5.3.2 Lining Material. Lining material shall consist of 100 percent solid polyurethane and
moisture tolerant epoxy. Polyurethane shall be capable of spray application to 125 mils (3 mm)
minimum thickness in one continuous coat. Epoxy shall be capable of spray application to 5 mils (125
µm) thickness in one continuous coat.
502-5.3.3 Installation and Curing. Lining material shall be applied to all prepared surfaces from 1
inch (25 mm) below the low-flow water level to the base of the ring and cover unless otherwise
specified. All termination points of the lining material to the existing subsurface shall be keyed into the

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 539

subsurface by mechanically scoring a minimum 1/4 inch x 1/4 inch (6 mm x 6 mm) keyway. Prior to
application of the polyurethane, the subsurface shall be primed with the epoxy primer to a thickness of 3
mils (75 µm) minimum to 5 mils (125 µm) maximum. Polyurethane shall be applied to a thickness of
125 mils (3 mm) immediately prior to the epoxy primer becoming tack-free. Lining material shall be
uniform in color, fully cured, free of holidays, surface imperfections, blisters and sags and adequately
adhered to the subsurface.
502-5.3.4 Performance Requirements. The lining system shall meet or exceed the requirements
shown in Table 502-5.3.4.

TABLE 502-5.3.4
Polyurethane Epoxy Primer
Tensile Strength ASTM D638, Type IV, psi (MPa) (min) 2,000 (14) 6,000 (41)
Elongation at Break, % ASTM D638, Type IV 40 5
1 1
Wear Resistance, mg. wt. Loss Taber abrasion, ASTM D4060 60 100
Hardness, Shore D, Durometer ASTM D2240 55 75
Tear Resistance, ppi (kg/mm) ASTM D624 150 (2.7) N/A
2 2
Peel Strength, Concrete, pli (g/mm) ASTM D903 7 (125) 7 (125)
3
Weight Change ± 1.5% ± 1.5%
1. Abrasive wheel No. CS-17, maximum value.
2. Tested as a system. Test results shall be verified on a per job basis or as specified in the Special Provisions.
3. Tested in conformance with 211-2.

502-5.3.5 Testing. The set or cured lining materials shall be tested in accordance with 501-6 unless
otherwise specified.
502-5.4 Epoxy Lining System.
502-5.4.1 General. This subsection specifies an epoxy lining system.
501-5.4.2 Lining Material. Lining material shall consist of solvent free, high-build epoxy resin
capable of spray application to 125 mils (3 mm) minimum thickness in one continuous coat.
502-5.4.3 Installation and Curing. Lining material shall be applied to all prepared surfaces from 1
inch (25 mm) below the low-flow water level to the base of the ring and cover unless otherwise
specified. Termination points of the lining to the existing subsurface shall be keyed into the subsurface
by mechanically scoring a minimum 1/4 inch x 1/4 inch (6 mm x 6 mm) keyway. Epoxy shall be applied
to a thickness of 125 mils (3 mm). Lining material shall be uniform in color, fully cured, free of
holidays, surface imperfections, blisters and sags and adequately adhered to the subsurface.
502-5.4.4 Testing. The set or cured lining materials shall be tested in accordance with 502-6 unless
otherwise specified.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
540 Greenbook 2021

502-5.4.5 Performance Requirements. The lining system shall conform to the requirements shown
in Table 500-5.4.5.

TABLE 502-5.4.5
Epoxy Liner
Tensile Strength ASTM D638, Type IV, psi (MPa) (min) 3,000 (21)
Elongation at Break, % ASTM D638, Type IV 0.9
1
Wear Resistance, mg. wt. Loss Taber abrasion, ASTM D4060 115
Hardness, Shore D, Durometer ASTM D2240 80
2
Weight Change ± 1.5%
1. Abrasive wheel No. CS-17, maximum value.
2. Tested in conformance with 211-2.

502-5.5 Epoxy Mastic and Flexible PVC System.

502-5.5.1 General. This subsection describes the installation of the mastic primer and epoxy mastic
that bonds to the cleaned, repaired and prepared interior concrete substrate, then follows with the
mechanical locking of the flexible PVC liner into the epoxy mastic. The integral locking extensions in
the flexible PVC liner are embedded to their full depth into the epoxy mastic.
502-5.5.2 Materials.
502-[Link] Plastic Liner. The liner shall be manufactured from a PVC compound in accordance
with 210-2. The plastic liner shall be a flexible PVC liner with a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch (1.5
mm) and conform to 210-2.4.
502-[Link] Mastic Primer. The epoxy mastic primer shall be a 2-part coating that is applied to the
prepared concrete substrate.
502-[Link] Epoxy Mastic. The epoxy mastic shall be a 2-part 100 percent epoxy coating for
bonding and filling voids in properly prepared concrete substrate.
502-[Link] Locking Extensions. Liner materials to be embedded in the epoxy mastic shall have
integral locking extensions conforming to 210-2.2.4 except for the dimensions requirement. The locking
extensions shall have a shape, height, web thickness, and spacing that will allow the liner to be held
permanently in place and meet the requirements of 502-5.4.
502-5.5.3 Preparation and Repair of Substrate. Prior to applying the mastic primer, the structure
shall be cleaned and prepared in accordance with 311-1.6 and repaired in accordance with 311-1.9.
502-5.5.4 Installation.
502-[Link] Priming. The mastic primer shall be applied to a thickness of 3 mils (75 µm) minimum
to 5 mils (125 µm) maximum. The primer shall be allowed to dry before applying the epoxy mastic.
502-[Link] Epoxy Mastic Application. A finishing trowel or other suitable tool shall be used to
apply the epoxy mastic to a uniform minimum thickness of 1/4 inch (6 mm).
502-[Link] Plastic Liner Application. The plastic liner shall be placed while the wetting ability of
the epoxy mastic is at its optimum, be pressed into the mastic, and rolled to remove any trapped air. The
lining system shall be allowed to cure for the amount of time recommended by the lining manufacturer.
The average dry film thickness of the cured lining system, including the liner sheets and the applied
epoxy mastic, when completed shall not be less than 315 mils (8 mm).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 541

502-[Link] Field Jointing.

a) General. The Contractor shall utilize the plastic liner sheet size that will result in the minimum
number of seams. Vertical and horizontal seams shall overlap a minimum of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm)
and shall be welded with 1 inch (25 mm) weld strips. Corner strips may be used at inside and
outside corners, or liner may be wrapped around corners. The Contractor may heat the liner to
facilitate turning corners.
b) Joint Types. Field joints shall be Type AL-2 unless otherwise specified.
i. Type AL-1 joints shall consist of a 4-inch (100 mm) wide joint strip centered over a 1 inch
(25 mm) maximum gap between sheets and securely welded along each edge of adjacent liner
with a 1 inch (25 mm) welding strip.
ii. Type AL-2 joints shall be constructed with integral joint flaps with locking extensions
removed 1 inch (25 mm) from one side in accordance with 210-2.2.6. The flap shall be
overlapped a minimum of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) and the overlap secured to the adjacent liner by
means of a 1 inch (25 mm) welding strip.
iii. Type AL-3 joints shall consist of a 1 inch (25 mm) wide weld strip centered over a 1/4 inch
(6 mm) maximum gap between sheets and securely welded along each edge of adjacent liner.
502-[Link] Installation of Welding Strips. Installation of welding strips shall conform to 311-
1.5.4.
502-5.5.5 Pull Test for Locking Extensions. Liner locking extensions embedded in epoxy mastic
shall withstand a test pull of at least 20 pounds per linear inch (3.5 N per linear mm), applied
perpendicular to the concrete surface for a period of 1 minute without rupture of the locking extensions
or withdrawal from the epoxy mastic or delaminating of the mastic from the concrete substrate. This test
shall be performed at a temperature between 70°F to 80°F (21°C to 27°C).
502-6 CLEANING, INSPECTION, TESTING, AND REPAIR OF INSTALLED LINER
SYSTEMS.
502-6.1 General. After installation, the surface of the liner system shall be cleaned and prepared by
the Contractor. Inspection will then be performed by the Engineer The following tests shall be
performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
502-6.2 Spark Test. The cured lining system shall be spark tested for holidays with the high voltage
holiday detector instrument specified by the coating manufacturer or as specified in the Special
Provisions. The voltage shall be set at a minimum of 15,000 volts. For thicknesses greater than 150
mils (4 mm), the voltage shall be set at 100 volts per 1 mil (25 µm) of thickness of the applied lining
material. Identified holidays shall be marked without contaminating the lining surface and repaired.
502-6.3 Mil Gauge Test. During installation, a mil gauge shall be used to verify that the minimum
thickness of the lining meets and/or exceeds the minimum thickness specified.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
542 Greenbook 2021

502-6.4 Adhesion Testing. Adhesion testing shall be performed on a minimum of 1 structure or 15

percent of all rehabilitated structures, whichever is greater unless otherwise shown on the Plans or
specified in the Special Provisions. Adhesion testing shall be conducted after the liner system has cured
in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. Adhesion testing shall be performed in accordance
with ASTM D4541 as modified herein.
A minimum of one 3/4 inch (19 mm) dolly shall be affixed to the lined surface of the host structure
at the upper section or cone area, the midsection, and at the bottom, unless otherwise specified. Each
testing location will be identified by the Engineer. The adhesive used to attach the dollies to the liner
shall be rapid setting with tensile strength greater than that of the liner material and permitted to cure in
accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. The lining material and dollies shall be prepared to
receive the adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. Prior to the pull test, the
tester shall utilize a scoring device to cut through the coating until the substrate is reached. The pull
tests in each area shall meet or exceed 200 pounds per square inch (1,400 kPa) and shall include
substrate adhered to the back of the dolly or no visual signs of coating material in the test hole. Pull tests
with results between a minimum 150 pounds per square inch (1,000 kPa) and 200 pounds per square
inch (1,400 kPa) may be acceptable if more than 50 percent of the substrate adhered to the back of the
dolly. A test result may be disregarded, as determined by the Engineer, if there is a valid non-statistical
reason as specified in Sections 8.4 and 8.5 of ASTM D4541. If any test fails, a minimum of 3 additional
locations in the section of the failure shall be tested, as directed by the Engineer. If any of the retests
fail, all loosely adhered or unadhered liner in the failed area, as determined by the Engineer, shall be
removed and replaced. If a host structure fails the adhesion test, one additional host structure or 10
percent of the initial number of host structures selected for testing shall be tested as directed by the
Engineer or as specified in the Special Provisions.
502-6.5 Liner Repairs. Holidays, uncured lining material, blisters, surface imperfections and
damage to the liner resulting from the adhesion test shall be repaired to a point 1 inch (25 mm) minimum
beyond the limits of the damaged area. The repair shall be 125 mils (3 mm) thick or the minimum
thickness specified in the Special Provisions. Holidays shall be primed and recoated with the same
lining system to a minimum additional thickness of 30 mils (750 µm) unless otherwise specified by the
liner manufacturer or approved by the Engineer. Blisters, uncured lining and surface imperfections shall
be completely removed and the areas recoated with appropriate lining material to 1 inch (25 mm)
minimum beyond the repair areas at a minimum thickness of 100 mils (2540 µm). Additional spark
testing shall be performed after repairs are completed.
502-7 MEASUREMENT. Manhole and structure rehabilitation will be measured by each.
502-8 PAYMENT. Payment for manhole and structure rehabilitation will be made at the Contract
Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid for each manhole or structure. The Bid price shall include
repair, resurfacing, and active infiltration elimination of the host structure; liner system; and cleaning,
inspection, testing, and repair of the installed liner system unless otherwise specified.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 543

PART 6
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
SECTION 600 - ACCESS

600-1 GENERAL. The Contractor’s operations shall cause no unnecessary inconvenience to the
public or businesses in the vicinity of the Work. The Contractor shall have no greater length or quantity
of Work under construction than can be prosecuted with a minimum of inconvenience to the public and
other contractors engaged in adjacent or related work.
The Contractor shall provide continuous and unobstructed vehicular and pedestrian access to the
adjacent properties unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or approved by Engineer.
600-2 VEHICULAR ACCESS. Vehicular access to residential driveways shall be maintained to
the property line except when necessary construction precludes such access. If backfill has been
completed to the extent that safe access may be provided and the street is opened to local traffic, the
Contractor shall immediately clear the street and driveways and provide and maintain access.
600-3 PEDESTRIAN ACCESS. Pedestrian access shall be maintained unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
Pedestrian zones and public transportation stops, as well as pedestrian crossings of the Work site at
intervals not exceeding 300 feet (90 m) shall be maintained unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
When sidewalks are closed, an alternate walkway shall be provided. Pedestrians shall not be directed
into direct conflict with vehicles operating within the Work site or other traffic. Where it is necessary to
divert pedestrians into the parking lane or a street, barricades or temporary traffic barriers shall be
provided to separate the pedestrian walkway from the adjacent traffic lane.
If crosswalk closures are necessary, the Contractor shall close only one crosswalk at a time at
intersections having four crosswalks. If two or more crosswalk closures at an intersection are necessary,
the Contractor shall submit a pedestrian detour plan and obtain approval from the Engineer before
implementation of the closure. Approval from the Engineer shall be obtained before closing any
crosswalks at intersections having fewer than four crosswalks.
Vertical changes of surface elevations in areas subject to pedestrian traffic of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) or
greater shall have a beveled edge of 12 horizontal to 1 vertical.
Walkways within the Work site shall be a minimum of 4 feet (1.2 m) in width. Obstructions within
walkways shall be illuminated during hours of darkness. The minimum vertical clearance to any
obstruction within a walkway shall be 7 feet (2.1 m).
The minimum horizontal clearance (buffer space) between walkways within the Work site and work
areas or operating equipment shall be a minimum of 5 feet (1.5 m).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
544 Greenbook 2021

SECTION 601 - TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR CONSTRUCTION

AND MAINTENANCE WORK ZONES

601-1 GENERAL. Temporary traffic control (TTC) for construction and maintenance work zones
shall conform to Part 6 of the California MUTCD, the Specifications, and the temporary traffic control
plan (TCP) if so included with the Plans or required to be prepared by the Contractor and submitted as a
Working Drawing.
The total length of the traffic control zone shall include buffer spaces, advance signing, striping
transitions, and the Work site.
Work requiring traffic lane closures shall only be performed between the hours specified in the
Special Provisions or shown on the temporary traffic control plan.
Traffic shall be permitted to pass through the Work site unless otherwise specified in the Special
Provisions or shown on the temporary traffic control plan.
TTC activities and milestones shall be shown as activities on the Contractor’s construction schedule
in accordance with 6-1.
The term “hours of darkness” used in the Specifications shall mean the hours of darkness as defined
in Division 1, Section 280, of the California Vehicle Code.
The Contractor shall conduct roadway construction operations in a manner that provides a surface
safe for vehicular traffic. Vertical changes of pavement elevations 1-1/2 inches (37.5 mm) or greater
shall have a beveled edge of 4 horizontal to 1 vertical.
Roadways adjacent to the Work site shall be kept free of obstructions or other hazards to bicyclists.
Pavement surface disruptions in marked bike lanes or routes of 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) or more shall have a
beveled edge of 8 horizontal to 1 vertical. Signs indicating the condition of the surface of the pavement
shall be posted as shown on the TCP or as specified in the Special Provisions. If the pavement surface
elevation changes are not beveled and signs are not posted, the bicycle lane or route shall be closed.
When a bicycle lane or route is closed, signing shall be installed to terminate the bike lane or route.
Signs shall be posted to advise motorists and bicyclists that the previously separated bicycle traffic will
be in the vehicular traveled way. Barricades used at the terminus or the closure shall be spaced to
prevent physical passage by bicyclists into the closed bicycle lane or route.
Lane restrictions, flagging or other operations shall not cause traffic to stop on railroad tracks.
Whenever the Work causes traffic to backup across an active railroad track, a flagger shall be provided.
Additional TTC requirements shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 545

601-2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN (TCP).

601-2.1 General. If so specified in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall prepare and submit
a TCP in accordance with 3-8.2.
The sheets of the TCP shall display the title, phase identification, name of the firm preparing the
TCP, name and stamp of the Registered Civil Engineer, approval block for each jurisdictional agency,
north arrow, sheet number, and number of sheets comprising the TCP. General notes and symbol
definitions shall be included when required.
The TCP shall graphically show the buffer spaces, lane configuration and lane width dimensions,
advance signing, sign panel dimensions, and striping details and transitions.
The TCP shall be drawn to a scale of 1 inch = 40 feet on common size plan sheets, either 11 inches x
17 inches or 2 feet x 3 feet, as dictated by the length of the Work.
The requirements in the Special Provisions shall govern the design of the proposed TCP.
601-2.2 Payment. Payment for preparation of the TCP, if so required, will be made as specified in
the Special Provisions.
601-3 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL (TTC) ZONE DEVICES.
601-3.1 General. TTC zone devices shall conform to NCHRP Report 350 criteria for TTC
crashworthy devices and the California MUTCD. Retro-reflective sheeting used on TTC devices shall
conform to ASTM D4956.
601-3.2 Categories.
601-3.2.1 Category 1. Category 1 TTC zone devices shall be defined as small, lightweight devices
weighing less than 100 pounds certified as crashworthy by crash testing or crash testing of similar
devices. Category 1 temporary traffic control zone devices include, but are not limited to, traffic cones,
plastic traffic drums, portable delineators, and channelizers.
601-3.2.2 Category 2. Category 2 TTC zone devices shall be defined as small, lightweight devices
weighing less than 100 pounds that are not expected to produce significant changes in vehicular velocity,
but could cause harm to impacting vehicles. Category 2 temporary traffic control zone devices include,
but are not limited to, barricades and portable sign supports.
601-3.2.3 Category 3. Category 3 TTC zone devices shall be defined as temporary traffic-handling
equipment and devices weighing 100 pounds or more that are expected to produce significant changes in
the vehicular velocity of impacting vehicles. Category 3 temporary traffic-handling equipment and
devices include, but are not limited to, crash cushions, impact attenuator vehicles, temporary railing,
temporary barrier, and end treatments for temporary railings and barriers.
601-3.3 Crashworthiness. Crashworthiness of TTC zone devices shall be substantiated as follows:
a) Category 1 devices purchased after October 1, 1998 shall be self-certified by the vendor. Self-
certification shall be based on crash testing, crash testing of similar devices, or years of
demonstrable safe performance. The certification shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the
start of the Work.
b) Category 2 devices shall be those listed on the FHWA’s “Accepted Crashworthy Category 2
Hardware for Work Zones” that meet NCHRP Report 350 criteria for crashworthiness. Category
2 devices must have FHWA acceptance and have been purchased after October 1, 2000. FHWA
acceptance shall be labeled with the FHWA acceptance letter number and the name of the
manufacturer prior to the start of the Work. The label shall be legible and permanently affixed
by the manufacturer. Category 2 devices without a label shall not be used on the Work.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
546 Greenbook 2021

c) Category 3 devices shall be those that have been tested in accordance with NCHRP criteria.
Category 3 devices shall be as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans or
Standard Plans.
601-3.4 Operation and Maintenance.
601-3.4.1 General. The Contractor shall be responsible for operation and maintenance of the TTC
zone devices and services. The Contractor shall patrol and monitor the Work site to ensure that the TTC
devices are in-place, properly positioned, and operational. The Contractor shall ensure that TTC devices
are repaired, replaced, and cleaned as necessary to preserve their appearance and visibility. TTC devices
that are damaged shall be repaired or replaced.
601-3.4.2 Payment. No separate or additional payment will be made for operation, maintenance,
repair, or replacement of TTC zone devices.
601-3.5 Signs and Signage.
601-3.5.1 General. Unless otherwise specified, signs shall conform to the California MUTCD.
Each sign shall consist of a base, standard or framework, and a sign panel. Sign units shall be capable of
being delivered to the Work site and placed into immediate operation.
Signage shall include all temporary signs required for the direction of traffic through or around the
Work site. Sign placement shall conform to the California MUTCD and the TCP.
Temporary “No Parking” and “No Stopping” signs shall be installed at least 24 hours before
enforcement. Temporary “No Parking” and “No Stopping” signs shall be installed and removed as
specified in the Special Provisions.
601-3.5.2 Payment. Payment for signs and signage will be made as specified in the Special
Provisions.
601-3.6 Channelizing Devices.
601-3.6.1 General. Channelizing devices shall include cones, tubular markers (delineators),
channelizers, drums, barricades, and temporary barriers. Channelizing devices shall be placed as shown
on the Plans or the TCP.
601-3.6.2 Cones, Tubular Markers and Channelizers. Cones, tubular markers or channelizers
shall be used on short-duration and short-term stationary temporary traffic control zones. Tubular
markers or channelizers shall be used on intermediate-term stationary temporary traffic control zones
and when additional visibility and stability is required.
601-3.6.3 Drums. Drums shall be used in lieu of cones or tubular markers for long-term stationary
temporary traffic control zones or as shown on the TCP.
601-3.6.4 Barricades. Barricades shall not be placed in a merging lane of traffic without advance
warning. Advance warning shall consist of a “High Level Warning Device”, arrow panel and other
appropriate delineation.
a) Type 1 and 2 barricades shall be used on local streets and sidewalks. Barricades shall be Type 1,
Type 2, or Type 3.
b) Type 1 barricades shall not be used where they may be encountered by the visually impaired
unless horizontal tie bars are provided not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from the bottom of the
barricade.
c) Type 2 barricades shall be used in major, secondary and collector streets.
d) Type 3 barricades shall be used for closing streets to through traffic and for other major
operations where the barricades must remain in place for extended periods.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 547

Barricades shall be placed such that there is no gap large enough for a vehicle to pass through, except
where necessary to provide access for local traffic or emergency vehicles. Ballasting of barricades shall
be by means of sand filled bags placed on the lower parts of the barricade frame or stays. Ballasting
shall not be placed over any retroreflectorized rail face facing traffic.
Barricades displaced or not in an upright position shall immediately be replaced or restored to their
original location, in an upright position.
601-3.6.5 Temporary Traffic Barriers and End Treatments. Temporary traffic barriers and end
treatments shall be placed as shown on the TCP. Water-filled plastic barriers shall be used within
sidewalks and bike paths. Concrete barriers shall be used within the vehicular way and bike lanes and
routes.
Temporary traffic barriers shall be placed on a firm and stable foundation. The foundation shall be
paved or graded to provide uniform bearing throughout the entire length of the barrier.
Abutting ends of adjoining segments shall be placed and maintained in alignment without offset to
each other. Segments shall be positioned straight on a tangent alignment and on a true arc on a curved
alignment. Segments shall be pinned to each adjacent segment. An impact attenuating device shall be
provided on the approach end.
If it is necessary to leave a gap between barrier segments due to equipment or special drainage features,
the gap shall be closed at all times when the Work is not actively in progress at the location of the gap.
Drilling of holes for concrete barriers shall be as shown on the Standard Plans or as specified in the
Special Provisions. Threaded rods of dowels shall be bonded in holes drilled in the existing pavement.
The bonding material used to bond the threaded rods or dowels shall conform to 215-5.7.4.
601-3.6.6 Measurement. Cones, tubular markers, channelizers, drums, and barricades will not be
measured separately for payment.
Temporary traffic barriers and end treatments will be measured as specified in the Special
Provisions.
601-3.6.7 Payment. No separate or additional payment will be made for cones, tubular markers,
channelizers, drums, and barricades. Payment will be included in the Contract Unit Price or lump sum
price in the Bid for the various Bid items.
Payment for temporary traffic barriers and end treatments will be made as specified in the Special Provisions.
601-3.7 Traffic Sign Enhancement Devices.
601-3.7.1 General. Traffic sign enhancement devices shall consist of flags, high level warning devices
(flag trees), warning lights, portable changeable message signs, arrow panels, and flashing arrow bars.
High level warning devices or flashing arrow panels shall be used at approaches to locations where
the work being performed is within or immediately adjacent to a traffic lane.
Traffic enhancement devices shall be maintained in operation.
601-3.7.2 Flags. Torn or dirty flags shall be replaced immediately.
601-3.7.3 High Level Warning Devices (“Flag Trees”). High level warning devices shall provide
advance warning of the Work site by being visible to drivers even when the Work site is obstructed from
view by vehicles or other equipment. The Contractor may use sandbags to add weight to the base or legs.
601-3.7.4 Warning Lights.
601-[Link] General. Warning lights shall be portable, powered, lens-directed, enclosed lights with
a yellow lens. Warning lights shall consist of a lighting unit, a flasher unit, visor, backplate, standard,
battery power source, and base. The components shall be assembled to form a complete self-contained

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
548 Greenbook 2021

warning light that can be delivered to the Work site and placed in immediate operation. Warning lights
may be mounted on channelizing devices or on a standard and base.
The type of warning light to be used shall be as specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the TCP.
601-[Link] Standards and Bases. Standards shall be adjustable to provide a variable
mounting height between 6 feet (1.8 m) to 10 feet (3.0 m) measured from the bottom of the base to
the center of the lens. Standards shall be securely attached to the base. Power cables shall be
multi-conductor and jacketed with neoprene and shall be of sufficient length to accommodate the
full-vertical height of the Standard.
Bases shall be large enough to accommodate a minimum of two, 12V automotive-type storage
batteries, and shall be of such shape and mass that the warning light will not roll in the event it is struck
by a vehicle or pushed over.
Standards and bases shall be finished with two applications of orange enamel conforming to color
No. 12473 of Federal Standard 595B.
601-[Link] Assemblies. Warning light assemblies shall be weatherproof and capable of operating a
minimum of 150 hours between battery recharges or other routine maintenance. Warning lights shall be
capable of use in either a steady burn or flashing mode. Lamps shall be rated at 25W for operation with a
12V battery current. The color of the light emitted shall be yellow. Lens shall glass or plastic and
conform to the requirements of ANSI D.10.1.
601-[Link] Visors and Backplates. Warning lights shall be equipped with an 8-inch (200 mm)
minimum length visor and a backplate. Visors are not required during the hours of darkness. The
interior of the visor and the front face of the backplate shall be finished with two applications of flat
black enamel conforming to 210-1.
601-[Link] Installation. Warning lights shall only be used outside of the Work site to provide
advance warning unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the TCP. Warning
lights used for advance warning shall be clearly distinguishable from the primary delineation and shall
be positioned above the normal reflectorized barricades. Warning lights shall be mounted a minimum
height of 3 feet (1 m) high measured from the bottom of the lens to the underlying surface.
Warning lights shall be used in either a steady burn or flashing mode at the Contractor’s option.
Visors will not be required during the hours of darkness. Torches and flares shall be used only in
patrolled emergency situations.
601-3.7.5 Portable Changeable Message Signs (PCMS). PCMS shall be furnished, placed,
operated and maintained at the locations shown on the Plans or TCP.
PCMS shall not be used for advertising or as a substitute for temporary traffic control signs and devices.
PCMS messages shall be approved by the Engineer.
601-3.7.6 Flashing Arrow Signs. Flashing arrow panels shall be mounted to provide a minimum of
7 feet (2.1 m) clearance between the bottom of the sign and the roadway surface.
601-3.7.7 Flashing Directional Bars. Flashing directional bars shall be vehicle-mounted. Flashing
directional bars shall be used to provide traffic control for lane closures as specified in the Special
Provisions or shown on the TCP.
601-3.7.8 Measurement. Flags, high-level warning devices, warning lights, and flashing
directional bars will not be measured separately for payment.
PCMS and flashing arrow signs will be measured as specified in the Special Provisions.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 549

601-3.7.9 Payment. No separate or additional payment will be made for flags, high-level warning
devices, warning lights, and flashing directional bars. Payment will be included in the Contract Unit
Price or lump sum price in the Bid for the various Bid items.
Payment for PCMS and flashing arrow signs will be made as specified in the Special Provisions.
601-4 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS.
601-4.1 General. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the TCP,
temporary traffic striping and pavement markings shall consist of one coat of paint and glass beads
(except black stripes). Glass beads shall conform to 214-3. Paint shall conform to 214-4.
601-4.2 Application. Unless otherwise specified, application of temporary traffic striping and
pavement markings shall conform to 314-4 and the following:
a) Yellow lines shall separate traffic flow in opposing directions.
b) White lines shall separate traffic flow in the same direction.
c) Broken lines shall be permissive.
d) Solid lines shall be restrictive.
e) Line widths indicate degree of emphasis.
f) Double lines indicate maximum restriction.
g) Centerlines shall be used to separate opposing traffic.
h) Traffic striping shall not project into or across a street intersection.
601-4.3 Removal. Removal shall conform to 314-2.
601-4.4 Measurement. Unless otherwise specified:
a) Measurement for application will be made in accordance with 314-4.3.6.
b) Measurement for removal will be made in accordance with 314-2.2.
601-4.5 Payment. Unless otherwise specified:
a) Payment for application will be made in accordance with 314-4.3.7.
b) Payment for removal will be made in accordance with 314-2.3.
601-5 TRAFFIC LANE WIDTHS AND CLEARANCES.
601-5.1 General. Traffic lanes and clearances shall conform to the requirements specified in the
Special Provisions or shown on the TCP.
601-5.2 Lane Widths. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the TCP, temporary traffic lanes
shall be at least 10 feet (3.0 m) wide. A minimum 12-foot (3.7 m)-wide traffic lane shall be provided
next to a curb or vertical drop off. When only one lane is provided in each direction, wider lanes shall
be provided to separate opposing traffic and to accommodate turning movements. A minimum 18-foot
(5.5 m)-wide lane shall be provided if parking is to be allowed.
Bicycle lanes shall have a clear width of not less than 5 feet (1.5 m). Bicycle lanes less than 5 feet
(1.5 m) wide shall be closed. If the Work site is in a bike path and requires the bike path to be closed, a
detour bike path, lane or route, with appropriate signage, shall be provided.
601-5.3 Clearances. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the TCP, clearances to obstructions
shall be as follows:
a) Two feet (600 mm) from vertical obstructions including, but not limited to, longitudinal curbs,
guardrails, or temporary traffic barriers.
b) Ten feet (3.0 m) from the edge of the traveled way to fixed objects unprotected by barriers.
When the minimum clearance to fixed objects cannot be provided, temporary barriers shall be
placed to protect the fixed object. On local streets with speed limits of 40 miles per hour (70 km/

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
550 Greenbook 2021

hour) or less, and at the Contractor’s option, temporary asphalt concrete curb may be used in lieu
of temporary traffic barriers.
c) Five feet (1.5 m) from any excavation or drop off of 2 inches (50 mm) or greater to allow
placement of temporary barriers to keep traffic out of the Work site and minimize traffic
surcharge on the excavation. When the 5-foot (1.5 m) clearance to an excavation or drop off
cannot be maintained, temporary traffic barriers shall be placed to separate vehicles, bicycles, and
pedestrians from the excavation or drop off.
If the Engineer determines that it is necessary to decrease the minimum distances specified herein to
allow for the prosecution of the Work, the Contractor shall provide such temporary traffic control
devices as required by the Engineer.
601-6 COVERING OF EXISTING TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNAL FACES.
601-6.1 General. Existing traffic signs and signal faces shall be covered as specified in the Special
Provisions or shown on the Plans or TCP. Covers shall be designed to be installed by hand without the
use of tools. The size of the cover shall closely fit and encapsulate the traffic control device.
601-6.2 Cover Material. Covers shall be made from outdoor grade, weather-resistant cloth, plastic,
or metallic material and be specially fabricated for the intended purpose. Cover material shall be of
sufficient density to block out the sign face or message so that the sign face or message is not visible to
oncoming traffic.
Signal head covers shall be a matte tan color or a contrasting color to the signal head. Covers for
pedestrian indications shall be a matte black color.
601-6.3 Installation.
601-6.3.1 General. Covers shall be secured in place with bolt snaps attached to elastic straps.
Adhesive tape shall not be used. The straps shall be permanently attached to the cover.
601-6.3.2 Vehicle Heads. The Contractor shall cover all non-functioning vehicle heads utilizing
signal head covers. No holes shall be drilled in any indications to attach the covers.
A minimum of 2 vehicle heads for each phase shall be in operation while work is being performed at
an intersection except for approved shut downs.
601-6.3.3 Pedestrian Indications. Pedestrian indications shall be covered. If audible pedestrian
signals are in place, the audible warning device shall be temporarily disabled for the crossing taken out
of service.
601-6.3.4 Pedestrian Push Buttons. Pedestrian push button message signs shall be removed,
reversed, and remounted on the pedestrian push button assembly. Pedestrian push button assembly
covers may be used instead of reversing and remounting pedestrian push button message signs.
601-6.3.5 Audible Pedestrian Signals. Audible pedestrian signals shall be disabled by temporarily
removing the load switches for the pedestrian indications within the traffic signal controller cabinet. The
pedestrian indications shall then be covered.
601-6.4 Signs. Sign covers shall be securely fastened to the sign.
601-6.5 Payment. No separate or additional payment will be made for covering of existing traffic
signs and signal faces. Payment will be included in the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid
for the various Bid items.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 551

PART 7
STREET LIGHTING AND
TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 700 - MATERIALS

700-1 GENERAL. The following specify the requirements for materials to be installed in street
lighting and traffic signal systems.
The Contractor shall submit, prior to acceptance of the Contract, the manufacturer’s warranties,
guaranties, instruction sheets and parts lists supplied for materials used in the Work.
700-2 NOT USED.
700-3 COMMON COMPONENTS
700-3.1 General. Subsection 700-3 specifies the requirements for components common to both
street lighting and traffic signal systems. All materials furnished and installed shall be new, except
materials shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions to be re-used.
700-3.2 Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers. Anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A307. Each
anchor bolt shall be round, have a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) of thread, and be provided with 2 nuts
and 2 flat 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick washers.
Nuts shall be symmetrically formed with the hole centered and at right angles to the face. Nuts shall
be tapped to fit a corresponding thread on the anchor bolt such that the nut can be run the entire length of
the thread by the fingers without undue forcing, and without play or rocking.
Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be galvanized by the hot-dip process in accordance with 210-3,
or be cadmium plated with Type NS coating conforming to ASTM A165.
700-3.3 Standards.
700-3.3.1 General. Standards shall have an aluminum identification plate attached with stainless
steel rivets or screws as shown on the Plans. Each Standard shall have a hand hole in the base and a
hand hole cover. The hand hole shall conform to the details shown on the Standard Plans. The hand
hole cover shall be securely attached to the Standard with tamper-resistant hardware unless otherwise
specified.
700-3.3.2 Straightness. For street lighting and pedestrian Standards the maximum deviation shall
not exceed the tolerance shown in Table 700-3.3.2 when measured with the Standard in the vertical
position. For traffic signal Standards the maximum deviation shall not exceed the tolerance shown in
Table 700-3.3.2 when measured with the Standard in the horizontal position.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
552 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 700-3.3.2
Length of Standard – Excluding Base Maximum Allowable Deviation From
1
Over Equal to or Less String Line
--- 21 feet (6.4 m) 1/2 inch (12.5 mm)
21 feet (6.4 m) 25 feet (7.9 m) 3/4 inch (19 mm)
25 feet (7.9 m) 35 feet (10.7 m) 1 inch (25 mm)
35 feet (10.7 m) 40 feet (12.2 m) 1-1/4 inches (32 mm)
40 feet (12.2 m) --- As specified in the Special Provisions.
1. The maximum deviation shall be measured from a string line on the face of the Standard, in a plane passing through the longitudinal axis.

Short deviations shall not exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm) from the centerline of the Standard for each 5 feet
(1.5 m) of length.
Offsets or jogs due to mold extensions or joints shall not exceed 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in thickness
along the surface of the Standard.
700-3.3.3 Metal Standards.
700-[Link] General. The top of each Standard shall be equipped with an ornamental cap securely
held in place by a 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter hex head machine bolt. Provisions shall be made for
substituting a 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter steel insulator pin. The cap and cap support surface shall have
sufficient strength to transfer to the Standard, from a point 5 inches (125 mm) above the top of the cap, a
horizontal load of 950 pounds (4,250 N).
Metal Standards shall a) withstand, without permanent deformation, a maximum horizontal load of
950 pounds (4,250 N) applied to the center of the cap, and b) withstand, without exceeding a deflection
of 2-5/16 inches (58 mm), a normal horizontal load of 370 pounds (1,650 N) applied to the cap.
Exposed edges of plates that comprise the base assembly shall be finished smooth. Exposed corners
shall be rounded unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Slots or drilled holes shall have a tolerance of 0
to + 1/8 inch (3 mm).
Metal Standards shall be equipped with anchor bolt covers made of metal of the same type as that
used for the shafts unless otherwise specified. Anchor bolt covers shall be equipped with all necessary
fittings and hardware for securing to the Standard.
700-[Link] Steel Standards. Unless otherwise specified, steel Standards shall be fabricated from
sheet steel of weldable grade having a minimum yield strength, after fabrication, of 40,200 pounds per
square inch (276 MPa). When a single-ply 5/16 inch (8 mm) thick steel Standard is specified, a 2-ply
steel Standard with an equivalent section modulus may be substituted unless otherwise specified. Test
reports that verify conformance to the required minimum yield strength shall be submitted to the
Engineer.
Steel Standards may be fabricated from full-length sheets or shorter sections. Each section shall be
fabricated from not more than 2 pieces of sheet steel. Where 2 pieces are used, the longitudinal welded
seams shall be directly opposite each other. When the sections are butt welded together, the longitudinal
welded seams on adjacent sections shall be placed to form continuous straight seams from the base to
the top. In addition, butt welded sections shall be strengthened by inserting a welded sleeve at each
joint. The sleeve shall be fabricated from steel 1/8 inch (3 mm) nominal thickness or thicker of the same
composition as the steel used in the Standard. The sleeve shall have a minimum length of 1 inch (25
mm). The sleeve shall be centered at the joint and have the same taper as the Standard such that the
outside of the sleeve is in full contact throughout its length and circumference. The weld metal at the

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 553

transverse joint shall extend to the sleeve. No transverse joint shall occur within 3 inches (75 mm) of
mast arm fittings.
Welds shall be continuous and conform to AWS D1.1. Welds joining the shaft to the base plate shall
be as shown on the Standard Plans. However, alternative weld joint details may be approved by the
Engineer. Approval of alternative weld joint details will be contingent upon the proposed weld joint
passing both weld procedure and nondestructive testing as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
Longitudinal welds in steel tubular sections may be tested by the Agency in accordance with
California Test 664. The sampling frequency will be determined by the Engineer. Welds may be made
by the electric resistance welding process. Exposed welds shall be ground flush with the base metal.
Steel Standards shall be galvanized by the hot-dip process in accordance with 210-3, or be cadmium
plated with Type NS coating conforming to ASTM A165. If so specified, steel Standards shall be
painted. Paint shall conform to 210-1. Painting shall conform to 310.
700-[Link] Aluminum Standards. Aluminum Standards shall be fabricated from seamless tubing
conforming to “6063-T6 wrought aluminum alloy of the Specifications of the Aluminum Association” or
the requirements shown in Table 700-[Link].

TABLE 700-[Link]
Item ASTM
Castings B26/B26M
Luminaire Arm B490-90a
Spun Shaft B241/B241M
Square Extruded Shaft B429

The wall thickness of the shaft shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch (6 mm). Aluminum Standards shall
be supplied with a mill finish and conform to ASTM B209/B209M.
700-3.3.4 Fiberglass Standards. Fiberglass Standards shall consist of fiberglass-reinforced
thermosetting plastic poles. Fiberglass Standards shall be hollow, tapered or with tapered sections, non-
conductive and chemically inert. Fiberglass Standards shall conform to the AASHTO “Standard
Specification for Structural Support for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals” and ANSI
requirements. The Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Compliance with each shipment. The
certificate shall include a copy of all applicable test reports. The certificate shall certify that the
Standards were manufactured in accordance with an Agency-approved testing and quality control
program.
Fiberglass Standards shall be constructed of continuous fiberglass filaments combined with
thermosetting polyester and ultraviolet-resistant resin. The fiberglass and resin ratio shall contain at
least 65 percent glass and 35 percent resin by weight. The resin shall be pigmented as specified and be
of uniform color throughout the entire body. The glass filament shall be helically wound under tension
at angles to provide axial strength. Hand hole, conduit entrance opening, and mast arm connection areas
shall be reinforced. The finish shall be smooth.
Fiberglass Standards shall be flame resistant when tested in accordance with ASTM D635.
Fiberglass Standards shall be either direct burial or have an anchor base as shown on the Standard
Plans. The base shall be bonded to the pole with an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer, and
coated with an aliphatic-type acrylic-modified polyurethane finish. Each fiberglass Standard shall be
equipped with a removable aluminum or galvanized steel pole top cap.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
554 Greenbook 2021

An aliphatic-type acrylic-modified polyurethane coating shall be applied to the exterior. The coating
shall be semi-gloss, weather resistant and match the color of the resin specified. The coating shall have
a minimum of 3 mils (75 µm) dry film thickness. A 1 quart (1 L) can of the coating that matches the
specified color shall be furnished to the Engineer. The coating shall be tested by the manufacturer for
adhesion in accordance with ASTM D3359, Method A and have a scale rating of 5A. The adhesion
testing shall be conducted before and after the manufacturer’s accelerated weathering evaluation. The
Contractor shall submit a copy of the test results in accordance with 3-8.
Finished surfaces shall be capable of withstanding a minimum of 2,500 hours of accelerated
weathering when tested, in accordance with ASTM G154. Testing lamps shall be UV-B (313 nm
wavelength). The testing cycle shall consist of 4 hours of ultraviolet (UV) exposure at 140°F (60°C),
followed by 4 hours of condensate exposure at 100°F (40°C). After testing, the finished surface shall
exhibit the following:
a) Fiber Exposure – None
b) Crazing – None
c) Checking – None
d) Chalking – Very slight
e) Change in color – May dull slightly.
Each Standard shall be spiral-wrapped in its entirety with a weather-proof wrap for protection during
shipping and storage.
700-3.4 Mast Arms. Mast arms shall be fabricated from the same material specified for the
adjoining Standard, except for fiberglass Standards. Mast arms for fiberglass Standards shall be
fabricated from aluminum. Mast arm fabrication shall conform to 700-[Link] or 700-[Link]. Mast
arms shall be smoothly curved to the approximate configuration shown on the Standard Plans. Mast
arms shall have an aluminum identification plate attached with stainless steel rivets or screws, as shown
on the Standard Plans.
Exposed welds, except fillet and fatigue resistant welds on top of the mast arms shall be ground flush
with the base metal.
Mast arms shall be furnished complete with all necessary fittings and hardware for attachment to the
adjoining Standard.
700-3.5 Conduit.
700-3.5.1 General. Conduit size and material shall be as shown on the Plans.
700-3.5.2 Rigid Metallic Conduit. Rigid metallic conduit and conduit fittings shall be galvanized
by the hot-dip, electrodepositing, or metallizing process in accordance with 210-3. Conduit shall
conform to the UL Standard for Rigid Metallic Conduit, Publication UL 6, and shall bear the UL label
on each length. The zinc coating shall be tested in accordance with ASTM A239.
700-3.5.3 Galvanized Pipe. Galvanized pipe used as conduit shall conform to the following:
a) ASTM A53 Grade A.
b) Only standard lengths shall be supplied to the Work site.
c) Need not be UL-listed.
700-3.5.4 Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall conform to the UL
Standard for Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit, Publication UL 651 (PVC Schedule 80) and UL 651B
(HDPE). Rigid non-metallic conduit connections shall be of the solvent-weld-type.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 555

700-3.6 Pull Tape or Rope. Pull tape or rope shall be as specified and used to install wires or
cables. Pull tape shall consist of a flat, woven, lubricated, soft-fiber polyester tape with a minimum
tensile strength of 1,800 pounds (8,000 N) and shall have a painted sequential measurement marking at
least every 3 feet (1 m).
Pull rope shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter polyethylene rope with a minimum tensile strength of
1,800 pounds (8,000 N).
700-3.7 Pull Boxes. Pull boxes, covers, and extensions shall be as shown on the Standard Plans
unless otherwise specified.
Pull box covers for street lighting systems shall be inscribed “STREET LIGHTING HIGH VOLTAGE.”
Pull box covers for traffic signal systems, or combined traffic signal and multiple-circuit street
lighting systems shall be inscribed “TRAFFIC SIGNAL.”
Pull box covers for underground service points, where both traffic signals and street lighting jointly
occupy the same box, shall be inscribed “TS-SL.”
When a ballast, transformer or other device is to be placed in a non-metallic pull box, the pull box
shall be provided with recesses for a hanger.
700-3.8 Splice Insulation.
700-3.8.1 General. Splice insulation shall be tape or heat-shrink tubing unless otherwise specified.
700-3.8.2 Splice Insulation Tape and Pads. Splice insulation tape shall consist of layers of vinyl
chloride electrical insulating tape conforming to ASTM D2301, Type I.
Low-voltage tape shall be UL or ETL-listed and shall be the following types:
a) Self-fusing, oil and flame-resistant, synthetic rubber.
b) Pressure-sensitive, adhesive, polyvinyl chloride, 150 µm minimum thickness.
Tape for insulating splices in high-voltage (over 600V) circuits shall be designed for use on 5kV
circuits and shall be resistant to ozone, corrosion and water. Insulating pads shall be composed of a
laminated 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thickness of electrical grade polyvinyl chloride and a 1/8 inch (3 mm)
thickness of butyl splicing compound with removable liner.
700-3.8.3 Heat-Shrink Tubing. Heat-shrink tubing shall be medium or heavy wall thickness,
irradiated polyolefin tubing containing an adhesive mastic inner wall. The minimum wall thickness
prior to contraction shall be 1/32 inch (800 µm). When heated, the inner wall shall melt and fill all
crevices and interstices of the object being covered while the outer wall shrinks to form a waterproof
insulation. Each end of the tube or open end of the end cap of heat-shrink tubing shall, after contraction,
overlap the conductor insulation at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Heat-shrink tubing shall conform to the
requirements of UL 468D and ANSI C119.1 for extruded insulated tubing at 600V. Heat-shrink tubing
shall also conform to the following requirements:
a) Shrinkage Ratio: 33 percent, maximum, of supplied diameter when heated to 257°F (125°C) and
allowed to cool to 77°F (25°C).
b) Dielectric Strength: 140kV per 3/8 inch (9.5 mm), minimum.
c) Resistivity: 1013 Ω-mm, minimum.
d) Tensile Strength: 2000 pounds per square inch (14 MPa), minimum.
e) Operating Temperature: –40°F to 194°F (–40°C to 90°C) [275°F (135°C) Emergency].
f) Water Absorption: 0.5 percent, maximum.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
556 Greenbook 2021

700-3.9 Bonding and Grounding. Bonding jumpers shall be copper wire or copper braid of the
same cross sectional area as No. 6 AWG conductor for multiple circuit lighting systems and No. 8 AWG
conductor or larger for series and all other street lighting and traffic signal systems. The cross sectional
area of the jumper shall match the cross sectional area of the conductors in the circuit. Equipment
grounding conductors shall be color coded to code requirements or shall be bare.
Bonding bushings to be installed on metal conduit shall be of the galvanized or zinc alloy type.
Ground electrodes shall be one-piece, 100-inch (2.5 m) long galvanized steel rod or pipe no less than
1 inch (25 mm) in diameter, or copper-coated (minimum thickness of rod coating 10 mils (250 µm))
steel rod not less than 1/2 inch in diameter by 8 feet long (12.5 mm in diameter by 2.4 m long).
700-3.10 Services. Service conduit shall conform to the requirements of the serving utility and shall
not be less than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter.
Where a kilowatt-hour meter is required, a meter socket with sealing ring, as approved by the serving
utility, shall be furnished and installed. Where a meter socket is installed, the meter enclosure shall be
provided with factory installed test bypass facilities as required by the serving utility.
Service equipment enclosures shall be galvanized or, if so specified, provided with a factory applied
rust resistant prime coat and finish coat.
700-3.11 Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers shall be of the quick-break type, capable of either
automatic or manual operation, and listed by UL or ETL. The operating mechanism shall be enclosed
and trip-free from the operating handle on overload. Circuit breakers shall be trip-indicating, have the
frame size plainly marked, and the trip rating clearly indicated on the operating handle. Overload
tripping breakers shall not be influenced by an ambient temperature range from 0°F (–18°C) to 122°F
(50°C). Multiple-pole breakers shall be the internal-trip-type.
700-4 STREET LIGHTING SYSTEM MATERIALS.
700-4.1 Reinforced Concrete Standards.
700-4.1.1 General. Shop Drawings and a concrete mix design shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8.
Reinforced concrete Standards shall have a uniform color and surface appearance.
Reinforced concrete Standards shall be constructed of pre-stressed, centrifugally spun, black and
white marble aggregate or natural exposed aggregate, Portland cement concrete, and be either the direct
burial or anchor base type. The cross section shall not deviate more than 3/16 inch (5 mm) from the
shape and dimensions shown on the Standard Plans or approved Shop Drawings. The length shall not
deviate more than 1 percent of the total length or a maximum of 3 inches (75 mm) from the dimensions
shown on the Standard Plans or approved Shop Drawings. The maximum deviation from a string line at
any point shall not exceed 1/32 inch per foot (2.6 mm/m) of length. The maximum deviation from a
string line on the face in a plane passing through the longitudinal axis shall not exceed the tolerance
shown in Table 700-3.3.2.
A central opening or duct shall be formed throughout the entire length. The opening or duct shall be 1-1/4
inches (32 mm) in diameter unless otherwise shown on the Standard Plans or approved Shop Drawings. The
opening or duct shall be free from sharp projections or edges which might damage wire or cable. The base
shall be cored to the dimensions shown on the Standard Plans or approved Shop Drawings.
Reinforced concrete Standards used with post-top luminaires shall be terminated with a post-top
adapter with a tenon.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 557

700-4.1.2 Reinforcement. Reinforced concrete Standards shall be reinforced with at least 4 pre-
stressed steel strands. Each pre-stressed steel strand shall consist of an uncoated 7-wire stress relieved
strand conforming to 303-3.3. Each strand shall be mechanically anchored to the base plate or base-
reinforcing cage depending on the type of base specified. Strands shall be pre-tensioned to develop the
specified design strength. However, in no case shall the stress in the strands immediately after transfer
exceed 70 percent of the minimum specified ultimate strength of the strands. Deformed bars may be
used in addition to the pre-stressed strands depending on the size and loading.
Longitudinal reinforcing shall be spirally wrapped with No. 11 AWG (3 mm) or larger steel wire on
a variable pitch, dependent upon the loading. The maximum pitch shall not exceed 6 inches (150 mm).
Transformer bases cast integral with the shaft shall be reinforced with deformed steel bars securely
attached to the base anchor lugs or plate and pre-stressing cables.
Four galvanized deformed bar studs at least 1 foot (300 mm) long shall be extended 1 inch (25 mm)
above the top for attachment of a bracket arm or tenon when required. Metal components shall conform
to the requirements shown in Table 700-4.1.2.

TABLE 700-4.1.2
Material ASTM
Pre-stressed Steel A416
Deformed Bar A615 Grade 40 or Grade 60/A706
Base Plate A36
Base Anchor Lugs A36

700-4.1.3 Casting. Casting shall be in rigid steel molds such that the relief in the design is sharp
and distinct. Longitudinal steel reinforcement shall be securely anchored to the top and bottom of the
mold plates and provide 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum of concrete cover except within 2 feet (600 mm) of
the top where the minimum cover shall be 5/8 inch (16 mm).
Standards shall be cured in their molds until the concrete has attained a set sufficiently hard to
prevent deformation or slipping of cable strands.
After the mold cure is complete, the remaining cure shall conform to 207-2.7.
After sufficient curing, the entire outside surface shall be blasted to remove cement laitance and
develop the surface texture.
700-4.1.4 Finish. The finish shall be free of cracks or crazing, rock pockets or any discoloration or
ridges and shall have a uniform surface (without objectionable mold marks) and texture throughout the
entire length.
Surface defects extending less than 5/8 inch (16 mm) in the shell may be repaired without the prior
approval of the Engineer. The repair shall be made by a method that will produce a permanent bond and
a surface that blends into the color and surface appearance of the remainder. Surface defects extending
greater than 5/8 inch (16 mm) into the shell shall not be repaired prior to inspection by the Engineer.
Standards containing voids or insufficient cover over pre-stressing cables, reinforcing steel or a blocked
central opening or duct will not be accepted.
700-4.1.5 Acceptance. Reinforced concrete Standards shall be labeled or marked in a permanent
fashion to indicate the manufacturer, and month and year of fabrication. Markings shall be located
within 2 feet (600 mm) of the bottom but not on the hand-hole cover. Markings shall be visible through
the hand hole opening.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
558 Greenbook 2021

A lot shall be defined as 100 Standards or less of the same design, produced in sequence on
consecutive production Days, and which bear the specified markings. The Standards composing each lot
shall be uniform in color and surface appearance. A new lot number shall be assigned if there is any
change in the size, type, or spacing of reinforcing or pre-stressing steel, concrete mix, or curing method.
The frequency of sampling and testing, and basis of acceptance, shall be as specified in the Special
Provisions. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, at least 5 Days prior to any
contemplated change in supplier or source of raw materials, and shall obtain approval of any changes
before the Standards are delivered.
700-4.2 Wire/Conductors.
700-4.2.1 General. Wire shall be a single strand of drawn metal that may or may not be insulated.
Conductors shall be single (solid) or multiple (stranded) strands of metal that are insulated. Cable shall
be multiple wires or conductors that are insulated and enclosed in an insulating cable jacket. Copper
wire shall conform to ASTM B3 and B8. Wire sizes shall be based on the American Wire Gage (AWG).
The wire diameter shall not be less than 98 percent of the specified AWG diameter.
Conductors shall have clear, distinctive and permanent markings on the outer surface throughout the
entire length showing the manufacturer’s name or trademark, insulation type letter designation, wire
size, and voltage rating.
Conductor insulation shall be a solid color or basic colors with a permanent colored stripe. Solid or
basic colors shall be homogenous throughout the full depth of insulation except for the clear nylon layer,
if present.
700-4.2.2 Conductors for Series Circuits. Conductors for series street lighting systems shall be
No. 8 AWG solid copper wire. Wire shall be insulated, covered with 110 mils (2800 µm) of black
polyethylene insulation conforming to Standard S-61-402 of the Insulated Power Cable Engineers
Association, and designated for operation at 5,000V. The Contractor shall submit a Certificate of
Compliance, for 5,000V (6.6A) series lighting conductors.
Where isolating transformers or external (remote) ballasts are used, the secondary wires in the
Standard from the transformer or external (remote) ballast to the luminaire shall be insulated No. 10
AWG solid copper wire. The insulation for these wires shall be black and rated and UL approved for
600V operation. The insulation shall be standard THW or THWN/THHN grade polyvinyl chloride,
conforming to the applicable provisions of ASTM D2219 and D2220.
700-4.2.3 Conductors for Multiple Circuits. Conductors for multiple circuits shall be of the type,
size and insulation colors shown in Table 700-4.2.3 or on the Plans. The insulation shall be THW or
THHN/THWN grade polyvinyl chloride, conforming to the applicable provisions of ASTM D2219 and
D2220. At any point the minimum thickness of any THW or THHN/THWN insulation shall be 55 mils
(1400 µm) for conductor sizes No. 14 AWG to No. 10 AWG inclusive and 59 mils (1500 µm) for No. 8
AWG to No. 2 AWG inclusive.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 559

TABLE 700-4.2.3
Identification
Multiple Circuits Function Insulation Colors Band Size
c
Base Stripe
a Symbols
Ungrounded Line 1 Black None NBR 8
Multiple Service
(Stranded) Ungrounded Line 2 Red None NBR 8
Grounded/Neutral White None NBR 8
Street Lighting Ungrounded Line 1 (odd) Black None NBR 8
b
Pull Box to Pull Box Ungrounded Line 2 (even) Red None NBR 8
(Stranded)
Grounded/Neutral White None NBR 8
Street Lighting Ungrounded Line 1 (odd) Black None NBR 10
b
Pull Box to Luminaire Ungrounded Line 2 (even) Red None NBR 10
(Solid) Grounded/Neutral White None NBR 10
Lighting Control Ungrounded to PEU Black None C1 10
From Luminaires with
Switching leg of PEU to terminal strip. Red None C2 10
PEU’s to Luminaires
without PEU’s Switching leg of PEU to unswitched d
d Purple None NBR 8/10
(Solid) Luminaire .
NBR = No Band Required PEU = Photoelectric Unit
a. Band conductors in each pull box and near ends of termination point.
b. Both wires between external high intensity discharge (HD) ballast lamp shall be black No. 10 AWG Solid wire.
c. “S” if circuit is switched on line side of service equipment by utility.
d. No. 8 AWG Stranded conductor from pull box to pull box and No. 8 AWG solid wire in the Standards.

700-4.3 Splicing Units and Terminal Blocks.

700-4.3.1 Disconnecting Splice Connector (High Voltage).
700-[Link] Connector Case. The connector case or shell shall be formed of neoprene or plastic
having a volume resistivity not less the 3.94 x 1012 ohms per inch (1013 ohms per cm). The diameter
shall not exceed 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) and the length shall not exceed 10 inches (250 mm). The case
shall withstand a load of 200 pounds (900 N) applied normal to the axis of the case without rupture,
cracking, or permanent deformation.
Each half of the case shall lock together with screw threads capable of forming a watertight joint and
be separated by a neoprene “O” ring under compression when the connector is assembled. The wires
that are to be spliced shall attach to the connector by a self threading lug made from a No. 8 AWG solid
copper wire. The connecting lug shall be slotted at 90 degrees to provide a pressure fit between the male
and female parts. Metal parts shall be cadmium plated.
Each half of the case shall be completely filled with a sealing compound and be held in place with a
wire/cable entrance plug designed to accommodate any cable having an overall diameter of between
11/32 inch (9 mm) and 5/8 inch (16 mm).
700-[Link] Connector Case Sealing Compound. The sealing compound shall be a viscous paste
composed of oil and inert mineral filler waterproof and resistant to oxidation, weathering and biological
attack. The volume resistivity shall not be less than 3.94 x 1011 ohms per inch (1012 ohms per cm).
When exposed to air for 18 hours in a film 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick at a temperature of 70°F ± 2°F
(21°C ± 1.1°C) absorption of water shall not exceed 0.02 fluid ounces per square inch (0.6 mL/cm2) of
surface area in contact with the water.
When allowed to dry in contact with air, the lineal shrinkage of the exposed surface shall not exceed
0.2 percent.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
560 Greenbook 2021

700-[Link] Electrical Characteristics. When 2 wire/cable ends are connected and sealed in the
connector case with sealing compound, the unit shall sustain an electrical stress of 11,000V at 70°F ± 2°
F (21°C ± 1.1°C), without breakdown, after immersion in water for 18 hours.
700-4.3.2 Fused Splice Connectors. Fused splice connectors shall have no exposed metal parts
except for the head of a stainless steel assembly screw. The head of the stainless steel assembly screw
shall be recessed a minimum of 1/32 inch (800 µm) below the top of a plastic boss which surrounds the
head.
Fused splice connectors shall completely enclose the fuse and protect the fuse against damage from
water and weather. The contact between the fuse and the fuse holder shall be the spring-pressure type.
Fuses shall be standard midget, ferrule type, with “slow blow” feature.
700-4.3.3 Terminal Blocks. Terminal blocks shall have a minimum of 12 positions with terminals
rated at No. 8 AWG or larger to accept the field wires shown on the Plans.
700-4.4 High Pressure Sodium Luminaires. High-pressure sodium luminaires shall be the
enclosed cutoff-type with a horizontal burning lamp unless otherwise specified. Each luminaire shall
consist of a housing, a reflector, a refractor or lens, a lamp socket, an internal (integral) ballast, a starter,
a terminal strip and a lamp.
Each mast arm-mounted luminaire shall be furnished without a photoelectric unit receptacle unless
otherwise specified. If a photoelectric unit receptacle is included, a rain-tight shorting cap shall be
installed. If a luminaire housing is provided with a hole for the receptacle, the hole shall be closed,
covered and sealed with weatherproof material.
The housing shall be fabricated from aluminum. Housings that are painted shall withstand a 1,000-
hour salt spray test in accordance with ASTM B117. Other metal parts of the housing shall be fabricated
from metal that equals or exceeds the corrosion resistance and finish of the metal used for the housing.
The housing shall be equipped with a slip-fitter capable of mounting on a 2-inch (50 mm) pipe tenon and
of being adjusted 5 degrees from the axis of the tenon. The clamping brackets of the slip-fitter shall not
bottom out on the housing bosses when adjusted within the ± 5 degree range.
No part of the slip-fitter mounting brackets shall develop a permanent set in excess of 1/64 inch (400
µm) when the 4, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) diameter cap screws used for mounting are tightened to 9.62 foot-
pounds (13 J).
Luminaires to be mounted on horizontal mast arms shall be tested in accordance with California Test
611, and be capable of withstanding cyclic loading in (G = Acceleration of Gravity):
a) a vertical plane at a minimum peak acceleration level of 3.0 G peak-to-peak sinusoidal loading
(same as 1.5 G peak) with the internal ballast removed, for a minimum of 2,000,000 cycles
without failure of any luminaire parts,
b) a horizontal plane perpendicular to the direction of the mast arm at a minimum peak acceleration
of 1.5 G peak-to-peak sinusoidal loading (same as 0.75 G peak) with the internal ballast installed,
for a minimum of 2,000,000 cycles without failure of any luminaire parts, and
c) a vertical plane at a minimum peak acceleration level of 1.0 G peak-to-peak sinusoidal loading
(same as 0.5 G peak) with the internal ballast installed, for a minimum of 2,000,000 cycles
without failure of any luminaire parts.
The surface of each reflector shall be specular and protected by either an anodized finish or a silicate film.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 561

Each refractor or lens shall be mounted in a frame that is hinged to the housing and secured with a
spring-loaded latch. Each refractor shall be made of glass or polycarbonate plastic. Each lens shall be
made of heat and impact resistant glass.
The optical system, consisting of the reflector, refractor or lens, lamp socket and lamp, shall be
contained in a sealed chamber. The seal shall consist of a gasket between the reflector and refractor or
lens and a gasket between the reflector and lamp socket. The chamber shall have provisions for a
filtered flow of air in and out due to lamp heat. Filtering shall be accomplished by either a separate filter
or a filtering gasket.
Each lamp socket shall be a porcelain enclosed mogul-multiple type. The shell shall contain integral
lamp grips to assure electrical contact under conditions of normal vibration. The socket shall be
mounted in the luminaire in a manner to permit pre-setting a variety of specified light distribution
patterns. The socket shall be rated for 1500W, 600V, and for a 4kV pulse.
When the ballast, starter and terminal strip are mounted on a down-opening door, the door shall be
hinged and secured to the luminaire separately from the refractor or flat lens frame. The door shall be
removable and replaceable. The door shall be secured to the housing in a manner to prevent its
accidental opening when the refractor or flat lens frame is opened.
Field conductors connected to the luminaire shall terminate on a barrier type terminal block secured
to the housing. Terminal screws shall be captive and equipped with wire grips for conductors up to No.
6 AWG. Each terminal position shall be clearly identified.
The minimum light distribution for each luminaire shall be as shown on the isolux diagrams on the
Plans. The maximum brightness of each cutoff luminaire, with the lamp indicated, shall be as shown in
Table 700-4.4 (A).

TABLE 700-4.4 (A)

2
Lamp ANSI Code No. Lamp Wattage Maximum Brightness (cd/m )
S55 150 140
S66 200 140
S50 250 175
S67 310 210
S51 400 260

Brightness readings specified are based on the use of a brightness meter with an acceptance angle of
1.5 degrees. When measured on the 90-degree and 270-degree lateral angle line, the maximum
brightness shall not exceed the required brightness when the meter is located at a horizontal distance of
120 feet (37 m) and a vertical distance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) between the luminaire and the meter, or at an
angle of 3 degrees-35 minutes from the horizontal to the line between the luminaire and the meter.
Measurements shall be made from both the 90-degree line and the 270-degree line and averaged. The
lamp for each test shall be operated at the wattage necessary to produce the light output shown in Table
700-4.4 (B).
TABLE 700-4.4 (B)
Lamp Wattage Lumens
150 16,000
200 22,000
250 27,000
310 37,000
400 50,000

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
562 Greenbook 2021

700-4.5 Lamp Ballasts.

700-4.5.1 General. The input voltage for ballasts and ballast types shall be as specified. The
ballast shall be plainly marked as to its operating voltage and wattage characteristics. Noise generated
by the ballast or in combination with the starting aid shall be minimized. The ballast, including starting
aid, shall incorporate protection against normal lamp failure modes. Ballasts for luminaires to be
mounted on mast arms, brackets or lowering assemblies shall be located within the luminaire housing.
Ballasts shall be designed for the type, characteristics and wattage of the lamp it is to operate and
shall provide the lamp starting and waveforms, voltage and current specified in the Special Provisions.
Ballasts shall also be designed to operate under outdoor conditions, either mounted internally (integral)
within the luminaire or lighting fixture or mounted externally (remote) to the luminaire. Ballasts shall
have a design life of not less than 100,000 hours. Ballasts shall provide reliable starting and operation at
ambient temperatures down to –22°F (–30°C) for the rated life of the lamp.
Ballasts shall be designed for continuous operation at ambient air temperatures from –4°F (–20°C) to
149°F (65°C) without reducing the rated life. Ballasts shall be designed to operate for a minimum of
180 cycles of 12 hours on and 12 hours off, with the lamp circuit in an open or short-circuited condition
and without a measurable reduction in the operating requirements specified in 700-4.4.
Heat-generating components shall be mounted so as to use the portion of the luminaire they are
mounted on as a heat sink. Capacitors shall be located as far as practicable from heat-generating
components or shall be thermally shielded to limit the case temperature to 167°F (75°C).
Transformers and inductors shall be resin-impregnated for protection against moisture. Capacitors,
except those in starting aids, shall be encased in metal and hermetically sealed.
Ballasts shall be tested in accordance with ANSI C82.6-1980.
700-4.5.2 Internal Ballasts. Each internal ballast shall consist of separate components, each of
which shall be capable of being easily replaced. A starting aid which is encapsulated will be considered
as a single component. Each component shall be provided with screw terminals, NEMA tab connectors
or a single multi-circuit connector. Conductor terminals shall be identified as to the component terminal
to which they are connected.
Internal ballasts shall be tested within the luminaire and shall be rated at a minimum temperature of
221°F (105°C).
700-4.5.3 Remote Ballasts. Ballasts to be located remote (external) from the luminaire shall be the
submersible-type and shall conform to 700-4.8.3. All components, including starting aids, shall be
enclosed in a single housing. Ballast leads shall extend a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) from the
housing. Steel housings shall be galvanized or painted. Ballast housings shall be clearly labeled to
indicate lamp type, lamp wattage and input voltage.
700-4.5.4 Starting Aids. Starting aids, if required, shall be interchangeable between ballasts of the
same wattage and manufacturer without adjustment.
700-4.5.5 High Pressure Sodium Lamp - Constant Wattage (CW) or Constant Wattage Auto-
Regulator (CWA) – Ballasts. CW and CWA ballasts shall have a ballast characteristic curve which
intersects both of the lamp-voltage limit lines between the wattage limit lines and remains between the
wattage limit lines throughout the full-range of lamp voltage. This requirement shall be met not only at
the rated input voltage of the ballast, but also at the lowest and highest input voltage that the ballast is
rated. Throughout the rated lifetime of the lamp, the ballast curve shall fall within the limits of the
specified lamp voltage and wattage.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 563

700-4.5.6 Regulator Type Ballasts.

700-[Link] General. Regulator type ballasts shall be the lag-type or lead-type and conform to the
following requirements:
a) For nominal input voltage and lamp voltage, the ballast design center shall not vary more than
7.5 percent from the rated lamp wattage.
b) Ballasts shall be designed such that a capacitance variance of ± 6 percent will not cause more
than a ± 8 percent variation in lamp wattage regulation throughout the rated lamp life for nominal
input voltage.
c) The lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.8 for input voltage variation of ± 10 percent at
any lamp voltage from initial through life.
700-[Link] Lag-Type. Lag-type regulator ballasts shall have the primary and secondary windings
electrically isolated and, when operated with the appropriate lamp, conform to the following
requirements:
a) The power factor shall be not less than 90 percent throughout the life of the lamp at nominal line
voltage with a nominally rated reference lamp.
b) Lamp wattage regulation spread at any lamp voltage from nominal through life shall not vary by
more than 18 percent for a ± 10 percent input voltage variation.
700-[Link] Lead-Type. Lead-type regulator CWA ballasts shall, when operated with the
appropriate lamp, conform to the following requirements:
a) The power factor shall be not less than 90 percent when the ballast is operated at nominal line
voltage with a nominally rated reference lamp.
b) The lamp wattage regulation spread at any lamp voltage from nominal through life shall not vary
by more than 30 percent for ± 10 percent input voltage variation.
700-4.5.7 Autotransformer or Reactor-Type Ballasts. Non-regulating reactor, autotransformer, or
high-reactance ballasts shall, when operated with the appropriate lamp, conform to the following
requirements:
a) The power factor shall be not less than 90 percent when the ballast is operated at nominal line
voltage with a nominally rated reference lamp.
b) The lamp wattage regulation spread at any lamp voltage from nominal through life shall not vary
by more than 25 percent for ± 5 percent input voltage variation.
c) For nominal input voltage and lamp voltage, the ballast design center shall not vary more than
7.5 percent from rated lamp watts.
d) The lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.8 for an input voltage variation of ± 5 percent at
any lamp voltage from initial through life.
700-4.5.8 Physical Requirements. External leads for multiple to multiple and series to multiple
secondary connections shall be Type USE No. 10, rated 600V AC. Primary conductors for series to
multiple ballasts shall be rated for use on 5000V AC circuits.
Ballast leads shall extend a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) from the case. The ballast insulation
shall be NEMA 365°F (185°C).
Series to multiple ballasts shall withstand the application of 12,000V AC from core to primary coil
and from coil to coil for a 1 minute period. Series to multiple ballasts secondaries and multiple-to-
multiple ballasts shall withstand the application of 2,200V AC from core to coils and, for multiple units

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
564 Greenbook 2021

only, from coil to coil for a 1 minute period. These tests shall be made immediately after operation of
the ballast at full-load for 24 hours.
Non-submersible ballasts shall be equipped with metal half-shell coil protection, moisture resistant,
synthetic varnish impregnated windings and shall be suitable for outdoor operation in a rain-tight
enclosure.
Each ballast to be installed in a pull box shall be the submersible-type and be equipped with a handle
and a hanger.
700-4.6 High Pressure Sodium Lamps.
700-4.6.1 General. High pressure sodium lamps shall conform to ANSI Standard C78 “Lamp
Specifications, Physical and Electrical Characteristics of High-Intensity Discharge Lamps,” when tested
in accordance with ANSI Standard C78.388, “Methods of Measurement of High Pressure Sodium Lamp
Characteristics.” High-pressure sodium lamps shall have a minimum average rated life of 24,000 hours.
700-4.6.2 Lamp Size Identification Targets. Lamp size identification targets shall:
a) be constructed of noncorrosive material that will provide a durable and legible surface that is
designed to endure for the life of the luminaire,
b) have a stable color background and black block numerals,
c) be 3 inches (75 mm) square, and
d) have the identification numbers and background color shown in Table 700-4.6.2 (A) and Table
700-4.6.2 (B), respectively. The identifying numerals shall be 2 inches (50 mm) high, minimum,
and have a stroke width of 1/4 inch (6 mm).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 565

TABLE 700-4.6.2 (A)

Identifying Numeral Lamp Wattage
1 18
3 35
5 50 or 55
7 70
9 90
10 100
13 135
15 150 – 55V
15H 150 – 100V
17 175
17B 175 Position Oriented
18 180
20 200
21 215
25 250
25B 250 Position Oriented
30 300
31 310
36 360
40 400
40B 400 Position Oriented
70 700
XI 1000

TABLE 700-4.6.2 (B)

Background Color Lamp Type
GOLD High Pressure Sodium
GREEN High Pressure Sodium/Mercury Ballast
LIGHT BLUE Mercury
RED Metal Halide
PURPLE Incandescent
AQUA Fluorescent

700-4.7 Photoelectric Controls.

700-4.7.1 General. Photoelectric controls shall consist of a photoelectric unit which plugs into an
EEI-NEMA twist-lock receptacle integral with the luminaire. Photoelectric controls, if specified, shall
be capable of switching multiple lighting systems directly.
700-4.7.2 Photoelectric Control Units. Photoelectric control units shall provide an output in
response to changing light levels. The response level shall remain stable throughout the life of the unit.
Components shall not require periodic replacement.
Photoelectric control units shall have a “turn-on” between 10 and 50 lux and a “turn off” at between
1.5 and 5 times “turn-on.” Measurements shall be by the procedures specified in “EEI-NEMA Standards
for Physical and Electrical Interchangeability of Light–Sensitive Control Devices Used in the Control of
Roadway Lighting.”

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
566 Greenbook 2021

Photoelectric control units shall also conform to the following requirements:

a) The supply voltage rating shall be 60Hz, 105-130V, 210-240V, or 1-5-240V, as specified.
b) The load rating shall be 1000W minimum, incandescent, mercury or fluorescent.
c) The operating temperature range shall be from -20°F (-29°C) to 149°F (65°C).
d) The power consumption shall be less than 10W.
e) Housed in a weatherproof enclosure.
f) The base of the unit shall be provided with a 3-prong, EEI-NEMA standard, twist-lock plug
mounting.
g) Equipped with a “fail-on” feature.
700-4.7.3 Contactors. Contactors shall have contacts rated to switch the specified lighting load and
shall be normally open, unless otherwise specified. Contactors shall be either the mechanical armature
type or the mercury displacement type. The contacts of the mechanical armature type shall be either fine
silver, silver alloy, or superior alternative material. Contactors shall have a minimum rating of 30A per
contact inductive load.
700-4.7.4 Terminal Blocks. Terminal blocks shall be rated at a minimum of 30A, 600V unless
otherwise specified. Terminal blocks shall be molded from phenolic or nylon material and shall be the
barrier-type with plated brass screw terminals and integral-type marking strips.
700-4.8 Transformers.
700-4.8.1 General. Multiple to multiple and series to multiple transformers shall be of the single-
phase, dry type designed for operation on a 60Hz supply.
700-4.8.2 Electrical Requirements. Transformer ratings shall be 120/480V, 240/480V, 480/120V,
or 480/240V for multiple to multiple units unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Transformer ratings for
series to multiple units shall be 6.0A/120V or 6.6A/4.8kV unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
Secondary 480V windings shall be center tapped. Volt-ampere ratings shall be as shown on the Plans.
Transformer efficiency shall exceed 95 percent for multiple to multiple units and 80 percent for series to
multiple units.
Secondary voltage regulation and tolerance shall be ± 3 percent from half-load to full-load for
multiple to multiple units and +10 percent (maximum) at no load to ± 3 percent at full-load for series to
multiple units.
Transformers shall have a decal showing a connection diagram. The diagram shall show either color
coding or tagging of wires with primary (H1, H2) or secondary (X1, X2) markers, and shall also show
the primary and secondary voltage and volt-ampere rating.
700-4.8.3 Submersible-Type Transformers. Submersible-type transformers shall be securely
encased in a corrosion-resistant, watertight case and withstand a 5-Day test of being submerged in 24
inches (600 mm) of salt water (2 percent salt by mass) with 12-hour on and off periods. The operating
periods shall be at full-load. Leads shall be brought out through one or more sealed hubs and secured in
a manner that will withstand a force of 101 pounds (450 N) static pull without loosening or leaking.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 567

700-5 TRAFFIC SIGNAL MATERIALS.

700-5.1 Steel Pedestrian Standards and Pedestals for Controller Cabinets. Steel pedestrian
Standards and pedestals for controller cabinets shall be constructed of 1/8 inch (3 mm) or thicker
galvanized steel, 4-inch (100 mm) schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, or size 103 conduit. Steel
pedestrian Standards and pedestals shall conform to 700-3.3, except the top shall be designed for slip-
fitting. Push-button posts shall be manufactured of 2-1/2-inch (63 mm) schedule 40 galvanized steel
pipe. Galvanized steel pipe shall conform to ASTM A53.
700-5.2 Pedestals. Pedestals shall have an aluminum identification plate attached with stainless
steel rivets or screws.
Welds shall be continuous and conform to 700-[Link]. Exposed welds shall be ground flush with
the base metal.
Pedestals shall be galvanized by the hot-dip process in accordance with 210-3, or be cadmium plated
with Type NS coating conforming to ASTM A165. If so specified, pedestals shall also be painted in
accordance with 210-1 and 310.
Pedestals shall be furnished complete with all necessary fittings and hardware for attachment of the
controller cabinet to the adjoining pedestal.
700-5.3 Conductors and Cable.
700-5.3.1 General. Copper wire shall conform to ASTM B3 (solid) and 700-4.2. Wire sizes, other
than for wires used in loop detector lead-in cable, shall be based on the American Wire Gage (AWG).
The wire diameter shall not be less than 98 percent of the specified AWG diameter. Conductors used in
loop detector lead-in cable shall conform to ASTM B286. A Certificate of Compliance shall be
submitted for each type of cable used in the Work.
Unless otherwise specified, Table 700-5.3.1 shall be used to identify the conductors.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
568 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 700-5.3.1

Signal Phase Identification

f
Circuit Or Insulation Colors Band Size
Function a Symbols
d
Base Stripe
2, 6 Red, Yellow, Brown Black 2.6 14
c 4, 8 Red, Yellow, Brown Orange 4.8 14
Vehicle Signals
1, 5 Red, Yellow, Brown None 1.5 14
3, 7 Red, Yellow, Brown Purple 3.7 14
2p, 6p Red, Brown Black 2p, 6p 14
c 4p, 8p Red, Brown Orange 4p, 8p 14
Pedestrian Signals
1p, 5p Red, Brown None 1p, 5p 14
3p, 7p Red, Brown Purple 3p, 7p 14
2p, 6p Blue Black P-2, P-6 14
Pedestrian 4p, 8p Blue Orange P-4, P-8 14
c
Push Buttons 1p, 5p Blue None P-1, P-5 14
3p.7p Blue Purple P-3, P-7 14
Traffic Signal Underground between Black None CON-1 6
b
Controller Cabinet Service Switch & Cabinet Red None CON-2 6
e Ungrounded Line 1 Black None SL-1 10
Sign Lighting
Ungrounded Line 2 Red None SL-2 10
Pedestrian Push Buttons White Black NBR 14
Grounded and
Signals White None NBR 10
Common
Sign Lighting White None NBR 12
Railroad Pre-Emption Black Black R 14
Spares Black None NBR 14
NBR = No Band Required
a. On overlaps, insulation is striped for first phase in designation, e.g. Phase (2 & 3) insulation is striped as for phase 2.
b. Band for overlap and special phases as required.
c. These requirements do not apply to signal cable.
d. Band conductors in each pull box and near each termination point. On signal light circuits, a single band may be placed around 2
or 3 ungrounded conductors comprising a phase.
e. Conductors between ballasts and sign lighting lamps shall be No. 16 AWG and color shall correspond to the ballast leads.
f. The No. 14 AWG conductor shall be solid copper in a 16 mils (410 µm) minimum polyvinyl chloride insulation encased in a 5 mils
(130 µm) minimum clear nylon jacket. The No. 10 conductor shall be solid copper in a 22 mils (560 µm) minimum polyvinyl
chloride insulation encased in a 8 mils (200 µm) minimum clear nylon jacket.

Single conductors, multi-conductor cables, and lead-in cables shall have clear, distinctive and
permanent markings on the outer surface throughout their entire length showing the manufacturer’s
name or trademark, insulation type letter designation, conductor size, voltage rating and number of
conductors. Multi-conductor cable jackets shall be black polyethylene binder sheath, rated for 600V and
167°F (75°C), or black polyvinyl chloride conforming to IMSA 9-1. Filler material, if used to make the
multi-conductor round, shall be polyethylene.
Conductor insulation shall be of a solid color or of basic colors with a permanent colored spiral
stripe under the nylon jacket as shown in Table 700-4.2.3 unless otherwise specified. Solid or basic
colors shall be homogeneous throughout the full-depth of insulation. Identification stripes shall be a
continuous spiral over the entire length of the conductor. For conductor sizes No. 2 and larger, the
insulation may be black and the ends taped with electrical insulating tape of the required color for a
minimum of 20 inches (500 mm).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 569

700-5.3.2 Materials.
700-[Link] General. Individual wires shall be solid copper with Type THWN or polyvinyl chloride
insulation, and shall conform to 700-4.2.1 and ASTM B286. The minimum thickness of Type THWN
insulation, at any point, shall be 12 mils (300 µm) for No. 14 conductor and 16 mils (400 µm) for No. 10
conductor. The minimum thickness of the polyvinyl chloride insulation, at any point shall be 16 mils
(400 µm) for No. 14 AWG conductor and 22 mils (560 µm) for No. 10 AWG conductor. No. 14 AWG
conductors shall have a clear nylon jacket a minimum of 5 mils (127 µm) thick. No. 10 AWG
conductors shall have a clear nylon jacket a minimum of 8 mils (203 µm) thick.
700-[Link] Three-Conductor Cable. Three-conductor cable shall be used for pedestrian push
buttons and a spare.
Three-conductor cable shall consist of 3 No. 14 AWG wires. The cable jacket shall have a minimum
average thickness of 43 mils (1100 µm) and a minimum thickness at any point of 35 mils (900 µm). The
nominal outside diameter of the cable shall not exceed 3/8 inch (9.5 mm). The color code of the wires
shall be blue/black stripe, blue/orange stripe and white/black stripe.
700-[Link] Five-Conductor Cable. Five-conductor cable shall consist of 5 No. 14 AWG wires.
The cable jacket shall have a minimum average thickness of 43 mils (1100 µm) and a minimum
thickness at any point of 35 mils (900 µm). The nominal outside diameter of the cable shall not exceed
1/2 inch (12.5 mm). The color code of the wires shall be red, yellow, brown, black, and white.
700-[Link] Nine-Conductor Cable. Nine-conductor cable shall consist of 8 No. 14 AWG wires
and 1 No. 12 AWG wire. The cable jacket shall have a minimum average thickness of 59 mils (1500
µm) and a minimum thickness at any point of 47 mils (1200 µm). The nominal outside diameter of the
cable shall not exceed 11/16 inch (17 mm). The color for the No. 12 AWG wire shall be white. The
color code for the No. 14 AWG wires shall be as shown in Table 700-[Link].

TABLE 700-[Link]
Primary Color Color Code
Red Yellow/Black strip
Yellow Brown/Black strip
Brown Black
Red/Black strip White/Black strip

700-[Link] Twelve-Conductor Cable. Twelve-conductor cable shall be used for vehicle signals,
pedestrian signals, spares, and the signal common. Twelve-conductor cable shall consist of 11 No. 14
AWG wires and 1 No. 12 AWG wire. The cable jacket shall have a minimum average thickness of 59
mils (1500 µm) and a minimum thickness at any point of 47 mils (1200 µm). The nominal outside
diameter of the cable shall not exceed 3/4 inch (19 mm). The color code of the No. 12 AWG wire shall
be white. The color code and functional connections for the No. 14 AWG wires shall be as shown in
Table 700-[Link] unless otherwise specified.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
570 Greenbook 2021

TABLE 700-[Link]
Color Code Termination Phase
Red Vehicle Signal Red 2, 4, 6, or 8
Yellow Vehicle Signal Yellow 2, 4, 6, or 8
Brown Vehicle Signal Green 2, 4, 6, or 8
Red/Black stripe Vehicle Signal Red 1, 3, 5, or 7
Yellow/Black stripe Vehicle Signal Yellow 1, 3, 5, or 7
Brown/Black stripe Vehicle Signal Green 1, 3, 5, or 7
Spare, or Ped. Signal use as required
Black/Red stripe ----
for Vehicle Signal red or “Don’t Walk”
Black/White stripe Spare, or use as required for Yellow ----
Spare, or Ped. Signal use as required
Black ----
for Vehicle Green or “Walk”
Red/White stripe Ped. Signal “Don’t Walk” ----
Brown/White stripe Ped. Signal “Walk” ----

700-[Link] Twenty-Eight-Conductor Cable. Twenty-eight-conductor signal cable shall consist of

27 No. 14 AWG wires and 1 No. 10 AWG wire cabled with polyethylene fillers, if necessary to make
the cable round. Clear binder tape shall be used to wrap the cable core. The black polyvinyl chloride
cable jacket shall have a minimum average thickness of 80 mils (2000 µm) and a minimum thickness at
any point of 60 mils (1600 µm). The manufacturer’s name, the type of insulation for each wire, the
number of wires of each size, the size of the wires in the cable and the voltage rating shall be imprinted
on the outside of the cable jacket. Sequential distance markings shall be imprinted at 2-foot (600 mm)
intervals. The nominal outside diameter of the cable shall not exceed 7/8 inch (23 mm). The voltage
rating shall be 600V and the temperature rating shall be 167°F (75°C). Signal commons in each cable
shall be kept separate except at the signal controller. Each cable shall be labeled in each pull box, “C1”
or “C2”. The cable identified as “C1” shall be used for signal Phases 1, 2, 3 and 4. The cable identified
“C2” shall be used for signal Phases 5, 6, 7 and 8. The “C1” and “C2” cable may also be used as
specified. The reel size shall allow for a maximum of 2,000 feet (610 m) of cable with a 2-3/4-inch (70
mm) arbor hole.
The color code for the No. 10 AWG wire shall be white. The color code and functional connections
for the No. 14 AWG wires shall be as shown in Table 700-[Link], unless otherwise specified.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 571

TABLE 700-[Link]
Color Code Termination Phase
Red/Black stripe Vehicle Signal Red 2 or 6
Yellow/Black stripe Vehicle Signal Yellow 2 or 6
Brown/Black stripe Vehicle Signal Green 2 or 6
Red/Orange stripe Vehicle Signal Red 4 or 8
Yellow/Orange stripe Vehicle Signal Yellow 4 or 8
Brown/Orange stripe Vehicle Signal Green 4 or 8
Red/Silver stripe Vehicle Signal Red 1 or 5
Yellow/Silver stripe Vehicle Signal Yellow 1 or 5
Brown/Silver stripe Vehicle Signal Green 1 or 5
Red/Purple stripe Vehicle Signal Red 3 or 7
Yellow/Purple stripe Vehicle Signal Yellow 3 or 7
Brown/Purple stripe Vehicle Signal Green 3 or 7
Red/2 Black stripes Ped. Signal DON’T WALK 2 or 6
Brown/2 Black stripes Ped. Signal WALK 2 or 6
Red/2 Orange stripes Ped. Signal DON’T WALK 4 or 8
Brown/ 2 Orange stripes Ped. Signal WALK 4 or 8
Red/2 Silver stripes Overlap A, C, Red OLA, OLC
Brown/2 Silver stripes Overlap A, C Green OLA, OLC
Red/2 Purple stripes Overlap B, D Red OLB, OLD
Brown/2 Purple stripes Overlap B, C Green OLB, OLD
Blue/Black stripe Ped. Push Button 2 or 6
Blue/Orange stripe Ped. Push Button 4 or 8
Blue/Silver stripe Overlap A, C Yellow OLA(y), OLC(y)
Blue/Purple stripe Overlap B, D Yellow OLB(y), OLD(y)
White/Black stripe Ped. Push Button Common ---
Black/Red stripe Railroad Preemption ---
Black Spare ---

700-5.3.3 Interconnect Cable.

700-[Link] Direct Wire. Interconnect cable shall consist of 7 No. 14 AWG tinned copper wires
unless otherwise specified. Each wire shall be insulated with color coded, polypropylene material a
minimum of 13 mils (330 µm) nominal thickness.
The interconnect cable jacket shall be black, high density polyethylene, rated for a minimum of 300V
at 140°F (60°C), and have a nominal wall thickness of 40 mils (1000 µm) minimum. The cable jacket or
the moisture-resistant tape directly under the outer jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name,
insulation type designation, number of wires and wire size, and voltage and temperature ratings.
700-[Link] Filled Telephone Cable. Filled telephone cable shall consist of paired No. 22 AWG
solid annealed copper wires. The cable shall be polyethylene insulated and aluminum shielded, and
conform to REA Specification PE-39 for filled telephone cable. The cable sizes shall be 12 and 25-pair.
700-[Link] Telephone Lines. Telephone lines shall be No. 14 AWG stranded, twisted, pair copper
wire having 600V insulation and overall shield and jacket.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
572 Greenbook 2021

700-5.3.4 Fiber Optic Cable.

700-[Link] General. Fiber optic cable shall be a 6-optical glass fiber cable rated by the
manufacturer for the aerial, direct burial, or duct installation specified or shown on the plans. The
optical fibers shall be multi-mode graded index optical glass with a nominal fiber core diameter of 50
microns and a nominal fiber cladding diameter of 125 microns. The fiber shall have a numerical
aperture of 0.2.
700-[Link] Performance. The minimum optical performance of each fiber measured at wave
lengths of both 850 nanometers and 1,300 nanometers shall have a maximum attenuation of 3.5 decibels
per kilometer at 858 nanometers and 1.0 decibel per kilometer at 1,300 nanometers, and shall have a
minimum bandwidth of 800 megahertz-kilometers unless otherwise specified.
700-[Link] Construction. The cable shall be constructed using 6 filled, loose-tube, color-coded
dual-layer buffer tubes stranded (reverse oscillation) around a steel central member. The 6 color coded
fibers shall be contained in a buffer tube and the remaining buffer tubes shall be natural or white. The
tubes shall be held in position around the strength member by a layer of aramid yarn. The buffer tube
diameter shall be a nominal 250 microns. The color code for the fibers and the buffer tubes shall be as
shown on the Plans.
700-[Link] Jacket. Fiber optic cable shall be covered with a medium density polyethylene jacket.
The color of the jacket shall be black unless otherwise specified. The jacket shall be abrasion and crack
resistant, non-nutrient to fungus, electronically non-conductive, compatible with all cable components
that it may come in contact with, and free from holes, splits, blisters or other imperfections.
700-[Link] Identification. Each length of cable shall be imprinted with the manufacturer’s name
and type of cable at intervals not greater than 6 feet (2 m) along the outside of the jacket. Each length of
cable shall be imprinted with length markings at intervals not greater than 3 feet (1 m).
700-[Link] Reels. Fiber optic cable shall be wound on reels in a manner which provides access to
both ends of the cable for testing while the cable is still on the reel.
700-5.4 Controllers.
700-5.4.1 General. Controllers, controller cabinets and auxiliary equipment shall be as specified in
the Special Provisions, or shown on the Plans or Standard Plans.
700-5.4.2 Wiring. Conductors shall be No. 22 AWG or larger, with a minimum of 19 strands.
Conductors shall conform to Military Specification MIL-W-16878D, Type B or better. The insulation
shall have a minimum thickness of 10 mils (250 µm) and be nylon-jacketed polyvinyl chloride,
irradiated cross-linked polyvinyl chloride, polyhalocarbon, or polychloro-alkene, except for conductors
No. 14 AWG and larger which may be UL Type THHN.
Flat cable may be used in lieu of individual conductors. Cable shall be constructed of No. 28 AWG
or larger wires. Conductor insulation shall be rated at 300V and for use at 221°F (105°C). Cables shall
be provided with strain relief.
Conductors shall conform to the following color-code requirements.
a) The grounded conductor of a circuit shall be identified by a continuous white or natural gray
color.
b) The equipment grounding conductor shall be identified by a continuous green color or by a
continuous green color with one or more yellow stripes.
c) Ungrounded conductors shall be identified by any color not specified above.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 573

Conductors shall terminate with properly sized captive or spring-spade-type terminals, or be soldered
to a through-panel solder lug on the rear side of the terminal block. Crimp-style connectors shall be
applied with a tool that is designed to prevent opening of the handles until the crimp is complete.
An equipment grounding conductor bus shall be provided in each controller cabinet. The bus shall
be grounded to the cabinet and connected to the metal conduit system or other approved ground with a
No. 8 or larger, grounding conductor.
With all of the cabinet equipment in place and connected, the resistance between the grounded
conductor terminal bus and the equipment grounding conductor bus shall be 50,000,000 ohms minimum,
when measured with an applied voltage of 150V DC.
If a DC circuit is to be grounded, the circuit shall be connected to the equipment ground only.
Two or more terminal blocks shall be provided for field connections. Terminals blocks for field
connections shall be installed within 22 inches (550 mm) of the face on the cabinet and shall be oriented
for screwdriver operation from the door opening. All terminals shall be a minimum of 5 inches (125
mm) above the foundation.
No more than 3 conductors shall be brought to any one terminal. Two flat metal jumpers, straight or
U shaped, may also be placed under a terminal screw. At least 2 full threads of all terminal screws shall
be fully engaged when the screw is tightened. No live parts shall extend beyond the barrier.
Wiring diagrams shall conform to 700-4.3.
700-5.4.3 Cabinets.
700-[Link] General. Controller cabinets shall be rainproof and conform to the dimensions shown
on the Standard Plans.
Cabinets and doors shall be fabricated from 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) minimum thickness cold rolled steel,
1/16 inch (1.8 mm) minimum thickness stainless steel, or 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum thickness
aluminum. Exterior seams shall be continuously welded.
Exterior welds shall be ground smooth. Edges shall be filed to a minimum radius of 1/32 inch (800 µm).
Metal shelves or brackets shall be provided to support the controller unit and auxiliary equipment.
Machine screws and bolts shall not protrude beyond the outside wall.
Conduit shall enter the bottom and towards the front of the cabinet unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
A pliable seal, composed of caulking compound or mastic, shall be placed between the controller
cabinet and the concrete foundation.
700-[Link] Steel Cabinets. Steel cabinets shall be finished with a polymer or enamel coating
system conforming to Color No. 14672 of Federal Standard 595B. Coatings shall be commercially
smooth, substantially free of flow lines, paint washout, streaks, blisters and other defects that would
impair serviceability or distract from the general appearance. Coatings shall conform to the following
requirements:
a) Hardness. The finish shall have a pencil lead hardness of HB minimum.
b) Salt Spray Resistance. Undercutting of the film of the coating system shall not exceed 1/8 inch
(3 mm) average, from lines scored diagonally and deep enough to expose the base metal, after
336 hours exposure in a salt spray cabinet in accordance with ASTM B117.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
574 Greenbook 2021

c) Loss. No coating loss shall be incurred when subjected to the following:

1) Two test specimens 4 inches x 8 inches (100 mm x 200 mm) of the same material and
coating as the cabinet supplied shall be furnished by the Contractor for testing.
2) Two 9-inch (225 mm) diagonal scratches exposing bare metal will be made on one specimen.
The specimen will be soaked in de-mineralized water for 192 hours. A 1 inch (25 mm) wide
strip of masking tape will be tightly affixed to the scratched surface and removed with one
quick motion. Evidence of blistering, softening, or peeling of the paint or coating from the
base metal will be cause for rejection. Testing will be performed in accordance with
California Test 645, except the 180-degree bend test will not be required.
Metal preparation shall conform to the 3-step iron phosphate conversion coating bonderizing
technique. The inside walls, doors, and ceiling of the housing shall be finished the same as the outside.
700-[Link] Stainless Steel Cabinets. Cabinets fabricated from stainless steel shall conform to the
following requirements:
a) Annealed or quarter-hard stainless steel sheet shall be used and shall conform to ASTM A666 for
Type 304 Grades A or B.
b) Welding shall be by the gas tungsten arc welding process using bare stainless steel welding
electrodes. Electrodes shall conform to AWS A5.9 for ER308 chromium-nickel bare arc welding
electrodes.
c) Procedures, welders and welding operators for welding on stainless steel shall conform to AWS C5.5.
d) Exposed, exterior surfaces shall be ground or brushed to a 0.6 µm to 1.3 µm finish using iron-
free abrasives or stainless steel brushes.
e) Overlapping exterior seams shall conform to NEMA Type 4 enclosures.
f) After grinding or brushing, no rust discoloration shall show when subjected to the following:
1) Forty-eight hours of exposure in a salt spray cabinet in conformance with ASTM B117; and
2) Twenty-four hours of exposure in a tap water spray cabinet with the water temperature
between 100°F (38°C) and 113°F (45°C). Any cabinet which shows rust discoloration
anywhere on its surface after the test will be rejected.
g) Cabinets that have been rejected because of surface discoloration may be cleaned, passivated, and
resubmitted for testing.
700-[Link] Aluminum Cabinets. Aluminum cabinets shall conform to ASTM B209 or B209M for
5052-H32 aluminum sheet and the following requirements:
a) Welding shall be done by the gas metal arc welding process using bare aluminum welding
electrodes. Electrodes shall conform to AWS A5.10 for ER5356 aluminum alloy bare welding
electrodes.
b) Procedures, welders and welding operators for welding on aluminum shall be qualified in
accordance with AWS B3.0 and C5.6.
c) Surfaces shall be finished in accordance with Military Specification MIL-A-8625C “Anodic
Coatings for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys” for a Type II, Class 1 coating, except that anodic
coating shall have a minimum thickness of 20 µm and a minimum coating weight of 40 µg/mm2.
Anodic coating shall be sealed in a 5 percent aqueous solution of nickel acetate (pH 5.0 to 6.5)
for 15 minutes at 207°F (97°C). Prior to applying anodic coating the cabinets shall be cleaned
and etched as follows:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 575

1) Immerse in inhibited alkaline cleaner, 6 to 8 ounces per gallon (45 to 60 g/L), 160°F (71°C)
for 5 minutes.
2) Rinse in cold water.
3) Etch in a solution of 0.39 ounces (11 g) of sodium fluoride, plus 4 to 6 ounces of sodium hydroxide
per gallon (30 to 45 g/l) of distilled water at 140°F to 149°F (60°C to 65°C) for 5 minutes.
4) Rinse in cold water.
5) Desmut in a 50 percent, by volume, nitric acid solution at room temperature for 2 minutes.
6) Rinse in cold water.
700-[Link] Doors. Cabinets shall have a single front door equipped with a lock. The door width shall
be as shown on the Standard Plans. When the door is closed and latched, the door shall be locked. The
handle shall have provisions for locking in the closed position. The handle shall have a minimum length
and steel shank as shown on the Standard Plans. The handle shall be fabricated of cast aluminum or of
zinc-plated or cadmium-plated steel. The cabinet frame shall be designed so that the latching mechanism
will hold tension on and form a firm seal between the door gasket and frame. Locks shall be the solid
brass, 6-pin tumbler rim type, with rectangular, spring-loaded bolts. Locks shall be left hand, and rigidly
mounted with stainless steel machine screws approximately 2 inches (50 mm) apart. Keys shall be
removable in the locked and unlocked positions, and 2 keys shall be furnished with each cabinet. The front
position of the lock shall extend 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) beyond the outside surface of the door.
The latching mechanism shall be a 3-point cabinet latch with nylon rollers. The center catch and
pushrods shall be zinc-plated or cadmium-plated steel. Pushrods shall be turned edgewise at the outer
supports and shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) x 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum. Nylon rollers shall have a
minimum diameter of 3/4 inch (19 mm) and shall be equipped with ball bearings.
Cadmium plating shall conform to Military Specification MIL-QQ-416b. Zinc plating shall conform
to 210-3.
Doors shall be equipped with 3-bolt butt hinges. Each hinge shall have a fixed pin. Doors larger
than 22 inches (550 mm) or 6 square feet (0.56 m2) in area shall be equipped with catches to hold the
door open at both 90 degrees and 180 degrees, plus or minus 10 degrees. Catches shall be plated steel
rods a minimum of 3/8 inch (9 mm) in diameter. Catches shall be capable of holding the door open at 90
degrees in a 56 miles per hour (90 km/h) wind at an angle perpendicular to the plane of the door.
A police panel shall be mounted on the front door as shown on the Standard Plans and shall be
equipped with a lock keyed to a master police key. Two keys shall be furnished with each cabinet. Each
police key shall have a shaft at least 1-3/4 inches (45 mm) in length. Police panels shall not be furnished
for controllers that do not control traffic signals.
Door hinges, pins and bolts shall be made of stainless steel. Hinges on aluminum cabinets may be
aluminum with a stainless steel hinge pin. Hinges shall be bolted to the cabinet. Hinge pins and bolts
shall not be accessible when the door is closed.
Gasketing shall be provided on all door openings and shall be dust-tight. Gaskets shall be
permanently bonded to the metal. The mating surface shall be covered with a silicone lubricant.
Shop Drawings of alternative designs shall be submitted in accordance with 3-8.3.
700-[Link] Cabinet Ventilation. Each controller cabinet shall be equipped with one of the
following as specified in the Special Provisions:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
576 Greenbook 2021

a) Eight screened, rain-tight vent holes 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) in diameter or larger, in the lower side
or bottom of the cabinet.
b) Louvered vents with a permanent metal mesh.
c) A 4-ply woven polypropylene air filter held firmly in place capable of passing 100 cubic feet per
minute (2.83 m3/min.) of air.
Each controller cabinet shall be equipped with an electric fan with ball or roller bearings and a
capacity of at least 100 cubic feet per minute (2.83 m3/min.). The vents shall be able to pass this volume
of air.
The fan shall be thermostatically controlled and shall be manually adjusted to turn on between 90°F
(32°C) and 150°F (65°C) with a differential of not more than 10°F (6°C) between automatic turn-on and
turn-off. The cabinet fan circuit shall be fused at 125 percent of the ampacity of the fan motor installed.
The fan and cabinet vent holes shall be located with respect to each other so as to direct the bulk of
the air flow over the controller or through the ventilating holes of the controller where those holes exist.
700-[Link] Cabinet Accessories. The following accessories shall be furnished with each cabinet
assembly unless otherwise specified:
a) Labels. A permanent printed, engraved or silk screened label shall be provided for the following
equipment and for all other removable items of equipment:
1) Receptacles for relays and switching devices.
2) Switches, fuses and circuit breakers.
3) Labels shall conform to the designations on the cabinet wiring diagram. Labels for all shelf-
mounted equipment shall be on the face of the shelf below the item. Labels for wall-mounted
equipment shall be below the item.
b) Convenience Receptacle. A convenience receptacle shall be mounted in a readily accessible
location inside the cabinet. The convenience receptacle shall be a duplex, 3-prong, NEMA, Type
5-15R grounding outlet and shall conform to UL Standard 943.
c) Lighting Fixture. The lighting fixture shall be a fluorescent lighting fixture, mounted on the
inside top of the cabinet near the front edge. The fixture shall be provided with an F15T8, cool
white lamp operated from a normal power factor UL or ETL listed ballast. The “On-Off” switch
for the lighting fixture shall be either of the following:
1) A toggle switch mounted on the inside door panel.
2) A door-actuated switch that turns the light on when the door is open, and off when the door is
closed.
d) Surge Arrestor. The surge arrestor shall reduce the effects of power line voltage transients and
shall have ratings as follows:
Recurrent peak voltage ................................................. 184V
Energy rating maximum ............................................... 20 J
Power dissipation average ............................................ 0.85W
Peak current for pulses less than 7 picoseconds ........... 1250A
Standby current shall be 1 milliampere or less for 60 Hz sinusoidal input.
e) Terminal Blocks. Terminal blocks shall be rated 600V AC minimum, and shall be provided
with nickel, silver or cadmium plated brass binder head screw terminals.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 577

Heavy duty terminal blocks shall be rated at 20A and shall be provided with 12 poles with No. 10 x
5/16 inch (8 mm) nickel plated brass binder head screws and nickel plated brass inserts. Each pole
position shall be provided with 2 terminal positions. The terminal blocks shall be the barrier type, with
shorting bars in each of the 12 positions, and shall be provided with integral-type marking strips.
Light duty terminal blocks shall be rated at 5A and shall be provided with 12 poles with No. 6 x 1/8
inch (3 mm) binder head screws. Each pole position shall be provided with one terminal position.
700-5.4.4 Components.
700-[Link] Toggle Switches. Toggle switches shall have poles as required and shall be rated at 200
percent of circuit current for circuits of 10A or less and 125 percent of circuit current for circuits over
10A.
700-[Link] Cartridge Fuses. Cartridge fuses shall be installed in panel mounted fuse holders.
Fuse type and rating shall be as recommended by the fuse manufacturer for the type of load being
protected.
700-[Link] Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers shall conform to 700-3.11 except that the circuit
breakers shall have a minimum interrupting capacity of 5000A, RMS.
700-[Link] Connectors. Connectors used for interconnecting various portions of circuits together
shall be designed and constructed for the application involved. Connectors shall be designed to provide
positive connection of all circuits, and easy insertion and removal of mating contacts. Connectors shall
be permanently keyed to prevent improper connection of circuits.
Connectors, or devices plugging into connectors, shall be provided with positive means to prevent any
individual circuit from being broken due to vibration, pull on connecting cable or similar disruptive force.
700-5.4.5 Dual 5-Way Active Data Bridges.
700-[Link] General. Dual 5-way active data bridges shall be provided in controller assemblies if
specified. Bridges shall provide a 4-wire transmission interconnection between a dedicated common
port and four multiple ports. Bridges shall incorporate a splitter channel and a combiner channel.
Multiple inputs shall be connected to a common output in the combiner channel. In the splitter channel,
a common input shall be connected to multiple outputs. Splitter and combiner shall be separate and
independent allowing operation in full-duplex data transmission applications.
Bridges shall be equipped with a front-panel-accessible potentiometer with continuous adjustment of
cross-bridge gain or loss within 2 switch-selectable loss/gain ranges suitable for most data applications;
–30dB to –10dB and –10dB to +10dB. Either range shall be independently selectable for each channel.
The level to which each channel is adjusted shall be common to all cross-bridge port combinations in
that channel (that is, if the splitter-channel potentiometer is set for +3dB gain, all common-to-multiple-
port paths in the splitter shall receive a +3dB level increase).
Ports, both common and multiple, shall be characterized by a balanced 600 ohm terminating
impedance. The module’s active circuit shall allow unused multiple ports to be left un-terminated
without affecting the transmission response of the ports in use.
Input, output and line monitor jacks on the front panel shall allow isolated-module, isolated-facility,
and cross-bridge measurement of transmission parameters in both the splitter and combiner channels.
Bridges shall be powered from input voltage of –22 to –56V DC at a maximum current of 60 mA.
Each unit shall be individually packaged in a housing. Circuitry shall be solid state, and constructed
on removable industry standard circuit boards with plug-in edge connectors.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
578 Greenbook 2021

Test jacks, edge connectors and external plug connectors shall be of a type and material suitable for
use in the environment specified without deterioration for the useful life of the equipment. The physical
size of the case shall not exceed 105 cubic feet (3700 cm3) (approximately 7 inches x 8 inches x 4 inches
(175 mm x 200 mm x 100 mm) and shall be suitable for mounting to the frame of a field cabinet.
Mounting holes shall be provided for attaching the unit to one side of the frame of a relay rack. Input
and output ports shall be provided for 5 full-duplex telephone circuits with input and output ports
labeled as to function. Level control or switches and level adjustment potentiometers along with the
input and output level test jacks shall provide external adjustments without removal of the housing.
700-[Link] Application. A bridge shall be used to interconnect several 4-wire data modems to a
common data channel or data link. The common data link shall be terminated at the distant end into a
central processor unit (CPU) or computer. A bridge shall be used to provide the central transmission
arrangement or “hubbing” network, that extends data transmission to outlying terminals.
Tandem bridge arrangements to expand the number of multiple ports of a 4-wire data hubbing
network shall be effected by direct connection of one multiple port in each channel of the first bridge to
the common port of the same channel of a second bridge to provide a 4-wire data bridge with one
common and 7 multiple ports.
700-[Link] Circuit Description. The combiner channel of the bridge shall consist of a variable-
gain integrated-circuit-operational amplifier with an input summing circuit. The summing circuit shall
add the transmission energy from all multiple input ports at a low-impedance summing point to provide
input port isolation. The output of the amplifier shall be connected to a transformer for balanced
connection to the facility.
The splitter channel shall consist of a transformer-input-variable-gain, integrated-circuit-operational
amplifier, and a power amplifier. The output of the power transformer shall be low impedance and drive
8, 300-ohm resistors to drive impedance at the multiple output circuits and provide isolation between
output circuits.
The multiple ports in the splitter and combiner channels of the bridge shall be isolated and balanced
via an output transformer and matched precision resistors in each channel.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 579

700-[Link] Electrical Requirements. Bridges shall conform to the electrical requirements shown
in Table 700-[Link].

TABLE 700-[Link]
Splitter channel loss/gain -30 to +10 dB usable range
Combiner channel loss/gain -30 to +10 dB usable range
Splitter: +5 dbmW
Maximum output level (overload point)
Combiner: +12 dBm
Level change with loading 1 dB maximum, one port to all ports loaded.
Noise 20 dBm maximum
Splitter (multiple ports): 600 Ω balanced.
Input port impedance
Combiner (common port): 600 Ω balanced.
Splitter (multiple ports): 600 Ω balanced.
Output port impedance
Combiner (common port): 600 Ω balanced.
Splitter: less than one percent at + 3 dBmW
Harmonic distortion
Combiner: less than one percent at + 8 dBmW
Frequency response ± 1 dBmW re: 1000 Hz level, 300 to 5000 Hz
Delay distortion Less than 75 µs, 400 to 3000 Hz
Cross-port coupling loss (crosstalk) Greater than 55 dB
Mounting One position
Operating environment -19°F to 129°F (-7°C to 54°C), humidity to 95% (no condensation)

700-[Link] Testing and Troubleshooting. Complete testing and troubleshooting instructions,

circuit diagrams and pictorial component location and identification guides shall be provided with each
bridge.
700-5.5 Traffic Signal Faces and Fittings.
700-5.5.1 Vehicle Signal Faces. Each vehicle signal face shall be of the adjustable type conforming
to ITE Publication ST-008B. The testing specified shall be performed by the manufacturer.
Metal signal sections shall be tested in accordance with California Test 666. Any fracture within the
housing assembly or a deflection of more than 1/2 the lens diameter of the signal section during the wind
load test will be considered a structural failure.
Plastic signal sections shall be tested in accordance with California Test 605. Any fracture within
the housing assembly, or deflection of more than 10 degrees in either the vertical or horizontal plane
after the wind load has been removed from the front of the signal face, or a deflection of more than 6
degrees in either the vertical or horizontal plane after the wind load has been removed from the back of
the signal face will be considered a structural failure.
Vehicle signal faces, except arrow and “X” faces, shall be tested in accordance with California Test 604.
Adjustment shall permit rotation of 360 degrees about a vertical axis. The number and type of
sections shall be as shown on the Plans. Each vehicle signal face shall be installed at the location and
mounted in the manner shown on the Plans.
All new vehicle signal faces, except the programmed visibility type, installed at any one intersection
shall be of the same manufacturer and of the same material.
Top openings of signal faces shall be sealed with neoprene gaskets.
700-5.5.2 Optical Units. Each optical unit shall consist of a lens, a reflector or reflector assembly, a
lamp receptacle, and a clear traffic signal lamp conforming to the following requirements:

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
580 Greenbook 2021

a) Lenses, reflectors, reflector assemblies, lamp receptacles, lamps, wiring and light distribution
shall conform to ITE Publication ST-008B.
b) Each lens shall be glass, true to color, and free of imperfections.
c) Reflectors shall conform to ITE Publication ST-008B except that the reflectors shall be made of
silvered glass or of specular aluminum with an anodic coating. Reflector ring holders shall be
made of cast aluminum.
A single piece formed metal reflector ring holder may be used.
700-5.5.3 Vehicle Signal Sections. Each vehicle signal section housing shall be either die-cast or
permanent mold-cast aluminum conforming to ITE Publication ST-008B or, when so specified,
structural plastic.
Signal sections shall conform to the following requirements:
a) Maximum height shall be 10 inches (250 mm) for 8-inch (200 mm) sections and 14 inches (375
mm) for 12-inch (300 mm) sections.
b) Housings shall be provided with a one-piece, hinged, square-shaped door designed to permit
access for re-lamping without the use of tools. The door shall be secured by a method that will
hold the door closed during the loading tests specified in 700-5.5.1. The lens shall be mounted in
the door in a watertight manner.
c) Exposed hardware, such as hinge pins and door latching devices, shall be manufactured of Type
304 or 305 stainless steel. Interior screws and fittings shall be manufactured of stainless steel or
steel with a corrosion resistant plating or coating.
d) An opening shall be provided in the top and bottom of each section to receive a 1-9/16-inch (40
mm) pipe. Eight-inch (200 mm) and 12-inch (300 mm) sections produced by an individual
manufacturer shall be capable of joining to form a signal face in any combination. This
interchangeability is not required between metal and plastic signal sections.
e) Gaskets, including those for the door, lens, reflector and lampholder, shall be made of a material
that is not affected when installed in a signal section with a metal or plastic housing that is
operated continuously for 336 hours.
700-5.5.4 Metal Signal Sections. Each metal signal section shall be provided with a metal visor
and/or backplate as specified. Visors shall conform to 700-5.5.8. Backplates shall conform to 700-5.5.10.
700-5.5.5 Plastic Signal Sections. Plastic signal sections shall be constructed of plastic which has
ultraviolet ray stability, is unaffected by the heat of the lamp, and is self-extinguishing. The housing
shall be either molded in one piece or fabricated from 2 or more pieces joined into a single piece. The
housing and doors shall be colored throughout. The color shall be black matching Color No. 17038,
27038 or 37038 of Federal Standard 595B.
Each plastic signal face shall be equipped with a plastic or metal visor as specified. Visors shall
conform to 700-5.5.8. Plastic signal sections shall also be equipped with plastic backplates if so
specified. Plastic backplates shall conform to 700-[Link].
A serrated nylon washer shall be inserted between each plastic signal section and the metal mounting
assembly. Each washer shall be not less than 5/32 inch (4 mm) nor more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.
Serrations shall match those on the signal section and the mounting assembly.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 581

700-5.5.6 Fittings. Each section in a face shall be joined to the adjacent section by one of the
following methods:
a) A minimum of 3 machine screws for 8-inch (200 mm) sections and 4 machine screws for 12-inch
(300 mm) sections installed through holes near the front and rear of the housings. Machine
screws shall be No. 10 and provided with a nut, flat washer and lock washer.
b) Two machine screws (each with a nut, flat washer and lock washer) through the 1- 9/16-inch (40
mm) pipe opening. The fastening system shall consist of 2 large flat washers to distribute the
load around the pipe opening and 3 carriage bolts, each with a nut and lock washer. The
minimum size of the machine screws shall be No. 10. The minimum size of the carriage bolts
shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm).
The supporting section of each signal face supported solely at the top or bottom shall be provided
with reinforcement.
Reinforcing plates shall be either sheet aluminum, galvanized steel or cast aluminum. Each plate
shall be not less than 7/64 inch (2700 µm) thick and have a hole concentric with the 1- 9/16-inch (40
mm) pipe mounting hole in the housing. Sheet aluminum reinforcing plates shall be placed both inside
and outside the housing. Galvanized steel reinforcing plates shall only be placed inside, and aluminum
reinforcing plates shall only be placed on the outside. Reinforcing plates placed on the outside shall be
finished to match the color of the signal face and mounting hardware. A minimum of 3 No. 10 machine
screws shall be installed through holes in the plates and matching holes in the housing. Each screw shall
have a round or binder head and shall be provided with a nut and lock washer.
Where a signal face is to be supported by a side attachment slip-fitter inserted between 2 sections, a
spacer or spacers shall be placed between the 2 sections. The vertical dimensions of the spacers shall
permit proper seating of the serrations between the slip-fitter and the 2 sections. Holes in spacers shall
align with the front holes in the section housings. In addition to the fastening through the large opening
in the housings, the 2 sections shall be joined with at least 2 machine screws through holes near the front
of the housings and the spacers, and through matching holes in a reinforcing plate installed in each
housing. Machine screws shall be No. 10 size. Spacers shall be made of the same material as the signal
housings. Reinforcing plates and machine screws shall be as specified herein.
Reinforcing plates will not be required where the housing is provided with reinforcing webs
connecting the rear of the housing with the top, bottom and sides.
Holes for machine screws shall be either cast or drilled during fabrication of the signal section. Each
hole shall be surrounded by a 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum width boss to permit contact between signal
sections about the axis of the hole.
700-5.5.7 Electrical Components. Lamp receptacles and wiring shall conform to ITE Publication
ST–008B. The metal portion of the medium base lamp socket shall be brass, copper or phosphor bronze.
Each lamp receptacle shall be wired with a conductor, connected to the shell of the receptacle, with
white insulation, and a conductor, to the bottom or end terminal of the receptacle, with a black insulation
or insulation color-coded.
Conductors shall, in turn, be connected to a terminal block mounted inside at the back of the
housing. The terminal block shall have sufficient screw-type terminals or NEMA-type tab connectors to
terminate all field conductors and lamp conductors independently. The terminals to which field
conductors are attached shall be permanently identified or conductors shall be color-coded to facilitate
field wiring.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
582 Greenbook 2021

Lamp receptacle conductors shall be No. 18, or larger, 600V, appliance wiring material (AWM),
with 1/32 inch (800 µm) thickness insulation rated for 221°F (105°C) or with insulation conforming to
Military Specification MIL-W 16878 D, Type B, with vinyl nylon jacket rated for 239°F (115°C). The
manufacturer’s name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type letter designation and temperature
rating shall be marked on the insulation or a Certificate of Compliance shall be submitted with each
shipment.
700-5.5.8 Visors. Each signal section shall be provided with a removable visor conforming to ITE
Publication ST-008B. Visors shall be classified on the basis of lens enclosure as full-circle, tunnel
(bottom open), or cap (bottom and lower sides open). Unless otherwise specified, visors shall be the
tunnel-type.
Visors shall be a minimum of 9-7/16 inches (240 mm) in length for nominal 12-inch (300 mm)
round lenses and 7-1/16 inches (180 mm) in length for nominal 8-inch (200 mm) round lenses, with a
downward tilt between 3 degrees and 7 degrees.
Metal visors shall be made from 3/64 inch (1.2 mm) minimum thickness, aluminum alloy sheets.
Plastic visors shall conform to the following requirements:
a) Visors shall be either formed from sheet plastic or assembled from one or more injection,
rotational or blow molded plastic sections.
b) Sections shall be joined using thermal, chemical or ultrasonic bonding, or with aluminum rivets
and washers permanently colored to match the visor.
c) Visors shall be of black, homogeneous colored material with lusterless finish.
Each visor shall be secured to its door in a manner that will prevent its removal or permanent
deformation when the wind load specified in California Test 605 for plastic visors or California Test 666
for metal visors is applied for 24 hours.
700-5.5.9 Directional Louvers. Directional louvers shall be furnished and installed in the signal
visors as shown on the Plans. Directional louvers shall be so constructed as to have a tight fit in the
signal visors. Dimensions of louvers and arrangements of vanes shall be as shown on the Plans.
The outside cylinder may be constructed of 1/32 inch (800 µm) nominal thickness or thicker sheet
steel. Vanes may be constructed of 1/64 inch (400 µm) nominal thickness, or thicker, sheet steel.
Alternatively, the cylinder and vanes may be constructed of 5052-H32 aluminum alloy of equivalent
thickness.
700-5.5.10 Backplates.
700-[Link] General. Backplates shall be furnished and installed on signal faces if shown on the
Plans. No background light shall show between the backplate and the signal face or between sections.
700-[Link] Plastic Backplates. Plastic backplates shall be either formed from sheet plastic or
assembled from extruded molded or cast sections. Backplates shall be made of black, homogeneous
colored material with a lusterless finish. Each plastic backplate shall be secured to the plastic signal face
in a manner that will prevent its removal or permanent deformation when the wind load test specified in
700-5.5.8 is applied to either the front or the rear of the signal face. The permanent deformation of any
portion of a backplate shall not exceed 5 degrees forward or backward after the wind loading has been
applied for 24 hours.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 583

Sections shall be factory-joined using:

a) solvent cement recommended by the manufacturer,
b) aluminum rivets and washers painted or permanently colored to match the backplate, or
c) No. 10 machine screws provided with a washer, lock washer and nut painted to match the backplate.
When a plastic backplate requires field assembly, it shall be joined with a minimum of 4 No. 10
machine screws at each field assembled joint. Each machine screw shall be provided with an
integral or captive flat washer, a hexagonal head slotted for a standard screwdriver, and either:
d) a locking nut with an integral or captive flat washer, or
e) a nut, flat washer, and lock washer.
Machine screws, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel or steel with a zinc or black oxide finish.
In lieu of screws, plastic backplates may be fastened to the plastic signal face using self-threading
No. 10 steel screws. The screws shall have an integral or captive flat washer and a hexagon head slotted
for a standard screwdriver, and shall be stainless steel or steel with a zinc or black oxide finish.
700-[Link] Metal Backplates. Where a metal backplate consists of 2 or more sections, the
sections shall be fastened with rivets or with aluminum bolts peened after assembly to prevent loosening.
700-5.5.11 Circular Light Emitting Diode (LED) Signal Modules.
700-[Link] General. LED signal modules shall consist of an assembly that utilizes LED’s as the
light source. Modules shall be from the same manufacturer and each size shall be the same model.
Modules shall be single, self-contained devices not requiring on-site assembly for installation into
existing traffic signal section housings. Modules shall fit into traffic signal section housings built in
conformance with the ITE publication ST-008B without modification to the housing. Special tools shall
not be required for installation. Installation shall only require removal of the optical unit components
(lens, gaskets, lamp, lamp socket and reflector).
Modules shall be installed in, and sealed to, the door frame with a one-piece ethylene propylene
rubber gasket and shall be weather-tight.
LED signal modules shall be sealed units with 2 conductors for connecting to power, a printed circuit
board, a power supply, a lens and gasket and weatherproof after installation and connection. The circuit
board and power supply shall be contained inside the module. Circuit boards shall conform to Chapter
1, Section 6, of the “Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications” published by the State of
California Department of Transportation unless otherwise specified.
Conductors for LED signal modules shall be 3 feet (1 m) in length, with terminals attached, and shall
conform to 700-5.3.
Connections shall be to the terminal block in the signal face or utilize an adapter that screws into the
medium base lamp socket. Contacts shall be brass. Splices will not be allowed.
The lens shall be integral to the module, convex with a smooth outer surface, and made of ultraviolet
stabilized plastic or glass. The lens shall be capable of withstanding exposure to ultraviolet light for a
minimum period of 48 months without exhibiting evidence of deterioration.
LED’s shall utilize aluminum indium gallium phosphate technology and shall be the ultra bright type
or equivalent rated for 100,000 hours of continuous operation from –42°F (–40°C) to 165°F (+74°C).
Each individual LED shall be wired such that physical damage or failure will result in the loss of not
more than 5 percent of the LED signal module light output.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
584 Greenbook 2021

Maximum power consumption requirements shall be as shown in Table 700-[Link].

TABLE 700-[Link]
Power Consumption at
LED Signal Module
77°°F (25°°C) 165°°F (74°°C)
12-inch (300 mm) Circular 25.0 W 30.0 W
8-inch (200 mm) Circular 15.0 W 18.0 W
12-inch (300 mm) Arrow 15.0 W 18.0 W
LED signal modules shall be rated for a minimum useful life of 48 months.

700-[Link] Physical and Mechanical Requirements. LED signal modules shall conform to the
following requirements:
a) Have a maximum weight of 4.4 pounds (2.0 kg).
b) Be rated for use in the operating temperature range of -42°F (-40°C) to +165°F (+74°C).
c) Be protected against dust and moisture intrusion in accordance with NEMA Standard 250-1991
for Type 4 enclosures.
d) Be manufactured to withstand mechanical shock and vibration from winds and other sources as
specified.
e) Have the manufacturer’s name, trademark, model number, serial number, lot number and the
month and year of manufacture permanently marked on the back of each module.
f) Have prominent and permanent vertical markings for correct indexing and orientation within a
signal housing. The markings shall consist of an “UP” arrow, or the word “UP” or “TOP.”
700-[Link] Operating Characteristics. The following operating characteristics shall be identified
and submitted to the Engineer:
a) Rated voltage.
b) Power consumption.
c) Volt-ampere (VA).
Enclosures, excluding the lens, containing either the power supply or electronic components shall be
made of UL 94VO flame retardant materials.
Lens’ may be tinted or use transparent film or material with similar characteristics to enhance
“on/off” contrasts. The use of tinting or other materials to enhance “on/off” contrasts shall not affect
chromaticity and shall be uniform across the face of the lens. If a polymeric lens is used, a surface
coating or chemical surface treatment shall be used to provide front surface abrasion resistance.
700-[Link] Photometric Requirements. The minimum initial luminous intensity values shall
conform to Section 11.94 of ITE Publication ST-008B at 77°F (25°C). Luminous intensity values shall
meet or exceed 85 percent of the standard light output values specified in the ITE VTCSH, after 48
months of continuous use over the temperature range of –42°F (–40°C) to 165°F (+74°C) in a traffic
signal operation.
Measured chromaticity coordinates shall conform to Section 8.04 and Figure 1 of the ITE VTCSH
over the temperature range of –42°F (–40°C) to 165°F (+74°C).

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 585

700-[Link] Electrical Requirements.

a) Modules shall operate over a voltage range from 95V AC to 135V AC at a frequency of 60 Hz ± 3 Hz.
b) Fluctuations of line voltage shall have no visible effect on the luminous intensity of the
indications. Rated voltage for the measurements shall be 120V.
c) Modules and associated on-board circuitry shall conform to FCC Title 47, Sub-Part B, Section 15
regulations concerning the emission of electronic noise.
d) Circuitry shall include voltage surge protection to withstand high-repetition noise transients as
specified in Section 2.1.6 of NEMA Standard TS2-1992.
e) Circuitry shall prevent perceptible flicker over the specified voltage range.
f) Modules shall provide a power factor of 0.90 or greater while operating throughout the
temperature range of –42°F (–40°C) to 165°F (+74°C).
g) Total harmonic distortion (current and voltage) induced into an AC power line shall not exceed
20 percent while operating throughout this temperature range.
h) Wiring and terminal blocks shall conform to Section 13.02 of the ITE VTCSH. Two secured
color coded 600V, No. 20 AWG minimum, jacketed wires shall be provided for electrical
connection for each module. The wires shall conform to the NEC, and be rated for service at
221°F (105°C) or greater.
Modules shall be operationally compatible with the controller assemblies (solid state load switches,
flashers and conflict monitors) specified.
700-[Link] Arrow LED Signal Modules. Arrow LED signal modules shall conform to Section
9.01 of the ITE VTCSH for arrow lenses. LEDs shall be spread evenly across the illuminated portion of
the arrow area. Each arrow LED signal section indication shall provide an average luminous intensity of
511 candelas per square foot (5500 cd/m2). Measurements shall be performed at the rated operating
voltage of 120V AC.
700-[Link] Testing Requirements. LED signal modules tested or submitted for testing shall be
representative of typical average production units. Circular LED signal modules shall be tested in
accordance with California Test 604. Optical testing shall be performed with the module mounted in a
standard traffic signal section but without a visor or hood attached. The number of units tested (sample
size) shall be determined by the quantity of each model in the shipment. The sample size shall conform to
the American National Standards Institute/Acceptance Sampling in Quality Control (ANSI/ASQC) Z1.4.
The sampling parameters to be used for the random sample testing, if any, shall be as specified in the
Special Provisions. The specified parameters may be tested on the sample.
Acceptance or rejection of the shipment will be based upon ANSI/ASQC Z1.4 for shipments which
are sampled randomly. Upon rejection of a shipment, the Contractor shall arrange for pick-up of the
rejected shipment.
700-[Link] Certificate of Compliance. The Contractor shall submit a Certificate of Compliance
with each shipment.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
586 Greenbook 2021

700-5.5.12 Programmed Visibility Vehicle Signal Sections.

700-[Link] General. Programmed visibility vehicle signal sections shall provide a nominal 11-
3/4-inch (300 mm) diameter circular or arrow indication. Color and arrow configuration shall conform
to ITE Publication ST-008B. Each signal section shall be provided with the following:
a) A cap visor.
b) An adjustable connection that permits incremental tilting from 0 to 10 degrees above or below
the horizontal while maintaining a common vertical axis through couplers and mounting.
Terminal connections shall permit external adjustments about the mounting axis in 5 degree
increments.
Signal sections shall be mountable with ordinary tools and capable of being serviced without tools.
Adjustments shall be preset at 4 degrees below the horizontal unless otherwise specified.
700-[Link] Programmed Visibility. The Contractor shall program the signal section as specified.
The visibility of each indication shall be capable of adjustment or programming within the section.
When programmed, the indication shall be visible only in those areas or lanes to be controlled, except
during dusk and darkness when a faint glow on each side will be permissible.
Prior to programming, each signal section with a yellow indication shall provide:
a) A minimum luminous intensity of 2500 candelas on the optical axis.
b) A maximum intensity of 100 candelas at 15 degrees from 0.5 to 2 degrees horizontal from the axis.
c) A maximum of 10 candelas from 2 to 15 degrees horizontal from the axis.
Under the same conditions, the intensity of the red indication and the green indication shall be a
minimum of 19 and 38 percent, respectively, of the yellow indication.
Each signal face or signal section shall include integral means for regulating its luminous intensity
between limits in proportion to the individual background luminance. Lamp intensity shall not be less
than 97 percent of uncontrolled intensity at 10,000 lux and shall reduce to 15 ± 2 percent of maximum
intensity at less than 10 lux. The dimming device shall operate over an applied voltage range of 95 to
135V, 60 Hz, and a temperature range of –42°F (–40°C) to 165°F (74°C).
700-5.6 Pedestrian Signal Sections.
700-5.6.1 General. Pedestrian signal sections shall be as specified. Message symbols shall be a
white “WALKING PERSON” and a Portland orange “UPRAISED HAND” conforming to the ITE
“Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications” and the California MUTCD. The height of each symbol
shall be not less than 9-3/4 inches (250 mm) and the width of each symbol shall be not less than 6-1/2
inches (163 mm). Each housing, including the front screen, shall have maximum overall dimensions of
18-1/2 inches (463 mm) wide, 19 inches (475 mm) high and 11-1/2 inches (288 mm) deep. All new
pedestrian signal sections installed at any one intersection shall be of the same manufacturer and type.
The luminance of the “UPRAISED HAND” symbol shall be 349 candelas per square foot (3750 cd/m2)
minimum, and the luminance of the “WALKING PERSON” symbol shall be 493 candelas per square foot
(5300 cd/m2), minimum, when tested in accordance with California Test 606. The uniformity ratio of an
illuminated symbol shall not exceed 4 to 1 between the highest and the lowest luminance area. The luminance
difference between a non-illuminated symbol and the background around the symbol shall be less than 30
percent when viewed with the visor and front screen in place and at a low sun angle.
Brightness measurements for sections designed for an incandescent lamp shall be made when the
signal is equipped with an A-21 traffic signal lamp operated at a voltage to produce 665 lumens.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 587

700-5.6.2 Components.
700-[Link] General. Each pedestrian signal section shall consist of a housing, 2-color message
plate, a reflector assembly, one incandescent lamp or one LED module conforming to 700-5.5.11 with
sockets and a front screen.
700-[Link] Message Plates. Message plates shall be one-piece and shall be made of 1/8 inch (3
mm) minimum thickness, ultraviolet stabilized polycarbonate plastic or 3/16 inch (5 mm) tempered
glass. The symbols shall be applied to the inside smooth surface.
700-[Link] Reflector Assemblies. Reflector assemblies shall consist of a double reflector or 2
single reflectors. Reflectors shall conform to ITE Publication ST-008B. Reflectors shall be made of
either aluminum or plastic. Each completed reflector shall, when operated with the appropriate lamp and
lens, provide the message brightness specified.
Plastic reflectors shall consist of molded or vacuum-formed plastic with a vacuum-deposited
aluminum reflecting surface. The plastic used shall not distort when the reflector is used with the lamp
of the wattage recommended by the section manufacturer. The UL non-mechanical loading temperature
of the material shall not be exceeded by more than 50°F (10°C) in accordance with UL 746B.
700-[Link] Front Screens. Front screens shall be provided on each signal face as shown on the
Plans. Front screens, when laying in a horizontal position and supported on their edges, shall not
fracture, separate at the welds, or compress more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) when a 3-inch (75 mm) diameter,
4-pound (1.8 kg) ball is dropped onto it from a height of 4 feet (1.2 m). When the pedestrian housing is
used to support the front screen during the test, the message plate will be removed from the pedestrian
signal housing so there will be no back support for the screen.
The screen and frame shall be fabricated from aluminum anodized flat black, finished with lusterless
black exterior grade latex paint formulated for application to properly prepared metal surfaces, or
fabricated from flat black plastic.
One of the following types of screens shall be provided as specified:
a) Honeycomb Screens. Honeycomb screens shall consist of:
1) Aluminum 3/16 inch (5 mm) hexagon cells, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick or,
2) Plastic 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) squares, 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) thick with a wall thickness of 1/16
inch (1.5 mm).
3) A clear front cover of 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum thickness acrylic plastic sheet or 1/16 inch
(1500 µm) minimum thickness polycarbonate plastic.
Honeycomb screens shall be installed tilting downward, at an angle of 15 ± 2 degrees, out from
the top. Screens shall completely cover the message plate. The screen and cover shall be held
firmly in place by stainless steel or aluminum clips, or stainless steel metal screws.
b) Eggcrate or Z-crate Screens. Eggcrate or Z-crate screens shall consist of a 1-1/2-inch (38 mm)-
deep eggcrate or Z-crate screen of 1/32 inch (800 µm) nominal thickness polycarbonate. Screens
shall be mounted in a frame constructed of 1/32 inch (800 µm) minimum thickness aluminum
alloy or polycarbonate.
Eggcrate or Z-crate screens shall be installed parallel to the face of the message plate and shall be held
in place by stainless steel screws. The visor specified in 700-[Link] is not required with this type screen.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
588 Greenbook 2021

700-[Link] Housings. Housings shall conform to 700-5.5.3.

700-[Link] Visors. Visors shall be constructed of a material similar to the housing. The top of the
visor shall extend a minimum length of 6 inches (150 mm) at the top and 5 inches (125 mm) at the
bottom when measured from the front surface of the housing. The front shall be normal to the top.
700-5.6.3 Finish. The exterior of each housing and visor and the interior of the visors shall be
painted in conformance with 210 unless otherwise specified.
700-5.6.4 Controls. Pedestrian signals sections shall be capable of being controlled by solid-state
switching devices specified for traffic signal controller assemblies.
700-5.6.5 Terminal Blocks. Each pedestrian signal section shall be provided with a terminal block
conforming to 700-4.3.3 unless otherwise specified. All field wiring shall connect to this terminal block.
700-5.6.6 LED Pedestrian Signal Section “Upraised Hand” Modules.
700-[Link] General. Installation shall not require modification of a standard lamp socket or
reflector. Modules shall be designed as retrofit replacements for existing optical units and shall not
require special tools for installation.
Maximum power consumption requirements shall be 15W at 77°F (25°C) and 18W at 165°F (74°C).
The luminance of the “Upraised Hand” symbol shall be a minimum of 348 candelas per square foot
(3,750 cd/m2). The color of the “Upraised Hand” shall be Portland orange conforming to the
requirements of ITE “Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications” and the California MUTCD. The
height of each symbol shall be not less than 10 inches (250 mm) and the width of each symbol shall not
be less than 6-1/2 inches (163 mm).
The uniformity ratio of an illuminated symbol shall not exceed 4 to 1 between the highest luminance
area and the lowest luminance area.
LED modules shall be rated for a minimum useful life of 48 months.
700-[Link] Physical and Mechanical Requirements. Physical and mechanical requirements shall
conform to 700-[Link] and the following:
a) Modules shall not require a specific mounting orientation or have a variance in light output,
pattern or visibility for any mounting orientation. Installation shall only require removal of the
lamp.
b) Modules shall be rated for use in the operating temperature range of –42°F to 165°F (–40°C to
+74°C).
700-[Link] Photometric Requirements. The minimum initial luminous intensity values shall be
347 candelas per square foot (3750 cd/m2). Luminous intensity values shall meet or exceed 85 percent
of 347 candelas per square foot (3750 cd/m2) after 48 months of continuous use over the temperature
range of –42°F to 165°F (–40°C to +74°C) in a traffic signal operation.
The measured chromaticity coordinates shall conform to [Link] and Figure C of the ITE VTCSH
while operating throughout the temperature range of –42°F to 165°F (–40°C to +74°C).
700-[Link] Electrical Requirements. Electrical requirements shall conform to 700-[Link] unless
otherwise specified.
700-[Link] Testing. Modules tested or submitted for testing shall be representative of the typical
average production units. Modules shall be tested in accordance with California Test 606. Optical
testing shall be performed with the module mounted in the specified housing but without a visor or hood
attached.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 589

700-[Link] Quality Assurance Testing. Quality assurance testing may be performed by the
Agency on each new LED pedestrian signal module. The number of units tested (sample size) will be
determined by the quantity of each model in the shipment. The sample size will conform to the
requirements in ANSI/ASQ Z1.4.
The Engineer will determine the sampling parameters to be used for the random sample testing. The
parameters specified in the Special Provisions may be tested on each sample.
The basis of acceptance or rejection of the shipment will be the criteria specified in ANSI/ASQ Z1.4
for shipments that are sampled randomly. Upon rejection of a shipment the Contractor shall arrange for
pick-up and return it to the manufacturer.
700-[Link] Certificate of Compliance. A Certificate of Compliance shall be submitted with each
shipment.
700-5.7 Signal Mounting Assemblies. Signal mounting assemblies shall consist of Size 41
standard steel pipe or galvanized conduit, necessary fittings, slip-fitters and terminal compartments.
Pipe fittings shall be ductile iron, galvanized steel, aluminum alloy Type AC-84B No. 380, or bronze.
Mast arm slip-fitters, post top slip-fitters and terminal compartments shall be cast bronze or hot-dip
galvanized ductile iron. After installation, any exposed threads of galvanized conduit brackets and areas
of the brackets damaged shall be cleaned with a wire brush and painted with 2 applications of an
approved un-thinned zinc-rich primer (organic vehicle type) conforming to 210. Aerosol cans shall not
be used.
Each terminal compartment shall be fitted with a terminal block containing a minimum of 12 poles,
each with 2 screw-type terminals. Each screw-type terminal shall be designed to accommodate at least 5
No. 14 conductors. A cover shall be provided on the compartment to give ready access to the terminal
block. Where used to bracket mount signals, the terminal compartment shall be designed to bolt
securely to a pole or Standard.
The horizontal dimension of the mounting assembly members between the vertical centerline of the
terminal compartment or slip-fitter and the vertical centerline of each signal face shall not exceed 11
inches (275 mm), except where required to provide proper signal face alignment or permit programming
of programmed visibility signal faces unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Mounting assemblies
shall be watertight and free of sharp edges or protrusions which might damage conductor insulation.
Mounting assembly members shall be either plumb or level, symmetrically arranged and securely
assembled. Each mounting assembly shall be provided with positive locking, serrated fittings that, when
mated with similar fittings on the signal faces shall prevent the faces from rotating. Fittings shall permit
fastening at increments of not more than 7 degrees. Construction shall be such as to permit all
conductors to be concealed.
For post-top mounting of signals, a slip-fitter shall be used. The slip-fitter shall fit over a 4-1/2-inch
(113 mm) outside diameter pipe or tapered Standard end. Each slip-fitter shall be provided with
cadmium-plated steel set screws, arranged as shown on the Standard Plans. Each slip-fitter used to post-
top mount signals with brackets shall be provided with an integral terminal compartment.
Each mounting assembly shall be oriented to provide maximum horizontal clearance to the
adjacent roadway.
700-5.8 Detectors.
700-5.8.1 General. Vehicle and bicycle detectors shall be the type or types shown on the Plans.
Sensor units, control units and amplifiers shall conform to the requirements in the Special Provisions.
The units shall not be affected by transient voltages when tested in accordance with California Test 667.
After a power interruption the units shall return to normal operation within one minute.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
590 Greenbook 2021

Each unit shall be provided with a light or meter, for each output circuit, to indicate when the
detector is detecting a vehicle. Each detector shall operate over the range of voltages from 100V to
135V at 60Hz.
Circuitry shall be solid-state, except relays with normally closed contacts may be used for the output
circuit. Units shall use printed circuit boards designed to facilitate identification of components by
either part identification markings or by providing a pictorial diagram showing the physical location and
identification of each component. Each printed circuit board shall conform to the following minimum
quality requirements:
a) NEMA FR-4 glass cloth base epoxy resin board, 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum thickness.
b) Organic masking.
c) Gold plated contacts.
Units shall be designed to provide vehicle detection without readjustment from 0°F to 160°F (–18°C
to 71°C).
700-5.8.2 Inductive Loop Detectors.
700-[Link] General. The term “inductive loop detector” shall be defined as a complete installation
consisting of a loop or group of loops installed in the roadway as shown on the Plans, lead-in cable, and
a sensor unit with a power supply installed in a controller cabinet.
700-[Link] Sensor Units. “Card” type sensor units shall conform to the requirements in the “Traffic
Signal Control Equipment Specifications” published by the State of California Department of Transportation.
Shelf mounted sensor units shall conform to the requirements in Section 11 of NEMA TS-1.
Capacitors or inductors necessary for loop tuning shall not be mounted external to the sensor unit.
700-[Link] Conductors. Conductors for inductive loop detectors shall be continuous and un-
spliced and conform to the following requirements unless otherwise specified:
a) Type 1 loop wire shall be Type RHW-USE neoprene-jacketed or Type USE cross-linked
polyethylene insulated No. 12 stranded copper wire. The minimum insulation thickness at any
point shall be 1/32 inch (800 µm).
b) Type 2 loop wire shall consist of a conductor inside of plastic tubing. The conductor shall be
Type THWN or Type XHHW, No. 14 stranded copper wire. The tubing shall be polyethylene or
vinyl, rated for use at 221°F (105°C), and resistant to oil and gasoline. The tubing shall have a
maximum outside diameter of 1/4 inch (6 mm) and a minimum wall thickness of 1/32 inch (800
µm). The conductors shall not be spliced inside the tubing.
Conductors for loop detector lead-in cable shall be 2 No. 16 AWG (19 x 29) stranded tinned copper.
Loop detector lead-in cable shall conform to the calculated cross sectional area of ASTM B286, Table 1.
Lead-in cable shall conform to the following requirements unless otherwise specified:
a) Type B lead-in cable shall be insulated with 1/64 inch (400 µm) of high-density polyethylene.
The conductors shall be twisted together with at least 6 turns per 3 feet (1 m) and the twisted pair
shall be protected with a copper or aluminum polyester shield. A No. 20 AWG, minimum,
copper drain ground wire shall be provided and connected to the equipment ground within the
cabinet. The cable shall be provided with a high-density polyethylene or high-density
polypropylene outer jacket with a nominal thickness of 1/32 inch (800 µm). An amorphous
interior moisture penetration barrier of non-hydroscopic polyethylene or polypropylene fillers
shall be provided.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 591

b) Type C lead-in cable shall conform to the IMSA Specifications No. 50-2. A No. 20 AWG
minimum copper drain ground wire shall be provided and connected to the equipment ground
within the cabinet.
All detector lead-in cable connections and/or terminations shall be soldered.
700-[Link] Sealants. Sealants shall be packaged in containers clearly labeled “detector loop
sealant” and the label shall include the batch and lot number of the manufacturer. The sealant for filling
slots shall conform to one of the following:
a) Elastomeric Sealant. Elastomeric sealant shall be a polyurethane material of a composition that
will, within its stated shelf life, cure only in the presence of moisture. Sealant shall be suitable
for use in both asphalt concrete and Portland cement concrete. The cured sealant shall have the
performance characteristics shown in Table 700-[Link] (A).

TABLE 700-[Link] (A)

Specifications ASTM Requirement
Hardness (indentation) at 77°F (25°C) and 50% relative humidity D2240 Rex. 65-85
(Type A Model 1700 only)
Tensile Strength, pulled at 20 inches (500 mm) per minute D412 Die C 500 psi (3.45 MPa) min.
Elongation: pulled at 20 inches (500 mm) per minute D412 Die C 400%, min.
Flex at -40°F (–40°C): 0.6 mm Free Bend (180°) over a 1/2 inch --- No cracks
(12 mm) Mandrel.
Weather Resistance: Weatherometer 350 h cured 7 Days at 77°F D822 Slight chalking
(25°C) @ 50% relative humidity.
Salt Spray Resistance: 28 days at 100°F (38°C) with 5% NaCl, B117 500 psi (3.45 MPa) min.
Die and pulled at 20 inches (500 mm) per minute. tensile, 400% min. elongation
Dielectric Constant over a temperature range of -22°F (–30°C) D150 Less than 25% change

b) Asphaltic Emulsion Sealant. Asphaltic emulsion sealant shall conform to State Specification
8040-41A-15 and shall only be used for filling slots in asphalt concrete pavement. This material
shall not be used in slots which exceed 5/8 inch (16 mm) in width or where the slope causes the
material to run from the slot. The material shall not be thinned in excess of the manufacturer’s
recommendations and shall not be placed when the air temperature is less than 45°F (7°C).
c) Hot-Melt Rubberized Asphalt Sealant. Hot-melt rubberized asphalt sealant shall be in solid form
at room temperature and fluid at an application temperature of 375°F (190°C) to 400°F (205°C).
Fumes from the material shall be non-toxic. Sealant shall be suitable for use in both asphalt
concrete and Portland cement concrete. Performance characteristics of the cured hot-melt
rubberized asphalt sealant shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 700-[Link] (B).

TABLE 700-[Link] (B)

Specification ASTM Requirement
Cone Penetration, 77°F (25°C) 5.3 oz (150 g), for 5 sec. D3407, Sec. 5 1/8 inch (3 mm) max.
Flow, 40°F (60°C) D3407, Sec. 6 3/16 inch (5 mm) max.
Resilience, 77°F (25°C) D3407, Sec. 8 25% min.
Softening Point D36 180°F (82°C) min.
Ductility, 77°F (25°C) 2 inches (50 mm) /min. D113 11-13/16 inches (300
mm) /min.
Flash Point, Cleveland Open Cup, °F (°C) D92 550°F (288°C)
Viscosity, Brookfield Thermosel, No. 27 Spindle, 20 rpm, 374°F (190°C) D4402 2.5-3.5 Pa·s

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
592 Greenbook 2021

700-5.9 Pedestrian Push Button Assemblies. Pedestrian push button assembly housings shall be
either die-cast or permanent mold cast aluminum or, when specified, shall be ultraviolet light stabilized,
self-extinguishing, structural plastic. Plastic housings shall be black matching Color No. 17038, 27038
or 37038 of Federal Standard No. 595B unless otherwise specified and shall be colored throughout.
Assemblies shall be rainproof and shockproof in any weather conditions.
Switches shall be the phenolic enclosed precision snap-acting type, single-pole, double-throw,
switching unit, with screw type terminals, rated 15A at 125V AC, and shall conform to the following:
a) Have a stainless steel plunger actuator and be provided with a U-frame to permit recessed
mounting in the push button housing.
b) Have an operating force of 9 ounces (2.5 N) to 13 ounces (3.6 N) and a minimum release force
of 4 ounces (1 N).
c) Pre-travel shall be 1/64 inch (400 µm) maximum.
d) Overtravel shall be 1/32 inch (800 µm) minimum.
e) Differential travel shall be 0.01 mm to 0.05 mm.
f) The actuator shall have a minimum diameter of 2 inches (50 mm).
Pedestrian push button signs shall be porcelain enameled metal or structural plastic.

SECTION 701 - CONSTRUCTION

701-1 GENERAL. The following specifies the requirements for the installation and construction of street
lighting and traffic signal systems. Street lighting and traffic signal materials to be furnished and installed shall
conform to 700 unless otherwise specified.
Incidental parts that are not shown on the Plans or specified in the Specifications and are necessary to
complete the Work, shall be furnished and installed as though such parts were shown on the Plans or specified in
the Specifications.
Unless otherwise directed or specified, the Contractor shall submit a list of equipment and materials to be
installed. The list shall include the name of the manufacturer, size, and identifying number of each item. In
addition, the Contractor shall submit detailed drawings and wiring diagrams for the electrical equipment to be
used.
If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit for review samples of the material proposed for use.
Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall submit one complete set of “as-built” Plans showing in
detail all construction changes.
701-2 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING AND TEMPORARY SYSTEMS. The Contractor, during the
progress of the Work, shall maintain existing or temporary street lighting and traffic signal systems.
701-3 COORDINATION WITH THE SERVING ELECTRICAL UTILITY. Safety clearances
between new or existing Standards (including luminaires, arms or signal heads) and overhead power and
communication lines shall conform to the State of California Industrial Safety Orders, General Order 95.
Construction in proximity to high-voltage overhead lines shall be performed in accordance with the California
Code of Regulations, Title 8 and the latest revision of Article 86, State of California High Voltage Electric Safety
Orders. The Contractor shall inspect the location of each Standard for safety clearance requirements and notify
the Engineer and the serving electric utility, in writing, of the locations where safety clearances are required. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the necessary coordination with the serving electric utility.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 593

Requests for safety clearances shall be made at least 21 Days in advance of the date the Contractor will be
working at each location requiring a safety clearance by the serving electric utility. If required, the Contractor
shall make the necessary arrangements with the serving electric utility to raise their overhead facilities in order to
provide for required clearances.
Coordination with the serving electrical utility, and the provision of safety clearances, shall be shown as
individual activities on the construction schedule specified in 6-1.1.
701-4 DAMAGE TO EXISTING SYSTEMS. Should any damage to an existing system occur, which is
not part of the work shown on the Plans, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and arrange for the
immediate repair and restoration of service. The Contractor shall commence repairs or replacements within 72
hours of damaging the system or receiving approval of the equipment and materials by the Engineer, whichever
takes longer. Electrical safety clearance shall be obtained from the serving utility before performing any work on
existing energized circuits. Equipment and materials used for repairs or replacements shall conform to 700 and
be approved by the Engineer.
701-5 TEMPORARY SYSTEMS.
701-5.1 General. The Contractor shall provide temporary street lighting and/or traffic signal systems
whenever the existing systems are removed or relocated. Temporary systems shall be in operation prior to the
removal or relocation of the existing systems. Temporary street lighting systems shall provide an average
illumination and uniformity ratio (average/minimum) that matches or exceeds the existing lighting levels
utilizing standard roadway lighting optics. The Contractor shall submit Working Drawings in accordance with 3-
8.2. Construction of the temporary systems shall be shown as an individual activity on the construction schedule
specified in 6-1.1.
Should a temporary system incur any damage, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and
arrange for repair and restoration of service in accordance with 700-4.
701-5.2 Temporary Wiring. Temporary wiring specified herein shall not apply to circuits exceeding 150V
to ground. Temporary wiring for circuits exceeding 150V to ground shall be as specified in the Special
Provisions.
Temporary wiring may utilize either overhead or underground conductors. Temporary overhead traffic
circuit runs shall be 28-conductor cable (except service wire).
Temporary overhead conductors shall be slack-spanned with 20-foot (6 m) minimum overhead clearance
above thoroughfares and 12-foot (4 m) minimum clearance above sidewalk areas. Temporary conductors may
not run on top of the ground or across any sidewalk area unless adequately protected in an electrical conduit.
Temporary conductors less than 10 feet (3 m) above ground level must be protected in an electrical conduit.
Temporary overhead conductors shall be multi-conductor cable or single conductors, securely tied or taped at
intervals not to exceed 5 feet (2 m). No spare conductors are required.
Splices within 10 feet (3 m) above ground level shall be enclosed in metal junction boxes. Splices made at
ground level shall be enclosed in pull boxes. Splices shall conform to 701-13.3. All circuits shall be grounded
and conform to 701-13.4.
701-5.3 Temporary Standards, Signals, Luminaires and Lamps. Temporary Standards shall be
installed adjacent to existing Standards. Combination poles that allow mounting of both street lighting
luminaires and traffic signal heads shall not be utilized.
For street lighting systems, the mounting height shall be a minimum of 30 feet (9 m). The minimum lamp
size shall be 200 watts. Luminaires shall be cutoff with a type 3 distribution pattern.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
594 Greenbook 2021

Temporary traffic signal heads shall provide a minimum of 2 clearly visible signal faces for each phase for
traffic from each direction. One signal face shall be adjacent to the left side of the traveled way and the other
signal face shall be adjacent to the right side of the traveled way. Temporary mast arms shall be installed as
necessary.
Temporary traffic signals shall be securely mounted approximately 10 feet (3 m) high, on poles, platform
Standards, or semi-permanent structures. Mast arms, where required, shall provide a minimum clearance of 17
feet (5 m) from the traveled way to the bottom of the traffic signal head. Primary and mast arm traffic signals
shall have backplates. Mast arm traffic signals and arrow indications shall be 12-inch (300 mm) in size and other
signals shall be of the same size as the permanent heads being replaced.
Traffic signal shutdown periods shall be as specified in the Special Provisions. Preliminary work associated
with the shutdown shall be performed prior to the actual shutdown.
Shutdowns, flashing operations, and turn-ons shall be requested at least 48 hours in advance and will be
overseen or performed by the Engineer.
701-5.4 Payment. Payment for preparing Working Drawings, and furnishing and installing temporary
systems complete and in-place shall be considered as included in the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in
the Bid for the work that required a temporary system.
701-6 ORDERING MATERIALS. The Contractor shall submit a letter to the Engineer stating that the
Contractor-furnished street lighting and/or traffic signal system materials have been ordered. The letter shall
contain the names and addresses of the suppliers and the estimated delivery dates. The letter shall be submitted
to the Engineer within 5 Working Days after acceptance of the submittal for the materials specified in 3-8.4.
701-7 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL.
701-7.1 General. Excavation required for the installation of conduit, foundations, and other equipment
shall be performed in such a manner as to cause the least possible damage to the streets, sidewalks, and other
existing improvements. Excavation shall not be performed until just prior to installation of equipment. Material
generated from excavations shall be placed in a location that will cause the least obstruction to surface drainage
and vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
Excavations that are required in concrete sidewalk, cuts and joints shall conform to 300-1.3.
At the end of each Working Day and at other times when construction operations are suspended, equipment,
material, and debris shall be removed from that portion of the right of way open for vehicular and pedestrian
traffic. Barricades shall be erected at excavations not backfilled or finished to final grade.
Excavations that are required shall be kept backfilled and maintained in a smooth and free draining condition
until permanent repairs are completed. Excavations, including those resulting from removal of existing
equipment, shall be backfilled, compacted, and the surface restored to match existing improvements. Restoration
shall conform to 400-1, 306-12.2, and 306-13.
701-7.2 Trenches. Trenches shall not be excavated wider than necessary for the installation of the conduit.
Trenching is not permitted through concrete improvements. When encountered, galvanized rigid steel conduit
shall be jacked, or rigid non-metallic conduit shall be bored beneath the improvements.
701-7.3 Payment. Payment for excavation and backfill of trenches shall be considered as included in the
Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid for the work that required excavation and backfill of trenches.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 595

701-8 FOUNDATIONS, FOUNDATION CAPS AND SLABS.

701-8.1 General. Work shall conform to the lines, elevations and grades shown on the Plans or established
by the Engineer. Construction of concrete foundations, caps and slabs construction shall conform to 303-1, 303-
5, and 305-1.3.
701-8.2 Foundations. Foundations shall be constructed in a single placement of concrete of the class
shown in Table 201-1.1.2. The bottom of the foundations shall rest securely on firm, unyielding soil.
Foundations shall cure for 24 hours before erecting Standards and 72 hours before erecting mast arms. Pile
foundations shall cure for 48 hours before erecting Standards and 7 Days before erecting mast arms.
Foundations constructed within the sidewalk or parkway shall pose no hazard to pedestrian traffic. The
above-ground portion of a foundation, if any, and/or anchor bolts, conduits etc. shall be protected with protection
devices approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall connect the protection devices to the foundation.
Protection devices shall protect pedestrians from the above ground portion of the foundation, and/or exposed
anchor bolts, conduit, etc. Protection devices shall remain and be maintained in place until the related equipment
is installed on the foundation.
701-8.3 Foundation Caps. Foundation caps shall be the same color, finish, and material as the adjacent
sidewalk, and be a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) thick unless otherwise specified. Foundation caps shall be
placed after the Standard is set in its final position. The longitudinal grade shall be the same as the grade for the
top of the existing curb. If there is no curb, the longitudinal grade will be established by the Engineer.
The transverse grade shall be established as follows:
a) Existing curb and no sidewalk – by sloping upward from the top of the back face of curb at the rate of
1/4 inch/foot (20 mm/m).
b) Existing curb and sidewalk – by straight grade from the top of the back face of curb to the top of the near
edge of sidewalk, and shall join all around in full-width sidewalk or sidewalk constructed adjacent to the
curb.
c) Service road parkways – by a straight line between the top of the back face of one curb to the top of the
back face of the other curb.
d) If the lateral grade of the existing parkway exceeds a slope of ± 1 inch/foot (80 mm/m), the Contractor
shall construct retaining curbs and sidewalk as directed by Engineer.
701-8.4 Concrete Slabs. Wherever the edge of a concrete foundation extends within 18 inches (450 mm)
of any existing concrete improvement, a concrete slab with a minimum thickness of 3 inches (75 mm) unless
otherwise specified shall be extended to meet the existing improvement.
701-8.5 Measurement. Foundations will be measured by the lump sum or by the cubic yard (m3) for each
type and size.
701-8.6 Payment. Payment for foundations, including protection devices, bolt circles, reinforcement and
foundation cap, will be made at the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid for each size and type.
Payment for concrete slabs will be made in accordance with 303-5.9.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
596 Greenbook 2021

701-9 ANCHOR BOLTS, NUTS, AND WASHERS.

701-9.1 General. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers, including those required for the relocation of existing
Standards, shall be furnished by the Contractor. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be of the type and size
shown on the Plans or Standard Plans.
701-9.2 Payment. No separate payment will be made for anchor bolts. Payment for furnishing and
installing anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be considered as included in the Contract Unit Price or lump sum
price in the Bid for the work that required the anchor bolts, nuts, and washers.
701-10 STANDARDS, PEDESTALS AND MAST ARMS.
701-10.1 General. Street lighting and traffic signal Standards, pedestals for cabinets, mast arms and other
similar equipment furnished shall be as shown on the Plans or Standard Plans.
Vertical alignment shall be performed by adjusting the nuts on the anchor bolts before the foundation cap is
placed. Shims or other similar devices shall not be used.
If base covers or foundation caps are not used, anchor bolts shall be cut 1/4 inch (6 mm) above the nuts. If
anchor bolts are cut, the cut surfaces shall be repaired in accordance with 210-3.5.
Holes left in the shafts of existing Standards, due to removal of equipment, shall be repaired as follows:
a) Steel shafts – by welding a suitable disc, grinding smooth, and painting as specified in 210-3.
b) Concrete shafts – by grouting to match the existing texture and color.
701-10.2 Mast Arms. Mast arms for Standards shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Plans or
Standard Plans. The joint between a Standard and a mast arm shall be rain-tight.
701-10.3 Measurement. Standards, mast arms, and pedestals will be measured by each type and size.
701-10.4 Payment. Payment for Standards, mast arms, and pedestals will be made at the Contract Unit
Price or lump sum price in the Bid for each size and type.
701-11 PULL BOXES.
701-11.1 General. Pull boxes, covers, and extensions shall be of the type, size, and details shown on the
Plans or Standard Plans.
Where the surrounding sidewalk surface is composed of a special material (terrazzo, pavers etc.), pull box
covers shall be made of matching material unless otherwise specified.
Pull boxes shall be installed at the locations shown on the Plans. If not shown, the maximum distance
between pull boxes shall be:
a) 300 feet (90 m) for traffic signal interconnect,
b) 200 feet (60 m) for street lighting systems, and
c) 600 feet (180 m) apart for fiber optic cable systems.
Pull boxes shall be placed:
a) Adjacent to Standards with a 3-foot (900 mm) clearance from the side of the foundation unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
b) A minimum of 5 feet (1500 mm) from the top of the “X” dimension of driveways and access ramps.
Pull boxes shall not be installed in any part of a driveway, curb ramp, or other traveled way unless
otherwise specified.
c) At least 6 inches (150 mm) from any substructure or back of curb unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 597

Pull boxes shall be installed with the long side parallel to the curb unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
The bottom shall rest firmly on a 12-inch (300 mm)-thick bed of 1 inch (25 mm) crushed rock conforming to
200-1.2, extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond the outside edges. The grade for the top shall be established as
specified in 701-8.3.
Where ballasts or transformers are installed in a pull box, a pull box extension shall be used.
The Contractor may, at its own expense and subject to the approval of the Engineer, install additional pull
boxes to facilitate the Work.
701-11.2 Measurement. Pull boxes will be measured by the number of each type.
701-11.3 Payment. Payment will be made at the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid for the
number of each type.
701-12 CONDUIT.
701-12.1 General. Conduit shall be of the type and size shown on the Plans. If so specified,
galvanized pipe or rigid non-metallic conduit may be substituted for galvanized electrical conduit.
Conduit shall be installed by trenching, jacking or directional boring methods as specified.
Conduit shall be placed, bored, or jacked to a depth of not less than 30 inches (750 mm) nor more
than 60 inches (1500 mm) below the flowline grade, unless otherwise specified. Conduit placed behind
a curb shall not be less than 14 inches (350 mm) nor more than 36 inches (900 mm) below the top of
curb. Conduit placed under railroad tracks shall not be less than 36 inches (900 mm) nor more than 60
inches (1500 mm) below the bottom of the ties, unless otherwise required by the jurisdictional railroad.
Conduit may be placed directly behind the curb if so approved by the Engineer. If there are obstructions,
the conduit may be placed further behind the curb. In no case shall the conduit be placed more than 36
inches (900 mm) behind the curb unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Jacking or directional boring pits shall be kept 2 feet (600 mm) clear of the edge of any type of
pavement unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
Jacking pits adjacent to railroad tracks shall be constructed not less than 25 feet (7.6 m) from the
centerline of track.
Conduit laid in an open trench shall not be covered nor shall any trench or inspection hole be
backfilled until the Engineer has approved the installation. Jacking or directional boring pits and
trenches left open overnight shall be covered with steel plates.
Detector, telephone interconnect, or street lighting conduit shall be 1 inch (25 mm) nominal size
unless otherwise specified. Direct interconnect, utility service, inductive loop detector, or traffic signal
conduit shall be 2-inch (50 mm) nominal size unless otherwise specified. The Contractor may use
conduit of a larger size than that specified, provided the larger size is used for the entire length of the
run. Reducing couplings shall not be used.
Conduit entering a pull box shall enter not less than:
a) 5 inches (125 mm) below the top of the box,
b) 2 inches (50 mm) above the bottom of the box.
Conduit shall terminate within 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) inside the box wall. The prolongation of the
conduit shall pass through the top of the pull box. Conduits shall enter from the direction of the run.
Spare conduit stubs from foundations shall extend a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) from the face and a
minimum of 14 inches (360 mm) below the top of foundation and shall be capped on each end.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
598 Greenbook 2021

The ends of the conduit, whether shop or field cut, shall be reamed to remove burrs and rough edges. Cuts
shall be made so that the ends will come together for the full circumference thereof. Slip joints or running
threads shall not be used for coupling conduit. Threads shall be treated with the joint compound specified or
approved by the Engineer before fittings are placed thereon.
Conduit installed on the surface of poles or structures or other exposed locations or in concrete structures
and foundations shall be unpainted, except that exposed conduit installed on a painted structure shall be
painted the same color as the structure. Conduit runs on the surface of structures shall be secured with
galvanized malleable iron clamps spaced not more than 5 feet (1.5 m) apart.
A No. 12 AWG pull wire, or a tape or rope shall be installed in all complete conduit runs that are to
receive future new conductors. A minimum of 2 feet (600 mm) of pull wire, tape or rope shall be secured and
extended beyond each end of the conduit run.
Conduit ends shall be capped until the pulling of conductors is started. The conduit shall be blown clean
with compressed air prior to installing conductors. In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor may be
required to pass a mandrel through the conduit. Existing conduit being incorporated into a new or modified
system shall be cleaned with a mandrel or cylindrical wire brush and blown clean with compressed air.
A minimum of 1 foot (300 mm) length of continuous oakum or other approved or specified sealant shall
be securely packed into all uncapped conduit ends. Oakum, if used, shall be string oakum that is tar or oil
saturated to be water resistant. The oakum or sealant shall be packed into the uncapped conduit immediately
after the installation of conductors in the conduit. The oakum or sealant shall be packed around the
conductors in such a manner that no visible gaps remain between the conductors and conduit, and with
sufficient care to avoid damage to conductors, bushings or conduit.
Conduit terminating in traffic signal pull boxes shall not be transposed.
Conduit abandoned in place shall be terminated a minimum of 1 foot (300 mm) below finished grade.
701-12.2 Rigid Metallic Conduit. Expansion fittings, shall be installed where the conduit crosses an
expansion joint in a structure. Each expansion fitting shall be provided with a No. 8 AWG copper bonding
jumper.
Rigid metallic conduit shall be bent without crimping or flattening and shall have a radius of not less than 6
times the inside diameter of the conduit.
Rigid metallic conduit fittings shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise specified. Couplings shall be
securely tightened to provide an electrical and mechanical connection throughout the entire length of the conduit
run. When a standard coupling cannot be used, a UL or ETL listed threaded union coupling approved by the
Engineer shall be used.
When rigid metallic conduit is capped and the caps are removed, the ends of the conduit shall be provided
with conduit bushings. Caps and bushings may be manufactured of metal or plastic, threaded or push-on.
701-12.3 Galvanized Pipe. Should “necking” occur when any length of pipe is installed, the length of pipe
where the “necking” occurred shall be removed.
Couplings shall have a uniform thread which ensures that the ends of the pipe to be joined are in full surface
contact when the couplings are in place. Couplings with tapered threads shall not be used.
701-12.4 Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall only be installed in
underground locations. A separate No. 8 AWG, solid bare ground wire and a pull rope or tape shall be inside
at the time of installation. A pull box shall be installed whenever an underground conduit changes from a
metallic type to a non-metallic type. The Contractor shall pull a mandrel approved by the Engineer through all
rigid non-metallic conduit.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 599

701-12.5 Abandonment of Conduit. Conduit that is to be abandoned in place shall have all wires or cable
removed. The conduit shall then be removed to a minimum depth of 1 foot (300 mm) below the surface and
have both ends crimped or capped.
701-12.6 Measurement. Conduit will be measured by the linear foot (m) or lump sum for each size and
type.
701-12.7 Payment. Payment for conduit will be made at the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the
Bid for each size and type. No additional payment will be made if the Contractor chooses to use a larger size
conduit than what is specified.
Payment for abandoning conduit in place shall be considered as included in the Contract Unit Price or lump
sum price in the Bid for the work that required the conduit to be abandoned.
701-13 WIRES, CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.
701-13.1 General. Conductors shall be run in conduit except when inside Standards, pedestals or for
overhead and temporary installations unless otherwise specified.
Low-voltage conductors run in Standards containing high-voltage conductors, either the low-voltage or the
high-voltage conductors shall be encased in flexible or rigid metallic conduit to a point where the different types
of conductors are no longer in the same raceway.
Conductors/cables shall be pulled by hand. Winches or other power-actuated pulling equipment shall not be
used. Only lubricants specified or approved by the Engineer shall be used in pulling conductors/cables in
conduit.
A total of 2 feet (600 mm) of slack shall be left at each Standard, and within each pull box sufficient slack
shall be left to extend 18 inches (450 mm) above the top of the pull box.
Small, permanent identification bands shall be marked as specified in 700-4.2, 700-5.3, or as follows.
Permanent identification bands shall be securely attached to conductors in pull boxes and near the termination of
each conductor. Where circuit and phase are clearly indicated by conductor insulation, bands need not be used.
Permanent identification bands shall be embossed, 6-mil (150 µm), oil-resistant polyvinyl chloride tape with
pressure-sensitive backing. Tape shall be of a type such that symbols contrast with the background color.
701-13.2 Splices. Splices shall conform to the details shown on the Plans unless otherwise specified.
Splices shall only be made in pull boxes and Standard bases. Splices shall be capable of operation under
continuous submersion in water. Multi-conductor cables shall be spliced and insulated to provide a watertight
joint and to prevent absorption of moisture by the cable. Where more than 1 conductor enters the sleeve of a
ballast installed in a pull box, the insulation and taping shall be applied between the conductors in such a manner
as to provide a watertight joint.
Splice insulation shall be applied to a thickness equal to the thickness of, and lapped over, the original
insulation.
Wire/conductor insulation shall be well-penciled, trimmed to a conical shape, and roughened before applying
the splice insulation. Tape shall be applied to a thickness equal to the thickness of, and lapped over, the original
insulation.
When 3 or more conductors are to be enclosed within a single splice using heat-shrink tubing, mastic shall be
placed around each conductor prior to being placed inside the heat-shrink tubing. The mastic shall be of the type
recommended by the manufacturer of the heat-shrink tubing.
Heat shrink tubing shall only be heated with a device specifically designed for such. Heating with an open
flame will not be permitted. After contraction, the ends and seams of heat-shrink tubing shall be painted with an
electrical insulating coating recommended by the manufacturer.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
600 Greenbook 2021

The Contractor may, at its option, use either of the following splice insulation methods:
a) A minimum of 2 thicknesses of electrical insulating pads. Pads shall be applied to the splice in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
b) Heat-shrink tubing conforming to 700-3.8.3.
Conductors shall be joined together by connectors conforming to 700-4.3 unless otherwise specified or
approved by the Engineer. Connectors and terminals used with aluminum utility power service conductors shall
be aluminum and greased with the inhibitor specified or approved by the Engineer.
701-13.3 Bonding and Grounding. Metallic cable sheaths, metal pull box covers, metallic conduit,
equipment grounding conductors, ballast and transformer cases, service equipment, sign switches, anchor bolts,
and metal Standards that form a continuous system shall be grounded.
At service points, grounding of metallic conduit, service equipment, and neutral conductors shall conform to
the applicable code and the requirements of the serving utility, except that grounding electrode conductors shall
be No. 6 AWG solid copper wire or larger.
Each multiple service disconnect location shall be grounded. Ground electrodes shall be installed in
accordance with the provisions of the NEC. The service equipment shall be bonded to the ground electrode by
use of a ground clamp or exothermic weld and No. 6 AWG or larger solid copper wire enclosed in a size 16 or
larger diameter conduit.
For equipment grounding purposes in rigid non-metallic conduit, a No. 6 AWG solid copper wire shall be
run continuously in circuits used for series street lighting, and a No. 8 AWG minimum solid copper wire shall be
run continuously in all other street lighting and traffic signal circuits. The bonding wire size shall be increased to
match the circuit breaker size, unless otherwise specified. Whenever rigid non-metallic conduit is to be installed
for future conductors, the solid copper wire may be omitted. Equipment bonding and grounding conductors are
not required in conduit which contain only loop lead-in cable or signal interconnect cable or both.
Bonding of Standards shall be accomplished by means of a No. 8 AWG bonding wire attached from a
grounding bushing to a foundation bolt or a 3/16 inch (5 mm), or larger, brass or bronze bolt installed in the
lower portion of the Standard. The bonding jumper in Standards with hand holes and traffic signal pull box lid
covers shall be attached by a 3/16 inch (5 mm) or larger brass bolt and shall be run to the conduit or bonding wire
in the adjacent pull box. Standards without hand holes shall be bonded by a jumper attached to each anchor bolt,
and shall be run to the conduit or bonding wire in the adjacent pull box. The grounding jumper shall be visible
after the cap has been placed on the foundation.
Bonding of metallic conduit in metal pull boxes shall be by means of locknuts, 1 inside and 1 outside of the
pull box.
Bonding of metallic conduit in nonmetallic pull boxes shall be by means of copper strap or galvanized
grounding bushing and bonding jumpers.
For series circuits, the metallic conduit or bonding conductor system shall be grounded at intervals not to
exceed 500 feet (150 m) by one of the following:
a) galvanized pipe driven to a depth of 8 feet (2 m) having its upper end not more than 3 inches (75 mm)
above the conduit; or,
b) copper-coated steel rod, driven to a depth of 8 feet (2 m); or,
c) metal water service pipe on the street side of the meter, with the approval of the owner. The water pipe
shall be thoroughly scraped and cleaned prior to connection.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 601

For multiple circuits, the metallic conduit or bonding conductor system shall be grounded at the
service points.
On wood poles, all equipment mounted less than 8 feet (2 m) above the ground surface shall be grounded.
701-13.4 Payment. No separate payment will be made for wire, conductor and cables, nor for bonding and
grounding. Payment shall be considered as included in the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid for
each type and size of conduit.
701-14 SERVICES.
701-14.1 General. Before any work is begun, the Contractor shall obtain daily circuit clearance from the
serving electric utility.
The Contractor shall furnish and install all material and equipment necessary to complete the electrical
connection between the terminating point of the serving electric utility and the electrical system shown on the
Plans. Electrical service installation and materials shall conform to the requirements of the serving electric
utility. Installation of service equipment shall be scheduled so as to enable the serving electric utility to complete
its work in advance of the completion of the Work.
Upon the Contractor’s written request, the Engineer will arrange with the serving electric utility to complete
service connections for permanent installations.
701-14.2 Services on Utility-Owned Poles. When service equipment is to be installed on a utility-owned
pole, the Contractor shall furnish and install conduit, conductors and other necessary material to complete the
installation of the service. The position of the riser and equipment will be determined by the serving utility
unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
Each service shall be provided with an in-line fuse holder on each non-grounded service conductor, except
the neutral conductor.
701-14.3 Services in Vaults. The Contractor shall contact the serving utility to determine the location of
stub outs for vault service points.
Thirty feet (9 m) of slack in each conductor entering a vault shall be provided for the serving utility to “rack”
the conductor on the walls of the vault.
In the service pull box, the Contractor shall furnish and install 2 disconnect splices for each circuit.
Disconnect splices shall be installed so that the 2 service wires may be connected together.
701-14.4 Measurement. Services will be measured by “each.”
701-14.5 Payment. Payment for the electrical connection between the “service point” and the nearest pull
box will be paid at the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid for each service connection.
Where the “service point” is indeterminate or shown on the Plans as an “approximate location” or “service
point not yet established”, payment for the connection between the “service point”, when established, and the
nearest pull box shown on the Plans will be paid for as Extra Work.
Payment for utility services other than electrical shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
The Agency will pay all costs and fees required by the serving utility for the service connections for
permanent installations unless otherwise specified.
701-15 CIRCUIT BREAKERS.
701-15.1 General. Circuit breakers shall be constructed at the locations shown on the Plans. Circuit
breakers used as service disconnect equipment shall be enclosed in a NEMA rain-tight enclosure with a dead-
front panel and hasp with a 7/16 inch (11 mm) hole for a padlock. The padlock will be furnished by the Agency.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
602 Greenbook 2021

701-15.2 Payment. No separate payment will be made for circuit breakers. Payment will be considered as
included in the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid for the equipment requiring circuit breakers.
701-16 STREET LIGHTING CONSTRUCTION.
701-16.1 General. Street lighting materials shall conform to 700-3 and 700-4.
701-16.2 Conduit. Conduit terminating in street lighting Standards shall not be transposed. Conduit shall
terminate as near the door of the Standard as possible with the end of the conduit below, but within 1 inch (25
mm) of the lower edge of the door. The prolongation of the conduit shall pass through the door opening.
701-16.3 Wiring/Conductors. Single conductors shall be used for all circuits.
For series-circuit conductor splices, sufficient synthetic oil-resistant rubber tape conforming to the
requirements of ASTM D119 shall be applied over the conductor to fill all voids before placing vinyl chloride
tape. The splice shall then be covered with a coating of the insulating material specified or approved by the
Engineer.
For multiple circuits, a fused disconnect splice connector shall be installed in each ungrounded conductor
between the line and the ballast. The connector shall be installed in the base of the Standard or in an adjacent
pull box and be readily accessible.
701-16.4 Fused Splice Connectors. In the pull box adjacent to each Standard, a fused disconnect splice
connector shall be installed on each ungrounded conductor between the line and the ballast. The connector shall
be readily accessible in the pull box regardless of whether the ballast is remote or integral with the luminaire.
Terminals shall be rigidly crimped, using a tool of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the fused
splice connector, onto the line conductors and the conductors to the ballasts. Terminals shall be insulated,
waterproof, and conform to the splice connector manufacturer’s recommendations.
Fused splice connectors shall not be used in series circuits.
701-16.5 Terminal Blocks. Barrier type terminal blocks rated for 40A minimum shall be provided in each
service equipment enclosure. Field conductors shall be terminated using crimped, insulated loop connectors.
701-16.6 Services. For series street lighting systems served from overhead circuits, a switch of 5,000V
rating shall be connected to control each circuit. The switch shall be enclosed in a NEMA Type 3R, 18-inch x
24-inch x 6-inch (450 mm x 600 mm x 150 mm) terminal box. The terminal box shall be fitted with a cover
permanently inscribed “DANGER – HIGH VOLTAGE.” The cover shall be attached to the box to form a rain-
tight plate and shall require tools for removal. The terminal box shall be installed not less than 10 feet (3 m)
above the ground.
701-16.7 Luminaires.
701-16.7.1 Lamp Size and Identification. Each lamp shall be identified with a tape target affixed to the
underside of horizontal luminaires or on the body facing oncoming traffic for upright luminaires.
Existing targets shall be removed and disposed of or covered.
701-16.7.2 Photoelectric Units. Photoelectric electric units shall be installed as shown on the Plans or
specified in the Special Provisions.
701-16.7.3 Measurement. Luminaires shall be measured by each type and size.
701-16.7.4 Payment. Payment for luminaires, including ballasts and photoelectric units, will be made at the
Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid for each size and type.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 603

701-17 TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONSTRUCTION.

701-17.1 General. Traffic signal materials shall conform to 700-3 and 700-5.
701-17.2 Controllers.
701-17.2.1 General. The Contractor shall supply the controller, cabinet and all auxiliary equipment
required to provide a complete functioning controller unless otherwise specified.
701-17.2.2 Controller Cabinet Wiring Diagrams. A wiring diagram for field modifications to existing
controller cabinets including, but not limited to, the installation of sensor units, switch packs, etc. shall be
submitted to the Engineer at least 10 Working Days prior to performing work in the affected controller cabinet.
Controller cabinet documentation, labeling, and placards shall be corrected/updated to reflect any changes
made within the controller cabinet that are the result of all current modifications.
Prior to acceptance of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish 5 sets of traffic signal controller cabinet
schematic wiring diagrams conforming to the phase designations shown on the Plans for the intersection. The
diagrams shall show the location of the installation and list all equipment installed in each cabinet. In addition,
for each signal installation, the Contractor shall furnish an intersection sketch showing Standards, detectors, and
phasing. One copy of the controller cabinet diagram and the intersection and phase diagram, as reviewed by the
Engineer, shall be placed in a plastic envelope and attached to the inside of the door.
701-17.2.3 Controller Slabs. In unpaved areas, a 4-inch (100 mm)-thick concrete slab shall be constructed
in front of each controller cabinet. Construction shall conform to 303-5. The slab shall extend the full-width of
the cabinet foundation and extend out 3 feet (1 m) from the face of the foundation.
701-17.2.4 Controller Cabinet Wiring. Wiring for field modifications and equipment installation shall
conform to 700-5.4.2 unless otherwise specified.
701-17.2.5 Service Checks. Service checks shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
measure the service voltage at the live AC terminal before the main circuit breaker in the controller assembly. If
the voltage is less than 110 volts, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. A resistance measurement shall also
be made between the service neutral terminal and the chassis ground terminal. If the resistance is more than 4
ohms, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. The Engineer will notify the serving electric utility to rectify the
problem.
701-17.2.6 Measurement. Controllers will be measured by each type. Controller slabs will be measured by
the square foot (m2) or by the cubic yard (m3).
701-17.2.7 Payment. Payment for controllers will be made at the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in
the Bid for each type. Payment for controller slabs will be made at the Contract Unit Price per square foot (m2)
or per cubic yard (m3).
701-17.3 Conduit. Conduit terminating in traffic signal Standards shall not be transposed. Conduit
terminating in traffic signal Standards shall extend vertically a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) above the foundation
cap and be centered within the bolt circle.
Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be installed in open trenches, except in the vicinity of pull boxes where it
may be bored in, pre-drilled, augered or through air blown holes.
701-17.4 Wiring, Conductors and Cable.
701-17.4.1 General. Multi-conductor cable shall be used for all circuits in lieu of individual conductors.
Multi-conductor cable shall be as shown on the Plans. Wires shall be solid copper of the gauge shown in Table
700-5.3.1 unless otherwise specified.
The neutral for pedestrian push-button circuits shall be separate from the signal light circuit neutral.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
604 Greenbook 2021

Splices shall be made only in pull boxes.

Where telephone circuits are installed adjacent to other electrical circuits, the telephone conductors shall be
encased in UL approved metallic conduit conforming to 700-3.5.2.
Multi-conductor cable entering controller cabinets shall be neatly arranged, secured, and tagged. Each cable
shall be identified by a plastic tag 1/2 inch x 2 inches (12.5 mm x 50 mm) in size, stamped with the cable run
identification characters in 1/4 inch (6 mm) letters and secured to the conductor with 2 nylon tie-wrap devices.
Each multi-conductor cable shall be identified in communication cabinets by an aluminum tag, 1 inch x 4
inches (25 mm x 100 mm) in size, stamped with the cable run identification characters in 1/2 inch (12.5 mm)
letters and secured to the cable with 2 nylon tie-wrap devices.
Whenever new conductors are to be installed in a conduit with existing individual conductors (except service
wire), all individual conductors shall be removed and replaced with multi-conductor cable. A 28-conductor
cable shall be installed in new cross street runs unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
Stranded conductors shall be terminated with approved terminal lugs.
701-17.4.2 Conductor Splicing and Termination. Field-spliced solid wires shall be twisted together and
secured using vinyl, water-tight, spring-tensioned, silicone-filled, direct-burial wire connectors. The Contractor
shall provide a minimum of 3 feet (1 m) of slack. The slack shall be neatly coiled in a clockwise direction within
each pull box. Splice insulation shall conform to 700-3.8.
Stranded conductors shall be terminated with a terminal connector. Stranded conductors shall be properly
compressed for minimum resistance at the attachment.
Where optimum operation of circuits requires minimum resistance, the connections and/or terminals shall be
soldered.
701-17.4.3 Ground Rods. Copper ground rods shall be installed in controller foundations and service pull
boxes unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
701-17.4.4 Interconnect.
701-[Link] Direct Wire/Conductor. Conductors shall be continuous from controller to controller, unless
splices are specifically approved by the Engineer. Splices, where approved, shall be soldered and shall be
secured using vinyl, water-tight, spring-tensioned, silicone-filled, direct-burial wire connectors, unless otherwise
specified. A minimum of 3 feet (1 m) of slack shall be provided at each splice and 7 feet (2 m) at each controller
cabinet. Spliced conductors shall be insulated with heat-shrink tubing of the appropriate size and overlap the
conductor insulation at least 19/32 inch (15 mm). The overall cable splice shall be covered with hear-shrink
tubing with at least 1-9/16 inches (40 mm) of overlap of the cable jacket.
701-[Link] Filled Telephone Cable. Cable splices shall be made at communication or controller cabinets
or other splice points specified in the Special Provisions. Splices shall conform to 700-3.8.
701-[Link] Identification. Each cable in communication cabinets shall be identified by an aluminum or
plastic tag 1 inch x 4 inches (25 mm x 100 mm) in size, stamped with the cable run identification characters in
1/2 inch (12.5 mm) letters and secured to the cable with 2 nylon tie-wrap devices.
Each cable shall be identified in controller cabinets or other specified splice points by a plastic tag 1/2 inch x
2 inches (12.5 mm x 50 mm) in size, stamped with the cable run identification characters in 1/4 inch (6 mm)
letters and secured to the cable with 2 nylon tie-wrap devices.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 605

701-17.4.5 Fiber Optic Cable.

701-[Link] General. Fiber optic cable installation and handling procedures shall conform to the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
In pull boxes with outside dimensions of 22 inches x 34 inches (550 mm x 850 mm), there shall be 10 feet (3
m) minimum of additional looped cable. In splice cabinets and vaults, there shall be 100 feet (30 m) minimum
of additional looped cable for each cable entering or leaving.
701-[Link] Splicing. Fiber optic cable shall only be spliced at the locations shown on the Plans or
specified in the Special Provisions.
Splicing shall be performed by the fusion technique. Cables shall be prepared and spliced in accordance with
the cable manufacturer’s recommendations. Completed splices shall be protected by either heat-shrink tubing, or
metal protective sleeves unless otherwise specified.
Completed splices shall be enclosed in re-enterable splice enclosures that seal to form a moisture resistant
enclosure. Splice enclosures shall be as shown on the Plans or Standard Plans. The splice case or enclosure shall
contain a removable splice organizer or crib that shall secure the individual fibers and protect the splices. The
splice organizer or crib shall be attached to the steel strength members in the fiber optic cable and shall be bonded
to a ground stud on the exterior of the splice case or enclosure. There shall be adequate space inside the
enclosure to hold at least 5 feet (1.5 m) of cable.
701-17.5 Signal Heads.
701-17.5.1 General. New vehicle signal heads installed at any individual intersection shall be of the same
style and from the same manufacturer, except for programmed visibility heads.
Mast arm and arrow indications shall be a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm). Other signal indications shall
be 8 inches (200 mm).
Backplates shall be installed unless otherwise specified. Pedestrian heads shall be equipped with a glare
reduction device unless otherwise specified.
Signal heads shall not be installed at any intersection until all other signal equipment, including the
controller, is in place and ready for operation, except that signal heads may be mounted if the faces are turned
away from traffic or are covered.
Signal heads shall be located and aimed as shown on the Plans. Mounting and location on Standards shall be
as shown on the Plans.
701-17.5.2 Signal Head Mountings. Pipe assemblies shall be installed plumb or level, as applicable, and
be symmetrically arranged, and securely tightened. Top horizontal members shall be approximately 12 inches
(300 mm) in length. Construction shall be such that all conductors are concealed within a Standard or pipe
assembly.
Unless otherwise specified, heads shall be installed with terminal compartment mountings. For top
mounting of a one-way head and mast arm mountings, a slip-fitter without a terminal compartment shall be used.
Clamp-type mountings may be used for installation of heads on existing concrete Standards if inserts for terminal
compartment mountings have not been provided. The terminal compartment shall be mounted on the Standard
on the side away from traffic and parallel with the prolongation of the nearest curb face.
701-17.5.3 Visors. Vehicle signal indications at signalized intersections shall be provided with removable
beveled or long visors if shown on the Plans.
701-17.5.4 Directional Louvers. Where shown on the Plans, louvers shall be furnished and installed in the
visors of the signal head sections.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
606 Greenbook 2021

701-17.5.5 Measurement. Signal heads will be measured by the number of each type and size. Visors and
directional louvers will not be measured separately.
701-17.5.6 Payment. Payment for signal heads will be made at the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price
in the Bid for each type and size. The Contract Unit Price shall include visors and directional louvers where
shown on the Plans for signal heads to be so equipped.
701-17.6 Detectors.
701-17.6.1 General. Vehicle and bicycle detectors shall be of the type or types shown on the Plans. The
location of each detector shall be as shown on the Plans.
701-17.6.2 Sensor Units. A minimum of 1 sensor unit shall be provided for each approach for each
separately controlled phase of operation unless otherwise specified. Sensor units shall be housed in the controller
cabinet unless otherwise specified.
701-17.6.3 Inductive Loop Detectors.
701-[Link] General. Inductive loop detectors shall be installed at the locations shown on the Plans.
Unless otherwise specified, each vehicle loop shall consist of 3 clockwise turns of conductor, and each bicycle
loop shall consist of 4 clockwise turns of conductor.
The Contractor shall install and activate inductive loop detectors within 14 Days of the activation of the
controller.
701-[Link] Installation. Each loop shall be installed entirely within one continuous type of paving
material. Slots 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum to 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) maximum in width shall be cut in the
pavement, washed or blown clean, and thoroughly dried before installation. The depth shall be as shown on the
Plans. Triangular corner cutoffs, 18 inches (450 mm) long on 2 adjacent sides shall be provided on all loops.
Residue resulting from slot cutting operations shall not be permitted to flow across lanes occupied by traffic.
Residue shall be removed from the pavement surface by vacuuming or other methods approved by the Engineer.
Installation shall conform to the following:
a) Two leads for each loop shall be installed as a pair, twisted at a rate of 360 degrees per foot (300 mm) in
a common saw slot. Inductive loop detector leads may share a common saw slot with leads from other
loops. However, inductive loop detector leads shall not cross any loops and shall not be installed within
20 inches (500 mm) of any other loop.
b) Lead-in cable shall consist of No. 12 AWG-THW [45 mil (1 mm)] twisted pair and be continuous from
the pull box where connections are made to the loops to the cabinet containing the sensor units.
c) Continuity and insulation resistance tests shall be performed after installation on both inductive detector
loops and lead-in cables. Measurements shall be made using the conduit system as ground and with the
shield (if any) of the lead-in grounded.
The input (or start) wire shall be tagged with an odd number, the output (or finish) wire with the next higher
number. A plastic tag 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) by 2 inches (50 mm) shall be wrapped around each loop pair to
identify each pair by timing phase and number of individual conductors.
Where circuits are to be spliced, each splice shall be crimped and soldered with rosin core solder. Splices
shall be taped and sealed with an electrical waterproofing compound unless otherwise specified. Acid core
solder or acid paste shall not be used.
Loop conductors shall be installed without splices and shall terminate in the pull box shown on the Plans. In
addition to the requirements for splices in detector circuits, the open end of the cable jackets or tubing shall be
sealed in a manner similar to the splicing requirements. Loops shall be joined in the pull box in series so that
optimum sensitivity is obtained at the sensor unit. Final splices between loops and lead-in cable shall not be
made until the operation of the loops under actual traffic conditions is approved by the Engineer. Loop

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 607

conductors for each direction of travel, for the same phase of a traffic signal system, and in the same pull box,
shall be spliced to a detector lead-in cable.
Loop conductors for inductive loop detector traffic signal and traffic monitoring installations shall be
identified and banded, in pairs, by lane, in the pull box adjacent to the loops. The pull box shall be near the
termination of the conductor in the controller or traffic monitoring station cabinet.
Loop conductors for traffic monitoring shall terminate in a pull box or terminal strip in the traffic monitor
station cabinet when a cabinet of that type is installed.
Inductive loop detector lead-in cable shall extend from the pull box adjacent to the loop detector to a sensor
unit mounted in the controller cabinet. Inductive loop detector lead-in cable from the pull box to the controller
cabinet shall have 4 conductors (consisting of 2 twisted pairs). Detector lead-in cable connections and/or
terminations shall be soldered.
After the loop conductors have been installed in the slots cut in the pavement, the slots shall be filled with
sealant to within 1/8 inch (3 mm) of the pavement surface. The sealant shall be a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm)
above the top conductor in the saw cut. Before setting, excess sealant shall be removed from the adjacent road
surface without the use of solvents.
If specified, the loops shall be installed prior to placing the asphalt concrete surface course. The loops shall
be installed, as shown on the Plans, in the compacted layer of asphalt concrete pavement immediately below the
asphalt concrete surface course. Installation details shall be as shown on the Plans, except the sealant shall fill the
slot flush to the surface.
701-[Link] Sealants. Hot-melt rubberized asphalt sealant shall be melted in a jacketed, double boiler type
melting unit. Temperature of the heat transfer medium shall not exceed the flash point of the sealant or 475º F
(240º C), whichever is less.
Sealants shall be applied with a pressure-feed applicator or pour pot. Sealants shall be applied when the
pavement surface temperature is greater than 40º F (4º C).
701-17.6.4 NOT USED.
701-17.6.5 Measurement. Inductive loop detectors will be measured as specified in the Special Provisions.
701-17.6.6 Payment. Payment for inductive loop detectors will be made at the Contract Unit Price or lump
sum price in the Bid.
701-17.7 Pedestrian Signals.
701-17.7.1 General. The Contractor shall provide one visible operating pedestrian head at all times for each
direction of each signalized crosswalk while modifying the pedestrian head. Non-functioning pedestrian heads at
a signalized crosswalk shall be covered as specified. Pedestrian signal heads shall be installed as shown on the
Plans. Accessible pedestrian signals shall conform to the requirements specified in the Special Provisions.
701-17.7.2 Pedestrian Push Buttons. Pedestrian push buttons shall be furnished and installed at the
locations shown on the Plans. Pedestrian push button assemblies shall be equipped as specified. Assemblies and
signs shall be installed on the crosswalk side of the Standard or pedestal parallel to the crosswalk to which it is
intended unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Arrows on push button signs shall point in the same direction as
the corresponding crosswalk.
Where a pedestrian push button is attached to a pedestal, the housing shall be shaped to fit the curvature of
the pedestal and secured to provide a rigid installation. Saddles shall be provided to make a neat fit when
required. Where mounted on the top of a pedestal, the housing shall be provided with a slip-fitter fitting and the
screws required to secure it rigidly to the pedestal.
701-17.7.3 NOT USED.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
608 Greenbook 2021

701-17.7.4 Measurement. Pedestrian signal heads and push buttons will be measured by “each”.
701-17.7.5 Payment. Payment for pedestrian signal heads and push buttons will be made at the Contract
Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid.
701-18 TESTING.
701-18.1 General. Prior to completion of the Work, the Contractor shall perform the following tests on all
electrical circuits, in the presence of the Engineer:
a) Continuity. Each circuit shall be tested for continuity.
b) Ground. Each circuit shall be tested for unintentional ground.
c) Megger. A megger test at 500V DC shall be performed on each circuit between the circuit and a ground.
The insulation resistance shall be not less than 10 megaohms on all circuits, except for inductive loop
detector circuits which shall have an insulation resistance value of not less than 100 megaohms.
d) Functional. A functional test shall be performed which shows that the system functions as specified.
The test shall not commence until approval is received from the Engineer.
The functional test for each new or modified electrical system shall consist of not less than 5 Days of
continuous, satisfactory operation. If unsatisfactory performance of the system develops, the condition
shall be corrected and the test shall be repeated until the 5 Days of continuous satisfactory operation are
obtained. Functional tests shall not start nor turn-ons be made on a Friday, or on the day preceding a
legal holiday. Shutdown caused by factors beyond the Contractor’s control shall not constitute
discontinuity of the functional test.
Any material revealed by these tests to be faulty in any part of the installation shall be replaced or corrected
by the Contractor at its expense in a manner approved by the Engineer, and the same test shall be repeated.
701-18.2 Payment. No separate payment will be made for testing.
701-19 PAINTING AND GALVANIZING.
701-19.1 General. New equipment to be painted or galvanized shall be as shown on the Plans or specified
in the Special Provisions. Painted or galvanized equipment that has been relocated shall be repainted or
galvanized as shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. Paint or galvanizing material shall
conform to 210. Painting shall conform to 310.
701-19.2 Payment. No separate payment will be made for painting or galvanizing. Payment shall be
considered as included in the Contract Unit Price or lump sum price in the Bid for each item that requires
painting or galvanizing.
701-20 SALVAGE. Unless otherwise specified, wires/conductors/cables, Standards, mast arms, pedestals,
electrical equipment, and foundations that are not specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans to be
salvaged shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the Work site.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 609

PART 8
LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION
SECTION 800 - MATERIALS

800-1 LANDSCAPING MATERIALS.

800-1.1 Topsoil.
800-1.1.1 General. Topsoil shall be designated as Class A (imported), Class B (selected) or Class
C (unclassified). The Engineer will determine the suitability of topsoil prior to use. The Engineer may
make such inspections and perform such tests as deemed necessary to determine that the material meets
the requirements. Topsoil shall be transported from the source to its final position unless stockpiling is
specified in the Special Provisions.
800-1.1.2 Class “A” Topsoil. Class “A” topsoil shall be from a source outside the limits of the
Work selected by the Contractor.
At least 15 Days before scheduled use, the proposed source of topsoil shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall submit a written request for approval which shall be
accompanied by a written report from a testing agency certified by the State for agricultural soil
evaluation which states that the topsoil proposed conforms to the requirements for “Class A topsoil.”
Class “A” topsoil shall have the same relative composition and structure, a friable sandy loam character,
and be free of roots, clods and stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in greatest dimension, pockets of coarse
sand, noxious weeds, sticks, brush, and other litter. It shall not be infested with nematodes or other
undesirable insects and plant disease organisms.
Class “A” topsoil shall meet the following additional requirements:
a) Gradation Limits. Sand, 50 to 80 percent; clay, 20 percent maximum; and silt, 30 percent
maximum. The sand, clay, and silt gradation limits shall conform to ASTM D422.
b) Permeability Rate. Not less than 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) per hour nor more than 2 inches (50 mm)
per hour when tested in accordance with ASTM D2434, California Test 220, or other approved
methods.
c) Agricultural Suitability. The topsoil shall be suitable to sustain the growth of the plants
specified.
800-1.1.3 Class “B” Topsoil. Class “B” is defined as material which is obtained from sources and
in the quantities designated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions and which requires transport to the
designated landscape areas. Such designated sources of the Class “B” topsoil may be within or outside
the Work limits.
Except as provided above, Class “B” topsoil shall be considered selected material in accordance with
300-2.7, 300-2.8, and 300-2.9.
800-1.1.4 Class “C” Topsoil. Class “C” topsoil is defined as soil found in place in the designated
landscape area, including soil compacted in place as part of the Work.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
610 Greenbook 2021

800-1.2 Soil Fertilizing and Conditioning Materials.

800-1.2.1 General. Fertilizing materials shall comply with the applicable requirements of the State
Food and Agricultural Code. Fertilizing materials shall be packaged first grade, commercial quality
products identified as to source, type of material, weight and manufacturer’s “guaranteed analysis.”
Fertilizing materials shall not contain toxic ingredients or fillers in quantities harmful to human life,
animals or plants.
When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish a Certificate of Compliance.
800-1.2.2 Manure. Manure shall be the product of yard-fed cattle; free of weed seed, straw, or
other inert material; and aged at least 3 months. The manure shall have been processed by grinding and
screening and shall be of a consistency that will readily spread with a mechanical spreader.
Manure may be supplied in bulk if the source is approved in advance by the Engineer.
800-1.2.3 Commercial Fertilizer. Commercial fertilizer shall be a pelletized or granular product
having the chemical analysis shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. Commercial
fertilizer shall be free-flowing material delivered in unopened sacks. Material which becomes caked or
otherwise damaged shall not be used.
800-1.2.4 Organic Soil Amendment. Organic soil amendment shall be selected from Type 1, 2, or
3 products as described herein.
Type 1 organic soil amendment shall be a ground or processed wood product derived from redwood,
fir, or cedar sawdust, or from the bark of fir or pine, treated with a non-toxic agent to absorb water
quickly, and shall comply with the requirements shown in Table 800-1.2.4.

TABLE 800-1.2.4
Gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing (minimum)
1/4 inch (6.3 mm) 95
No. 8 (2.36 mm) 80
No. 35 (500 µm) 30
Nitrogen Content (%, dry weight)
Redwood 0.4 – 0.6%
Fir 0.56 – 0.84%
Cedar 0.56 – 0.84%
Fir bark 0.8– 1.2%
Pine bark 0.8 – 1.2%
Salinity: Maximum saturation extract conductivity: 2.50 millisiemens per centimeter (6.35 millimhos/inch) at 77°F (25°C).
Wettability: When one teaspoon of tap water is applied to 4 cubic inches (1 cm3 of top water is applied to 15 cm3) (volumetric ratio
of 1:15) of the air-dry product, the material shall become completely damp in a period not exceeding 2 minutes. Any wetting
agent added shall be guaranteed non-phyto-toxic at the rate used.

Type 2 organic soil amendment shall be a relatively dry friable organic composite derived from
sewage sludge processed for agricultural use. It shall contain at least 1 percent nitrogen by dry weight
and comply substantially with the gradation for Type 1 organic soil amendment.
Type 3 organic soil amendment shall be hay and stable bedding which has been processed and used
as the growing medium for the commercial production of mushrooms. It shall contain at least 1 percent
nitrogen by dry weight and comply substantially with the gradation for Type 1 organic soil amendment.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 611

800-1.2.5 Mulch. Mulch shall be designated by Type in accordance with the requirements herein.
Mulch shall be packaged in bales or bags unless the Engineer approves a bulk source in advance of
delivery to the Work site.
a) Type 1 mulch (ground wood product), shall conform to Type 1 organic soil amendment.
b) Type 2 mulch (sewage sludge product), shall conform to Type 2 organic soil amendment.
c) Type 3 mulch (mushroom compost) shall conform to Type 3 organic soil amendment.
d) Type 4 mulch (peat), shall be brown compressed sphagnum or hypnum.
e) Type 5 mulch (fir bark chips), shall be fir bark chips conforming to the gradation specified.
f) Type 6 mulch (straw), shall be either threshed new straw or stable bedding material derived from
rice, oats or barley. Straw in an advanced state of decomposition will not be acceptable.
800-1.3 Seed. Seed shall be fresh, clean, new crop seed, mechanically premixed to specified
proportions.
Seed shall be delivered to the Work site in original unopened containers bearing the dealer’s
“guaranteed analysis” and germination percentage, and a certificate or stamp or release by a County
Agricultural Commissioner. Any seed tagged “warning, hold for inspection” shall be inspected and
released by the Agricultural Commissioner of the County within which the seeds are to be planted.
800-1.4 Plants.
800-1.4.1 General. Plants shall be inspected and approved at the nursery by the Engineer prior to
shipment to the planting site.
Plants shall have a growth habit normal to the species and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous and free
from insect pests, plant diseases, sun scalds, fresh bark abrasions, excessive abrasions, or other
objectionable disfigurements. Tree trunks shall be sturdy and well “hardened off.” Plants shall have
normal well-developed branch systems, and vigorous and fibrous roots systems which are neither root-
nor pot-bound and are free of kinked or girdling roots.
Other than the normal side pruning during the growth period, no pruning shall be done prior to
inspection at the nursery.
800-1.4.2 Trees. Trees shall be of the specified height and crown to the last division of the terminal
leader and diameter. The height shall be measured from the root crown. The diameter shall be measured
6 inches (150 mm) above the root crown. The height of palm trees shall be measured from the
groundline to the base of the growing bud. The tree shall stand reasonably erect without support.
800-1.4.3 Shrubs. Shrubs shall be of the specified type and size, selected from high quality, well-
shaped nursery stock.
800-1.4.4 Flatted Plants. Groundcover plants and other flatted plants shall be grown and remain in
the flats until transplanted at the Work site. The soil and spacing of the plants in the flat shall ensure the
minimum disturbance of the root system at time of transplanting.
800-1.4.5 Sod and Stolons (turf grass). Stolons shall be fresh, clean, living sections of runners of
hybrid Bermuda grass or hybrid bent grass as specified in the Contract Documents. They shall be free of
turf disease, insects, or weeds, and capable of healthy vigorous growth.
For mechanical or hand spreading, Bermuda grass stolons shall be 1 to 4 inches (25 mm to 100 mm)
long and bent grass 4 to 8 inches (100 mm to 200 mm) long. Stolons to be planted in a slurry mixture
shall be supplied in shorter sections as required.
800-1.4.6 Cuttings. Cuttings shall be fresh stock cut with a sharp hand tool from the stems of
healthy vigorous plants of the species specified.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
612 Greenbook 2021

800-1.5 Headers, Stakes, and Ties.

800-1.5.1 General. Lumber for landscape work shall be construction heart rough redwood in the
sizes specified. Nails, lag screws, and miscellaneous hardware shall be galvanized commercial quality
material. Miscellaneous fabricated metal items shall be made from steel conforming to ASTM A36.
800-1.5.2 Headers and Stakes. Headers shall be 2 inches x 4 inches (50 mm x 100 mm) except
that 2, 1 inch x 4-inch (25 mm x 100 mm) boards shall be supplied for laminations on turns and curves.
Header stock shall be supplied in lengths of at least 10 feet (3 m). Stakes for headers shall be pointed 2
inches x 4 inches (50 mm x 100 mm), at least 18 inches (450 mm) long. Joint splicing lumber shall be 1
inch x 4 inches (25 mm x 100 mm), 2 feet (0.6 m) long.
800-1.5.3 Tree Stakes. The type of tree stake shall be as specified in the Special Provisions. The
tree support stakes shall be 10 feet (3 m) long.
Guy wire shall be No. 12 BWG (2.64 mm) zinc-coated iron. Plastic ribbon tie material shall be 1
inch (25 mm) wide with a minimum tensile strength of 500 pounds (2 kN).
Deadman stakes shall be either 2 inches x 4 inches (50 mm x 100 mm) redwood or 3/4 inch (19 mm)
diameter steel pipe 3 feet (1 m) long. Covers for wire shall be garden hose, 1/2 inch (12.5 mm)
minimum diameter.
800-2 IRRIGATION SYSTEM MATERIALS.
800-2.1 Pipe and Fittings.
800-2.1.1 General. The type of pipe materials and fittings shall be as shown on the Plans or
specified in the Special Provisions and shall comply with the following.
800-2.1.2 Steel Pipe. Steel pipe shall be galvanized standard weight (Schedule 40) conforming to
ASTM A120. Steel pipe shall be jointed with galvanized, threaded, standard weight malleable iron
fittings and couplings.
800-2.1.3 Plastic Pipe for Use with Solvent Weld Socket or Threaded Fittings. Plastic pipe shall
be rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride PVC 1220 (Type 1, Grade 2), conforming to ASTM D1785.
Plastic pipe marked with product standard PS-21-70 conforms to the ASTM requirements. The
minimum gaskets shall be rigid un-plasticized polyvinyl chloride pressure rating shall not be less than
the working pressures indicated therein for the schedule and sizes listed.
Schedule 40 pipe shall be used for installation on the discharge side of control valves and Schedule
80 pipe shall be used for continuously pressurized pipe on the supply side of control valves. Schedule
80 only shall be supplied when threaded joints are specified or otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
Fittings and couplings for plastic pipe shall be threaded or slip-fitted tapered socket solvent weld
type. Threaded adapters shall be provided with socket pipe for connections to threaded pipe. Plastic
pipe fittings and couplings shall be PVC I or PVC I/II material supplied in the same schedule size
specified for the pipe. The type of plastic material and schedule size shall be indicated on each fitting or
coupling. Fittings and couplings shall conform to the requirements shown in Table 800-2.1.3.

TABLE 800-2.1.3
Socket Fittings
Schedule 40 ASTM D2466
Schedule 80 ASTM D2467
Threaded Fittings
Schedule 80 ASTM D2464

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 613

800-2.1.4 Plastic Pipe for Use with Rubber Ring Gaskets. Plastic pipe for use with rubber ring
PVC 1120 (Type 1, Grade 1) shall conform to ASTM D2241. Plastic pipe marked with product standard
PS 22-70 conforms to ASTM requirements. Pipe shall be supplied with plain ends or with an integral
thickened expanded bell with rubber ring groove. Couplings for plain end pipe shall be of the single-
rubber-ring-type with solvent weld socket on one end or shall be of the double ring type.
Rubber ring gaskets shall be of a synthetic rubber conforming to ASTM D1869.
Pipe shall be furnished in the following standard dimension ratios (SDR) and pressure ratings:
160 psi (1100 kPa), SDR 26
200 psi (1380 kPa), SDR 21
800-2.1.5 Copper Pipe. Copper pipe shall be Type K conforming to ASTM B88/B88M. Copper
pipe shall be jointed with the appropriate solder type wrought copper fittings for 2-1/2-inch (63 mm) and
smaller sizes. Cast brass fittings shall be used for sizes over 2-1/2-inch (63 mm).
800-2.2 Valves and Valve Boxes.
800-2.2.1 General. Valves shall be of the size, type, and capacity shown on the Plans or specified
in the Special Provisions.
Valves except garden valves shall be capable of satisfactory performance at a working pressure of
200 pounds per square inch (1380 kPa). Valves shall be designed to permit disassembly to replace
sealing components without removal of the valve body from the pipeline.
800-2.2.2 Gate Valves. Gate valves in sizes 2 inches (50 mm) and smaller shall be all bronze
double disc-wedge-type with integral taper seats and non-rising stem.
Sizes 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) and larger shall be iron body, brass trimmed with other features the same
as for 2-inch (50 mm) and smaller.
800-2.2.3 Manual Control Valves. Manual control valves shall be brass or bronze, and shall be
straight or angle pattern globe valves, full-opening, key-operated with a replaceable compression disc
and ground joint union on the discharge end.
800-2.2.4 Remote Control Valves. Remote control valves shall be:
a) electrically or hydraulically operated,
b) brass or bronze with accurately machined valve seat surfaces,
c) equipped with flow control adjustment and capability for manual operation, and
d) made so that they may be readily disassembled for servicing.
800-2.2.5 Garden Valves. Garden valves shall be brass or bronze except for the handle. They shall
have a replaceable compression disc, and shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm) straight-nosed, key operated and
pressure rated for operation at 150 pounds per square inch (1035 kPa).
800-2.2.6 Quick-Coupling Valves and Assemblies. Quick-coupling valves shall be brass or
bronze with built-in flow control and self-closing valve and supplied in 3/4 inch (19 mm) size unless
otherwise required. When a quick-coupler assembly is specified, it shall consist of the valve, quick-
coupler connection and hose swivel.
800-2.2.7 Valve Boxes. Valve boxes and covers shall be constructed of precast concrete.
800-2.3 Backflow Preventer Assemblies. Backflow preventer assemblies shall consist of a
backflow preventer unit and related components conforming to the governing code requirements.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
614 Greenbook 2021

800-2.4 Sprinkler Equipment. Sprinkler heads, bubbler heads and spray nozzles shall be of the
types and sizes shown on the Plans. Such equipment shall be brass, bronze and stainless steel except for
minor components. Equipment of one type and flow characteristic shall be from the same manufacturer
and all equipment shall bear the manufacturer’s name and identification code in a position where they
can be identified in the installed position.
Fixed head sprinklers shall have a one-piece housing with provision for interior parts replacement.
Pop-up sprinklers shall rise at least 1 inch (25 mm) during operation.
Shrubbery and bubbler heads shall be adjustable from full-flow to shutoff.
800-3 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS.
800-3.1 General. The Contractor shall furnish and install all electrical equipment and materials
required for a complete electrical system.
All equipment and materials shall comply with the requirements of the governing code and the
serving utility and shall be approved and identified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
800-3.2 Conduit and Conductors.
800-3.2.1 Conduit. Conduit shall be galvanized steel conforming to 700-3.5.
800-3.2.2 Conductors. Line voltage conductors shall be supplied in the sizes and types shown on
the Plans and shall be THW or THWN, 600-volt insulation rating, conforming to ASTM D2219 and
D2220.
Low voltage control conductors shall be Type UF and supplied in the sizes shown on the Plans or in
accordance with the control equipment manufacturer’s recommendation, and shall be UL approved for
direct burial installation.
800-3.3 Controller Unit. The type of controller unit shall be as shown on the Plans. It shall be fully
automatic, with provisions for manual operation, sized to accommodate the number of stations or control
valves included in the system. Outdoor models shall be housed in a vandal-proof and weatherproof
enclosure with locking cover.

SECTION 801 - INSTALLATION

801-1 GENERAL. This section includes specifications for the preparation, planting, and irrigation
system construction for landscape areas shown on the Plans.
Unless otherwise specified, walls, curbs, planter boxes, walks, irrigation systems, and similar
improvements shall be constructed following rough grading and before landscaping.
All work on the irrigation system, including hydrostatic and coverage tests, preliminary operational
tests of the automatic control system, and the backfill and densification of trenches, and other
excavations shall be performed after topsoil work and before planting.
801-2 EARTHWORK AND TOPSOIL PLACEMENT.
801-2.1 General. Earthwork and topsoil placement shall include the preparation for and the
spreading, densification, cultivation, and raking of topsoil, including fertilization and conditioning.
Preliminary rough grading and related work to prepare areas for landscaping work to within 0.1 foot
(30 mm) of finish grade, or to subgrade for Class A or Class B topsoil, shall conform to 300-2, 300-4,
and 301-1.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 615

801-2.2 Topsoil Preparation and Conditioning.

801-2.2.1 General. The type and thickness of topsoil shall be as shown on the Plans, or if not
shown, shall be Class “A”, 6 inches (150 mm) thick. Planting areas shall be free of weeds and other
extraneous materials to a depth of 12 inches (300 mm) below finish grade before topsoil work.
Soil shall not be worked when it is so wet or so dry as to cause excessive compaction or the forming
of hard clods or dust.
The existing soil below subgrade for Class “A” topsoil shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches (150
mm) prior to spreading topsoil.
Class “C” topsoil shall be scarified and cultivated to a finely divided condition to a depth of 8 inches
(200 mm) minimum below finish grade. During this operation, all stones over 1 inch (25 mm) in
greatest dimension shall be removed.
801-2.2.2 Fertilizing and Conditioning Procedures. The planting area shall be brought to finish
grade before spreading the fertilizers or conditioning materials specified.
Fertilizing and conditioning materials shall be mechanically spread at a uniform rate. The quantities
of materials necessary for the planting area shall be at the Work site and verified by delivery tickets
furnished to the Engineer before spreading.
After spreading, the fertilizing and conditioning materials shall be uniformly cultivated into the
upper 6 inches (150 mm) of soil by suitable equipment operated in at least 2 directions approximately at
right angles. The resulting soil shall be in a friable condition.
801-2.3 Finish Grading. The finish grade shall be smooth, uniform, and free of abrupt grade
changes and depressions to ensure surface drainage.
The finish grade below adjacent paving, curbs or headers shall be 1 inch (25 mm) in lawn areas and 2
inches (50 mm) in shrub or groundcover areas.
After fertilizing and conditioning, the soil shall be watered and allowed to settle to provide a stable
surface, not overly compacted to the extent that it will prevent aeration and water infiltration. After the
soil has dried out to a workable condition, the planting areas shall be regraded, raked, and smoothed to
the required grades and contours. Finish surfaces shall be clean and suitable for planting.
801-3 HEADER INSTALLATION. Headers shall be installed at the locations and grades shown
on the Plans prior to planting.
Stakes shall be located at splices, corners, and at intervals not to exceed 5 feet (1.5 m) and driven
slightly below the top of the header. Splice plates shall be used at butt joints. Headers shall be nailed to
stakes with 2 nails, clinched 1/2 inch (12.5 mm). Splice plates shall be centered on the joint and nailed
to each header with 4, 10d box nails.
801-4 PLANTING.
801-4.1 General. The types, sizes, and quantities of plant materials shall be as specified in the
Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
All plants will be inspected prior to planting, including plants previously approved at the nursery.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of all plants, planted or otherwise, until completion
of the Work.
Planting shall be performed with materials, equipment, and procedures favorable to the optimum
growth of the plants and in compliance with these procedures.
Except as noted for specimen planting, all planting shall follow the completion of the irrigation
system.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
616 Greenbook 2021

801-4.2 Protection and Storage. The Contractor shall keep all plant material delivered to the Work
site in a healthy condition for planting. Plants shall not be allowed to dry out. Bare root stock shall be
separated and “heeled in” moist earth or other suitable material. Balled and burlapped plants shall have
the root ball covered with moist sawdust, wood chips, or other approved material.
801-4.3 Layout and Plant Location. Planting areas will be staked by the Engineer. Detailed
layout within the planting areas shall be performed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer prior
to planting. Parkway trees will be located in the field by the Engineer before planting.
The first row of plants in areas designated for center-to-center spacing of plants shall be located at
one-half of designated spacing from the edge of the area.
801-4.4 Specimen Planting. Plants in boxes 24 inches (600 mm) and larger shall be planted before
installation of lateral irrigation lines.
Irrigation lines conflicting with specimen plant locations shall be rerouted to clear the root ball.
801-4.5 Tree and Shrub Planting. Planting holes shall be approximately square with vertical sides
twice the depth and width of the plant container or ball, and shall be larger if necessary to permit
handling and planting without injury or breakage of the root ball or root system. Any plant with a
broken or cracked root ball before or during planting shall not be planted.
Containers shall be opened and removed in such a manner that the root is not injured. Balled plant
wrappings shall be loosened or cut back after the plant is positioned in the planting hole.
The native soil at the bottom of planting holes shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches (150 mm).
Planting holes shall be backfilled with a prepared soil mix. Soil shall consist of 50 percent of the
specified topsoil and 50 percent Type 1, 2, or 3 organic soil amendment.
Planting shall conform to the following requirements.
a) A layer of prepared soil mix shall be deposited in the planting hole.
b) The plant shall be set approximately at the center of the hole.
c) Prepared soil mix shall be deposited in the remainder of the hole to finish grade.
d) The backfill shall be thoroughly water-settled and additional prepared soil mix added to fill any
remaining void below finish grade.
e) A circular watering basin slightly larger than the planting hole, 4 inches (100 mm) high for trees
and 2 inches (50 mm) high for shrubs, shall be left around the plant. The bottom of the basin
shall be at approximate finish grade or slightly lower. Type 1, 2, 3, or 4 mulch shall be spread at
least 2 inches (50 mm) thick in the basin.
f) The plant shall be guyed and staked as specified in 801-4.6.
g) The area around the plant shall be re-graded to finish grade. The excess soil shall be disposed of
by the Contractor.
After planting, the plant shall be plumb, with the root crown at its natural growing depth with respect
to finish grade.
801-4.6 Plant Staking and Guying.
801-4.6.1 Method “A” Tree Staking. The tree shall be staked with a 1-1/2-inch (38 mm) nominal
diameter x 10-foot (3 m) long galvanized steel pipe conforming to 800-2.1.2, installed vertically,
positioned at least 6 inches (150 mm) from the trunk at ground level, and 30 inches (750 mm) into the
soil in a manner to avoid injury to the roots or breaking the root ball. The trunk shall be secured to the
pipe with one tie just below the head of the tree. The tie shall be No. 12 BWG galvanized iron wire
covered with garden hose, or other approved tie. The loop shall be 1 inch (25 mm) greater in diameter

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 617

than the trunk. The tie shall be attached to the pipe through a hole drilled at the tie location described
above. The wire ties shall be secured by twisting the ends.
801-4.6.2 Method “B” Tree Staking. The tree shall be staked with 2, No. 6 (No. 19M) steel
reinforcing bars 6 feet (1.8 m) long driven 24 inches (600 mm) into the ground. The stakes shall be 18
inches (450 mm) from each side of the tree trunk, and stakes and tree shall be in a plane parallel to the
street centerline. Ties shall be made of 1 inch (25 mm) or wider flexible plastic ribbon material having a
minimum tensile strength of 500 pounds (2.2 kN). Four ties shall be used; 2 at 2 inches (50 mm) from
the top of each stake and 2 at 2 feet (0.6 m) above the ground. Ties shall be loops secured to the stake
on one end and shall be long enough to provide for 3 inches (75 mm) of slack to permit the tree trunk
limited movement in any direction.
801-4.6.3 Guying. Trees and other plants, except specimen plants, to be guyed will be shown on
the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Guying shall be done immediately after planting. Three guys per plant shall be installed in
accordance with the following:
a) Each guy shall be secured to the appropriate main branch by a twisted loop of No. 12 BWG
galvanized iron wire housed in garden hose.
b) Each guy shall be anchored to a driven stake located at a horizontal distance from the tree equal
to the vertical distance from the ground to the connection of the guy wire on the tree branch.
c) Each guy shall be covered with highly visible garden hose or plastic tubing to a height of 6 feet
(1.8 m) above grade.
d) Slack in each guy shall be removed by hand so as not to bend or twist the plant.
801-4.7 Ground Cover and Vine Planting. Soil preparation and fine grading shall be completed
prior to ground cover planting.
Ground cover and vines shall be planted in moist soil and spaced as indicated on the Plans.
Each plant shall be planted with its proportionate amount of flat soil to minimize root disturbance.
Soil moisture shall be such that the soil does not crumble when removing plants.
Following planting, ground cover and vine areas shall be regraded to restore smooth finish grade and
to ensure proper surface drainage. A 1 inch (25 mm) layer of Type 1, 2, 3, or 4 mulch shall be spread
over the planted areas. Watering shall begin immediately following mulching.
When necessary to prevent plant damage from pedestrian traffic during the initial growing stage, the
Contractor shall erect temporary protective fencing to be removed at the end of the plant establishment
period.
Vines shall be tied to walls, fences, etc., in the manner prescribed on the Plans. Temporary staking
shall be removed at the end of the plant establishment period.
801-4.8 Lawn Planting.
801-4.8.1 General. Before beginning lawn planting soil preparation and fine grading shall be
completed.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
618 Greenbook 2021

801-4.8.2 Seed. Seed lawn planting may be accomplished by Method A (dry method) or Method B
(hydraulic method). Seeding shall not be performed when the wind velocity exceeds 5 miles per hour (8
km/h), or is detrimental to the uniform distribution of the seed.
a) Method A. The area to be seeded shall be lightly raked to provide a seed bed.
The required seed mixture shall be sown uniformly at the specified rate. Seeding shall be done in
2 operations with the spreader set to sow 1/2 the specified amount in each operation. The
second sowing shall be at right angles to the first.
After sowing, the area shall be evenly covered to a depth of 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6 mm to 12.5 mm)
with an approved mulch.
The lawn area shall be watered in a manner so as not to cause surface erosion.
Newly seeded surfaces shall be kept moist continuously throughout the germination period.
b) Method B. The seed, fertilizer, fiber, and other materials in the slurry mixture shall be as
specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans. All materials shall be of such
character that they will disperse into a uniform slurry when mixed with water. The mixture shall
be such that an absorbent, porous mat will be formed.
All materials must be available for inspection prior to application. Weights and contents of
containers shall be clearly identified. A green coloring additive shall be used in the slurry for
visual inspection purposes.
The slurry shall be applied under pressure at the specified rates.
Areas to be planted by this method shall be moistened to a depth of 6 inches (150 mm) but shall
not be surface wet at the time of application.
The slurry planted areas shall be kept moist during the germination period, but ponding shall be
avoided.
801-4.8.3 Sod. The type and thickness of sod and the areas to be sodded shall be as shown on the
Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Subgrade for sod shall be the specified thickness of the sod below finish grade. Soil conditioning
and fine grading shall be completed before sodding. No heavy equipment shall operate over the
subgrade after grading is completed.
The subgrade shall be moist but not wet when sod is laid. Sod shall be laid with closely fitted joints,
and the ends of the strips shall be staggered. Openings shall be plugged with sod or topsoil.
Within 2 hours after installing sod and before rolling, the sod shall be lightly irrigated. All seams
and joints shall then be rolled until the sod is bonded to the subgrade.
The area shall then be watered thoroughly to penetrate the subgrade at least 8 inches (200 mm).
Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep the sod moist until rooted into the subgrade. Sodded
areas shall be protected against foot traffic until the sod is well established.
801-4.8.4 Stolon Planting. Topsoil preparation and conditioning and finish grading shall be
completed before stolon planting.
The area to be planted shall be thoroughly irrigated to a depth of at least 8 inches (200 mm). As
soon as the soil can be worked, the specified commercial fertilizer shall be worked into the top 1 inch
(25 mm) of soil.
At the time of planting, the top 2 inches (50 mm) of soil shall be friable and contain enough moisture
to prevent stolons from drying out during the planting operation. The stolons shall be worked into the

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 619

soil to a depth of 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (12.5 mm to 38 mm) by a mechanical or hand planter, or broadcast
by hand and covered with 1/4 inch (6 mm) of mulch.
When the area to be planted exceeds 10,000 square feet (1000 m2), a mechanical spreader shall be
used; when less than 10,000 square feet (1000 m2) and more than 2,000 square feet (200 m2), the use of
a hand planter or mechanical planter is optional; and when less than 2,000 square feet (200 m2),
handplanting or broadcasting with mulch is optional.
The planted stolons shall not be allowed to dry out. Watering shall begin immediately after planting
and the stolons kept moist at all times until the plants are well established.
When overseeding is required, the seed shall be spread in accordance with 801-4.8.2, Method A,
immediately after planting.
801-4.9 Erosion Control Planting.
801-4.9.1 General. Erosion control planting shall be for slope protection. Topsoil preparation and
conditioning shall conform to 801-2.3.
801-4.9.2 Straw Stabilization. When straw stabilization is specified, Type 6 mulch shall be
incorporated into the slope topsoil either by discing or with a steel plate studded roller. The steel plate
studs shall be at least 6 inches (150 mm) long, not more than 6 inches (150 mm) wide, and
approximately 1 inch (25 mm) thick, with rounded edges. The roller shall be capable of forcing the
straw into the soil a sufficient depth to tie down the surface soils.
801-4.9.3 Seeding and Mulching. Seed, fertilizer, mulch, and other specified materials may be
applied on slopes by Method A or Method B specified in 801-4.8.2.
801-4.9.4 Sprigging. Sprigging shall consist of planting turf grasses, cut stems of plants, and plants
with attached root system, but without adhering soil.
Sprigs shall be harvested and planted within a 24-hour period. Ice plant sprigs shall be harvested
between 48 and 96 hours before planting so that a thin callus is formed over the cut surface of each
sprig. Sprigs shall be shaded during callusing, but shall not be moistened.
Turf grasses shall be planted in accordance with 801-4.8.4.
Ice plant sprigs shall be planted in moist soil in holes or furrows 4 inches (100 mm) deep and the
hole or furrow refilled with soil and made firm around the plant in such a manner that the plant is not
damaged.
Sprigs shall be planted individually at the specified spacing. When row sprigging is specified,
planting shall be in furrows cut along the contour of the slope.
If mulching of sprigged areas is required, it shall immediately follow planting.
801-4.9.5 Watering. All seeded and planted areas shall be kept moist during the plant
establishment period.
Areas containing ice plants shall be maintained in a barely moist condition to a depth of 1 inch (25
mm) below the planted root depth.
When a permanent irrigation system is not available, the Contractor shall provide whatever
temporary system is necessary to provide adequate watering during the plant establishment period
without erosion detrimental to the planting.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
620 Greenbook 2021

801-5 IRRIGATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION.

801-5.1 General. Unless otherwise specified, the irrigation system layout shown on the Plans shall
be considered schematic. With the Engineer’s approval, the Contractor may make adjustments where
necessary to conform to actual field conditions. The irrigation system shall be operational, with uniform
and adequate coverage of the areas to be irrigated, prior to planting.
Service connections shall be as shown on the Plans, or designated by the serving utility and will be
installed by others at no cost to the Contractor. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 3 weeks
prior to the time electrical and water services are required. The Contractor shall be responsible for
furnishing the labor and materials to connect to the service connection.
After completing the irrigation system, the Contractor shall submit as-built drawings showing the
location of pipe, valves, tubing, wiring, controllers, and electrical services as constructed.
801-5.2 Trench Excavation and Backfill. Trenches and other excavations shall be sized to
accommodate the irrigation system components, conduit, and other required facilities. Additional space
shall be provided to assure proper installation and access for inspection.
Unless otherwise specified, the minimum depth of cover over pipelines and conduit shall be as
follows:
a) Electrical conduit – 24 inches (600 mm) (36 inches (900 mm) under roadways).
b) Waterlines continuously pressurized – 24 inches (600 mm) (36 inches (900 mm) under
roadways).
c) Lateral sprinkler lines – 12 inches (300 mm).
The bottom of trenches shall be true to grade and free of protruding stones, roots, or other matter
which would prevent proper bedding of pipe or other facilities.
Trenches and excavations shall be backfilled so that the specified thickness of topsoil is restored to
the upper part of the trench. Backfill shall be jetted in accordance with 306-12.4.
Trenches through paved areas shall be resurfaced in accordance with 306-13.
801-5.3 Irrigation Pipeline Installation.
801-5.3.1 General.
Pipe fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and these
Specifications. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish the manufacturer’s printed
installation instructions before pipe installation.
Pipe shall be bedded in at least 2 inches (50 mm) of finely divided material to provide a firm,
uniform bearing. After laying, the pipe shall be surrounded with additional finely divided material to at
least 2 inches (50 mm) over the top of the pipe. Trench backfill, sufficient to anchor the pipe, may be
deposited before the pipeline pressure testing, except that joints shall remain exposed until satisfactory
completion of testing.
When 2 or more pipelines are installed in the same trench, they shall be separated by a minimum
horizontal clear distance of 6 inches (150 mm) and they shall be installed so that each pipeline, valve, or
other pipeline component may be serviced or replaced without disturbing the other.
All assemblies shall be assembled as specified and in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.
During installation of pipe, fittings, valves, and other pipeline components, foreign matter shall be
prevented from entering the system. All open ends shall be temporarily capped or plugged during
cessation of installation operations.
Changes in pipeline size shall be accomplished with reducer fittings.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 621

801-5.3.2 Steel Pipeline. Ends of pipe shall be cut square and reamed to full size with a long taper
reamer.
Threads shall be cut with clean, sharp dies and shall conform to American Standards Association
Specification B2.
Joints shall be made with a nontoxic, non-hardening joint compound applied to the male threads
only.
When wrapped pipe is specified, joints and any remaining unwrapped portion of the pipeline shall be
similarly wrapped after pressure testing.
801-5.3.3 Plastic Pipeline. Plastic pipe shall be jointed by socket-type solvent-welded fittings,
threaded fittings, rubber-ring fittings, or by other means specified. When plastic pipe is joined to steel
pipe, the steel pipe shall be installed first.
Plastic pipe shall be cut square, externally chamfered approximately 10 to 15 degrees, and all burrs
and fins removed.
Solvent welded joints shall be made in accordance with ASTM D2855. The solvent recommended
by the manufacturer shall be used.
Plastic pipe installation shall be in accordance ASTM D2774 and the requirements herein.
Care shall be exercised in assembling a pipeline with solvent welded joints so that stress on
previously made joints is avoided. Handling of the pipe following jointing, such as lowering the
assembled pipeline into the trench, shall not occur prior to the set times specified in ASTM D2855.
Solvent shall be applied to pipe ends in such a manner that no material is deposited on the interior
surface of the pipe or extruded into the interior of the pipe during jointing. Excess cement on the
exterior of the joint shall be wiped clean immediately after assembly.
Threads shall be cut with clean, sharp dies and shall conform to American Standards Association
Specification B2. A plug shall be installed in the bore of the pipe to prevent distortion prior to
threading.
Threaded pipe joints shall be made using teflon tape or other approved jointing material. Solvent
shall not be used with threaded joints.
Pipe shall be protected from tool damage during assembly. Vises shall have pleated jaws and strap
wrenches shall be used for installation of fittings and nipples.
Plastic pipe which has been nicked, scarred, or otherwise damaged shall be removed and replaced.
Plastic pipe shall be snaked from side to side in the trench to allow 1 foot (0.3 m) of expansion and
contraction per 100 feet (30 m) of straight run.
The pipeline shall not be exposed to water for 24 hours after the last solvent welded joint is made.
801-5.3.4 Copper Pipeline. Copper pipeline shall be made with sweated solder joints.
Before jointing, the end of the pipe for the depth of the fitting, and the interior of the fitting shall be
buffed to a bright finish and coated with solder flux. A continuous solder bead shall show around the
joint circumference after soldering.
Copper pipe shall be joined to steel or cast iron pipe with a dielectric union.
801-5.4 Installation of Valves, Valve Boxes, and Special Equipment. Valves, backflow
preventers, pressure regulators, and related accessories shall be furnished and installed as specified.
Valves and other equipment shall be installed in a normal upright position unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer, and shall be readily accessible for operation, maintenance, and
replacement. Sectional control valves shall not be located within range of sprinklers they control.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
622 Greenbook 2021

Valves shall be same size as the pipeline in which they are installed.
Gate valves and sectional control valves shall be installed below ground. Gate valves shall be
housed in a covered concrete box that will permit access for servicing. Sectional control valves shall be
equipped with a sleeve and cap centered on the valve stem.
Quick-coupler valves and garden valves projecting above grade shall be installed 3 feet (0.9 m) from
curbs, pavement, and walks. In lawn areas, such equipment shall be installed in a covered concrete box
set to finish grade. In ground cover and shrubbery areas, quick-coupler valves shall be set 6 inches (150
mm) above finish grade, and garden valves shall be set between 12 and 15 inches (300 mm and 375 mm)
above finish grade. Quick-coupler valves and garden valves shall be installed on a double-swing-joint
riser assembly and secured to a driven No. 4 (No. 13M) reinforcing steel rod in accordance with 801-
5.5.3.
All valve boxes, pipe sleeves, and caps shall be set to finish grade, and valves shall be set at
sufficient depth to provide clearance between the cover and the cap, valve handle, or key when the valve
is in the fully open position.
Backflow preventers shall be provided with pipe supports and the accessories necessary to properly
secure the assembly. All backflow preventers shall be assembled with pipe and fittings of galvanized
steel.
801-5.5 Sprinkler Head Installation and Adjustment.
801-5.5.1 General. Mains and laterals, including risers, shall be flushed and pressure tested in
accordance with 801-5.7 before installing sprinkler heads, after which a water coverage test shall be
performed.
801-5.5.2 Location, Elevation, and Spacing. Sprinkler head spacing shall not exceed the
maximum shown on the Plans or recommended by the manufacturer.
In new lawn areas, sprinkler heads shall be installed 3 inches (75 mm) above grade and then reset
flush with the finish surface just prior to the first mowing. Lawn sprinklers shall be installed 2 inches
(50 mm) clear of adjacent walks, curbs, paving, headers, and similar improvements.
Sprinkler heads shall be installed 4 inches (100 mm) from adjacent vertical elements projecting
above grade such as walks, planter boxes, curbs, and fences.
Shrub heads, bubbler heads, and oscillating sprinklers shall be installed 6 inches (150 mm) above
finish grade.
Nozzle lines shall be installed at least 12 inches (300 mm) above finish grade. Sprinkler heads
projecting above finish grade shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) from adjacent curbs, walks, paving,
and similar improvements.
801-5.5.3 Riser and Nozzle Line Installation. Risers shall be oriented perpendicular to finish grade.
Risers for oscillating sprinklers and nozzle lines shall be galvanized steel pipe. All other risers may
be galvanized steel or Schedule 80 PVC. Pipe between the connection to the lateral or main and the
sprinkler head shall be threaded.
Sprinkler head riser assemblies shall be top outlet, single-swing joint, or double-swing joint.
Sprinkler head risers and nozzle risers installed above grade within 24 inches (600 mm) of roadway
paving, curbs, walks, and similar improvements shall be of the double-swing joint type.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 623

A top outlet riser assembly shall consist of a pipe riser threaded into a top outlet ell or tee installed in
the lateral supply line.
Double-swing joint and single-swing joint riser assemblies shall utilize a horizontal 6-inch (150 mm)
pipe nipple threaded into a side outlet ell or tee installed in the lateral supply line. For a double-swing
joint, three ells shall be used in the remaining assembly ahead of the vertical riser pipe. For a single-
swing joint, one ell shall be used.
Risers for nozzle lines, oscillating sprinklers, and other sprinkler heads installed above grade within
24 inches (600 mm) of curbs, walks, roadways, and similar improvements shall be supported by a No. 4
(No. 13M) reinforcing steel rod. The upper end of the rod shall be at finish grade and be of such length
that it extends 24 inches (600 mm) below the lateral supply line.
Where nozzle lines cannot be supported on adjacent fences, guard rails and the like, they shall be
supported on driven 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) pipe stakes, 4 feet (1.2 m) long at 8-foot (2.4 m) centers. The
nozzle line shall be secured to the top of the stake with 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) anchor rings, 12 inches (300
mm) long.
801-5.5.4 Sprinkler Head Adjustment. When all sprinkler heads are installed and the irrigation
system is operating, each section or unit shall be adjusted and balanced, with all section control valves
fully open to obtain uniform and adequate coverage.
Sprinkler heads having adjustable pin nozzles or orifices shall have the pins adjusted to provide
adequate distribution of water over the coverage pattern. The Contractor shall substitute larger or
smaller nozzle cores in nonadjustable sprinkler heads as necessary.
If additional work other than the prescribed above is necessary to correct a deficiency in the system
installed as specified, such work will be considered as Extra Work.
801-5.6 Automatic Control System Installation. The Contractor shall install a complete
automatic irrigation control system including the automatic controller, remote control valves and wiring,
and all necessary accessories and utility service connection.
The automatic controller shall be installed outside of the coverage pattern of the irrigation system at
the location shown on the Plans. The foundation for the controller shall be walk concrete, as specified in
201-1, of the size shown on the Plans or recommended by the manufacturer. The control components in
the controller shall be fused and the chassis shall be grounded.
Remote control valves shall be compatible with the automatic controller. When the valve is to be
housed in a concrete box, it shall be installed with at least a 6-inch (150 mm) clearance below the
concrete cover. The box shall be set to finish grade on a 12-inch (300 mm) layer of 1 inch (25 mm)
crushed rock.
All service wiring shall be installed in galvanized steel conduit from the service point to the
controller. A separate disconnect switch or combination meter socket, as required, shall be installed
between the source of power and the controller. The minimum service wire shall be No. 12 AWG
copper, 600V, Type TW, THW, THWN, or larger as specified in the Special Provisions or by the
controller manufacturer. Wire splices shall be located only in pull boxes and shall be made with a
packaged kit approved for underground use, or as specified in 701-13.2. Pull boxes shall be concrete, set
to grade on a 12-inch (300 mm) layer of 1 inch (25 mm) crushed rock.
Control wiring or hydraulic control tubing shall be housed in conduit between the controller and a
concrete pull box installed at least 12 inches (300 mm) outside the limits of the controller foundation, or
the structure foundation where the controller is housed. All other wiring and hydraulic control tubing
issuing from the pull box shall be direct burial installed in main or lateral waterline trenches wherever

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
624 Greenbook 2021

practicable. The wiring or tubing shall be bundled and secured to the lower quadrant of the irrigation
pipeline at 10-foot (3 m) intervals with plastic electrical tape. Sufficient slack shall be left in the wiring
or tubing to provide for expansion and contraction. When the control wiring or tubing cannot be
installed in a pipe trench, it shall be installed a minimum of 18 inches (450 mm) below finish grade and
a bright colored plastic ribbon with suitable markings shall be installed in the trench 6 inches (150 mm)
below grade directly over the wire or tubing.
Control wiring shall be suitably color coded as necessary for identification. All common wire shall
be the same color. Unless otherwise specified, all control wiring shall be direct burial, Type UF, No. 14
AWG copper. Splices in control wire shall be made in accordance with the requirements for service
wire. At least 2 feet (0.6 m) of slack shall be left at each splice and point of connection in pull boxes
and valve boxes.
All wiring shall be tested for continuity, open circuits, and unintentional grounds prior to connecting
to equipment. When tested for a period of 4 hours, the hydraulic control system shall maintain a
constant test pattern of 125 pounds per square inch (860 kPa). Upon completion of the Work, the
control system shall be in operating condition with an operational chart mounted within the controller
cabinet.
Upon completion of the Work, the control system shall be in operating condition with an operational
chart mounted within the controller cabinet.
801-5.7 Flushing and Testing.
801-5.7.1 General. After completion and prior to the installation of any terminal fittings, the entire
pipeline system shall be thoroughly flushed to remove dirt, scale, or other material. After flushing, the
following tests shall be conducted by the Contractor in the sequence listed below. All equipment,
materials, and labor necessary to perform the tests shall be furnished by the Contractor and all tests shall
be conducted in the presence of the Engineer.
801-5.7.2 Pipeline Pressure Test.
801-[Link] General. Pressure testing for leakage shall be performed on supply lines, pressure
mains, and laterals installed by the Contractor, except for non-rigid pipelines and pipelines with spray
nozzles installed into the pipe. Pipelines to be tested shall be installed, and each open end of the pipeline
shall be plugged or capped prior to testing.
Pipelines installed by trenching and backfilling and pipelines which are completely visible after
installation shall be tested by either Method A or Method B. The method used shall be at the
Contractor's option. All other pipelines, including those installed in the ground by methods other than
trenching and backfilling, shall be tested by Method A. Waterline crossovers shall be tested by Method
A except the test period and allowable drop in pressure shall be modified from one hour to 1/2 hour and
from 5 pounds per square inch (35 kPa) to no drop in pressure, respectively.
801-[Link] Method A. Method A pressure testing for leakage shall conform to the following procedure.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to performing a pressure test. The
Engineer will observe each pressure test.
Pipelines to be tested shall be filled with water and a pressure gage shall be connected to the
pipeline. The pipeline shall then be placed under a pressure of 125 pounds per square inch (860 kPa)
except as otherwise specified below, by air or water pressure, after which the source of pressure shall be
cut off leaving the line under the required pressure.
The pipeline shall be tested under the required pressure for a test period of one hour. The pressure
gage shall remain in place until each test period has been completed. Leaks that develop in the tested
portion of the system shall be located and repaired after each test period when a drop of more than 5

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 625

pounds per square inch (35 kPa) is indicated by the pressure gage. After the leaks have been repaired, the
one hour pressure test shall be repeated and additional repairs made until the drop in pressure is 5
pounds per square inch (35 kPa) or less.
When a system consists of new pipelines installed as part of the Work and existing pipelines, the
new pipelines shall be isolated from the existing pipelines and the new pipelines shall be tested at 125
pounds per square inch (860 kPa).
801-[Link] Method B. Method B pressure testing for leakage shall conform to the following
procedure.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to performing a pressure test.
Pressure tests shall be performed such that the test periods are within the working hours specified in the
Special Provisions. The Engineer will observe each pressure test.
Before any portion of the pipeline on the supply side of a control valve is backfilled, water shall be
turned into that portion of the line and maintained at full pressure from the water source for a period of
not less than 8 consecutive hours after air has been expelled from the line. Before any portion of the
pipeline on the discharge side of a control valve is backfilled, a similar test shall be performed, except
the test shall be for a period of one hour. Leaks that develop in a tested portion of the system shall be
repaired. After the leaks have been repaired, the pressure test shall be repeated and additional repairs
made until no leaks occur.
801-5.7.3 Sprinkler Coverage Test. The coverage test shall be performed after sprinkler heads
have been installed and shall demonstrate that each section or unit in the irrigation system is balanced to
provide uniform and adequate coverage of the areas serviced. The Contractor shall correct any
deficiencies in the system in accordance with 801-5.5.4.
801-5.7.4 Operational Test. The performance of all components of the automatic control system
shall be evaluated for manual and automatic operation.
During the maintenance period and at least 15 Days prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall set
the controller on automatic operation and the system shall operate satisfactorily during such period. All
necessary repairs, replacements, and adjustments shall be made until all equipment, electrical work,
controls, and instrumentation are functioning in accordance with the Contract Documents.
801-6 MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT. The Contractor shall maintain all
planted areas on a continuous basis as they are completed during the progress of the Work and during the
plant establishment period.
All planted areas shall be kept free of debris and shall be weeded and cultivated at intervals not to
exceed 10 Days. The first mowing of lawn areas shall be performed when the grass is 2-1/2 inches (63
mm) high and shall be repeated as often as necessary to maintain the lawn at a height of 2 inches (50
mm). In no case shall the lawn be cut lower than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in height.
Any required pruning of plants will be designated by the Engineer at the start of the plant
establishment period and the Contractor shall perform the pruning as part of the plant establishment
work.
The Contractor shall request a final inspection to begin the plant establishment period after all
planting and related work have been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
626 Greenbook 2021

After planting is completed, a field notification will be issued to the Contractor to establish the
effective beginning date of the plant establishment period. The plant establishment period shall be for a
period of 30 Days unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions and will be extended by the
Engineer if the planted areas are improperly maintained, appreciable plant replacement is required, or
other corrective work becomes necessary.
Upon completion of the plant establishment period, a final inspection will be performed by the
Engineer. If the plant establishment period is satisfactorily completed ahead of other work included in
the Contract, the maintenance of planted areas shall be continued by the Contractor until all other work
has been completed.
801-7 MEASUREMENT. Landscaping and irrigation will be measured as specified in the Special
Provisions and as shown in the Bid.
801-8 PAYMENT. Payment for landscaping and irrigation will be made at the lump sum prices or
Contract Unit Prices shown in the Bid.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 627

APPENDIX A

SAMPLE ENABLING ORDINANCE

(For use by municipalities in adopting Standard Specifications For Public Works
Construction by reference)

Ordinance No. _________

An ordinance regulating materials of construction and their use in the erection,
installation, alteration, repair, removal, conversion, demolition, and construction of
public works improvements in the City (County) of ……………………….;
providing for the administration of contracts as well as permits issued in connection
with such improvements; and repealing all ordinances and parts of ordinances in
conflict therewith.

The People of the City (County) of………………………do ordain as follows:

Except as may otherwise be provided herein, the provisions of the 2021 edition
of the “Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction,” prepared and
promulgated by Public Works Standards, Inc., a California Nonprofit Mutual
Benefit Corporation, whose members are the American Public works Association,
the Associated General Contractors of California, the Engineering Contractors’
Association, the Southern California Contractors Association and BNI Publications,
Inc., are adopted and applicable to all public works construction undertaken after
the effective date of this ordinance.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
628 Greenbook 2021

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Greenbook 2021 629

REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Following is a list of documents referred to in this book, arranged alphabetically.

AMERICAN FOREST AND PAPER ASSOCIATION. 1111 19th St., N.W. Suite 800, Washington, D.C.
20036.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE. (Formally the United States of American Standards
Institute, also the American Standards Association). Published by the American National Standards
Institute, 25 West 43rd St., 4th Floor, New York, New York 10036.
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE STANDARDS. Published by the American Petroleum Institute, 1220
L St., N.W. Washington, D.C. 20005.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS. Standards and Metric Practice Guide E380.
Published by the American Society for Testing and Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Dr., Conshohocken,
PA 19428-2959.
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION STANDARDS (AWWA). Published by the American Water
Works Association, 6666 W. Quincy Avenue, Denver, CO 80235.
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS) STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Published by the American
Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126.
AMERICAN WOOD PRESERVERS ASSOCIATION (AWPA) BOOK OF STANDARDS. Published by the
American Wood Preservers Association, 2345 Grand Blvd Ste 500, Kansas City, MO 64108-2625.
ASPHALT PROTECTIVE COATING FOR PIPELINES. Published by the Asphalt Institute, Research Park
Dr., P.O. Box 14052, Lexington, KY 40512-4052.
FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS. Available through the Federal Supply Service Bureau, Specification
Section, 470 East L’Enfant Plaza S.W., Suite 8100, Washington, D.C. 20407.
MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE. Published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 933 N.
Plum Grove Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758.
MANUAL OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC). Published by the American Institute of Steel Construction,
Incorporated, One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100, Chicago, IL 60601-2001.
MANUAL OF WARNING SIGNS LIGHTS, AND DEVICES.
MATERIALS MANUAL, VOLUMES I, II, & III TESTING AND CONTROL PROCEDURES.
MILITARY SPECIFICATIONS. Available through the Superintendent of Documents, US Government
Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.
NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE. Published by the National Fire Protection Association, One Batterymarch
Park, Quincy, MA 02269.
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION STANDARDS. Published by the National
th
Electrical Manufacturers Association, 1300 N 17 St. Ste 1847, Rosslyn, VA 22209.
PLACING REINFORCING BARS. (Formerly Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars).
Published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 933 N. Plum Grove Road, Schaumburg, IL
60173-4758.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
630 Greenbook 2021

RULES FOR OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CONSTRUCTION- GENERAL ORDER NO. 95. Published by the
State of California, Public Utilities Commission, 505 Van Ness Ave, San Francisco, CA 94102.
SAFETY ORDERS-BASIC ELECTRICAL REGULATIONS, TITLE 24, CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL INDUSTRY,
TUNNEL. Published by the Office of Procurement, Publications Section¹, P.O. Box 1015, North
Highlands, California 95660.
SOFTWOOD PLYWOOD, CONSTRUCTION & INDUSTRIAL. (Formerly Douglas Fir Plywood, Construction
& Industry). Published by the U.S. Department of Commerce, Business and Defense Services
Administration, Office of Technical Services, Commodity Standards Division; Superintendent of
Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE DESIGN, FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR
BUILDINGS. Published by the American Institute of Steel Construction, One East Wacker Dr., Suite
3100, Chicago, IL 60601-2001.
SPECIFICATION FOR WELDED HIGHWAY AND RAILWAY BRIDGES. Published by the American Welding
Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Rd., Miami, FL 33126.
STANDARD GRADING RULES FOR WEST COAST LUMBER. (Formerly Standard Grading and Dressing
Rules for West Coast Lumber). Published by the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, P.O. Box
23145, Portland, OR 97281-3145.
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR GRADES OF CALIFORNIA REDWOOD LUMBER. Published by the
California Redwood Association, 405 Enfrente Dr., Suite 200, Novato, CA 94949.
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR HIGHWAYS MATERIALS AND METHODS OF SAMPLING AND
TESTING. Published by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials,
PO Box 96716, Washington DC, 20090-6716.
STANDARDS FOR INSULATED POWER CABLE. Published by the Insulated Cable Engineers Association,
P.O. Box 1568, Carrollton, GA 30112.
STANDARDS OF OPERATIONS OF TRUCK MIXERS AND AGITATORS. (National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association). Published by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association, 900 Spring Street,
Silver Spring, MD 20910.
TRUCK MIXER & AGITATORS STANDARDS. (Truck Mixer Manufacturers Bureau). Published by the
Truck Mixer Manufacturers Bureau, 900 Spring Street, Silver Spring, MD 20910.
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY, INC. LISTINGS AND STANDARDS. Published by the Underwriters
Laboratory, Inc., 333 Pfingsten Rd., Northbrook, IL 60062-2096.
U.S. CORPS OF ENGINEERS TEST METHODS. Available through the Corps of Engineers, U.S. Army,
Waterways Experimental Stations, 3909 Halls Ferry Rd., Vicksburg, MS 39180-6199.

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Index 631

AGGREGATE EAS................................................................... 320

A GRADATION ........................................................................ 47
LEAN CONCRETE BASE..................................................... 56
ABANDONMENT CONDUIT............................................. 401, 599
POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE ...................................... 120
ABBREVIATIONS......................................................................... 5
PORTLAND CEMENT .......................................................... 65
ABOVE-GROUND PIPING ....................................................... 226
QUALITY .............................................................................. 53
ABS COMPOSITE PIPE.................................................... 168-169
REAS ................................................................................... 96
PIPE .................................................................................... 413
SCALE ................................................................................. 70
ABS SOLID WALL PIPE.................................................... 167-168
SCREENING ........................................................................ 44
ABSORPTION TEST ................................................................ 141
TRMAC............................................................................... 118
ABUTTING JOINT .................................................................... 380
AGITATOR CONCRETE ............................................................ 72
ACCELERATED AGING............................................176, 182, 188
AGREED PRICE ........................................................................ 37
ACCELERATING ADMIXTURE .................................................. 66
AGRICULTURAL SUITABILITY................................................ 609
ACCEPTANCE ........................................................................... 21
AID STARTING ........................................................................ 562
ABS PIPE ..................................................................... 168-169
AIR PRESSURE TEST.....................................................415, 536
ANNULAR HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE ........... 174
HAMMER ........................................................................... 391
CCFRPM MICROTUNNELING PIPE ................................... 182
PLACED CONCRETE .......................................................... 47
CCFRPM PIPE .................................................................... 178
POLLUTION ......................................................................... 19
DUCTILE IRON CASTING ................................................... 132
AIR/VACUUM VALVES ............................................................ 241
GRAY IRON CASTING ........................................................ 132
AIR-ENTRAINING ADMIXTURES .............................................. 66
LCB..................................................................................... 299
AIR-PLACED CONCRETE .......................................... 47, 357-359
PAVEMENT MARKER ........................................................ 257
ALCLAD COATING DAMAGE .................................................. 166
PIPE ................................................................................... 421
ALIGNMENT MARKING ........................................................... 488
POLYURETHANE JOINT.................................................... 190
TRAFFIC STRIPING ........................................................... 488
PRCB........................................................................... 269-270
ALLEY CONCRETE ..........................................................369, 372
PVC PIPE .................................................................... 169-170
REMOVAL.......................................................................... 496
RCP MICROTUNNELING ................................................... 183
ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE .......................................................... 434
SYNTHETIC RUBBER JOINT............................................. 189
ALTERNATE CONCRETE CLASS ............................................. 58
TRMAC ............................................................................... 119
CURING RCP...................................................................... 146
TUBE .................................................................................. 511
ALUMINIZING DAMAGE .......................................................... 160
VITRIFIED CLAY MICROTUNNELING PIPE ...................... 180
ALUMINUM ARCH PIPE .......................................................... 163
WORK .................................................................................. 21
CABINET............................................................................ 574
ACCESS LADDERS TRENCH ................................................. 403
PIPE END FINISH .............................................................. 165
RAMP CONCRETE ..................................................... 369, 372
STANDARD........................................................................ 553
ACCESSORY CABINET........................................................... 576
AMENDMENT SOIL ................................................................. 610
ACCOUNTING TIME .................................................................. 31
ANALYSIS SIEVE .................................................................... 219
ACID RESISTANCE TEST ....................................................... 180
ANCHOR BOLT..................................................128-129, 381, 551
ACRYLIC COATING................................................................. 217
ANCHORAGE ...................................................................362, 381
ACRYLONITRILE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE PIPE..................... 167
ANCHORING DEVICE ............................................................. 362
ACTIVE DATA BRIDGES ......................................................... 577
ANGLE CONNECTION ............................................................ 381
INFILTRATION ELIMINATION ............................................ 537
METER VALVES ................................................................ 248
ACTUAL QUANTITY .................................................................. 35
ANIONIC EMULSIFIED ASPHALT ............................................. 91
ACTUATORS VALVE ............................................................... 233
ANNULAR GROUTING .....................................469, 510, 513, 529
ADHESION TEST......................................................157, 535, 542
HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE..................... 171-174
ADHESIVE ............................................................................... 538
SEALING DEVICES ........................................................... 233
BITUMINOUS ..................................................................... 494
SPACE GROUTING ....................................................526, 531
EPOXY ....................................................................... 260, 262
ANTITRUST CLAIM.................................................................... 27
HOT-MELT BITUMINOUS .................................................. 263
APPARENT SPECIFIC GRAVITY .............................................. 48
MIXING............................................................................... 493
APPENDIX ............................................................................... 627
PAVEMENT MARKER................................................ 260, 493
APPLICATION ARAM............................................................... 340
ADMIXTURE ACCELERATING .................................................. 66
CURING COMPOUND .......................................................... 78
CEMENT MORTAR .............................................................. 79
EAS ..................................................................................... 323
CHEMICAL ..................................................................... 57, 66
OF PAINT............................................................................ 477
COLOR............................................................................... 374
PAINTING ........................................................................... 471
CSLM ................................................................................... 79
REAS .................................................................................. 324
HYDRATION STABILIZING.................................................. 66
SEAL COAT ........................................................................ 339
SET-RETARDING ................................................................ 66
SLURRY SEAL.................................................................... 323
SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE ................................................ 66
TRAFFIC STRIPING .................................................... 489-490
WATER-REDUCING ............................................................ 66
WATER .............................................................................. 279
ADVERTISING CONTRACTOR ................................................. 18
APPURTENANCES.................................................................. 432
AGENCY CHANGES.................................................................. 13
ARAM....................................................................................... 340
FACILITY.............................................................................. 39
MEASUREMENT................................................................ 343
INSPECTION........................................................................ 22
ARCH ....................................................................................... 389
AGENT RECYCLING ................................................................. 99
CORRUGATED ALUMINUM ............................................... 163
SET CONTROL .................................................................. 321
PIPE .................................................................................... 163
AGGREGATE............................................................................. 97
SECTIONS .......................................................................... 347
ARHM................................................................................. 113
STEEL................................................................................. 389
BASE.................................................................................... 50
STEEL CORRUGATED....................................................... 157
COARSE .............................................................................. 46
STRUCTURAL .................................................................... 163
CRUSHED............................................................................ 50
STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PLATE..................................... 166
CSLM ................................................................................... 79

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
632 Index

ARCHAEOLOGICAL DISCOVERIES..........................................32 BARRIERS ............................................................................... 547

ARHM ........................................................................ 110-116, 340 BASE AGGREGATE...................................................................50
ARM MAST ...............................................................................596 COMPACTING..................................................................... 288
ARRESTOR SURGE ................................................................576 COURSE ............................................................................. 454
ARROW LED ............................................................................585 CRUSHED ........................................................................50-51
SIGNS..................................................................................548 LEAN CONCRETE......................................................... 56, 298
ASPHALT ...................................................................................97 MATERIAL ..................................................................... 50, 287
CONCRETE......................................46, 97, 100, 109, 328, 454 MISCELLANEOUS............................................................50-52
CONCRETE POROUS.........................................................119 PROCESSED ...................................................................50-52
CONCRETE TIRE RUBBER MODIFIED ............... 116, 343-344 PULVERIZED MISCELLANEOUS .........................................53
EMULSIFIED .........................................................................90 SPREADING........................................................................ 288
HEATING TANK ..................................................................115 UNTREATED ....................................................................... 288
LIQUID...................................................................................87 BASES...................................................................................... 548
MODIFIER ARHM ................................................................110 BASIN ....................................................................................... 280
PAINT ..................................................................................110 EXCAVATION...................................................................... 281
PAVEMENT ...........................................................................98 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................................41
PAVING .................................................................................86 BATCH PLANT METHOD ......................................................... 105
PLACEMENT .......................................................................454 BATCHED MATERIAL ................................................................73
RECLAIMED ..........................................................................98 BATCH-TYPE PLANTS ..............................................................82
RUBBER AGGREGATE MEMBRANE .................................340 BATHHOUSE FACILITY .............................................................41
RUBBER HOT MIX ...................................................... 110, 340 BEAD GLASS ........................................................................... 256
STORAGE ...........................................................................109 BEARING ASSEMBLY.............................................................. 381
TEMPERATURE ....................................................................87 PLATE BRONZE CASTING ................................................. 132
WARM MIX ..........................................................................105 STRENGTH TEST ............................................................... 180
ASPHALT-RUBBER EQUIPMENT............................................115 SURFACE............................................................................ 380
ASSEMBLING STEEL ..............................................................378 VALUE ................................................................................. 393
ASSEMBLY BEARING..............................................................381 BED LEVELING ........................................................................ 267
EXPANSION ........................................................................382 MATERIAL ........................................................................... 446
PLATE .................................................................................389 BEDDING FOR PLASTIC PIPE ............................................... 271
PUSH-BUTTON ...................................................................592 MATERIALS......................................................................... 271
REFLECTOR .......................................................................587 PIPE .................................................................................... 403
ROTATION ..........................................................................382 TRENCH .............................................................................. 404
ASSIGNMENT CONTRACT........................................................14 BELL JOINTS ........................................................................... 171
AUGER CASED ........................................................................468 BENCHING ............................................................................... 278
AUTHORITY BOARD..................................................................15 BENDING REINFORCEMENT.................................................. 349
ENGINEER ............................................................................15 BENT PLATE ............................................................................ 384
AUTO LIABILITY.........................................................................27 BIDDER SUBCONTRACT ..........................................................10
AUTOTRANSFORMER BALLAST ............................................563 BIDDING.....................................................................................10
AWARD CONTRACT..................................................................11 BINDER ASPHALT .....................................................................97
BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE......................................................... 494
COATING CORRUGATED ALUMINUM PIPE...................... 166
B COATING. ........................................................................... 161
LINING................................................................................. 161
BACKFILL ................................................................. 283, 450, 453 MATERIAL .............................................................................86
COMPACTED ......................................................................451 PAVING ............................................................................... 161
JETTED ...............................................................................452 SEAL CURING..................................................................... 292
MATERIALS.........................................................................271 BLAST CLEANING ............................................................ 474-475
PERVIOUS ..........................................................................277 BLENDER EQUIPMENT ........................................................... 115
PIPE ....................................................................................453 BLISTER PIPE.......................................................................... 153
STRUCTURE ................................................................275-277 BLISTERS ................................................................................ 179
TRENCH ..............................................................................620 VCP ..................................................................................... 154
TUNNEL...............................................................................462 BLOCK CONCRETE...................................................................84
BACKFLOW PREVENTER .......................................................613 TERMINAL.....................................559-560, 566, 576, 588, 602
PREVENTION DEVICES .....................................................243 BLOTTER ROCK DUST.................................................... 340, 343
BACKPACKING TUNNEL .........................................................462 BLOW MOLDED FITTINGS ...................................................... 171
BACKPLATE.............................................................................582 BMP PAYMENT..........................................................................21
BACKPLATES ..........................................................................548 BOARD AUTHORITY..................................................................15
BACTERIOLOGICAL SAMPLING .............................................438 BOLT ........................................................................................ 129
BALL VALVES ..........................................................................238 ANCHOR ............................................................. 129, 381, 551
BALLAST AUTOTRANSFORMER ............................................563 HIGH-STRENGTH ............................................................... 129
CWA ....................................................................................562 HOLE ................................................................................... 377
INTERNAL ...........................................................................562 STRUCTURAL STEEL......................................................... 128
LAMP ...................................................................................562 UNFINISHED ....................................................................... 129
REGULATOR.......................................................................563 BOLTED CONNECTION.................................................... 380-381
REMOTE..............................................................................562 BOLTED-SLEEVE COUPLINGS............................................... 244
BAND CONNECTING ...............................................................165 BOND CONTRACT.....................................................................11
COUPLING ..........................................................................158 BONDING ......................................................................... 365, 556
BANK PROTECTION................................................................284 GROUNDING....................................................................... 600
BAR DEFORMED .....................................................................267 MORTAR ............................................................................. 153
REINFORCEMENT ................................................................73 BONNET BOLTS ...................................................................... 228
BARBED WIRE CHAIN LINK FENCE .......................................135 BORROW ................................................................................ 280
BARRICADES...........................................................................546 BOX CONCRETE ..................................................................... 447

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Index 633

BOX PRECAST CONCRETE ................................................... 266 CELL CLASSIFICATION .......................................................... 174

PULL ........................................................................... 555, 596 PVC PLASTIC PIPE ............................................................ 170
VALVE......................................................................... 613, 621 CEMENT .................................................................................... 79
BREAKER CIRCUIT ..................................................556, 577, 601 HYDRAULIC.......................................................................... 64
BRICK ........................................................................................ 84 JOINT.................................................................................. 411
BUILDING ............................................................................. 84 MORTAR............................................................................... 78
FACING................................................................................. 84 MORTAR ADMIXTURE ......................................................... 79
MANHOLE............................................................................. 84 MORTAR WATER ................................................................. 79
MASONRY .......................................................................... 368 NON-PLASTIC ...................................................................... 68
BRICKLAYING ......................................................................... 368 PORTLAND ................... 46-47, 56, 58, 64, 68, 79, 96, 267, 332
BRIDGE BEARING PLATES .................................................... 130 SCALE .................................................................................. 70
BRIDGES ................................................................................. 347 STABILIZED BASE ............................................................. 294
BRIM-STYLE SYSTEM ............................................................ 535 TREATED BASE ........................................................... 83, 293
BRINNELL HARDNESS ........................................................... 383 CEMENTITIOUS GROUT......................................................... 538
BRITTLENESS ......................................................................... 186 MATERIAL ............................................................................ 66
BRITTLENESS PIPE........................................................... 173 CENTRAL MIXING PLANT............................ 81, 96, 289, 325, 327
BRONZE CASTING.................................................................. 132 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST PIPE .........................................175, 180
ORNAMENTAL TABLET ..................................................... 132 CERTIFICATE COMPLIANCE.................................23, 64, 95, 585
BRUSH-OFF BLAST ................................................................ 475 CURB MARKING................................................................. 256
BUILDING BRICK....................................................................... 84 PAVEMENT FABRIC........................................................... 252
BULK CEMENT .......................................................................... 70 PAVEMENT MARKER......................................................... 256
BURIED PIPING APPLICATIONS ............................................ 225 TRAFFIC STRIPING ........................................................... 256
STRUCTURES .................................................................... 457 CERTIFICATION ARHM........................................................... 116
BURLAP ..................................................................................... 78 CURING ................................................................................ 78
BUTT PILE ............................................................................... 124 LIQUID ASPHALT ................................................................. 88
BUTTON PEDESTRIAN ........................................................... 607 PAVING ASPHALT................................................................ 86
PUSH .................................................................................. 607 SEALANT .............................................................................. 77
BUTT-STRAP JOINTS ............................................................. 425 CERTIFIED MAIL ....................................................................... 25
BYPASS SEWAGE .................................................................... 19 WEIGHT................................................................................ 35
TEMPORARY...................................................................... 400 CHAIN LINK FENCE .................................................133, 136, 388
SEWER ............................................................................... 508 FABRIC TIE......................................................................... 135
CHANGED CONDITION............................................................. 13
CHANGES AGENCY.................................................................. 13
C CONTRACTOR ..................................................................... 13
CHANNEL EARTHWORK ................................................. 282-283
CABINET.................................................................................. 573 STRAP ................................................................................ 210
ACCESSORY ...................................................................... 576 WEEP ................................................................................. 482
CONTROLLER ............................................................ 567, 603 CHANNELIZERS...................................................................... 546
DOOR.................................................................................. 575 CHDPE PIPE............................................................................ 413
STEEL ................................................................................. 573 CHECK SERVICE .................................................................... 603
VENTILATION ..................................................................... 575 VALVES .............................................................................. 239
CABLE.............................................................................. 567, 599 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURE ..................................................... 57, 66
FILLED ................................................................................ 604 RESISTANCE ...........167, 171-176, 188, 210, 219, 509, 511-514, 522
IDENTIFICATION ................................................................ 604 RESISTANCE TESTING ..................................................... 528
INTERCONNECT ................................................................ 571 CHEMICAL TEST..................................................................... 157
TELEPHONE............................................................... 571, 604 TESTING............................................................................. 169
CAGE REINFORCING ............................................................. 392 CHIP SEAL............................................................................... 307
CALCIUM CHLORIDE ................................................................ 62 CHIPS ...................................................................................... 179
CALIBRATION MIXER.............................................................. 321 FULL DEPTH....................................................................... 155
VISCOMETER..................................................................... 222 SURFACE ........................................................................... 154
CAP SCREWS ......................................................................... 228 VCP..................................................................................... 154
CAPACITY INFILTRATION ...................................................... 221 CHLORIDE CALCIUM ................................................................ 62
CARBON STEEL CASTING ..................................................... 129 CHROMATE ............................................................................. 217
CARTRIDGE FUSE .................................................................. 577 CIPCP ...................................................................................... 439
CASE CONNECTOR................................................................ 559 CIPP......................................................................................... 511
CASED AUGER ....................................................................... 468 LINERS ............................................................................... 529
CASING.................................................................................... 392 REJECTION ........................................................................ 512
SPACERS ........................................................................... 230 REPAIR ............................................................................... 512
CASTING BRONZE.................................................................. 132 CIPRCB.............................................................................347, 447
DUCTILE IRON ................................................................... 129 MEASUREMENT................................................................. 456
GRAY IRON ........................................................................ 129 CIRCUIT BREAKER ..................................................556, 577, 601
NON-VEHICULAR TRAFFIC AREA .................................... 130 MULTIPLE........................................................................... 558
STEEL ................................................................................. 129 SERIES ............................................................................... 558
VEHICULAR TRAFFIC AREA ............................................. 130 CIRCULAR LIGHT EMITTING DIODE...................................... 583
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PILES .............................. 126, 392 CLAIM ANTITRUST.................................................................... 27
PIPE .................................................................................... 439 CLASS CONCRETE................................................................... 58
CATCH BASINS ....................................................................... 347 CLASSIFICATION CELL .......................................................... 174
CATIONIC EMULSIFIED ASPHALT ........................................... 92 CLAY PIPE........................................................153, 178, 187, 409
CCFRPM .......................................................................5, 175, 420 CLEANER PLASTIC LINER ..................................................... 208
MICROTUNNELING PIPE ............................................ 180-182 CLEANING BLAST................................................................... 474
CCFRPM PIPE .......................................................... 175-180, 515 POWER TOOL .................................................................... 473
CCTV......................................................................... 506-507, 535 CLEANNESS VALUE ................................................................. 46

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
634 Index

CLEANUP ...................................................................................19 CONCRETE COLORED ........................................................... 373

CLEARING................................................................................280 CONSISTENCY .....................................................................71
CLEARING AND GRUBBING ...................................................273 CONSTRUCTION ................................................................ 344
CLOSED CIRCUIT TV ..............................................................506 CORE .................................................................................. 442
CLSM..........................................................................................79 CRADLES ............................................................................ 405
COARSE AGGREGATE .............................................................46 CURB................................................................................... 371
COAT FLUSH ...........................................................................342 CURB................................................................................... 369
PAINT ..................................................................................207 CURING MATERIALS............................................................77
PRIME .................................................................................328 DRIVEWAY.................................................................. 369, 372
TACK .................................................... 328, 337, 340, 343-344 FINISHES ............................................................................ 354
COATED CHAIN LINK PVC......................................................135 FLOATING ........................................................................... 334
PRODUCTS PIPELINES......................................................400 FORMS................................................................................ 345
COATING..................................................................................250 GUTTER ...................................................................... 369, 372
ACRYLIC .............................................................................217 INTERSECTION .......................................................... 369, 372
ALUMINUM PLATE PIPE.....................................................166 JOINT .......................................................................... 351, 370
BITUMINOUS ......................................................................161 LINING................................................................................. 161
CORRUGATED PIPE ..........................................................160 MANHOLES......................................................................... 264
PIPE ....................................................................................217 MIXED ...................................................................................73
PROTECTIVE ......................................................................207 PAVEMENT ......................................................................... 332
PVC .....................................................................................218 PAVEMENT REMOVAL ....................................................... 496
REPAIR ....................................................................... 216, 218 PAVING. .............................................................................. 161
STEEL MICROTUNNELING PIPE .......................................184 PERVIOUS .................................................................... 63, 374
STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PLATE ARCH ..........................166 PILES .................................................................................. 126
STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATE ARCH..................................163 PIPE CURING...................................................................... 140
STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATE PIPE ...................................163 PIPE GASKET ..................................................................... 191
TESTING .............................................................................218 PIPE INSPECTION.............................................................. 140
URETHANE .........................................................................217 PLACEMENT ....................................................................... 454
ZINC ....................................................................................217 PLACING ..................................................................... 286, 349
COFFERDAM ...........................................................................276 PRESSURE PIPE ........................................................ 201, 426
COLD MILLING................................................................. 307, 500 PRESTRESSED .................................................................. 360
COLLAR JOINT ........................................................................408 RECLAIMED .....................................................................68-69
COLLATERAL WORK.................................................................12 REINFORCEMENT................................................................73
COLORED CONCRETE ..................................................... 58, 373 RESURFACING. .................................................................. 455
COMBINED AGGREGATE GRADING.................................. 56, 70 SAMPLE ................................................................................63
COMMENCEMENT WORK.........................................................30 SAND.....................................................................................47
COMMERCIAL BLAST CLEAN.................................................475 SPECIAL EXPOSURE ...........................................................61
COMMERCIAL FERTILIZER.....................................................610 STAMPED ........................................................................... 373
COMPACTED BACKFILL .........................................................451 STANDARD ......................................................................... 556
FILL......................................................................................281 STONE ................................................................................ 286
COMPACTING BASE ...............................................................288 STRENGTH COMPRESSIVE ................................................62
BORROW ............................................................................280 TAMPING ............................................................................ 334
LCB......................................................................................299 UNDER WATER .................................................................. 354
COMPACTION FILL..................................................................279 WALK .......................................................................... 369, 372
RELATIVE ...........................................................................287 CONDITION CHANGED .............................................................13
REQUIREMENTS .........................................................451-452 CONDITIONING SOIL .............................................................. 610
TEST....................................................................................219 TOPSOIL ............................................................................. 615
COMPLETION ............................................................................21 CONDUCTOR................................................... 558, 567, 599, 614
TIME ......................................................................................31 DIRECT ............................................................................... 604
WORK ...................................................................................21 TERMINATION .................................................................... 604
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE ..................................................585 WIRING ....................................................................... 572, 602
COMPONENT Z JOINT ............................................................192 CONDUIT.................................................................. 597, 602, 614
COMPOSITION ARHM .............................................................113 ABANDONMENT ................................................................. 599
POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE .......................................120 ELECTRICAL............................................................... 554, 567
RPME ....................................................................................93 METALLIC ................................................................... 554, 598
TRMAC ................................................................................121 NON-METALLIC .......................................................... 554, 598
COMPOUND CURING ................................................................77 TOLERANCE ....................................................................... 460
SEALING .............................................................................559 CONES ..................................................................................... 546
COMPRESSION DISC..............................................................180 CONFINED SPACE ...............................................................28-29
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH .....................................................62 CONNECTING BAND ............................................................... 165
STRENGTH TEST ...............................................................180 CONNECTION ANGLE ............................................................. 381
CONCRETE................................................................................58 BOLTED ....................................................................... 380-381
ACCESS RAMP ........................................................... 369, 372 PIN....................................................................................... 381
ADVERSE WEATHER .........................................................353 STEEL ................................................................................. 380
AGITATOR.............................................................................72 CONNECTIONS HD POLY PIPE .............................................. 172
AIR-PLACED ................................................................. 47, 357 CONNECTOR ........................................................................... 577
ALLEY.......................................................................... 369, 372 CASE ................................................................................... 559
ASPHALT .........................................46, 97, 100, 109, 328, 454 SPLICE ........................................................................ 559, 602
BASE LEAN ...........................................................................56 CONSISTENCY CONCRETE .....................................................71
BLOCK........................................................................... 84, 367 CONSOLIDATING .................................................................... 350
BOX .....................................................................................447 CONSTRUCTION CONCRETE ................................................ 344
CLASS ...................................................................................58 FENCE................................................................................. 388
JOINT .......................................................................... 291, 335

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Index 635

CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING ................................................... 602 CRASHWORTHINESS............................................................. 545

MASONRY .................................................................. 344, 367 CREOSOTE ............................................................................. 123
MATERIAL ............................................................................ 43 CRM .................................................................................. 111-113
METAL ................................................................................ 375 CRUMB RUBBER..................................................................... 110
METHODS........................................................................... 273 CRUSHED AGGREGATE ..................................................... 51-52
SCHEDULE ........................................................................... 30 ROCK .................................................................................... 43
TIMBER....................................................................... 390, 395 CRUSHING ................................................................................ 13
CONTACTOR........................................................................... 566 CSEP ......................................................................................... 28
CONTENTS..................................................................................V CSLM ADMIXTURE............................................................... 79-80
CONTINUOUS-FLOW MIXER ...................................321, 326, 328 CSP JACKING ......................................................................... 459
CONTRACT ASSIGNMENT ....................................................... 14 CSPB ....................................................................................... 294
AWARD................................................................................. 11 CURB CONCRETE ........................................................... 369-371
BOND .................................................................................... 11 DRAIN ................................................................................. 369
DOCUMENTS ....................................................................... 15 EXPANSION JOINT ............................................................ 370
TERMINATION................................................................. 33-34 FORM.................................................................................. 369
UNIT PRICE .......................................................................... 37 MARKING.....................................................................256, 487
CONTRACTOR ADVERTISING ................................................. 18 REMOVAL........................................................................... 496
CHANGES............................................................................. 13 CURED-IN-PLACE LINER........................................................ 511
EQUIPMENT ......................................................................... 12 CURING ................................................................................... 291
FACILITY............................................................................... 12 AIR-PLACED CONCRETE .................................................. 359
PERMIT................................................................................. 12 BRICK MASONRY .............................................................. 369
REPORT ............................................................................... 39 CERTIFICATION ................................................................... 78
REPRESENTATIVE .............................................................. 15 COMPOUND .................................................................... 77-78
RESPONSIBILITIES.............................................................. 24 CONCRETE PIPE ............................................................... 140
WORK ................................................................................... 39 CURING .............................................................................. 355
CONTRACTORS PREPARATION............................................ 499 LCB ..................................................................................... 299
CONTROL DUST ....................................................................... 19 MASONRY .......................................................................... 368
EROSION.................................................................... 284, 619 MEMBRANE.......................................................................... 77
JOINT .................................................................................. 371 PCC PAVEMENT ................................................................ 336
NOISE ................................................................................... 19 PIPE .................................................................................... 440
OF MATERIALS .................................................................... 22 PRCB .................................................................................. 268
PHOTOELECTRIC .............................................................. 565 CUTOFF PILE .......................................................................... 393
POLLUTION ..................................................................... 19-21 CUTTING ................................................................................. 611
STEERING .......................................................................... 468 TORCH................................................................................ 384
TRAFFIC ..................................................................... 322, 342 CWA BALLAST ........................................................................ 562
WORK ................................................................................... 12
CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL ........................... 79
CONTROLLER ................................................................. 572, 603 D
CABINET..................................................................... 567, 603
SLAB ................................................................................... 603 DAILY REPORT ......................................................................... 39
UNIT .................................................................................... 614 DAM DEBRIS ........................................................................... 280
CONVENIENCE PUBLIC.................................................. 322, 342 DAMAGE ALCLAD COATING .................................................. 166
RECEPTACLE..................................................................... 576 ALUMINIZING ..................................................................... 160
CONVERSION CHROMATE .................................................... 217 GALVANIZING .................................................................... 160
CONVEYING FLUIDS .............................................................. 224 LIQUIDATED ......................................................................... 34
COOPERATION ................................................................. 12, 499 PVC COATING.................................................................... 218
COPPER BEARING STRUCTURAL STEEL ............................ 128 ZINC COATING................................................................... 217
NAPTHENATE .................................................................... 123 DATA BRIDGES....................................................................... 577
PIPE .................................................................................... 613 DEBRIS DAM ........................................................................... 280
PIPELINE ............................................................................ 621 REMOVAL............................................................................. 19
CORE CONCRETE .................................................................. 442 DECHLORINATION AND FLUSHING ...................................... 438
STRENGTH......................................................................... 141 DEFAULT TERMINATION.......................................................... 33
CORPORATION STOPS .......................................................... 248 DEFINITIONS............................................................................... 1
CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENTS............................................... 226 DEFLECTION....................................................................419, 421
CORRUGATED ALUMINUM ARCH AND PIPE ................. 161-171 DEFORMED BAR..................................................................... 267
PIPE. ................................................................................... 412 HDPE .................................................................................. 514
STEEL PIPE........................................................................ 157 WIRE................................................................................... 267
COST ESTABLISHING............................................................... 38 DELAY ....................................................................................... 31
LABOR .................................................................................. 38 NOTICE................................................................................. 32
MATERIAL ............................................................................ 38 PAYMENT ............................................................................. 32
COUPLING BAND .................................................................... 158 UTILITIES............................................................................ 499
MANHOLE........................................................................... 192 DENSITY ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT ....................... 331
COURSE BASE........................................................................ 454 FIELD .................................................................................. 219
FINISH................................................................................. 454 MAXIMUM ........................................................................... 219
COVER BOLTS ........................................................................ 228 DEPOSITING ........................................................................... 350
COVER SOIL............................................................................ 465 DESCRIPTION SURFACE ....................................................... 465
COVERAGE SPRINKLER ........................................................ 625 DETECTOR.............................................................................. 589
COVERING SIGNS .................................................................. 550 LOOP .................................................................................. 502
CRACK RESISTANCE ............................................................. 173 VEHICLE ............................................................................. 606
CRACKING PIPE ..................................................................... 173 DETOURS.................................................................................. 13
CRACKS .................................................................................. 179 DEWATERING ................................................................... 21, 403
VCP..................................................................................... 154 SEWER ............................................................................... 508

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
636 Index

DEWATERING TUNNEL ..........................................................461 EARTHWORK PAYMENT ........................................................ 282

DIAGRAM WIRING ...................................................................603 EAS ................................................................................... 320-324
DIAMETER PIPE ...............................................................182-183 EDGE PLANING ....................................................................... 380
DIAPHRAGM VALVES .............................................................241 ELASTOMERIC GASKET JOINTS ........................................... 170
DIMENSIONS CCFRPM MICROTUNNELING PIPE .................180 SEALANT ..............................................................................75
CCFRPM PIPE ....................................................................176 SEALING ............................................................................. 179
PLASTIC LINER ..................................................................209 ELECTRIC VAULTS ................................................................. 601
PRCB...................................................................................269 ELECTRICAL CONDUIT................................................... 554, 567
STEEL MICROTUNNELING PIPE .......................................183 GROUNDING....................................................................... 600
TIMBER PILES ....................................................................125 MATERIAL ........................................................................... 556
VITRIFIED CLAY MICROTUNNELING PIPE .......................178 WIRE ................................................................................... 558
DIRECT CONDUCTOR.............................................................604 WIRING ............................................................................... 599
WIRE ........................................................................... 571, 604 ELECTROLIER ......................................................................... 567
DIRECTIONAL LOUVER .................................................. 582, 605 ELEVATION SPRINKLER......................................................... 622
DISC COMPRESSION..............................................................180 ELIMINATED ITEM .....................................................................37
DISINFECTION PIPE................................................................437 EMERGENCY PLAN...................................................................20
DISINTEGRATED GRANITE ......................................................53 EMULSIFIED ASPHALT ........................................ 90-92, 294, 309
DISPOSAL MILLING.................................................................502 EMULSION RUBBERIZED POLYMER MODIFIED ............... 93, 96
DISPUTED WORK......................................................................14 EMULSION-AGGREGATE SLURRY ......................... 320, 323-324
DISTORTING STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PLATE ARCH ........166 ENCLOSURE DUCT ................................................................. 363
STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PLATE PIPE ............................166 END FINISH CORRUGATED PIPE .......................................... 165
STRUCTURAL STEEL PIPE................................................163 SEALS ................................................................. 510, 526, 531
DISTRIBUTING EQUIPMENT............................................... 87, 89 SQUARENESS PIPE ............................................ 178, 181-183
DISTRIBUTION ARHM .............................................................340 TREATMENTS..................................................................... 547
POROUS PAVEMENT .........................................................343 ENGINEER AUTHORITY............................................................15
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE..............................................362 ENGINEERING FABRIC ........................................................... 252
DISTRIBUTION TRMAC ....................................................343-344 ENTRANCE DRIVEWAY .......................................................... 369
D-LOAD TEST ..........................................................................147 EPOXY ..................................................................................... 493
DOOR CABINET.......................................................................575 ADHESIVE........................................................... 260, 262, 493
DOUBLE CHECK BACKFLOW ASSEMBLIES .........................244 ADHESIVE MIXING ............................................................. 262
DOUBLE-BALL EXPANSION JOINTS ......................................246 ADHESIVE REPAIR ............................................................ 153
DOUGLAS FIR..........................................................................122 ADHESIVE REQUIREMENT................................................ 263
DOWNDRAIN CORRUGATED ALUMINUM PIPE.....................165 LINER ........................................................................... 538-539
STEEL CORRUGATED PIPE ..............................................162 MASTIC ............................................................................... 540
DRAIN CURB............................................................................369 EQUIPMENT AIR-PLACED CONCRETE.................................. 358
TRENCH ..............................................................................283 ASPHALT-RUBBER............................................................. 115
DRAINAGE GEOTEXTILE ........................................................283 BLENDER ............................................................................ 115
OUTLET...............................................................................369 CONTRACTOR......................................................................12
DRAWINGS SHOP ............................................................. 17, 375 DISTRIBUTING................................................................ 87, 89
WORKING .............................................................................16 GROUTING.......................................................................... 532
DRILLED CORES .......................................................................63 HYDRO-CLEANING............................................................. 506
HOLE ...................................................................................378 JACKING ............................................................................. 467
PILE .....................................................................................392 PILE DRIVING ..................................................................... 391
DRILLING MATERIAL...............................................................392 RENTAL.................................................................................38
WATER................................................................................392 SPRINKLER......................................................................... 614
DRIVEN PILE............................................................................392 STORAGE .............................................................................19
DRIVEWAY CONCRETE.................................................. 369, 372 STRUCTURAL STEEL......................................................... 376
ENTRANCE .........................................................................369 TRAFFIC STRIPING ............................................................ 489
REMOVAL ...........................................................................496 EROSION CONTROL ....................................................... 284, 619
DRIVING CONCRETE PILES ...................................................127 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT....................................... 286
PILE ............................................................................. 390, 392 ESTABLISHING COST ...............................................................38
DROP HAMMER.......................................................................391 EXCAVATION BASIN ............................................................... 281
DRUM MIXER .............................................................................72 BORROW ............................................................................ 280
DRUMS.....................................................................................546 CHANNEL............................................................................ 282
DRY SHAKE .............................................................................374 MATERIAL ........................................................................... 275
DRYER-DRUM METHOD .........................................................107 STRUCTURE....................................................................... 275
DUCT ENCLOSURE .................................................................363 SURPLUS ............................................................................ 274
DUCTILE IRON CASTING ........................................................129 TRENCH ...................................................................... 439, 620
IRON CASTING ACCEPTANCE ..........................................132 TUNNEL .............................................................................. 461
IRON CASTING MATERIAL ................................................130 UNCLASSIFIED................................................................... 273
IRON PIPE................................................................... 193, 422 EXCESSIVE BLASTING ........................................................... 274
DUROMETER ...........................................................................112 EXFILTRATION WATER .......................................................... 414
DUST CONTROL........................................................................19 EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS.................................................... 495
ROCK .................................................................... 43, 340, 343 TRAFFIC SIGNS.................................................................. 550
EXPANSION ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 382
JOINTS .......................................................................... 75, 246
E PLATE BRONZE CASTING ................................................. 132
EXPLOSIVES .............................................................................28
EARTHWORK...........................................................................280 EXPOSURE SPECIAL ................................................................61
CHANNEL............................................................................282 EXTENSION LOCKING ...................................... 209-210, 540-541
LANDSCAPING ...................................................................614 PILE..................................................................................... 393
MEASUREMENT .................................................................275 TIME .................................................................................31-32

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Index 637

EXTENSIVE ROCK .................................................................. 440 FIRE HYDRANTS..................................................................... 242

EXTRA WORK ..................................................................... 13, 38 FITTING PLASTIC.................................................................... 404
EXTRUDED FITTINGS............................................................. 171 FITTINGS ..........................................................................397, 612
PIPE ............................................................................ 171, 184 ANNULAR HD POLY PIPE.................................................. 172
BLOW MOLDED.................................................................. 171
CHAIN LINK FENCE ........................................................... 135
F EXTRUDED......................................................................... 171
T-BRANCH .......................................................................... 155
FABRIC CHAIN LINK ............................................................... 135 VCP..................................................................................... 155
ENGINEERING ................................................................... 252 VITRIFIED CLAY MICROTUNNELING PIPE....................... 179
GEOSYNTHETIC ................................................................ 253 FIXTURE LIGHTING ................................................................ 576
PAVEMENT......................................................................... 336 FLAG TREES ........................................................................... 547
SUBGRADE ........................................................................ 285 FLANGE DRILLING.................................................................. 225
TIE CHAIN LINK.................................................................. 135 FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTORS......................................... 244
TUBES ................................................................................ 529 IN-LINE SENSOR................................................................ 249
FABRICATION CORRUGATED ALUMINUM ARCH................. 165 JOINTS ............................................................................... 432
CORRUGATED ALUMINUM PIPE ...................................... 165 FLAP PLASTIC LINER ............................................................. 210
CORRUGATED ARCH ........................................................ 158 FLASHING DIRECTIONAL BARS ............................................ 548
METAL ................................................................................ 375 FLATTED PLANT ..................................................................... 611
METAL RAILING ................................................................. 387 FLATTENING PIPE .................................................................. 173
PRCB .................................................................................. 267 FLEXIBLE LINER .......................................................482, 484-485
FACILITY AGENCY.................................................................... 39 FLOATING CONCRETE........................................................... 334
BATHHOUSE ........................................................................ 41 FLOOD LIGHTING ..................................................................... 29
CONTRACTOR ..................................................................... 12 FLUSH COAT....................................................................313, 342
REMOVAL ............................................................................. 41 FLUSHING AND DECHLORINATION ...................................... 438
FACING BRICK .......................................................................... 84 TESTING............................................................................ 624
FALSEWORK........................................................................... 347 FLY ASH ...............................................................67, 79, 264, 267
PLAN ................................................................................... 376 FOG SEAL ........................................................294, 298, 306, 313
FEE PATENT ............................................................................. 27 FOOTING ................................................................................. 389
FENCE BRACES...................................................................... 134 FORGING MILD STEEL ........................................................... 129
CHAIN LINK ................................................................ 133, 388 FORM METAL .......................................................................... 333
CONSTRUCTION................................................................ 388 PCC PAVEMENT ................................................................ 332
POST .................................................................................. 134 PRCB .................................................................................. 268
RAILS .................................................................................. 134 SLIP .................................................................................... 370
SECURITY .......................................................................... 390 WOODEN............................................................................ 333
FERTILIZER COMMERCIAL .................................................... 610 FORMS CURB ......................................................................... 369
FERTILIZING............................................................................ 615 FORMWORK............................................................................ 345
SOIL .................................................................................... 610 FOUNDATION INSPECTION ................................................... 277
FIBER OPTIC ................................................................... 572, 605 MATERIAL .......................................................................... 276
REINFORCEMENT ............................................................... 74 SIGNAL ............................................................................... 595
SYNTHETIC .......................................................................... 74 FRACTIONATION ...................................................................... 98
FIBERGLASS PRESSURE PIPE ..................................... 204, 431 FRACTURES............................................................................ 179
STANDARD......................................................................... 553 FRAMING TIMBER................................................................... 396
FIELD DENSITY....................................................................... 219 FRONT SCREEN ..................................................................... 587
JOINT .................................................................................. 484 FRPM PIPE .............................................................................. 413
JOINT PIPE......................................................................... 483 FULL DEPTH CHIPS................................................................ 155
LABORATORY ................................................................. 39-40 WRAP SYSTEM.................................................................. 535
OFFICE ............................................................................ 39-40 FULL-DEPTH MILLING. ........................................................... 502
RIVET.................................................................................. 378 FUSE CARTRIDGE .................................................................. 577
FILL .......................................................................................... 283 FUSED SPLICE........................................................................ 560
COMPACTED...................................................................... 281
COMPACTION .................................................................... 279
MATERIAL .......................................................................... 278 G
PAYMENT ........................................................................... 279
PLACING............................................................................. 279 GALVANIZED CHAIN LINK FABRIC ........................................ 135
PREPARATION................................................................... 278 PIPE .................................................................................... 554
UNCLASSIFIED .................................................................. 278 SURFACE ........................................................................... 476
FILLED CABLE......................................................................... 604 SURFACE PAINTING......................................................... 478
FILLER MINERAL....................................................................... 98 GALVANIZING ......................................................................... 215
POLYSTYRENE .................................................................... 75 DAMAGE............................................................................. 160
PREMOLDED....................................................................... 75 PAINTING ........................................................................... 608
FINAL CURING ........................................................................ 297 WORKMANSHIP ................................................................. 216
PAYMENT ............................................................................. 36 GARDEN VALVE...................................................................... 613
FINISH COURSE ..................................................................... 454 GASKET CONCRETE PIPE..................................................... 191
GRADING............................................................................ 615 JOINT........................................................................... 407-408
SURFACE ........................................................................... 355 PIPE .................................................................................... 191
FINISHED PIPE........................................................................ 173 RUBBER ............................................................................. 613
FINISHING DUCTILE IRON CASTING..................................... 130 THERMOPLASTIC PIPE ..................................................... 192
GRAY IRON CASTING........................................................ 130 GATE INSTALLATION ............................................................. 389
PCC PAVEMENT ................................................................ 334 VALVE................................................................................. 613
PIPE .................................................................................... 440 GAUGE TEST .......................................................................... 541
FINISHING-MACHINE .............................................................. 334 GEAR ACTUATORS ................................................................ 235

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
638 Index

GENERAL PROVISIONS..............................................................1
GEOSYNTHETIC FABRIC........................................................253 H
GEOTEXTILE ...........................................................................284
HAND MIXING ............................................................................73
DRAINAGE ..........................................................................283
HANDLING PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ............................... 367
MEASUREMENT ..........................................................284-285
HARNESS BOLTS .................................................................... 225
PAYMENT.....................................................................284-285
HAUL ROUTE.............................................................................13
PLACEMENT ................................................................284-285
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES ....................................................28
SEPARATION......................................................................285
HD POLY PIPE FITTINGS........................................................ 172
GLASS BEAD ...........................................................................256
POLY SOLID WALL PRESSURE PIPE ............................... 204
FIBER TUBES .....................................................................529
HDPE........................................................................................ 509
GRADATION AGGREGATE .......................................................47
DEFORMED ........................................................................ 514
COMBINED AGGREGATE ....................................................56
LINER .................................................................................. 523
CRM.....................................................................................112
PIPE ............................................................................ 204, 413
LIMIT....................................................................................609
PRESSURE PIPE ................................................................ 428
SAND.....................................................................................47
RE-FORMED ....................................................................... 514
GRADE .......................................................................................18
TESTING ............................................................................. 509
AND ALIGNMENT................................................................444
TUBING ............................................................................... 247
LUMBER ..............................................................................122
HEAD SIGNAL.......................................................................... 605
MARKING PLYWOOD .........................................................122
HEADER........................................................................... 612, 615
GRADING ARHM......................................................................113
PCC PAVEMENT................................................................. 332
CHANNEL............................................................................283
HEATING TANK ASPHALT ...................................................... 115
COMBINED AGGREGATE ....................................................70
HELICAL SEAM........................................................................ 159
CRUSHED AGGREGATE......................................................50
HEXAGON HEADS................................................................... 227
DISINTEGRATED GRANITE .................................................53
HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE ........................................... 247
FINISH .................................................................................615
LEVEL WARNING DEVICES............................................... 547
MISCELLANEOUS BASE ......................................................51
PRESSURE SODIUM .......................................................... 560
POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE .......................................120
HIGH-DENSITY POLY PIPE..................................................... 428
PROCESSED MISCELLANEOUS .........................................52
STRENGTH BOLT ............................................................... 129
PULVERIZED MISCELLANEOUS BASE ...............................54
STRENGTH RIVET.............................................................. 129
ROADWAY ..........................................................................287
STRENGTH STEEL ............................................................. 128
SLURRY SEAL ......................................................................49
HIGH-STRENGTH STEEL CASTING ....................................... 129
STONE ..................................................................................48
HOLE BOLT.............................................................................. 377
SUBBASE..............................................................................52
DRILLED.............................................................................. 378
TRMAC ................................................................................121
PILE..................................................................................... 392
GRANITE DISINTEGRATED ......................................................53
RIVET .................................................................................. 377
GRASS .....................................................................................611
HOT-DIP PROCESS................................................................. 217
GRAVEL .....................................................................................45
HOT-MELT BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE...................................... 263
GRAVITY PIPE ................................................................. 136, 405
BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE REQUIREMENT......................... 263
PIPE MEASUREMENT ........................................................455
HOT-POURED SEALANT...........................................................76
IRON CASTING ...................................................................129
HOUSING ................................................................................. 588
IRON CASTING TENSILE ACCEPTANCE ..........................132
HRWRA ......................................................................................66
GRIT BLASTING.......................................................................475
HVEEM ..................................................................................... 100
GROOVED COUPLINGS..........................................................245
DESIGN METHOD.................................................................99
GROUND ROD .........................................................................604
HYDRANTS ...................................................................... 242, 432
WIRE ...................................................................................359
HYDRATED CEMENT ................................................................69
GROUNDING............................................................................556
HYDRATION STABILIZING ADMIXTURE...................................66
BONDING ............................................................................600
HYDRAULIC CEMENT ...............................................................64
ELECTRICAL.......................................................................600
CONTINUOUS-FLOW MIXER ............................................. 321
GROUNDWATER .....................................................................403
HYDRO-CLEANING EQUIPMENT............................................ 506
GROUT .......................................................................................85
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TEST.................. 139, 180, 433, 435
CEMENTITIOUS ..................................................................538
TEST ................................................................................... 141
NON-MASONRY....................................................................80
NON-SHRINK ........................................................................80
QUICK-SETTING ...................................................................80
READY-MIXED ......................................................................85
I
SITE-MIXED ..........................................................................85 IDENTIFICATION CABLE ......................................................... 604
GROUTING....................................................................... 350, 365 MARKS PVC PLASTIC PIPE ............................................... 169
ANNULAR.................................................... 469, 510, 513, 529 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PLATE ARCH .......................... 166
EQUIPMENT........................................................................532 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PLATE PIPE ............................ 166
TESTING .............................................................................532 STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATE ARCH.................................. 163
VOID ....................................................................................463 STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATE PIPE ................................... 163
GRUBBING....................................................................... 273, 280 TARGET .............................................................................. 564
GUARANTEE PERIOD ...............................................................35 IMPERFECTIONS VITRIFIED CLAY MICROTUNNELING PIPE ....... 179
WORK ...................................................................................21 IMPORTED BACKFILL ............................................................. 271
GUARDRAIL PAINTING ...........................................................478 BORROW ............................................................................ 280
GUIDANCE EQUIPMENT .........................................................468 IMPROVEMENT USE .................................................................32
GUNITE ....................................................................................357 INDUCTIVE LOOP............................................................ 590, 606
GUTTER CONCRETE ...................................................... 369, 372 INFILTRATION CAPACITY....................................................... 221
REMOVAL ...........................................................................496 CAPACITY TEST................................................................. 221
GUYING....................................................................................617 ELIMINATION ...................................................................... 537
PLANT .................................................................................616 RATE ................................................................................... 343
WATER........................................................................ 221, 415

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Index 639

INJECTION PRESSURE .......................................................... 532 JOINT FIELD............................................................................ 484

PROCEDURE...................................................................... 532 FILLER .................................................................................. 75
SEALED JOINTS................................................................. 170 GASKET....................................................................... 407-408
INJECTION-SEALED PIPE ...................................................... 413 INTEGRITY ......................................................................... 173
IN-PLACE MIXING ................................................................... 290 LINER...........................................................................483, 541
INSPECTION.............................................................................. 15 PAVEMENT..................................................................332, 335
AGENCY ............................................................................... 22 PIPE .................................................................................... 187
CCTV................................................................................... 535 PIPE LINER......................................................................... 518
CONCRETE PIPE ............................................................... 140 PLASTIC ............................................................................. 371
FOUNDATION..................................................................... 277 POLYURETHANE. .............................................................. 189
OF REPAIR ......................................................................... 157 PRCB .................................................................................. 267
PIPE .................................................................................... 505 RCP..................................................................................... 145
PIPELINE ............................................................................ 508 REINFORCEMENT ............................................................. 485
RCP..................................................................................... 150 SEALANT ................................................................. 75-76, 351
REQUIREMENTS.................................................................. 22 SHEAR RING ...................................................................... 188
SIGNAL ............................................................................... 608 SHOP-WELDED.................................................................. 210
STRUCTURAL STEEL ........................................................ 376 JOINT SILT-TIGHT................................................................... 172
TELEVISION ....................................................................... 507 SLIP-ON .............................................................................. 411
INSTALLATION GATE ............................................................. 389 STEEL................................................................................. 380
LINER.................................................................................. 479 SYNTHETIC RUBBER ........................................................ 187
MANHOLE COUPLING ....................................................... 193 TEST ................................................................................... 180
PIPE JOINT......................................................................... 187 TRANSVERSE EXPANSION............................................... 335
SPRINKLER ........................................................................ 622 VCP..................................................................................... 187
INSTALLED LINER SYSTEMS................................................. 541 WATER-TIGHT ................................................................... 172
INSTITUTIONS............................................................................. 8 WEAKENED-PLANE ....................................................335, 371
INSULATION SPLICE .............................................................. 555 Z .......................................................................................... 192
INSURANCE .............................................................................. 25 JOINTS ARHM ......................................................................... 340
INTEGRAL-LOCKING PVC LINER........................................... 537 BELL ................................................................................... 171
INTEGRITY JOINT ................................................................... 173 CCFRPM MICROTUNNELING PIPE ................................... 181
INTERCONNECT ..................................................................... 604 CCFRPM PIPE .................................................................... 176
CABLE................................................................................. 571 ELASTOMERIC GASKET ................................................... 170
INTERIOR LINING.................................................................... 250 INJECTION SEALED .......................................................... 170
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT .......................................................... 469 RCP MICROTUNNELING.................................................... 183
INTERNAL BALLAST ............................................................... 562 SOLVENT CEMENT............................................................ 170
INTERSECTION....................................................................... 496 SPIGOT............................................................................... 171
CONCRETE ................................................................ 369, 372 STEEL MICROTUNNELING PIPE....................................... 184
INVOICES .................................................................................. 39 VITRIFIED CLAY MICROTUNNELING PIPE....................... 179
IRON PIPE ............................................................................... 411 VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE........................................................ 155
PIPE AND FITTINGS .......................................................... 193 JUNCTION PIPE ...................................................................... 440
IRRIGATION............................................................................. 614
MATERIAL .................................................................. 609, 612
PIPE .................................................................................... 612 L
PIPELINE ............................................................................ 620
SYSTEM.............................................................................. 620 LABEL ...................................................................................... 576
ISOLATED ROCK .................................................................... 439 LABOR COST ............................................................................ 38
ITEM ELIMINATED..................................................................... 37 HOURS ................................................................................. 25
NON-LOCAL.......................................................................... 23 LAW ...................................................................................... 25
OTHER.................................................................................. 38 LABORATORY FIELD ........................................................... 39-40
TESTING SYNTHETIC RUBBER SEALING........................ 188
LAG-TYPE REGULATOR......................................................... 563
J LAMP BALLAST ....................................................................... 562
IDENTIFICATION ................................................................ 602
JACKET WIRE ......................................................................... 572 SODIUM .............................................................................. 564
JACKING CSP.......................................................................... 459 LANDSCAPE MATERIAL ......................................................... 609
EQUIPMENT ....................................................................... 467 LANDSCAPING........................................................................ 614
OPERATION ....................................................................... 458 EARTHWORK ..................................................................... 614
PIPE .................................................................................... 458 WATERING ......................................................................... 619
RCP..................................................................................... 458 LANE WIDTHS......................................................................... 549
STEEL CASING .................................................................. 459 LATEX EAS.............................................................................. 320
JETTED BACKFILL .................................................................. 452 LAW ........................................................................................... 24
JMF ............................................................................................ 99 LABOR .................................................................................. 25
JOB MIX FORMULA ........................................................... 99, 120 LAWN PLANTING .................................................................... 617
TRAILER ............................................................................... 40 LAYDOWN PAVEMENT FABRIC............................................. 337
JOINING PVC PLASTIC PIPE.................................................. 170 LAYOUT MARKING.................................................................. 488
JOINT ........................................................................ 343-344, 359 PLANT................................................................................. 616
ABUTTING .......................................................................... 380 TRAFFIC STRIPING ........................................................... 488
CEMENT ............................................................................. 411 LCB .................................................................................... 56, 298
CLAY PIPE.......................................................................... 187 ACCEPTANCE .................................................................... 299
COLLAR .............................................................................. 408 COMPACTING .................................................................... 299
CONSTRUCTION................................................................ 335 CURING .............................................................................. 299
CONTROL ........................................................................... 371 MATERIAL .......................................................................... 299
EXPANSION.................................................................. 75, 370 MEASUREMENT................................................................. 299

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
640 Index

LCB PAYMENT.........................................................................300 LUMINAIRES ............................................................ 560, 593, 602

PLACEMENT ................................................................298-299 LUMP SUM .................................................................................35
SHAPING.............................................................................299
SPREADING........................................................................299
SUBGRADE.........................................................................298 M
LEAD-TYPE. .............................................................................563
LEAKAGE ALLOWABLE...........................................................434 MACHINE FINISHING .............................................................. 334
TEST....................................................................................418 MILLING .............................................................................. 501
LEAN CONCRETE BASE .............................................. 56-57, 299 MIXING ..................................................................................71
LED ARROW ............................................................................585 MACHINE STRIPING................................................................ 489
SIGNAL........................................................................ 583, 588 MACHINE-MADE RCP.............................................................. 145
LENGTH CCFRPM MICROTUNNELING PIPE .........................180 MAIL CERTIFIED........................................................................25
CCFRPM PIPE ....................................................................176 MAINTENANCE WORK SITE .....................................................19
PRCB...................................................................................269 MANAGEMENT PRACTICES .....................................................20
TRENCH ..............................................................................403 MANHOLE ......................................................... 340, 264, 343-344
LEVELING BED ................................................................ 267, 446 ADJUSTMENT..................................................................... 499
LIABILITY INSURANCE..............................................................26 BRICK....................................................................................84
LIFTING HOLES .......................................................................265 CONNECTIONS................................................................... 447
LIGHTING CONSTRUCTION....................................................602 COUPLING ................................................................... 192-193
FIXTURE..............................................................................576 COVERS.............................................................................. 130
SERVICE .............................................................................602 FRAMES.............................................................................. 130
STREET....................................................... 551, 556, 592, 602 GRATES .............................................................................. 130
WIRING ...............................................................................600 LINER .................................................................................. 537
LIME STABLIZED BASE...........................................................304 PVC LINER .......................................................................... 211
LIMIT GRADATION...................................................................609 REHABILITATION ....................................................... 505, 533
LINE............................................................................................18 RIGID LINER ....................................................................... 213
NOZZLE...............................................................................622 MANUAL CONTROL VALVE .................................................... 613
LINED CONCRETE PIPE .........................................................150 MANUFACTURING CASTING .................................................. 130
RCP .....................................................................................150 DUCTILE IRON CASTING ................................................... 130
LINER APPLICATION....................................................... 485, 486 OFFSITE................................................................................40
CURED-IN-PLACE...............................................................511 PLANT ...................................................................................40
EPOXY ........................................................................ 538, 539 PVC PLASTIC PIPE ............................................................ 169
FLEXIBLE .....................................................................484-485 STEEL PILES ...................................................................... 126
HDPE...................................................................................523 MANURE .................................................................................. 610
INSTALLATION ...................................................................479 MARKER PAVEMENT ....................................... 256-257, 487, 493
JOINT .......................................................................... 483, 541 REMOVAL ........................................................................... 488
MANHOLE ...........................................................................537 MARKING ABS SOLID WALL PIPE......................................... 168
PLASTIC...................................................................... 517, 540 ABS COMPOSITE PIPE ...................................................... 169
PLASTIC...................................................................... 208, 479 ALIGNMENT ........................................................................ 488
POLYURETHANE................................................................538 ANNULAR HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE ........... 174
PROFILE .............................................................................523 CCFRPM MICROTUNNELING PIPE ................................... 182
PROPERTIES......................................................................530 CCFRPM PIPE .................................................................... 178
PROTECTION .....................................................................486 CURB........................................................................... 256, 487
PROTECTIVE ......................................................................538 LAYOUT .............................................................................. 488
PVC .....................................................................................211 NONREINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE................................ 138
REPAIRS ..................................................................... 486, 542 PAINT .................................................................................. 256
RETURN ..............................................................................482 PAVEMENT ......................................................................... 256
RIGID............................................................................484-485 PE SOLID WALL PIPE ........................................................ 175
LINING CONCRETE .................................................................161 PRCB................................................................................... 270
CORRUGATED PIPE ..........................................................160 PVC COMPOSITE PIPE ...................................................... 169
STEEL ARCH ......................................................................161 PVC PIPE LINER................................................................. 526
STEEL MICROTUNNELING PIPE .......................................184 MARKUP ....................................................................................39
SYSTEMS............................................................................537 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION .......................................... 344, 367
LIQUID ANTISTRIP POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE ............120 MATERIAL .............................................................................84
ASPHALT ..............................................................................87 REINFORCING .................................................................... 368
ASPHALT PAYMENT ............................................................90 REMOVAL ........................................................................... 496
LIQUIDATED DAMAGE ..............................................................34 UNIT ......................................................................................84
LOAD TESTING........................................................................394 MAST ARM ....................................................................... 554, 596
LOCAL BORROW.....................................................................280 MASTIC COATING. .................................................................. 161
LOCK SEAM ..................................................................... 159, 165 EPOXY ................................................................................ 540
LOCKING EXTENSION ...................................... 209-210, 540-541 PRIMER............................................................................... 540
LONGITUDINAL-FLOAT METHOD...........................................334 MATERIAL CHAIN LINK ........................................................... 134
LOOP DETECTOR ...................................................................502 ABS COMPOSITE PIPE ............................................... 167-169
INDUCTIVE.................................................................. 590, 606 ANNULAR HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE ........... 171
LOUVER DIRECTIONAL .................................................. 582, 605 ARHM .................................................................................. 110
LOW-ALLOY STEEL.................................................................128 BASE ............................................................................. 50, 287
LSPB.........................................................................................304 BATCHED..............................................................................73
LUMBER ...................................................................................122 BITUMINOUS ........................................................................86
GRADE MARKING...............................................................122 CCFRPM PIPE ............................................................ 175, 180
PAINTING ............................................................................478 CEMENTITIOUS ....................................................................66
PRESERVATIVE .................................................................123 CONCRETE PIPE................................................................ 136
TREATMENT .......................................................................123 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH .........................................79

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Index 641

MATERIAL CORRUGATED ALUMINUM PIPE......................... 163 MEASUREMENT VOLUMETRIC................................................ 95

COST .................................................................................... 38 WORK ................................................................................... 35
CSLM .................................................................................... 79 MECHANICAL CONTINUOUS-FLOW MIXER.......................... 321
DELIVERED .......................................................................... 36 JOINTS ............................................................................... 423
DRILLING ............................................................................ 392 MEGGER TEST ....................................................................... 608
DUCTILE IRON CASTING................................................... 130 MELLOWING ........................................................................... 305
EAS ..................................................................................... 320 MEMBRANE CURING ................................................................ 77
ELECTRICAL ...................................................................... 556 MESH REINFORCEMENT ......................................................... 74
EXCAVATION ..................................................................... 275 MESSAGE PLATE ................................................................... 587
FILL ..................................................................................... 278 SIGNS ................................................................................. 548
FOUNDATION..................................................................... 276 METAL FABRICATION............................................................. 375
GRAY IRON CASTING........................................................ 130 FORM.................................................................................. 333
IRRIGATION................................................................ 609, 612 MISCELLANEOUS .............................................................. 128
LANDSCAPE....................................................................... 609 RAILING .......................................................................133, 387
LCB ..................................................................................... 299 STANDARD......................................................................... 552
LEAN CONCRETE BASE...................................................... 56 WHITE................................................................................. 474
MANHOLE COUPLING ....................................................... 193 METAL-CASED CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PILES ............ 126
MASONRY ............................................................................ 84 METALIZING PROCESS.......................................................... 217
METAL RAILING ................................................................. 133 METALLIC CONDUIT........................................................554, 598
PAINT.................................................................................. 207 METER BOXES........................................................................ 247
PE SOLID WALL PIPE ........................................................ 174 METERING EQUIPMENT........................................................... 24
PERVIOUS CONCRETE ....................................................... 64 METHOD TRANSVERSE-FLOAT ............................................ 334
PIPE JOINT......................................................................... 187 METRIC........................................................................................ 9
POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE ....................................... 119 MICA .......................................................................................... 46
PORTLAND CEMENT ........................................................... 64 MICRO-CRACKING.................................................................. 297
PRCB .................................................................................. 267 MICROSURFACING EMULSION ............................................... 95
PROTECTION ....................................................................... 22 MICROTUNNELING ................................................................. 464
PROTECTIVE...................................................................... 479 PIPE .................................................................................... 180
PVC COMPOSITE PIPE...................................................... 169 PIPE TESTING VITRIFIED.................................................. 180
RCP MICROTUNNELING.................................................... 182 SYSTEM.............................................................................. 467
REAS .................................................................................... 96 MIL GAUGE TEST ................................................................... 541
ROCK .................................................................................... 43 MILD STEEL FORGING ........................................................... 129
SEAL COAT ........................................................................ 339 MILLING COLD ........................................................................ 307
SHEET CURING ................................................................... 78 DISPOSAL .......................................................................... 502
STEEL MICROTUNNELING PIPE....................................... 183 FULL-DEPTH ...................................................................... 502
STORAGE............................................................................. 19 MACHINE............................................................................ 501
STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PLATE ARCH.......................... 166 OPERATIONS ..................................................................... 503
STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PLATE PIPE ........................... 166 PROFILE ............................................................................. 502
TEST ............................................................................. 23, 219 MILL-TYPE STEEL PIPE.......................................................... 197
THERMOPLASTIC .............................................................. 257 MINERAL FILLER ...................................................................... 98
TRMAC........................................................................ 117, 121 FILLER POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE .......................... 120
UNSUITABLE ...................................................................... 273 FILLER TRMAC................................................................... 118
UNTREATED......................................................................... 50 PIGMENT ............................................................................ 374
WET .................................................................................... 274 MISCELLANEOUS BASE...................................................... 50-52
MATERIALS CONSTRUCTION.................................................. 43 BASE GRADING ................................................................... 51
CURING CONCRETE............................................................ 77 BRONZE CASTING............................................................. 132
MAXIMUM DENSITY ................................................................ 219 METAL ................................................................................ 128
MEASURE UNIT .......................................................................... 9 METAL REQUIREMENT ..................................................... 128
MEASUREMENT...................................................................... 455 STRUCTURES .................................................................... 347
AIR-PLACED CONCRETE .................................................. 360 MIX DESIGN .............................................................................. 83
ARAM .................................................................................. 343 DESIGN ARHM ................................................................... 116
ARHM.................................................................................. 340 DESIGN PERVIOUS CONCRETE......................................... 64
BORROW ............................................................................ 280 DESIGNS ............................................................................ 293
BRICK MASONRY............................................................... 369 MIXED CONCRETE ................................................................... 73
CHANNEL ........................................................................... 283 MIXER CALIBRATION ............................................................. 321
EARTHWORK ..................................................................... 275 CONTINUOUS-FLOW ..................................................321, 328
EROSION CONTROL.......................................................... 286 DRUM.................................................................................... 72
GEOTEXTILE ............................................................... 284-285 PAVING................................................................................. 72
LCB ..................................................................................... 299 STATIONARY ....................................................................... 72
LIQUID ASPHALT ................................................................. 90 TRANSIT ............................................................................... 72
MASONRY .......................................................................... 368 TRUCK .................................................................................. 72
METHOD ............................................................................... 35 MIXING ADHESIVE.................................................................. 493
PAVEMENT FABRIC........................................................... 338 CENTRAL PLANT ................................................................. 96
PAVING ASPHALT................................................................ 87 CRM ARHM......................................................................... 113
PCC..................................................................................... 336 CSLM .................................................................................... 80
POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT................... 344 EAS ..................................................................................... 321
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ............................................. 367 EPOXY ADHESIVE ............................................................. 262
QUANTITY ............................................................................ 35 HAND .................................................................................... 73
SEAL COAT ........................................................................ 339 LEAN CONCRETE BASE...................................................... 57
STONEWORK..................................................................... 286 MACHINE.............................................................................. 71
TRMAC......................................................................... 343-344 PAINT.................................................................................. 489
UNTREATED BASE ............................................................ 289 PLANT................................................................................. 327

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
642 Index

MIXING PORTLAND CEMENT ...................................................71

REAS ...................................................................................321 P
MOBILIZATION PAYMENT.........................................................36
PAINT ............................................................................... 207, 488
MODIFIED PAVING ASPHALT .................................................310
ASPHALT ............................................................................ 110
MOISTURE SOIL ......................................................................440
COAT................................................................................... 207
MONUMENT SURVEY .............................................................470
MARKING ............................................................................ 256
MORTAR ........................................................................ 58, 78, 85
MATERIAL ........................................................................... 207
BONDING ............................................................................153
MIXING ................................................................................ 489
CEMENT................................................................................78
STRIPING............................................................................ 256
SAND.....................................................................................79
SYSTEM .............................................................................. 207
MOUNTING SIGNAL.................................................................605
TESTING ............................................................................. 207
MOVING AVERAGE .................................................................223
TRAFFIC LINE..................................................................... 256
MSE ............................................................................................95
ZINC-DUST.......................................................................... 217
MTBM ............................................................................... 464, 467
PAINTING......................................................................... 250, 471
MULCH .....................................................................................611
GALVANIZING..................................................................... 608
MULCHING ...............................................................................619
STEEL ................................................................................. 472
MULTIPLE CIRCUIT .................................................................558
STRUCTURAL STEEL......................................................... 476
TIMBER ............................................................................... 397
N WOOD ................................................................................. 476
PALEONTOLOGICAL DISCOVERIES ........................................32
NEAR-WHITE ...........................................................................475 PAM.......................................................................................... 153
NESTABLE CORRUGATED PIPE ............................................161 PARAMETERS MANHOLE COUPLING ................................... 192
NOISE CONTROL ......................................................................19 PARTIAL PAYMENT...................................................................36
NOMINAL DIAMETER ..............................................................184 PARTIAL-WIDTH CONSTRUCTION......................................... 291
NON-BEVELED PIPE ...............................................................410 PATENT FEE..............................................................................27
NON-MASONRY GROUT ...........................................................80 PATTERN STAMPED CONCRETE .......................................... 373
NON-METALLIC CONDUIT .............................................. 554, 598 PAVEMENT ASPHALT ...............................................................98
NON-PLASTIC CEMENT ............................................................68 ASPHALT CONCRETE........................................................ 328
PORTLAND CEMENT............................................................69 ASPHALT CONCRETE POROUS ....................................... 343
NON-REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKER ..............................258 CONCRETE......................................................................... 332
PAVEMENT MARKER CERAMIC ........................................258 CONCRETE REMOVAL....................................................... 496
PAVEMENT MARKER PLASTIC .........................................258 FABRIC................................................................................ 336
PAVEMENT MARKER REQUIREMENT ..............................258 FABRIC CERTIFICATE COMPLIANCE ............................... 252
NON-REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE....................................406 FABRIC LAYDOWN............................................................. 337
NONREINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE.....................................136 FABRIC MEASUREMENT ................................................... 338
CONCRETE PIPE MARKING ..............................................138 FABRIC PAYMENT.............................................................. 339
NON-SHRINK GROUT................................................................80 FABRIC PLACEMENT ......................................................... 336
NON-SKID SURFACE...............................................................485 FABRIC TESTING ............................................................... 252
NON-VEHICULAR TRAFFIC AREA CASTING .........................130 JOINT .......................................................................... 332, 335
NOTICE CURE ...........................................................................33 MARKER ...................................................... 256-257, 487, 493
DELAY ...................................................................................32 MARKER ACCEPTANCE .................................................... 257
SPECIAL................................................................................24 MARKER ADHESIVE........................................................... 260
STOP .....................................................................................35 MARKER CERTIFICATE COMPLIANCE ............................. 256
TERMINATION ......................................................................33 MARKER NON-REFLECTIVE.............................................. 258
NOZZLE LINE...........................................................................622 MARKER RETROREFLECTIVE .......................................... 259
NRCP........................................................................................406 MARKER SAMPLING .......................................................... 257
MARKER STORAGE ........................................................... 259
MARKER TESTING ...................................................... 256-257
O MARKING ............................................................................ 256
MARKING CERTIFICATE COMPLIANCE............................ 256
OD TRANSITIONS Z JOINT .....................................................192 MARKING TESTING............................................................ 256
OFFICE FIELD.......................................................................39-40 MARKINGS.......................................................................... 549
OFF-ROAD MIXING....................................................................82 PCC ..................................................................................... 332
MIXTURE.............................................................................289 POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE ....................................... 343
OFFSET....................................................................................444 RECESS .............................................................................. 494
OFFSITE MANUFACTURING.....................................................40 REPLACING ..........................................................................80
OPEN TRENCH ........................................................ 397, 403, 421 TRANSITION ....................................................................... 502
OPERATION TRENCH .............................................................403 PAVING ASPHALT .....................................................................86
OPTIC FIBER ................................................................... 572, 605 ASPHALT ARHM ................................................................. 110
OPTICAL UNIT .........................................................................579 ASPHALT CERTIFICATION ..................................................86
OR EQUAL .................................................................................23 ASPHALT MEASUREMENT ..................................................87
ORGANIC SOIL ........................................................................610 ASPHALT PAYMENT ............................................................87
ORNAMENTAL TABLET BRONZE CASTING ..........................132 ASPHALT POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE ...................... 119
OSHA..........................................................................................27 ASPHALT TESTING. .............................................................86
OUTLET DRAINAGE ................................................................369 CONCRETE......................................................................... 161
OVERSHOOTING.....................................................................274 MIXER ...................................................................................72
SLIP-FORM ......................................................................... 333
STEEL CORRUGATED PIPE .............................................. 160
PAYMENT ..................................................................................29
AIR-PLACED CONCRETE................................................... 360
ARHM .................................................................................. 340
BASIS ....................................................................................41

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Index 643

PAYMENT BMP ......................................................................... 21 PILES ....................................................................................... 124

BORROW ............................................................................ 280 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ............................................ 126
BRICK MASONRY............................................................... 369 CONCRETE ........................................................................ 126
CHANNEL ........................................................................... 283 DRILLED ............................................................................. 127
DELAY................................................................................... 32 METAL-CASED CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE .................. 126
EARTHWORK ..................................................................... 282 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ............................................. 127
EROSION CONTROL.......................................................... 286 STEEL................................................................................. 126
FILL ..................................................................................... 279 TIMBER............................................................................... 124
FINAL .................................................................................... 36 PIN ........................................................................................... 381
GENERAL ........................................................................... 456 CONNECTION .................................................................... 381
GEOTEXTILE ............................................................... 284-285 STRUCTURAL STEEL ........................................................ 128
LCB ..................................................................................... 300 PIPE ABS..........................................................................168, 413
LIQUID ASPHALT ................................................................. 90 ABS .............................................................................. 167-168
MASONRY .......................................................................... 368 ACCEPTANCE .................................................................... 421
MOBILIZATION ..................................................................... 36 ACRYLONITRILE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE......................... 167
PARTIAL ............................................................................... 36 ANNULAR HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE .................... 171
PAVEMENT FABRIC........................................................... 339 ARCH .................................................................................. 158
PAVING ASPHALT................................................................ 87 BEDDING .....................................................................403, 462
PCC..................................................................................... 336 BLISTER ............................................................................. 153
POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT................... 344 BRITTLENESS .................................................................... 173
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ............................................. 367 CAST-IN-PLACE ................................................................. 439
PROGRESS .......................................................................... 36 CCFRPM ......................................................................175, 180
SEAL COAT ........................................................................ 339 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST FIBERGLASS REINFORCED
SHORING.............................................................................. 28 PLASTIC MORTAR.............................................................. 175
STOP .................................................................................... 35 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST FIBERGLASS REINFORCED
STRUCTURE BACKFILL..................................................... 278 PLASTIC MORTAR MICROTUNNELING............................. 180
SUBGRADE ........................................................................ 288 CHDPE................................................................................ 413
SURETY................................................................................ 34 CLAY............................................................153, 178, 187, 409
TRMAC................................................................................ 343 COATING ............................................................................ 217
UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION........................................... 275 COPPER ............................................................................. 613
UNTREATED BASE ............................................................ 289 CORRUGATED ................................................................... 412
WORK ................................................................................... 35 CORRUGATED ALUMINUM ............................................... 163
PAYROLL RECORD................................................................... 25 CORRUGATED EXTERIOR ................................................ 171
PCC PAVEMENT ..................................................................... 332 CRACKING ......................................................................... 173
PAVEMENT HEADER ......................................................... 332 DIAMETER................................................................... 182-183
PCMS ....................................................................................... 548 DISTORTING ...................................................................... 163
PE FILM WRAP........................................................................ 424 END SQUARENESS .............................................178, 181-183
SOLID WALL PIPE.............................................................. 413 EXTRUDED......................................................................... 171
SOLID WALL PIPE ACCEPTANCE..................................... 174 FINISHED............................................................................ 173
SOLID WALL PIPE MARKING ............................................ 175 FINISHING .......................................................................... 440
SOLID WALL PIPE MATERIAL ........................................... 174 FLATTENING. ..............................................................173, 186
SOLID WALL PIPE TESTING ............................................. 175 GALVANIZED...................................................................... 554
PEDESTAL....................................................................... 567, 596 HANGERS........................................................................... 230
PEDESTRIAN ACCESS ........................................................... 543 INJECTION-SEALED .......................................................... 413
BUTTON.............................................................................. 607 INSTALLATION ................................................................... 421
INDICATIONS ..................................................................... 550 IRON ................................................................................... 411
SIGNAL ................................................................586, 588, 607 IRRIGATION ....................................................................... 612
PENTACHLOROPHENOL........................................................ 123 JACKING...................................................................... 458-459
PERFORATED CONCRETE PIPE ........................................... 139 JOINT.................................................................................. 187
PERFORMANCE SELF .............................................................. 14 JOINT INSTALLATION........................................................ 187
PERMANENT RESURFACING ................................................ 453 JOINT MATERIAL ............................................................... 187
PERMEABILITY RATE ............................................................. 609 JUNCTION .......................................................................... 440
PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS ................................................... 265 LINER JOINT ...................................................................... 518
VARIATIONS PRCB ............................................................ 269 LINER PROTECTION.......................................................... 518
PERMIT...................................................................................... 12 LINER PVC ..................................................................512, 528
CONFINED SPACE............................................................... 29 LINER RE-FORMED ........................................................... 519
PERVIOUS BACKFILL ..................................................... 272, 277 LINER REPAIR.................................................................... 518
CONCRETE .................................................................. 63, 374 LINER SOLID-WALL ........................................................... 509
CONCRETE MATERIAL........................................................ 64 MANDREL ........................................................................... 419
CONCRETE MIX DESIGN..................................................... 64 MICROTUNNELING .....................................................180, 182
PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROL ................................................. 565 NONREINFORCED CONCRETE ........................................ 136
UNIT ............................................................................ 565, 602 PLASTIC ......................................................................404, 613
PHOTOMETRIC REQUIREMENT ............................................ 584 PVC..............................................................................168, 413
PICKLE JAR TEST....................................................167, 210, 219 PVC LINER ......................................................................... 211
PIGMENT COLOR.................................................................... 374 REINFORCED CONCRETE .........................................140, 407
PILE CAST-IN-PLACE.............................................................. 392 REJECTION ........................................................................ 445
CUTOFF.............................................................................. 393 REPAIR ............................................................................... 153
DRILLED ............................................................................. 392 REPAIRING......................................................................... 441
DRIVING ..................................................................... 390, 392 RIGID LINER ....................................................................... 213
DRIVING EQUIPMENT. ...................................................... 391 RIVETING ........................................................................... 165
EXTENSION........................................................................ 393 ROUNDNESS........................................................178, 181-183
HOLE................................................................................... 392 SMOOTH INTERIOR........................................................... 171

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
644 Index

PIPE STEEL .............................................................................389 PLASTIC LINER TESTING ....................................................... 210

STEEL CORRUGATED .......................................................157 PIPE ............................................................................ 404, 613
STEEL MICROTUNNELING ................................................183 PIPE IDENTIFICATION MARKS PVC.................................. 169
STIFFNESS ................................................................. 172, 184 PIPELINE............................................................................. 621
STRAIGHTNESS ..........................................................181-183 PORTLAND CEMENT............................................................69
STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PLATE .....................................166 REWORKED........................................................................ 171
STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATE.............................................163 SEWER AND DRAINAGE PIPE .......................................... 413
SUPPORTS .........................................................................230 PLATE ASSEMBLY .................................................................. 389
THERMOPLASTIC...............................................................192 BENT ................................................................................... 384
THICKNESS ........................................................................441 MESSAGE ........................................................................... 587
VITRIFIED CLAY .................................................................153 WEB .................................................................................... 381
VITRIFIED CLAY MICROTUNNELING ................................178 PLUG VALVES ......................................................................... 237
PIPELINE..................................................................................418 PLYWOOD ............................................................................... 122
APPURTENANCE MEASUREMENT ...................................456 GRADE MARKING............................................................... 122
APPURTENANCES PAYMENT ...........................................456 PMAC ............................................................................... 121, 344
COMMISSIONING ...............................................................438 PMCOS.......................................................................................94
COPPER..............................................................................621 PME ............................................................................................93
IDENTIFICATION.................................................................206 PNEUMATIC TIRE ROLLERS .................................................. 308
IRRIGATION ........................................................................620 PNEUMATICALLY APPLIED MORTAR REPAIR...................... 153
MATERIALS.........................................................................397 POLE UTILITY-OWNED ........................................................... 601
MATERIALS STORAGE. .....................................................399 POLLUTION AIR.........................................................................19
PLASTIC..............................................................................621 CONTROL ....................................................................... 19, 21
PRESSURE .........................................................................624 WATER..................................................................................20
PRESSURE TESTING.........................................................433 POLYETHYLENE FILM WRAP................................................. 424
REHABILITATION................................................................505 POLYMER MODIFIED EMULSIFIED ASPHALT....................... 309
REPAIR ...............................................................................508 MODIFIED EMULSION ..........................................................93
REPLACEMENT ..................................................................508 RUBBER ROD SEALANT ......................................................76
STEEL .................................................................................621 POLYMERIC COATING............................................................ 161
TESTING .............................................................................414 POLYPROPYLENE PIPE ................................................. 184, 413
PLACEMENT ASPHALT ...........................................................454 POLYSTYRENE FILLER ............................................................75
CONCRETE.........................................................................454 POLYSULFIDE POLYMER .........................................................76
CSLM.....................................................................................80 POLYURETHANE JOINT.......................................................... 189
GEOTEXTILE ...............................................................284-285 JOINT ACCEPTANCE ......................................................... 190
LCB...............................................................................298-299 JOINT SEALING .................................................................. 189
PAVEMENT FABRIC ...........................................................336 LINER .................................................................................. 538
REINFORCING STEEL........................................................368 SEALANT ..............................................................................75
SOD .....................................................................................618 POROUS ASPHALT CONCRETE ..................................... 119-120
TOPSOIL .............................................................................614 ASPHALT CONCRETE AGGREGATE ................................ 120
TRENCH ..............................................................................283 ASPHALT CONCRETE ANTISTRIP .................................... 120
PLACING BORROW .................................................................280 ASPHALT CONCRETE COMPOSITION.............................. 120
CONCRETE................................................................. 286, 349 ASPHALT CONCRETE GRADING ...................................... 120
CONCRETE CURB ..............................................................370 ASPHALT CONCRETE MATERIAL ..................................... 119
FILL......................................................................................279 ASPHALT CONCRETE MINERAL FILLER .......................... 120
PCC PAVEMENT.................................................................333 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT ................................... 343
PLAN EMERGENCY...................................................................20 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING ASPHALT ........................ 119
FALSEWORK ......................................................................376 PORTLAND CEMENT ...46-47, 56, 58, 64, 68, 79, 96, 267, 289, 294, 332
SEWAGE ...............................................................................19 AGGREGATE ........................................................................65
SHORING ..............................................................................28 MATERIAL .............................................................................64
PLANING EDGE .......................................................................380 MIXING ..................................................................................71
PLANT BATCH .........................................................................105 NON-PLASTIC.......................................................................69
CENTRAL MIXING...............................................................325 PLASTIC................................................................................69
ESTABLISHMENT ...............................................................625 PROPORTIONING.................................................................70
FABRICATION MANHOLE COUPLING ...............................193 TEST .....................................................................................63
GUYING...............................................................................616 WATER..................................................................................65
LAYOUT ..............................................................................616 POSITION INDICATORS .......................................................... 234
MANUFACTURING................................................................40 POST-TENSIONED STEEL ...................................................... 365
STAKING .............................................................................616 POTABLE WATER ................................................................... 224
PLANTING ................................................................................615 POWER CLEANING ................................................................. 473
LAWN ..................................................................................617 POZZOLAN............................................................................66-67
SEED ...................................................................................618 PRCB................................................................................ 266, 445
SHRUB ................................................................................616 ACCEPTANCE ............................................................ 269, 270
SPECIMEN ..........................................................................616 COMPRESSION TEST ........................................................ 269
TREE ...................................................................................616 CURING............................................................................... 268
VINE ....................................................................................617 DIMENSIONS ...................................................................... 269
PLANTS....................................................................................611 FABRICATION..................................................................... 267
PLASTIC FITTING ....................................................................404 FORM .................................................................................. 268
JOINT ..................................................................................371 JOINT .................................................................................. 267
LINER .......................................................... 208, 479, 517, 540 LENGTH .............................................................................. 269
LINER CLEANER.................................................................208 MARKING ............................................................................ 270
LINER DIMENSIONS ...........................................................209 MATERIAL ........................................................................... 267
LINER FLAP ........................................................................210 MEASUREMENT ................................................................. 455
LINER SIZE .........................................................................209 PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS............................................... 269

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Index 645

PRCB REINFORCEMENT................................................ 267, 269 PROTECTION PROPERTY...................................................... 495

REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT ....................................... 268 SHORE................................................................................ 284
REINFORCEMENT SPLICING ............................................ 268 UTILITIES............................................................................ 497
REJECTION ........................................................................ 270 WORK ................................................................................... 22
STEEL REINFORCEMENT ................................................. 267 PROTECTIVE COATING ......................................................... 207
TESTING............................................................................. 269 LINER.................................................................................. 538
THICKNESS ........................................................................ 269 MATERIAL .......................................................................... 479
PRCMH ..............................................................264, 446-447, 455 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE ..................................................322, 342
PREBLENDED MORTAR ........................................................... 85 PUGMILL PLANTS ..................................................................... 82
PRECAST CONCRETE BOX ................................................... 266 PULL BOX.........................................................................555, 596
CONCRETE PILES. ............................................................ 126 ROPE .................................................................................. 555
MANHOLES ................................................................ 264, 446 TEST ............................................................................210, 541
REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX REINFORCEMENT ........ 267 PULVERIZED BASE .......................................................... 53, 304
STRUCTURES .................................................................... 445 BASE GRADING ................................................................... 54
PRECEDENCE OF DOCUMENTS ............................................. 15 BASE QUALITY .................................................................... 54
PREFABRICATED GRAVITY PIPE.......................................... 405 BASE TESTING .................................................................... 54
TENDON ............................................................................. 366 MISCELLANEOUS BASE...................................................... 53
PREMOLDED FILLER ................................................................ 75 PULVERIZING.......................................................................... 305
PREPARATION FILL................................................................ 278 PAVEMENT......................................................................... 296
PAINTING ........................................................................... 472 PUMPING SEWAGE .................................................................. 19
SUBGRADE ........................................................................ 287 PUSH BUTTON........................................................................ 607
TOPSOIL............................................................................. 615 PUSH-BUTTON ASSEMBLY.................................................... 592
PRESERVATIVE LUMBER ............................................... 122-123 PUSH-ON JOINTS ................................................................... 422
WOOD................................................................................ 123 PVC CLOSED PROFILE LINER............................................... 526
PRESSURE GAUGES.............................................................. 249 COATED CHAIN LINK......................................................... 135
INJECTION ......................................................................... 532 COATING ............................................................................ 218
PIPE ............................................................................ 193, 427 COATING WORKMANSHIP................................................ 218
PIPE FIBERGLASS............................................................. 431 COMPOSITE PIPE............................................................. 168
PIPE MEASUREMENT........................................................ 455 COMPOSITE PIPE ACCEPTANCE..................................... 169
PIPELINE ............................................................................ 624 COMPOSITE PIPE MARKING ............................................ 169
TEST ................................................................................... 624 COMPOSITE PIPE MATERIAL ........................................... 169
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE .................................................. 360 COMPOSITE PIPE REPAIR................................................ 169
CONCRETE HANDLING ..................................................... 367 COMPOSITE PIPE TESTING ............................................. 169
CONCRETE MEASUREMENT ............................................ 367 LINER.................................................................................. 211
CONCRETE PAYMENT ...................................................... 367 LINER INTEGRAL-LOCKING .............................................. 537
CONCRETE PILES ............................................................. 127 LINER MANHOLE ............................................................... 211
PRESTRESSING STEEL ................................................. 361, 363 LINER SEGMENTED .......................................................... 538
PREVAILING WAGE .................................................................. 25 PIPE .................................................................................... 413
PREVENTER BACKFLOW....................................................... 613 PIPE LINER..................................................................512, 528
PREVENTION SPILL.................................................................. 20 PIPE LINER INSPECTION .................................................. 513
PRICE AGREED ........................................................................ 37 PIPE LINER INSTALLATION .............................................. 513
UNIT ................................................................................ 35, 37 PIPE LINER REJECTION.............................................514, 523
PRIME COAT. .......................................................................... 328 PIPE LINER REPAIR ...................................................514, 523
PRIMER MASTIC ..................................................................... 540 PIPE LINER TESTING ........................................................ 522
PROCEDURE INJECTION ....................................................... 532 PIPE MARKING................................................................... 526
PROCESS HOT-DIP ................................................................ 217 PLASTIC PIPE ACCEPTANCE ........................................... 170
METALIZING ....................................................................... 217 PLASTIC PIPE CELL CLASSIFICATION ............................ 170
PROCESSED BASE ............................................................ 50, 52 PLASTIC PIPE JOINING ..................................................... 170
MISCELLANEOUS GRADING............................................... 52 PLASTIC PIPE MANUFACTURING .................................... 169
MISCELLANEOUS QUALITY ................................................ 52 PLASTIC PIPE TESTING .................................................... 170
PRODUCT ROCK....................................................................... 43 PRESSURE PIPE................................................................ 427
PROFILE GASKET................................................................... 446 SPIRAL WOUND................................................................. 528
LINER.................................................................................. 523
MILLING .............................................................................. 502
POLYPROPYLENE PIPE .................................................... 184 Q
PROGRAMMED VISIBILITY..................................................... 586
PROGRESS PAYMENT ............................................................. 36 QUALITY AGGREGATE............................................................. 53
WORK ................................................................................... 30 CRUSHED AGGREGATE ..................................................... 51
PROOF-LOAD TESTING.......................................................... 131 CRUSHED MISCELLANEOUS.............................................. 52
PROPORTIONING AIR-PLACED CONCRETE ........................ 358 PROCESSED MISCELLANEOUS ......................................... 52
CSLM .................................................................................... 79 PULVERIZED MISCELLANEOUS BASE .............................. 54
LEAN CONCRETE BASE...................................................... 57 STONE .................................................................................. 48
PORTLAND CEMENT ........................................................... 70 SUBBASE ............................................................................. 53
PROSECUTION OF WORK ....................................................... 31 QUANTITY MEASUREMENT..................................................... 35
WORK ................................................................................... 30 QUICK-COUPLING VALVE ...................................................... 613
PROTECTION .......................................................................... 616 QUICK-SET POLYMER.............................................................. 94
BANK .................................................................................. 284 QUICK-SETTING GROUT.......................................................... 80
BRICK MASONRY............................................................... 369
LINER.................................................................................. 486
MASONRY .......................................................................... 368
PAINTING ........................................................................... 471
PIPE LINER......................................................................... 518

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
646 Index

RELATIVE COMPACTION................................................ 219, 287

R RELOCATION UTILITIES ......................................................... 498
REMOTE BALLAST .................................................................. 562
RAILING METAL............................................................... 133, 387
CONTROL VALVE ............................................................... 613
POSTS.................................................................................130
REGISTRATION SYSTEMS ................................................ 248
RAILINGS ......................................................................... 130, 133
REMOVAL ................................................................................ 496
RAP ............................................................................ 98, 100, 121
FACILITY ...............................................................................41
CORRECTION FACTOR .....................................................223
MARKER ............................................................................. 488
DRYING & SCREENING......................................................105
OPERATIONS ..................................................................... 498
STORAGE AND DRYING ....................................................107
TRAFFIC STRIPING ............................................................ 487
RAPID-SET EPOXY..................................................................493
UTILITIES ............................................................................ 498
RATE INFILTRATION ...............................................................343
RENTAL......................................................................................38
PERMEABILITY...................................................................609
EQUIPMENT..........................................................................38
RCP .......................................................................... 140, 142, 407
TOOL .....................................................................................38
CURING...............................................................................145
REPAIR ABS COMPOSITE PIPE ............................................. 169
JACKING .............................................................................458
CHAIN LINK FENCE............................................................ 136
JOINT ..................................................................................145
CIPP .................................................................................... 512
LINED ..................................................................................150
COATING .................................................................... 216, 218
MANUFACTURING..............................................................145
CORRUGATED ALUMINUM ARCH ..................................... 166
MICROTUNNELING......................................................182-184
CORRUGATED ALUMINUM PIPE....................................... 166
WET-CAST ..........................................................................145
EPOXY ADHESIVE.............................................................. 153
READY-MIXED GROUT..............................................................85
HDPE........................................................................... 510, 515
REAMED WORK ......................................................................378
LINER .................................................................................. 486
REAS ........................................................................................321
PIPE .................................................................................... 152
AGGREGATE ........................................................................96
PIPE LINER ......................................................................... 518
MATERIAL .............................................................................96
PIPELINE............................................................................. 508
TRANSPORTING...................................................................97
PVC COATING .................................................................... 218
WATER..................................................................................96
PVC COMPOSITE PIPE ...................................................... 169
RECEPTACLE CONVENIENCE ...............................................576
PVC PIPE LINER......................................................... 514, 523
RECESS PAVEMENT...............................................................494
RCP MICROTUNNELING .................................................... 183
RECLAIMED ASPHALT ..............................................................98
STEEL CORRUGATED ARCH ............................................ 160
ASPHALT PAVEMENT ................................................ 100, 121
STEEL CORRUGATED PIPE .............................................. 160
CONCRETE......................................................................68-69
VITRIFIED CLAY MICROTUNNELING PIPE ....................... 179
RECORD PAYROLL ...................................................................25
ZINC COATING ................................................................... 217
RECYCLED WATER DISINFECTION.......................................438
REPAIRING PIPE ............................................................. 153, 441
RECYCLING AGENT ..................................................................99
REPLACING PAVEMENT...........................................................80
REDUCED-PRESSURE ASSEMBLIES ....................................244
REPORT DAILY..........................................................................39
REDWOOD...............................................................................122
REPRESENTATIVE CONTRACTOR ..........................................15
REEL ........................................................................................572
REQUIREMENT AIR-PLACED CONCRETE............................. 357
REFLECTANCE........................................................................257
CSLM.....................................................................................79
REFLECTOR ASSEMBLY ........................................................587
EPOXY ADHESIVE.............................................................. 263
RE-FORMED HDPE..................................................................514
HOT-MELT BITUMINOUS ADHESIVE................................. 263
PVC LINER ..........................................................................519
MISCELLANEOUS METAL.................................................. 128
REGULATOR BALLAST. ..........................................................563
NON-REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKER ......................... 258
REHABILITATION PIPELINE....................................................505
PHOTOMETRIC................................................................... 584
REINFORCED CONCRETE MICROTUNNELING PIPE ...........182
RETROREFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKER ...................... 259
CONCRETE PIPE................................................................140
REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................22
PIPE LINED .........................................................................150
INSPECTION .........................................................................22
REINFORCEMENT ...................................................................348
RESIN....................................................................................... 511
CONCRETE...........................................................................73
RESISTANCE CHEMICAL................................. 167, 171, 175-176
FIBER ....................................................................................74
CRACK ................................................................................ 173
JOINT ..................................................................................485
RESPONSIBILITIES SURETY....................................................33
MESH ....................................................................................74
RESTORATION PROPERTY.................................................... 495
PLACEMENT PRCB ............................................................268
RESURFACING CONCRETE ................................................... 455
PRCB........................................................................... 267, 269
PERMANENT ...................................................................... 453
RCP ............................................................................. 143, 182
TEMPORARY ...................................................................... 453
SPLICES..............................................................................143
RETROREFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKER ........................... 259
SPLICING PRCB .................................................................268
PAVEMENT MARKER REQUIREMENT .............................. 259
STEEL ...................................................................................73
RETURN LINER........................................................................ 482
TESTING ...............................................................................74
REWORKED PLASTICS................................................... 171, 184
WELDED WIRE ............................................................. 73, 267
RIGHT OF WAY .........................................................................12
WIRE ................................................................................73-41
RIGID LINER ............................................................. 212, 484-485
REINFORCING CAGE ..............................................................392
LINER MANHOLE................................................................ 213
MASONRY...........................................................................368
LINER PIPE ......................................................................... 213
STEEL ..............................................................................73-74
RIPRAP STONE .........................................................................47
REJECTION ANNULAR HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE.... 174
RISER SPRINKLER.................................................................. 622
CCFRPM PIPE ............................................................ 178, 182
RIVET ....................................................................................... 128
CIPP ....................................................................................512
FIELD................................................................................... 378
HDPE........................................................................... 510, 515
HOLE ................................................................................... 377
PIPE ....................................................................................445
SHOP................................................................................... 377
PRCB...................................................................................270
STRUCTURAL STEEL......................................................... 128
PVC PIPE LINER......................................................... 514, 523
RCP MICROTUNNELING ....................................................183

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Index 647

RIVETING ................................................................................ 379 SEAL COAT PAYMENT ........................................................... 339

PIPE .................................................................................... 165 END..................................................................................... 510
ROADWAY GRADING ............................................................. 287 MANHOLE COUPLING ....................................................... 192
PREPARATION................................................................... 308 SLURRY................................................................................ 95
SURFACING ....................................................................... 307 SEALANT ................................................................................. 538
ROCK CRUSHED....................................................................... 43 CERTIFICATION ................................................................... 77
DUST......................................................................43, 340, 343 ELASTOMERIC..................................................................... 75
DUST BLOTTER ................................................................. 343 HOT-POURED ...................................................................... 76
EXTENSIVE ........................................................................ 440 JOINT.................................................................................... 76
ISOLATED........................................................................... 439 POLYMER RUBBER ROD .................................................... 76
MATERIAL ............................................................................ 43 POLYURETHANE ................................................................. 75
PRODUCT............................................................................. 43 RUBBER-ASPHALT .............................................................. 76
ROCK-DUST BLOTTER ........................................................... 340 SEALCOAT .............................................................................. 110
ROCKER PLATE BEARINGS................................................... 130 TESTING............................................................................. 110
ROCKERS................................................................................ 130 BRIM-STYLE ....................................................................... 535
ROD GROUND......................................................................... 604 COMPOUND ....................................................................... 559
ROLLER ........................................................................... 295, 381 ELASTOMERIC................................................................... 179
ROLLING.................................................................................. 312 POLYURETHANE JOINT .................................................... 189
ARHM.................................................................................. 340 SERVICE LATERAL............................................................ 533
ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT................................... 330 SLC ..................................................................................... 533
POROUS ASPHALT............................................................ 343 SYNTHETIC RUBBER ........................................................ 187
TRMAC......................................................................... 343-344 SYSTEM T-STYLE .............................................................. 535
ROOT PRUNING...................................................................... 273 SEAM HELICAL ....................................................................... 159
ROTAP TEST SHAKER ........................................................... 112 LOCK ...........................................................................159, 165
ROTATION ASSEMBLY........................................................... 382 WELDED............................................................................. 160
ROUNDNESS PIPE................................................... 178, 181-183 SECTION SIGNAL ................................................................... 580
ROYALTY................................................................................... 27 SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCE ............................................. 136
RPME ................................................................................... 93, 96 DEVICES............................................................................... 29
TEMPERATURE ................................................................... 95 FENCE ................................................................................ 390
RPPCC....................................................................................... 69 FENCING. ............................................................................. 29
RUBBER ASPHALT AGGREGATE MEMBRANE..................... 340 SEED ....................................................................................... 611
ASPHALT HOT MIX ............................................................ 340 PLANTING .......................................................................... 618
GASKET.............................................................................. 613 SEEDING ................................................................................. 619
ROD ...................................................................................... 77 SEGMENTED PVC LINER ....................................................... 538
RUBBER-ASPHALT SEALANT .................................................. 76 SELF PERFORMANCE.............................................................. 14
RUBBERIZED EMULSION AGGREGATE SLURRY ................ 321 SELF-CENTERING JOINTS..................................................... 406
POLYMER MODIFIED EMULSION ................................. 93, 96 SENSOR UNIT ..................................................................590, 606
SEPARATION GEOTEXTILE ................................................... 285
SERIES CIRCUIT..................................................................... 558
S SERVICE CHECK .................................................................... 603
CONNECTIONS .................................................................. 433
SAFETY LAWS .......................................................................... 27 LATERALS .......................................................................... 247
WORK SITE .......................................................................... 27 LIGHTING ........................................................................... 602
SALVAGE................................................................................. 608 SADDLES............................................................................ 248
SAMPLE CONCRETE ................................................................ 63 SURVEY................................................................................ 18
SAMPLING PAVEMENT MARKER .......................................... 257 SERVICES UTILITY ................................................................... 13
SAMPLING SLURRY SEAL...................................................... 325 SERVING UTILITY ................................................................... 592
SAND ......................................................................................... 46 SET CONTROL AGENT........................................................... 321
CONCRETE .......................................................................... 47 SET-RETARDING ADMIXTURE................................................. 66
COVER................................................................................ 313 SEWAGE BYPASS .................................................................... 19
EQUIVALENT........................................................................ 57 PLAN..................................................................................... 19
GRADATION ......................................................................... 47 PUMPING.............................................................................. 19
MOISTURE CONTENT.......................................................... 65 SEWER BYPASSING .............................................................. 508
MORTAR ............................................................................... 79 DEWATERING .................................................................... 508
SANDBLASTING...................................................................... 475 SANITARY ............................................................................ 19
SANITARY SEWER ................................................................... 19 VALVES .............................................................................. 224
SANITATION .............................................................................. 19 SHAFT INTERMEDIATE .......................................................... 469
SCALE AGGREGATE ................................................................ 70 SHAPING LCB ......................................................................... 299
CEMENT ............................................................................... 70 SHEAR RING JOINT ................................................................ 188
WATER ................................................................................. 70 RING JOINT TESTING........................................................ 188
WEIGHT.............................................................................. 385 SHEET CURING MATERIAL...................................................... 78
SCHEDULE CONSTRUCTION................................................... 30 SHOP DRAWINGS............................................................. 17, 375
SCM ........................................................................................... 66 RIVET.................................................................................. 377
SCOPE OF WORK..................................................................... 12 SHOP-WELDED JOINT ........................................................... 210
SCREEN FRONT ..................................................................... 587 SHORE DUROMETER ............................................................. 112
SCREENING .............................................................................. 13 PROTECTION ..................................................................... 284
SCREENINGS ARAM............................................................... 341 SHORING PAYMENT................................................................. 28
SCREW THREAD .................................................................... 381 PLAN..................................................................................... 28
SEAL .......................................................................................... 75 SHOT BLASTING..................................................................... 475
COAT .................................................................................. 339 SHOTCRETE ........................................................................... 357
COAT APPLICATION .......................................................... 339 SHRUB..................................................................................... 611
COAT MATERIAL................................................................ 339 PLANTING .......................................................................... 616

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
648 Index

SHUTDOWN EXISTING PIPELINE ..........................................400 SPLICE FUSED ........................................................................ 560

SI UNIT ....................................................................................9-10 INSULATION ....................................................................... 555
SIEVE ANALYSIS.....................................................................219 WIRE ................................................................................... 599
SIGNAL.....................................................................................593 SPLICING BARS ...................................................................... 349
FOUNDATION .....................................................................595 CONDUCTOR...................................................................... 604
HEAD...................................................................................605 UNIT .................................................................................... 559
INSPECTION .......................................................................608 SPLITTER CHANNEL............................................................... 578
LED.............................................................................. 583, 588 SPOIL TRANSPORTATION...................................................... 468
MOUNTING .........................................................................605 SPOT WELDING ...................................................................... 159
MOUNTING ASSEMBLY .....................................................589 SPRAYER UNIT CALIBRATION ............................................... 337
PEDESTRIAN ...................................................... 586, 588, 607 SPREADER TRUCK ................................................................. 295
SECTION .............................................................................580 SPREADING ARHM ................................................................. 340
STANDARD .........................................................................596 BASE ................................................................................... 288
TESTING .............................................................................608 LCB...................................................................................... 299
TRAFFIC.............................................................. 551, 567, 592 POROUS ASPHALT ............................................................ 343
VEHICLE .............................................................................586 SEAL COAT......................................................................... 339
SIGNS AND SIGNAGE .............................................................546 SLURRY SEAL .................................................................... 323
SILT-TIGHT JOINT. ..................................................................172 TRMAC ......................................................................... 343-344
SINGLE OFFSET JOINTS ........................................................446 SPRIGGING.............................................................................. 619
SIPHON STEEL CORRUGATED PIPE.....................................162 SPRINKLER COVERAGE......................................................... 625
SITE MIXED MORTAR ...............................................................85 ELEVATION......................................................................... 622
SITE-MIXED GROUT..................................................................85 EQUIPMENT........................................................................ 614
SIZE PLASTIC LINER...............................................................209 INSTALLATION ................................................................... 622
SLAB CONTROLLER................................................................603 RISER.................................................................................. 622
SLANTING-DISC CHECK VALVES ..........................................240 SPACING............................................................................. 622
SLC SEALING ..........................................................................533 SPUN RCP ............................................................................... 145
SEALING SYSTEMS ...........................................................535 STABILIZATION STRAW ......................................................... 619
SLIDE .......................................................................................274 STAINLESS STEEL CABINETS ............................................... 574
SLIP-FORM ..............................................................................370 STEEL WATER PIPE .......................................................... 200
PAVING ...............................................................................333 STAKE ...................................................................................... 612
SLIP-ON JOINT ........................................................................411 TREE ................................................................................... 612
SLIPOUT ..................................................................................274 STAKING PLANT...................................................................... 616
SLOPE...................................................................... 274, 279, 286 TREE ................................................................................... 616
SLOTTED STEEL CORRUGATED PIPE ..................................161 STAMPED CONCRETE............................................................ 373
SLURRY SEAL ...........................................................................95 STANDARD ALUMINUM .......................................................... 553
SEAL AGGREGATE .........................................................49-50 CONCRETE......................................................................... 556
SEAL GRADING ....................................................................49 FIBERGLASS ...................................................................... 553
SEAL SURFACING..............................................................319 METAL................................................................................. 552
SEAL TESTING ...................................................................322 STEEL ................................................................................. 552
SMOOTH INTERIOR PIPE .......................................................171 STANDARDS............................................................................ 548
SMOOTHNESS ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT ..............331 SIGNAL................................................................................ 596
SOCKET ...................................................................................612 STANDARD-SET EPOXY ......................................................... 493
SOD ..........................................................................................611 STARTING AID......................................................................... 562
PLACEMENT .......................................................................618 STATIONARY MIXER .................................................................72
SODIUM LAMP .........................................................................564 STATISTICAL TESTING..................................................... 43, 104
SOIL AMENDMENT ..................................................................610 STEAM HAMMER..................................................................... 391
CONDITIONING...................................................................610 STEEL ANCHOR BOLT ............................................................ 128
COVER ................................................................................465 ARCH................................................................................... 389
FERTILIZING .......................................................................610 ARCH LINING...................................................................... 161
MOISTURE ..........................................................................440 ASSEMBLING...................................................................... 378
ORGANIC ............................................................................610 BAR. ......................................................................................74
PIPE ....................................................................................157 CABINET ............................................................................. 573
STRIPPING...................................................................281-282 CASTING............................................................................. 129
TEST....................................................................................219 COMPUTED WEIGHT ......................................................... 385
TREATED ............................................................................287 CONNECTION ..................................................................... 380
SOIL-CEMENT.................................................................... 80, 289 CONSTRUCTION ................................................................ 389
SOLDER ZINC-BASED.............................................................217 CORRUGATED ARCH.................................................. 157-162
SOLID WALL PIPE ACCEPTANCE PE ....................................174 JOINT .................................................................................. 380
SOLID-WALL LINER.................................................................509 MICROTUNNELING PIPE ............................................ 183-184
SOLVENT CEMENT JOINTS....................................................170 PAINTING............................................................................ 472
CLEANING...........................................................................473 PILES .................................................................................. 126
WELD SOCKET...................................................................612 PIPE ............................................................................ 389, 425
SPACING SPRINKLER.............................................................622 PIPE FABRICATION............................................................ 158
SPARK TEST.................................................................... 211, 541 PIPELINE............................................................................. 621
SPECIAL EXPOSURE ................................................................61 PLATE ...................................................................................29
NOTICE ................................................................................24 PLATE ARCH MATERIAL.................................................... 163
SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE ADMIXTURE .................................66 PRESTRESSING......................................................... 361, 363
SPECIMEN PLANTING.............................................................616 REINFORCEMENT PRCB ................................................... 267
SPIGOT JOINTS.......................................................................171 REINFORCING ......................................................... 73-74, 368
SPILL PREVENTION ..................................................................20 STANDARD ......................................................................... 552
SPIRAL WOUND PVC ..............................................................528 STRUCTURAL ..................................................... 128, 375, 389
SPLICE CONNECTOR ..................................................... 559, 602 STRUCTURE....................................................................... 376

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Index 649

STEERING CONTROL ............................................................. 468 SUPPORTING INFORMATION .................................................. 17

STEM-MOUNTED PRESSURE GAUGES ................................ 249 SURETY PAYMENT................................................................... 34
STIFFENER ............................................................................. 381 RESPONSIBILITIES.............................................................. 33
STIFFNESS PIPE..................................................................... 172 SURFACE BEARING ............................................................... 380
STIPULATED UNIT PRICE ........................................................ 37 CHIPS ................................................................................. 154
STOCKPILES ............................................................................. 98 DESCRIPTION .................................................................... 465
STOLON........................................................................... 611, 618 FINISH ................................................................................ 355
STONE CONCRETE ................................................................ 286 GALVANIZED...................................................................... 476
GRADING.............................................................................. 48 NON-SKID........................................................................... 485
PLACING............................................................................. 285 PREPARATION................................................................... 359
QUALITY ............................................................................... 48 SURFACING ROADWAY ......................................................... 307
RIPRAP ................................................................................. 47 SLURRY SEAL.................................................................... 319
STONEWORK MEASUREMENT ............................................. 286 SURGE ARRESTOR ................................................................ 576
STOP NOTICE ........................................................................... 35 SURPLUS EXCAVATION......................................................... 274
PAYMENT ............................................................................. 35 SURVEY MARKERS ................................................................ 495
STOPPERS VCP...................................................................... 155 MONUMENT ....................................................................... 470
VITRIFIED CLAY MICROTUNNELING PIPE....................... 179 SERVICE............................................................................... 18
STORAGE................................................................................ 616 SURVEYING .............................................................................. 18
ARHM.................................................................................. 116 SUSPENSION WORK................................................................ 32
EQUIPMENT ......................................................................... 19 S-VALUE .................................................................................. 100
MATERIAL ............................................................................ 19 SWEEPERS............................................................................. 308
PAVEMENT MARKER......................................................... 259 SWING-CHECK VALVES......................................................... 238
PUBLIC STREET .................................................................. 19 SWITCH TOGGLE ................................................................... 577
REAS .................................................................................. 321 SYMBOLS .................................................................................. 10
TRMAC................................................................................ 119 SYNTHETIC FIBER.................................................................... 74
STORAGE/REACTION TANK .................................................. 115 RUBBER JOINT .................................................................. 187
STORM WATER......................................................................... 21 RUBBER JOINT ACCEPTANCE ......................................... 189
STRAIGHTNESS PIPE...................................................... 181-183 RUBBER SEALING ............................................................. 187
STRAP CHANNEL.................................................................... 210 RUBBER SEALING LABORATORY TESTING.................... 188
STRAW STABILIZATION. ........................................................ 619 RUBBER SEALING TESTING............................................. 187
STREET LIGHTING...........................................551, 556, 592, 602 SYSTEM DISINFECTION......................................................... 437
STRENGTH COMPRESSIVE..................................................... 62 IRRIGATION ....................................................................... 620
TENSILE ............................................................................. 555 MICROTUNNELING ............................................................ 467
STRIP WELDING ......................................................485, 518, 541 PAINT.................................................................................. 207
STRIPING MACHINE ............................................................... 489
PAINT.................................................................................. 256
SOIL ............................................................................. 281-282 T
STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PLATE ARCH AND PIPE ............. 166
ARCH .................................................................................. 163 TACK COAT...............................................328, 337, 340, 343-344
STEEL ..................................................................128, 375, 389 TAMPING CONCRETE ............................................................ 334
STEEL EQUIPMENT ........................................................... 376 TARGET IDENTIFICATION...................................................... 564
STEEL PIN .......................................................................... 128 T-BRANCH FITTINGS.............................................................. 155
STEEL PLATE ARCH AND PIPE ........................................ 163 TCP .......................................................................................... 545
STEEL RIVET ..................................................................... 129 TELEPHONE CABLE ........................................................571, 604
WELDING CODE AWS D1.1............................................... 382 TELEVISION INSPECTION...................................................... 507
STRUCTURE ........................................................................... 401 TEMPERATURE ARHM MIXING.............................................. 116
BACKFILL ............................................................272, 275, 277 LIQUID ASPHALT ................................................................. 88
BACKFILL PAYMENT ......................................................... 278 PAVING ASPHALT................................................................ 87
EXCAVATION ..................................................................... 275 RPME .................................................................................... 95
STEEL ................................................................................. 376 UNIT........................................................................................ 9
TIMBER............................................................................... 395 TEMPORARY BYPASSES....................................................... 400
SUBBASE ............................................................................ 50, 52 RESURFACING .................................................................. 453
GRADING.............................................................................. 52 TRAFFIC CONTROL .............................................309, 544-545
QUALITY ............................................................................... 53 UTILITY ................................................................................. 13
SUBCONTRACT ........................................................................ 10 TENSILE STRENGTH .............................................................. 555
BIDDER................................................................................. 10 TESTING............................................................................. 130
SUBCONTRACTOR ................................................................... 14 TENSION ROD CHAIN LINK FENCE....................................... 135
WORK ................................................................................... 39 WIRE CHAIN LINK .............................................................. 135
SUBGRADE ..................................................................... 287, 345 TERMINAL BLOCK ............................ 559-560, 566, 576, 588, 602
FABRIC ............................................................................... 285 TERMINATION CONDUCTOR ................................................. 604
LCB ..................................................................................... 298 CONTRACT..................................................................... 33, 34
PAYMENT ........................................................................... 288 CONVENIENCE .................................................................... 34
PREPARATION................................................................... 287 DEFAULT .............................................................................. 33
TOLERANCES .................................................................... 287 NOTICE................................................................................. 33
SUBMERGED VALVES............................................................ 233 TEST ACID RESISTANCE ....................................................... 180
SUBMERSIBLE TRANSFORMER............................................ 566 ADHESION.......................................................................... 542
SUBMITTAL ............................................................................... 16 AIR PRESSURE................................................................. 536
SUBSTRATE ............................................................................ 540 COMPACTION .................................................................... 219
SUBSURFACE CONDITION .................................................... 466 COMPRESSION PRCB....................................................... 269
SUBSURFACE DATA................................................................. 18 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH.............................................. 180
SUITABILITY AGRICULTURAL................................................ 609 CORE .................................................................................. 269
SUPPORT TUNNEL .......................................................... 461-462

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
650 Index

TEST COUPON ........................................................................217 TIE ............................................................................................ 612

CYLINDER...........................................................................269 TIMBER CONSTRUCTION ............................................... 390, 395
HYDROSTATIC ...................................................................141 PILES .................................................................................. 124
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE ....................................... 139, 180 STRUCTURE....................................................................... 395
INFILTRATION CAPACITY..................................................221 TIME ACCOUNTING ..................................................................31
JOINT ..................................................................................180 COMPLETION .......................................................................31
LEAKAGE ............................................................................418 EXTENSION .....................................................................31-32
MATERIAL ..................................................................... 23, 219 TIRE RUBBER CONCRETE ..................................................... 121
MEGGER .............................................................................608 RUBBER MODIFIED ASPHALT CONCRETE...................... 116
PICKLE JAR ........................................................ 167, 210, 219 RUBBER MODIFIED ASPHALT CONCRETE............... 343-344
PORTLAND CEMENT............................................................63 TOGGLE SWITCH.................................................................... 577
PRESSURE .........................................................................624 TOLERANCE CONDUIT ........................................................... 460
PULL............................................................................ 210, 541 TOLERANCES CCFRPM MICROTUNNELING PIPE................ 181
RESULTS CASTINGS .........................................................131 RCP MICROTUNNELING .................................................... 182
SPARK......................................................................... 211, 541 STEEL MICROTUNNELING PIPE ....................................... 183
VISCOMETER .....................................................................222 SUBGRADE......................................................................... 287
TESTING ....................................................................................43 VITRIFIED CLAY MICROTUNNELING PIPE ....................... 178
ABS COMPOSITE PIPE ......................................................169 TONGUE & GROOVE JOINTS ................................................. 407
ABS SOLID WALL PIPE ......................................................167 TOOL RENTAL ...........................................................................38
ADHESION ..........................................................................535 TOPSOIL .................................................................................. 609
AIR-PLACED CONCRETE...................................................358 PLACEMENT ....................................................................... 614
ANNULAR HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE ...........172 PREPARATION ................................................................... 615
BEARING STRENGTH ........................................................180 TORCH CUTTING .................................................................... 384
CCFRPM MICROTUNNELING PIPE ...................................182 TRADE NAMES ..........................................................................23
CCFRPM PIPE ....................................................................176 TRAFFIC BARRIERS................................................................ 547
CHEMICAL ..........................................................................169 CONTROL ........................................................... 322, 342, 543
COATING.............................................................................218 LANES ................................................................................. 549
CONCRETE PIPE................................................................138 LINE PAINT ......................................................................... 256
CSLM.....................................................................................80 SIGN .................................................................................... 547
CURB MARKING .................................................................256 SIGNAL........................................................ 551, 567, 579, 592
FLUSHING...........................................................................624 SIGNAL CONSTRUCTION .................................................. 603
HDPE........................................................................... 509, 514 STRIPING............................................................ 256, 487, 549
LIQUID ASPHALT..................................................................88 STRIPING APPLICATION ............................................ 489-490
LOAD ...................................................................................394 STRIPING CERTIFICATE COMPLIANCE ........................... 256
MANHOLE COUPLING........................................................193 STRIPING EQUIPMENT ...................................................... 491
MISCELLANEOUS BASE ......................................................54 STRIPING REMOVAL.......................................................... 487
PAINT ..................................................................................207 STRIPING TESTING............................................................ 256
PAVEMENT FABRIC ...........................................................252 STRIPING THERMOPLASTIC ............................................. 491
PAVEMENT MARKER ..................................................256-257 TRAILER JOB.............................................................................40
PAVEMENT MARKING........................................................256 TRANSFORMER ...................................................................... 566
PAVING ASPHALT ................................................................86 SUBMERSIBLE ................................................................... 566
PE SOLID WALL PIPE ........................................................175 TRANSIT MIXER ........................................................................72
PIPELINE.............................................................................414 TRANSITION PAVEMENT........................................................ 502
PLASTIC LINER ..................................................................210 STRUCTURES .................................................................... 347
PRCB...................................................................................269 TRANSPORTATION SPOIL...................................................... 468
PRESTRESSING STEEL.....................................................366 TRANSPORTING LEAN CONCRETE BASE ..............................57
PROOF-LOAD .....................................................................131 REAS ............................................................................. 97, 321
PVC COMPOSITE PIPE ......................................................169 TRANSVERSE CONSTRUCTION JOINTS............................... 375
PVC PIPE LINER.................................................................522 EXPANSION JOINT............................................................. 335
PVC PLASTIC PIPE ............................................................170 TRANSVERSE-FLOAT METHOD............................................. 334
REINFORCEMENT ................................................................74 TREATED MATERIAL HANDLING ........................................... 123
SEALCOAT..........................................................................110 SOIL .................................................................................... 287
SHEAR RING JOINT ...........................................................188 TREATMENT LUMBER ..................................................... 122-123
SIGNAL................................................................................608 TREE ........................................................................................ 611
SLURRY SEAL ............................................................ 322, 325 PLANTING ........................................................................... 616
STATISTICAL ........................................................................43 STAKE ................................................................................. 612
SYNTHETIC RUBBER SEALING.........................................187 STAKING ............................................................................. 616
TRAFFIC STRIPING ............................................................256 TRIMMING........................................................................... 273
VITRIFIED MICROTUNNELING PIPE .................................180 TRENCH BACKFILL ......................................................... 271, 620
Z JOINT ...............................................................................192 BACKFILLING...................................................................... 451
THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL .................................................257 BEDDING ............................................................................ 404
PIPE ....................................................................................192 DRAIN.................................................................................. 283
PIPE GASKET .....................................................................192 EXCAVATION.............................................................. 439, 620
TRAFFIC STRIPING ............................................................491 LENGTH .............................................................................. 403
THICKNESS PIPE ....................................................................441 OPEN................................................................... 397, 403, 421
PLASTIC LINER ..................................................................209 OPERATION................................................................ 397, 403
PRCB...................................................................................269 PLACEMENT ....................................................................... 283
THINNING PAINT .....................................................................471 RESURFACING ................................................................... 453
THREAD SCREW .....................................................................381 WIDTH......................................................................... 401, 439
THREE-CONDUCTOR CABLE .................................................569
THRUST BLOCKS ....................................................................433
THWN/THHN ............................................................................558

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
 Index 651

TRMAC...................................................................... 116, 343-344

ACCEPTANCE .................................................................... 119 V
AGGREGATE...................................................................... 118
VALUE BEARING..................................................................... 393
COMPOSITION ................................................................... 121
VALVE...............................................................................613, 621
DISTRIBUTION ............................................................ 343-344
ACTUATORS ...................................................................... 233
GRADING............................................................................ 121
BOX..............................................................................613, 621
MATERIAL .................................................................. 117, 121
CANS .................................................................................. 234
MINERAL FILLER................................................................ 118
GARDEN ............................................................................. 613
PAVING ASPHALT...................................................... 117, 121
GATE .................................................................................. 613
STORAGE........................................................................... 119
MANUAL CONTROL ........................................................... 613
TRUCK MIXER ........................................................................... 72
OPERATORS ...................................................................... 234
TRUSS ROD CHAIN LINK........................................................ 135
QUICK-COUPLING ............................................................. 613
T-STYLE SEALING SYSTEM................................................... 535
REMOTE CONTROL........................................................... 613
TTC .......................................................................................... 545
VALVES ....................................................................224, 397, 432
TUBE ACCEPTANCE............................................................... 511
VCP.......................................................................................... 178
TUBING.................................................................................... 555
JOINT.................................................................................. 187
TUBULAR MARKERS .............................................................. 546
STOPPERS......................................................................... 155
TUNNEL BACKFILL ................................................................. 462
VEHICLE DETECTOR.............................................................. 606
BACKPACKING................................................................... 462
SIGNAL ............................................................................... 586
DEWATERING .................................................................... 461
SIGNAL FACES .................................................................. 579
EXCAVATION ..................................................................... 461
VEHICULAR ACCESS ............................................................. 543
SUPPORT .................................................................... 461-462
TRAFFIC AREA CASTING.................................................. 130
TUNNELING............................................................................. 458
VENTILATION CABINET.......................................................... 575
OPERATIONS ..................................................................... 460
VIBRATORY ROLLING ............................................................ 340
TURF........................................................................................ 611
VINE PLANTING ...................................................................... 617
TYPE “A” SEAL ........................................................................ 352
VISCOMETER.......................................................................... 115
“B” SEAL ............................................................................. 352
CALIBRATION..................................................................... 222
“C” SEAL ............................................................................. 353
TEST ................................................................................... 222
“E” SEAL ............................................................................. 353
VISIBILITY PROGRAMMED..................................................... 586
VISOR .......................................................................582, 588, 605
U VITRIFIED CLAY MICROTUNNELING PIPE..................... 178-180
CLAY PIPE...................................................................153, 409
ULTRAVIOLET CURED LINERS............................................. 529 CLAY PIPE TOLERANCES................................................. 153
UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION................................................ 273 VOID GROUTING .................................................................... 463
EXCAVATION PAYMENT ................................................... 275 VOLUMETRIC MEASUREMENT................................................ 95
FILL ..................................................................................... 278
UNDERDRAIN CORRUGATED ALUMINUM PIPE ................... 165
STEEL CORRUGATED PIPE.............................................. 162 W
UNFINISHED BOLT ................................................................. 129
WAGE PREVAILING .................................................................. 25
UNIT CONTROLLER ................................................................ 614
WALKS CONCRETE.........................................................369, 372
MASONRY ............................................................................ 84
WALKWAYS ............................................................................ 351
MEASURE............................................................................... 9
WALL PENETRATIONS........................................................... 230
OPTICAL ............................................................................. 579
THICKNESS CCFRPM MICROTUNNELING PIPE.............. 181
PHOTOELECTRIC .............................................................. 565
WARM MIX ASPHALT.............................................................. 105
UNIT PRICE ......................................................................... 35, 37
WARNING LIGHTS .................................................................. 547
PRICE DECREASE ............................................................... 37
WARRANTY............................................................................... 21
PRICE INCREASE ................................................................ 37
INSTRUCTIONS.................................................................... 18
PRICE STIPULATED............................................................. 37
WORK ................................................................................... 21
SENSOR ..................................................................... 590, 606
WATER ...................................................................................... 85
SI........................................................................................ 9-10
APPLICATION..................................................................... 279
SPLICING............................................................................ 559
CEMENT MORTAR ............................................................... 79
SPRAYER ........................................................................... 337
CSLM .................................................................................... 79
TEMPERATURE ..................................................................... 9
CURING .............................................................................. 292
UNSUITABLE MATERIAL ........................................................ 273
CURING RCP...................................................................... 146
UNTREATED BASE ......................................................50, 83, 288
DRILLING............................................................................ 392
BASE MEASUREMENT ...................................................... 289
EAS ..................................................................................... 320
BASE PAYMENT................................................................. 289
EMULSIFIED ASPHALT........................................................ 90
MATERIAL ............................................................................ 50
EXFILTRATION................................................................... 414
URETHANE COATING............................................................. 217
INFILTRATION .............................................................221, 415
USE LUMBER .......................................................................... 122
LEAN CONCRETE BASE...................................................... 57
PCC PAVEMENT ................................................................ 336
POLLUTION ..................................................................... 20-21
UTILITIES................................................................................. 497
PORTLAND CEMENT ........................................................... 65
DELAY................................................................................. 499
PRESSURE......................................................................... 433
PROTECTION ..................................................................... 497
REAS .................................................................................... 96
RELOCATION ..................................................................... 498
SCALE .................................................................................. 70
UTILITY SERVICES ................................................................... 13
STORM ................................................................................. 21
SERVING ............................................................................ 592
VALVES .............................................................................. 224
TEMPORARY........................................................................ 13
WATERING LANDSCAPING.................................................... 619
UTILITY-OWNED POLE........................................................... 601
WATER-REDUCING ADMIXTURE............................................. 66
WATER-TIGHT JOINTS....................................................172, 185

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062
652 Index

WEAKENED-PLANE JOINT ............................................. 335, 371 WORK COMPLETION ................................................................21

WEB PLATE .............................................................................381 CONTRACTOR......................................................................39
WEEP CHANNEL .....................................................................482 CONTROL .............................................................................12
WEIGH HOPPER........................................................................70 DISPUTED.............................................................................14
WEIGHING AND METERING EQUIPMENT ...............................24 EXTRA...................................................................................38
WEIGHT CERTIFIED..................................................................35 GUARANTEE.........................................................................21
SCALE .................................................................................385 MEASUREMENT ...................................................................35
WEIGHTS CERTIFIED ...............................................................35 PAYMENT .............................................................................35
WELDED SEAM .......................................................................160 PROGRESS...........................................................................30
STEEL PIPE ........................................................................425 PROSECUTION.....................................................................30
WIRE FABRIC .....................................................................349 PROTECTION .......................................................................22
WIRE REINFORCEMENT.............................................. 73, 267 SCOPE ..................................................................................12
WELDER ...........................................................................479-480 SITE MAINTENANCE .................................................... 19, 502
WELDING .................................................................................382 SITE SAFETY........................................................................27
STRIP .................................................................. 485, 518, 541 SITE SAFETY OFFICIAL .......................................................27
WET MATERIAL .......................................................................274 SUBCONTRACTOR ..............................................................39
WET-CAST RCP.......................................................................145 SUSPENSION .......................................................................32
WHEEL GUARDS.....................................................................130 WARRANTY ..........................................................................21
WHITE METAL .........................................................................474 WORKERS' COMPENSATION ...................................................26
WIRE ........................................................................................599 WORKING DRAWINGS..............................................................16
DEFORMED ........................................................................267 WORKMANSHIP ........................................................................22
DIRECT ....................................................................... 571, 604 GALVANIZING..................................................................... 216
ELECTRICAL.......................................................................558 PVC COATING .................................................................... 218
GROUND .............................................................................359 STRUCTURAL STEEL......................................................... 377
MESH ....................................................................................74 WTAT ....................................................................................... 327
REINFORCEMENT ...........................................................73-74
WIRING CONDUCTOR..................................................... 572, 602
DIAGRAM ............................................................................603 Z
ELECTRICAL.......................................................................599
LIGHTING ............................................................................600 Z JOINT .................................................................................... 192
WMA.........................................................................................105 COMPONENT...................................................................... 192
WOOD PAINTING ....................................................................476 OD TRANSITIONS............................................................... 192
PRESERVATIVE .................................................................123 TESTING ............................................................................. 192
WOODEN FORM. .....................................................................333 ZINC COATING DAMAGE ........................................................ 217
WORK ACCEPTANCE ...............................................................21 COATING REPAIR .............................................................. 217
COLLATERAL........................................................................12 ZINC-BASED SOLDER............................................................. 217
COMMENCEMENT................................................................30 ZINC-DUST PAINT. .................................................................. 217

For individual use only by rudic0086@[Link] as per copyright law. Order ID: bni6062